The Rise of Iceland #1-400
Author: 夏虫之语
Date: 2026-01-21T09:27:10+00:00

Chapter 1: Golden-Haired Olaf

June 1627, Julian Calendar

The Seltjarnarnes Peninsula in Iceland, located about ten kilometers south of Reykjavik, the island’s major port city, was a fertile land due to its proximity to the harbor. The peninsula, spanning hundreds of miles, was dotted with small villages, making it one of the more densely populated areas in Iceland.

The Dark Middle Ages had ended, and the world was now in the Age of Exploration, undergoing rapid changes. Cultures and beliefs across nations were evolving at a breakneck pace.

Yet, life in Iceland remained slow and peaceful, as if untouched by time, seemingly unaffected by its incorporation into the Danish-Norwegian Union in 1262.

Over the centuries, the number of villages on the Seltjarnarnes Peninsula had only increased by three. Each village had a population of around thirty to fifty or sixty people, with the largest, the White Hazel Forest Hrut Village, housing just over a hundred. Originally a large estate called Hrutstakki, it had transformed into scattered villages as more freemen settled there.

On the northern side of the peninsula lay fertile fields. It was summer, and the wheat in these fields had begun to form ears, though sparse, swaying gently in the warm sea breeze, a pleasant sight.

Although Iceland enjoyed warm sea breezes blowing from west to east, it was still on the edge of the Arctic Circle. The warm months lasted only from May to October, with the most suitable period for crop growth being from late May to September.

To the east of the vast fields was a small hill covered with white hazel trees. These trees, native to the cold regions of Siberia, were drought-resistant shrubs that didn’t grow very tall. Their only advantage was producing nuts rich in oils and starches, a rare delicacy in Iceland.

Under one of these white hazel trees sat a boy around ten years old, dressed in a white linen shirt and pants, with a deer fur coat draped over his shoulders. His golden hair, shimmering like threads of gold, looked even more stunning in the sunlight.

Beneath his thick brows, his deep-set eyes held a pair of bright, gem-like blue pupils. His high nose bridge, thin lips, and fair skin marked him as a typical North Germanic Viking.

The boy’s name was Olaf Haldorsson, the second son of Haldor, the leader of the White Hazel Forest Hrut Village. With his striking golden hair, he was known as Golden-Haired Olaf.

Though only ten years old, Olaf had grown to nearly five feet tall due to good nutrition and inheriting his father’s tall and sturdy genes. At first glance, he looked like an ordinary fourteen or fifteen-year-old boy.

In an era where the average European height was under five feet, the Germanic people of Scandinavia, Iceland, and Denmark were among the tallest, with nearly half of the men standing just under five and a half feet.

Olaf’s father and uncle were both over six feet five inches tall, earning them the nickname “Big Guys.”

Olaf sat on a bare rock under the white hazel tree, holding a charcoal stick and scribbling on a stack of yellowed paper, occasionally muttering to himself.

If someone could peek over Olaf’s shoulder, they would see that the paper was filled with square characters. A merchant who had traded in the distant Ming Dynasty might recognize them as similar to Chinese script.

“In the year 1627, China is in the Tianqi or Chongzhen era of the Ming Dynasty. The Ming Dynasty will fall in 1644.

From what I know, Ming China is still the most powerful, prosperous, and civilized nation in the world. Now is the Age of Exploration. The European Middle Ages have long ended, and the power of the Roman Pope has greatly diminished. The emergence of Protestantism, also known as Christianity, has further weakened the Church’s control over the monarchy. Denmark and Iceland are currently under the Lutheran Church.

However, one of the most developed regions in Europe, Paris, is probably still littered with garbage, sewage, and water sources teeming with E. coli. Living in the idyllic Iceland is not a bad place. There are no mosquitoes or cockroaches, and the Black Death has never ravaged here. The environment is good, and as long as one doesn’t catch a cold or worse, they can live a long life. The only downside is that life is monotonous, and material goods are extremely scarce. Without trading sheep wool and hides for flour, timber, and cloth with England and Denmark, life would be difficult.”

This journal-like notebook was written by Olaf, but he was not an ordinary Icelander with a blank slate of a mind.

Since birth, Olaf had retained memories from his past life. He clearly remembered being a drifter in Yanjing, China, working as a security guard, a stock clerk, a salesman, and buying CDs. His only hobby was history, though he often forgot what he read.

Reborn in Iceland, Olaf knew he had to make the most of this life. From the age of one, he worked hard to learn Icelandic and adapt to the local lifestyle, striving to become a true Icelander.

Olaf was indeed clever. He could speak at one year old, form sentences at one and a half, and express his needs clearly by two. This delighted his parents, Haldor and Katrin, and made his relatives and neighbors proud. In a place like Iceland, any unusual event was treasured.

By the age of three, Olaf could live independently as long as there was food at home.

After turning two, Olaf began using leftover charcoal from the family hearth to record historical knowledge, timelines, and various technologies he remembered. At first, he wrote Chinese characters on the stone walls of his small house, then on old sheepskin, and recently, he had obtained rough but usable paper.

Olaf had initially thought himself brilliant for remembering the formula for gunpowder (one part saltpeter, two parts sulfur, three parts charcoal), and the processes for making porcelain, brewing alcohol, vinegar, and paper. He could also recall basic physics and chemistry. However, he soon realized that knowing the procedures and basics wasn’t enough; successful operations would require countless trials and specific tools. After understanding Iceland’s backward social level, Olaf gave up on these ideas.

Thus, Olaf’s dream of using his advanced knowledge to develop industries and get rich quickly was shattered early on.

Now, Olaf focused on writing down as much knowledge and historical events as he could remember, hoping to use his foresight for political speculation, perhaps reaching the pinnacle of life and becoming a notable figure in history books, rather than being summed up as just another Icelander.

Last night, Olaf discussed the family’s only merchant ship with his father and learned that the ship’s hull was severely damaged by shipworms, requiring a significant amount of money for timber repairs. Much of the earnings from two trips to England this spring had been spent on these repairs.

Olaf had a sleepless night, recalling articles he had read in his past life about treating shipworms. Early the next morning, he came out to record methods to deal with shipworms that could be immediately applied.

European sailors still used traditional methods to prevent shipworms, such as soaking wood in tar, pitch, and glue. However, over time, these methods proved ineffective against shipworms.

Olaf knew of three methods. The first was soaking wood in copper sulfate and then applying tung oil, which was very effective but impossible to obtain in Iceland. The second was sheathing the hull in copper or iron, which was also effective but too expensive and beyond the current shipbuilding technology’s capacity. The third method was simple: sailing into a frozen freshwater river to kill the shipworms with cold and freshwater. However, this method required at least three months, and no one could afford to idle their ship for that long.

The third method was the most suitable for Olaf’s family.

Iceland’s winters were unproductive, with no agricultural activities. The persistent sub-zero temperatures and frequent snow made it unsuitable for outdoor activities, forcing Icelanders to stay indoors, eating, drinking, and sleeping until spring, when they would resume their lives, perhaps as pirates, merchants, or farmers.

Olaf thought that before winter arrived, Haldor could sail the ship into the Hvítá River and leave it there. By the following spring, all the shipworms would be dead.

Feeling satisfied with this idea, Olaf carefully put away his precious notebook and left the ancestral white hazel forest, heading towards the eastern village.

Note: In ancient Europe, the units of length were based on steps and feet. An inch, or a cun, was the width of the thumb joint. Later, in the 13th century, King Edward II of England established the “Standard Legal Inch”: the length of three large barleycorns placed end to end, which is about 25.4 mm. Twelve inches make one foot.

Chapter 2: Bad News

Olaf walked eastward along the gravel path beside the wheat fields for a few hundred meters. After passing through a birch forest, he saw a cluster of charming grass-roofed houses—twenty-seven or twenty-eight in total, some larger, some smaller.

These houses were built with thick stone walls, each five or six feet wide, covered in grass and wildflowers, some even blooming with small yellow blossoms. They looked like something out of a fairy tale.

This style of turf house had been built for seven or eight hundred years. The ancestors had constructed them with thick stone walls and grass roofs to ensure durability and insulation—warm in winter and cool in summer. It was a testament to the wisdom of Iceland’s forefathers in their struggle against harsh weather.

Olaf approached the village slowly. At the entrance, several elderly women in their fifties were sunbathing while sewing. They greeted him warmly.

“Golden-haired young master is back!”

“Olaf, your mother is looking for you.”

“Olaf, you’ve grown taller again!”

Their kind teasing brought a smile to Olaf’s face. He replied playfully, “Aunt Yaldur, be careful—Old Galdur might drink too much and hit you again. Aunt Vinilrod, when will you make me a pair of pants? Big-eyed sister, your work isn’t looking too good.”

After exchanging a few jokes with the villagers, Olaf continued inside. Along the way, he chatted with others—men and women busy watering their beetroot, spinach, and radishes. These three vegetables were the only ones that could grow in Iceland’s summer climate, so everyone planted at least some.

The village had about one hundred and fifty people, mostly descendants of seven ancient families. Over time, intermarriage had made nearly everyone related, so the villagers were all familiar and close with one another.

Olaf greeted everyone warmly. The younger ones especially enjoyed talking to him.

A red-haired, freckled boy of thirteen or fourteen, wearing a tattered and oversized robe, hurried over. “Olaf, your mother’s looking for you! Word is, someone from Reykjavik—the biggest port city in Iceland, the ‘Bay of Smokes’—brought bad news.”

This boy was Lixstrom, one of Olaf’s best friends. His father, Jot, was the village’s only carriage merchant, owning a large wagon that transported people between nearby villages.

“Tom, who did you fight this time?” Olaf asked, frowning at the mud stains on Lixstrom’s clothes.

Though Lixstrom was a few years older, he was Olaf’s loyal follower. He scowled. “This morning, while you were gone, Big-Head Olin from Will Village came with his gang. Last time, you led us in beating them up, but today, without you, we got the worst of it. How about we go settle the score this afternoon?”

White Hazel Forest Hrut Village had over a hundred people, divided into more than thirty households. There were over forty children between the ages of seven and seventeen, and excluding the girls and those under seven, about twenty boys. Nearly all of them were Olaf’s followers.

Olaf was clever, tall for his age, and strong. Though he had only studied ancient poetry with the village’s old poet and attended a few days of school at the southern church, he spoke clearly and persuasively. The children all knew Olaf’s words were more accurate and compelling than even the adults’.

Over the past two years, the village boys had followed Olaf in fights against neighboring villages and never lost. Olaf knew how to dig traps, where to strike for maximum pain, and even some advanced fighting techniques.

Thus, all the boys in the village respected Olaf and willingly followed him.

Olaf and Lixstrom were about the same height. He dusted off Lixstrom’s clothes and said, “No need to rush revenge. I’ll go home first and see what’s happening.”

“Good idea. You’re always right, Olaf,” Lixstrom said, wiping his nose before turning to leave.

Olaf quickened his pace and soon entered a large courtyard with three turf houses. The walls were made of stone and wood, covered inside and out with grass and wildflowers. In the stable stood a mixed-breed Shire draft horse—no longer as strong as it once was, but still with sturdy hooves.

“Thank goodness, Olaf, you’re finally back!”

As soon as Olaf entered the courtyard, a slender middle-aged woman with golden hair emerged from the eastern house. She was Katrin, Olaf’s mother.

Like other village matriarchs, Katrin was strict and harsh with her children—except for Olaf, whom she treated with unusual courtesy, as if he were already an adult.

Olaf followed his mother inside and saw his tall, broad-shouldered father, Haldor, sitting at a wooden table with a troubled expression. Across from him sat a short, middle-aged man with curly black hair and a sparse beard. Though thin, he had a lively spirit.

“Olaf, this is your other uncle, Hoskuld. He and your Uncle Kadir are half-brothers, sharing the same mother. He lives in Reykjavik, the Bay of Smokes.”

Haldor introduced Hoskuld to Olaf, then turned to Hoskuld and said, “Olaf, you’ve heard of him—my son, a prodigy, a genius, a treasure bestowed by our ancestor Hrut. I think you should tell him the bad news you’ve brought.”

Hoskuld suddenly laughed, his eyes gleaming as he looked at Olaf. He didn’t underestimate the young boy; instead, he stood up and patted Olaf’s sturdy shoulder. “I can’t believe you’re Olaf. You’re only ten? You look taller and stronger than my sixteen-year-old son! I’ve heard about you—brilliant from birth, skilled at solving problems. Maybe you’re the reincarnation of an ancestor’s spirit,” he added in a hushed tone.

After all, Iceland was now under the light of the Lord. Though many Icelanders still worshipped their ancestral gods alongside Christianity, openly declaring such beliefs challenged the dominance of the Church. While burning heretics was no longer common, the governor would still punish such talk severely—confiscating property, whipping, or even imprisonment.

Hoskuld quickly continued, “Your father is lucky. I’ll tell you what I’ve learned. Your family’s old enemy, Sigfoss, has suddenly struck gold—his daughter married the new Governor of Iceland, Kolsvin. Now his family is connected to someone powerful, and they’re strutting around like peacocks. Sigfoss has always wanted to seize your property. Seven years ago, he failed, but now he’s declared that his son-in-law, Governor Kolsvin, will take your assets. Soon, the governor might call a court assembly to discuss your case.”

Hoskuld took a quick sip of beer from the wooden cup on the table.

“Oh, this is not good news at all,” Olaf said, frowning. Now he understood why his usually cheerful father looked so troubled.

Olaf sat on a stone bench, pondering the bad news his uncle had just delivered. He knew that if it were true, his family’s survival was now uncertain.

Olaf wasn’t foolish enough to spout modern ideals like democracy, freedom, or revolution. In a Europe plagued by war, rigid hierarchies, and bloodline politics, talking about such things would only get him crushed by feudalism’s iron fist and thrown into the dustbin of history.

Was the hangman’s noose too soft? Were the stones for crushing too weak? Was the fire for burning heretics not hot enough? Were the executioner’s blades not sharp enough?

Chapter 3: Feudal Society Devours People

Olaf was a typical second-generation rich and official heir in Iceland. His father, Haldor, held the hereditary right to lead White Hazel Forest Hrut Village, a privilege passed down from his ancestors. Centuries ago, his ancestor Hrut had been the owner and leader of this land, bearing the title of Godi, meaning a noble and god-fearing man.

Godi, whether major or minor, held authority over the local estate’s population, land resources, and even the interpretation and judgment of the law. They were the rulers of Iceland.

Thus, Hrut, known as the “Grey Cloak Jarl,” had been a leader in the Althing, Iceland’s self-governing assembly, responsible for governing the Seltjarnarnes Peninsula.

Later, when Iceland submitted to the Danish-Norwegian Kingdom, the Godi chiefs became mere local gentry, at most holding positions akin to village heads, but their power was greatly diminished.

Then, due to various reasons—primarily the Black Death, which reduced the population—more free peasants emerged in Europe. Although they could still be exploited, their status was essentially equalized.

In Iceland, too, there were large landowners and free peasants. Poor free peasants still worked as servants or tenant farmers for the landowners, though they now had contracts.

For minor landowners and lesser nobles, their power continued to shrink.

When the hereditary chieftainship passed to Haldor, Olaf’s father, it was reduced to nothing more than the title of village head. The former servants had long since become free peasants, most owning their own land. Yet, out of old loyalty, the villagers still respected Haldor.

If things had remained this way, Olaf could have lived a carefree life as a landowner’s heir. But when he was nearly three years old, a great misfortune struck the family. Haldor lost more than half of the three hundred virgate units of land he controlled.

Haldor had three sisters and one brother. His brother, Haig, was even taller and stronger than Haldor. Both brothers had trained in their ancestors’ swordsmanship, wrestling, and horsemanship—skills every proper Viking pirate should master. However, Haig was clearly more proficient.

From a young age, Haig had been better at fighting. During raids at sea, he had killed many merchant guards. His brutality and aggression had earned him a fearsome reputation across the Seltjarnarnes Peninsula.

This continued until Olaf was two and a half. Haig killed a man in a duel over a woman. If the victim had been a free peasant or a minor landowner, the matter would have been quickly settled.

But the man was the son of a powerful chieftain in Reykjavik, a family with centuries of heritage. Their ancestors had even produced a cardinal in Iceland. Their influence was at least ten times greater than Haldor’s. Worse, the deceased was the godson of the then-Cardinal of Iceland. At the time, the Danish-Norwegian Kingdom had not yet converted to Protestantism, and the Catholic bishops in Iceland held immense power.

Killing the cardinal’s godson, who was also the son of a powerful chieftain in Reykjavik, meant Haig’s fate was sealed. He would be arrested by the Governor of Iceland and hanged in the great port.

After the killing, Haig immediately fled back to White Hazel Forest Hrut Village and confessed to his elder brother, Haldor. The two brothers decided that Haig should leave Iceland by ship.

Their chosen destination was Greenland. Norway and Denmark were out of the question, and the Kingdom of Scotland in Britain, which was promoting Protestantism, sought the support of its neighbors and maintained good relations with Denmark. Going there would not save Haig. Only the remote Greenland, a lawless land, was an option. Though nominally under Danish rule, Denmark had not even sent a governor there due to its sparse population and resources.

Olaf knew that Denmark and Norway later followed the example of colonial powers like Britain and established the Greenland Company to colonize Greenland. Thus, Haig’s escape there would not be a permanent solution.

After some thought, Olaf decided to change his father and uncle’s plans. But he was not yet three years old. Even if they considered him a prodigy, they would never listen to a child in such a grave matter.

Then, Olaf remembered the ancient Norse myths that the Vikings still believed in to some extent. Suddenly, he had an idea.

Olaf grabbed a scroll of sheepskin, burst through the door, and began singing the prelude to an ancient battle song. Then, he placed the sheepskin on his head and sang:

*“Sleep has fled my eyes, the war god’s axe hangs before me,

Brave Hrut stirs from slumber, in spring, swords drown Haig in green fields,

I cannot accept this, so I offer you these words of counsel.”*

Olaf’s eerie performance instantly stunned Haldor, Katrin, Haig, and his elder brother, Ulf.

No one would have expected a two-and-a-half-year-old child to put on such a show. Even if Olaf was a genius, no adult in their world could have pulled off such a performance. Everyone realized that the ancestral spirit of Hrut had awakened within Olaf.

According to Viking legend, brave ancestors who died would be taken by the war god to his hall. When their descendants faced great peril, the ancestral spirit would manifest in the most outstanding descendant. Haldor and Haig never imagined that this myth would come true.

But Olaf’s performance left them no choice but to believe. They understood that if Haig went to Greenland, he would be killed. So, they begged their ancestor Hrut to guide them.

Olaf continued in a mournful tone:

*“The Vikings once reached the farthest land, Vinland, where the family’s glory shall be reborn,

I recall Vinland’s fertile soil, I recall the Skraelings, the best of slaves,

Before going to Vinland, first go to Britain, where countless desperate men await,

They are the best of slaves, take up arms.”*

After Olaf repeated the song more than ten times, Haig and the others finally deciphered its meaning.

They unanimously believed that their ancestor Hrut was directing Haig to seek refuge in Vinland, the land of ancient legends. Vinland lay southwest of Greenland, abundant in rare treasures, primitive natives, fertile land, and game. Their ancestor wanted Haig to first go to Scotland to recruit poor, landless farmers to join him in Vinland, where they would capture natives as slaves, farm, and establish a colony. In the previous century, Spain and Portugal had grown wealthy through overseas colonization, and Haig and Haldor knew that while colonization was risky, the rewards were immense.

With the ancestor’s prophecy, Haig and Haldor immediately changed their plans.

Haldor gave Haig their largest brigantine, a ship suitable for both trade and piracy, along with two thousand four hundred marks of silver. He also sent several of their most capable servants and his eldest son, Ulf, with Haig. His only request was that Haig follow their ancestor’s guidance, settle in Vinland, and prosper.

The next morning, Haig took the family’s accumulated wealth and ship and set sail. As Olaf had instructed, he first went to Britain and recruited over a hundred landless young white farmers. Then, using nautical charts and a compass, he sailed westward and indeed reached Vinland, establishing a foothold and capturing several hundred natives as slaves to help with farming.

Three years later, when Haig sent Ulf back to England to recruit another batch of indentured white slaves, Ulf stopped by Iceland to inform Haldor and Olaf of these events.

Ulf also told Haldor and Olaf something Olaf did not know: Vinland, and even America, had already become colonies of other European powers like Britain and France. However, their focus was on South America, and in North America, only France had a small outpost. It was insignificant, providing the royal family with rare animal pelts at most.

Although Vinland (Newfoundland) had no settlements yet, the British had long since claimed it. After Haig and Ulf arrived in Vinland, they managed to establish themselves but, to avoid conflict with Britain and France, they acknowledged British sovereignty over Newfoundland, living there and trading with British and French merchants.

Colonizing the primitive Americas required vast resources and manpower. Britain’s development of North America had relied on criminals, outcasts, and Puritans, taking centuries to clear most of the native population.

At the time, Britain had no energy to develop Vinland, so Ulf’s arrival was welcomed by British and French colonists in North America, who even offered some assistance.

Thanks to his performance at two and a half years old, Olaf truly earned the respect of his elders. No longer was he merely a clever child to be admired; he was treated as an equal, respected as an adult. Haldor and the others saw Olaf as the vessel of their ancestor Hrut’s spirit, the chosen heir of their lineage.

However, these events and their beliefs were known only to those involved. In an Europe dominated by Catholicism and Christianity, no one dared to openly profess their faith in the ancient Norse religion of Scandinavia.

Note:

- Virgate: A unit of land measurement, approximately 40 acres (242 Chinese mu). In medieval Europe, agriculture was underdeveloped, and fields required fallow periods. Thus, about half a virgate (10-20 acres or 60-120 Chinese mu) was needed to support a household of 3-8 people.

- Mark: A unit of currency, approximately 220-233 grams.

- Vinland: Newfoundland.

Chapter 4: A Countermeasure

Olaf had earned the respect of his father, Haldor, and his mother, Katrin, through a single performance. From the summer of his second year onward, the couple consulted him on every matter, great or small, and Olaf was always happy to help, offering thoughtful and practical advice. Though some suggestions failed due to cultural differences, most proved useful in one way or another.

Not long after Haig’s departure, the governor’s guards arrived. Upon discovering Haig’s escape, Sigfoss refused to let the matter drop. Through the bishop, he pressured the Governor of Iceland while also resorting to bribery. In the end, the governor ruled according to ancient Icelandic law, ordering Haldor to compensate the Sigfoss family with ten thousand marks in silver.

In Iceland, one hundred marks of silver were worth more than half a virgate of land—equivalent to the entire fortune of a free man.

Ten thousand marks of silver, converted to the currency of the Ming Dynasty, would have been worth over fifty-eight thousand taels of silver—enough to purchase a fine mansion in Beijing or even secure a favorable appointment as a prefect.

The Haldor family could not afford such a sum. Their ancestral wealth consisted of little more than three hundred virgates of land and two decent merchant ships. Aside from the two thousand marks they had given Haig, their only liquid assets were a buried jar containing one hundred gold marks and a few gold and silver trinkets.

After much negotiation, the two families reached an agreement: Haldor would pay eight thousand marks in silver. Since he lacked the cash, the Governor of Iceland confiscated and sold the most fertile one hundred virgates of Haldor’s land, valued at twelve thousand marks—enough to cover the compensation, fines, and transaction taxes.

In those days, every transaction and business venture was subject to taxes levied by feudal lords, governments, or the church. These taxes were exorbitant, sometimes reaching nearly thirty percent, as they could be compounded.

Because of this lawsuit, Olaf went from being the heir of a wealthy family to a modest one. Haldor, once a great landowner, was reduced to a minor one. Of the three hundred virgates passed down through generations, the most fertile one hundred were lost, leaving only one hundred virgates of poor, sandy soil and a little over a hundred virgates of woodland. The remaining land yielded less than half the harvest of what had been lost, but Haldor had no choice but to accept it.

Seven years had passed since then. Both Haldor and Olaf believed the matter was long settled.

But now, Hoskuld had suddenly arrived from Reykjavik, bringing dire news: Sigfoss had not given up. Through his son-in-law, the newly appointed Governor of Iceland, he intended to reopen the seven-year-old case, using the most fearsome political power of the feudal era to force Haldor into submission and seize the last of the Hrutr Estate’s land and resources.

“Is Sigfoss a troll? He’s even more vicious than Fenrir!” Katrin muttered before Haldor could speak.

In Norse mythology, trolls were cunning and treacherous creatures, while Fenrir was the monstrous wolf son of the trickster god Loki. Capable of devouring the heavens and earth, Fenrir was brother to the world-encircling serpent Jörmungandr. According to legend, even Odin, the Allfather, was destined to be swallowed by Fenrir.

In the Viking world, there were no proper curse words as understood in Confucian culture. Sexual insults held little weight, as extramarital affairs were the only real taboo in Iceland. All other forms of relationships between men and women were considered normal. Thus, calling someone a “troll,” “devil,” or “monster” was the harshest insult possible, as it invoked the very creatures their faith condemned.

Hoskuld nodded in agreement. “You’re right, sister. Is there anyone more greedy and wicked than Sigfoss?”

“What do we do? Next month is this year’s court assembly. If the governor publicly demands to revisit the case from seven years ago, Sigfoss will surely rally the other chieftains to his side. What then?” Katrin’s voice trembled with panic.

Haldor was a simple, honest man with some courage and strength, but he had only attended a church school for a few days. He lacked the knowledge to handle such a thorny problem. Turning to Olaf, he asked, “Olaf, what do you think we should do?”

“Yes, yes, Olaf, tell us,” Katrin urged.

This was only the second time Hoskuld had seen his nephew since Olaf’s birth, but he had heard his sister speak of Olaf’s extraordinary nature. Now, he watched the boy with curiosity.

After a long pause, Olaf hesitated before speaking. “We’re just minor landowners, barely better off than free men. If the governor and Sigfoss conspire against us, I don’t think we can fight back.”

Haldor and Katrin paled. Hoskuld sighed deeply. Olaf continued, “But as the old saying goes, every sword has a shield to match it. If we don’t want to be slaughtered like lambs, there’s always a way.”

“Tell us what you’re thinking. As long as it can save our family, I’ll try anything,” Haldor said solemnly, his gaze unwavering.

Olaf thought for a moment before replying, “There’s an old proverb: The best way to kill a night wolf is to strike before dark. We can’t stop the governor and Sigfoss’s scheme. They want to destroy our family, so we should take a lesson from Flosi. We can delay them, make them come for our property just as winter approaches. Then, we’ll kill or capture whoever they send, take our family, and sail away on our own ships to find my uncle Haig in Vinland. Once we leave Iceland, we’ll find a way to survive.”

His words left the three adults stunned. They sat in silence for a long time.

Hoskuld was Olaf’s uncle, and he had come out of familial duty to warn Haldor. Olaf wondered if his uncle might be a spy for Sigfoss, but the Icelanders had never been ones for such cunning. Their methods were direct—violence was their time-honored solution, unchanged for thousands of years.

The Icelanders even had a saying: There is nothing you cannot tell a friend. In their chaotic world, family and friends stood together through life and death. Betrayal or abandonment meant exile to the wilderness, where survival was impossible. Such simple bonds had endured through harsh environments and societal pressures.

Olaf’s reference to Flosi was drawn from Icelandic legend. If Flosi had existed, he would have lived seven hundred years earlier. After his father was killed by Njal, Flosi burned Njal and his sons alive in retaliation—a classic tale of vengeance in Icelandic sagas.

The three adults understood immediately. Olaf wanted Haldor to follow Flosi’s example and strike back at Sigfoss. Since their wealth was already lost, they might as well deny Sigfoss the spoils. They could lure his men in, kill them, and use the long winter as cover to escape to Vinland, where Haig awaited.

The ancestors of the Icelanders had migrated from Scandinavia—they were Germanic people, known as Vikings, with the restless spirit of seafaring raiders. The idea of uprooting the entire family to colonize Vinland was met with immediate agreement. Unlike the Chinese, who might hesitate over leaving their homeland, the Icelanders had no such attachment.

Note on the Mark: A medieval unit of currency in Northern and Western Europe, one mark weighed approximately 233 grams, though this varied by region and era. Later, it stabilized to around 220 grams.

Chapter 5: Reputation Matters

Standing at only five feet four inches, Hoskuld appeared small and frail to Olaf’s family of three. Yet, he was a man of courage, unafraid of trouble.

The room fell silent for a long while before Hoskuld was the first to rise. He downed a cup of beer in one gulp, then sneered, “Olaf is truly a warrior, worthy of being Hrut’s descendant. Haldor, you stand no chance against Sigfoss. Rather than being forced out, why not fight back before leaving? What do you say? I can stay and help, even bring my son and family. Together, we can take on Sigfoss.”

Katrin stepped forward and embraced her younger brother, who was an inch shorter than her. Her eyes reddened as she said, “Hoskuld, you’re such a good man. Your heart is as kind as Frey’s little sprites. I know you and your son are skilled with the long sword and longbow. If you’re willing to help us, that would be wonderful.”

Hoskuld had already fulfilled his duty by informing Haldor and offering financial aid, but now he was willing to stand with Haldor’s family to the end. This moved Haldor’s family deeply.

Ice-landers were not ones for empty politeness. Haldor stood and clapped Hoskuld on the shoulder, saying, “I would be honored to call you my friend forever, Hoskuld. After lunch, go fetch your family. We need to plan our next move.”

Hoskuld nodded. Katrin then turned to the kitchen to prepare the meal. Just then, Olaf’s younger brother, Half, and sister, Gerny, returned home. The six- and seven-year-olds greeted their uncle after their father introduced them.

Free farmers and the poor in Iceland typically ate only two meals a day. Breakfast was almost nonexistent—perhaps a sip of roasted pea flour or a bite of carrot, food usually reserved for livestock. Lunch was the main meal, consisting of bread, vegetable soup, or bread with salted fish. Dinner was leftovers, if any, otherwise just bread and a little beer.

Haldor’s landowning family, however, could afford three meals a day. With livestock like cows, sheep, chickens, and ducks, they started each morning with oatmeal fish porridge or black bread.

Lunch was the most substantial meal for Icelanders, and Haldor’s family was no exception. Katrin prepared roasted cod, whale, and mackerel, along with boiled eggs, blood pudding, and smoked auks. Dinner was usually leftovers.

The waters around Iceland, where warm and cold currents met, were among the world’s richest fishing grounds, teeming with seafood. However, limited by primitive boats and fishing tools, few Icelanders grew wealthy from cod and other marine products.

Instead, many English fishing boats came to Iceland’s waters, though their fishing technology was also underdeveloped compared to future centuries.

Unlike the highly sought-after herring from the Netherlands, North Sea cod and hairtail had lower yields and poor preservation methods, making them less marketable. Thus, Icelanders with large ships preferred piracy or the fur trade over fishing.

Most Icelandic fishermen still used traditional Viking boats, and their catch was consumed locally or in the Faroe Islands, Scotland, and as far as Norway.

Thus, fish remained a staple in the Icelandic diet.

Today, with her younger half-brother visiting, Katrin reheated the leftover smoked auk from the previous night. She also boiled dried cod, three large shrimp, and a piece of whale meat she had traded for that morning, seasoning it with onions and salt before serving.

The family sat around the table, facing a bowl of fish and half a bowl of smoked auk. Olaf sighed inwardly before waiting for the three elders to serve themselves. Only then did he fill his plate with fish soup and a piece of whale meat, tearing off a chunk of black bread to soak in the broth before wolfing it down.

Half and Gerny had been feeding themselves since they were two. Now, they used forks and spoons to tackle the fish on their plates.

The family ate in silence, no clinking of utensils or idle chatter. Once everyone finished, Katrin cleared the dishes and went to wash them in the kitchen.

A moment later, she returned and asked about Hoskuld’s children. After a brief chat, Hoskuld stood up.

Smiling at his sister, he kissed Olaf, Half, and Gerny on the cheek—a rare gesture among Icelanders. Then, donning his hat, he shook Haldor’s hand and left, leading his horse from the stable.

After Hoskuld left, Haldor sent the two children to play in Olaf’s room before pulling his son aside. He stared intently at Olaf and asked, “Olaf, what do you think we should do?”

Olaf shook his head in frustration. “I know too little about Iceland to handle this. We can’t resist the Governor’s guards. If they force us, we’ll have to either surrender or flee Iceland. But you won’t want to give up our property, and I refuse to let them have it easily. Even if we leave, we won’t make it easy for them.”

“You’re right,” Haldor muttered, rubbing his face. “We’ll let Sigfoss come to claim the land this winter, then kill his men and go to your uncle Haig.”

Olaf couldn’t think of a better plan. Fleeing to Vinland in North America would mean living like primitives. He would have to find a way back to civilization—and more importantly, seek revenge.

Considering the stigma of being a fugitive, Olaf looked at his father and said, “Father, we’re the victims of Sigfoss’s bullying, aren’t we?”

“Of course,” Haldor growled, clenching his fists.

“But if the Governor and the court assembly reopen the case from seven years ago, you’ll be seen as Iceland’s disgrace. No one will sympathize with you. They might even think the current Governor is fairer, since most don’t know the truth.”

Haldor shook his head. “You’re right, Olaf. No one listens to us, but they believe the powerful.”

Olaf stood up excitedly, turning in a circle. “So, Father, we need to spread the word now—that we’ve already paid more than we owed and no longer owe Sigfoss anything. Let people beyond the Seltjarnarnes Peninsula know. If most Icelanders hear about it, Sigfoss and the Governor might hesitate.”

Haldor was confused. He didn’t understand the power of public opinion and doubted Olaf’s words.

Olaf rolled his eyes in frustration and explained carefully, “If Icelanders know we paid twelve thousand silver marks seven years ago for a case that should have cost only eight thousand, they’ll speak up for us when the Governor reopens the case.”

“But the landowners and chiefs won’t sympathize with us. They only care about the Governor’s stance,” Haldor frowned at Olaf.

Olaf muttered in annoyance, “The Governor might not care, but the chiefs will worry about their reputations. If even six or seven of them speak up for us at the assembly, we might be safe. Even if the Governor pressures them, we might not lose everything.”

“You’re right,” Haldor clapped his hands with a crisp sound and laughed. “The chiefs are native Icelanders. Some are even related to our ancestors. If they know we’ve been wronged, they’ll speak for us.”

“Olaf, you’re as clever as if you’ve drunk from the Well of Wisdom,” Haldor praised before saying, “I’ll go find the chiefs we’re connected to and tell them our story. I’ll ask them to speak fairly at the assembly. You and your mother stay home and take care of your siblings. If all goes well, we won’t have to take up our ancestors’ axes and spears.”

Olaf knew Haldor didn’t want to fight Sigfoss to the death and end up leaving Iceland.

Even if someone at the assembly could mediate and reduce the Governor’s and Sigfoss’s demands, Haldor would rather give up some land than risk everything. As a small landowner, he didn’t want to fight the island’s most powerful leader.

Olaf understood his father’s mindset. If he were in the same position, he would do the same. So, he hoped his father could sway some of the chiefs.

Chapter 6: Brawl

After a while, Olaf was about to take a nap when he heard someone shouting outside.

“Golden-Haired Olaf! Golden-Haired Olaf!”

Olaf recognized the voice as Red-Haired Lixstrom. Remembering what he had said that morning, Olaf realized he was here to call him to fight with the children from another village.

Olaf, who had already become the leader of the children, used to do it just to pass the time. But now, considering the future, if he ever escaped Iceland, he would need reliable people from his hometown. So, he couldn’t refuse. He walked out and saw Red-Haired Lixstrom standing with five other children of varying heights and builds.

These five children were also companions from the village. The shortest one was half a head shorter than Olaf. His name was Solrak, and his great-grandfather had been a bishop in southern Iceland, making his family one of the better-off among the freemen.

The tallest and most robust was Little White Bear Halik. He was tall and strong, but his temper was too quick, and he didn’t like to think, so he listened to Olaf.

The other three were named Ilugi, Hari, and Val. They were all children of freemen from the village. Including Red-Haired Tom, the ancestors of these six children had all been slaves of Olaf’s family, but now everyone was equal.

They greeted each other, and then Olaf asked, “What’s up?”

“Big-Head Olin challenged us to a fight this afternoon. His fists are hard. How do we deal with him?” Solrak was very active and was the first to ask Olaf.

Olaf thought for a moment and said, “I’ve heard of Big-Head Olin. He has learned combat, but in his village, only he can fight. If Halik can hold him back, we can take down the other kids from his village first.”

“But what if he asks for a one-on-one?” Red-Haired Tom said, “None of us can beat Big-Head Olin.”

Olaf smiled slightly and said, “If it’s one-on-one, Halik can wrestle with Big-Head Olin first, and then I’ll deal with him.”

“That’s good. Your combat skills are also excellent. That should work.”

They agreed and set off north.

They passed through a patch of low shrubs and then a wetland, arriving at a wide grassland. This place originally belonged to Olaf’s family but was later given to the freemen of his manor. Now, Olaf’s father still owned one-third of this grassland.

There was a flock of sheep grazing leisurely in the grassland. Olaf glanced at them and estimated there were about seventy. Icelanders didn’t need to watch over their sheep; almost no one stole them here. If someone did, they couldn’t escape punishment, and it was hard to hide.

Three boys in linen clothes stood not far away, eyeing Olaf and his group.

The leader was a boy taller and more robust than Olaf, even bigger than Little White Bear Halik. If it weren’t for his youthful face, he would have looked like an ordinary adult male from Iceland.

Olaf recognized this big guy as Big-Head Olin. The two boys behind him were much smaller, but they looked clever and capable.

“Olaf, Solrak, Red-Haired Tom, I thought you guys wouldn’t dare to come.”

As they got closer, Big-Head Olin laughed loudly, looking somewhat ugly and ridiculous. Tom shook his clothes and sneered, “Olin, what nonsense are you talking about? We’re here to teach you a lesson. You think you’re something? Olaf said we’re going to knock out your front teeth today.”

Big-Head Olin stared at Olaf and said in a deep voice, “Alright, come on, Olaf. Let’s wrestle.”

Olaf shook his head and said, “I’m not good at wrestling. We can do combat. If it’s wrestling, let Halik fight you.”

Olin sneered and pointed at Halik, laughing, “Little White Bear, do you dare to fight me?”

Halik glared at him and rushed forward, hugging Olin.

Olin and Halik instantly grappled with each other, each trying to throw the other down.

The Icelanders’ understanding of wrestling was still just tripping and waist-lifting, with two arms struggling. Olaf and the others watched the two wrestle, cheering loudly for their respective villages.

After a while, Olaf estimated that about ten minutes had passed. Halik finally exhausted his strength and was thrown out by Olin, rolling on the ground twice before slowly getting up.

“Haha, Olaf, do you admit defeat?” Olin proudly clapped his hands. Although he was still panting, he was very confident.

“Little White Bear turned into a rolling bear, haha.”

His two lackeys also jeered.

Solrak and Tom exchanged glances and smiled. Olaf stepped forward and asked, “Big-Head Olin, do you want to rest for a while? You look as tired as if you’ve been chased by a sea lion.”

Olin was now very arrogant. He sneered and snorted, “I’m very strong. Only I chase sea lions; there’s no way a sea lion chases me. Come on, golden-haired boy, let me teach you what combat is.”

Olaf had the soul of an adult. He had never been as emotional or straightforward as the other Icelandic children since he was little.

Considering that this was an era with various diseases, and if one got sick, they either had to endure it or be bled or amputated by so-called doctors, Olaf had taken good care of his body since he was little. He dressed appropriately without his parents’ supervision, ate as much as possible, and started consciously exercising his body at a young age. Later, as he grew older, he learned the combat techniques passed down by his Viking ancestors from his father, including hand-to-hand combat and the use of knives, swords, spears, hammers, battle axes, throwing axes, and bows and arrows.

Due to his mature thinking and strong body, Olaf quickly mastered the family’s combat techniques. According to his father, Haldor, Olaf’s combat skills were almost as good as his own, not considering strength.

If Olaf became an adult, with these skills, he could go to sea and plunder, becoming rich beyond measure.

Because his body hadn’t fully developed, Olaf’s muscle content and strength were lower, but he felt that with a weapon, he could easily handle one or two adults who didn’t know combat.

Big-Head Olin was fifteen years old this year. Although he wasn’t an adult in this era, he was a half-grown boy. Olin had also learned combat techniques since he was little.

Olaf felt that dealing with Olin was still somewhat difficult, so he had Halik exhaust Olin’s strength first.

Feeling confident of victory, Olaf took two steps forward, warming up his hands and feet with small jumps and arm swings. His boxing-like preparation and defensive movements made Olin laugh and mock, “Olaf looks like a little chicken shaking its head.”

Solrak, Tom, Halik, and the other two had their eyes light up. They had seen Olaf’s seemingly strange but powerful movements before. They knew Olaf called this boxing, but they couldn’t understand it. However, for these children, knowing that Olaf’s boxing was powerful was enough.

“I hope you still think so when you’re crying for your mom.” Halik, who had just suffered a bit, retorted.

“Haha, let me show you how powerful I am, Olin.”

Big-Head Olin laughed loudly and stepped forward, throwing a punch at Olaf’s nose, shouting, “Odin’s Meteor Strike!”

In his previous life, when Olaf was in high school, one of his roommates studied free combat and boxing. He had practiced with him for a few months, learning some basics of boxing footwork and defense. In this life, after learning combat techniques from his father, the knowledge from both lives merged, making his Viking combat techniques more comprehensive.

Olaf believed that he had to stay alive to defeat the enemy, so he focused on improving his evasion and defensive techniques, especially protecting his head. He thought this would make Viking combat techniques more comprehensive. However, due to his lack of actual combat experience, Olaf was still exploring how to improve his combat techniques.

Chapter 7: Scheming

Big-Head Olin threw a punch, but Olaf remained calm. He sidestepped, letting the fist graze his left cheek, feeling the wind rush past his face.

After dodging, Olaf quickly closed the distance, landing a left jab. Seizing the moment as Olin reached to block, he followed with a powerful right hook that struck Olin’s left cheek, sending him stumbling back as if drunk.

Though knightly duels in the medieval era still held great influence, Icelanders had never been ones for refinement. Their fights were raw—no gloves, no handkerchiefs, no gentlemanly restraint. They took every advantage.

Olaf was even more ruthless than most. As Olin reeled from the blow, he pressed forward, raining down punches until Olin’s face was swollen and bloody, his nose gushing.

Only when Olin collapsed, groaning in pain, did Olaf step back, hands on his knees, chest heaving as he caught his breath.

Olaf was still young, and the flurry of punches had drained him. If Olin had held on ten seconds longer, Olaf would have been the one to collapse.

The moment Olin fell, Tom and the other four boys charged at his two lackeys, beating them until they fled. Then, with a swagger, they returned.

Olaf rested before sitting beside Olin. “Hey, you alright?” he asked softly.

Olin opened his eyes, grumbling, “Damn, how’d you get so strong? Is your family gonna produce another Hrut?”

Olaf knew Olin was conceding. Most Icelanders, with their simple lives and the brutal consequences of failure, didn’t make excuses—they admitted defeat openly.

“Get up, Olin,” Olaf said with a smile, offering his hand. The sunlight glinted off his golden hair, momentarily dazzling Olin.

Olin took his hand and stood, clapping Olaf’s shoulder. “You don’t hit hard, but it still hurts like hell.”

Before Olaf could respond, the distant church bell rang—three chimes, paused, then three more, repeating three times.

It was the third hour of the day. Glancing at the setting sun, Olaf knew it was three in the afternoon. In Iceland’s short summer nights and long days, people worked until the third bell before resting.

Olin’s father was the village chief and tax collector of Will Village, responsible for gathering agricultural taxes, water fees, timber dues, and more for the Governor’s office. Though unpaid, the role was prestigious compared to common folk.

Will Village fell under the Seltyana district, led by Haldor, but the three villages there operated independently, leaving Haldor with little authority over Will.

At the third bell, Olin grew anxious. “My father’s coming home soon! If he finds me skipping math again, he’ll whip me. Let’s fight another time.”

Olaf shook Olin’s hand like an adult, and Olin hurried off, calling his lackeys to follow.

After they left, Tom and Solrak invited Olaf to the river, but he was too preoccupied to join. He waved them off.

Seeing their disappointment, Olaf remembered Solrak’s recent mentorship under a church elder. “We should head back early,” he called, catching up.

“You’re the best, Olaf!” they cheered, hugging him before heading to the river to fish.

Olaf learned Solrak’s teacher was Elder Amie of the South Harbor Church. He expressed interest in meeting her, and Solrak eagerly agreed, promising to introduce him that weekend. Next Monday, Solrak would move into the church choir to study hymns.

Olaf needed a way to counter the combined threat of the Sigfoss family and the Governor. Historically, such alliances in Iceland meant death or exile to Greenland. If both turned against a family, it was a death sentence.

He considered fleeing overseas or seeking another leader’s support. Then, remembering Solrak’s mentor, he thought of shaping public opinion.

Iceland lacked formal schools or notable history, but its people had created heroic sagas and poems. The sagas—prose narratives—and eddas—poetic works—were cultural treasures, even centuries later.

Every Icelander knew these stories by heart. Olaf’s ancestor, the “Grey Cloak Jarl” Hrut, was a saga figure.

If he could spread his family’s story through a saga, revealing Haldor’s eight thousand marks and ancestral lands paid to Sigfoss, the Governor might hesitate to act at the court assembly.

Without newspapers, the fastest way to spread news was through sagas—or by writing a new one.

For centuries, most sagas were written by educated bishops or priests. Olaf wanted Elder Amie to craft a short saga for his family, highlighting Haldar’s sacrifices and integrity.

He already had ideas—what to emphasize, what to downplay. His past life’s love for history and fantasy novels gave him an eye for gripping storytelling.

But first, he needed to convince Amie.

Note on Bell-Ringing: Before mechanical clocks, time was measured by sundials, and common folk relied on church bells. Churches rang eight times a day, every three hours, from dawn to late night.

Note on Handshakes: A Nordic custom, while southern France still favored cheek-kissing.

Chapter 8: The Visit

Time in Iceland always seemed to pass in a strange rhythm—sometimes slow, sometimes long.

In the summer, the Icelanders were so busy with work that they barely noticed the day slipping away. For a child like Olaf, however, each day was filled with play and learning the fishing and hunting skills passed down by his ancestors. If a family had the means, they might also send their children to the church school to learn some letters and arithmetic.

Olaf had long since mastered the few dozen pitiful words his father knew. At the small church school on the peninsula, he had also learned standard Danish and basic Latin. Since he had already completed his studies, he no longer attended school. Instead, he spent his days pondering how to counter the Sigfoss family’s schemes to ruin his family’s happiness.

Olaf racked his brains, drawing on all the knowledge from his past life, and though he came up with ways to break the deadlock, his age and circumstances prevented him from putting them into action. He could only sigh in frustration.

Before he knew it, Saturday morning arrived. Since his father, Haldor, had not yet returned, Olaf mentioned to his mother, Katrin, over breakfast that he wanted to visit the elder of the South Harbor Church. His reason was that he wished to attend the church school in the harbor for a higher level of education.

After Katrin understood the situation and learned that it was the godfather of Solrak, the boy from their village, she felt at ease. She took out some English shillings, worth about half a mark in silver, and handed them to Olaf. She instructed, “This is for your tuition. How could you go empty-handed? Since your father isn’t home, I can’t go with you. Let Jot take you, and ask him to convey my greetings to Elder Amie on my behalf.”

With that, Katrin went out to find Jot. Soon, red-haired Tom followed her back inside, grinning mischievously. “Olaf, I’m coming with you to see the world! My old man said if I can stay in the harbor and be your and Solrak’s classmate, he’ll let my brother take over the family business and become a coachman.”

Olaf laughed heartily, slung his small bundle over his shoulder, and left the house with red-haired Tom. They first went to find Solrak, and amid the chatter of Solrak’s sister, the three boys climbed into Uncle Jot’s carriage and left White Hazel Forest Hrut Village, heading northeast.

Jot’s grandfather had once been a serf in Olaf’s family, but after gaining his freedom, he remained close to them. Thoughtfully, he had laid a sheepskin on the carriage floor, letting Olaf lie in the softest and warmest spot first, followed by Solrak and red-haired Tom.

Since Jot had driven Solrak and his father to the South Harbor Church before, he knew the way well.

The three boys chatted for a while in the swaying carriage before falling asleep. When they woke, it was already noon. Olaf sat up and looked around at the unfamiliar surroundings. “Uncle Jot, where are we? How much farther to the harbor?”

Jot flicked the reins and turned his head with a smile. “Olaf, you’re awake. We’re at New River Bay now. Another six or seven miles ahead, and we’ll reach the harbor. We should get there by four o’clock. If you’re hungry, eat some jerky.”

Jot’s eyes crinkled as he reached into a hidden compartment from the front seat and pulled out a deerskin bundle, handing it to Olaf.

Olaf took it and opened it to find a silver-plated round tin flask. Beside it were a few pieces of smoked venison, weighing about four or five pounds—roughly nine hundred grams.

Just then, red-haired Tom and Solrak woke up as well. Tom shouted, “Dad, I need to pee!”

“Whoa.”

Jot pulled on the reins, steadying the carriage. “Go ahead and relieve yourselves.”

The three boys got out and happily emptied their bladders by the roadside before climbing back into the carriage. Tom took a piece of smoked venison, broke it in half, and handed one piece to Olaf.

Olaf pointed at Solrak and said, “Give it to Solrak. I’ll take my own.”

With that, Olaf took a piece himself, broke it in half, and gave one piece to Jot.

After eating about half a pound of smoked venison, Olaf found it a bit salty. He took a small copper flask from his bundle and drank a few sips of water before lying back down comfortably.

Tom and Solrak, now full, couldn’t sit still. They gazed at the scenery along the road, occasionally shouting at the sight of Arctic foxes, Arctic wolves, and reindeer.

Olaf, meanwhile, rested his head on his bundle, silently planning how to persuade Elder Amie of the South Harbor Church.

By the time the carriage entered the village of the harbor, the sky had darkened slightly, and the distant barking of dogs could be heard clearly.

Moments later, Jot’s carriage turned onto a gravel path. Amid the clatter of hooves, he pointed to a church not far ahead and said with a smile, “We’ve arrived at the South Harbor Church.”

Iceland had abandoned its Norse pagan beliefs around the tenth century, converting to Catholicism—a sign of the northern barbarians, the Vikings, moving toward civilization.

Later, Iceland became a territory of the Norwegian Kingdom. After Norway and Denmark merged, it became part of the Danish Kingdom.

Over thirty years ago, the Danish king, in an effort to strengthen royal authority, abandoned Catholicism and embraced the Lutheran Church. Under the efforts of the governor at the time, Iceland expelled the Catholic bishops, and the more than ten churches on the island were taken over by the Lutherans.

In theory, abandoning Catholicism should have meant the abolition of the “tithe,” allowing the people of Iceland to live more prosperously. However, the governor, representing the kingdom, imposed various other taxes, still leaving the Icelandic people struggling to get by.

The South Harbor Church, a three-hundred-year-old Catholic church, was now a Lutheran place of worship.

As evening approached, candles were lit inside the church. Jot drove the carriage to the church’s entrance, and the three boys jumped down with their bundles.

A boy of fifteen or sixteen emerged from the church, his face freckled, his eyes deep-set but brown. He wore the garments of a church official and asked, “It’s getting dark. If you want to pray, come back tomorrow.”

Solrak called out with a smile, “Brother Ilugi, it’s me, Solrak!”

“Oh, Solrak is here. The elder was just talking about you.”

The young cleric, Ilugi, squinted and smiled, looking at Olaf and Tom. “Are these your friends?”

“This is the son of our village chief, my good friend Olaf Haldorsson—we all call him Golden-Haired Olaf. And this is my good friend, Red-Haired Lixstrom. This is his father, Uncle Jot.”

Solrak quickly introduced everyone. After they exchanged handshakes and greetings, Ilugi led the four of them into the church. They arrived at a small house behind the church, where Ilugi knocked on the door and said softly, “Elder, Solrak is here.”

A magnetic voice responded from inside, “Bring him in quickly. The poor child must be exhausted.”

Ilugi pushed open the door and led the four inside, introducing them one by one before stepping aside.

The room was furnished with a rug woven by East Slavs. Behind a pinewood table sat a middle-aged man with thinning hair, dressed in clerical robes, flipping through a Bible. When he saw Olaf and the others enter, he nodded with a smile.

“Please, sit down.”

They took their seats on wooden chairs, and Solrak explained the purpose of Olaf and Tom’s visit. Then Jot stood up, first expressing his devotion to the Lord, before presenting two bags of silver coins. He smiled and said, “Elder Amie, we are willing to let the children serve the Lord Jesus. We hope you can make this possible.”

Chapter 9: Starting School

After Jot presented the silver coin, Elder Amie’s expression softened. Though he didn’t need the money, he appreciated Jot’s attitude. After asking Olaf and red-haired Tom a few simple questions, he happily accepted the two children.

That evening, Olaf, Solrak, and Tom stayed at the South District’s grand cathedral. Jot, having donated copper coins to the church, received a simple dinner and a night’s stay in the communal dormitory.

The next morning, after exchanging a few words with Olaf and Tom, Jot bid farewell to Elder Amie and left. He drove his carriage straight to the great port to load some timber and fabric, then returned to White Hazel Forest Hrut Village. This way, people from nearby villages and his own village who needed clothes, house repairs, or furniture would come to him, allowing him to earn some copper coins.

After Jot left, Olaf and the other two, led by Ilugi, first went to bathe before heading to the church school behind the cathedral.

Ilugi was a recent graduate and familiar with the school’s deacon. He helped the three find a dormitory before leaving.

The church school held classes five days a week, with weekends off. So, Olaf and the others had agreed with Jot that every Friday, he would pick them up and take them back to the village, returning them to school on Sunday.

The teachers at the church school were all pastors from the cathedral. Sometimes, Elder Amie would also lecture on the Bible. Though the school aimed to cultivate believers, in this era, learning conventional knowledge required attending a church school.

Olaf knew he was too young to engage with Amie as an equal and request a saga for the Hrut family. He would have to wait. So, he settled into the church school, studying hymns and Latin—simple yet monotonous subjects.

Before he knew it, Friday arrived. That morning, Tom and Solrak were distracted, often gazing at the gate. Olaf understood—they missed home, having been away from the village for so long.

By afternoon, Jot still hadn’t arrived, but an unexpected visitor brought Olaf joy.

During class that afternoon, Ilugi entered the classroom and called out to Olaf among the dozen or so children, saying, “Your father is here.”

Olaf followed Ilugi to the front of the cathedral, where he indeed saw his father sitting in a chair, head bowed in prayer.

“You two talk,” Ilugi said before leaving.

Olaf stepped forward. When his father finished praying, he whispered, “Father, why are you here?”

“Olaf,” Haldor said, looking at his somewhat thinner son with surprise. He lifted Olaf into his arms, then smiled and said, “Son, I was shocked when I got home yesterday and your mother told me you were studying at the South District cathedral. What made you think of this?”

Olaf heard the subtext in his father’s words. He lowered his voice and said, “Let’s sit at the back. I’ll tell you slowly.”

Haldor realized he had been too excited, his voice too loud. He apologized with a smile to the other worshippers, then carried Olaf to the empty corner at the back.

Haldor first told Olaf about his visits to other chieftains. The results were disappointing—only the chieftain of the Djupeyr region beneath Mount Snaefell in the east, Kjartan, had explicitly agreed to help Haldor. The other chieftains, upon hearing that Sigfoss and the governor were joining forces against Haldor, all found excuses to refuse.

After all, the Icelanders of today were no longer the fearless, death-defying Viking raiders of centuries past. Hundreds of years of tilling the land had worn down their spirit, leaving most chieftains afraid of offending the governor and Sigfoss.

Olaf had been unhappy since arriving at the South District cathedral. Whether teachers or others, they all treated him like a child, which frustrated Olaf, whose mind had always been that of an adult.

Now, sitting with his father, Olaf regained the feeling of being respected and treated as an equal. He first comforted his father, then casually smiled as he explained his plan to have Elder Amie write a saga for the Hrut family, elevating their reputation and making the governor and Sigfoss hesitate to act against them.

After hearing Olaf’s plan, Haldor thought for a moment, then happily patted Olaf’s shoulder and said, “Olaf, your little brain is so clever! If we can get the pastor to write our family’s saga, not only will it make the Sigfoss family and the governor wary, but it will also bring great fame to our family in Iceland. Everything will go much smoother in the future.”

Olaf nodded. Haldor frowned again and whispered, “But apart from ancestor Hrut, where else do we have legendary figures? There are no stories to write. Will Amie agree?”

Olaf thought: No stories? That’s because I haven’t been here yet. I arrived early, so there are already stories.

With a mysterious smile, Olaf took out a small notebook from his pocket. It contained an outline written in a mix of Danish and Latin. With a little more detail, a grand epic spanning hundreds of years and nine generations would emerge.

Haldor took it and examined it carefully. His education was limited, so he had to ask questions as he read. Olaf knew that his family, as minor chieftains, had the means to receive an education. Otherwise, Haldor would be like most Icelanders and Europeans—completely illiterate.

When Haldor finally understood the story his son Olaf had written, titled “The Hrut Family,” he was still enthralled, his face filled with shock, mouth agape in speechless amazement.

After a long while, Haldor slapped his thigh and said, “Olaf, you must have drunk from the Well of Wisdom! What you’ve written is like an edda—a poem recording Norse mythology. But aren’t you making up too much?”

Olaf thought of Romance of the Three Kingdoms, which was already popular in East Asia at the time. He blinked and said, “Who else knows about our ancestors besides us? If we say it happened, then it happened. Besides, poetry and stories should be three parts truth and seven parts fiction. If it’s all true, no one would enjoy reading it.”

“Three parts truth and seven parts fiction.”

Haldor pondered this, feeling the phrase was good but not quite understanding it. He shook his head and asked, “Should I go talk to Elder Amie?”

Olaf thought for a moment, then nodded and said, “Yes. But we should go together. You need to say that this story’s framework has been passed down through the generations. Otherwise, Amie might not believe it.”

“Alright, I’ll listen to you.”

Haldor laughed heartily and pulled Olaf toward the cathedral’s back door.

Suddenly, Ilugi appeared from the back door as if out of nowhere. He frowned and asked, “Mr. Haldor, what brings you here?”

“I have some personal matters I’d like to discuss with Elder Amie.”

Ilugi smiled and said, “Elder Amie is eating. If it’s important, please go ahead.” With that, he shrugged and left.

Haldor, led by Olaf, walked down two corridors and knocked on Amie’s door.

“Come in.”

Haldor and Olaf entered to find the thin-haired Amie eating sausage and bread, with a cup of steaming honey water on the table.

Haldor silently admired Amie’s wealth—even honey water was a luxury—then made the sign of the cross and greeted him. “Apologies for disturbing you, Elder. It’s been three years since we last met. You’re as healthy and youthful as ever.”

“May God bless you,” Amie said, rising with a smile to shake Haldor’s hand. After all, Haldor was a minor chieftain, worthy of the elder’s respect.

After inviting Haldor to sit, Amie joked, “Every year, you take your ship to England, Scotland, Norway, and Denmark. You haven’t attended the court assembly for three years. It seems you’ve become a successful merchant, dear Haldor.”

“I wish I were a successful merchant, but war has made the seas increasingly dangerous. Perhaps soon, I’ll have to return to my old ways and become a Viking raider again.”

“Haha.”

Chapter 10: The Tale of the Hrutstakki Family

Haldor exchanged a few pleasantries with Elder Amie before stating his purpose.

Amie was taken aback when he heard Haldor’s request for him to compose a saga chronicling their family’s history. Glancing at Haldor and Olaf, who sat calmly, Amie cleared his throat and asked, “Mr. Haldor, forgive my bluntness, but I know nothing of your family’s history. I doubt anyone in Iceland does. It’s not that I’m refusing—I simply cannot write it.”

Haldor retrieved the notebook Olaf had written from his coat and handed it to Amie, smiling. “Why not take a look before deciding?”

Amie flipped through it casually at first, but after reading just two pages, his eyes widened, and his expression grew serious. A moment later, he reluctantly closed it, glancing at Olaf before sighing. “Did Olaf write this?”

Olaf’s heart stirred. He knew Amie recognized the paper and handwriting—his own. Rising quickly, he said, “Yes, respected elder. My father just ordered me to record the stories he told.”

“Oh.”

Amie nodded, then leaned forward eagerly, looking at Haldor with a smile. “Mr. Haldor, your family’s story already has a solid outline. Did you write it yourself?”

Haldor shook his head. “This is a tale passed down from my grandfather’s generation. My father and I added the events of the last few decades.”

Amie was disappointed, though he didn’t truly believe such a compelling story could come from Haldor, who seemed illiterate.

Haldor pressed, “Do you think this story can be written? If not, I’ll try another church.”

As Haldor began to rise, Amie quickly placed a hand on him, his voice firm. “God bless you. Your family’s story is perfectly suited for an Icelandic saga. Besides me, I doubt any priest in Iceland is qualified. After all, I studied for ten years at the Great Cathedral of Copenhagen, where the deepest knowledge and finest arts reside.”

“Oh, I suppose so.”

Haldor smiled and shook Amie’s hand. The two then discussed the details of composing the saga. Throughout, Haldor, in the guise of a doting father, sought Olaf’s opinions, while Olaf played the part of an eager child, offering insightful suggestions that delighted Amie. Patting Olaf’s head, Amie laughed, “Olaf is too clever—he’s my star pupil!”

Olaf secretly scoffed. Playing dumb to outsmart, feigning weakness to strike—these are classic tropes. How could a sheltered priest like you resist?

Since Denmark had converted to Protestantism, Iceland had only Christianity, though its priests differed from Catholics in faith. Yet they shared one trait: as bearers of European theological civilization, they were the torchbearers of culture, representing its highest echelons.

Of the millions of priests, only sainthood or authorship could secure a place in history. Few could resist the allure of fame and fortune, and most Westerners would choose fame—wealth would follow.

Two centuries earlier, the Italian Renaissance had risen in opposition to Catholic oppression, and Protestantism, likewise opposing it, had embraced the movement. Every Protestant priest dreamed of writing a masterpiece like Dante’s, ensuring eternal renown.

Amie was no exception. The moment he saw the notebook titled The Hrutstakki Family, he was captivated. He could swear by God that this story surpassed any saga he had ever read.

His instincts told him that if he wrote this saga, the tale of the Hrutstakki family—and his name—would echo across Iceland, even reaching Norway and Denmark.

Time flew as they discussed the creation. Soon, evening approached, and Jot arrived with a cart full of goods.

Haldor politely declined Amie’s invitation to dinner, then left with Olaf, Tom, and Solrak. The three children boarded the cart, while Haldor rode behind, and they hastened away from the Great Port’s southern district, heading toward their hometown dozens of miles away.

Before leaving, Haldor and Amie agreed that Olaf would bring the latest manuscript each week. The Hrutstakki family would review it, mark any issues or needed revisions, and Olaf would return it to Amie.

Thus, Olaf became the “author” and material provider of the Hrutstakki epic, the messenger of information—though in truth, he was the real screenwriter.

Three weeks later, the first draft of the Hrutstakki saga was complete, roughly one hundred thousand words long—a medium-length work by Icelandic standards.

The story spanned from 1179 to 1627, covering over five hundred years and nine generations of the Hrutstakki family. The most detailed sections focused on the first patriarch, Hrut, the third patriarch, Odin, the sixth patriarch, Little Hrut, and the ninth-generation brothers, Haldor and Haig.

The first ancestor, Hrut, was known as the “Grey Cloak Jarl” for aiding the Norwegian king in defeating northern rebels, earning the title of jarl and a cloak.

Hrut was an Icelander who owned a Viking longship and over fifty thralls. The entire Seltjarnarnes Peninsula south of the Great Port was once his estate.

His life was legendary, the epitome of a saga hero.

By the time of the third patriarch, Odin—who inherited the Hrutstakki family’s stature, strength, and swordsmanship—the times had changed.

Odin’s youth coincided with Iceland’s submission to Norway. A pirate himself, he expanded Hrutstakki’s population to over two hundred, with five Viking warships under his command. He even controlled several islands in the Faroe archipelago. The most thrilling part of his tale was his encounter with a sea serpent, a giant lanternfish, and a singing mermaid of unparalleled beauty.

The sixth patriarch, Little Hrut, was named for his golden hair, towering height, handsome features, and unmatched martial prowess—resembling the first Hrut.

By his time, Iceland had transformed. Most thralls had become freemen, and villages dotted the peninsula. Like his ancestors, Little Hrut took to the seas, reaching Greenland and then Vinland, where he conquered several tribes of Skraelings and Unipads, living there for years.

Once, after a defeat in Vinland, he fled into a cliffside cave and met a white-bearded old man who gave him a magical fruit to heal his wounds and a sword that could cut through iron.

With this blade, Little Hrut defeated the Skraelings, rescued his men, and prepared to return to Iceland. But a storm struck at sea. To calm the waves, he cast the sword into the ocean as an offering to the sea god. The storm subsided, and he returned unharmed.

Whether it was Olaf, Haldor, or Amie, they all knew that for Icelanders, the tales of Hrut and Odin were conventional saga fare—enjoyable, but not groundbreaking.

Little Hrut’s story, however, elevated the legend. His perilous, mysterious adventures in the fabled, fertile Vinland, the old man in the cliff, the sword that cut through iron, and the sea god’s demand—all these elements stirred the heart.

From Little Hrut’s story onward, every reader felt a kinship with the Hrutstakki family. But the real bombshell Olaf had planted was the tale of the ninth-generation brothers, Haldor and Haig.

Olaf’s plotting and Amie’s prose made their story even more compelling.

The first half was a tragic hero’s tale. Haldor and Haig, each with their own cog ship, raided merchant vessels while trading furs for timber, flour, and beer for the people of Iceland.

Their journey was filled with wonders—talking walruses and seals, a kilometer-long whale, and in Sweden, a fortune-telling Gypsy who prophesied that Haig would meet a violent end. But if he followed his ancestors’ path, he would become a hero and even establish a new homeland called “New Iceland.”

Haldor, too, faced disaster—a family annihilation ten years after Haig’s fate. A monstrous seagull would control a powerful figure’s mind, seeking to destroy the Hrutstakki family. If Haldor fell, Haig would return with an army of vengeance.

Upon returning home, they encountered Sigfoss’s son. Haig and young Sigfoss dueled over the daughter of the Great Port’s northern leader. Though Haig was stronger, he accidentally killed Sigfoss. Unwilling to face execution, Haig fled Iceland, embarking on a grand naval adventure.

He reached India, witnessing elephant-mounted armies, and the Ming Dynasty, marveling at the prosperity of the East. He visited Japan, Ryukyu, and Korea, uncovering the mysteries of the Eastern tributary system—a civilization utterly distinct from Western Christianity.

Meanwhile, Haldor compensated the Sigfoss family with a fortune.

Haig’s adventures were conveyed through a “Thousand-Mile Voice Talisman” given to him by a Taoist master named Zhang Sanfeng in the Celestial Empire. This talisman allowed his voice to travel thousands of miles, letting him share his experiences with Haldor.

After witnessing the wonders of the Far East, Haig led his fleet to the mainland near Vinland, settling there. Like his sixth-generation ancestor, Little Hrut, he established a base in Vinland’s fertile lands, enslaving wild tribes and becoming the ruler of a vast territory.

The Hrutstakki saga ended here, leaving room for imagination, as if inviting every listener to dream of Vinland’s beauty.

Note: After Denmark converted to Protestantism, Iceland resisted, but the Danish king ordered the governor to execute a bishop, forcing Iceland’s conversion.

Chapter 11: Haldor’s Fame Spreads Across Iceland

After more than a week of careful revision, the final version of the Hrut family’s story was completed.

Elder Amie, unable to contain his excitement after the book was finished, immediately ordered other priests and teachers in the church to transcribe seven or eight copies, which were then sent to the elders in the major ports and other regions.

Within a week, the story of the Hrut family began to spread among the Protestant believers, gradually gaining momentum.

Another week passed, and the tale of the Hrut family became the most popular topic of discussion among the majority of Icelanders, growing hotter by the day.

In the early seventeenth century, Iceland’s population was only fifty to sixty thousand, with little change over the years. The vast, sparsely populated land and lack of migration led to isolation, so when news broke two years ago that King Christian IV of Denmark, representing the Protestant Union, had launched a war to sanction the Holy Roman Empire, the Icelandic people discussed this major event for two years.

But in late July and early August of 1627, the story of the Hrut family surpassed the European war as the new topic of conversation in Iceland, captivating people and growing in influence.

Many Icelanders, drawn by the fame, traveled to White Hazel Forest Hrut Village to visit Haldor, hoping to meet the descendant of the legendary hero Hrut, Odin, Little Hrut, and the brother of the explorer Haig.

At first, Haldor was pleased, but soon he grew weary. However, Olaf told him that before the court assembly, they must ensure every Icelander who visited the village left with a favorable impression of the Hrut family to build a good reputation.

Haldor thus became even more enthusiastic, ensuring that every visitor left praising his generosity, kindness, and imposing stature.

Many who had doubted the story of the Hrut family were convinced when they saw Haldor’s height of over six feet. After all, at nearly six feet three inches, he was a rare giant in resource-scarce Iceland, where intermarriage was common. Among Iceland’s fifty thousand people, Haldor’s height surpassed eighty percent of the population.

The chieftains Haldor had previously visited, who had been afraid to speak up for him due to the governor’s influence, changed their tune after the Hrut family’s story spread across Iceland. They sent word to Haldor that if the governor and Sigfoss tried to revisit his past crimes at the next month’s court assembly, they would speak in his defense and not allow him to be bullied.

Olaf and Haldor both felt relieved, believing that Sigfoss and the governor could no longer use old grievances against them.

Every day, Haldor met with visitors from various regions in the village—some familiar, some strangers.

Meanwhile, Olaf thrived in the church school. The popularity of the Hrut family’s story had brought Elder Amie great prestige, and in return, he showed even more favor to Olaf, openly declaring him his most promising student and introducing him to several church elders.

Olaf learned that the elder of the North District Church in the major port, Hongrode, was a nobleman sent from Copenhagen, Denmark. Hongrode’s family had been entrusted by King Christian IV to oversee the Danish East India Company, which had occupied the Tranquebar region in southern India in 1620, developing colonies and smuggling tea and sugar. The company was currently flourishing.

Olaf knew this was the golden age of the Age of Exploration. England, France, the Netherlands, and Denmark were all establishing East India Companies to set up bases in India, while Spain was heavily involved in colonization in Central and South America, and England and France had just begun establishing footholds in North America.

Olaf had always wanted to ride the wave of maritime colonization to enrich his family. After all, a modern soul could not endure the dull, resource-scarce, and spiritually barren life in Iceland.

He also aspired to achieve great things, whether by commanding an army or controlling merchant ships and wealth.

After meeting Hongrode, Olaf took note of him, planning to have his father secretly purchase some matchlock or smoothbore guns from him. With the governor and the Sigfoss family watching them, Olaf felt unsafe without firearms.

That Friday evening, after returning home in Jot’s carriage, Olaf found an opportunity to tell his father.

Haldor sat on a stool, polishing his whaling spear, and laughed, “You’re right, Olaf. We’ve offended Sigfoss, which is dangerous for us. Until Governor Kolsvin leaves Iceland, our family still faces the risk of destruction. Buying some firearms is a way to protect ourselves. But I’m more familiar with English merchants—they might sell me matchlock guns at a better price.”

“No, Father, you’ve always had business dealings with English merchants, so whether you buy now or later, you can still trade with them. But if we don’t seize this opportunity with the Hongrode family, we might never get another chance. You might not know, but the Hongrode family controls the East India Company, which has five armed merchant ships and dominates the tea and sugar trade between India, Denmark, Sweden, and England. Although the trade routes have just been established and haven’t shown their full potential yet, in terms of assets and influence, they are one of the most powerful forces in Denmark and will become an indispensable source of revenue for the Danish kingdom in the future.”

“If we establish a connection with them, it will be useful someday. This is an investment, Father.”

Olaf’s words moved Haldor. After a moment of thought, he said, “I’ll do as you say and keep the ship in the middle reaches of the Hvítá River to deal with the shipworms. This year, we’ll make one less voyage, but our sheep have done well, and we can sell them for a hundred or two hundred marks in silver, which should be enough to discuss business with Hongrode.”

The next morning, Haldor left home to arrange the sale of his family’s sheep and a few calves.

That evening, Haldor returned with a merchant who had bought the sheep, and the flock and calves were driven to the coast a few miles away to be loaded onto a ship.

Haldor sat down with a small box of silver coins, delighted.

Katrin reheated the food and poured him a bottle of wine.

After eating and drinking his fill, Haldor belched and looked at Olaf. “Tomorrow morning, we’ll go see Elder Hongrode and see how many guns and bullets we can buy with our one hundred and sixty marks in silver.”

Katrin had just put Half and Gerny to sleep and entered the room. Seeing her husband so attentive to their second son, she felt a pang of jealousy and huffed, “Hmph, you listen to Olaf so much—when will you ever listen to me?”

Haldor laughed heartily. “Olaf is the child blessed by our ancestors, the future of our family. He’s your son, so being good to him is being good to you.”

Katrin also laughed. “You’re right. The children I bear are all handsome and tall. Look at Ulf—he’s only twenty-three and already almost as tall as you. Olaf will grow up to be just as tall and handsome.”

“And Half and Gerny will grow up to be strong young men and beautiful women,” Haldor said happily, pulling his wife into his arms. “Let’s have a few more good children.”

Katrin rolled her eyes at her husband, pushing away his burly hands, and took Olaf by the arm. “Come on, Olaf, let’s go to bed.”

Olaf felt the warmth of his family and kissed his mother. “Alright, you two should go to bed early too. Goodnight.”

Chapter 12: Purchasing Arms

The next morning, Haldor and Olaf rose before dawn, packed some dried meat and hot water, then mounted their family’s mixed-breed Shire horse and an old gelding, setting off for the great port.

Haldor’s riding skills were exceptional, even among the best in White Hazel Forest Hrut Village. Olaf, eager to learn, took this opportunity to master the basics under his father’s guidance.

The old gelding Olaf rode was gentle and castrated, making it the perfect mount for a beginner.

At first, the two rode slowly out of the village, but as Olaf grew more comfortable, they picked up the pace to a steady trot.

Since they had left early, Haldor was in no hurry. He patiently instructed Olaf along the way while keeping a watchful eye on his son’s progress.

Olaf, now nearly the height and weight of an average adult, had decent stamina. Combined with the intelligence of a modern adult who had endured the rigors of the gaokao, he learned quickly.

By the time they reached the village south of the great port, they heard the distant tolling of church bells. Olaf wiped the sweat from his face and sighed, “It’s been over an hour already.”

Haldor glanced at the high-rising sun, flicked his whip, and said, “Not far now. Let’s go.”

Olaf estimated another hour had passed before they crossed through the main street of Reykjavik, Iceland’s most prosperous city, and arrived at the grand cathedral in the northern district.

Europe was still in an era where agriculture, medicine, and culture lagged behind the East. Farming techniques were primitive, and average grain yields were less than one-fifth of those in the ancient Eastern nations.

Iceland was even more backward, so the vast island had only one city—Reykjavik.

Though called a city, Reykjavik was essentially a more prosperous village. To Haldor, who had seen the wider world, it was just a place with more large houses and a few taverns and shops—far from the wealth and bustle of London.

But for most Icelanders who had never traveled far, their world consisted only of their own village and neighboring ones. The difference was merely the number of stone or wooden houses.

Reykjavik had wide streets and tall buildings, but most importantly, it had a dock. Ships arrived daily, with sailors loading and unloading grain, alcohol, furs, timber, farming tools, and swords. To the east of the dock was a tavern that served as a brothel, inn, and restaurant. Further east lay the Governor’s Mansion, the center of Iceland’s authority.

Around the Governor’s Mansion, the three surrounding streets were home to Iceland’s highest-ranking and wealthiest chiefs. Every Icelander who saw the three-story stone mansion would admire it, saying:

“The royal palace in Copenhagen must be just like this.”

To Olaf, Reykjavik was no more than a slightly wealthier village or an ordinary town in the Celestial Empire of later eras. Its so-called prosperity held no appeal for him.

Reykjavik was divided into three districts. The southern and northern districts were where the free laborers lived, with the largest population. The eastern district, directly east of the dock, was where the Governor’s Mansion, shops, and wealthy residences were concentrated.

After passing through the main street, the number of pedestrians thinned out. Haldor tied up the horses in front of the cathedral and led Olaf into the northern district church.

It was Sunday, and a mass had just ended. The congregation filed out, and Haldor and Olaf waited until the church was empty before entering.

Inside, two priests were tidying up the sacred vessels. On the altar, a man in white robes, who appeared to be an elder, was giving instructions.

Haldor and Olaf approached. Haldor made the sign of the cross, bowed slightly, and said respectfully, “Haldor, a lost sheep from White Hazel Forest Hrut Village, has come to receive the Lord’s grace.”

“The Lord will embrace His children and bless His follower, Mr. Haldor.”

The white-robed man had brown hair and was about the same age as Haldor, though a head shorter. He first made a solemn sign of the cross before turning to ask, “Olaf, what is your relationship with Mr. Haldor?”

Olaf bowed slightly, greeted him, and explained, “This is my father, Elder Hongrode.”

Hongrode’s eyes lit up with recognition, and he smiled, shaking Haldor’s hand. “I remember now. Mr. Haldor is the brother of Iceland’s great explorer, Haig. I’ve heard much about the Hrut family’s deeds recently.”

Sensing Hongrode’s goodwill, Haldor cleared his throat. “Icelanders fear neither wind nor waves and love adventure. It is the spirit passed down by our ancestors, Elder Hongrode. I’ve come today to discuss business with you.”

“Since it’s business, let’s talk in my office.”

Hongrode led Haldor into a room adorned with reindeer heads, medieval swords, and a golden cross.

Haldor praised the decorations as he sat down. The two exchanged a few words about the room’s furnishings, and Hongrode seemed quite enthusiastic, even pouring Haldor a cup of wine.

After a moment, Haldor set down his cup and got to the point. “Elder Hongrode, you know I have a merchant ship. These past two years, the Protestant Union and the Holy Roman Empire, which supports Catholicism, have been at war. All of Europe is in chaos. Defeated mercenaries and desperate farmers have turned to piracy and banditry. I want to protect my ships and property, so I’ve come to buy some firearms. Do you have any?”

Though Hongrode was a clergyman, he was also an excellent businessman. Originally groomed as his family’s successor, he had later converted to maintain religious support for his family. In just five years, he had risen from priest to deacon and was now stationed in northern Iceland as an elder. With a few more years of experience, he could arrange a transfer to the grand cathedral in Copenhagen.

Upon seeing Haldor and Olaf, Hongrode had immediately sensed they were there to buy weapons. After all, whether it was the incident eight years ago or the Hrut family’s history, it was clear that Sigfoss and the Haldor family were enemies. Moreover, Sigfoss, backed by the governor, had openly declared his intention to reduce the Haldor family to serfdom.

Hongrode knew Haldor must want firearms for self-defense, perhaps even to fight Sigfoss. But since he had no ties to Sigfoss, as long as he could make money, he didn’t care what they did.

A thought flashed through Hongrode’s mind, and he smiled warmly. “These are troubled times. Under the personal command of His Majesty Christian, Denmark has captured several regions in northern Germany. It seems we are on the verge of defeating the Holy Roman Empire and becoming the savior of the Protestant nations. Thus, all firearms and ammunition produced in the Norwegian and Danish arsenals are being sent to the front lines. I can’t obtain any—it would be treason.”

Olaf inwardly scoffed. He didn’t know if Hongrode was aware, but in the second half of last year, Christian IV had been soundly defeated by the Holy Roman Empire’s commander, Wallenstein. This year, they had suffered further losses, relinquishing all the territory they had gained. Soon, they would face another major defeat. Yet here was Hongrode, still singing the praises of the Danish king.

Olaf knew the course of history, but Hongrode and Haldor did not. Haldor understood that Hongrode’s words might not be a refusal—there was likely more to come. So he waited patiently with a smile.

Hongrode silently praised Haldor’s composure, thinking, No wonder he’s the head of the Hrut family.

“However, England and France are now our allies. Both nations have provided significant support in gold, silver, arrows, spears, and firearms. If you truly want some, I could arrange to have a portion of the firearms shipped from England to Copenhagen diverted to Iceland. The price, however, would be higher.”

Chapter 13: The Exploitation of the Works of Nature

Icelanders generally did not haggle during transactions, but Haldor, who owned merchant ships, was clearly an exception.

After a brief negotiation with Hongrode, fifteen mark silver coins could buy a matchlock musket, and half a mark could get a pack of lead bullets and gunpowder.

Haldor purchased ten matchlock muskets and five crates of ammunition, paying a deposit of one crate of mark silver coins.

Iceland did not have a standard currency. The crate of silver coins contained British silver pennies, shillings, and golden Rhine shields, which looked like gold but had low actual gold content and were used as silver coins.

Hongrode calculated for a long time—Olaf estimated about an hour.

Finally, Hongrode figured out that the crate of silver and gold coins together amounted to one hundred and sixty marks. He then calculated a bit more, rubbing his forehead, and said, “I’ll take one hundred and sixty marks as the deposit, making the total one hundred and eighty marks. I’ll write a letter and send someone to Copenhagen. It will take at least a month.”

Olaf lightly kicked his father’s heel. Haldor stood up and shook hands with Hongrode, saying, “Pleasure doing business with you, Elder Hongrode.”

After agreeing on the time, Haldor bid farewell and left.

The father and son first ate some dry rations, then Haldor took Olaf back to the church school in the southern district before leaving.

Today was Sunday. Olaf’s roommates—Tom, Solrak, and another child from a local merchant family in the big port, Zerimi—would not return until the afternoon.

After greeting his teacher, Elder Amie, Olaf followed Pastor Ilugi to help prepare for the Sunday mass.

After the series of activities—prayers, communion, and hymns—ended, Olaf felt exhausted. He drank a cup of grape juice, ate a few bites of pancakes, and then returned to his dormitory for a nap.

When he woke up, his three roommates had all returned one after another.

Olaf once again returned to the dull and uninteresting life of the church school. However, while he endured and studied hard, he knew his age was still too young to do many things independently. In just five or six more years, once he turned sixteen, he would be taken seriously and able to accomplish many things on his own.

While attending classes and singing hymns every day, Olaf also thought about ways to make money, which had become his top priority in recent years.

Iceland, limited by its small population and low productivity, had almost no way to make money except for its geothermal resources, which could be used for hot springs.

From around the tenth century to the present, Iceland’s walruses had been hunted to extinction for their valuable ivory. Before the Black Death spread, Icelanders could live well by exporting rare animal furs and walrus tusks.

But now, with Europe’s population greatly reduced and years of war causing countries to invest their funds in recruiting soldiers, armaments, shipbuilding, and colonization, the demand for luxury goods had decreased significantly. Of course, Iceland could no longer provide them.

As a result, Icelanders now barely survived on the rich marine resources of the North Sea and the wool and sheepskins from the island, while still having to pay various taxes that were no lower than those collected during the Catholic era.

Olaf was well aware that his father had to pay taxes when he sold sheep, and taxes were also due when the crops grew. Basically, after deducting the food for the family, the remaining yield from the fields was just enough to pay the taxes.

To truly make money in Iceland, besides developing agriculture and livestock, the only option was to increase income from fishing. However, agriculture relied on advanced planting and management techniques, while fishing depended on advanced boats and tools, as well as subsequent storage, preservation, and curing methods.

Neither of these was something Olaf could solve.

In fact, in today’s Europe, if one had a ship, startup capital, and courage, the most profitable venture was to trade in the Far East. However, this required the consent of England, Spain, and the Netherlands, as well as paying sufficient protection fees. Otherwise, the armed merchant ships of the three countries controlling Far Eastern trade could turn to piracy at any time.

Olaf weighed his age and his family’s funds and ultimately gave up on the possibility of overseas trade, instead focusing on agricultural development.

Among the numerous nations and ethnic groups on the continents of the world, if one were to rank agricultural cultivation, the ancient Eastern country would undoubtedly be at the top in any century.

Even now, during the Ming Dynasty, China’s agriculture was several times more advanced than Europe’s.

In his previous life, Olaf had studied for the civil service exam and learned a lot of historical, encyclopedic, and political knowledge. He remembered that the Ming Dynasty had produced three treasures in the field of biological technology: Li Shizhen’s Compendium of Materia Medica, Xu Guangqi’s Complete Treatise on Agriculture, and Song Yingxing’s The Exploitation of the Works of Nature.

Olaf recalled that in history, these three books were not introduced to Europe until a hundred or two hundred years later. At that time, the bellows for iron smelting and fire-making in The Exploitation of the Works of Nature helped Europe open the door to the Industrial Revolution. Industries such as sericulture, planting, textiles, sugar making, and ceramics also rapidly improved. However, the Qing Dynasty of the same era, still basking in the glory of the Kangxi and Qianlong reigns, could not extricate itself. The Qianlong Emperor even listed The Exploitation of the Works of Nature as a forbidden book, so that hundreds of years later, the only surviving Ming Dynasty edition could only be found in Japan.

Olaf knew that in all of Europe, he might be the only one who could read Chinese characters. As long as he could ask British merchants to bring back these three divine books, he could slowly study them and then gradually introduce them to make a fortune. He could become Iceland’s richest man, the richest in Scandinavia, or even the richest in Europe.

Olaf was well aware of the value of these three books. They were the crystallization of wisdom from a five-thousand-year-old civilization. If he translated and spread them, Europe’s agriculture, heavy industry, and light industry, which lagged behind the Ming Dynasty, would quickly improve by one or two levels and soon surpass the East.

Of course, Olaf would not do such a thing. First, he still had lingering affection for the ancient Eastern country and hoped for the Ming Dynasty to be strong.

Second, doing so would not benefit him.

The Compendium of Materia Medica also contained medical prescriptions. Olaf thought that using them directly would be enough to outperform European doctors who only knew bloodletting. This would not only make money but also ensure his own life.

The Complete Treatise on Agriculture could increase crop yields. Once he learned it, his family’s twenty-four thousand acres of farmland could see a two- or three-fold, or even three- or four-fold, increase in production. This would mean an increase in annual income, and over time, farming alone could make him a wealthy man.

The Exploitation of the Works of Nature was even more remarkable. This encyclopedia was the supreme guide to improving the foundations of agricultural and industrial development. As long as he obtained it, he could change the situation in Europe.

Olaf felt he must get these three books. Currently, the only way to buy them was through England, Spain, and the Dutch Republic of the Seven United Provinces.

But Olaf’s family was too far from Spain and the Netherlands and had no acquaintances there. Haldor was only familiar with English merchants, so Olaf was somewhat impatient to go home and have his father ask British merchants to buy a batch of Ming Dynasty books.

After several agonizing days, it was finally Friday afternoon.

The three eagerly awaiting children heard the familiar sound of copper bells and horse whinnies while scrubbing the floor—Jot had arrived.

In the evening, just as night fell, Jot drove the carriage and took the three children back to the village.

Olaf and Solrak got off the carriage and each went home.

Entering the house, the light golden-haired Half and the almost white-haired Gerny cheered and hugged Olaf.

“Oh, my dear brother and sister. Did you miss me?” Olaf ruffled the hair of his two siblings, who only came up to his chest, and said lightly.

Half had thick eyebrows and big eyes, with a small scar at the corner of his eye from a mischievous fall. He admired his second brother, who was undefeated in the village, and was endlessly curious about the outside world. He asked, “Brother, when you weren’t home, the kids from Elrond’s neighboring village bullied me. I couldn’t beat them.”

“I’ll tell Halik. If anything happens, go to him.” Olaf smiled and patted Half’s shoulder.

Half cheered and let go, saying, “If Big Brother Halik can help me, I’ll beat up all the Elrond kids.”

Gerny had big, round eyes, and her sky-blue eyes were as pure as the Vatnajökull glacier. She inherited her mother’s gentleness and touched Olaf’s face, softly asking, “Brother Olaf, you’ve gotten thinner. I missed you so much.”

This week, Olaf had been lost in thoughts about the “scientific journals” from the distant East, so he had been eating and drinking less, which made him a bit thinner. He chuckled, hugged his sister, and patted her shoulder, softly comforting her, “I missed you too. Gerny, have you been eating well?”

The moonlight shone at the doorway, casting long shadows of the three Olaf siblings.

Chapter 14: The Hammer of Thor

Brother and sister were in conversation when Haldor and his wife heard their voices and came out, pulling Olaf back into the room to serve him a still-warm meal.

After Olaf had eaten his fill, Katrin noticed he had something to say, so she took Half and Gerny into the inner room.

Olaf sipped his hot water and glanced at his father, noticing his distracted expression. He smiled and asked, “What’s wrong, Papa?”

Haldor rubbed his hands together, his face shifting slightly as he spoke in a hoarse voice, “This morning, I received notice that on the tenth of next month—the same day the governor convenes the court assembly—things might come to a head.”

“Don’t worry, Papa,” Olaf said, his expression darkening. After a moment’s thought, he lowered his voice, “With the Hrut family’s saga protecting us, Lord Kolsvin wouldn’t dare act against you. And the other chiefs will speak for our family.”

“I think we’ll be fine. But Kolsvin is the late king’s illegitimate son, King Christian’s half-brother. Even if he has no status or power, he’s not someone to be trifled with. If he disregards the consequences and insists on avenging Sigfoss, which chief could stop him? It’s not impossible.”

Haldor was worried, and Olaf considered his words. Though he believed it unlikely the governor would forcefully intervene for Sigfoss, everyone in Iceland knew that Sigfoss’s daughter was deeply favored by her husband, Kolsvin. A well-placed whisper in the bedroom could change everything.

Olaf thought about how, in just three weeks, the Hongrode family would deliver ten muskets. Combined with the two old, clumsy matchlocks they already had, their family would possess twelve firearms, along with dozens of knives, swords, axes, and iron hammers. They also had leather armor, horned helmets, and worn plate armor.

If the governor truly acted against them at next month’s assembly, Olaf believed they would have to fight to the death.

Ever since his rebirth, Olaf had dreamed of great achievements. Eight years ago, when he had tricked his uncle Haig into going to North America, it had been a deliberate attempt to guide him toward colonization. Deep down, Olaf had always harbored the idea of going to America to colonize—or even found a nation—when he grew up.

“If the governor really moves against us, Father, we’ll do as we planned. We’ll pretend to submit to Sigfoss’s bullying. When he sends people to seize our land and wealth, we’ll strike back, kill them, and then take the entire village—men, women, and children—by force onto the ship and sail to join my uncle Haig.”

Olaf’s childish face trembled with excitement, but his eyes burned with fierce determination. Haldor felt a surge of heat in his chest and declared, “Good! If Sigfoss and the governor leave us no choice, we’ll act. But we need to plan early. Tomorrow, I’ll have your mother speak to your uncles Kadir and Hoskuld, and we’ll inform Jot and Hrutik in advance. When the time comes, we’ll act swiftly—no one must escape.”

Jot and Haldor were close, and their group of over a dozen strong, battle-ready men were the toughest in the village. Haldor was the village chief, and Jot was his second-in-command, so if it came to killing and rebellion, Haldor needed to discuss it with Jot first, giving him time to prepare mentally.

Hrutik was Haldor’s first mate, an archer, and a whaler—a Swiss mercenary from the Schwyz region who had fought in wars across many nations. In 1612, he was recruited by King Christian IV of Denmark for the Kalmar campaign, which captured the Swedish city of Kalmar within months.

Hrutik was severely wounded in that battle and left for dead, but Haldor, who was transporting supplies to the front, saved him. The two formed a deep bond, and after the war, Hrutik retired from the military and, at Haldor’s invitation, came to Iceland to serve as his deputy.

Olaf had met his father’s closest brothers and knew of their deep friendship, so when he heard his father’s decision, he said no more and went to sleep.

Haldor, restless with worry, set out early the next morning with provisions, riding his horse to find Jot. Together, they rode northeast toward the upper reaches of the Hvítá River.

Haldor’s large cog ship, over fifty meters long, was moored in a river bay upstream, guarded by Hrutik and a sailor.

Both Haldor and Jot were skilled riders, and by evening, they reached the bay.

A thin mist hung over the water, but through the haze, they could make out the familiar silhouette of their merchant ship, the Hammer of Thor.

At the sight of their ship, Haldor and Jot relaxed. Then, they shouted at the top of their lungs, “Hrutik!”

A yellow-bearded man with a sword scar on his cheek, holding a bow, had eagle-like eyes that flashed with recognition. His forearm muscles relaxed as he saw Haldor and Jot emerge from the forest on horseback. A faint smile played on his lips as he lowered his bow.

Moments later, Haldor and Hrutik embraced warmly on the deck. Nearby, the sailor Hilt secured the gangplank, while Jot stepped forward to shake Hrutik’s hand.

After a few pleasantries, the three men entered the cabin and sat down. Haldor patted the young sailor Hilt on the shoulder and smiled. “Little Hilt, you’re the boy I found in England. But you’re clever—I’m sure you’ve learned a lot from Hrutik. Keep it up, and in a few years, I’ll help you find a wife.”

Twenty-year-old Hilt was a stutterer. His face flushed as he struggled to speak, gesturing excitedly.

Haldor, Jot, and Hrutik laughed, then ordered Hilt to fetch some wine.

After finishing a bottle, Hrutik and Jot learned of Haldor’s plans. Hrutik, unmarried and not an Icelander, fully supported Haldor’s decision.

“I’ve heard America is full of gold, and land is free for the taking. With our skills, we can surely claim a piece of it,” Hrutik laughed, patting the quiver at his waist.

Jot seemed simple, but he was just not talkative. He had his own ideas and, after some thought, squinted and said, “Hrutik, you don’t know yet, but eight years ago, Haig already claimed land in Vinland. If we go, we should go to Vinland.”

“Good idea,” Hrutik said, looking at Haldor in surprise, as if amazed by his foresight.

Haldor sighed bitterly and said in a low voice, “Back then, Haig was fleeing for his life. I couldn’t reveal his whereabouts. Now, to save our lives, I’ve asked Elder Amie to write a saga, so I’m afraid all of Iceland knows by now.”

Jot explained the situation to Hrutik, who laughed heartily and took another sip of wine, his face flushed. “With Haig in Vinland, our retreat is secure. But I’ve heard America is full of Indian savages—what the Icelanders call Skrælings. Though they’re primitive, they’re numerous. If we want to settle there long-term, we’ll need more people.”

“I thought about it all night. If it comes to action, and Sigfoss sends people to Hrut Village, I want you to help me kill Sigfoss’s men. Then, we’ll take all the villagers of Hrut Village and leave Iceland on this Hammer of Thor. If any villagers refuse, we’ll have to force them.”

Haldor’s expression was unsettled, his tone hesitant.

The moment Haldor spoke, the cabin fell silent, save for the faint sound of breathing.

After a long while, just as Hrutik was about to lose patience and demand Jot’s stance, Jot sighed deeply and gritted his teeth. “If they come to confiscate your property, it won’t just be Sigfoss’s men—there will be guards and tax officials from the governor’s office. If we kill them, it’ll implicate the whole village. It’s better to take the entire village with us.

Haldor, you’re the chief, and the Hrut family are the ancestors’ masters. By both duty and reason, we must stand with you. I’ll speak to the men in the village. The old, women, and children don’t matter, but the men who run the households won’t want to leave. To make this work, you’ll have to promise them rewards—hand out some gold and silver.”

Jot’s declaration instantly warmed the atmosphere in the cabin.

Haldor’s face relaxed as he patted his chest in assurance. “Jot, don’t worry. I’ll divide this year’s harvest among everyone. In Vinland, for every piece of land you have in Iceland, I’ll give you twice as much. Jot, can you make this work?”

Jot’s brows relaxed slightly, and he nodded. “With these terms, I can try. First, I’ll speak to our closest ten or so men. On that day, the rest won’t have a choice.”

Chapter 15: Uncle

Two weeks passed in the blink of an eye. Olaf continued his monotonous life at the church school, but even on weekends when he returned home, he rarely saw Haldor. On the few occasions he did, he found his father polishing his war hammer and long knife, and training his body in the early mornings.

Olaf clearly sensed that Haldor was preparing for the upcoming court assembly, making preparations for the worst-case scenario.

This sense of foresight made Olaf admire his father even more. He felt that his father was reliable and possessed many qualities of a successful man.

August was the warmest month of the year in Iceland.

Although the nights still required a thick fur blanket, during the day, one only needed to wear a thicker robe. Compared to the bitter cold of June and October, August was the most pleasant.

On Friday after school, Olaf was taken by his father, who had come to Big Port, to a village in the northern district. As they approached a dark stone house, Haldor called out, and a thin, short man with black curly hair emerged, laughing heartily as he embraced Haldor.

“My dear brother-in-law, you’ve finally arrived,” Olaf’s uncle, Hoskuld, turned and lifted Olaf, smiling as he said, “I heard Olaf is studying at the church school in the southern district. I’ve been wanting to invite him over for a visit. How are you finding the church school, boy?”

Olaf now knew that many years ago, his maternal grandfather had died at sea while raiding, and his grandmother had remarried, taking his mother, Katrin, and his uncle Hoskuld with her. Later, she had given birth to another son, Kadir.

Kadir lived in Gray Mountain Village, northeast of White Hazel Forest Hrut Village. Having inherited his father’s position, he was the leader and tax collector of this small village, his status not much different from Haldor’s.

Both younger brothers had a very good relationship with their eldest sister, Katrin, and were even closer to their brother-in-law, Haldor. Thus, they were people the Haldor family could completely trust in Iceland.

Olaf politely answered his uncle’s questions, and then Hoskuld’s two sons came out to greet Haldor and Olaf.

Hoskuld had fathered four children, but two had died young. His two remaining sons had grown up and were working with him in Big Port.

The eldest son, Kalm, was twenty years old and looked very much like Hoskuld.

The second son, Kalhu, was sixteen but already taller than his father and brother. He had just graduated from the church school last year and was now an apprentice scribe under the tax official at the governor’s mansion. It was Kalhu who had informed Hoskuld about Sigfoss and the governor’s plans against Haldor.

“Haldor and Olaf, stay with me until the court assembly begins next Tuesday. Then we’ll go to the governor’s mansion together.”

Hoskuld enthusiastically pulled Haldor and his son into the room, excitedly saying, “Tomorrow, Kadir will bring his son-in-law over. Let’s have a good drink tonight.”

Haldor nodded and smiled, “Good. No matter what happens at the court assembly, we’re prepared. Let’s relax these few days and see how things go next Tuesday.”

“Right,” Hoskuld narrowed his eyes, his tone somewhat sinister, “The worst that could happen is killing someone and fleeing. Vinland has Haig, we have a way out.”

Olaf and his two cousins sat to the side, cracking hazelnuts and listening to their elders talk. The two cousins showed no change in expression, clearly understanding and supporting their fathers’ plans.

Olaf knew that his father had met with his two uncles last month. From their conversation now, it was clear that both uncles were willing to stand with the Haldor family.

As they talked, night gradually fell. The animal fat lamps inside the house lit up, making the room much brighter.

Olaf’s aunt and two cousins brought out several dishes: smoked sheep’s head, boiled sheep intestines and meat, fried salmon, smoked sea birds, boiled carrots, a pot of oatmeal porridge, and black bread.

Everyone took a plate and ate while chatting. After finishing their meal, Hoskuld and Haldor each took a bottle of wine and sat to the side, drinking heavily.

In the small room next door, Olaf and his two cousins, curious about the history of the Hrut family and Haig’s adventures, boasted for a while. In the name of their uncle Haig, they spoke knowledgeably about the Far East, mentioning wonders like the Great Wall, the Forbidden City in Beijing, and the Porcelain Tower of Nanjing, which left the two cousins in awe.

“Is there really a wall made of stone that stretches for thousands of miles? That must be amazing.”

“The emperor of the Ming Dynasty really lives in a palace with tens of thousands of rooms? They must be incredibly rich.”

Olaf grinned and said, “In Iceland, apart from the governor and the richest leaders, no one else has used silk, porcelain, or tea, all of which come from the Ming Dynasty.”

“Oh, I’ve seen a blue bottle at Lord Amir’s house. He said it was eastern porcelain, very expensive,” the eldest cousin, Kalm, clapped his hands, excitedly recalling the porcelain bottle he had seen at the tavern owner’s house in Big Port.

Kalhu scoffed and whispered, “The front part of the governor’s mansion is the assembly hall, and the back part is the governor’s residence. I’ve seen a lot of porcelain there. It’s indeed beautiful. I heard that one of the governor’s porcelain bottles could be exchanged for a ship.”

“Oh, that valuable?”

After talking for a while, Olaf felt sleepy. He poured some hot water into the washbasin and washed his hands and face.

The two cousins were still eager for more and muttered about wanting to go to the Far East once.

Olaf wiped his upper arms, thinking to himself: I want to go see it too, but it might be a long time before that happens.

The next morning, after waking up, Olaf began doing push-ups and sit-ups.

The two cousins, who were sleeping in the same room, got up and curiously watched for a while before trying to imitate the exercises, but they quickly found it strenuous.

“Olaf, are you training your body? Is this exercise effective?” Kalhu asked, rubbing his stomach.

Olaf finished a hundred push-ups in one go before standing up and smiling, “This is a great exercise. You can try it too, but you need to control your breathing and not rush the movements.”

Just as Olaf was teaching his cousins how to exercise, a long horse’s neigh came from outside, followed by the laughter of Hoskuld and Haldor.

Olaf had a sudden realization and knew that his other uncle, Kadir, had arrived.

Sure enough, after a moment, Hoskuld shouted from outside, “Kalm, Kalhu, Olaf, come out quickly. Your Uncle Kadir is here.”

Since the Icelandic language, like English, Danish, French, and others, did not distinguish between uncles, aunts, and other relatives with specific terms, one had to determine the exact relationship based on the context.

Olaf and his two cousins pushed open the door and saw Haldor and Hoskuld talking with two men.

One of the men was tall with golden hair, bulging eyes, and a fierce-looking face covered in scars. He stood in the house, about the same height as Haldor, and a head taller than Hoskuld.

Next to the golden-haired man was a younger man who looked about thirty years old. This man had clear eyes, a high nose bridge, but a somewhat thin build.

Olaf quickly went over and hugged the golden-haired man, affectionately saying, “Uncle Kadir.”

Kadir pulled off his wolfskin cloak with his left hand and patted Olaf’s head with his right, softly saying, “My little Olaf is here too. Good boy, you’ve grown taller.”

Over the past ten years, Kadir had more interactions with the Haldor family, so Olaf was more familiar with Kadir.

After some conversation, Olaf learned that the man standing next to Kadir was his new son-in-law, Heiner, who had married his cousin Fanshil last year. Heiner was a Scottish nobleman who had lost his land and estate due to a failed struggle and had fled to Iceland, where Kadir had taken him in and made him his son-in-law.

Last year, when Fanshil and Heiner got married, Haldor and Katrin had attended the wedding. Olaf had stayed in the village to learn writing at the church school. At that time, Katrin had praised Heiner for being handsome and having a noble demeanor.

Now, Olaf took a good look at his cousin’s husband and indeed found him to be quite good-looking. As for his character and abilities, that remained to be seen.

Chapter 16: Court Assembly

Staying at Hoskuld’s home, Olaf felt there wasn’t much to do besides spinning tales to entertain his two cousins.

Haldor, Hoskuld, and Kadir spent their days drinking, chatting idly, and sparring. Haldor’s build matched Kadir’s, but his combat experience was far greater, allowing him to hold his own even when fighting two-on-one.

Heiner, meanwhile, spent all day poring over a thin book. Olaf caught a glimpse of the cover—it was printed in English, titled The Prince.

After a moment’s thought, Olaf realized this was a political treatise from the Renaissance, later revered by many kings, great leaders, and dictators as a guiding text. In later eras, it was considered a banned political work for advocating the separation—or even opposition—of politics and morality. It preached that goodness leads to ruin while cruelty ensures stability, that human nature is inherently evil, and that rulers must control their subjects through force and constant vigilance.

Olaf hadn’t read it in his past life but had seen academic critiques of The Prince. Still, he felt a strange familiarity—its ideas reminded him of China’s Legalist philosophy from over two thousand years ago.

The Prince argued that human nature is selfish, that rulers must control the people’s fundamental interests, and that a ruler must be both as fierce as a lion and as cunning as a fox. “Unarmed prophets fail; armed prophets succeed.” The “arms” here referred to military power, wealth, and intellect. The lion’s ferocity was the military, the fox’s cunning was the mind. With these, a ruler could secure wealth, intimidate subjects, bind their interests to his own, and brainwash them—only then would his rule be unshakable.

Legalist thought was similar but even more comprehensive. Chinese rulers used Confucian ethics, the Mandate of Heaven, and the hierarchical structure of scholar-officials, farmers, artisans, and merchants to maintain feudal rule. No matter who sat on the throne, the system persisted.

The ideal of “inner sage, outer king” was the ultimate goal for Chinese rulers—philosophically superior to The Prince’s focus on external dominance while neglecting inner cultivation. Yet in thousands of years of history, few had achieved it. The founders of dynasties like Qin, Han, Tang, and Song either lacked the means or the moral refinement to reach Confucian perfection.

Heiner’s book sparked many thoughts in Olaf. Curious, he cautiously asked what the book was about. Perhaps because of Olaf’s age and status, Heiner seemed at ease and eagerly explained.

After listening for a while, Olaf gained a deeper understanding of Heiner. From his words, Olaf deduced that Heiner was a high-ranking Scottish noble, possibly even related to the royal family. Now fallen from grace, he had fled to Iceland after his family’s wealth was seized, determined to return, seek vengeance, and reclaim his inheritance. That was why he was studying The Prince—a manual for tyrannical rule.

Though Heiner seemed somewhat neurotic, his eyes gleamed as he discussed The Prince. Olaf had to admit that as a noble, Heiner had a strong cultural foundation and a keen grasp of the text. If given power, he might become an extraordinary figure.

For various reasons, Olaf took a liking to Heiner. He expanded on Heiner’s points, introducing some of Han Fei’s ideas, which left Heiner stunned.

“Olaf, how can someone so young think of such things? Good heavens!”

Heiner’s face paled as if he had seen a demon, but he couldn’t help but ponder Olaf’s words.

“In a war-torn age, harsh laws must constrain the people, forcing them to follow the ruler’s will—farming and fighting. Wealth comes only from agriculture and state-regulated trade. Status rises only through military merit, not inherited privilege. With such laws, the ruler’s wars cannot fail.”

Heiner thought of Europe’s great kings, who had risen through war and ruthless measures. He admired Olaf’s words, seeing him as a sage despite his youth. It felt surreal.

Olaf smiled. “I once heard stories from the Far East—of the Ming Dynasty. Two thousand years ago, China was in a Warring States period, much like Europe now. Philosophers wrote books to persuade rulers to adopt their ideas. One school was called Legalism. What I just said comes from their teachings.”

“Ah,” Heiner recovered, his unease fading. He looked at Olaf warmly. “I never knew the Ming had such great thinkers so long ago. Truly the richest and most powerful nation in the world.”

Because Olaf had shared ideas Heiner admired, Heiner’s opinion of him improved. He began to see Olaf as mature beyond his years, treating him like an adult. This gave Heiner a sense of comfort he hadn’t felt in a long time—like he was back in Scotland, a lord once more.

Three days passed quickly, and soon it was August 10th—a Tuesday, the day of Iceland’s annual court assembly.

From the 8th to 9th centuries, Iceland had become a refuge for Scandinavian Vikings fleeing political oppression. By the 10th century, it had become a highly autonomous region, effectively a nation governed by a council of Godi chiefs. The court assembly was where these chiefs gathered to interact with foreign nations.

Initially, each Godi ruled independently, and the assembly only convened annually to mediate disputes among chiefs and freemen. The harshest punishment was exile—minor offenses sent one to Iceland’s desolate islands, while major ones meant banishment to Greenland.

After the 10th century, the assembly was held during the warmest season, originally lasting ten days. After converting to Christianity, it was shortened to a week.

Even after Iceland became part of Norway and Denmark in the 11th century, governed by royal appointees, the annual assembly persisted. Normally, the governor handled trade, taxes, and justice, but during the assembly, he would gather Iceland’s chiefs to discuss taxes and settle cases.

Over time, the assembly also became a period for private barter and trade among the chiefs, much like the festive gatherings in Ming Dynasty villages.

Chapter 17: The Governor of Iceland

On Tuesday, Haldor, Olaf, and the others woke up early, had some bread and milk, and then set out together toward the central district.

The sun had just risen, and the dirt road was already bustling with laborers in tattered clothes hurrying toward the docks.

After passing through several alleys, they arrived at the central district.

The lawn in front of the Governor’s Mansion was already packed with people. Olaf observed that they were all dressed in Nordic-style robes and hats—likely the various local leaders from across Iceland.

Haldor, Hoskuld, and Kadir each had acquaintances, so they led Olaf, Kalm, and Heiner forward to greet them. Kalhu had already gone to the Governor’s Mansion early to attend to the tax official.

The court assembly had not yet begun, but the attitude of the leaders toward Haldor had noticeably changed. After all, the story of the Hrut family had spread far and wide, and both Haldor and Haig had become local celebrities.

These leaders were also eager to befriend Haldor, hoping to secure their place in history.

As they chatted, the doors of the three-story assembly hall in front of the Governor’s Mansion were opened by guards. A young black-haired official stepped out and called loudly, “All leaders, please enter and take your seats.”

A village leader from the northern district of Big Port, who was Kadir’s cousin, whispered, “That young man is Sigfoss’s nephew. Sigfoss hasn’t arrived yet—probably waiting until midday to come with the Governor and the three new church elders.”

The crowd entered the assembly hall through the stone pillars and sat down on the wooden chairs inside. Some of the more boisterous men had already taken out small bottles of liquor from their pockets and were drinking merrily in groups.

Haldor instructed Heiner and Kalm to keep an eye on Olaf while he, Hoskuld, and Kadir moved through the crowd, greeting the various leaders and church elders.

In Iceland, the most powerful figures besides the Governor were the elders of the three church districts—south, north, and central. Originally, the local leaders had managed their own affairs without much interference, but ever since Sigfoss had aligned himself with Governor Kolsvin, he had become the most formidable and highest-ranking leader in Iceland.

After a long, noisy wait, the air growing stifling, the back door finally opened. Kalhu and the same official from Sigfoss’s family escorted several middle-aged and elderly officials with protruding bellies inside.

The leading official, his hair streaked with gray, clapped his hands and shouted in a booming voice, “Silence, everyone!”

Someone recognized him as Agran, the tax official of the Governor’s Mansion, who held authority over tax collection in all regions. Originally Governor Kolsvin’s steward, he had risen to prominence in Iceland and was now the second most powerful man on the island.

The leaders knew that Agran’s appearance meant the Governor was about to arrive.

As Agran spoke, another man emerged from the door—a middle-aged man dressed in a Danish-style pleated robe and a gentleman’s hat. He was slender and refined, with gentle eyes and a faint smile.

Haldor narrowed his eyes and leaned down to whisper in Olaf’s ear, “That’s Sigfoss.”

Olaf studied the ruthless leader of Big Port carefully and couldn’t help but marvel inwardly: You can’t judge a book by its cover. He looks like a scholar, yet he’s the enemy, Sigfoss.

Sigfoss scanned the room with a smile, pausing briefly on Haldor before bowing deeply with Agran toward the door, calling out, “We humbly welcome the Governor!”

A series of sharp clicks echoed as a fair-skinned young man with gray curly hair entered. He wore a velvet blue robe with intricate floral patterns, the train trailing behind him in lace folds. His expression was one of arrogance and severity.

The leaders quickly bowed, pressing their hands to their chests as they greeted him in unison, “Greetings, Governor!”

Olaf was shorter than most in the crowd, so even though he didn’t bow, he was hidden from view. Through a gap, he caught sight of Governor Kolsvin’s thin autumn undergarments beneath his ceremonial robe and his brown leather high-heeled shoes with sky-blue heels. The bizarre combination, paired with his handsome features and average height, struck Olaf as utterly grotesque, devoid of any beauty.

No one else in the assembly hall found anything odd about Kolsvin’s attire. The fashion of the time had its own standards, and Kolsvin’s outfit was actually quite refined. Without his Danish royal bloodline, his position as Governor of Iceland wouldn’t have granted him the right to wear such garments.

In other words, Kolsvin’s attire was a deliberate display of his status and authority.

“Please, take your seats,” Kolsvin said, his heels clicking as he walked to the sofa on the raised platform against the eastern wall. He gestured to the seats beside him and smiled. “Elder Orikel, Elder Hongrode, Elder Amie, and Lord Sigfoss, please sit.”

After Kolsvin’s entrance, three priests in gold-embroidered robes with silver crosses on their chests followed him inside. These were the three leaders of Iceland’s new church: Orikel, the elder of the central district church; Amie, the elder of the southern district church; and Hongrode, the elder of the northern district church.

The three elders and Sigfoss took their seats beside Kolsvin, and the rest of the crowd followed suit.

Agran sat on a high stool to the left and shouted, “The Icelandic court assembly is now in session! This year’s agricultural taxes remain unchanged. However, due to our nation’s ongoing campaign against Germany, additional military funds are required. The Governor has decided to increase the royal tribute and weapon maintenance fees. Each region will contribute different amounts based on size. I will now announce the war tribute and other fees for each district: Orik Village—two hundred silver marks, Beri District—three hundred marks, White Hazel Forest Hrut Village—four hundred silver marks, Will Village—”

Before Agran could finish, the assembly hall erupted in chaos. The leaders began complaining loudly, their faces flushed as they protested the impossibility of paying such exorbitant war tributes.

Icelandic leaders actually enjoyed considerable autonomy, but they still had to negotiate with each governor. After all, governors relied on various taxes to amass wealth, and the local leaders could usually meet their demands by collecting a little extra from their people. Many tax officials and village leaders even profited from these levies, so no one really objected to the system.

After all, the common folk are like wheat—if you don’t harvest them, how can the lords grow rich? Even in the poorest lands, as long as there are people, you can squeeze out some profit.

But this year, the Governor’s war tribute was simply too much. For White Hazel Forest Hrut Village, four hundred silver marks meant each household would have to pay over ten silver marks—equivalent to three gold marks or five French gold écus.

A horse, the most expensive livestock, sold for only eight or nine gold coins, and a cow was worth five gold coins. A cow or ten silver marks was already enough to sustain an ordinary family for four or five years of hard work. For the impoverished free folk of Iceland, suddenly being taxed the equivalent of a cow was nearly impossible.

But Governor Kolsvin was known for his iron fist. His status was noble, and he commanded a hundred guards. The Icelandic leaders didn’t dare to be too disrespectful, so they merely argued heatedly with Agran, their faces red with frustration.

Chapter 18: War Contribution

Kolsvin sat motionless, silent, waiting until the others had argued for half a day. Then, the three elders rose one by one to persuade everyone to contribute to the great cause of spreading the new faith. This time, the chieftains could only listen in resigned silence—regardless of whether they wanted to pay, they had to give the elders face.

After the three elders had spoken, Governor Kolsvin cleared his throat and stood, looking down at the dozens of chieftains in the hall.

“The war contribution must be paid.”

The icy words filled the room with humiliation and anger. Just as the atmosphere grew tense, Sigfoss suddenly stood, stroking his neatly trimmed beard, and said, “Our king is fighting on the front lines against the mercenaries of the Holy Roman Empire. As subjects of the Danish Kingdom, it is our duty to pay the contribution. However, the amount set by Governor Kolsvin is rather high. We may not be able to gather it all at once. Could we pay half now and the rest next year?”

Sigfoss’s status meant Kolsvin could not ignore him. After a moment’s thought, Kolsvin waved his hand dismissively. “Discuss this matter privately with Agran. Some adjustments can be made.”

Kolsvin’s words were like heavenly music, relieving most of the chieftains.

Olaf watched warily, sneering inwardly: Kolsvin, Sigfoss, the three elders, and Agran are clearly putting on a show. Either Denmark isn’t demanding much in war contributions, or they aren’t demanding any at all. They’re just tricking the sixty-odd chieftains of Iceland into handing over money.

Though Olaf found Kolsvin and Sigfoss’s tactics simple, he had to admit they were effective against the stubborn Icelanders.

The chieftains, who had originally wanted a reduction of more than half, were swayed by Sigfoss’s suggestion to pay half now and the rest the following year. This made Olaf more wary of Sigfoss and Kolsvin, suspecting they might be cunning and full of schemes.

Kolsvin passed the problem to his subordinate, and the chaotic debate began.

Agran was surrounded by chieftains discussing the contribution. After half a day of heated arguments, they finally agreed to let the chieftains pay half now and the rest the following summer, but with an additional ten percent interest.

First, the situation was stronger than the people. Second, the Danish Kingdom had won consecutive victories in two years of war and had reportedly occupied several regions in northern Germany. The stronger the Danish Kingdom became, the less the Icelandic chieftains dared to defy the governor. After all, they could not afford to provoke Denmark across the sea.

By the time each chieftain had signed the contribution receipt and agreed on the payment date, an hour had passed. It was nearly afternoon, and Kolsvin ordered everyone to eat at the governor’s mansion.

After waiting for a long time, each person was given a portion of boiled venison and black bread, which filled their stomachs.

After eating, Agran announced the end of the first day’s court assembly, to be continued the next morning.

The next morning, Haldor and his group returned to the assembly hall, where the chieftains from various regions reported on population growth, deaths, and criminal cases.

For two days, Olaf listened to the affairs of other villages, feeling dizzy and nauseated. On the third morning, the discussion was still about the northwestern region’s chieftains debating the exile of a rapist.

After a while, the hall suddenly fell silent. Then, Weis, the chieftain of Comb Valley and Sigfoss’s son-in-law, stood up, walked to the governor, pointed at Haldor, and sneered, “Governor, recently a story about the Hrut family has been circulating in Iceland. I know it was written by Elder Amie, and I respect the story. But the people in it are not good. That Haig is a murderer, still at large in America. I strongly demand severe punishment for Haig and Haldor, who sheltered him. Otherwise, Iceland’s laws will lose their authority. The Law Rock of Thingvellir still stands, and we must not forget the oaths of our ancestors.”

Weis’s words were like a bolt from the blue, startling everyone in the assembly hall.

Haldor and his group had been on guard against Sigfoss’s outburst but did not expect him to use Weis instead. This was somewhat unexpected for Haldor.

Kolsvin remained silent, as did the three new elders.

Sigfoss glanced at Agran, who stood and echoed, “Indeed, Iceland’s stability requires upholding the sanctity of the law. I suggest the governor re-examine the case from eight years ago and give Sigfoss an answer.”

Kadir scoffed, raising his voice, “Haig may have killed someone, but it was in a duel. Duels are a matter of life and death, and that’s not even considering that Haldor compensated Sigfoss with ten thousand marks eight years ago. Isn’t that enough?”

“Of course not,” Sigfoss suddenly stood, his face ashen, his eyes fierce. “If my son were still alive, in eight years, under my guidance, he would have developed a fleet, traded in wool and linen, and earned more than twenty thousand marks by now. Without Haldor’s protection, Haig would not have escaped eight years ago. Since Haig is not here, Haldor must take his place and be punished. The punishment eight years ago was too lenient. I ask the governor to re-examine the case.”

As he spoke, Sigfoss bowed to Kolsvin, then began to weep bitterly about the pain of losing his son.

Supporters of Sigfoss and Haldor began to argue.

According to Iceland’s ancient laws, Haldor and Sigfoss had settled their accounts. But under Danish law, the responsibility of a murderer must still be pursued. Haldor had sheltered and helped Haig escape, and though he was not guilty, the governor could re-examine the case from eight years ago and increase Haldor’s punishment.

This was exactly what Sigfoss had planned—to ruin the Haldor family, seize their property, and take revenge. But his main goal was money and land.

Though Kolsvin had previously agreed to help Sigfoss, Haldor’s family had recently gained significant influence. Having just collected the war contributions, Kolsvin felt he could not push Haldor too hard, especially since more than twenty chieftains were now speaking in Haldor’s favor.

This surprised Kolsvin and shocked Sigfoss.

Seeing Haldor and Hoskuld, Kadir speaking calmly and confidently, Sigfoss’s heart sank. He knew they had come prepared.

When he saw chieftains from all over Iceland speaking up for Haldor, smoothing things over, and even those who had promised to join him in attacking Haldor now speaking vaguely, Sigfoss was furious.

The native Icelanders did not understand the benefits of public opinion. Though Sigfoss was clever, he had not realized how much honor and goodwill the Hrut family’s saga would bring Haldor, allowing him to rally so many chieftains to his side.

“I never thought Haldor’s family saga would be so useful.”

Sigfoss did not know that Haldor had gained the support of more than twenty chieftains not just because of his family saga, but also because, before the Hrut family’s rise, Haldor had already begun visiting and building relationships with some of them.

Chapter 19: Crisis Averted?

Haldor’s proactive measures, combined with the assistance of the saga, had elevated his standing among the people. This led to a scene in the assembly hall where many chiefs sided with Haldor, as the compensation he had paid eight years ago was already substantial. Moreover, if Sigfoss were allowed to destroy Haldor’s family today, who would be next tomorrow? Regardless of their motives, everyone agreed that Haldor must be protected.

The Icelanders might not have understood the concept of “lips and teeth depending on each other,” but they had a proverb that conveyed the same warning: “The nose is right in front of the eyes.” In other words, if the nose is not protected, the eyes will suffer as well.

The assembly hall was filled with chaotic debates throughout the afternoon, continuing until dusk without any resolution. Sigfoss spoke loudly and melodiously, as if reciting an ancient poem. Haldor and his supporters clung to the fact that compensation had already been paid, though the situation was unfavorable for Sigfoss, he still tried to refute Haldor and sway Kolsvin and the other chiefs.

Thanks to Olaf’s prior warning, Haldor firmly maintained that he had already paid most of his family’s wealth eight years ago and that there was no obligation for brothers to share punishment. The other chiefs also voiced their opinions, but the discussion remained inconclusive.

The three elders listened with furrowed brows. Kolsvin, true to his noble upbringing, quickly realized that Sigfoss had little hope of reopening the case. As darkness fell, he coldly humphed, stood up, and slammed the table, declaring, “Enough arguing! The case of Haig from eight years ago has already been settled. Haldor need not face further punishment. However, the criminal Haig remains wanted. If he is spotted anywhere in Iceland, report it immediately. Upon capture, he is to be hanged and displayed publicly.”

With the governor’s final decision, Sigfoss’s plans were dashed. The chiefs bid farewell to the governor and left the assembly hall in groups, then dispersed to eat and drink. Haldor, relieved of a great burden, invited a few of his closest chief friends to a tavern for drinks and meat, returning to Hoskuld’s home only at midnight.

Olaf, on the other hand, returned directly to the church school. Since the matter concerning the family’s rise and fall had been resolved, he had no interest in attending the court assembly the next day, even though it was scheduled to continue.

Before parting with his father, Olaf reminded him that the day to collect the goods had arrived, urging Haldor to visit Elder Hongrode the next day to retrieve the musket bullets.

That evening, Sigfoss, reeking of alcohol, returned home. His wife helped him remove his coat and asked, “Has Haldor’s family admitted their guilt?”

Sigfoss roared, cursing, “That bastard! May God punish him! Haldor’s luck is incredible; the other chiefs all spoke in his favor.”

“What about the governor? Didn’t our son-in-law agree to deal with Haldor?” The woman’s face was caked with white lead powder, hiding her wrinkles and freckles. Her voice sharpened as she asked, “I had already planned to spend this winter in Hrut Village. Why didn’t the governor act?”

“Sigh…”

Sigfoss let out a long sigh, rubbing his temples. He bitterly smiled and said, “Kolsvin is a politician who values his reputation. He just collected war tribute; how could he offend the local chiefs? This matter is impossible.”

“So, we just let Haig, who killed my son, live comfortably in Iceland?” The woman coldly humphed. “I’ll ask my brother to kill Haldor’s son. His pirate ship has plenty of skilled killers.”

Sigfoss nodded, his eyes flickering. “What good would killing his son do? We want his fortune. Haldor will be in Big Port for the next two days. The day after tomorrow, he’ll probably return to Hrut Village. We need to kill Haldor on his way back. Choose the right moment, kill him, and dispose of the body at sea. Alright, I’ll go see Ozul tomorrow and discuss the details personally.”

“This time, Haldor must die.”

The next day, at the court assembly, Haldor and his group noticed Sigfoss’s absence. They assumed he was too embarrassed to show his face after the setback, unaware that a life-threatening crisis was already looming over Haldor.

In a crude harbor within the Bjarg Strait in northwest Iceland, several cog ships were docked. On the shore stood some dilapidated houses, and in the largest one, Sigfoss sat with a one-eyed, black-bearded man.

“We’re wanted pirates in England, Scotland, Ireland, Denmark, and Norway. Going to Big Port to kill someone would be too dangerous,” the one-eyed man said, his face deeply wrinkled and his skin smooth and yellow. He tapped the table with his fingers, pondering whether he could fulfill his brother-in-law Sigfoss’s request.

Sigfoss cleared his throat and said, “Big Port is out of the question. We need to ambush Haldor on his way back to Hrut Village, kill him, and take the body away without leaving any traces. So, you need to send your most capable man. Don’t worry; we’ve worked together for years. Kill Haldor, and you’ll get ten percent of his fortune.”

Sigfoss spoke calmly, but inwardly, he gritted his teeth. The man before him was his wife’s brother, Ozul. Since his youth, Ozul had been a pirate, later becoming notorious and wanted in various Nordic countries. However, Sigfoss had taken him in, allowing him to smuggle polar bear and Arctic fox furs to Danish officials, as the taxes on legal fur trade were too high.

Of course, Ozul also did some killing and arson for Sigfoss, though not frequently. This time, targeting a village chief was a first.

Ozul had to consider the consequences of this job. If his tracks were exposed, he wouldn’t be able to stay in Iceland anymore. “Now, Iceland is the only place I can stay. If I kill an Icelander, I might have to hide in Greenland. Isn’t it better to quietly smuggle some bear, fox, and wolf furs?”

“Haldor’s fortune is worth about ten thousand marks. Think about it.”

Sigfoss’s casual remark made Ozul immediately agree, laughing, “It’s just killing a man. Let’s do it.”

Ozul had six or seven men under him, all seasoned killers, but Ozul himself was the most skilled. He thought for a moment, then grinned, “I’ll go myself. I’ve seen Haldor before.”

Sigfoss nodded, lowering his voice to instruct, “You need to disguise yourself. Although no Icelander knows you’re the one-eyed black-bearded pirate terrorizing the Danish and Scottish seas, you still need to be careful.”

“I know.” Ozul removed his black eye patch, blinking his bright eyes. “I’ll set out tomorrow and make sure Haldor disappears completely.”

Sigfoss felt slightly reassured, stood up, put on his hat, and turned to say, “I’ll go first. Remember, the execution must be clean and swift.”

“Don’t worry, Sigfoss.” Ozul walked his brother-in-law out, then went to the shore and whistled. Soon, several fierce-looking men appeared from nowhere.

“I have some business to attend to on the island. You all keep an eye on the place.”

“Yes, boss.”

Chapter 20: Assassination

The Althing assembly for all of Iceland had finally concluded.

Starting on Tuesday and ending on Saturday, by Sunday morning, everyone had bid farewell to Hoskuld and gone their separate ways.

Haldor, accompanied by Olaf, Kadir, and Heiner, traveled together on horseback. Each of the four men rode horses of varying sizes, with Haldor’s horse pulling a small two-wheeled cart behind it. The cart was covered with dry grass, concealing ten flintlock rifles and five boxes of ammunition.

Apart from Olaf, who looked harmless, the three adults wore swords at their waists. As they traveled along the sparsely populated dirt roads of Iceland, their armed presence drew the startled gazes of passersby and villagers living along the road. Upon realizing that they did not match the descriptions of any wanted criminals from the governor’s office, the onlookers relaxed.

Leaving the southern district of Great Port, which governed more than ten villages, the surroundings became increasingly desolate. Kadir pulled on the reins, took off his hat, and nodded, saying, “We should head east now. Haldor, you’ve overcome your difficulties. Why not come to the Selfoss district this winter? My Gray Mountain Village welcomes you and your sister to visit.”

“I’ll tell your sister as soon as I get back. Karina might miss you too. Who knows, we might come anytime,” Haldor replied, taking off his hat and returning the gesture with a laugh.

“May God bless you, good luck, and farewell.”

The two adults shook hands and bid farewell, with Heiner also waving to Olaf. Then, Kadir and Heiner rode east, while Haldor and Olaf headed west.

Due to the light rain the previous night, the morning was foggy, so Haldor and Olaf did not ride quickly. However, Olaf’s horseback riding skills had improved significantly on this return journey, and he could now easily control the old nag beneath him.

The finest purebred horses in Iceland were kept in the stables of the governor, elders, and regional chiefs. Haldor only had two decent colts, which still carried some draft horse bloodline. Even these horses were quite valuable.

Most families owned small, sturdy horses, a mix of various breeds and draft horses, suitable for farm work and more affordable. Their withers did not even reach Olaf’s nose, and Olaf estimated their height to be around one meter thirty or forty. The horse he was riding now was one of the smaller nags.

After traveling east for a while, they saw a birch forest ahead. Haldor pointed at the forest and said with a smile, “This is the northwestern forest of Will Village. Originally, it was where our ancestors gathered materials to build houses, but later it was given to his groom, Will.”

Olaf knew that White Hazel Forest Hrut Village and the three surrounding villages formed one district, with his father as the leader of this district. However, the leader’s authority was now too restricted to manage the affairs of Will Village. The head of Will Village was the father of Big-Head Olin.

Looking at the vast birch forest, Olaf estimated it to be at least a hundred acres. He shook his head and said, “This forest must be worth several hundred marks.”

“Yes,” Haldor laughed. “Study hard, and in a few years, come out to sea with me to see the world. In the future, our Hrut Village will be passed down to you. Let’s see if you can inherit the glory of Hrut.”

Olaf and his father chatted and laughed as they entered the forest. Haldor pointed to a birch tree not far away, with a brown, hairy tree knot, and said, “This is a birch polypore. It’s not very useful, but when you’re constipated, you can scrape some off and drink it with water to relieve constipation. You drank it a few times when you were little.”

Olaf recalled his past life when he traveled to Xinjiang, where birch polypore was sold for thousands of yuan per jin, claimed to be used for tea to fight cancer and cure diseases. Although he didn’t believe it, he still calculated in his mind: if he had the chance, he could bring the Nordic birch polypore to the Celestial Empire and sell it for a good price.

Suddenly, a “hey” sound came from not far away, and Haldor and Olaf both turned their heads to look.

They saw a short axe flying out from behind a twisted birch tree about twenty steps away, whistling through the air towards Haldor’s face.

Haldor had experienced many life-and-death battles during his sea raids. In this moment of crisis, he had no time to draw his weapon to defend himself, so he quickly leaned to the left.

“Snap”

Although Haldor dodged quickly, the flying axe was fierce, and the axe handle still hit Haldor’s right shoulder blade, causing him to cry out in pain and fall from his horse.

From behind the twisted birch tree, a burly man with a round face and black beard emerged, holding a large axe and running quickly towards them.

Olaf had rarely fought in his past life, and in this life, he had not seen any fighting in the past ten years. Although he knew this was a chaotic world and that people died every day from war and disease, he thought he had mentally prepared himself for killing and being killed. But when he saw the bandit attacking his father and charging towards them with a murderous look, Olaf’s body suddenly felt numb, unable to move, trembling all over, his heart pounding like a drum.

Ozul had been waiting in the birch forest since early morning. When he saw Haldor riding in with a blond boy, he threw the flying axe to kill Haldor.

But Haldor reacted quickly and was only knocked off his horse. Ozul shouted and charged out, swinging his ten-pound axe towards Haldor, who had just gotten up and drawn his sword.

As Haldor rolled off his horse, he quickly got up, drawing his sword while looking at Olaf. He saw that the black-bearded man who had ambushed him had not gone to kill Olaf but was instead swinging his axe at him. Haldor felt a sense of relief and raised his sword while spreading his legs.

“Clang”

The axe and sword clashed, producing a harsh sound and sparks. Haldor’s hands weakened, and he fell to the ground again. He was surprised to find that this somewhat familiar man might be stronger than him, and his right shoulder was in severe pain, making his right arm weak. It was clear that he could not defeat this man.

Ozul was delighted to see Haldor knocked down by his axe. He stepped forward, pressing his foot on Haldor’s abdomen, ready to swing his axe down.

Haldor caught a glimpse of his son Olaf standing behind Ozul with a tree branch. He quickly rolled over and shouted, swinging his sword and hitting Ozul’s left instep.

Haldor’s shout covered all other sounds. Ozul endured the pain in his foot and swung his axe down, aiming to cut off Haldor’s head. But from the corner of his right eye, he saw a black shadow flash, and then his right ear was in severe pain. His mind went blank, and he fell to the ground.

Haldor exerted all his strength to raise his sword, which had been almost severed by the axe, and stabbed it into Ozul’s chest.

“Swish”

“Clink”

Before Ozul could react, Haldar had already stabbed him through the heart. The sword, which had been notched by the axe, broke as it struck Ozul’s chest bone. Half of the broken sword was stuck in Ozul’s body, while the other half was still in Haldar’s hand.

Haldar sat down, panting heavily, and looked at Olaf, who stood nearby with a pale face. He laughed heartily, “Well done, son of Hrut! You are brave. Thanks to my Olaf, otherwise, your father would have been killed.”

Olaf swallowed and threw down the tree branch that had pierced Ozul’s ear, its side covered in blood. He also sat down on the damp, cold ground.

It turned out that the terrified Olaf, upon hearing the first sound of the axe clashing with the sword, had suddenly come to his senses and jumped off his horse. His mind was blank, but his body instinctively picked up a slippery birch branch covered in moss. He gripped the branch, which was as thick as his wrist, and approached the attacker. Then, with all his might, he stabbed the attacker in the side of the face, causing him to fall. Haldar then killed the attacker.

For Olaf, he had only fought desperately to save his and his father’s lives. However, without the experienced Haldar’s cooperation, or if Olaf had been weaker, they might have been killed by Ozul in the birch forest.

After resting for a while, the smell of blood in the air grew stronger. Looking at the blood flowing on the ground before him, Haldar spat out a mouthful of phlegm, then leaned close to Ozul’s face to examine it carefully. He shook his head and muttered, “This man looks familiar, but I can’t remember his name. It seems like he’s from one of the districts in Great Port. I don’t have any grudge against him. Why would he want to kill me? Could it be a robbery?”

As he spoke, Haldar searched the corpse and found only a bag of silver and copper coins worth about three or four marks. There was nothing else.

Olaf took a deep breath to calm himself, stood up, and asked, “Do you know this person who attacked us?”

“He looks somewhat familiar, but I can’t recall. It seems like I saw him a long time ago, but we never spoke,” Haldar said, shaking his head and clapping his hands. “It must be a robbery.”

Olaf shook his head. After all, he had watched palace intrigue and murder mysteries, and he felt that the matter was not so simple.

“He could be an assassin sent by Sigfoss to kill us. After all, Sigfoss was humiliated at the assembly. Not only did his plan fail, but he also lost face. He might have hired someone to kill us.”

Haldar rubbed his hands and frowned without speaking.

Olaf continued, “The people who take this road are only from Hrut Village, Will Village, and Grindavik Village. Apart from you, who else from the three villages would go out or come back this morning? This person was waiting here, and I think he was targeting us.”

“It’s possible.”

Haldar nodded and, with a serious expression, pulled Olaf aside and instructed, “You ride quickly to Will Village and call for help. No matter who wanted to kill me, we need to notify the people of Will Village now. According to Icelandic law, after a homicide, we must voluntarily explain everything to the first person we see. Then, they can testify that I killed the attacker in self-defense. Finally, we will take the attacker’s body to the governor’s office for identification. If it was indeed Sigfoss who hired someone to kill me, we cannot let him off. Even if it was a robbery, we can make the attacker’s family compensate us with some money.”

Olaf quickly mounted his horse and rode out of the forest towards Will Village in the west.

Chapter 21: Turning the Tables

Before long, Olaf returned to the birch forest with Arnolin, the village chief and tax collector of Will Village, along with seven or eight men.

Arnolin first greeted Haldor, then ordered his men to carry the dead Ozul onto a cart. He then politely said to Haldor, “Haldor, since this murder case happened in Will Village, I must ask you to come with me to the Governor’s Mansion. It’s just a bandit who tried to rob you. If we explain the situation clearly, neither of us will be held responsible. You might even receive some compensation.”

Haldor nodded, first unloading the wooden frame from his horse and securing it onto Olaf’s nag. He then instructed Olaf to go home first while he followed Arnolin’s group to Big Port.

Olaf knew that with Arnolin and the others as witnesses, according to Icelandic law, his father and the others would be fine once they explained the situation to the governor. So he slowly led his horse home.

Upon returning, Olaf first carried the firearms and ammunition into the house before seeing his mother return.

Katrin, seeing Olaf had come back alone, asked about Haldor. Olaf explained the situation, and Katrin frowned, asking, “Your father didn’t recognize who that man was?”

“No,” Olaf shook his head.

Katrin wiped her hands with a coarse cloth, glancing at the sky. It was already noon, the sun high, the mist dispersed.

“If he didn’t recognize him, then it’s not a vendetta. There won’t be much investigation. He might be back tonight.” Katrin smiled, then turned to prepare lunch.

Olaf went to his room to chat with his younger siblings before they all ate a meal of fried fish together.

By nightfall, Haldor still hadn’t returned. Olaf’s heart grew uneasy. He had always been worried that the assassination attempt wasn’t as simple as a robbery. But the fact was that Haldor had fought back and killed the attacker, so this matter had to be reported to the governor.

With his father gone, if someone with ill intentions caused more trouble, there could be further crises.

The more he thought about it, the more worried he became. Olaf went to his mother, Katrin, to voice his concerns. Katrin was just about to put the children to bed when she heard Olaf’s words. She stepped outside, her expression shifting between stormy and calm.

“That attacker might have been sent by Sigfoss. If he and the governor join forces, your father could really be in trouble. Come on, let’s go find Jot.”

With that, Katrin pulled Olaf to Jot’s house, calling out loudly until Jot came out.

“Jot, this morning—”

Katrin explained the situation. Jot’s face changed, and he turned to rush to the stable to fetch his horse, his voice urgent. “Katrin, you stay here with the children. I’ll take Olaf to Big Port.”

Katrin and Tom saw Jot and Olaf off as they rode away on two horses. Suddenly, Katrin reminded them, “If there’s trouble, don’t forget to find Hoskuld.”

“Don’t worry,” Jot’s powerful voice gradually faded into the distance.

Olaf and Jot didn’t dare slow their pace as they rode through the night, arriving in Big Port before midnight.

The docks and the central area of Big Port were guarded by soldiers at night. Jot led Olaf, holding their horses, to ask the guards about Haldor’s situation, but the guards paid them no mind.

Hoskuld suddenly appeared, pulling the two aside. After turning into an alley, he stopped, his expression grim. In the moonlight, his eyes flickered, his voice low. “Why are you only coming now? I was just about to go to Hrut Village when I happened to see you.”

“What happened to my father?” Olaf’s heart sank as he asked urgently.

Hoskuld sighed. “I only found out this afternoon. Haldor came to the Governor’s Mansion with a group of people and a corpse this afternoon, saying someone had ambushed him that morning and that he had killed the man in self-defense. The governor questioned everyone and was about to let your father go home after identifying the body.”

“But at dusk, things suddenly changed. The governor sent soldiers to arrest Haldor, saying he had fought and killed a man named Ozul, then lied and framed others. Tomorrow, he plans to convene three elders and several district leaders to sentence your father.”

“What’s going on?” Jot panicked.

Olaf gritted his teeth. “It must be Sigfoss. I suspect the man who ambushed my father was sent by him. The governor’s change in attitude is also his doing.”

Jot paced in a circle, then stamped his foot, his voice sharp. “Forget it. If they sentence him tomorrow, Haldor will be exiled to the glacier to die. I’ll go find Hrutik now. Hoskuld, you go find Kadir. Tomorrow, we’ll rescue Haldor and flee Iceland.”

“Good,” Hoskuld agreed first, then furrowed his brow and whispered, “But tomorrow, rescuing Haldor means facing the governor’s hundred guards. Those guards are all elite soldiers of the Danes, skilled in battle, and twenty of them are musketeers. At most, we can handle twenty men. How can we rescue Haldor?”

Jot thought of the governor’s hundred elite guards, and his mind instantly cooled. He urgently said, “What can we do? If they really sentence him tomorrow, we won’t be able to save him.”

Olaf scratched his head, stepped forward, and said, “Don’t panic. I’ll go find Elder Amie. If he speaks up for my father tomorrow, there might be hope.”

Hoskuld pressed, “What if there’s no hope? Once the guards take Haldor to the glacier, he’ll freeze to death in less than a day.”

A ruthless glint flashed in Olaf’s eyes as he rasped, “If there’s no hope, we can’t act in Big Port tomorrow. We’ll wait until the guards are escorting my father and ambush them on the road, rescue him, and then flee Iceland.”

“Good,” Jot and Hoskuld both nodded.

“Olaf, you’re right. Let’s do that.”

After an agonizing discussion, the three went to seek Elder Amie. After pleading with him, he agreed to speak for Haldor, but if the governor was determined, the outcome might not change.

Olaf and the others thanked him before going to Hoskuld’s house to rest. The next morning, Hoskuld sent Kalm and Kalhu to gather information.

Kalhu, who worked odd jobs at the Governor’s Mansion, returned in less than an hour.

“I heard from my teacher, Tax Collector Hari, that yesterday evening, Sigfoss and his wife went crying to the governor, saying the dead man was Ozul, Sigfoss’s wife’s brother. He had been living in the Ankrey district in northern Iceland. Yesterday, when he heard the governor couldn’t overturn the case of his nephew’s murder, he went to confront Haldor. During the argument, Haldor killed him.”

“Now the governor believes Sigfoss and his wife’s story completely. He has ordered a trial to be held this afternoon and plans to exile Haldor to Vatnajökull Glacier.”

The news Kalhu brought back made everything clear to Olaf and the others.

“Ozul was sent by Sigfoss to ambush Haldor,” Hoskuld, though not tall, spoke loudly, coldly snorting. “We need to prepare early.”

Jot nodded. “Time is of the essence. I can’t wait for the trial results. I’ll go find people now and be back by tomorrow afternoon. You stay here and keep watch. We’ll prepare to intercept Haldor.”

Olaf pulled Jot aside and whispered, “I have ten muskets at home. Take them with you. They should come in handy.”

Jot had already heard from Haldor that they had bought ten muskets from Hongrode, so he wasn’t surprised. He agreed and hurriedly went to fetch his horse and left.

Chapter 22: Poison

By afternoon, Olaf and the others had gathered outside the governor’s mansion, waiting anxiously. However, Haldor’s trial was being conducted indoors, and they had no way of knowing what was happening inside.

After waiting nervously for over an hour, it was nearly sunset when the three elders and several chiefs finally emerged.

Olaf quickly stepped forward to intercept Elder Amie, asking urgently, “Teacher, how is my father?”

Elder Amie’s expression was grave. He shook his head slightly, then waved his hand, saying, “The governor is very resolute. He has already sentenced your father to exile for manslaughter in a fight. Tomorrow morning, he will be banished to the Vatnajökull Glacier. There’s nothing I can do to save him.”

With that, Elder Amie sighed and left.

Hoskuld had also learned of the situation from a familiar chief. He pulled Olaf along and headed home.

Olaf’s face was dark, his teeth grinding audibly.

Back at home, Hoskuld pulled Olaf down to sit, then instructed his two sons to fetch the family’s bows, spears, swords, and axes to clean and sharpen.

Amid the sound of grinding blades, Olaf slowly stood up, his eyes firm as he said, “Uncle, we can only rescue my father on the way tomorrow. After that, we truly won’t have a place in Iceland anymore.”

The Icelanders valued family deeply, and the bond of kinship was strong. Haldor and the others had long been prepared. Though the situation had taken many twists and turns, it had ultimately led to the worst possible outcome.

Hoskuld could not bear to let Haldor be harmed, so he coldly replied, “Don’t worry. Your father has already made arrangements. Your Uncle Kadir, Hrutik, Jot, and I are all prepared. It’s just a matter of killing a few guards and escaping Iceland. I’ve been wanting to go to Vinland anyway.”

Olaf felt a weight lift from his heart. He knew that Haig’s life in North America and his management of Vinland was their escape route. This was the foundation that made everyone unafraid of rebellion.

“Child, go to the governor’s mansion immediately and keep watch. See how many guards Kolsvin plans to send to escort Haldor to the Vatnajökull Glacier.”

Hoskuld walked into the courtyard, took the iron sword from Kalhu’s hands, and continued sharpening the blade as he gave his instructions.

Kalhu agreed and quickly left.

It was nearly dusk when Kalhu finally returned in a hurry.

“Father, Olaf, I found out that the governor is sending four guards to escort Uncle Haldor to the glacier.”

Hoskuld’s expression relaxed slightly as he muttered, “Four men. Jot, Hrutik, Kadir, and I might be able to handle them. But we need to ambush them near the glacier first. I don’t know how long it will take for Hrutik and the others to get there.”

Olaf questioned Kalhu further about the details of the four guards. He learned that they were ordinary guards but would be armed with spears and crossbows, wearing leather armor. They would also bind Haldor’s hands and feet, leaving only a step’s distance between them, making it impossible for him to escape.

Hoskuld sent Olaf to rest while he pulled his two sons and wife aside to plan their escape in case the rescue succeeded, as well as how his wife and sons could avoid blame if it failed.

Kalmu and Kalhu were young and full of vigor. They admired the stories of the Hrut family and their daring spirit of fighting and killing. Both expressed their willingness to follow their father to rescue Uncle Haldor and then escape.

The next morning, everyone got up early. Kalhu continued to go to the governor’s mansion to gather information.

Olaf and Kalmu went to wait outside the governor’s mansion. When the sun was high in the sky, they saw four guards in leather armor, carrying spears and bundles, leading a tall man out of the side gate of the governor’s mansion.

Seeing his father bound with ropes, his hands and feet tied, leaving only a step’s distance, his hair disheveled, and his head hanging low like a lost dog, Olaf’s eyes reddened, and he clenched his fists.

Hoskuld intercepted the four guards on the street, offering them some dried meat, water, and silver coins. He smiled and asked the guards to take care of his brother-in-law, Haldor, while giving Haldor a few meaningful glances.

Haldor, who had been prepared, understood immediately. Under Hoskuld’s care, he ate some dried meat and drank some water to quickly restore his strength.

The journey from Reykjavik to the Vatnajökull Glacier was a five-day walk. This was a severe punishment for murderers in Iceland. Being exiled to a glacier with temperatures below minus ten degrees Celsius, devoid of people and animals, was equivalent to being left to fend for oneself and die a slow, torturous death.

After Haldor was taken away by the guards, Olaf and the others waited anxiously at Hoskuld’s house.

It wasn’t until nightfall that Jot arrived with Kadir, Heiner, and Hrutik. They were riding horses pulling a cart loaded with ten flintlock guns, ammunition, swords, and axes.

Hoskuld informed the four of them that Haldor had already been sent to the Vatnajökull Glacier. Hrutik spat on the ground, his eyes flashing with a fierce light, and the scar on his cheek twitched slightly.

“I, Jot, Kadir, Hoskuld, and Heiner—we five will set out immediately. We’ll kill the guards on the grassland before the glacier, rescue Haldor, and then Olaf and Hoskuld’s wife will follow the original plan, taking the family and belongings to the beach south of Hrut Village. I’ve already had little Hilt set sail downstream. Tomorrow, the Thor’s Hammer will dock at the beach. Then we’ll board the ship and go to Vinland, and everything will be safe.”

“This is my eldest son, Kalmu. He’s twenty years old and will be a help,” Hoskuld said, pulling Kalmu forward. “Those four guards have all participated in the Battle of Kalmar. They’re elite soldiers. Bringing one more person will increase our chances.”

Hrutik was the most professional when it came to fighting and killing, so as soon as he arrived, he became the leader.

Looking at Kalmu’s sturdy build, Hrutik nodded and said, “Alright, let’s set out immediately.”

Everyone agreed. Hoskuld took his wife’s hand and instructed her to take care of Kalhu and Olaf, to pack up their belongings, and go to Hrut Village to wait.

Hoskuld’s wife didn’t really want to rebel and escape, but she knew she couldn’t stop it. She also knew it was a matter of life and death for the whole family, so she agreed.

Just as everyone was about to take their weapons, bows, arrows, and flintlock guns, and prepare to leave on horseback, Olaf suddenly grabbed Hrutik and said in a low voice, “I want to go with you.”

“Nonsense,” Hrutik scowled. “You’re just a kid. Are you going to get yourself killed? Go home and wait.”

Olaf didn’t have the patience to argue with Hrutik. He quickly explained his idea.

“Uncles, listen to me. Even though you’re brave, it won’t be easy to deal with four guards. If there are any casualties, my father and I won’t be able to accept it. So I want to go with you.”

“What can you do? Going home and waiting is the best way to help us.”

Olaf didn’t say anything, but Hrutik rudely interrupted him.

Hoskuld and Heiner, however, believed that Olaf must have a good idea. If they could easily take down the four guards, they would be more than willing. So they tried to persuade Hrutik.

“Listening to Olaf’s idea isn’t a bad thing. If it’s useful, great. If not, it won’t hurt to spend a little time.”

“I think Olaf wants to come with us for a reason. It’s not just to cause trouble.”

Hrutik let out a long sigh and asked, “What’s your idea? Tell us.”

Olaf quickly explained his plan.

Olaf thought that among Hrutik’s five men, only Hrutik and Kadir were truly capable. The rest were just ordinary people, a ragtag group. If they couldn’t defeat the four guards, it would be a joke.

Even if they could, it might cost one or two of them their lives or leave them severely injured. Olaf didn’t want to take such a risk. So he thought he could have Hoskuld catch up with them, meet Haldor as his son, and give the four guards some meat and strong alcohol, poisoning the food. After they ate and drank, they could strike, ensuring success.

When Olaf explained his idea, the others, who only knew how to fight and kill, were stunned. After thinking about it, they found it interesting.

“Olaf, your idea is good, but we don’t have any poison,” Hrutik said, coughing lightly and shaking his head.

Olaf confidently sneered, “I do.”

“What? You have poison?”

Olaf looked at their surprised expressions, picked up the candlestick from the table, went into the courtyard, and pulled out a few potato plants that had just finished flowering. Pointing to the small, green, tuber-like objects covered in soil at the roots, he said, “This is the poison I’ll use against the guards.”

Chapter 23: Waiting for the Rabbit

Potatoes were familiar to anyone from later generations, as they had been a staple since childhood. They could be fried, stir-fried, boiled, or deep-fried, and snacks like potato chips and fries were irresistible treats for children.

However, everyone also knew that sprouted or green potatoes were poisonous. Eating them could cause vomiting and diarrhea at best, and at worst, dehydration, convulsions, respiratory distress, or even death.

It was the early seventeenth century, and over fifty years ago, the Spanish had brought potatoes from South America to Europe. Yet, they were still treated as ornamental plants. At most, the English and Irish ate potato leaves, though even in the land of dark cuisine, few could stomach their unique flavor.

In Iceland, many households grew potatoes, including Hoskuld’s, where over a dozen plants were cultivated as ornamentals, with leaves occasionally plucked and boiled for consumption.

Resource-scarce Iceland had no access to poisons, so Olaf had to rely on sprouted, green potatoes to poison the four guards, using the solanine within them.

When Olaf pulled out two potato plants and claimed their tubers were poisonous, Hrutik, Hoskuld, Kalm, and Heiner all frowned, dismissing it as another of Olaf’s wild ideas.

Olaf knew they didn’t believe him. Seeing their impatience, he played up the mystery again: “This is what Uncle Haig wrote to my father. Potatoes are cursed food from the Incas of America. Their tubers carry the devil’s curse when unripe or sprouted. Eating them causes vomiting, dizziness, and even death if consumed in large quantities.”

Mentioning Haig made them half-believe him.

Hoskuld, who knew Olaf’s strange insights best, nodded. “Alright, we’ll listen to you. What else do you need?”

Olaf instructed them to wash the unripe green potatoes, chop them finely, and cook them with meat, salt, and black pepper, then serve them to the guards, who wouldn’t refuse such a dish.

Hoskuld gritted his teeth and had his wife fetch their precious black pepper, cooking a pot of potato mash as Olaf directed.

When it was done, the fragrant aroma made everyone’s mouths water.

“Is this really food?” Heiner asked in disbelief.

“It seems so,” Hoskuld nodded. “We should plant more and ask Haig how to eat them safely.”

They packed the potato mash into a clay pot, poured wine into a jug, and mixed in the juice from the crushed green potatoes. Only then did Olaf clap his hands in satisfaction. “Let’s go. Uncle, take me to deliver the food and drink. Once the guards eat it and the poison takes effect, we’ll make our move.”

This time, Hoskuld didn’t consult Hrutik. He led a horse out of the stable for Olaf.

The six men, warned by Hrutik, feared that seven riders leaving Big Port in the dead of night with bundles would alert their prey. So, they split into small groups, slowly making their way to the old Althing site at Thingvellir, beneath the Law Rock.

Olaf, Hoskuld, and Kalm were the last to leave. They traveled north for half a day before turning east, passing three or four villages along the way.

By dawn, they reached a vast valley. To the north stood towering, jagged mountains, barren and gray, resembling the Lonely Mountain from The Hobbit. To the south lay a massive lake, its surface shimmering with mist and ripples, devoid of any settlements.

“This is where our ancestors held the Althing hundreds of years ago,” Hoskuld said, pointing to a massive rock standing amid broken wood debris. “Back then, our ancestors settled Iceland and built a free homeland. We formed court assemblies by family, elected Godis, and governed ourselves. How grand it was! But then Norway forced us into submission, making us subjects of their king, burdening us with taxes. If only we could be independent again.”

Olaf knew Hoskuld spoke for most Icelanders. Their desire for independence from Norway and Denmark would eventually lead to sovereignty in 1918, lasting into the 21st century.

Icelanders, fiercely independent and brave, had long been exploited under Danish-Norwegian rule, fueling growing resistance.

After a night’s journey, Hoskuld saw Olaf’s fatigue and, with Kadir still absent, said, “Olaf, Kalm, rest a while. I’ll wake you when everyone arrives.”

Olaf couldn’t sleep, haunted by thoughts of his father. He waved it off. “I’m not tired.”

After some conversation and a quick meal, they spotted riders approaching from the west—Hrutik and Jot.

Soon, Kadir and Heiner arrived. The seven men ate, then mounted their horses, riding east.

Though Olaf’s group had left a day after the four guards escorting Haldor, their nighttime travel had closed much of the distance.

The guards rode horses, but Haldor walked. By Olaf’s calculations, they were nearly within reach.

Half a day’s ride ahead lay the Geysir hot springs, where a village stood. Hrutik deduced the guards would stay there tonight, so the seven men took a detour, arriving early at the Haukadalur geothermal area. With over a dozen geysers, the ground was perpetually steaming, much warmer than elsewhere. However, the lack of arable land made it unsuitable for anything but grazing, so few lived there.

Olaf marveled at the strange geysers—some barely waist-high, others erupting dozens of meters into the air. The natural spectacle left him in awe, though under different circumstances, he would have loved to stay and watch them for days.

The others seemed indifferent, having seen such sights before. They skirted the village, reaching the bend of the Hvítá River by afternoon. The river was one of Iceland’s largest, and Haldor’s Thor’s Hammer cog ship had once docked in a lower bend.

On either bank stood small villages—seven or eight households on the west, four or five on the east.

According to Hrutik, these were fishing families who sometimes ferried travelers for copper coins.

Two thousand paces south of the west-bank village, on the east bank, lay a pine forest. Hrutik scouted the area, then led the others in clearing a space to rest, waiting for the guards to arrive the next day before ambushing them.

Despite centuries of development, Iceland’s population had barely grown due to its harsh geography and poor agriculture. Elder Amie had once mentioned in church school that the governor’s office estimated Iceland’s population at no more than fifty thousand.

The interior’s high elevation made it uninhabitable, so ninety percent of the population lived along the coast.

Beyond Haukadalur, Olaf saw no signs of human life until they reached the Hvítá River.

To avoid trouble, they bypassed the west-bank households, hiding in the pine forest.

Olaf lay on a blanket, watching curious squirrels peer down from the trees, a small smile on his face.

Hrutik and the others gathered firewood, boiling a pot of smoked venison porridge.

The seven men took turns eating with wooden spoons before Hrutik extinguished the fire. He and Kadir, Heiner, and Jot divided the night watch, while the others wrapped themselves in blankets and slept.

Chapter 24: A Kind Father and a Filial Son

Olaf woke in the morning to the sound of birds chirping. As he opened his eyes, he saw flocks of birds perched in the treetops, their calls filling the air, while a few hawks circled overhead.

After a night spent outdoors, Olaf felt refreshed. He threw off his blanket and stood up, only to see Hrutik, Hoskuld, Kadir, Heiner, and Kalm sitting around a pile of pine branches, starting a fire.

Hoskuld was cutting slices of dark bread, preparing to toast them over the flames.

Olaf folded his blanket and noticed Jot approaching with a large bundle of pine branches.

“Olaf’s awake. Let’s eat soon.”

Olaf took two sticks and headed deeper into the forest to relieve himself. By the time he returned, a pot of meat porridge had been prepared.

After breakfast, they reheated the mashed potatoes over the fire. Then, Hoskuld led Olaf on horseback out of the southern end of the pine forest, galloping westward along a dirt road.

Hrutik, meanwhile, readied Kadir and Jot, ensuring they had their weapons. He instructed Heiner and Kalm to follow Hoskuld at a distance, ready to report back if anything unexpected happened.

Olaf and Hoskuld rode for half a day until the pine forest was no longer visible behind them, and the towering Hekla volcano to the south had faded into a blur. Only then did they rein in their horses.

“We’ll wait here. Haldor and the others should arrive by midday,” Hoskuld estimated, speaking softly.

Olaf dismounted, clutching a clay pot wrapped in animal hide, and waited. After about an hour, four mounted guards appeared in the west, slowly making their way east.

“Let’s go meet them.”

The two led their horses westward, their footsteps crunching on the mossy grass. Soon, they could make out the four guards on horseback, followed by Haldor, whose hands and lower legs were bound, forcing him to take small, shuffling steps.

“Who goes there?”

“Halt!”

The four guards, startled by Olaf and Hoskuld’s approach, tightened their grip on their spears and shouted.

“Good sirs, I am Hoskuld, a law-abiding citizen of Big Port’s northern district. You don’t recognize me? This boy is Haldor’s son. We know Haldor has been sentenced to exile, and his family asked me to bring the boy to see his father one last time.”

Hoskuld kept Olaf at a distance as he spoke, slowly edging closer.

The lead guard, with pale yellow skin and a thick beard, looked like he might be of Eastern European descent. He waved his spear, recalling that Hoskuld had come to bid Haldor farewell a few days earlier. “Why are you waiting for Haldor ahead of us?”

Hoskuld sighed, spreading his hands. “Ah, we didn’t know where you were. In our haste, we overshot. We figured you might not have crossed the Hvítá River yet, so we turned back to try our luck.”

“And here you are,” Hoskuld said, taking the clay pot from Olaf and setting down a small barrel of ale. “This is a dish we prepared for you—diced meat with mashed potatoes, a famous French delicacy. You must be tired from the journey. Take a break, have something to eat and drink, and let the boy talk to his father for a while.”

“Stay for the time it takes to burn a candle, then leave immediately.”

The four guards considered for a moment, eyeing the young Olaf and the short, wiry Hoskuld. They nodded, took the pot and barrel, and sat down to eat and drink.

Olaf and Hoskuld approached Haldor, whose gaunt face and sunken cheeks made their hearts ache. They knew he had suffered greatly these past few days—endless marching with little food or rest. If he were truly sent to the glaciers, he might not even survive the journey.

Hoskuld silently cursed Sigfoss and Kolsvin for their cruelty, while Olaf embraced his father, whispering the rescue plan into his ear.

To the guards, who were eating and drinking while keeping a close watch, it seemed like Olaf was simply expressing his love and concern for his father.

Haldor was already emotional upon seeing Olaf and Hoskuld, and after hearing the plan, his body trembled with excitement. One of the guards noticed and sneered loudly.

After finishing the pot of mashed potatoes and the barrel of ale, the guards stood up, praising the dish before ordering Olaf and Hoskuld to leave at once.

Hoskuld pulled Olaf away, hurrying eastward. The guards leisurely mounted their horses, and the last one tugged on the rope binding Haldor’s legs. “Move along. Let’s pick up the pace today. We’ll rest on the eastern bank tonight.”

The lead guard, his fingernails caked with black mud, picked at the meat stuck in his teeth as he mumbled, “After eating the fine food your son brought, we won’t march this afternoon. Let you rest a bit, huh? Your family even uses black pepper—no wonder you’re a district leader.”

Olaf and Hoskuld walked far enough that the guards on horseback were no longer visible. Then they turned back, mounting their horses and galloping south before circling back east.

Soon, they spotted Heiner rushing out from the bushes and quickly reined in their horses.

“How did it go?” Heiner asked urgently.

“They all ate it,” Hoskuld said, slapping his forearm with satisfaction. “We’ll ambush them in the western forest. Once the poison takes effect, we’ll strike.”

Olaf estimated it would take about an hour for the guards and his father to reach the western forest. By then, the ale would have accelerated the effects of the dragon’s bane, and they would soon show symptoms. He nodded in agreement.

“The western forest is too close to the village. We can tie the horses in the woods and hide in the tall grass outside. By the time they get close, the poison should have taken effect—either they’ll be too weak from diarrhea or doubled over in pain. Then we can rush them.”

Hoskuld and Heiner trusted Olaf completely and burst into laughter at the plan.

The three quickly rode back to the forest, where they met Kalm. Finally, they were greeted by Jot, Hrutik, and Kadir, who had heard the commotion and come out to meet them.

Olaf explained his plan again. This time, Hrutik didn’t object. Instead, he frowned, looking at the others, who seemed convinced by Olaf’s words. He snorted coldly. “If we don’t ambush them in the forest, the guards might escape on horseback. But if your potatoes can poison them, making them vomit and suffer from diarrhea, then hiding outside the forest might work.”

He sighed. “I don’t see a better option. Since we’ve chosen to try your poison, we’ll trust you completely.”

Olaf breathed a sigh of relief and took a long sword from Hoskuld’s saddlebag. “Thank you, Uncle Hrutik. Thank you, Uncle Hoskuld and Uncle Kadir. Thank you, Heiner and Kalm. You are the closest thing I have to family. Thank you.”

Hrutik’s lips curled slightly. “Let’s get into position,” he said coldly, slinging his bow over his shoulder and drawing his sword before walking away. The others hurried after him.

Olaf smiled, taking a firm step forward as he brought up the rear.

Chapter 25: Ambition

Olaf and Hrutik, along with five others, crouched behind some shrubs two hundred paces east of the pine forest. Hrutik, with the sharpest eyes, was positioned at the front, occasionally glancing westward.

Time passed slowly, and the shadows beneath the sunlight shifted from west to north.

Gradually, four mounted guards appeared on the yellowish-green land in the distance. They slumped over their horses as if asleep, while Haldor, bound and walking behind them, staggered with each step.

“Be ready,” Hrutik whispered, drawing his bow and aiming at the approaching guards.

He wielded an English longbow, capable of firing two hundred paces with an effective killing range of one hundred and fifty. He silently calculated the distance, his focus unwavering.

Olaf and the others tightened their grips on their weapons, waiting for the guards to come closer before striking.

When the four guards were nearly a hundred paces away, they suddenly halted their horses. Dismounting, they stumbled to the side, dropped their pants, and squatted. After a long while, they clutched their stomachs and slowly returned.

Mounting their horses again took considerable effort, and they groaned, urging Haldor to hurry.

Seeing the guards’ sickly state, Hrutik and the others were delighted—the potato poison had taken effect. Their trust in Olaf deepened.

Originally, Hrutik had planned to attack within a hundred paces, but seeing the guards slumped over their horses, oblivious to their surroundings, he decided to let them come even closer.

Holding his breath, he waited until the guards were just fifty paces away. Through the gaps in the shrubs, he could almost make out their features. Only then did he loose his arrow and shout, “Attack!”

Hrutik’s arrow flew straight and true, piercing the back of the lead guard—a burly, bearded man still lost in the agony of his stomach cramps. He died instantly.

Thud.

The four horses continued forward, but the dead guard tumbled off, hitting the ground with a heavy sound. The remaining three guards turned to see the arrow protruding from their companion’s back. Panicked, they scrambled to their feet, grabbing their weapons from their horses and scanning ahead.

Swoosh.

Another arrow struck one guard in the face, sending him crashing to the ground. The last two, despite their stomach pains, gritted their teeth and readied their weapons, preparing to charge on horseback.

At that moment, the two remaining guards, weakened by diarrhea and blurred vision, failed to recognize Olaf and Hoskuld. Mistaking them for starving refugees, they thought a simple charge would scatter them.

Kadir, seeing the guards just twenty paces away, drew the short spears from his waist and hurled them with all his might.

Two iron spears whistled through the air. One grazed the left guard’s forearm, while the other struck him square in the chest.

The guard, already weakened and disoriented, had no chance to dodge. Under normal circumstances, he would never have been killed by a thrown spear.

The last guard suddenly found himself face-to-face with Hoskuld, Kalm, and Heiner. The three men dared not block his path and quickly dodged to the sides. If the guard had been at his peak, he could have ridden in a semicircle, cutting down one of them first.

But in his weakened state, he could only turn his horse and charge at Kalm.

Kalm and Hoskuld, true to their Viking heritage, hurled their short spears and axes at the guard. Heiner, skilled with a sword, approached from the side, ready to strike the guard’s ribs when he came close.

Three or four spears and axes rained down on the guard. He dodged two axes but was struck by one axe and a spear in the shoulder blade and arm, sending him tumbling from his horse.

Heiner swiftly stepped forward, and with a thunk, his slender sword pierced the guard’s body through a gap in his leather armor. The guard let out a low, guttural cry before convulsing and dying.

Olaf rushed to Haldor’s side, cutting the ropes binding his father. Haldor rubbed his wrists and walked over to the now lifeless guards. After a slow circle, he spoke in a low, somber tone, “With the guards dead, Iceland, Denmark, Norway, and the Faroe Islands will no longer tolerate us. We have no choice but to seek out Haig.”

“Quickly, drag the bodies away and bury them.”

Hrutik grabbed one of the guard’s legs, and together, they hauled the four corpses to a remote spot and buried them. Then, they returned to the forest, gathered the horses, and set off westward—eight men and eleven horses. To avoid recognition and trouble, Haldor wrapped half his face in a cloak.

On the third morning, they reached the Haukadalur region, now close to Big Port. A day’s ride would take them there.

“Sigfoss is probably in the governor’s mansion with Kolsvin, drinking wine and dancing with the ladies. Meanwhile, we’re about to be exiled, forced to fight savages for land. Damn it all!”

Haldor gazed westward, his sharp eyes seeming to pierce through the void, as if he could strike down his enemies in Big Port.

“Big Port has nearly a hundred governor’s guards, not to mention Sigfoss’s household servants, and the guards from the taverns, shops, and livestock markets. We’re no match for them.”

Hrutik, worried that Haldor’s rage might lead to reckless actions, quickly reminded him.

Haldor turned to see the concerned looks of his closest friends and family. He smiled faintly. “We have at most five days. If the guards don’t return to Big Port in five days, Kolsvin will send people to investigate. Our escape and the killings won’t stay hidden for long. These next few days are our golden opportunity. Let’s return to Hrut Village and then leave by ship. But we will come back—next time, it will be for revenge.”

Perhaps overcoming the psychological barrier of killing the guards had emboldened Haldor. He now radiated confidence and ambition. Olaf knew that the Thirty Years’ War was raging across the European continent. The Black Death and warfare had drained the nations’ strength and attention, leaving colonial efforts in their infancy. Maybe he could be bolder, more ambitious. In the future, he might lead an army to sweep across Iceland, avenge his family, and then make a name for himself in Europe.

“Father, uncles, when we return, it will be to liberate Iceland—to free our people from Danish rule and let us govern ourselves!”

Olaf’s youthful face flushed with excitement. Sitting tall on his horse, his eyes burned with determination and hope for the future.

Hrutik and the others were stunned by Olaf’s words. Despite his young age, he spoke with a courage and vision beyond his years, knowledge, and status. It was as if he possessed an innate gift. They began to believe that Olaf’s dreams might truly come to pass.

Years later, Heiner would still vividly recall that moment in Haukadalur when Olaf, mounted on his horse, pointed toward the mist-shrouded Big Port. The way he seemed to command the heavens and earth, his voice filled with the grand ambition of reshaping the world—it was then that Heiner truly became Olaf’s devoted friend.

Chapter 26: Setting Sail

When they returned to Hrut Village, it was already night. Haldor ordered Jot, Kadir, and the others to organize the relocation. At that moment, Olaf’s two uncles’ families were waiting in their own homes.

Hrutik rode a horse to the nearby shore to find the cog ship Thor’s Hammer, the vessel that carried everyone’s future and hopes.

In the darkness, Hrut Village suddenly became noisy. The thirty-plus households were awakened one by one by Jot and the others. The lamps in the stone houses were lit, and amidst the grumbling of a few and the anxious unease of most, they quickly packed their belongings, clothes, and other items. After dawn, they began leaving their homes one family at a time, appearing in Haldor’s courtyard and outside.

Haldor, Jot, Kalm, Hoskuld, Kadir, Heiner, and four other men from the village who listened most to Haldor patrolled the village with weapons in hand. They were on guard against people from other villages or Big Port approaching and discovering their plans, but they were also worried that some villagers, out of fear or reluctance to leave, might escape. Either outcome could spell disaster for everyone, so these ten men were fierce and determined, ready to kill without mercy.

After nearly an hour, the night grew deeper. It was already the latter half of the night. The thirty-plus households of White Hazel Forest Hrut Village, over a hundred people, gathered in and around Haldor’s courtyard. They carried large and small bundles of their belongings, and many led cows and horses, the most valuable assets in their homes and the precious support for agricultural development.

Haldor signaled everyone to keep watch around them. He walked into the courtyard, his face calm as he looked at the villagers outside and inside, their faces anxious and their eyes filled with fear as they looked at him. Many of them were related to Haldor’s family, and they had always interacted as equals. But tonight, Haldor and his group suddenly seemed like demons, forcing them out of bed with weapons and making them leave together. This left them dazed and afraid.

Haldor sighed inwardly, but his expression grew even more solemn. He stood on the water trough in the courtyard, glancing at his wife, Olaf, Half, and Gerny nearby. In a deep voice, he said, “The governor and Sigfoss have conspired to seize all the land and property of Hrut Village, turning us all into their slaves and tenants, stripping you of your status as free men. To resist, I have already killed the guards. Now, I must leave Iceland and go to Vinland to find my dear brother Haig. There are sweet grapes, fertile and vast lands, and a warm climate. There is an endless supply of fish, shrimp, and wild beasts. Once we reach Vinland, I will distribute land to everyone again. Whatever land you had in Iceland, you will receive double in Vinland. Now, do you want to stay in Iceland and become slaves of the Sigfoss family, losing your land, wealth, and personal freedom, or do you want to come with me to the rich and beautiful Vinland to rebuild our homes?”

As soon as Haldor finished speaking, the courtyard and outside buzzed with discussion. People began to talk, their expressions growing more panicked.

After a moment, apart from a few households closest to Haldor’s family who expressed their willingness to leave with him, the others were still discussing.

Olaf knew that most of these people did not want to leave. If they continued to hesitate and formed a united front, it would be troublesome. So, he quickly cleared his throat and gave Heiner a glance.

Heiner struck the stone wall with his long sword, creating a sharp and loud noise that silenced the discussions.

“Shut up!” Heiner shouted. “Those who come with us will have money, land, and status. Those who stay will be treated as slaves. If you don’t think about yourselves, think about your children.”

Hoskuld also reacted, adding, “That’s right. I am from Big Port. Sigfoss is more greedy than a night wolf. If you are not afraid of your wives and daughters being toyed with, then stay.”

The threats from the two men startled the indecisive people, and their thoughts of staying faded.

Olaf quickly shouted, “Vinland has savages. If you come with us, you can get some savage slaves. Then, you will have people to serve you, and you won’t have to farm the land yourselves. Everyone will be masters.”

Haldor repeated Olaf’s words and added, “Haig said he wants to rebuild the glory of our ancestor Hrut with me. When we establish our country in Vinland, you will all be founding heroes, and everyone can be granted a title of nobility.”

Perhaps the benefits and prospects promised by Haldor were too tempting, or perhaps the swords in the hands of Hoskuld and the others were too frightening. In the end, everyone agreed to follow Haldor to Vinland to create a new homeland and build a new country.

Haldor saw that the sky was gradually brightening and knew that time was of the essence. With a wave of his hand, the group of over a hundred people, along with dozens of cows, horses, and sheep, carrying their food and belongings, left Hrut Village and arrived at a desolate beach on the south coast.

This desolate beach was the most convenient place near Hrut Village to enter the sea. Standing on the beach, they could see a huge cog ship with its sails furled, floating on the sea a few hundred steps away.

Hrutik waited on the shore. When he saw Haldor and the others approaching, he sighed in relief and went to meet them.

The desolate beach had no dock, so the large ship could not approach the shore. They had to use small boats to slowly transport people.

Olaf’s younger brother, White Bear Halik, and Solrak, Erik, and Val’s fathers were the four most loyal followers of Haldor and Jot, as these four men were Haldor’s assistants in sea raids.

Among them, Val’s father, Big Ear Valitu, and Erik’s father, Lunde, were fishermen. Their boats, along with those of two other fishing households, were docked by the sea. Haldor called the four men over, and after a brief discussion, the four small boats began ferrying the people of Hrut Village onto Thor’s Hammer.

Half an hour later, as the sun rose high in the sky, thirty-seven households, one hundred and thirty-five people, thirty horses, twenty cows, and eighty-five sheep were all on board, filling the large deck and cabins.

In Olaf’s eyes, Thor’s Hammer was somewhat old but very large.

The ancient cog ship had a length of over fifty meters and a width of over twenty meters, making it appear bulky and massive. Since Iceland’s economy was based on livestock and fur exports, Icelandic sea vessels were often built larger and wider to carry more livestock to Denmark, Norway, England, and other places for a good price.

Additionally, because cog ships were built taller, they had an advantage in height during sea raids, giving them a greater edge in boarding battles.

Thus, at the end of the last century, the traditional clinker-built shipbuilding method of the Nordic countries was replaced by the more advanced carvel-built method from the south, leading to the construction of larger cog ships.

The second level of Thor’s Hammer was not small, but with so many people and livestock, it still felt crowded. However, since the voyage would only take a few days, everyone could endure it.

Haldor and the others possessed the advanced navigation techniques passed down through generations of Vikings. After looking at the hand-drawn navigation map that Ulf had previously brought back, they discussed and finalized the sailing route.

It was now late autumn, and the warm currents of the Atlantic were still circulating around Iceland. The cold currents of the Arctic Ocean were also weakly flowing towards the southwest. Setting sail now would allow them to follow the wind to Greenland. After resting and resupplying in Greenland, they could continue south to Vinland.

Haldor estimated that the entire voyage would take no more than ten days, with the Greenland segment taking about three days.

It wouldn’t take long for the resilient Icelanders to accept the temporary cramped conditions in the stuffy, dark cabins. Olaf followed Haldor, Hrutik, Hilt, and a few others back to the deck. The adults hoisted the sails, and Olaf sat in the pilot’s cabin at the stern to observe.

Hrutik personally took the helm. Soon, Thor’s Hammer slowly began to move, driven by the wind, pushing through the waves as it sailed westward. Like a soaring seabird, it glided across the water, flying towards the distant land of freedom.

Chapter 27: Greenland

Under the influence of the Arctic Ocean’s autumn currents, Thor’s Hammer reached its top speed of seven or eight knots. Though there were no reference points on the vast sea, Olaf, standing on the deck, could still estimate the speed by the wind brushing against his face—it felt comparable to riding a low-end electric scooter.

While the ship’s speed was far slower than those of later eras, as long as the wind direction remained steady, Thor’s Hammer could maintain this pace without stopping. Calculating the distance, they could cover over three hundred and fifty kilometers in a day.

Greenland was only about three hundred kilometers from Iceland. If not for the unpredictable winds and the inability to sail in a straight line, Olaf and his companions might have reached Greenland in just one day.

This was the early seventeenth century, the golden age of the Age of Exploration. Central and South America had already fallen under Spanish colonial rule, while North America had been developed by the English and French, who had established outposts to plunder precious medicinal herbs, furs, and other treasures.

Due to the thriving Atlantic shipping routes, piracy flourished in the Caribbean, while European waters, patrolled by the navies of various nations, had become less hospitable to pirates.

In his youth, Haldor had only dared to raid small ships near Ireland. The idea of emulating their ancestors, who had once dominated the North Sea and the Baltic, was now impossible.

Since there were no merchant ships near Iceland and Greenland, pirates had long since vanished from these waters. If they had been in the Caribbean, Olaf’s ship might have been raided eight times over in just one day.

Thor’s Hammer sailed for two days under clear skies. It wasn’t until noon on the second day that Haldor, standing on the deck, spotted floating ice in the distance. He let out a sigh of relief, making the sign of the cross. “Thank God. Seeing the ice means we’re almost to Greenland. Two days without wind or rain—what luck.”

In this era, if a ship encountered storms at sea, there was a real risk of sinking. Even if the ship didn’t capsize, being blown off course could lead to stranding on a desolate island with no hope of rescue—a fate worse than death.

Hrutik and the others also relaxed, making the sign of the cross in gratitude.

Only Olaf remained pale, slumped over a wooden barrel nearby.

This was the second time Olaf had appeared on deck since boarding. Yesterday, he had spent some time in the cabin before succumbing to seasickness. Thanks to his strong constitution and quick recovery, he felt much better by this morning.

Determined to overcome his seasickness, Olaf had insisted on coming out for some fresh air. But after just a few steps, he was back over the barrel.

“Olaf, you should go below and rest. Maybe next time you’ll be better,” Haldor said, lifting his son with concern.

Olaf shook his head, tightening his robe and hat. “A descendant of Vikings can’t be seasick. I have to overcome this,” he said, his voice trembling.

With Haldor’s support, Olaf took a few more steps, his expression gradually improving.

After about an hour, the sun began to dip toward the west. Haldor and the others saw a massive, snow-white glacier growing clearer on the horizon.

Three more hours passed before Thor’s Hammer navigated through the floating ice and anchored near the closest shore.

Haldor glanced at his companions. “Who’s going to check it out?”

“I’ll go,” Hrutik said, taking his bow, arrows, and long sword, preparing to disembark.

Haldor quickly stopped him. “We Icelanders and Norwegians haven’t set foot on Greenland in two or three hundred years. They say there are Unipads there—short, savage people who eat raw meat but are fierce warriors. Our ancestors fought them often. We don’t know what it’s like now. If you go alone and run into them, it could be dangerous. Kadir, Jot, Valitu, Lunde—you four go with Hrutik. If it’s safe, come back, and we’ll send more people. We’ll gather fresh water and cut some moss to feed the livestock before setting sail for Vinland.”

Hrutik, not being Icelandic, knew little about Greenland. After hearing Haldor’s warning, he nodded. The five men, armed with weapons and flintlocks, rowed ashore on a raft made of wood and sheepskin.

Haldor, Olaf, and the others watched from the deck as Hrutik and his group disappeared into the grayish landscape.

Half an hour passed, and as dusk approached, there was still no sign of Hrutik’s return. Haldor grew anxious, fearing the worst. He grabbed his axe, ready to lead a search party.

Olaf knew his father was the backbone of Thor’s Hammer. If he left, the crew would panic. He stepped forward, grabbing Haldor’s arm. “Father, maybe Uncle Hrutik and the others will be back soon. Even if we have to look for them, you can’t go.”

“But if they’re in danger, I can’t just sit here!” Haldor frowned, grabbing two more throwing axes. “Don’t worry, Olaf. I’ll find them and come right back.”

Olaf admired his father’s loyalty, but without him, the ship would descend into chaos. He, Heiner, and Hoskuld couldn’t control the hundred-plus crew members. If they demanded to return to Iceland, it would be a disaster.

Just as Haldor and Olaf were at an impasse, Hilt suddenly pointed ahead. “Deputy Captain Hrutik is back!”

“Where?” Haldor rushed to the railing and saw Hrutik and the others returning to the shore.

Hrutik waved from the beach before the five men rowed back to the ship.

Climbing up the rope ladder, Hrutik shook Haldor’s hand with a smile. “The area looks good. There’s a bay further in with two river mouths. The rivers aren’t big, but the water is clean and plentiful. We can go there to cut grass and gather water.”

“Good,” Haldor said, embracing Hrutik.

Hrutik continued, “We walked thousands of steps and didn’t see any ancient ruins. It seems no one has lived here before. We did find some small animal droppings—probably foxes, dogs, or wolves.”

Haldor nodded and ordered the men to disembark in groups to gather water, cut grass, and search for animal droppings and dry firewood. After all, with over a hundred people on board, they needed to eat—raw meat wouldn’t do.

Olaf wanted to go ashore and explore. After some thought, Haldor agreed. Hrutik led nearly forty men ashore, with Olaf sticking close to Heiner, Kadir, and Hoskuld. The other children and Kalm and Kalhu stayed on the ship with Haldor.

As soon as Olaf stepped ashore, he saw towering mountains in every direction. The climate was similar to Iceland’s, though slightly colder.

The ground and hills were covered in hardy, low-growing grasses and mosses, soft underfoot like a carpet.

Though the climate was cold, the coastal areas experienced a few warm months each year, allowing the vegetation to thrive. Over centuries, the soil had become rich, and the plants grew lush and resilient.

Hrutik instructed Kadir, Jot, and the others to fetch fresh water first, then cut grass.

The men carried farming tools and sheepskin water bags, knowing their families and livestock depended on this. They obediently followed Hrutik in groups, heading westward along the bay’s slope.

Chapter 28: The Inuit

As they traveled, the group admired the scenery, similar yet distinct from Iceland. Venturing deeper inland, they reached the clear, rushing streams fed by the distant towering glaciers. Hand in hand, they stepped onto the damp, slippery ground by the riverbank, filling their sheepskin bags with water. Once each had gathered four or five gallons, they tied the bags shut and carried them back to shore.

After everyone had collected their water, Hrutik led them to a fertile patch of land near the riverbank. Together, they cut grass to feed the livestock. While the others crouched, using shovels to gather the grass, Hrutik, Kadir, and the others stood guard, scanning their surroundings. Olaf mimicked their vigilance.

Suddenly, Hrutik’s eyes narrowed. Silently, he drew his bow and fired an arrow toward a hillock to the north. A strange howl echoed in the distance, and the group dropped their tools, grabbing their weapons as they hurried toward the sound.

Upon closer inspection, they found a gray-furred creature lying on the side of the hillock, an arrow lodged in its body.

“What is this? It looks like a wolf but has the build of an ape.”

“Could it be a werewolf?”

“What kind of night wolf is this? It’s not even evening yet.”

The group murmured in confusion as they cautiously approached. Olaf, however, wore a strange expression. As they drew nearer, the others sighed in relief.

The creature was not a beast but a short, stocky human dressed in a wolfskin coat, which had led to the misunderstanding.

Hrutik flipped the man over with his spear. The man’s eyes were closed, his face flat with small features, his skin a reddish-yellow hue—an odd appearance unlike anything they had seen before. Hrutik turned to Haldor for an explanation.

Haldor’s mind flashed with insight. Pointing at the injured, nearly unconscious man, he declared, “This is a Unipad.”

The group nodded in understanding and gathered around to examine the legendary ape-man.

Olaf, however, knew this small man was not an ape-man but an Eskimo—an Inuit.

The Inuit were a people who lived in the far north, practicing shamanism. They were short in stature, with facial features and skin tone similar to Asians. Ethnically, they were a branch of the Mongols, sharing ancestors with the nomadic and fishing-hunting peoples of the Changbai Mountains, Siberia, and the Mongolian steppes.

Because Europeans had prominent features and fair skin, the Inuit’s appearance seemed alien to them. Coupled with their primitive culture, they were often mistaken for ape-like savages.

Olaf recalled a documentary from his past life about the Inuit, who lived in family units, never alone. This injured Inuit likely had a group of seven or eight, or even twenty to thirty, behind him. They were a hardy people, surviving in icy wastelands, hunting whales, walruses, sea lions, and seals. If not for their scattered population and small numbers, they might have developed a civilization akin to the khanates of Asia.

“Father, Unipads live in groups. This one doesn’t look old, so his elders can’t be far. If we’ve injured him, we might have trouble if they come looking for a fight. We should leave quickly,” Olaf said, not wanting an unnecessary battle with the Inuit. He urged the group to depart.

Haldor and the others nodded in agreement and turned to leave.

Just then, the young Inuit woke up, grimacing in pain.

Hrutik raised his sword, ready to kill him, but Olaf couldn’t bear to take an innocent life. The familiarity of the man’s yellowish skin also stirred a sense of kinship in him. He quickly stopped Hrutik.

“Uncle Hrutik, Father, even if we can’t let him go, perhaps we can take him with us. Vinland has many Unipads. If we educate this young one and teach him Icelandic, he might help us communicate with the Unipads in Vinland. That would be very beneficial for our development there.”

Olaf’s plea was not just to save the man’s life but also a genuine consideration of the advantages a translator could bring. His tone grew slower yet more persuasive.

Hrutik and Haldor hesitated for a moment before nodding in agreement.

Hrutik struck the Inuit, who was clutching his wound and muttering, with a fist to the head, knocking him unconscious. Then, he hoisted the Inuit onto his shoulder.

Fearful of pursuit by the Unipads, Hrutik, Haldor, and the others quickened their pace without needing to be urged, each carrying two bags filled with water and grass.

Back at the shore, Haldor and the others stood guard with their matchlock guns and bows while Olaf and the rest took the rafts back to the ship in five trips, ensuring all forty-plus people were safely aboard.

As soon as they boarded, Haldor ordered the ship to set sail. Hilt, Jot, and the others raised the anchor and hoisted the sails, while Hrutik took the helm.

With the sails shifting in the wind, Thor’s Hammer slowly turned and sailed out of the ice floes, heading south.

Just as the ship was pulling away from the shore, a distant commotion arose from the coastline. Haldor and the others turned to see a group of people in brown deerskin clothing, brandishing wooden spears and shouting.

Olaf’s heart skipped a beat, but he soon relaxed.

Kadir quickly counted and exclaimed, “There are thirty or forty Unipads on the east coast of Greenland. It’s a good thing we left early. If they had surrounded us, we would have been in trouble.”

Haldor nodded and instructed Jot to take the Unipad, whose smooth-faced appearance made his age difficult to guess, to the side to remove the arrowhead and bandage the wound.

“If he survives, he can serve Olaf. If he dies, throw him into the sea to feed the fish,” Haldor said indifferently. The others agreed, making Olaf realize that to the Europeans, whose culture was rooted in Catholicism and Christianity, the Inuit, like the Native Americans and Incas, were no different from beasts.

For centuries, influenced by the dual export of Western culture and military power, they only presented themselves as civilized to those of the same cultural background. Facing different cultures, their sole focus was on carving out a piece of flesh from others.

If a nation was strong, they would attempt brutal colonization. If that failed, they would export religion and culture, appearing civilized and courteous. But the moment a nation showed weakness, they would instantly change, becoming the most vicious hyenas.

Portugal, in its colonization of South America and Southeast Asia, destroyed countless kingdoms. Initially, they tried to force open the doors of the Ming Dynasty with armed merchant ships, but after two crushing defeats, they had to humbly rent land in Macau and bribe local officials to barely pry open the Ming Dynasty’s trade gates.

Throughout the Ming Dynasty, much of the gold and silver mined and traded by Spain, Portugal, and the Netherlands flowed into Ming China, leading to the saying, “Half the world’s gold and silver enters the Ming.”

The Ming Dynasty then distributed some of this wealth through tribute policies and smuggling in Jiangnan to Korea, Ryukyu, Vietnam, Japan, and other countries, ensuring that East Asia did not suffer from a shortage of gold and silver currency.

But during the transition from Ming to Qing, the Dutch occupied Taiwan, a clear example of Western powers taking advantage of chaos to seize territory.

Two hundred years later, the “Great Qing Dynasty” went from a sleeping lion to a paper tiger. The Western powers, who had been exporting gold and silver to China for centuries, could no longer contain themselves. Through the Opium Wars, they tested the waters and found the sleeping lion had become a paper tiger. The once-prosperous and civilized eastern empire became a backward and ignorant land in their eyes—a source of coolie labor and raw materials, a lower civilization. This perception persisted until the establishment of a great nation, but even then, China had not fully regained its status from the Ming Dynasty. It was destined to be a long and arduous path to great rejuvenation.

Chapter 29: Pikku

Leaving Greenland, Thor’s Hammer sailed swiftly southward along the northeastern winds of the Arctic Ocean. After a day’s journey, the floating ice gradually diminished, and whether it was Haldor, Hrutik, or Olaf, they all knew they were nearing Vinland.

After consulting the map, Olaf realized that Vinland was none other than Newfoundland in Canada, an island half the size of Iceland but with a far better climate and richer resources.

This place boasted fishing grounds that rivaled those of Iceland and Norway, renowned in later centuries. The island also held abundant mineral deposits, which, once surveyed and mined, would provide a solid foundation for establishing independence in Iceland.

By the next morning, the Inuit man had awoken. Seeming to understand his situation, he remained calm and obedient, quietly resting to recover from his injuries.

On the third morning, Olaf, along with Heiner, Red-haired Tom, Solrak, Halik, and others, went to visit the unfortunate Inuit man.

Olaf carried a plate with roasted lamb chops, their golden-brown crusts crisp and fragrant with the rich aroma of fat.

The Inuit man, catching the scent, sat up and stared wide-eyed at the lamb chops in Olaf’s hands.

“What’s your name?” Olaf asked slowly, standing before the Inuit man.

The Inuit man looked confused and wary, his gaze shifting uneasily among Olaf and the others.

After a moment’s thought, Olaf pointed to his chest and said deliberately, “I am Olaf Haldorsson.”

“Heiner Williams.”

“Halik.”

“Solrak.”

“Lixstrom.”

The others also took the hint and introduced themselves.

The Inuit man watched for a while before seeming to understand. He pointed to himself and said, “Mohopikku.”

Olaf nodded and smiled. “Your name is Mohopikku. Eat.”

He placed the lamb chops in front of Pikku and gestured for him to eat.

Pikku glanced at Olaf and the others before reaching out with hands caked in black mud and greedily devouring the lamb chops, making loud smacking sounds.

Olaf swallowed hard, seemingly hungry himself.

“This ape-man eats so amusingly.”

“He’s like a starving dog.”

“But watching him eat makes me hungry too, haha.”

Tom and the others pointed at Pikku and joked, while Olaf remained silent. Only after Pikku finished eating and wiped his hands on himself did Olaf begin to speak slowly, using gestures to communicate.

Perhaps moved by the delicious lamb chops, Pikku treated Olaf warmly. The two communicated through a mix of guesswork and gestures.

After a long while, Olaf led the group away, leaving Pikku to rest.

Through half a day of communication, Olaf learned that Pikku was only twenty years old, about the same age as his brother Ulf. Among the Inuit, he had just come of age and was searching for reindeer tracks when Hrutik shot him with an arrow.

Pikku knew he had become a captive servant to these white men. He had heard from the elders of his tribe about the great white nation to the east across the sea, where the white men were powerful, with massive ships and sharp, sturdy iron tools.

At first, Pikku thought of escaping once he recovered, but seeing how kindly Olaf, the young leader of the white men, treated him—almost like a friend—his simple and guileless nature made him abandon the idea of escape for now. He wanted to stay with the white men, learn their advanced culture, and if he could help his tribe obtain some iron tools, it would greatly improve their lives.

The language of Pikku’s Inuit tribe was simple, with few words. Heiner, after listening for a while, found it fascinating and pulled Olaf aside. “Since Uncle Haldor has made Pikku your servant, he’ll need to learn some Icelandic eventually. I’ve been wanting to learn their ape-man language. Let me teach him.”

Olaf laughed. “That’s a great idea, Heiner. You’re a nobleman, the most educated among us. It’s perfect for you to teach him. Who knows, he might even be of great help to us in the future.”

Olaf took Heiner to see Haldor and requested that Heiner teach Pikku their language. Haldor agreed with a wave of his hand and instructed Heiner to also teach Pikku some manners, as he was still a savage.

After the entire village of Hrut Village relocated, Haldor’s status and prestige as the team leader grew steadily. His dual roles as village chief and ship captain, along with key personnel like Vice Captain Hrutik and Jot managing the village, formed a clear division of labor, almost giving birth to a miniature organizational structure.

Olaf knew that regardless of how well his uncle Haig managed in Vinland, their group of over a hundred people would inevitably continue to expand their territory upon arrival, leading to conflicts with the native people of Vinland. War was unavoidable.

These few days were crucial for Haldor to establish his authority and unite everyone under his command. With over a hundred followers, Haldor would have a foundation for development in Vinland. Whether capturing Indians or Inuit as slaves or bringing white slaves from England, Scotland, or Ireland, as long as the population didn’t expand too rapidly in the short term, they could maintain their ruling position.

In his past life, Olaf was just an ordinary commoner with no understanding of power struggles, but he had watched many films and TV shows, picking up some good ideas to share with Haldor.

Haldor took these suggestions seriously and, over the past few days, had been amiably chatting with the villagers, promising them a bright future if they followed him. Sometimes, he would bring along the core fighting force—Hrutik, Jot, Kadir, Hoskuld, Heiner, Kalm, Kalhu, Valitu, Lunde, Big Solrak, Nilanhu, and Hilt—twelve men in total—to practice shooting birds and drill with weapons on the deck.

The sound of gunfire, the smell of gunpowder, and the battle cries frightened the villagers below deck, making them even more reverent toward Haldor. They also gained a clearer understanding of their own safety and future, feeling more at ease.

Since the Spanish square formation took shape last century, armies worldwide had adopted this formation, relying mainly on mercenaries but also forming some elite guards based on the Spanish square.

Hrutik, formerly the military police sergeant of his own three-hundred-man company, naturally trained the others in the formation of the Spanish long pike infantry. In less than two days, they had already begun to resemble a proper military formation.

Confidently, Hrutik told Haldor that if given enough personnel and time in Vinland, he could train a company of long pike infantry and a company of musketeers, enough to conquer and sweep through the primitive people of Vinland.

Haldor was greatly tempted and promised to do everything possible to support Hrutik in building a powerful army.

Olaf, hearing Hrutik boast about the invincibility of the Spanish square, was unimpressed.

The Spanish square was indeed a groundbreaking development last century, rendering medieval knights and sword-and-shield soldiers obsolete. It combined the close combat of long pike infantry with the explosive firepower of musketeers, creating a modernized formation that protected both near and far.

This formation had become the basic structure of armies worldwide, but as Olaf knew, the Dutch Maurice formation had already defeated the Spanish twice in battle. The Maurice formation’s greater mobility and broader firepower coverage had already surpassed the cumbersome Spanish square.

In another five or six years, the Lion of the North would lead the Swedish army, using the Gustavus formation to defeat the forces of the Holy Roman Empire, becoming one of the greatest military leaders in European history. The Gustavus formation would be used on European battlefields until World War I.

Olaf believed that if they were to train an army, they should adopt the Gustavus formation instead of the outdated Spanish square.

Chapter 30: Arrival

Olaf quickly set aside his thoughts about forming a military formation. After all, they hadn’t even reached Vinland yet. Whether they could quickly establish a foothold and carve out their own territory was still uncertain. Even if they became local leaders, whether they could build an army remained unknown. The real issue at hand was how to secure their position once they arrived in Vinland.

Haldor had promised the villagers double the land if they moved their families here. If he couldn’t deliver, what kind of leader would he be?

The primary task in Vinland was to develop farmland and seize territory from the Native Americans and Inuit.

Olaf had discussed this with Haldor, who revealed that he and Hrutik had already planned everything. Once they arrived in Vinland, they would first find Haig, then combine their forces. With their flintlock muskets, bows, spears, and axes, they would drive away the locals, clear the forests, and establish a settlement.

Olaf realized they had thought things through more carefully than he had. He remembered that the first Europeans to colonize were the Vikings, so Haldor and his men must be experts.

After another day, at noon, they spotted a dark mass of land to the south.

Haldor, confident in his navigation skills, nodded excitedly and said, “We’ve reached Vinland.”

They passed three or four islands before finally seeing the true face of Vinland.

A great river flowed into the sea, flanked by rugged rocks. In the distance, mountains rolled across the horizon, while the shore was covered in lush grass and towering trees.

“The climate here is much better than Iceland,” Hrutik remarked, pointing at the tall trees on the shore.

The others nodded in agreement, pleased with what they saw.

Haldor steered Thor’s Hammer to the river mouth, then sent several men to pull the ship upstream during high tide. The vessel slowly made its way up the river. Fearing hidden reefs, Haldor chose a flat area to anchor. After dropping anchor and furling the sails, Hrutik led a group ashore to scout the area. They returned after a long while.

“There are no signs of natives nearby,” Hrutik reported, his shirt unbuttoned as he took a sip of water. “About three thousand paces to the south, there’s an open area. We can start by cutting down trees and building a camp, then look for Haig.”

Haldor nodded and personally led a group armed with flintlock muskets and other weapons ashore. They spread out to guard the area while the villagers slowly disembarked.

Olaf, his mother Katrin, and his siblings stepped onto the shore. Once everyone and the livestock were ashore, Haldor led them southeast.

Under Haldor and Hrutik’s guidance, the group moved through dense forests until they reached an open area filled with low fruit trees and vines. There were few large trees here, and the terrain was flat. To the east, a small stream flowed nearby—it was the perfect place to build a village.

“This place is great,” Haldor said, satisfied. He ordered Jot to lead the group in clearing the land and building houses, while he and Hrutik took a few others to explore the surroundings.

Olaf and a group of young boys and girls, led by several women, used wooden sticks to beat down the grass, driving away snakes, rats, and insects. Once the grass was flattened, they rode horses over it to ensure it was safe to walk on.

The men worked efficiently, cutting down trees, digging pits, and constructing simple wooden houses. By nightfall, they had built five large wooden frames, their roofs covered with branches and vines. As darkness fell, Jot and the others worked quickly, setting up half-height fences and digging traps around the houses.

Haldor and his group returned, dragging two reindeer. The animals were already dead, pierced by arrows and spears.

“Tonight, we’ll have venison,” Haldor announced, tossing the deer down. He skillfully skinned one, pulling off a complete hide in moments. Lunde hung the other deer from a tree to skin and gut it.

The two reindeer weighed less than fifty pounds combined. Each family received a portion, which they cooked over a fire.

“Children, come here,” Haldor called, sitting on a wooden stool. He beckoned Olaf, Half, and Gerny over, then pulled a cluster of dark purple, glossy grapes from a pouch made of deer hide. “Want some grapes?”

Olaf had eaten grapes before in his past life—with seeds, without seeds, and even raisins. But Half and Gerny had only heard of grapes, never seen or tasted them.

Olaf took the cluster, plucked a grape, rubbed it clean, and popped it into his mouth. The sweet-tart juice burst in his mouth, refreshing and delicious. Though not as sweet as the varieties he remembered from his past life, it was still quite good.

After eating two, Olaf divided the rest into three small clusters, giving one to each of his siblings and the last to his mother, Katrin.

Half and Gerny imitated Olaf, rubbing a grape before eating it. Their eyes lit up, and they happily continued eating.

Iceland had few resources, and fruits were almost nonexistent. Most Icelanders had never tasted fruit or sugar. Even in Haldor’s household, children only got a taste of black sugar milk pudding on special occasions. Fruit was unheard of.

Watching his children and wife carefully savor the grapes, their faces glowing with happiness, Haldor laughed heartily. “There’s a small valley to the southeast with plenty of grapes. Tomorrow, we’ll all go and pick some. We can eat what we want and make wine with the rest. Vinland truly lives up to its name as the ‘Land of Wine.’”

In the Icelandic language, “Vinland” meant “Land of Wine,” a name given by their ancestors when they first discovered the place.

Wine was a beloved drink in Europe. It satisfied people’s need for sugar and alcohol, was easy to store, and simple to make. Throughout European culture, wine was one of the most important beverages.

Hearing that there were grapes in the valley, the Icelanders were thrilled. Life in Vinland seemed even better than they had imagined. After a meal of venison and bread, they settled into the wooden houses for the night.

Haldor, Hrutik, and ten others kept watch by the bonfire, guarding against any attacks from natives or wild animals.

Vinland’s climate was much warmer than Iceland’s, and since it was only early autumn, the nights weren’t cold. The Icelanders slept comfortably under animal hides.

Chapter 31: Grapes

The next morning, a light rain fell, but the people of Iceland continued to build houses and repair fences, draped in their sheepskin cloaks. Meanwhile, Haldor led seven or eight sturdy men to explore the surrounding terrain.

That evening, they returned with several hundred pounds of grapes—some red, some purple, and a few still green. The dozens of families in the camp each received two or three pounds, which delighted the villagers, who had only recently arrived in Vinland and were still full of hope. They praised Haldor’s generosity loudly.

Days passed, and one wooden house after another was completed. Ten days later, thirty-eight houses stood in the camp, and construction finally ceased. Under the leadership of Jot and others, the villagers began fishing, hunting, gathering wild fruits and vegetables, and clearing land to plant radishes and oats.

Haldor watched the bustling activity in and around the camp with great satisfaction. The land in Vinland was fertile and vast. The nearby wilderness, once properly tended, would make excellent farmland. He estimated that before the weather turned completely cold, they could clear five virgates of land. By next spring, they could continue expanding, and the land he had promised them might be fully cultivated within two years.

Over the past few days, Haldor had explored an area of twenty thousand paces around the camp. He had discovered several long-abandoned primitive campsites, which they speculated had once belonged to the Skrælings or the Unipads. Perhaps due to war or disease, the inhabitants had moved away, leaving behind this expansive, fertile, unclaimed land.

What Haldor and his people did not know was that at this time, the lands of what would later become Canada and the United States were home to only one and a half to two million Native Americans, divided into dozens, even hundreds, of tribes, maintaining a balance of conflict and strife.

Apart from Mexico and the civilizations of Central and South America—such as the Aztecs, Incas, and Mayans—the vast expanse of North America had not given rise to a single nation, let alone a brilliant civilization.

Later scholars proposed a theory: the indigenous peoples of America had migrated from Asia across the Bering Strait, but this migration could not have been completed in a short time. The earlier migrants were displaced by later arrivals, forcing them to move southward and settle. Only the first few waves of Native Americans developed civilizations, while the later arrivals remained in a primitive state.

Without the arrival of white people, it might have taken thousands more years for America to develop a civilization comparable to the Spring and Autumn or Warring States periods of East Asia or the medieval era of Europe.

Vinland was what would later be known as Newfoundland, the largest island on the eastern coast of North America. It was not densely populated by Native Americans, and there were also many Inuit people. Tribal conflicts and ethnic warfare had persisted for centuries. The site of Haldor’s camp had been a Native American settlement decades ago but had been abandoned for various reasons.

Over the past few days, Olaf had been wandering around the camp with Heiner, Kalhu, Tom, and others. Pikku had recovered from his arrow wound and had been following Olaf closely.

Heiner’s efforts had not been in vain. He had learned much of the Inuit language and had taught Pikku some simple Icelandic words. More importantly, he had made Pikku understand his place and obey Olaf’s commands.

Although Pikku was Olaf’s servant, Olaf treated him with respect. Every day, Pikku enjoyed roasted and boiled delicacies, and he had come to accept his role.

Olaf was not aimlessly wandering. He was observing Vinland’s climate and environment and concluded that it was similar to that of Beijing or even northeastern China in the Ming Dynasty—much colder than Qingdao, his hometown in his past life.

Of course, Olaf also considered that it was November 1627 in the Julian calendar, and the Little Ice Age had already begun. Perhaps the climate had made Vinland colder than usual.

Olaf was neither a scientist nor an agricultural expert, but he wanted to use his knowledge, which was ahead of its time, and his foresight to help his father, Haldor, establish a stable homeland as quickly as possible and consolidate his family’s rule over it.

Over the past few days, Olaf had noticed that almost all the Icelandic families had an almost obsessive love for grapes, sugary fruits, and even honey—far more than they loved meat. It seemed that eating a single grape or wild fruit could bring them genuine happiness.

Olaf knew that sweets could bring happiness. He also knew that famous European desserts like macarons and tiramisu were luxuries because sugar was a rare commodity in Europe. The people of Iceland, even more isolated than their European neighbors, had even less access to sugar and honey, making them even more susceptible to the allure of sweet foods.

Olaf thought that if his family could cultivate the wild or semi-wild grapes of Vinland and master the techniques of grape farming, they would hold the key to the island’s population. If people wanted sugar, they would have to obey.

In his past life, Olaf had lived with his grandmother during his childhood and had grown grapes. He knew that grapevines could be propagated by cuttings. So, after discussing it with his father, he went to Grape Valley with his uncle Kadir. There, he selected several grapevines that bore the sweetest fruit, marked them, and planned to take cuttings in the spring to cultivate a superior variety. This would allow his family to control the production of grape wine and fresh grapes—two major sugar substitutes. Whether for their own use or for future export to Nordic countries, this would be a valuable asset.

Haldor was delighted with Olaf’s idea. He boasted to everyone that with Olaf in the family, the Hrut clan would surely surpass their ancestors.

In addition to focusing on agricultural development, Olaf and Haldor also prioritized finding Haig’s camp.

Two days ago, Haldor had sent Hrutik, Hilt, and several others on a ship to search for Haig’s camp along the coastline of Vinland. They hoped to find Haig soon so that the brothers could join forces to build a homeland in the harsh, primitive land of Vinland.

Vinland was about half the size of Iceland, comparable to the combined size of Henan and Shandong provinces in the Ming Dynasty. With such a vast, undeveloped wilderness, finding a settlement of a few hundred people was like searching for a needle in a haystack.

However, Haldor knew that Haig’s camp was built by the sea. If they sailed along the coastline, Haig would recognize Thor’s Hammer and come out to meet them.

Another seven or eight days passed. One morning, Haldor led seven or eight men, armed with weapons, to explore the southern hinterlands. Not long after, Olaf heard four or five gunshots from the southern forests. His brow furrowed—he knew his father’s matchlock guns had been fired.

Thinking of the Native Americans and Inuit living on Vinland, Olaf worried that his father’s group might be under attack by the fierce, battle-hardened natives. If not handled carefully, they could all perish at the hands of these primitive warriors.

Olaf quickly returned to the camp and saw Jot shearing a sheep. He approached and whispered, “I just heard gunshots. Uncle Jot, my father and the others must be in trouble. We need to go help them.”

Jot dropped the shears, shouted, and gathered Kadir, Hoskuld, and six or seven others. They left two men to guard the camp and rushed south with their weapons.

Chapter 32: The Black Bear Kills

Olaf and Heiner followed Jot and the others out of the camp, heading south into the dense forest.

They trudged through the uneven terrain, emerging from the woods into a vast valley flanked by towering cliffs on either side. The group gripped their weapons tightly as they ascended higher into the valley. Olaf glanced back, seeing the camp’s forest far below in the distance.

He realized that the farther south they ventured into Vinland, the higher the elevation seemed to rise. Just as he was observing his surroundings, a deafening roar—part animal, part human—echoed from the hill ahead, sending a chill down his spine.

“It’s a bear!” Jot quickened his pace, his voice urgent. “Haldor’s run into a bear!”

Olaf’s heart tightened as he followed Kadir, Jot, and the others up the slope.

The hill was dotted with ash and maple trees. Two smaller black bears lay dead on the ground, their bodies drenched in blood. A massive black bear was still attacking four men, who dodged its swipes desperately. Leading them was Haldor, his group covered in scratches and wounds, blood streaming from their injuries.

Not far off, a man in his forties lay motionless, his head split open, brain matter and blood spattered everywhere. Olaf recognized him—the village carpenter, Ilugi’s father. It seemed Haldor’s group had been ambushed by the bears. Though they had killed two of the smaller ones, one man had already lost his life.

Kadir shouted, and he, Jot, Hoskuld, and five others charged forward, hacking with axes and stabbing with spears. The massive bear held out for a moment, snapping two spears before collapsing under the barrage of blows.

Olaf turned away from the carpenter’s corpse and hurried to Haldor’s side. His father’s left arm was torn open, muscles exposed, blood gushing. Olaf quickly called for Heiner to fetch some wine from the camp, then tore strips from his own clothing to bind the wound.

Most Icelanders knew basic wound care, and Olaf had learned these skills from Haldor himself. However, in this era, people had no concept of sterilization or antiseptics. Wounds were simply bandaged, left to fester, then lanced to drain the pus before being allowed to scab over. Many died from infections during this process.

Of course, if one sought a doctor’s treatment, the methods were even more bizarre—amputations, bird dung, or toxic concoctions that only hastened death.

Olaf knew that wine contained alcohol, which could serve as a crude disinfectant.

Once Heiner returned with a small clay jar—about two gallons of wine—Olaf asked Hoskuld to light a bonfire. He sealed the jar and boiled the wine over the flames, then let it cool before using it to clean Haldor’s wound and those of the other injured men. Afterward, he rebandaged them.

The group then carried the wounded and the three bear carcasses back to camp. Men, women, and children gathered, many wearing expressions of concern.

Haldor, gritting his teeth against the pain, put on a brave face and reassured everyone before retiring to his bed under Katrin’s care.

The three bears were given to the carpenter’s family. His wife and two sons also received most of the newly cleared land as compensation for his death.

Olaf spent some time with his friend Ilugi, trying to comfort him. To his relief, Ilugi harbored no resentment toward him or his father. This eased Olaf’s mind, but it also reminded him of the fragility of life in this era—just as the Middle Ages were ending and the Age of Exploration beginning. Concepts like human rights had yet to emerge, and most people accepted early deaths, illness, and accidental fatalities as inevitable.

The carpenter’s death at the bears’ claws and Haldor’s injuries were tragic, but Ilugi’s family saw Haldor’s generosity in compensating them. They felt grateful rather than bitter, determined to carry on.

With Haldor injured, the camp’s affairs were temporarily managed by Jot, Hoskuld, and Kadir. However, since most of the settlers were from Hrut Village, Jot’s word carried the most weight.

After the bear attack, exploration was put on hold. Instead, the camp focused on clearing land and establishing agriculture and animal husbandry.

Vinland was rich in resources—its rivers teemed with fish, and its forests were dense with vegetation, enough to sustain everyone. Before the first harvest next year, the camp would need to organize its labor force.

Though Haldor was recuperating, Jot still consulted him daily. After ensuring a steady food supply, Jot assigned tasks: some fished, others gathered vines to make ropes, and others quarried stone and timber. The camp began stockpiling fish, dried goods, and other supplies—both to prepare for winter and to expand their settlement.

Day by day, the camp grew more organized. With over a hundred people working together, the houses became sturdier and more numerous.

Olaf, meanwhile, spent most of his time indoors, occasionally checking on his father. The rest of his days were devoted to drafting management guidelines for the camp, with a particular focus on hygiene and healthcare.

The peak of European civilization had been ancient Rome and Greece, where urban sanitation had been far ahead of seventeenth-century France. The Black Death had spread so devastatingly in Europe largely due to poor hygiene—piles of waste and filth littered living areas, contaminating rivers, wells, and groundwater. As a result, Europeans had taken to avoiding baths as a misguided preventive measure.

Icelanders weren’t much better in their hygiene habits, but with sparse populations and vast land, waste wasn’t a major issue. Now, however, with over a hundred people from Hrut Village and others settling in Vinland, garbage was being discarded haphazardly. While the pollution hadn’t yet become severe, Olaf recognized the dangers.

Not only did waste pollute the air and breed insects and bacteria, but untreated excrement could spread disease. The problem wasn’t urgent now, with the weather cooling, but come spring and summer, swarms of insects would pose a serious threat to the camp’s health and productivity.

Olaf planned to leverage the camp’s informal hierarchy, convincing his father, Haldor, to persuade Jot and the other leaders to address these issues proactively. By regulating personal hygiene and waste management, they could prevent future outbreaks and ensure the camp’s long-term prosperity.

Tom and Solrak, who often came to play with Olaf, didn’t yet grasp the deeper implications of his work. But Heiner, as a Scottish noble, immediately recognized its value.

On the surface, Olaf’s proposals seemed aimed at improving living standards and hygiene. In reality, they were a subtle way to consolidate Haldor’s authority. Direct orders might breed resentment over time, but framing regulations as beneficial to the collective would make them more palatable.

Olaf was clearly using these management rules to formalize Haldor’s leadership, ensuring that as the camp grew, its people would remain accustomed to following his commands.

Heiner studied Olaf’s bright blue eyes, realizing that though he was still young, his mind was as sharp as any court official’s. Perhaps Haldor was right—Olaf truly was the reincarnation of their ancestor, Hrut. How else could he possess such innate understanding of governance and human nature?

Chapter 33: Semi-Military Management

Heavy rain poured down on Vinland, the raindrops drumming against the thatched roofs of the huts. Many of the houses had begun to leak, but the people of Haldor’s camp had no time to worry about their own roofs. After three or four days of continuous rain, the lower-lying areas of the camp had already turned into pools of water.

Though they had tried to build their houses on higher ground, some of the shorter structures had already been flooded by the rising water, becoming unstable and on the verge of collapse.

Haldor, recently recovered from his injuries, wore a fur coat as he led Jot, Hoskuld, Kadir, and a group of men and women through the rain, wading through the water to dig drainage channels. Their goal was to divert the stagnant water in the camp to the riverbed to the north.

Olaf, meanwhile, stayed in his large house with Tom and the others, watching over several dozen children. Alongside some of the women, he kept a worried eye on the blurred figures working in the rain outside.

The camp was about three thousand paces from the river—Olaf estimated around two thousand meters. Digging a channel by hand would take at least seven or eight days. However, there was a small stream to the east that flowed north into the river, only seven or eight hundred paces away—no more than six hundred meters.

Haldor and the others split into four teams, digging toward the stream.

They had been working since midnight and had already completed more than half of the channel. Olaf estimated that in another two or three hours, they would break through. Once the water could flow into the stream, the flooding crisis threatening the camp would be temporarily resolved.

After the men returned to their families to rest, Haldor collapsed onto his bed and fell into a deep sleep.

Before falling asleep, Katrin, seeing how exhausted her husband was, couldn’t help but ask, “Isn’t this too much for you?”

Haldor seemed to have already fallen asleep, but in his slumber, he mumbled, “No matter how hard it is, this is about carving out our own homeland. This is a man’s true calling—” His words trailed off as he began to snore.

Olaf was moved. He understood the unspoken part of his father’s words: Even if we die on this path, it is a death with purpose.

The next morning, the heavy rain that had marked the transition from autumn to winter finally stopped.

After breakfast, Haldor reviewed Olaf’s “Camp Management Manual” once more before gathering Jot, Hoskuld, Kadir, and Heiner. With Hrutik absent, these four men, along with Haldor, now formed the camp’s leadership.

Since the water had not yet fully receded, there was little work to be done in the camp that day, so everyone arrived quickly—within the time it took to burn a single candle.

Katrin poured beer for everyone before sitting quietly to the side, observing.

Olaf sat nearby, while his younger siblings still slept lazily in the inner room.

“Men, I think Olaf’s manual is excellent,” Haldor began. “It’s full of methods for managing our camp, many of which I never would have thought of. I think it’s great, so let’s all take a look. Heiner, why don’t you read it aloud?”

Haldor handed the manual to Heiner, who, already familiar with its contents, began to read in a clear voice:

“A snake without a head cannot move; a people without a leader cannot thrive. An organization must have a structure—leadership, management, and those being managed.

The Haldor Camp has a population of 134 people: 42 adult men, 48 adult women, and 44 children. Vinland is an undeveloped region with abundant resources and unknown dangers, such as black bears and wild men. For the Haldor Camp to develop and secure its place, we must take measures to unite the strength of these 134 people and mobilize them effectively.

First, we must establish a clear leadership system. Only with legitimacy can we ensure long-term development.

Next, we must define roles and responsibilities for everyone, dividing labor and professions, working together, and rewarding contributions accordingly. This is called a planned economy.

Beyond production, we must also manage daily life and implement semi-military training. Life management should focus on hygiene—waste and excrement must not be discarded carelessly, and the sick must be isolated.

Semi-military training means that all men must train for half an hour each day, practicing formations and combat techniques. Additionally, ten elite individuals will be selected to train as musketeers.”

Olaf was neither a feudal bureaucrat nor a modern administrator. He simply wrote down whatever came to mind, so the manual’s content was somewhat disorganized and unrefined.

But to Haldor and the others, it was profound and eye-opening.

Hoskuld pondered for a long time before being the first to voice his approval. The others also realized that the “leadership system” mentioned at the beginning was essentially a way to formally appoint officials, legitimizing their authority over the camp’s residents.

The later sections on hygiene management and semi-military training were ways to tighten control over the camp’s people, ensuring their obedience through structured daily life.

The concept of a “planned economy” was even more formidable—it meant that everyone would work together, and rewards would be distributed based on contributions. This would place the wealth of over a hundred people directly in their hands. If implemented, the Haldor Camp would effectively become the private property of Haldor’s family.

This was even more advanced than the manorial system of centuries past. However, Hoskuld and the others understood that with only a little over a hundred people, facing the harsh primitive environment and the threats of wild beasts and wild men, they could not afford to let everyone develop freely. Without such measures, they might never progress in a hundred years—or worse, they could be wiped out in less than ten.

Hoskuld shared his thoughts, and everyone agreed. After further discussion, they decided to adopt the “Management Manual” as the basis for governing the camp.

The leadership system was established after much deliberation, with Kadir and the others inviting Olaf to participate. They modeled it after the manorial system of centuries past, renaming the Haldor Camp to the Haldor Manor.

Haldor became the lord of the manor, with authority over all its affairs. Jot, Hoskuld, Kadir, and Heiner were appointed as stewards, each responsible for different aspects: hygiene, farming, hunting, fishing, training, and record-keeping. Hrutik, though absent, was named the captain of the guard, overseeing the militia, musketeers, and maintaining order.

In terms of specifics, Haldor and Katrin retained control over the distribution and development of resources such as supplies and farmland.

With their thoughts aligned, they immediately called a general assembly of the entire camp. Before the hundred-plus residents, Haldor announced the camp’s transformation into the Haldor Manor and read out the revised management regulations, clarifying the roles of Jot, Hoskuld, Kadir, Heiner, and Hrutik.

In ancient times, the lord of a manor held ownership and control over the land and resources. Most of Iceland’s free folk had once been serfs or tenants of such lords, granted land and freedom only after long service.

Now, Haldor was reintroducing the manorial system in Vinland, which would effectively make all hundred-plus people in the camp his serfs or tenants. This was something no one could easily accept.

However, as the regulations were read aloud one by one, the people realized that the “manor” was merely a name. In reality, they would remain free folk, with their personal property and wealth untouched. They would be rewarded according to their contributions.

Having just endured the disasters of the black bear attacks and the flooding of their camp, the people of Iceland understood that if they wanted to survive—and to live well—they had to unite closely under Haldor’s leadership.

After a chaotic half-day of discussion, no one found any harm to their personal interests in the new regulations. Instead, they saw that it would benefit the camp’s development and help fulfill Haldor’s promises of land and wealth.

Thus, without a single objection, the Haldor Manor was officially established. The leadership was confirmed, and the manor’s way of life and production was set in stone.

Chapter 34: Haldor Manor

After the establishment of Haldor Manor, Haldor, as the lord of the manor, issued an order. To defend against savages and wild beasts and to ensure the well-being of everyone in the manor, starting tomorrow, each household was to send one man for military training. Additionally, strict hygiene standards were to be enforced. Those who repeatedly failed to comply would be expelled from the manor and left to fend for themselves in Vinland.

The people of Iceland realized that Haldor was serious, so they all obediently complied. The next morning, the men followed Haldor and Kadir for training outside, while the women first disposed of the household waste outside the camp. Then, under Jot’s leadership, along with other men and elders, they twisted tree bark into ropes and wove vines into containers.

Winter was fast approaching, and the previously stored food needed to be properly contained. They had to make enough vessels to adequately prepare and distribute the winter supplies.

The children, apart from helping with household chores, mostly had nothing to do. Olaf gathered two or three dozen young children in his large thatched house, telling stories and playing games.

He spoke of the heroic deeds of the gods, aiming to indoctrinate these children and instill in them a sense of loyalty and righteousness. He wanted them to be devoted to their family and deeply grateful to him, their leader. After all, in a few years, these youngsters would become Olaf’s core followers.

Haldor Manor had forty-four children and adolescents under the age of eighteen. Among them, five were too young, twenty were girls, and nineteen were boys. As the young master of the manor and one of the strongest fighters, Olaf had been the leader of the children back in Iceland.

Now, in Vinland, both Haldor and Olaf’s status had risen sharply. Although the children didn’t fully understand the implications, teenagers like Tom realized the growing disparity in their positions.

Thus, Tom, Halik, Solrak, Ilugi, Hari, and Val—the six children closest to Olaf—were the first to demand that the other children show more respect to Olaf.

However, since they were all farmers’ children and unfamiliar with formalities, they still treated Olaf as their leader among their group of playmates. Even though Olaf was only a little over ten years old, some of the others were already sixteen.

Though young in age, Olaf’s spirit was far from childlike. In his eyes, these two dozen boys and girls were all guileless, their emotions and thoughts transparent. Thus, Olaf always managed to make these children and adolescents who followed him love and adore him even more.

Haldor Manor entered a critical phase in the early winter, focusing on stockpiling food, crafting tools, and training the militia. Olaf, through storytelling and other means, won the hearts of the young children and began to instill in them a sense of loyalty to his family.

While Haldor and Olaf were busy, a large cog ship bearing the flag of a giant hammer sailed across the sea toward the southeastern tip of the eastern peninsula of Vinland Island, approaching the mouth of a small river flowing north.

Hrutik and Hilt, accompanied by two sailors they had found in the camp, set out from the northern side of Vinland. They sailed around the island, continuously searching for Haig’s camp.

“Old teacher, Hrutik, we’ve been out for more than half a month, haven’t we?” Hilt stammered, looking at Hrutik, who was sprawled on the deck, constantly scanning the island.

“It’s been over two weeks,” Hrutik replied, counting on his fingers and nodding.

Since setting sail, Hrutik had carefully examined every possible landing spot, not just the coast of Vinland but also the surrounding larger islands. His relentless search had not yet found Haig, but he had seen many savages.

After more than ten days of arduous searching, Hrutik had become familiar with the terrain and locations of the northern and eastern coastlines of Vinland Island and its surrounding islands. He had begun drawing maps, intending to circumnavigate Vinland along the coastline, whether or not he found Haig’s camp, and then present a basic map to Haldor.

“We must have traveled hundreds of nautical miles by now,” Hilt, who was not good at math, scratched his head and said, “Vinland is too big. Do you think it might be as large as Europe?”

Hrutik shook his head. “No, the largest is America. The rest are just large and small islands. Based on my experience, Vinland is probably about the size of Iceland. But the environment and resources here are much better than Iceland, and there are fewer savages. Along the way, we’ve only seen four places where savages live. They use wood and stone for weapons. I think with our long spears, large axes, firearms, and crossbows, we can quickly conquer this place and colonize Vinland.”

As he spoke, Hrutik grew excited. As a mercenary from Germany, he had heard from his countrymen about the lucrative colonial ventures in the islands of America with the Spanish, where they could control the life and death of the natives. There were many mines there, and the Spanish and Portuguese lords had made their fortunes through mining, sugarcane, and grape cultivation.

Hrutik thought that if he and Haldor could also colonize Vinland, they could follow the example of the Spanish and Portuguese, making a fortune through mining or cultivating sugarcane and grapes. The prospect of becoming a nobleman or a wealthy man was very promising.

The savages Hrutik had encountered were very backward, with a small population living in scattered groups. Some were short and stocky, similar to the natives of Greenland, while others were taller, with long faces and sharp noses, also with yellow skin but with frighteningly red faces.

The primitive lifestyle of these two types of savages and their terrified reactions upon seeing his large ship gave Hrutik great confidence. He believed that when he returned and informed Haldor of the situation, they could gradually enslave these savages, making them cultivate the most valuable crops like grapes and sugarcane, as well as various grains. If there were mines in Vinland, they could also make the savages work in the mines to create wealth for themselves.

After all, to Westerners like Hrutik, the savages of Vinland were no different from livestock.

As Hrutik was lost in his fantasies, the Thor’s Hammer gradually approached the mouth of the not-too-wide river. Hilt suddenly pointed to the left bank of the river and exclaimed, “Old teacher, there’s smoke over there!”

Hrutik turned his head and indeed saw white smoke rising from a forest in the northwest distance on the riverbank. It was clearly the smoke from burning wood.

“Is that a savage tribe or Haig’s camp?”

Muttering to himself, Hrutik turned to fetch his bow and arrows, also strapping on his firelock musket, throwing axes, and long sword, and putting on his leather armor. He left Hilt on the ship and, with the two fully armed sailors, took a raft ashore.

These two sailors were young men from Hrut Village. One had lost both parents to illness and had only an older sister left, while the other had no relatives at all. They had grown up thanks to Haldor’s support. So, when Haldor announced his plan to flee Iceland, they immediately agreed. Later, they became Hrutik’s apprentices, learning to be sailors and combat skills, hoping to make a name for themselves in this primitive land of Vinland.

Once ashore, Hrutik ordered the two to secure the raft, then led them slowly into the forest.

“Savages also know how to shoot arrows, but their bows have short range and little power. Polly, Brun, you must be extra careful. As long as you don’t step into traps or get ambushed, you’ll be fine. If you spot savages, strike first without hesitation.”

Over the past half month, Hrutik had encountered hunters from two savage tribes. Relying on his longbow, he had killed the savages, but he had also experienced the savages’ archery and camouflage skills. Without his years of battle experience, Hrutik felt he might have met an untimely end at the hands of the savages.

Hrutik’s earnest teachings deeply moved the two young men. They solemnly agreed, then widened their eyes, scanning the surrounding trees and bushes, hoping to spot a savage or two to practice their skills.

Chapter 35: Haig

Hrutik and his two companions slowly ventured deeper into the forest. Through the canopy, they could faintly see the white smoke growing larger, signaling their approach to the settlement. Their vigilance heightened several times over.

“Stop,” Hrutik suddenly commanded, his voice low. He had noticed something amiss with the dried branches and fallen leaves beneath a few trees ahead—likely a trap. Polly and Brun halted immediately.

“What’s wrong, Captain?” they asked, their faces tense as they stared at Hrutik.

“There’s a trap up ahead,” Hrutik said, pointing forward. He picked up a stone and hurled it toward the suspicious spot.

The fist-sized rock landed on the dried leaves and rolled forward.

Whoosh!

The ground beneath the leaves collapsed, revealing a pit roughly ten feet wide.

“Wow, there really was a trap!”

Polly and Brun looked at Hrutik with admiration. They hadn’t noticed anything unusual, but Hrutik had uncovered the danger before it could harm them.

Hrutik led the two young men to the edge of the pit and peered down. Inside, several iron spears gleamed with a cold, white light. His expression darkened for a moment before he burst into laughter, pointing toward the smoke rising from the foothills in the distance. “We’ve found Haig’s camp!”

Polly scratched his head, but Brun’s eyes lit up. He pointed at the spears in the pit and said, “Besides Haig’s camp, who else on Vinland would use iron spears for traps? The savages here only use wood and stone for their weapons.”

Polly nodded in agreement, a smile spreading across his face. “Let’s go find Haig quickly!”

Polly and Brun were about ten years younger than Haig. Since childhood, they had heard tales of Haldor and Haig’s adventures—raiding and trading at sea—and had come to admire the two men greatly. After the Saga of the Hrut Clan began to circulate, their admiration for Haig reached its peak. Now, they could barely contain their excitement and were eager to rush toward the foothills.

“Not so fast,” Hrutik cautioned, pulling them back. He spoke in a low voice, “What if these spears were lost during a battle between Haig and the savages? The savages could have taken them and set this trap.”

“But—”

“Haig is a formidable fighter. How could the savages have taken his weapons?”

Hrutik smiled slightly at the two young men’s differing expressions before continuing toward the foothills at a measured pace.

Polly and Brun wanted to say more, but seeing their captain walk away, they suppressed their thoughts and quickly followed.

As they neared the foothills, Hrutik spotted a fortified settlement built halfway up the mountain. The low wooden and stone walls formed a semicircle, standing only as tall as a man. The mountains flanked the walls on either side, and several watchtowers stood atop them—though no one was present now.

Recognizing the familiar bastion-like structure, Hrutik’s tense muscles relaxed slightly. Squinting, he saw several men dressed in animal hides, armed with bows, arrows, and large axes, their skin pale. Only then did he truly set his mind at ease.

“This bastion-like camp built against the foothills must be Haig’s,” he said.

With that, Hrutik took out a signal arrow, carved his name and Haig’s onto the shaft, and fired it toward the camp.

Whoosh!

The arrow landed inside the camp, and suddenly, the sound of drums and shouting erupted from within.

Hrutik and his two companions crouched behind a large rock, peering out cautiously.

After the time it took a candle to burn, the camp’s gates swung open. A group of men clad in leather armor and wielding long spears poured out in disarray. Then, a towering figure emerged—a man in plate armor, gripping a large axe, mounted on a powerful draft horse. Behind him rode another equally imposing man, also in plate armor, clutching a long spear atop a sleeker, mixed-breed horse.

The mounted man rode down from the foothills and reined in his horse on the grassy plain. He scanned the area before shouting, “Hrutik! Hrutik! It’s me, Haig! Are you there?”

Hrutik listened for a moment, then leaped onto the rock, laughing heartily. “Haig! Haig, my brother! It’s me, Hrutik!”

Haig turned on his horse, studying Hrutik for a moment before dismounting with a booming laugh.

Hrutik, accompanied by Polly and Brun, approached Haig. Moments later, the two burly men embraced, then shook hands warmly.

“Brother Hrutik, weren’t you sailing and trading with Haldor? How did you end up in Vinland? Is Haldor with you?”

Haig bore a resemblance to Haldor, but his hair and beard were snow-white and gleaming. His frame was even more massive than Haldor’s, making him seem like a polar bear standing before Hrutik.

Hrutik was already an imposing six feet tall, but next to Haig, he looked like a child.

“Haldor is here too. The entire Hrut Village has moved to Vinland. I came to find you,” Hrutik said, a smile playing at the corners of his mouth. His eye twitched slightly as he looked at the tall, young man behind Haig, noting his handsome, familiar features and brown beard. “Ulf, how have you been?”

Ulf, who had followed his uncle Haig to Vinland, was now a twenty-two-year-old man. Seven and a half years had transformed him from a youth into a mature and handsome young man. In recent years, he had been sailing alone, transporting Vinland’s specialties—bear, deer, and fox pelts—to Scotland, Ireland, and England for trade. The experience had honed him into a brave and capable man, a hero in his own right, rivaling his father’s generation.

“Uncle Hrutik, it’s been nearly two years since we last saw each other. How have you been?” Ulf asked, his handsome features and brown beard distinguishing him from Olaf. He embraced Hrutik and smiled.

“I’m doing well,” Hrutik replied with a nod before introducing Polly and Brun to Haig and Ulf. The group chatted as they made their way back to the camp.

“This place is called Haig’s Fort. There are over five hundred people here—half are white slaves recruited from Scotland and Ireland, and the other half are captured Indians and Inuit. These savages are quite obedient,” Haig explained as they entered the bastion-like gates.

Only after they had settled in Haig’s wooden house, drinking wine, did Hrutik learn of Haig’s experiences over the past seven and a half years.

When Haig first arrived in Vinland, he had brought over a hundred white slaves, Ulf, and four servants. They worked tirelessly to establish a settlement and cultivate the land. During this time, they clashed several times with the tribes the Spanish and Portuguese called “Indians.” Within a year, over thirty white slaves had perished.

However, Haig’s bravery and skill in battle, combined with his firearms and horses, allowed his mounted gunmen to overwhelm the primitive tribes. By the second year, they had conquered an Indian settlement. The tribe, numbering fewer than three hundred, lost over sixty men, and the survivors were taken as slaves to Haig’s camp.

The following year, more than half of the two hundred Indian captives died from disease.

Afterward, Haig remained in Vinland to guard the settlement while sending Ulf to trade goods in Scotland and other places. Through this, he reconnected with Haldor and Hrutik, allowing Haldor to learn that Haig had established a foothold in Vinland.

Over the next few years, Haig gradually took control of the southeastern corner of Vinland, which he named “Turning Point.” He drove out most of the savages and enslaved two to three hundred more, though many perished over time. By this year, fewer than two hundred remained.

Hrutik knew that many of the tales about Haig in the Saga of the Hrut Clan were fabricated, so hearing the true account of Haig’s experiences filled him with admiration. He praised Haig’s courage and abilities loudly.

Polly and Brun, however, found it hard to believe. They rose abruptly, their manners forgotten, and began to question Haig.

“Haig, didn’t you go to the Ming Empire? That powerful and wealthy land of the Khitans?”

“Yes, and you were even given an elephant by an Indian prince, weren’t you?”

“What Khitans? What elephant?” Haig looked utterly confused, his brow furrowed.

Hrutik cleared his throat and said, “Polly, Brun, go with Haig’s men and secure our ship in the nearby river bay. We can’t leave it out at sea.”

After Polly and Brun left, grumbling in frustration, Hrutik explained to Haig in detail how Haldor had been betrayed by Sigfoss and the governor, how Haldor had been persuaded by Olaf to commission Elder Amie to write the Saga of the Hrut Clan, and how Haldor had been ambushed by Ozul, Sigfoss’s relative, only to turn the tables and kill his attackers. He described how Haldor had been sentenced to exile in the glaciers, how they had ambushed the guards to rescue him, and how they had coerced the villagers of Hrut Village to migrate to Vinland.

Hrutik spoke for over half an hour, pausing only to take a sip of wine to quench his thirst.

Haig and Ulf listened in astonishment. They couldn’t believe that in just a few months, Haldor had experienced so much—becoming legendary figures in the saga, with numerous fabricated tales of their exploits. The two men found the situation utterly bizarre.

Chapter 36: Haig’s Fortress

Haig and Ulf had been able to venture to Vinland seven and a half years ago thanks to the guidance of Olaf’s ancestral spirit. Moreover, their swift establishment seven years prior was due to Olaf’s advice to recruit white slaves near Scotland. With a large population, they had managed to withstand the attacks from the Indians and Inuit, ultimately securing a foothold.

Upon hearing from Hrutik about the changes in their family, they learned that it was once again Olaf who had saved the family from a dire situation. This made them even more admiring of Olaf.

Ulf pondered for a moment before whispering, “Uncle, I think we should go find my father and Olaf. Together, we can develop better. With more people, we can rule Vinland. I believe Olaf will help us grow. Maybe we can be ambiguous about the Hrut family’s saga. This might help our family rule Iceland and the people from Scotland, Ireland, and England.”

Haig was stronger and more skilled in combat than Ulf, but his mind wasn’t as sharp as his nephew’s. After frowning in thought for a moment, he nodded and said, “Good. Let’s go find Haldor right away.”

Ulf nodded with a smile, “The entire Turning Point and the surrounding two thousand virgates of land are ours. There are no powerful savage tribes on the entire Ox Head Peninsula. We are the strongest force here. If it weren’t for the lack of people to occupy a large area, we would have unified the peninsula long ago. Now that my father and his people are here, we should go meet them and invite them to join us. Our family can rebuild the Hrut family estate in Vinland, and maybe even establish a country in the future.”

Ulf was young and had broadened his horizons, with ambitions that matched his knowledge and abilities. He had always dreamed of recruiting white slaves from Ireland, Scotland, and other places to support his estate’s expansion, gradually increasing the number of enslaved native savages, and ultimately taking over Vinland to become the leader of a new nation.

Haig knew his nephew had such ambitions and was slowly being swayed by them. After all, the Vikings were among the world’s earliest colonizers. Without Viking colonization, England might not have been born.

As a descendant of the Vikings, Haig also felt that he could try to occupy and develop Vinland, becoming a national leader.

After Haig and Ulf hosted a three-day feast for Hrutik, they took him on a tour of their estate.

Hrutik discovered that Haig’s Fortress had only over two hundred white people, mostly young and middle-aged men, with fewer than twenty women, all of whom were members of white slave families. These white people worked as indentured servants for Haig’s estate, farming and helping with defense, and would only receive land to become freeholders after seven or eight years.

Among them were Irish, but most were Scots. They lived in Haig’s Fortress and held great fear and respect for Haig, Ulf, and their few personal guards.

Outside Haig’s Fortress, there was a camp consisting of a large cave dug into a hillside, housing nearly two hundred Indians and over twenty Inuit.

All of them were slaves of Haig’s Fortress, working in stone quarrying, ditch digging, and food cultivation. They were guarded by four Irish and four Scottish white slave guards.

Every morning, the eight guards would urge the male slaves to work, while children, women, and the elderly remained locked in the stone caves to prevent the native slaves from escaping.

Haig had decreed that if one slave escaped, all slaves in the adjacent caves would be executed.

In the early years, Haig had indeed killed some people after implementing harsh punishments, which terrified the slaves into enduring their situation for the sake of their families. In recent years, aside from deaths caused by disease, the native slaves had made significant contributions to Haig’s Fortress’s farming and husbandry industries. Without the slaves’ continuous logging, farming, and harvesting, the two hundred white slaves alone could not have supported the material needs of a fortress base.

Hrutik was deeply impressed by Haig’s territory and his management of the native slaves. He nodded in approval, praising Haig as an excellent colonizer, and thought that Haldor and he might need to learn from Haig.

Haig, however, laughed and said that if it weren’t for the white slaves risking their lives to figure out how to capture and manage the native slaves, they might have died in Vinland years ago. Therefore, the main task of Haig’s Fortress now was to send a ship to Ireland and Scotland every year to bring back some white slaves to join Haig’s Fortress.

Hrutik stayed in Haig’s Fortress for five days and on the sixth day, he returned to Thor’s Hammer. Haig and Ulf, along with seven or eight others, launched a ship larger than Thor’s Hammer from a large bay on the west side.

The two ships then sailed one after the other downstream, leaving the river named “Muskox River” and entering the sea. Taking advantage of the recent decrease in northwest winds, they slowly sailed along the coastline to the northeast.

Haig and Ulf’s ship was called “Hope,” originally built with the wealth accumulated by Haldor and Haig’s ancestors over several generations. It was a new type of brigantine, larger than “Thor’s Hammer.”

In the age of great navigation, ships were still entirely at the mercy of the wind. Before the advent of steamships, sails were the lifeblood of sea vessels.

When there was no wind assistance, a ship might not travel a nautical mile in an hour.

Now, “Thor’s Hammer” and “Hope” were caught in a slow-moving headwind. After a day, the two ships finally reached the far north of Vinland Island.

Over the years, Haig and Ulf had already circumnavigated Vinland and the surrounding islands and continents, even drawing a rough map. Hrutik compared it with his own maps and completed the sketch of Vinland, realizing that Vinland Island was actually triangular, with a missing piece on the northern side, forming a coastline hundreds of miles long, and then a large island to the northeast.

Haldor and his group’s camp was on the west side of the strait. The environment was not inferior to Haig’s Turning Point, but the Atlantic warm currents and the Arctic cold currents both bypassed the east side hundreds of miles away. If they were to develop and settle here, sailing in and out would be far less convenient than at Turning Point, where the warm and cold currents intersected.

Hrutik was actually shocked after seeing Haig’s map. He had thought that Vinland, not much smaller than Iceland, had much more vast lands on its northern and southern sides than Iceland. This suggested that Vinland was indeed just a large island in the northern part of America.

This discovery startled Hrutik. He felt that if they were to carve out a kingdom under the noses of the Spanish, it would be very dangerous. The greedy Spanish had a powerful fleet, and if they were to take action, they wouldn’t even have a chance to fight back.

Having lived in Vinland for seven and a half years and having dealt with English and French merchants, Haig was well aware of the situation in America. He saw Hrutik’s concern and reassured him, explaining the true state of America.

Now, Europeans knew that America had been a Spanish and Portuguese monopoly for a century, allowing no other nations to share the benefits.

However, due to the repeated failures of the Spanish Armada in invading England over the past twenty years, England and the Netherlands had rapidly risen, and France had also taken the opportunity to breach Spain’s defenses in America. England, France, and the Netherlands had all infiltrated America, reaching out to claim their share.

Even the current Danish King Christian IV had realized that overseas colonization was a means to national strength and a necessary tool for plundering wealth in the age of great navigation. Thus, he had established the Greenland Colonization Company and the East India Company, and forty-five years later, he would establish the West India Colonization Company, occupying St. Thomas, St. John, and St. Croix in the Caribbean, engaging in the slave trade and developing colonial plantations until 1917, when the United States purchased the three islands for twenty-five million dollars.

Although European powers would eventually carve up islands and colonies from Spain and Portugal, it was not until the Netherlands began seizing the Brazilian region in 1624 that countries truly started to take large numbers of colonies, beginning in 1634.

Now, in 1627, whether it was the long-coveted strong nations or financial conglomerates, they were all waiting for an opportunity to enter the most prosperous Central and South America, known in later times as Latin America.

North America currently had only two or three insignificant, self-sustaining outposts established by England and France since the early seventeenth century, which were of little use before 1630, serving at most to collect animal skins for His Majesty.

In other words, North America had not yet discovered gold or silver mines, and its vast terrain was unsuitable for growing sugarcane to produce sugar, making it less profitable than developing Central and South America.

Haig’s appearance in Vinland at this critical juncture was seen by the only two nations interested in North America, France and England, as harmless. A group of Icelanders growing grapes and enslaving savages was a rare good neighbor in the wilderness, so instead of hostility, the armed merchant ships of both countries had bought animal skins from Haig and sold him some grain and cloth.

Currently, Haig’s Fortress maintained occasional trade with Quebec City, established by France at the lower reaches of the St. Lawrence River in eastern Vinland, and New England, established by England four hundred miles south of Vinland Island, providing some precious animal skins to the colonial companies of both places, maintaining a harmonious relationship.

Haig’s Fortress, Quebec City, and New England were later known as the three major bases of North American colonization and were called the “Three Pearls of Civilization in the North American Cultural Wilderness” by most scholars, marking the beginning of the spread of civilization in North America from three sources.

Note: China has many names in various languages, such as Khitans, Qinnai, and Ming, all referring to China.

Chapter 1: Overseas Visitors

November 20, 1627 (Julian Calendar)

More than twenty days had passed since Haldor led the people of Iceland to Vinland. The walls of Haldor Manor were growing taller and sturdier, and the Icelandic-style longhouses within the estate were becoming more numerous and solid.

Haldor and the other leaders trained the men daily and led hunting expeditions, while Jot took the remaining men and women to fish and gather pine nuts, hazelnuts, and other nuts before the harsh winter arrived.

The food Haldor and his group had brought with them to Vinland was limited. If they simply consumed their supplies without replenishing them, even if they ate all their livestock, they would run out of food before winter ended.

Since settling in the waterfall valley named by Haldor, the Icelanders had worked tirelessly to gather food. Apart from daily consumption, the surplus was salted, dried, and stored.

Originally, the children were also expected to contribute to the estate’s labor, but Olaf wanted to teach them. Over the past ten days, the twenty or so children in the estate had been following Olaf, learning Latin and Icelandic script, listening to stories, and playing games.

Neither the children nor the adults like Haldor understood why Olaf spent his days playing with the younger generation. However, Haldor, Jot, Hoskuld, and the others trusted Olaf deeply. After many events, they no longer saw him as a child. Their unanimous opinion was that Olaf must have a deeper purpose, so they let him do as he pleased.

In truth, Olaf did have many plans. He believed that since they had arrived in the Americas during the Age of Exploration, they could not miss the opportunity to colonize the land. While England had not yet focused on colonizing North America, he and his father could work hard for decades to carve out their own territory and establish a nation, leaving their names in history.

For this future endeavor, Haldor Manor needed to continuously recruit Europeans. As the number of white settlers and enslaved natives increased, Olaf believed the best people to help him and his father control the estate were the villagers who had also migrated from Hrut Village.

These children would grow up in less than ten years. By teaching them culture now and indoctrinating them with loyalty, they would become his future followers.

Olaf buried his ambitions deep, using stories of loyalty and team-building activities to slowly unite the children of the estate around him. He planned to have Heiner and Kadir train these children in combat and teach them the knowledge reserved for leaders and nobles, expanding their horizons and raising their potential, laying the foundation for his future control of the estate.

In Europe, inheritance followed the biblical primogeniture system, though some countries allowed daughters to inherit. However, in Iceland and other Nordic regions, only the eldest son inherited, while younger sons received only meager scraps and had to fend for themselves.

Olaf was now cultivating his own loyal followers in case his father’s estate and wealth were passed to his elder brother, Ulf. If he had his own people, he could still carve out his own territory.

If Haldor lived a few more years, by the time Olaf came of age, he was confident his father would support him in establishing new colonies—something that would require manpower.

The children of Haldor Manor were the future core of Olaf’s faction.

Beyond colonizing Vinland and even North America, Olaf also dreamed of, once he had the strength, planning ahead for future European conflicts like the Thirty Years’ War, the Great Northern War, and the Portuguese Restoration War, seizing opportunities to gain advantages. If all went well, he might surpass his father’s achievements in his lifetime.

On the twentieth day, early in the morning, Haldor led Kadir, Hoskuld, and five others on a hunting expedition, leaving Jot and Heiner behind.

That morning, Olaf was telling his twenty or so young followers about how loyal souls could enter Valhalla and ascend to heaven, weaving in stories of loyalty from ancient and modern times. Suddenly, he heard the drum from the watchtower in the distance. His brow furrowed, and he quickly stepped outside.

Western drums did not serve a timekeeping function, so there were no drum towers or clock towers. Instead, drums were used for military purposes, controlling marching speed and serving as warnings.

The drum at Haldor Manor was the only military drum they had brought, placed in the watchtower in case of enemy attacks.

Since the establishment of Haldor Manor, this was the first time the drum had been sounded.

Olaf knew that a few days earlier, his father had returned from a scouting trip and reported that there was an Indian tribe upstream of the waterfall river, about ten miles south of their camp. They had quietly approached and discovered that this was the only nearby tribe of savages, with a population of four to five hundred—far stronger than Haldor Manor.

Since Haldor had brought back this news three days ago, the people in the estate had been on edge, fearing an attack by the savages.

Now, with the drum sounding, both Olaf and the others in the estate assumed the Indian tribe was attacking. Many men, women, and children grabbed their weapons and rushed out.

Kalhu was on watch in the tower. He slid down from the four-man-height tower just as Jot and Heiner, who had been left in charge, approached with a dozen men.

“What’s happening?” Jot asked, his face lined with deep wrinkles from years of wind and sun. He gripped his large axe tightly, his eyes sharp as he looked at Kalhu.

Heiner also held his sword at his waist, his expression solemn. The Icelandic men behind them, though trained, had never experienced real battle, and their faces betrayed their unease.

“I saw two large ships approaching the mouth of the waterfall river,” Kalhu said urgently, pointing toward the northern river mouth beyond the trees. “The first is Thor’s Hammer, and the second is another large ship. Both have stopped at the river’s mouth, and people are already pulling them in with ropes.”

“Oh?” Jot frowned, turning to Heiner. “Hrutik is back. But what’s the ship behind him? Could it be pirates?”

Remembering Hrutik’s mission, Jot’s eyes lit up. “Kalhu, describe the second ship’s captain clearly.”

Kalhu scratched his head and described the second ship as he had seen it.

The more Jot listened, the brighter his eyes grew. Finally, he laughed heartily. “A brigantine—that’s it! That’s Hope, the ship Haldor gave to Haig seven years ago. Now Hope is following Thor’s Hammer here. Hrutik must have found Haig! Quick, Kalhu, ride to Grape Valley and find Haldor!”

Kalhu nodded and rode off.

Jot laughed again, clapping Heiner on the shoulder. “Haig might be coming himself. We should learn from him how to colonize and make a fortune in Vinland.”

Olaf stepped forward and reminded Jot, “Should we send someone to greet them?”

Jot clapped his hands and smiled. “Yes, I’ll go myself. You and Heiner stay in the estate and don’t go out.”

“Heiner, if I don’t fire a signal arrow, it means Hrutik and Haig are indeed returning. If I do, guard the estate well.”

Before leaving, the cautious Jot whispered this reminder to Heiner, then opened the gate and rode toward the two large ships now visible near the northern riverbank.

Chapter 2: The Feast

November 20, 1627, noon

The largest wooden house in Haldor Manor was filled with men and women. At the head of the long table sat Haldor and his wife, Katrin, with Haig and Ulf beside them. Further down were Hrutik, Hoskuld and his wife, Kadir and his wife, Jot and his wife, Heiner and his wife, Kalm, Kalhu, Tom, and others. Essentially, all the high-ranking families of Haldor Manor were present. Olaf and his younger siblings sat at the far end.

An hour earlier, Jot had welcomed Hrutik, Haig, and the others back to the manor. Not long after, Haldor returned as well. After warm embraces and handshakes, everyone entered Haldor’s great hall and sat down, drinking and sharing their experiences.

Katrin led the women in preparing a lavish lunch. They served salted fish and fresh cod, roasted to perfection, along with venison stewed in radishes and grape wine. There were also sheep’s head, lamb chops, and lamb intestines, accompanied by hogweed soup.

As they drank grape wine and enjoyed the feast, the sun began to set.

Olaf had two cups of grape wine—his first time tasting it. The flavor was a mix of sour, sweet, and astringent, nothing extraordinary, but the fruity aroma was rich. He thought the alcohol content was similar to beer, perhaps slightly stronger but not by much.

After the dishes were cleared, Katrin served milk and grape pudding. Everyone praised her cooking before turning to discuss their progress in Vinland.

When the topic of the “Saga of the Hrut Family” came up, Haig looked at Olaf in delight. “Olaf is too clever,” he said. “I’ve heard about this saga from Hrutik. It’s brilliant. If I weren’t Haig myself, I might have believed it too. How does your little head know about the Far East?”

Without hesitation, Olaf replied, “Ever since the spirit of our ancestor Hrut possessed me seven years ago, I’ve had dreams—dreams of distant lands, as if I were living there. The mighty Ming Dynasty and India, I saw them in my dreams. Perhaps it’s the ancestor’s revelation.”

Those present were all Olaf’s kin and Haldor’s trusted confidants. The women had been led away by Katrin to work on clothing, and the men had all witnessed Olaf’s extraordinary knowledge during the rescue of Haldor. Haldor, Haig, Ulf, and the others had even seen the miracle of the ancestor’s manifestation seven and a half years ago. They believed Olaf’s words without doubt, marveling at the ancestor’s guidance.

“I think what Olaf saw is real,” Ulf said after listening to the discussion. “Perhaps the ancestor wants us to colonize the East Indies in the future. But he first told us to colonize Vinland, so maybe we should use Vinland as our base before going further east.”

Haig nodded in agreement. “Ulf is right. I think so too.”

“Then we’ll consider it later,” Haig continued. “You’ve already accepted our family’s epic story. This legendary tale has made you a living legend in Iceland. We were wronged by Sigfoss, and we must return to take revenge. If we have soldiers and weapons, perhaps we can make Iceland independent again.”

Haldor nodded solemnly, looking at his brother with deep sincerity.

Haig’s current achievements were all thanks to his brother Haldor’s support. Combined with their strong bond from childhood, Haldor had always been the decision-maker. Without hesitation, Haig nodded. “Brother, you’re right. I’ll listen to you. We must return to Iceland for revenge. During the duel, it was young Sigfoss who ambushed me, and I killed him in self-defense. I’m innocent, but the Sigfoss family keeps tormenting us. I’ll kill Sigfoss, or I’ll never be at peace.”

Olaf watched his father, uncle, and brother speak with such heroic vigor, a presence far stronger than seven years ago.

Does a man achieve greatness, or does greatness shape the man? Or perhaps, in achieving greatness, a man also shapes himself. These thoughts suddenly flooded Olaf’s mind.

After a moment, Haig looked at Haldor earnestly. “Brother, your place isn’t as good as my Haig Fortress. It’s warmer and safer there. Why don’t you all move to Turning Point?”

Haldor thought for a moment. “But we’ve just cultivated over a virgate of land. I planned to clear five virgates before winter, planting oats and wheat. By next summer, we’ll have a harvest.”

“Father, even a virgate of newly cultivated land will only yield two or three thousand pounds of grain. We have enough food at Turning Point to last until next year. Why not abandon this place for now? When our population grows, we can reclaim it.”

Ulf added, seeing Haldor’s hesitation, “We should all live together. With over six hundred people now, and with these hundred Icelanders, we can recruit more white slaves from Scotland and Ireland, capture more Indian and Inuit slaves. By next summer, we can double our slave numbers. Before autumn, we’ll surely become a manor of over a thousand people.”

“Yes,” Hrutik said, his scarred face twitching with excitement. “Haldor, if we unite, we can take over the Oxhorn Peninsula in a few years.”

Haldor had seen the maps from Hrutik and Haig and knew that the southeastern peninsula of Vinland, shaped like an oxhorn, was called the Oxhorn Peninsula. After a moment’s thought and seeing the enthusiasm of his kin, he nodded. “Alright. While the weather hasn’t turned completely cold, let’s organize everyone to leave by ship. Two ships should be enough to transport all of Haldor Manor—people, livestock, and supplies.”

Haldor was better at thinking and listening than Haig. As the eldest son, he had received traditional Viking education from Iceland, mastering piracy, trade, hunting, fishing, whaling, and farming. Most importantly, he had successfully led White Hazel Forest Hrut Village.

Haig, on the other hand, was a specialist—excelling in piracy and skilled in hunting and whaling, but uninterested in other matters. So, Haldor’s arrival was a relief to Haig.

For over seven years, Haig and Ulf had made decisions together, but as Ulf grew older, he began to influence Haig more. With Haldor in Vinland, Haig felt he could finally step back, leaving colonization to his brother while focusing on war and hunting.

Thus, when Haldor agreed to move to Haig Fortress, Haig was overjoyed and immediately offered to hand over management of the fortress.

In Icelandic tradition, an elder brother bears some responsibility for his unmarried younger brother, which was why Haldor had taken on the burden after Haig’s killing, paying a hefty compensation.

Similarly, Haig’s current achievements in Vinland were built with Haldor’s financial support, manpower, and ships. Their bond was strong, and Haig, being a hero, had no intention of seizing control.

Everyone present found Haig’s decision natural, so Haldor nodded and instructed everyone to inform the freemen of the manor. They were to pack their belongings that night and set sail at dawn the next day, leaving Haldor Manor for Turning Point in southeastern Vinland.

Chapter 3: Relocation and the Harsh Winter

In late November 1627, the entire population of Haldor Manor—over one hundred and thirty people—boarded Thor’s Hammer and Hope, departing Waterfall Valley. Following the coastline of Vinland, they sailed eastward, arriving at Turning Point the following afternoon.

After the bustling relocation, the people of Haldor Manor settled in the central area of Haig Fortress. This inner stronghold, constructed by white slaves and Indian slaves under Haig’s orders, was nearly complete and ready for occupancy—perfect for Haldor and his people.

Most of the one hundred-plus residents moved into the inner fortress, while the remaining few households took up residence in nearby wooden houses. Originally belonging to white slaves, Haig had granted them timber and land to rebuild their own homes, effectively quelling their resentment.

Often, those of the same race were not necessarily kinder to one another than outsiders. The history of white slavery during the Age of Exploration was a bloody one, followed by the relentless exploitation of commoners during the Industrial Revolution. The serfdom in Eastern Europe persisted until the twentieth century.

The white slaves under Haig were those who had no means of survival in their homelands. Now, Haig had given them hope, and they obeyed diligently, working hard without complaint.

For the first two days, Haldor merely observed the situation at Haig Fortress. Even when Haig instructed his servants to report to Haldor and declared that they would follow Haldor’s commands in the future, Haldor refrained from interfering. He simply told everyone to carry on as usual and ordered the people of Haldor Manor to work alongside those of Haig Fortress, continuing his silent observations.

Since the people of Hrut Village were more trusted by Haldor and Haig, a hierarchy soon emerged within Haig Fortress. Naturally, Haldor, Haig, and the other leaders held the highest status.

Next were the Icelanders. The white slaves dared not offend them, and even in disputes, they endured silently. The original stewards of Haig Fortress were servants of the Haldor family, hailing from Hrut Village, so they naturally favored their own kind, handling matters unfairly.

Below the white slaves in status were the true savage slaves.

With just over six hundred people, Haig Fortress had already developed factions and social stratification from its primitive beginnings. Olaf believed this was not conducive to their future development.

The white slaves endured their grievances in silence, though they would not rebel. However, once they gained the status of freemen, their loyalty to the Haldor family might wane.

As for the savage slaves, they were of a different race and culture, utterly unwilling to submit. Before assimilation, they could only be ruled with an iron fist.

Determined to resolve the discord between the white slaves and the Icelanders as soon as possible, Olaf began contemplating methods of governance from ancient and modern times, seeking the best approach for the people of Vinland.

Haldor, Haig, and the other leaders might have noticed the elevated status of the Icelanders, but they welcomed this development. They believed their foundation still lay with the Icelanders, followed by the white slaves.

Under the leadership of the Icelanders at Haig Fortress, the white slaves began daily fishing in the Muskox River and hunting in the surrounding river valleys and forests.

Since Vinland had few medium to large animals like reindeer and black bears, their catches were mostly small game—rabbits, birds, and the like.

The pelts were skinned, dried, and stored, while the meat was salted and preserved.

The southeastern peninsula of Vinland, with its relatively warm climate and developed water systems, supported a variety of wildlife, sufficient to sustain several hundred people.

A few days later, Haldor and Haig discussed and decided to begin constructing a larger town on the plains before Haig Fortress before winter arrived, preparing for future population growth.

Haig naturally agreed with his brother’s decision. Under the direction of the white slaves, the slaves began felling trees and quarrying stone. The white slaves wielded the tools for cutting stone and chopping wood, while the Indian and Inuit slaves were responsible for the heaviest labor—hauling.

The area in front of Haig Fortress was gradually cleared, creating a vast open space. If fully developed, it would surpass Hrut Village in size. Haldor planned to name this future settlement Hrut City.

Haldor and Haig first had the white slaves raise the ground in the center of the square, then construct the largest two-story wooden house, intended to serve as the city’s center and their own manor. After all, improving living conditions was only natural when possible.

Inspired by Haldor’s daily militia training at his manor, Haig began selecting a dozen sturdy white slaves to partially withdraw from production and train with him.

As several light rains fell in succession, Vinland’s weather grew colder. By mid-December, streams began to freeze, and the savage slaves started falling ill, some even dying.

Haig handled these matters with experience, immediately ordering the other slaves to dispose of the sick and dead in a distant valley to prevent the spread of disease or even plague.

Olaf couldn’t bear to witness it and only heard of these events from others.

By late December, a heavy snowfall blanketed the area around Haig Fortress, transforming everything visible into a snowy kingdom.

The slaves and white slaves had already stopped working days before, huddling together in caves and wooden houses for warmth.

Olaf’s family stayed in their wooden house within Haig Fortress, warming themselves by the fireplace. Outside, the world was a frozen wasteland, with temperatures likely around minus ten degrees Celsius. Anyone venturing out would freeze to death in no time.

Thus, everyone in Haig Fortress remained indoors. Families like Haldor’s and Olaf’s, along with other leaders, had firewood and fireplaces, making their stay quite comfortable.

The white slaves, however, had only two sheepskin blankets to keep from freezing. Only when hunger became unbearable would they grit their teeth, rise from their beds, and cook some barley porridge to fill their stomachs.

The slaves in the caves fared even worse. They rarely ate anything substantial, and now their daily meal was a thin porridge of roots, dried fish, and black beans—enough to keep them from starving but far from filling. Without fat to provide warmth, they huddled in the deepest part of the cave, shivering. Every few days, one or two of the elderly or weak would freeze or starve to death.

Yet, the Indian slaves showed no emotion, as if they had grown accustomed to their miserable existence. Whether enslaved by whites or captured in tribal wars, their fate was either death—sometimes as a sacrifice to the gods—or a life of torment as slaves.

The fireplace burned warmly, and Pikku stood before it, stoking the fire with tongs to prevent smoke from billowing back into the room.

Olaf, dressed in a linen undershirt, sat by the stove, sipping milk as he lost himself in thought. His younger siblings napped in the inner room.

His brother Ulf and his father Haldor sat nearby with Haig, Kadir, and Heiner, drinking hot buttered beer and eating smoked meat. Katrin, Kadir’s wife, and his daughter were sewing small clothes for Heiner’s soon-to-be-born child.

In ancient times, with low productivity and technological levels, winter meant staying indoors.

In the Far East, the people of the Ming Dynasty might still venture outside, and even if they fell ill, a physician’s medicine could help them recover. But for Europeans, lacking proper medical care, falling ill in winter often meant death through bloodletting.

For centuries, the Icelandic tradition had been for families and friends to gather in winter, eating, drinking, and playing games indoors to pass the time.

This lifestyle fostered unity and trust among Icelanders.

In Iceland, people would stay indoors for at least five months, but Vinland’s climate was milder. Olaf estimated that by February of the following year, the weather would warm up.

His brother and elders spent their days drinking, chatting, and competing in arm-wrestling and other strength games. Olaf had no interest in these activities. Each day, attended by Pikku, he lived a life of ease, while quietly refining his plans for managing Haig Fortress and its future development. Once satisfied, he would present his ideas to his father and uncles.

Chapter 4: Icelandic Musketeers

Outside Haig Fortress, blanketed in snow and ice, Haldor and Haig personally led a militia of over a hundred Icelanders and white slaves, training in battle formations and martial arts.

Eighty sturdy white slaves wielded long spears in the front ranks, while thirty Icelanders armed with firearms stood in the rear. Haldor and Haig each commanded a unit, with Heiner, Kadir, and others overseeing smaller groups.

This formation was a fusion of the Spanish and Mauricean squares, with musketeers making up slightly more than a quarter of the force. If a small unit of light cavalry were added for flank protection, it would resemble a modernized miniature army.

Haldor had brought twelve firelock muskets to Vinland, two of which were older, bulkier models. Over seven years, Haig had purchased firearms twice, amassing over twenty muskets—enough to arm the thirty Icelandic musketeers with weapons to spare. The remaining firearms were distributed among the leaders, including Haldor.

After enduring the first snowstorm, the Icelanders, gradually adapting to the harsh winter, found Vinland’s climate milder than Iceland’s. Unwilling to spend the winter idly drinking and feasting, Haldor, Haig, and the others reorganized the militia into a force of one hundred and ten men. Thirty Icelandic men aged twenty to forty were selected as the core musketeers, while eighty of the youngest and strongest white slaves were chosen as spearmen. This exhausted their entire stockpile of weapons.

Under Hrutik’s leadership, the militia quickly took shape. Within days, they could march in formation, attack, and retreat on command.

Haldor and Hrutik, veterans of real battles, acknowledged that while this militia fell short of professional mercenary companies, it surpassed the hastily assembled levies of most nations. With a taste of real combat, they believed these men could transform into capable warriors.

“The cold forges the strongest wills,” Haldor declared, watching his militia drill in the snow. He clapped proudly as they practiced their charges and thrusts.

“Next spring, we’ll raid an Inuit village on the northern side of Oxhorn Peninsula and capture more of them,” Haig said, rubbing his hands together eagerly. “The peninsula’s savages are already few—mostly just Inuit now. We’ll sweep the peninsula clean, then head to England for more plate armor, firearms, and spears. Only then can we take on the large Indian tribe rumored to number over a thousand inside the island. We’re outnumbered, so we’ll need proper equipment.”

Haldor nodded. Over the past months, as they idled away their days in drink and revelry, they had already laid out plans for the coming years. Next spring, they would clear Oxhorn Peninsula of its primitives, enslaving some and selling the rest. The plunder, along with this year’s hunting yields, would be shipped to England or even Amsterdam for a good price, funding the purchase of armor, firearms, seeds, and—if funds allowed—horses. With these resources, they would recruit more white slaves from Ireland and Scotland. By the time their two large ships returned, Hrutr Estate’s power would have grown significantly, ready to conquer Vinland’s inner islands.

Since the end of the Middle Ages and the Hundred Years’ War, European military power had surged. The advent of firelock muskets, plate armor, new formations, and advanced naval technology had propelled European nations to the forefront of global military and technological dominance.

Over a century ago, Spain and Portugal had used their superior technology to conquer the two great empires of Latin America, establishing colonies. Southeast Asia and West Africa soon followed, falling under colonial rule. Even the Ming Dynasty had been attacked twice by Portugal, though their armed merchant ships were no match for the Ming navy, forcing them to settle for leasing Macau.

Through countless colonial wars and victories over indigenous governments across the globe, European nations had grown increasingly confident in their invincibility. The Renaissance further bolstered their cultural pride, reinforcing the belief that Europe was the center of world civilization.

While Europeans might still harbor reservations about the distant Eastern giant, they held no such concerns for the indigenous peoples of other continents.

Hrutik and Haldor shared this mindset. They believed that with sufficient firearms and armor, even a few dozen men could annihilate any primitive tribe.

A century ago, just 168 Spanish soldiers had toppled the Inca Empire, which ruled over much of South America. Around the same time, a few hundred Spanish troops had captured the Aztec emperor in Central America, and with the help of some traitorous Indians, they had destroyed the Aztec civilization, beginning their colonization of the region.

These historical examples made it impossible for Haldor and Hrutik to take Vinland’s natives seriously. The indigenous people here lacked even large tribes, let alone nations—how could they stand against civilized men armed with advanced weaponry?

Hrutik, a former mercenary, even mused that if they had faced the Inca or Aztec Empires, they too could have achieved legendary victories with just a hundred men.

The Inuit and Indians crafted primitive bows and arrows—not longbows, and with low draw weights—but they still posed some threat. Haldor believed that even a white slave was a valuable asset, and losses should be minimized. Thus, he planned to purchase plate armor from Europe.

Plate armor, nearly impenetrable even to English longbows, was the pinnacle of cold-steel-era defense. Olaf was convinced that white men armed with firearms and clad in plate armor could crush any cold-steel civilization or primitive people.

To improve the marksmanship of his Icelandic musketeers, Haldor allowed them to practice with lead shot and gunpowder. After expending three crates of ammunition, they could now hit targets reliably within seventy paces.

Most Icelandic men were descendants of Vikings. Though few still practiced the throwing axe and combat skills of their ancestors, many had at least some exposure to them. This Viking heritage gave them a natural aptitude for shooting, making firearms easier to master. Their physical conditioning was also superior to that of the white slaves from labor-stricken regions like Ireland and Scotland.

For Haldor and Haig, the Icelanders were the most trustworthy and easiest to train, forming the core of their elite musketeer force.

Though most white slaves came from Ireland and Scotland, they could still communicate with the Icelanders, and their shared Viking ancestry made them kin.

The white slaves worked hard for years, hoping to earn land and freedom—a better life. They were like the bandits of the Ming Dynasty, fighting for survival. Who would willingly leave their homeland if they could thrive where they were?

Haldor and his men aimed to dominate all of Vinland, becoming its overlords. Though their goals differed, their paths aligned. Colonizing Vinland benefited the white slaves as well, so in Haldor’s plans, they were the backbone of the colony. Only by continuously bringing more Europeans to Vinland could their rule be secured.

As for the Indians and Inuit, Haldor and his men saw them as nothing more than cheap labor and expendable livestock. Their lives held no value, and their deaths were no loss—a view shared by most white men of the time.

Olaf, however, was not so callous. He reasoned that these differences stemmed from cultural and educational disparities, leading to divergent values.

In this era, European nations were constantly at war. The conflicts between nobles, bourgeoisie, commoners, and slaves were stark. Healthcare and education were woefully inadequate, and merely surviving was a luxury. How could anyone afford compassion?

Moreover, European culture was dominated by religion. For centuries, Catholicism had preached the burning and killing of heretics, even organizing Crusades. Plunder and conquest were ingrained in the European psyche. They showed no mercy to the lambs they slaughtered or the enemies they faced.

When everyone was a bandit, preaching universal values was absurd—unless one was a fool.

The so-called human rights and women’s rights of later Western civilization were built upon the blood and tears of the colonized. Europe’s splendor was forged from the suffering of other nations. Only after gorging itself on the blood of others did Europe don its fine clothes and preach morality.

Olaf believed in adapting to one’s environment. Though he couldn’t yet accept the enslavement and slaughter of natives, he wouldn’t interfere. Competition was the law of nature. In this brutal world, one had to fight like a beast to survive.

After all, even among animals, the young competed for milk. The weak grew frailer until they perished.

As adults, they competed for mating rights, food, and leadership. Failure often meant death.

Even in human society, reproductive rights were tied to wealth, resources, appearance, and status. Those who couldn’t compete went hungry or survived on scraps.

Civilization was a luxury pursued only after basic needs were met. Like a fruit-laden plant, it had to take root in dark, damp soil teeming with insects and bacteria. A hanging garden, no matter how beautiful, couldn’t last—its beauty lacked foundation.

Note: The term “Inuit” refers to the indigenous people of the Arctic, known to the Indians as “Eskimos,” meaning “raw meat eaters.” This name stems from their habit of consuming raw meat, a practice linked to the scarcity of fuel in the Arctic and their consumption of raw whale skin and seal meat to supplement vitamins.

Chapter 5: Contemplating the Eight Banners System

Olaf watched with his own eyes as his father, Haldor, his uncle Haig, and his two uncles-in-law, Heiner and Ulf, gathered in the warmth of their home during the cold winter, drinking wine and discussing a series of measures for governing the Hrutr Estate.

Olaf found the discussion immensely enlightening. Though he had been considering similar matters himself, he felt that putting them into practice would be difficult. After all, what he knew was based on the governance principles of other countries, particularly ancient China, which were entirely different from the situation in Vinland.

In a feudal and backward era, the division of people into hierarchical classes was the fundamental basis for maintaining social stability and development.

Olaf believed that his father and the others had effectively structured the governance of Vinland into a three-tiered pyramid, with Icelanders at the top, white slaves in the middle, and savage slaves at the bottom. However, he worried that over time, as their territory expanded, the white slaves might grow dissatisfied. He thought that, when the time came, they could emulate the contemporary Jurchen chieftains of the Far East by “raising the banner” for the white slaves, granting them the status of freemen and the same rights as the Icelanders. Whether they remained slaves or became freemen, they would be more loyal in their service.

This idea led Olaf to consider adapting the Manchu Eight Banners system to create a framework that would uphold their rule. He was still pondering how to adjust it to fit the cultural norms of the Icelanders and other Europeans, making it acceptable and recognizable to all. If he could perfect this system, he was confident he could persuade Haldor to agree.

The Eight Banners system of the Manchus began with two banners, then expanded to four, and eventually eight, evolving as the Jurchen population grew.

Later, when the Mongols and Han Chinese were incorporated, the Mongol Eight Banners and Han Eight Banners were established.

In the early days, the Manchus were civilians when dismounted and soldiers when mounted. Thus, the Eight Banners, which governed all Manchus, became the foundation of the Qing Dynasty—the apex of the pyramid. Below them were the Mongol and Han Eight Banners, followed by the Green Standard Army and other Han collaborator forces. When the Manchus transitioned from a military organization to rulers, they began to rely on Han officials, though the Eight Banners system was not abolished—it simply lost its combat effectiveness over time.

Olaf’s knowledge of Qing history was limited, but he knew one thing: even in the mid to late Qing period, when the Eight Banners had fallen behind and their soldiers had lost their fighting spirit, the system still maintained strong control over its subjects.

The establishment of multiple levels of master-servant relationships—between banner lords and banner men, masters and slaves, armored soldiers and bondservants—unified the Eight Banners as a whole. In times of scarcity and barbarism, this system could unleash formidable combat power because the masters held absolute authority over their slaves, and the slaves had no choice but to serve their masters wholeheartedly.

One could say that the Eight Banners system was designed to cultivate slaves.

After experiencing the Middle Ages and the Renaissance, Europeans—except in Eastern Europe—had largely abolished serfdom. Traditional slavery had virtually disappeared, replaced by contractual slavery or indentured servitude, where personal property rights were respected.

Thus, it would be difficult for freedom-loving Europeans and their culture to accept a system where whites or even white slaves willingly became the slaves of banner lords, armored soldiers, or bondservants.

The success of the Eight Banners system lay in the fact that the Jurchens initially assimilated other Jurchen and Mongol tribes with similar cultures. Later, they conquered Korea, which had been enslaved by the Two Classes for centuries, and the captives accepted their fate as slaves.

After entering the Central Plains, the policy of “shaving heads and changing clothes,” along with widespread massacres, eliminated most of the righteous and culturally aware Han Chinese. The remaining were ignorant commoners, culturally crippled scholars, and cunning individuals who, under the education that mutilated their culture, eventually accepted the rule of the Qing court.

Olaf felt that if he were to adopt the Eight Banners system, it would likely face resistance due to cultural incompatibility. However, by changing its name, giving it a different facade, and making some adjustments, it might still work.

From December 1627 to January 1628, Olaf began researching how to adapt the Eight Banners system to Icelandic or Vinlandic culture. Meanwhile, Haldor and the others conducted outdoor drills every other day, training the 110 militia members.

“Excellence comes from diligence, neglect from frivolity.”

This ancient Chinese saying held true. While others remained inactive during the winter, the militia of the Hrutr Estate trained diligently. Haldor rewarded each militia family with a smoked fish daily, and the vast stores of grain, dried meat, and dried fish in Haig Fortress were rapidly being consumed.

Haldor, Haig, and Hrutik firmly believed that with such substantial investment, by spring, the 100-plus militia members would become an invincible force capable of crushing the natives.

To motivate the white slave spearmen and Icelandic musketeers, Haldor promised that those who performed exceptionally in training and battles against the natives would be rewarded with native slaves, money, land, or even the status of freemen.

Currently, within the entire Hrutr Estate, aside from the leaders and managers, no one—whether Icelander or otherwise—was a freeman. Thus, the prospect of becoming a freeman was highly appealing.

Under Haldor’s leadership, the brave Icelanders eagerly anticipated the conquest and enslavement of the natives. The white slaves under Haig’s command held the natives in even greater contempt. In terms of morale, the militia of the Hrutr Estate rivaled that of German mercenaries, much to the satisfaction of their commander, Hrutik.

On January 10th, after a warm meal of salted fish and oatmeal porridge, Haldor, Haig, Hrutik, and the other leaders set out with 110 militia members from Haig Fortress, marching deep into the interior of the northern peninsula to practice forced marches, building endurance and discipline. Olaf had wanted to join them, but Haldor, considering the difficulty of traveling in the snow, left Olaf behind with Ulf to watch over the estate.

Once outside Haig Fortress, the promise of land, slaves, and freeman status as rewards seemed to transform the 110 militia members into seasoned veterans. Even after marching eight or nine miles through the snow, feeling utterly exhausted, no one asked to rest.

Haldor, Haig, and Hrutik rode on horseback, while Heiner, Hoskuld, and Kadir followed alongside the troops, also training themselves.

Hoskuld felt as though he could barely breathe, and seeing the formation on the left stretch and deform, he knew everyone was nearing their limit. He approached Hrutik and whispered, “Hrutik, we should rest. If we keep going, someone might collapse.”

Hrutik, who had once led his mercenary unit to march twelve miles without rest, now saw the militia struggling after less than nine miles, their faces flushed and breath ragged. He frowned, then remembered the difficulty of marching in snow and nodded. He loudly ordered the troops to halt and rest, taking a sip of wine to quench their thirst.

The Icelandic musketeers took out their small ceramic flasks from their pockets, unstoppered them, and drank a few mouthfuls of watered-down wine.

The white slaves had no such luxury and could only scoop up handfuls of snow to chew on for hydration.

Hrutik intended to let the militia rest for the time it took to burn a candle, so he allowed them to move freely.

Many white slave spearmen and Icelandic musketeers wandered off to relieve themselves behind distant trees.

Haldor, Haig, and Hrutik dismounted and walked over to Hoskuld, chatting as they waited. Suddenly, they heard a gunshot in the distance, followed by an Icelander’s loud shout: “Chief Haldor! Commander Hrutik! We’re under attack!”

Haldor and the others hurriedly called the militia to assemble and rushed toward the source of the sound.

Chapter 6: The Deer Hunters

Nearly a hundred men, armed with long spears and firearms, climbed up a hillside. They spotted three Icelandic musketeers hiding behind a large rock, their firelock muskets at the ready. Beside them in the snow was a bone arrow made from a whalebone, clearly fired by the Inuit.

Haldor, Haig, and Hrutik, who had ridden up last, looked ahead and saw an Inuit hunter lying under a pine tree, dressed in sealskin. The bloodstains suggested he had been shot and managed to crawl a few more steps before collapsing.

Three more Inuit hunters quickly emerged from behind other boulders, dragging the wounded man down the slope.

Haig felt the cold wind blowing from behind and realized the four Inuit had appeared downwind to hunt reindeer. He spurred his horse forward, saying, “These are Inuit hunters from their tribe who killed them.”

Haldor and Hrutik followed on horseback, quickly catching up to the Inuit still struggling through the snow.

The three hunters, hearing the heavy hoofbeats behind them, panicked and abandoned their wounded companion, scattering in different directions.

No one could outrun a horse. Haig’s mount was the fastest, and in an instant, he caught up, swinging his large axe to decapitate one of the hunters.

Hrutik and Haldor were not to be outdone—one skewered a hunter with his long spear, while the other hurled a throwing axe, striking another in the back.

The three fleeing hunters were dead in an instant.

The militia, watching from below, cheered loudly as they witnessed their leaders and captains effortlessly slay the three Inuit hunters.

Haldor and the others were pleased. They ordered the sealskins stripped from the four hunters before returning to Haig Fortress.

Sealskin was a valuable commodity. Though the Inuit crafted it into clothing, their workmanship was crude. The skins could be disassembled and remade into hats, vests, waistcoats, and jackets. Four sets of sealskin could fetch several dozen silver shillings.

By the time they returned to Haig Fortress, it was dusk. The militia took their salted fish home for dinner, while Haldor, Haig, Hrutik, Heiner, Kadir, and the others gathered at Haldor’s house to drink and feast.

Olaf and Ulf saw the fur coats their father had tossed by the door and knew he must have encountered Inuit.

“Father, did you run into Inuit?” Ulf asked, taking his father’s coat.

“Four Inuit hunters crossed our path,” Haldor replied casually.

“I, Hrutik, and my brother easily killed three of them. That kid Hrutik has decent aim—he took one down right at the start,” Haig boasted, in high spirits.

As they sat around the wooden table, Katrin poured them each a cup of beer before heading to the kitchen to prepare dinner.

Hrutik took a sip of his drink and turned to Haig. “Are there many hunters in the Inuit tribes?”

“All adult males are hunters, but winter makes hunting more difficult than other seasons. They might only succeed once in three attempts. According to the Inuit slaves, they often go hungry in winter,” Haig replied offhandedly.

Olaf, sitting by the fireplace, glanced at Pikku and asked, “Is that true?”

Pikku, who had learned some Icelandic, thought for a moment before answering, “Yes, young master. In winter, the rivers freeze, making fishing difficult. We usually hunt reindeer and walruses, but the beasts are more alert in winter. We think the ice and snow amplify sounds, so we hide downwind to ambush them. Sometimes that doesn’t work, and we have to rely on traps.”

Olaf nodded. Ulf had told him that no more than two or three hundred Inuit remained on the Oxhorn Peninsula, living in small groups of ten to twenty. As long as they didn’t unite, a few dozen white slave spearmen and a dozen Icelandic musketeers could conquer them all.

It was winter, and the Inuit had even less contact with each other. Struggling against the harsh weather, they focused on survival, with many men hunting daily. If they eliminated a few Inuit hunters each day, the peninsula’s Inuit might vanish before spring.

Olaf was startled by the grim thought that crossed his mind. Have I been influenced by my brother, father, and uncles? Why am I thinking about how to destroy or weaken other tribes? Have I become ruthless and cold-hearted?

Haldor, Hrutik, and the others had already considered what Olaf was thinking. Over drinks, they decided that future training exercises would focus more on the northern regions. Any Inuit hunters they encountered would be killed on the spot. This winter would weaken the Inuit tribes while also serving as military training.

“Father, the Inuit’s short bows don’t have the range of our firelock muskets, and we outnumber them. It’s easy to deal with them, but we must be careful of their traps. They’re skilled hunters, and their traps are hard to detect. If someone steps into one, they’re as good as dead,” Ulf warned, recalling a white slave boy who had died a few years ago after stepping into a trap and being impaled by a wooden spike.

“That’s right,” Haig agreed, still shaken. “A few years ago, when we didn’t know about their traps, several white slaves died. The Inuit’s greatest skills are setting traps and training hunting dogs.”

Having lived in Vinland for nearly eight years, Haig had dealt with the Inuit many times. He had even attempted trade with them initially and knew them well. He had no respect for the Indians but admitted the Inuit’s traps were ingenious, and their hunting dogs were intelligent and obedient. Haig Fortress now had a pack of hunting dogs, descendants of puppies Haig had taken from an Inuit tribe. They were sometimes brought along on hunts.

“I heard Monsieur Champlain of Quebec say that smallpox has killed more than half of the Indians in Central America. There are far fewer Indians in the northern parts of America, but the London Virginia Company in the south sent smallpox-infected blankets to the Pequot tribe, causing heavy casualties,” Ulf said coldly. “The southern English are making fortunes much faster than we are or Quebec.”

“They have the support of their nations behind them. We’re just individuals—we must be cautious,” Haldor warned his son, fearing he was becoming too ambitious. “Our family has a strong foundation. Our ancestors worked for three generations to earn the title of ‘Grey Cloak Jarl’ and gain control of the Hrut Estate on the Seltjarnarnes Peninsula. Your father and I will create an even better foundation for you, Olaf, and Half. If you and your descendants manage it well, perhaps in three generations, we could establish a nation in Vinland. Don’t rush—some methods aren’t suitable for us.”

Hrutik nodded. “Whether we establish a nation or carve out our own territory in Vinland, once we control it and wealth appears, Denmark, England, or even France won’t tolerate us. They might try to annex us. That’s why we need a strong army. Your father and I will train elite soldiers over the next decade to protect our wealth.”

Chapter 7: Spring

After Haldor and the others had finished their business in his longhouse, Katrin had also prepared dinner—buttered lamb chops and boiled fox.

The fox had been shot by Hrutik in the wild two days prior. Since he had no family, he always ate at Haldor’s house and had given the fox to Katrin.

By the next afternoon, snowflakes had begun to drift down from the sky again.

The snow fell for two days, and once it cleared, Haldor and the others resumed leading the militia north for training while also clearing the wilderness of any animals and savages they encountered.

Time passed day by day, and before they knew it, it was the end of February 1628.

After more than two months of intense training, the militia of Hrutr Estate had undergone a remarkable transformation. Not only had they grown stronger, but their eyes had also taken on a fierce and ruthless glint. In that time, they had killed over fifty reindeer, two black bears, and twenty-three Inuit hunters.

Though the core force consisted of Icelandic firearms, the white slave spearmen had also all seen blood. This psychological transition, combined with twenty rounds of wilderness training, had turned them into true soldiers.

Hrutik was still somewhat dissatisfied, but Haldor was pleased. He believed that even if their victories had been easy, relying on superior numbers and weapons to crush beasts and savages, it had bolstered the militia’s confidence. They would only grow braver in the future.

The weather gradually warmed, and the ice and snow on the ground melted away day by day.

When Olaf woke up that morning and pushed open the window, he saw that except for the shadows cast by the house and the rocks and trees, there was no trace of snow left outside.

Vinland was located where the eastern coasts of what would later become the United States and Canada met, belonging to Canada. Its latitude was roughly the same as the Later Jin of the Ming Dynasty, and the temperatures were similar.

Though spring was approaching, the temperature still hovered around freezing.

After being cooped up in the longhouse for two months, Olaf took his younger siblings out to play after breakfast.

Haldor had also left early that morning with the militia. They were no longer heading north because the warming weather and the high number of hunter deaths had caused the northern Inuit tribes to consolidate and move in large groups. Haldor’s forces were not in a position to engage them directly.

Today, Jot, Kadir, and Heiner had all stayed behind at Haig Fortress. With the weather warming, they were preparing to continue leading the remaining white slaves and savage slaves in the construction of Hrut City outside the fortress.

After leaving, Haldor and his men headed south, carrying bottles and jars to collect seawater for boiling into salt.

Icelanders typically relied on salt purchased from England, as England produced both sea salt and well salt. Sometimes, coastal areas would also boil their own seawater for salt, but since Iceland had few trees and insufficient fuel, only wealthy chieftains and merchants with large herds and pastures could afford to burn animal dung as fuel to sustain salt production. They would then sell the salt within the island.

The salt Haldor’s group had brought to Vinland was nearly depleted. Over the past seven years, Haig and his men had been boiling their own salt because Vinland’s abundant vegetation provided plenty of fuel. They never wasted silver on purchasing salt, instead using cheap slave labor to produce it.

The southeastern coast of Vinland was warmed by the Atlantic current, so the sea never froze. Haldor’s group did not need to bring ice-breaking tools as they followed the Muskox River south to the mouth of the sea, where they collected water before returning to the estate together.

Inside Haig Fortress, Olaf was wandering around with his younger siblings when he ran into Lixstrom, Halik, Solrak, and Ilugi, who had also come outside.

It had been two months since they had last seen each other, and the group greeted Olaf with handshakes and hugs before gathering around him to chat.

“Olaf, you’ve gotten fatter and taller,” red-haired Tom said in surprise, looking at Olaf, who had been only as tall as his eyebrows the year before but was now nearly his height.

The other boys only then realized that Olaf had unknowingly grown to be one of the taller youths among them. Remembering that Olaf was only eleven years old, and that Haldor, Haig, and Ulf were all rare giants, they looked at him with envy.

“Maybe in a couple of years, you’ll be as tall as your brother Ulf,” Solrak said with a laugh. “Then, except for that big oaf Halik, we’ll all have to look up to you.”

Olaf was about to respond when he suddenly heard several sharp cracks of a whip from outside Haig Fortress, followed by a mix of Scottish and Icelandic voices.

“Stupid fools, move faster!”

“It’s the white slaves urging the savages to work,” Tom blurted out. His father was currently supervising the construction site outside the fortress, and he was sure the white slaves were being harsh to impress him.

Olaf led the boys to the open gate to look outside.

The two young white slave guards quickly raised their hands to stop them, speaking in awkward, stumbling Icelandic: “Please, Young Master Olaf and the others, do not go out. The master has ordered that the elderly and children are not to leave the castle.”

Olaf glanced at the two thin white slave youths, who were only eighteen or nineteen and seemed inexperienced. They were clearly nervous, their freckled faces trembling as they saw Olaf approaching with a group of Icelandic boys.

Yet they remembered their duty and bravely stood their ground. Olaf felt a liking for them and nodded. “We’ll just watch the slaves building Hrut City from here. Can you open the door a little so we can see? I promise we won’t go out.”

Perhaps because Olaf’s request was reasonable, or perhaps because his tone was gentle and his manner approachable, the two white slave youths gradually relaxed.

They exchanged a glance, then gritted their teeth and said, “Alright, Young Master Olaf. If you’re just going to look from the doorway, we can’t very well refuse.”

With that, the two boys pulled back the bolt and slowly opened the left wooden door just enough to see the outside.

Olaf and the others stood at the doorway, peering out. They saw hundreds of massive logs piled on the flat ground below Haig Fortress, with over twenty white slaves sitting on the timber, sawing and shaping the wood.

To the east of the logs was a pile of stones of various shapes. Dozens of gaunt savages, under the watchful eyes of white slaves wielding whips, were struggling to push the stones on small logs. After pushing them a short distance, they would move the empty log to the front and push again, using the rolling motion to reduce friction and move the stones, which weighed tens of thousands of pounds.

Olaf counted and realized there were only a little over a hundred savage slaves on the construction site, far fewer than the over two hundred there had been two months ago.

“Why are there fewer savage slaves?” Olaf asked the two white slave youths beside him.

The red-haired one hurriedly replied, “I heard this winter was colder than before, so more savages froze or died of illness. It seems over thirty slaves died in the caves, and another twenty or so are too sick to work.”

Olaf looked at the emaciated slaves, their familiar yellow skin making his heart ache. After a moment’s thought, he asked, “What are the symptoms of their illness?”

The white slave youth shook his head. “I don’t know. Everyone’s afraid of being cursed by the savages’ demons, so no one dares go near them.”

Olaf knew that the white people of Europe still believed diseases were curses or possessions by demons, which was why many unconventional and punitive “treatments” existed. After a moment’s thought, he waved to Jot, who was far off on the construction site, and called out loudly.

“Uncle Jot! Uncle Jot!”

Chapter 8: Boiling Salt

Olaf shouted loudly, summoning Jot, who was overseeing the workers. Jot frowned as he looked at the group of children before him, snorting coldly. “What are you all running around for? Go home!”

The boys were startled and looked to Olaf. Olaf waved his hand. “You all go ahead. I need to talk to Uncle Jot.”

With the eldest brother’s word, the boys left together, and Half and Gerny were taken away by Tom and the others to play.

Only after the boys had left did Jot curiously ask, “Olaf, what’s the matter?”

“Uncle Jot, I want to know about the savages in the cave behind the mountain,” Olaf asked seriously.

“Why are you asking about that?” Jot furrowed his brow slightly. He had intended to brush him off casually, but remembering Olaf’s unusual maturity and wisdom, he sighed softly and pulled him into the shelter of a wall out of the wind. Lowering his voice, he said, “Thirty-six have died this winter, mostly the old, the young, and women. There are still twenty-eight sick, and they probably won’t make it. Tomorrow, if those patients don’t improve, they’ll be driven out of the cave to fend for themselves.”

“That won’t do,” Olaf frowned. “Driving the sick out in this season is just sending them to die in the wilderness.”

“But if we keep the sick in the cave, the disease will spread to the healthy savages, and eventually, it might even spread to the white slaves and us. We can’t take that risk,” Jot was cautious, explaining in a grave tone.

Olaf knew Jot was right, but he couldn’t bear to ignore the natives’ lives. After a moment’s thought, he asked quietly, “Can you tell me about the symptoms of those savages?”

Jot thought for a moment and said, “It should be a cold. Drinking some hot grape juice would help, but we don’t have much of our own. How can we waste it on the natives?”

Olaf tried to suggest, “Can I go take a look? Maybe I have a way to help these sick slaves recover faster.”

Jot firmly shook his head in refusal. “Impossible. It’s too dangerous there. If your father finds out I let you go to such a place, he’ll kill me. And you shouldn’t go either.”

Olaf asked again, but seeing Jot’s resolute attitude, he could only shrug and give up, saying, “If they have a cold, I think there are still some ways.”

“What ways?” Jot was also concerned about the slaves’ health, not only because slaves were like livestock, like wealth, but also because he was worried the natives might spread the disease to the white slaves and the Icelanders.

Olaf didn’t know what kind of cold these natives had, but he didn’t know how to treat it. However, he knew some auxiliary treatment methods. So, he invoked the name of his teacher, Elder Amie, and under the pretense of teaching new treatment methods from the church, he told Jot what he knew.

“Uncle Jot, Elder Amie says that in Rome, when people have a cold, they drink hot water continuously, keep the air circulating, and eat some nutritious porridge. Over time, they get better. If they don’t, then not even God can save them.”

After saying this, Olaf turned and went home. He had told all he knew. Whether it would help those natives, he didn’t know. He could only hope they would recover soon.

After Olaf left, Jot turned and walked toward the construction site outside. Several white slaves saw Lord Jot coming and hurriedly bowed and scraped. Jot casually called one over and, following Olaf’s suggestion, gave orders. He also instructed them to ensure the supply of a pot of black bean and barley porridge daily for the savage slaves. With that, Jot put the sick slaves out of his mind and focused on the construction of Hrut City.

By midday, Haldor led the militia back to Haig Fortress. The white slave militia carried all the seawater clay pots back to their homes, handing them over to families with women to boil sea salt. Haldor had already promised that after the salt was boiled, these families would be given a portion of the sea salt first. Moreover, the firewood for boiling salt could be taken from the fortress’s warehouse. This good news made every family very enthusiastic, and from the afternoon onward, they began boiling sea salt day and night.

Sea salt was the solid crystals left after boiling seawater. Although mostly sodium chloride, it also contained impurities and harmful substances from the sea. However, the seawater at this time had no industrial waste, and the seawater in the northern Atlantic was cleaner. So, whether it was the seawater from Vinland or Iceland, the sea salt produced was basically healthy.

Salt was a necessity for human survival. Even if it was toxic, people had to eat it to survive. Moreover, people at this time didn’t understand the composition of sea salt; they only knew that boiling seawater could produce sea salt.

Olaf, having nothing to do, took his younger siblings and Pikku to watch the sea salt boiling. He found that they first boiled the seawater into brine, then poured all the thick brine into a clay pot to boil, finally obtaining some white salt crystals.

Ten clay pots held about fifty to sixty gallons of seawater, but after boiling, they could only get less than ten spoonfuls of salt grains. Olaf thought this efficiency was too low. When summer came, he could try opening a salt field to sun-dry salt. If successful, not only could he use it himself, but he could also sell it as a commodity. After all, sun-drying salt had almost no cost, and whatever was sold was profit. At worst, it could be sold cheaper than other salts. Wouldn’t that ensure sales?

Sun-drying salt was something most Europeans had never encountered or even heard of, but Olaf had seen it with his own eyes in his previous life. He thought it was really worth trying in the summer.

From late February to mid-March 1628, over nearly twenty days, Haldor led the militia to the seaside more than ten times, bringing back two thousand pots of seawater. In the end, they consumed a small mountain of firewood and boiled less than ten pounds of sea salt.

Haldor first took out one pound to distribute to the ten or so white slave families who had boiled the salt. Then he took out six pounds as a reward for the white slave long spears and Icelandic musketeers for their months of hard training.

He kept two pounds in reserve and divided the rest among Jot, Hrutik, Kadir, Hoskuld, and others.

The salt crisis at Hrutr Estate was temporarily resolved. Both the Icelanders and the white slaves were overjoyed, praising Lord Haldor as a great benefactor.

Now, salt was nearly ten times cheaper than it had been hundreds of years ago. After all, hundreds of years ago, salt had been as rare as spices, silver, and gold, and could be used directly as currency in commerce.

Salt was still not a cheap seasoning. Ordinary people could only buy it from the church, and the price was still thirty to forty times that of grain. Ordinary families only used salt when curing meat or eating meat, and they were usually reluctant to use much.

Now that Haldor had rewarded everyone with salt, it was like bestowing wealth, an expensive necessity for life. Since early winter, the white slaves’ mouths had been as bland as birds’. If it weren’t for the salted fish they received during training, their strength wouldn’t have kept up with the training.

Now that everyone had salt, they were all overjoyed and grateful to Haldor.

The Icelanders, influenced by the white slaves’ emotions, also held Haldor in even higher esteem.

Generous and magnanimous, Haldor was indeed a rare hero among the current lords of the manor and chiefs. Even in Iceland, he was very popular.

Chapter 9: Beaver Pelts

As mid-March arrived, the weather grew warmer. Though nights and mornings remained chilly, the midday sun compelled people to shed a layer of their winter garments. Many trees—maples, birches, and hazels—once bare in autumn and winter, now sprouted tender buds. In less than a month, the land would burst into a fragrant spring, alive with birdsong and blossoms.

The rivers thawed, and small creatures and beasts emerged, their movements signaling the rebirth of nature. The sight filled the heart with joy.

After nearly twenty more native slaves had perished, the survivors adjusted to their conditions. Most of the sick gradually recovered, their health and strength restored by improved food and the warming weather. They could now endure the daily toil, however grueling.

With the arrival of spring, Olaf could no longer restrain himself. He resumed teaching the young men the ancestral crafts passed down through generations.

For close combat, they trained with swords, axes, and long spears. At medium range, they practiced precision strikes with throwing axes and javelins. Archery, however, was not a Viking specialty—only a few had mastered it, and Olaf, lacking skill in it himself, abandoned the practice. He believed firearms would soon replace bows entirely.

Ulf and Haig occasionally guided Olaf and the others in martial training, but most days, Olaf taught alone. The young men understood that their future depended on mastering these skills—whether for conquering Vinland or distant lands. They practiced diligently, and within days, their movements grew fluid and precise.

Since farming season had not yet begun, Jot continued overseeing the white slaves and native laborers in the construction of Hrut City. Outside Haig Fortress, the sound of hammers and saws filled the air as buildings rose.

Haldor, Haig, Ulf, and others led the militia, now transformed into a hunting party. They scoured the waterways for beavers, killing any they found and bringing the carcasses back to the estate. There, they carefully scraped away fat and flesh from the pelts before drying them. The meat was divided among the hunters.

While hunting beavers, they also targeted marten, squirrels, black bears, reindeer, and the massive white wolves unique to Vinland. Upon spotting any of these creatures, they fired their guns and arrows in unison, ensuring a hit. Then, they approached with deer-hide-wrapped clubs to finish off the wounded beasts, preserving the pelts as intact as possible.

Spring was the peak season for animals with valuable fur—emerging to forage, mate, and recover from winter starvation. Their coats, thickened by the cold, were at their most luxurious. Late winter and early spring were the best times to hunt and skin them.

Haldor led the militia out each morning, then divided them into six smaller teams, each led by himself, Haig, Hrutik, Kadir, Hoskuld, or Heiner. They scattered to hunt.

Every evening, they returned to Haig Fortress with seven to ten small or medium-sized animals—mostly beavers, river otters, white wolves, and foxes. Reindeer were rare; these migratory creatures seemed to have retreated to Vinland’s inner islands. Black bears, apex predators, were already nearly extinct on the peninsula after seven or eight had been killed.

For eight years, Haig had built his fortune in Vinland on the backs of beavers, river otters, seals, and other creatures with prized pelts.

In Europe and Asia, rare furs from northern animals—marten, beavers, river otters, and sea lions—were hunted to supply the nobility. In the Ming Dynasty’s northeast, such furs were reserved for emperors and high-ranking officials. Even the wealthiest commoners were forbidden from owning or wearing them.

Similarly, in Europe, beaver and fox pelts from the northern forests were sold to the elite, especially in the wealthy Mediterranean nations.

Since the early Middle Ages, Scandinavians had traded furs with Eastern, Central, and Western Europe. Their migration south from the Scandinavian Peninsula was driven by the desire to control trade routes and secure better trading grounds.

The French and English colonization of North America was, in truth, a hunt for beaver and river otter pelts. Centuries of overhunting in Northern Europe had nearly wiped out these animals, making their furs scarce.

Across the Atlantic, however, North America’s cold regions teemed with beavers. The French and English, eager for profit, began sending merchants in the early 17th century to establish trade posts, hunt pelts themselves, and buy from the natives. These furs were then sold to European nobility.

As for exporting to other nations, both France and England were still in the early stages of colonization. Their populations and resources were insufficient to supply Europe with large quantities of beaver pelts. But within fifty to a hundred years, as their colonies expanded—especially France’s—the fur trade would become a cornerstone of their economies, replacing Northern European furs and dominating the European market.

Newfoundland’s cod fisheries were another product, but in the 17th century, with limited productivity, the impact on Europe was minimal. Only a few tons of fish were supplied annually.

The French Quebec region and the English New England area each had only a few hundred settlers—far fewer than Vinland. Weak in both population and strength, they sought alliances with Haig’s colonists. This was partly to purchase beaver pelts but also to unite the scattered white settlers against the natives, ensuring the indigenous people respected their strength and unity.

If France and England’s colonies remained weak—or weaker than Vinland—their friendship with Haig might endure. But if their power grew to surpass Vinland’s, they would never tolerate a rival on their doorstep.

Haldor and Haig did not yet grasp this reality, but Olaf had long been wary. He had repeatedly warned his father and uncle to remain vigilant toward the nearby English and French colonies. In little over a century, the Anglo-French wars would erupt across North America, fueled by colonial rivalry. History was a lesson they could not ignore.

Behind Haig Fortress, a cave had been expanded into a storage room. Inside, stacks of precious pelts grew daily. A rough count revealed hundreds of hides—280 beaver pelts, over 200 river otter pelts, and another 200 marten pelts. The rest were far less valuable. These had been accumulated since autumn, and Haig estimated that selling them would yield at least ten thousand silver marks—enough to buy three large ships.

Haldor’s ancestors had farmed and herded in Iceland for decades without amassing such wealth. Yet in Vinland, in less than a year, they had acquired assets worth ten thousand silver marks. The realization filled them with joy and motivation.

Olaf, upon learning this, was stunned. He now understood why Europeans of this era were so eager to plunder. Colonization and theft required no investment or production—only the seizure of others’ labor to amass wealth. It was quick, easy, and lucrative. Who wouldn’t be tempted?

Chapter 10: Opportunity

On the morning of March 17th, Haldor gathered Haig, Hrutik, and six or seven others at home to discuss how to sell the furs stored in the warehouse.

Hoskuld, Kadir, and Heiner, unfamiliar with the situation, remained silent. Haig scratched his head and said, “Brother, following our usual practice, by June, merchant ships traveling between Quebec City and Le Havre in France will come to buy our furs. I used to sell half to them and take the remaining half to England and Amsterdam. Since we’re not a state-backed colonial company, our strength can’t compare to Quebec’s, so we have to give the French half. Fortunately, Champlain is decent enough—he only offers us a price one-third lower than the market rate.”

“Why not go to Lisbon? The Portuguese and Spanish are the richest,” Haldor asked.

Haig’s expression darkened as he shook his head. “We went four years ago, but it didn’t go well. Spain and Portugal are now one country, both devout Catholic nations. Lisbon is chaotic, and as soon as we opened our mouths, we were met with hostility—after all, we northerners are Protestants. We didn’t know any of the local power players there, so even the best pelts couldn’t fetch a good price that year.”

“Hmph, the Spanish are too arrogant. No wonder they were defeated by England—serves them right,” Hoskuld slammed the table and cursed.

“Ulf, Olaf, what do you think? Should we stick to tradition or make a change?” Haldor felt no need to give the French any favors but hesitated and wanted to hear his two sons’ opinions.

Ulf thought for a moment and said, “Father, Mr. Champlain in Quebec City is a good man with considerable influence in France. I think it’s necessary for us to maintain a good relationship with him. After all, we’re criminals in Iceland and outlaws in Denmark. With France’s help, we might gain a higher status in the future.”

Haldor was moved by these words and nodded, ready to agree. But remembering his second son’s extraordinary wisdom and foresight, he restrained himself to hear what Olaf had to say.

Olaf agreed with Ulf’s point—maintaining good relations with France was indeed beneficial from their perspective. However, Europe was currently embroiled in what could be called the first pan-European war, the “Thirty Years’ War.” The outcome of this conflict would determine the future standing of the Holy Roman Empire and the Spanish Empire’s Catholic alliance against the Protestant Union, comprising France, England, Denmark, Sweden, the Netherlands, and others. Every participating nation was going all out, committing money, resources, and manpower.

The Thirty Years’ War had been raging since 1618. By 1625, King Christian IV of Denmark, persuaded by France and backed by England, France, and the Netherlands, had personally led an invasion into northern Germany, achieving a series of victories and occupying the entire northwestern region.

Now, in 1628, the tide had turned. In August of the previous year, at the Battle of Lutter, King Christian IV had been defeated by the forces of the Holy Roman Empire, forcing him into a humiliating retreat that severely weakened his forces. As a result, the territories he had captured in 1627 and 1628 were gradually being reclaimed by the Holy Roman Empire. The southern shore of the Baltic Sea was nearly lost, and if it weren’t for the Holy Roman Empire’s commander, Wallenstein, lacking ports and a navy, he would have already marched on Copenhagen.

Olaf, who was well-versed in the Thirty Years’ War, clearly remembered that King Christian IV had relied on Sweden to repel Wallenstein’s advance. Then, in May of the following year, 1629, he would sign a treaty with Holy Roman Emperor Ferdinand II, completely abandoning any involvement in German affairs and allowing Catholicism to revive within his kingdom.

The result of King Christian IV’s involvement in the Thirty Years’ War was a complete disaster—losing both his army and his reputation across Europe, and utterly failing to curb the rise of Sweden, the “Lion of the North.” Under King Christian IV’s decades-long rule, Denmark had gradually declined into a second-rate European power. This was why Olaf paid no heed to Denmark and dared to dream of returning to Europe to secure Iceland’s independence.

France emerged as the greatest victor of the Thirty Years’ War. The hopes for German unification and a powerful Holy Roman Empire vanished with their defeat, and the Bourbon dynasty completely overshadowed the Habsburgs, becoming the most powerful dynasty in Europe.

Olaf understood the immense benefits of maintaining good relations with France. France had no ambitions in the Nordic region, but the war wouldn’t end until 1648. At least until 1643, when the Prince of Condé crushed the Spanish army, France wouldn’t have the capacity to send naval and land forces to North America. During the Thirty Years’ War, both England and France relied on criminals and white slaves to develop their territories.

Olaf believed that the fifteen years between 1628 and 1643 were a golden period for his family’s development in North America. Once the European war ended, the colonial efforts would intensify, and by then, if his family still sought territorial claims in North America, France and England would likely be unwilling to accommodate them.

Olaf couldn’t directly tell his father, uncles, and brothers about the history of the Thirty Years’ War, but after some thought, he decided to use Elder Amie as a pretext to convince them.

“Actually, last year in Big Port, when I bid farewell to Elder Amie, he told me that according to his sources, King Christian IV had already suffered consecutive defeats last year. Meanwhile, France and England are deeply involved in the war against Austria. I think this presents an opportunity for us,” Olaf said, his eyes growing brighter as he stood up and looked at Haldor and the others.

Haldor, Haig, Hrutik, and the others couldn’t fathom what opportunity Olaf was talking about, especially the news of King Christian IV’s consecutive defeats, which they found hard to believe. After all, the last news they had received before leaving Iceland was that King Christian IV had already occupied northern Germany.

Kadir urgently asked, “Olaf, did Elder Amie say how King Christian was defeated?”

Olaf pretended to think before replying, “I heard him say that the Emperor of Austria hired General Wallenstein to defeat King Christian.”

“Is it Albrecht von Wallenstein, the Duke of Friedland who suppressed the Bohemian rebellion?” Hrutik suddenly furrowed his brow and asked.

Olaf nodded. “That’s right, it’s him.”

“Oh, if it’s him, then it’s very likely true. I’ve heard of this man—he’s a military genius. The thirty to forty thousand mercenaries under his command are all battle-hardened veterans,” Hrutik said with a wary expression.

“Even if Denmark is defeated, what good does that do us? How is this an opportunity?” Haig asked in confusion.

Heiner suddenly smiled and asked, “Olaf, are you saying that even with England and France involved, the Holy Roman Empire won’t be defeated?”

Olaf nodded. “That’s right. Spain and the Holy Roman Empire combined have the power to change the European situation. Now that Denmark has been defeated, the north can only rely on Sweden, but impoverished Sweden doesn’t have enough strength. Even with French and English support, they might not be a match. Without a strong northern force to restrain the Holy Roman Empire, France won’t dare to act rashly, fearing a two-pronged attack from Spain and Austria. England, being overseas, won’t fully commit either. So, I think either the Protestant Union can’t win, or this war will drag on for another decade.”

“You’re right,” Heiner nodded and said softly, “If the pan-European war drags on for another decade, we won’t have to worry about the French and English colonial companies in Vinland. After all, our strength surpasses theirs. I think that even if we’re given another ten or eight years, we can occupy Vinland and the western continent. By then, we won’t have to worry about the French and English colonial companies anymore.”

“Are you saying that England and France are too busy with the West Indies, so we can accelerate our expansion and colonization?” Ulf said, growing excited. “Yes, as long as France and England don’t send large numbers of troops, armed merchant ships, and warships, we don’t have to pay them any mind. We can sell all the pelts to the Dutch, quickly recruit white slaves, and expand our territory.”

Ulf’s words livened up the meeting, and everyone began discussing how to accelerate their development.

Since everyone believed what Olaf said, they were convinced that Vinland would have eight to ten years of uninterrupted development. If they didn’t seize this opportunity to expand, it would be a shame.

Chapter 11: The Decision

Inside Haldor’s longhouse, the crowd chattered away, their opinions gradually converging. Everyone agreed to abandon selling beaver pelts to the French this year, opting instead to transport all their furs to Europe.

“Haldor, what do you think?” Haig chuckled, seeking his brother’s opinion.

“But we’re far away in Vinland, West Indies,” Haldor mused, raising a sharp concern. “If we want to grow our population, military, and fleet, we’ve already angered Denmark. If we offend France and England too, how will we find shipyards to build large vessels?”

Ulf and Kadir fell silent, while Olaf furrowed his brow before smoothing it out again.

Heiner let out a hearty laugh. “The Dutch are nothing but profit-driven merchants. As long as the price is right, they’ll build ships for us—and theirs are the best in the world.”

Olaf added, “Northern Europe is locked in a struggle between Denmark and Sweden for dominance. With Denmark’s defeat, Sweden will surely take up the Protestant cause against the Holy Roman Empire. Europe is heading for endless war. The Netherlands, as a rising small nation, will seize the opportunity to grow its economy. If we have the money, Amsterdam will take any order we place.”

The Dutch Republic, known as the “Seven United Provinces,” was small in land but dense in population. Dubbed the “carriage of the sea,” the Netherlands was the sole maritime hegemon of the 17th century. Even as England rose in the mid-to-late 17th century, it remained the Netherlands’ junior partner at sea. Had France not invaded and seized Amsterdam, the Dutch might have become the arbiters of European affairs. Alas, the “Sun King” ultimately dominated Europe.

Thus, when Olaf and Heiner proposed purchasing ships from the Netherlands, Haldor and the others quickly agreed. Though the Netherlands was still a second-tier nation, Dutch merchant ships already plied the world’s oceans. Dutch merchants were renowned for their business integrity and quality, earning the European proverb: “Doing business with the Dutch is the safest.”

Little did they know that in a few years, the Dutch navy would emerge in force, marking the beginning of their global dominance. By mid-century, of the twenty thousand ships sailing the world, fifteen thousand would fly the Dutch red, white, and blue tricolor.

“That settles it,” Haldor declared after surveying the room and seeing unanimous approval. “We won’t sell our furs to the French anymore.”

Haig narrowed his eyes, his voice cold. “If we had a nation backing us, I wouldn’t hesitate to stop losing money to the French. This year, even if we have to sell everything we own, we’ll buy two armed merchant ships.”

Jot nodded in agreement. “Armed merchant ships can protect the Thor’s Hammer and the Hope, safeguard Vinland, and carry more cargo. It’s a good plan.”

Ulf chimed in, “Every spring and summer, French and English ships fish for cod east and south of Turning Point. They even dry and salt cod on the shores of Nova Scotia, across the Cabot Strait from us. By autumn, they return to Europe with holds full of dried cod, each shipment worth two thousand pounds. That cod is our wealth—they’re stealing from us. With armed merchant ships, we can drive those fishing boats away.”

Haldor and the others wholeheartedly agreed.

Previously, they had feared offending England and France and lacked the strength to monopolize Vinland and its surrounding resources. But now, with both nations embroiled in a pan-European war, it was clear that no state power would intervene in Vinland until the war’s end. This window of opportunity was their chance to rapidly expand their influence. Seizing wealth and monopolizing resources was the first step.

Haldor still worried about potential shifts in the European conflict. He turned to Ulf and instructed, “The warm southeasterly winds are growing stronger. With the Gulf Stream, it’ll take less than half a month to reach Ireland. I think you, Hrutik, and Haig should take the furs, wine, and salted cod back to Europe. First, gather intelligence on the pan-European war. Second, selling the goods early will give us time to clear inventory. If things go as we expect, head straight to the Netherlands to buy ships, then return with white slaves and military supplies.”

“Understood,” they all replied in unison.

“To prepare more goods, I’ll personally lead a team to fish for cod and make salted fish. Hrutik, you and Haig continue hunting beavers. We must save enough to build ships, buy firearms, plate armor, and even cannons.”

“Prepare for another month. You can set off at the end of April.”

After the meeting, Hrutr Estate shifted into high gear. Each day, the Icelanders, white slaves, and savage slaves divided their labor—constructing houses, quarrying stone and timber, fishing, and hunting.

Olaf continued his daily training of the young Icelanders on the estate. These twenty-odd youths would become his future core followers. Once they matured into seasoned soldiers, Olaf planned to select young white slaves as their subordinates. Of course, this depended on Olaf having the funds to purchase white slaves, as Haldor controlled the estate’s white slaves, and Olaf had no authority to claim them.

Olaf wasn’t particularly talented in his past life, so making a fortune now wasn’t easy. However, he had spent some time as a child living with his uncle in the countryside, where he had helped cultivate crops like corn and squash. Thus, he was confident in his ability to grow the “Three Sisters”—corn, squash, and beans—commonly cultivated by the Indians.

These Indian crops had already spread to Europe and even Asia, but large-scale cultivation wouldn’t begin for another two hundred years.

Corn could supplement rye and wheat, squash contained sugar, and beans were edible, protein-rich, and could be pressed for oil. If developed properly, these three crops could form the foundation of their livelihood.

Moreover, Olaf hadn’t been idle during the winter. He had racked his brains to identify primitive products from early North America and Canada. Beyond rare furs like beaver pelts, there were two future cash crops that the French hadn’t discovered yet—maple sugar and American ginseng. The eastern and northern regions of Quebec, with their high elevations, had a climate and environment similar to the Changbai Mountains, producing American ginseng, a cousin to the wild ginseng of Northeast China.

The demand for ginseng in the Far Eastern Celestial Empire had always been high, but with the Later Jin controlling its supply, future sales would be restricted. Apart from Korea, which produced some, ginseng was becoming increasingly rare, driving prices ever higher.

Olaf reasoned that bringing American ginseng to the Far East would be an immensely profitable venture.

He thought of maple sugar because, in later centuries, the Canadian flag would feature a maple leaf. The southern and eastern regions of Canada were home to vast maple forests. The sap from these trees could be boiled down into maple syrup and maple sugar, said to have medicinal value and priced far higher than white sugar—twenty to thirty times more.

Currently, Europe’s luxury consumables were spices and sugar. Vinland’s climate wasn’t suitable for sugarcane, but it had plenty of maple trees. Producing maple sugar would be a highly lucrative business.

Olaf knew that American ginseng offered the greatest profits, but neither he nor the entire Hrutr family currently had the means to pursue it. They lacked ships capable of reaching the Far East and the strength to venture there.

However, cultivating crops like corn could be prioritized, though it required significant labor. Olaf could only suggest this to his father, while his own path to wealth would have to focus on maple sugar.

Chapter 12: Olaf’s First Pot of Gold

To earn his first pot of gold and gain the means to do what he wanted, Olaf first sought out Haldor, Hrutik, Ulf, and Haig, convincing each of them to join him on a journey to Europe to broaden their horizons.

The Icelanders, descendants of the Vikings, were accustomed to letting their children train from a young age, even allowing them to accompany their elders on fishing and raiding expeditions. They believed that even young lions and eagles must learn to hunt.

Thus, though Olaf was only eleven years old, his maturity and the Icelandic way of life led everyone to agree to his request.

Knowing that the voyage would begin in less than a month, Olaf quickly gathered his most loyal companions—red-haired Tom, Solrak, Halik, Ilugi, Val, and Eriksson—and, with Pikku in tow, they gathered some tools before seeking out Heiner to explain their plans.

Heiner, who was inventorying supplies at Haig Fortress, glanced at the assortment of tools the group had brought and, without asking for details, assigned four white slaves to accompany and protect Olaf.

With eleven followers, Olaf left Haig Fortress and found five towering red maple trees nearby. Gazing up at the towering trunks, Olaf nodded in satisfaction before instructing the four white slaves to stand guard. He then led the boys to one of the trees.

“Watch closely,” he said.

Olaf first used a small axe to make a notch in the trunk, then ordered Pikku and Halik to use a short spear and hammer to carve a hole about a palm’s depth into the tree. When a faint trickle of sap began to seep out, Olaf dipped his finger in it, tasted it, and confirmed its slight sweetness. He then inserted a small wooden stick into the hole and placed a bucket beneath it. Soon, a thin stream of liquid flowed down the stick and dripped into the bucket with a soft sound.

“This one’s done,” Olaf chuckled, looking at the massive tree that would take three people to encircle. “Follow this method and carve four more holes in this tree. Once it’s done, do the same to the other four trees.”

Val, Eriksson, and Ilugi, being the tallest, used their axes to cut through the tough bark, while Pikku and Halik hammered and carved the holes. Solrak and Tom positioned the buckets to catch the sap.

With clear division of labor, they quickly carved holes in all five maple trees and set up buckets to collect the sap.

Olaf praised them before pointing to the other black and red maples in the distance. “Halik, Pikku, and Val, go back and bring more buckets. We’ll find more big trees and collect their sap.”

The three agreed and hurried off. Soon, Pikku returned with over a dozen Icelandic boys, each carrying buckets and basins, followed by Heiner and Jot.

“What are you doing?” Jot asked, frowning as he watched the sap dripping from the holes in the maple trees.

Olaf lowered his voice. “I’m using the sap from these maples to make something special. Don’t tell anyone.”

Jot nodded, while Heiner smiled faintly. The two then stood by, watching as Olaf directed the boys to carve holes in the maples and collect the sap.

Maple trees convert their nutrients into starch for storage in May and June. Only in the spring months of March and April does the sap contain sugar, and it can only be collected from morning until dusk. Outside these times, the sap stops flowing.

Olaf didn’t know this, but by sheer luck, he had come out to collect sap in the morning of March. By noon, nearly thirty to forty large trees near Hrutr Estate had been tapped for their sap.

At noon, everyone returned home for lunch. When the afternoon grew colder, Olaf led the Icelandic boys back to collect the buckets. It took three trips to bring all the buckets back.

Olaf kept Tom, Halik, and four others behind, instructing them to gather firewood.

Hidden in the kitchen behind the house, Olaf lit a fire and had Pikku place a large clay pot over it. He then sent Half and Solrak to fetch two buckets of sap.

Olaf slowly poured the sap into the pot. When it began to bubble and boil, he said, “Bring in the remaining fifty or sixty buckets of sap.”

Soon, the small room was filled with buckets. Olaf stood by the fire, waiting a long time until the liquid in the pot had reduced to a thin layer. He then had Pikku remove the pot with a wooden frame and used a wooden spatula to scrape the thick, sticky substance from the bottom, carefully collecting it.

The small wooden spatula held a golden, honey-like substance that smelled sweet with a hint of floral fragrance. Olaf blew on it, took a small bite, and found it tasted like non-sticky malt sugar, yet also like thickened honey—sweet, smooth, and delicious. It was the best dessert he had ever tasted in this life.

“Perfect,” Olaf exclaimed, his face lighting up with joy. Seeing Half, Halik, and the others staring at him eagerly, he handed them the spatula. “You can try some too, but don’t tell anyone.”

The boys happily took turns tasting the maple sugar, finishing it in moments.

With the first batch of maple sugar successfully made, Olaf’s confidence soared. He estimated that one pot used nearly two gallons of sap but yielded less than half a pint of syrup. If he boiled it into a solid, the amount would be even less.

After some thought, Olaf decided to keep it in liquid form. This way, he could market it as a special floral honey. After all, the most expensive sugar in Europe at the time was white sugar from the East, while the black sugar produced by Spain in Central America was not as valuable as honey.

Olaf had Pikku continue boiling the sap while the others gathered more firewood. Only when night fell did he let Tom, Halik, and the others return home.

Each time a batch of maple syrup was ready, Olaf personally scraped it into another prepared clay pot. By nightfall, he had boiled four batches, using eight buckets of sap, and his pot was nearly full of syrup.

Katrin then sent Half to call Olaf for dinner. After finishing the current batch with Pikku, Olaf extinguished the fire and went to eat.

When he entered the living room, he found everyone had already finished eating and rested. The table still held warm oatmeal and fried cod. He told Pikku to sit and eat with him.

Trained in etiquette by Heiner, Pikku waved his hands. “I wouldn’t dare, young master. You eat first, and I’ll eat after.”

Olaf smiled. “Everyone’s asleep. No one will mind. You’re my servant—are you going to disobey me? Sit down and eat with me.”

Olaf’s insistence moved Pikku, who sat down. After finishing their meal, Pikku took the dishes to wash.

Olaf stretched and went to his room to rest.

Pikku lived in a small room near the door. Accustomed to life with Olaf, he lay in bed, savoring the memory of the golden syrup Olaf had let him taste. He could swear it was the most delicious thing he had ever eaten—the sweetness and warmth were unlike anything he had ever experienced.

To Pikku, Olaf, who respected and cared for him, was his best friend. In his heart, Olaf was like a brother. After tasting the maple syrup, Pikku was even more touched. He knew from the reactions of Tom and the other boys that syrup was a luxury, yet Olaf had shared it with him. Pikku was now certain that his young master truly treated him like family.

Chapter 13: Royal Jelly

Early the next morning, Olaf woke up, ate breakfast, and left Pikku at home to continue boiling the syrup. He then put on his linen clothes, a lambskin coat, cowhide boots, and a felt hat before heading out.

Today, Olaf decided to have Pikku stay home and boil the tree sap they had collected the day before, while he took the Icelandic boys further inland to gather more maple sap.

Since hunting parties ventured deep into the north every day, even leaving the peninsula to hunt beavers in the heart of Vinland, the Oxhorn Peninsula, long inhabited only by white people, was quite safe.

After a word with Jot, Olaf recruited two more strong and brave white slaves to join him. Then, with twenty or so boys carrying wooden buckets, short spears, and axes, they left Haig Fortress and headed north into the forest.

Vinland had remained unchanged for thousands of years. The trees here were ancient and towering, though truly massive maples numbered only a few hundred. Smaller trees that could still yield sap were around a hundred. Olaf tapped the sap from over a dozen maples on the northern side of Haig Fortress that day. He estimated that within half a month, all the maples on the peninsula would be fully utilized.

At noon, the two white slaves cooked smoked fish in clay pots, and everyone shared fish soup. Olaf also ate a piece of fish.

By afternoon, they began collecting the buckets one by one. Almost every bucket was a third or a quarter full of sap.

Olaf roughly calculated that today’s harvest was nearly double yesterday’s. Delighted, he led everyone back to Haig Fortress, carefully carrying the buckets.

Upon returning home, the two white slaves and the boys placed the buckets in Olaf’s backyard before leaving.

Pikku emerged from the back kitchen, his face and head covered in wood ash, looking utterly disheveled. Olaf patted him down, nearly bringing Pikku to tears.

“Pikku, how much syrup did you boil today?”

Pikku was terrible at math. After much thought, he held up his fingers and said, “One and a half jars.”

Olaf nodded in approval. “Not bad. A jar must weigh about twenty pounds. Did you use up all of yesterday’s sap?”

“There’s still… six more jars to go.” Pikku counted on his fingers again.

Olaf then pointed to the yard full of buckets and said, “First, pour it into the large jars. When the large jars are full, use the small ones. Once you’re done, go rest. I’ll take over.”

Pikku agreed and began lifting the buckets to pour the sap into the large ceramic jars inside.

The day before, Olaf had taken twenty large clay jars from the warehouse, each capable of holding several dozen gallons, along with over thirty smaller five-gallon jars. These jars were leftovers from Haig’s winemaking days, and Olaf had repurposed them.

Olaf stood guard over the pot, stirring occasionally. After half a day, he poured the syrup from the bottom of the pot into a half-filled jar, then refilled the pot with fresh sap and continued boiling.

“Young master, I’ve poured all the sap. You go rest. I’ll take over,” Pikku said after finishing the task. Without waiting for a break, he rushed to Olaf’s side.

Olaf patted Pikku, who was nearly as tall as him, on the shoulder and smiled. “You’ve been working all day. Sit down and rest for a bit.”

“I’m not tired, young master,” Pikku said, eyes wide.

Olaf smiled and handed him the wooden spatula. “Finish this pot, then rest. We’ll continue tomorrow.”

With that, Olaf left. He realized that as the maple sap increased, Pikku alone wouldn’t be able to keep up, no matter how hard he worked. So, he decided to ask his mother to recruit his aunts and other relatives to help. He could always share some of the sugar with them.

Katrin, who was cooking porridge, was taken aback when Olaf mentioned making sugar. She turned to him and asked softly, “Are you sure the liquid you gave us can be boiled into a sweet syrup like honey?”

“Of course,” Olaf said, spreading his hands. “This secret is known only to me. I plan to make money with this sugar-making method and then develop other crops and livestock in Vinland. I only trust you and my two aunts. If you help me make sugar, I can give you ten percent of the syrup. What do you say?”

Katrin agreed without hesitation. She immediately followed Olaf to the back kitchen to see Pikku boiling the syrup. After Olaf explained the process and how much syrup a jar of sap would yield, Katrin nodded and said, “Leave it to me. Tomorrow, I’ll have your two aunts, your cousin Vanhild, Jot’s family, Anni, and Weideme help you boil the sugar. They’re all reliable. Don’t worry.”

“Thank you, Mother.”

With the help secured, Olaf was overjoyed. He even ate an extra piece of black bread at dinner. That night, he tossed and turned, unable to sleep, his stomach churning with acid.

After a restless half-night, he finally fell into a deep sleep. The next morning, he was abruptly awakened by Pikku shaking him.

“What are you doing?” Olaf snapped, frowning as he squinted at Pikku.

It was the first time Olaf had ever been angry, and Pikku’s face paled in shock. He quickly bowed and said, “Young master, your friends are all here. They’re waiting for you to come down.”

Olaf sat up abruptly and asked, “Did I wake up late today?”

Pikku muttered, “You usually finish breakfast by now.”

“Oh,” Olaf hurriedly got out of bed, dressing as he walked out.

“I’ll get you a hot towel,” Pikku said, quickly fetching a towel from the basin by the fireplace, wringing it out, and handing it to Olaf.

Olaf wiped his hands and face, then picked up the cold water on the table to rinse his mouth before heading out.

Tom and the others were waiting in the yard. When they saw Olaf, they greeted him with a cheer.

“Olaf, why are you sleeping in?” Halik asked with a grin.

“It’s nothing. I just didn’t sleep well last night,” Olaf smiled, instructing Pikku to bring some bread and dried meat. Then, he led the boys to Jot to borrow two horse-drawn carriages. The twenty-three of them rode in the two large carriages, heading further north in search of new maple trees.

Actually, the maples from the day before and the day before that could still yield some sap if new holes were drilled, but the amount would be much less. Olaf knew that the maples on the peninsula alone were enough for him to exploit, so he wasn’t interested in trees that had already been tapped.

From that day on, Olaf roamed the Oxhorn Peninsula, searching for tall maples and tapping them for sap.

Katrin also found Olaf’s two aunts, his cousin, and her friends. Everyone took the maple sap home and boiled it according to the proportions and times Katrin had specified. By evening, when Olaf returned home, he was delighted to see six jars of maple syrup. He loudly praised his mother Katrin for her efficiency.

Katrin smiled and said, “It was all done before afternoon. There are still two and a half jars here.”

“Many hands make light work,” Olaf marveled. “Today’s yield is about the same as yesterday’s. Take your time.”

Haldor had come home early that day and had already tasted the syrup Olaf had made. Though he had always had high hopes for Olaf, he hadn’t expected Olaf to keep surprising him. Haldor walked out of the room and asked, “Son, I asked your Uncle Jot and Heiner. They said you’ve been collecting maple sap every day. Is the syrup your mother boiled made from maple sap? It’s as sweet as honey. If you sell it, it would be a great product.”

“Yes, Father,” Olaf didn’t dare deceive his father, so he explained, “Maple sap contains sugar, but very little. It has to be boiled down to get the syrup. It tastes almost as sweet as honey but has a different flavor. I want to make it and take it with my uncles and brothers to sell in Holland for money, then use that money to buy some white slaves. What do you think?”

“You can spend your own money however you like,” Haldor said, reaching out to ruffle Olaf’s hair with a smile. “My son is so clever.”

Haldor didn’t ask how Olaf knew maple sap could be made into sugar. He had already decided that Olaf was a genius possessed by ancestral spirits, a miracle sent by their ancestors to revive the family. So, he was simply happy.

Olaf could sense that his family treated him differently from other children. He knew this was due to his mature mindset, his knowledge beyond ordinary people, and the fact that they believed he was possessed by ancestral spirits. The most important factor was that they were convinced of the ancestral possession.

In a Europe where religious culture was dominant, almost no one was free from superstition. While Iceland worshipped Jesus, it still retained traditional Nordic ancestor worship and primitive religious customs. Olaf had taken advantage of this to elevate himself to a status nearly equal to Haldor’s.

Olaf smiled slightly but didn’t speak. Haldor asked another question: “What’s the name of this syrup?”

“I’ve decided to call it Royal Jelly.”

Chapter 14: The First Trade Voyage

Royal Jelly—Olaf’s cleverly chosen name to disguise the true nature of maple sugar.

Olaf knew all too well the greed of Europeans. They had crossed the Atlantic in search of cod and beaver pelts; if word of maple sugar spread, they would surely flock to the maple-rich lands of North America. The English and French, already colonizing Quebec and New England, would undoubtedly attempt to harvest sap and produce their own syrup. The secret of maple sugar would be lost, and the once-barren lands of North America would become even more enticing, complicating his family’s efforts to colonize Vinland and the rest of the continent.

By naming it Royal Jelly, Olaf not only obscured its true origins but also lent it an air of prestige. The golden hue made it easy to market as a luxury ingredient.

The next day, Haldor summoned Haig and Hrutik to his home and explained Olaf’s plan to produce and sell Royal Jelly in Europe. He instructed them sternly: “Remember, we only have Royal Jelly—no one knows anything about maple sugar. And keep Olaf’s sap-collecting methods a secret. Don’t let the crew or anyone else talk. Tell them the Royal Jelly comes from North Africa. This is how we protect Vinland.”

Haig laughed heartily. “Olaf is a treasure sent by our ancestors! Everything he does is guided by the spirit of Hrut. I’ll make sure no one leaks a word.”

Hrutik, who had always been skeptical of Haldor’s claims about Olaf’s divine favor, now found himself believing. Could the pagan gods of the North truly exist? he wondered. Or is Olaf like Moses, chosen by heaven?

Spring slipped away unnoticed.

By April 25th, Haldor had prepared all the goods for Haig, Hrutik, Ulf, and Olaf’s journey to Europe. White slaves carried loads of beaver and muskrat pelts, dried cod, and wine from Haig Fortress down to the banks of the Muskox River, where two large ships awaited.

After nearly a month of hard work, Olaf had produced nearly two hundred jars of Royal Jelly. Twenty were kept at home—half as payment for the Icelandic boys and Katrin who had helped collect sap and boil the syrup, the other half given to Haldor to stock the Hrutr Estate’s stores.

The remaining one hundred and eighty jars—roughly thirteen to fourteen hundred gallons—were worth a fortune. In England, a gallon of honey cost anywhere from ten to thirty shillings. If all the Royal Jelly sold, it could fetch fifty to sixty gold marks—equivalent to a hundred crates of premium liquor.

Jot’s wife had brought home a jar the day before, and after tasting it, he couldn’t stop praising it. Today, he had eight jars loaded onto the ship, carefully secured in a separate section with wooden frames to prevent them from toppling in rough seas—just like the wine.

After two days of grueling labor, over fifty white slaves had packed the Thor’s Hammer and the Hope to the brim with goods and repaired any damage.

On the morning of April 27th, Olaf and Ulf bid farewell to their family and friends. Under the guidance of Hrutik and Haig, they left Haig Fortress.

For this voyage, Ulf and Haig would sail the Hope, with Olaf joining them. Besides twenty-eight sailors, Pikku was also aboard.

The Thor’s Hammer was slightly smaller than the Hope, but with its cargo hold full, it only had twenty-two crew members, managed by Hrutik, Hilt, and Valitu Lunde.

The two ships, pulled by white slave laborers, slowly left the river bend and entered deeper waters, accelerating toward the open sea.

Olaf and the others stood on deck, waving to Haldor, Katrin, and the others on shore until the ships vanished from sight.

Only then did Katrin lower her hand, her eyes red as she embraced Haldor. “I can’t bear to see my two sons leave.”

Haldor gripped her shoulders and murmured, “This is the fate of a Viking.”

Their ancestors had left Scandinavia and reshaped Europe’s history and people. Now, Haldor and his sons, Olaf and Ulf, would leave Iceland and change the future of America and the North. This was the mission bestowed upon them by their forebears.

A single thought echoed in Haldor’s mind.

The Thor’s Hammer and the Hope sailed out of the Muskox River and into the Atlantic, carried by the southwest winds toward the northern seas.

Before long, the two ships had traveled several nautical miles. To the east and south of Vinland, four fishing boats were casting their nets. Soon, they hauled in a net full of cod, their cheers ringing across the water.

Olaf and the others watched from the deck.

Ulf’s eyes gleamed with determination as he clenched his fists and growled, “These are thieves. I’ll drive them out one day.”

Haig squinted into the distance before sneering. “English and French fishermen. And that one with the Spanish flag—probably Basques. They fly the French flag when the English are around and the Spanish flag when the French are near. A bunch of opportunists.”

“What are Basques?” Olaf asked, unfamiliar with the term.

Haig scoffed. “A group of early Western natives living between Spain and France. Most are nominally French, but their customs and language don’t fit either country. Many make their living by fishing.”

Olaf nodded, unimpressed.

The Thor’s Hammer followed the Hope, riding the southwest winds at full speed. By noon, they had reached the deep sea.

Looking back, Vinland was barely visible—they had traveled far.

This European voyage had been planned long ago by Haldor, Haig, and Hrutik. Their route was set: first to Ireland and Scotland, then to England and Holland, and finally back to Scotland and Ireland to pick up more white slaves.

Sitting in his cabin, sipping water, Olaf eagerly anticipated seeing 17th-century England and Holland with his own eyes. Though he had never visited Europe in his past life, he had heard much about England. This time, he was determined to study the nation closely and understand how it had risen to prominence.

Vinland had little to learn from England, but Iceland did. Olaf had already decided that once Vinland was secure, he would return to Iceland—not just for revenge, but to seize the opportunity while Denmark was weakened by wars with Sweden and the Holy Roman Empire. He would lead Iceland to independence and carve out a place in Europe.

To Olaf, England—a fellow island nation that had grown from weakness to strength—was the perfect model.

Vinland could only serve as a starting point and a resource base. To truly shape the era and wield influence, he needed a foothold in Europe. Olaf and Haldor shared a vision: develop Vinland into a granary and lumber depot, then use Iceland as a bridgehead to conquer Europe. With both regions supporting each other, they could build real power—no longer at the mercy of Danish warships blockading Iceland.

Since killing the guards and fleeing Iceland, Haldor’s ambitions had grown. Olaf, Ulf, Hrutik, and even Heiner had encouraged him.

The leaders of the Hrutr Estate were united in their goal: develop Vinland, raise an elite army of Icelanders and white slaves, build warships, and return to Iceland to lead its people to independence.

Haldor estimated Iceland’s population at over fifty thousand—all descendants of Vikings, many with generations of raiding expertise. With minimal training, they could become formidable warriors. Using Iceland’s elite as a core and supplementing with white slave soldiers, while relying on Vinland and even America as a food source, Iceland could one day rival the great powers.

Olaf was only eleven, and the Thirty Years’ War still had over a decade to run. If Haldor and his allies seized this golden opportunity, their dreams could become reality.

Chapter 15: Ireland

The sky was overcast, and a light drizzle fell from the heavens. The waves on the sea were larger than usual, but fortunately, there were no major thunderstorms. Thus, Thor’s Hammer and Hope proceeded cautiously yet steadily.

After several hours, the weather gradually cleared, and the sun appeared in the sky. It was noon.

Olaf led Pikku out of the cabin, looked up at the sky, and sighed in relief. Turning his head, he saw nothing but the vast expanse of the sea.

Suddenly, Pikku pointed to the distant land in the north and shouted, “Young master, there’s land over there!”

“Oh,” Olaf turned to look, then turned his head and shouted toward the bridge, “Brother, is that Ireland?”

Today, Ulf was at the helm. Hearing Olaf’s voice, he calculated the time and said loudly, “Almost there. Is the angle off?”

“Turn the rudder fifty degrees south,” Olaf blinked and immediately spotted the deviation, then shouted.

After Ulf adjusted the rudder, he finally saw the distant land through the window and sighed in relief, “Finally, we should reach Dublin by afternoon.”

Having been at sea for half a month, Olaf was already bored out of his mind. A few days ago, he had carved a chessboard on the table with a knife and used the heads and tails of copper coins to distinguish the pieces. He taught Ulf, Haig, Pikku, and others how to play Gomoku, passing the time by playing chess.

By afternoon, the two ships entered the Celtic Sea south of Ireland. At noon, they had a fresh seafood feast, then turned north, entering the Saint George’s Channel between Britain and Ireland.

Standing on the deck, they could see a few fishing boats scattered in the channel, but ships as large as Thor’s Hammer and Hope were rare.

Ireland was very poor, with an economy based on agriculture, so there were few fishermen. After watching for a while, Olaf and the others saw a bay appear to the northwest. Inside was a large port similar to Reykjavik. Ulf and Hilt then steered the ship toward it.

“This is Dublin,” Haig pointed to the increasingly clear port ahead and said, “After England occupied Ireland, this place has been unstable. The Irish don’t submit to the English. After several suppressions, they finally quieted down. But this place is even poorer than Iceland. Except for a few wealthy lords and old nobles, the only other wealthy person is the Governor of Dublin. The current governor is called Carnavon Stephen, an old English noble. He is a distant relative of the prime minister and has been the Governor of Ireland for twelve years. He is a traditional noble, very arrogant and values money highly, so dealing with him isn’t difficult. Moreover, he always stays in the governor’s mansion. In the past, when we had fewer goods, we usually only dealt with his subordinates.”

“When you’re in Ireland, don’t talk to ordinary Irish people, and don’t use the term ‘southerners’ because the richest Irish are southerners, and they hate this term. Ordinary Irish are just the lowest in status. Our goods are mainly sold to Irish noble lords and Governor Stephen. You should look more and talk less on the way.”

Haig carefully explained everything Olaf needed to pay attention to, and Olaf listened attentively. After entering the port, the ship slowly reduced speed under the command of the port flagman and docked at the harbor.

The port was built with pine wood and was quite sturdy. However, there were already five or six large ships docked, and sailors were busy loading and unloading goods. It seemed that most of the goods were being loaded onto the ships, with only a small amount of salt, sugar, and cloth being unloaded.

Ulf saw Olaf’s gaze and lowered his head, saying, “The agricultural tax in Ireland is very high. The governor and large farm owners add an extra twenty percent, so Ireland has to hand over more than seventy percent of its grain every year. It’s said that many people starve to death every year in the north. These should be the governor and Irish lords shipping grain out.”

Olaf instantly understood and thought to himself, “No wonder the Irish are eager to go to Vinland as white slaves. In their homeland, they are being exploited layer by layer by the British government, colonial governors, and large landowners until there’s nothing left. Staying at home is death, so they might as well go out and take a chance.”

While Ulf and Olaf were talking, a wooden plank was placed on the ship, and a short, red-haired man holding a broadsword and accompanied by two soldiers came aboard. He first looked around, then at the flags on Hope and Thor’s Hammer, which he didn’t recognize. However, he then saw the Danish red cross flag and raised his eyebrows at Haig and the other sailors.

“Who is the captain? What are you here for?”

The Irish accent in English made Olaf and the others frown repeatedly. They felt it was worse than Icelandic with an accent.

Haig stepped forward, secretly handed the man a few silver shillings, and then explained in English, “We are Icelandic merchants, here to sell some northern specialties. May I ask your name, sir? We used to be friends with Tax Officer Simmer. I wonder why he’s not here.”

The red-haired short man put away the small silver coins, then grinned and said, “Simmer drank too much in the winter and froze to death outside. I am Kildare, the new port tax officer appointed by the governor. You all look like honest people.”

Turning to the guards behind him, Tax Officer Kildare said, “Old Crooked Mouth, measure the inner length of the deck of these two ships.”

The two soldiers took out a rope with markings and stood on both sides of Hope’s deck, then straightened the rope. The oldest soldier, who had a slightly crooked mouth, shouted, “Seventy feet!”

After that, the two went to measure the inner width of Thor’s Hammer’s deck and shouted, “Seventy-two feet and nine inches!”

Kildare smiled at Haig and said, “Sir, according to the regulations of the English Parliament, your two ships need to pay twenty-seven pounds and eighteen shillings in taxes. After paying the taxes, you can stay and move freely in Dublin. Welcome to Dublin.”

In the Age of Exploration, ports in various countries relied on taxing merchant ships for income. However, in commercially developed regions, exchange personnel were dispatched to follow transactions and collect about ten percent of the transaction tax. But in backward areas like Iceland and Ireland, maritime trade was monopolized by domestic capitalists, so the tax collection method was simple and convenient.

Haig knew that this tax method was beneficial to him. If it were according to the transaction tax of large ports like London, Lisbon, or Amsterdam, it would be more than ten percent of the transaction amount. Knowing he was getting a good deal, he didn’t bargain. Moreover, the small favor he had just given Kildare had saved him a few feet in measurement, which was most beneficial to him.

Taking out twenty gold coins and more than forty silver coins from his money bag, Haig counted them twice before handing them to Kildare.

At that time, the gold and silver currencies of various countries were mixed. There were many counterfeit coins with extremely low gold and silver content on the market. As tax officers, they were proficient in arithmetic and sensitive to currency. Kildare took them one by one to verify, then calculated the conversion standard of pounds, Baltic marks, and French écus in his mind before finally putting them away. He nodded and said, “Not bad, I overcharged you by one shilling, friend. What’s your name?”

“My name is Haig, sir.” Haig smiled and nodded, then the two shook hands, and Kildare left the ship with the soldiers.

Olaf did a simple calculation of the pounds and couldn’t help but click his tongue, saying, “They don’t tax based on the value of the goods but on the size of the ship. This is very unfair to merchants dealing in cheap goods.”

Haig chuckled and said, “Olaf, you don’t understand. The value of the goods on the ship can’t be fixed. For example, a beaver pelt might be sold by us for a few marks, but local big merchants can sell it for dozens of marks. Moreover, the price of goods is changeable and can’t be fixed. If taxes were based on the value of goods, it wouldn’t be good for the nobles and big merchants who really control large businesses. No one would want to promote this, so in small places like Ireland and Scotland, ships like ours that run hard currency once a year are actually the most beneficial. If we were in London, we would really have to pay taxes based on the transaction amount.”

Olaf thought for a moment, then nodded and said, “Indeed, in these small places, many goods basically don’t have a market price. Local merchants also want to evade taxes. If the buying and selling process isn’t supervised, unless it’s a transfer of property like land or houses, even the governor can’t collect transaction taxes and can only tax based on the ship.”

Note: The British currency units are pounds, shillings, and pence. But before the currency reform, the pound referred to a pound of silver. The currency form was basically gold coins worth more than twenty shillings, equivalent to a pound of silver.

Chapter 16: Nobility

Haig and Hrutik had spent many years traveling through Ireland, but in recent years, Haig had handed over the reins to Ulf. So, Ulf and Hrutik were the first to disembark and seek out familiar merchants, while Haig, Olaf, and the others remained on the ship to guard it.

After a long while, the fourth bell of the distant church rang, signaling the approaching dusk. Olaf glanced at the fiery clouds in the western sky and muttered in confusion, “It’s almost dark. Why haven’t my brother and Hrutik returned yet?”

Haig, sitting at the table playing Gomoku with Olaf, pondered his next move as he replied, “Don’t worry. Dublin’s security is good, and even if they run into trouble, Hrutik and Ulf can handle themselves.”

Olaf considered this and casually placed a piece, blocking Haig’s clever two-pronged attack, leaving him stunned and frustrated.

After a few more moves, Olaf was on the verge of connecting four pieces, and Haig could only block one end, leaving the other open. Suddenly, a sailor’s voice called out from outside, “Young Master Ulf, Captain Hrutik, you’re back!”

Haig leaped up with a hearty laugh, rushing out to give Hrutik a warm embrace before eagerly asking, “Brother, how did it go? Did you contact the buyers?”

Hrutik looked puzzled by Haig’s sudden enthusiasm but, being old friends, didn’t dwell on it. He smiled and said, “Haldar and I used to deal in salted fish and sealskins, so we only know one local big shot in Ireland. He agreed to take all the dried cod, and the price is good. As for the precious furs, he couldn’t handle them, so I didn’t mention them.”

“Uncle, I contacted Grey Bowers. He said he’ll speak to the governor tomorrow to see how much beaver and river otter pelts they can take. As for the royal jelly, he wants to see it in person. If it meets his standards, he’ll take it. I told him we only procured sixty jars and forty pelts in the Baltic Sea to avoid arousing their greed. The rest we’ll sell in Scotland and Amsterdam.”

Ulf spoke methodically, then noticed Olaf and Hrutik’s unfamiliarity with the name Grey Bowers and began to explain.

“Grey Bowers is one of the largest landowners in Ireland and a baron bestowed by the English crown. He’s a distant cousin of Prime Minister Stilton. Lord Bowers is a major figure in Ireland with an excellent relationship with Governor Stephen. His wealth is not to be underestimated. If I weren’t worried that he and the governor might learn the true value of our cargo and take risks, I would have sold all the furs to him.”

“Ulf, you’ve done well. That was a wise decision,” Haig said approvingly, patting Ulf on the back. Then he suggested, “We’ll wait on the ship for their response. Hrutik, how about a drink?”

Hrutik laughed heartily, and the three of them, along with a dozen sailors, went ashore to drink, leaving half the crew and Olaf behind to guard the ship.

It was late at night when Haig and the others returned. Olaf, awakened by the noise, grumbled irritably upon seeing them before going back to sleep.

Early the next morning, a young man in a lace jacket called out Ulf’s name from the shore.

Olaf and Ulf were washing up when Ulf heard the call clearly. He wiped his hands and said, “That must be Lord Bowers’ servant.”

Ulf then instructed Pikku and a white slave sailor to bring the man aboard.

After a while, Pikku led the young man into the cabin. Haig, Ulf, and Hrutik stood up from their seats, while Olaf remained in the corner.

The young man wore traditional Irish clothing but no makeup or accessories. His posture revealed him to be a highly trained, professional servant.

“Mr. Ulf, my lord has said that he will be dining with the governor at the governor’s mansion this afternoon. He requests that you bring one of each type of fur and a jar of royal jelly to the mansion. He will invite the governor to appraise them. If both are satisfied, they will purchase everything.”

The young man gave a slight bow and spoke in a floating tone with a standard London accent. Haig, Hrutik, and Ulf understood most of it, but Olaf only caught the general idea. After all, in this life, he hadn’t had much exposure to English, and his English from his previous life was only average, let alone the archaic London accent from centuries ago.

Although Ireland and Scotland had been conquered by England centuries ago, they maintained a degree of autonomy within the system. Ireland, in particular, due to its ethnic composition and geographical location, enjoyed complete self-rule. England only sent a governor to manage affairs and exploit the Irish, much like Denmark’s rule over Iceland. Both were forms of colonial rule, though Iceland fared slightly better due to its remote location and sparse population, suffering less exploitation than Ireland.

For this reason, Ireland would later demand independence, and Scotland would hold two referendums seeking the same.

In name, the governor held the highest authority in Ireland, but in reality, the governor relied on Irish nobles and landowners to maintain order. Thus, nobles like Bowers wielded significant power.

After sending Bowers’ servant away, Ulf personally selected several beaver, river otter, bear, and fox pelts, while Pikku brought out a jar of royal jelly.

“Olaf, come with me. Uncle Haig, you and Uncle Hrutik stay on the ship,” Ulf said, changing into his finest and most elegant clothes, donning a feathered hat.

Haig nodded and said, “Alright, I’ll have Valitu and two white slaves escort you.”

Olaf knew his brother and uncle wanted him to gain some experience, so without waiting for them to say more, he went to his room and had Pikku fetch the exquisite garments his mother, Heiner’s wife, and his cousin Vanhild had sewn together.

After much effort, Olaf and Pikku finally secured the pleated, puffed trousers around his calves, then put on deer leather boots. His upper body was adorned with a gold-threaded jacket, over which he wore a long robe, and on his head, a wide-brimmed black hat.

The opulent attire accentuated Olaf’s fair skin. Unlike other white youths, his face was free of freckles, with delicate features and a square jaw, giving him a dignified and noble appearance, much like the son of a great nation’s aristocracy.

Ulf smiled approvingly as Olaf entered the cabin, while Haig stroked his beard and chuckled, “Our ancestor Hrut was a noble of the Norwegian kingdom. Ulf, you and Olaf look like princes of Copenhagen in these formal clothes. When you meet the governor and Bowers, mention our ancestry. Remember, we are descendants of the Grey Cloak Jarl from the Norwegian kingdom, a noble lineage spanning nine generations.”

In this era, nobles, capitalists, and commoners were worlds apart. After a thousand years of the Middle Ages, the noble’s exalted image was deeply ingrained in every European’s mind.

Even a fallen noble could command respect when interacting with other nobles. After all, etiquette was born to distinguish social classes and identities. Nobles only observed etiquette among themselves; for Western nobles, it was “no courtesy for commoners.”

Since they were meeting the governor and Bowers in the afternoon, Ulf and Olaf ate only a thin porridge and a bite of black bread for lunch to avoid bad breath or stomach discomfort.

Feeling the time was right, Ulf and Olaf, accompanied by Pikku as their servant and Valitu as their guard, disembarked. The two white slaves carried a wooden box containing several pelts, while the other carried a jar of royal jelly.

Chapter 17: Making Connections

The upper echelons of society in the early seventeenth century were both troublesome and chaotic. Unless absolutely necessary, nobles would never walk on foot, as it would soil their shoes and the hems of their robes—an unforgivable offense for a noble.

Now, Ulf and Olaf were to visit the governor as descendants of the ancient Norwegian nobility from Iceland, so they naturally had to maintain their noble bearing.

After disembarking, Ulf had Valitu find a carriage. Then, Olaf, Ulf, and Valitu climbed into the cabin, while the two white slaves and their goods were crammed beside the driver.

The carriage slowly left the harbor. Olaf sat inside the jostling vehicle, observing the scenery on either side. The dirt road was patched with gravel in some places, while others were muddy. The path was mostly smooth, though occasionally pitted.

Leaving the harbor, they first headed north across a bridge to the northern side of a black river, then followed the northern bank westward. To the right were low wooden and stone houses, with few pedestrians, all dressed in tattered, impoverished clothing—clearly laborers scraping by.

After traveling about a thousand paces, they reached a bridge crossing. Looking south from the bridge, they saw gardens and tall, well-kept houses, with neatly dressed women watering flowers in the courtyards. But to the north, the scene remained dilapidated. Further north was a bustling market, where at the intersection, many “wild nightingales” could be seen flashing their white arms to attract customers.

Having visited Dublin several times, Ulf was familiar with the situation. He lowered his voice and said, “This Blackwater River is Dublin’s great Black Mud River. There are twelve large bridges across it. North of the bridge is the slum, while the south is where the nobles and wealthy live. Around the fourth bridge on the south bank is the governor’s castle, the heart of Ireland. South of the castle is St. Patrick’s Cathedral, where the fifth-century saint Patrick preached after receiving the Gospel. Currently, a cardinal oversees it.”

Olaf raised an eyebrow slightly and asked, “They still follow Catholicism here. Didn’t England convert to Protestantism?”

Ulf shook his head lightly. “I don’t know. Maybe the English king didn’t require Ireland to convert, or perhaps Governor Bowes doesn’t want to change too much. But it doesn’t affect us.”

“True,” Olaf nodded. Then the carriage turned south onto a white stone bridge, entering the fragrant, flower-filled south bank of the Black Mud River.

Ulf pointed to the towering fortress in the distance and said, “That’s the governor’s residence.”

Moments later, they alighted in the plaza before the fortress. Ulf casually handed the driver a few pence, then Olaf looked up at the castle. It was ancient and grand, its dark, mottled walls silently bearing the marks of time.

“A beautiful castle,” Olaf nodded, smiling slightly. “I like it.”

Dublin Castle was built in the early thirteenth century by King George of England to store the wealth he had plundered from Ireland. But since the previous century, King Henry VIII had declared himself King of Ireland under the pretense of promoting Catholicism, marking Ireland’s complete subjugation to England. He stationed a governor with troops in Dublin Castle to seize the lands and assets of the Irish Catholic Church. At that time, many in Ireland were labeled “blasphemers” and “rebels,” stripped of their wealth, killed, or enslaved.

A decade ago, King James I had even confiscated three million acres of fertile land in Ulster, northern Ireland, and granted it to English and Scottish nobles.

Thus, as England’s oppression and exploitation of Ireland intensified, the governor’s responsibilities and powers grew. Now, the governor’s residence was permanently garrisoned with five hundred guards, as Ireland’s population of over a million necessitated vigilance.

Pikku approached the castle’s moat and announced that his masters, Ulf and Olaf, had been invited by Lord Bowes to visit the governor.

After the time it took a candle to burn, the drawbridge slowly lowered, and a burly man in half-plate armor emerged. He looked at Ulf and Olaf and asked, “Are you Ulf, the merchant from Iceland?”

“Yes, sir,” Ulf replied politely.

The man nodded and led them into the castle. Beyond the gate was a vast garden, flanked by bastions and numerous halls. The man pointed to the massive inner keep beyond the garden and said, “The governor and Lord Bowes are having tea in the St. Patrick’s Hall on the second floor. Please follow this guard upstairs.”

A young guard approached, and Ulf, Olaf, and their companions followed him into the inner keep, ascending the stairs. After three turns, they entered a magnificent hall.

Two guards stood at the entrance, and inside were two smaller doors, likely resting rooms. The guards questioned the escort, and one went in to report, returning shortly.

“You may enter.”

Olaf followed Ulf, leading their four subordinates into the inner hall. It was about thirty paces square, with a long table draped in a dark green velvet cloth embroidered with gold. At one end sat a mustachioed man in a fitted coat, appearing in his fifties, with a distinguished air. Nearby sat a man in his forties with brownish-yellow hair, exuding wealth, his fingers adorned with two cat’s-eye rings.

Ulf stepped forward, removing his hat and bowing with a hand over his chest. He then announced, “Ulf, son of the Icelandic chieftain and descendant of the Grey Cloak Jarl of the Norwegian Kingdom, greets Governor Stephen and Lord Bowes.”

Olaf followed suit. After their greetings, the mustachioed man waved his hand and said, “Since you are descendants of northern nobility, and clearly well-educated, please, take a seat.”

Governor Stephen stroked his beard and chuckled, “I just heard from Bowes that you, Ulf, are only in your twenties but have already inherited your family’s legacy for several years. Impressive. Young men should be bold and daring. Your brother here is also quite good. Excellent.”

“Thank you for your praise. May the Lord bless you.”

Ulf and Olaf smiled in gratitude and sat down, keeping their backs straight to avoid any breach of etiquette.

Bowes took a sip of tea and gestured to those still standing, saying, “Ulf, quickly present the beaver pelts and royal jelly so the governor can inspect their quality.”

Governor Stephen waved his hand, and an Irish servant stepped forward to clear the tea set.

Ulf hastily instructed Pikku and the others to bring out the furs and place them before the governor and Bowes.

The two men picked up the beaver pelts, stroking them with smiles, their wrinkles softening.

“The beaver pelts are as smooth as silk—no, even better than silk. Such high-quality pelts are becoming rarer. Excellent.”

Governor Stephen examined one pelt for a long time before setting it down and inspecting the others. He then smiled and said, “Your pelts are of high quality. How many beaver and river otter pelts do you have?”

Ulf stood up and replied, “Governor, we only managed to acquire these pelts from the northwestern depths of the Baltic Sea. The quantity is limited, and the cost was substantial.”

Before Ulf could finish, Governor Stephen waved his hand and turned to Bowes, asking, “These two young men seem quite capable. Let’s give them a fair price. What do you say? Don’t take all the beaver pelts; leave the others for you. How does that sound?”

Bowes thought for a moment, rubbing the cat’s-eye ring on his right index finger with his left hand, and smiled, “You’ll have to give me a few. I’m going to London next month to celebrate the prime minister’s birthday, and they’ll make excellent gifts.”

“Alright then. For the sake of our friendship,” Governor Stephen shrugged.

Bowes then turned to Ulf and said, “You’re not new to Dublin, so you know the prices of beaver pelts. Here’s what I propose: twenty silver pounds per beaver pelt, or two gold pounds if you prefer gold. River otter pelts at fifteen silver pounds, bear pelts at forty, and fox and wolf pelts at nine. How does that sound?”

Ulf considered for a moment, then nodded and said, “I accept your offer, my lord.”

Chapter 18: Striking It Rich

The price was settled, and Bowes beckoned for paper and ink to be brought over. He and Stephen then signed an agreement with Ulf, with three copies made—each detailing the quantity and price of pelts purchased by each party. Bowes and Stephen’s servants then went to fetch the money.

The servant opened the jar and presented a silver spoon. Bowes and Stephen both caught the sweet, fragrant aroma of the royal jelly. As seasoned gourmets who had sampled famous desserts from around the world, they still found the taste of the royal jelly novel and refreshing.

Stephen scooped some onto Bowes’ plate with the spoon, then took a small portion for himself. The moment it touched his tongue, the unique fragrance and sweetness enveloped his mouth. The light, refreshing sweetness—rich yet not cloying—made them both take another bite.

“This royal jelly is delicious,” Stephen said, dabbing his mouth with a handkerchief. “But it doesn’t taste like honey. Ulf, can you tell us what this really is?”

Ulf glanced at his younger brother beside him and smiled. “The royal jelly was obtained by my brother, Olaf. Only he can explain its origins.”

Olaf stood up and looked at the governor, his gaze neither servile nor arrogant, his tone calm. “The royal jelly is a rare honey I acquired in the dense jungles of southern Africa. I encountered yellow-skinned people there—at first, I thought they were Tatars, but they called themselves Inuit, a unique tribe living near southern Africa. Our Icelandic histories have recorded them before; the sagas refer to them as the Unipads.

“I saved an injured Inuit boy—this one, Pikku—who is now my servant. In gratitude, his tribe gave me the royal jelly they found on the southern African plateau. According to them, it’s made by a special species of queen bee that feeds on the essence of plateau flowers. It’s far more valuable than ordinary honey and is said to have medicinal properties—it can invigorate vitality, cure impotence and premature ejaculation, help the weak recover their health, and even prolong life if consumed regularly.”

Olaf spoke with utter sincerity, though his words were pure fabrication. Stephen and Bowes noticed for the first time that Pikku was a yellow-skinned boy, which surprised them—neither had ever seen an East Asian before. They believed about seventy to eighty percent of what Olaf said.

“Pikku, greet the two lords,” Olaf commanded sternly.

Pikku, who had been prepared in advance, stepped forward and bowed, speaking in the Inuit language.

Stephen and Bowes chuckled and gestured for Pikku to rise.

“I’ve heard that the distant East is full of yellow-skinned people, like the Indians and Chinese,” Bowes marveled, looking at Pikku. “I never expected to find them near southern Africa. Truly astonishing.”

Stephen reminisced, “When I was young, I followed Sir Francis Drake to the West Indies. The Indians there didn’t look much like this boy. Olaf, you’re young, yet you speak with such refinement and courage, venturing deep into the forests to explore. I admire you. If you ever need anything, you can come to me.”

Olaf hadn’t expected his poise and demeanor to earn Stephen’s favor so quickly. He hurriedly bowed in gratitude. “Thank you for your kindness, my lord.”

“As for the royal jelly, I’ll buy it at the price of Ming Dynasty white sugar,” Stephen said with a light laugh, glancing at his old friend. “If there’s another batch, Bowes, you can have it next time.”

Bowes sighed in resignation, smirking. “Fine, take it if you want. Next time, I’ll keep it all to myself and won’t tell you.”

While the servants went to fetch the gold, the group chatted idly for a few more moments before exchanging the contracts and money. Stephen stretched and prepared for his afternoon nap, while Bowes instructed his servants to follow Ulf to collect the pelts before taking his leave.

Ulf and Olaf watched as the servants carried several large chests before them. When they opened one, the sight of the gold coins inside made their hearts race with excitement.

“We should hurry back,” Ulf said, snapping out of his reverie. “We only have a couple of hours before nightfall. We need to deliver the governor’s and Bowes’ goods as soon as possible.”

Olaf, seeing a chest full of gold for the first time, quickly regained his composure and led Valitu, Pikku, and the others in carrying the seven or eight chests out of the governor’s mansion.

The governor’s mansion sent a steward and six servants to accompany them, along with two horse-drawn carriages.

“The steward politely said, “I heard you didn’t bring a carriage, so I brought an extra one for you to use.”

“Thank you,” Ulf replied before instructing everyone to load the money chests onto the carriages.

Just as Olaf and Ulf were about to board, the servant from Bowes’ household suddenly appeared.

“Master Ulf, my lord requests the presence of you and Master Olaf.”

Ulf and Olaf turned to see Bowes sitting in his carriage, waving at them from the open door.

“Please wait a moment,” Ulf apologized to the steward before leading Olaf to Bowes’ carriage.

“My lord, do you have any further instructions for us?”

Bowes smiled warmly, nodding at them before speaking softly. “I just wanted to ask if you have any more stock left. If so, I’d like to purchase it all at the price we agreed upon earlier. And if there’s a next batch, I’d like first dibs. What do you think?”

Olaf noticed that Bowes’ attitude was even more amiable than before. He suspected it might be because Governor Stephen had mentioned taking care of him, or perhaps Bowes simply wanted more goods.

Ulf thought for a moment before shrugging. “Well, my lord, we do have some left, but beaver pelts are rare—we only had twenty-five, and now only five remain. We do still have some royal jelly, though.”

Olaf nodded. “Yes, we have twenty jars of royal jelly left. We were planning to take them back to Iceland, but if you want them, we can sell them to you.”

“Excellent. How many river otter pelts, fox pelts, and wolf pelts do you have left?”

“A few, but not many,” Ulf said thoughtfully.

Bowes chuckled and ordered his servant to fetch more gold before continuing. “I’ll send someone with the money to collect the goods. Whatever the total, I’ll pay it. You two are impressive young men. I believe you’ll become great merchants one day, so I’d like to be your friend, just like Stephen. If you ever need anything, you can come to me.”

“Thank you, my lord,” both brothers said, bowing in gratitude.

Bowes closed the carriage door, and it gradually drove away.

Ulf and Olaf exchanged a smile before turning and climbing into their own carriage.

Valitu drove from the front, while the white slaves sat in the carriage, guarding the money chests. Olaf’s excitement still hadn’t faded. He mentally calculated: Forty beaver pelts and over a hundred other pelts earned us a little over a thousand pounds in gold coins. A thousand pounds is nearly two thousand gold marks, which is twenty thousand silver marks!

Haldor’s entire fortune in Iceland was only twenty thousand silver marks, and half of that had been lost to Sigfoss eight years ago. These assets had been accumulated by the Haldor family over generations, yet Ulf had effortlessly earned the equivalent of his ancestors’ lifetimes’ worth of wealth with just over seventy pelts. The sheer magic of this transformation left Olaf in awe, though Ulf took it in stride.

After all, in the Age of Exploration, the profits from agriculture paled in comparison to maritime trade, and maritime trade was nothing compared to colonial trade. Maritime trade involved buying and selling, with assets invested and risks taken to earn a profit margin. But colonial trade required no investment—all goods were obtained through plunder, so every sale was pure profit.

Stephen had bought the royal jelly at the price of white sugar. Among luxury goods, white sugar was twice as expensive as honey, though premium honey could narrow that gap. A pound of white sugar now sold for forty shillings to half a pound of silver.

A jar of royal jelly weighed about twenty pounds, so at forty shillings per pound, that was forty pounds per jar. Sixty jars totaled two hundred forty pounds, or just under five hundred silver marks. This far exceeded Olaf’s expectations.

Olaf was more than satisfied with his earnings. Five hundred silver marks could buy thirty firearms.

Chapter 19: The White Slave Trade

Two carriages rattled their way into the dock.

Back on the ship, the sailors helped the servants from the governor’s mansion unload the furs and royal jelly. The steward led the servants away in the carriage, while Haldor and Haig stood guard over several chests of gold coins, counting the money nonstop.

In the past, Haig would only get a dozen or so beaver pelts and river otter pelts in a year, and he had to sell half of them to the French. Even at best, he couldn’t make much money. But this year, just one trip to Ireland had earned him more than the past seven years combined.

This made Haig firmly believe that Vinland should only be entrusted to his brother Haldor, and he grew excited.

In truth, the reason why dozens of pelts could fetch such a high price was partly because the governor had taken a liking to Ulf and Olaf and hadn’t driven a hard bargain. At his age and position, he often showed favor to promising young men as an investment in the future.

Before long, Bowes’ servants arrived. After Ulf went out to negotiate, they sold another ten beaver pelts and over thirty other pelts, along with forty jars of royal jelly.

Once Bowes’ people had left, Hilt, Hrutik, Valitu, and Lunde carried the money chests and followed Ulf into the cabin.

Clang!

They opened the chests and counted the money together. Then, Haldor, his face flushed with excitement, announced, “This time, we sold fifty beaver pelts, over sixty other pelts, three thousand pounds of dried cod, and over three hundred gallons of wine. In total, we made one thousand six hundred pounds in gold coins, which is equivalent to three thousand one hundred fifty-six gold marks, or over thirty thousand silver marks!”

Gasp!

The crowd gasped in astonishment. For the people of Iceland, thirty thousand silver marks could buy an entire village’s worth of land. They were overjoyed.

“When we return, we’ll reduce the white slaves’ contracts by one year and give each of them ten pounds in gold coins. The rest of you will each get fifty pounds in gold coins,” Haldor said happily. The crowd grew even more excited.

Then, Haig sent someone to buy beer, planning to celebrate with a grand feast on the ship.

Hrutik, still somewhat sober, pulled Haldor aside and said sternly, “First, we need to find someone to handle the recruitment of white slaves. Then, we can buy the beer and leave the harbor to drink. If we get drunk here, someone might kill us and steal our money, and you won’t even know it.”

The crowd suddenly realized the danger. Haldor then instructed Ulf and Haig to contact the northern landowners living in Dublin to recruit white slaves from the north to sell in Vinland.

Due to the oppression of the English king, the poorest and most suffering people, who had long been selling their children, daughters, and even themselves, were in northern Ireland, especially in the northwest region of Ulster.

Over a decade ago, many of the white slaves deceived into going to the eastern coast of North America in New England were Irish. And of the three batches of white slaves Haig had recruited over the past seven years, more than half were from northern Ireland.

Southern Ireland was relatively stable and prosperous, with a decent standard of living, but the north was much worse off.

The northern landowners, in an effort to improve the political environment and conditions in the north, had been living in Dublin, lobbying the governor to reduce taxes in the north or to advise the English king to give Catholics some space to survive.

Stephen, of course, paid no attention to the northern landowners, always ignoring them. But over the years, as the northern landowners failed to change the situation, they began secretly helping northern Irish people escape overseas. This way, they could reduce the population pressure on their estates, free up land, and allow the remaining farmers to seek a living. Thus, the northern landowners could gain both land and money from selling white slaves, making this trade quite profitable for them at the moment.

Chapter 20: Amsterdam

Amsterdam, the economic and political heart of the Dutch Republic.

Since the province of Holland was the wealthiest and largest in the Dutch Republic, it was the true core, often referred to as the Holland Republic.

After decades of struggle, the Dutch people had endured the oppression and slaughter of Spanish colonizers. Now, thanks to its thriving maritime trade, the Netherlands had risen rapidly. In industries such as fishing, shipbuilding, grain processing, linen and wool weaving, and fur trade, it had become the leader among European nations. Particularly in fishing and shipbuilding, it had surpassed England, France, and Spain, laying the foundation to dominate all of Europe.

In the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries, the Champagne fairs on the northern coast of France were the most vibrant, representing the pinnacle of European trade. In the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, Amsterdam had replaced the Champagne fairs, even surpassing them as an international metropolis.

At the port of Amsterdam, over two thousand ships of various sizes docked and departed daily. If one were to calculate the economy based on the number of ships and cargo throughput, Amsterdam alone could rival the combined total of all ports in England and France.

Here, one could find Nordic wool and furs, English wool, Mediterranean wine and sugar, Arabian spices, African ivory and rhinoceros horns, as well as porcelain and silk from the Far East—everything was available.

Free merchants and agents of large capitalists from various countries bustled through Amsterdam’s exchange and docks every day, trading goods on ships from different nations before shipping them out on their own or their companies’ vessels.

As Thor’s Hammer and Hope approached the port, flagmen waved them in. Once the ships anchored, the flagmen on shore shouted something.

Olaf and the others stepped onto the deck, listening intently but unable to understand.

“Is that English or German?” Haig frowned, shaking his head.

“Maybe a Dutch dialect,” Ulf said uncertainly.

“Does anyone here understand it?” Olaf looked at the others and the white slaves, but everyone shook their heads.

Just then, Hrutik from Hope spoke in a similar tone to the flagman.

Haig laughed and said, “Hrutik is Swiss; he speaks German. He might be able to communicate with the Dutch.”

After a long conversation with the flagman, Hrutik called out to Haig and the others, “To trade goods in Amsterdam, we must first go to the exchange to register and obtain a tax permit before we can list our goods. If we need to exchange currency, we should go to the Amsterdam Bank in the southeast of the dock. There, we can deposit money from various countries and exchange it for bills, which we can then use for transactions. When we leave, we can exchange the bills back into currency at the bank.”

“Bank…” Olaf pondered for a moment, suddenly recalling that the world’s first bank had emerged in the early seventeenth century in the Netherlands. Along with it came the stock exchange, initially for trading shares of the Dutch East India Company to raise funds for overseas trade. As the East India Company’s business flourished, its stocks became more valuable. Later, the West India Company was established, but after colonizing Brazil, it went bankrupt due to prolonged warfare.

“I’ll go with Hrutik to the exchange to register and list our goods. Ulf, you take Olaf, Valitu, and the others to exchange the bills. We need to buy flour, seeds, containers, and weapons. Exchange one thousand gold marks’ worth of bills first to avoid drawing too much attention with the money.” Haig thought for a moment, pulled Ulf aside to give instructions, then left with Hrutik and the moneybag to find the exchange.

Ulf left Hilt and Valitu to guard the ship while he, Olaf, Pikku, two Icelanders, and six white slaves disembarked.

The eleven men, each with a sword at their waist, guarded five chests filled with gold coins as they walked along the dock.

Olaf had two throwing axes tucked into his belt, and Pikku carried a short spear as they followed behind. As they left the dock, everyone frowned.

Outside the dock, guards stood watch. Since all eleven were armed, four soldiers approached to stop them.

After speaking in Dutch and realizing Ulf and the others didn’t understand, the lead soldier tried English and Danish.

“Who are you?”

Ulf quickly smiled and replied in Danish that they were heading to the bank. The soldier suddenly understood and mockingly said, “Amsterdam has excellent security. There are patrols on the streets to prevent robberies. If you’re going to the bank, you can call a carriage. There’s no need for such a grand display—it makes you look like bandits.”

Olaf turned his head to look around and noticed a few merchants carrying heavy moneybags with only one or two servants following them. He thought that if Amsterdam didn’t maintain good security, how could merchants feel safe doing business here? He silently praised the wisdom of the Dutch rulers.

Ulf awkwardly smiled, then called two carriages. Everyone boarded and left the dock, heading toward the city center.

The Netherlands was a lowland country, and Amsterdam was built at sea level, crisscrossed with canals. The carriages constantly weaved through bridges and winding roads. Although the bustling streets and crowds were visible on both sides, Olaf soon lost his sense of direction.

For Ulf and the others, who had grown up in Iceland, a street with a hundred people was already overwhelming. But in Amsterdam, people were everywhere—some streets were so crowded that people were shoulder to shoulder. This level of prosperity was beyond anything they had ever seen or heard of, leaving them stunned and tense.

“Heavens, there are so many people here—I can barely breathe!” Valitu swallowed hard.

Ulf also clenched his fists, not daring to look outside. Olaf, however, laughed and turned to observe everyone’s discomfort. Noticing Pikku trembling, he teased, “Pikku, are you afraid of crowds too?”

“Young master, it’s terrifying,” Pikku shrank into his arms, his voice shaking.

Olaf thought, If you saw the crowds during the Golden Week holidays, you’d go mad.

“Don’t be afraid; crowds are nothing to worry about.” Olaf chuckled lightly. “Don’t be scared. Look around and get used to it.”

“You’re not afraid?” Ulf looked at Olaf in surprise.

“Of course not.” Olaf smiled, pointing outside. “You should take a good look at this scene. People are the foundation of a nation’s strength and prosperity. This bustling crowd, this constant flow of people—how prosperous, how intoxicating.”

Ulf followed Olaf’s gesture, gazing outward, and pondered his words. For a moment, he felt like an outsider, watching people buy fruits and vegetables, dried fish, seeing guards arrest thieves, and children begging their parents for street pastries.

After a long while, Ulf snapped back to reality and sighed, “Yes, this is how people should live. This prosperity surpasses Iceland tenfold, a thousand times more than our Vinland.”

“But one day, our Vinland will be as prosperous, wealthy, and bustling as Amsterdam.”

Ulf’s eyes gradually grew determined, and he began to look outside with interest.

Olaf’s heart skipped a beat as he pondered: Father Haldor and my elder brother Ulf both possess extraordinary heroic spirit, far surpassing ordinary people. Yet, historically, they achieved nothing notable and lived ordinary, uneventful lives before leaving Iceland. Does this mean that even heroes need the right opportunity and platform? There’s a saying that ‘the times make the hero.’ Does it mean that even heroes, without the right chance or stage, will remain obscure?

Did my arrival help my father and brother, or did they help me?

After much thought, only one line of poetry echoed in Olaf’s mind, filling him with renewed vigor:

“A golden carp is no fish for a pond—when the winds and clouds gather, it becomes a dragon.”

Chapter 21: The Bank

The carriage stopped in front of the bank, its whitewashed walls gleaming under the sunlight. The coachman, speaking in broken Danish, announced, “We’ve arrived at the bank, sir.”

Ulf tossed the coachman seven or eight copper coins before they all disembarked.

As Olaf stepped down, he glanced at the honest and unassuming coachman, a flicker of curiosity in his mind. Why was this seventeenth-century cab driver so taciturn, unlike the chatty drivers of later eras? Was it the living environment or the religious culture?

Yet, the coachman, a Dutchman, could speak simple Danish and English, which suggested that Amsterdam was teeming with foreign merchants. This was the hallmark of a seventeenth-century international metropolis.

Olaf was generally pleased with what he had seen and heard in Amsterdam. The city had exceeded his expectations—clean streets, bustling commerce, and rational urban planning. If this was the pinnacle of seventeenth-century urban development, then it already possessed the fundamental traits of a modern city.

Pondering this, Olaf followed Ulf through the bank’s entrance. The bank was a two-story classical building with a marble facade and an elegant glass door.

Upon entering, they saw two rows of long benches in the lobby. At the far end stood a tall counter, behind which sat several male bank employees in jackets, their shirt collars visible. The benches were occupied by many people, and the counter was crowded with customers.

A young gentleman in white gloves approached them, smiling as he spoke in fluent Latin, “Gentlemen, how may I assist you?”

Before the Reformation, Latin had been the lingua franca of civilized nations centered around Catholicism. It was the common language of Europe, spoken and written by the educated across all nations.

Ulf had attended a church school for several years, so he understood the gentleman’s words and replied in Latin, “We are here to deposit money.”

“Ah,” the gentleman said, eyeing the sturdy white slaves tightly clutching the money chests. Years of experience told him that the weight of those chests was not silver coins. Five chests of gold coins were no small sum—even in a week, the bank might not see such a large deposit.

“Sir, please follow me to the second floor,” the gentleman said warmly, leading Ulf and the others upstairs. He then gestured to the sofas on the second floor. “Please have a seat. These are the new soft upholstered chairs—we call them sofas. Gentlemen, make yourselves comfortable while I handle your transaction.”

“Good day, sir. I am Frederik Coyett, an assistant manager at the Amsterdam Bank. How much would you like to deposit, and what denomination of notes would you prefer?”

Seated in the second-floor booth, Coyett introduced himself before inquiring about Ulf’s needs.

Ulf placed the money chests on the table in front of Coyett and said, “This is roughly worth one thousand gold marks in pounds and Swedish kronor. Please exchange it for notes in Dutch guilders.”

“Very well, sir. The Dutch guilder is only available in silver coins. Twenty Dutch guilders equal one pound, and one gold mark is approximately one hundred and ten Dutch guilders. Let me first verify your gold coins.” As he spoke, Coyett elegantly opened the chests, sorting and counting the various coins. For those he was unsure of, he weighed them on a scale. Finally, he used a charcoal stick to calculate on paper for a while before saying, “You have five thousand six hundred and eighty-seven pounds, which converts to one hundred and thirteen thousand seven hundred and forty Dutch guilders. I will now prepare your receipt. Would you like checks?”

Ulf asked about the purpose of checks and then nodded, saying, “Issue two, please.”

The Amsterdam Bank currently only offered deposit and currency exchange services, charging a fee of one to five thousandths of the transaction during exchanges. The lending services of later banks had not yet emerged, so deposits did not earn interest. In this regard, it was actually less advanced than the draft banks of the Far East’s Celestial Empire.

Similarly, since banking was a new industry, the checks of this era were not standardized but did have withdrawal functions.

Coyett took out beautifully patterned paper, stamped it with the bank’s official seal, and wrote his name and the check numbers with a goose quill dipped in ink.

“The check amounts are blank, so you may fill them in as needed, but they cannot exceed your deposit. A fee of five ten-thousandths will be charged when withdrawing money.” After blowing the ink dry, Coyett handed Ulf two checks and a deposit certificate, all of which required Ulf’s signature.

The original deposit certificate bore Ulf’s signature, meaning that anyone presenting it to withdraw money would have to replicate the exact handwriting and name from the original document.

Checks, however, did not require this. As long as the amount and signature were filled in, anyone could come to the bank to withdraw the money, provided the name and handwriting on the check matched those on the original certificate.

Checks were used by merchants to purchase large quantities of goods, streamlining the payment process. Currently, they could only be used in Amsterdam.

Coyett rang a small copper bell on the desk, and several burly men immediately appeared to carry away the gold coins. He then smiled and said, “It has been a pleasure serving you, sir. May I have your name?”

“Ulf Haldorsson,” Ulf replied with a smile, returning the compliment. “You are a refined gentleman. I believe your achievements will not be limited to a mere bank assistant.”

“Thank you for your kind words,” Coyett said with a smile. He couldn’t help but add, “Actually, I will be leaving Holland next month. The bank manager has recommended me for a transfer to the East India Company. I will be going to the Spice Islands in the East Indies to assist the governor of Batavia in managing the spice trade. So, your insight is quite accurate.”

“That is truly congratulatory,” Ulf said, shaking Coyett’s hand.

Olaf suddenly remembered the Dutch governor who, thirty years later, would lose to Koxinga and retreat from Taiwan. He was also named Coyett. So, he said, “Mr. Coyett, you will certainly achieve great things in the Far East. However, I have heard that the Ming Dynasty of the Far East is extremely powerful, with a land area and population nearly as large as all of Europe combined. I have also heard that Portugal once attempted to invade the Ming Dynasty but was soundly defeated. Therefore, I believe that any nation seeking to develop in the Far East must show respect to the Ming Dynasty. What do you think?”

“You are?” Coyett found Olaf’s words quite intriguing, as in Europe, only employees or shareholders of the East India Company knew that porcelain and silk came from the Ming Dynasty. Many still followed the Arab tradition of calling it “Khitans.”

“This is my brother, Olaf,” Ulf introduced with a smile. “Olaf is friends with Mr. Hongrode of the Danish East India Company and is quite knowledgeable about the Far East.”

“Ah,” Coyett nodded, warmly shaking Olaf’s hand before whispering, “Mr. Olaf, you don’t look old enough to be of age, but your insight is both unique and accurate. I have heard that several governors in the Far East have tried to open trade with the Ming Dynasty, but they have maintained a maritime ban. Countries under their influence, like Korea and Japan, have done the same. Even if we wanted to befriend the people of the Ming Dynasty, we couldn’t.”

“Then, may I ask if you know of anyone in your country’s East India Company who shares your name?” Olaf asked again to confirm.

“Not that I know of,” Coyett replied, looking at Olaf with a hint of confusion.

Olaf smiled slightly and finally said, “Perhaps I am speaking out of turn, but Mr. Coyett, you are indeed a gentleman. My brother and I would like to be your friends, so I must advise you: unless absolutely necessary, do not invade the territories of the Ming Dynasty, especially the island of Taiwan. The pirates and navy of the Ming Dynasty will not tolerate it.”

Chapter 22: Grain

Kuiyi inwardly dismissed Olaf’s words, but he could tell that the young man was genuinely advising him. Moreover, Olaf, despite his youth, had remarkable insight, and his brother had deposited over a hundred thousand Dutch guilders in the bank—clearly a noble from the north. Judging by their accents, they were likely from Denmark or Norway. Perhaps they would be useful in the future.

With that thought, Kuiyi nodded and smiled. “Thank you for your advice, Mr. Olaf. I will keep it in mind.”

Olaf knew his casual remark wouldn’t stop Kuiyi from pursuing the governorship of Taiwan, but he was confident that his insights on the Far East would make Kuiyi take him seriously. That was enough.

“Mr. Kuiyi, if you return home next year to visit your family, I hope you can bring back some specialties from the Ming Dynasty for me. Price is no object.”

“No problem. Please provide a list, Mr. Olaf. I will look for them when I arrive in Batavia next month.”

Kuiyi took out paper and a pen and handed them to Olaf.

Olaf wrote down the names of blue-and-white porcelain tea sets, tableware, and other items in Latin. He also listed medicinal herbs like isatis root and honeysuckle, specifying quantities in the hundreds of pounds. Besides porcelain and medicine, he included three books—by Li Shizhen, Xu Guangqi, and Song Yingxing—writing both the authors’ names and titles in Latin and simplified Chinese before handing the list to Kuiyi.

Kuiyi glanced at it and praised Olaf’s vast knowledge, marveling that he could even write such complex Eastern characters. He promised to find the items as soon as possible. The two agreed to meet again at the bank next April to complete the transaction. If either couldn’t attend, they would send a representative with a signed note.

After settling their business, Ulf asked Kuiyi about the grain market. Kuiyi recommended a highly reputable grain merchant and personally escorted Olaf, Ulf, and the others out of the bank.

Olaf and Ulf left the bank with ease and followed Kuiyi’s directions, walking until they reached the area near Rembrandt Garden. There, they saw a massive warehouse. In front of it was an artificial circular canal. Laborers unloaded sacks of wheat, rye, and other grains from small boats on one side, then transported them to the central gate before carrying them into the warehouse. Most of the goods, however, were already milled flour.

On the other side of the canal, boats lined up to transport grain.

Ulf gazed at the bustling crowd in front of the grain market and exclaimed in awe, “This Bade Grain Market is enormous! I don’t think all the grain in Iceland could match what they have here.”

Olaf watched the laboring white men, their spirits high, and realized this was the power of capital. Everyone involved had something to gain, giving them hope for the future and passion for life. It was this very force that had allowed tiny Holland to rise to global dominance in just a few decades.

As they approached the grain market, a young apprentice greeted them with a smile before they could even speak.

Ulf and Olaf couldn’t help but admire the Dutch business acumen. Holland’s rapid rise was no accident—it was built on sharp commercial instincts.

In truth, Dutch merchants weren’t particularly courteous compared to modern salespeople, but they were at least enthusiastic, smiling, and mindful of business quality. Compared to the Dutch, Ulf and Olaf felt Icelandic merchants fell far short. If there was a professional code for Icelandic merchants, it would be: “Please do not assault customers without cause.”

Vikings carried axes in their left hands, knives in their right, with wine and gold in their pockets and battle songs and epics in their minds.

Icelanders, descendants of Vikings, were no longer as savage. Now, they carried axes in their left hands and hoes in their right, with wine and hides in their pockets and sagas and children in their minds.

Ulf stated his need for large quantities of flour, and the apprentice quickly led them inside, shouting in Dutch. A plump, elderly man approached, speaking broken Danish. “Ah, two young masters! I’m the owner of Bade Grain Market. You can call me Old Bade. I hear you need a lot of flour.”

“Yes, Old Bade,” Ulf said, gesturing to the mountains of grain in the warehouse. “Mr. Kuiyi from the bank recommended you. I need twenty thousand pounds of rye flour, ten thousand pounds each of wheat and barley flour, and another ten thousand pounds of unhusked barley, wheat, and rye.”

“That’s quite a lot,” Old Bade replied. “But I have what you need. Since you were referred by Kuiyi, I’ll give you a discount. How about this: rye flour at ten stuivers per pound, wheat flour at twelve, and barley flour at nine.”

Old Bade’s rapid pricing made Ulf agree on the spot. They drafted a contract, stipulating that Old Bade would pay the taxes, and each kept a copy.

Though Olaf wasn’t concerned with grain prices, he found Bade’s offer reasonable. In Iceland, a pound of rye flour cost nearly twenty copper coins. The stuiver was a Dutch copper coin, with an exchange rate of about forty to one Dutch guilder. Nine guilders were roughly equivalent to one mark, and in Iceland, one mark was worth over two hundred Danish copper coins or three hundred and sixty stuivers. Calculating the numbers, shipping grain to Iceland could yield a gross profit of seventy to eighty percent. Even after expenses, the net profit would exceed thirty percent.

The grain trade showed that seafaring was a venture of both risk and reward.

Ulf handed Old Bade a check for twelve thousand two hundred guilders.

Old Bade examined it carefully before tucking it away. “Do you need the goods urgently? If not, I can clear the check at the bank tomorrow and arrange delivery. Which dock is your ship at?”

“Not urgent. We haven’t sold our goods yet. You can deliver the day after tomorrow,” Ulf said after a moment’s thought. “Our ship is at Dock 21. Just ask for me, Ulf. If I’m not there, look for a Mr. Haig—he’s my uncle.”

“Understood, Mr. Ulf. You northerners—”

Chapter 23: Windmills

Amsterdam was a city crisscrossed by rivers and man-made canals, where goods were transported by boats large and small, making trade exceptionally convenient.

The most bustling area was the southern district, while the northern region was relatively remote. Due to its remoteness, commerce was underdeveloped, but it was home to numerous small workshops, forming the beginnings of an industrial park.

As Olaf walked along, he noticed many workshops producing ship supplies and components, as well as others crafting fishing gear and nets. These were the backbone industries of Holland, naturally stimulating the growth of related processing trades.

Entering the courtyard, Valitu called out loudly, “Is anyone here? Is Master Troy around?”

“Who’s there?”

A deep, hoarse voice responded, and an elderly man covered in wood shavings emerged from a room.

Upon seeing Ulf and the others, the old man spoke in Dutch, German, and English, but no one understood. Olaf replied in Danish and Latin.

The old man sighed in relief and spoke in broken Danish, “Ah, friends from the north. Are you here for windmills? I’ve built over a dozen windmill workshops on the Jutland Peninsula in Denmark.”

The Jutland Peninsula was in northern Germany but belonged to Denmark, the largest landmass in the country, bordering the North Sea to the west. The cold currents from the North Sea kept the western coast windy year-round, so Denmark had built many windmills there to harness the wind.

Valitu, who had been to Denmark, quietly explained this to Olaf and Ulf, who then understood why Master Troy had been invited by the Danish authorities to build windmills—he was truly a master.

“Master Troy, we’d like to purchase a windmill and a waterwheel to take back and install ourselves. Would you be able to make them?” Olaf asked politely.

Troy seemed unfazed, not surprised that a young man like Olaf was speaking for the group. He smiled kindly and said, “Young master, I can make both, but you’ll need to provide specifications—size, for example. However, I worry that if you take the equipment back and install it improperly, you might blame me for selling you faulty goods.”

“We just need the standard windmills like those along the Dutch coast. If you’re concerned about installation, could you instruct my servants? I’d be happy to pay extra for your guidance.” After a brief discussion with Ulf, Olaf replied.

Troy considered for a moment before nodding. “Alright. But making two sets will take ten days. During that time, you can have your men learn in my workshop, though I can’t guarantee they’ll master it.”

“That’s fine,” Olaf said with a smile. “Thank you for your generosity.”

After some negotiation, Ulf and Troy settled on two waterwheel mills and two windmill sets for sixteen thousand Dutch guilders.

Troy explained that purchasing materials—wood, iron, and processed parts—would require upfront payment.

In this era, buyers rarely provided advances since demand outweighed supply.

Ulf had no choice but to agree. Troy then sent an apprentice to fetch an assistant from the Windmill Guild to witness the transaction. After signing the commission agreement—with the guild assistant also signing—Ulf paid the sixteen thousand guilders by check.

The contract was made in triplicate. Unlike grain, which was in high demand, windmills weren’t taxed, saving Ulf a considerable sum.

Among the white slaves on the ship, three or four had carpentry or masonry skills—common among the poor, who often had multiple trades. Olaf and Ulf planned to send them to learn from Troy to avoid installation problems back in Vinland.

By the time they returned to the dock, it was afternoon. The distant church bells marked the fourth hour, with dusk approaching in half an hour.

Olaf remembered that Amsterdam should have the most advanced self-striking clocks, so he decided to visit a shop the next day to buy a few. He had grown tired of estimating time and missed the precision of clocks.

On their way back, Olaf, Ulf, and the others stopped at a restaurant for pork pies and boiled mussels, so they weren’t too hungry when they returned to the ship.

Hrutik and Haig were already aboard. Olaf and Ulf reported the day’s events, and Hrutik nodded in approval. “You’ve done well. You’re truly capable—just like Haldor’s sons.”

Haig also praised them before adding, “Hrutik and I have finished the paperwork. Our furs and royal jelly are now listed for sale. I expect buyers will come tomorrow—beaver pelts are in high demand.”

As if on cue, a man’s voice called out in Danish from outside, “Are Mr. Haig and Mr. Hrutik here? I’m a friend of Mr. Putmans, here to purchase goods.”

Haig and Hrutik hurried outside, and Ulf asked, “Who’s Putmans?”

Hrutik replied casually, “He’s the exchange manager. When we got our tax permits, he learned we were selling beaver pelts and said he’d send buyers. Didn’t expect it to be so quick.”

Soon, Haig and Hrutik returned with a man in a dark green wool coat.

“Mr. Kolank, please sit,” Haig invited, taking a seat himself.

“I heard from Mr. Putmans that you have beaver pelts. May I see them? If the quality is good, I’d like to buy them all.”

Kolank, who appeared to be in his forties with a weathered face, asked eagerly as soon as he sat down.

His manner and appearance suggested he was an agent for someone important. Haig and Hrutik suspected he might work for Putmans, but regardless, a buyer was a buyer.

“Just a moment.” Haig nodded and instructed Pikku to fetch a beaver pelt, along with river otter, wolf, and other furs.

Soon, Pikku and a white slave sailor entered with the pelts. Kolank couldn’t resist standing up to take the beaver pelt, feeling its texture and smelling it.

“This is fresh this year—excellent quality.” Kolank then examined the river otter and wolf pelts, praising them repeatedly.

Setting the furs aside, Kolank returned to his seat, his expression serious as he asked Haig, “Mr. Haig, your beaver pelts are of fine quality, though the tanning is a bit rough. Still, they’re premium. How much do you have?”

“Forty-four beaver pelts, thirty river otter pelts, thirty sable pelts, six bear pelts, twelve white wolf pelts, sixteen fox pelts, and fifty-two squirrel pelts.”

Haig listed their inventory before asking, “What price can you offer, Mr. Kolank?”

“I’d like to purchase at last year’s rates. In Amsterdam, beaver pelts usually go for around four hundred Dutch guilders—already higher than elsewhere. But with beaver pelts growing scarcer, I can offer four hundred sixty guilders. River otter pelts, however, will be lower.”

Chapter 24: Good Things Don’t Worry About Selling

Kolank, true to his reputation as an old merchant, wore a face of honesty and integrity. He skillfully guided the negotiation, offering a fair price. In truth, furs of this quality in Amsterdam could easily fetch five hundred Dutch guilders, but Haig and his companions didn’t want to waste too much time. After some mental calculations, they agreed that four hundred and sixty guilders was already higher than what the governor of Dublin and Lord Bowes had offered.

“Alright, sir, we’ll take your price,” Haig said after consulting with Ulf and Hrutik.

“May God bless you, sir. You truly are an excellent merchant and sailor,” Kolank praised Haig without pause, then took out checks and contracts to fill in.

After Haig signed and confirmed everything, Kolank took a copy of the contract and tucked it into his waist pouch. “Tomorrow morning is Friday, and the bank will be open. Please confirm the check is valid and wait on the ship. I will personally bring people to collect the goods in the morning.”

Haig glanced at the string of zeros on the check, nodded, and smiled. “A deal worth two hundred and twenty thousand guilders—no room for carelessness. As long as the check can be cashed tomorrow morning, delivering it to your residence won’t be a problem.”

“Rest assured, sir. The reputation of Kolank Trading House is well-known throughout Holland. We would never do anything dishonorable,” Kolank said solemnly.

“Yes, Kolank Trading House has always had a good reputation,” Haig agreed casually, then remembered that merchants as capable as Kolank were rare. If they didn’t seize this opportunity, the royal jelly might take much longer to sell. So, he recommended, “Our royal jelly is also a top-tier delicacy with medicinal value. Would you like some?”

“Oh?” Kolank raised an eyebrow, clearly interested. “I’ve always been curious about royal jelly. Since you’ve brought it up, let me take a look.”

Pikku brought over half a jar of “royal jelly”—the leftover half from when Olaf and Ulf had mixed it with sugar water to drink.

When the lid was lifted, a sweet and fragrant aroma wafted out. Kolank smiled. “May I taste it?”

“Of course,” Haig said, handing him a spoon.

“Delicious. This royal jelly is indeed different from ordinary honey. The fragrance is unique—I’ve never tasted anything like it. I think it will appeal to important figures,” Kolank said after a bite. He wiped the spoon clean with a handkerchief and returned it to Haig. “Where does royal jelly come from? And what’s the price per gallon?”

Haig looked at Olaf, who gave him a subtle nod. Following Olaf’s lead, Haig presented the “royal jelly” as a rare delicacy with mysterious, primitive origins, pricing it similarly to white sugar from the Celestial Empire.

Since white sugar was currently only produced in the Ming Dynasty, it was a rare and precious sweet in Europe, far more expensive than honey.

“Alright, if royal jelly is a treasure from Siberia, it’s worth the price,” Kolank mused for a while before nodding. “But royal jelly is still a new product. It will take time to open up the market and gain recognition. If you could lower the price by a third, I’d be willing to buy more.”

Olaf had originally planned to sell it at the price of honey, so two-thirds the price of white sugar was actually slightly higher than honey. After some thought, he nodded at Haig.

“Alright. I have about forty to fifty jars on my ship right now.”

“I’ll take them all,” Kolank said.

After Haig agreed, they finalized another contract.

This time, the check was for sixty thousand Dutch guilders, worth three thousand pounds.

After Kolank left, Haig handed the check to Olaf and said, “Selling the royal jelly alone has earned you seven thousand pounds, kid. Tsk, tsk, that’s quite something.”

Olaf’s heart raced. He knew that seven thousand pounds in this era wasn’t like a few hundred years later—it was seven thousand pounds of solid silver.

Seven thousand pounds equaled over seventy thousand taels of silver in the Ming Dynasty, nearly eighty thousand. While this might be pocket change to the truly wealthy in the Ming Dynasty or Europe, it was equivalent to the entire fortune of a small merchant.

Twenty-eight years ago, when England first established the East India Company, its capital was only seventy-two thousand pounds, raised by over a hundred investors. Of course, each investor contributed only a small amount, but this showed the significant value of seven thousand pounds.

After all, a cow cost only four pounds, a purebred Shire horse less than nine pounds, and a villa in central London only three to four thousand pounds. Of course, there was no concept of real estate speculation yet, so prices weren’t high.

No matter how you looked at it, Olaf’s earnings this time were equivalent to what Haldor could have made from farming and herding in Iceland for twenty or thirty years.

Luxury goods were always the most profitable.

Satisfied with his income, Olaf added another procurement plan to his original one.

Originally, Olaf had planned to make his first fortune with maple syrup, then use the money to buy a ship and a few dozen white slaves—a budget of about four thousand marks. But now, with over thirteen thousand marks, Olaf thought it might be better to buy an armed merchant ship and some cannons, giving himself some firepower.

The next morning, Haig took Olaf to the bank. After waiting about as long as it took a candle to burn, they reached the counter. Both checks were confirmed valid and then re-deposited into Haig’s account.

Haig then requested ten more checks before leaving with Olaf.

Back at the ship, they ran into Kolank waiting with servants and vehicles. After a brief exchange, they began loading the furs and royal jelly. Once Kolank left, Old Bade arrived with several carts of grain.

By then, Ulf had returned. That morning, he had taken sailors to learn how to assemble and manufacture windmills from Troy. After a quick trip, he was back.

Seeing the sun high in the sky, Ulf estimated it was nearly noon. Since the sailors were busy unloading grain, Olaf and Hrutik went to the shipyard to buy a ship.

The shipyards along the Dutch docks were countless. Beyond the mooring area, heading north across the bridge and then east, they saw a large river—the Zaan River. To the west, it connected to Amsterdam’s intricate canals and the grand canal leading to the North Sea.

On the north bank stood rows of large factories, most with their doors wide open. Some even had nearly completed wooden ships pulled outside. From the outside, they could see windmills and towering winches inside the shipyards. Only after entering did Olaf realize that the windmills used coastal winds to power sawmills for cutting timber into ship planks.

Buying a ship was no small matter. They visited four or five shipyards, asking about their offerings, which were mostly similar. However, ready-made ships were scarce, and the few available were too small for Haig’s needs.

If they ordered a custom ship, even with materials on hand, it would take at least three days. Without materials, it could take over ten days.

After making the rounds, Haig decided to wait for the best. After some discussion, they chose De Groot Shipyard, a mid-sized but large-scale operation.

The reason they chose De Groot Shipyard was that while other shipyards boasted about building merchant ships for the Dutch and British East India Companies, De Groot’s staff told Haig and his group that their chief shipbuilder, Henrik Habert, was currently in Stockholm, the capital of Sweden, building a warship for “The Lion of the North,” King Gustavus Adolphus II.

That ship was the Vasa, the flagship of the Swedish navy, which would lead Sweden to defeat Poland and Denmark, dominating the Baltic Sea.

With this example in mind, they naturally chose De Groot Shipyard for their warship. Haig paid a deposit of thirty-eight thousand Dutch guilders, ordering three armed merchant ships and one mixed-rigged merchant ship—one of the armed merchant ships was for Olaf.

Chapter 25: Visiting the Big Shot

Holland’s shipbuilding technology currently leads the world. The same ship would cost thirty to forty percent more to build in London or Denmark than in Amsterdam, due to differences in labor and technology.

Additionally, the design and ease of use of Dutch ships make them the most numerous. A large ship of the same displacement would require seventeen or eighteen sailors in England or Denmark, but only twelve in Holland. Thus, even merchants from major shipbuilding nations like England and Denmark come to Holland to order ships to save money. This is Holland’s core competitive advantage.

After ordering the ships, Haig inquired about cannons, preparing to equip two armed merchant vessels with cannon firearms.

The shipyard owner, Mr. Arent de Groot, informed Haig that the shipyard was not authorized to sell firearms or cannons. However, he quietly added that any director of the East India Company could sell Haig cannons and firearms, and he could arrange an introduction—but this would require a significant amount of money.

“In Holland, there’s nothing you can’t buy.”

De Groot’s words made Haig, Ulf, and the others understand. They then asked him to arrange the introduction.

That afternoon, De Groot took Haig around the southern district of Amsterdam, spending over a thousand Dutch guilders on porcelain and paintings, which he then sent out. Finally, one family responded—a director of the East India Company responsible for personnel scheduling. He only had time the next morning, so Haig would have to visit him then.

Getting this matter settled relieved Haig and the others. They knew that if all went well, this director’s word would make acquiring the cannons, firearms, plate armor, and other weapons and equipment they needed no problem at all.

The next morning, Haig and Hrutik put on presentable frock coats and top hats, bringing four sailor servants and gifts of sable fur, and followed De Groot to visit the East India Company director.

Since the furs in the ship’s hold were expensive, they had sold all the intact ones, leaving only a few severely damaged pelts from hunting that weren’t worth much. Haig had planned to take these back to give to his sister-in-law and other relatives as scarves. Now, for the visit to the important figure, he had selected the best sable pelt and three squirrel pelts to bring along.

While Haig and Hrutik went to visit the big shot, Ulf and Olaf led the others to buy pottery jars, fabrics, wool, stationery, leather, and various materials, as well as needles, thread, kitchenware, and other household items. They also purchased seeds for various fruits, vegetables, and grains.

After buying several cartloads of miscellaneous goods, they spent less than three thousand Dutch guilders.

Passing by a musical instrument shop, Olaf saw a young girl playing a square-shaped instrument, the melodious music soothing the soul.

Upon inquiry, he learned it was a horizontal harp, like the vertical harp, both traditional Nordic instruments, but now with very few players. Olaf took notice because, at first glance, this square-shaped harp somewhat resembled traditional Chinese instruments like the guzheng or guqin.

Watching…

Chapter 26: Journey to Scotland

After the group settled into the cabin, Olaf asked, “What did you all buy, Uncle?”

“Thirty-six 32-pound cannons, eighteen 9-pound cannons, three hundred firelock muskets, five hundred sets of plate armor, over a hundred bows and crossbows, five hundred each of knives, swords, and long spears, and more than two hundred crates of ammunition. The cannons and plate armor were the most expensive—they’re all made of pure iron,” Hrutik recited from the first purchase order he pulled from his pocket, then sighed.

“These cannons should be enough for three armed merchant ships. Heavy cannons for direct attacks, light cannons for harassment. And the firelock muskets and plate armor—quite the arsenal,” Olaf marveled at Haig and Hrutik’s extravagance.

“That’s way too expensive,” Ulf fretted over the dwindling funds.

“It’s not that expensive,” Haig grinned. “Mr. Fransen said the cannons are new, but a lot of the other weapons and gear are used—leftovers from Dutch soldiers. They’re still usable, just a bit worn. If it weren’t for the peace with Spain, they wouldn’t be selling them so cheap.”

“Still, over two hundred thousand Dutch guilders…”

Ulf couldn’t help but wince. Olaf frowned and said, “We need to set up our own weapons production line someday. Relying on purchases isn’t sustainable.”

“That’s thinking too far ahead for now,” Hrutik muttered, though his eyes betrayed a glimmer of hope.

Olaf nodded. “You’re right. Let’s focus on building our strength first.”

Ulf’s miscellaneous supplies weren’t fully loaded until the next afternoon. Olaf and Ulf spent the day wandering Amsterdam’s markets, where they saw gypsy fortune-tellers and magicians, Arab snake charmers and monkey trainers, and other curiosities.

They also spotted goods from the Far East—familiar to Olaf, though the porcelain was crude and the fabric patterns unrefined. Clearly, these were low-end imports.

Nine days later, Troy arrived with his apprentices, delivering windmill and watermill components to the dock, along with a hand-drawn installation diagram for Ulf.

“Your sailors may be slow, but they’re diligent. They can build the windmills and watermills using this diagram.”

On the tenth evening, an armed merchant ship entered the harbor near Thor’s Hammer.

A group of hurried figures in black cloaks stood on the deck.

Haig and Hrutik, hearing the commotion, grabbed their weapons and rushed out with the crew. Upon seeing the ship’s occupants, they paused, waving flags in a brief exchange. A cloaked figure on the other ship responded with a flag signal.

“It’s the delivery,” Haig sighed in relief, then directed the crew to set up a plank.

A man emerged from the cloaks, spoke briefly with Haig, and then the crew began unloading massive, heavy crates from the hold.

It took over a dozen men to carry a single crate, and only two could be moved at a time. Haig and Hrutik pried each one open for inspection, finding firearms, plate armor, and other weapons—most of them brand new.

“Load them onto our ship.”

The crew carried the crates across the plank onto Thor’s Hammer. After unloading over a dozen large crates of weapons, the cloaked figures brought out another thirty or forty smaller ones. These were lighter.

Haig opened one and recognized the iron cannons he had purchased. The 36-pound cannons weighed six to seven hundred pounds each, and with wheels, they were even heavier. The 9-pound cannons were much lighter.

By the time the crew finished loading the cannons and ammunition, it was the dead of night. The only sounds were the waves crashing against the hull.

The cloaked leader emerged, followed Haig into the cabin, and by candlelight, accepted a check for two hundred and fifty thousand Dutch guilders before nodding and leaving.

Haig and Hrutik sent the crew to bed, then spent a long time examining the cannons before finally retiring.

The next morning, Haig personally piloted the ship to the northern shore of the harbor, sailing into the Zaan River and docking at De Groot Shipyard.

De Groot’s men used pulleys to lower the cannons, preparing to install them in the gunports of the armed merchant ships.

Haig oversaw the near-completion of the four new ships, while Ulf and Olaf went to purchase goods. After spending so much on ships and weapons, they couldn’t afford to return from Scotland empty-handed.

Of Haig’s three hundred and fifty thousand guilders, after buying food, windmills, watermills, and weapons, less than seventy thousand remained. The two armed merchant ships and one mixed-rigged schooner cost fifty-five thousand guilders, and the remaining twenty thousand for the third armed merchant ship came from Olaf.

So Haig was left with only fifteen thousand guilders. Seeing his uncle’s predicament, Olaf lent him most of his seven thousand pounds, allowing Haig to send Ulf to buy goods.

Thor’s Hammer was loaded with weapons, while Hope carried a full ship of grain. The remaining four new ships—three armed merchant ships of similar size to Hope and Thor’s Hammer—had their cargo space reduced by a third due to the cannons, significantly lowering their capacity.

The mixed-rigged schooner was smaller than the large ships, primarily for fishing and coastal transport. Ulf bought it for convenience in Vinland—it would make fishing easier and allow river travel inland, serving as a fast transport and troop carrier against the savages.

For around fifty thousand guilders, Ulf bought one hundred pounds of first-grade spices and two hundred and seventy pounds of second-grade spices.

He spent another fifty thousand guilders on large quantities of hemp textiles, beer, and twenty sacks of sugar.

The five thousand pounds were spent clean, and the remaining funds bought enough fresh water and food for the five ships’ crews. When Ulf returned the money bag to Haig, it contained only eight thousand guilders in silver coins from the Amsterdam Bank—heavy with silver but worth only four hundred pounds.

On the morning of June 2nd, after all preparations were complete, Haig submitted the tax permit and had the exchange staff verify the contracts and port documents, obtaining the departure papers. After handing them to the port authorities, he received a transit pass. The five ships, under the command of Haig, Ulf, Hrutik, Hilt, and Valitu, slowly left the harbor, heading north out of Amsterdam’s inland sea.

Near the West Frisian Islands, Dutch ships blocked their path, allowing only departures from the port of Den Helder. This was the only northern gateway to Amsterdam, effectively a Dutch checkpoint.

The five large ships were stopped at Den Helder, where a Dutch naval officer inspected their departure papers before allowing them to proceed—a measure to prevent tax evasion and smuggling.

With Hope leading, the three armed merchant ships formed an arrowhead formation behind, encircling Thor’s Hammer and the mixed-rigged schooner.

After clearing the Den Helder checkpoint, the fleet entered the North Sea, adjusted course, and set full sail. The wind filled the sails, propelling the ships northwest at high speed.

By noon the next day, the fleet reached the Firth of Forth on Scotland’s east coast—a large, trumpet-shaped bay. About a hundred nautical miles west lay Edinburgh, the former capital of the Kingdom of Scotland and now the capital of the Scottish region under the United Kingdom of England, Scotland, and Ireland.

Chapter 27: Scottish White Slaves

Edinburgh was an ancient city with centuries of history as a royal capital. The entire city radiated outward from the royal castle at its heart in a spiderweb pattern, stretching north to the harbor and east, west, and south to the highland forests.

After the fleet entered Edinburgh’s harbor, they docked under the guidance of the flag bearer. Port authority officials then questioned the crew about their purpose and origins. Upon learning they intended to sell goods, the officials led Haig to the authority’s office to register and obtain a tax permit.

With all formalities completed, the fleet could now list their goods for sale at the Edinburgh Exchange. Haig and Ulf went to the exchange to find merchants willing to buy their wares, while Hrutik took a few men to seek out Scottish landowners in Edinburgh, planning to recruit several dozen Scottish white slaves.

Given Ireland’s current state, securing one or two thousand people would have been effortless. The people in northern Ireland were struggling to survive, and many were actively seeking opportunities to leave by sea. However, Haldor and Haig were no fools. They feared that if too many Irish white slaves were brought in, they might band together, refusing to cooperate, demanding better treatment, or even overthrowing their leaders.

To counterbalance the Irish white slaves and maintain a power equilibrium, they needed to recruit some Scottish white slaves as well.

Olaf had heard Haldor, Haig, and Ulf discussing this very issue by the fireplace during the harsh winter. He had always agreed with their reasoning.

Currently, Vinland had over two hundred white slaves, with around one hundred fifty being Irish and only about thirty Scottish. Haig and Ulf, with the help of four or five Icelanders they had brought from home and a dozen white slave militiamen, managed over two hundred white slaves and two hundred savages without any issues. This was largely because the number of white slaves was still small, and Haig, armed and fiercely tempered, treated his men generously, leaving the slaves with no rebellious thoughts.

But as the number of white slaves grew, there was no guarantee that some wouldn’t develop dangerous ideas. If the white slaves far outnumbered the handful of Icelanders and militiamen under Haig’s command, the situation could become perilous.

For this reason, Haig had always prioritized selecting white slaves who were family-oriented and honest.

Now, with Haldor bringing over a hundred Icelanders, the leadership’s strength had increased tenfold. With the support of Hrut Village, Haig estimated they could safely add five hundred to eight hundred more white slaves without threatening the Icelanders’ dominance.

However, to balance the power dynamics and prevent the white slaves from uniting based on shared homeland and kinship, they still needed to recruit some Scots. This would prevent Vinland’s social structure from being divided solely between the upper-class Icelanders and the lower-class Irish white slaves—a highly unstable arrangement that could easily lead to internal strife or even rebellion.

By incorporating more Scots, Vinland’s social hierarchy would consist of the Hrut family at the top, followed by the Icelandic elite, then the white slave militiamen, the Irish and Scottish white slaves, and finally the savage slaves at the bottom.

This stratification would reduce the likelihood of the Irish white slaves uniting, and if the Scottish and Irish white slaves were mixed into the same teams, even if the Irish were more numerous, they wouldn’t be able to form a cohesive bloc.

After listing their goods for sale, the fleet’s merchandise didn’t sell as well as hoped.

In a place as ordinary and even backward as Scotland, luxury items like spices and sugar weren’t in high demand. Each merchant only bought a small amount.

Moreover, Scottish merchants had limited resources. Even for staples like grain, beer, and linen, they could only afford purchases ranging from a few dozen to a couple hundred pounds.

Haig, Hrutik, and the others seemed prepared for this. Each day, one of them would go to the exchange to find buyers, while the rest waited patiently as various merchants boarded the ships to inspect the goods.

The mountains of cargo on the five large ships gradually dwindled. After three or four days of bustling activity, the diverse goods were finally sold off in batches to twenty-seven or twenty-eight Scottish merchants.

“Apart from the thirty thousand pounds of unhusked barley, wheat, and rye we kept for ourselves, all the other grain and beer has been sold. I did a quick calculation—we made a total of seven thousand eight hundred pounds, which means a profit of two thousand five hundred pounds.”

In the pilot house, Haig finished counting the gold and silver coins in the money chest and turned to Olaf with a smile. “Here’s your five thousand five hundred pounds, Uncle. I won’t take your money for nothing.”

Olaf had used the remaining five thousand pounds after buying the ship to lend to his uncle for purchasing goods. Now, he had earned a ten percent return. Grinning, he said, “I’ll treat everyone to a feast tonight. How about roast pig and roast lamb?”

“What a generous young master!” Pikku clapped and cheered, showering his master with praise.

“White slaves will be arriving tonight,” Haig said with a light chuckle. “Hrutik has already gone to select them. I’d say there’ll be around fifty or sixty households.”

Haig had always been ruthless toward the poor Scots and Irish. Olaf had long seen him as a cold-hearted hero who valued only his family, friends, and subordinates, so his uncle’s mocking words didn’t surprise him.

“I heard Hrutik say that in England, the West India Company often recruits farmers and poor city dwellers to go to the West Indies to seek their fortunes,” Valitu chimed in. “Their deceptive tactics are a hundred times worse than ours.”

“Is that true?” Hilt, an orphan from England, had always held an idealized view of his homeland. Valitu’s words were hard for him to accept.

“Of course it’s true. Hrutik heard it from the Scottish nobles themselves,” Valitu scoffed. “Little Hilt, you’re still young. You don’t understand how vile the nobility can be. Your Uncle Valitu wouldn’t lie to you.”

Soon, an hour passed. The self-striking clock in the pilot house, adorned with a saint’s image, chimed.

Olaf glanced at the time—six in the evening. The sky was gradually darkening.

In summer, England didn’t get truly dark until after seven, but the sun began to set around six.

Suddenly, two ornate carriages with intricate carvings appeared at the dock. The drivers were dressed impeccably, clearly from wealthy families.

Behind the carriages followed over a hundred Scots carrying bundles, their children in tow. The carriages came to a stop, and Hrutik, dressed in a worn but neatly pressed military uniform, stepped out of the first one. He then opened the door of the second carriage.

A short, obese man emerged from the second carriage. He sported a forked mustache that curled to the sides and carried a walking stick.

Haig and Ulf had already hurried down from the ship. Haig shook the short man’s hand and said with a smile, “Mr. Ramos, why did you come yourself?”

Olaf stood on the deck, quietly observing the scene at the harbor. Hearing Haig address the short man as Mr. Ramos, he recalled what Hrutik had told him earlier. Ramos was a local Scottish landowner and merchant who was eager to make money in any way possible. He had helped them coordinate with other landowners to recruit white slaves.

“I had to come myself. We’ve worked together many times, Haig. You’re a good friend of mine. How could I not come to oversee things?” Ramos said with a smile.

Haig, knowing the man’s true nature, sneered inwardly. You’re just afraid your servants will run off with the money. You don’t trust anyone with it.

“Hrutik, how many households is this?” Haig asked, turning to him.

“Sixty-six households, one hundred twenty-six people in total,” Hrutik replied without hesitation.

Haig nodded, then turned and ordered, “Valitu, go to the cabin and fetch two hundred sixty-four pounds.”

When Valitu returned with a money bag and handed it to Haig, Haig counted the money in front of everyone before giving it to Ramos.

Ramos weighed the bag in his hand and knew instantly that not a penny was missing. He then pulled out a stack of contracts from his coat. These were the signed indenture agreements of the one hundred twenty-six people, stating that they had voluntarily agreed to purchase passage to the West Indies but, lacking the funds, had agreed to work without pay for six years in exchange.

The signatures were mostly scrawled, illegible letters. Most of the farmers and poor were illiterate, and some could only write the initials of their names, while others could only manage a single letter. A few couldn’t write at all and had to have friends or family sign for them.

Unlike the Eastern practice of pressing a thumbprint, Westerners simply signed with letters.

By handing over these contracts, Ramos had effectively transferred the lives and management rights of the one hundred twenty-six people on the dock to Haig. In return, Haig had only paid Ramos two hundred sixty-four pounds and promised the white slaves a plot of land after their term of service.

“May God bless you, my friend,” Ramos said cheerfully as he pocketed the money bag. He shook Haig’s hand and then left in his carriage.

Chapter 28: The Return Journey

After Ramos left, only the Scottish white slaves, their master Haig, and several dozen sailors remained on the dock.

“Lads, friends, you’ve all been forced by circumstance to leave your homeland and seek a new life in the West Indies. You’ve placed your families’ futures in my hands, and I feel the weight of that responsibility. But I won’t let you down.”

Haig frowned at the uncertainty in the eyes of the Scottish white slaves before him. Stepping forward, he raised his voice in a speech: “I am Haig, one of the leaders of our future home. We went from Iceland to the West Indies and, after eight years of hard work, established a peaceful haven—a free homeland. You’ll be very satisfied when you arrive. I promise you this: as long as you work hard and follow our arrangements, your indentured status will be lifted on schedule. You might even gain your freedom early, along with land, livestock, and even savage slaves.”

As Haig finished speaking, the eyes of the male Scottish slaves began to flicker with faint flames of hope and ambition—a sign of their longing for the outside world and their rekindled confidence. The female slaves also seemed more lively, no longer clutching their children in fear.

Surveying the crowd, Haig said a few more encouraging words before pointing to a large ship ahead. “Friends, the ship that will take you to your new home in the West Indies is right there. The road to happiness lies ahead. Step forward for your future and board the ship.”

After Haig finished, Hrutik ordered the sailors to guide the Scottish slaves onto the ship. In less than half an hour, the dock was empty.

Since the three armed merchant ships were the core of their strength, Haig planned to house the white slaves on Thor’s Hammer, Hope, and the mixed-rigged schooner. If there wasn’t enough space, a few would be placed on the armed merchant ships.

Under Haig’s orders, over a hundred Scottish slaves were packed into Thor’s Hammer. Then, the five ships, loaded with fresh water and coarse grain, purchased a small amount of whisky—a new Scottish liquor—as well as locally produced coarse linen and various rough tools before setting sail.

The fleet sailed north in a wide arc before turning west through the North Sea strait between Britain and Ireland. They reached the mouth of the Foyle River in northern Ireland, then sailed south against the current into the port of Derry, just outside the city.

Derry was what would later become Londonderry, the capital of British Northern Ireland. At present, it was still underdeveloped and poor—even the crude, narrow port revealed the low city walls and houses in the distance.

Compared to Amsterdam and Dublin, Derry was much smaller and more dilapidated. At first glance, its prosperity was on par with Reykjavik in Iceland.

Olaf pondered in his mind: Amsterdam was like the water towns of Jiangnan—Suzhou and Hangzhou—with canals everywhere, its prosperity and commerce comparable to those two prefectures. Edinburgh resembled a northern military stronghold that had seen battle, while Dublin was like an ordinary prefecture in the Ming Dynasty. Though Olaf had never seen one, judging by economic scale, these two cities were at that level.

As for Derry, it was truly just a low city wall enclosing a small town with few people—more like a village than a city.

The dock outside this rundown city had only a few fishing boats. There wasn’t a single large merchant ship, let alone any management personnel.

“Derry is the territory of Rory O’More. Even the governor of Derry is a junior member of the O’More family—the nephew of the clan leader, Rory O’More. It may not look like much, but it’s the center of a large county with over a hundred thousand people,” Haig said, pointing to the distant city as he explained to Olaf.

“We agreed with O’More to meet around June 5th, but it’s already June 11th. Though it’s already evening, we should still go find O’More’s nephew as soon as possible.” After saying this, Haig ordered the sailors to set up the gangplank, then disembarked with Hrutik.

Two hours later, after nightfall, the two returned to the ship.

“So, did you meet O’More’s nephew, the governor?” Ulf asked casually as he took Haig and Hrutik’s hats.

“Cough, cough. We did. Starting tomorrow, he’ll organize people to come. We should have the over a hundred households of white slaves we need by the day after tomorrow,” Hrutik said, his throat troubled by an old ailment that had flared up recently, causing him to cough lightly before speaking.

By the next afternoon, people from the O’More family had brought farmers, artisans, and other commoners from northern Ireland to the port. Hrutik and Haig selected them on the spot, rejecting seven or eight who were ill, and accepted the remaining fifty households—over eighty people—who were then placed on the mixed-rigged schooner.

After completing one transaction, Haig settled the account in pounds with the O’More family based on the number of households.

This trade continued for three days because the white slaves were people the O’More family had selected from various places, and it took time for them to gather after being notified.

After three days of selection, Haig and Hrutik had chosen 81 households—over 260 people—from four regions in northern Ireland.

Most of the 260 were placed on Hope and the mixed-rigged schooner, while the remaining thirty or so were housed on the two armed merchant ships.

The addition of hundreds of people meant the fleet was now nearly at full capacity. However, since they had been carefully selected, they were all healthy and strong men, women, and children, so there was no immediate concern about the spread of disease from overcrowding.

After final provisions, Haig purchased some horses and livestock. Then, on the morning of June 15th, the fleet set sail from Derry Port, sailing north along the Foyle River into the sea before adjusting course in the North Sea and slowly heading toward Vinland.

It was summer, so sailing from Europe to Central and South America wasn’t too bad, but heading to North America meant facing warm southeasterly winds, which slowed the ships down. They maintained a speed of about six to nine knots.

Twenty days later, the fleet finally approached the eastern waters of Vinland. Along the way, they endured strong winds, rough waves, and thunderstorms. Since the Atlantic was in the grip of summer heat, the rainfall was much heavier than in autumn or winter.

Without the route and nautical charts, along with the skilled navigation of Hrutik, Haig, and the others, the fleet would have been lost to the winds and storms long ago.

On the afternoon of June 27th, under Haig’s leadership, the fleet finally arrived safely off the east coast of Vinland. In the setting sun, the white slaves moving about on deck saw several fishing boats spread out on the sea, catching cod. To the west, a dark coastline with towering cliffs and mountains emerged, stretching endlessly in both directions—more like a continent than an island.

“Land ho!”

“Land ho!”

Dozens of white slaves on deck cheered repeatedly. Most of them had never been on a ship before, and the first ten days had left them dizzy and unable to eat. It took five or six days before they gradually recovered, and only after more than ten days could they leave their cabins and move about on deck.

Olaf had been napping but was roused by the commotion on deck. Pikku also heard the noise and came out of the nearby cabin. The master and servant made their way onto the deck.

“Master Olaf!”

After twenty-one days together, most of the white slaves on Thor’s Hammer recognized Olaf. Seeing him emerge, they shrank their necks in deference.

“Hello, everyone.”

Olaf smiled and nodded at each of them. His warm smile and handsome features made the white slaves feel even more inferior, but they also grew fonder of him—especially when they saw his bright blue eyes, which they couldn’t bear to look at directly.

Walking to the bow, Olaf watched as Vinland grew nearer and clearer. The corners of his mouth curled slightly, and he spread his arms, feeling the sea breeze as he whispered, “Vinland, I’m back.”

Chapter 29: Celebration Banquet

In the southeastern corner of Vinland Island, the Muskox River’s western valley was bordered to the north by the towering Razor Mountain, standing hundreds of feet high. At the southeastern foothills, nestled against the mountain, stood Haig Fortress. Before the fortress, in the flat valley, a massive city was beginning to take shape.

Hrut City—ordered by Haldor to be built last winter—was planned to span over ten acres. Beyond the central Haldor Keep, streets radiated outward like a spider’s web, with the outermost ring hugging the mouth of the Muskox River. Though the river’s natural state couldn’t accommodate large ships or more than ten vessels at once, Haldor’s vision for Hrut City was grand. Once completed, it would serve as the home for all Vinland colonists and slaves, even encompassing Razor Mountain as a garden. Ultimately, it would house tens of thousands.

Yet, even with the daily toil of white slaves and savage slaves, less than one-thousandth of Hrut City had been completed.

By mid-June, Haldor Keep at the city’s center was barely finished, with a dozen houses built around it. A crude stone-and-wood fence, just over a man’s height, served as a makeshift wall—enough to deter beasts and primitive savages but not a proper army.

On this late June day, Hrut City buzzed with excitement.

Not only were the Icelandic overseers and white slave leaders in high spirits, but even the white and savage slaves had been promised an unprecedented feast—unlimited meat, courtesy of Lord Haldor.

The white slaves, after questioning their foremen, learned that Master Haig, Young Master Ulf, Young Master Olaf, and Captain Hrutik had returned from Europe laden with goods and powerful weapons. Overjoyed, Haldor had decreed a grand banquet in Haldor Keep that evening, inviting all Icelanders, white slave militiamen, and white slave foremen.

Even the ordinary white and savage slaves would receive generous portions, sharing in the celebration.

Soon, hundreds of people disembarked from the six ships docked at the Muskox River’s mouth. Haldor and Katrin, along with Jot, Kadir, Hoskuld, Heiner, and others, awaited them on the shore.

“Father!”

Ulf and Olaf embraced their father before kissing their mother’s cheeks. Haldor remained composed, but Katrin wept with joy, showering her sons with kisses and words of longing.

Haig and Hrutik exchanged greetings with Haldor’s group before instructing the sailors to unload gifts—linen, wool, and whiskey—for Haldor, Kadir, Hoskuld, Heiner, Jot, and the others.

The hundreds of white slaves lined up on the shore wore varied expressions—most curious and excited, gazing at Vinland’s unique scenery while secretly worrying about Haldor’s temper and their futures.

Haldor surveyed them, noting their pale faces. Realizing many were unwell from the long voyage, he ordered Jot and Heiner to lead the 390 white slaves to Hrut City, settling them in the newly built houses. Once they recovered the next day, they would be given materials to construct their own homes on the city’s outskirts.

After the white slaves departed, Haldor rode back to Haldor Keep with Olaf and the others.

The ship’s cargo and armaments were transported to the Haig Fortress caves by Hoskuld and two Icelandic work teams. Haldor trusted only his fellow Icelanders with Vinland’s most critical supplies. Along with the weapons and plate armor, ordinary goods like linen were stored away, to be distributed as rewards after summer to improve the Icelanders’ clothing and living conditions.

Back at home, Tom, Halik, Solrak, Ilugi, Hari, Val, Eriksson, and others soon arrived upon hearing the news.

The friends embraced, and Olaf gifted them ornate brooches. The youngsters, delighted, bombarded Olaf with questions about his sea adventures.

“Olaf, did you see singing mermaids? Were they beautiful?”

“Brother, did you meet Uncle Haig’s giant walrus friend?”

Amid the chatter and wild imaginations, Olaf laughed helplessly before spinning a tale. “Of course! I was even chased onto the ship by a massive Indian tiger! Then I outsmarted it—”

Olaf’s storytelling prowess turned his two-month European trip into a fantastical blend of Life of Pi and Robinson Crusoe, leaving the youngsters in awe.

As dusk fell, the grand hall on the first floor of Haldor Keep was lit with candles made of sheep fat and whale oil—over a hundred of them, illuminating the fifty-step-wide hall like daylight, the air tinged with the scent of burning fat.

Long wooden tables filled the hall, crafted from oak and pine by the white slaves, each surrounded by benches.

As night deepened, over a hundred well-dressed Icelanders—men, women, and children—entered. Most were former Hrut Village residents, with eight others from the families of Kadir, Hoskuld, Heiner, and Kalm.

Once the Icelanders were seated at the front tables, the sixteen white slave foremen arrived with their families, taking the rear tables.

The work teams were Haldor’s system for managing Icelanders and slaves. A small team consisted of five households (over ten people), and four small teams formed a large team (twenty households, over fifty people). The Icelanders had two large teams, led by Jot and Hoskuld, with eight small teams under them. The over two hundred white slaves were divided into four large teams with sixteen small teams.

This structure strengthened Haldor’s control, ensuring discipline and efficiency. Each member answered to their small team leader, who in turn answered to the large team leader.

Haldor had considered forming savage slave teams but decided against it, fearing organized rebellion.

For this banquet, all white slave small team leaders were invited, and the sixteen arrived proudly with their families.

When all guests had gathered, Haldor descended the stairs in a brown wool dress with a striped jacket, accompanied by Katrin in a burgundy wool gown. Their attire, purchased by Ulf in Amsterdam, reflected their elevated status—true nobility now.

Behind them followed Ulf and Olaf in striped white robes, Half in a long white gown, and Gerny in a pink puffed dress.

The crowd, led by Haig, Hrutik, and Jot, stood and applauded. Haldor smiled warmly before speaking:

“Thank you all for coming. Hrut City grows richer and more prosperous each day through our collective efforts. It will one day be a great city. My brother Haig, my friend Hrutik, and my sons Ulf and Olaf have returned from Europe with immense wealth, trading our Vinland treasures. They are the heroes of Hrut City! Tonight, let us drink, feast, and celebrate their triumphs!”

“Celebrate!” the crowd roared in excitement.

At Haldor’s command, white slave servants brought out roasted reindeer, cod, and hare, their aromas mingling with spices. Dozens of racks held golden-brown meats, which the white slave cooks swiftly sliced and served on fine porcelain plates to the nobles before moving to the other tables.

As the cooks worked, white slave women carried out large earthenware pots, revealing clouds of fragrant steam—stewed mutton seasoned with black pepper and rosemary.

Within half an hour, every table was laden with delicacies, and every guest’s plate overflowed with meat.

Haldor ordered a barrel of whiskey placed at each table. This barley-based spirit, stronger than beer or wine, had been a favorite among Icelanders for nearly twenty years.

Chapter 30: The Oarsman

The day after the victory feast, Haldor, Haig, and the others slept until afternoon before gathering to select the finest firearms and plate armor from the Haig Fortress mountain cave warehouse. These were to be equipped for the Icelandic musketeers, the core of their army.

The thirty Icelandic musketeers were Haldor and his men’s most trusted subordinates, followed by the eighty white slave long spearmen. Naturally, they prioritized the Icelanders.

Three days after Hrutik’s return to Hrut City, training for the Icelandic musketeers and white slave long spearmen resumed. This time, over a hundred men donned plate armor, wielding the sharpest long spears and the latest firelock muskets.

The focus of this training was on formation charges and pursuing enemies. Hrutik had already begun preparations to raid the savage tribes deep within Vinland. The current training aimed to further improve coordination and endurance between the musketeers and spearmen.

Time flies when one is busy, making days blur together like arrows in flight.

In the blink of an eye, more than ten days had passed since the fleet’s return to Vinland. The white slaves had been organized into sixty-six production teams, each assigned different tasks. However, due to the sheer number of people and insufficient overseers, conflicts arose—some worked endlessly while others had nothing to do.

This problem worsened over time until an Irish white slave from the west was severely beaten by a northern white slave. Only then did Haldor realize that without adjusting their management and imposing stricter regulations on the white slaves, chaos would ensue.

The population of Hrut City had swollen from six hundred to one thousand and three people—a milestone equivalent to the population of an entire Icelandic district.

As the leader overseeing such a vast population, Haldor was both exhilarated and anxious. Now, only a little over a hundred Icelanders remained in Hrut City, while the white slaves numbered over six hundred. The rest, fewer than two hundred, were savage slaves. The white slave contingent had grown alarmingly large.

Previously, no issues had surfaced, but now management problems were glaringly apparent. To better control the white slaves and gain experience in colonizing and managing more savage slaves, Haldor immediately summoned the six leaders—Haig, Hrutik, Jot, Kadir, Heiner, and Hoskuld—to his home to discuss restructuring Hrut City’s management. Ulf and Olaf also attended.

Iceland had no precedents to follow, and European history offered no examples of a settlement like Hrut City in Vinland. Thus, Haldor and his men had no established models to reference.

After half a day of drinking beer and discussion, they still had no solutions. Everyone except Olaf and Heiner had shared their thoughts. Haldor had always known Heiner was intelligent—a university graduate from London—and asked for his opinion.

Heiner had been pondering the issue. Though he lacked political experience, his family had been Scottish nobility for generations, managing estates and people. However, their experience was with Scottish commoners, not a society like Hrut City’s, composed of Icelanders, white slaves, and savage slaves. He struggled to devise a suitable management system.

But since Haldor had asked, Heiner couldn’t remain silent. He cleared his throat and shared his half-formed ideas: “Uncle Haldor, Hrut City now has over six hundred people, and problems keep arising. After observing, I’d say more than half of the conflicts in production and daily life could have been avoided. The root issue is that we don’t have enough managers.”

“We have no real system for managing over a thousand people in Hrut City. Besides you as the lord, me, my father-in-law, Uncle Hoskuld, Jot, and Hrutik are the only overseers. There’s no one else managing the white slaves. While Icelanders outrank white slaves, they have no authority to manage them. So, to better oversee the white slaves, we organized them into teams of ten, each led by a white slave foreman. Then, Uncle Jot, me, Uncle Hoskuld, and the rest only needed to manage those sixteen foremen. This method worked well—it improved efficiency.”

“But now, with six hundred white slaves—minus twenty children who can’t work—we have fifty-two production teams, each with a foreman. These fifty-two teams are divided into fourteen larger units. But we, the five or six overseers, have too much on our plates. The fourteen unit leaders lack the ability and knowledge to manage the smaller teams effectively. While we manage the unit leaders, we’re still effectively overseeing fifty teams, which is too much. We can’t efficiently utilize all the production teams.”

“Heiner’s right,” Jot agreed, his forehead creasing further. “The fifty-two foremen all want easier jobs, so they fight over positions and tasks. For example, they all want to hunt, some will settle for logging, but no one wants to quarry stone. The unit leaders can’t control them—they think the same way. That’s where the conflicts come from.”

With Heiner and Jot’s analysis, the situation became clearer. Haldor twirled the knot in his beard, asking, “How do we solve this?”

Everyone racked their brains, desperate for a solution.

Heiner spoke again: “I don’t have the best answer, but to reduce conflicts among the white slave teams, we need to distribute work fairly. Each team should get a mix of easy and hard tasks, rotated regularly. To better manage them, we should create an additional layer of oversight above the production teams—people with some education and intelligence.”

“That’s a great idea,” Haig agreed, slapping his forehead. “I never would’ve thought of that.”

Olaf listened carefully, having no prior management experience. Even now, his ideas needed validation against others’ input before he could contribute.

Hoskuld and Kadir also approved of Heiner’s suggestion. Haldor immediately decided to adopt it. After further discussion, they resolved to emulate the ancient Viking system used in England, Scotland, Norway, and Denmark—the Aettangr. Above the white slave production teams, they would establish a new position: the Oarsman, who would oversee two teams forming an Aettangr.

With this restructuring, six hundred white slaves would form seven Aettangrs, each consisting of fourteen teams. Seven Icelanders would serve as Oarsmen to manage them.

Note: Aettangr refers to one-quarter of a village, the smallest residential unit, defined by land area. During the early medieval period, Viking raiders used this system as their primary organizational structure. A Viking with one Aettangr of land could command an oar on a longship, joining raids and earning a full share of the spoils. Later, it came to represent the smallest administrative unit for Viking raiders, managing their own land and thralls. The Oarsman was the leader of an Aettangr.

Chapter 31: Viking Raid

After much discussion, to separate the combat personnel from production, the seven Oarsmen were ultimately appointed: Hoskuld, Heiner, Kalhu, Kalm, Ulf, Olaf, and Ilugi.

The first five were chosen without dispute. Olaf, who held the contracts of over eighty white slaves and had borne the cost of their purchase, was also young but had already achieved many extraordinary feats beyond ordinary men, his abilities evident to all. Thus, he was granted an Aettangr.

Ilugi was now sixteen years old. His father had been killed by a black bear in Vinland the previous year. Though his family had received some care, their circumstances were not as good as before. Haldor recalled that Ilugi had attended the church school in the Seltyana district and had graduated with excellent results the previous spring. Driven by guilt over Ilugi’s father’s death and a genuine appreciation for talent, Haldor proposed that Ilugi be made an Aettangr Oarsman.

Though there were some objections, under Haldor’s insistence, the others agreed before the meeting concluded.

The establishment of the Aettangr and the clear definition of the Oarsmen’s roles played a crucial part in perfecting Hrut Village’s management and supplementing its administrative structure.

The seven Oarsmen could replace the previous six leaders. After their responsibilities were clearly defined, they could lead their own “Aettangr” to work, reporting only to the stewards.

Haldor, Haig, Hrutik, and the other leaders could now be completely freed from the busy work of production to focus on the great campaign of subduing the savage primitives.

To clarify the legitimacy and continuity of management, the group deliberated for half a day before agreeing to Haldor’s proposal. Above the dual management layers of the production teams and the Aettangr, they established a higher management layer called the “Mannafylki.”

Mannafylki was an Icelandic term meaning “man-made and managed,” and also referred to the area controlled by the oars, or the oar district. In the Viking era, it was another leadership structure above the Aettangr.

Haldor decreed that five Aettangr would form one Mannafylki. Since Hrut City currently had only seven Aettangr, they established a larger Mannafylki, with Haldor serving as its leader, the Steersman.

In truth, Haldor had also established a “Fylki” above the Mannafylki, an Icelandic term for “ship district,” a larger management mechanism than the oar district Mannafylki. However, due to the small population, the Fylki existed only in name, with Haldor still serving as the Fylki’s district chief.

In ancient Viking history, the names and positions of the management hierarchy from top to bottom were all related to ships, reflecting the Vikings’ advanced shipbuilding and navigation skills, as well as their grand expeditions and colonization of various lands.

Haldor decided to manage the Icelanders in the same way, though the small population meant he was only nominally the Fylki district chief and Mannafylki Steersman, even serving as an Aettangr Oarsman. After all, Hrut City’s Icelanders numbered only a little over a hundred, barely enough to form one Aettangr.

Haldor’s proposal to emulate the ancient Vikings in organizing the Icelanders and white slaves under a hierarchical leadership structure was actually the result of a long conversation he had with Olaf the previous night.

Olaf knew that while Iceland was not small, its resources were scarce, its population sparse, and its environment harsh—far inferior to Vinland.

But no matter how good Vinland was, it was just a primitive island on the American continent. If they wanted to advance, they would have to return to Europe. Thus, Iceland was a necessary territory to develop.

After aligning their thoughts, Olaf and Haldor’s preliminary strategic plan was to develop Vinland, using its agricultural resources as a foundation to conquer Iceland. Once Iceland was secured, it would serve as a bridgehead to expand into Europe. With five to six hundred thousand Icelanders, all descendants of Vikings, fierce in temperament, tall and strong, and with over half trained in ancestral martial arts from childhood, they were the perfect source of soldiers.

But Haldor and the others wanted to develop within the ten years before the Thirty Years’ War in Europe ended. They couldn’t afford slow development—superficial exploitation and establishing provinces, relying on free citizens for taxation, was not suitable for Vinland’s colonists.

To rapidly increase Vinland’s strength, population, and wealth, Olaf clearly recognized that they must learn from their contemporary counterpart in the Far East—the old wild boar skin predecessor.

That predecessor and his son, Huang Taiji, had used the Eight Banners system to quickly plunder populations from Korea, Shandong, Zhili, Mongolia, and other regions. Like a snowball, they absorbed Jurchens, Mongols, Koreans, and Han Chinese under the Manchu core, leading armored soldiers and bondservants. After establishing the Manchu Eight Banners, they successively formed the Mongol and Han Eight Banners, dividing and ruling various ethnic groups while strengthening leadership under their family as the banner lords of the Manchu, Mongol, and Han. Combined with favorable timing, geography, and human factors, they seized the opportunity to enter the pass and establish their dynasty.

Without discussing the merits of the “Great Qing,” Olaf only wanted the Hrut family to replicate and imitate the “Eight Banners system” invented by the old wild boar skin.

After a winter and spring of research, Olaf felt that his modified version of the Eight Banners system was mature. Upon returning to Vinland, he began to persuade his father, Haldor, to agree to reform the colonial team in Vinland under the guise of Viking ancestral traditions.

The Manchu Eight Banners had layers of organization like Gūsa and Niru, while Vinland’s Hrut City had Fylki, Mannafylki, and Aettangr. Both managed all subordinates by household, with many differences but a similar basic structure.

The Manchu Eight Banners system, under the layered management of their own people, also included captured outsiders and foreigners as armored soldiers and bondservants—hereditary slaves. These slaves were layer upon layer of leaders’ property, a very Jurchen practice. Olaf knew this couldn’t be directly applied in Vinland.

Vinland’s so-called white slaves were actually contract slaves, more like severely exploited indentured laborers who regained their freedom upon completing their contracts.

In Northern and Western Europe, where serfdom had been abolished for centuries, the people, influenced by religious culture and Enlightenment thought, resisted being reduced to hereditary slaves.

If Haldor turned his subordinates into layers of exploited slaves, with “hereditary servitude,” generation after generation bound as slaves, his leadership would never hold, and he wouldn’t last a day as Fylki district chief.

Thus, after deep consideration, Olaf modified this form. Though the Fylki led the Mannafylki, the Mannafylki led the Aettangr, and the Aettangr led the production teams, this leadership was not that of a master over slaves but more like a governor over subjects—a form of colonial governance. This allowed the leaders to seek maximum authority within an acceptable framework while ensuring the system’s stability.

Building on this, Olaf also incorporated the strengths of the Manchu Eight Banners and Vinland’s local characteristics, preparing to provide the reformed Viking ancestral system with a bottom layer of exploitable slaves—the Inuit and the more numerous Indians.

Olaf named the reorganized team the “Viking Raid.” From the Fylki to the production teams, the entire Hrut City and the large team would work tirelessly to supply blood to the cause. When the team captured savages, they would be distributed as slave labor to every deserving family within the team.

“Viking” referred to people from the fjords, specifically the Scandinavian Peninsula. But in Icelandic, “Viking” also meant “bold in sea exploration.” Thus, Olaf decided to use “Viking” as a unifying term for the ethnic groups of the Vinland region.

“Raid” was an Icelandic term for expedition, originally referring to the Viking king leading a region in an expedition, organizing personnel and ships—similar to terms like “Northern Expedition,” “Liberation,” or “Eastern Expedition” in the Celestial Empire. Later, it also came to refer to the Vikings’ living areas and tax-paying communities.

“Viking Raid” was a term coined by Olaf, roughly meaning “Viking Expeditionary Force.” This structure was the result of Olaf’s study of the Eight Banners system, adapted and integrated with local culture.

In Olaf’s vision, once the Viking Raid grew strong, it would become a nation led by Icelanders and white slaves, managing a large number of savage slaves—similar to the newly established Later Jin Manchuria.

Sometimes, Olaf wondered: When the Later Jin was first established, it had only tens of thousands of people. Even after integrating Koreans, Mongols, and other ethnic groups in Northeast Asia to become Manchuria, it still had fewer than a hundred thousand people. Yet, these few tens of thousands had managed to enter the pass, unify the Central Plains, and rule China for over two centuries.

Iceland also had tens of thousands of direct Viking descendants. Could he establish a Viking ethnicity, uniting Icelanders, Irish, Scots, and other whites, even Inuit and some Indians, under the Viking banner system? Then, with the Viking team as the core, they could sweep across North America, unify the continent, and establish a new American nation. Using Iceland as a bridgehead, they could invade Ireland, the British Isles, or the Scandinavian Peninsula, becoming Viking raiders who “landed” in Europe culturally and “entered the pass” to rule that vast, prosperous, and beautiful land.

Chapter 32: Planting Potatoes

On the afternoon of July 5, 1628, by the Julian calendar, a light drizzle fell from the sky, bringing a slight coolness to the hot air.

It was the Little Ice Age, and Vinland’s summers were not unbearably hot. The rain made people feel as if they had returned to the long-missed spring and autumn seasons.

Last night’s meeting about managing white slaves and establishing the Viking Raid had lasted until the quiet hours of midnight. Every participant had felt Haldor’s ambitious determination to make great strides, as well as the powerful energy behind the organization “Viking Raid.” Excited, they left Haig Fortress and returned home, tossing and turning for an hour or two before finally falling asleep with complex emotions.

This morning, Haldor and the other leaders, including Haig, held a meeting in the square for all the Icelanders and white slaves. They announced the establishment of the Viking Raid, explained the relevant matters, and finally introduced the seven newly appointed Aettangr Oarsmen.

Then, the seven Oarsmen appeared, each leading their Aettangr’s white slaves to work in their assigned areas. Their tasks included logging, quarrying, planting, hunting, and gathering vines and grasses. Additionally, they were responsible for the construction of Hrut City one day a week.

Olaf, accompanied by Pikku, first addressed his eighty white slaves, then instructed several young children to follow him as servants, along with Pikku. He then led everyone to the stone cave warehouse to retrieve various plant seeds and farming tools they had brought back from Amsterdam.

Next, they went to the eastern riverbank near Hrut City to cultivate the land.

The land around Hrut City was generally good, and several hundred acres had already been cultivated. However, the most fertile and moist eastern riverbank had not been developed for planting. Originally, the white slaves from Haig Fortress had planted cold-resistant rye, which could not adapt to the damp environment by the river. Thus, even though there were dozens of acres of the most fertile land along the riverbank, less than a tenth had been developed.

The current society had extremely low productivity. A single farming household could cultivate at most twenty acres of land. Limited by primitive crop varieties and insufficient soil fertility, the number of plants per acre was far less than in later times. Therefore, looking at the farmland in this world, one would get the impression of “grass thriving, bean sprouts sparse.”

If planting rye, oats, and other grains, one acre of land could yield over a hundred pounds annually. When milled into flour, it would be less than a hundred pounds. A family of several people would need six or seven acres of grain for a year’s food. Adding taxes and daily expenses, a normal family would need to cultivate more than ten acres of land to survive, and even then, life would be tight.

Vinland had plenty of land. Currently, many fields around Hrut City had been developed, already planted with rye and some vegetables like radishes and beets. With abundant cod resources, a thousand people could easily be self-sufficient.

But Olaf knew that Western agricultural technology was backward, and crop breeding techniques were primitive. Grain yields were much lower than those of the Ming Dynasty at the same time. Although he hoped to obtain advanced agricultural guides from the East in the future, before that, Olaf wanted to do something to improve Vinland’s productivity. He wanted to free the large number of white slaves bound to the land by backward productivity, allowing the Icelanders and white slaves to have more hands for other tasks.

With limited productivity and no knowledge of advanced agricultural technology, after careful consideration, Olaf decided to start with crop planting. Besides wheat, barley, and rye, the crops suitable for Vinland’s climate included soybeans and black beans, but their yields were limited.

Currently, in the Little Ice Age, agricultural yields worldwide were decreasing, leading to natural and man-made disasters. This had pushed the already struggling Ming Dynasty to its end. Decades later, during the Kangxi and Qianlong prosperous era, with the end of the Little Ice Age and the sudden emergence of sweet potatoes and potatoes in the East, the high yield of sweet potatoes solved the people’s food problems, creating a false prosperity and ultimately a population of four hundred million.

Olaf’s attention was on sweet potatoes and potatoes, which were planted in both the East and West but had not received much attention.

In Amsterdam, Olaf had followed Ulf to purchase various vegetable seeds and plant seeds, including some sweet potatoes and potatoes. These plants were basically grown for ornamental purposes in Europe. Potatoes could produce small yellow flowers, and in England, some people ate the leaves. Sweet potatoes were purely green leafy plants, and some people ate the roots, i.e., sweet potatoes. However, as they were new things from Latin America, few dared to try them.

Olaf clearly remembered that in the Celestial Empire hundreds of years later, one mu of land could produce five to six thousand jin to seven to eight thousand jin of sweet potatoes and potatoes. The yield from one mu was enough to feed ten people for a year. Although the current varieties of potatoes and sweet potatoes were not as good as those in later times, a yield of one to two thousand jin per mu was certainly possible.

Converted to acres, that meant one acre could yield over ten thousand pounds of food. If a hundred or so acres of potatoes and sweet potatoes could be planted, it would be enough to feed everyone in Hrut City.

Cultivating a hundred or two hundred acres of land would only require the manpower of a small production team, saving over eighty percent of the population for other work. This could save a large portion of the productivity and accelerate the development of Hrut City by twofold or more.

As someone nurtured for decades with the core socialist values, Olaf clearly remembered the great leader’s words: “Population is productivity. A good party must liberate productivity.” Time and practice had proven that the great nation, in a few decades, developed its population and liberated productivity, turning a poor and blank country into the world’s second-largest economy. This guiding ideology was undoubtedly correct.

Olaf now wanted to develop Vinland, to build this undeveloped virgin land. Relying on a thousand people was almost impossible, but if most of the labor force could be freed from the land, it would accelerate the construction and development speed.

Olaf personally believed his decision was very meaningful, so he led his Aettangr’s white slaves to the fertile and moist riverbank. He first instructed them to till the soil, then plant the already cut potato and sweet potato pieces in the loose soil, about half a palm deep, with the skin facing up, and then water them.

Among the eighty-plus white slaves, the gender ratio was unbalanced, with only one-third being women. However, both men and women were healthy young people, aged between seventeen or eighteen and forty. There were only nine young children.

Now, among the nine children, except for three under ten years old who followed Olaf, the other six followed their parents and joined the seventy-plus experienced farmers.

The white slaves, led by their squad leaders and team leaders, scattered to till the land, plant the seeds, and water them. The most labor-intensive task of tilling was done by men and strong women, while the thinner women and teenagers planted the sweet potatoes and potatoes and then watered them.

Olaf knew that sweet potatoes and potatoes needed to be planted in ridges. Parallel ridges were dug, with sweet potato and potato seeds planted deep inside. The middle of the ridges became low-lying, which could store rainwater after rain. Olaf didn’t fully understand this principle, but he knew that in later times, this method was used to plant these two high-starch, high-yield crops, so he also required the white slaves to create ridges according to his memory.

Chapter 33: The Expedition

Hrut City was bustling every day, and even in the hottest month of July, the city’s pace did not slow down.

Haldor, Hrutik, Haig, and others led the militia in daily training, preparing for the upcoming sweep through the heartland of Vinland.

Jot, Heiner, and others led an Aettangr of white slaves and all the savage slaves in the daily construction of Hrut City.

The remaining six Aettangrs of white slaves were responsible for managing the farmland and collecting various materials.

It could be said that in the entire Hrut City of Vinland, almost no one was idle. Even the children of the Icelanders and white slaves were learning culture, such as language and writing, under Olaf’s guidance.

Olaf taught fifty to sixty children in the morning and personally observed the white slaves under his command planting potatoes and sweet potatoes in the afternoon.

Pikku, as Olaf’s personal servant, led more than seventy white slaves throughout the day.

Within a few days, the white slaves under Olaf’s command had cultivated and planted two acres of sweet potatoes and three acres of potatoes.

After inspecting the fields, Olaf ordered a halt to the planting of sweet potatoes and potatoes because the one hundred pounds of seeds he had purchased had already been planted.

But the white slaves could not be idle, so every day, Pikku led them to the fields outside the city in the cooler mornings and evenings to weed and catch insects. In an era without herbicides, pesticides, and fertilizers, agriculture relied on manual labor every day in the fields to weed and catch insects to ensure the growth, branching, and maturity of the already low-yielding crops.

At noon, he instructed the white slaves under his command to plant vegetables such as cabbage, cauliflower, radishes, European angelica, coriander, and water spinach along the riverbanks. Most of these vegetables had a history of cultivation for a hundred years, except for water spinach, which was a European wild vegetable. Later, people in the Guangdong region enjoyed eating it, so Olaf had also seen and eaten it. He had collected some seeds by the water channels in Amsterdam.

Water spinach is a water-borne wild vegetable that can also be planted in swamps and land, but it requires frequent watering when planted on land. It is a fairly productive green vegetable, and planting it along the riverbanks of the Muskox River is most suitable.

Previously, Haig and others found it luxurious to eat vegetables because the limited population did not have the time and energy to grow them. But now, with more people, they could grow more vegetables besides grains to supplement and enrich everyone’s diet.

So not only were the white slaves under Olaf growing vegetables, but the other six Aettangrs of white slaves were also planting vegetables by the streams and wetlands while managing the farmland, logging, and quarrying. Among them, Ilugi’s Aettangr was the most enthusiastic, almost replicating the work of the white slaves under Olaf, planting various vegetables on both sides of the Muskox River upstream.

Moreover, Ilugi had already applied to Olaf in advance, planning to get a batch of potatoes and sweet potatoes after Olaf’s harvest to try planting them next year.

Pikku felt that although his master Olaf was only the owner of one Aettangr, he could influence and even command Ilugi. If he wanted, he might already be the owner of two Aettangrs.

While Olaf was leading his white slaves in agricultural activities, Haldor, Hrutik, and Haig felt that the militia training was sufficient and they could attack the savage tribes in the heartland of Vinland.

On the morning and afternoon of July 10th, Haldor, feeling well-prepared, held two meetings of all the Viking Raid leaders in the castle.

The first meeting was attended by only six managers and seven Oarsmen, totaling eleven people. The meeting unanimously approved the militia’s plan to attack the heartland of Vinland, destroy the savage tribes, plunder their wealth, and capture savage slaves.

Hrut City was hundreds of miles away from the heartland of Vinland, and a long expedition could not rely solely on the militia.

The one hundred and ten militiamen of Hrut City were the combat unit, but entering the heartland of Vinland required many white slave laborers and wagons to provide provisions and help transport equipment and food. Real warfare was not like playing a game; preparation was complex and lengthy.

After discussion, Haldor finally decided to mobilize the food, cod, and smoked meat stored in the mountain cave warehouse as expedition provisions and requisition half of the large livestock in Hrut City to transport provisions and weapons.

Each of the seven Aettangrs sent twenty male white slaves as laborers and servants for the expeditionary army to serve the militiamen. They also found two loyal savage slaves to serve as guides and interpreters.

From the managers to the Oarsmen, everyone agreed with Haldor’s decision. Then, in the afternoon meeting, they gathered the leaders of the production teams and conducted a pre-war mobilization.

The white slaves came to Vinland because they could not survive in their homeland, so they risked death to come here. Although they did not like war, they did not resist it.

Especially when Haldor mentioned two conditions, the white slaves could not refuse. The first was that participating laborers could reduce their contract time by three months, meaning they could shorten their white slave status by three months and become free citizens earlier.

The second was that if white slaves killed savage warriors in the war, they could gain military merit. Using noses as evidence, one savage nose could be exchanged for a one-year reduction in slave time. That is to say, if a white slave could kill six savage warriors, they could immediately gain the status of a free citizen, obtaining land and freedom.

Chief Haldor’s generous conditions made it impossible to refuse, but there were also requirements: no one could desert during the war. Anyone who fled would be exiled or even hanged.

The male white slaves had already put life and death aside when they sold themselves to buy ship tickets to the West Indies, so after hearing Haldor’s words, almost no white slave production team leader hesitated. Everyone excitedly expressed their willingness to lead their teams to join the expeditionary army.

Haldor, Hrutik, and Haig were pleased with the performance of the white slave leaders. After discussion, Hrutik was tasked with selecting white slaves that evening. Finally, ten of the strongest men were selected from each production team, mostly team leaders, and then led by a squad leader to join the expeditionary army as logistics personnel.

The original production teams were then promoted by their respective Oarsmen to acting squad leaders and team leaders and continued to work in Hrut City.

At the same time, to protect the safety of Hrut City, Haldor ordered Kadir to serve as the captain of the city defense militia, managing ten white slave militiamen to guard the safety of Hrut City. If attacked by savages, they could also mobilize the seven major Aettangrs to assist in the battle.

At noon on July 11th, led by the three major chiefs Haldor, Haig, and Hrutik, one hundred and ten militiamen and one hundred and forty white slave laborers, along with twelve wagons, four ox carts, and two savage slaves, set off.

This Viking militia carried the eager expectations and instructions of more than seven hundred fathers, wives, and children from Hrut City and left the Muskox River Valley in high spirits, rapidly advancing towards the vast heartland of Vinland Island to the northeast.

Almost all the Icelandic musketeers and white slave long spearmen, and even most of the white slave laborers, faced the upcoming war with a relaxed attitude. Eight years of large and small battles had told them that, with equal numbers, the savages were nothing in front of the white men. Moreover, the current militia had thirty firelock muskets and more than a hundred sets of plate armor as advanced equipment, making it easy to deal with the small, primitive savages.

Unconsciously, various troops in the Viking militia on the march thought of the earnest teachings from their wives or relatives before departure:

“Work hard and plunder more.”

In the current era, not to mention militias like these rabble, even the best mercenary troops in the German region played the role of bandits in war. Sometimes they not only plundered the people of enemy countries but also those of friendly and their own countries.

The unity of soldiers and bandits was a military system characteristic maintained in both the West and the East. The improvement of this situation would have to wait for the future World War I, where modern warfare would promote the emergence of modern professional soldiers, improving the quality of soldiers.

Therefore, neither Haldor nor Hrutik would stop their subordinates from having the idea of plundering; they would even encourage them because people risked their lives in great battles, and plundering was a benefit within their duties.

Wasn’t the Crusade a holy war from top to bottom to plunder the East?

In Europe, fighting was synonymous with plundering, a tradition with a long history. Even in the future 21st century, wasn’t that beautiful country still following this logic?

Chapter 34: Crumbling Like Dry Wood

Since the seventeenth century, Earth had entered a period of the Little Ice Age, with the climate gradually growing colder. Though Vinland lay at a high latitude, the warm Caribbean current to its south kept temperature fluctuations relatively mild.

Yet even in July, the people of Vinland still wore linen undershirts and long trousers, adding a thin robe at night.

To the east of Vinland lay the Bedino Wilderness—a vast wetland forest, untouched by human presence, where black bears and white wolves roamed freely.

But today, the wilderness was eerily silent. Not a single beast stirred, for a disciplined column of soldiers marched eastward across the grasslands before the forest.

At the head of the column rode three towering men. The two tallest were broad-shouldered brothers with brown and white hair—Haldor and Haig. Their thick brows and strong features marked them as kin.

Hrutik, clad in leather armor, rode ahead, his sharp eyes scanning the surroundings like radar, alert for any sign of life—especially savages.

All three wore leather armor, with long swords and large axes at their waists and short spears strapped to their saddles. Behind them marched one hundred and ten militiamen in formation, followed by white slaves guarding sixteen supply wagons. Among them were two young Indian slaves—Jot’s carefully selected guides, Blackstone and Amu, both timid and obedient, perfect for translation and navigation.

“According to the Indians, this grassland forest is called Bedino,” Haig remarked, gazing at the endless wilderness to the right. “It’s vast.”

From Amu and Blackstone’s accounts, Haig, Haldor, and the others learned that beyond the Bedino Wilderness lay the heart of Vinland—a land twice the size of Oxhorn Peninsula, rich with lakes and towering mountain ranges. To the east were two major Indian tribes, while the north was home to several Inuit settlements.

The Inuit were fewer in number and lacked large tribes, so they were not targets of this expedition.

The strategic goal of Haldor’s campaign was to conquer and annihilate all major savage tribes in Vinland’s interior, execute their chieftains and warriors, and enslave the survivors for Hrut City.

The natives themselves called their people the Beothuk, not Indians. For the past century, English fishermen had been drying cod on Vinland’s shores while capturing or killing Beothuk for their furs. A hundred years of conflict had driven the Beothuk and Inuit deep into the island’s interior, where they lived in fear and resentment of European whites.

Eight years ago, when Haig led over a hundred men to claim Vinland, the fishermen dared not provoke his armed forces. They no longer landed on the island during the spring and summer fishing seasons. Yet the Beothuk and Inuit could not escape enslavement. Within a few years, not a single savage remained on Oxhorn Peninsula.

After crossing the wilderness and marching west for another day, the expedition encountered a river the next morning. The white auxiliary troops felled trees to build rafts, and the Viking militia crossed in orderly fashion.

In half a day, they covered over twenty miles, crossing three rivers—rafting across the large ones and wading through the smaller streams.

From a gently sloping hill, Haig spotted a massive lake in the distance, with wisps of smoke rising from the surrounding forest.

“That’s an Indian village,” he called out.

Haldor and Hrutik followed his gaze, their faces lighting up with excitement.

“We’ve been marching for a week, and we’ve finally found a savage settlement,” Haldor announced, straightening his back and turning to address his men. “Men, the village is just ahead! Move faster—we’ll sweep through it by afternoon. If all goes well, we’ll sleep in their huts tonight!”

The troops’ spirits lifted at his words, their fatigue melting away as they quickened their pace.

Two hours later, they neared the Beothuk forest. Haldor signaled a halt and ordered the plate armor unloaded from the wagons.

Once Haldor, Haig, Hrutik, and the one hundred and ten soldiers were fully armored, and the musketeers had loaded their firearms, Haldor felt the killing intent radiating from his men. He smiled faintly and gave the signal.

“Advance!”

The column moved into the forest, heading toward the primitive village by the lake.

Thump. Thump.

To the beat of a white slave’s drum, the one hundred and ten men marched in formation toward the palisaded encampment.

The Beothuk had already spotted the invaders. Over a hundred warriors, their upper bodies bare and faces painted red, charged out of the village, wielding stone-studded clubs and carrying bows and arrows.

Hrutik watched through the slit in his helmet. The encampment was sizable, with over a hundred warriors—half of them young men wearing feathered headdresses, the rest elders and youths.

Primitive tribal warfare had no strategy or rules—just brutal melee. Though the Beothuk found the white men’s armor and tight formation strange, they did not falter. The boldest forty or fifty warriors surged ahead, closing to within a hundred and twenty paces of the Viking formation.

At this range, their wolf-tooth arrows, tipped with snake venom, would be most effective. The Beothuk warriors nocked their arrows and loosed them at the soldiers.

Seventy or eighty arrows struck the long spears and musketeers, but the plate armor deflected them all. The arrows shattered with a metallic clatter, leaving no dent in the armor.

Failing to penetrate the enemy’s defenses, the warriors howled in frustration, leaping in strange dance steps before charging forward.

Firelock muskets had reached their peak of development, with a maximum range of over two hundred and fifty paces. However, their most lethal and accurate range was within one hundred and fifty paces. Beyond two hundred, accuracy plummeted.

As the battle commander, Hrutik did not need to consult Haldor. His eyes narrowed, and he swung a red flag downward.

The drumming ceased, and the formation halted.

The front and side ranks of long spearmen parted, revealing thirty Icelandic musketeers in the center.

At the captain’s command, the first row of fifteen knelt, aimed, and fired.

The second row stood and fired in unison.

Bang!

Thirty shots rang out. Though some bullets overlapped, the close range and dense formation of the Beothuk warriors ensured nearly twenty fell.

The sight of their finest warriors cut down before they could even engage terrified the Beothuk.

Only twenty or so painted warriors continued their charge, while the rest slowed their advance.

With no time to reload at a hundred paces, the musketeers slung their firearms and took up their backup short spears and large axes.

Hrutik signaled with his flag, and the drumbeat changed. The four long spear captains led their men back into formation.

Thump. Thump.

The drumbeat quickened and slowed in rhythm.

The formation advanced steadily, crashing into the remaining twenty warriors.

The skilled hunters and warriors raised their clubs, but before they could strike, five or six long spears pierced them from all angles. Even the fiercest Beothuk could only deflect one spear before being skewered like hedgehogs, their bodies riddled with bloody holes as they collapsed.

The fifty warriors behind watched in horror as their proudest fighters fell instantly. Even their mightiest chief, Asma, could not land a single blow before being turned into a bloodied corpse.

These were warriors who could battle bears and wolves—yet now, they were slaughtered with ease. The Beothuk could hardly believe their eyes.

Chapter 35: Conquest

The battle between the one hundred and ten formation soldiers and the Beothuk warriors ended in less than half an hour.

The Beothuk warriors were first gunned down by the Icelandic musketeers, losing over twenty men. Then, the white slave long spearmen killed another twenty. The remaining fifty or so warriors, seeing that their bows and arrows had no effect on the enemy and that the twenty strongest warriors of their tribe had been slaughtered like rabbits in the jaws of a leopard, were instantly terrified.

Watching the massive, square formation of men in strange armor, wielding sharp and unfamiliar weapons, the remaining Beothuk warriors shouted in their language before turning and fleeing back to their camp.

Haldor waved his hand, summoning the two Indian slaves, Blackstone and Amu, to his side. From atop his horse, he looked down and asked, “What are those savage warriors shouting about?”

“Respected master, those ignorant savages see your mighty army, your strength, and the firearms that spew fire and smoke to kill men from a hundred paces away. They believe you are a demonic spirit wielding the power of thunder and heavenly fire. They cry out for the heavenly fire not to strike them and flee with their people,” Amu respectfully replied in Icelandic.

Icelandic was an ancient language of the Scandinavian Peninsula, the ancestor of modern Danish, Norwegian, and even Swedish. Though archaic, its simplicity made it easier to learn.

The white slaves of Hrut City were eagerly learning Icelandic, and many had already become proficient. Among the savage slaves, the quick-witted ones like Blackstone and Amu were also diligently studying the language.

Hrutik was a highly disciplined military officer. Upon hearing Amu’s words, he instantly thought of a way to shatter the enemy’s morale and weaken their resistance.

“Amu and Blackstone, follow behind the formation and charge forward. Once inside the village, shout that the divine lord who commands the heavenly fire has descended to punish those who disrespect the spirits. If they surrender, they will be spared judgment.”

Hrutik’s words made Haig and Haldor’s eyes light up simultaneously.

“Hrutik, that’s a good idea,” they agreed.

The two savage slaves nodded and quickly caught up with the formation, which had already broken through the wooden palisade and stormed into the camp.

Once inside the village, the musketeers and long spearmen began hunting down the warriors and adult males hiding in the thatched huts. Many Beothuk families attempting to flee were caught and killed, and those who resisted—young men and women—were also slaughtered. The remaining women, children, and elderly were taken as captive slaves.

The Beothuk camp spanned over a hundred acres, with forty to fifty thatched houses and a population of five hundred, making it one of the largest tribes in Vinland.

The Beothuk lived by the water, calling this land and its surrounding lakes the “Star River Land.” It was a place of peace and prosperity, where life had been stable for centuries. But on this day, that tranquility was shattered by white men clad in armor harder than stone.

The arrival of the white men from the southeastern peninsula brought not friendship, but death and terror.

The warriors of this powerful tribe, rulers of the “Star River Land,” were instantly killed by the white men’s magical heavenly fire. Then, hundreds of white men stormed the village, slaughtering warriors, priests, and adult males, and looting every hut for furs.

Indian culture was primitive—they had no metal, no currency, no jewels. The only thing they valued was animal pelts, used for clothing and bedding.

The cries of the Indians lasted for over two hours before finally ceasing. When all was said and done, Haldor, Haig, and Hrutik gathered their one hundred and ten soldiers, one hundred and forty white slave auxiliaries, and the two savage slaves.

Under the indulgence of Haldor and the others, the two hundred and fifty-two Hrut City militiamen had stormed the village and begun a rampage of killing and looting.

At first, some warriors and men tried to resist, but they were no match for the white slaves and Icelanders in plate armor wielding sharp blades. The primitive men, bare-chested and armed only with wooden clubs, were slaughtered on contact, unable to inflict even a scratch on the white soldiers.

After the militiamen had their fill of pillaging, the white slave auxiliaries rushed in, eager to snatch up whatever scraps the militiamen had left behind.

The Hrut City militia, trained by Hrutik in the ways of mercenaries, represented the peak of contemporary soldiery.

The Icelandic musketeers, few in number and most with families, behaved relatively well—they only killed resisting men and women, taking the rest as captives while looting the huts for furs.

The white slave auxiliaries, newly arrived in Vinland and of low status, dared not act too boldly. They only captured the weak and elderly and took the tattered deer hides the militiamen had discarded.

But the white slave long spearmen were a different story.

Most of them had lived in Vinland for over three years, some as long as eight. Over eighty percent were unmarried, young and full of vigor. Long deprived of women, they had begun to see even ewes as fair maidens. The violence and plunder of war had awakened their bestial nature, and many dragged Indian women into the huts to sate their lust.

Only when Haldor, Haig, and Hrutik—the three leaders—ordered the white slaves to beat the drums and assemble the militia and auxiliaries did the scattered men emerge from the huts, bringing their looted furs and captives to the central clearing of the village.

As the crowd stood in disarray with their captives, Haldor’s expression darkened. Hrutik and Haig furrowed their brows—they had noticed over twenty white slave long spearmen with disheveled clothing, clearly having just indulged in pleasure. Behind them, some of the bound Indian captives—women and girls—were also in disarray, their faces filled with terror.

“You there—step forward!” Hrutik’s face was as cold as the snow-capped mountains of the Arctic Ocean.

The disheveled white slave long spearmen stumbled forward, trembling.

“Hrutik, Oarsman, what are your orders?” they asked.

After the restructuring of Hrut City, the militia had been reorganized along the lines of the Viking Raid, though the production teams were now called squads. Above them were the Aettangr Oarsmen and the Mannafylki Raid Leaders. Hrutik was the Oarsman overseeing the one hundred and ten militiamen and the entire Viking force of two hundred and fifty-two, including auxiliaries.

Staring at the panicked white slave long spearmen before him, Hrutik drew the riding crop from his waist and lashed out viciously, cursing, “Bastards! You sons of bitches! You dare rape Indian women? Do you have a death wish? If you don’t want to live, don’t drag others down with you!”

Hrutik showed no mercy, whipping the men until they writhed on the ground, begging for forgiveness. The sight terrified the other thirty or so white slave long spearmen who had also just indulged, their faces pale, their bodies shaking.

Hrutik grew more enraged with each strike, only stopping when the men lay motionless, covered in wounds. Panting heavily, he sheathed his whip and glared at the crowd. “From now on, keep your belts buckled! If I catch anyone raping an Indian woman again, I’ll exile you from Vinland and leave you to die in the wilderness of the West Indies!”

His voice was chilling, and the two hundred men shivered, standing straighter in fear.

Chapter 36: Slaves

Haldor and Haig breathed a sigh of relief when they saw Hrutik finally suppress the soldiers with his violent methods, easing their tension.

In truth, Haldor, Hrutik, and Haig were not saints of high moral character, nor were they leaders who refused to take even a needle or thread from the people. They had no intention or ability to build an army that did not disturb the people or engage in looting.

The reason they could not tolerate the white slave long spears raping Indian women and were furious was because they feared their soldiers would contract syphilis, which could ultimately kill many of them.

After Columbus discovered the New World and returned to Europe, diseases similar to leprosy but seemingly more terrifying began to appear in large numbers in Spain, France, and other places. This terrible virus spread through sexual contact and had a terrifying fatality rate. Even if patients did not die, they would suffer unbearable pain. Thus, people’s fear of this disease, called syphilis, brought back by Columbus from America, was second only to the Black Death.

Later research showed that whether syphilis was truly brought back from the American continent by Columbus was still debatable, but it was a fact verified through excavated bones that Indians carried syphilis.

Haldor, Hrutik, and Haig did not understand what syphilis was or whether it truly existed among the Indians, but they dared not try it and were unwilling to risk their soldiers’ lives to test the accuracy of the rumors.

Hrutik severely punished more than twenty white slaves who had raped Indian women in front of everyone to remind them not to touch Indian women, lest they contract syphilis and ruin their lives, and risk infecting everyone else.

After Hrutik’s severe punishment of the white slaves, the Viking army’s frenzied excitement and joy of victory were diluted and suppressed.

Haldor also expressed his support for Hrutik and finally ordered that the spoils, captives, and military merits obtained by each Icelandic individual belonged to them. The white slaves could also keep half of their spoils and captives as private property. If they did not want them, they could turn them in upon returning to Hrut City to offset their contract time. This was Haldor’s reward for the white slaves’ brave fighting.

After the decision was announced, the white slaves cheered.

Because white slaves were not recognized as having private property before the end of their contract, a strict contract owner could deprive the white slaves of all their wealth.

Similarly, the wealth looted by white slaves following their master into battle had to be turned over to the master.

However, doing so would completely offend the white slaves, and giving everything to the white slaves would make them arrogant. Haldor seemed to have truly figured out leadership experience and, without hesitation, timely displayed the benevolence of a kind leader, allowing the white slaves to keep half of the looted wealth.

The white slaves were both happy and grateful to Haldor, feeling it was their due and fortunate. This premise was also because the white slaves could loot things due to the strength of the militia, and the strength of the militia was due to the remote firepower suppression of thirty musketeers and the close protection of one hundred and ten sets of plate armor. This result was entirely due to Leader Haldor.

Haldor looked at the increasingly dark sky and ordered the preparation of food. After eating, he led everyone to set up night watches. More than two hundred people were divided into three shifts and slept in several large houses at the core of the village.

To prevent the slaves from escaping, the white slaves tied all the slaves together with ropes, and then dozens of soldiers took turns guarding them.

The next morning, when Haldor and the others woke up, they felt sore all over. The unfamiliar environment and the company of the dead made them sleep very uncomfortably, and they just wanted to leave quickly.

So Haldor ordered the destruction of the savage village and led the captives and spoils back to Hrut City.

At dawn, the lakeside village was set on fire. The more than a hundred corpses lying around the village the previous night had been thrown into the lake by the white slaves. The flames grew higher and higher, illuminating the blood-stained land. The air was filled with a strong and pungent bloody smell, but as more and more grass houses were set on fire, the black smoke spread and covered the bloody smell. The growing flames in the black smoke also lit up the dawn sky.

As the flames soared and black smoke rolled, Haldor had already led more than two hundred and fifty militiamen and three hundred and eighty Beothuk slaves away from the lake and forest filled with corpses, embarking on the return journey.

On the way back, due to the addition of nearly four hundred Indian savages, the speed was much slower. It was not that the Indians could not walk fast, but the Haldor army, to save energy and prevent the Indian captives from escaping, tied many savages together with ropes, making it impossible for them to move quickly.

The Viking legion took a week to travel from Hrut City to the large Beothuk village, consuming a third of the food on the wagons.

The remaining food was originally insufficient to support the large group of more than six hundred people returning to Hrut City. However, in addition to furs, the Indian village was looted of more than a thousand pounds of corn, cowpea grains, and squash seeds. Corn, cowpeas, and squash seeds could be both planted and eaten. Haldor ordered the white slaves to bring all this food, which was enough for more than six hundred people to eat on the road.

Now was the season for crop growth, so the savage village had only leftover rations. If they waited another month, it would be harvest season, and corn, cowpeas, and squash would be ready for harvest.

Vinland’s latitude was too far north, making the climate unsuitable for most agricultural crops, especially in the north near the Arctic Ocean, where the Arctic Ocean’s cold currents had a severe impact. Apart from the most cold-resistant rye, almost no other crops could survive.

Southern Vinland, due to the Caribbean warm current, had a much warmer and humid climate, making it basically similar to the climate temperature of Heilongjiang in the Far East Celestial Empire. From spring to autumn, more crop varieties could be planted.

The Beothuk people on Vinland Island were not skilled in cultivation and mainly relied on hunting, fishing, and gathering nature’s gifts. Later, after establishing close ties with the tribes of the western continent, they obtained the “Three Sisters” of squash, corn, and cowpeas and began cultivation.

These Three Sisters, in the Indians’ cultivation experience, needed to be planted together, mutually dependent, and would yield good harvests. The Indians did not understand the scientific principles but had figured it out through experience.

The chiefs and warriors of the Beothuk people were killed by the white slaves, and even most of the adult men died. The remaining men, women, and children were terrified and became obedient.

To better manage them, Haldor temporarily had Blackstone and Amu, two young Indian slaves, manage the nearly four hundred Beothuk slaves. Their languages were the same, and their cultures were similar. Within a day, the benefits were evident. Any command Haldor gave to the Beothuk people was immediately responded to and executed, which made Haldor’s favor for the two young slaves grow day by day.

When Haldor led his more than six hundred soldiers and captives back to Hrut City, it was already the afternoon of July 31.

Haldor’s western expedition in the summer of 1628 on the Julian calendar took twenty days and ultimately achieved a complete victory.

Two hundred and fifty-two militiamen and auxiliary troops had no casualties, killing one hundred and forty-nine Beothuk people and capturing three hundred and eighty men, women, and children.

When this achievement was announced in Hrut City, it caused everyone to cheer, and Haldor’s prestige was further enhanced.

Chapter 37: Distribution of Slaves

In August of 1628, the population of Hrut City reached over thirteen hundred, with the number of white slaves and Indian slaves nearly equal.

Upon returning to Hrut City, Haldor immediately began rewarding and commending the members of his Viking army.

Each Icelandic musketeer received one male and one female Beothuk slave, along with a reward of one hundred silver marks.

The white slave long spearmen were granted a reduction of half a year in their contract terms and a material reward of twenty silver marks.

Most of the white auxiliary troops, except for a few who had killed Indian warriors and thus had additional time deducted from their contracts, had three months reduced from their terms and received rewards of five to ten silver marks.

Since the white slaves had to surrender half of the furs and slaves they captured, and most of them also handed over the remaining half of the savage slaves to offset their contract time, Haldor ended up with nearly three hundred Indian slaves. He allocated sixty of them as rewards for the Icelandic musketeers, leaving him with over two hundred.

Haldor distributed the more than two hundred savage slaves equally among his seven Aettangr leaders. Each of the seven Oarsmen received over thirty savage slaves. However, since the Viking warband had killed more than half of the adult males during the conquest of the Beothuk tribes, the slaves obtained were mostly women and teenagers.

Olaf and Ulf, as the chief’s sons, along with Hoskuld, Heiner, Kalhu, and Kalm, did not compete with them for slaves, so they were able to choose first.

Olaf casually selected thirty-six or thirty-seven slaves, including only two adult males, twenty adult females, and the remaining fifteen were children.

Olaf ordered Pikku to manage the thirty-seven slaves and allocated a piece of land outside the city for them to build their own houses.

Originally, the savage slaves in Vinland were unruly, often escaping during outdoor labor or at night. However, the entire eastern part of Vinland was essentially under the control of Hrut City, and the savage tribes were in a state of competition and hostility with each other. Savages without a tribe to rely on in the wilderness had no good fate—they either ended up in the bellies of wild beasts or were recaptured by white slave militia to suffer torture and beatings.

Coupled with the fact that diseases and heavy labor had killed many in recent years, the original two hundred savage slaves had become docile and numb.

Seeing the behavior of their fellow slaves, the three hundred and eighty slaves under the seven Oarsmen, the Icelanders, and the white slaves did not dare to entertain thoughts of escape. Especially the women and children, who were already terrified, became very easy to manage.

The population of Hrut City increased by three hundred and eighty people due to this western expedition, bringing the number of white slaves and savage slaves to nearly equal. Although the savage slaves only added less than a hundred adult males and over a hundred women and girls, the slave force had indeed grown, and the construction speed of Hrut City had increased by twenty percent.

A easy conquest battle boosted the confidence of Haldor, Hrutik, Haig, and others. Kadir, who had been cooped up in the city for twenty days, also clamored to lead troops into battle and capture savage prisoners.

Moreover, based on the information provided by the captive savage slaves from the interior, Haldor and his men also learned about the true situation of the savages in the interior of Vinland, which further increased their confidence.

It turned out that over a hundred years ago, the French discovered that the waters around Vinland were a rich fishing ground. They began to land on Vinland to rest and dry fish. Initially, their interaction with the Beothuk was limited to exchanging small items from their ships, such as knives, flint, mirrors, and glass beads, for the Beothuk’s furs. Later, they discovered that the Beothuk did not have large tribes or aggressive tendencies, so they began to capture them as slaves and sometimes kill them.

The coastal Beothuk, under attack by French fishermen, could only flee into the mountains and forests. However, due to contact with whites, they contracted viruses such as smallpox and influenza, which quickly caused heavy casualties among the savages on Vinland.

Over a hundred years, the number of savages on Vinland gradually decreased from tens of thousands to a fraction of that, and several powerful tribal alliances also perished.

Eight years ago, when Haig arrived in Vinland, it was a time when the savages were slightly recovering. However, the savages on the southeastern Oxhorn Peninsula were still captured as slaves, causing the remaining people to flee to the interior.

From the mouths of the savage slaves, Haldor and his men learned that the several large tribal alliances in the interior, each with thousands of people, had disintegrated and perished due to decades of disease. It seemed that only one alliance remained.

Understanding the limited resistance of the savages, Haldor and his men decided to split their forces and advance into the interior of Vinland, sweeping from east to west, destroying all large and small savage tribes, capturing savage slaves, until they had swept across all of Vinland, unified the island, and enslaved all the savages.

“If everything goes smoothly, perhaps we can rule all of Vinland before winter this year.”

Haldor said with great enthusiasm at the pre-war meeting organized in the castle.

After the meeting, Hrutik began to select men from the Icelanders and white slaves to strengthen the ranks, preparing to expand the number of soldiers by one Aettangr.

With the addition of over three hundred slaves in Hrut City, including more than two hundred able-bodied laborers, the pressure on the Icelanders and white slaves was greatly reduced, freeing up a lot of their productivity.

Hrutik relaxed some conditions this time and finally selected thirty Icelandic men aged between eighteen and fifty and ninety white slave men aged between twenty and forty. He then began intensive training.

After half a month of training, the Icelandic men with some foundation could handle their firelock muskets quite well. Although their marksmanship was not as good as the other team of veteran musketeers, overall, it satisfied Hrutik.

The white slave long spearmen also trained to a certain level, able to follow orders and, wearing plate armor, were capable of sweeping away any Indian warriors.

In mid-August, after discussing with Haldor, Hrutik mixed the two legions and then, with the old soldiers leading the new ones, reorganized them into two legions. Once preparations were complete, Haldor ordered the expedition. The two legions were led by Haldor, Hrutik, Haig, and Kadir.

The auxiliary troops consisted of the original one hundred and forty white slaves plus one hundred and forty savage slaves, mixed together. Each of the two legions had a team of auxiliary troops carrying supplies and provisions.

When Haldor and Haig led the militia legions out of Hrut City in a grand procession, the large emerging city was left with only over eighty Icelandic women and children and over eight hundred slaves.

The management of the entire Hrut City was left to Hoskuld and Jot. In reality, the daily production, life, and construction of Hrut City were still steadily managed by the seven Aettangr leaders. Now that the weather had entered the hottest period, crops could no longer be planted, and people focused on logging, quarrying, fishing, and hunting. The women engaged in tasks such as boiling salt, salting fish, salting meat, cooking, and sewing clothes.

Although Hrut City suddenly lost five hundred men, the presence of numerous white slaves, savage slaves, and strong women continuously contributing to the development of Hrut City made both Ulf and Hoskuld feel that Hrut City had not been affected at all. Every day, hundreds of pounds of food were added to the warehouses, and thousands of pounds of timber and stone were transported to the square in Hrut City.

Hrut City had only over twenty horses and over ten cattle. More than half of them were requisitioned for this expedition. Fortunately, there was no farming work now, so the remaining ten or so horses and three or four cattle were enough to transport timber and stone.

Chapter 38: Wielding Firearms Makes You a God to the Indians

While Hrut City was bustling with construction and slaves toiled away, Haldor and Haig had already led their respective Viking militia armies off the peninsula and deep into the heart of Vinland.

This time, both armies brought newly captured slaves to guide them. Relying on their numbers and firearms, they had crushed over a dozen small savage tribes without needing plate armor. These so-called savage tribes were little more than a few families, mostly Inuit settlements of ten to twenty people. After the white slave pikemen and Icelandic musketeers killed a few strong men, the rest surrendered meekly.

With the new savage captives leading the way, the two armies quickly advanced along Vinland’s northern and southern coastlines, one heading northeast and the other southwest.

Along the way, they systematically destroyed every savage tribe they encountered—large or small—killing the brave and strong men while enslaving the rest.

In less than ten days, Haldor and Hrutik’s northern force had doubled in size, with over a hundred Inuit and nearly two hundred Beothuk added to their auxiliary troops.

By late August, heavy rains fell as Haldor and his men trudged through the downpour to Waterfall Valley, the place they had named the previous autumn in northern Vinland.

The houses built there a year ago still stood firm, but the crops they had planted had been ravaged by animals. Haldor and his men took shelter in the large and small longhouses, waiting for the rain to stop before continuing their exploration upstream toward the great waterfall. According to the captive savages, beyond the waterfall lay a massive tribe.

While Haldor sought shelter from the rain, the southern part of Vinland basked in clear skies under the blazing sun.

The militia and white slaves marched under the scorching sun, drenched in sweat. Haig and Kadir conferred and ordered a rest in the shade by a lake up ahead.

“Not far ahead is the savage tribe we wiped out last month,” Haig said, pointing to the vast lake. “This is what the savages call Star River Land. The waterways are extensive, with lakes everywhere. Deep in the heart of it, by the great Bakens Lake, lies the largest tribe, home to the chief of the Beothuk alliance.”

“Vinland is nearly as large as Iceland, and its climate is better. Could the number of savages here exceed Iceland’s? If there are tens of thousands, we might struggle to conquer their major tribes,” Kadir fretted. He hadn’t witnessed the Viking militia’s overwhelming victory over the savages last month, so the prospect of facing a massive tribe filled him with unease.

“The Indian savages have no metallurgy. Their weapons are nothing but wood, stone, and animal bones. Our soldiers in plate armor are immune to their attacks, and our musketeers are a formidable weapon,” Haig said, wiping his face with a silk handkerchief, the cool fabric a relief against his sweat. “The Indian savages have never seen firearms. When they hear the gunfire, see the flash and smoke, they think it’s divine fire and thunder. Their ignorance makes them abandon resistance. Our weapons, equipment, and combat skills surpass theirs a thousandfold. Even against ten times their number, we can easily prevail.”

Vinland teemed with wildlife, and the savages lived comfortably on hunting and gathering, so large tribes never formed. Most were small groups of ten to thirty people, living leisurely by the waterways.

But Haig’s army had upended life for the southern savages. They sought out every tribe, large or small, crushed them, and enslaved the survivors. Soon, their ranks swelled.

The southern region of Vinland was far more hospitable than the north, rich in resources, so few Inuit were found there. They had been driven to the harsh northern coasts by the Beothuk.

That evening, Haig’s forces stormed a Beothuk stronghold by a crescent-shaped lake, slaughtering over eighty adult men and capturing more than a hundred women, children, and youths.

Settling into the chieftain’s grand wooden lodge, Haig lit an oil lamp made of seal fat and sat quietly, waiting, his voice low as he muttered to himself.

“We’ve been out for nearly half a month. Because we’ve been sweeping through the savages like a carpet, we haven’t covered as much ground as last month. But now, there isn’t a single savage tribe left behind us. However, my white slave auxiliaries and savage auxiliaries now number over three hundred Indians. The more there are, the greater the burden—and the greater the risk.”

After a while, Kadir, still wearing his bloodstained half-plate armor, strode in and sat down, grinning. “That old bastard’s head is gone—blown apart by my gun. All the savages saw it with their own eyes. Now they believe I’m a god descended with the power of heavenly fire and thunder.”

Haig laughed heartily, recalling the words his nephew Olaf had shared before he left. At the time, he hadn’t fully understood, but now it all made sense. “Good. By killing their revered chieftain and shaman with your own hands, you make them doubt their gods. Then, when you tell them we are gods come to punish the blasphemers and spread true divine grace, they will submit to us.”

Kadir and Haig were not cunning men. Kadir pondered Haig’s words for a moment before clicking his tongue in admiration, his eyes wide as he asked, “Since when did you become so wise, Haig? That sounds more like something Heiner or Haldor would say.”

In Hrut City, Heiner Williams was known as the most intelligent, Haldor as the most strategic, Haig as the strongest, Kjartan as the most generous, Ulf as the most promising, and Olaf as the most enigmatic.

Kadir refused to believe that Haig, as rough and unrefined as himself, had suddenly become clever—unless he had been half-drowned in the Fountain of Wisdom.

Haig spread his hands and sighed. “Why can’t I think of wise strategies?”

Sensing Kadir’s increasingly strange gaze, Haig gave a dry laugh. “Fine, I admit it wasn’t my idea. Olaf told me before I left how to use the savages’ beliefs to control them.”

“That makes sense,” Kadir said, smiling as he clapped his hands. As the deputy commander of a Viking militia army, he knew his old friend Haig well. “Olaf’s mind is truly soaked in the Fountain of Wisdom. He’s a genius. Using faith to subdue the savages is far better than your usual brutal methods.”

The Vikings were ruthless toward enemies and slaves, and even after converting to the merciful Lord, they had not become much kinder.

Likewise, the European nations, who worshipped the almighty and merciful Lord, had not become gentle and courteous. They remained greedy, savage, and eager to help the “backward” peoples of the world accept the “enlightenment” of “advanced culture.”

In truth, if one compared Haig’s treatment of savage slaves to the methods of the East India Company in South Asia, the West India Company in Central and South America, or the colonizers in West Africa, Haig would be considered a benevolent master.

Chapter 39: The Great Waterfall City

Between towering mountains lay one verdant valley after another, where gentle slopes and flatlands nurtured a variety of plants. The most abundant among them were the fields where corn, beans, and squash grew intertwined—the Three Sisters.

The bean vines climbed the corn stalks, their roots enriching the soil, while the squash spread across the ground, shading the earth and stifling weeds. This symbiotic relationship, perfected over thousands of years by the Indians, ensured that even when the hunt failed, they would not starve. It allowed their presence to spread across the vast expanse of North America, wherever the ice and snow did not reign.

Though the Beothuk were a fishing and hunting people, they had been influenced by the Quebecois of the mainland and cultivated some of the Three Sisters and other crops.

In the northern reaches of Vinland, at the farthest edge of Star River Land, lay dozens of valleys, each home to small tribes ranging from a few dozen to over a hundred people. From the cliffs of the Broken Head, a great waterfall cascaded, unrivaled in all of Vinland. Upstream from this waterfall stood a city built of stone and timber, known to the Beothuk and Inuit as the Great Waterfall City.

Though most of its structures were simple wooden huts, at its heart stood a towering stone temple. Encircling the city was a wall of stone, tall enough to deter wild beasts and fend off Inuit raiders or rival tribes. The outer wall and central temple lent the city an air of mystery and antiquity, as if it bore the weight of history itself.

For centuries, the Beothuk of Vinland had formed an alliance, and the Great Waterfall City had known no war. But a hundred years ago, a series of terrible curses and plagues swept through Vinland, devastating the Beothuk. The Great Waterfall City, once the leader of the alliance, was reduced to a mere member. Its population had been halved, leaving only a thousand souls and five hundred warriors—far weaker than the current alliance leader, the Long Lake City of Bakens Lake.

That morning, Atapu, the chief and high priest of the Great Waterfall City, sat in the temple, praying for the success of tomorrow’s Great Wolf Hunt. The relentless rain had finally ceased after five days, and the animals would soon emerge in great numbers—perfect timing for the hunt.

The white wolves of Vinland were massive and ferocious, with no natural predators, and their numbers were vast, roaming every corner of the land.

Every summer and autumn, when game was most abundant, the Great Waterfall City held the “Great Wolf Hunt,” culling the wolves and other prey to reduce winter raids. Yet even with these hunts, children were still sometimes carried off and killed by the wolves.

Atapu was fifty years old, an elder by Beothuk standards. His hair was streaked with gray, his back bent with age. He wore a headdress of red feathers and clutched a maple staff carved with calendrical runes, its top adorned with three gold beads, two obsidian beads, and a single turquoise stone. This was the High Priest’s Staff, passed down through generations, a symbol of supreme authority and a conduit to the gods.

As Atapu murmured his incantations, nearing the trance-like state where he communed with the gods, a sudden pain seized his chest. His heart raced, and the staff nearly slipped from his grasp.

“High Priest!”

His descendants and the other priests, standing solemnly beside him, gasped in alarm as they saw him sway.

A young man, his face painted with colorful runes and a feathered headdress upon his brow, rushed forward to catch Atapu, gently lowering him onto a woven mat.

After a moment, Atapu stirred, waking to find that only his left hand and neck could move—his body was otherwise numb.

“Ah…” Though shaken, Atapu quickly steadied himself. “Olos, help me sit up.”

The youth’s face was etched with concern, nearly calling him “Grandfather” before swallowing the word. He struggled to lift the high priest.

Atapu knew he suffered from “the Stiffening,” a malady that afflicted the elderly and high priests. He understood that his time was near—soon, he would return to the embrace of the Sea of Asuras and the Harvest Goddess.

“I am to return to the gods,” Atapu rasped, panting heavily after the effort. “This was the revelation granted to me just now.” The priests around him knelt in silence, not daring to breathe.

“I have lived fifty years,” Atapu continued, “and preserved the Great Waterfall City through curses and plagues. Thirty years ago, our people numbered barely seven hundred. Now, we have surpassed a thousand. Under the gods’ guidance, we shall rise again. As High Priest, I now pass the chieftaincy of the Great Waterfall City to my grandson, Olos. Upon my death, he shall also inherit the mantle of High Priest.”

Atapu waved away his grandson’s attempt to help him rest, fixing the priests with a resolute gaze until they voiced their assent.

Just as Atapu was about to close his eyes, a series of loud crashes echoed from outside the temple.

Crack! Crack!

“Skyfire!”

“The Thunder God descends in wrath!”

The priests’ thoughts spilled from their lips in awe.

Ten thunderous booms rang out in succession, sending tremors through the temple. Shouts of terror followed.

Atapu, exhausted, had already drifted into sleep. His grandson, the newly appointed chief Olos, rose to his feet. He ordered several priestly apprentices to carry his grandfather to a bed in the inner chamber, then strode out of the temple with the other priests.

“Divine beings walk the earth, wielding lightning and fire! Kneel and worship, and you shall be blessed. Those who dare resist shall be damned for eternity!”

Outside, Olos and the others saw the city’s people kneeling in terror, their gazes fixed on the eastern gate.

To the east, the city’s finest warriors—elite White Wolf Warriors—lay strewn across the walls, their blood staining the stone. Many others, both warriors and common folk, knelt in submission.

Olos’s eyes narrowed, his brow furrowing. From the stone platform before the temple, he and the priests behind him saw a glowing red sun suspended in the eastern sky. Below it, a host of figures marched in unison, clad in armor that shimmered in the sunlight, their long spears gleaming. Some carried long rods that emitted wisps of smoke.

Squinting, Olos made out two figures at the forefront, mounted on towering, majestic beasts, also clad in gleaming armor and wielding strange weapons.

Behind these two leaders were several Beothuk from distant lands, shouting in an eastern dialect: “Divine beings walk the earth, wielding lightning and fire! Kneel and worship, and you shall be blessed. Those who dare resist shall be damned for eternity!”

“What fools dare call themselves gods?” Olos seethed, his body trembling. The approaching, gleaming horde was terrifying in its strangeness.

Suppressing his fear, Olos drew the bear-bone knife at his waist and roared, “Blasphemers defile our gods! People of the Great Waterfall City, take up your weapons and defend our home!”

Chapter 40: The Descent of the Heavenly God

Olos had expected that after his shout, the citizens and warriors who had been terrified into kneeling by the enemy would rise up and charge out bravely. But the result was that, apart from a dozen White Wolf Warriors, everyone else remained on the ground, trembling in fear.

“Gods, have you all been bewitched by demons?”

Olos looked in disbelief at the sea of kneeling people. Then, a sturdy middle-aged priest behind him drew the bone knife at his waist and roared as he charged out of the temple.

“Get up, all of you! Follow me and charge out!”

The priest was still the captain of the White Wolf Warriors, a man who had once hunted three white wolves alone. His reputation for bravery had spread across all the tribes on the island.

“Lord Putiya!”

The White Wolf Warriors and other warriors, seeing that it was the Battle Song Priest, hastily got to their feet. Putiya let out a cold snort and ordered everyone to take up their weapons. Then he stood on the city wall, preparing to carefully observe the approaching figures who were almost at the city gates.

Suddenly, Putiya saw the armored figure in the center of the enemy formation, holding a long staff, raise the weapon in their hand. His heart jolted, but he was greatly puzzled. Before he could speak, he heard the White Wolf Warriors around him shouting.

“Lord Putiya, kneel quickly, or the divine beings on the other side will summon heavenly fire and thunder to kill you!”

Putiya’s anger flared as he kicked over two men who were trying to pull him down. He was about to give an impassioned speech to reprimand these cowards when his body suddenly trembled. Then he heard several consecutive thunderous explosions, like bolts of lightning in a clear sky.

Putiya’s body went limp, and he collapsed to the ground. Only then did he feel the excruciating pain in his chest, as if his internal organs had shattered. Then came difficulty breathing, and his body convulsed before he lost consciousness. Until his dying moment, his mind was still confused about what had attacked him—could it really have been a bolt of lightning from the heavens?

Not far away, on the high platform of the temple, the leader of Great Waterfall City, Olos, and many priests saw clearly what had happened. Several armored figures outside the city gates raised the long staffs in their hands. Then, one end emitted fire and white smoke, accompanied by thunderous explosions. Following that, several blooms of blood appeared on Putiya’s upper body, and he collapsed to the ground.

The White Wolf Warriors and other warriors instantly knelt and crawled on the ground, trembling. Putiya and the others seemed to have witnessed a divine miracle, or perhaps they were hallucinating. For a moment, they were stunned, not knowing how to respond.

“The Heavenly God descends, wielding thunder and fire. Kneel and worship, and you shall be blessed. Those who dare to resist and blaspheme shall never be redeemed!”

“That man dared to draw his knife and raise his weapon. He is a blasphemer and must die without salvation. His wife and children shall also not be redeemed!”

The people led by the mounted figure continued to shout loudly. Their voices echoed throughout Great Waterfall City, making Olos’s face grow paler.

Soon, those strange people entered Great Waterfall City and stood in the square, all looking up at Olos and the other priests on the temple.

The tall leader on the beast turned his head and said a few words to the Beothuk man holding the reins. Then the Beothuk man pointed at Olos on the temple and shouted, “Seeing the descent of the Heavenly God, you, as divine priests, should come quickly to pay your respects. Are you also false believers, blasphemers destined for hell?”

As the tone of his voice grew more impassioned, the armored figures holding the staffs that emitted heavenly fire and thunder raised their weapons. Olos felt a chill run through his body. He knew that if he uttered any hostile words or made any opposing gestures, he would die on the spot. Putiya, who had been struck by heavenly thunder, was the example of what happened to those who resisted.

Olos was still contemplating whether to die with dignity or surrender to save his life when he suddenly heard a sound behind him. Out of the corner of his eye, he saw the priests, who were usually brave and domineering, all kneeling in unison, shouting, “We pay our respects to the great and merciful Heavenly God!”

Olos’s heart grew cold, and he hastily knelt as well, joining in the shout.

Haldor, riding on horseback, pulled down his face guard, revealing his fair face and brownish-yellow beard. He smiled slightly and said to Hrutik, who was riding beside him, “Olaf’s method is truly excellent. I didn’t expect these savages to be so ignorant and superstitious. By calling firearms the divine instruments of thunder, we’ve completely broken their will to resist and saved ourselves a lot of effort.”

“Yes, with our bravery and skills, along with Olaf’s wisdom and everyone’s efforts, we might soon unify Vinland. Then we’ll have the foundation to return to Iceland and establish a free republic. Haldor, you truly are a child trusted by God, to have given birth to a son like a prophet. Perhaps in the future, we will all be remembered by posterity because of Olaf.”

Hrutik, having experienced saving Haldor, enduring the royal jelly, and establishing the Viking Raid, had already witnessed Olaf’s extraordinary abilities and was quite impressed with the young man.

Chapter 41: Divide and Conquer

Olos was only eighteen years old. He felt he had a bright future ahead and had no intention of dying so soon. Sensing that the white leader might have murderous intent, he quickly begged for the chance to speak.

Haldor listened to Blackstone’s translation and nodded, signaling Olos to speak freely.

Without hesitation, Olos stammered excitedly. Blackstone listened with a slight frown, taking half a moment to organize his words before translating: “Great and merciful Heavenly God, as the lord of Great Waterfall City and the soon-to-be High Priest, I pledge allegiance to the great incarnation of the Heavenly God. You are the Heavenly God descended to earth, noble beyond compare. How could you personally rule over the people and teach the masses? It should be us, the priests, who spread your benevolence to the tribes across the island, so they may recognize the true faith.”

After hearing this, Haldor exchanged a few quiet words with Hrutik before asking, “How can you help me?”

Upon hearing Blackstone’s translation, Olos felt a wave of relief, knowing his life was likely spared. He spoke even more fervently: “Great incarnation of the Heavenly God, since you are an incarnation, I believe any deity is merely your earthly representative. You are the master of all things, of mountains and rivers, and you must have countless divine names, ruling over myriad tribes. My Great Waterfall City worships the goddess of the sea and harvest, the great Shurost. I think the greatness of the gods is beyond human understanding—gods have no gender, only our limited human perception assigns them one. So, I wish to bring out my grandfather, the High Priest Atapu. He is the most respected priest in Great Waterfall City, even across the entire alliance. If he were to profess faith in the true god before the people and return to your divine kingdom, I believe it would make ruling over the mortal people much easier for you.”

Haldor was delighted upon hearing this. He looked at Olos and nodded. “You’re quite impressive. If you can do as you say, I will make you a High Priest—the High Priest of all the Beothuk people on Vinland.”

Haldor agreed with Olos’s proposal. Olos respectfully kowtowed before rising and leading a priest to the temple, where they carried out his grandfather, the High Priest Atapu.

Atapu had suffered a stroke and was in a coma, but no one outside the temple knew this. Olos invited Haldor and the others to move to the temple’s exterior and sit down. Then, supporting his grandfather, he knelt before Haldor.

The commotion atop the temple drew the attention of the thousands of Beothuk people kneeling in the square. They recognized the familiar figure of the High Priest and his feathered crown, symbolizing supreme dignity and divine might. Then they saw the High Priest, supported by Olos, kneeling before the towering white man who claimed to be a god descended to earth. The sight sent shockwaves through their hearts.

High Priest Atapu was an elder of Great Waterfall City, the one who had single-handedly pulled the city back from the brink of destruction into a golden age of prosperity. He was the High Priest who communicated with the gods and was blessed by the Heavenly God. But now, this great leader was kneeling humbly before the white-skinned giant who claimed to be a god. Could this giant truly be a god descended to earth?

Olos helped his dying grandfather into position, kneeling before Haldor’s feet. Then, roughening his voice and covering his mouth, he mimicked his grandfather’s slurred speech due to old age: “Great Heavenly God, creator of the world, goddess of the sea and harvest, great Shurost’s incarnation, thank you for your arrival. Thank you for saving your people. I wish to return to the divine kingdom and serve you eternally by your side.”

After speaking, Olos suddenly stood up and, in his own voice, said, “The High Priest has met the true god. His devotion is sincere, and his soul has been received into the divine kingdom to enjoy eternal life.”

With that, Olos ordered the other priests to carry his grandfather away. They would first skin and gut him, preserving his body to remain incorruptible, then display it for a year before burial. This was a sacred funeral rite for priests and chiefs.

Haldor agreed to Olos’s request. The people of Great Waterfall City then watched as their late leader, High Priest Atapu, was laid out in the square. Two priests used bone knives to slit his belly, blood gushing out, before scraping his bones and flesh, refilling the skin with bones and padding, and placing the preserved corpse in a newly constructed shrine in the square.

Olos personally led the people into the shrine to pay their respects to the old priest’s body. According to custom, Atapu’s body would be displayed for a year before being washed and reburied.

Haldor and Hrutik watched Olos in the distant shrine, their eyes flickering with a hint of wariness.

Hrutik thought for a moment, then leaned in and whispered to Haldor, “That old priest was clearly still breathing, but Olos insisted he was dead and had him skinned alive. These savages may be brutal, but Olos is both brutal and cunning. I think we should use him, but we must also be on guard against him.”

Haldor picked at his teeth with his fingernail, but the stubborn meat fibers refused to budge, irritating him. Gritting his teeth, he said, “It doesn’t matter. We Vikings don’t fear difficulties. What problem can’t be solved with one axe? If one isn’t enough, we’ll use two. No savage can be more powerful than a firelock musket.”

“You’re right,” Hrutik nodded, though he still looked worried. “But I think we should keep someone to watch Olos, just in case he has other ideas.”

Through questioning Olos and the others, Haldor had learned that there were over a hundred tribes in the northern part of Vinland. Some were nominally under Great Waterfall City, some were completely independent, and many were Inuit tribes. Haldor didn’t want to embark on a long campaign, and he also felt that Great Waterfall City had too many warriors. It would be better to let Great Waterfall City conquer the savage tribes on his behalf.

“We’ll have Olos summon all the Indian tribal leaders under Great Waterfall City’s rule here, then order them to pledge loyalty to me. Then, we’ll have Great Waterfall City conquer all the northern tribes. Once all the savages are subdued, the northern tribes’ warrior strength will be depleted, and we can take them back to Hrut City.”

Haldor’s idea made Hrutik ponder deeply. He nodded. “It’s a good plan. We’ll stay and guard Great Waterfall City while Olos sends warriors to conquer the northern tribes. Great Waterfall City has over fifty White Wolf Warriors and more than three hundred warriors. With some organization, they can assemble a force of five hundred, enough to sweep across the entire north. Let them exhaust themselves for us—this is a brilliant strategy.” Hrutik even laughed as he spoke.

Circumstances change people, and hardships temper them. The two Viking militia commanders were growing through the trials of war.

Haldor and Hrutik thought for a while longer, refining their plan. Then they called Olos into the temple and ordered him to organize four hundred warriors to conquer the unruly tribes in the north, bringing all the conquered people back to Great Waterfall City. They also ordered the tribes already under Great Waterfall City’s rule to relocate there.

Olos’s expression darkened upon hearing this. He was deeply resistant to the idea but knew he couldn’t refuse. His fear of Haldor grew. He never could have imagined that this giant would devise such a terrifying plan—using his own soldiers to fight other tribes, helping him conquer the northern islands.

Chapter 42: Faith

Though reluctant, Olos still valued his life more. Under Haldor’s stern gaze, he knelt and pledged his loyalty on the spot before going to assemble the troops.

Soon, Olos had gathered five hundred warriors. Among them were fifty-seven of the fiercest and highest-ranking White Wolf Warriors, three hundred and forty ordinary warriors, and over a hundred youths in their teens and men over forty. Though young, the boys were brave, and the elders had experience—both could fight as warriors.

With this force of over five hundred men, Great Waterfall City was left with only women, children, and a few youths and elderly men.

With the families and children of the warriors as hostages, and with Olos, the chief priest, and all the other priests in his grasp, Haldor was confident that these five hundred men would fight to the death for him.

After kneeling before Haldor, the divine incarnation atop the temple, the five hundred warriors, led by over fifty White Wolf Warriors, departed Great Waterfall City. Ten musketeers from Iceland accompanied them as they hurried toward the distant, unruly tribes.

Backed by the late city elder and High Priest Atapu’s endorsement—and the miracle of his soul’s departure—the people of Great Waterfall City now firmly believed that Haldor, the towering white man, was indeed the incarnation of their god.

When a person believes in something, even if it is a lie, their mind will find reasons to justify it.

Haldor’s extraordinary height was proof of his divine nature. In the legends of the Beothuk and other Indians, gods were towering giants who wielded thunder and fire. The great High Priest Atapu had even recognized Haldor as a god, and after meeting him, Atapu’s soul had been taken to the divine kingdom to live eternally. This made the people of Great Waterfall City absolutely certain that Haldor was a god.

Thus, when Olos summoned the warriors, he declared it a divine decree: the god demanded that all of Great Waterfall City march to conquer the northern tribes, spreading the god’s faith across the island. Those who fought valiantly and remained devout would, like the High Priest, enter the divine kingdom upon death and enjoy eternal bliss.

The Beothuk warriors were filled with zeal. Carrying their sacred duty, they left Great Waterfall City with holy smiles on their faces.

Faith is a manifestation of how people perceive the world. The ignorant believe in gods because they know nothing of society—only faith can give their souls a home.

Even the educated cling to fixed gods or values, finding solace in the worldview shaped by their culture.

Those without faith cannot understand the devotion of the faithful. Haldor and Hrutik were both believers in God, though Haldor still held some faith in the old Norse religion. Thus, they and their musketeers and spearmen understood the savages’ behavior. Haldor even prayed silently to God, seeking forgiveness for impersonating a pagan deity.

Great Waterfall City was called a city, but in truth, it was just a large village with a temple and walls.

With over five hundred men gone, the city felt empty. Haldor ordered Hrutik to bring the white slave auxiliaries, savage auxiliaries, and captive savage slaves into the city. Olos was to settle them all.

Olos was obedient, carrying out Haldor’s orders diligently and frequently seeking guidance, like a loyal hound.

The addition of over two hundred militiamen and two hundred slaves made housing scarce. Many slaves were building new homes, while Olos struggled to feed Haldor’s five hundred men. With so few men left in the city, the people of Great Waterfall City often went hungry after supplying Haldor’s troops.

This did not go unnoticed. Hrutik soon reported it to Haldor, and after a brief discussion, they summoned Olos to the temple through Blackstone.

“Greetings to the great god and the divine emissary Hrutik,” Olos said, kneeling as soon as he entered, his newly learned Icelandic still clumsy.

“You are clever and loyal, Olos. That is good,” Haldor said, smiling at the young man before him. “Study Old Norse well. It will be useful to you.”

To emphasize his divine authority and mystery, Haldor had ordered all his subordinates to adopt Old Norse names, which sounded more ancient and majestic.

Olos looked up at Haldor and asked, “Great god, have you summoned me for something? Please give your orders.”

“I hear you’ve been letting the people of Great Waterfall City starve just to feed my men and slaves,” Haldor said, staring at Olos.

Olos, still kneeling, pressed his forehead to the ground. “It is this humble one’s mistake. Please punish me, great god.”

“Get up first,” Haldor said with a cold snort. “Starting tomorrow, I will have my Beothuk and Inuit slaves hunt together. Great Waterfall City is now part of Hrut City, and all of you are my people. No one shall go hungry.”

Olos’s eyes reddened slightly, his voice hoarse. “Thank you for your kindness, merciful master.”

Haldor enjoyed the flattery. Only after Hrutik glared at him a third time did he wave his hand dismissively. “You may go.”

After Olos left, Hrutik stood and stared at Haldor until he finally asked, frowning, “Be careful with Olos. He’s slippery. That tearful act just now—he’s hiding something deep.”

Haldor shrugged. “With you here, I don’t need to worry about him. He’s just a savage—a beast we can kill anytime. Why should we fear them?”

Hrutik’s expression softened slightly. “We don’t know how long we’ll have to wait in Great Waterfall City. Maybe we should call the fleet over. That way, when the warriors return with captives, we can leave for Hrut City immediately.”

Haldor slapped his forehead, raising an eyebrow. “You’re right. I almost forgot. Send Polly or Brun. Those two have performed well in recent battles.”

Polly and Brun were Hrutik’s most promising students. Not only had he taught them navigation, but he had also trained them in warfare. In recent battles, the two young men had led small squads of musketeers with impressive timing and marksmanship, earning even Haldor’s admiration.

Hrutik smiled slightly. “I’ve already sent Polly with two white slave soldiers to fetch the horses. Do you want to write a letter to Hoskuld and the family back home?”

Haldor quickly stood, and Hrutik had already taken out paper, a quill, and ink from his cloak, handing them to him.

Haldor smiled lightly, took them, and leaned over the stone table to write two letters. One was to Hoskuld, explaining recent events and instructing him to send all available ships to the old settlement in Waterfall Valley, built when they first arrived in Vinland, to pick up the savages from Great Waterfall City.

The second letter was to his wife, Katrin, and his sons, Ulf and Olaf. It recounted his journey over the past few dozen days and expressed his deep longing for his family.

An hour later, Polly, clad in half-plate armor, left Great Waterfall City with two white slave soldiers, riding Hrutik’s horse and carrying Haldor’s two letters.

Chapter 43: Managing the Savages Requires Good Methods

October 1628, Julian Calendar

Fifty White Wolf Warriors of Great Waterfall City, accompanied by fewer than three hundred subordinates and several thousand members of various Beothuk tribes, returned to the outskirts of Great Waterfall City.

Haldor, who had been waiting for some time, led his Viking militia in a display of formidable military formations and the awe-inspiring “heavenly fire and thunder,” silencing any lingering resentment among the captured or coerced tribesmen.

The White Wolf Warriors were the most powerful and esteemed warriors among the Beothuk, second only to the shamans in authority. Each White Wolf Warrior represented the slaying of a white wolf—a feat that marked them as the bravest and most skilled fighters in their tribe. Smaller tribes rarely had such warriors, and if they did, it was usually only the chieftain who held the title.

Thus, when Great Waterfall City’s fifty-plus White Wolf Warriors appeared with hundreds of warriors in tow, many smaller tribes surrendered without resistance. Even larger tribes with four or five hundred people were subdued after a bloody battle. The warriors of Great Waterfall City held overwhelming advantages in courage, stamina, combat skills, and sheer numbers.

In just one month, the city’s five hundred warriors had been reduced to just over three hundred. However, they had conquered and destroyed all the tribes in the northern half of Vinland’s Long Ridge Mountains, west of the peninsula. Nearly three thousand captives—mostly men who had resisted—were brought to Great Waterfall City, along with five hundred Inuit slaves.

After Haldor’s theatrical display of divine power, he retreated to the temple, where he now sat with Hrutik, drinking newly brewed wine from that year’s harvest.

Soon, Brun entered with Blackstone and Olos.

Olos knelt first in greeting before reporting to Haldor.

Earlier, Haldor had ordered Brun, Blackstone, and Olos to settle the returning warriors and captives. The labor of the remaining savages and slaves over the past ten days had resulted in the construction of many new wooden houses, allowing the thousands of newcomers to squeeze in.

Now, Brun, Olos, and Blackstone had come to report. In truth, Olos was the one handling the actual work, as he was the leader of Great Waterfall City, making it easiest for him to command the shamans and warriors. However, to prevent any underhanded schemes, Brun and Blackstone were present—ostensibly to assist but really to supervise.

Having submitted to Haldor for over a month, Olos’s Old Norse was still somewhat halting, but communication was no longer an issue. He first reported the headcount, then explained his plans to preach the faith of the heavenly god, converting the masses to follow Haldor.

Haldor remained noncommittal, but Hrutik raised an eyebrow and asked, “Are there really only a little over three thousand people in all of northern Vinland?” He glanced at Blackstone and Brun.

Blackstone, sensing Hrutik’s suspicion that Olos might be lying, stepped forward and said, “The count just now confirmed that the two tribes combined have only three thousand seven hundred people. Among them, there are barely thirteen hundred men. All the elders have been killed, leaving two thousand women and children.”

Hrutik frowned. “Given Vinland’s size and abundant resources, the population shouldn’t be this low. Even without outside contact, primitive tribes should have thrived on the rich game and land. The population shouldn’t be less than Iceland’s.”

Blackstone immediately berated Olos in the Beothuk language. Olos answered nervously, and after a long pause, Blackstone said, “Olos claims the island’s population was once much larger—twice what it is now. But diseases like leprosy and typhus have killed many. I’ve heard from my own people that my tribe suffered the same fate. Olos says the environment in northern Vinland is harsher than the south, so the population was always smaller there, and now it’s even fewer.”

Hrutik and Haldor exchanged glances. “It’s true that savages can’t resist diseases like smallpox,” Hrutik said. “That matches what we know.”

Haldor muttered, “Perhaps it’s not a bad thing that so many savages have died. With fewer of them, managing the weak ones will be easier.”

Hrutik’s scarred eye twitched, and he grinned. “Exactly. Our policy of using savages to govern savages is the best approach. If they’re too strong, they might not obey.”

In this era, nationalism and the concept of nation-states were not yet established. Whether it was the Four Great Khanates, the Ottoman Empire claiming to be the successor of the Eastern Roman Empire, or the United Kingdom of England, all ruled over many ethnic groups and annexed numerous states.

Of course, rebellions, uprisings, and even coups occurred, but these were unrelated to the common people—they were movements orchestrated by nobles vying for power.

The ongoing purge of the Huguenots in France was a prime example—a war waged by the ambitious nobles led by the Queen Mother against the reformist faction headed by Prime Minister Richelieu and King Louis XIII, all for control of power.

Within a year, the Huguenot nobles and their armies would be utterly defeated, and Richelieu would rise as a dominant figure in Europe, uniting with Louis XIII to lead France toward becoming a great empire.

Haldor and his companions had previously discussed how to govern the savages. They knew that as long as the ignorant savages feared and respected their rulers, they could be controlled. However, differences in culture and language, along with the savages’ barbarism, remained challenges.

Later, Heiner proposed a solution inspired by England: while assimilating the savages culturally, they could establish separate living areas for them, appointing governors to oversee them—much like England’s rule over Ireland or Denmark’s rule over Iceland.

Haldor and the others approved of Heiner’s proposal. Then, Olaf quietly suggested the strategy of “using barbarians to control barbarians.”

This involved reforming the savages’ beliefs, unifying all tribal deities under Haldor, who wielded heavenly fire and thunder. Thus, the Haldor family would become a divine lineage, ensuring long-term rule over the savages.

Olaf believed that as long as the savages were kept from advancing toward civilization, the Haldor family’s rule—based on their “divine bloodline”—would remain unchallenged.

The first and second batches of savages to submit would be granted the same status as white slaves or even Icelanders. They would then govern and conquer the uncivilized savages who resisted the rule of the heavenly god. Thus, the Haldor family would be the divine rulers of the savage nobility, who in turn would rule over the savage commoners.

Since the savage nobility were the first to be conquered, their faith was the first to be assimilated. Their connection to the Haldor family was inseparable, and their authority to rule over the savages was granted by the Haldors—they had no choice but to uphold Haldor’s rule.

The ideal outcome would be a layered system: the Haldor family ruling over the assimilated savage nobility, who in turn ruled over the newly conquered savage chiefs, who then ruled over the common savages. This tiered structure would reduce costs while ensuring the Haldor family’s dominance.

Olaf’s idea drew inspiration from the Japanese emperor’s divine status, the relationship between the shogunate and the daimyo, and the medieval European feudal system. It also incorporated the Jurchen practice of the “cooked” ruling the “raw,” who then ruled the Mongols, Koreans, and Han Chinese.

Though still in its early stages, the concept impressed Haldor, Haig, Heiner, Hrutik, and the others, who eagerly adopted it.

Chapter 44: Triumphant Return by Land and Sea

Vinland entered October with a series of autumn rains, one after another, falling in a steady drizzle.

After each rain, the weather grew colder, and by the end of the month, the savages of Great Waterfall City had wrapped themselves in layers of reindeer fur.

Haldor also added a sealskin coat over his linen robe. Leading Hrutik and a few others through the city, he watched the savages bustling about, gathering food and firewood. He stamped his feet and exhaled a warm breath. “This year is even colder than last.”

Hrutik, draped in a white wolf cloak, rubbed his fingers together, feeling the chill. He exhaled a puff of white air. “It feels like Iceland in October. The weather these past few years has been strange—getting colder every year.”

Muttering a few words, Haldor was about to visit the savages’ dwellings when he suddenly heard the sound of hooves approaching. Hrutik stood on his toes and looked west, smiling. “It’s Polly. Looks like the fleet has arrived.”

Polly, entering the city, spotted Haldor and Hrutik standing tall in the street, their bearing and attire far surpassing the short, ugly savages.

Soon, Polly and two white slaves rode up to Haldor and Hrutik, dismounted, and knelt on one knee in greeting. “Lord Haldor, Captain Hrutik, the fleet has arrived at the mouth of the Waterfall River. Hoskuld and the young masters are waiting for your return.”

“Hah, excellent!” Haldor laughed heartily, helping Polly to his feet. “How is Hrut City faring?”

“All is well in the city. Here are letters from the lady and the young masters, as well as one from Steward Hoskuld.”

Polly pulled two sheepskin scrolls from his coat and handed them to Haldor.

After reading them, Haldor burst into laughter and turned to Blackstone, who had been following behind. “Go fetch Olos.”

A moment later, Blackstone returned with Olos, who bowed before speaking. “Great Master, what would you have me do?”

Haldor, to emphasize his divine status and authority over the savages, had forbidden them from calling him a god. Instead, they were to address him as “Master.” Starting with Olos, all savages now bowed and hailed him as “Great Master,” “Merciful Master,” or “Sacred and Inviolable Master.”

Haldor gestured for Olos to rise. “My fleet has arrived at the mouth of the Waterfall River. Everyone in Great Waterfall City will relocate to Hrut City. Gather everyone and prepare for the move.”

Olos hesitated for a moment before realizing what was happening. “Yes, Master. It is a great honor to live in your divine city. I will prepare at once.”

Hrutik stopped Olos. “There are over five thousand people in Great Waterfall City. Three armed merchant ships and three large vessels can carry at most a thousand at a time. Start with the women and children.”

Olos bowed deeply and hurried away.

That afternoon, Olos gathered over five hundred women, children, and elderly, along with the wives and children of tribal leaders and warriors—totaling over four hundred more.

Haldor inspected them and, finding no issues, ordered Polly to lead the first group to the ships. Over a thousand people, carrying fur coats and a few clay pots, set off under the guidance of a dozen white men, heading north to the river channel ten miles away.

Ten days later, the fleet returned to Waterfall Valley, and the second group of women and children boarded the ships and departed.

Now, only two thousand five hundred young and strong men remained in Great Waterfall City. Haldor saw no need to wait for the fleet again, so he told Polly and the others not to return. After the fleet left, he ordered the entire population of Great Waterfall City to march out, preparing to return to Hrut City by land.

This time, Haldor commanded that all the stored grain in Great Waterfall City be brought along. The Viking militia guarded over a hundred tribal leaders and priests, leading the warriors and young men out of the city.

Late autumn in Vinland was unusually cold. If it weren’t for the lack of snow, it would have felt like winter.

North of Hrut City lay a vast wetland prairie. Frost had long since settled, turning the entire wetland into a silver-white expanse, like ice crystals and snowflakes.

In the wetland prairie, Olaf, Ilugi, and Ulf were hunting white wolves with their slaves from three Aettangr. This not only provided pelts and meat but also reduced the number of predators, easing the pressure on beavers, reindeer, and other prey, allowing them to thrive.

The area was dotted with thousands of lakes and various cold-weather vegetation, making it the most biodiverse region on Oxhorn Peninsula. Olaf had often come here in spring to collect maple sap.

The wetland was vast, but years of relentless hunting by Haig, Haldor, and others had thinned the once-plentiful reindeer, beavers, white wolves, and foxes. Even the skilled hunters from the seven Aettangr in Hrut City had to work hard to return with a full haul.

Olaf calculated that at the current rate of hunting hundreds of animals daily, the wetland might be nearly empty in a decade or two.

This reminded him of the extinct walruses of Iceland and the animals that had gone extinct in Australia, Africa, and Southeast Asia after European colonization. He had once been indignant about such losses, but now, as a colonizer himself, he understood the difficulty of resisting greed.

Olaf believed that only when Vinland became prosperous, and its people no longer needed to hunt for survival, could animal conservation be promoted. To ensure a steady supply of valuable pelts from beavers, reindeer, and foxes, he had mobilized Ulf and Ilugi to lead the hunt for white wolves.

Olaf saw this as a win-win: hunting wolves trained his men, boosting their organization and courage, while also providing meat to reward them and pelts to fill his coffers. It also ensured the sustainable development of the wetland’s fur resources.

That day, the three Aettangr had sent over two hundred men, killing more than a dozen white wolves. The meat was enough for each household to enjoy a meat stew, though one white slave had been bitten on the thigh by a wolf. Fortunately, his thick fur coat had lessened the injury, and he could still walk with assistance.

Just as Ulf, Olaf, and Ilugi were preparing to return with their spoils, they encountered Haldor’s group of over two thousand people returning from Great Waterfall City.

“What’s that?”

Pikku, riding a fat reindeer beside Olaf, spotted a large group of people appearing on the northern plateau. He straightened up to get a better look and confirmed it was indeed a large group, likely Beothuk savages. He quickly turned to inform Olaf.

“Master, a large group of savages is approaching from the north.”

Olaf, Ulf, and Ilugi rode side by side, each on a horse. Olaf and Ulf’s mounts were of finer breed—tall, long-legged, and muscular—while Ilugi’s was a sturdy draft horse, clumsy in appearance but still a rare commodity in Hrut City. If not for his position as an Aettangr Oarsman, he wouldn’t even have been able to ride such a horse.

Chapter 45: Hrut City

Upon hearing Pikku’s cry of alarm, Olaf, Ulf, and Ilugi, who had been chatting idly, quickly turned their heads to the north. Sure enough, they saw a massive crowd of savages approaching. Their hearts tightened, and their first thought was whether the inland savage tribes had come to seek revenge.

Behind Olaf were over forty people riding tall reindeer, including thirty white slave boys and more than ten short-statured savages. Further back were over two hundred white slaves, with several dozen in the middle carrying the corpses of white wolves.

Olaf had always been the leader among the children in Iceland and Vinland. The youngsters in Hrut City, both Icelandic and otherwise, all looked up to him as their big brother.

The special status of the Icelanders in Vinland meant their children didn’t have to help with daily chores. Recently, more than ten of them had been following Olaf around, going out hunting and training every day, having a grand time.

Among the thirty-plus youths behind Olaf, Ulf, and Ilugi, ten were Icelandic teenagers, over twenty were white slave boys from the three Aettangr, and more than ten short-statured young savage men were the most agile, healthy, and young slaves selected from the savage slaves under Ulf and the others.

The women, very young children, and a few sick or immobile men from the three Aettangr, along with most of the savage slaves, had been left in Hrut City to weave wooden containers, fire pottery, boil salt, gather fruits and vegetables, and dig up edible plant roots.

Those who had come out were the most trusted subordinates of the three Oarsmen. The ten Icelandic youths needed no introduction, and the over twenty white slave boys and more than ten young savage men were all trusted and favored by the three Oarsmen. They were being cultivated with the intention of becoming leaders who could manage slaves independently when they grew up.

These forty youths were short and lightweight, so Ulf had selected several dozen sturdy reindeer from the Inuit slaves in the city to serve as their mounts.

The city had limited cattle and horses, all of which were in use, so they had to temporarily use reindeer as mounts for these youths and short-statured young savages. As long as they didn’t wear armor, these reindeer could carry them for over ten miles. The only drawback was that they could only maintain a run for about a hundred steps before tiring.

The North American reindeer on Vinland Island had an average shoulder height of only one meter one to one meter two and weighed between one hundred thirty to one hundred sixty kilograms. The largest ones were only one meter three tall and weighed two hundred kilograms, smaller than the short-statured Mongolian horses, and about the same size as the hybrid native horses commonly found in the Ming Dynasty, Korea, and Yunnan at the time, though they were much lighter.

They were absolutely unsuitable as cavalry mounts, but they posed no problem for youths and shorter, lighter individuals to ride. They were an emergency substitute for mounts in Hrut City at the moment.

Olaf looked carefully ahead and saw that the group of savages was led by two white men on horseback, who appeared to be his father, Haldor, and his uncle, Hrutik. Behind them was a long line of Viking militia.

“It’s Dad! City Lord Haldor has returned with savage captives!”

Ulf also saw the situation ahead and laughed heartily before riding forward to greet them.

Olaf quickly led his people to follow. After the father and son reunion, they chatted warmly before merging into one group and returning to Hrut City.

Hrut City was located northeast of what would later be known as Trepassey Harbor. The terrain here wasn’t very high, and the overall landscape was flat, with numerous hills, small mountains, and ponds visible everywhere. Due to years of development by Haig, unlike the pools around Razor Mountain, which had long been filled in, the city had taken shape after hundreds of people had worked diligently from last year until now.

Haldor led over two thousand Beothuk and over two hundred Inuit back to Hrut City. From afar, they could see the stone and earth walls in the north, standing as tall as a person, and behind them, the castle of Haldor.

The Beothuk and Inuit slaves, under the leadership of white slaves and Icelanders, transported stones and soil to build the walls. Entering the city, they could see white slaves and savage slaves constructing houses, digging and repairing drainage channels, and over a dozen white slaves busy digging wells. The scene was bustling with hundreds of people, none of whom were idle.

“Very good.”

Haldor looked at the three rows of sturdy longhouses built around his castle, the neat houses, and clean streets, and nodded with a smile. He was clearly satisfied with Hoskuld and Jot’s management of Hrut City during his absence.

The urban layout of Hrut City was now taking shape. As the core figures in Vinland, most Icelanders and some white slaves lived around the castle, with the outer areas housing other white slaves.

Between Haig Fortress and Hrut City, in the low-lying area, there were hundreds of houses where most of the savage slaves lived. They were still cutting timber and building wooden houses every day to prepare for the arrival of thousands of savages.

Due to the extensive construction, the trees around Hrut City had nearly disappeared, forcing the slaves to venture deep into the Avalon Forest to the north for timber. It seemed it would take more than ten years to restore the greenery.

Among the natives, some belonged to the seven Oarsmen, and some were savage slaves owned by white slaves and Icelandic families. These savages were the private property of the chiefs, freemen, and even white slaves, living either in their masters’ homes or in small huts built next to their masters’ houses.

The current Hrut City, with a population of several thousand, already had the beginnings of a city. With a little more construction, it would become a brand-new city.

Olaf, Ulf, and the others saw Hrut City improving and expanding every day, so they didn’t notice the changes much. But for Haldor, Hrutik, and the Viking militia who hadn’t seen it for over two months, their second hometown, Hrut City, had truly become more magnificent and grand.

As Haldor and his group entered Hrut City, Hoskuld and the five Oarsmen in the city, along with several managers, came out to greet them.

The scene became lively as everyone met. Haldor was very pleased and first called Blackstone and Olos to his side. After introducing them to everyone, he pulled Hoskuld and Jot aside and said, “Olos and Blackstone can assist you in managing the over five thousand people from Great Waterfall City. I see you’ve already arranged for the over two thousand elderly, women, and children who arrived earlier to build houses. These over two thousand strong men and warriors need to be managed properly. You go and settle them first, and we’ll talk and drink in my castle tonight.”

Hoskuld and Jot had developed a good understanding after more than two months of working together. They glanced at Olos and Blackstone, who wore humble smiles, then nodded and led the two men to the warrior troops behind Haldor. They first learned about the composition and various situations before making temporary group arrangements.

Originally, the houses in the savage slave residential area on the west side of Hrut City could only accommodate less than two thousand people. Over a month, several dozen shorter longhouses had been built, which could now house over four thousand people.

But now, the savages from Great Waterfall City alone numbered over five thousand one hundred, and with the original five hundred plus, there wasn’t enough room.

However, they couldn’t let these laborers and slaves sleep outdoors. Jot and Hoskuld remembered that Haig Fortress now only had over a dozen Icelandic families living there, so it would be a good place to settle them.

After obtaining Haldor’s consent, the over five thousand savage slaves were divided into one thousand three hundred households. One-third of these households were randomly selected to move into Haig Fortress, while the remaining two-thirds stayed in the residential area.

Chapter 46: The Formation of a Thousand-Strong Legion

By the time Hoskuld and Jot had settled the savages, it was already late at night. The exhausted savage slaves, after a day of labor, had fallen into a deep sleep.

Haig Fortress was shrouded in silence. The two men arranged for twelve white slave militiamen to keep watch overnight before riding away from the fortress. Soon, they entered the dark and shadowy Hrut City at the foot of the mountain.

The entire city was mostly pitch-black, with only a few households showing faint glimmers of light through their windows. Only the tallest wooden windows of Haldor’s Castle in the center were open, casting an orange glow. Inside, the sound of singing and clinking glasses could still be heard.

“They’re having quite the lively drink,” Hoskuld remarked, swallowing his saliva, clearly craving a drink himself.

“Let’s go. Tonight, we’re all getting drunk. Ever since Ulf and Olaf returned from Europe this year, we haven’t had a moment’s rest. Tonight, we’re going to enjoy ourselves and relax,” Jot said, dismounting and handing the reins to two white slave guards at the castle entrance.

As Jot and Hoskuld entered the castle, they were spotted by Haldor, who rose from his seat with a hearty laugh, embracing them both before pulling them to sit beside him in the two empty seats that had been vacant for over two hours.

“You’re finally here. How did things go? Are they all settled?” Haldor asked, glancing at the self-striking clock in the corner. “It’s already past ten at night.”

“Everything’s been arranged for now,” Jot replied after downing a large cup of beer. He let out a burp and wiped the foam from his mouth before continuing, “But the scale of your victory in this expedition is beyond anything we could have imagined. You’ve swept through all of northern Vinland and brought back over five thousand savage slaves. Hrut City won’t have to worry about labor shortages anymore.”

The leaders around the long table burst into laughter.

Hoskuld also took a drink but saw a different issue. Frowning, he asked, “Haldor, your development plan for us only required a little over a thousand people. Now we have over five thousand extra slaves, most of them Beothuk. I think we need to adjust how we manage Hrut City.”

Hoskuld’s words plunged everyone into thought. Last winter, the habit of drinking and chatting in Haldor’s Castle had blurred the lines between work and life.

Haldor had only been thinking of quickly unifying Vinland, then ruling over the savages and mobilizing the massive workforce to develop Hrut City. But now that he actually had a large number of savage slaves at his disposal, he was at a loss, unsure of what to do next.

Jot smiled and took a sheepskin scroll from his chest, handing it to Haldor. “Haig sent a letter yesterday. He said he’s already raided dozens of tribes in southern Vinland and has pushed deep into the southeastern corner of Bakens Lake. He’s captured a thousand prisoners and plans to wipe out the Beothuk chieftain’s tribe at Bakens Lake.”

“But he’s worried the Beothuk chieftain’s influence is too strong. If his prisoners are swayed by the Bakens tribe during battle and rise up in rebellion, it could be dangerous. He doesn’t want to fail because of his own carelessness, so he’s requesting we send a fleet up the long river in southwestern Vinland. He’ll send white slaves and savage auxiliary troops to escort the prisoners to the midstream to wait.”

“Once the prisoners are sent away, he can concentrate his forces to destroy the strongest Beothuk chieftain—the Bakens Lake tribe—so Hrut City can unify all of Vinland.”

As Jot spoke, Haldor finished reading Haig’s letter. He said gravely, “From what I’ve gathered, the strongest savage tribe on Vinland Island is the Bakens Lake tribe. They’re the leaders of the Beothuk alliance, with seven or eight thousand people, and their main tribe has over a thousand warriors. They’re very powerful.”

“Haig wants to conquer the Bakens Lake tribe on his own, but it’ll be difficult. I think I should take the Viking militia and some White Wolf Warriors to support him.”

The others followed Haldor’s lead, discussing the matter. Most agreed on conquering the Bakens Lake tribe, and they unanimously decided to reorganize the expeditionary force to provide support.

The seven oarsmen also sent some brave and strong white slaves and savage slaves to contribute to Hrut City’s final conquest.

After settling on the next strategic direction for Hrut City, the group drank merrily until midnight before dispersing.

Olaf went to rest after the serious discussions.

The next morning, Haldor sent a messenger to Haig, urging him to hold off on his offensive until Haldor himself arrived with reinforcements to jointly attack the Bakens Lake tribe.

After breakfast, Haldor and Hrutik began gathering the Viking militia, the Aettangr oarsmen, and the captains. They then brought out the firearms that had been stored in the castle the day before, preparing to take stock of the numbers.

Following the strategy decided the previous night, they formed a core force of eight hundred, consisting of Viking militia and auxiliary troops, with five hundred White Wolf Warriors and elite warriors as the flanks. Combined with Haig’s two hundred men, they would have a thousand-strong army.

With a thousand-strong army, advanced weapons, and high morale from constant victories, they were certain to crush the Beothuk chieftain in one fell swoop, laying a solid foundation for ruling Vinland.

With the full cooperation of the various leaders, the eight-hundred-strong force was assembled before noon. Haldor and Hrutik then led the troops into the northern wetlands for training exercises.

The purpose of this training was primarily to drill commands and coordination. Haldor didn’t demand much else—he only wanted the savage warriors to understand orders, recognize flag signals, and obey commands. The three hundred white troops were already well-coordinated, so as long as the two forces could work together, they would be ready for the expedition.

Hrutik, a seasoned mercenary leader, proved his worth in training. In just two days, the eight-hundred-strong force, composed of two entirely different groups, began to take shape.

Five days later, after another training session, Haldor and Hrutik were satisfied. The next morning, they led the legion by ship away from Hrut City and Turning Point, sailing along the southern coast of Vinland Island toward the west. By that afternoon, they had reached the lower reaches of the long river in the west.

On November 3rd, after resting for a night, the ships began sailing upstream. After traveling about ten nautical miles, the river narrowed. Some white slaves disembarked to pull the ships through a bend near a waterfall, where they docked.

Haldor sent scouts on horseback to explore the surroundings and see if they could find Haig’s men.

After waiting over three hours, just as the army was about to eat lunch, the scouts returned with one of Haig’s white slave guards.

“My lord is camped with the militia not far to the north,” the white slave soldier reported concisely to Haldor.

Haldor asked, “Did Haig receive my letter?”

“He received it three days ago.”

Haldor pressed further, “Why hasn’t Haig come to see me?”

“My lord asked me to inform you first. He will come personally later with over a thousand savage slaves.”

Haldor nodded and dismissed the white slave soldier with a wave.

By the time the afternoon sun was setting, Haig and Kadir arrived with over a thousand people. Haldor invited the two onto the ship to talk, then gathered detailed information about the Bakens Lake tribe from Haig and finalized their battle plan.

Immediately after, Haldor led the eight hundred troops ashore to assemble. Haig then ordered the three savage slave leaders he had appointed to board the ships with the slaves. Several Icelandic musketeers and white slave spearmen also boarded, serving as the military escort for the prisoners.

Because Haig had ruthlessly slaughtered chieftains, priests, and any warriors who dared to resist along the way, the twelve hundred savage prisoners feared him deeply. Now, a single soldier with a firelock musket could keep a thousand of them in line without so much as a breath of defiance. When Haig was angry, even the children and women among the savage slaves would tremble in fear, and the men would turn pale.

Thus, six soldiers and three newly promoted savage leaders were enough to turn over a thousand savage slaves into docile sheep, obediently boarding the ships.

Often, this is how it goes—when people are afraid, they lose the will to resist, even if they have the strength to do so.

Chapter 47: The Frenchman’s Movements

Due to the increasing population of Hrut City, the mixed-rigged schooners remained at Oxhorn Peninsula, fishing daily to supplement the city’s dwindling food supply with their abundant catches. This time, the fleet consisted of only five ships.

To accommodate more people, the three armed merchant ships had even unloaded their smallest nine-pound cannons, which Hrutik had ordered to be transported by ox carts, preparing to use them to breach the walls of the Bakens Lake tribe during the attack.

After the five large ships departed, Haldor sighed deeply, looking at Haig with admiration before turning to Hrutik and Kadir beside him. “In Haig’s presence, even the strongest savage warriors seem like mice. I think his iron-fisted approach to dealing with the savages is more effective than my gentle methods.”

Haldor, Haig, Hrutik, and Kadir led a thousand-strong army northward along the midstream banks of the Triumph River. As night approached, they arrived at Haig’s previous temporary camp.

Pointing north into the darkness, Haig said, “I’ve already sent scouts. About two hundred and fifty miles further north lies Bakens Lake. The Beothuk’s main allied tribe is located at the northeastern corner of the long lake.”

“From my observations over the past two days, they seem to have noticed our strategic intentions. Now, all the tribes around the long lake are gathering and relocating there. Many strong warriors have also been transferred to the long lake tribe. I estimate the population there has now reached four thousand.”

Hrutik sneered, “Ignorant savages. They must have heard from the northern and southern tribes we’ve destroyed that we’re planning to eliminate all savage tribes. They’re trying to gather all their alliance members to resist us. What fools. Even if they can temporarily support five or six thousand people with the lake’s resources, once it gets colder and the lake freezes, these savages will have to scatter to survive. Even if we don’t attack them, the long lake tribe will be drained by the excessive number of alliance members joining them. Many will likely freeze or starve to death this winter.”

The three men realized he was right. Kadir laughed heartily, “Perhaps they’ve learned from the refugees of other tribes about our strength. To resist us, they’ve had to make sacrifices.”

Haldor snorted, scratching his itchy scalp. “If we didn’t have enough strength, we’d have to let them go this year. But now that these savages are gathered at the long lake, it’s the perfect opportunity to defeat and enslave them all at once. We have long guns, cannons, plate armor, and the finest soldiers on Vinland Island. Even against ten thousand savage warriors, we can still win.”

Haldor’s resolute words strengthened the resolve of the other three. The next morning, after breakfast, the thousand-strong army packed up and left the crude camp, led by the white slave scouts trained by Haig, slowly approaching the northern long lake.

Four days later, Haldor led the army past the southern lake group, still called the Small Long Lake, and reached the southern shore of the long lake, where they established a camp.

The long lake was shaped like an upper crescent moon. Haldor’s camp was built on the inner side of the southern crescent. Further south was an irregular long, narrow small lake. Standing on the shore, one could clearly see the faint outline of villages on the distant northeastern shore—that was the location of the long lake tribe.

As they approached the long lake, large and small tribes came into view. Some were old villages, others clearly newly built wooden houses. Along the way, five hundred savage warriors had conquered all these tribes. This time, there was no mass slaughter. Instead, after ordering the tribal leaders to pledge loyalty to Haldor, the “Heavenly God,” they plundered their food supplies and led the tribal leaders as slaves, following the auxiliary troops.

Now, as they were about to attack the long lake tribe, it was inconvenient to bring too many savage slaves. Haldor planned to let these tribal leaders witness firsthand how powerful the Heavenly God’s army was and how their overlord was destroyed, thereby making them completely submit.

Although Haldor’s army far outnumbered the savages of various tribes, some savages still took the opportunity to escape, which led to the Bakens Lake tribe learning of Haldor’s army’s movements and location.

Thus, that evening, a small group of savage warriors, led by two White Wolf Warriors, approached Haldor’s army’s camp, both to scout and to harass.

The night watch at Haldor’s camp consisted of savage warriors, as well as Icelandic and white slave militia. The enemy was discovered as soon as they approached. Several White Wolf Warriors first reported to two Icelandic musketeer lords, then quietly went into hiding.

After a while, the group of savage warriors tried to sneak into the camp to kill a few people but were ambushed by the hidden White Wolf Warriors, who killed two of them. Then, several gunshots rang out, and the battle ended.

Among the Bakens Lake tribe’s warriors, the leading White Wolf Warrior was shot dead by the Icelandic musketeers, and the other was killed in the encirclement. The remaining warriors, realizing that the eastern white men truly possessed heavenly fire and thunder, instantly knelt down and begged for mercy.

Half an hour later, Hrutik interrogated several captured warriors in a large tent made of beast hides and wood, then went to find Haldor.

“Haldor, those warriors from the long lake tribe have confessed. Their tribe now has five thousand people, including over three thousand men and warriors. More importantly, their High Priest seems to have contacted the French across the strait, asking for their help. It’s said that a group of French musketeers will arrive tomorrow.”

Hrutik brought bad news, which instantly jolted Haldor from his daze. He then summoned Haig and Kadir, and the two discussed the matter for half a day after hearing the news.

Haldor quickly composed himself and looked at Haig, asking, “You’ve dealt with Quebec more. Do you think the French will help the Beothuk?”

“It’s probably true. Four months ago, Quebec’s fleet didn’t receive our furs, and their captain was very angry. I think this time, Champlain of Quebec is deliberately sending people to support the Beothuk. From what I know of Champlain, although his intention is to cause trouble for us, his real purpose is to mediate the conflicts in Vinland. After all, a unified Vinland Island doesn’t align with French interests.”

After deep thought, Haig slowly shared his thoughts. Everyone fell into contemplation. After a long while, Kadir asked, “Haig, how many people do the French have in Quebec?”

Haig thought for a moment and said, “Less than four hundred. Quebec City seems to have only over eighty white people and four hundred Indian slaves. The rest are scattered in various outposts, some traveling by ship between America and Europe.”

“Not many. We don’t need to fear them.”

Kadir’s eyes gleamed as he said, “America is a treasure trove now, with countless slaves and resources, vast lands, and endless timber, furs, and fish. We, the French, and the British are actually competitors. As British and French immigrants increase, we will inevitably go to war with them.”

“I think it’s better to take advantage of our current strength and their weakness to defeat them, making the British and French know that we Icelanders are not to be trifled with.”

Chapter 48: The French Motive

Kadir and Haig were fearless men, and even knowing the French were involved did not intimidate them.

Haig pondered the situation in the North American colonies and laughed heartily. “Over the past two years, the number of English, Scottish, and Irish immigrants in New England has been growing—now there must be five or six thousand. Though their struggles with the Indians have tied up their strength, the British have already seized the two French outposts on the southeastern coast. I’ve heard from English fishermen that the British colonial companies are even preparing to attack Quebec City and drive the French out. Heh, this is the perfect time for us to strike against the French!”

Haldor considered this and agreed it was time to demonstrate their military might.

“Good. Tomorrow, we begin our assault on the Bakens Lake tribe. If we encounter any French, we’ll defeat and capture them as well.”

Compared to Haig’s earlier experiences in Vinland, the British and French colonists had suffered far worse.

Haig, having been warned by Olaf about the importance of colonial rule, had brought white slaves and a small number of Icelanders to Vinland. He avoided the heartland of the Beothuk and instead established a camp on the southeastern peninsula. There, he relied on capturing savages to increase his labor force, while the Newfoundland fishing grounds and the peninsula’s wetlands and forests provided ample food, sparing him the famines that plagued the French and British colonists on the eastern coast.

Additionally, because he was far from the tribal lands of the savage alliance, Haig had never been attacked by the larger Beothuk tribes, giving him a significant advantage over the New England colonists on the eastern coast.

Though the French colonists had a good relationship with the Huron savages—even forming an alliance—the savages on the mainland had their own deadly rivalries. The most powerful Iroquois alliance on the eastern coast had become bitter enemies with the French, constantly attacking their colonies.

From the early seventeenth century until 1628, the death rate in British and French colonies had been as high as one-third. While some died from disease, most were killed by savages or starved to death due to warfare and sieges. In contrast, Haig’s colony had a death rate of just over one-tenth before stabilizing. Once the number of savage slaves increased, the death rate rose again, but the white population remained largely intact.

Before the end of the Thirty Years’ War in Europe, France and Britain had neither the will nor the resources to heavily invest in their North American colonies. Even decades later, when they had the means, they were reluctant to waste resources there. Their methods of developing North America remained backward, relying on colonial companies and self-sufficient development by criminals and landless whites.

Compared to France’s colonies in Central and South America and Britain’s in India, North America had always been the neglected stepchild. The seeds of its future independence were already being sown.

The next morning, after breakfast, Haldor, Haig, Hrutik, and Kadir—four chieftains—led a thousand-strong army of Viking militia and savage warriors out of their camp, marching north.

They advanced rapidly, ignoring any savage tribes they encountered. By afternoon, they reached the northeastern shore of Bakens Lake, where they saw the stone-built temple fortress of the Bakens Lake tribe two miles away.

The Bakens Lake tribe was the most powerful native force on the island of Vinland, controlling hundreds of square kilometers of land and a population of nearly ten thousand. Their main warrior force numbered seventeen to eighteen hundred, with over three hundred White Wolf Warriors—making them nearly invincible. Yet now, as Haldor’s army approached, the tribe withdrew into their city. The High Priest and a white officer spoke urgently.

This white officer was the guard captain of the New France Colony, a close comrade of Governor Champlain, and a distant nephew of the Prince of Condé—Francis de Bourbon.

Though Francis was a member of the Bourbon family, his lineage was distant. His grandfather had been the youngest son of the first prince, leaving him with only a small estate. Still, the men of the Bourbon family sought glory on the battlefield. The current Prince of Condé, Henry II, had appointed Champlain to govern New France in his stead and sent Francis as his deputy to assist in managing the mid- and low-ranking officers.

That summer, British merchants, seeking to monopolize the fur trade in Quebec, had repeatedly raided French outposts. They used armed merchant ships and armed white slaves to blockade French ports, cutting off food supplies to Quebec City in hopes of forcing Champlain to negotiate—or even surrender the city.

Quebec City was built on the middle reaches of the Saint Lawrence River, where the river began to widen. With its rich waterways and connections, the French had forged deep alliances with the Huron. However, since Quebec City was primarily a fur trade outpost, it produced little food and relied entirely on supplies from coastal settlements.

In August, Champlain had sent Francis with two hundred guards to Gaspe Peninsula at the southern end of the river’s mouth to ensure the Huron and French fishermen could supply Quebec with food.

By October, the Beothuk alliance on Vinland (known to the French as Newfoundland) had sent a priest across the Belle Isle Strait to the French at Red Bay, a Basque whaling station, requesting support.

For years, the Icelanders on Vinland had been docile, and Champlain and Francis had been content to have an Icelandic colony there, maintaining peaceful relations.

But that summer, the British had targeted New France. The Icelanders, now led by Haldor in a city renamed Hrut City, were no longer submissive. They refused to sell furs to the French and had begun a campaign of conquest and enslavement across the island.

This alarmed Champlain, who sent Francis with an army to Vinland to repel the Icelanders and teach them a lesson. Then, they would seek an alliance to preserve New France’s position amid threats from the British and the Iroquois.

The Beothuk on the southern islands of the Belle Isle Strait had long traded with the French.

The northern Red Bay Basque whaling station, established over a century ago by the Basques, was the second group after the Icelandic Vikings to settle in North America. The French Basques fished and hunted whales there, drying cod to sell in Europe for vast profits.

Later, the British discovered the rich fishing grounds of Newfoundland, and each year, over a hundred fishing ships competed there. Though the fishing grounds remained abundant, the docking and drying stations were strained. Still, the catch was unaffected.

Now, the Red Bay Basque whaling station had been taken over by the “Champlain-Gon Company,” a merged colonial enterprise that produced dried cod and traded furs.

After receiving Champlain’s orders, Francis led 180 musketeers and the priest of the Bakens Lake tribe by ship to Red Bay. There, he recruited five hundred Huron warriors before sailing to the southern shore of Vinland, marching day and night to reach the Bakens Lake tribe.

Chapter 49: The Cannons Roar

Haldor’s army had arrived just two miles from the Long Lake tribal city when Francis had only been there for less than twelve hours. Before he could even get a good night’s sleep, the High Priest had summoned him, urgently requesting Francis to repel the powerful Icelanders.

The Long Lake tribe was unlike other backward tribes. As the leading tribe, they had long established fur trade with the French, and the High Priest and other high-ranking members had witnessed the power of the French firelock muskets.

They had always scoffed at Haldor’s claims of a Heavenly God who wielded heavenly fire and thunder. But after learning of the destruction of Great Waterfall City in the north and many southern tribes, the Long Lake tribe, not wanting to be annihilated by Hrut City, sent someone to invite the French.

They believed only the French whites, who also possessed firelock muskets, could deal with the Icelandic whites on the southeastern peninsula.

“Monsieur Bourbon, please go into battle quickly. The enemy from the southeastern peninsula is already at our doorstep. Our High Priest says that if you can repel the enemy, all the furs on the island will be sold to you in the future.”

Next to Francis was a Beothuk who spoke French. His French wasn’t good, but he tried his best to translate the High Priest’s words for Francis.

“A bunch of Icelanders and white slaves, relying at most on the power of firelock muskets. Today, I will show you savages what the strength of the French Royal Guard is.”

Like other Gallic roosters, Francis exuded an innate arrogance. He never looked directly at the North American savages, even if the one before him was the High Priest who controlled thousands of people.

Mr. Francis coldly spoke and turned to leave the room, then ordered his one hundred and eighty guards to form up and go into battle.

Francis wore half plate armor, a red-tasseled steel helmet, and held a command sword while riding a purebred Arabian horse. He looked exceptionally handsome and towering, appearing like a celestial being in the eyes of the tribal warriors.

The Beothuk warriors had gathered over three thousand men, but Francis had no interest in fighting alongside this ragtag group.

Under the guidance of Francis’ subordinate officers, five hundred Huron warriors formed a square, with forty-five musketeers protected at each of the four corners. This was a simplified version of the Maurice square, and since the Huron warriors had cooperated with Francis many times, they used it quite skillfully. The Beothuk people lacked the martial prowess of the mainland savages and had never trained together, so Francis only planned to let them assist him, acting freely.

Led by Francis, the nearly seven hundred-strong square marched at the front, followed by over three thousand Beothuk warriors. The army marched out of the tribal gates in a grand procession, steadily advancing toward the thousand-strong army visible to the south.

In today’s Europe, battles were still primarily fought with lined-up musket volleys, close combat, and the construction of bastions to occupy strategic points.

If facing any European country’s army, Francis would first defend the city, probe the enemy’s strengths and weaknesses, and then consider whether to engage. But in his eyes, the enemy was just a ragtag group of Icelanders, white slaves, and savages, looking similar to his own troops but without professional training and certainly no match for him.

Francis was confident, so he directly led his troops out of the city to engage, aiming to crush the enemy in one fell swoop and show the Icelanders and Beothuk the might of the French Kingdom and himself, Captain Bourbon.

The Huron and Iroquois had been at war for hundreds of years, and their warriors were fierce and fearless, far stronger than the island’s Beothuk. The French musketeers also had strong discipline and combat will, able to stand firm during lined-up musket volleys, not retreating or fearing even if their comrades were shot down beside them.

If following the normal lined-up musket volley battle method, the quality of Haldor’s musketeers and long spearmen indeed couldn’t match Francis’ troops. Perhaps after just three volleys, the Viking militia would crumble and ultimately lose the battle.

But the cautious Haldor also brought twelve nine-pound cannons.

Initially, Haldor was also leading his army north, but upon seeing a large square emerge from the enemy’s gates, with a similar number of troops to his own, Haldor realized it was a square formed by French soldiers and savage warriors, with even more savage warriors behind it. Haldor’s heart trembled, knowing he was about to face a tough battle.

With a swing of his large axe, Haldor shouted, “Halt!”

After the command was relayed layer by layer, the Viking militia stopped advancing. Hrutik raised an eyebrow and pointed ahead, saying, “Should we use the cannons?”

Haldor nodded and said, “Although our soldiers are all wearing plate armor, the enemy also has French musketeers, and their numbers are not less than ours. If we really fight, we are very likely to be at a disadvantage. It’s better to use cannons to disrupt their formation before attacking.”

Both Haldor and Hrutik had experienced the great war between Denmark and Sweden in their youth and had witnessed the power of cannons on the battlefield. Although cannons were mainly used for defending and attacking cities, some light cannons were also used in field battles. However, due to their inconvenience to carry and their impact on the speed of attack and retreat, the number of cannons deployed on European battlefields was much less than in the future.

In fact, Haldor and Hrutik didn’t know that a few years later, the North European lion Gustavus Adolphus II would improve cannons and form an artillery unit that would shine in the Thirty Years’ War, repeatedly defeating the German army, and only then would various countries belatedly develop field cannons and artillery units.

Hrutik had a stronger military acumen than Haldor. He pulled Haldor’s hand and reminded him, “Don’t rush. We don’t have professional artillerymen. The current white slave artillerymen are still my newly trained students, and their accuracy is very poor. Let the enemy come closer before letting the artillerymen act, then we can take advantage of the chaos to fire our muskets and kill the enemy soldiers, and finally charge forward.”

Haldor sighed, “Yes, I almost forgot that our artillerymen are still rookies. You should go to the rear to guide them.”

Hrutik nodded and turned his horse to go to the rear of the square, where five carriages were pulling eighteen nine-pound cannons.

The nine-pound cannon was the smallest type of cannon, weighing only a little over two hundred pounds, with a range of only four hundred to six hundred meters. Its power was truly unimpressive, and whether for attacking cities or naval battles, it was barely better than nothing.

But even with nine-pound cannons, if fired in concentration to form a barrage, they could still cause great harm to soldiers. Hrutik went to the rear and ordered the white slave soldiers to unload the eighteen cannons, set them up, and adjust the cannon mouths.

To make the cannons strike the enemy as close as possible, Hrutik adjusted the cannon angles to thirty-five degrees toward the sky and then personally checked each one before calling the newly trained artillerymen to the cannons to explain the key points of use again.

Because there was a square of a thousand soldiers blocking the front, Francis and his army couldn’t see the two rows of eighteen cannons behind Haldor’s Viking militia square.

“The enemy has stopped and is waiting for us to attack. This is a sign of cowardice. Soldiers, follow me and accelerate. Musketeers, get ready.”

Francis narrowed his eyes, watching the Viking militia square in the distance become clearer as the distance shrank, and the tall and burly figures of Haldor, Haig, and Kadir riding horses on the right side of the square. He also saw clearly that the enemy’s mounted leaders and hundreds or thousands of soldiers were all wearing full plate armor. This made Francis’ heart tremble, and he sneered.

“Good heavens, these Icelanders are so rich. No wonder they can flatten half of Newfoundland. It turns out they have plate armor. Savages really can’t do anything about plate armor. But in the face of muskets, plate armor has lost its absolute defensive glory. Watch my French muskets break your plate armor.”

Francis coldly hummed, calculating the distance between the two armies. Feeling it was already three hundred paces, he gripped the command sword in his hand, preparing to give the order to fire after getting fifty paces closer.

He was very confident in the skills of his French musketeers and the muskets produced by the kingdom. Past experience showed a 30% hit rate when firing within three hundred paces, a 40% hit rate at two hundred and eighty paces, and a 50% hit rate at two hundred and fifty paces.

Francis had already imagined that a few seconds later, at his command, as the gunfire sounded and smoke rose, the ragtag enemy would fall like wheat being cut down, then scatter like rats, completely routed.

Two hundred and ninety paces.

Two hundred and eighty paces.

Two hundred and seventy paces.

Francis slowly took a deep breath, ready to shout “Fire” at any moment. But suddenly, he saw the tall leader riding a yellow-maned horse in front swing his large axe violently, and he felt puzzled. He didn’t believe that the Icelandic musketeers and muskets were better than the French, so he thought they were scared and couldn’t help but fire early.

“You can fire first. When your bullets are spent, it will be the time for us to harvest your lives.” Francis’ mouth curled up, and he couldn’t help but almost laugh.

“Bang bang.”

Francis suddenly felt the ground tremble slightly, then heard the familiar and loud sound of cannon fire.

His eyes widened, clearly seeing clouds of smoke rise from behind the Icelandic soldier square, followed by many iron ball cannonballs flying into the sky and rapidly falling towards them.

“Damn cannons!”

Chapter 50: Victory

When the two armies were two hundred and seventy paces apart, Francis saw the enemy’s cannons hidden behind their square formation fire, and heard the thunderous roar of the cannon blast. In that instant, he had no time to think—he instinctively rolled off his horse, only managing to shout, “Damn those cannons!”

Then, eighteen iron balls, each the size of a palm, whistled through the air and slammed into the square formation of French musketeers and Huron warriors.

A nine-pound cannon meant its bore could fire a nine-pound iron ball—about four kilograms in later times. Though not large, the kinetic energy propelled by gunpowder was formidable; in naval battles, it could still punch holes in ships.

Eighteen cannons fired simultaneously, and the iron balls, carrying the scent of gunpowder, crashed into the formation. Since Francis’s troops stood only about one and a half meters apart, the formation was relatively tight. Of the eighteen cannonballs, only one missed—seventeen iron balls instantly tore through the unprepared French soldiers and Huron warriors, shattering skulls or piercing bodies. After killing one man, the iron balls, undiminished in force, changed direction and killed two more before hitting the ground.

A single volley of cannon fire killed thirty-eight men—thirteen French musketeers and twenty-five Huron warriors.

Nearly twenty men had been killed by falling iron balls before they could even close in. Seeing the mangled bodies of their comrades and the French musketeers, the Huron warriors felt a pang of fear. Francis stood up and shouted, “Cannons don’t fire quickly! Hurry and advance! Shoot and kill the enemy! Huron warriors, charge!”

Francis’s command rallied the well-trained French soldiers, who quickly regrouped the Huron warriors. The now-deformed square formation surged forward, while the French musketeers raised their firelock muskets, aiming at the enemy ahead, waiting for Francis’s order to fire.

Francis abandoned his horse and marched on foot. When the distance closed to two hundred and fifty paces, he ordered the attack. The French musketeers halted and fired, and as expected, dozens of enemies fell. Then, methodically, the musketeers reloaded while marching, with the Huron warriors charging ahead to shield them.

Haldor, Haig, Hrutik, and Kadir, riding to the rear of the formation, saw the Beothuk warriors at the front—protected by the leather armor Haldor had bestowed—fall to the French muskets, around thirty of them. Though the leather armor offered some protection, a musket shot could still inflict heavy casualties.

The Beothuk feared the muskets. Seeing their comrades drop instantly, they grew uneasy.

Sensing the formation wavering, Haldor and the others quickly dispersed to different positions to maintain discipline, ordering the Viking militia to hold their ground. The presence of the four leaders and the Heavenly God steadied the Beothuk warriors.

Hrutik, in command, calculated the distance between the two forces. Waving his military banner, he shouted, “Beothuk warriors and long spearmen, flank and charge! Musketeers, prepare to fire—one, two, three—fire!”

At his command, the musketeers, already positioned and aimed, ignited their fuses. A thunderous explosion followed—not as deafening as the cannons, but concentrated and chaotic.

The Icelandic musketeers fired when the distance had closed to two hundred paces—a range Hrutik had deliberately chosen to improve their accuracy.

The Viking militia’s formation was not as disciplined as the French soldiers, but the French were few, mostly Huron warriors. The overall quality of both sides was similar.

Hrutik and Haldor knew that such troops would struggle to maintain formation during a charge—likely scattering within two hundred paces. To preserve the Viking militia’s formation, they ordered them to wait for the enemy’s charge, then counterattack after the French fired.

Sixty Icelandic musketeers and twenty white slave musketeers fired simultaneously. At two hundred paces, the Viking musketeers’ accuracy improved dramatically, and dozens of Huron warriors fell instantly—roughly forty or fifty.

The enemy’s already disorganized ranks collapsed entirely after losing a tenth of their numbers. Most Huron warriors scattered, charging forward to close the distance before the next volley, hoping to engage the Viking militia in melee combat where their strength lay. A few, however, were too terrified—their steps faltered, ready to flee at any moment.

At two hundred paces, infantry could only manage two more volleys before closing. The musketeers reloaded swiftly, while the white slave long spearmen and the armed Beothuk warriors charged forward.

The Huron and Beothuk warriors clashed violently, both wielding iron swords and long spears gifted by their white masters, unleashing fierce combat. The battlefield echoed with war cries, and every moment, a warrior fell.

The white slave long spearmen followed closely, their spears thrusting in unison, killing any Huron warrior who tried to break through.

The Huron had only five hundred warriors. After losing seventy or eighty to cannons and muskets, only about three hundred brave souls remained. Though they held their own against the four hundred Beothuk warriors—each Huron taking a Beothuk with them—the arrival of the white slave long spearmen quickly turned the tide.

The well-coordinated long spearmen became a meat grinder, slaughtering any Huron who approached. Even if a Huron warrior managed to reach them, their weapons could not penetrate the plate armor of the long spearmen. Instead, they were instantly skewered by spears from all directions.

Half the Huron warriors were soon killed. As the survivors prepared to flee, the three thousand warriors of the Long Lake tribe arrived.

Francis was about to order the French musketeers to fire in support when Haldor, Haig, Hrutik, and Kadir—four riders—charged like a small cavalry unit, wielding long spears and large axes, cutting through the Long Lake warriors.

The Long Lake warriors had never seen cavalry before. The sound of hooves and the sight of the four charging riders filled them with terror, and they tried to turn and flee.

But Haldor and his companions were faster. In the blink of an eye, they were upon the Long Lake warriors, bending low to swing their weapons—large axes, long spears, and long knives easily killing seven or eight leading White Wolf Warriors.

Before their charge, the four had ordered the musketeers to flank and attack the Long Lake Beothuk warriors, while the artillerymen fired at the rear French musketeers and the Long Lake warriors behind them.

With another swing, Haldor cleaved a White Wolf Warrior in two. Then, he heard the thunderous roar of cannons behind him.

From his tall frame atop his horse, he saw the French soldiers preparing to fire all drop to the ground. Still, two cannonballs struck two unlucky souls who reacted too slowly, while over twenty Long Lake warriors were killed in the rear.

“Hah! Excellent!”

Haldor, Haig, Hrutik, and Kadir were all towering, powerful warriors with formidable martial skills. Riding together, they formed a small cavalry unit, moving like the wind through the Long Lake warriors, reaping lives and striking fear into their hearts. The Long Lake warriors shrank back, shouting something. Haig, who understood some Beothuk, laughed and said, “They say we are the incarnations of the god of death.”

“Hah!”

Kadir laughed heartily. Hrutik’s scarred eye twitched, and Haldor declared loudly, “Today, let’s show these fools the scythe of the god of death!”

After the eighteen cannons fired, eighty musketeers opened fire almost simultaneously, and another swath of Long Lake warriors fell like cut wheat.

The leading White Wolf Warriors and war priests of the Long Lake tribe were nearly wiped out. Seeing Haldor and his companions’ unstoppable might, and the devastating power of the cannons and muskets, the remaining warriors lost all will to fight.

Blackstone, leading a small squad to slaughter the remaining Huron warriors, saw the Long Lake warriors—who had initially attacked them—suddenly retreat. He shouted, “The Heavenly God has descended! His might is unstoppable! Ignorant fools of Long Lake, kneel and beg for mercy! Those who kneel and surrender may be spared! Those who resist will have their souls tormented forever!”

As Blackstone spoke, the Beothuk warriors of Hrut City repeated his words, their voices growing unified and echoing through the sky. Many Long Lake warriors turned pale, kneeling and kowtowing, while others turned and fled toward their stronghold.

Seeing the Long Lake tribe’s army crumble and flee, Haldor laughed heartily. Hrutik first ordered the cannons to fire one last volley, then, seeing the Long Lake warriors in full retreat, raised his arm and shouted, “Charge! Pursue and kill!”

At Hrutik’s command, the Viking militia formed up and advanced slowly, five hundred strong, a high-spirited battalion. The four hundred warriors, however, did not pursue immediately—they gathered prisoners, finished off the wounded, and consolidated their position.

Three volleys from the twelve nine-pound cannons utterly shattered the Long Lake warriors’ morale. Five more French soldiers were struck, and before Francis could react, the fleeing savage horde scattered his formation, even trampling several soldiers to death.

“Damn it!” Francis turned and fled, shouting, “Run! Quickly! Don’t get trampled!”

Chapter 51: Haldor Unites Vinland

The morale of the Long Lake tribe and the Viking army shifted dramatically during the pursuit and rout. The warriors of the Long Lake tribe either surrendered or were killed, and by the time they all fled into the city and closed the gates, only half remained.

The Viking militia had blocked the eastern gate of the Long Lake tribe, while another group of warriors guarded the nearly one thousand captured Long Lake warriors.

The remnants of the French and Long Lake forces, like stray dogs, huddled behind the city gates, gathering in front of the temple with wooden poles, awaiting the High Priest’s orders.

Upon learning of the defeat, the High Priest of the Long Lake tribe saw the remnants of his forces and nearly fainted. He was horrified and incredulous that his three thousand troops, supported by five hundred French soldiers, had been so quickly defeated by the mere thousand-strong army of Hrut City.

Francis was also pale, his expression dazed, his clothes disheveled. He struggled to accept the fact that he had been utterly defeated by the ragtag Icelanders, especially since his side had outnumbered them.

Behind Francis stood fewer than one hundred and thirty French soldiers, their uniforms in disarray, their faces covered in dust, many of them having lost their firearms.

Outside the castle, the Viking militia surrounded the gates. The sound of hooves approached, and the four leaders arrived to observe the low castle walls.

“Naive savages, they think this tiny castle can stop us,” Haig sneered.

“I think we should bombard them with cannons,” Hrutik added.

Raising his whip and pointing at the walls before him, Haldor coldly ordered, “Indeed, what good is hiding inside? Pass the word: keep firing the cannons until they surrender.”

Following Haldor’s command, eighteen cannons were dragged to the front of the city. Hrutik personally adjusted the cannon barrels, and twelve of them were angled at forty-five degrees toward the sky. They were lit simultaneously, firing twelve cannonballs that whistled through the air and landed inside the city. The remaining six cannons targeted the walls and gates.

As the cannonballs rained down, the warriors gathered in front of the temple suffered heavy casualties. Francis quickly pulled the High Priest down, and they both took cover behind the temple.

Boom!

Haldor’s army had brought enough cannonballs and gunpowder. After half an hour of continuous bombardment, the gates were already in ruins, and the warriors inside had scattered to various corners.

Through the gate, it was clear there was little resistance left inside. Haig laughed and, along with Kadir, led a group of long spearmen, musketeers, and White Wolf Warriors into the city.

The Viking militia and warriors then poured into the city, spreading out to loot and burn. Shouts and cries echoed from every corner.

By the time the sun began to set, every member of the Viking army had returned laden with furs, jade, and slaves, gathering in front of the temple.

The White Wolf Warriors and others also returned with captives and looted glass beads, mirrors, swords, and other iron goods, their faces flushed with excitement.

Haldor and Haig ascended the stone steps in front of the temple, while Hrutik and Kadir maintained order within the city.

Soon, Valitu, Lunde, and Blackstone brought the disheveled Francis and the High Priest forward.

Haig sneered, pulling out a firelock musket already loaded with bullets. In front of the six thousand people in the city, he fired a shot that shattered the High Priest’s skull. He then cruelly laughed, “This is the fate of those who defy the gods. Who else dares to resist and refuses to submit to Hrut City?”

Blackstone and the other warriors repeated Haig’s words in the Beothuk language, ensuring everyone in the city heard clearly. All the savages knelt on the ground in terror and pain.

Haldor remained silent, glancing at Francis. He noticed the young Frenchman seemed shaken by the sight of the High Priest’s corpse being shot at close range. “Young man, what is your name?” Haldor asked, his tone calm.

Haldor was in his early forties, speaking to Francis in a gentle tone.

Francis had always considered himself a brave French warrior who sought honor, one who would face death with the dignity of a nobleman and a soldier of the kingdom. But the defeat and the sight of the white-bearded giant shooting the High Priest’s head had left him trembling, his body covered in cold sweat.

When Haldor kindly inquired, the well-educated Francis recognized the giant’s words as a mix of Latin and English with a slight accent. Fortunately, he understood. Unable to maintain his noble French demeanor any longer, he instinctively bowed and replied in English, “Respected sir, I am Francis de Bourbon, an officer of the French Kingdom stationed in New France.”

“Ah, a noble of the Bourbon family,” Haldor’s interest was piqued upon hearing Francis’s surname. After a moment’s thought, he stepped forward and extended his hand. “War is merciless, but in this uncivilized wilderness, we could have been friends, just like my brother Haig and Monsieur Champlain. We could have supported each other. What do you think, Monsieur Bourbon?”

Francis sighed in relief, his goodwill toward Haldor growing. He firmly grasped Haldor’s large hand, looking up at him with a smile. “Yes, before the war, I didn’t know I was fighting a friend of Champlain. Your Hrut City is well-known in New France, and we have a long-standing relationship with the Long Lake tribe, which led to this misunderstanding. I hope you can forgive us.”

“It’s nothing. We can consider this a misunderstanding that brought us together,” Haldor laughed, brushing the dust off Francis’s clothes.

“Sir, you—” Francis blushed, declining.

“I’m sorry,” Haldor turned and said, “Hrutik, we will rest in the city tonight. Arrange a table of food. I want to talk to Monsieur Bourbon and apologize to him.”

Before the war, Francis had not held Haldor and his men in high regard. But after his defeat and capture, his life was at their mercy. The respect and kindness he received from Haldor filled him with immense gratitude.

That evening at the banquet, Haldor and Francis sat side by side, accompanied by Haig, Hrutik, and Kadir.

“Your soldiers have been well taken care of. They have been provided with food and drink. Tomorrow, you can leave Vinland and return to New France,” Haldor said, as if suddenly remembering after the meal.

“Thank you for your generosity,” Francis smiled and nodded. He had changed into a clean and neat uniform, looking entirely different from earlier that afternoon.

During the meal, they engaged in friendly and warm conversation. Francis expressed understanding of Haldor’s conquest of the Long Lake tribe and the unification of Vinland. He also mentioned that upon returning to New France, he would seek Governor Champlain’s approval to establish an equal cooperative relationship between New France and Vinland.

Haldor knew his foundation was weak and could not completely sever ties with the French and British colonizers. However, by flexing his muscles appropriately, he could earn their respect and make them face the reality of his unified Vinland. This would help in gaining respect and importance in future interactions with New France and New England.

Originally, Haldor had planned to capture the French soldiers and have New France pay to ransom them. If they refused, he would enslave them.

But upon learning that Francis was a member of the Bourbon family and the highest-ranking officer in the New France army, second only to Governor Champlain, Haldor changed his approach. He decided to win Francis over and seek New France’s support, or at least their tacit recognition of his sovereignty over Vinland.

From Francis’s demeanor, Haldor could tell he had agreed. The next step would depend on Champlain’s attitude.

Haldor believed he did not want to offend his neighbors, New France and New England. Once they realized Vinland was not to be trifled with, they would likely maintain good relations with him.

Chapter 52: The Establishment of the Viking Raid System (Part 1)

Through their conversation during the meal, Haldor had learned from Francis that several outposts in New France had been raided and even occupied by armed English merchants this year. This indicated that the number of colonists in New England had multiplied in recent years, reaching over two thousand. They believed that with their far greater numbers compared to New France, they could seize more and better territory—a clear sign of ambition swelling.

The English were squeezing New France’s space, and Francis felt they even harbored ambitions of monopolizing North America.

This was not good news for Haldor, but after some thought, he believed that Champlain, who did not want to be annexed or driven out of the North American colonies, would likely accept the olive branch he extended. After all, the weak could only survive by uniting against the strong.

In 1628, there were only four colonial powers in North America. The first was New France, centered around Quebec, with a colonial population of about four to five hundred.

The second was New England, centered around the Massachusetts and Virginia colonies, with a population that grew every year, now exceeding two thousand.

The third was Hrut City, which had unified the large and small tribes on Vinland Island this autumn, becoming the sole leader. This was a colony led by Icelanders, completely independent and free from any governance. Their leader, Haldor, was not a colonist sent by the Danish kingdom. Vinland Island had a population of over ten thousand natives and eight hundred colonists.

The last was the Dutch colony of New Netherland, established less than four years ago in the south of New England. It was the youngest, with the fewest people and the smallest territory, making it the weakest colony.

After eliminating the chief of the Beothuk alliance, Haldor became the ruler of all of Vinland and the overlord of the Beothuk. As the ruler of Vinland, he pondered how to govern it, maintain his rule, and handle relations with his nearest neighbor, New France, the slightly more distant New England, and the farthest neighbor, New Netherland.

Francis de Bourbon’s equal dialogue with the French governor, attempting to establish a “Vinland-France Alliance,” was the first diplomatic move Haldor made after becoming the ruler of Vinland.

The next morning, Francis bid farewell to Haldor and led his French soldiers away from Vinland on small boats.

Haldor waited until Francis was far away before turning back to the city. Looking at the already assembled Viking militia and thousands of Beothuk slaves, he gave a grand wave of his hand and ordered the march.

Haldor and the other three chiefs rode on horseback, followed by nearly a thousand Viking soldiers pulling ox carts loaded with cannons, furs, and jade. Behind them were over three thousand captured warriors.

The Long Lake tribe had over two thousand people, and with the addition of two thousand recruited warriors, they now had nearly five thousand. Haldor considered the limited resources on the southeastern peninsula and was cautious about accepting more captives.

Hrut City now had over six thousand native slaves. Adding another six or seven thousand would bring the total to fourteen thousand.

While it was good for Hrut City to suddenly become a large city of fourteen thousand, winter was approaching, and it would be difficult to support such a large population. Even with the food plundered from various tribes and the Bakens tribe, as well as the food harvested in Hrut City this year and other stored provisions, it would still be tight to feed over ten thousand people through the winter.

To concentrate the able-bodied labor force and have the Long Lake tribe serve as a base for food collection before winter, even supporting Hrut City with some food, and to stabilize the western part of Vinland, Haldor appointed Blackstone as the governor of Bakens City before leaving. Blackstone was responsible for governing the one thousand warriors and two thousand women and children left in Bakens City, as well as the surrounding large and small tribes totaling one to two thousand people, and consolidating control over all the natives in the west.

Haldor gave Blackstone two tasks. The first was to promote the worship of the Heavenly God’s bloodline family of Haldor, turning all natives into faithful followers of Haldor. The second was to gather all natives around Long Lake and vigorously develop agriculture and animal husbandry to provide logistical support for Hrut City.

To ensure Blackstone’s authority, Haldor also left behind two hundred White Wolf Warriors and ten white slave guards equipped with firearms, ordering them to obey Blackstone’s commands.

Amid Blackstone’s tearful expressions of loyalty, Haldor led the army away from Long Lake, heading south along the great river.

Three days later, Haldor’s army reached the river bend in the middle and lower reaches and set up camp to await the arrival of the fleet.

Two days later, the fleet appeared. Haldor divided the Viking militia into five groups. One group, with over eight hundred warrior slaves, boarded the ships. Using eleven days, they made three round trips. Finally, before the winter’s severe cold set in, Haldor, as the last group, returned to Hrut City with one hundred white slave soldiers and over eight hundred warrior slaves.

Upon returning to Hrut City, all five large ships were repurposed as fishing vessels to continue fishing, whale hunting, and sealing to store food for the winter.

At the same time, all ten thousand native slaves in Hrut City were reorganized and integrated into the new system according to the Viking Raid model, becoming the lowest tier of personnel.

Haldor and the chiefs, including Haig, along with the seven Oarsmen, held a special meeting to discuss the management model of Hrut Village.

Olaf’s increasingly mature system, similar to the Eight Banners, known as the “Viking Raid,” was discussed and supplemented with some details before being unanimously approved for implementation.

A few days later, Haldor, as the lord of Hrut City and the general of the Viking Raid, issued orders to reward all personnel based on merit.

The first major reward was granting freedom to all white slave militia and their families. The earliest two batches of Beothuk and Inuit slaves also became free men. Then, all freed people of various tribes enjoyed the same status as the Icelanders, and all free men were collectively called Vikings.

Every Viking owned land, houses, and slaves as private property and was protected by all Vikings, making them members of the “Viking Raid” that ruled Vinland.

However, due to the current scarcity of resources in Vinland, development required centralized allocation. Therefore, the houses given to the Vikings were entirely their personal property. Although the slaves also belonged to them, they had to be unconditionally requisitioned when the Viking Raid needed them. However, food was provided by the Raid General, and compensation was given for any injuries or deaths.

As for the land, the Vikings currently only received a number. Every seven to nine people formed a household, and each household could receive half a virgate of arable land. However, the cultivation and harvest of the land had to be carried out under the unified arrangement and allocation of the Viking Raid, and the harvest would be distributed.

But Haldor also clearly told everyone that in a year or two, when Vinland’s food production stabilized and no one had to go hungry, the land would be entirely managed by individuals. In the future, the Raid General would only collect agricultural taxes in proportion.

The Vikings fully supported Haldor’s orders. Even the Icelanders did not raise any objections. This was because Haldor had been leading them to success since they arrived in Vinland, which invisibly enhanced Haldor’s prestige and leadership aura, making it difficult for people to question his decisions.

If Haldor were to fail once or twice in the future, his leadership aura and authority would gradually fade. However, with the assistance of Hrutik, Jot, Olaf, and others, it was unlikely that Haldor would encounter failure in his struggles against the natives.

Chapter 53: The Establishment of the Viking Raid System (Part 2)

The Viking Raid, as the name suggests, refers to the Viking expeditionary force.

This was a concept Olaf created by drawing inspiration from the later American nation’s fabricated Viking identity, or perhaps by emulating the Manchus. Strictly speaking, the term “Viking” originally referred to Germanic people from the Scandinavian Peninsula and Denmark hundreds of years ago, meaning pirates and maritime adventurers, not a distinct ethnic group.

Of course, the Manchus did not exist before either. The Manchu ethnicity was formed by merging various groups such as the Jurchens, Mongols, Koreans, and some Han Chinese. Genetically, the so-called pure Manchus were merely a branch of the Mongols.

Similarly, the Vikings were a unified identity Olaf created to consolidate the various ethnic groups in Vinland. Icelanders, Scots, English, Danes, Norwegians, Swedes, and even many French and Germans were Germanic peoples, while the Inuit and Indians were of Mongolian descent. The Irish were mostly Celts. At the very least, Vinland currently had three or four distinct ethnic groups, with different cultures, languages, and beliefs. Without the unifying concept of “Vikings,” it would be impossible to integrate them into a single entity.

After Olaf shared his idea with Haldor, the latter pondered for a moment before agreeing to the creation of the “Viking” identity.

Following this major restructuring, the eight hundred white people—comprising Icelanders, Scots, Irish, and English—all became equal free citizens. The original two hundred savage slaves and the later conquered savages who had assisted Haldor’s army in annihilating the Long Lake tribe also became free citizens. In total, there were four hundred families, numbering around a thousand people, with eighty percent being Beothuk and twenty percent Inuit.

By the winter of 1628, Hrut City had a population of twelve thousand. Among them, fewer than two thousand were free citizens with status. These people were divided by skin color into white and yellow, and by language into six groups: Icelandic, Scottish, Irish, English, Inuit, and Beothuk. However, that winter, the lord of Hrut City, the great leader Haldor, announced that all free citizens of Vinland would henceforth be known as Vikings—a unified ethnicity with equal status and rights.

After establishing the Viking identity among the people of Hrut City, nearly nine thousand Beothuk slaves and eight to nine hundred Inuit slaves were distributed by Haldor to all Vikings. The allocation was based on status and military merit. Even the most ordinary former white slave or savage family, upon becoming Vikings, received one male and two female savage slaves. The chiefs and leaders, of course, received even more.

Haldor, Hrutik, Haig, and Kadir each received a thousand slaves.

The Viking Raid system, after adjustments, established a hierarchical management structure. Currently, Vinland was governed under this system, which combined elements of tribal leadership, clans, and slavery.

Olaf was well aware that whether it was the Manchu Eight Banners or the Viking Raid, at their core, they were both slave systems.

This system was indeed backward and primitive, but for the small population of Icelanders, if they wanted to colonize North America with its millions of people, they had no choice but to adopt slavery. By emulating the proven successful Eight Banners system, they could use the Viking Raid to assimilate white slaves, Inuit, Beothuk, Huron, Cree, and other ethnic groups. Ultimately, they aimed to establish a pyramid-shaped nation with Icelanders at the core, white and native elites at the top, without confusing concepts, and unifying the diverse cultures under their rule.

As for how to govern after conquest, that was a matter for later. If they did not implement slavery and instead followed the British colonial model—establishing colonies, continuous immigration, expansion, and displacement of natives—Vinland would quickly perish.

Vinland lacked the foundation and support; it had no backing whatsoever.

The predecessor of the United States was sixteen colonies. The prosperity of these sixteen colonies was due to the backing of the United Kingdom, with a population of over ten million.

What did the leaders of Vinland have behind them? Nothing but their own two hands.

Thus, they had to learn from the successful figure in the Far East who also achieved greatness from small beginnings, emulating the Jurchen method of integrating Jurchens, Han Chinese, Koreans, Mongols, and others into the Manchu identity through a snowballing approach.

Icelanders, white slaves, Beothuk—Vikings.

There were many ways to rule colonies, but Olaf did not want colonization. He wanted to conquer his own land. Therefore, as leaders, the Icelanders had to intertwine with the natives, using systems, culture, religion, and beliefs to infiltrate and ultimately rule the North American continent, while establishing the foundation of their rule.

As for whether the Viking Raid system was suitable, Olaf was unsure. He simply felt that they could not develop colonies like Haig, the British, or the French—it was too slow and inefficient.

If the Viking Raid system proved unsuitable, problems would arise, and adjustments could be made accordingly.

After all, the so-called Viking Raid was merely a product of Olaf’s synthesis of the ancient Viking raiding and colonial system with the Eight Banners and slave systems. Problems were inevitable.

A great man once said, “Crossing the river by feeling the stones.” Olaf felt he was that person crossing the river.

The Viking Raid, meaning “Viking Expeditionary Force,” was divided into five Pasde. Each Pasde consisted of five Mannafylki.

Each Mannafylki governed five Aettangr, and each Aettangr managed two production teams. A production team was composed of four squads.

With each squad having about ten people, a production team had around fifty people, an Aettangr about a hundred, a Mannafylki five hundred, a Pasde two thousand five hundred, and a Raid twelve thousand five hundred.

Currently, Hrut City had only eighteen hundred Vikings, not even enough to form one Pasde. However, Haldor, Haig, Ulf, Olaf, and others were confident that with the increasing number of white slaves from Europe and the growing number of savage slaves, the Viking population would continue to rise. Soon, not only would they fill one Pasde, but even a full Raid would be achievable.

The Viking Raid was the sole political system in Vinland for managing population, production, military, and all other affairs. Currently, Raid General Haldor was the primary leader, with Haig as the Pasde District Chief. Hrutik, Jot, Kadir, and Hoskuld were the four Mannafylki Chieftains. Hrutik’s Mannafylki had the fewest people, only three hundred and fifty, but they were mostly single, robust men, the elite selected from white slaves and Beothuk.

Below the Mannafylki were the Aettangr.

Ulf and Olaf were still Aettangr Oarsmen, but the number of Aettangr had increased to nineteen. Due to their special status, Ulf and Olaf each led two Aettangr.

Among the remaining fifteen Aettangr, Heiner also led two. Hoskuld, having taken on the higher position of Mannafylki Chieftain, handed over his Aettangr to Kalm, making Kalm responsible for two Aettangr as well.

The rest were managed by Kalhu and Ilugi, each overseeing one Aettangr. Newly promoted leaders included Pikku, Olos, Brun, Polly, Valitu, Lunde, Solrak, Nilahu, and Hilt.

The true mid-level leaders holding real power in Hrut City were these fifteen Oarsmen who controlled the nineteen Aettangr. They were all Haldor’s closest friends, juniors, and two loyal savages. One of them was Pikku, an Inuit, who was perfectly suited to lead the Inuit Aettangr.

As for Olos, he was given leadership over a hundred Beothuk free citizens. The rest of the Beothuk free citizens were divided among the various Aettangr.

Note: The Viking Raid system is similar to the Eight Banners, combining production, life, and political-military management. Its structure is as follows: four production squads equal one large squad of 50 people, two production squads form one Aettangr, five Aettangr make one Mannafylki of 500 people, five Mannafylki form one Pasde of 2,500 people, and five Pasde form one Raid of 12,500 people.

Chapter 54: Bountiful Potato Harvest, Impressive Yields

The establishment of the Viking Raid granted Haldor and his followers legitimate authority and unparalleled status. It also made the Viking people, composed of various interest groups, deeply grateful and loyal to their leader, Haldor.

Apart from the Icelanders, a small number of English white slaves, more Scottish white slaves, and the majority of Irish white slaves—whether in their homeland or in Vinland—were the lowest in society, with no status, no dignity, and living hand-to-mouth. Often, even having enough to eat was a luxury.

But now, because their men had followed Lord Haldor in conquering the savages and establishing great merits, they had become freemen with status, wealth, and slaves. They all understood that everything they had gained was built upon Haldor’s Viking Raid and the kindness of their benevolent lord, Haldor.

The Beothuk and Inuit freemen were even more grateful and worshipful of Haldor, their gratitude beyond words.

These freemen had become Vikings. If they had the ability and achieved merits, they too could become production team leaders or even Aettangr Oarsmen. They did not want to lose what they had gained, so they did everything in their power to uphold Haldor’s rule and the correctness and greatness of the Viking Raid system.

After a winter rain, Vinland grew even colder. However, when the Viking militia went on their expedition, the rye, barley, oats, and vegetables had already been harvested, so there was no need to worry about food shortages.

After accounting, Jot discovered that this year’s grain harvest, along with the stored fish and meat, was enough to last until next spring, though they would have to live frugally.

But Jot also noticed that after each Aettangr submitted half of their harvest to the city granary, the remaining grain was carefully rationed among the families, and with some savings, they could make it through the winter.

However, Olaf’s Aettangr was different from the others.

They had submitted a considerable amount of grain and vegetables, which was the required share when the seven Aettangrs were established. The rest was only enough to feed over a hundred people for a little more than two months, less than the other Aettangrs.

But Jot noticed that the people of Olaf’s Aettangr were all smiling. Upon closer inspection, he found that they had received many potatoes and sweet potatoes. During the summer, Olaf had been heavily promoting the cultivation of potatoes and sweet potatoes. At the time, Jot and others knew about it but did not know the yield of these two crops, so they dismissed it as child’s play.

But in just over three months, the nearly five acres of land Olaf had cultivated along both sides of the Muskox River for sweet potatoes and potatoes had yielded a bountiful harvest. These harvests did not need to be submitted, so Olaf distributed one-third to the eighty or ninety elders and earliest followers of the Aettangr, and then one-tenth of the remaining harvest to the more than a hundred new members.

After the distribution, the fewer members of Olaf’s two Aettangrs each received dozens of pounds of potatoes and sweet potatoes, while the elders received over two hundred pounds. This food was enough to sustain these families through the winter, leaving them very satisfied. After thanking Olaf, they took their shares home.

When Jot asked Olaf about it, he learned that the five acres of land had yielded over forty thousand pounds of potatoes and thirty thousand pounds of sweet potatoes. Although they had high water content, when sliced and dried, they should yield over twenty thousand pounds. This was enough to feed forty or fifty people for a year.

Currently, Hrut City had only a little over five thousand acres of cultivated land, but the grain could barely support two thousand people. Yet, Olaf’s five acres of potatoes and sweet potatoes could feed forty people.

Jot was stunned after a simple calculation. His scalp tingled, and his heart raced. He thought: If all this land is planted with potatoes and sweet potatoes, we won’t have to worry about famine in Vinland.

Five thousand acres could support forty to fifty thousand people. With the addition of fish, meat, and vegetables, if managed properly, increasing the population by tens of thousands next year would be feasible. Moreover, the land and climate in southern Vinland were good. What was there to fear about not having enough food if they cultivated a few more thousand or even ten thousand acres?

Understanding how to solve the food problem, Jot happily went to find Haldor. Haldor had already heard about his son’s experimental field yielding a great harvest, so he ordered that the remaining thirty-seven thousand pounds of potatoes and sweet potatoes be confiscated for public use. Seven thousand pounds were then distributed to over a thousand Vikings for consumption, and the rest were stored in a large cellar, preparing for large-scale cultivation in Vinland next spring to thoroughly improve the food problem plaguing the Vikings.

Potatoes and sweet potatoes were rich in starch, making them one of the best foods in the world at the time. They tasted great and provided energy, leaving the Vikings very satisfied after eating them. Upon learning of this year’s harvest, they were all surprised and had great confidence in next year’s harvest.

However, this year’s bountiful harvest of potatoes and sweet potatoes by Olaf was not only due to their high yield but also because the soil on both sides of the river was nutrient-rich. Additionally, Olaf had fermented the manure from the Aettangr-level slaves and applied it twice after planting the potatoes and sweet potatoes.

The mysterious technique of making farmyard manure from the Far East was met with skepticism and incomprehension by most people. However, the bountiful harvest of potatoes and sweet potatoes this time prompted Jot to inquire in detail about the production and benefits of farmyard manure. He was determined to use farmyard manure to fertilize the land during the spring planting next year.

Olaf’s experimental cultivation of sweet potatoes and potatoes was aimed at solving the food problem that had plagued the East and West for thousands of years.

If his father were to cultivate potatoes and sweet potatoes on a large scale in Vinland, it would not only ensure food supply but also free up a large amount of labor. This would allow them to undergo military training and develop industries such as handicrafts, processing, and mining. With Vinland’s small population, they could rapidly develop industries, build infrastructure, and establish a strong foundation for the nation, placing them at the forefront of North America.

Haldor greatly approved of Olaf’s ideas. He felt that with Olaf’s assistance, his ambition of establishing a nation in Vinland or even on the North American continent was not just a fantasy.

While the over ten thousand people in Hrut City were discussing the enormous yield of potatoes and sweet potatoes, the Arctic cold current swept across North America.

After entering November, winter rains still fell occasionally. Although the weather was cold, Haldor and his men were unwilling to stay in the castle. Every day, they led a full thousand-strong Viking militia for training and hunting.

Due to the previous promotion of militiamen, auxiliary troops, and even warriors to freemen, this force had been reorganized.

All the white people and some of the former savage auxiliary troops were promoted to musketeers, totaling three hundred men. All the firearms in Haldor’s fortress were put into use.

The remaining seven hundred Beothuk and Inuit Vikings became long spearmen. Additionally, fifty savage warrior slaves were selected as scouts, and thirty white people as artillerymen to support the main force.

There were also the earliest sixty Icelanders who were relieved from the musketeer ranks. Thirty of them became leaders of various squads, and the other thirty became Haldor’s personal knightly guards. Although the entire Hrut City only had a little over forty horses, with fewer than twenty of good breed, in just two more years, they could breed enough mounts for over thirty knights.

While developing themselves, Haldor and the other leaders also planned to continue trading Vinland’s specialties—furs, royal jelly, and wine—to Europe next spring in exchange for wealth. They intended to purchase large quantities of military equipment, white slaves, and livestock. With the vast number of savage slaves in Vinland, endless resources like furs, grapes, maple sugar, cod, and whales to plunder, and vast lands to cultivate, everyone believed that in just five or six years, Vinland could be developed into a capital no worse than Iceland.

Half a month after Haldor’s triumphant return to the city after unifying Vinland, another early winter rain turned into snow and hail after two hours, slowly covering Vinland’s mountains and plains with a white veil.

This cold front was very strong. It wasn’t until the afternoon of the third day that the rain and snow stopped. The temperature in Hrut City then dropped significantly. Although the ice and snow on the ground slowly melted under the sun, Olaf could feel that the air temperature was close to freezing. He exhaled a breath of white air, closed the wooden window of his room, and sighed, “This year’s harsh winter has truly arrived. It might be even colder than last year.”

Chapter 55: Champlain’s Reaction

On November 25th, a relentless snowstorm had blanketed North America for two days, forcing the Huron, Abenaki, and Cree tribes living near the mouth of the Saint Lawrence River to take shelter in their wooden lodges. Champlain, who had hoped to rely on his Huron allies for food, found his plans thwarted by the blizzard. In such weather, sending men to seek out the natives was impossible, and the natives themselves would not venture out to deliver supplies—not only because of the harsh conditions but also because food had become even more precious after the storm.

Within Quebec City stood a stone-walled, timber-roofed mansion in the French style, its chimney puffing black smoke—a sign that a fire burned inside to ward off the cold. This was the residence of Samuel de Champlain, Governor of New France, and the very heart of French authority in the colony.

Inside, Champlain sat by the fireplace in a woolen sweater, his neatly trimmed beard framing a thoughtful expression as he read a letter. After a moment, he coughed lightly and said, “Elise, add another log. It’s still chilly.”

Elise, his lover of several years—a woman in her thirties with an elegant bearing—chuckled softly and obliged, tossing more wood into the hearth.

“You’re not as strong as you used to be, Governor,” she remarked.

Champlain coughed again, reflecting on his waning vigor. “I’m nearly fifty, and I’ve spent years exploring the North American wilderness. The fact that I’m still alive is a blessing from God. You should have seen me in my prime—I was far stronger then.”

Elise laughed gently. “Yes, my strong Governor.”

Shrugging, Champlain reread the letter before tightening his coat around himself, as if seeking warmth in the fabric.

He pondered Francis’s urgent request and the grim news from the Gaspe Peninsula—where the sudden drop in temperature had led to mass sickness among the natives. If the natives at the supply outpost perished, next year’s hunting and fishing yields would plummet. Francis and his French soldiers were no match for the wilderness; they couldn’t even hunt a fox.

French soldiers lacked the versatility of the Icelanders, who were skilled in hunting, fishing, and navigation—each mastering at least two trades, a legacy passed down through generations. France, an agricultural nation, had farmers who knew only farming, mercenaries who knew only war, and few coastal fishermen. Though the kingdom boasted ten million people, only a handful of Basque regions thrived on fishing.

Champlain knew all too well that without native allies, the French could not survive in North America.

He set the letter aside, furrowing his brow in deep thought.

Sensing his unease, Elise sat beside him, wrapping an arm around him. “Darling, what did Francis say this time?”

Champlain scoffed. “What else? He’s still urging me to ally with the Icelanders of Vinland. After his defeat last month, Haldor let him go, and the first thing he did was beg me to form an alliance. I think the Icelanders have brainwashed him.”

“Oh?” Elise nodded. “But didn’t you say before that with England pressing in, allying with Vinland might be a good idea? What changed?”

Champlain’s voice turned cold. “The Icelanders of Vinland are no saints. They enslave the Beothuk, dominate the island, and clearly have grand ambitions. England wants to drive me out, but even if I retreat, they lack the foundation to rule here. The Icelanders, however, are different—they enslave the natives to govern, far more brutal than the English. If I ally with them, they might use my strength to land in New France and then swallow up the natives, seizing territory. The English are wolves, but the Icelanders are leopards.”

After careful consideration, Champlain feared the Icelanders’ ambitions. To avoid inviting trouble, he had ignored Francis’s repeated pleas for an alliance.

“If you don’t want to ally with the Icelanders, why not seek support from France? Cardinal Richelieu appointed you governor—he won’t ignore New France’s plight.”

Champlain, who had never married, had been with Elise for four or five years. She moved in high circles and had developed a keen political sense, offering her advice.

Champlain waved a hand, frowning. “Cardinal Richelieu is powerless to help me now.”

“Why?”

He sighed. “Three years ago, Richelieu pushed for the ‘Anti-Habsburg Alliance’ between England, France, Holland, and Denmark. The three nations funded Denmark’s war effort, and at first, Denmark fared well. But last year, King Christian IV began losing ground, and the English commander, Mansfield, was crushed. Now, Denmark has been driven back to northern Jutland, and the Habsburg forces are unstoppable. Richelieu is scrambling to find new allies while guarding against Spanish invasion—they’re tied to the Habsburgs, after all.”

Champlain sighed again, pacing before continuing. “I’ve ordered Francis to secure supplies for Quebec from the Gaspe Peninsula. With over a hundred musketeers and Huron warriors under his command, he should manage. This winter will be tougher than usual, but we’ll endure. Come spring, I’ll negotiate with the English—so long as their terms aren’t too harsh, we can reach an agreement.”

He wasn’t sure if his decision was right, but after learning that Francis’s combined force of 180 French soldiers, 500 Huron warriors, and 3,000 Beothuk warriors had been defeated by the Icelanders—who possessed cannons, firearms, and plate armor—Champlain harbored deep apprehension toward the Icelanders.

He believed they were not mere fur traders but had territorial ambitions. He regretted not recognizing their hidden strength sooner, especially since he had once maintained a superficial friendship with their former leader, Haig.

Fearful that an alliance with Vinland would give them a foothold on the continent to rival England, Champlain refused Francis’s proposal, even at the risk of starvation in the outposts. He could sense his trusted lieutenant’s growing frustration in his letters.

Reaching into the fire, he felt its warmth and a faint sting. Coughing softly, he muttered to himself, “Wait a little longer, Francis. You’re still too young, too naive. You don’t understand that the courteous Icelandic leader harbors ambitions to dominate North America. Unless we’re truly desperate, we must never ally with them. If we do, they’ll have the excuse and the means to interfere on the mainland. North America could descend into chaos worse than Europe’s wars. That serves neither New France’s interests nor my rule.”

Chapter 56: The Reaction of the English Colonists

New England was the colony established by Britain on the eastern coast of North America. In 1606, the London Virginia Company was founded, and they began colonizing the southern part of the eastern coast in Virginia. However, this earliest colony had always developed sluggishly, even facing the risk of extinction multiple times.

Later, in 1620, after the arrival of the “Mayflower” in North America, the Puritans and the Plymouth Company jointly established the Plymouth Colony in the north, truly bringing the land named New England in 1614 under British rule. This marked the beginning of the rise of Britain’s colonial endeavors in North America.

From 1620 to 1628, almost every year, the Plymouth Company and its partner, the Creek Company, among others, deceived large numbers of white slaves from England, Scotland, and Ireland to come to New England to build the colony. Due to the harsh environment, the ferocity of the natives, and the colonial companies’ inhuman treatment and relentless exploitation of the white slaves, New England had continuously received nearly six thousand immigrants over the years, but by the winter of 1628, only a little over two thousand remained alive.

After several years of development, the Plymouth Colony had built churches, a council hall, and hundreds of houses. Outside the colony were low walls and fences, and beyond that lay vast expanses of cultivated land.

Since New England was controlled by the Puritans, they did not accept the idea of a governor sent by the English company. Instead, they spontaneously formed a council to manage the colony, overseen by Pastor Blaister, the leader of the Puritans. Of course, the Plymouth Company had also sent a governor, William Bradford, to manage trade.

Blaister had fled to the New World because his religious beliefs were not valued or promoted. The Puritans were also part of the Protestant movement, but they opposed King James I’s advocacy of “divine right of kings” and the political stance that “the king is the noblest after God.” They opposed the king’s ambition and usurpation of church lands. It could be said that the Puritans had reached a point of opposition to King James I.

However, the king’s attitude and tactics were very strong, which made the traditional nobles, Catholics, and Puritans in Ireland, Scotland, and even England very resentful. This laid the groundwork for the beheading of King James I’s son, Charles I, decades later.

Blaister was a Puritan pastor who led the Puritans in managing the Plymouth immigrants, attempting to preach to the native savages. But initially, their arrogant preaching attitude caused them much suffering. It was only in recent years, with the large influx of white slaves from Britain, that they gained strong power, rapidly expanding the colony and beginning to enslave the natives.

With the growth of New England’s power, Blaister and other Puritan leaders set their sights on their northern neighbor, New France.

Europe was currently embroiled in the all-consuming Thirty Years’ War. The Puritans didn’t care that France was also on the side of the Protestant Union. They had no goodwill towards Catholic France because the American natives were non-believers, and the French, by occupying North America, had control over the faith of the natives in New France.

Blaister and other Puritans wanted to become saints like Saint Paul. Although they were Protestant believers, it didn’t stop them from working to bring Christianity to the New World. They also wanted the natives of the New World to believe in the Puritan version of Protestantism, making them the founding fathers.

Blaister began to strongly target New France this year, but in the early winter, he was shocked by a piece of news: the Icelanders had unified Vinland, subdued all the natives on the island, and even more astonishingly, the Icelandic army had defeated the soldiers of New France.

Blaister had never taken the Icelanders of Vinland seriously. First, the Icelanders had also converted to the Lutheran Church, a branch of Protestantism, making them somewhat related to New England, though not the same sect. Compared to New France, they were closer. Moreover, the Icelanders had always behaved well, honest and straightforward, which made New England treat Vinland like a little brother.

But now, the little brother had suddenly become the big brother, a burly man who had pinned France to the ground and beaten them up. Blaister found it hard to accept for a while, so he asked the crew of the Creek Company to quickly gather information about the Icelanders of Vinland. After ten days, after reading a large stack of materials, he rubbed his sore eyes and gathered over forty council members, then convened a special meeting on Vinland and New France.

At the meeting, Blaister first reported on the situation of the Vinland war, then explained the military strength of Hrut City in Vinland, which had a thousand soldiers, thousands of native warriors, firearms, plate armor, cannons, and armed warships. Finally, he looked around and saw that everyone was very surprised. He shook his head and said, “Friends, we have all overlooked the Icelanders on Vinland. We never thought that they came to North America in the same year as us, but right before our eyes, they have quickly grown into a powerful force. It is conceivable that the leaders of the Icelanders, Haig and his successor Haldor, are natural-born leaders.”

“Ah, yes, we came to the northern continent at the same time, but over the years, we have lost more than half of our white slaves, yet we have only gained less than half the land of the Icelanders,” a young pastor said with emotion.

“Hmph, back then, to help them, we ordered English fishermen not to go ashore and harass Vinland. They have developed so well but have not repaid us. It’s despicable. Why not have Governor William use armed merchant ships to threaten the Icelanders a bit,” a middle-aged man with a hooked nose said coldly.

The young pastor sneered repeatedly and said, “Mr. Miller, back then, we didn’t let the English fishermen land on Vinland because we wanted to use the Icelanders of Vinland to restrain New France and at the same time bring all the English fishermen to us to provide us with some fish. Honesty is the most basic virtue of a person. We are all believers of the Lord, not despicable politicians, so please, Mr. Miller, do not deceive yourself. Moreover, Governor William has always wanted to extend his power to the colony, replacing our council to rule the immigrants. Do you want to invite the wolf into the house?”

“Hmph, of course, I don’t want our council to lose power, but, Pastor McG, do you think you are very noble?” Miller glared and retorted.

Miller was a member of the council and also a Puritan, but he was very cruel to the white slaves, which many kind-hearted council members could not stand. The only one who dared to speak out against him was the young pastor McG.

Seeing that the two were about to argue again, Blaister frowned and waved his hand, saying, “Stop it, don’t engage in meaningless arguments, friends. We are now discussing what attitude to take towards Hrut City in Vinland and New France in the future. Should we join hands with Hrut City to completely drive the French away, or continue to maintain our cold friendship with the Icelanders?”

The dozens of council members immediately started discussing, and after half a day, the opinions gradually became clear. Two voices emerged in the meeting hall.

One was the hardline faction led by Miller, and the other was the moderate faction led by Pastor McG.

The hardliners believed that Hrut City did not have the support of the Danish kingdom and had just offended France. New England could temporarily ease the pressure on New France, lure New France and Vinland into a struggle to consume each other’s strength, and when Vinland was weakened to a certain extent, New England could step in to mediate, or annex both, or support the Icelanders. This way, New England would have the dominant position and initiative.

Miller’s opinion had a considerable market. More than half of the over forty council members agreed with Miller’s opinion, which made him very proud, even smirking provocatively at McG.

The opinion of McG’s faction was to base everything on the Puritan beliefs. In North America, full of natives, they must unite with the hard-won like-minded people. The Icelanders believed in the Lutheran Church, which was essentially not much different from the Puritans. If the two joined forces to spread the gospel to the natives, perhaps everyone could see Protestantism blossom in the wilderness in their lifetime, ultimately achieving their religious and political aspirations.

If they watched New France and Vinland fight, perhaps after the pan-European war ended, New France would turn its attention to Vinland. In a few years, if Vinland was annexed and destroyed by New France, New England’s interests would also be difficult to guarantee, and the confrontation between Catholicism and Christianity in the New World would continue.

Just as the two sides were locked in dispute, Blaister seemed to have a preference. He clapped his hands to stop everyone’s argument and then said, “I think we should still maintain our original plans and beliefs. If we drive New France out of the New World and take over Quebec and other strongholds, we will not only control the source of furs and amass great wealth, but we can also use Quebec as a bridgehead to penetrate deep into the interior to spread the gospel and search for the distant Seres in the East.”

“I think Pastor McG is right. We must adhere to our beliefs. The Catholic French cannot be trusted. We should deepen our relationship with the Icelanders and jointly drive out New France, then divide their colonies.”

After speaking, Blaister saw that Miller was about to persuade him, so he added, “I know your concerns, Miller. You are worried that the Icelanders will pose a threat to us after New France is gone. But you must know that in the current European war, Denmark is about to face defeat. The Icelanders cannot seek Danish support, but we can seek support from England through the London Company. In the long run, uniting with a wild dog to strangle a young lion is very worthwhile, but we are also a young lion. Do you think the wild dog of New France will still be a threat when the lion grows up? But if we allow the young northern lion to grow, we will regret it later. And you must know that even if we join forces to drive out the French, New France will surely return in the future. At that time, Vinland at the mouth of the Saint Lawrence River will be our shield.”

After Blaister’s explanation, Miller and the others suddenly understood and praised the old pastor’s foresight.

Blaister waved his hand, knowing that it was about to get completely cold, so many things could only be started next spring.

After thinking for a moment, he immediately ordered McG to send someone to contact the Icelanders of Hrut City, striving to find an opportunity to meet with Vinland’s leader, Haldor, after the spring.

When the council members dispersed, Blaister called McG, who was about to leave, and pulled him to sit in a corner, asking, “McG, do you understand my meaning?”

McG looked admiringly and said, “Teacher, you are indeed far-sighted. I—”

“You don’t need to say anything.” Blaister interrupted McG, coughing lightly, “I am already fifty-five years old this year, and my energy and physical strength are getting worse. If we cannot seize this opportunity to drive out New France and occupy Quebec, perhaps I will not be able to penetrate deep into the interior of the New World to preach before I die. You must remember, we are the lambs of the Lord, the faithful dogs that shepherd for the Lord. We are not ugly colonists who only seek money. We also want to establish church traditions on this vast land and become prophets.”

“Yes, I understand,” McG said solemnly as he stood up, “To drive out New France as soon as possible, I will go to Vinland myself.”

Miller took a few confidants back to his home, first drank a glass of wine, and then discussed the recent events. After hearing a council member praise Blaister’s political insight, he coldly snorted and said, “Pastors are a bunch of idealists. They only consider preaching but do not know that if the Icelanders develop ambitions for the mainland land, we will only become their vassals or even be driven away.”

“Isn’t that so? Blaister said that the French will not be willing, and we can seek support from England,” a council member asked in confusion.

“Hmph,” Miller sighed and sneered, “The involvement of French and British forces is based on the victory of the Protestant Union in the pan-European war. What if they don’t win? What if it drags on for another ten or twenty years?”

“You mean—”

“If the Icelanders drive us out and annex us when England and France are deeply mired in the pan-European war and cannot assist us, do you think we have the power to fight back? What’s scary is that the Icelanders, who already have a strong army, will not be easily satisfied.”

“We can ask the London Company to increase the immigration effort. As long as our population in New England keeps increasing, we will soon surpass Iceland.”

“Yes, asking London to increase immigration—I have already applied for this, and Blaister also agrees and has approved it. Moreover, Governor William has already started. But I think it’s time to talk to Governor William again.”

Note: Seres: An ancient name for China. Before the exploration of the North American continent was completed in the seventeenth century, Europeans generally believed that India, China, and the North American continent were connected, thinking that a route to China could be found from North America.

Chapter 57: The Heavenly God and the Loyal Hound

Winter in Vinland was exceptionally cold, but for the people of Iceland, it was nothing out of the ordinary. The ones who truly struggled with the cold were the poorest of the Beothuk slaves. However, this year, Haldor had allowed them to gather firewood for themselves before December, a kindness that had the slaves cheering in gratitude.

This was because the second phase of construction in Hrut City had just been completed by the end of November.

Initially, progress in Hrut City had been slow, but with the influx of white slaves this year—who were far more skilled in construction than the native slaves—and many of them capable of crafting tools, the pace of work had accelerated dramatically. By the new year, the framework of Hrut City had been established.

Thousands of slaves and Vikings worked day and night, quarrying stone, felling timber, and constructing houses and walls. Now, Hrut City had expanded to an area comparable to Reykjavik’s harbor in Iceland. Though still crude, the framework was solid, with houses standing in rows and drainage ditches and gravel roads neatly arranged.

Besides Haldor’s central fortress, the city now had a newly built military stronghold on the east side for military arrangements and arms storage, and a two-story Nordic-style building on the west side serving as the governing council for managing the lives and production of Vinland’s slaves and freemen.

With the addition of many skilled white slave artisans this year, Hrut City had produced small, medium, and even large tools to aid in the city’s construction. Haldor believed that next year, the third phase of construction could be completed, transforming the colony into a true city.

Under the guidance of the white slave artisans, the native slaves had achieved productivity far beyond what they had before. Hrut City’s construction efficiency had improved more than threefold, and in just one year, progress had surpassed four times that of the previous year.

Hrut City was now large enough to house twenty to thirty thousand people, divided into inner and outer sections, with even the outer walls completed.

Pleased, Haldor ordered all the Aettangr and slaves to rest until spring before resuming work. He also temporarily granted the native slaves the same logging rights as the Vikings and allocated a plot of land in the northern Avalon wetlands for them to gather firewood for the winter.

Originally, Haldor had planned to build some stone roads around Hrut City, but with so much work to be done and labor in short supply, road construction was not a priority. For now, only the inner city streets had been paved with leftover stone from the building projects.

In a forest northwest of Avalon, several dozen slaves were felling trees. These were servants of Viking lords who did not dare compete with the slaves of the city lord, the commander, or the Oarsmen for the safer and more abundant forests to the east and south. They knew their Viking masters were only freemen, and as slaves, their own status was even lower. Thus, they had banded together to work in the more remote northwestern forest.

The quiet forest echoed with the dull thuds of axes striking wood. The Beothuk slaves had grown accustomed to silence and obedience, especially after seeing members of their own tribe rewarded with Viking status for their bravery and diligence. This had only spurred them to work harder.

Time passed slowly, and soon the sun began to set. Many Beothuk slaves had already bundled their firewood—each load weighing over a hundred pounds—with ropes made of tree bark and were heading south toward Hrut City.

Only two natives remained in the forest. Both were around sixteen or seventeen years old, each with a bundle of firewood already tied, yet they continued chopping, determined to gather one more small bundle.

These two were young warriors Haig had captured in the south. Too young to be warriors themselves, they had survived. Now, they shared the same goal: to gather more firewood and win the favor of a girl or a widow. After all, they were nearly grown, and it was time to think about starting a family.

“Balu, hurry up. I’ve already cut enough. I think if we give Aydia and Moniko twenty bundles, they’ll marry us,” the taller boy said, adjusting the small piece of deer hide he had placed on his shoulder before hoisting two bundles of firewood onto his back. His deer hide coat was already shedding, but he handled it with care.

The shorter boy quickly tied his own bundles and, with a grunt, lifted two onto his back. Bending under the weight, he panted, “Kikapu, I’m ready. Let’s go.”

The two scrawny figures struggled under the nearly two hundred pounds of firewood, stopping every so often to rest against a tree before continuing, chatting idly to ease their fatigue and shoulder pain.

“Balu, after you marry Aydia, what else do you plan to do?”

“I want to have two children first, then join the warrior band to fight for the Heavenly God. Maybe one day, I can make Aydia and our children into noble Vikings like the lords.”

The shorter Balu’s face lit up with hope as he turned to Kikapu. “What about you?”

“I want to become a warrior of the Heavenly God too. Maybe then I can become a Viking.”

“Then let’s work hard together. I heard that before, the Inuit and other tribes who followed the Heavenly God had to crowd into caves in winter, and many froze to death. We’re much better off now. The Heavenly God has given us land and houses, allowed us to gather firewood, and even provided us with dried fish for meat. I think this winter will be better than any we had in the tribe.”

“Yeah, the mighty Heavenly God is both powerful and kind.”

After praising Haldor, they continued on their way.

This year, with the population of Hrut City increasing, the white wolves on the peninsula had been systematically hunted, with over three hundred killed. The fierce beasts were nearly wiped out, and the slaves no longer faced attacks.

The two friends only reached Hrut City after nightfall. Since Haldor had relaxed restrictions on the native slaves over a month ago, none had attempted to escape. When Balu and Kikapu returned, they were only questioned briefly by two White Wolf Warriors—former slaves who had earned their Viking status—before being allowed to pass.

Their homes stood side by side, and as they prepared to part ways, they noticed the bright windows of the towering fortress in the center of the inner city. They knew Haldor and the other lords were feasting inside.

After a moment of envy, Kikapu suddenly leaned in and whispered, “Balu, do you think Haldor is really a god descended from heaven? If he weren’t, I might be even more loyal to him.”

Balu’s heart skipped a beat, and he quickly pulled Kikapu down, hissing, “Are you crazy? How dare you question the Heavenly God?”

Kikapu had spoken impulsively out of admiration for Haldor’s life, but as soon as the words left his mouth, he regretted them. Seeing Balu’s reaction, however, a surge of defiance rose in him. “I think Haldor only has the blood of the gods, not that he’s a true god. Otherwise, why can’t he really summon the wind and rain? I’ve heard that the white Vikings control heavenly fire with weapons called firearms—not divine power.”

“You’re talking nonsense!” Balu scowled, pinning Kikapu down. “If he weren’t a god, how could he be so tall and mighty? And how did he lead Haig and the great commanders Hrutik and Kadir to defeat the warriors of Bakens Lake just by charging on horseback? If that’s not divine power, what is?”

“It is, it is!” Kikapu’s stomach twisted with regret. He slapped his own mouth hard. “I was just talking nonsense.”

With that, Kikapu fled, his mind racing with excuses: I didn’t mean to blaspheme. I only meant that even if Haldor isn’t a god, I’ll still be his loyal hound. He’s smarter, kinder, and greater than any chief. Only by following him can we become noble Vikings.

Chapter 58: The Messenger

As December arrived, the weather grew increasingly cold, with overcast skies hinting at another impending snowstorm.

Recently, the entire family, now with more free time, spent their days in the castle playing a card game invented by Olaf called “Fighting the Trolls.” It was essentially a variation of poker, but with a name that suited Olaf’s tastes.

This novel and entertaining card game was not only enjoyed by Haldor, Katrin, Ulf, Half, and Gerny, but even Haig, Hrutik, Heiner, and others became hooked after trying it.

Every morning after breakfast, the great hall on the first floor of the castle would be filled with people. Many chiefs and oarsmen, along with their families, gathered to play cards and drink, making the already warm castle, heated by bonfires, even cozier. It could be said that since winter began, the lights in Haldor Castle burned brightly until midnight every night.

Apart from playing cards with his mother, brother, and others, Olaf spent his days drafting plans for the following spring. He believed that now that Vinland was unified and the population was concentrated in Hrut City, they could ensure food supplies by planting potatoes and sweet potatoes next year. Then, they could use slaves to develop mining and even shipbuilding industries. Of course, this depended on whether they could purchase skilled workers, equipment, and technicians from Europe next year.

Olaf remembered seeing a map of North American mineral deposits in the national library in his past life. Though he had forgotten the distribution of most minerals, he still recalled some coal and iron deposits. He knew that in the southern part of Vinland Island, in the peninsula that would later become Nova Scotia, there were coal and iron mines, with substantial coal reserves. Vinland Island also had iron, lead-zinc, and even copper mines, though the reserves of these, except for lead-zinc, were not significant.

Thus, Olaf planned to bring people from Europe to Vinland next year—not just white slaves, but also shipbuilders and mining experts for exploration and extraction. With iron and coal mines, they could smelt iron and even produce weapons and equipment. For Vinland to truly stand firm, it needed to develop both its population and heavy industry. Without these, the island would eventually be seized by the English, let alone expanding westward.

Besides developing mining, steel, and shipbuilding industries, Olaf also thought about the business deal he had agreed upon with Kuiyi last year.

He had asked Kuiyi, who was working in the Dutch East India Company’s colony in Batavia, to purchase some porcelain and traditional Chinese medicine, and most importantly, the books by Li Shizhen, Xu Guangqi, and Song Yingxing. These were the fundamental classics Olaf intended to use for developing light industry, heavy industry, and agriculture—his guiding principles.

Olaf knew his own limitations. To develop Vinland as a nation, he couldn’t do without the wisdom accumulated by the laboring people of the Celestial Empire over thousands of years.

Olaf wrote down his plans for next year with charcoal on paper, fearing he might forget. He also prepared to have two Aettangr Vikings and slaves start producing maple syrup as soon as spring arrived. After all, they had no industries yet, and the only way to get rich was through the unique sugar industry of North America.

Originally, Olaf had also wanted to find a suitable area on the southern coast of Hrut City to open salt fields for salt production, solving Vinland’s salt supply problem while adding another commodity.

However, Vinland’s climate was not cooperative. Perhaps due to the Little Ice Age, summers in Vinland were not very hot, making salt production inefficient. Moreover, establishing salt fields was troublesome. When Olaf mentioned it to Haldor, he showed no interest, and the salt production plan was indefinitely postponed.

Though Haldor wasn’t interested in the salt industry, he was eager for other ventures.

Haldor, Hrutik, Haig, Jot, and others had also made plans. Next spring, they would mobilize everyone. Warriors and militia would continue the late autumn and early winter wolf hunting and trapping activities, stockpiling large quantities of pelts. Other Aettangr people and slaves would be gathered and transported by ship to various regions of the island to find maple trees, collect sap, and produce sugar. They aimed to fill all six ships bound for Europe next spring with precious goods like royal jelly and pelts.

Today, Haldor was having good luck. He had caught three trolls in a row and won three times with good cards. Suddenly, Jot rushed in from outside, his cloak still dusted with a few melting snowflakes.

“What’s wrong?”

Haldor saw Jot’s expression and knew something serious had happened. He quickly stood up and asked.

Jot pointed outside and said, “Just now, an Englishman came. He said he is a messenger sent by Elder Blaister, the leader of Plymouth on the western coast of the south. He wants to see you. I asked him some questions. It seems he wants to discuss cooperation or an alliance with us. Maybe they heard about our victory over the New France army and want to show goodwill.”

“We’ll meet him in the East Council Hall. Pikku, go bring the Englishman at the door to the East Council Hall.”

Without hesitation, Haldor pulled Jot toward the East Council Hall in the corridor to the east of the great hall and called Pikku to bring the English messenger in.

Olaf saw the situation, handed his cards to Tom, and quickly followed.

“Father, Uncle Jot, what’s happening?”

When Olaf arrived at the East Council Hall, Haldor and Jot were already seated at the round table.

“Olaf, sit next to me.”

After Olaf sat down, Haldor briefly explained the situation. Olaf nodded and said, “Father, you mentioned before that Francis sent you two letters, both saying that Governor Champlain of New France was ambiguous and had no intention of allying with us in Vinland. Now, the leader of New England has sent someone. I think both New France and New England have strange attitudes toward us.”

“Yes,” Haldor stroked his beard and shook his head. “Logically, Champlain is being pressured by the English and can barely feed himself. Allying with us would be beneficial and harmless. Why is he hesitating? New England sending someone might be to probe our attitude. After all, they must know that I have unified Vinland and that we defeated the New France army.”

Olaf and Jot couldn’t figure it out and were deep in thought when the door creaked open. Pikku, the Inuit oarsman of the Aettangr, still bent like a servant, led a thin man wearing a wolf pelt coat inside.

“The guest has arrived, sir.”

Pikku, who had grown a beard, bowed and then stood behind Olaf.

Although Pikku had become an Aettangr oarsman and gained the status of a freeman, he still lived in Haldor Castle and considered himself Olaf’s servant, which the Haldor family appreciated.

The messenger took off his hat, revealing handsome features. He looked very young, bowed to Haldor, and then forced a smile, speaking in a standard London accent: “Mr. Haldor, I am Pastor McG from Plymouth, sent by Elder Blaister to seek an audience with you.”

“Please sit.”

Haldor smiled, stood up, shook hands with McG, and then invited him to sit across from him.

After exchanging some pleasantries, Haldor sensed McG’s goodwill. Then, McG stood up solemnly and handed Haldor a personal letter from Elder Blaister. Haldor opened it and saw that it was filled with polite and humble greetings.

Knowing that the key matters still needed to be discussed with McG, Haldor put away the letter and looked at McG with a smile, asking, “Thank you for Elder Blaister’s greetings. Please convey my regards to him when you return. Pastor McG, you have come through ice and snow. Is there anything else?”

McG smiled and said, “I represent Elder Blaister. Besides conveying his greetings, I have another mission: to hope that Vinland and New England can establish a lasting friendship. Although we are far to the south, we have heard that Governor Champlain of New France sent soldiers to attack you and invade Vinland. The elder condemns Champlain’s despicable actions and is willing to stand with you.

Now, the war between the Protestant Union and the Catholic League in Europe is raging. We are both members of the Protestant faith. Even though we are far in North America, we should unite to drive out the French, who cling to outdated and corrupt doctrines.”

Chapter 59: A Tripartite Balance is True Stability

After McG’s persuasive speech, Haldor was tempted but did not commit.

After inviting McG to lunch, Haldor took the opportunity during the midday break to gather the major and minor chiefs—Olaf, Jot, Haig, Ulf, Kadir, and Hoskuld—for a discussion.

Upon learning that New England intended to ally with Vinland to expel the French and divide New France, Olaf’s heart raced. He found the proposal highly enticing.

Haig and Kadir burst into laughter, feeling their side had made a strong impression, even drawing the British to seek an alliance. They both expressed their agreement with New England’s proposal.

Most of the attending Oarsmen and helmsmen were not skilled in political matters, excelling instead in warfare, farming, and fishing. Thus, few were able to offer meaningful opinions.

After three or four people had voiced their agreement, Haldor turned to Heiner and asked, “What’s your opinion?”

Heiner stroked his chin thoughtfully before speaking. “The English have never been kind and benevolent like Baldr. They are cunning, fickle, treacherous, and vicious. My estate was seized by the English, so I know their wickedness well.

I’ve never heard of Blaister, the elder of Plymouth, so I don’t know if he truly wants to ally with us. However, if we join them to drive out the French, we will undoubtedly gain greatly in the short term. The Hurons and others who trade with the French will turn to us, and we will gain more fur resources.”

“You mean short term?” Hrutik’s scarred eye twitched as he repeated the phrase.

“Yes,” Heiner nodded, continuing. “We have established a friendship with Francis, the second-in-command of New France, and have no conflict with Governor Champlain. I don’t think we need to offend them. If they find financial or governmental support in France, we will be at a disadvantage in the future, whether in dealing with them or in war. It would be a loss for us either way.”

Heiner’s words chilled the room. Haldor glanced at Ulf.

Though Ulf was already twenty-three, he had only attended church school and spent the past eight years of his youth following his uncle. Thus, he was not particularly clever, but after listening to everyone’s opinions, he had some thoughts. He spoke slowly, “I think Heiner is right. Even if we ally with the English, it shouldn’t be now. We only unified Vinland this year, and most of our energy should be focused on developing Vinland’s land. If, in a few years, we have abundant resources and sufficient provisions and soldiers, I think dealing with the French or the English won’t be a problem.”

Haldor’s own thoughts were similar to Ulf’s, but he still wanted to hear the last person’s opinion, so he turned to Olaf.

Olaf felt the weight of everyone’s gaze and tapped his fingers on the table before speaking. “I think what my brother and Heiner said is correct. We don’t need to offend the French for some fur trade. Not to mention that New France is backed by powerful France, but for the sake of our friendship with Francis, we should maintain good relations with New France.

Champlain has no intention of allying with us, which shows he knows our strength threatens him. If we are strong and have a solid foundation, we can naturally invade the mainland, occupy New France, or even New England.

But our population and resources are far from sufficient. The best choice for us now is to maintain a tripartite balance—Vinland, New France, and New England coexisting in North America. After all, there are still many undeveloped areas in the New World. We should guide them to explore deeper into the continent rather than fight each other.”

Haldor’s resolve was strengthened by Olaf’s words. He then stood up and, accompanied by Haig and a few others, went to reject McG’s request, but also made it clear that they only wanted to focus on Vinland and were willing to maintain friendly relations with New England.

McG left Hrut City with a letter of greeting from Haldor to Elder Blaister, knowing that relying on the Icelanders was no longer an option. To drive out Champlain, he would have to rely on himself.

Olaf pushed open the window and watched the snowflakes drifting in the sky and the wet mud outside, realizing the snow had just fallen.

In his line of sight, McG and his two servants on horseback gradually disappeared. His eyes gradually emptied, and his thoughts drifted into the air.

Olaf had just learned that the current leader of New England was a Puritan, which made him think of certain possibilities.

He had heard several versions of the story of the Mayflower arriving in the New World and establishing a colony in his past life. McG and Blaister were among those who had sailed on the Mayflower.

The later Thanksgiving holiday was created by Blaister’s group to commemorate the Indians who had extended a helping hand to them, aiding them through famine. Although they and their descendants never hesitated to kill Indians, when eating turkey, everyone would still take a moment to remember the kind Indians.

Olaf recalled that although New England was initially managed by Puritans, after they occupied Quebec City, the Puritan ranks gradually split. Then, the leadership was diluted by the new batch of colonists sent by the London Company, wealthy landowners who took over the leadership positions. This led to the emergence of a new governor of New England with greater power, who took over all the rights of the governor of Plymouth. New England then became a thoroughly aggressive colony.

Olaf was well aware that within a hundred years, the British would establish sixteen colonies in North America, then drive out the French to establish the United States of America, eventually becoming the world’s superpower. Thus, he was most wary of the British.

Olaf believed that if New England continued to be led by Puritans, it might be better than being ruled by a governor like a bandit. After all, Elder Blaister and McG had not shown any ambition for Vinland or other North American lands. Their desire to drive out the French was not just for fur but more for the exclusive control of the vast, untouched missionary territories.

Olaf was not afraid of idealistic religious figures who aspired to sainthood; what he feared most were competitors who nakedly pursued their own interests.

By dinnertime, Olaf told his father that he hoped he would inform Champlain of New England’s intentions and Vinland’s decision the following spring. This might prompt Champlain to lean toward Vinland.

Then, Olaf reminded Haldor that they must maintain contact with both colonies and stay informed of their movements. If they detected any instability in the Puritan leadership of New England, they should extend a helping hand and support Blaister and his people. After all, a New England led by Puritans would be far easier to deal with than future governors who were criminals, politicians, or opportunists.

Olaf reiterated his opinion. He believed that now that Vinland was unified under Haldor’s rule, with over one hundred thousand square kilometers of land and inexhaustible resources, more than ten thousand subjects, and thousands of potential Indian slaves scattered across the land, Vinland’s resources were abundant.

The foundation of Hrut City was laid. Now, they did not need to expand outward but should focus on consolidating Vinland. They needed to quickly utilize their population and resources to develop Vinland, turning it into a base for provisions, industry, and shipbuilding.

Consolidating Vinland would take time, and during this period, they needed to maintain good relations with their neighbors to avoid external interference. Therefore, they must maintain the balance in North America. New France, New England, and Vinland formed a triangular relationship. Vinland should mediate between the two to ensure stability rather than participate in or initiate wars.

Haldor, Ulf, Haig, and Hrutik were all deeply inspired by Olaf’s words. They had never been rulers before and had never seen a model for developing people’s livelihoods and industries. After hearing Olaf’s plan, Haldor immediately agreed on the spot, and everyone happily drank a few more cups of wine.

Chapter 60: Do You Want to Go Home?

Haldor and the others were still playing cards late into the night when Olaf excused himself to return to his room.

Back in his room, Olaf lit a candle made of animal fat and, by its dim glow, began reading through his handwritten notes—three large volumes filled with knowledge, culture, and historical information he had accumulated over the years.

After a while, the door creaked open, and Pikku entered carrying a basin of hot water. “The footbath is ready, sir,” he said. “Go ahead and soak your feet.”

In this era of backward productivity, where Olaf lived in a sparsely populated and culturally underdeveloped region, entertainment was scarce. Beyond drinking, fighting, and the occasional naked brawl between men and women, there was little else to do.

To pass the time and maintain his health, Olaf had adopted a habit since arriving in Vinland—soaking his feet every night before bed for about an hour. Afterward, he would feel warm and sweaty, making it easier to fall into a deep, comfortable sleep.

Though Pikku was now an Oarsman of the Aettangr, he still lived outside Olaf’s house by the fire wall. Olaf had always treated him well, and Pikku saw him as family. Every night, he would prepare Olaf’s footbath and only leave once the water was taken away.

Sometimes, when Olaf had nothing better to do, he would chat with Pikku—about Iceland, about learning the Inuit language, or about Pikku’s simple and harsh life. But more often, Olaf would boast about his “dreams”—fragments of his past life. He used the pretense of dreams to confide in Pikku, partly to vent his frustrations and partly because Pikku, with his limited worldview, treated these stories like heavenly revelations.

That night, as Olaf soaked his feet, he spoke of the distant Ming Dynasty in the Far East. He thought of the future hardships that would befall the Chinese people, of the Qing Dynasty that would rise centuries later, and his mood grew restless. The source of his agitation was his knowledge that, in just over a decade, the Han dynasty would be wiped out—and there was nothing he could do about it.

Glancing at Pikku, with his thick beard and fur-lined clothes that made him look like a Mongolian noble, Olaf chuckled. “You’re only twenty-one, yet with that beard, you could pass for thirty.”

Pikku twisted his head, grinning. “The colder it gets, the more hair grows—keeps me warm. If you don’t like it, I’ll shave it off tomorrow.”

Olaf quickly waved his hands. “No, no, I was just asking. It actually suits you quite well.”

“Really?” Pikku laughed. “My father and brothers are the real warriors.”

His tone darkened slightly. Olaf noticed the shift in his mood and asked, “You miss home?”

“Not really,” Pikku shook his head. “In Greenland, we never had enough to eat. Life with you is good. My father and brothers are whale hunters—they’ll be fine. It’s just… my mother… she doted on me the most. She had a coughing sickness. The chieftain said she wouldn’t last long. I think she might already be gone.”

Olaf’s body went cold as he listened. He lifted his feet from the basin, letting them air-dry. After a moment of hesitation, he asked, “Do you want to go home and see for yourself?”

Pikku didn’t speak. He didn’t move.

Olaf knew he wanted to go—he just couldn’t. As a slave, even if he was nominally an Oarsman, he had no authority to command a ship to Greenland. Whether he spoke or stayed silent, it made no difference.

A heavy weight settled in Olaf’s chest. He wanted to help Pikku, but he wasn’t the leader of Vinland. He had no right to order a ship to take him home. Even though he owned an armed merchant ship, its actual use was controlled by Haldor. Without Olaf’s ship and funds, Haldor, at his young age, would never have been able to command two Aettangr. The Icelanders would have raised objections, but Olaf’s contributions—a ship and dozens of white slaves—had silenced the doubters.

Olaf had neither the right nor the reason to send Pikku home, but he genuinely wanted to help this loyal, honest Inuit man. There was another reason, too—Pikku’s face reminded him of an Easterner, especially with the beard, resembling the singer Teng Ger, who had once sung “Wings of Steel.” It made Olaf feel a strange sense of familiarity and comfort, even making him want to teach Pikku to sing “Invisible Wings.”

Since Olaf wanted to help Pikku return to Greenland, he considered whether he could persuade his father to send a ship and soldiers there to establish a colony.

But this was the Little Ice Age. The world was growing colder, and Greenland’s climate was far harsher than it had been centuries ago. The Viking settlers who had once lived there had been wiped out over a hundred years ago. Now, across Greenland’s 2.6 million square kilometers, only ten or twenty thousand Inuit struggled to survive in the freezing cold.

Greenland’s climate made agriculture impossible. With only moss and a few shrubs, the only viable industry was animal husbandry. But even cows and horses couldn’t endure the cold of the Little Ice Age, which was why the original Viking settlers had perished.

Without farming or livestock, and with a shortage of firewood, Greenland held little value. It was no wonder that King Christian IV of Denmark had established the Greenland Company yet failed to establish a single colony there before his death.

After much thought, Olaf suddenly had an idea—reindeer. Before 1950, Greenland had tens of thousands of reindeer, but Danish colonists had hunted them to extinction. Only later were new reindeer introduced to repopulate the island.

Thinking of reindeer reminded Olaf of another animal native to Greenland—the muskox. These creatures, along with polar bears and Arctic wolves, thrived in large numbers.

The Inuit of Greenland, limited by their primitive tools and small numbers, couldn’t hunt reindeer or muskox on a large scale. But the Vikings could.

Greenland wasn’t without agricultural potential—it just lacked arable land. However, it had abundant pastoral resources. The problem was that no one was utilizing them.

Greenland was home to reindeer, muskox, walruses, seals, and vast schools of fish. The Inuit, with their small kayaks and bone weapons, could barely exploit these resources. But with the Vikings’ advanced tools, weapons, and ships, these resources could be developed into a vast fortune. Vinland’s proximity to Greenland meant it could provide supplies and support—something Denmark couldn’t match.

Olaf knew that among the new Vikings—composed of Icelanders, Irish, Scots, and Beothuk—the Beothuk were skilled hunters, while the Icelanders and other whites could raise and domesticate animals. The vast herds of muskox and reindeer were valuable for their meat and fur. Colonizing Greenland would be beneficial—the meat could sustain the colonists, and the fur would be a lucrative export.

If the local reindeer, already adapted to Greenland’s climate, were domesticated and raised, Greenland could become a major reindeer breeding ground, providing a steady supply of meat and fur for the Vikings.

Beyond these resources, Olaf thought of the tens of thousands of Inuit on Greenland. Surviving in such harsh conditions, fighting beasts daily, they were fierce and brave—perfect warrior material. If he could recruit them into the Viking Raid, it would strengthen the entire organization.

Greenland covered 2.6 million square kilometers, with 340,000 square kilometers free of ice and snow. Though only 300,000 square kilometers were truly habitable for animals, that was still a vast area.

England, by comparison, was less than 200,000 square kilometers. But no matter how large Greenland was, its harsh climate and scarce resources made development difficult.

Even if Greenland’s usable land was equal to Vinland and Iceland combined, it required careful planning.

If used properly, turning the entire 300,000 square kilometers into grazing and hunting grounds, with proper logistics, could sustain tens of thousands of regular troops.

The more Olaf thought about it, the more excited he became. In his enthusiasm, he kicked over the basin of water. Laughing, he declared, “Pikku, you will go home—and you must go home!”

Chapter 61: Christmas

Since Olaf had not yet discussed his sudden idea of colonizing Greenland with Haldor, he kept it to himself to avoid disappointing Pikku if the plan ultimately failed.

After Pikku finished cleaning the wooden basin and disposing of the wastewater, Olaf blew out the candle, lay in bed, and refined his idea until he was satisfied there were no flaws before falling into a deep sleep, preparing to discuss the Greenland colonization plan with his father, Haldor, the next day.

When Olaf woke up, it was already daylight. Pikku entered with hot water to assist him in washing up, and then Olaf took Pikku downstairs to the dining room for breakfast.

Katrin knew her husband and son had worked tirelessly to develop Vinland, so she prepared lavish meals every day. That morning, they had black bread, fried venison, hot milk, and a cold dish of beets with black pepper, salt, honey, and pickled radishes.

Olaf had long since adapted to Icelandic cuisine. Though he sometimes found it barely acceptable, he could tolerate it overall.

Once the family was gathered, they said grace before the meal and ate in silence. Afterward, Haldor, Haig, Ulf, and Olaf rested on the sofas by the fireplace while Pikku stood nearby to attend to them. Katrin went to wash the dishes, and Half and Gerny, under Katrin’s supervision, went to their rooms to practice writing.

Though sofas had been invented in the early seventeenth century, Olaf had rarely seen them in Iceland. The first time he encountered one was in Amsterdam. Due to material limitations, the sofas were still quite crude and primitive in design.

The sofas in Haldor’s fortress were made from the hides of white wolves and reindeer by Scottish and Irish slaves, stuffed with seabird feathers, leaves, and sheep’s wool, making them soft and warm.

Seeing that Haldor, Haig, and Ulf seemed eager to play cards or Gomoku, Olaf quickly shared his idea from the previous night.

The three men fell into deep thought. Haig then turned to Pikku and asked, “How many Inuit are there in Greenland?”

Pikku looked confused. In his twenty years in Greenland, he had only visited a few neighboring villages and met fewer than a hundred people, so he had no way of answering Haig’s question.

Olaf noticed Pikku’s discomfort and said, “Pikku doesn’t know, but I estimate the population must be larger than Vinland’s. These people are excellent hunters and warriors, and there are countless reindeer and muskoxen. If we conquer the Inuit of Greenland, we can take control of the entire island.”

Haldor, Haig, and Ulf were all tempted. In the past, few people had attempted to colonize Greenland, and those who did were disorganized, lacking the vision and ability to establish large-scale colonial rule. But now, with Vinland as a stronghold, Haldor had the means to send warriors to colonize Greenland, making the endeavor far more feasible.

Ulf recalled something Jot had mentioned a few days earlier and said, “Father, Uncle, Jot mentioned that most of the Beothuk slaves in Hrut City obey orders, but the White Wolf Warriors refuse to do anything but fight and hunt. They don’t want to work in agriculture or logging. Jot said he would discipline them next spring when the weather warms up.”

He continued, “I think these few hundred White Wolf Warriors are indeed fierce and skilled in battle. Using them as laborers would be a waste. Since we’ve unified Vinland and won’t have any wars in the near future, why not send them to Greenland to help us conquer the Inuit?”

“Ulf, that’s a good idea,” Haldor said, his eyes lighting up. “Jot has complained to me a few times. We have enough labor in Hrut City now, so sending these restless White Wolf Warriors to Greenland is a perfect solution.”

After some discussion, Haldor decided to have Pikku lead his Aettangr people and the five hundred White Wolf Warriors from Hrut City to colonize Greenland. This would give them over seven hundred men, equipped with plate armor, long spears, and firelock muskets—enough to sweep across Greenland.

With Vinland recently unified, they only needed to cultivate a thousand acres of land in the spring to feed the tens of thousands in Hrut City. This would free up a significant amount of labor, allowing them to begin infrastructure projects and the third phase of Hrut City’s construction.

Sending the White Wolf Warriors, who refused to do manual labor, to Greenland to gradually colonize the land, conquer the Inuit, and raise reindeer and muskoxen was a sound plan. In a few years, Vinland might gain tens of thousands of Inuit warriors, along with a vast supply of furs and meat.

After making this decision, Haldor appointed Pikku as the Governor of Greenland, tasking him with leading the conquest and colonization of Greenland next spring.

Overwhelmed with emotion, Pikku knelt and kissed Haldor’s and Olaf’s feet, promising to fully conquer Greenland within five years and lead all the Inuit to welcome Haldor’s inspection.

Time passed quickly in the cold winter, as people stayed indoors to pass the days.

December was nearly over, and today was the twenty-fifth—the greatest holiday for both Protestants and Catholics: Christmas.

Christmas was a celebration of the birth of Jesus Christ, the Son of God in the Holy Trinity. Since the Bible did not record the exact date of Jesus’ birth, ancient scholars had adopted the Roman festival of Saturnalia as Christmas Day, giving rise to the holiday.

In the early seventeenth century, Christmas had not yet taken on the entertainment and commercial aspects it would in later years. It was simply a day for attending church services, praying, and enjoying pancakes and a glass of wine.

Vinland had no churches, so the Icelanders and other white settlers prayed at home and drank a glass of wine. Since the white slaves had become Vikings, Haldor had given each household a jug of wine, depleting half of the summer’s production. The remaining wine would not be enough to sell in Europe the following spring.

The family in Haldor’s fortress prayed for blessings, shared pancakes, and drank a glass of wine. They refrained from entertainment and reflected on the past year.

Haldor, as the lord of Vinland, bore the weight of tens of thousands of lives. He could no longer return to the carefree life he had led years before. Every day, he racked his brain to develop Vinland, planning for spring production, dispatching merchant ships to Europe, and maintaining good relations with New England and New France. The burden was immense, but it also brought him extraordinary joy.

Olaf had been an atheist in his past life and did not truly believe in Jehovah in this one. However, for the sake of his family’s future, he prayed for divine protection.

In five days, it would be the New Year. Olaf could no longer celebrate the Lunar New Year, nor could he keep track of it, so he treated the Gregorian New Year as his Spring Festival. He looked forward to the coming year with hope, knowing that if all went well, Hrut City would trade furs and other goods from the conquered tribes and hunting expeditions for far greater wealth in Europe than they had this year. That wealth would then be reinvested into Vinland’s foundation.

These prospects were certainly cause for celebration, but Olaf was more concerned about the deal with the Amsterdam Bank. If the technical books from the Ming Dynasty that he and Kuiyi had agreed to purchase last year arrived safely, Vinland’s agricultural and handicraft industries would have a solid foundation. With improved mining channels and skilled workers, they might even lay the groundwork for heavy industry.

Olaf recalled that, if his memory served him correctly, the first Industrial Revolution, which had propelled the Western world forward over a hundred years later, had been built in part on Eastern scientific texts like The Exploitation of the Works of Nature. At the very least, the introduction of the bellows had improved the production and quality of iron, a cornerstone of industrial development.

Chapter 62: Spring Blossoms

The New Year’s Day of 1629 arrived swiftly, yet as January set in, Vinland’s temperatures remained as bitterly cold as ever, showing no signs of warming.

After entering January, Vinland was struck by three consecutive heavy snowfalls. It wasn’t until February that the thick layer of snow, which had blanketed Vinland for over a month—reaching depths of two feet—finally began to melt, revealing the dark rocks and soil beneath.

In February, though the nights in Vinland were still bone-chillingly cold, the midday temperatures gradually climbed above freezing under the sun.

By mid-February, while the northern regions of Vinland still retained patches of snow in the shaded areas, the southern parts grew increasingly warm. Rivers thawed, their waters gurgling as they flowed southward into the warm currents of the Atlantic.

Starting from mid-February, under the leadership of their chiefs, the people of Hrut City began venturing outdoors. Women, children, and some men and slaves remained behind to tidy up, repair drainage channels, and manage waste disposal.

The Vikings, accompanied by warriors and most of the male slaves, dispersed into the northern Avalon Forest and the inland forests to hunt, replenishing the stockpiles of furs in their warehouses.

The Viking force of one thousand was divided into one hundred teams, each accompanied by thirty Beothuk warrior slaves. They spread across various locations in Vinland, launching a massive hunting campaign that swept through the entire region.

Governor Blackstone, stationed in Bakens Lake City and responsible for recruiting the local natives, soon encountered nearby hunting parties. He dispatched over five hundred warriors to join the hunt and also retrieved a large stockpile of furs, sending a contingent of warriors to escort them to Hrut City as tribute to Haldor, the Heavenly God.

The seas surrounding the southeastern peninsula of Vinland, influenced by the warm currents of the Caribbean, remained ice-free year-round despite the high latitude. Thus, establishing a deep-water port in a suitable location would be an inevitable necessity as Vinland developed.

Haldor, Hrutik, and Haig split into three teams to scout the coastline for potential port locations, particularly near Turning Point.

Starting this year, as Hrut City began to consolidate the resources of the entire 110,000 square kilometers of Vinland, the colony was poised to become a powerful settlement. Building ports would be essential, so they needed to start selecting sites now. After several days, they finally chose a location southwest of the Muskox River’s southern mouth, utilizing a small peninsula to the east to construct docks on both the eastern and western shores, transforming it into a formal port.

Olaf personally inspected the site and found it satisfactory, believing it would meet Vinland’s needs for decades. However, he recalled the future city of St. John’s at the northeastern tip of the peninsula, the capital of Canada’s Newfoundland and Labrador province, which would be the most suitable location for a deep-water port on the island. He decided to search for that spot later.

A week later, after Hrut City had been thoroughly cleaned and organized, Haldor ordered all remaining Vikings in the city to lead slaves in search of maple trees to collect sap for producing maple syrup, initiating another major industry.

Vinland’s two main industries were the export of furs from animals such as beavers, otters, white wolves, black bears, reindeer, seals, foxes, and squirrels, which formed the core of Vinland’s economy.

The second major industry was sugar production. Due to Vinland’s unique geography and climate, growing sugarcane for sugar was nearly impossible. However, nature had been kind.

The maple syrup produced from maple sap, which Olaf had named “Royal Honey,” had brought in vast wealth during their trip to Europe last year. This had made Haldor and the others see the enormous potential of Vinland’s sugar industry.

Looking at the maple trees scattered across Vinland, Haldor estimated there were about ten thousand trees capable of producing sugar. If fully utilized, they could produce half the amount of syrup exported by Spain’s Caribbean colonies, making it a second major industry comparable to the fur trade.

Haldor and the other chiefs placed great importance on these two industries. Haldor even divided the regions, urging the Oarsmen to lead the slaves in production. He also set a quota for each chief and Viking, leaving it to them whether to sell or use their share.

In the high-level plans of Hrut City, after the two main industries, there were three emerging industries: fishing, agriculture, and animal husbandry.

With access to a world-class fishing ground, it was essential to develop shipbuilding to utilize the fishing resources. Additionally, agriculture and animal husbandry could be developed. The 110,000 square kilometers of land, depending on the climate, could be used for farming in the south, growing crops like grains and potatoes, which could be exported for profit in the future.

The colder northern regions could be used for raising cattle, sheep, horses, and reindeer, becoming a source of wool, cowhide, and deerskin products.

However, agriculture and animal husbandry would take another year or two to determine their feasibility, so Haldor’s focus this year remained on the two main industries.

Olaf led his two Aettangr and the Aettangr of Pikku and Ilugi, totaling over four hundred people, roaming the peninsula daily in search of maple trees to collect sap for sugar production, keeping them busy.

Haldor implemented a system in Vinland that combined slavery, chieftaincy, and military organization, known as the Viking Raid system. Given the small core population and the rule over primitive natives, this system was currently very convenient.

Haldor divided the profits from agriculture, hunting, and sugar production with the Fylki district chief, Haig. Haig then distributed the profits to the two Mannafylki helmsmen under him, who further distributed them to the Aettangr Oarsmen, and finally to the production team leaders and Vikings.

The current distribution ratio was that 30% of the harvest was submitted to Hrut City. Of the remaining 70%, the Raid General Haldor received 10%, the Fylki received 5% of the remainder, the Mannafylki helmsmen received 4% of the new remainder, the Aettangr Oarsmen received 3%, and the production team leaders received 2%.

After this layered distribution, each Viking could still secure 45% of the wealth they and their slaves created. Even in other European countries, they would have to pay substantial taxes. If they were tenant farmers working for a landlord, they would earn even less. In comparison, the Vikings’ earnings were quite substantial, especially since the wealth gained by their slaves was also considered theirs. With just one slave earning an extra 50, it was as if they hadn’t paid any taxes.

The Viking Raid system was modeled after the ancient Viking expeditions and colonization, so the distribution model resembled the ancient Viking spoils division rather than modern taxation, making it easier for the subordinates to accept.

Olaf had pondered this. Although the earnings seemed similar, the Viking Raid was a collective entrepreneurial venture where spoils and harvests were distributed. Traditional landlords and lords were exploitative. The Vikings’ good life was built on the tragic fate of the plundered and enslaved, so naturally, they supported this system.

Olaf understood that the current Viking Raid was a collective startup team with strong cohesion and combat power before corruption set in, much like the Later Jin’s Eight Banners in the Far East at the same latitude and period. Years later, under Huang Taiji’s leadership, it would transform into Manchuria, marking the rapid rise from the Eight Banners to Manchuria.

Comparing it to Manchuria, Olaf believed the Viking Raid might also have a rise period of twenty or even thirty years.

Gazing at the sun in the sky and feeling its faint warmth on his face, Olaf sighed deeply and murmured, “Spring is coming, and the flowers will bloom. I hope the Viking Raid can flourish like the plants and trees.”

Chapter 63: The First Viking Raid Expedition

After half a month of bustling activity, Hrut City welcomed the true spring of Vinland in 1629.

Seabirds soared through the sky, trees sprouted tender green shoots, and beneath the shade, one could spot beavers, squirrels, and other small animals cautiously foraging. The Vikings hunted reindeer and white wolves with bows and firearms, while they trapped smaller creatures like beavers and muskrats using snares and traps. Though Vinland’s resources were abundant, the wildlife population remained vast. Even after years of overhunting, one could still encounter small wild animals in the wilderness.

Vinland was vast, and the areas truly developed by humans were limited to Hrut City, Great Waterfall City, Bakens Lake, and a few other places. The rest of the forests and mountains remained the domain of various animals.

By March, seasoned sailors like Haldor, Haig, and Hrutik sensed the Caribbean warm current becoming more active as temperatures rose. The warm winds from the southwest grew stronger.

Years of experience told them it was time to set sail.

After the first Viking Raid leadership meeting of 1629, Haldor appointed Pikku and provided him with ample supplies. He ordered three armed merchant ships to carry provisions, an Aettangr of Vikings, and over five hundred White Wolf Warriors to colonize Greenland.

Greenland lacked trees, and thus timber, so the Inuit lived in snow houses or caves. Haldor knew timber was a precious commodity in Greenland, so he allowed Pikku to bring enough wood to build houses.

Upon accepting his appointment, Pikku began preparing for the expedition with over a hundred Inuit and four hundred White Wolf Warriors. They gathered various supplies and transported food and timber.

Three days later, everything was ready. Pikku’s Aettangr of over a hundred people, along with their families and slaves, boarded one ship. They also brought three Viking farmers skilled in animal husbandry—former Irish landowners who had grown up on ranches. These men were experts in tending and raising animals and could treat their ailments, making them essential for developing livestock farming in Greenland.

This single ship carried over two hundred people and was nearly at full capacity with supplies.

The other two ships were loaded with timber, food, and over five hundred White Wolf Warriors, who were still technically slaves belonging to Haldor and Haig. However, their management had been temporarily entrusted to Pikku. If they successfully conquered all the natives in Greenland, Haldor promised that those with outstanding achievements would be granted “elevated status,” becoming the highest-ranking Vikings under the command of General Haldor of the Viking Raid, no longer slaves.

After the three armed merchant ships departed from the southern bay of Hrut City, Haldor continued to lead the city’s ten thousand people in hunting and producing maple syrup. Meanwhile, the Thor’s Hammer, Hope, and a mixed-rigged schooner began fishing for cod in the eastern waters of Vinland, preparing fish for drying.

While the colonization and industrial development continued in and around Vinland, the three armed merchant ships, led by Captains Hilt, Brun, and Polly, had already left the waters near Vinland and were approaching Greenland to the north.

Several days later, the three ships reached the southern coast of Greenland and temporarily anchored to rest.

The northern part of Greenland was an uninhabited frozen wasteland, too cold even for the hardiest Inuit, who lived in the central and southern regions. Only the coastal areas within a few hundred kilometers could support human and animal life; beyond that lay glaciers.

Pikku lived on the eastern coast of Greenland, where the North Atlantic current made the temperature slightly higher than the western coast. However, the eastern coast was also filled with floating ice, making navigation difficult. Thus, the early Viking colonies in Greenland were established in the southern regions.

It was mid-March, and the northern parts of Vinland were still in the grip of winter, with temperatures below freezing. The floating ice on the eastern coast showed no signs of melting, making it impossible for ships to pass. Moreover, the eastern coast had far fewer Inuit than the western coast, making it an unsuitable place for establishing a colony.

The night before Pikku’s departure, Olaf and his servant had a long conversation. Olaf knew Pikku was a quick learner, brave, and sincere—a rare and valuable assistant. Though reluctant to let him go, Olaf had to send him for the sake of incorporating Greenland into Vinland’s territory. He did his best to advise Pikku.

Olaf’s knowledge of Greenland from his past life was limited. He knew it was a free state with some resources, but not ones that could be developed at present.

Olaf knew that in the future, the capital of Greenland, Nuuk, would be located on the southern part of the western coast. Since the Danes chose to establish a colony there two hundred years later, and it became the capital in later times, Nuuk must be the most suitable place for colonization.

Pikku remembered every word of advice his master had given him that night. Upon arriving in Greenland the next day, he set sail again, heading north to find the place called “Nuuk.”

Nuuk meant “cape” in the Inuit language. Every day, Pikku stood on the deck, looking east, hoping to see a large cape.

At noon the next day, Pikku finally spotted a massive cape on the northeastern coast, with a large strait to its south.

As the ship approached, Pikku realized it wasn’t a cape but a large island rising high above the sea, with a vast area.

Looking southeast from the island, several capes jutted out, making it ideal for ships of all sizes to navigate and dock. After a moment’s thought, Pikku decided this might be Nuuk and ordered the ship to approach.

An hour later, the three large ships discovered a natural harbor with a concave shape, perfect for docking.

After the ships docked, Pikku could see a dozen or so tents made of whale skin and bones on a distant hillside, round and plump like women, probably four or five thousand steps away, maybe even farther.

Seeing the whale skin tents, Pikku knew this must be the territory of a large tribe, as only great shamans and chiefs lived in such tents.

“Women and children, stay on the ship. Five hundred White Wolf Warriors and Viking men, follow me. Put on your leather armor and plate armor, take your weapons. Let’s conquer the nearby Inuit tribe first, and tonight we’ll sleep in warm whale skin tents.”

Pikku laughed heartily and stopped the Inuit women on the ship from packing their belongings to follow the men ashore. Then he issued his first combat order upon arriving in Greenland.

Over five hundred White Wolf Warriors, dressed in white wolf pelts and leather armor given by Haldor, gathered on the shore with sharp iron weapons like long swords and spears.

Fifty Inuit warriors also donned the full plate armor brought on the ship and stood beside the White Wolf Warriors with spears.

Pikku and the three captains, Hilt, Brun, and Polly, also changed into plate armor. Each carried a firelock musket, with short spears and large axes at their waists.

For this expedition to Greenland, Haldor had not given Pikku any firearms, only plate armor, leather armor, and weapons like spears and long swords.

Pikku’s firelock musket was a personal gift from Olaf for self-defense. The firearms carried by Hilt and the others were clearly rewards from Haldor.

Although Hilt and the others were only escorting Pikku to Greenland and had no hierarchical difference, they were not obligated to help Pikku fight. However, regardless of Pikku being Haldor’s personal slave, for the sake of the Viking Raid’s expedition victory and the interests of Hrut City, the three would not stand idly by.

Pikku also knew that these three white men, similar in age to him, were trusted subordinates of Haldor and Hrutik. Having interacted with them for many days, he had always been humble. Seeing the troops assembled, Pikku invited Hilt and the others to give the order. The three declined, stating they would follow his arrangements.

Pikku no longer stood on ceremony. Pointing to the distant hillside, he said, “That hillside is an Inuit tribe. The population is at most fifty, but it could be close to a hundred. Everyone, stay alert. While they haven’t reacted yet, move quickly. When we get close, the Viking soldiers will attack from the front, and the White Wolf Warriors will attack from the side.”

Pikku had learned much from Haldor, Haig, and Hrutik about troop deployment and tactical command. Now, mimicking their methods, he organized the troops systematically, earning the respect of Hilt and the others. They felt Haldor’s decision to send Pikku was well-considered.

Chapter 64: Journey to Europe

By the time Hilt and his two companions returned to Vinland from Greenland, it was already early April.

The temperature in Hrut City was growing warmer by the day. The Vikings, leading their slaves, were busy cultivating land outside the city and planting crops such as sweet potatoes, potatoes, rye, and barley—all cold-resistant and high-yielding. With these crops sown, a bountiful harvest would arrive by late autumn.

Currently, there were one thousand acres of land outside Hrut City. Jot, in charge of agriculture, planned to cultivate an additional four thousand acres during this golden spring planting season. Half would be planted with rye and other grains, while the other half would be dedicated to potatoes and sweet potatoes.

To better manage the farmland, Hrut City would establish several fortified village outposts among the fields this year. These would serve both to protect the crops from animals and to facilitate management.

As the land expanded, traveling to and from Hrut City on foot each day would waste too much energy and time. It was far more efficient to build small agricultural fortresses outside the city, allowing Vikings and some slaves to take turns residing there while tending to the crops.

This decision, proposed by Jot after careful consideration, was immediately implemented. Ten sites had already been selected outside the city, each overseen by an Aettangr. The remaining eight Aettangr would manage the farmland within and around the city.

Hilt and his two companions returned to Hrut City with a chest of walrus tusks, a massive whalebone, one hundred seal pelts, and three bear pelts. These gifts were spoils from the campaign led by Pikku and the three Vikings, along with the White Wolf Warriors, against the Inuit tribes. Most of the plunder had been sent to Haldor’s Fortress and presented to Haldor, the Viking Raid general and ruler of Vinland.

Haldor commended the three captains and rewarded each with ten slaves before waving them off as the goods were carried into storage.

Upon hearing the news, Olaf also rushed back to the fortress. Haig, Kadir, Heiner, Ulf, and others soon arrived as well. Haldor knew they were all concerned about Pikku’s colonization efforts in Greenland, so he had Polly and Brun recount the details.

Hilt, who stuttered slightly, could only smile as he listened to his two companions describe the thrilling expedition in Greenland.

“Twelve days ago, we first rested on an island at the southern tip of Greenland,” Polly began.

“When we reached Nuuk, we didn’t rest but immediately conquered an Inuit tribe of eighty people. Pikku said this was considered a large tribe since Inuit in Greenland usually live in groups of only ten or so,” Brun continued. “After conquering them, we enslaved them and ordered them to help transport goods and build a camp. Three days later, after constructing a simple camp with timber, we launched a campaign against eight nearby tribes, ultimately adding over three hundred slaves. However, one White Wolf Warrior was wounded in the foot by an Inuit warrior. Pikku rewarded all these slaves to the White Wolf Warriors.”

“With the camp established, we returned with these gifts.”

After listening to Polly and Brun, everyone understood that Pikku’s conquest of the Inuit had gone smoothly, just as expected. After all, the Inuit were no match for the White Wolf Warriors, especially with advanced weapons and Viking soldiers aiding them. Suffering only one injury to subdue over three hundred people was to be expected.

“Pikku will likely conquer the southern and western coasts centered around Nuuk this year. Since their population has just surged, food will be hard to secure. We should send more support. Once the fleet returns from Europe, we’ll send a shipment of grain and timber to Greenland,” Haldor said, rubbing his hands together with a smile.

Afterward, Haldor gathered the remaining Oarsmen leaders and decided in the meeting that the fleet would set sail for Europe at the end of the month to trade goods. Since Vinland had just been unified, many production and livelihood issues needed addressing, along with diplomatic relations with the New England and New France colonies. Haldor, Jot, Heiner, and the others were struggling to keep up.

Thus, this year, Olaf and Hrutik would stay behind to assist Haldor in managing Vinland, while Haig, Ulf, Brun, Polly, Hilt, and the others would handle the European trade.

Olaf knew he was still too young. Even if he went to Europe, he wouldn’t be able to change much. It was better to stay in Vinland and experiment with the two Aettangr’s Vikings and slaves—perhaps he could achieve something.

Last year, Hrutik, Haig, Ulf, Olaf, and others had gone to Europe to sell furs and royal jelly, returning with four ships and numerous weapons, equipment, and supplies. This year, the amount of furs and royal jelly was twenty and thirty times greater, respectively. Haldor instructed Haig and Ulf that this year, they only needed to bring back ten armed warships and enough weapons to equip one thousand Viking soldiers.

Haldor’s plan was for every Viking Raid soldier to have a firelock musket and plate armor. He felt there could never be too many weapons and equipment, especially with two restless neighbors nearby.

Besides weapons, equipment, and ships, Haldor also told Haig to pay special attention to artisans and technical personnel, particularly experts in mineral exploration and mining, as well as shipbuilders. In the future, Vinland would need its own shipbuilding industry and mining development; otherwise, purchasing ships, weapons, equipment, and ironware would consume most of their income.

Haldor promised Haig that no matter how high the salary, they must recruit suitable artisans to Hrut City. This was crucial for Vinland’s development and future prosperity.

Haldor’s realization was actually the result of Olaf’s persuasion. Initially, Haldor had no intention of developing industry in Vinland—at most, some handicrafts. But Olaf knew that a nation without an industrial foundation would be at the mercy of others.

Once the Thirty Years’ War ended, England and France would rapidly rise through the support of their overseas colonies, while Sweden, Holland, and Denmark would continue to advance.

If their small island on the eastern coast of North America didn’t take the initiative, it would eventually be contested and occupied by England and France. Forget about nation-building and counterattacking Europe—even their survival would be uncertain.

Olaf had explained to Haldor in simple terms that industry equaled productivity, which equaled military strength, which equaled national power. Haldor realized that for Vinland to develop and secure its place in this era of great contention, it must develop shipbuilding and mining industries. Without these, they couldn’t even protect themselves, let alone expand.

Six large ships were quickly loaded with furs, dried fish, and royal jelly—three types of goods.

“Don’t disgrace us Icelanders in Europe. If anyone dares to eye our wealth, teach them a harsh lesson,” Haldor said nervously as he oversaw the six ships of goods. Before departure, he reminded Haig and Ulf.

“Don’t worry, brother. My axe isn’t just for chopping wood,” Haig laughed heartily, patting the axe at his waist, which clanged loudly.

“Father, rest assured. We have over a hundred Viking warriors. Even if we have to slaughter an entire dock, it’ll be enough. I think only we can provoke others—no one dares to provoke us,” Ulf said with a cheerful laugh.

After a few more words, Haig, Ulf, and the others began inspecting the goods. Then, they bid farewell to Haldor and the others with embraces before boarding the ships with one hundred twenty sailors and twenty Viking soldiers.

On April 9, 1629, after a year of preparation, Hrut City in Vinland had gathered wealth worth hundreds of thousands of pounds of silver. The fleet, led by Haig and Ulf, carried the hopes and blessings of tens of thousands of people as they departed from Turning Point. Riding the winds of what would later be named the Gulf Stream, they sailed away, soon disappearing over the horizon.

This year’s fleet had departed twenty days earlier than last year. Currently, there were no English or French fishing boats in the southeastern waters of Vinland. However, based on estimates from several old servants who had lived in Vinland with Haig for nine years, Haldor and Ulf knew that in about ten days, English and French fishing boats would begin appearing in the southeastern waters of Vinland.

Haldor let out a cold snort in his heart. Gazing at the vast, boundless sea, his eyes gleamed as he muttered, “Just wait. In the future, no foreign ships will be allowed to sail and fish in Vinland’s waters.”

Chapter 65: Caution in Business

This time, Haig and Ulf led the expedition to Europe to sell goods and procure weapons, carrying the hopes of Vinland’s rise. They also had a few minor tasks, such as gathering intelligence on the progress of the war between the Catholic League and the Protestant Union, which had engulfed all of Europe.

Currently, Denmark represented the Protestant savior, though this savior was on its last legs. The rise and fall of Denmark concerned Haldor and the others in distant Vinland. If Denmark continued its triumphant march, it would prove the strength and invincibility of the Kingdom of Denmark, prompting Vinland to consider establishing friendly relations with them.

If Denmark was beaten to a pulp by the Habsburg League and forced to sue for peace, then a weakened and battle-worn Denmark would have no strength to interfere in the matter of Iceland’s sovereignty. Perhaps, after a few years, when Vinland had grown strong enough, Haldor could lead the Viking Raid army to sweep across Iceland, delivering a decisive blow to avenge past grievances, seize Iceland, and gain a foothold to peer into the European continent.

Thus, the outcome of the Thirty Years’ War would influence Haldor’s future choices in distant Vinland, North America.

Apart from gathering intelligence on the war’s progress, Ulf was also responsible for completing the deal Olaf and Kuiyi had negotiated last year with the Amsterdam Bank. If successful, Olaf’s long-coveted medicinal herbs like Isatis root would be within reach.

But that was impossible, as Song Yingxing only began writing his work in 1634, which was published in 1637. A book from eight years in the future was naturally unavailable now.

In April, Pikku, stationed in Greenland, led over a thousand slave followers to develop Nuuk, expanding their territory. They continuously conquered tribes near the western coast and Nuuk. Those nearby were reached on foot, while distant ones were accessed by small wooden boats. Almost every week, dozens of new slaves were added, along with a large quantity of furs.

As Nuuk’s population grew, Pikku instructed the Inuit slaves to use canoes to fish for food and attempt to capture and tame reindeer and muskoxen.

While Pikku worked hard to develop Nuuk, Haig and Ulf led their fleet swiftly toward Ireland, aided by the southwest wind.

In mid-April, the fleet arrived in Dublin. After paying the taxes, Haig and Ulf disembarked and visited their old customer, the Irish landowner Grey Bowers.

This time, after inspecting the goods, Bowers purchased fifty beaver pelts and over two hundred other furs, along with fifty jars of royal jelly. He praised the quality of Haig’s goods.

“Governor Stephen is also very satisfied with last year’s trade. You can go see him; perhaps he will buy some beaver pelts and royal jelly this year as well,” Bowers said, then ordered his servants to bring several boxes of gold shillings.

Without counting, Haig and Ulf had the sailors carry the boxes and then took their leave from Bowers.

After leaving Bowers’ villa, Haig intended to go directly to the governor’s mansion, but Ulf stopped him, saying, “Governor Stephen values noble etiquette. We should change into clean and elegant clothes before visiting to avoid offending him.”

Haig, unlike Haldor and Ulf, frowned and said, “Visiting noble lords is too uncomfortable. Ulf, you go alone. I’ll have Polly and Brun accompany you with some men.”

That afternoon, Ulf, dressed in new and elegant clothes, along with Polly and Brun, also neatly dressed, and five sailors, brought a beaver pelt, a white wolf pelt, and two jars of royal jelly as gifts to visit the Irish governor.

Governor Stephen, residing in Dublin Castle, received visitors daily, but common merchants and freemen without noble status were turned away by the guards.

The guards were unsure about Ulf’s identity. After inquiring, Ulf smiled and gave his name, adding that he was the son of Hrut of Iceland, fearing that Governor Stephen might have forgotten him.

About an hour later, a guard came out and said, “The governor says he knows you. Please come in. However, he was just napping and is still dressing. Please wait in the reception hall first.”

After a quick check, they were asked to leave their weapons at the door. The guard led Ulf into the first-floor hall, where a steward came out and had Polly and Brun stand far behind Ulf, while the sailors were asked to leave. Ulf waved for the sailors to put down the gifts and then said with a smile, “These are the beaver pelts and other furs, as well as royal jelly, I brought for the governor. It’s a small token of my regard and also the goods I intend to sell.”

The steward, a man in his thirties, nodded and had the gifts taken away, then said, “Please wait a moment. The governor will be here shortly.”

After the steward left, about half an hour later, Ulf, Polly, and Brun’s feet were numb from standing when they heard the creak of the door being pushed open. Governor Stephen, with his curly hair, entered in a woolen robe, smiling slightly at Ulf. “Young man, we meet again.”

Ulf quickly bowed in greeting and then greeted Stephen, who smiled in return before sitting in a chair inlaid with rubies and gesturing for Ulf to sit as well.

After Ulf sat down, Stephen didn’t immediately ask about his purpose but chatted idly for a while before saying, “You Icelanders have some tricks. The quality of last year’s beaver pelts was excellent. The big shots in the royal palace were very satisfied. Do you have more this year? I’d like to buy some more.”

Ulf smiled and said, “Thank you for your praise, sir. We braved the wind and snow to venture deep into the forests to procure some furs from the hands of the savage natives. This year, we were lucky to find new sources and brought over fifty beaver pelts, some other furs, and more royal jelly than previous years.”

“I’ve eaten a lot of royal jelly and found it quite good. Compared to sugar, royal jelly is clearly better for the body. I think I can take all your royal jelly.”

Ulf didn’t get excited upon hearing this, as last year they had told Stephen that furs and royal jelly were rare luxuries. So he knew what Stephen meant—Stephen must have thought Ulf’s ship only had a few dozen or hundred jars of royal jelly, hence his generous offer. If Stephen knew Ulf’s fleet had four thousand jars of royal jelly, he would surely be shocked and filled with greed and murderous intent after the initial surprise.

Ulf was no novice. He said in a low voice, “This time, we have over two hundred jars of royal jelly. Does the governor really need so much?”

“Oh,” Stephen raised an eyebrow, looking at Ulf, and said, “You’ve had quite a bit of luck this year. Leave it all. But the price this year will have to be cheaper.”

Ulf didn’t show excessive greed for money. After bargaining with Stephen’s steward, the price of royal jelly was settled at ninety percent of last year’s price. Then, after consulting with Stephen, the steward signed a contract with Ulf to purchase two hundred jars of royal jelly, fifty beaver pelts, eighty river otter pelts, thirty white wolf pelts, one hundred reindeer pelts, and other goods, totaling two thousand pounds. That evening, the steward, accompanied by soldiers, followed Ulf and his men back to the dock to transport the goods and paid with several boxes of gold and silver coins.

In all of Ireland, only Governor Stephen and Lord Bowers could afford such a large quantity of valuable goods at once. Other major merchants and landowners could buy some, but Ulf feared that selling more would reveal the vast quantity of precious furs and royal jelly in his fleet, leading to many troubles and dangers.

To avoid unnecessary trouble and crises, Ulf stopped after selling to the governor and Lord Bowers. The next morning, he went to find Rory O’More, intending to ask him to help purchase a batch of young and strong white slaves to strengthen Vinland’s forces.

Chapter 66: Turmoil Brewing in Ireland

Ulf had gone to visit Rory O’More but found only his steward in Dublin. After inquiring, he learned that O’More was still at his northern estate, which had been plagued by a series of serf suicides, leaving the northern landowners, including O’More, overwhelmed.

The steward, knowing Ulf was a business partner of his master, feared delaying important matters and sent someone to deliver a message to the north while asking Ulf to wait a few more days.

Ulf had considered seeking out other large landowners, but the quantity he needed was too great. Involving multiple families would complicate the transaction, so he decided it was better to wait for O’More’s return.

Three days later, in the afternoon, O’More’s steward arrived at the docks in a carriage to invite Ulf and Haig, saying that his master had returned home.

Ulf and Haig quickly disembarked and left in the carriage.

When they entered O’More’s villa, they saw him looking weary, his clothes still dusty from travel, clearly having just arrived.

“Brother O’More, how have you been?” Haig asked, shaking his hand and patting his forearm. “You don’t look well.”

O’More scratched his head, smoothing his red hair before inviting Haig and Ulf to sit. He sighed softly and said, “Recently, Charles and the Prime Minister have had Stephen accelerate the political persecution of the Irish under the guise of converting us to Protestantism, seizing our land and wealth.

At first, Stephen only acted in the north, which was manageable, but lately, Kilkenny has also seen many arrests by the governor’s troops. Several of my wife’s brothers and my sister’s fiancé have been persecuted. I’ve been busy trying to rescue them these past few days.”

Haig knew O’More considered him a friend and, given his frustration, could only vent to an outsider like himself. He offered words of comfort.

After a few exchanges, O’More’s steward brought beer. O’More took a sip and asked, “Are you still planning to purchase some white slaves this year? More and more Irish are losing their homes, land, and property. If you’re willing to take entire families as indentured servants, I think ten pence per person would be fair. I hope you can take in more of these poor souls so they can have a chance at life.”

O’More’s sincere request made Haig’s expression turn serious. He replied solemnly, “Brother, we will do as you say. This time, we plan to recruit over a thousand people. We can take entire households, regardless of age or gender, but the sick and the very elderly won’t be necessary. They likely wouldn’t survive the journey to the West Indies, and even if they did, they wouldn’t endure the conditions in North America.”

“Thank you,” O’More said, shaking Haig’s hand and nodding. “I will carefully select them for you. Your kindness will be remembered by the Irish.”

After finalizing some details, Haig and O’More prepared to take their leave. Suddenly, O’More’s gaze sharpened, and he spoke in a low voice, “I’d like to ask Brother Haig for a favor.”

Haig glanced at Ulf before asking, “What is it, brother?”

“With the unstable situation in Ireland, our ships are being inspected by the governor’s guards whenever they enter or leave port. I need you to help me purchase some weapons and smuggle them back. Don’t worry, the price will be fair.”

O’More cleared his throat and continued, “The English are tightening their grip. We Irish must prepare early, or we won’t even have a chance to resist.”

Though Haig wasn’t well-versed in politics, he sensed O’More’s rebellious intentions. Since he had no ties to the English and a good relationship with O’More, he smiled and said, “Of course. What kind of weapons do you need?”

“Here’s the order. I’ll have my steward send two hundred pounds of gold as a deposit. The delivery location remains the same. When you arrive, we’ll settle the remaining balance. Whatever you can get will be fine.” O’More took a piece of paper from his pocket and handed it to Haig.

Haig glanced at it and saw items like “firelock muskets,” “12-pound cannons,” and other weapons. His heart raced, realizing O’More was serious about rebelling against England. Excited by the prospect of chaos, he smiled, tucked the list away, and promised to fulfill the request.

An hour after Haig and Ulf returned to the docks, six large ships slowly set sail.

Inside the cabin, Ulf and Haig looked at the list, unable to hide their astonishment.

“1,500 firelock muskets, 500 boxes of lead shot and gunpowder,

2,000 long spears, 1,200 sets of plate armor,

2,000 crossbows, 10 12-pound cannons, and ammunition.”

Comparing the prices from last year’s weapon purchases in Amsterdam, Haig and Ulf quickly estimated that the weapons on this list were worth five to six hundred thousand Dutch guilders. The two hundred pounds of gold O’More had given them would only amount to a little over fifty thousand guilders—far from enough.

“Should we help them buy the weapons? Even if we do, the money O’More gave us is way too little,” Haig asked Ulf.

Having worked together for years, Haig had grown accustomed to seeking Ulf’s opinion on such matters, as he wasn’t one to dwell on details.

Ulf hesitated before saying, “O’More gave us two hundred pounds of gold, which seems to be the value he places on your friendship. Any more, and he might not trust us.

He says he needs this many weapons, but he also said he’ll take whatever we can get. He probably assumes we won’t front the money to buy everything on the list. But since we were already planning to buy weapons for the Viking soldiers, we can just purchase extra and include O’More’s order. Maybe we can even make a profit.”

“Alright,” Haig nodded. “I think we should help them.”

“The English have been too unjust to the Irish. O’More has always resented the English king in London. If we help him, we’ll gain his friendship, earn some money, and make future recruitment of indentured servants much easier.”

Haig’s words were sincere. Ulf thought for a moment and added, “Yes, uncle. But you’re missing one point. If the Irish and English fight among themselves, it will benefit Vinland’s position and interests in North America. New England will be weakened and unable to threaten us in the future. Even my father would approve of us helping O’More.”

“You’re right,” Haig said after a moment’s thought, clapping his hands. “Ulf, you think more thoroughly than I do. Publicly and privately, we should lend O’More a hand. It seems our major purchase this year will be arms and weapons.”

“The pan-European war isn’t over yet. Every country is probably working overtime to produce weapons. Now is the perfect time to buy.”

Ulf smirked and stood up, looking behind him. The sea was turbulent, and the sky was filled with dark clouds, as if brewing a spring storm.

In the distant mist, the island of Ireland gradually blurred. Ulf thought of how he and his uncle had become epic heroes and suddenly felt a surge of spirit. Gazing at the sky, he said, “Ireland’s future may also be turbulent, with thunder and lightning. But what role will we play in it?”

Chapter 67: The Development of Light Industry

Haig and Ulf leading the fleet away from Vinland had no impact on anyone in Hrut City.

The Vikings of Hrut City, along with their slaves, had been busy since March, clearing land and planting crops. By mid-April, when the weather had fully warmed, they had finally completed this year’s spring planting.

Jot’s planned cultivation target had barely been met. Every day, he rode his horse, inspecting the various village outposts and observing the sprouting crops in the fields.

Vinland’s soil was as fertile as the black earth of the northeast. Additionally, last autumn’s harvest had seen the fields burned, clearing away weeds and stalks. As a result, none of Vinland’s land required fallowing to restore fertility. The crop rotation model commonly used in the West was not yet necessary in Vinland.

After the spring planting was complete, the third phase of construction in Hrut City began. Meanwhile, dozens of newly built Viking longships, crafted from timber felled by the Vikings, were launched into the sea for fishing. Everyone was busy, gradually improving Hrut City.

Olaf led his two Aettangr groups, not only planting potatoes, sweet potatoes, and various vegetables but also experimenting with planting squash, corn, and beans—the “Three Sisters” of the Indians—in the trial fields by the river. Additionally, they were cultivating tomatoes, which Europeans currently considered ornamental plants.

Olaf believed that if the Three Sisters and tomatoes were successfully cultivated this year, the planting industry model in Vinland would continue to change next year.

After all, cornmeal and squash were rich in sugar and starch, and their taste was excellent. Although Olaf didn’t particularly like beans, they were still a vegetable, and their protein content was essential for the human body. To some extent, beans could replace meat, making them a necessary food in Vinland.

As for tomatoes, Olaf was determined to cultivate them simply to satisfy his own culinary desires.

The next step would be to fry potatoes and dip them in tomato sauce, which would undoubtedly enrich the backward dining culture of the people in Vinland.

After the spring planting was complete, Olaf applied to Haldor to explore and experiment with handicrafts.

Haldor knew that his second son never acted without purpose, so he reassigned most of the skilled craftsmen among the Vikings to Olaf’s command. The remaining were only construction workers, who continued to lead the slaves in expanding Hrut City.

After questioning over forty craftsmen, Olaf divided them into groups. The majority were carpenters, stonemasons, and leatherworkers, making up more than half. There were also three blacksmiths, five shoemakers, six potters, one pen maker, and four professional shipbuilders.

Among these, only the four shipbuilders, five carpenters, and three leatherworkers were Icelanders. The rest were white slaves from Ireland and Scotland.

These craftsmen were all delighted to work under Olaf. They had long heard through various channels about the extraordinary abilities of the young master. Especially the twelve Icelanders, who were all former villagers of White Hazel Forest Hrut Village. According to distant familial relations, Olaf should address them as cousins or uncles.

Olaf knew that after Hrut City had secured Vinland, there was essentially no crisis on the island. They could now focus on development and management. After ensuring the intake of essentials like food, they needed to improve light industry and promote products related to daily life, achieving self-sufficiency.

Wood was abundant in Vinland, making the production of wooden goods the easiest and most convenient. This was the material carpenters needed.

The pen maker could use feathers and various plant and mineral powders to process quill pens and ink.

Stonemasons could use stone to craft small furniture and items, such as rolling pins and mortars. The raw materials were readily available and could be mined from Razor Mountain.

Leatherworkers and shoemakers had an almost endless supply of hides on Vinland Island. There was no need to worry about a shortage of materials for making leather clothes and shoes; the only concern was whether there were enough hands.

The only troublesome ones were the potters, shipbuilders, and blacksmiths.

Currently, Vinland had no iron mines, coal mines, or many tools. The potters and blacksmiths had little to do.

Additionally, due to the limitations of tools and technology, the shipbuilders could not build large ships. The small, primitive Viking longships were sufficient for now, and shipbuilding could not be done within Haig Fortress.

Therefore, Olaf decided to temporarily reassign these craftsmen to work as carpenters and stonemasons.

The Icelandic colonists had been in Vinland for nearly nine years, but due to the small population, the deforestation was not significant. However, in the past two years, with the construction of Hrut City and the building of Viking longships for fishing, the timber on the southeastern peninsula had been severely depleted. Haldor had already ordered that if more wood was needed, they would have to sail to the interior of Vinland to fell trees, to prevent the southeastern peninsula from becoming barren.

Olaf’s purpose in gathering the craftsmen was to develop light industry in Vinland, addressing the second shortcoming of Vinland’s social model after the food shortage.

After more than three hours of discussion, Olaf had a clear understanding of the skills and characteristics of the forty-four craftsmen under him. He then had the craftsmen bring their slaves from home. Olaf also brought the Viking youths and slave youths from his Aettangr, totaling over a hundred people, to Haig Fortress in the north of Hrut City.

Since the completion of Hrut City, Haig Fortress had been uninhabited. Initially, it was used as a warehouse, but after the full completion of Haldor Fortress, the large amount of supplies and military equipment were stored in the warehouses of Haldor Fortress, and Haig Fortress lost even its warehouse function, remaining idle.

Olaf was very satisfied with the size and spatial layout of Haig Fortress. He brought the craftsmen, youths, and slaves here to build Vinland’s first factory within Haig Fortress.

Olaf made over eighty white and native youths apprentices to the craftsmen, following their respective masters to learn skills. He then allocated the various halls of Haig Fortress to the craftsmen as production workshops, and the original warehouses were used as raw material storage.

After everything was arranged, Olaf gathered everyone in the meeting hall. He first announced that Haig Fortress would be renamed Olaf’s Factory and explained that he would provide raw materials such as wood, hides, and stone. He would employ them to produce handicrafts for Hrut City, with payment in dried fish, food, and silver coins.

To motivate everyone, Olaf offered very generous rewards. Compared to other jobs, these craftsmen were more than willing to become part of Olaf’s Factory, both emotionally and in terms of compensation.

“Don’t worry, Master Olaf, we will definitely follow your arrangements.”

“Yes, we will definitely work hard, Master.”

“I, old Hanim, was a famous shoemaker in Northern Ireland. Many landlords came to me for shoes. Don’t worry, I will give it my all to make shoes that satisfy you, Master.”

Listening to the craftsmen’s noisy pledges of loyalty, Olaf didn’t say anything. He just smiled and nodded. His demeanor didn’t seem like that of a twelve-year-old boy but rather a steady and mature adult. His manner, combined with his tall stature and deliberately mature clothing and hairstyle, made the craftsmen and apprentices see him as a sixteen or seventeen-year-old young adult.

Olaf’s demeanor and speech always made people forget his age. This was something Olaf intentionally cultivated. After all, it was obvious which was more convincing—a twelve-year-old child or a nearly adult teenager. If he wanted to do things independently, he had to make others trust him. Making himself appear older and more mature was the most basic operation.

After all the craftsmen had pledged their loyalty, Olaf cleared his throat and pointed to old Galdur, who was also an Icelander and the closest relative to his family. Galdur was a man in his fifties, short but sturdy, with skin yellowed by years of wind and sun. His red nose and the occasional burps that smelled of alcohol proved he was a drinker. According to their familial relations, Galdur was Olaf’s distant cousin, but they didn’t care much about this relationship. After all, distant relatives were not uncommon among Icelanders.

“Old Galdur is skilled in masonry, carpentry, and shipbuilding. He will serve as the workshop supervisor, responsible for managing everyone’s production and coordinating issues.”

Before Galdur could thank him, Olaf continued, “Starting tomorrow, the first batch of raw materials will enter the factory. Please familiarize yourselves with them as soon as possible and lead the apprentices in producing simple production tools. Next week, I will issue production standards. Those who do not meet the standards will have a portion of their wages deducted, while the top three who complete the tasks will receive double rewards.”

Chapter 68: Champlain’s Overture

With the establishment of Olaf’s factory, Haldor ordered the first batch of supplies to be delivered to the factory warehouse. These included logs of various sizes from over a dozen felled trees, as well as stones of different shapes and sizes, reindeer hides, and sealskin and walrus hides.

The factory then began operations.

The tanners and cobblers selected different parts of the hides for tanning, cutting, and manufacturing. Softer hides like reindeer and seal were typically used for clothing, while walrus, old deer, and sea lion hides were used for shoes after removing the fur and cutting and sewing them. For single shoes, the sole was folded five layers thick, and the upper was made from one layer. For boots, a smooth hide was lined with a soft, furry hide.

The tools used by the tanners and cobblers for making clothes and shoes were small knives and scissors, which they carried with them. However, since thread was unavailable, they temporarily used soft strips of hide as thread, and needles were replaced with sharpened wolf teeth for sewing.

The carpenters made wooden basins, combs, plates, bowls, and cutlery. Sometimes, they worked with stonemasons to create tools like stone hammers and hoes with wooden handles. Many craftsmen also wove containers and baskets from vines.

After inspecting the finished products, Olaf was very satisfied. He believed that after meeting the needs of Vinland’s ten thousand people, the factory’s products could also be sold to the colonists of New England and New France, as well as the Indian tribes on the American continent. These three factions were all in need of such daily necessities for various reasons, and manufacturing and selling them would surely bring substantial returns.

After the factory started operating, Olaf called Old Galdur and six potters. He led them up the eastern slope of Razor Mountain, pointing to the slopes beneath their feet and the distant hills, saying, “From today onward, you will search for clay suitable for pottery. Vinland’s geology and size must contain a lot of clay. Pottery making is the direction of our future development.”

The seven men quickly agreed and hurriedly left Hrut City with their weapons to search for clay.

Although Olaf wasn’t very knowledgeable about making pottery and porcelain, he knew that both required clay. Strictly speaking, clay wasn’t just soil but the crystallization of mineral weathering. That’s why it became sturdy after high-temperature firing without cracking like ordinary soil.

From what Olaf remembered, clay could be found in white or light-colored rocks like mica, kaolin, and asbestos, though there were other colors as well. Essentially, they all contained substances like calcium, aluminum, and magnesium.

Vinland definitely had similar mines; the only difference was the concentration. Once found, they could refine pottery. If they could get their hands on it and study it thoroughly, they might even be able to make porcelain. If Vinland could produce porcelain, even common white or coarse porcelain, it would be enough to become a wealthy and powerful nation.

While Olaf was pondering the knowledge of making pottery and porcelain in the factory, a thirty-something-year-old yellow-skinned Viking soldier suddenly walked in and said, “Young Master Olaf, the general asks you to come over.”

Olaf was startled awake and then got up to ride his white horse in the courtyard.

In Vinland, one’s identity could be discerned from their title. Only Vikings called Haldor “general,” while other slaves had to address him as “lord of the city” or “lord of the Heavenly God.”

Olaf followed the yellow-skinned Viking soldier out of the factory and back to the government building in front of the council hall in Hrut City.

After dismounting, the Viking soldier said in broken Icelandic, “Young Master Olaf, the general is waiting for you in the council hall. Please go in.”

Olaf nodded, then dismounted and handed the reins to the soldier before walking into the government building. He went upstairs and pushed open the door to the council hall.

In the center of the council hall was a large square table with over a dozen sofas. Haldor was seated in the east, along with Jot, Hrutik, Hoskuld, Kadir, and Heiner. They were talking when they saw Olaf enter. Jot pointed to the letters on the table and said, “Look, a letter from Mr. Champlain.”

Olaf walked over and glanced at it, finding that Champlain had written in Latin with a humble and polite tone, clearly requesting to establish an alliance with Vinland. This was a stark contrast to his behavior last year, which puzzled Olaf. He asked, “Why has Champlain suddenly changed his attitude?”

Hoskuld sneered and said, “Francis just came with a French priest sent by Champlain to deliver the letter. Haldor hasn’t decided how to respond yet, so he sent them down to eat first. Haldor wants us to discuss how to handle this.”

“Uncle, what are your thoughts?” Olaf nodded and asked.

“Francis said that this winter, Quebec and the other two outposts almost starved. In the spring, the English still targeted them, which worsened the famine in New France. I think Champlain couldn’t reach an agreement with the English, so he had to turn to us for help,” Hoskuld said in a mocking tone.

“So, my opinion, along with Kadir’s and Hrutik’s, is to refuse to help the French.”

“Then, Uncle Jot and Heiner, you want to help the French?” Olaf looked at Heiner.

Jot nodded, and Heiner, who had a neatly trimmed beard, stroked it and said, “I think the English aren’t good neighbors. If we can show kindness to New France now and pull them completely to our side, dealing with New England in the future will be much easier.”

Olaf fell into deep thought. Haldor looked at his most promising second son and softly asked, “Olaf, what do you think?”

Olaf had previously stated that the best situation in North America was to maintain a balance of power among the three factions. However, now the weakest, New France, was extending an olive branch to the currently stronger Vinland. If Vinland accepted, New England would feel threatened and might turn against Vinland, which wasn’t a good thing.

But if Vinland didn’t help Champlain, it wouldn’t be in Vinland’s interest either. It would allow New England to drive out the French, leading to a confrontation between Vinland and New England.

Between two evils, Olaf thought it was better to accept New France’s offer of friendship rather than let New England eliminate the weak New France and drive out Champlain. Although this might offend New England, it would curb their expansionist ambitions, which would be more beneficial for Vinland’s stable development in the long run.

“I suggest we help Champlain,” Olaf said firmly, looking up.

With Vinland’s current strength, it could actually sweep through New France and New England without much loss, but losing these two neighbors wouldn’t benefit Vinland at all. Vinland was still in its early stages and didn’t have the strength to expand into the continental mainland, let alone get involved in wars with the native tribes.

Moreover, the French and English wouldn’t accept defeat easily. If they came back, it would be Vinland against two wolves, which wouldn’t be a good thing.

Therefore, keeping New France and letting them compete with New England would not only deplete the native tribes on the continent but also make them consume each other’s resources, giving Vinland time and space to develop.

At the same time, Vinland could gain some initiative through trade and exchanges with the two colonies, and even establish connections with the countries behind them. In the future, when attacking places like Iceland in Europe, the French and English could provide indirect assistance.

Chapter 69: Aid for Quebec City

Olaf’s attitude became the final straw that broke the camel’s back.

Haldor made his decision to assist New France and once again received Francis and the priestly messenger from Quebec.

Francis, clad in a leather armor cloak, entered with an elderly priest. He first greeted Haldor, then said, “Thank you for your hospitality. The cuisine of Hrut City has been most satisfying.”

Haldor smiled and invited the two to sit before asking, “We are aware of Governor Champlain’s goodwill. Now, I would like to ask you, Francis, and Father Gethin, just how dire is New France’s situation?”

Father Gethin was fluent in English, French, and Danish, so Haldor communicated with them in English. The old priest understood perfectly but still looked to Francis. As a mere messenger, his status and authority were far inferior to Francis’, so whether to answer depended on Francis’ attitude.

Francis knew that cooperation with Vinland required sincerity and honesty, so he had no intention of concealing the truth.

Spreading his hands, he said, “Things are better in Gaspé where I am, but Quebec is truly on the verge of collapse. Last month, five sick indentured servants starved to death. Governor Champlain has instructed me to secure an alliance between Vinland and New France and to request aid from Lord Haldor. As a gesture of goodwill, he is willing to cede the Basque whaling station at Red Bay and its surrounding lands on the north shore to Vinland.”

Haldor let out a hearty laugh. Though he knew Champlain would offer Vinland benefits to win him over, he hadn’t expected Champlain to give him an entire outpost. This made Haldor even more aware of Champlain’s desperate situation. Inwardly, he scoffed: Champlain, you don’t understand your own predicament or the state of North America.

If Olaf had said this, it would have been: Last year, you ignored me, but this year, you won’t even be worthy of my attention.

Though Haldor inwardly despised Champlain’s shortsightedness, he maintained a composed exterior and laughed, saying, “Since Governor Champlain is so sincere, I am deeply moved. And for the sake of my friendship with you, Brother Bourbon, I have decided to ally with Governor Champlain and provide you with sufficient supplies.”

Francis’ face lit up with pride. As a nobleman, he valued face and honor as much as any Chinese person, and his admiration for Haldor grew. He and Father Gethin both pressed their hands to their chests in a gesture of gratitude.

“How much grain do you need?” Haldor asked.

Before Francis could speak, Father Gethin lifted his eyelids and said, “We need three thousand pounds of flour, as well as salt, butter, and meat.”

Haldor laughed heartily and was about to agree when Olaf suddenly nudged his foot and tugged at his father’s sleeve.

Haldor raised an eyebrow, cleared his throat, and turned to Olaf, asking, “Olaf, Jot, do you know how much grain we have left in the city? Is it enough to support our friends in New France?”

Francis and Father Gethin were too far away to see Olaf’s subtle actions, but Jot, Heiner, and the others saw it clearly.

Jot wasn’t quick-witted and didn’t understand Olaf’s meaning, but he knew Olaf must have a reason, so he remained silent. Olaf leaned in and said, “Father, our grain stores were already low after last autumn’s harvest. After the winter, we have almost nothing left. We have thousands of people to feed every day.”

Haldor and the others were taken aback by Olaf’s words. They knew last year’s harvest had been bountiful, and even after winter, with the continuous hunting and fishing since spring, the military fortress and Haldor’s stronghold still had plenty of grain, fish, and meat. Giving some to Champlain wouldn’t be a problem.

But Olaf’s words made them all pause, realizing that the boy rarely spoke up on his own, so if he did, there must be a reason.

After Olaf spoke, the atmosphere grew tense. Francis and Father Gethin’s faces reddened with embarrassment, feeling they had put Haldor in a difficult position.

“If we have caused you trouble, Lord Haldor, we can ask for less,” Father Gethin said, his voice growing weaker. As a respected priest, he had spent decades receiving offerings from people, but this was the first time he had to beg for food, which made him increasingly uneasy.

Olaf winked at Jot, who also stood up and complained to Haldor about the hard work and effort he had put in to ensure the city’s people were well-fed, emphasizing that if Francis took the grain, the people of Hrut City would go hungry.

Haldor knew Olaf and Jot were lying but couldn’t expose them. Instead, he understood Olaf’s intention.

He frowned at the embarrassed Francis, slammed his hand on the table with a loud bang, and said, “Enough! Do you have the heart to watch Governor Champlain and the people of New France starve to death?

Moreover, since Brother Bourbon has come in person, I must help them. Prepare the amount Father Gethin requested, Jot. If necessary, we will eat less ourselves, but we cannot let our French brothers go hungry.”

With a grand gesture, Haldor spoke with righteous compassion, moving Francis and Father Gethin deeply.

“May God bless you, Lord Haldor. You are truly a great benefactor.”

“Haldor, my brother, I will remember your help forever.”

For Champlain and Francis, they believed that Haldor’s continuous conquests of the natives last year and the large increase in slave populations must have made feeding everyone difficult. They had little confidence in whether they could bring back food, let alone how much.

After all, the French couldn’t imagine that Hrut City had enough hunters, fishermen, and farmers, nor that they could mobilize everyone, including the natives, to vigorously develop agriculture, fishing, and hunting.

The different ways New France and New England treated the natives and developed their colonies led to an imbalance in the strength of the two settlements.

Similarly, the development models, components, leadership cores, and even the mindset of New France, New England, and Vinland were all different, so neither could comprehend Vinland’s foundation. They were even more shocked that Haldor could lead the Icelanders to unify Vinland.

In a future joint research project between Oxford and Cambridge universities on Vinland’s colonial culture, tens of thousands of words were devoted to explaining why Vinland, as a North American colony, could quickly establish itself and leave New France, New England, and New Netherland far behind.

The text naturally credited the great contributions of the North European dragon, the lion tamer, and His Highness Olaf Haldorsson, but beyond Olaf, there were also Vinland’s unique environment, location, and resources, as well as the Beothuk people’s less fierce nature compared to the mainland natives. Overall, it was a combination of coincidence and inevitability.

According to the evaluation of the proletarian leader Karl Marx centuries later: “The success of Haldor, Ulf, and Olaf in colonizing Vinland and North America had various reasons, but fundamentally, it was similar to the rapid expansion of the Manchus in the Far East with tens of thousands of people and land. It was a product of the times.

They possessed the unique characteristics and cohesion of that era, which neither later generations nor other rulers of the time could imitate or learn.

If Haldor and his sons had not colonized America and oppressed the natives, if they had not been the first to lead the European proletariat, who had lost their wealth, to America to build a homeland with their own hands as bourgeoisie and feudal lords, I might have respected Haldor and Olaf.

But when I think of how, apart from elevating a few natives to become citizens known as Vikings, their enslavement and oppression of most natives was no different from other colonizers, I can no longer respect them.

To be blunt, Haldor was a traditional feudal lord and military leader, while Olaf seemed to hold some universal values, but only for the people he ruled.”

Chapter 70: The Unfathomable Human Heart

In the end, under Haldor’s firm insistence, Francis and Gethin left with gratitude toward him and guilt toward the people of Hrut Village. They quickly took their leave, boarding a ship loaded with flour, dried fish, dried meat, and animal fats, departing from the newly built makeshift dock at the mouth of the Muskox River. They then followed the Saint Lawrence River westward, planning to deliver the food directly to Quebec City on the northern shore of the midstream. If they delayed any longer, they feared Governor Champlain might also fall ill from hunger.

The next day, before dawn, Francis’s ship arrived at the port of Quebec City. The soldiers, weakened by hunger, and Francis’s men worked together to unload the supplies. They then cooked a large pot of fish and meat porridge with flour. Only after all eighty-three people in Quebec City had eaten their fill did their faces once again show expressions of satisfaction.

“How wonderful it is to feel full again,” Champlain said, setting down his bowl and patting his stomach. He looked at Francis and Gethin, who sat before him.

“The food our merchant ship carried wasn’t much, but it was enough to sustain us for a while. I was planning to hold out a little longer, thinking the first batch of ships would arrive in a few days. But I didn’t expect the English to support the Iroquois in attacking the Huron camps. We lost the Hurons’ support, and I was about to give in and negotiate with the English for a temporary withdrawal. Fortunately, your shipment of food arrived just in time,” Champlain said.

Champlain was originally an explorer and had no understanding of the refinements of officials and nobles. Thus, his words and actions were much cruder than Francis’s. He glanced at his lover, Elise, who had just finished her meat porridge. She smiled lightly, picked up her utensils, and left.

“To be honest, I didn’t have high hopes for your alliance with Vinland and your request for their support. But it seems you’ve convinced their leader. Francis and Gethin, your contributions to New France are etched in my heart, and I will surely repay you,” Champlain said solemnly, bowing to the two of them before inquiring about the details.

Upon learning that Haldor had insisted on sending food despite the risk of his own slaves going hungry, Champlain was slightly moved. He knew Vinland’s food supply wouldn’t be abundant, but he hadn’t expected it to be so tight. Thinking about how they had just survived a harsh winter with severe food consumption, Champlain understood and admired, “I didn’t expect Haldor to be such an upright and kind man. No wonder his subordinates admire him so much and fight for him, conquering all of Vinland. If I get the chance, I must meet him in person.”

“Yes, Haldor is a straightforward, brave, and kind man. Our alliance with him means we no longer have to worry about the cunning English,” Francis praised Haldor without hesitation.

“Governor, Haldor has shown his sincerity and determination. How should we respond?” Gethin asked. “Should we inform the people of New England about our alliance with Vinland? Perhaps they will fear Vinland’s strength and maintain peaceful relations with us.”

“The English are not ignorant fools who can be intimidated so easily. Even if they know about our alliance with Vinland, unless they suffer losses or see Vinland willing to go to war for us, they will continue to oppose us,” Champlain said, shaking his head slightly.

“Then—”

Champlain suddenly raised his eyebrows and said, “I think we can invite Haldor to come and sign the alliance, showing our willingness to help Vinland enter the interior of the continent. This will be our sincerity.

After signing the alliance, we can invite their soldiers to explore the North American continent with us. We can use Vinland’s strong military force to defeat the Iroquois tribes. This way, we can suppress the natives who oppose us and deter the English. After all, the Iroquois Confederacy has the English behind them.”

“Excellent,” Gethin’s expression changed, and he smiled. “Governor, you are truly someone the Prime Minister values. I wouldn’t have thought of this.”

Francis said in a deep voice, “Governor, you want to use Haldor and his men.”

“It’s not about using them,” Champlain said, glancing at Francis, whose mood seemed off. He chuckled, “You’re still young and don’t understand that human interactions are about mutual assistance. We help Vinland enter the interior, giving them maps and the distribution of the natives, and the opportunity to develop the continent with us. This is a win-win situation. Then, they help us defeat the Iroquois who threaten the land we all want to develop. Isn’t this their duty?

This benefits both of us without harm. I hope you understand that without benefits, Vinland wouldn’t help us for free.”

Francis wasn’t a naive young man who didn’t understand politics. His character just made him more inclined to be a gentleman. After a moment of thought, he said, “Governor, you’re right. I was being presumptuous.”

Soon, Champlain finished writing the letter and looked at Francis, asking, “Who should deliver the letter and invite Haldor to bring his soldiers here?”

Francis sighed and said, “I’ll go.”

After taking the letter, Francis turned and left the governor’s residence, preparing to return to Vinland by ship.

After a while, Gethin noticed Champlain’s displeasure and approached him, whispering, “Champlain, you don’t need to be angry. I think Francis didn’t mean to offend you. He’s still young and gets easily moved by those who treat him well, like Haldor.”

Champlain coldly snorted and asked, “What do you think of Haldor?”

“He’s very straightforward and sincere in his words and actions, tall and strong, clearly a man of great strength. I think having a good relationship with him will be very beneficial to us,” Gethin said thoughtfully. “To be honest, he does have the charisma of a leader. From what I’ve gathered in Vinland, he was originally a leader in Iceland, so his methods and demeanor are excellent. It’s normal for Bourbon to have some connection with him.”

“I don’t care about Bourbon’s personal connections. I’m just worried that if Francis sides with Haldor in the future, I, as the governor of New France, will have no authority.”

Champlain looked at Gethin and whispered, “In a few days, I will write a letter to the Prime Minister. Please deliver it to him personally. I hope to replace Francis with a French military officer I can control, not a noble officer who relies on his family’s power and is disrespectful.”

“Understood, I will be happy to serve,” Gethin bowed and then stood up.

Francis left Quebec with his guards, sailing eastward down the river. By the afternoon of the same day, he arrived at Turning Point in Vinland, turned the ship around, and entered the Muskox River, docking at the pier.

After disembarking, Francis rode a horse straight north to Hrut City.

Half an hour later, as the sky gradually darkened, Francis took off his cloak and sat on a sofa in Haldor’s castle. Across from him were Haldor, Hrutik, and Olaf.

Upon learning of Francis’s purpose, Haldor happily took the letter, opened it, and read for a moment before saying, “I am very happy to establish an alliance with Governor Champlain. He invites me to bring a group of soldiers in early May. After signing the alliance, we will explore the regions west of Quebec together. I think this is a great idea. What do you think?”

Hrutik and Olaf naturally had no objections, but Francis suddenly spoke urgently, “Champlain actually wants to lead your soldiers to help him defeat the Iroquois tribes. I consider us friends, so I don’t want to hide this from you. If you don’t want to, you can refuse.”

Haldor laughed heartily upon hearing this, stood up, and deeply embraced Francis before saying, “Thank you, my brother. May I call you Francis?”

After getting Francis’s approval, Haldor said, “I don’t think Champlain’s idea is an offense to me. He clearly knows my strength, so it’s normal for him to want to use me to help him clear out his enemies. If he didn’t have this mind, I don’t believe the French officials would have made him the governor of New France. I don’t mind this. I only care about you.

I care about my friend’s attitude toward me. Francis, I am very moved that you said this. Rest assured, I will wholeheartedly help you drive away the natives. In the future, in the eastern part of the continent, I also hope you, as a local expert, will help me gain enough territory. The whaling station is really too small. I heard from my Beothuk subordinates that it’s not even a third the size of Hrut City.”

“Don’t worry, my friend,” Francis’s eyes reddened as he thought about how he and Haldor had come to know each other. He felt that Haldor had always taken care of him in many ways and never treated him as an enemy or outsider. This made his heart surge with warmth, and he couldn’t help but grasp Haldor’s hand tightly, saying sincerely, “As long as Vinland needs it, I will do my duty without hesitation.”

Chapter 71: The Alliance

That evening, Haldor drank heavily with Francis in the castle until midnight before instructing Katrin to prepare the most spacious guest room for Francis to rest.

The next day, Haldor and Hrutik led Francis on a tour of Hrut City before inviting him to drink again.

The Icelanders treated their close friends by hosting them in their own homes, sharing meals and drinks—the most intimate gesture and the highest honor.

After two consecutive days of unrestrained drinking, Francis could no longer hold his liquor. He felt as though he hadn’t even sobered up before getting drunk again. In his intoxicated state, he spoke without restraint, as if all the troubles of work and life were pouring out like urine.

In his hazy, drunken thoughts, Francis had heard before about the astonishing drinking capacity of the Norse and their warm hospitality. Only now did he truly experience it. Though he felt a faint fear of such fervor, he also found himself drawn to it.

After three days of living in a drunken daze at Haldor’s fortress, the month turned to May.

May in Vinland brought even warmer temperatures, and Olaf felt it was nearly ten degrees Celsius.

That morning, Haldor assembled thirty Viking warriors of Icelandic descent, thirty Viking warriors who had once been white slaves, and forty White Wolf Warriors, totaling one hundred guards.

By nine in the morning, Haldor, Hrutik, and Olaf, accompanied by soldiers, sailors, and Francis, bid farewell to their families. They carried sixty firelock muskets, plate armor, bows and arrows, and other weapons before departing Hrut City. Since this trip was to form an alliance in Quebec, Haldor brought Olaf along to broaden his horizons.

Haldor and his men boarded three large Viking longships, while Francis boarded his own smaller armed merchant ship. The four wooden vessels slowly left the harbor, sailing westward along the Saint Lawrence Bay. They made a brief stop at Anticosti Island near the river’s mouth, where Francis explained to Haldor and the others about the Gaspé camp he had established on the southern shore.

Through the mist, Haldor caught a glimpse of the distant peninsula and praised Francis warmly. Francis, pleased with himself, led Haldor’s ships further westward up the river until the channel narrowed, and they saw a large island blocking the center of the river. Only then did the ships slow down.

“This is Orleans Island. Once you pass through the northern or southern channels, you’ll see Quebec City,” Francis said, standing on the deck and pointing ahead as the ships bearing the flag of the French kingdom sailed slowly forward.

Haldor remained silent, but Hrutik sneered and muttered, “Orleans is a province in France. The place names in New France are almost the same as those in France. It just shows that the French and the English lack both knowledge and imagination when naming their colonies.”

Olaf, however, had no interest in mocking the French naming conventions. He licked his lips, suddenly recalling the “Orleans roasted wings” he had loved in his past life. But that delicacy would not appear for hundreds of years, so he could only reminisce in his heart.

Soon, the ships passed south of Orleans Island, and Haldor and the others saw a stone-walled fortress standing tall on the northern side of the river bay. It wasn’t large, but its architectural style was unmistakably French.

Half an hour later, Haldor, Hrutik, and Olaf met Champlain and his female companion in the governor’s mansion, where they were received in full regalia.

Champlain, as the governor of New France, was fluent in English and could speak some Danish, so communicating with Haldor posed no difficulty.

Elise, heavily made up and leaning against Champlain, felt a tremor in her heart when she saw the tall, muscular, and masculine Haldor. She couldn’t help but cast a few lingering glances his way.

Haldor kept his gaze straight ahead, offering only a polite smile before turning his attention to Champlain, who stood only as tall as his shoulder.

After the customary greetings, both sides took their seats. Champlain expressed his gratitude to Haldor, secretly marveling at the man’s height.

Haldor did not modestly downplay his assistance to Champlain. Instead, he emphasized that the relationship between New France and Vinland had changed dramatically, and mutual aid was only natural.

Champlain, of course, understood the subtext in Haldor’s words. He smiled and said, “Indeed, we are friends. The alliance document will make it clear that we have a mutual obligation to assist each other.”

Haldor nodded, then inquired about the situation in New France and Champlain’s story of establishing the colony. The two chatted idly for a long time before a clerk brought in the prepared alliance document. Champlain reviewed it and handed it to Haldor.

Haldor saw that the treaty was written in Latin, explicitly stating that both parties would assist each other, including providing material support or even military aid when requested. It also stipulated that any new territories explored would be jointly developed, with each side entitled to half the rights to newly established colonies.

Haldor passed the document to Hrutik and Olaf for review. Finding no issues, Haldor and Champlain each took a quill and signed their names.

After both copies of the alliance were signed, each party kept one. Champlain and Haldor shook hands and laughed. “Last year, I traveled up the Saint Lawrence River and saw many local customs. This year, I plan to explore the south, but there are some powerful savage tribes there. I wonder if Lord Haldor would dare to join us in this exploration.”

Haldor scoffed. “My soldiers fear no savages. When do we depart?”

Champlain smiled inwardly before replying, “How about tomorrow?”

“Agreed,” Haldor said, also smiling to himself.

Olaf watched the two men, each with their own schemes, and couldn’t help but laugh inwardly as well.

Earlier, Francis had revealed that Champlain intended to use Haldor and his men to deal with the Iroquois Confederacy. Thus, Haldor and his companions were well aware of Champlain’s intentions.

Though Champlain claimed they were exploring the south, he was merely leading Haldor and his men into Iroquois territory to provoke a war. To clear himself of suspicion, Champlain had even used reverse psychology in advance. However, his schemes were already exposed to Haldor and his men, who had prior knowledge.

Haldor, too, was playing along, intending to use this opportunity to see if the mainland savages were as fierce and difficult to deal with as Francis had described. He also wanted his Viking soldiers to display their might, intimidating Champlain and making him abandon his schemes.

As for the possibility of being unable to defeat the savages, neither Haldor nor Champlain gave it a thought. Their only concern was what to do with the land they conquered.

Champlain wanted to gain something for nothing. He knew that any land they captured would be closest to Quebec, while Haldor’s forces were far away in Vinland. Even if Haldor helped him conquer vast territories, they would ultimately fall into Quebec’s hands. At most, he would share some minor benefits with Vinland later.

Haldor and Olaf could guess Champlain’s intentions, but they had their own considerations.

If they invaded the Iroquois lands to the south, once Haldor and his Viking soldiers left, Champlain would surely clear the land and even relocate the Huron people to develop it. However, the weak and small population of New France would not be enough to deter the natives. They would face counterattacks and raids from the Iroquois, which would cause both sides to weaken each other.

Once they were exhausted, Vinland could send a large army in the future to easily seize a fertile piece of land.

Haldor, influenced by the many political intrigue stories from the Hrut family edited by Olaf and the tales of ancient Chinese politics from Seres, had developed considerable political acumen. He could see through Champlain’s schemes at a glance and even turn them to his advantage.

Haldor planned to use an open strategy, unlike Champlain, who only considered immediate gains. Haldor was looking toward the distant future.

Chapter 72: Exploration

On May 2nd, 1629, Champlain and Francis gathered fifty French soldiers and one hundred and twenty Huron warriors in front of the governor’s mansion.

Haldor and Olaf, clad in leather armor, stood beside Champlain, while Hrutik, fully armored, led one hundred Viking soldiers behind them.

Before departing, Haldor had asked Olaf if he wanted to stay in Quebec City, concerned about his safety since this expedition would involve battling the fiercest Iroquois warriors in the eastern part of the continent. Olaf, though still young, had grown taller and stronger over the past two years, now standing over five and a half feet tall—average for an adult in Iceland. Though not as tall as Haldor or Ulf, he was only half a head shorter than Hrutik, making him of average height among the one hundred Viking soldiers.

Confident in his strength and combat skills, Olaf insisted on joining the southern expedition. Seeing his son’s sturdy frame and the dark fuzz on his upper lip, Haldor no longer tried to dissuade him.

The two groups boarded ships to the southern shore, then marched southward, maintaining a clear distance between them. Since this was an expedition, no one rode horses—everyone traveled on foot at a slow pace. By the time the sun rose and the morning mist dissipated, they had only just passed through the first stretch of forest.

The terrain on both sides of Quebec resembled that of Vinland—wild and untamed, with towering maples, firs, and pines. The uneven ground was overgrown with weeds and shrubs, occasionally interrupted by puddles and mud pits that forced them to detour.

While the heart of Vinland was a highland mountain range, the land south of Quebec was a vast plain. Haldor crouched down, scooped up some soil, and smiled as he examined its dark, fertile texture. “This land is far richer than the southeastern peninsula of Vinland. If we cultivate it, it could feed a hundred thousand people.”

Hrutik’s eye twitched as he glanced at Champlain, who was several paces away. “Let’s scout the area and assess the Iroquois’ strength first. Later, we’ll find a way to claim this land.”

Haldor nodded, then clapped his hands and stood up, continuing to follow the troops.

In his past life, Olaf had witnessed the U.S. presidential election, poring over maps of the red and blue states. He knew that traveling south from Quebec would lead to what would one day become the state of Maine.

Northeastern Maine was famous for its potato production, supplying McDonald’s fries. Olaf believed that the land stretching from Quebec to Maine would become a future breadbasket. In an era of low productivity and devastating natural disasters, food was the ultimate competitive advantage. This region was the prime choice for Vinland’s expansion into the American continent.

An hour later, a primitive stone fortress appeared on the plain ahead, adorned with flags bearing eagle and snake totems. Though called a fortress, it was merely a low stone wall encircling a slightly taller stone house.

“That’s an Iroquois fortress,” Champlain said to Haldor. “We don’t need to provoke them. Let’s go around.”

Before Haldor could respond, two or three dozen arrows suddenly flew from the fortress. Most fell short, but three or four struck the ranks, wounding a French soldier and a Huron warrior.

The Viking soldiers, clad in plate armor, remained unharmed even when hit.

“Enemy attack! Retreat!” Champlain shouted.

Haldor stopped him. “Governor, let me show you the strength of my Viking army.”

He glanced at Hrutik, who instantly understood. Hrutik ordered the troops to form up and charge. Forty warriors, armed with long spears and clad in plate armor, rushed forward, while sixty musketeers followed closely behind, ready to fire their lead shot at close range.

Moments later, the Vikings, enduring a volley of arrows, closed to within fifty paces of the fortress. Hrutik commanded the warriors to flank the enemy while the musketeers took position in front. They aimed at the natives drawing bows on the walls and those peering from the windows, then lit their fuses.

Bang!

Sixty firelock muskets fired in three volleys. The first killed over a dozen natives, while the next two struck the stone walls, suppressing the defenders.

Once the muskets fell silent, the forty warriors stormed the fortress. The clash of steel and cries of battle soon ceased.

The long spearmen emerged, dragging the bodies of over thirty slain native warriors.

“Commander, all enemies have been eliminated,” a squad leader reported to Hrutik.

As the Viking army’s trainer and leader, Hrutik’s status was nearly equal to Haldor’s. He nodded, then turned to the stunned Champlain and Francis, smirking.

Haldor was unfazed by the victory. “Governor Champlain, what do you think of my army’s combat strength?”

Champlain swallowed hard. “Impressive. They rival the royal troops of France.”

Haldor glanced at Francis, who was eyeing the Viking soldiers with admiration, then continued, “I’ve destroyed this savage outpost. The next one is yours. I’m curious about the strength of your French soldiers. Today is the perfect opportunity to see them in action.”

Champlain looked at Francis, cleared his throat, and said, “Captain Bourbon, lead our New France soldiers to take the next outpost and show Lord Haldor what we can do.”

Francis hesitated, his expression shifting. “Sir, the Vikings just fired their muskets. The Iroquois warriors will soon send reinforcements. We should retreat!”

Champlain silently cursed himself for being intimidated by the Viking army and forgetting the Iroquois’ reinforcement speed. “When I led an expedition before, we encountered an Iroquois fortress. As soon as the battle began, hundreds of Iroquois warriors arrived as reinforcements. We were outnumbered and lost many Huron warriors before escaping.”

He turned to Haldor. “Lord Haldor, we only have a little over two hundred men. If we don’t leave, we’ll be overwhelmed by the Iroquois army.”

Haldor remained calm. “How many Iroquois tribes are nearby, and how many people do they have?”

“Three tribes,” Champlain replied without hesitation. “Around seventeen to eighteen hundred, maybe two thousand people.”

“A tribe of seventeen to eighteen hundred can field seven to eight hundred warriors at most. We don’t need to run. We can hold our ground behind the fortress.”

Haldor believed his Viking soldiers had extensive experience fighting natives. Moreover, he had brought the most skilled marksmen and warriors, and with the French soldiers’ support, they could crush the Iroquois army.

He ordered the Vikings to secure the fortress. The musketeers took positions on the walls, while most of the long spearmen stood in front of the low wall, with the rest behind it.

The fortress’s elevated position provided a strategic advantage. Champlain, however, had no intention of risking his life in a reckless battle with the natives. He even questioned his decision to invite Haldor on this expedition.

Chapter 73: The Brave Iroquois

Champlain did not believe that his fifty French soldiers, one hundred and twenty Huron warriors, and the one hundred warriors Haldor had brought could withstand seven or eight hundred, or even a thousand, Iroquois warriors. After coldly observing the deployment of Haldor’s soldiers, he leaned in close to Francis and ordered him to lead the army to protect him as they temporarily retreated.

At this point, Champlain was already prepared to abandon Haldor, who was courting death. After all, Champlain had been fighting the Iroquois for many years. He believed that these natives were fearless in battle, and without at least half a regular army, it would be impossible to defeat them. Remembering the Iroquois, his legs, which had been injured by arrows a few years ago, seemed to ache again, bringing his mood to a freezing point.

Francis, however, was drawn to Haldor’s confidence and the execution of the Viking soldiers. He was not one to blindly follow Champlain’s orders, and upon hearing this, he raised an eyebrow and said, “If the Governor is afraid, please leave first. Now, I want to fight side by side with Lord Haldor of the city, to expand the territory of New France.”

After saying this, Francis sent two French guards to escort Champlain. Then, he led the remaining one hundred and sixty-eight soldiers to a hill about two hundred paces northeast of the fortress, ordering them to form a circular formation to await the Iroquois.

Haldor and Hrutik silently praised Francis’s arrangement in their hearts. Olaf also guessed that Francis’s intention was to form a mutual support with the Viking soldiers occupying the fortress, thereby assisting in covering the fortress. The distance and position Francis chose were just right—neither putting themselves in the most dangerous position nor failing to help Haldor.

“Not bad for a French royal officer. He must have received systematic military training,” Haldor lightly praised, then looked toward the southeast and shouted, “Men, stay alert! The Iroquois warriors are coming!”

A group of men with white cloth tied around their heads and wearing leather clothes rushed out from the southeast forest, surging like a tide.

The appearance of the Iroquois made Champlain hurriedly retreat north with his guards, but he did not want to flee the battlefield. He stopped at the edge of the northern forest and looked south.

These natives had the same skin and features as East Asians, with sturdy builds. Most of them carried wooden clubs and stone hammers, while some had bows and arrows on their backs. However, the ten or so leaders at the front carried long spears and blades, with bows and arrows on their backs—clearly, the iron weapons were obtained through trade with the New Englanders.

Haldor roughly estimated that there were six or seven hundred, or even seven or eight hundred, of them. They were divided into three groups, each led by four or five leaders armed with iron weapons.

These men shouted loudly in an incomprehensible language. As they approached, they saw the corpses outside the fortress and immediately began beating their weapons, shaking them in circles before charging toward the fortress under the leadership of their chiefs.

Haldor, already prepared, stood with Ulf behind the stone wall in the middle of the fortress, watching the approaching natives, their fierce and terrifying faces becoming clearer.

Hrutik, standing behind the outer wall, calculated the distance between the Iroquois and the fortress. When they were about one hundred and fifty paces away, he waved his hand and shouted, “First row, fire!”

Because the fortress was too narrow, the sixty musketeers could not all stand at once, so they were divided into three rows, with twenty men firing each time.

The first group of twenty musketeers were the most experienced and skilled Icelandic musketeers. After lighting the fuses, they fired their bullets, each shot hitting one or even two Iroquois warriors.

The Iroquois had fought the French many times and had seen the power of firelock muskets. However, they only saw the French soldiers on the distant hill holding guns, while the soldiers in front of the fortress were armed with long spears. This made them careless, not expecting musketeers to be hidden in the fortress.

Nearly thirty Iroquois warriors at the front, whether with blood gushing from their chests or their faces torn open, fell to the ground with the gunshots. Among them were three who appeared to be leaders.

The sudden loss did not make the Iroquois retreat. The fierce and warlike Iroquois were much braver and stronger than the Beothuk.

The deaths of their comrades made them even more frenzied. The leaders sang battle songs, and with roars and singing, the Iroquois stepped over the corpses of their comrades and charged forward.

The leaders and the good hunters of the tribe took out their bows and arrows and shot at the fortress. Now that the distance had been reduced to less than one hundred and fifty paces, in the Iroquois’ minds, their bows and arrows were enough to threaten the safety of the white men.

However, most of the arrows only fell on the plate armor of the Viking soldiers, making a clanging sound and leaving scratches, but causing no real damage.

The leaders and hunters were not like the foolish Beothuk of Vinland who had never seen the world. They knew this was the white man’s iron armor, as some French officers, like Francis, wore plate armor.

Knowing that bows and arrows made of animal teeth and tree branches could not penetrate the iron armor, the Iroquois threw down their bows and arrows, tightened their grip on their iron weapons, and shouted, “Charge to the white men’s side, tear off their iron armor, and kill them through the gaps in the armor!”

During the Iroquois’ charge, Francis was also calculating whether they had entered the range of the fifty French soldiers and arranged for nearly half of the one hundred Huron warriors to shoot arrows at the enemy.

The musketeers in the fortress fired in turns. The second and third rounds killed more than fifty people. Although the front line was continuously shot down, the natives still charged forward relentlessly. The firearms were terrifying, but they could not shake the Iroquois’ offensive.

When the third round of firing ended, the first group of twenty musketeers had reloaded and continued firing.

Ten minutes later, after losing two hundred lives, the Iroquois reached the front of the fortress. Just as they were about to pounce on the Viking soldiers, Hrutik gave an order. He and forty Viking soldiers took the short spears hanging from their belts and, with a muffled sound from their throats, threw the spears, which streaked through the air.

“Thud, thud.”

More than forty Iroquois warriors in front were pierced through the chest and abdomen by forty-one short spears. Most of them died on the spot, while a few lay on the ground, screaming in pain.

One of the three great skills passed down through generations of Icelandic Vikings was the throwing spear and throwing axe technique.

This was a skill their ancestors had honed when raiding ships. Over the years, many Icelanders had not abandoned this skill.

The Viking soldiers, trained personally by the Icelandic captain and instructors, all mastered the spear-throwing technique. These forty White Wolf Warriors, with their expert spear and axe throwing skills, could pierce a chest from twenty-five paces away, hitting their target with precision.

Although the plate armor somewhat affected their aim, within twenty paces, the three-pound short spears in the hands of the Viking soldiers were still unstoppable and difficult to dodge.

The forty Viking soldiers continuously took the four short spears hanging from their belts and threw them, killing or injuring more than one hundred Iroquois, causing heavy casualties among the Iroquois who were about to reach the fortress.

More than eight hundred Iroquois warriors had not even touched the Viking warriors, yet over three hundred had already been killed or injured. The remaining five hundred still did not retreat. With roars, they prepared to rush forward.

But neither the musketeers in the fortress nor the French soldiers about one hundred and seventy or eighty paces away hesitated or stopped. The twenty bullets from the fortress and the fifty bullets from the French soldiers turned into deadly demons, rushing into the Iroquois warriors and instantly taking the lives of more than forty.

Before the gunfire had even dissipated, more than fifty arrows from the Huron fell, instantly hitting more than ten Iroquois.

This wave of attacks caused nearly sixty more Iroquois to fall. The continuous and massive losses finally completely shattered the Iroquois’ will to fight.

Chapter 74: How to Guard Against the Terrifying Vikings?

The primitive and savage Iroquois had always dominated the northeastern part of North America, and the surrounding tribes generally avoided provoking the Iroquois Confederacy.

Even the colonists of New France often found themselves at a disadvantage in battles against the Iroquois. But today, the Iroquois had met their match in the Viking warriors.

The relentless and precise firelock musket attacks, the volley of long spears, and the Huron warriors’ bow and arrows had already claimed a third of the Iroquois forces. Yet, their desire for vengeance burned fiercely. If they could breach the fortress, dozens, even hundreds of Viking soldiers would be torn apart in an instant. Even if the long spearmen could kill three or four times their number before falling, the five hundred Iroquois warriors would surely overwhelm the Viking long spearmen.

But the combined assault of the French musketeers, Huron archers, and Viking musketeers instantly slaughtered over sixty Iroquois at the fortress gates, clearing the land before the stronghold in an instant.

By this point, the leading warriors at the forefront had been nearly wiped out. The remaining four hundred warriors, seeing their numbers halved, lost their courage and will to attack.

Amid the cacophony of shouts and cries, no one knew which Iroquois warrior was the first to turn and flee. But once one did, the rest followed.

The four hundred Iroquois warriors scattered like an avalanche, fleeing faster and faster. The last remnants of their courage vanished as they ran, and those behind even discarded their weapons in their haste.

Minutes later, Haldor and Francis embraced warmly, then burst into laughter.

“Hah! The Iroquois may be fierce and fearless, but didn’t we still defeat them?” Haldor gripped Francis’s hand tightly as he spoke.

Francis looked at him with admiration. “It’s all thanks to you, Brother Haldor. Without you, we never could have won such a brilliant victory.”

“A lion never fears a pack of wolves. We have firelock muskets, plate armor, and are all elite soldiers. Why should we fear a bunch of savages?”

Haldor appeared nonchalant, but inwardly, he was still shaken. He never expected the Iroquois to be so brave. If Francis’s men hadn’t come to their aid at the last moment, he feared many of his own would have perished.

Francis and the French soldiers, along with the Huron warriors, were overjoyed. Seeing that the Viking soldiers had no intention of looting the spoils, the Huron warriors swarmed forward, searching the four hundred corpses for beast teeth, colorful feathers, and weapons.

“We’ve just killed half the men from three nearby tribes in one fell swoop. I don’t think we’ll need to lift a finger—the Huron and other tribes will take the initiative to attack the Iroquois once they hear the news. This land will fall into our hands before long.”

This was the first time since arriving in New France that Francis had achieved such a resounding victory against the Iroquois. He estimated that if he sent this battle report back to Paris, he might have a chance to be recalled to France and appointed as a legion commander.

Haldor could see that Francis was pleased, so he said, “The vast lands south of the Saint Lawrence River must be developed well. Plant enough crops to feed thousands. Your next step should be to drive out the Iroquois as soon as possible, then establish a true fortress stronghold here to defend our shared land.”

Francis pounded his chest in assurance, and then the two sides prepared to return to Quebec City.

They had not walked three hundred paces north when they saw Champlain standing on the road, his face filled with surprise and admiration as he waited for them.

“Congratulations to Lord Haldor and Captain Bourbon for joining forces to defeat the Iroquois. This is the greatest victory since the establishment of New France.”

Champlain stroked his upper lip and smiled. “I will petition for honors for both of you, requesting that His Highness and the Cardinal Prime Minister bestow medals upon you.”

Haldor and Francis’s faces turned cold. They had gained a deeper understanding of Champlain’s shamelessness.

Though Haldor despised Champlain for fleeing the battlefield, they were not allies, so he forced a stiff smile and said, “Then we thank you, sir.”

Francis, however, furrowed his brow and coldly replied, “I will request a transfer out of New France, so there is no need for you, Governor, to petition on my behalf.”

Champlain’s smile froze, and a flicker of anger flashed in his eyes, but he suppressed it and spoke gently, “This time, I underestimated the combat strength of Lord Haldor’s soldiers. Captain Bourbon, please understand my caution as a governor.”

Before Francis could respond, Champlain turned to Haldor, bowed slightly, and said, “I apologize for our rashness and cowardice. I hope Lord Haldor can forgive my mistake.”

Haldor recalled what Francis had said—that ever since Champlain arrived in New France, every conflict with the Iroquois had ended in defeat. Once, Champlain had even been shot in both legs by the Iroquois and had to live with the Huron for half a year before returning to Quebec. Haldor understood that Champlain subconsciously held the Iroquois in high regard and did not believe that two hundred soldiers could defeat eight or nine hundred Iroquois warriors. This was not his fault.

Haldor offered Champlain a few words of comfort, and then the group returned to Quebec City.

Upon their return, Haldor, Hrutik, and Olaf sensed a tense and oppressive atmosphere. This was because Champlain’s lack of trust and support for them and Francis had sown the seeds of discord. Though everything seemed normal on the surface, their hearts had grown distant.

After accepting Champlain’s banquet invitation, Haldor and his men bid farewell the next morning and departed by ship.

Once the Vikings of Vinland had left, Champlain intended to speak with Francis to smooth things over, but Francis immediately requested to withdraw to Gaspé.

Seeing the anger still on Francis’s face, Champlain said nothing more and allowed him to leave by ship.

After Quebec City had quieted down, Father Gethin entered his room and asked, “What do you plan to do?”

“What do you mean?” Champlain asked.

Gethin knew Champlain understood his meaning but did not mind. He explained, “Captain Bourbon has already grown distant from you. On the contrary, his relationship with Vinland grows closer. Though we both noticed this long ago, we never expected a single battle to make everything spiral out of control. If you want to secure your position as governor, you must address this quickly.”

Gethin had been an aide to Cardinal Richelieu when he served as Prime Minister. Though the pan-European war prevented the nation from supporting New France, Richelieu still sent him there—partly to spread the faith and partly to coordinate relations with the trading company, ensuring the Church’s and Richelieu’s interests in the fur trade.

Thus, Gethin and Champlain were actually a team with aligned interests. They discussed both major and minor matters concerning the colony together.

Champlain knew what Gethin meant. He now regretted retreating when Haldor insisted on fighting the Iroquois. Upon reflection, he realized that while part of his hesitation stemmed from his lack of confidence in the battle, another part was his hope to use the Iroquois to weaken or even defeat the Icelanders. This would diminish the strength of Vinland, the most powerful colony in North America, allowing New France to gain some leverage in its dealings with Vinland.

But he never expected Francis to be willing to fight alongside Haldor, nor did he anticipate the Iroquois would be so easily defeated.

“This was my misjudgment,” Champlain rubbed his temples and sighed. “The people of New England do not have good intentions toward Quebec. Our ally, Vinland, is too powerful. I truly feel that the situation in New France is difficult to manage. In a couple of years, we might either have to cede benefits and land to New England or become a vassal of Vinland. Francis is too naive.”

Perhaps due to differences in status and power, Gethin did not share Champlain’s concerns. Inwardly, he sighed: Is Francis really naive? By cooperating with Haldor, he can establish rare military merits—something you, Governor, cannot provide for him.

If Captain Bourbon and Haldor join forces to expand their territory on the continent, even if they only gain half, it would still mean an expansion of New France and the French Kingdom’s domain. This would certainly become a stepping stone for his promotion. As for whether the conquered land can be defended and profited from, that is a matter for the governor to consider. Captain Bourbon, for the sake of his future, would not care about your feelings.

Moreover, Governor, your hesitation and indecision have made you seem too fickle. This might offend the Vikings of Vinland. If both New England and Vinland turn against New France, that would not be good.

After a moment of silence, Champlain suddenly stood up and said, “Francis’s status should not be confined to the small colony of New France. I should help him advance, have him transferred back to France to serve as a legion commander, and let him shine on the stage of the pan-European war. Don’t you think so?”

A sharp gleam flashed in Gethin’s eyes. Brilliant, he thought. Denmark’s fate was already sealed, and France was preparing for war, likely to take direct action. Regardless of whether Francis would survive after being drawn into the pan-European war upon his return to France, his transfer would be beneficial to Champlain. A new captain would be more advantageous to the governor, and Champlain’s authority would strengthen after Francis’s departure.

“Governor, your care for the younger generation is a commendable virtue,” Gethin said with a smile, approving Champlain’s decision.

“Sigh, Francis’s issue is easy to resolve,” Champlain looked up at the ceiling in confusion and sighed. “But how to guard against those terrifying Vikings—I truly have no idea.”

The atmosphere grew completely cold. Only after Gethin left did Champlain’s posture slump, and he felt a deep sense of powerlessness. After a long while, he finally murmured, “The only option is to request the company to increase the investment in white slaves and bring in New England to counterbalance Vinland. But perhaps it won’t work… Sigh.”

Soon, in mid-May, the French ships transporting colonial goods like furs, grain, and sugar between the New World and Paris docked in Quebec. After loading the furs, they departed the New World with Father Gethin aboard, sailing east toward Paris. In the priest’s possession was a personal letter from Governor Champlain.

It was a letter of commendation. Champlain even exaggerated Francis’s merits and achievements. If one ignored other factors and only considered this letter, he could be seen as a benefactor to Francis de Bourbon’s career.

Chapter 75: Smallpox

On May 1st, Haldor, Olaf, Hrutik, and a group of over a hundred men set sail from Vinland to Quebec City, returning to Hrut Harbor on the evening of the 3rd.

That night, the city’s leaders, both major and minor, gathered in the dining hall on the first floor of Haldor’s fortress for a celebratory feast. The occasion marked not only the successful alliance between Vinland and New France and the acquisition of land on the mainland but also the victory over the Iroquois.

This battle had given Haldor, Hrutik, and the Viking soldiers a clear understanding of the powerful native tribes on the mainland. The Iroquois were indeed braver, fiercer, and more fearless of death than the Beothuk and Inuit. However, with advanced weapons and highly skilled soldiers, they could still achieve victory with fewer numbers.

Before the banquet, Hrutik and Haldor held a meeting. After discussion, they conservatively estimated that to defeat and rout the Iroquois warriors with little to no losses, the number of Viking soldiers needed to be at least one-third of the Iroquois forces.

However, if they could utilize terrain and prepare traps and obstacles in advance, one-quarter of the Iroquois numbers could suffice.

Moreover, among these Viking soldiers, the number of musketeers had to make up 50% of the force. Otherwise, there wouldn’t be enough powerful long-range firepower to suppress and deplete the native warriors. If there were too few musketeers, the greater number of Iroquois could close in and break the Viking soldiers’ square formation.

Additionally, since the Vikings wore full plate armor and the natives lacked iron weapons, their bows and arrows, weapons, and traps were virtually ineffective against the Viking soldiers. Thus, the overwhelming advantage would remain unchanged for the time being.

Olaf proposed that during the conquest of the natives, they could bring a large number of cattle and horse-drawn wagons. During battle, they could form a defensive line with the wagons. The musketeers could shoot from within the wagon formation, and the long spearmen could defend from behind the wagons, effectively creating a makeshift fortress.

While this tactic would be ineffective against European armies with cannons and firearms, it would be more than sufficient to dominate the primitive and backward natives.

Hrutik was the first to agree, and ultimately, Haldor decided on the future tactics the Viking legion would use against the Indians.

The banquet lasted until midnight. Olaf drank a cup of beer for the first time at the feast. Previously, he had been concerned that drinking would affect his health, so he never actively asked for alcohol and politely declined invitations from friends and family. However, after drinking this cup, he felt that while the current beer wasn’t as good as the future’s, the basic taste was similar.

After drinking a large cup of beer, Olaf went to bed with many thoughts on his mind.

The next morning, as Olaf was about to go to the factory, he suddenly saw Jot rush in, looking pale with shock.

“Where is Haldor?”

Katrin had left early to lead the women in sewing clothes, so only Olaf and Haldor were at home.

“Father is still asleep. He might have drunk too much last night.”

“Oh, no, he can’t be sleeping now!” Jot exclaimed, stomping his foot before quickly entering Haldor’s room and pulling him up.

Olaf had never seen Jot like this before. Before he could ask, he heard Jot shout into Haldor’s still somewhat dazed ear, “Someone in the city has smallpox! Haldor, it’s smallpox!”

“What smallpox?”

Haldor suddenly turned pale and leaped up, grabbing Jot’s shoulders and asking, “How many people? How long have they been sick?”

“Three people, all Vikings from Ireland. The first to fall ill was their child, and then the couple was infected. I’ve already had their house sealed off,” Jot said rapidly.

“We need to control everyone they’ve been in contact with over the past two days.”

Haldor grabbed a leather coat and put it on, quickly heading out.

Olaf knew this was an era with scarce medical resources. A common disease in the future could easily take a life. Smallpox, which had nearly been eradicated in the future due to vaccines, was a virus with a high mortality rate in this era.

The Indians of Central America, South America, and North America, having had no contact with the viruses carried by white people, had almost a 100% mortality rate when infected with smallpox, typhoid, and other viruses. Over a hundred years, seven out of ten million Indians in Central and South America died, and half of the Indians in North America perished.

Currently, Asia and Europe had no effective treatment for smallpox. It was purely a matter of physical resistance. The mortality rate for Europeans with smallpox was over one-third. Over twenty years ago, a British expedition team of over sixty people in North America established a base, but within two years, they were nearly wiped out by the smallpox virus. This showed that this contagious and terrifying virus, if not handled promptly and appropriately, was like a ticking time bomb.

Now, Hrut City had a population of over ten thousand, most of whom were Beothuk people with the weakest resistance to the smallpox virus. If it spread, Vinland Island would become a living hell.

Olaf also understood the severity of the situation and followed his father and Jot to the several houses that had been sealed off by Viking soldiers.

“The patients and their neighbors have been controlled. We have determined that the infected family has only been in contact with four neighboring households, but these four households have been in contact with twelve people. These people have been locked in their houses, and their slaves have been captured and locked in caves,” Heiner said, his right hand resting on the hilt of his sword at his waist as he stood guard at the front. Seeing Haldor and the others approach, he stepped forward.

Haldor nodded and said in a deep voice, “Starting today, no one is to live in the nearby houses. Everyone must move to the outer city and rebuild their houses with larger distances between them. Any new cases must be reported and controlled immediately to prevent further spread.”

Jot and Heiner listened and quickly sent people to relay the message. Then Jot pointed to the more than a dozen longhouses that had been sealed off and asked, “What should we do with these houses and the more than thirty people inside?”

Haldor’s face was solemn. After hesitating for a long time, he finally frowned painfully and said, “Set the houses on fire.”

“Alright.”

Jot and Heiner had already given up on the three infected people and the thirty neighbors who might be infected in their hearts. As long as they were alive, there was a high risk of spreading the disease to others, which would put the entire Hrut City and even the people of Vinland at risk of infection.

The best solution now was to set fire to the infected people, the possibly infected people, and the houses carrying the virus. Once everything was reduced to ashes, this plague crisis would be over.

Haldor’s order was accepted without hesitation by Jot and Heiner. They turned to arrange for its execution, but Olaf couldn’t bear to see his companions killed. He called out to the two men, his mind racing, and said, “Don’t rush, I have a way.”

Under the hopeful gaze of Haldor, Heiner, and Jot, Olaf, sweating profusely, suddenly remembered something he had heard in his previous life.

It was said that “those who have had smallpox or been vaccinated against it will never get smallpox again.” In other words, those who survived infection by the smallpox virus would develop antibodies. In the future, there was the cowpox vaccine, but now there was nothing, let alone effective treatments for smallpox in the future.

Olaf had no way to treat smallpox, but he knew that those who recovered from smallpox had immune antibodies. So he said, “If someone has had smallpox, won’t they be immune to it and never get it again?”

“Er, it seems so,” Jot said hesitantly.

Heiner and Haldor thought for a moment, and their eyes lit up simultaneously.

Heiner said, “You mean to have those who have survived smallpox take care of the patients, so there won’t be a risk of infecting others.”

Olaf nodded and said, “We need to quickly find people with antibodies, that is, those who have had smallpox. The rest who haven’t had it must stay away from here and avoid contact with those who have been in contact with smallpox patients. We’ll seal off this area, and in ten days or so, those who survive will be the lucky ones.”

Haldor and Jot exchanged a glance. In truth, they didn’t want to kill their own people, but for the safety of the tens of thousands of people in Vinland, they had to be ruthless. Now that Olaf had presented a better solution, they chose to accept it.

Under the search led by Jot, Heiner, and other leaders, it was found that among the two thousand Vikings, over seven hundred had previously had smallpox. Among the more than ten thousand Beothuk slaves, six thousand had had smallpox.

This data indicated that one-third of the Icelanders, Irish, and Scots who had been infected at the same time had died. Among the six thousand four hundred Beothuk people who had been infected, two-thirds or even more of their kin had perished.

Chapter 76: Smallpox and Cowpox

Under the joint efforts of the major and minor chiefs, Hrut City was swiftly mobilized. Dozens of the most clever slaves were quickly selected to replace the Viking soldiers in sealing off the epidemic zone, providing food and other supplies to the patients and those in close contact with them.

After more than ten days, among the three patients, only the man survived; the woman and child had both succumbed to smallpox. Eighty percent of their neighbors had also been infected, while the remaining twenty percent were spared because they had previously contracted smallpox and survived.

Another week passed, and the man recovered his health, though ten of his neighbors had died.

This outbreak, which had infected thirty-three people and claimed seventeen lives, served as a stark warning to Haldor, Hrutik, Olaf, and the others.

In a densely populated city like Hrut City, while the cold climate and sanitation management prevented most diseases from spreading, smallpox and influenza remained serious threats.

Establishing a disease prevention and control mechanism and routine defensive measures had become an urgent necessity, as it concerned the lives of tens of thousands on Vinland.

Traditionally, Europe treated plagues as the work of demons, employing isolation measures that were often incomplete and lacking in treatment or prevention methods. Many regions simply left people to fend for themselves.

However, Vinland was under military-style management, so Haldor’s will could be swiftly and fully implemented.

With no time for meetings, Olaf presented advanced epidemic prevention systems from the future to Haldor, who quickly grasped them and ordered their execution.

First, the prevention and control mechanism: personal and collective hygiene had to be elevated to a new level. Excrement, household waste, and sewage needed to be separated, with water channeled into ditches. Each longhouse was to have a latrine pit built nearby to prevent indiscriminate waste.

Handwashing was mandated before meals and after using the toilet, and bathing at least once a month was required. To conserve resources and facilitate this, Haldor planned to construct a large public bathhouse in the city, heated by earthen stoves.

Beyond mandatory hygiene measures, masks made of hemp cloth were to be produced—three layers thick—and every household was to sew them. During epidemics, everyone was to wear them.

If someone coughed or had a fever, they were to be isolated at home, wearing masks during isolation.

Strict supervision and punishment mechanisms were also established. Anyone reported for violating epidemic prevention measures would, upon verification, be stripped of their freeman status and enslaved. If the violator was already a slave, they would be flogged to death.

This epidemic prevention system could certainly be implemented in Vinland for now, but as the population grew, enforcement would likely slacken over time.

However, Olaf believed a few years would suffice, as he had thought of a permanent solution: vaccines.

In his past life, Olaf had grown vaccines and knew they were derived from cowpox, extracted from cows infected with smallpox. This virus was non-lethal, and when introduced into the human body in small amounts, the immune system would consume and digest it, producing antibodies.

The problem was that Olaf didn’t know how to extract the virus from cows, nor did he know what symptoms indicated cowpox. This required careful personnel to conduct dedicated experiments, observing reactions after exposure to sick cows.

After Olaf shared this idea, Haldor ordered that each day, a slave who had never had smallpox be selected to feed livestock in the stables and cattle pens.

According to Haldor’s plan, if smallpox symptoms appeared, the infected cows or horses could be identified.

Then, concentrated mucus from the sick animals would be extracted and introduced into humans in small amounts, achieving a rudimentary vaccine effect.

Olaf wasn’t sure if Haldor’s idea was correct, but he also recalled another ingenious method from traditional Chinese medicine before the invention of the cowpox vaccine: variolation.

Olaf couldn’t remember the specifics, but he knew that variolation involved a Chinese physician using the pus and scabs from smallpox patients, drying and grinding them into powder, then blowing it into the nostrils. The fragile nasal mucosa and capillaries would absorb the virus, causing mild symptoms similar to vaccination.

Olaf believed that finding cowpox and developing a vaccination method wasn’t something that could be achieved in a few days or even months, but variolation could be implemented immediately.

The isolation zone already had ready-made “vaccines.”

Olaf again credited his teacher, Elder Amie, from the church school in Iceland, claiming that Amie had learned a special method for preventing smallpox from Arab doctors while preaching in Germany, called variolation.

Haldor didn’t question it further—or perhaps he simply didn’t doubt his son’s ideas—and treated “variolation” as a treasure. He ordered the collection of pus and scabs from patients, which were dried, ground into powder, and wrapped in paper. Three slaves were then selected for experimentation.

Concerned about the difficulty of controlling the dosage when blowing the powder, Haldor summoned several shoemakers. He personally used their large sewing needles to pick up a small amount of the variolation powder and insert it deep into a slave’s nose, then flicked the needle to shake the powder into the slave’s nasal cavity.

Haldor conducted the experiment himself, with Olaf, Heiner, Hrutik, Jot, and Hoskuld, along with several skilled women and artisans, observing.

One slave received one needle’s worth of powder, another two, and the third three. The three slaves were then confined for observation.

The next day, all three developed fevers, but the onset times varied. Over time, all three showed symptoms of smallpox. The slave who received three needle’s worth was the most severe, exhibiting symptoms identical to smallpox, and died in agony eight days later.

The other two only had fevers, which subsided after a day, and they recovered normally.

Haldor and Olaf were delighted. To confirm the results, Haldor administered three needle’s worth of variolation powder to two more slaves. After two days, they showed no reaction, confirming the success of the variolation method for these two slaves.

The success of variolation gave Haldor and the other chiefs great confidence. Haldor then handed the needles and paper packets to carefully selected skilled women and artisans, instructing them to administer variolation to the first batch of 200 slaves.

This batch included slaves of various ages, and this large-scale experiment would determine the method’s effectiveness. If the results were positive, it would confirm that variolation was indeed effective.

Soon, the first batch of slaves received variolation, and all developed fevers. However, seventeen of them also developed pox and other symptoms, which gradually worsened.

The remaining 183 recovered normally on the third day. Haldor then ordered them to come into contact with the seventeen who had failed variolation and developed full-blown smallpox. None of the 183 were reinfected.

This success finally put Olaf at ease, and Haldor and the others were overjoyed. They felt that mastering variolation meant they had conquered an invisible, terrifying reaper.

Previously, falling ill meant hoping not to be among the one-third who died, but now, with variolation, almost everyone had a chance to become immune to smallpox. As variolation spread through Hrut City, smallpox would no longer threaten the people of Vinland. Perhaps in five or ten years, Vinland’s population would enter a period of rapid growth.

Haldor and Haig had both contracted smallpox in their youth. Their brothers had died from smallpox and other diseases, but the two of them had survived due to their strong constitutions.

Olaf, however, had never had smallpox, nor had many of his friends. For the sake of his long-term health, he chose to be in the third batch of variolation recipients. After a night of anxious fever, he recovered his strength the next day, full of vigor once more.

With this newfound immunity, Olaf felt much more at ease watching the Vikings line up for variolation. The unease of the past was gone. He smiled and sighed in relief: “Overcoming the smallpox crisis, I’m more confident about the future.”

Chapter 77: The Whaling Station

After a month of slow production and near-stagnation in Hrut City, all those without immunity to smallpox had undergone variolation. Though over a hundred had contracted the disease and more than eighty had died, the survivors now possessed antibodies against it.

Three days after Hrut City returned to its bustling pace, Haldor recalled the Basque whaling station at Red Bay, directly across from Vinland’s northern shore.

Red Bay, the closest point between Vinland and the western continent, was a dumbbell-shaped bay named for the blood-red waters after each whale slaughter. The French had once established an outpost on its northeastern shore.

Before the English and Dutch arrived in North America, this land had been untouched. But a century ago, Basque fishermen from France discovered the famed fishing grounds near Vinland, beginning their whaling and cod-fishing operations to produce dried fish for trade. This industry had peaked half a century ago.

Fishermen arriving in spring would stay until late summer or early autumn, accumulating enough dried fish to return to Europe. To secure their livelihood and fishing grounds, the Basques built settlements, fortresses, and cultivated land at the mouth of the Saint Lawrence Gulf in northern Vinland.

Later, as English and French explorers ventured along the eastern coast of North America in search of beavers, the whaling station became part of New France. It was typically manned by two guards and twenty to thirty fishermen, who also traded with neighboring Cree, Abenaki, and Beothuk tribes.

Since last month, when Governor Champlain and Haldor, the lord of Hrut City, signed an alliance, the Basque whaling station and its surrounding lands had come under Vinland’s control. The fishermen, guards, and some Huron, Cree, and Abenaki had relocated to Anticosti Island.

Abandoned by its masters, the outpost was soon overrun by nearby natives, descending into chaos.

But at noon that day, over ten Viking longships swiftly entered Red Bay, docking at the crude pier.

The natives, unfamiliar with these ships, gathered to watch. The vessels carried thirty Vikings in leather armor, armed with firelock muskets, and three hundred Beothuk slaves wielding long spears and wearing wooden chest plates—a simple protective gear Hrutik had devised to shield slaves from beasts and hostile natives.

Seeing white men accompanied by Beothuk, the occupying natives panicked. They knew Vinland was now under white rule, and the sight of over three hundred armed men filled them with dread. Families fled in small groups.

Leading this expedition was Hrutik, commanding thirty elite Viking soldiers and three hundred slave warriors.

This was Vinland’s first major operation after concluding its smallpox prevention and variolation efforts. Had the outbreak not occurred, the whaling station would have been secured much earlier.

With Hrut City’s production now restored, Haldor turned his attention back to the northern whaling station. According to the strategic plan devised by Haldor, Hrutik, and Olaf, Vinland would use the whaling station as a base to gradually expand its territory and conquer the mainland.

To prevent unrest among the natives after the French departure, Hrutik personally led over three hundred men to the outpost, aiming to establish control swiftly, expand the land, and enslave the locals.

Both Haldor and Hrutik understood a fundamental truth: land meant resources, and population meant productivity and manpower.

Vinland’s current population was just over ten thousand, with a few thousand more likely in the western mountains. Even at full count, the numbers were modest, with only a thousand whites. They knew that over time, even with continuous white immigration, after a generation or two, the majority of Vinland’s population would still be Beothuk.

How could they ensure the Beothuk remained obedient slaves?

Influenced by Olaf’s adapted Eight Banners Viking system, Haldor believed expansion into the mainland was necessary. By having the Beothuk enslave other mainland natives, they could create a layered pyramid structure, securing the Vikings’ position at the top despite their smaller numbers.

Thus, Hrutik’s mission as the Basque governor was to stabilize the existing territory and gradually encroach further inland.

Considering Hrutik’s capabilities, loyalty, and their friendship, Haldor reluctantly entrusted him with this task.

Hrutik indeed had the leadership skills for such a role. Upon landing, he found the outpost nearly abandoned by the natives. With a cold snort, he mounted his horse, surveying the three hundred slaves and thirty Viking soldiers. Wielding his long sword, he commanded, “Each Viking soldier will lead ten slaves. Spread out and capture the natives. Whoever catches them owns them, whether Viking or Beothuk!”

The order was quickly relayed by the Beothuk slave captains who understood Icelandic. The three hundred men, energized, charged out under their Viking masters, pursuing the fleeing natives in all directions.

An hour later, Hrutik sat in the newly tidied fortress as thirty jubilant Viking soldiers, carrying firelock muskets, entered one by one to report.

The ten pursuit teams had all made captures—some as many as ten, others as few as three. One unlucky slave had stepped into a beaver trap by the lake and drowned.

Hrutik waved his hand, ordering the Vikings to lead the slaves and their new captives to clean every corner of the outpost and move supplies from the ships into the fortress.

“We’ve captured over eighty slaves, but only ten are able-bodied men. That means forty or fifty native men escaped. They might return with warriors soon. Vigil! Come here!”

Hrutik called out, and when the middle-aged man approached, he instructed, “Bring the fifty sets of plate armor and other weapons from my room and place them where they’re easily accessible. Then send a few sharp-eyed slaves to scout the surroundings. If natives attack, sound the alarm immediately. We must prepare in advance.”

“Yes, Governor,” Vigil replied before hurrying off.

Hrutik stepped to the window, watching the Vikings and slaves tidy the houses. He then turned his gaze to the dense, dark forests stretching across the northern and western mountains. His eyes gleamed with ambition and ruthlessness, making the scar near his temple seem like a writhing centipede.

Under Hrutik’s watch, Vigil quickly selected eight of the sharpest-eyed Beothuk slaves, who then disappeared into the western and northern forests with bows and arrows.

But Hrutik wasn’t worried about them fleeing. They wouldn’t dare.

First, their families were held on the island—any escape attempt would mean death for their kin. Second, as Beothuk, they were seen as servants of the Vinland whites by mainland natives. Having just participated in capturing other natives, they had deeply offended the local tribes.

Without Vinland’s protection, survival would be nearly impossible. Additionally, the Beothuk had long-standing tensions with other mainland tribes. Any Beothuk falling into their hands would face certain death, forcing them to work diligently.

Often, external threats were necessary to foster internal motivation. Much like how some nations, facing domestic strife or seeking re-election, would provoke external conflicts to rally their people, creating a sense of unity and tension to achieve political goals.

The Führer’s rise began with anti-Semitic movements, using his exceptional oratory to become a leader and organizer. Those who rallied behind him were the disillusioned, exploited by industrial capitalists until they had nothing left—people who could only direct their hatred toward the wealthy Jews.

In this regard, the fate of Jews in that era was similar to that of Chinese in Southeast Asia, Vietnam, Australia, and the Americas.

From a politician’s perspective, a common enemy could unite even irreconcilable factions, parties, or groups, forcing them to cooperate or set aside internal conflicts to eliminate the threat.

But the common people wouldn’t think that way.

Chapter 78: Experimental Firing of Bone China

As Hrutik left Hrut City for the Basque whaling grounds, Olaf received some exciting news.

Old Galdur, accompanied by six potters, had returned after a month of travel, dusty and weary. They reported discovering clay deposits suitable for pottery in the highlands of Vinland’s interior, as well as in the southern and northern ranges of the southwest and northwest regions. The deposits were vast, and the clay was of excellent quality.

After examining the samples they brought back, Olaf realized these were not kaolin clays. Some resembled kaolin, but most contained fine, glass-like particles. A thought struck him—Canada, in later centuries, would be renowned for its asbestos mines. These clays were likely byproducts of asbestos mining.

Asbestos had many uses in textiles and construction, but Olaf only knew of asbestos roofing tiles, which required cement. Since he had no immediate use for it, he set aside the idea of mining asbestos for now. Instead, he ordered Old Galdur to take thirty of his strongest male slaves to mine the clay.

Olaf had received fifty slaves when Haldor established the Viking Raid, and as the leader of two Aettangrs, he had a hundred slaves under his command, managed by two production foremen.

For the clay mining operation, Olaf had Old Galdur select the thirty strongest slaves. That afternoon, the slaves, carrying shovels and picks, boarded two Viking longships and set off.

Five days later, the first ship returned under the guidance of two potters, laden with clay. Since livestock was scarce in Vinland and slaves were considered less valuable than cattle, the slaves had to carry the clay themselves, taking two days to transport it all to the factory.

After the second ship’s clay was also brought back to Hrut City, Olaf began working with the six potters to produce pottery.

First, they needed to build a kiln. Olaf did not participate in this process but observed as the craftsmen directed apprentices and slaves to construct a massive kiln, three men tall, using stones and clay. They left it to dry naturally before applying another layer of clay.

A week later, the kiln was ready. The six potters personally mixed the clay, shaped the blanks, formed the vessels, and added patterns, all while instructing the apprentices.

Several days later, the first batch of pottery was fired, but since it was a new kiln, many issues arose. Dissatisfied with the results, the potters smashed the pieces and reinforced the kiln before firing a second batch.

After two consecutive batches of defective pottery and exhausting a mountain of firewood, the third batch finally met the potters’ standards in terms of hardness and quality, making it suitable for sale.

However, Olaf was still unsatisfied. While these pots were adequate for daily use, he wanted to produce marketable goods. Even if he filled a ship with these pots and sailed to Europe, they would fetch only a few pounds in gold coins. Ordinary Arab ceramics could rival dozens or hundreds of these pots, and Far Eastern ceramics could fetch an entire ship’s worth.

Olaf did not know the techniques for making porcelain, but he knew how to make bone china.

Historically, bone china was invented in England in 1794. It was a type of porcelain made by mixing animal bone ash with clay, developed by Westerners to imitate Eastern porcelain. At the time, it was considered a novel technology, and a set of translucent bone china could fetch an astronomical price, nearly matching the value of high-end thin-bodied porcelain from the Far East.

Olaf knew that bone china was made by mixing ordinary clay, kaolin, and bone ash, firing it once to create pottery, then glazing and firing it a second time to produce bone china. However, when bone china was first invented over a hundred years later, the success rate was extremely low.

Olaf only had theoretical knowledge and was unsure if he was missing something. He shared his idea with Old Galdur and the six potters. They were astonished to learn that mixing animal bone ash and white kaolin could transform ordinary pottery into the beautiful and expensive porcelain of the East. This news filled them with enthusiasm.

After producing thousands of pots, bowls, and dishes, the apprentices gradually mastered the techniques. Meanwhile, the six potters took turns supervising the apprentices’ work and set up a small kiln at the foot of the mountain to experiment with bone china.

These six potters were experienced masters who had worked in noble kilns back home, producing thousands of high-quality pots annually. Their skills and techniques were refined.

With Olaf’s bone china formula, they quickly moved to the trial phase, shaping rough blanks, carefully carving and molding them, and finally firing them.

However, bone china was not as simple as mixing clay, porcelain clay, and bone ash. If it were that easy, porcelain would not have become a symbol of Chinese civilization for thousands of years, nor would bone china have become a representative Western porcelain.

In essence, any type of porcelain was the crystallization of wisdom from one or more civilizations, the result of generations of effort and research.

After witnessing the potters’ repeated failures, Olaf reflected on his impatience and encouraged them to explore gradually.

Time passed quickly, and by June, after more than twenty failures, the potters finally found a complete vessel among a batch of cracked pottery.

It was a one-foot-diameter, two-foot-tall pot with a traditional Nordic design, appearing rustic and primitive, adorned with cross and lion’s mane patterns.

Traditional pottery was yellowish or gray, with a rough surface. If painted, it could be a decent piece.

But this pottery, made with bone ash and other materials in specific proportions, felt smooth to the touch. Upon closer inspection, its texture resembled white plaster, but it was much harder.

Olaf then had the potters apply glaze and fire it a second time. The result was a pot that closely resembled white porcelain, both in appearance and texture.

Olaf held the pot near the stove, and the firelight shone through it, giving it a jade-like quality. Although its translucency was poor, it was indeed a successful piece of bone china.

“Excellent! Keep up the good work. Each of the six potters will receive a hundred pounds of dried fish as a reward. If you can perfect the formula and consistently produce bone china, I will request my father to grant each of you a virgate of land!”

Olaf was generous with rewards for his researchers. After his announcement, the six potters thanked him joyfully and immediately returned to their work.

Whether due to luck or material issues, the potters fired over ten more batches, wasting fifty to sixty molds and tens of thousands of pounds of firewood, but not a single piece of bone china was successfully produced. Most either cracked or shattered.

Olaf observed one of the firings and suggested adjusting the proportions. After several dozen more attempts, they finally managed to produce bone china again. However, out of six or seven pieces per batch, only one or two would turn out well, while the rest deformed or cracked, becoming waste. On average, only one out of five batches yielded bone china.

Olaf was satisfied with this success rate. The finished bone china had a fine, jade-like texture, white as milk. It was more than enough to deceive the wealthy and foolish European nobles, passing as high-quality porcelain from the Far East.

A set of fine porcelain from the Ming Dynasty could fetch tens of thousands of pounds in silver, affordable only to royal families, high-ranking church officials, and the wealthiest nobles.

While bone china could not compare to the finest porcelain, it could easily pass as mid-range porcelain, which was still highly valuable and far more expensive than beaver pelts and royal jelly.

Olaf believed that if his factory could gradually produce bone china, it would surpass the profits from beaver pelts and royal jelly by next year, becoming another pillar industry in Vinland.

Chapter 79: The Tradition of the Ancestors

When Olaf’s factory first began tinkering with porcelain production, Haldor and the others thought Olaf was just fooling around. For centuries, countless skilled artisans across Europe had tried and failed to replicate porcelain. How could Olaf and six potters succeed where so many had failed? It would take a miracle!

But when the first piece of bone china appeared, Haldor, Hrutik, Hoskuld, Kadir, Heiner, and the others were stunned. They caressed the porcelain vase as if it were a lover’s skin, and Haldor, overcome with joy, rewarded Olaf with three hundred slaves, one hundred reindeer, and one hundred virgates of land.

With the production of bone china, Olaf’s reputation and status in Hrut City soared to new heights. From the upper echelons to the middle ranks, even ordinary Vikings and slaves, all began to believe the rumor that Olaf was the reincarnation of Haldor’s ancestral spirit.

A twelve-year-old boy surpassing adults, even the most educated and experienced figures, and possessing all manner of miraculous abilities—how could the superstitious people of the 17th century not worship, revere, and believe in him?

While Olaf led the potters in researching bone china, the apprentice potters and other craftsmen were far from idle. They consumed vast quantities of raw materials brought in by slaves from Hrut City.

Over the thirty-plus days from May to early June, they produced an astonishing variety of goods, leaving Haldor, Jot, Hoskuld, and Olaf amazed.

Wooden utensils and tools were the most numerous, with thousands upon thousands at a glance. Stone tools numbered in the hundreds, but combined stone-and-wood tools were more common, totaling nearly a thousand.

There were over four hundred pottery jars and basins.

Leather shoes, coats, and trousers were too numerous to count, totaling nearly a thousand. Though not made from expensive or rare hides, they were durable, sturdy, and far more stylish than those made by the Beothuk or Inuit.

The pen makers crafted over a hundred exquisite quill pens from the thick feathers of eagles and large seabirds hunted on the island. Alongside the pens were dozens of barrels of black ink made from plants and minerals.

If these goods were packed and shipped to Europe for sale, aside from fetching a modest price in the materially poor Nordic regions, they would likely go unsold elsewhere. Even in the Nordic regions, the proceeds wouldn’t be enough to buy a single ship’s worth of flour.

But in the resource-scarce New World, where skilled labor and handicrafts were equally lacking, these goods would be worth far more. Whether European colonists or the native inhabitants, there was demand for the various daily necessities produced by the Vinland craftsmen.

With these tools, the natives would no longer have to rely on the crude methods of their elders, and the English and French colonists would no longer have to wait desperately for the scarce goods shipped from Europe.

Upon seeing the mountain of goods piled in the warehouse, Olaf immediately discussed with Haldor and the others. They decided to distribute some within Hrut City, then transport a batch to New England and New France for sale. They could even trade with the savage tribes on the mainland, exchanging goods for furs and other items.

New England and New France had an insatiable demand for food, clothing, and daily tools—all essentials for life. However, relying on merchant ships traveling back and forth between the New World and Europe was extremely costly and yielded meager quantities. Thus, most white slaves and colonists in the colonies had to make do, enduring the inconveniences of life.

In Haig Fortress, Olaf proposed selling the factory’s products to the two colonies.

All the high-ranking officials of Hrut City agreed. Jot even laughed and said, “Yanis, who came with Haig—your father’s servant—once said that originally, Haig Fortress, New England, and New France only cared about solving the problems of food and warmth. Other issues were completely ignored. Over time, everyone became like wild beasts, forgetting the days of civilized society!

This shows how inconvenient life is for those living far away in the New World due to the lack of tools! Now, our neighbors are still suffering from this hardship. I think the daily necessities produced by Olaf’s factory will be very popular. This is a good way for us to take wealth from the French and English!”

Olos also chimed in, “The second young master’s factory is amazing! In the past, even a large tribe didn’t have many people who could make tools. Usually, only the chief could enjoy various daily utensils. Now, if the factory’s goods can be transported to the mainland, the Iroquois, Huron, Abenaki, and Cree will all be willing to exchange furs…”

Olos now spoke ancient Norse almost as well as the Icelanders. The longer he lived in Hrut City, the more he felt his own insignificance and the more he realized the vast knowledge and power of Haldor and the others. Although he was intelligent and had guessed that Haldor was not a heavenly god, and that the so-called “heavenly fire and thunder” were just miraculous weapons, he still displayed loyalty and superstition.

After seeing how the second young master, Olaf, had subdued the smallpox curse that had plagued the Beothuk for over a hundred years, Olos was convinced of the miracles others spoke of regarding Haldor and Olaf, and he held Olaf in great awe.

The leaders present did not ignore Olos’s words, as he could represent the natives’ opinions.

Olaf smiled and said, “Our Viking ancestors were known for holding a knife in one hand and money in the other. Combining plunder with trade is our Viking tradition. I can first establish contact with our many neighbors through commerce. Perhaps without large-scale warfare, we can gradually subdue the natives through the penetration of our goods, making them serve us!”

Olaf understood the strategic significance of economic sanctions and the influence of controlling another country’s essential goods. The struggles over “chips,” soybeans, pork, and cotton all vividly demonstrated the power of holding the upper hand in commerce.

Olaf believed that if the neighboring communities accepted and adapted to relying on Vinland for various daily necessities, Vinland could later control their purchasing and sales needs for other goods. They could use trade imbalances to incite or even control conflicts between different factions or use the gift of goods to bribe natives into helping them attack other native tribes.

However, it was clear that Haldor and the others did not understand Olaf’s subtext. They only discussed how much fur and wealth the sale of goods could bring.

Although Olaf’s suggestions did not spark much interest, selling the factory’s products was something everyone agreed on. The next day, Vikings armed with firearms and swords, along with slave warriors and numerous goods, set sail in Viking longships from Hrut Port, heading toward the territories of their neighboring communities.

This time, Haldor dispatched two hundred Vikings and one thousand slave warriors. They took all the ships on the island, dividing into four teams heading to the outposts of New England and New France, as well as the native territories on both banks of the Saint Lawrence River.

Chapter 80: Joint Operation

While the Vikings took their slave warriors away from Vinland to seek buyers at the prices set by the Viking Raid’s higher-ups, a battle that would decide the future of Vinland was being prepared at the Basque whaling station on the northern shore of the Grand Ocean in Vinland.

On June 12, 1629, Basque Governor Hrutik stood before the Basque castle, clad in plate armor, a long sword and javelin at his waist. His visor was pushed up, revealing the scar at the corner of his eye and his resolute, stern gaze.

Before Hrutik stood over six hundred warriors. Among them, standing straight and formed into a square formation, were three hundred and thirty Viking militia, consisting of thirty Viking soldiers and three hundred Beothuk slave warriors.

Behind the three hundred and thirty militia stood two hundred sturdy native men. These were slaves captured by the Viking militia over the past month. Some were Cree, some were Huron, but most were from an eastern branch of the Abenaki—the Penobscot.

After arriving at the Basque whaling station in early May, Hrutik renamed it Basque City. He then led his Viking militia to defeat the attacking Penobscot, capturing and enslaving over a hundred of them.

In the following time, the Viking militia successively crushed three tribes that had already lost many men in previous battles, capturing over four hundred prisoners, of whom only a little over a hundred were young men.

This resulted in no native tribes within a thirty-mile radius.

Entering June, Basque City had five hundred and forty-one savage slaves, most of whom were Penobscot. To better manage the slaves, Hrutik appointed a few Cree and Huron as production team leaders and squad leaders for the Penobscot, to prevent them from forming groups and causing disputes or unwanted thoughts.

Originally, Hrutik had planned to train the slave soldiers in June and then lead all the militia and slave soldiers to attack the native camps to the west at the end of the month. The Cree, Abenaki, and Huron living on the north bank of the Saint Lawrence River did not have large tribes because the climate and environment here were far inferior to the south bank.

Moreover, the native population on the north bank east of the river mouth was not large; the truly densely populated areas were near New France and to the southwest and due south.

Through investigation, Hrutik believed that before winter, he could lead a large army to occupy all the land north of Anticosti Island, which would later be known as the Labrador region.

However, at the end of May, Hrutik met a messenger sent by Francis. This messenger brought a personal letter from Francis, inviting Hrutik to join forces with him to conquer the entire Labrador region.

Hrutik was naturally delighted to join forces with the French soldiers. This would reduce the pressure and casualties on his side and allow his men to witness the style of the French soldiers.

As agreed, June 12 was the day both sides would gather at Chicken Beak Bay on the north bank. After assembling his troops, Hrutik personally led the army aboard Viking longships, leaving Red Bay and sailing east along the coast. Before noon, they arrived at Chicken Beak Bay, north of Anticosti Island. Sailing into Chicken Beak River from Chicken Beak Bay, Hrutik, standing at the bow, saw over eighty French soldiers and two hundred Huron warriors on the northern slope.

After landing, Hrutik found that the northern bank was a tidal flat formed by the river and the tide surging into the channel. Further north, he saw vast forests. The Chicken Beak River’s mouth narrowed upstream, with stone hills and hidden reefs, making it navigable only by small boats.

Not daring to risk experimenting with the Viking longships, Hrutik led his army to meet up with Francis. Then, under the guidance of Huron warriors familiar with the terrain, they followed the Chicken Beak River upstream, preparing to attack several Cree and Penobscot tribes living in the northern river valley.

According to Francis’s subordinates, the northeast of the Saint Lawrence River’s north bank was sparsely populated, with only seven or eight large tribes, all living in the river valleys around Chicken Beak River.

Because the Labrador region was mountainous and forested with rugged roads, the seven hundred-strong army did not move quickly.

It wasn’t until dusk that they found the first native tribe in the river valley. Then, the Huron and Viking slave warriors launched the first attack, charging into the native tribe.

Arrows flew, and shouts of battle rose one after another. After the French soldiers and Viking soldiers fired a round of firearms, the native tribe in the river valley lost their resistance.

After the battle, Hrutik and Francis, who had taken up residence in the tribe’s large house, counted the losses. The tribe had over three hundred people, with over a hundred and thirty male warriors. Now, more than half had been killed, leaving only over fifty male prisoners.

The entire tribe had fewer than three hundred people left, and they were taken as slaves by the Viking slaves and Huron.

The next morning, Francis and Hrutik divided some Huron and Viking slaves to guard the slaves in the tribe, then led the remaining army north to attack another river valley tribe.

Five days later, Hrutik and Francis led five hundred soldiers to break the fifth large tribe, killing over a hundred native warriors and capturing over four hundred native slaves.

However, due to multiple battles, both sides’ ammunition and gunpowder were severely depleted, and the Huron warriors and slave warriors had suffered heavy casualties. This made Hrutik and Francis consider retreat.

Both believed that there were no large tribes left in the southern Labrador region; at most, there were small tribes of several dozen people, which posed no threat to their future rule. Now, they could consider issues of governance and management.

In terms of military conquest, the entire southern Labrador region had become the territory of New France and Vinland. This area, according to Champlain’s previous surveys, was roughly half or more than half the size of Vinland. If not for the severe cold making the land too barren and the population too small, it could be said that a few hundred people could never conquer it.

Since Basque City’s food and resources could not temporarily support too many people, and New France faced the same situation, Hrutik and Francis left some soldiers and slaves in the five tribes to rule, appointing some docile women as chiefs to manage the slaves. Then, they each left Labrador with a small number of slaves.

After returning to Basque City, Hrutik sent a message to Hrut City, reporting the good news of the occupation of the Labrador region and hoping that Hrut City could send more food and supplies. After all, it was difficult for Hrutik to develop Basque City; it was mainly a military occupation and rule, radiating throughout southern Labrador, ordering the natives to hand over furs and other resources.

Labrador’s climate and environment were unsuitable for farming, but it could be used for grazing. Therefore, Hrutik also requested that Haldor send some professional herders and sheep, reindeer, etc., to raise here, training the slaves to become herders, turning southern Labrador into another supply base for Vinland’s meat, furs, timber, and other resources.

Returning to New France, Francis personally wrote a second letter, preparing to have someone take it back to Paris in a couple of days. The military merit of expanding New France’s territory was enough for him to advance further.

Francis was at an age full of ambition. He was eager to be promoted in war, even to return to France and establish military achievements in the pan-European war, gaining titles and land.

Chapter 81: Changes in England

New England Colony

The atmosphere in Plymouth City was tense. Dozens of Puritans, firearms in hand, glared with ashen faces at the hundred musketeers before them.

At the head of the Puritans stood the young Pastor McG, with most of the Puritan councilmen behind him.

Opposite them were the armed sailors of the Plymouth Company, led by Governor William and Mr. Miller.

“McG! Elder Blaister has fallen into a coma. As his friend, I must take him back to London. His illness can only be treated there. Do you want him to die?”

Governor William was a burly man in his thirties, clad in leather armor and a felt hat, his mustache curled upward at the ends. He stared sternly at McG.

McG’s face was pale with tension. Glancing at his companions, who were losing their nerve, his heart was a storm of conflicting emotions.

The harsh conditions of New England meant that every year, conflicts with the natives and diseases claimed lives. This was partly due to the leaders’ neglect of production, while the white slaves were worked to death. Many leaders themselves could not endure the brutal environment and primitive conditions, succumbing to dysentery, smallpox, and typhoid.

During winter, the residents burned firewood indoors for warmth. Elder Blaister, suffering from asthma, had been choked by the smoke several times, worsening his condition. By spring, he had fallen gravely ill twice. Though McG and Governor William had sought treatment from neighboring Indian shamans, the results were far from ideal. With the recent warming weather, Blaister had slipped into a coma, nearing death.

Before losing consciousness, Blaister had called McG to his side, warning him to protect himself. If Blaister died or left New England, McG’s authority alone would not be enough to lead the people. Governor William of the Plymouth Company would seize control of Plymouth City, endangering the Puritans’ position.

McG heeded Blaister’s warning, staying by his side day and night. But as Blaister’s condition worsened, Governor William grew impatient. With the help of Miller, who sided with the Plymouth Company, they claimed they would take Blaister back to London for treatment.

Though McG was not perceptive, he sensed their ill intentions.

Blaister was still in a coma, but the Puritans remained united around him. If Blaister left New England, and with Miller openly supporting Governor William, McG would lose all power. The Puritan-led council governing Plymouth City would become meaningless.

Thus, McG led the Puritans in guarding the comatose Blaister. The standoff escalated, with both sides threatening force.

Governor William stepped forward, his tone softening, which eased McG’s tension slightly. Shaking his head, McG said, “Elder Blaister’s body cannot endure the journey across the sea. We should wait for him to wake and follow his instructions.”

Miller let out a cold laugh, his hawk-like nose seeming to curve further.

“What right do you have to stop us from treating Elder Blaister? Do you want him to die? Then you can inherit his position and control the council! His body is failing—he must return to London immediately! If you refuse, it proves you have ulterior motives!”

“You… you’re lying!”

McG’s face flushed red with anger. Pointing at Miller, he shouted, “I have no ambition to inherit the elder’s position! I’m not stopping you from saving him… it’s the elder who asked me to—”

Miller and William exchanged a glance, secretly pleased. They continued their assault—one aggressive, the other feigning concern. Soon, McG was left speechless, as if refusing their request would make him the villain who had harmed Blaister.

Only two Puritans initially spoke up for McG, but to no avail. Overwhelmed, McG reluctantly agreed to their demands. He requested that his two closest companions accompany Blaister on the journey to London to ensure his safety.

That afternoon, the unconscious Elder Blaister and the two Puritan councilmen, surrounded by animal furs, boarded the Plymouth Company’s armed merchant ship and set sail for London, vanishing into the eastern horizon.

After Blaister and the two councilmen left, Plymouth City enjoyed two peaceful days. But on the third day, Governor William announced the dissolution of the Puritan council, replacing it with the Plymouth Council, where both Puritans and other colonists would serve as members. The Plymouth Company would now oversee all colonial affairs.

McG was furious, but his protests fell on deaf ears. Nearly all the Puritans had sided with Miller, who became the first chairman of the new council.

Within days, the ostracized McG found himself utterly alone.

With no place left for him in New England except Virginia, McG’s only options were to go to Virginia or return to London.

Sensing the growing hostility in Plymouth City, McG decided to leave, heading back to London for the time being.

He hoped to find his mentor, Blaister, and his two friends there. Perhaps they could seek help from the Massachusetts Company, the most powerful of the three companies colonizing New England and a long-time rival of the Plymouth Company.

On June 20th, McG finally boarded a Creek Company ship bound for London.

After McG’s humiliating departure, Miller and William were quickly informed.

Miller pondered for a moment before going to see William.

“Governor, did you hear? McG is returning to London on a Creek Company ship.”

Governor William sat on a sofa, puffing on a pipe filled with American tobacco—a habit he had picked up the previous year. He enjoyed the sensation of smoke curling from his lips. Seeing Miller enter, he offered him a puff. When Miller declined, William tapped the ash from his pipe and put it away. “I just heard. A failure—what does it matter?”

Miller frowned. “I’m worried he might cause trouble in London if he can’t find Blaister, George, and Byram.”

Governor William slowly straightened, tapping his fingers on the table. “Then send someone to intercept the Creek ship. Pay the captain to throw McG overboard. With Blaister gone, I’ll have no rivals in Plymouth. If McG wants to be my enemy, let him join Blaister at the bottom of the sea.”

A flicker of delight crossed Miller’s eyes. “I’ll arrange it at once.” With that, he hurried out.

Chapter 82: Seize This Ship!

The Creek Company’s armed merchant ships had docked at three colonial settlements in New England before preparing for their final resupply at the northern outpost of New Scotland—also known as the Nova Scotia Peninsula—before setting sail across the North Atlantic to return to London.

As the two armed merchant ships of the Creek Company entered the eastern waters of Vinland, the fishing boats grew fewer. Just as the sun dipped westward and the sky darkened, several sailors carried a nailed-shut wooden barrel to the ship’s railing and heaved it overboard together.

Splash!

The sea erupted in a spray three times the height of a man, and the barrel bobbed in the waves before drifting away, likely to be waterlogged and sink within ten minutes.

In the fading glow of the sun, a fleet of sixteen massive ships emerged on the eastern horizon, surging westward in a grand procession.

Thirteen of these ships were armed merchant vessels, their tall, narrow hulls and movable wooden gun ports revealing their nature—the dark muzzles of cannons lurked behind those ports.

The thirteen armed merchant ships encircled three large-bellied cargo ships and one mixed-rigged schooner, each flying a flag bearing the crossed hammer and axe, signifying that this fleet represented no nation.

The captains of the Creek Company’s two armed merchant ships were startled by the approaching armada, but upon recognizing the flags, they breathed a sigh of relief.

“It’s the Vinland flag! How did the Icelanders get so many ships?!” the captain muttered enviously before preparing to steer clear of the Vinland fleet.

This fleet was none other than Haig and Ulf, returning from Europe. Ulf and Haig, leading their newly purchased armed merchant ships, thousands of white slaves, and various supplies, caught sight of the distant silhouette of Vinland in the sunset’s glow. They rushed to the deck, their eyes filled with excitement.

“Has it been two and a half months since we left Vinland?” Haig asked, turning to Ulf.

Ulf nodded, then sighed. “Overall, things went smoothly. We didn’t disappoint my father. But… wait… are those English merchant ships?” As he spoke, he spotted two armed merchant ships on the western horizon. Upon closer inspection of their flags, he recognized them as British vessels.

Haig followed his gaze. Moments later, as the two fleets passed each other, a sailor suddenly pointed at the sea and shouted.

“Hey! What’s that in the water?!”

Haig and Ulf both looked down and saw a barrel bobbing in the waves nearby, seemingly on the verge of sinking.

“Fish it out and take a look!” Haig and Ulf exchanged glances before Ulf suddenly turned to glance at the British ships, now trailing behind their own fleet. He called out loudly.

Several sailors quickly tied ropes around their waists and dove into the sea to retrieve the barrel. Moments later, it was hauled onto the deck. When the lid was pried open, a sailor exclaimed in surprise, “It’s a person!”

The barrel was tipped over, and along with the rushing seawater, a young man tumbled out. Haig and Ulf frowned—they recognized the young man inside the barrel.

“I remember him—his name is McG, right? Isn’t he a Puritan from Plymouth? Last winter, he came to Hrut City on behalf of Elder Blaister to discuss cooperation with us, wanting to drive out the French. Do you remember, Ulf?” Haig finished speaking and ordered the sailors to tend to the unconscious McG.

“I remember. His presence here must mean he was thrown off one of those two merchant ships!” Ulf knew that at sea, killing or punishing disobedient sailors and criminals often involved throwing them overboard. To avoid the sin of murder, most would seal the person in a barrel before tossing them in. Judging by McG’s condition, he had clearly been in the water for only a short time.

Cough! Cough!

With the sailors’ help, McG suddenly coughed up seawater and slowly regained consciousness.

Soon, Haig and Ulf learned from McG that he had been wronged and that the Puritan Council of New England seemed on the verge of collapse.

“A governor backed by a commercial company is never a good neighbor!” Ulf, influenced by Olaf and Haldor, had developed a keen awareness of the situation in Plymouth. He turned to McG and said gently, “For God’s sake! I must help you, Pastor McG. And given your ordeal, I suspect Elder Blaister has also met with misfortune!”

“Ah!”

McG’s pale face suddenly contorted in shock, and his bloodless lips trembled. The terrible truth dawned on him, and he looked at Ulf and Haig, pleading, “Could I ask you to investigate this matter? I know this request may be presumptuous…”

Ulf had known for some time that McG was highly regarded by Elder Blaister. Now, if they could make good use of him, it might be an opportunity to sow chaos in New England—at the very least, to divide the British forces.

“Pastor McG, rest assured!” Ulf patted McG’s shoulder and turned to Haig, asking, “Uncle! Let’s turn the ships around and chase down those two vessels!”

“What for? To seize them?” Haig, recalling that he hadn’t been a pirate in over five years, felt a sudden itch in his hands. He immediately ordered the ships to turn and pursue the two Creek Company armed merchant ships, which hadn’t yet gone far.

“I suspect the hired sailors who tried to kill Pastor McG are still on that ship. Without seeing the murder with our own eyes, no one will be at ease!” Ulf rubbed his chin and said, “We must help Pastor McG seek justice. We must board and inspect their ship! Uncle, with so many armed merchant ships, what’s the harm in seizing them?!”

“Exactly!” Haig laughed heartily. “Seize them!”

Twenty minutes later, Haig and Ulf’s flagship, leading three armed merchant ships, caught up with the Creek Company’s armed merchant ships, which had already increased to full speed.

Since Haig’s flagship and the other three ships carried few people, they had a shallow draft and greater speed, quickly closing in on the British vessels.

“Ramming speed!” Haig roared, and the four ships charged forward like swordfish, hurtling toward the Creek Company’s ships.

The two British captains were terrified and at a loss. One ship continued to flee at full speed, while the other turned broadside, preparing to fire a volley.

Seeing the British armed merchant ship turning to face them, Haig realized they intended to fire their cannons. He ordered the four ships to scatter and circle the two British vessels while returning fire.

Boom!!!

Massive iron balls whistled through the air, smashing into the water and sending up towering sprays, though one or two struck the hulls, causing minor damage.

But the four armed merchant ships of Vinland, with their superior firepower, unleashed a devastating broadside, riddling the decks and hulls of the two British ships with dozens of gaping holes. With twice the firepower, they instantly suppressed the British.

After two rounds of firing, Haig urgently ordered the charge. The four ships then rammed the two British vessels, their prows piercing deep into the enemy hulls. What followed was the Vikings’ specialty—boarding actions.

Under the leadership of Haig and Ulf, sailors and Viking warriors stormed the two ships via gangplanks. With Haig leading the way by cleaving two men with his large axe, the Vikings slaughtered over a dozen resisting sailors. Brun even felled one of the captains.

In the end, Haig’s forces captured over forty survivors from the British ships, along with two large vessels and a full cargo of goods.

Chapter 83: Let Me Avenge You!

A classic and swift Viking raid erupted at dusk, ending by the time night fell.

Haig’s side suffered only one sailor losing an arm, with the rest sustaining minor injuries—no casualties. But the English ship’s guards and sailors fared far worse. Over twenty died across the two vessels, and the remaining forty-plus were all wounded.

Under McG’s identification, the sailors captured both the man who harmed him and the one who ordered it, then interrogated them.

The instigator was Miller’s close friend, a middle-aged man named Byram. After two punches, he spilled everything he knew.

“It… it was Miller and William who ordered me… Elder Blaister was also killed and thrown into the sea on their command…”

McG’s fears were confirmed by Byram’s words. Tears streamed down his face as he recalled the days spent learning under Blaister and preaching to the natives.

“Damn you!”

McG punched Byram to the ground, then glared with bloodshot eyes, shouting, “You’re all devils! I’ll avenge Elder Blaister! I’ll kill you all! You’re doomed to suffer Satan’s torment and the final judgment!”

Ulf approached McG only after his outburst, patting his shoulder solemnly. He looked McG in the eye with sincere concern. “I deeply sympathize with and am outraged by what happened to Elder Blaister and Pastor McG! A devout man of God, a guide for lost sheep, a prophet spreading the Lord’s name in the New World—brutally murdered, his body fed to the fish! They’re despicable scoundrels! I want to help you. Would that be alright?”

“Thank you so much, Lord Ulf! And Lord Haig!”

McG showed utmost respect to his saviors and last hope. He bowed deeply before pleading, “Lord Haig, Lord Ulf, I know Vinland is powerful—its population and military in North America surpass New England and New France. If I want to avenge myself, Elder Blaister, George, and Byram, I must ask for your aid. If you help us seek justice, I’ll share New England’s land and resources with Vinland!”

McG was no fool or naive man. He knew the Icelanders’ willingness to help stemmed from their ambition for New England’s land. But what did it matter?

Now, McG was a pitiful man who had nearly lost his life. Everything he had built in the New World was gone. He was a gambler with nothing left, knowing Vinland only needed him to provide a legitimate reason to enter New England.

Even if he could never control New England again, as long as he could have his revenge and secure the Puritans’ interests, he was willing to help the Icelandic Vikings defeat the Plymouth Company and take Plymouth.

Haig turned to the forty-plus trembling sailors. With a wave of his hand, the Vikings bound all the Englishmen and threw them into the sea.

Splash…

One after another, forty-plus bodies hit the water. On deck, only McG remained among the English.

Watching Haig slaughter so effortlessly, McG’s hands and feet turned icy. He silently regretted asking the Icelandic Vikings for help, but it was too late to turn back now. He had to act as if nothing was wrong.

A day later, Vinland’s sixteen-ship fleet, towing two battered armed merchant ships, entered Vinland’s coastal waters.

Along the way, French and English fishing boats in the East Sea scattered in fear at the sight of the massive fleet, terrified of being rammed or attacked. Haig, Ulf, and the others relished the feeling of dominating the seas.

“These ant-like creatures are plundering our wealth! With our powerful armed fleet, no other ships will dare poach our fish in Vinland’s waters!”

Ulf pointed at the fleeing fishing boats, his voice ringing with conviction. Haig laughed heartily, mocking, “Good! We’ll drive them out and take from them! The North Atlantic will see the return of Viking raiders!”

As the fleet docked at Hrut Port on Vinland’s southeastern peninsula, the Vikings and slaves in Hrut City were already alerted.

Haldor and Katrin, accompanied by friends and family, rushed to the dock to welcome Haig, Ulf, and the others.

After warm embraces, the group huddled together, exchanging words of longing. Olaf arrived on horseback, leaping off with a shout to embrace his uncle and brother.

“Uncle! Brother!”

“You’ve grown taller, Olaf!” Ulf remarked, smiling at Olaf, who now reached his shoulder.

Haig noticed the golden fuzz on Olaf’s upper lip and chuckled, “The golden-haired lad’s growing a beard!”

Olaf showed no shyness. Recently, he had noticed his body hair thickening and his height surging past most white men—a sign of puberty.

“Brother, do you remember this pastor?” Haig stepped aside, revealing the young pastor behind him, and addressed Haldor.

Haldor raised an eyebrow and smiled, “Is this Pastor McG? How did you end up on Haig’s ship?”

“Thanks to Mr. Haig and Mr. Ulf, or I would have been thrown into the sea and drowned…” McG bowed and explained.

“What happened?” Haldor frowned.

Ulf stepped forward and whispered the details to Haldor, whose eyes gleamed with excitement. He then instructed someone to take McG to rest.

“Please, Pastor McG, freshen up and rest. I’ll send someone to invite you to the banquet tonight…”

After McG left, the group chatted for a while. Haig suddenly coughed nervously. When everyone turned to him, he stammered, “Uh… I…”

“What’s wrong?!” Haldor asked, puzzled. In his memory, his brother had never acted this way.

Haig still struggled to speak, but Ulf laughed and said, “Half a month ago, while we were picking up white slaves in Ireland, Uncle met his true love. He wants to introduce her to you.”

“Wow!”

Everyone exclaimed in surprise, their expressions varying as they looked at Haig. Haldor and Katrin wore delighted smiles, while Kadir and Hoskuld exchanged mischievous grins. Jot and a few others looked curious.

Olaf was also very curious. He wondered what kind of woman had captured his uncle’s heart, especially since, as far as he knew, Haig was thirty-four and had only fallen in love once eleven years ago. That relationship ended in a jealous quarrel, and the woman married a Norwegian. Since coming to Vinland, Haig had had no opportunity to interact with women. He showed no interest in Inuit or Indian women, making everyone almost forget he was a thirty-four-year-old bachelor.

But who would have thought that on this trip, Haig would find his true love? It was indeed intriguing what kind of woman had captured the heart of this “thunderbolt Qin Ming”?

Ulf spoke Haig’s mind, making Haig suddenly relax. He regained his heroic demeanor, turning to the densely packed crowd of sailors, guards, and white slaves behind him, and shouted, “Rolin! Come meet my family!”

A woman in a light red cross-patterned plaid coat, wearing a sunhat, stepped gracefully from the crowd and nestled against Haig. Her pointed chin lifted, revealing a fair complexion and delicate features—quite beautiful, though her wide jawbones slightly marred her perfection.

“Rolin O’More! Irish. Pleased to meet you all!”

Rolin smiled softly, her lips forming a graceful curve. She blinked, then looked at the tall and extraordinary Haldor and Katrin beside him, saying, “You must be Big Brother Haldor and Sister-in-law Katrin. Haig has always told me about your help and deep familial affection. I’ve always envied that!”

Katrin took Rolin’s hand, noting she was around twenty and dressed in a way that suggested she wasn’t from an ordinary family. She reminded her, “You’ve crossed the ocean for Haig and come to Vinland. I hope you won’t mind the harsh conditions here.”

Rolin gently glanced at Haig before saying, “I love Haig deeply. His bravery and strength are unmatched. Before coming, I prepared myself to endure hardships with him, so Katrin, you needn’t worry.”

“Haha.” Haig laughed heartily, wrapping his burly arm around Rolin. “Speaking of which, Olaf should remember. Rolin is Mr. O’More’s younger sister…”

After Haig’s explanation, everyone learned of Rolin’s background.

Rolin was the youngest sister of Rory O’More, a traditional Irish landowner. At twenty-one, she had lived in her hometown’s manor until meeting Haig, who was there to collect white slaves, twenty-some days ago. They fell in love at first sight and secretly pledged themselves to each other. Without her clan leader and elder brother’s consent, Rolin followed Haig to Vinland.

Haldor was grateful for Rolin’s sacrifice for his brother. After some conversation, he let Haig take Rolin back to the city to rest.

Once Haig left with Rolin in his arms, Haldor first glanced at the numerous white slaves standing obediently under the guards’ watch, then turned to Ulf and asked, “Son, you’ve done well! I see we’ve added ten armed merchant ships. Are there over a thousand white slaves?”

Ulf turned and pointed at the crowd of white slaves behind him, grinning. “Father, there are one thousand six hundred fifty-three white slaves. This time, the settlement fee is one-fifth of what it used to be. Among them, one thousand two hundred are Irish, three hundred eighty are Scottish, and the rest are Scottish and five Dutch.”

White slaves referred to indentured servants. This form of employment had existed since colonization began last century, but it was the British who truly popularized indentured white servitude—and now, the Icelanders would join them.

Chapter 84: A Woman for Every Man

From the sixteenth century onward, England, having maintained stable development after unification, saw its population on the island of Britain double by the early seventeenth century, reaching over five million. Including Ireland’s two million, the total population exceeded eight million.

In a Europe still reeling from the Black Death, this made England a populous nation, ranking fourth after France, the Holy Roman Empire, and Spain.

However, England’s land area was far smaller than these three nations, leading to severe overpopulation and resource scarcity. To address this, Queen Elizabeth I had vigorously developed the navy and maritime plunder to boost national wealth, encouraging piracy as a means of alleviating population pressure—a form of indirect job redistribution.

But this was only a temporary solution. As the population continued to grow, inflation, labor surplus, and land consolidation threatened the stability of the monarchy.

In the seventeenth century, England turned to overseas colonization, establishing the East India Company and the West India Company to reduce domestic population pressure and secure cheap resources from colonies.

Thus, England’s colonial history began as a response to overpopulation and land scarcity on its small island.

For Haig and Ulf, recruiting indentured white slaves was most convenient and affordable in England, Scotland, and Ireland. British merchant companies could acquire such labor without even a penny in resettlement fees, securing six to seven years of free labor.

As outsiders, Haig and his men had to rely on local merchants and landowners, who would not assist them without compensation—hence the introduction of “resettlement fees.”

After Ulf’s report, Haldor learned that Haig and Ulf’s six ships had sold all their goods in Ireland, England, Scotland, and Amsterdam, earning two hundred thousand pounds of silver—equivalent to over four million Dutch guilders. The bulk of the profits came from furs, followed by royal jelly, then dried meat, wine, timber, and other goods.

With their earnings, Haig and Ulf purchased ten armed merchant ships, three thousand firelock muskets, five hundred new smoothbore muskets, plate armor, bows and arrows, swords, and ammunition. They also recruited one thousand six hundred and fifty-three indentured servants, spending nearly all their money.

Four million Dutch guilders rivaled the annual income of the British or Dutch East India Companies. However, these companies had high operational costs, leaving their executives with less than a third of the profits.

In Vinland, under Haldor’s complete control, most resources were his personal or familial wealth. The costs of acquiring this wealth were borne by the enslaved population, meaning the four million guilders were almost entirely Haldor’s.

Though this year’s wealth rivaled that of a national colonial company, it was unstable—even unsustainable. The four million guilders (two hundred thousand English pounds) came entirely from the sale of furs, royal jelly, dried fish, and timber, with the largest share from rare pelts like beaver, river otter, mink, wolf, bear, reindeer, and seal.

Vinland, larger than Iceland, boasted rich resources—wetlands, forests, mountains, and rivers. Its sparse indigenous population and backward lifestyle meant abundant wildlife, seemingly inexhaustible.

But since Haldor’s arrival two years prior, the Vikings had begun systematic hunting. Traps, bows, firearms, and organized hunts had drastically reduced wildlife populations—beavers, otters, foxes, wolves, bears, and reindeer were all in sharp decline.

Though hunting slowed in winter, the leaders of Hrut City noticed the dwindling animal numbers. At this rate, Vinland’s wildlife would be extinct within a decade.

The remaining funds were spent on livestock—cattle, horses, pigs, sheep, chickens, ducks, geese, rabbits, and dogs—as well as grain, beer, whiskey, and other supplies. Almost no gold coins were brought back.

Among the new indentured servants, there were almost no children or elderly. They were young people desperate for survival, willing to cross the ocean for a chance at life. Over four hundred were married couples, six hundred were single men or youths, and another six hundred were unmarried young women or widows.

Vinland now had two thousand Vikings and over ten thousand slaves. Due to the slaughter in conquest, female slaves outnumbered males, though not severely.

But among the white Vikings, the gender imbalance was extreme. Of the eight hundred whites, only two hundred were women. Excluding underage males, nearly five hundred adult men were single. Though some had taken indigenous slaves to satisfy their needs—even impregnating them—the civilized Vikings had no desire to marry primitive natives who couldn’t even speak Icelandic fluently.

With ten times as many men as women, the unfulfilled Vikings would eventually have to form families with indigenous women. Within decades, mixed-race descendants would dominate Vinland unless more white women were brought in.

Before Haig and Ulf’s departure in early April, Haldor, Hrutik, Olaf, Heiner, Jot, and others discussed the future. They foresaw an increasing number of indigenous and mixed-race Vikings. To maintain white dominance, at least the first two generations must remain predominantly white in number and status. Thus, Haig and Ulf were tasked with bringing back more white women—to satisfy the single Vikings and accelerate Vinland’s population growth. Self-reproduction and external recruitment were the two pillars of Vinland’s early development.

After settling the new servants, Hrut City held a banquet to celebrate the successful European voyage and the capture of two armed merchant ships and their cargo.

The next morning, Haldor summoned Haig, Jot, Olaf, and other high-ranking members for a general assembly of all Vikings.

Over two thousand Vikings gathered in the square before Haldor’s fortress. Haldor praised Vinland and Hrut City’s achievements over the years and announced that all single white Vikings would receive an Irish female slave as a spouse—though not for free.

The announcement sent cheers through Hrut City, and over five hundred wild-eyed men eagerly eyed the female slaves, their eyes burning with desire.

With six hundred female servants and only five hundred single white men, demand could be fully met.

But Haldor, as the Viking Raid general, was no philanthropist. The youngest and most beautiful hundred women were set aside, with the rest categorized by height, appearance, and age.

Any white Viking could choose a wife, but prices varied by tier. The most ordinary slave required either another slave to cancel an eight-year contract or an equivalent payment.

For more attractive slaves, additional fees were required. The finest women would even be auctioned.

Driven by lust, the white Vikings spared no thought for the cost—even if it meant emptying their pockets for a woman.

Chapter 85: Vinland’s Potential Remains Vast

After half a day of fierce competition, the finest one hundred or so young female slaves were auctioned off to Viking soldiers and unmarried production team leaders of all ranks. Most paid the price of ten slaves, though many were temporarily in debt to Haldor.

The remaining female slaves were quickly snatched up as well. The morning’s frenzy had alleviated the gender imbalance plaguing Hrut City in Vinland, especially among the Viking whites, who now each had a family.

With wives secured, the Viking whites were content, and Haldor suffered no loss. Instead, he gained deeper loyalty and gratitude from the Vikings, while also becoming the creditor to most of them.

Beyond the Viking whites, many unmarried Vikings of Beothuk descent also waved their furs, eager to claim the leftover female slaves. These fair-skinned women were the most beautiful in the eyes of the native-born Vikings.

They believed that marrying a white woman would grant their children noble white blood, ensuring their descendants would be no different from other Viking whites.

The natives of Vinland, and even those across North America, were largely admirers of Europeans at this time. They harbored a mix of resistance and envy toward the tall, fair-skinned Europeans, who possessed both formidable strength and advanced technology. The slaves on Vinland Island viewed them with admiration and reverence, though a few secretly nursed hatred.

Now, even white slaves in Vinland looked down on Beothuk slaves. Many only vented their desires on native female slaves, never considering marrying one—a situation not unlike how future American plantation owners would treat black slaves.

After the scramble, the remaining one hundred or so white female slaves became the wives of Viking reds (those of Indigenous descent), though they paid an even higher price than the Viking whites.

With the marriage issues of both Viking whites and reds resolved, Haldor and Haig breathed a sigh of relief. Whether the Vikings could form families and reproduce was the core concern, especially for the Viking whites, who were Haldor’s most crucial force. Only by continuously strengthening the Viking whites could Haldor’s position grow more secure.

The six hundred unmarried female white slaves had all been claimed by men, but over a thousand white slaves remained. Among them, two hundred were entire families, while eight hundred were able-bodied men between fifteen and thirty-five—fresh blood to reinforce the Viking soldiers.

Once the “every man has a woman” phase concluded, Hrutik stepped forward to announce the expansion of the Viking soldiers. The Viking Raid needed auxiliary militia, and nine hundred male white slaves were conscripted into the militia. Five Dutch white slaves, each skilled in leatherworking, windmill construction, fishing, and other trades, were appointed as production team leaders.

The nine hundred male white slave militia adopted a military-civilian integration system, with a garrison farming policy. Haldor planned to allocate a vast tract of land in the northern peninsula for them, where they would lead native slaves in land reclamation, port construction, and military training, while also engaging in production.

Since Hrut City was now fully constructed, it no longer required a large population. Keeping over ten thousand people in the city had led to labor surpluses and excessive food consumption. It would be better to relocate some to establish another city in the north.

In the end, the nine hundred men were organized into nine Aettangr units, led by elite Vikings serving as Oarsmen, directly reporting to Haldor. With Hrutik far away in Basque City, Hrutik oversaw the military training of the white slave militia, while Jot managed their daily production.

The summer of 1629 brought news that Denmark had suffered a crushing defeat and signed a peace treaty with Holy Roman Emperor Ferdinand III, withdrawing entirely from the pan-European war.

This news delighted Haldor and his men. Denmark’s defeat meant the country was severely weakened and incapable of launching a transoceanic campaign for some time. In a few years, when Haldor returned to Iceland to seek vengeance and lead the island to independence, Denmark would struggle to mobilize naval and land forces to suppress them.

Along with the good news, the fleet also brought a massive shipment of weapons and equipment, as well as over sixteen hundred white slaves. This significantly boosted the white population in Vinland to over twenty-four hundred, still fewer than the natives but greatly easing Haldor’s manpower shortage.

If these thousand-plus whites performed well, they could soon fulfill their contracts and become Vikings. With some skill, they might even rise to the upper class.

Besides the white slaves, Haig and Ulf had recruited mining surveyors, shipbuilders, ironworkers, and other technical experts from Scotland, England, Ireland, and Amsterdam.

In this era, there was no concept of intellectual property, and technical workers were not highly respected. Their social status was little better than farmers, though their income was slightly higher.

Regardless, skilled workers held no real social standing and remained employees of wealthy merchants and companies, risking unemployment at any moment.

Haig and Ulf offered exceptional terms—three times the European wages—which the workers accepted without hesitation, following the fleet to Vinland.

On the third day, Haldor and Jot, along with other leaders, met with the thirty-plus technical experts. After questioning them, they found their knowledge solid and ordered Jot and Hoskuld to assist in establishing a shipyard at the port while maintaining the two captured British armed merchant ships.

The mining surveyors, under guard, left Hrut City to explore Vinland’s various regions in search of mineral resources.

By July 1629, Vinland’s military strength had grown several times stronger than in spring.

Influenced by Olaf, Haldor had implemented a militaristic development policy, prioritizing military expansion. He abandoned the manorial and gubernatorial systems, instead integrating all under a hybrid system centered on the Viking Raid—combining the Fubing system, slavery, and tribal governance. This strict management extended to all military and civilian affairs, with unified control over production resources and distribution.

After a series of victories, Haldor had developed blind confidence in the Viking Raid. He believed Olaf’s guidance in emulating the ancient Viking system had effectively unified the population’s strength, unleashing Vinland’s tremendous potential.

Last month, the traders had returned. The French and British had bought little, but many distant native tribes had exchanged their gold, silver, furs, and gems for pottery, wooden tools, stone tools, fine leather clothing, stylish leather shoes, and linen.

This half-month of trade saw Hrut City sell thousands of various tools, along with leather goods and linen, earning over a thousand furs and more than fifty marks of gold—a highly profitable venture.

The only downside was the limited purchasing power of the natives, meaning the next trade might not happen until next year.

…

Gazing at the eighteen large ships (including two captured vessels) in the harbor and the mountains of spears, ammunition, plate armor, bows, crossbows, and swords in the warehouse, Haldor’s ambition swelled. He grew increasingly confident in his future.

Perhaps carving out a nation in North America was not just a dream…

As the de facto ruler of Vinland, general of the Viking Raid, and lord of Hrut City, Haldor now controlled 111,000 square kilometers—a vast territory.

Iceland, by comparison, was only 103,000 square kilometers, with far inferior resources. The only advantages Iceland held over Vinland were its population and livestock industry.

In terms of economic income, Iceland’s five to six hundred thousand people earned less in a year from farming, animal husbandry, fishing, and even raiding than Vinland did in just this year. Even if Governor Kolsvin of Iceland were completely honest, the island’s annual tax revenue was only a few hundred thousand silver marks—at most, a million Dutch guilders. After expenses, the net gain was even smaller.

But Vinland’s income this year alone was four million Dutch guilders—several times that of Iceland. While this was partly due to rare local products, there was no denying that Haldor’s wealth and power had long surpassed that of the Governor of Iceland. The flames of vengeance in his heart began to burn slowly.

Though Iceland now had five to six hundred thousand people, at Vinland’s current rate of development, its population might surpass Iceland’s in less than five years.

With Vinland and the North American continent as his base, Haldor’s family would soon amass enormous wealth, which could then be used to build colonies, expand, and eventually challenge the European continent.

Sometimes, after drinking, Haldor and his men would discuss their success. While their unity and bravery were factors, the choice of colony and the relative weakness of the colonized people were even more crucial. For instance, New France and New England had issues with native slaves escaping, but Vinland, being an isolated island with constant military patrols, left the enslaved natives with no means or courage to flee.

Thus, even Haldor, Haig, Ulf, Hrutik, and the others secretly believed their success was a divine blessing, allowing them to rule Vinland’s vast lands more easily than other colonizers.

Regardless, judging from Haldor’s development trajectory since arriving in Vinland, it seemed his family truly was favored by God—or perhaps Vinland itself was a favored island, and Haldor’s family had simply seized the opportunity.

Haldor couldn’t help but feel a swell of pride as he pondered when to launch his counterattack on Iceland.

Chapter 86: Complete Treatise on Agriculture

As Haldor’s ambitions swelled within him, Jot and Hoskuld had already departed Hrut City with the white slave militia and three thousand native slaves, along with more than half of the livestock. They were heading north to the peninsula, preparing to establish a new settlement on the west or south side of a natural harbor they had discovered during their survey.

The harbor was a banana-shaped bay, with a narrow strait serving as a natural barrier. The space before the sheltered port was vast, and the waters ran deep—making it a natural deep-water harbor, a safe haven, and a strategically advantageous port.

After examining the rough sketch of the terrain, Olaf speculated that the location they had chosen might be the future site of St. John’s, the capital of Newfoundland and Labrador.

But for now, it could not be called by that name. As Jot and the others set out, Haldor named the new location and the future port city “Haldor.”

With Jot and Hoskuld gone, Hrut City’s population had dwindled by nearly a third, leaving the place somewhat desolate.

However, Haldor had already sent word to Bakens City, instructing Blackstone to transfer some of the native slaves he had gathered.

July 7th, a day of endless drizzle.

Though summer had arrived, the temperature in Hrut City remained chilly. Even two layers of linen robes were not enough to ward off the damp cold. In northern Vinland, one would still need fur coats—partly because Vinland was so close to the Arctic, and partly due to the effects of the Little Ice Age.

For the past few days, Olaf had been shut away in his office within the factory, completely absorbed in the two books Ulf had brought back from Amsterdam.

When Ulf was in Amsterdam, he had gone to the bank to seek out Kuiyi, intending to fulfill the agreement made the previous summer.

Last summer, Olaf and Kuiyi, who worked at the bank, had verbally agreed to a business arrangement.

Olaf had placed an order with Kuiyi, who was about to depart for Batavia (Jakarta), for large quantities of isatis root, honeysuckle, and other basic medicinal herbs, as well as several dozen sets of porcelain, along with the Compendium of Materia Medica, Complete Treatise on Agriculture, and The Exploitation of the Works of Nature.

In Amsterdam, Ulf met with Kuiyi’s assistant, a capable young man, who brought back most of the items Olaf had requested. However, he had been unable to find The Exploitation of the Works of Nature or the Complete Treatise on Agriculture.

The large quantity of medicinal herbs from the Far East, porcelain, silk, and a few books had cost Ulf nearly one hundred thousand Dutch guilders. Fortunately, this year’s income had been substantial. The most expensive items in the shipment were the several dozen sets of exquisite porcelain and ten bolts of silk.

Though Olaf was disappointed that he had not obtained The Exploitation of the Works of Nature, he treasured the draft manuscripts of the Compendium of Materia Medica and the Complete Treatise on Agriculture.

The Compendium of Materia Medica was a guide to traditional Chinese medicine compiled over thirty years by the “Divine Farmer of Medicine,” Li Shizhen. The book documented 1,892 types of medicinal substances, over a thousand of which were illustrated, along with more than eleven thousand prescriptions for treating various ailments.

Olaf valued this book most highly, considering the health of himself and his family. The primitive continent of North America must contain hundreds, if not thousands, of medicinal plants similar to or identical with those in the Compendium. If he could train some apothecaries, then in the future, ailments like headaches and fevers could be treated properly instead of being left to heal on their own or subjected to bloodletting or trepanation.

If the Compendium of Materia Medica was Olaf’s guide to health and healing, which he intended to study thoroughly before selecting clever and intelligent individuals to teach, then the Complete Treatise on Agriculture was what he saw as the key to Vinland’s agricultural revolution. Only with the Complete Treatise on Agriculture could he master the world’s most advanced planting techniques for crops such as cotton, sweet potatoes, wheat, rice, and mulberry trees, as well as methods for cultivation, management, breeding, and improvement.

At present, European agricultural and livestock farming techniques were primitive and backward. Livestock farming relied entirely on free-range grazing, and there were no effective methods for dealing with animal diseases.

Planting techniques were even more inferior compared to those of the Ming Dynasty.

In times without natural disasters, the Ming Dynasty’s planting yield ratio was between 1:25 to 1:40, and this was already affected by the Little Ice Age, with production somewhat reduced.

Meanwhile, in European countries of the same period, the grain yield ratio was between 1:2 to 1:4, mostly the latter.

In simpler terms, planting one catty of wheat seeds, Ming farmers could harvest twenty-five to forty catties of grain due to variations in soil fertility, while European farmers could only harvest two to four catties.

The difference in yield clearly showed how far European planting techniques lagged behind those of the Ming Dynasty.

This gap was evident in seed selection, management, fertilization, and other aspects. The most obvious and simplest difference was that farmers in the Celestial Empire had long since learned the methods of collecting manure, fermenting it, and using it as fertilizer to enhance soil fertility.

However, Europeans had yet to master the technique of turning manure into fertilizer to improve soil fertility and increase grain production. Even the most skilled Norse farmers in northern Europe only relied on the natural decomposition of cow and sheep dung that fell onto fallow land to slightly improve soil fertility.

Olaf, from his past life, also understood the importance of organic fertilizer. Therefore, over the past two years of city management, he had ensured that every household built toilets and had slaves collect human and animal waste, along with grass clippings and food scraps, piling them up, adding water to promote fermentation, and then mixing them with soil to spread over the fields. As a result, last autumn’s harvest had been bountiful.

Jot had discovered that the manure fertilizer Olaf proposed was indeed effective and had vigorously promoted it this year. If all went well, this autumn’s grain harvest would be another great success.

Olaf secretly estimated that with the help of organic fertilizer, this autumn’s harvest of potatoes and sweet potatoes aside, even the yields of rye and oats would double compared to previous years, likely reaching a ratio of 1:8, or even 1:10.

The foundation of agriculture was fertilizer. Without fertilizer, there could be no increase in production. Olaf had racked his brains and could only use the organic fertilizer techniques he had learned in his past life to improve Vinland’s grain production. But the true treasure that could help elevate Vinland’s overall agricultural level was still to be found in Xu Guangqi’s Complete Treatise on Agriculture.

Kuiyi’s assistant had only given Ulf a printed copy of the Compendium of Materia Medica and some handwritten manuscripts.

Olaf was initially disheartened when he learned that Kuiyi had not found Xu Guangqi’s Complete Treatise on Agriculture or Song Yingxing’s The Exploitation of the Works of Nature. But upon seeing these handwritten manuscripts, his excitement returned.

Sweet Potato Treatise, Jute Treatise, Turnip Treatise, Northern Cultivation Records, Manure Application Rules, Reclamation Decree, Miscellaneous Agricultural Records, Cotton Planting Methods.

Eight books of varying thickness were bound together, titled Agricultural Manuscript Drafts.

In Olaf’s eyes, these Drafts were diluted treasures. The medium and long articles within were all directed agricultural technology writings by Xu Guangqi. Some were later deleted when the Complete Treatise on Agriculture was published, while others were revised and incorporated into other articles. However, these handwritten manuscripts reflected Xu Guangqi’s early research insights into agriculture, even his practical wisdom.

Olaf did not know why the Complete Treatise on Agriculture had not been found, but instead, these other agricultural writings by Xu Guangqi had been obtained. He believed these must be part of the Complete Treatise on Agriculture and thought they would suffice for now.

Two days ago, when Ulf handed these manuscripts to him, he mentioned that Kuiyi’s assistant had said Kuiyi had written to several missionaries in the Ming Dynasty who were respected by the Chinese and even held official positions, requesting all the items on Olaf’s list.

Everything was quickly gathered and shipped to Macau, but neither the Complete Treatise on Agriculture nor The Exploitation of the Works of Nature had been heard of, even by the most learned Father Guo Jujing.

Father Guo Jujing and Xu Guangqi were old friends. After the search for the two books proved fruitless, he confirmed multiple times that the Complete Treatise on Agriculture was indeed written by Xu Guangqi and personally wrote to him to inquire.

Xu Guangqi’s work on the agricultural book was no secret, as writing books was one of the three great pursuits of Confucian scholars. Thus, he was not surprised that Father Guo Jujing knew he was writing an agricultural treatise. However, he was quite puzzled by the title Complete Treatise on Agriculture.

After a brief summary, Xu Guangqi sent the completed draft articles, along with questions about geometric knowledge and his confusion regarding the title Complete Treatise on Agriculture, to Father Guo Jujing.

Upon receiving the Agricultural Manuscript Drafts, Father Guo Jujing immediately had them hand-copied with the help of Confucian converts to Catholicism. He then sent a copy to Kuiyi, keeping the original for himself to study and translate, intending to translate Xu Guangqi’s agricultural works accurately before sending them back to Europe.

Kuiyi, upon receiving the manuscripts, packed them with other goods and sent them via an East India Company merchant ship back to Amsterdam. He left contact information at the bank with his assistant to await delivery, which was how Ulf later completed the transaction.

Chapter 87: A Whole New World

Olaf was almost entirely unfamiliar with traditional Chinese medicine, so he treated the Compendium of Materia Medica as nothing more than an encyclopedia of herbs and other substances.

But Xu Guangqi’s seven agricultural treatises—those he studied meticulously. He read them slowly, taking notes and making annotations as he went.

While reading the Compendium of Materia Medica and the Agricultural Manuscript Drafts, Olaf encountered an issue he had previously overlooked: all the texts were written in traditional Chinese characters, whereas in his past life, he had only learned simplified Chinese. His knowledge of traditional characters was minimal.

This meant he frequently stumbled upon complex characters he didn’t recognize. Though he could usually deduce their meanings from context, the constant deliberation slowed his reading to a crawl. It took him three full days just to finish the Compendium of Materia Medica.

After reading it once, he set it aside. He felt his understanding of traditional characters had improved, which would help him tackle the agricultural texts next.

The Sweet Potato Treatise, Jute Treatise, Turnip Treatise, Northern Cultivation Records, Manure Application Rules, Reclamation Decree, Miscellaneous Agricultural Records, Cotton Cultivation Methods…

The Agricultural Manuscript Drafts were a treasure trove of knowledge. Olaf found them immensely valuable, especially the sections on sweet potato cultivation, turnip farming, manure processing, land reclamation, and cotton planting. These were the kinds of insights that could instantly transform Vinland into an agricultural powerhouse.

Vinland’s terrain was complex—central highlands, mountain ranges in the west and northwest, forests, rivers, and wetlands everywhere. With its harsh northern climate, the most viable agricultural pursuit was actually livestock grazing. The scattered plains, river valleys, and mountain basins in the south could support some farming, but arable land was limited. Using outdated European farming techniques, even after decades of reclamation, the land could barely sustain forty to fifty thousand people.

But now, with Olaf and Haldor’s efforts to cultivate potatoes and sweet potatoes, food production had surged. Even if only a tenth of the land was developed, it could feed tens of thousands. According to Jot’s plans, the entire southeastern peninsula could have seven to eight thousand acres of farmland developed within three years—enough to feed all the Vikings and slaves in Vinland.

The Sweet Potato Treatise provided a comprehensive guide to sweet potato cultivation, far more detailed than what Olaf had known before. His understanding of the crop had reached a new level. He translated it into Icelandic and gave it to Haldor, who had Heiner make two copies. One was sent to Haldor City in the north, while the other two were used to train the oarsmen. They planned to dig up some sweet potatoes and potatoes that summer and expand cultivation using the most advanced techniques. Over a hundred acres of land, previously used for growing masterwort, beets, and radishes, were repurposed for experimentation.

The Jute Treatise detailed Xu Guangqi’s methods for cultivating jute (cotton), an Asian variety introduced to China during the Song and Yuan dynasties. Cotton was ideal for spinning into fabric, and Olaf read this section with great care. Europe’s market was dominated by linen, while cotton was still a luxury import from the Middle East. If Vinland could grow and weave its own cotton, the profits would be enormous.

The Turnip Treatise covered various techniques for cultivating turnips—also known as swede, round cabbage, or root cabbage. Similar in shape and cultivation to white radishes, turnips had firmer flesh and less water content. They could be eaten as a staple food like potatoes and sweet potatoes, pickled into preserves, or used as vegetables. Their nutritional value was high.

In later eras, with abundant food options, turnips were rarely sold fresh in markets. Instead, they were processed into pickled vegetables like datoucai or gadamen.

Olaf discovered a key detail: turnips thrived in cold weather and were planted in summer, harvested around the first frost in winter—just over three months later. Their yield was even higher than sweet potatoes. With proper fertilization, one acre could produce ten thousand catties of fresh turnip roots and five thousand catties of stems and leaves. Without fertilizer, the yield would be halved.

From the illustrations, Olaf recognized that turnips were already grown in Europe, even in Iceland. However, most people there only ate the leaves, unsure if the roots were edible.

He believed turnips could be another high-yield crop for Vinland. The stems and leaves could feed livestock, while the roots could be pickled or dried for storage—another excellent staple food.

He jotted down the key points from the Turnip Treatise in his notebook, then decided to discuss it with his father. They could start experimenting with turnip seeds immediately. If the results matched the treatise’s claims, they could expand cultivation next year.

The Northern Cultivation Records documented Xu Guangqi’s experiences and observations during his time farming in Tianjin. Though Tianjin’s climate was slightly warmer than Hrut City’s, the overall conditions were similar, making the text highly relevant to Vinland’s agriculture.

The Manure Application Rules, Reclamation Decree, and Miscellaneous Agricultural Records were even more valuable. The first explained methods for collecting and fermenting manure, as well as the conditions and advantages of liquid versus dry fertilizers.

The latter two covered land reclamation, soil development, adapting to climate variations, and adjusting farming practices during the Little Ice Age.

The Cotton Cultivation Methods was a goldmine for wealth in this era. It focused on a Western variety of cotton—specifically, sea island cotton from South America. In quality, sea island cotton far surpassed the Asian cotton that had been cultivated in the Ming Dynasty for two hundred years. It was the best variety for spinning and weaving.

Olaf was determined to introduce sea island cotton and cultivate it extensively in the Americas. Vinland’s climate wasn’t ideal for cotton, but the vast plains south of Quebec City would be perfect.

Cotton was one of the most economically valuable plants of the time. Planted in spring, the seedlings were transplanted once established, and the cotton was harvested in late autumn.

Cotton lint could be made into quilts and clothing, spun into fabric, while the seeds could be pressed for oil. The stalks, being sturdy, made excellent firewood. Every part of the cotton plant was useful—a tool for improving people’s lives.

There were dozens of fabrics in the world, but the main categories were linen, ramie, kapok, silk, wool, and cotton.

The most expensive and comfortable fabrics were silk and cotton. Though cotton was slightly cheaper than silk, it was far superior to linen or ramie.

Europe, with its backward agriculture, prioritized food crops over cotton. They had no experience or history with cotton cultivation and relied entirely on imports, making cotton nearly as expensive as silk.

In the future, the rise of the British Empire would depend on Indian laborers growing sugarcane, grains, cotton, and even opium. Without India’s colonial output, the British Isles alone could never have become a global power. No other colony contributed as much as India.

A hundred years later, as British India expanded, cotton production soared. The abundance of cheap raw materials fueled Britain’s textile industry. By the early 19th century, the British were cultivating cotton in the Americas, producing cotton fabric for sale, and becoming the world’s second-largest exporter of cotton goods after China.

Olaf believed that since he had colonized the Americas before the British, he could find a way to obtain Huang Daopo’s spinning wheels from the Ming Dynasty. Then, by growing cotton in the Americas and weaving it into fabric, Vinland could become a world-leading exporter of cotton goods. The wealth generated would be ten, even a hundred times greater than Vinland’s current income.

At present, China’s textile machinery was far more efficient than Europe’s. Europe wouldn’t catch up in textile productivity for another century.

Only after the invention of the spinning jenny would Europe’s textile industry flourish—especially in Britain…

Chapter 88: The Agricultural Express Train

Busy days always passed quickly.

By the end of July, Olaf had spent over a month poring over the Agricultural Manuscript Drafts. Occasionally, he would discuss its contents with Jot, Haldor, and others. He even held weekly lectures in the city for experienced farmers, teaching them about manure fertilization, sweet potato cultivation, grain management, and land reclamation. The wisdom crystallized from thousands of years of the Far Eastern Celestial Empire left the Viking farmers spellbound. Only now did they realize how backward and ignorant they had been in agriculture. Who could have imagined that the filthy, stinking waste, once collected and processed, could become a treasure that boosted crop yields? If a local had said such a thing, the Vikings would have surely filled the speaker’s head with excrement in an instant…

The more Olaf studied the Agricultural Manuscript Drafts, the more fascinated he became with agricultural knowledge. He had read the draft three times and still found it endlessly engaging, gaining new insights with each reading.

At first, Olaf could recognize over eighty percent of the traditional characters in the Agricultural Manuscript Drafts. Combined with the context, this did not hinder his understanding. He then translated it into Icelandic and gave a copy to Haldor.

Now, after reading it so many times, he had deciphered most of the remaining unfamiliar characters by piecing together the context. He even made significant revisions to his translation.

In July, Hrut City and Haldor City in the northern peninsula, under the leadership of Haldor, Jot, and others, began teaching farmers advanced agricultural knowledge based on Olaf’s translated Agricultural Manuscript. They also started cleaning and storing waste from toilets, digging large manure pits for unified storage and fermentation, and then drying most of the processed manure according to the manuscript’s instructions.

Due to the limited supply of manure, only one-third of the fields in Hrut City could benefit from manure irrigation this year. Olaf was highly confident in the yield of this one-third of the land in a few months.

Haldor City, being newly established, did not have much reclaimed land. Apart from the initially reclaimed land planted with vegetables, the rest was transplanted with sweet potato vines. Although time was tight, Haldor still expected a decent harvest of sweet potatoes this winter.

Because Olaf had touted the Agricultural Manuscript as a mysterious agricultural guide from the great Ming Dynasty of the East, capable of feeding hundreds of millions, the Vikings had come to deeply trust the manuscript. Haldor, Jot, and others were also confident about this year’s harvest.

Sometimes, when Olaf saw the yellow-skinned slaves from each household collecting manure and dumping it into the fermentation pits, he felt a strange illusion—as if he were in the Ming Dynasty, watching ancient Chinese people engaged in agricultural production.

Much of the content in the Agricultural Manuscript Drafts shattered Olaf’s superficial understanding of agriculture. The Manure Application Rules not only distinguished between the fertility of liquid and dry manure but also introduced several other fertilizers, such as bone meal. Made from crushed animal bones, bone meal, when scattered in fields, could increase grain production by more than twice that of dry manure.

Olaf knew that bone meal was rich in phosphorus, potassium, and calcium. Nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium were the basic fertilizers of later eras that increased yields. Although bone meal did not have as high an element content as chemical fertilizers, it was enough to double the yield.

Olaf knew that planting soybeans, whose root stems released nitrogen into the soil, could maintain soil fertility if planted after grain instead of leaving the land fallow. Planting a crop of nitrogen-fixing plants like soybeans or cowpeas after grain, followed by grain again the next year, would keep the soil fertile. Combined with manure, bone meal, and wood ash, this could ensure continuous high yields from all arable land.

After putting away the book, Olaf began focusing on guiding the city’s fertilizer production. He instructed the manure collectors to also gather the wood ash left from cooking and heating in each household. This wood ash, rich in nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium, could be mixed with manure.

Additionally, waste from sun-drying fish—such as gills, intestines, and scales—was also mixed with manure for heat fermentation. Animal offal and fish scales were excellent fertilizers, and leftover bones from meals were crushed and added to the manure pits to enhance the fertilizer’s potency and quantity.

After Olaf’s guidance, Hrut City entered a mode of universal frugality. Almost no household waste was discarded without being turned into fertilizer. Even old rags and tattered clothes were burned into ash and added to the manure pits for composting.

Olaf was well aware that if Vinland’s agriculture mastered fertilizer production and application, future yield increases of two, three, four, five, or even seven or eight times were not mere fantasies. With the advanced agricultural knowledge from the Celestial Empire, Vinland had boarded the agricultural express train. How far it could go would depend on the leaders’ abilities…

At the very least, Olaf’s slogan, “Accumulate manure, increase yield,” became a rallying cry in Hrut City and Haldor City in the second half of 1629, influencing several generations.

…

Besides guiding fertilizer production, Olaf also visited the factory to oversee the firing of bone china, pottery, and woodworking. Due to the shortage of workers, the current and future demand for daily necessities in Hrut City and Haldor City was high. For now, all produced goods were bought by their own people. Even if domestic demand was satisfied in the future, external sales would not fetch high prices. Olaf did not expect pottery, woodwork, or leather goods to be profitable.

The product Olaf truly pinned his hopes on for profit was bone china.

Olaf did not know how to fire porcelain. He only told the potters what materials to use for bone china. The potters then experimented, enduring thousands of failures. Although most of the daily two firings had flaws, recently they had managed to produce one or two flawless pieces of bone china each day.

After each firing, the potters made slight adjustments. However, relying purely on experience, they told Olaf that they could not improve the success rate of firing bone china for the time being.

Olaf was satisfied with a success rate of over twenty percent. He believed that even the official kilns of the Ming Dynasty could not guarantee that every firing would produce flawless porcelain without defects. Although the “Vinland Official Kiln” was far inferior to the Ming official kilns, Olaf was content. He thought that to further improve the success rate, they would need to find experts in porcelain firing. Without expert involvement, the path of experimentation would be extremely tortuous and long.

Although the success rate of bone china satisfied Olaf for now, he despised the potters’ artistic sensibilities. The bone china they produced was always the same shape—a large belly and a tall neck, with exaggerated patterns and crude glazing. The style was unmistakably Nordic, lacking the nobility and elegance of porcelain.

Olaf knew that these uneducated craftsmen could never replicate the beautiful forms of Celestial Empire porcelain. He did not get angry but took three sets of Ming Dynasty porcelain that Ulf had brought back from the warehouse and handed them to Old Galdur. He instructed him to keep them safe and said, “You and the potters should study these together. From now on, imitate these two sets of tea ware and the pair of vases. If you only produce clumsy, rough pottery, even if you manage to fire porcelain, it won’t fetch a good price!”

“Don’t worry, young master!”

Old Galdur, hiccuping from drink, carefully cradled a porcelain vase, scolding the craftsmen to handle the porcelain with care. His eyes lingered on the vase before reluctantly looking away, smiling. “With these Eastern porcelain pieces as models, we’ll be able to replicate them next month!”

Chapter 89: Helping You Rise to Lordship

Olaf encouraged the craftsmen with a few words before leaving the workshop.

With the original draft of the Agricultural Manuscript and his own translation tucked under his arm, Olaf walked into the inner city, his nose catching the faint stench of distant manure pits. He knew this was because Jot had taken most of the cattle and horses to build the new city, leaving Hrut City short on livestock, forcing slaves to transport the manure barrels instead.

The slaves’ insufficient strength made manure transport difficult, leading to an increase in the number and density of manure pits, which worsened the air quality.

However, Olaf believed that once livestock breeding increased next year, the problem would be resolved. The manure fermentation sites would be moved outside the city, and Hrut City would regain its usual cleanliness and fresh air.

As he walked along the smooth streets of the inner city, paved with crushed stones, Olaf saw McG, the priest in white robes, wandering around with a Bible in his hands.

Upon seeing Olaf approach, McG’s face lit up with delight. “Olaf, I heard you’re using manure to make fertilizer, which can increase crop yields. Is that true?”

Olaf’s heart tightened. “Who told you that?”

“I’ve been wandering around the city these past few days, and I’ve heard many people talking about using manure as fertilizer. They say it’s wisdom you brought back from the Far East, from the Celestial Empire…”

Olaf understood immediately—someone in the city had leaked the information.

In this era, there was no concept of intellectual property, and any new knowledge or technology couldn’t remain secret for long. The fertilizer matter was the biggest news in Hrut City at the moment, discussed by Vikings and white slaves alike. It was only natural that McG had found out.

Olaf brushed off the topic with a few casual remarks before changing the subject, asking McG if he had adjusted to life in Hrut City. After less than ten sentences, Olaf had already deduced that McG had a basic understanding of the local customs, agriculture, and fishing industries, and was quite curious about them.

McG even requested a tour of the factory. Olaf considered agriculture, handicrafts, and sugar production to be Vinland’s core industries—ones that needed protection—so he ignored McG’s request, politely bidding him farewell before leaving, all the while resolving to send McG away as soon as possible.

That evening, Haldor and Olaf sat on the sofa, discussing the matter. Olaf expressed his concerns and urged Haldor to send McG away quickly.

“What harm is there in McG knowing about our advanced agriculture in Vinland? He’s no threat to us. Whether he lives or dies depends on our attitude…”

Haldor didn’t fully understand his second son’s worries about the risks of advanced agricultural technology being leaked, but he still considered Olaf’s opinion.

After a brief conversation, Haldor said, “Your elder brother wants us to help McG reclaim leadership of Plymouth City so we can control New England. We’ve already held high-level meetings on this matter, and everyone agrees to assist McG. Since you believe he shouldn’t stay in Hrut City any longer, we’ll gather our forces as soon as possible and send him to Plymouth to become its lord!”

Haldor’s words were calm and measured, but they carried an unmistakable air of authority and respect for Olaf’s opinion.

Olaf felt his father’s leadership qualities growing more pronounced, which pleased him. He then asked, “Father, how many troops do you plan to send to help McG?”

Haldor scratched his left cheek, furrowed his brow in thought, and said coolly, “Five hundred Viking soldiers and five hundred White Wolf Warriors should suffice!”

Olaf wholeheartedly agreed. “Plymouth only has a thousand people. Sending five hundred Vikings and five hundred White Wolf Warriors will be more than enough to overpower them and intimidate the city after we take it. You’ve thought this through carefully, Father!”

Haldor laughed heartily and waved his hand. “Then it’s settled! McG, I’ll send a grand army to help you rise to lordship!”

Soon, Haldor’s orders spread from the castle.

After the heavy rains of late July, August brought warmer air, clear skies, and fluffy white clouds—a rare stretch of fine weather.

Five hundred Viking soldiers and five hundred White Wolf Warriors, led by Kadir, assembled before Haldor’s fortress. Haldor ordered the slaves to bring out firearms, plate armor, javelins, and long spears.

After a few words of encouragement, Kadir, accompanied by the promising young men Polly and Brun, bid farewell to Haldor. McG hastily bowed in respect before the four of them—Kadir, McG, Polly, and Brun—mounted their horses and led the Viking soldiers out of Hrut City. The five hundred White Wolf Warriors followed behind, escorting ten ox-drawn carts laden with supplies.

Over a thousand men, along with their supplies, boarded five armed merchant ships at the southern port, setting sail southwest toward Plymouth City on the eastern coast of the Americas.

While Kadir led the army to help McG reclaim Plymouth from the Puritans, Olaf did not see them off. Instead, he searched the warehouse for various plant seeds brought back from Europe last year and this year, hoping to find cotton seeds from South American islands or Mexico.

Since no one in Vinland had seen cotton or cotton seeds except for Olaf in his past life, he had to search for them himself.

Though Europe did not cultivate cotton on a large scale, plants like potatoes, sweet potatoes, and tomatoes—later popularized from the Americas—were already grown as ornamental plants in Europe. Cotton was no exception.

During their two trips to Europe, they had purchased many plant seeds. After a careful search, Olaf found a bag of cotton seeds. He felt the quantity was too small—even if all were planted, they wouldn’t cover two acres of land. But as long as they were sown, long-term cultivation would yield more seeds.

After carefully storing the cotton seeds, Olaf remembered the tomatoes he had successfully grown. Currently, they were prized for their vibrant red appearance and considered symbolic of love, grown as ornamental plants. This year, Olaf had led his Aettangr to cultivate ten acres of experimental fields, planting corn, squash, and beans, as well as some tomatoes.

Due to Vinland’s cold climate, current plant varieties—even cold-resistant ones—could not be grown in winter without improvement. The winter wheat common in the northern regions of the Celestial Empire in later eras was nonexistent in Vinland.

Currently, like Europe, Vinland grew spring wheat, harvested in late autumn.

Vegetables like corn, squash, and beans were also planted around early spring. The corn had already matured, and the squash and beans had produced plump fruits.

Olaf and the high-ranking officials, including Haldor, had even enjoyed several meals of roasted sweet corn. Its sweet, fragrant taste and smoky flavor had earned praise from everyone. Haldor and Jot personally inspected the high-yield corn fields and discovered that corn was indeed twice as productive as wheat or rye. They decided to reduce wheat cultivation next year and expand the planting of corn, squash, and beans.

This year, all available land around Hrut City had been cultivated. However, to avoid widespread crop failure due to disease or disaster, they had adopted diversified planting. Potatoes and sweet potatoes were planted on only a third of the land, while the rest was mostly devoted to rye, oats, wheat, and barley, with a small portion allocated to corn, squash, and beans.

In terms of yield, before wheat improvement, corn far outproduced wheat. If the same twenty to thirty pounds of seeds were sown, corn could yield two to three hundred pounds per acre, and if planted in early spring, it could even reach four to five hundred pounds, whereas wheat only yielded around a hundred pounds.

Corn’s high yield was due to both its variety and the benefits of intercropping with squash and beans.

Squash, a vine plant, covered the roots of the tall, slender corn with its broad leaves, preventing low-growing weeds from receiving sunlight and thus preserving soil moisture and nutrients. Meanwhile, beans climbed the cornstalks, fixing nitrogen in the roots and increasing the yield of both corn and squash. Thus, the “Three Sisters” intercropping system mutually benefited each other, ensuring increased production and income while reducing the workload for farmers. In this era, it was undoubtedly the king of crops.

Chapter 90: Discovery of the Mines

Recalling the vibrant agricultural bounty of Vinland, Olaf found himself craving roasted corn and boiled squash once more. He estimated that the tomatoes would soon be ripe, allowing him to enjoy fried potatoes with tomato sauce. His thoughts wandered further—tomato scrambled eggs, tomato-braised lamb chops, tomato sauce with pasta…

Shaking off these distractions with a laugh, Olaf rose and headed to the workshop to observe the craftsmen at work.

That afternoon, after leaving the factory, Olaf took Tom, Solrak, Hari, and Val with him to the experimental fields outside the city. They picked several hundred ears of corn and seven or eight large squash, then dug up potatoes and sweet potatoes to bring back.

The group of young men gathered in Olaf’s kitchen, whipping up roasted corn, squash stewed in syrup, whale oil-fried potato sticks, sweet potato fries, and tomato sauce. They drank beer and feasted heartily.

As they grew older, most of Olaf’s childhood friends had surpassed fifteen, with some even reaching adulthood. They now held positions as production or team leaders in the Viking Raid’s Aettangr, managed by their fathers. Their daily responsibilities left little time for leisure, and their gatherings grew increasingly rare.

That evening, as they ate and drank, Ilugi, Eriksson, and Halik arrived with seven or eight young men from Iceland. The revelry lasted until midnight, with everyone drinking their fill—even Olaf downed five cups of beer before collapsing into bed.

The next morning, Olaf was roused by Gerny. Opening his eyes, he saw his sister’s bright blue gaze fixed on him. His morning grumpiness vanished instantly, and he playfully pinched her soft, plump cheeks before planting a kiss on her forehead. “What’s wrong, my little princess?”

Gerny, with her fair skin and golden hair—just like Olaf’s—had inherited their mother’s striking blue eyes. Though only nine, she had already grown into a graceful young lady with a slender figure and delicate features. Wiping her cheek, she said, “Father sent me to fetch you. The miners just returned with good news. Big brother has already gone with Half.”

Olaf sprang from bed, quickly dressing in trousers and a coat. “Where are Father and Big Brother?”

“Probably in the council hall…”

Before Gerny could finish, Olaf was already striding out the door. After a quick wash, he grabbed a piece of cold bread and hurried out, gnawing on it as he walked.

What could it be? Could they have found gold mines?

Olaf’s mind raced, frustrated by his limited knowledge of Newfoundland and Canada from his past life. He couldn’t recall whether Vinland had gold or silver deposits.

When he entered the council hall, he saw Haldor, Kadir, Heiner, Nilahu, and Hilt engaged in an animated discussion, their faces alight with excitement. At one end of the round table sat a well-dressed middle-aged man—Olaf recognized him as Jeremy Hunt, the English mineral surveyor.

“Olaf, you’re here! Ha! We have great news—Mr. Hunt has found gold, iron, and coal mines!” Nilahu, true to his straightforward nature, boomed with laughter as he clapped Olaf on the back, nearly knocking him over.

Olaf didn’t mind, knowing Nilahu was simply overjoyed. He took a seat beside Heiner, and before he could speak, Haldor handed him a rough sketch. “This is the result of Mr. Hunt’s hard work over the past month… Take a look…”

Heiner passed it to Olaf, who examined the two-foot-long, one-foot-wide yellowed paper. It was a charcoal and graphite sketch of Vinland, clearly drawn by Hunt. The map didn’t show Hrut City or Bakens City, but the central highlands, wetlands, lakes, and the southwestern and northwestern mountain ranges were meticulously depicted. Though likely not entirely accurate, it was a close approximation of reality.

Olaf studied the map carefully. In the southwestern corner of Vinland, a long ridge stretched from the southwest to the northeast, spanning hundreds of miles and reaching the western shore of the long lake. The northeastern part of Vinland, shaped like a long rod, was also traversed by a ridge running north to south.

On the map, the southern foothills of the southern ridge were marked with symbols and English annotations: (Suspected gold mine, confirmed copper mine). West of the southern ridge, more symbols appeared with the note: (Confirmed coal mine). Further north, along the northern ridge, another annotation read: (Confirmed iron mine).

“Mr. Hunt has found several mineral deposits in just over a month—truly impressive!” Olaf remarked politely. When Hunt didn’t modestly decline, Olaf frowned slightly and asked directly, “Mr. Hunt, how accessible are these mineral veins?”

Hunt shook his head gently. “Under the guidance of the native guides and escorts provided by Lord Jot, we initially surveyed the southeastern peninsula but found no mineral veins. Typically, mineral veins follow mountain ranges. Knowing Vinland is vast, after exploring the central highlands without success, we requested ships from Lord Jot to circumnavigate the island. This approach is more efficient…

We discovered mineral-rich rocks in the southeastern and northern ridges. After surveying, we confirmed that both ranges contain associated ores. However, the copper mines in the southern ridge and the iron mines in the northern ridge are likely deep underground. The surface layers, several dozen feet deep, are mostly permeable rock with low mineral content, making extraction difficult and economically unviable…”

Hunt’s words dampened the room’s excitement. Olaf’s question had poured cold water on their enthusiasm. Learning that the mineral veins were deeply buried and of low extraction value, Haldor furrowed his brow.

But Olaf caught the implication in Hunt’s words. Before the man could continue, he pressed, “Does that mean the coal mines on the western side of the southern ridge are easier to access?”

Hunt shrugged, spreading his hands. “Young Master Olaf is quite perceptive! Indeed, our surveys show that while the copper mines in the southern hills and the iron mines in the northern ridge are deeply buried and difficult to extract, the southwestern coal mines have several open-pit areas. The coal seams are just seven or eight feet below the surface!”

“Excellent! You’ve done outstanding work, Mr. Hunt!”

Olaf clapped his hands, rising excitedly. Noticing the others’ puzzled expressions, he explained, “Coal is incredibly useful! Once we mine the southwestern coal, we’ll have a fuel source that burns longer and hotter than firewood. More importantly, coal is more durable than wood. With coal, our fuel supply will be more abundant. And when we eventually mine the copper and iron, we can smelt our own steel! With steel and copper, we can forge our own weapons, reducing our reliance on European imports!”

Chapter 91: Pirates Arrive from Afar

Haldor and Heiner were the first to grasp Olaf’s meaning, recalling his earlier words that Vinland needed to develop industry to grow stronger or even defend itself, and that industry required coal and iron.

Heiner nodded and said, “Copper and iron mines may be difficult to exploit, but we have cheap labor. If we send slaves to mine them slowly, we will eventually see results. As long as we invest the manpower, I believe we will soon have our own ironworks and arms factories!”

Haldor was stirred by Heiner’s words. He stood up and declared, “Once the full harvest is complete at the end of next month, if our grain yields meet expectations, we can reduce the labor force for farming by more than half. We can then redirect those saved slaves to the mines… Comrades! Since Vinland has mines on its land, no matter how difficult, we must exploit them. With coal and iron mines… Vinland’s industrial development will be inevitable!”

During the brief meeting in the council hall, Haldor ordered Heiner to notify Bakens City, which was closer to the North-South Ridge Mountains, and have Blackstone mobilize men to build houses and camps at the three mining sites marked on the map for future miners.

Before adjourning, Haldor remembered Olaf’s repeated warnings and loudly instructed, “Vinland has no support from any European power. Every step we take is through our collective struggle, so we must guard our tongues! For example, the secrets of Vinland’s high-yield fertilizer production and mining must never be leaked! If the Dutch, English, French, or Spanish take notice, Vinland may face a great war in the future! So, everyone must keep all agricultural and industrial secrets of Vinland confidential! If anyone dares to leak them, I will exile their entire family to Greenland!”

“Understood?”

“Yes, General!”

…

After the meeting, a Viking rode out of Hrut City with Haldor’s handwritten orders, heading for Bakens City in the interior.

Meanwhile, the southern east coast welcomed a group of unexpected visitors.

Plymouth had a crude dock on its eastern shore. That noon, five towering armed merchant ships suddenly surrounded the harbor.

No one was near the harbor until, after the five ships docked, hundreds of soldiers clad in plate armor and wielding firearms and long spears disembarked. They were spotted by residents weeding the nearby fields, who, seeing no flags of the English-Scottish United Kingdom on the ships, knew enemies or pirates had arrived. Panicked, they grabbed their hoes and ran into the city to report to Governor William and Speaker Miller.

“Commander Kadir! The high ground a mile ahead is Plymouth!” McG, having endured many hardships, now had a different personality. He smiled ingratiatingly at Kadir, pointing to the distant cluster of buildings resembling a village.

McG knew his fate was in Kadir’s hands. Only by relying on Kadir and his Viking legion could he avenge himself, Elder Blaister, George, and Byram. Only with Kadir’s help could he have a chance to represent the Puritans and regain control of Plymouth.

Every proud and arrogant person, after being beaten by reality, becomes more humble and pragmatic. McG felt that once he bowed his head, it was hard to straighten up again, but what did it matter?

Kadir picked up the helmet from his arm and put it on, then mounted his horse, raising his long sword and shouting, “Form ranks!”

The five hundred Viking soldiers and five hundred White Wolf soldiers, trained over the years, had the discipline of professional soldiers. At the command, they quickly formed ranks.

Since the five hundred Vikings had changed into plate armor and the White Wolf soldiers into leather armor before disembarking, they did not need to pause after forming ranks. Kadir swung his long sword, and the thousand soldiers, five abreast, moved forward like a long dragon, their footsteps steady and swift. Soon, they left the harbor behind.

Kadir, McG, Polly, and Brun rode ahead on their mixed-breed draft horses. In their eyes, Plymouth grew clearer.

Though called a city, Plymouth was merely a camp with wooden palisade walls, nothing like Quebec City with its castles and walls.

The Plymouth colony was established in the autumn of 1620 and had a short development period. Facing several attacks by natives, plagues, and famines, even with hundreds or thousands of indentured white slaves sent annually by the Plymouth Company and Creek Company, Plymouth’s population was still less than Virginia’s.

Currently, Plymouth had fewer than a thousand people, including over a hundred Puritans, about forty or fifty governors, guards, and others, with the rest being freemen and indentured white slaves.

With a small population and short development time, they lacked the ability to build a city. Originally, wooden palisades and firelock muskets were enough to deal with natives, but they never expected to face a professional army like the Viking legion.

At this moment, Governor William and Speaker Miller had gathered all the guards and able-bodied men in Plymouth behind the palisade walls. Over six hundred adult males and forty-seven guards stood in a line. Behind Governor William and Speaker Miller, more than a hundred Puritans and guards held firearms, while the remaining four hundred freemen and indentured slaves had only about twenty with firearms. The rest wielded long swords, kitchen knives, long spears, and even hoes and wooden sticks.

“Don’t be afraid, everyone! No matter where these pirates come from, we have guns and need not fear them!”

Governor William wore half plate armor and an iron helmet. The faceplate pressed his cherished goatee out of shape, but he paid no mind.

Now, Governor William’s eyes were fixed on the long line of soldiers approaching on the horizon. The sunlight reflected off their plate armor, making his heart grow colder and his expression darker.

“Those four on horseback are their leaders!”

Speaker Miller pointed at the leading knights, whose features were becoming visible. Suddenly, he squinted, rubbed his eyes, and stepped forward incredulously, staring and stammering, “It… it’s McG! Am I seeing things?”

“What!”

Governor William exclaimed, pushing up his faceplate to look ahead. A familiar young man came into view.

“It really is McG!”

William was startled, then glared reproachfully at Miller, blaming him for not handling things properly—not only failing to kill McG but allowing him to return with reinforcements.

Miller’s mind was in turmoil. Gritting his teeth, he said, “McG has become a pirate’s lackey and spy! He’s bringing pirates to burn, kill, and plunder Plymouth. We must kill them!”

Miller’s words stirred the Puritans, guards, and even freemen. They crowded forward to look, and upon seeing McG among the knights, they all began cursing. The air in Plymouth filled with vulgarities.

Amid the chaotic curses at McG, Miller leaned toward William and whispered, “Governor, rest assured. The number of pirates McG has brought isn’t much more than ours. Look at how fired up our citizens are. We can hold the city!”

William nodded noncommittally, but his heart had already begun to waver.

Damn Miller, he thought, he can’t even handle things properly and still claims we can hold the city. It’s sheer fantasy. There are at least seven or eight hundred of them, and half are wearing plate armor. They must have firearms too…

Plymouth’s defenses are weak. Freemen and slaves are unreliable. The Puritans and guards are the core. Counting them up, we only have about a hundred and thirty guns, and less than half are skilled marksmen. If the pirates have a hundred or two firearms, Plymouth is doomed…

If we can’t hold the city, I need to find a way to escape…

Chapter 92: The White Wolf Warriors

As Governor William watched the Vinland army march in perfect formation, their disciplined steps and the long, serpentine formation stretching behind them—representing nearly a thousand men—his heart filled with dread. He did not believe that his ragtag force of a few dozen guards, a hundred Puritans, and several hundred freemen and indentured white slaves could withstand this terrifying army.

Miller, though he spoke boldly, could not hide his unease as the Vinland forces drew nearer. His eyes darted nervously.

Behind them, the guards, Puritans, freemen, and white slaves instinctively stepped back at the sight of the disciplined and menacing Vinland soldiers. Murmurs spread through Plymouth like a swarm of buzzing insects.

“Are these pirates?”

“This looks like a proper army!”

“I’ve seen the Cambridge militia before—they don’t look half as frightening as these men!”

Kadir led his troops to within five hundred paces of Plymouth, close enough to see the guards and Puritans huddled behind the city’s flimsy wooden walls. Their disorganized stance made it clear they were untrained rabble.

“Form ranks! White Wolf Warriors, flank and charge! Vikings, advance head-on!”

The five hundred White Wolf Warriors, clad in leather armor and wielding bows and long knives, split into two groups, forming a crescent as they encircled Plymouth. When they closed to three hundred paces, they drew their bows and loosed arrows, raining death upon the clustered defenders.

Equipped with English longbows, the White Wolf Warriors’ ranged lethality had doubled. Though they could not penetrate plate armor, their arrows were deadly against leather-clad or unarmored foes within one hundred thirty paces and could harass enemies up to two hundred paces away.

In an era without rifling, the accuracy of matchlock and smoothbore muskets was poor. Only massed volleys could inflict significant damage. In a duel between an unarmored musketeer and a longbowman, the archer would likely strike first.

But if both wore breastplates and helmets, the longbowman’s advantage vanished unless he aimed for the arms.

Training a skilled longbowman took years, while a musketeer could be field-ready in months and reasonably accurate in a year. By the seventeenth century, archers had become obsolete in pan-European wars, with armies relying on long spearmen, musketeers, cavalry, and artillerymen in varying proportions.

Inside Plymouth, the guards and Puritans huddled behind the wooden walls. The White Wolf Warriors, expert hunters with precise aim and exceptional stamina, had been trained to use longbows effectively. At two hundred paces, their arrows rained down, wounding dozens and shattering morale. Most of the defenders fled in panic.

As the White Wolf Warriors closed in, the freemen and white slaves took cover, while the Puritans and guards suffered over a dozen casualties.

Seeing resistance wane, Governor William hardened his resolve. “We can’t stay in the city! Their archers are too many—we’ll be picked off! Everyone, follow me out! We’ll concentrate our fire on one flank of archers, then deal with the musketeers and spearmen in the center!”

It was a sound plan, but only forty guards responded. The Puritans looked to Miller.

Though Elder Blaister had left Plymouth, the Puritans still rallied around Miller, hoping to retain control of the city. Blaister’s departure and illness had left them divided, giving the Plymouth Company an opening to install a governor.

Though William was now governor, the Puritan council still answered to Miller. Only orders agreed upon by both men held weight.

Miller knew McG hated him most of all. Seeing William’s urgency, he quickly urged the Puritans to attack.

Under Miller’s coercion, ninety Puritans and a dozen bold freemen grabbed their firearms and joined the forty guards, charging out of Plymouth under a second volley of arrows toward the two hundred White Wolf Warriors on the western flank.

Though the White Wolf Warriors were native, William and Miller felt slightly relieved—years of conflict had taught them that native warriors fought without tactics, relying on reckless charges. A volley from their hundred muskets should rout them.

A third volley struck as the two sides closed to one hundred thirty paces. Two hundred arrows felled over forty of William and Miller’s men.

“Fire!”

William, an arrow lodged in his shoulder, grimaced in pain and ordered the volley.

One hundred ten matchlocks fired unevenly, spitting lead and flame. One musket, overloaded with powder, exploded, mangling the shooter’s arms and chest. He collapsed, writhing in agony.

The White Wolf Warriors had been trained to drop prone or take cover behind rocks and trees when the enemy lit their matchlocks. This tactic, developed by Kadir to exploit their agility, allowed them to dodge at least eighty percent of the bullets.

Only twenty White Wolf Warriors were hit, fewer than ten fatally. The rest loosed another volley at one hundred paces, unleashing maximum lethality.

Over two hundred arrows thudded into the enemy ranks.

William and Miller barely dodged in time, but half their musketeers were struck down. The survivors, terrified, turned to flee.

“Whoosh…”

“Thud… thud…”

Another volley descended, cutting down the remaining Englishmen. Many were struck by three or four arrows.

The two hundred fifty White Wolf Warriors on the eastern flank cheered, stowing their bows and charging forward.

From Governor William to Miller, the Puritans, and the guards—over a hundred men—twenty wore half-plate or breastplates, while the rest wore leather armor. Normally, this would have offered decent protection against arrows.

But the archers outnumbered them two to one, and the final volley came from both flanks. Over a hundred Englishmen fell in moments. The few uninjured or lightly wounded lay prone, too afraid to resist.

Chapter 93: Hanged

The effect of this round of shooting was beyond expectations. Kadir, mounted on his horse, watched as the Viking soldiers he led were still two hundred paces away from the Englishmen leaving the city. The two White Wolf troops had already surrounded them.

Several rounds of shooting had easily taken down the Englishmen, while the White Wolf troops had only suffered a dozen casualties.

By the time Kadir led the Viking soldiers to the gates of Plymouth, the White Wolf troops had already killed the Englishmen who had been severely wounded by arrows. The lightly wounded and uninjured were stripped naked, herded together like pigs, and surrounded by long knives.

McG immediately spotted Miller and Governor William among the crowd, cowering in a corner, avoiding his gaze. He dismounted with a twist of his waist and walked over, coldly asking, “Miller! Governor William! Long time no see!”

“Yes… yes…”

Miller stood up, forcing a smile, stammering incoherently. Governor William feigned ignorance, asking, “Pastor McG, didn’t you return to London? Why are you mixed up with these pirates? Please speak to that gentleman on the horse. I am willing to hand over everything in Plymouth. Please ask him not to kill the people…”

“Hmph!”

McG coldly snorted, wanting to curse but remembering his faith. Finally, he reprimanded, “You murdered Elder Blaister, George, and Byram, and you wanted to kill me. Thank God, I met Haig and Ulf and managed to survive. Now is the time for God to let me uphold justice and punish the wicked!”

After McG finished speaking, he turned to Kadir, his expression hesitant, as if pondering how to make a request. Kadir, a seasoned warrior, saw the killing intent in McG’s eyes. He raised his eyelids and said loudly, “Pastor McG, how do you want to deal with these wicked men before you? They have betrayed the guidance of Lord Jesus, heeded Satan’s temptations, and become shameless evildoers. Only you, as a pastor, have the right to judge them!”

“I want to hang Miller and William in the middle of Plymouth to deter all the petty people and the sheep with weak faith!”

McG’s sinister grin made Miller and William tremble. Miller was slightly better, but William felt like he was about to wet his pants.

“McG… McG, you can’t… I…”

Miller and William tried to argue, but at Kadir’s signal, Brun ordered several White Wolf soldiers to drag Governor William and Miller out of the crowd and all the way to the gates of Plymouth.

A White Wolf soldier nimbly climbed up the gate, and several men tied ropes around William and Miller’s necks, securing them to the top of the gate. With a mighty pull, all the curses and pleas of the two struggling, crying men were choked off.

The Viking soldiers rushed into the city, shouting for the hundreds of residents to come out and watch the impending deaths of the governor and the speaker. The White Wolf soldiers escorted the more than thirty survivors from outside the city to the gate.

The English curses with an Icelandic accent forced everyone to look up at the bodies of Miller and William struggling in the air, watching their legs gradually straighten, their fingers digging into their palms, until finally their eyes and tongues bulged out, and they were completely dead.

All the Englishmen were scared pale, their bodies trembling. The only one hundred and eighty women and several dozen timid white slaves and freemen were already sobbing softly.

The White Wolf soldiers glared at them, scaring the Englishmen into covering their mouths, their bodies trembling even more.

Kadir and McG knew very well that these crying Englishmen were not crying for the dead Miller and William. They were purely terrified out of their wits.

Of the one thousand people in Plymouth, the bravest and highest-status one hundred or so had been killed by the White Wolf soldiers. The remaining citizens were honest freemen and contract white slaves. They were all worried about their future, and several freemen looked pleadingly at McG.

McG looked at the horrifying forms of Miller and William, and the pent-up anger in his heart finally dissipated. He shouted, “May God forgive your sins!”

After making the sign of the cross on his chest and praying, McG raised his head and asked refreshingly, “Leader Kadir! What do you plan to do next with Plymouth?”

Kadir had received instructions from Haldor before setting out, so he did not act on his own. Instead, he asked amiably, “Pastor McG, what do you think should be done with Plymouth?”

Seeing McG’s anxious and uneasy expression, Kadir smiled and said, “Haldor asked me to help you avenge your grievances and reclaim the rights to Plymouth. So from now on, you, Pastor McG, are the lord and governor of Plymouth. These people are your subjects, so how to deal with them should be decided by you!”

McG understood Kadir’s meaning and realized that Haldor of Vinland had no plans to occupy New England. He was somewhat moved and slightly reassured. He bowed slightly and said, “Thank you, Haldor, thank you, Kadir! In the future, I will need your support and help in managing Plymouth!”

Kadir smiled and nodded, then promised that his Vinland troops would be stationed in Plymouth for a long time and would not withdraw in the short term.

Kadir’s words were like a reassurance to McG. Without the support of Vinland’s military, McG could not be the lord for even a day. Moreover, by hanging Governor William, he had completely offended the Plymouth Company.

Although this company’s strength was average and absolutely no match for Vinland, killing him would be very easy. Therefore, the future of Plymouth could no longer do without the stationing and protection of Vinland’s strong troops.

McG thanked him again and then walked to the front of the crowd, telling them about the murder of Elder Blaister. He also pulled out several of Miller’s loyal followers and, after interrogation, they confessed to Miller and William’s plan to kill Elder Blaister, George, Byram, and McG.

The revelation of this fact changed the impression of McG among most people in the city. It was no longer just contempt and fear, but also a hint of understanding for the tragic hero.

At this time, more than a dozen neutral Puritans and several people who had a good relationship with McG showed enthusiasm and excitement. They cursed William and Miller and supported McG’s decision to rely on Vinland’s strong troops.

McG did not care about their true thoughts. He immediately announced the reformation of the Plymouth management council. The council members would be these nearly twenty Puritans and freemen who had come forward. At the same time, he took the property of the deceased and distributed it equally among everyone.

Governor William and Miller had considerable wealth. After distribution, the attitude of Plymouth’s citizens towards McG softened again.

The English were not like the people of the Celestial Empire, who valued righteousness and morality. They did not believe in Confucian culture but only in the strong. If burning, killing, and looting could bring them wealth, they would do so without hesitation.

Therefore, after McG distributed wealth to them, everyone’s attitude completely changed because following Lord McG could bring real benefits.

Although about sixty people died in the battle, most of them were Puritans and guards without family, so the survivors had no direct interest in the dead.

The citizens of Plymouth did not mourn the dead. With money and food in hand, the dead were forgotten.

Chapter 95: The Great Harvest

Vinland in August was brimming with joy.

The discovery of coal, iron, copper, and even gold mines had Haldor, Ulf, Olaf, and the others so elated they felt like they were walking on clouds.

Hudik led the Viking warriors, White Wolf soldiers, and slave warriors in Basque City with great success. He had swept through seven or eight medium and small tribes in the western part of the Labrador Peninsula, then dispatched Vikings and White Wolf soldiers with some slaves to establish five fortress outposts. As these fortresses gradually increased and spread, the western Labrador Peninsula would eventually form a grid-like network of Vinland camps.

Jot and Hoskuld had made progress on the first phase of the inner fortress for the new Hrut City, and a simple dock had been built in the bay. With fishing, hunting, and stored grain, they could sustain themselves for a month or two without needing to draw from the Hrut City warehouses.

Plymouth had also become more orderly. Kadir sent weekly reports to Hrut City, updating them on the situation.

With so much good news, Haldor had been in high spirits all month. The joyful and relaxed August passed quickly.

As Vinland entered September, the temperature dropped sharply, and the season of harvest arrived.

The farmland around Hrut City had been planted with crops in early spring, and after half a year, they had grown to their fullest.

Originally, there had been nineteen Aettangr in Hrut City, but after Pikku took his Inuit followers to colonize Greenland, only eighteen Aettangr remained.

In September, the people and slaves of the eighteen Aettangr scattered to harvest the ripe wheat and beans, pick the corn and squash, and dig up the sweet potatoes and potatoes that had cracked the earth.

The vegetables planted had been harvested in the previous two months. Most of what wasn’t eaten had been pickled. Those vegetables were only side dishes; the real sustenance for the people of Vinland was this batch of grain.

Now, there were five thousand acres of land outside Hrut City. Over a thousand acres were well-cultivated land from years of tilling, while the remaining four thousand acres had been newly reclaimed last year and this year.

During the spring planting, one hundred acres had been allocated for vegetables, while black wheat, wheat, barley, oats, and other grains had been planted on two thousand acres.

Corn, squash, and beans, using seeds captured from other tribes, had been planted on five hundred acres. The rest of the land had been used for potatoes and sweet potatoes.

Jot and Haldor had planned this not only out of concern that monoculture might lead to crop failure due to disasters or diseases but also because last year’s harvest of potatoes and sweet potatoes hadn’t been large. During spring planting, even if all the tubers were planted and the sprouts were transplanted, they couldn’t cover four thousand acres. Moreover, the warehouses had plenty of unshelled grain seeds, which could be planted directly without milling into flour.

Thus, the proportion of potatoes and sweet potatoes planted this year wasn’t very high, but everyone hoped for a bumper harvest of sweet potatoes, potatoes, corn, and squash so that they could be planted on a large scale next year.

After more than half a month of harvest, the warehouses of the three major fortresses in Hrut City—the Haldor Fortress, the Military Fortress, and the Olaf Factory Fortress—were filled to the brim with grain.

Heiner, taking over Jot’s role, assisted Haldor in supervising and coordinating the harvest. After the grain was harvested and stored, Heiner brought thirty educated young men and boys to calculate the yield. Finally, he excitedly told Haldor that this year was indeed a great harvest.

Jot had always made rough estimates, but Heiner was more meticulous. After three days of calculations, he listed a detailed inventory of all the food harvested from the five thousand acres of land in Hrut Village.

“Nineteen hundred and fifty thousand pounds of black wheat, eighteen hundred thousand pounds each of barley and wheat, and two hundred and six thousand pounds of oats.”

“The yield of corn and squash is incredible! Five hundred acres of corn produced one hundred and fourteen thousand pounds, and squash yielded one hundred and ten thousand pounds. Truly amazing!”

“The beans are plentiful too! We’ve eaten a lot of fresh beans recently, and there are still over twenty thousand pounds of dried beans. Excellent!”

The first list showed the yield of black wheat, corn, and other grains. As people passed it around, discussing and smiling, Haldor handed over the second list, which recorded the harvest of potatoes and sweet potatoes. Everyone who saw it was left speechless.

“The harvest of sweet potatoes and potatoes is too large to calculate precisely, but a rough estimate puts sweet potatoes at eight million five hundred thousand pounds and potatoes at nine million pounds…”

Seeing everyone’s silence, Heiner thought they were dissatisfied with his work, so he cleared his throat and began to explain.

“God! Eight million? Eight hundred tens of thousands? How enormous is that? Can you imagine it?” Nilahu shouted, eyes wide with disbelief.

Valitu also slapped his head with a deep voice, “Can’t imagine it. It’s just a lot!”

Lunde praised, “Olaf’s research on manure is excellent! Forget the potatoes and sweet potatoes for now—just the black wheat and corn are enough for us!”

“Enough… more than enough!” Hilt’s face was flushed with excitement.

Everyone burst into laughter, and Heiner finally relaxed, smiling as he said, “This year’s harvest is indeed enormous. Although some of it is still wet, after drying, it will lose about thirty percent of its weight. But even with seventy percent of the corn, squash, and black wheat, it’s enough to feed the two thousand Vikings and twelve thousand slaves in Vinland’s three cities and the Labrador region for two years!”

Most people in Vinland were manual laborers. Native male slaves ate over five pounds of food a day, while females ate half that. Contract white slaves ate even better, and Vikings could eat meat daily—fish, wolf, deer, bird, and more—so their grain consumption was actually slightly lower than that of the slaves.

In the past, when Haig was colonizing, there were fewer people, and they could sustain themselves with a small amount of farmland and fishing and hunting.

After Haldor arrived in Vinland two years ago, colonization began in earnest last year.

Following last year’s conquest wars, a large population was concentrated in Hrut City. Without the grain plundered from various tribes and the fish caught by multiple ships, Hrut City would have starved last winter, and the newly established social order would have collapsed.

But thanks to agricultural and fishing yields, as well as plundered resources, Hrut City survived the harshest winter. After last spring, the large-scale hunting of animals increased the supply of furs and meat, and fishing and foraging sustained them for another half year.

This year’s autumn harvest finally provided enough food for a feast. Haldor, Olaf, Ulf, and Heiner weren’t just happy like the others—they also realized that if the five thousand acres of land had still been planted with black wheat, oats, and other grains without the use of manure to increase yield, this year’s production would not have exceeded one million pounds.

The two thousand acres of newly reclaimed land this year had already yielded nearly six hundred thousand pounds of grain, and that was with limited manure. If livestock farming developed further, increasing the supply of manure, future grain production would see a significant boost.

Chapter 96: The Wonders of Sweet Potatoes and Potatoes

This year’s autumn harvest profoundly demonstrated the power of organic fertilizer and the advanced productivity of modern agricultural techniques. It also changed the stubborn perceptions of many Vikings regarding the advanced agricultural knowledge from the Far East, further strengthening the authority of leaders like Olaf and Haldor, who had persistently promoted new agricultural knowledge and crops.

Success not only boosts a person’s confidence and abilities, making them stronger, but also determines the cohesion and future of an organization. After all, a leader who constantly makes mistakes will eventually cease to be a leader, while one who consistently makes correct decisions will become a great and wise leader.

Currently, the decisions made by Olaf and Haldor were being implemented regardless of whether the Vikings understood or accepted them. The results always benefited the collective and the individual, which greatly enhanced Haldor’s prestige. The Vikings of Vinland had gradually reached a state of blind obedience.

Although Vinland cultivated seven or eight types of crops, the high-yield varieties were actually only potatoes, sweet potatoes, squash, and corn. Among these, potatoes and sweet potatoes were indeed the most productive foods.

After this autumn’s harvest, the combined yield of potatoes and sweet potatoes was a staggering seventeen million five hundred thousand pounds. While this might seem insignificant compared to Ireland or England, in terms of sheer weight, Iceland’s grain production was not much higher than Vinland’s. It was believed that in another year or two, as more land in Vinland was cultivated, the grain production, calculated by quality, would surpass that of Iceland, a land that the Icelanders’ ancestors had cultivated for hundreds of years.

To put it bluntly, even if everyone on Vinland Island rolled around and ate to their heart’s content, they wouldn’t be able to finish this year’s harvest.

Since they couldn’t finish it all, they had to find a way to monetize it.

Olaf’s mind quickly turned to the other two major uses of potatoes and sweet potatoes: making starch and brewing alcohol.

Potatoes are rich in starch, and sweet potatoes also contain a significant amount. However, potatoes do not contain sugar, while sweet potatoes do. Therefore, both can be used for brewing, but potatoes yield more starch when processed.

Starch can be used in cooking, soups, and seasoning, and can be sold to restaurants and noble households. Additionally, starch can be used to make malt sugar, which is a highly profitable business.

As for brewing, potato-based alcohol has long been a national drink in Nordic countries, while sweet potato wine has a long history in the Celestial Empire.

Olaf felt that the quantity of potatoes and sweet potatoes was too large. Such a massive amount of sweet potatoes and potatoes needed to be stored in cellars and processed, otherwise, they would spoil before next year.

After making starch, malt sugar, and brewing, there would be food residues and distiller’s grains, which are excellent feed. This was perfect for developing livestock farming. Apart from the traditional pastoralism, the Vikings could also use distiller’s grains to develop large-scale enclosed farming.

On the morning of September 20th, Haldor began distributing a year’s worth of rations to all Vikings, white slaves, and native slaves. This time, each person received a basic ration of two hundred pounds of potatoes and two hundred pounds of sweet potatoes.

Contracted white slaves received additional corn and squash, while Vikings, on top of the basics, received one hundred pounds of wheat, rye, oats, corn, and other grains, as well as ten pieces of dried meat and ten pieces of dried fish.

These rations were just the basic food supply. Additional subsidies and wages would be distributed periodically based on status and work.

Originally, Haldor had planned to give land to the Vikings for self-cultivation, but considering that if potatoes, sweet potatoes, corn, and other crops were not widely planted, the Vikings, being stubborn, would still plant low-yield and labor-intensive crops like rye and barley. Therefore, this year, each Viking household was only nominally given half a virgate of land, with a few households with more military merits receiving an additional half virgate.

When the Vikings were established, Hrut City had over eighteen hundred Vikings and about two hundred households. That land distribution had consumed almost all the available land, leaving even the Haldor family with only ten virgates.

According to the plan, this year’s centralized planting and distribution would be followed by individual management of the land next year.

However, Haldor and Jot had already planned ahead. Next spring, they would follow the agricultural manual’s guidance to cultivate land on the west and south sides of the new Hrut City. They would even send people to guide Blackstone in Bakens City to cultivate land there, ensuring a target of ten thousand acres of arable land next year.

This year, all the land was centrally managed, and the harvest was centrally distributed. Next year, the land would be returned to individual management. Although the tax revenue Haldor would receive would not be as much as the grain obtained from centralized management, he wouldn’t have to worry about the food for the Vikings’ slaves and the contracted white slaves assigned to various production teams. Their respective owners and team leaders would take care of that.

This distribution of food put everyone in Hrut City in high spirits. They saw the mountains of grain and received enough food to fill their bellies. For the slaves at the bottom of society, being able to eat their fill was a great happiness.

Within five days, all the food was distributed. Then, Haldor sent a portion of the grain to the new Hrut City and Basque City. He even sent ten thousand pounds of potatoes and sweet potatoes to Bakens City to ensure that Blackstone and his men would not go hungry.

As for Kadir and the others stationed in the south at Plymouth, to protect the secret of the high yield of sweet potatoes and potatoes from being discovered by the English, Haldor only sent them newly ground flour and some squash and beans.

After the distribution, the mountain-like grain reserves were reduced, but they were still abundant.

There were still four hundred thousand pounds of rye, barley, wheat, oats, and other grains, eighty thousand pounds of corn, and forty to fifty thousand pounds of squash.

The remaining sweet potatoes and potatoes were even more numerous, with a simple estimate showing a stock of twelve million pounds.

A few days earlier, Olaf had already written down the recipes for making malt sugar and brewing alcohol based on his notes.

These two recipes were actually quite simple. Olaf had learned these skills from novels in his previous life.

First, the rotten and insect-damaged parts of the sweet potatoes or potatoes were removed, and then they were thoroughly cleaned.

To make malt sugar, the processed sweet potatoes or potatoes were cut into small pieces and then washed in a container filled with clean water until the starch in the flesh dissolved into the water. The pulp was then filtered out, leaving a starch-rich liquid.

If the water was allowed to settle and then poured off, the starch would settle at the bottom.

For sugar production, the starch-rich liquid was boiled at high temperatures. After cooking, germinated malt was added, and the mixture was continuously boiled down to a thick syrup or even a semi-solid state to complete the process.

The uniquely flavored malt sugar was then ready.

The pulp filtered out during the starch washing process was still nutritious and could be used for human consumption or as animal feed. This way, every part of the potatoes and sweet potatoes was utilized, with no waste.

Brewing was even simpler. The initial processing of potatoes and sweet potatoes was the same: after cleaning, they were steamed.

Once the potatoes or sweet potatoes were steamed, they were taken out to dry the skin, then mashed in a container, and yeast was added.

After adding enough yeast, an amount of clean water equal to half the weight of the potato or sweet potato mash was added, followed by grain husks to aid fermentation. The mixture was then stored in a sealed container.

For the first seven or eight days, the mixture was stirred once a day, after which it was completely sealed and stored indoors for more than a month. However, due to Vinland’s colder climate, it might take about a month and a half.

After fermentation, it could be filtered and drunk directly, but for better taste and storage, it was best to distill it, resulting in a high-proof spirit similar to whiskey.

Olaf claimed that the brewing method was copied from books in the Ming Dynasty of the Far East. Since no one in Vinland could read Chinese except Olaf, everyone naturally believed whatever he said.

Haldor was long accustomed to his second son Olaf’s intelligence and ingenuity. Without questioning further, he approved Olaf’s request to use the stored potatoes, sweet potatoes, barley, rye, and other grains to make malt sugar and alcohol.

Thus, at noon on September 21st, Olaf led his two Aettangr groups, totaling over two hundred people, along with hundreds of slaves, driving ox carts and pushing wooden carts to transport potatoes, sweet potatoes, and grains.

Olaf personally led the team, taking the food to the water-powered mill workshop several thousand steps upstream of the Muskox River.

Olaf instructed the production team leaders to divide the Vikings into groups to clean and process the potatoes, sweet potatoes, and grains by the river, then dry them. After drying, they were cut into pieces and ground using the water mill.

The slaves were dispersed to cut wood and build workshops on the nearby open ground. The workshops were equipped with large pots and chimneys for cooking potatoes and sweet potatoes.

By the time the sun was setting, the simple workshops were completed, and tens of thousands of pounds of potatoes and sweet potatoes began to be ground.

Fresh potatoes and sweet potatoes have high water content. When cut into small pieces and ground directly by the water mill, they quickly turned into a white pulp. Using large ceramic jars made in Olaf’s factory, the pulp was collected. Once a jar was full, it was carried to the nearby workshop.

Several young, clean female slaves took out new coarse linen cloth and spread it out. Others poured the liquid onto the cloth. The pulp was filtered by the linen, leaving the residue on top, while the starch-rich liquid seeped through into the large pot below.

Once a pot was filled with liquid, Olaf ordered the slaves to light a fire and boil it. Soon, the liquid boiled, and Olaf had a basin of germinated barley malt added. After boiling for another hour, the air was filled with a sweet fragrance, and the malt’s aroma grew stronger.

Olaf had the fire stoked to its highest and the mixture stirred vigorously. After an hour, the full pot of liquid was boiled down to a semi-solid state, half the original volume.

Chapter 97: Eastern Malt Sugar

After more than two hours of cooking, it was finally time to reap the rewards.

The thick malt syrup at the bottom of the pot was golden in color, similar to maple syrup but slightly brighter. The rising steam and aroma were entirely different from honey and maple syrup—more enticing. Olaf dipped a tree branch into the syrup, blew on it, and took a taste. The sticky, sweet flavor filled his mouth, and he laughed heartily. The experimental production of malt sugar was a success!

The malt sugar had been successfully made. The starch had been converted into sugar through malt and high heat, resulting in a sticky, sweet treat. When mixed with flour to form sugar blocks, it could be passed off as the expensive sugar products of the Far East’s Ming Dynasty.

Olaf felt that malt sugar should follow the example of maple syrup and be given a grand name—one that conveyed luxury and mystery while misleading others to prevent replication. After much thought, he decided to name it “Eastern Sugar” or “Eastern Malt Sugar.”

Traditional Chinese malt sugar was essentially a snack made from rice and other grains, where starch was converted into sugar—the same principle as Olaf’s malt sugar. Passing it off as Ming Dynasty malt sugar would be flawless.

With the successful production of Eastern Malt Sugar, Olaf saw that the sky was growing dark. He watched as the villagers under his command finished another pot, which was then stored in earthenware jars and brought back to the city.

That evening, the dinner in Haldor’s fortress consisted of pine nut black bread slices spread with malt sugar, accompanied by sauerkraut soup.

Half and Gerny, the two youngsters, were in their growth spurts. Each of them ate three thick slices of bread, generously spread with diluted malt syrup. Their faces were covered in syrup, and they squirmed happily. For children who had rarely tasted sugar, this sweet treat was pure bliss.

Haldor, Katrin, and Ulf each had two slices. They praised the malt sugar highly. Though they had come to expect many things from Olaf, he always managed to surprise them.

“Excellent!” Ulf wiped his mouth, swallowed his bread, and pointed at the plate of syrup on the table. “The taste is different from royal jelly. Personally, I prefer this one. The aroma is distinct, but Eastern Malt Sugar is clearly sweeter!”

Olaf shrugged and said, “As long as we plant large quantities of potatoes and sweet potatoes next year, not only will we have enough for our own consumption, but Vinland’s sugar industry will also see tremendous growth! Royal jelly and Eastern Malt Sugar will become our key brands. In the future, we might even rival Spain and England’s sugar revenues from the East and West Indies!”

The income from colonies in Central and South America supported the luxurious lifestyles of the Spanish and Portuguese royal families, making them the wealthiest in Europe for nearly a century.

Among the colonial incomes in the West Indies, mining for gold and silver was the most profitable. However, as the mines had been nearly exhausted in recent years, sugarcane had become another highly lucrative business.

Dozens, even hundreds, of plantations along the northern coast of South America and the Caribbean islands were sugarcane fields, providing Spain, England, and Holland with vast wealth from sugarcane.

Because there were few colonies suitable for sugarcane cultivation, European nations would fiercely compete for control of the Caribbean in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, with many colonies changing hands multiple times.

Olaf was well aware of Europeans’ almost obsessive desire for sweets. With maple syrup and malt sugar now in production, Vinland’s pillar industry could become sugar manufacturing.

After all, the fur trade couldn’t last forever. In a few years, wild animals would be hunted to near extinction. Reducing hunting would hinder Vinland’s development, so Olaf wanted to develop the sugar industry within a few years. He aimed to turn Vinland into an industrial powerhouse with sugar, ceramics, alcohol, fur, mining, and even military industries all advancing together. Only by leveraging Vinland and North America’s abundant resources to develop multiple industries would Vinland’s foundation become more stable.

The next day, Olaf first sent someone to soak more barley seeds. Then, he instructed the five production team leaders to take people to the workshop to continue processing malt sugar.

After the first group from Aettangr left, Olaf took the second group from Aettangr, along with a large quantity of potatoes and sweet potatoes, to the factory at Razor Mountain.

This time, after washing the sweet potatoes and potatoes, Olaf ordered them to be placed in large pots for steaming. After two hours, the lid was opened, and a few were broken open to reveal they were soft and fully cooked. He then had the stonemasons’ stone hammers and mortars used to mash the sweet potatoes and potatoes separately. They were then placed in large vats, mixed with yeast (purchased in Europe among various miscellaneous items) and grain husks, stirred until even, and then water was added before being sealed in clean containers to ferment.

The next step was to wait. If all went well, the smell of alcohol would be detectable in a week, and after a month, it could be filtered and distilled, resulting in successful brewing.

Olaf personally oversaw the first batch before handing the process over to the Vikings and slaves under his command, while he supervised and guided from the side.

Making malt sugar, potato wine, and sweet potato wine was simple if one observed the process. Most people in later generations could learn it—it was just a few steps. However, to the people of this world, it seemed mysterious and complex.

The white Vikings, having some knowledge of alcohol and a bit of culture, quickly picked up the process under Olaf’s guidance.

For the native slaves, however, brewing and sugar-making were entirely foreign concepts. They had never heard of such things, let alone learned how to make them.

Olaf didn’t expect the native slaves to learn these skills. To better utilize the workforce, he adopted a modern factory-style assembly line production model.

The simplest tasks, like washing and processing potatoes and sweet potatoes, were assigned to the native slaves, followed by steaming. The remaining work was left to the Vikings.

The sugar-making process was similar. Native slaves handled washing and processing, then cutting and grinding. Vikings supervised the grinding, and after filtering, the native slaves added and carried firewood. Vikings controlled the heat and timing for adding malt, then operated the stirring and final shaping.

Olaf wiped his hands with a cloth and took out a charcoal pencil and notebook from his pocket. On a page filled with simplified Chinese characters listing industrial categories, he found the alcohol industry section. Behind “grape wine,” he carefully wrote “potato wine” and “sweet potato wine.”

The page was already filled with dense Chinese characters.

“Industry is the cornerstone of Vinland!

Ceramics Industry—Bone China, Pottery (High value, technology needs improvement, potential: five stars)

Fur Industry—Beaver pelts and other animal furs (High price, currently unsustainable due to inability to hunt or farm, potential: two stars)

Sugar Industry—Maple syrup, Malt Sugar (High value, technology needs refinement, potential: five stars)

Mining Industry—Gold, Iron, Copper, Coal (Value immeasurable, technology and equipment primitive, long development cycle, potential: five stars)

Alcohol Industry—Grape wine, Potato wine, Sweet potato wine (High value, technology needs improvement, potential: five stars)”

This page was filled with Olaf’s plans for Vinland’s industries. Those already in development included ceramics, fur, sugar, and alcohol. Mining was still in the exploratory stage.

In the alcohol industry, grape wine had been overseen by Jot for the past two years. Every summer, he ordered slaves to harvest grapes, expanding the scale based on Haig’s vineyard. Eventually, they cultivated over ten acres of grapes. Most were processed into wine, with a small portion consumed fresh or dried into raisins.

Though grape cultivation and wine production in Vinland were still primitive, they had taken shape last year. With continuous improvement in varieties and expansion of cultivation, the grape wine industry would grow significantly.

If the production of potato and sweet potato wine took off this year, the winter’s output could surpass the entire island’s grape wine production, and next year, they could be sold in Europe for a good price.

Chapter 98: Industry Builds a Nation

Time quickly entered October, and Vinland’s weather, with two early winter rains, saw temperatures plummet. Everyone had to bundle up in fur coats when going out.

Olaf had been closely monitoring the two Aettangr under his command as they produced malt sugar and potato liquor. He shuttled between the factory and workshop daily, inspecting the food produced each day.

By mid-October, the weather grew even colder. Though it hadn’t yet reached freezing, many trees had already begun shedding their leaves.

To date, Olaf’s two Aettangr had produced nearly fifty thousand pounds of malt sugar and over a hundred thousand gallons of potato and sweet potato liquor, consuming more than three hundred thousand pounds of potatoes and sweet potatoes. The lees hadn’t been filtered yet, but the starch residue had been taken away by the slaves—perhaps to cook at home.

This experimental production hadn’t gone entirely smoothly. A few days earlier, due to worker error, seven vats of sweet potato liquor had spoiled. Olaf had only verbally reprimanded them and let it go, allowing his subordinates to make their first mistake. As a result, their work efficiency improved significantly afterward.

Based on this progress, Olaf estimated that, excluding the coldest winter months when production would halt, they could work for over twenty more days next month before spring arrived. By April of next year, they should be able to consume seven to eight hundred thousand pounds of potatoes and sweet potatoes, producing thirteen to fourteen thousand pounds of malt sugar and five hundred thousand gallons of potato and sweet potato liquor.

In addition to the massive output of malt sugar and liquor, there would also be two to three hundred thousand pounds of residue and lees, which could be used for livestock farming next spring.

Currently, Vinland had no developed livestock industry. The Icelanders had brought and purchased cattle, sheep, horses, and captured reindeer for free-range grazing—a crude and extensive method. While management costs were low, reproduction rates were low, and growth cycles were long, making it far from an advanced farming technique.

Beyond free-range and occasional pen-raising, the Vikings of Hrut City also kept chickens, ducks, and other poultry in their yards to ensure a supply of eggs. A few wealthier households even raised sheep or pigs. This was the development model of small-scale agriculture at the time.

Olaf believed that with the widespread cultivation of high-yield crops like potatoes, corn, sweet potatoes, and squash, Vinland’s food reserves would continue to grow. In the future, breweries and sugar workshops—except for the two coldest months when work would halt—would operate year-round.

This would ensure nine to ten months of continuous production of liquor, sugar, and food residue. As consumable goods, more liquor and sugar would always be better.

The large accumulation of food residue could be used to develop livestock feed, encouraging Vikings to expand their household livestock varieties and scale. They could even establish large pig farms, cattle farms, sheep farms, horse farms, and reindeer farms in a corner of Hrut City.

Fresh feed that couldn’t be consumed immediately could be dried and stored to meet winter demand. The daily manure from farms and household livestock could be used to make fertilizer, ensuring soil fertility and increasing yields, thus forming a virtuous cycle.

Vinland’s grain, meat, and fur production would all increase, and reserves would grow significantly, providing the foundation and capacity to cope with epidemics, wars, natural disasters, and other crises. This was the fundamental basis for strengthening power and moving toward nation-building.

Agriculture determined whether people’s stomachs could be filled, and whether stomachs were full determined the most basic future of the nation and its people.

Olaf felt that as long as Vinland’s agriculture developed rapidly and its farming and livestock industries thrived, the Viking population would explode within ten to twenty years. In the future, with enough core Icelandic Vikings and white Vikings, ruling tens of thousands or even hundreds of thousands of natives and the vast lands of North America would be a natural progression.

In terms of intelligence and ability, Olaf wasn’t outstanding among the Vikings in Vinland. However, Haldor, Hudik, Jot, Hoskuld, Heiner, and others were limited by the knowledge and understanding of their backward era, lacking good planning and development direction for colonial rule.

This was similar to other colonizers in the seventeenth century. The methods of colonial rule employed by England, France, Denmark, Holland, and other countries were also backward.

In seventeenth-century Europe, people like Olaf, who planned and guided the industrial development of Vinland’s resources, were almost non-existent. This was a matter of awareness, as well as the role of advanced knowledge.

After all, Olaf had witnessed the six-year poverty alleviation campaign led by the great man, during which, under the strong leadership of the organization, a wave of industrial planning swept across the country, improving village-level collective economies while achieving prosperity.

In essence, it all came down to one thing: industry was the foundation of prosperity and national strength.

The essence of the Opium Wars in the late Qing Dynasty was the competition between Western and Eastern industries. The most fundamental method of plundering other countries’ wealth was to dump products, purchase their raw materials, process them, and then dump them back, shifting the cost of a high-quality life onto others.

Olaf was well aware that since the Age of Exploration began the colonial model, any country that opened its eyes to the world had entered an accelerated mode, plundering wealth through colonial rule to enhance national power. Therefore, the later defeat of the Great Qing by the Western powers couldn’t be attributed solely to Europe’s homeland. The British Empire at the time had twenty million square kilometers of colonies, and France had six to seven million square kilometers, both of which had been developed for many years, focusing only on basic industries to provide raw materials and cheap labor for Europe.

Olaf’s mind held centuries of advanced colonial rule and governance experience from later eras, which was why he could propose ideas that Haldor and others found convincing and were willing to follow. From a certain perspective, Olaf was like a prophet from ancient texts, guiding Vinland from a weak colony to a path of rapid development and national strength.

…

After the temperature dropped significantly, Heiner, following Olaf’s suggestion, ordered the digging of larger and more cellars in the city to store sweet potatoes, potatoes, and squash for the winter.

Corn, wheat, and other grains had been dried thoroughly last month. The plumpest seeds were selected for next year’s planting, while the rest were either ground into flour at the windmill workshop or bagged and stored in warehouses.

The windmill workshop hadn’t stopped operating since Haldor distributed the grain. Every day, Vikings and white slaves used the windmill to grind flour and cornmeal for free—a rare welfare benefit in European concepts.

Currently, Vinland had a small population and a single development model, leading to a weak commercial atmosphere.

Due to Haldor’s military rule, resources were completely under his control, so the ruling Viking class received basic living necessities for free.

However, according to the plans of Haldor, Olaf, and others, Vinland would begin reforms next year.

In the future, as Vinland’s population grew and land was distributed to individuals, it would return to a commercial model and establish a formal tax system.

Future Vinland would collect agricultural taxes based on land, commercial taxes based on business activities, and wool taxes from livestock development. Only through reasonable taxation could the abilities of Vikings and white slaves be fully unleashed to develop industries.

After implementing the tax system, Vikings and white slaves would need to establish a clear conscription system, with Vikings serving in the military and white slaves serving in the militia and corvée labor. This would be the most fundamental system for Vinland’s future development.

As for native slaves, they were private property and not protected by any legal regulations. Corvée labor and war would require their conscription without question. However, if a slave died in battle, Haldor would have to provide appropriate compensation.

These reform methods were written on paper and placed at Haldor’s bedside. He studied them day and night, discussing and refining them with Olaf, Ulf, Heiner, and others, gradually forming a governance model suited to Vinland’s national conditions.

Chapter 99: The Meeting and the Rift

On October 20th, Haldor convened a meeting in the council hall, gathering the Oarsmen, production team leaders, and other managers to discuss recent developments in production and daily life, aiming to identify and resolve any emerging issues.

“General! Our Aettangr has been leading the slaves in constructing the road from Hrut City to the harbor. Progress has been smooth, but the wooden carts are severely damaged. We need Olaf’s factory to produce more!” Ilugi, serving as an Oarsman, rose to speak after the other elders had reported on their work.

Haldor, Ulf, and Olaf listened attentively, jotting down notes on the paper before them. After Ilugi finished, Olaf looked up and said, “How many do you need? There are three completed carriages in the warehouse that you can use for now. We’ll start production again tomorrow to ensure we don’t delay the road construction in Hrut City!”

The proverb “To get rich, build roads first” was a slogan from the 1990s that Olaf had heard in his childhood. Convenient transportation promotes commercial development and population growth. The capitals of European nations are mostly built near deep-water ports. In the Tang Dynasty, eight rivers surrounded Chang’an; in the Song Dynasty, the Bian River and the Grand Canal flourished; the Ming Dynasty’s Nanjing relied on the Yangtze River, and Beijing depended on Tianjin and the Jing-Hang Canal. The rise and fall of dynasties in the Celestial Empire were tied to the establishment of capitals based on land and, more importantly, water transportation. In other words, convenient transportation is productivity and control over the nation.

Since the completion of Hrut City last spring, after the spring plowing, every week an Aettangr Viking leads a thousand slaves to maintain the roads, not only within the outer city but also to the fortresses guarding the land. First, they use tools to fell trees and clear bushes, then level the land, and finally pave the roads with gravel.

Vinland’s terrain features hills, cliffs, and significant elevation changes, with many ponds, puddles, and lakes. However, due to the cold climate, there is little grass and low shrubbery, making it relatively easy for the Viking army to travel. Now, with dedicated efforts, the task is even simpler.

In less than half a year, the roads inside and outside Hrut City have been paved with gravel. Currently, the road to the southern harbor is half-completed, and according to the plan, it should be finished before the heavy snow blocks the roads this year.

Ilugi is currently overseeing the road construction. The issues he raised must be resolved quickly by Haldor and Olaf to avoid delaying the completion of the final batch of city fortifications this year.

After Ilugi spoke, several other Oarsmen and production team leaders stood up to report other issues in production and daily life, such as the phenomenon of native slaves stealing food like berries, grapes, hazelnuts, and pine nuts during collection.

Before Haldor could speak, Haig slammed the table and cursed loudly, then demanded that the Viking overseers be given the authority to punish slave workers on the spot.

Haldor nodded in agreement, and Heiner added, “This year, we’ve already distributed rations, plus the usual rewards and gifts after work. The slaves are definitely not going hungry! Those who steal must be severely punished. For every case discovered, they should be flogged, or even sent to the quarry for half a year!”

Most people spoke during this meeting, and the exposed problems were quickly resolved.

Heiner stood up and looked around, about to announce the end of the meeting, when Olaf suddenly remembered his newly promoted production team leader, Gilson. Gilson was a young and honest Inuit, chosen by Pikku before he left Vinland as one of his subordinates, and given to Olaf to manage the production team of Inuits in the city.

Gilson had always been quiet, but he was serious and responsible in his work. Later, as the Vikings and native slaves ventured deeper into the island for hunting, they brought back several dozen Inuits. Haldor gave all of them to Olaf as slaves, and Olaf put Gilson in charge of managing these people.

Recently, Olaf had been busy and hadn’t paid much attention to the affairs of the two Aettangr under him. Usually, the four Viking team leaders managed them, while the slaves of his own Aettangr were overseen by the production team leader, Gilson.

A few days ago, Gilson had told Olaf that many slaves had fallen ill, and several had even died in the city.

Although slaves died every year, and even white slaves and Vikings got sick and died, the difference was only in the numbers. Leaders like Haldor had never paid much attention to this, but Olaf took the issue seriously.

The population of Hrut City was growing, and many diseases were contagious. If there was an outbreak, it couldn’t be ignored.

Olaf stood up and emphasized the need to continue promoting the use of masks this winter, requiring everyone to wear them to prevent the spread of disease. He also called for the isolation of the sick.

To save their lives, Olaf, though not knowledgeable in traditional Chinese medicine, allocated several hundred pounds of Isatis root and honeysuckle from the warehouse. He had them boiled into a medicinal broth for the sick to drink, and the other city residents could also receive a cup daily for prevention.

For Vinland, with a population of just over ten thousand, people were the foundation of everything. Olaf had to do his best to protect the Vikings, contracted white slaves, and even the native slaves. Only by increasing the population could Vinland grow stronger and wealthier.

Olaf’s generosity earned him widespread praise. Haldor even patted Olaf on the shoulder and said, “Our family has become the master of Vinland, and Olaf deserves half the credit! He is our pride!”

Although Olaf had the soul of an adult, he couldn’t help but feel a little proud and pleased by the praise. However, no one noticed that Ulf, sitting on the other side of Haldor, had a stiff expression.

Ulf and Olaf had a deep bond, much like their fathers, Haldor and Haig.

But Ulf was already twenty-two years old. He had inherited the family’s bold and generous character, but as the eldest son and one of the founders of the Vinland colony, he was now overshadowed by his father and younger brother, Olaf, leaving him with little recognition. This made Ulf feel somewhat depressed.

Traditional Icelanders never schemed; they faced everything directly and courageously.

After the meeting, Ulf found his father, Haldor, and directly expressed his frustrations, requesting to leave Hrut City and establish his own household.

“Father! I’m already twenty-two, and I’ll be twenty-three after this winter. When you were my age, you were already sailing out to raid and trade. But I’m still living in the shadow of you and my brother. I think I can represent the Hrut family to conquer the natives and expand the land on the mainland across the sea!”

Seeing that his father remained silent, Ulf continued his plea.

Haldor had already approved Ulf’s request in his heart, but he was worried that his eldest son’s departure might affect the relationship and feelings between Olaf and the others, so he remained silent.

At this moment, Olaf approached and overheard his father and brother’s conversation, understanding why his elder brother insisted on establishing his own household. Ulf saw the favoritism his father showed Olaf and the brilliance that overshadowed him. He didn’t want to stay in Hrut City and compete with his brother, so he decided to carve out his own path.

It was also Ulf’s way of proving himself, building his own team and strength, so that in the future, he could become a force in Vinland that Haldor couldn’t ignore, ensuring that the position would be passed to him.

Olaf even thought darkly that perhaps by then, Ulf wouldn’t be afraid to compete with him…

Chapter 100: Striking Out on His Own

The Viking tradition dictated that the eldest son inherited the family estate, while younger sons were expected to forge their own paths. However, the elder brother or the heir was duty-bound to assist them—financially supporting their marriages and providing them with a ship to raid or trade, thus fulfilling their obligations.

This rule was not absolute. If the eldest son was disabled or ill, or if a younger son proved exceptionally capable, the inheritance could pass to them. In such cases, they would support their elder brother or help his children establish themselves.

Later, as the Vikings settled in Iceland and transitioned to an agrarian lifestyle, their faith evolved, but the customs surrounding inheritance and the succession of the family head remained unchanged.

Ulf’s decision to strike out on his own was, in essence, a declaration that he had no intention of competing with his younger brother, Olaf, for the inheritance. He was prepared to cede the existing family holdings to Olaf, relying instead on his father’s support to carve out new territories and resources in the vast, uncharted lands of the New World. This decision reflected Ulf’s deep regard for family, his confidence in his own abilities, and, above all, the ambition of a young man hungry for the boundless opportunities of the continent.

Yet, beneath the surface, Ulf recognized a harsh truth: to have any chance of inheriting his father’s position in the future, he needed to cultivate his own loyal followers. At present, all signs pointed to Olaf as their father’s favored successor. Without land, manpower, or an army of his own, Ulf stood no chance against his capable younger brother.

If Ulf secured his father’s backing and leveraged the resources and population of Vinland, he could establish a kingdom in the New World—one that, in name, belonged to the family but, in reality, would be his alone. It would be akin to the relationship between the Kingdom of Scotland or the Principality of Wales and the Kingdom of England.

In time, this would give him the strength to vie for leadership of the family.

Even if he failed in that endeavor, as long as his lineage endured, his descendants would continue to rule his lands, at least nominally under the authority of his father, Haldor, and future family heirs, as part of the greater Haldor domain.

Ulf cared little for empty titles. What mattered to him was power—his own power—and the vast, untamed lands to the west of Vinland, lands ten or even a hundred times larger than Vinland itself. The chance to conquer and claim them for himself was an opportunity too good to pass up.

Olaf saw the ambition and determination in his brother’s eyes and guessed his intentions. Stepping forward, he helped Ulf persuade their father.

“Father! Brother! I think we should send someone from our family to oversee the conquest of the natives on the mainland. Brother is no longer young!”

Haldor seemed moved by Olaf’s words. Nodding, he said, “Ulf, if you truly want to go, then in a few days, you’ll accompany the supply ship to Basque City. You and Hudik will switch places, representing our family in managing the Labrador Peninsula! Any lands you conquer will be yours to govern! Name your terms…”

Hearing Haldor’s agreement, Ulf let out a hearty laugh, and Olaf breathed a sigh of relief. The three of them then walked home, chatting and laughing along the way.

Influenced by their ancestors, the Icelanders valued their word. They never refused what was rightfully theirs, nor did they covet what was not. While they placed great importance on land and property, they valued hard work even more. When relatives or friends faced hardship, they were generous with land and wealth to help them settle. Disputes over inheritance among brothers were rare.

Now that Ulf had taken the initiative to strike out on his own, Haldor, who had long intended to leave Vinland to Olaf, felt at ease. Olaf, in turn, gained newfound respect—and wariness—for his elder brother. He realized that whether Ulf aimed to claim the family leadership or had other motives, seizing this opportunity to build his own power base and expand his territory was a necessary move.

Olaf had never wanted to compete with his brother. He had planned to wait a few more years before setting out on his own. But now, seeing Ulf’s ambition, Olaf found himself both admiring and cautious of his brother. After all, Vinland was only a hundred thousand square kilometers, while the Americas stretched over tens of millions…

Rather than fight over scraps, why not carve out his own destiny? Ulf’s vision and boldness marked him as an extraordinary man.

Ulf was experienced in colonization and in his early twenties, at the peak of his strength, energy, and drive. His willingness to expand the family’s territory made him the perfect candidate for the task.

Back at home, Haldor announced Ulf’s plans to cross the sea to the mainland. Katrin and Gerny were worried and reluctant to see him go, while Half, overflowing with excitement, clamored to join him.

Katrin understood that Viking descendants must be bold. Without a word, she went to prepare a meal.

Ulf and Olaf restrained their younger brother, telling him he could only join them in battle once he came of age.

Half, nearly nine years old, grabbed his weapon—a blunt throwing axe—and loudly declared himself already grown.

Ulf, annoyed, punched him, sending him flying three meters away. The axe clattered to the ground, and Half, finally subdued, sat quietly to the side.

Olaf and Gerny chuckled. In this family, Olaf had always been mature and wise, earning special treatment.

Half, however, was a bundle of restless energy. Only the iron fists of Olaf and Haldor could keep him in line. Since he was four or five, Olaf had made it a habit to beat some sense into his mischievous younger brother, which was why Half was so obedient around him.

Ulf, who had left Iceland before Half was born, had rarely seen his younger siblings. After reuniting in Vinland, he cherished their bond and doted on them. This was why Half had never feared his eldest brother—until today’s punch taught him otherwise.

The barren land and harsh climate of Iceland had shaped its people to be warm and deeply value kinship and friendship. With few distractions, Icelandic children, regardless of relation, grew up listening to elders recite sagas and ancient myths.

Driven by admiration for their ancestors’ valor, every Icelandic child spent their youth either fighting or preparing to fight. Whether it was genetic inheritance or cultural influence, it had forged the Icelanders’ combative spirit and robust physiques.

…

Soon, Katrin and a young Inuit slave girl entered with food, and the family gathered to eat.

Vikings had no tradition of silent meals. Haldor regaled them with tales of his early raids, encouraging Ulf to do his best.

After some conversation, Olaf asked, “Father! I heard you’ve arranged ships to deliver grain to Basque City, Plymouth, and Nuuk in Greenland. Won’t the seas around Greenland freeze over in winter? Will there be enough time?”

Haldor swallowed a mouthful of sausage and replied, “Valitu, Hilt, and Solrak will set sail tomorrow. The Greenland sea should freeze next month—everything should be fine if nothing goes wrong!”

Olaf missed Pikku, whom he considered a friend.

By tradition, Vinland’s temperatures would plummet by the end of the month, trapping everyone indoors for two months. Before being confined, Olaf wanted to visit Greenland—not just to see Pikku but to witness the colonization efforts firsthand. If Pikku faced any difficulties, Olaf could help resolve them in person. The ship’s captain, after all, had no particular fondness for Pikku and might not bother.

“I want to go to Greenland with the ship tomorrow,” Olaf said, looking at his father.

Katrin frowned, but Haldor nodded. “Fine. Take plenty of men and firearms with you in case of danger.”

Icelanders allowed their adult children to forge their own paths. If a child could establish their own estate abroad, all family wealth would eventually be liquidated and passed to them upon their parents’ deaths. Thus, modern Icelanders’ views on wealth and their children’s independence remained much like those of the ancient Vikings.

Though Olaf was not yet physically mature, his height and build rivaled that of a full-grown Icelander—even surpassing many shorter adults. Among the native slaves, few could match his stature.

Olaf’s physical strength and intellect were nearly on par with an adult’s, surpassing most native slaves and even many white adults. Haldor respected Olaf’s judgment and, after a moment’s thought, agreed to his request.

Katrin’s frown did not stem from the same maternal reluctance seen in the Far East. She simply found Greenland’s barren, frozen landscape unappealing. But since her husband had agreed and Olaf was always decisive, she did not try to dissuade them, silently accepting the decision.

Chapter 101: Changes in Greenland

Greenland’s geographical location meant it did not have the distinct four seasons of the southern lands. To be precise, Greenland only had two seasons: an extremely cold winter and a slightly less cold winter.

As the calendar winter began, Greenland was blanketed by a heavy snowfall, thickening the ice over its lakes and making the snow-capped mountains appear even larger. Though the coastal areas around Nuuk had not yet frozen, the increasingly frigid weather would soon freeze the surrounding seas.

Today, the weather in Greenland seemed a bit better, with the daylight lasting a little longer. Even as the days grew shorter, the sun could still be seen at noon. Under its rays, over twenty canoes appeared in the Nuuk strait. These boats were crafted from timber brought from Vinland in the spring by Pikku’s men and were essential for whaling, fishing, and warfare.

Since the Inuit people of Greenland were scattered along the warmer southern coasts, the only way to find them was by boat. Soon, the twenty-plus large canoes arrived at the newly built small harbor on the shore. From each canoe, four men disembarked, each carrying bundles of animal hides. In moments, over a hundred people gathered on the shore.

From the largest canoe, seven men stepped out. The burly, bearded man in the center was none other than Pikku, the Governor of Greenland.

“Chief! This time, we have conquered five major tribes in the southwestern fjords. The smaller tribes have also submitted to us, offering furs as tribute. Under your leadership, we have now conquered the entire western coast!” A similarly sturdy but shorter man with a yellow beard bowed to Pikku, his voice deep and resonant.

Pikku was delighted to hear this and laughed heartily. “Our conquest of the western coast is thanks to the bravery of our men and the White Wolf soldiers, as well as the advanced weapons bestowed upon us by our master. I just calculated—with the southwestern fjords under our control, we are now the masters of the western coast, ruling over ten thousand Inuit. Only now do I feel I have lived up to my master’s expectations as Governor of Greenland!”

Since spring, when Pikku and his men had taken Nuuk, they had swept through the surrounding tribes, relocating the Inuit to Nuuk for centralized living. Over a hundred Inuit Vikings and four hundred White Wolf soldiers, along with three hundred enslaved Inuit, had established a settlement of nearly a thousand people.

With ample timber and food supplies, the Nuuk colony had started smoothly, with no deaths from cold or starvation. Once Pikku’s men had turned the timber into canoes, the Inuit Vikings led the enslaved Inuit in daily fishing. Thanks to the active fish stocks as the weather warmed and their stored provisions, the settlement’s food consumption had nearly balanced out.

Pikku waited until everyone had adapted to the environment and the few White Wolf soldiers suffering from the climate had recovered before deciding to continue conquering nearby tribes. With their advanced weapons and superior forces, Pikku’s army easily crushed any resistance, killing the chiefs and relocating the rest of the tribe to areas near Nuuk. This made management easier and ensured the newly conquered tribes had enough space to find food.

Though they would eventually need to disperse the population to follow the migrations of fish, seals, and reindeer to sustain the Inuit, this arrangement worked fine for a few months.

As summer arrived, bringing the warmest temperatures and the longest days of the midnight sun, Pikku’s army reached the peak of their conquests, subduing one or two tribes each day. In just over two months, Pikku had defeated over seventy major tribes and conquered nearly three hundred, spreading his reputation so widely that many tribes surrendered upon seeing his fleet, offering furs and walrus ivory as tribute.

Pikku knew he could not emulate his master’s enslavement of the Vinland natives by bringing all the Inuit to Nuuk for centralized management. First, he did not have enough people, and second, Greenland’s harsh environment and scarce resources meant Nuuk could not support a large population. One to two thousand people was already the limit.

By autumn, Pikku had conquered most of the western coast, occupying more than half of it. Over three hundred tribes, large and small, had submitted, with a population exceeding nine thousand. However, some tribes in the southwestern fjords still refused to submit or pay tribute, and the five largest had even formed an alliance against him.

Unwilling to suffer heavy losses in a direct confrontation, Pikku took advantage of the polar night, when tribes were frantically hunting and fishing to stockpile food for winter. He led a hundred elite soldiers in a surprise attack on the tribal alliance in the southwestern fjords.

The tribes had not expected Pikku’s attack and lacked the strength to resist. In the first clash, Pikku’s forces killed over a dozen hunters, and the tribes quickly surrendered. They had no choice—prolonged resistance would have cost them too many hunters, leaving them without enough food for winter, dooming the entire tribe.

Surrender was meaningless; survival was everything.

With this pre-winter military campaign and show of force, Pikku subdued the five tribes of the southwestern fjords and over a dozen smaller tribes. He now had complete control over the entire western coast, the most populous and climatically favorable region of Greenland, ruling over ten thousand people—nearly half of Greenland’s total population.

Returning to the Nuuk colony, the guards at the camp came forward to greet them and help the hundred-plus White Wolf soldiers and Inuit warriors unload the furs and meat.

The Nuuk settlement now had over a hundred and twenty longhouses, housing two thousand people: over a hundred Vikings, four hundred White Wolf soldiers, and fifteen hundred Inuit slaves.

The stone for the longhouses was sourced locally, and the timber came half from the logs and leftover materials brought from Vinland and half from the low birch and polar willow trees cut down nearby. Though Greenland’s tree coverage was sparse, the island was vast, and the timber resources were actually quite abundant—just inconvenient to access.

Pikku instructed everyone to return home for a meal before entering his own longhouse.

A sturdy and beautiful Inuit girl, dressed in a fine seal-skin coat and adorned with gold jewelry Pikku had given her, emerged from the inner room. She bowed politely before fetching a warm water pouch filled with reindeer milk, which had been warming by the fire, and handed it to Pikku.

This girl was the daughter of a tribal chief whom Pikku had taken as his woman. The chief, spared from execution, had been enslaved. Now, the girl spent her days with three white Vikings, tending to reindeer and researching ways to expand their herding—a relatively easy job.

Pikku took the pouch and drank a few sips before wiping his mouth and saying, “Herman, your reindeer milk is always so delicious!”

Herman smiled, stepping closer to massage his shoulders. “You men go out and fight, battling the sea and beasts under the heavens’ blessing. I can’t help you, so I can only serve you well.”

Pikku let out a satisfied hum, then took her warm, soft hand and pulled her into his arms. “You’ve been with me for two months—why aren’t you pregnant yet?”

Herman, still a girl, blushed and whispered, “I… I don’t know…”

Pikku lifted her petite body and carried her toward the inner room, laughing as he went. “I’ll show you how it’s done!”

“But… we haven’t eaten yet…”

“We’ll work up an appetite first!”

…

Chapter 102: The Governor’s Happy Life

The next morning arrived in the blink of an eye. Pikku, exhausted from half a night’s exertions, lay sprawled on the fur mat in the inner room, fast asleep. Herman, however, was already dressed and sitting by the hearth. He picked up a few sun-dried reindeer dung cakes, reignited them, and tossed them into the fire. The embers inside had clearly died out during the night.

Once the hearth was burning hot, Herman retrieved a piece of whale meat rich in fat, skewered it with an ivory spike, and held it over the flames. After a while, the meat was half-cooked, its surface charred. He pulled it out, scraped off the blackened exterior with a knife made from a whale’s tooth, revealing the yellowish, dry meat beneath. This was breakfast.

Soon, Pikku woke up and joined Herman for the roasted meat and a cup of reindeer milk. As the governor of western Greenland, Pikku had long since secured three square meals a day, each one filled with meat.

Under Herman’s care, Pikku donned his seal fur coat, put on his Arctic hare fur hat, and grabbed his large axe before stepping out the door.

He hadn’t gone far when he turned back, looking at his woman. “Herman, go process those two seals we caught yesterday. Winter’s almost here—make yourself a warm new set of clothes!”

Herman beamed with joy, kissed Pikku, and happily went to the outer room to handle the seal carcasses from the night before.

Pikku chuckled as he left, thinking to himself: Women are no different from dogs. Give them good food and treat them well, and they’ll be loyal to the death… I’ve heard the chieftain of a large tribe on the eastern coast has some beautiful women. Maybe I’ll raid them next year…

Stepping on the frozen, yellowed grass, Pikku glanced at the dozens of reindeer in the withered pasture outside the Nuuk colony. Three white Vikings were already up, directing the slave herders to milk the animals.

“Good morning, Pikku!”

“Good morning, Bell! Bruton! Haulin! How’s the winter feed coming along?”

The Irish-born Vikings greeted Pikku warmly. Recently, Pikku had gifted each of them a young, beautiful Inuit girl, bringing some joy to their otherwise monotonous lives in Greenland. Their relationship had grown increasingly cordial.

Haulin, the eldest of the three, shook Pikku’s hand warmly. “We don’t have many reindeer this year, so finding feed won’t be a problem!”

The four chatted idly in Icelandic for a while when suddenly, a tall, muscular man with yellowish skin approached, clad in white wolf fur. The sky had just begun to brighten, and all four recognized him as Nan, a commander of the White Wolf soldiers—a fierce warrior who always led from the front in battle.

The four hundred White Wolf soldiers were the foundation of Pikku’s rule and conquest of Greenland. He treated his officers and even the common soldiers with kindness, ensuring they were well-fed. But to prevent rebellion, he had split the White Wolf soldiers into two factions of two hundred each, keeping them in check. Nan was the leader of the left guard.

“My White Wolf commander, what brings you here? What’s the matter?” Pikku embraced Nan warmly before asking.

Nan spoke in broken Icelandic: “Governor, the Inuit militia and slaves who went out fishing just spotted massive ships entering the western strait, heading straight for Nuuk!”

“Whose ships?! Did you send someone to check?” Pikku asked alertly.

“I’ve already sent White Wolf soldiers to investigate. At this time of year, it’s probably the Heavenly God’s supply ships!” Nan said gravely.

“I think so too, but it could also be Danish colonists. I’ve heard the Danish king formed the Greenland Company to expand their colonies. There’s been no movement before, but we can’t let our guard down. Go inform Serokino (the other White Wolf commander) and gather the White Wolf soldiers and Inuit militia. We need to be ready for battle. If it’s the Danes, we’ll drive them away!”

The two men hurried toward the western shore. After giving his orders, Nan dashed off to the nearby settlement, shouting in a mix of Icelandic, Beothuk, and a few simple Inuit phrases.

At Nan’s call, the morning calm of the Nuuk colony erupted into chaos. From the largest longhouses near Pikku’s residence emerged over fifty Inuit Vikings clad in half-plate armor, wielding long swords, and carrying crossbows and bows. These were the young, strong men from the Inuit families under Pikku’s Aettangr, serving as the colony’s militia leaders.

Beyond the Inuit longhouses were the White Wolf soldiers’ quarters. Though less than half were inside at this hour, they quickly donned their wolf pelts and wooden armor, grabbing their swords, knives, and bows before assembling outside.

From the low wooden huts on the outskirts came over two hundred of the strongest Inuit slaves—chosen from the thirteen hundred for their strength and bravery. They served as the Inuit Vikings’ militia, joining battles since the summer solstice. Though not as disciplined or skilled as the White Wolf soldiers, they had proven themselves capable.

Hearing the commotion, Serokino and the other White Wolf soldiers rushed back from the colony’s edges. Within half an hour, the seven hundred-strong armed force—White Wolf soldiers and Inuit militia—assembled under Pikku’s command and marched to the dock, ready for battle.

A few minutes later, several canoes approached the shore at high speed. The White Wolf soldiers and Inuit slaves rowed fiercely, undeterred by the waves, and soon reached the beach.

One of the White Wolf soldiers leaped ashore, his face alight with excitement. “Governor! Governor! It’s… it’s Vinland’s great ships! Vinland’s ships have arrived!”

The soldier’s Icelandic was poor, his words a mix of Icelandic and Beothuk, but Pikku, the two commanders, and most of the Vikings understood.

“Excellent! Hahaha!”

…

Relieved to hear it was Vinland’s supply ships, the crowd sighed in laughter.

Soon, everyone on shore spotted two massive vessels rounding a sea cape to the west, cutting through the waves as they approached. As they drew nearer, the ships’ banners became visible—depicting horned iron helmets, grey cloaks, and axes. This was the flag Haldor had established after unifying Vinland last year, symbolizing the Grey Cloak Jarl Hrut family and the Viking Raid.

“It’s Vinland’s supply ships!”

“Vinland has arrived!”

Pikku couldn’t contain his excitement. Hausen and the other two white Viking livestock experts quickly joined the crowd at the shore.

Everyone stood silently, waiting. After a while, the two large ships docked, and the sailors threw down ropes. Pikku immediately ordered his men to secure them, and soon, the gangplanks were lowered.

The first to disembark were Hilt, clad in wolf fur, and a tall, familiar figure.

Pikku’s expression changed at the sight of them. A delighted cry escaped his lips, and he dashed forward like an eager dog greeting its master.

Chapter 103: The Success of the Greenland Colony

Pikku was overjoyed to see Olaf’s arrival and quickly rushed forward to greet him, reaching out to steady Olaf as he disembarked.

With reddened eyes, Pikku said, “Master! Why have you come in person?!”

Olaf patted Pikku, who was half a head shorter but a full circle broader than himself. The muscles beneath Pikku’s fur coat felt hard as iron—far stronger than he had been in the summer. Olaf smiled and said, “It seems you’ve had a good year in Greenland!”

“Hahaha!” Pikku laughed heartily, slapping his belly. “Meat every day, and now I even have a woman. Life is good, but I still miss the days of following you in Vinland!”

Olaf chuckled. “Keep up the good work. There will be greater uses for you in the future. I’ve come to see how your colonization efforts are going. Tell me if you’re facing any difficulties, and I’ll help you find a solution.”

“Very well!” Pikku said. “Master, let’s go inside to talk. It’s too cold out here. You should have a cup of warm reindeer milk first to warm up!”

Olaf didn’t respond but instead looked at the hundreds of armed men behind Pikku and frowned. “What’s all this about?”

“Just now, someone reported that a large ship had arrived. I was worried it might be colonists from the Danish Greenland Company, so I gathered the militia and the White Wolf soldiers to drive them away…”

Pikku’s face flushed with embarrassment as he turned to dismiss the crowd.

Olaf and Hilt laughed, and Hilt said, “This time, we’ve brought one hundred thousand pounds of potatoes and sweet potatoes, along with some wheat, corn, and squash. Young Master Olaf has personally brought you some grape wine and potato wine. Why don’t you send someone to unload them?”

Pikku, delighted, turned to give orders to his men before noticing Olaf’s interest in the two White Wolf guards and the leader of the Inuit militia behind him. He introduced them.

After Olaf had exchanged a few encouraging words with them, Pikku led Olaf and Hilt to his longhouse. The other sailors and Vikings who had come with them were arranged in other Inuit-Viking longhouses.

Inside the warm room, Pikku naturally helped Olaf remove his outer coat before shouting loudly in Inuit, “Herman, come quickly and greet the master!”

A beautiful young girl emerged, looking curiously at Olaf. A flicker of fear flashed in her eyes—this was the first time she had seen such a tall, fair-skinned, blond man. Though Pikku had told her about him before, she still felt some trepidation.

“Stop daydreaming! Pour some reindeer milk for the master!” Pikku barked, frowning. Herman snapped out of her daze, hastily bowed, and then brought three cups of milk on a wooden tray to Olaf, Hilt, and Pikku.

The three men sat on stone benches covered with animal furs and took their cups. Olaf glanced at Herman a few more times before smiling and saying, “Pikku, is this your woman? She’s quite pretty!”

“Do you like her, Master? She’s yours!” Pikku stood up and said to Herman, “From now on, you will serve the master in my place…” He spoke first in Icelandic, then, seeing that his wife didn’t understand, repeated it in Inuit.

Olaf had never seen such a bold act of offering a wife before. He quickly grabbed Pikku, his face reddening as he said sternly, “Don’t be ridiculous! Stop it! How could I take your woman?!”

Only when Pikku saw Olaf’s serious expression did he force a smile and wave his hand. “The master doesn’t fancy you. Go cook some meat. Make a few extra dishes today and let the master taste your cooking!”

“Yes.” Herman smoothed her hair and left.

Olaf had intended to scold Pikku, but then he remembered that for primitive tribes living in harsh environments, the civilized world’s notions of propriety and morality didn’t apply. He could only take a sip of the warm reindeer milk.

Hilt was also shocked by the scene. His stutter worsened with his emotional turmoil. “P-Pikku… you must… respect your… your wife…”

Pikku knew that the white men’s Christian faith advocated monogamy and mutual fidelity, so he understood Hilt’s reaction. He didn’t argue but simply nodded in agreement.

Olaf felt the atmosphere was awkward, so he asked, “Pikku, tell me what you’ve accomplished this year. What are your achievements?”

Pikku cleared his throat and then recounted his experiences since arriving in Nuuk in the spring—conquests, establishing camps, hunting, and more—like telling a story.

Pikku wasn’t a skilled orator; he simply recounted his experiences and observations without any rhetorical flourishes. However, because Greenland’s culture and climate were so different from other regions, Olaf and Hilt listened with great interest. They were particularly fascinated by the description of Greenland’s summer midnight sun, which lasted for over two months with almost no darkness. The magical quality of this phenomenon excited Hilt, who declared he had to experience it for himself—it was completely different from Iceland, where even in summer, there were still a few hours of darkness each night.

Olaf had read about the polar day and night in books in his past life and understood the concept. He had even witnessed it in Iceland, but he had never seen the complete polar day and night within the Arctic Circle. He was curious.

Pikku, who had served Olaf closely for over a year, could tell from his expression that Olaf, like Hilt, was interested in the polar day and night. Though Pikku himself disliked the phenomenon, seeing his master’s enthusiasm, he suggested that Olaf spend the winter in Nuuk and return to Vinland by ship the following spring.

Olaf was tempted, but he thought about how everything in Vinland had only just gotten on track. He didn’t have the heart to stay in distant Greenland for several months. Finally, he said regretfully, “Perhaps another time. When things settle down, I’ll come to Greenland specifically to experience the polar day and night.”

Iceland also had polar day and night, but according to Pikku, neither the daily duration nor the length of the polar day and night cycles were as extreme as in Greenland. So Olaf and Hilt were eager to experience it.

By the time Pikku finished his story, over an hour had passed. It was now three in the afternoon, and the sky had darkened. The warm room was lit by dim yellow oil lamps, making everyone drowsy. But Olaf and Hilt, having listened to the tale, were still full of energy.

Olaf was very satisfied with Pikku’s achievements—honestly, they exceeded his expectations.

Previously, Olaf had thought that if Pikku could control the areas around Nuuk and develop a population of two or three thousand, that would be impressive. He hadn’t expected that in less than a year, Pikku would have taken control of the entire west coast and become the leader of over ten thousand Inuit. It was truly beyond his expectations—a pleasant surprise.

Pikku didn’t know whether his master was satisfied with his work, so he asked nervously, “We don’t have enough people, and the resources can’t support too many, so I just made the hundreds of tribes along the west coast submit to us and pay tribute. This way, every year, we have over ten thousand Inuit working for us for free. I’ve calculated that by next spring, we’ll receive twenty to thirty thousand seal skins as tribute. Are you satisfied, Master?”

Chapter 104: Unlocking Greenland’s Potential

Olaf had always intended to turn Greenland into a supply hub for valuable commodities like furs, walrus ivory, whale oil, dried meat, and dried fish. Pikku, whether understanding his master’s intentions or acting on his own initiative, decided to have the Inuit tribes under his rule pay tribute, thereby securing Greenland’s output. Though this meant the Inuit would have to work harder and face greater dangers than before, neither Pikku nor Olaf felt any pity for them. To be precise, Pikku had no capacity for pity, while Olaf simply chose not to dwell on the hardships his people endured to provide him with such abundant goods.

For Olaf and Pikku, this approach was both politically and economically sound, reducing unnecessary expenditures and waste.

If they were to establish a city-state in Greenland and concentrate the population, the current production and living conditions would not support such a large, centralized populace. Moreover, it would disrupt the Inuit’s ability to exploit the vast resources of the land and sea. Only by dispersing and managing their own territories could they achieve the most efficient and valuable form of colonization.

As Nuuk grew more prosperous in the future, supported by Vinland’s abundant food, hemp cloth, handicrafts, iron tools, and weapons, the native Inuit of Greenland would also benefit from advanced hunting and fishing tools, improving their efficiency and quality of life.

Thus, Pikku’s methods earned high praise and approval from Olaf. Delighted, Pikku drank a few extra cups that evening and gave Olaf the warmest bed in the house, assigning Hilt to the east room while he and Herman slept in the side room.

Late at night, the door creaked open. Olaf, already undressed and in bed, assumed it was Pikku and said without looking up, “No need to attend to me. Leave.”

“Master! I’ve come to wash your feet!”

A girl’s voice, speaking broken Icelandic, reached Olaf’s ears, startling him awake. He looked up to see Herman, Pikku’s wife, carrying a basin of hot water.

Olaf’s heart raced as he gazed at the pretty young woman before him. If he were a true Icelandic man, he might not have cared, but his soul would not allow him to enjoy such “foot-washing service.”

“Put the basin down and leave,” Olaf said, fearing Herman wouldn’t understand, so he repeated himself in the Inuit language he had learned from Pikku the previous year.

Herman, after all, was an inexperienced girl. In her eyes, Olaf was the noblest man in the world. Hearing his words, she froze, torn between leaving and fearing Pikku’s anger if she stayed.

Fortunately, Pikku, who had been eavesdropping, rushed in, took the basin from his wife’s hands, and growled, “Get out!”

After Herman left, Pikku forced a smile, placed the basin at Olaf’s feet, and said, “Master, don’t be angry. I just thought Herman’s hands are soft and smooth. Having her attend to you would make you more comfortable. If you don’t like it, I’ll do it myself.”

“Don’t presume to know what I’m thinking! Get out!”

Olaf kicked Pikku in the stomach. Though he held back, the blow was still forceful. Pikku, strong as he was, should have been fine, but he dramatically collapsed onto his backside and begged for mercy, “I was wrong, Master! Don’t be angry!”

Olaf soaked his feet for a moment before lifting them out. Just as he was about to reach for the soft fur used as a towel, Pikku had already grabbed it and began drying Olaf’s feet.

A moment later, Olaf burrowed into the clean, new sealskin blanket, feeling the warmth of the heated bed beneath him. He waved his hand and said, “Go. We’ll talk tomorrow.”

“Rest well, Master. Call me if you need anything,” Pikku said, placing a walrus skull that served as a chamber pot beside the bed.

Olaf was nearly thirteen now. The fuzz on his upper lip had grown thicker, his voice had deepened the previous year, his Adam’s apple was more prominent, and most importantly, he had physically matured. Given the early maturity of Icelandic men, Olaf was now fully capable of impregnating a woman.

Olaf had never given much thought to matters between men and women, but Herman had stirred something in him that night. His mind was a whirlwind of chaotic thoughts, and he tossed and turned in bed until the early hours before finally falling asleep.

The next morning, after washing up, Olaf found that Herman had prepared a breakfast of charred, unappetizing roasted meat. It made his stomach turn. The meat she had boiled with water and salt the night before had been decent, but this morning’s roasted meat was inedible.

At Pikku’s invitation, Olaf took only one bite before excusing himself, claiming a lack of appetite, and drank two cups of reindeer milk instead.

After breakfast, Pikku accompanied Olaf and Hilt on a walk through the Nuuk colony. Olaf wanted to observe the colony’s appearance and the daily lives of the Vikings, White Wolf soldiers, and slaves.

As they walked around, Olaf noticed that most people were leaving in groups, heading to the docks to find canoes and taking fishing spears and nets to go fishing.

Others were boarding ships with bows and arrows and weapons. Upon asking Pikku, Olaf learned that these people were going to hunt muskoxen, reindeer, wolves, foxes, and other animals along the coast.

Fishing and hunting were the daily lives of the Greenlanders. Without them, survival itself would be a problem.

Although Nuuk had begun experimenting with reindeer herding and grazing, it was still in the early stages, and it would take time to develop on a large scale.

After his tour, Olaf clearly recognized that Greenland’s fundamental industry was fishing and hunting. As long as he could continuously supply cheap staple foods like potatoes, sweet potatoes, and corn from Vinland to fill the bellies of the Greenlanders, more than half of the meat and furs they obtained from hunting and fishing could be saved and sold as commodities to Vinland.

During his morning walk, Olaf had warm conversations with many people and witnessed two slaves fighting over a piece of reindeer dung before being severely slapped by the militia captain.

In Greenland, trees were scarce, which meant fuel was hard to come by. Most of the time, the Inuit did not light fires. Their houses were half-buried in the ground for warmth, and their habit of eating raw meat was forced by their environment.

However, this did not mean Greenland had no fuel. Apart from the limited wood, there was another common fuel source: reindeer dung.

Although most Inuit relied on fishing and hunting for survival, larger tribes also had traditions of reindeer herding. Dried reindeer dung was the best fuel.

The one hundred thousand pounds of sweet potatoes, potatoes, corn, and squash had been moved into three new tents made of whale skin the night before, and White Wolf soldiers had been guarding them since yesterday.

Upon discovering this, Olaf instructed Pikku to have people dig cellars to store the potatoes, sweet potatoes, and squash. He also told them how to prepare these foods and the precautions to take, emphasizing that potatoes must never be eaten raw or when sprouted to prevent poisoning.

At noon, when Olaf and Hilt returned to Pikku’s home, they were served boiled squash, roasted sweet potatoes, and roasted potatoes.

Since all three ingredients were delicious on their own, no seasoning was needed, and everyone ate to their heart’s content. Pikku and Herman, in particular, ate as if they had been starved for years, each finishing a whole basin.

Pikku and Herman were tasting sweet potatoes, squash, and potatoes for the first time. The sweet, soft, and sticky texture satisfied both their taste buds and their stomachs. The subtle sweetness was irresistible to the Inuit, who had never tasted sugar in their lives.

Seeing how popular these high-yield, nutritious, and calorie-rich foods were among the Inuit, Olaf decided to increase the supply of food to Greenland. He was determined to ensure that the people of Greenland were well-fed with high-yield crops like potatoes, sweet potatoes, and squash, so that the meat they would otherwise have to consume for survival could be saved and sold.

With potatoes and sweet potatoes in their diet, the Inuit of Greenland would see a change in their meals. The monotonous daily meat consumption would be largely replaced by these staple foods.

If Olaf’s plans to increase the volume and frequency of food shipments came to fruition, Pikku could use sweet potatoes, potatoes, and other foods to trade with the Inuit on both the eastern and western coasts, exchanging them for furs and meat.

As long as trade continued, within a few years, all the Inuit of Greenland would come to depend on Pikku for their supply of potatoes and sweet potatoes, as well as the goods from Vinland.

In the future, Pikku’s control over Greenland might no longer require force and bloodshed. The power to withhold or supply food would be enough to keep every Inuit in line.

Chapter 105: Captain

After staying in Nuuk for three days, Olaf finally had a clear understanding of Greenland’s strengths and weaknesses. He felt even more confident about Greenland’s potential, believing that as long as they could provide enough cheap and high-yield food, they could uncover astonishing wealth.

Three days later, Olaf prepared to return to Vinland. Staying any longer risked being trapped on Greenland by ice and snow.

Pikku mentioned that he had already sent people with potatoes and sweet potatoes to trade with other large tribes. He kept Olaf for one more day. On the fourth day, various fleets returned to Nuuk with a considerable amount of furs and dried meat.

Pikku took out over ten thousand pelts from the warehouse. These were all the tributes collected from the hundreds of large and small tribes Pikku had conquered this year, as well as the pelts from the animals they had hunted and killed. This was essentially the entire harvest.

Even if everything went smoothly every year, the annual harvest would not increase much beyond the ten thousand pelts of this year.

Pikku ordered slaves to load the accumulated dried meat and pelts onto two large ships. To save Olaf the time of inspection, he told him there were five thousand pounds of dried meat and six thousand pounds of dried fish. Now that the food was enough to last two years, Pikku gave all the stored dried meat for winter to Olaf.

Among the ten thousand pelts, seal skins were the most numerous, about five thousand. Sea lion and seal skins numbered over two thousand, while reindeer and muskox hides each had over a thousand. The rest were pelts of Arctic foxes, Arctic hares, Arctic wolves, and other animals. The most precious were the fifteen Arctic bear pelts.

Arctic bears were difficult to hunt, and their snow-white pelts had always been exceptionally valuable. Among European fur merchants, a complete Arctic bear pelt was worth ten times the price of a black bear pelt.

Usually, one Arctic bear pelt could fetch the astronomical price of four hundred pounds!

Olaf looked at them and couldn’t help but click his tongue. Not counting the other pelts, the fifteen Arctic bear pelts alone, when sold, would be enough to buy three armed merchant ships with twelve cannons each. He hadn’t expected Greenland’s fur harvest to rival that of Vinland. His decision to colonize Greenland now seemed brilliantly wise.

The two ships had arrived with full holds of food, and although they weren’t carrying much cargo on their return, the value of what they had was enough to buy hundreds of times more food.

On the fifth morning after arriving in Greenland, Olaf and Hilt bid farewell to Pikku and left. The two ships followed the North Atlantic cold current southward, traveling three times faster than when they had come north. By nightfall, the occasional floating ice on the sea surface was no longer visible, and looking back, the massive ice-covered Greenland was also out of sight. Clearly, they had left Greenland’s waters.

…

Basque City

A bonfire was lit inside the governor’s fortress, heating the room until it was warm. Hudik and Ulf sat in front of the fire, stretching out their hands to warm them while sharing the situation on the Labrador Peninsula.

Ever since Ulf had arrived the day before with food supplies and the order to replace him, Hudik had been explaining to Ulf the methods and precautions for managing the mainland’s natives, as well as the terrain and location of Labrador, the routes to the outposts, and the activity areas of the remaining savages.

Hudik’s nearly half-year of experience had given him a deep understanding of the mainland’s natives. He felt that if he didn’t share everything he knew, Ulf might suffer losses.

“You know the situation at the outpost. Now I remind you that the savages on the mainland are accustomed to forming alliances of two or three to seven or eight tribal groups, then advancing and retreating together. The savages on the west and north sides of Labrador are peripheral small tribes under the large alliance. This is because the environment here is not as good as the southwestern hinterland, meaning the powerful Indian tribal alliances are all in the mainland’s hinterland…”

“I have conquered many tribes on the west side of the Labrador region, but I can clearly feel that the natives here have some understanding of our combat methods and firearms. Plus, the courage of their tribal warriors exceeds that of the Beothuk warriors of Vinland, making the Indian warriors of the mainland even more formidable! I’ve heard that the warriors of the allied large tribes are even more fierce, just like the Iroquois warriors my father and I killed on the Quebec southern plains, fearless of death…”

As Hudik spoke, Ulf listened silently. After a long time, Hudik withdrew his hands from the fire, stood up, and patted his aching left shoulder, sighing, “There’s a bullet in this shoulder. Every winter and rainy day, it aches and swells. These past few days, the pain has been almost unbearable. Your arrival to replace me shows that Haldor hasn’t forgotten me!”

Ulf stretched lazily on the stool and asked, “When do you plan to return to Hrut City?”

Hudik rubbed his arm and said, “Tomorrow. You’ve brought a lot of food this time, and the troops have increased. I know you’re planning to occupy the entire Labrador Peninsula in one go, but it’s impossible before spring. It’s even colder here than in Vinland. If you don’t want people to freeze to death, you’ll have to wait until next spring!”

Ulf had always respected Hudik and humbly learned from him. Hearing Hudik’s advice, he nodded and said, “I’ll launch the campaign next spring when it’s warmer. Before the big freeze, it’s the perfect time to train the soldiers and make preparations!”

Hudik was very satisfied with Ulf’s cautious and steady approach. He smiled and was about to turn to go to his room for a nap.

Ulf suddenly called out to him and asked, “Hudik! As soon as I arrived yesterday, I heard that the new captain replacing Francis in New France has taken office and sent you a letter, demanding that we withdraw from Basque. Is that true?”

Hudik nodded and said, “Four days ago, the new captain named Thiers did indeed send a haughty letter, demanding that we return the illegally occupied land of New France. I threw it away. I think Francis didn’t brief Brother Thiers after returning to the country. This new captain doesn’t understand the situation in the New World and thinks we are weak Icelandic colonists. He also thinks we will fear them. It seems the news of Francis’s defeat by us hasn’t spread… Hmm… But I think in a few days, Mr. Champlain will tell Captain Thiers how ignorant and rude he is! So there’s no need to pay attention to him!”

Ulf nodded and coldly snorted, “If that guy still dares to be insolent after I become the governor of Basque, I will really occupy one or two of their New France outposts and make the crime of illegal occupation a reality. I’d like to see what this arrogant fellow will do then!”

Hudik laughed heartily and said, “Your eagerness to fight is just like Haig. But your father was the same when he was young… Haha… Speaking of which, it’s quite nostalgic…”

Hudik laughed heartily and left the room.

Ulf flicked his fingers above the flames, and the gust of wind blew the flames around, casting an ever-changing light on Ulf’s face.

“Vinland’s current strength is the strongest in the New World. Plymouth in New England is also under Vinland’s control. What gives a New France colony with only four or five hundred French people the right to be arrogant like a rooster in front of us? I can’t stand this insult!

Sooner or later, I will teach these arrogant Frenchmen a lesson!”

After saying this, Ulf suddenly stood up, called his personal guards, and left in large strides.

Chapter 106: Respecting the Powerful Presence in the East

The final shipment of supplies before winter arrived at Quebec City from the Gaspe Peninsula in New France.

Champlain also met the newly appointed Captain Thiers, a lean middle-aged man with eyes full of fighting spirit.

After a brief exchange, Champlain learned that this newly appointed captain was reckless—he had presumptuously sent a letter to the Basque whaling station demanding that Vinland withdraw without the governor’s approval or even understanding the situation. This was truly a despicable blunder!

Champlain was furious, but he only had the authority to appoint or dismiss mid-to-low-ranking officers in New France. He had no power over Captain Thiers and could only use his position as governor to restrain him.

Now that Thiers had acted on his own and offended Haldor, the governor sent by Vinland to the Basque region, Champlain felt it necessary to explain himself to Mr. Hudik.

Champlain first took out his prized self-drawn map of the New World, unfolded it on the table, and pointed to Vinland. “Captain Thiers, you just said that before you came, you studied the situation in the New World. You know that besides New France, there are New England, New Netherlands, and the Icelanders who occupy Vinland. But you don’t know that the Icelanders currently hold Vinland securely! That means all the natives and resources on the island are under their control. Over the past two years, the Icelandic leaders, the Haldor and Haig brothers, have amassed enormous wealth by plundering Vinland’s resources and people!”

“You should know that Vinland is larger than England’s Ireland or even the Kingdom of Portugal. Its climate is similar to Quebec and the northern regions of our French kingdom. The Haldor brothers rule over ten thousand Beothuk slaves, hunting tens of thousands of beaver, otter, and other rare animal pelts each year, along with over a hundred thousand pounds of dried fish. They also possess more than ten ships, most of which are armed merchant vessels equipped with cannons…”

“Frankly, Vinland’s only weakness right now is its small population. In every other aspect, it is nearly as strong as a free state or even a nation. How do you think we should deal with the Icelanders?”

Champlain’s tone grew increasingly stern. Finally, he tapped the table twice with his finger, making a thudding sound, before turning the question to Thiers.

Only now did Thiers realize how much his reckless actions had put the French kingdom at a disadvantage, and his hostility toward the Icelanders in Vinland deepened.

Seeing that the moment was right, Champlain asked Thiers to sit down and then spoke softly, “If your actions lead to conflict or even war between New France and Vinland, it will be a great loss for both of us, and we might even bear the blame. So, I intend to write a letter to the governor of Basque City to explain the situation.”

“Thank you, Governor!” Thiers finally lowered his proud head and bowed to Champlain in gratitude.

Champlain earnestly advised Thiers, “The English colony in Plymouth has also fallen under Vinland’s control. We must be careful in our dealings with Vinland—we cannot become their vassals or puppets, nor can we show hostility or unfriendliness. England is different from France; their navy is very powerful. The English might intervene soon. I think our best course of action is to wait.”

“Then why don’t we help the English? Why don’t we persuade the West India Colonization Company to send armed merchant ships and mercenaries?” Thiers asked.

Champlain scratched his itchy wrist and said, “The English coming won’t benefit us much. I’ve already formed an alliance with Haldor of Vinland, based on mutual respect and cooperation, allowing us to jointly develop the land. The Icelanders are much more reasonable than the English. I think we should just focus on our own affairs.”

“You should cultivate more land on the Gaspe Peninsula next year. I’ve already spoken with Chief Wolf Fang of the Huron tribe, and he will send three hundred Huron warriors next year. You can take a hundred of them to farm, and I’ll send the rest to build a fortress in the southern plains of Quebec. That area is now shared between us and Vinland. The Iroquois tribe that used to harass and attack Quebec City has been wiped out by Haldor and Francis. Next year, send ten sergeants. We need to occupy that plain. In the future, we can cultivate fertile land and have the Huron people grow food for us. This way, the various outposts of New France won’t have to worry about the Icelanders or the English blocking our supplies!”

Champlain finished his speech in one breath and then signaled for Thiers to leave.

Once the room was quiet, Champlain suddenly coughed lightly and cursed, “Stupid fool! Who should I send to deliver the letter? Sigh, it’s a shame Gethin is sick. Otherwise, he could definitely persuade Hudik to forget about Thiers’ foolishness…”

Soon, Champlain’s envoy set off with the letter to Basque City, and Thiers returned to the Gaspe camp, ordering his subordinates to gather all information about Vinland.

…

After Hudik returned to Hrut City by longship, Champlain’s messenger arrived in Basque City and met the new governor of Basque, Ulf.

Ulf read Champlain’s handwritten letter in English, exchanged a few polite words, and sent the messenger away. But as soon as the messenger left, he threw the letter into the fire.

“War isn’t something you can control at will! The Vikings will teach you Frenchmen what respect means with firearms and long spears!”

Ulf muttered, stroking the axe at his side, and let out a cold snort.

In the eyes of Champlain and other Frenchmen, Vinland’s rise was sudden—within two years, it had grown from a weak colonial outpost into the strongest colonial territory. But Haldor, Haig, Hudik, Ulf, and others saw this as a natural progression, even feeling it was a bit slow.

Vinland’s development was much like the growth of bamboo.

Bamboo first spreads its roots underground, accumulating nutrients before sprouting and growing into a sturdy young shoot in just a few days.

Vinland had also relied on the foundation laid by Haig’s seven years of colonization to become a colonial power far surpassing New France and New England in just two years.

In the summer of 1620, Haig, Ulf, three family servants, and over a hundred indentured white slaves landed in Vinland to establish colonial rule.

Initially, Haig landed at Turning Point on the southeastern peninsula, where the climate was warmest and fishing was convenient. Over a hundred people cut down trees to build a camp. Once they had a foothold, they began using firearms, crossbows, and force to capture the Inuit and Beothuk people living on the peninsula as slave labor.

The timing and location of Haig and Ulf’s landing were the most advantageous choices for the weak Icelandic colonists. Decades earlier, French fishing boats had begun landing on the peninsula to dry fish and even capture Beothuk people, leading to several battles.

This made the native tribes on the peninsula reluctant to get involved, and the larger groups had already migrated inland. When Haig and his group landed, there were only over forty tribes on the southeastern peninsula, scattered and disorganized, unable to form an effective resistance. This allowed Haig and his group to gradually encroach and conquer.

Before Haldar and Olaf arrived in Vinland, Haig and Ulf’s seven years of colonization on the southeastern peninsula had turned the entire area into a backyard they could freely enter and exploit.

The reason they hadn’t colonized the natives on a large scale and ruled over them was primarily due to the lack of white people and livestock, as well as insufficient firearms and armor. More importantly, Haig and Ulf had been imitating the colonial methods of New France and New England—building cities first, then colonizing on a small scale, hunting for pelts while trading with the natives, exchanging pelts for goods, and then purchasing supplies, food, and indentured white slaves from Europe.

This cautious colonial approach allowed Haig and Ulf to maintain the independence of Haig’s estate and develop slowly. Although the population growth rate wasn’t high, there were no large-scale losses, and they gained a deep understanding of Vinland. Once they had enough strength, they could sweep away all native forces in one fell swoop.

When Haldar and Olaf brought the entire village to Vinland, the Icelandic colonial strength doubled. The brave and skilled Icelandic men and white slaves, trained by Hudik, quickly developed the basic qualities of soldiers. Every day, they used traps, crossbows, and other tools to hunt wild beasts, and two large ships allowed them to fish and hunt whales.

Although the first year was tough, with many native slaves freezing or starving to death, the Hrut camp, with over five hundred people, successfully integrated. In terms of population, it surpassed New France, and in cohesion and combat power, it far exceeded other colonies. Finally, in the spring of 1628, it unleashed tremendous energy.

Agriculture, war, fishing, commerce…

Starting with cutting off the supply of pelts to New France, under the joint efforts of Haldar, Haig, Ulf, Hudik, Hoskuld, Kadir, Heiner, and others, with Olaf’s support, Hrut City was established. The Icelandic colony developed rapidly in multiple areas under efficient and centralized rule.

Later, with the large increase in slaves and the superior climate and land compared to Iceland, agriculture soared. Long-distance trade with Europe was highly successful and, in turn, supported Hrut City. The various aspects complemented and reinforced each other, leading to another surge in development. In just one year, with advanced firearms and cannons purchased from Europe, the Viking militia swept through Vinland, and Haldar became the ruler of Vinland.

In 1629, with ten thousand slaves and two thousand Vikings, they unleashed enormous productivity. Through hunting and plundering, they amassed mountains of pelts, produced tens of thousands of gallons of maple syrup and wine, and hundreds of thousands of pounds of dried fish and meat. A trip to Europe brought back immense wealth, and in 1629, they began to ferment and brew, ready to unleash even greater potential in the future.

Chapter 107: Or Change the World?

From November of the Western calendar, the temperature in Vinland plummeted once again, followed by sporadic light snowfalls.

Production and interaction between Basque City and Bakens City ceased first, followed by Hrut City and Haldor City, which also gradually halted their activities.

After a heavy snowstorm blanketed the land in December, all of Vinland seemed to pause. The primitive landscape was filled with howling northern winds, and in the dead of night, one could occasionally hear the lonely, desolate howls of wolves.

According to some Beothuk elders, twenty or thirty years ago, winters in Vinland rarely saw snow. Even if there was rain or snow, it wasn’t much, and the warm sea winds from the southern coast kept the southern part of Vinland from freezing.

But now, it was getting colder and colder. Even the Beothuk, who had lived in Vinland for hundreds or thousands of years, could barely endure the winter’s chill.

Olaf sat in the hall of Haldor Castle, wrapped in a blanket made of young wolf pelts, with a crackling fireplace nearby.

Since the temperature had dropped sharply, Olaf rarely went out. Today, Haldor had gone to handle the funeral of a Viking who had died of illness, while Half had gone with the red-haired Tom and others to practice throwing axes. Only Katrin, Olaf, and Gerny remained at home.

Olaf woke up, rubbed the corner of his mouth where drool had gathered, and let out a long sigh.

Every winter, the weak fell ill, and with the slightest carelessness, they could die.

Since arriving in Vinland in 1627, seven Icelanders had died. Ilugi’s father had been killed by a black bear, two had died from infected wounds, and the remaining four had succumbed to various illnesses—two children and two adult men.

More than ten indentured white slaves had died, and seventy or eighty native slaves had perished, with over twenty children among them dying young.

Medical conditions were primitive. Whether it was external injuries or illnesses, treatment was rudimentary, relying mostly on one’s physical resilience.

This morning, Old Galdur had died. It was said that after drinking last night, he had gone outside to relieve himself, slipped, fallen, and frozen to death.

Olaf had wanted to go, but Icelandic customs forbade children from attending funerals, so Haldor had left him at home and gone with Haig.

Old Galdur was only in his early sixties. Apart from some leg pain, he had been in good health. No one had expected him to die so suddenly.

Olaf felt a weight on his heart, but he understood that in this era, life was fragile. A minor illness or a small wound could take a life.

The Icelanders’ diet and living conditions were not conducive to longevity. In Olaf’s family, few ancestors had lived past seventy, and other families were the same.

Though people in Vinland died of illness every year, and children under six or seven often died young, with abundant food, the birth rate was steadily increasing for Icelanders, indentured white slaves, and Beothuk slaves alike. Four or five newborns arrived each month, though only two-thirds survived past their first month.

Olaf had noticed this phenomenon even in Iceland. Unlike the elderly in the Celestial Empire centuries later, who lived to a ripe old age, such people were rarely seen in Iceland.

In White Hazel Forest Hrut Village, with over a hundred people, the oldest had been Old Galdur’s brother, who had died two years ago at seventy-two, making him one of the oldest in the surrounding villages.

From observing just this one village, Olaf had found that while the male-to-female ratio was nearly balanced, fewer than ten people were over fifty, and now only eight remained. If calculated, the average lifespan of Icelanders must be very low.

Conditions in Vinland were even harsher, with higher mortality and infant death rates among the natives, making the average lifespan even lower.

Iceland had few elderly and even fewer disabled. Children with conditions like dementia, idiocy, or polio, who couldn’t care for themselves, rarely survived past three due to various reasons.

Among the native tribes of Vinland, disabled children were often drowned at birth. Though cruel, it was a form of release, as under such primitive conditions, only noble families could afford to care for disabled children.

Old Galdur’s death sent Olaf’s thoughts soaring. After countless reflections, he sighed softly and murmured in Mandarin, “How many rise and fall through the ages… the endless flow of the Yangtze River…”

He picked up the blanket and stood, silently grateful that he had been born into the family of a village chief, with a strong body and good looks, and had never gone hungry or cold.

If he had been reborn into a common or poor family, his fate would have been tragic—perhaps he wouldn’t have even survived to adulthood.

Comparing his current circumstances and experiences to the future, Olaf grew increasingly nostalgic for that era, longing for it.

“Science changes the world. When I gain power, I will establish universities, invite scientists like Newton, Descartes, Pascal, Leibniz, Galileo, and Kepler to cultivate the next generation, advance science, and perhaps accelerate the first Industrial Revolution! Greatly improving living standards!”

Old Galdur’s death had ignited Olaf’s ambition, making his dreams even grander.

At first, after his rebirth, Olaf had only wanted to live well, be healthy, wealthy, and if possible, visit the Far East.

Later, when Haig killed Sigfoss’s son, Olaf had a sudden idea during discussions of escape—his uncle could colonize North America, and when he grew up, he could join in.

At the time, Olaf had only thought of securing a place for his family in North America, perhaps amassing wealth and gaining his own territory.

But as his family’s business in Vinland thrived, Olaf, like his father and brother, grew more ambitious with each success.

Haldor was already planning how to occupy as much land as possible in North America, establish a nation, return to Iceland to drive out the Danish governor, avenge their grievances, and free Iceland from Danish and Norwegian control, allowing Icelanders to govern themselves.

Ulf, being younger, was even more ambitious. He dreamed of conquering all of North America, making their family the rulers of a vast land comparable to Europe, with little concern for the barren Iceland.

Olaf had now solidified his resolve: develop Vinland and other regions in North America under their control, use them as a base and supply hub to counterattack Iceland. They must occupy Iceland to secure a foothold for attacking Europe. The tens of thousands of Icelanders could also serve as the foundation for leading North American natives and white slaves.

As for revenge—killing Sigfoss—if they could invade Iceland, Sigfoss would be no match for them.

After occupying and securing Iceland, the next step would be to ally with the powerful Sweden while Denmark was weak and divide Norway between them, providing support for moving south into the European continent.

Olaf felt he could take bigger steps. After securing the Nordic region, he could send fleets and Viking warriors to help the Ming Dynasty suppress the rebellious Jurchens, allowing him to gain a share in the Far East. Dividing Germany and Poland with France and Sweden were also good options.

Once the resources of North America, Iceland, Northern Europe, and even Central Europe were integrated, they would become one of the most powerful nations in the world. Promoting the Industrial Revolution, liberating thought, advancing science, medicine, and other industries related to people’s livelihoods—if they spared no expense in fostering a research environment, the world’s development would accelerate.

Watching TV or making phone calls was impossible, but if they could rapidly advance technology, perhaps in his later years, he could experience sending telegrams and listening to the radio.

As these thoughts swirled in his mind, Olaf’s eyes gleamed, and his fists clenched tightly, unwilling to let go for a long time.

Chapter 108: The Winter Snow of 1629 (Combined)

The sky was dark and overcast, with snowflakes swirling fiercely in the biting northern wind. The earth, with its rolling hills, was gradually blanketed in white.

Trees, mountains, rivers, and houses all merged into one under the snow. The only sounds in the vast, desolate world were the occasional thud of branches snapping under the weight of the snow and the muffled crunch of ice and snow hitting the ground. It made one long to curl up in a warm room and sleep peacefully.

The second year of the Chongzhen Emperor’s reign was drawing to a close. The Ming Dynasty, riddled with problems, still stood like a paper tiger in the Central Plains, striking fear into the hearts of neighboring nations.

The brutal battle for Beijing, fought by the Later Jin army that had entered through Xifengkou Pass just months ago, remained fresh in the minds of the capital’s residents. The scars of war were everywhere—broken sections of the city walls still awaited repair.

The falling snow slowly covered the wounds left by the artillery on the ancient city. The people of Beijing, caught up in the festive spirit of the approaching New Year, had their fears and anxieties about the war dulled. Their deepest worries about the fate of the Ming Empire were buried even deeper.

Even the most sacred and majestic imperial palace of the Ming Dynasty was covered in ice and snow. Inside, the Chongzhen Emperor set down his brush after reviewing memorials, stretched his sore wrist, and walked to the door, gazing at the vast, snowy landscape and the towering, ancient palaces around him. A dry cough escaped his throat.

“Hah…”

“Your Majesty, it is late at night. You should rest and take care of your health!”

A red-robed eunuch silently approached, stopping five paces behind the emperor, and spoke softly.

The Chongzhen Emperor was only eighteen years old, full of youthful vigor. His eyebrows twitched, and he snapped, “The nation is in peril! The Jurchens dared to attack Beijing—how can I sleep at a time like this?!”

The old eunuch quickly knelt and kowtowed. “This servant is incompetent and cannot share Your Majesty’s burdens!”

The emperor recalled their years of companionship and softened. He knew he shouldn’t take his anger out on others, especially not on his close attendant. But the heat in his chest was unbearable, so he coldly hummed in response.

“Get up, Huachun.”

Cao Huachun rose but did not dare to persuade the stubborn young master further.

After a moment, the emperor suddenly asked, “Has that traitor confessed?”

The sinister tone made Cao Huachun’s heart skip a beat. He knew the emperor’s deep hatred was directed at Yuan Chonghuan, the former Governor of Jili and Liao, and Minister of War. Yuan had been showered with imperial favor yet recklessly killed a general and spouted nonsense. Just this past October, the Jurchens had led an army straight to Beijing, surrounding the city. If not for the soldiers’ loyalty, the consequences would have been unthinkable.

After the defense of the capital, the palace received a secret report from the Eastern Depot: Yuan Chonghuan had conspired with the false emperor of the Later Jin, Huang Taiji, and had long harbored treacherous intentions. Thus, the emperor had Yuan imprisoned and interrogated.

Cao Huachun knew the emperor despised Yuan Chonghuan to the bone. He quickly replied, “This servant interrogated him severely, but Yuan Chonghuan refuses to admit to treason. Instead, he cries out in injustice, claiming he has been falsely accused by treacherous officials!”

Bang!

The emperor kicked over a table, cursing, “Despicable! Did he not secretly negotiate with the Jurchens and kill Mao Wenlong without authorization? Investigate thoroughly! If you cannot uncover his accomplices and crimes, I will hold you responsible!”

“This servant obeys! Your Majesty, please calm your anger!”

Cao Huachun knew the young master was truly furious, so he knelt and accepted the order.

Even after Cao Huachun hurriedly left, the emperor’s angry denunciations of Yuan Chonghuan could still be heard from the hall.

The eunuchs inside and outside the palace trembled in fear. The air seemed to grow colder, as if the wind and snow outside could blow in at any moment.

…

Shengjing, Beyond the Pass

In the palace, the burly Emperor of the Great Jin, Tiancong Khan Huang Taiji, sat in a warm chamber. Beside him was his petite concubine from the Western Palace, Bumbutai—who would later become Empress Dowager Xiaozhuang.

Huang Taiji was thirty-seven this year, while Bumbutai, only sixteen, had been married to him for four years. Last January, she had given birth to a little princess, making her a typical “underage mother.”

Huang Taiji adored this concubine. She was plump and fair, with a face full of fortune. He took his fourth daughter from Bumbutai’s arms and played with her for a while, but the child suddenly cried. Huang Taiji frowned and handed her to a wet nurse standing nearby. “Feed the princess,” he ordered.

After the plump wet nurse took the child away, Bumbutai reached out her delicate white hand and held Huang Taiji’s. Softly, she asked, “Your Majesty, what troubles you?”

What Huang Taiji loved most about Bumbutai was her intelligence and perceptiveness. Hearing her words, he smiled and pulled her into his embrace, saying casually, “The reproduction of the red-coated cannons is proving difficult. To this day, we still have no solution! Hmph, though I used a reverse stratagem to sow discord in the Ming emperor’s camp, causing him to foolishly imprison Yuan Chonghuan—ha! Removing Yuan Chonghuan has made things much easier for us!

But two months ago, when we attacked Beijing, our warriors still suffered from the Ming army’s cannons. If we had a dozen or so cannons of our own, we could have stormed the Forbidden City and captured that little emperor, Chongzhen! Then we could have spent this year’s New Year in the Forbidden City!”

“So, the cannons must be replicated,” Xiaozhuang agreed, knowing the power of artillery, especially in sieges.

The elite Eight Banners soldiers were fierce in battle, capable of fighting ten or even a hundred Ming soldiers. But when it came to sieges, their advantage vanished.

If the Great Jin wanted to enter the pass and replace the Ming, they needed siege cannons. After witnessing how the Ming’s cannons had defeated the wise Khan, his father, Tiancong Khan had begun replicating the red-coated cannons captured from the battlefield.

Bumbutai suddenly remembered the exquisite jewelry from the Central Plains that had recently arrived in the palace. It was said to be a gift from Furongdou, a fur merchant from Shanxi. His family had been supplying the Great Jin with grain, iron, ginseng, and pearls for nearly twenty years, making them a valuable partner.

“Your Majesty, our Eight Banners warriors are not skilled in cannon-making, and the Han people of Liaoning lack the craftsmanship. Why not ask Furongdou from Shanxi to find some skilled blacksmiths…”

“Good! My beloved, I had forgotten about those Shanxi merchants!” Huang Taiji laughed heartily, giving Bumbutai’s bottom a playful slap. “You are truly delightful! I shall rest here tonight!”

…

Louvre Palace, Paris

The tall and thin Cardinal Richelieu, dressed in red, stepped out of an ornate carriage in front of the palace gates and walked through the snow into the royal palace.

Passing through the grand gallery designed by the late king and turning through several halls, Richelieu entered a small room behind the throne hall. A guard stepped forward from the side.

“Prime Minister!”

“Is His Majesty here?” Richelieu’s face was ashen as he demanded sternly.

The guard stammered, “His Majesty is… He ordered that no one should disturb him.”

Richelieu knew his king was with his mistress again. While he worked on internal reforms, suppressed opposition, and actively encouraged Denmark and Sweden to challenge the Habsburgs, the king only indulged in his mistresses, neglecting Queen Anne. As a result, they had yet to produce an heir.

Richelieu was in a foul mood. He had already dealt with one of the king’s male lovers, but now the king had grown even more reckless.

With a cold snort, Richelieu said, “Captain Mahal, inform His Majesty that I await him in the throne room.”

After speaking, Richelieu turned and left resolutely. Captain Mahal, looking troubled, knocked on the door and entered, only to find the king and two women entangled naked, with one woman even riding him and whipping him, emitting strange sounds.

“What is it?!” Louis XIII, in the midst of his pleasure, glared angrily at the captain. Seeing his hesitation, he suddenly understood and said, “Help me dress!”

The two mistresses quickly gathered his clothes and dressed him. Ten minutes later, Louis XIII entered the throne room and saw Richelieu sitting quietly. Smiling, he asked, “Prime Minister, what brings you here?”

“Forgive the interruption, Your Majesty.”

Richelieu wanted to lecture the king but restrained himself, remembering the urgency of the matter. He took a battle report and a letter from his sleeve and said, “Through my mediation, Sweden and Poland ceased hostilities in September. Now, Gustavus Adolphus II has agreed to march south!”

Louis XIII took the report and letter, reading them carefully before saying, “Excellent! I knew nothing was too difficult for the Prime Minister. You wish for me to approve your request for military funding to support Gustavus Adolphus II in tomorrow’s council meeting?”

“Yes, Your Majesty. The amount involved is substantial, and the Queen Mother may object tomorrow.”

Richelieu’s meaning was clear: if it were a small sum, he wouldn’t bother the king, but this required their combined effort to pass in the council.

Louis XIII understood that if the Habsburgs were not suppressed, the German region might unify under the Holy Roman Emperor, threatening France’s position. Supporting the Protestant Union against the Holy Roman Empire was a political necessity.

“Rest assured, Prime Minister.” Louis XIII nodded, picking up the letter. “Tomorrow’s council will proceed as usual, and I will support your request for military funding for Sweden’s involvement.”

…

Frederiksborg Palace, Hillerød, Denmark

Snowflakes danced outside the window as the sky darkened.

Frederiksborg Palace, located one hundred and fifty miles northwest of Copenhagen, was the most luxurious and magnificent royal palace in Denmark. Since King Christian IV ascended the throne, he had spent a fortune renovating it. The Danish royal family now resided in this castle surrounded by lakes on an island.

The usual festive preparations for Christmas were absent this year. The entire palace was shrouded in gloom. Denmark’s financial income this year was the lowest in years, and a proposal to rebuild Jutland, costing one hundred thousand pounds of silver, lay on Christian IV’s desk.

Since the second half of 1626, when Christian IV personally led his army against the Habsburgs, he had suffered consecutive defeats, even being driven back to the Jutland Peninsula.

The subsequent tug-of-war turned Jutland into a wasteland, ravaged by German troops and defeated Danish mercenaries, leaving it desolate.

In May of this year, Denmark signed a truce with the Habsburgs. Christian IV’s ambitions were ultimately buried on the battlefields of the Thirty Years’ War. The nation’s accumulated wealth was exhausted, and Jutland was reduced to ruins by the plundering mercenaries.

Since the second half of the year, calls for agricultural tax reductions had grown louder across Denmark, with Jutland demanding royal subsidies to help the people rebuild their homes.

Christian IV felt like a clown, mocked not only by other kings but also by his own people. Since returning to Copenhagen, he had secluded himself in Frederiksborg Palace. Though many ministers had come to see him and several councils had been held, Christian IV felt their recent glances carried mockery, making his mood particularly foul during Christmas and the New Year.

“I hear France has invited Sweden to join the war, and Gustavus Adolphus II has agreed!”

“Ulf! If I had agreed to Gustavus Adolphus II’s alliance proposal last year to attack the Habsburgs together, could I have maintained my position as the savior of the Protestant nations?!”

Christian IV, dressed in a gold-trimmed wool robe, stood by the window, gazing at the frozen lake in the distance as he spoke.

In the room stood a tall, handsome young man with golden hair and blue eyes—Fitz Ulf, the current head of Denmark’s wealthiest family, Christian IV’s son-in-law, and the cabinet’s financial specialist. Since the king’s return, he had been the most trusted advisor.

Ulf knew his father-in-law was wallowing in self-pity again. The Swedish Lion of the North had always been the king’s destined rival. The king had wanted to lead the Protestant Union into war to elevate Denmark’s status, gain honor, wealth, and land, and thus suppress the rising Swedish king. But fate had other plans.

The Danish king had failed, while Gustavus Adolphus II of Sweden was about to take his place and declare war on Germany. If Sweden succeeded, Denmark’s position in Northern Europe would be untenable.

“Your Majesty! If even you have failed, how can Gustavus Adolphus II defeat the Habsburgs?”

Ulf skillfully consoled Christian IV, who, like a drowning man clutching at straws, nodded repeatedly and said, “Yes, Gustavus Adolphus may have agreed with Poland, but the Habsburg mercenaries are not easy to deal with!”

“But we must also prepare for Gustavus Adolphus II’s potential success! I think you should go to Russia. Tsar Romanov and Patriarch Filaret have always wanted to ally with me to suppress the rising Sweden and assist them in threatening Poland from the sea. I ignored them before, but to prevent any mishaps, we must maintain contact and friendship!”

Christian IV, true to his reputation as a Danish hero, though his mind was in turmoil, still keenly grasped the key to suppressing his neighbor.

“Very well, I will prepare the gifts tomorrow.” Ulf bowed respectfully and slowly retreated.

Christian IV muttered nervously, “We must also secure Britain’s support. In a few days, I will take young Christian to London as a guest and strive for Britain’s financial and diplomatic backing! After all, I am still Charles’s uncle—family should be easier to deal with! The domestic economy is in chaos; we must borrow a sum from England. But first, we need to increase taxes on the Sound and Iceland, or next year we won’t even be able to pay the government employees’ salaries!”

After speaking, Christian IV thought of the petitions from nobles across the country requesting tax reductions and relief, making his scalp tingle and his eyes ache. With a cold snort, he sighed and sat down.

Chapter 109: Bakens City

The bitter winter might be nothing more than a dull season of sleep and feasting for the nobles ensconced in their grand halls. They might grumble about its length, longing for spring’s arrival—when they could host lavish banquets, dances, and salons, or venture out for hunts and picnics, always finding some amusement to while away the time.

For the poor, winter was a different kind of torment. Without enough fuel, they spent most of their days bundled in every scrap of clothing they owned, shivering in their beds, praying for the cold to pass. Only when spring came could they leave their homes to scavenge for food and work.

Vinland’s climate was even harsher than Europe’s, and every year, the weak among the Beothuk perished from cold, hunger, or sickness.

But this winter was different. Whether in Hrut City, the newly built Haldor City, Bakens City, or Basque City across the strait, no one had frozen or starved to death. Thanks to ample food and warm longhouses, the people had endured.

Bakens City held a special significance for every Beothuk. As the traditional seat of the alliance’s leader, it carried weight beyond mere geography.

The early spring sun burned through the mist, casting a glittering light over the snow-covered city.

Governor Blackstone sat in the temple, draped in a coat stitched from over a hundred squirrel pelts. Behind him stood a towering male deity—bearded, wielding a large axe in one hand and a firearm in the other, bearing a striking resemblance to Haldor. This was the new idol of the Heavenly God, commissioned by Blackstone after taking office. It served two purposes: to flatter his master, Haldor, and to consolidate his rule over the scattered tribes of western Vinland and the northern and southern Long Ridge Mountains by reshaping their faith.

Over a year had passed since Blackstone became governor. With the support of ten white slave musketeers and two hundred White Wolf Warriors, he had enacted sweeping reforms in Bakens City.

First, he purged over fifty fanatical adherents of the old faith. Then, he retrained all priests and religious officials, compiling a hymnal that introduced and praised the Heavenly God Haldor. By the following spring, he mandated daily recitations and temple worship—only those who complied were permitted to hunt or forage.

Those who demonstrated devotion to Haldor were swiftly promoted to production team leaders, rewarded with women, dried meat, and other incentives.

Beyond the religious overhaul, Blackstone implemented structural reforms, modeling them after Haldor’s Viking Raid system. He organized the city into small production teams (ten to twenty people), production teams (fifty-plus), and large production teams (over a hundred). Above them were battalion leaders overseeing ten large teams.

The leaders of the small and regular teams were young, devout followers of Haldor, while the large team and battalion leaders were drawn from the White Wolf Warriors.

With the management system in place, Blackstone enforced strict rewards and punishments. Rewards were tied to displays of faith—dried meat, slaves, and the like. Punishments covered a wide range: laziness or insufficient devotion could result in floggings, starvation, enslavement, or even mutilation.

In less than a year, Bakens City had transformed under Blackstone’s iron rule. Nearby tribes submitted, pledging allegiance to the Heavenly God Haldor. By 1629, his influence had spread to the Long Ridge Mountains, where over a hundred tribes bowed to his authority. Bakens City had become a political, military, and economic hub governing thousands.

This spring, Blackstone’s control over Vinland’s tribes surpassed even that of the original Bakens Lake tribe, the former alliance leader. His dominance allowed him to supply Haig and Ulf’s eastern expedition with over two thousand pelts—a monumental contribution to Vinland’s prosperity.

As spring approached, Blackstone, under the guidance of ten white slave musketeers, ordered slaves to clear and cultivate hundreds of acres south of Long Lake. They planted corn, squash, and beans. With fish from the lake, game from the surrounding forests, and stored provisions, Bakens City reaped a bountiful harvest in the autumn.

Blackstone planned to expand the city next spring, relocating some tribes from the Long Ridge Mountains to dilute the original population—a shrewd tactic to maintain control.

Having studied every aspect of Hrut City under Haldor’s rule, Blackstone now had the chance to implement his vision in Bakens City. Seated on a stone bench draped in deer hide, he felt he had become the most successful Beothuk leader in centuries.

Inside the temple, four braziers burned brightly. Besides Blackstone, the room held the Bearfang Battalion Leader, who commanded two hundred White Wolf Warriors, three battalion leaders, and four chiefs from nearby tribes. Behind Blackstone sat ten white slave guards. These nineteen men were the rulers of western Vinland.

“It’s now February, and the weather is warming,” Blackstone said, scanning the room in flawless ancient Norse. “How many in your units and tribes died this winter from cold or sickness?”

This was the first major meeting since winter began—four months had passed since the last gathering in autumn, where they had discussed regional conditions and set quotas for food and pelts.

Blackstone had learned well from Haldor, even adopting his meeting protocols. High-level discussions were far more efficient than leaving decisions to subordinates.

The men rose one by one, responding in perfect ancient Norse—the language of Iceland.

This year, with sufficient food and reduced competition for resources, hunting and foraging had been easier. Bakens City and its surrounding tribes had stockpiled ample supplies—food, timber, pelts—ensuring a comfortable winter.

In a population of six thousand, fewer than a hundred had perished, mostly from illness. Over five hundred babies had been born, with around four hundred surviving.

The numbers spoke for themselves: Bakens City’s population had grown this year, a stark contrast to the decline when Blackstone first took office.

Pleased with his achievements, Blackstone was certain Haldor would be proud.

After discussing the upcoming spring hunt, the atmosphere relaxed. They sipped grape wine, chatting idly.

Then Blackstone remembered the rumors from before winter—Hrut City’s incredible harvest. Olaf had provided sweet potatoes and potatoes for Jot and the others to plant, yielding enough to fill several storehouses. They said the harvest was so abundant they couldn’t finish it even if they ate it every day.

“Potatoes and sweet potatoes are highly productive and delicious,” Blackstone mused. “We’ll begin spring planting next month. I think we should request some seeds from the Heavenly God. What do you think?”

No one dared object. They praised Blackstone’s foresight.

Chuckling, he declared, “Excellent! It’s settled. In five days, we’ll launch the spring hunt. We must kill as many white wolves and wild beasts as possible—to replenish our meat supplies after winter and to provide pelts for this year’s Viking Raid trade with Europe!”

He sighed. “I miss the master. Next month, when the caravan delivers pelts to Hrut City, I’ll lead it myself—and ask for some potatoes and sweet potatoes while I’m there!”

Chapter 110: The Spring Wind of 1630

Clouds yearn for garments, flowers for beauty,

Spring winds brush the railing, dew glistens thick.

If not seen on Jade Mountain’s peak,

Then met beneath the moon on Jade Terrace.

This was a Tang dynasty poem by the immortal poet Li Bai.

One morning in February 1630, Olaf pushed open his window and saw the golden rays of dawn spilling over the distant snow-capped mountains. The shimmering light, the chirping of birds, and the crisp breeze stirring his face instantly brought the poem to mind.

Olaf gazed at the breathtaking natural scenery for a moment, then stretched lazily and said, “1630 is here—the factory can resume operations!”

Stepping out of the castle, he saw many of his family’s slaves busy with chores—chopping firewood, clearing dung, and other tasks.

Upon seeing their young master, the slaves all stopped to bow respectfully, calling out, “Young Master!”

The houses surrounding Haldor Castle were home to the family’s slaves. Haldor had over four hundred, while Ulf and Olaf had more than three hundred. Now, they had all settled down, started families, and were quietly contributing to the prosperity of Hrut City.

Since February, the weather in Hrut City had warmed slightly. Though farming was still impossible, fishing expeditions had resumed last week, alternating every other day. Hunting parties, meanwhile, went out daily, with three teams rotating shifts.

Olaf called over one of his personal slaves and ordered him to notify the factory workers to return to work that day.

After the young slave hurried off, Olaf returned to the warm room to eat the hearty breakfast prepared under Katrin’s guidance by his sister, Gerny—a plate of boiled potatoes sprinkled with black pepper and fried fish, along with a steaming bowl of sheep’s milk.

“Your sister is still young, so I can only teach her simple dishes,” Katrin said, sitting beside Olaf and gesturing for him to try it. “The sheep’s milk has a bit of dried coriander and malt sugar—you should like it!”

Olaf glanced at his sister across the table, her face full of anticipation, and at his younger brother, Half, sitting to his right. Half seemed to love Gerny’s cooking, devouring it eagerly while nodding in approval.

But Olaf couldn’t stand the lingering scent of coriander. He found the sheep’s milk nearly undrinkable.

Yet, seeing his sister’s hopeful expression, he didn’t have the heart to disappoint her. He forced himself to finish it all, then belched and said, “Delicious, though I don’t think coriander in sheep’s milk is a good idea.”

Gerny nodded. “Next time, should I add some pepper and spices?”

“Cough!” Olaf nearly choked, quickly waving his hands. “No, no. I’m done—I have to go to the factory. I won’t be back for lunch.”

Half suddenly jumped up. “Brother, I want to go with you!”

Olaf almost refused, but remembering how cooped up his brother had been at home, he nodded. “Alright. Let’s go.”

The two brothers stepped out of Haldor Castle, their boots crunching on the gravel as they looked around. The city streets, once blanketed in snow, were now clear. Vikings, white slaves, and native slaves bustled about—some carrying water, others chopping wood, but most were airing out bedding and clothes. After a long winter, everything was damp and musty; a good sun-drying would help.

If one ignored the differences in appearance, the scene was much like White Hazel Forest Hrut Village back in Iceland.

Half was now nine years old, standing at four feet nine inches—nearly a meter and a half tall. Though still half a head shorter than Olaf, he towered over the smaller native slaves.

The Hrut family carried the purest Nordic genes, and their descendants were tall. If all went well, Half would likely grow beyond six feet in the future.

Olaf observed how much his brother had changed since coming to Vinland two and a half years ago. Always fearless and quick to fight, Half had little interest in poetry, literature, or mathematics. His grasp of English and Danish was rudimentary at best. Instead, he spent his days training with the Viking and White Wolf soldiers, mastering archery, swordsmanship, and horsemanship. He was a natural athlete—top of his class in physical prowess.

Watching his brother’s strong physique, Olaf suddenly realized a problem: education in Vinland.

Vinland’s agriculture, fishing, and light industries were now running smoothly. Life was stable and orderly. Once coal and iron mines were developed, heavy industry could follow.

But Vinland’s social foundation still had glaring weaknesses—namely, the lack of healthcare and education. These might not be immediate threats, but over time, they could destabilize society.

A civilization with a large population needed doctors to protect health and treat illness.

European medicine, though primitive, had advanced surgical techniques and some effective methods for dealing with infectious diseases. Over the past century, as the Black Death raged, transmission and mortality rates had gradually declined.

Arab physicians and Chinese doctors were even more advanced, using herbal remedies to create medicines for various ailments. Chinese medicine also employed acupuncture, moxibustion, and advanced wellness practices.

Olaf believed that now that Vinland had solved its food problems, the next steps were healthcare and education. He needed to bring in skilled doctors—perhaps from Arabia or even the Celestial Empire. Otherwise, if an epidemic or serious illness struck, Vinland would be in trouble.

Hiring doctors from Arabia or the Celestial Empire would be expensive, but once they arrived, they could train local medical students, gradually developing a healthcare system and even establishing clinics and hospitals.

Olaf already had plans for healthcare—he intended to travel to Europe himself this year to bring back Arab doctors and, through the Dutch East India Company, invite experienced Chinese physicians from the Ming Dynasty.

But the issue of education had only just occurred to him.

The foundation of any civilization was the transmission and development of culture. The Celestial Empire relied on academies, private schools, temples, and Taoist monasteries to preserve and spread knowledge. In Europe, culture was tied to the Church. Priests controlled education, and children in every parish were indoctrinated in theology while learning language and music.

Though late medieval Europe sought to break free from religious control, state-run universities were becoming more common—like the University of Copenhagen in Denmark, and Cambridge and Oxford in England. These institutions taught theology, philosophy, law, medicine, mathematics, and linguistics, producing elites—mostly nobles—for their respective nations. The poor, however, had no means to send their children to university.

From the birth of civilization to the seventeenth century, Europe had no equivalent to the Eastern “scholar, farmer, artisan, merchant” class system. European society was led by nobles—kings, bishops, officials—all from aristocratic families, differing only in power and lineage. The rise of the bourgeoisie would eventually disrupt this millennia-old structure.

Chapter 111: Commencement

Half, now the young master of Raid General Haldor, found himself with nothing to do in Hrut City due to the lack of schools. Even with Heiner serving as a tutor for Haldor’s two young sons, there were only two lessons a week, leaving the rest of the time free. This was not conducive to Haldor’s development and growth.

Hrut City was home to over eight hundred Viking families, all of whom struggled with the education of their children. With a small population and few children, the issue had not yet surfaced, and the demand for Viking children’s education was not strong. However, if left unresolved, it would become a significant problem in the future. Illiteracy would make it impossible to govern a city-state or a nation, let alone manage an army or become a technical expert.

The future of Vinland would eventually be passed into the hands of today’s children, so it was essential to find teachers to impart culture and cultivate talent for Vinland’s children!

Through Half, Olaf contemplated the profound significance of education. He believed that whether in the Celestial Empire or Europe, the development and strengthening of national civilization were crucially dependent on academies (schools). Therefore, Vinland also needed schools. Previously, there were no conditions, but now that Vinland had resolved the issue of hunger, this year they would begin to establish schools. This would not only allow for the indoctrination of the next generation of Vikings and even natives, creating a Viking cultural identity, but also cultivate elite professionals in various industries, enhancing national strength.

The more Olaf watched his younger brother walking and swinging a short axe, the more determined he became—establishing a school was something that needed to be done as soon as possible!

Currently, Vinland had a small population, with only about thirty percent of the white slaves and fifty percent of the Vikings being literate. Their educational levels varied greatly, with some only recognizing a few letters and others having attended church schools for over five years. However, truly well-educated individuals were hard to find, with only about thirty people, and among them, only Heiner had attended university.

These thirty-plus individuals were all responsible for important tasks in various aspects of production and life in Hrut City. At most, they served as tutors in Viking households. Olaf did not think it was a good idea to use them to establish a school. The best approach was similar to finding doctors—searching the European continent for educated individuals to serve as teachers.

This year, they might try to find scholars, scientists, and missionaries in various European countries who were willing to develop in the New World. Bringing these highly educated individuals to Vinland to establish schools was the way to go. However, truly educated people were unlikely to come to the New World, so the most probable solution was still to find church pastors.

As Olaf pondered this and entered the factory, the craftsmen and their apprentices had all arrived, including Mr. Hunter and five other technical personnel specializing in mineral exploration and mining.

After some casual conversation, everyone entered the factory workshop and sat down. Olaf looked at the ample materials in the warehouse and ordered the commencement of work.

The craftsmen, along with their apprentices, began taking materials from the warehouse to produce wooden tools, wooden armor, leather goods, and other items. The porcelain craftsmen lacked sufficient materials for bone china, so they had to start with pottery.

Mr. Hunter looked around in admiration. “Young Master Olaf, I must sincerely express my admiration. Your factory is more complete than any I’ve seen in London. The only shortcomings are the lack of equipment and skilled workers. I think if you had enough workers, you could expand the porcelain kiln workshop and eliminate the stone and wood workshops, focusing entirely on porcelain production. I truly cannot believe you have mastered the secret of porcelain making. Tsk, tsk, it’s astonishing!”

Mr. Hunter looked at Olaf with great surprise, his tone somewhat exaggerated. The five craftsmen beside him also looked astonished, clearly not expecting Olaf’s factory to be capable of producing porcelain, which was a luxury item imported from the Far East!

Olaf gently shook his head. “Sir, you don’t understand. Porcelain production is quite intricate, and other craftsmen find it difficult to master the molding and firing processes. However, you have indeed reminded me. I think in the future, I will reduce the number of workers and apprentices in other workshops. This year, I plan to purchase some textile machines from Europe and attempt to grow cotton and produce cotton fabric.”

“Oh? Cotton fabric? That’s a rare material.” Mr. Hunter smiled and said, “I wish you success with your plans this year, Young Master Olaf.”

“Mr. Hunter, when do you plan to start the mining operations at Longling Mountain?” Olaf asked about the mines in western Vinland.

Hunter and his companions exchanged glances and finally smiled. “General Haldor has ordered us to go next week. We plan to work in pairs. I will be responsible for the copper and gold mines, Edward for the northern iron mines, and Robert for the coal mines. Vinland lacks too much equipment, so we plan to find the weakest areas and have the miners dig directly, using open-pit mining. This way, the daily output will be small, and the quality of the ore cannot be guaranteed. The initial output will be low, and we won’t be able to work on rainy days…”

Olaf nodded understandingly after hearing Hunter’s words. “Every beginning is difficult. As long as we can start mining, it’s good. I believe my father will send enough slaves to mine. Don’t worry about the workers. As for tools, I think you can write a list, and we will send a ship to Europe to purchase them in a while!”

“Young Master Olaf, you don’t seem like a young man of your age. Listening to you speak is like facing a noble boss in London, haha. Don’t worry, we will write a detailed list of supplies before we leave. With enough equipment and tools, I believe the mining output will increase in the second half of this year!”

Hunter subtly flattered Olaf and then patted his chest to guarantee.

Olaf also smiled. “You should say that to my father. But I believe in your abilities.”

As they spoke, slaves and several dozen skilled workers from Aettangr pushed several carts of sweet potatoes that had just been taken out of the cellar into the factory. Half was already surrounding the woodworking craftsmen, studying their work.

Olaf instructed his younger brother a few words and then stood up. “Come, come, I’ll show you the brewing process.”

Saying this, Olaf led the six English craftsmen into the brewing workshop, which was converted from a warehouse. The space inside was large, with various pots, stoves, and utensils.

Under Olaf’s command, the Vikings led the native slaves to start washing the sweet potatoes and then steaming them in pots.

By the time the process was complete, two hours had passed. Although Hunter and his companions did not fully understand, they still felt the high-end atmosphere and praised Olaf’s factory again, discussing the taste of sweet potato wine and potato wine.

Olaf remembered that the sweet potato wine and potato wine that had been cellared for several months since before the New Year should be ready. He instructed someone to open a jar of each, first filtering them, then using the distillation pot bought from Europe last year to process them at high temperatures over a fire. Finally, some wine was drawn from the outlet for Hunter and his companions to taste.

Hunter and his five companions were all middle-class technical personnel in Europe. They had come to Vinland last year purely for the reward of five pounds of silver, which was twice as much as they could earn in England, so they were naturally willing to come.

As well-paid technical personnel, Hunter and his companions had not drunk less alcohol. However, after tasting the sweet potato wine and potato wine, they all gave high praise.

“The sweet potato wine has a sweet taste, but when swallowed, it has a spicy and stimulating kick. After drinking, the body feels warm. I think it tastes better than whiskey.”

“The potato wine has a faint fragrance. The taste is very light, but the aftertaste is fascinating!”

…

Hunter and his companions excitedly drank and discussed. Olaf, curious, also took a sip. He felt that the taste of both wines was different from the baijiu (Chinese liquor) of later generations. Perhaps due to the average distillation technology, the taste was strong, and the alcohol content was much lower than that of later generations’ baijiu, probably around thirty degrees.

“This wine is not bad. It has a higher alcohol content than beer and grape wine, maybe even higher than whiskey. I think many people will love it.”

Putting down the cup, Olaf lightly clicked his tongue and said so.

Chapter 112: The Water of Life

After sampling the potato and sweet potato wines, Olaf had three large jars delivered to the homes of the major chieftains—Jot, Haig, Hudik, Kadir, and Hoskuld—whether they were home or not. Gifts were gifts, after all.

As for his eldest brother, Ulf, who was far away in Basque City, Olaf decided to send a shipful later. There was no need to send anything special to his father, Haldor, since the house already had over a dozen jars of the first batch brewed last year—good wine Olaf had prepared specifically to honor his father.

Olaf also gave each of Hunter’s six men a flask of potato wine. When they asked about the names of the two wines, Olaf recalled the high-proof “water of life” from later eras and casually said, “These two wines may have slight differences in taste, but they’re essentially the same, so both are called the water of life. One is Moon Water, the other is Sun Water.”

After thanking Olaf, Hunter’s men took their leave.

Olaf had a midday meal of boiled sweet potatoes and pickled radishes at the factory before leaving with his brother, Half, who had found the factory’s production process dull. They were heading to the maltose workshop by the river before returning home to rest.

Half, who had initially wanted to leave, perked up at the mention of the maltose workshop. “Olaf, let’s ride there! The waterwheel workshop is too far to walk!”

Olaf knew his brother was just craving sugar again.

Normally, the house received a small jar of sugar each week, but Gerny and Half always managed to finish it within two or three days. Sugar truly had an irresistible pull on children.

If not for the fear of ruining their teeth, Olaf would have given them more.

“Hurry up and get the horses! Quick!”

Olaf and Half walked back home, but before Olaf could say anything, Half loudly ordered a slave to fetch two horses from the stable.

The commotion must have reached Gerny inside the castle, for the little girl rushed out, saying, “Are you going to the maltose workshop? I’m coming too!”

Olaf, already mounted, laughed. “Your nose is sharp!” He patted the horse’s back. “Come on up!”

Though Gerny acted gentle at home, she was still the daughter of the hero Hrut, skilled in swordsmanship and horsemanship. Seeing that Olaf and Half’s horses were rather tall, and remembering the white reindeer she kept in the stable, she turned to a nearby slave and coldly ordered, “Bring my little Xixi over!”

Last year, Olaf had started a trend, and now most Viking households kept one or two sturdy reindeer for their children to ride. By ordinary standards, the strongest reindeer could carry children weighing thirty to fifty pounds for short distances, sometimes even seventy or eighty pounds, though their stamina was limited.

Gerny, slender and petite, looked especially graceful atop her snow-white reindeer, far more elegant than on a horse, though not as fast.

Olaf and Half slowed their pace to match hers, and soon the three of them arrived at the waterwheel workshop.

The Vikings and slaves working there greeted Olaf, who nodded in response. Before he could speak, Half and Gerny leaped from their mounts and dashed inside, each pushing aside a slave stirring a large pot of forming maltose. They pulled out clean wooden spoons from their pockets, scooped up a full spoonful, and began blowing on it before licking it contentedly.

When Olaf entered, he saw Half gulping down the scalding sugar with a hiss, while Gerny squinted, her pink tongue deftly licking the syrup from her spoon.

Noticing the slaves’ panicked expressions, Olaf waved them off. “Get back to work. Half! Gerny! Don’t cause trouble.”

The siblings didn’t dare disobey and, clutching their spoons, sat at a nearby wooden table to finish their sugar.

Olaf ignored them and pulled aside two Viking workers managing the workshop to ask about production.

“Sir, today’s the first day. This morning, the upstream river hadn’t fully thawed, so the water flow was low, and progress was slow. We only managed one pot by noon, which has been stored in jars on the shelf by the wall. The waterwheel should work better this afternoon. The first pot is almost done, and we should finish another before nightfall.”

The maltose workshop was overseen by Vakili, a white slave and production foreman who had worked with Olaf since last year. Though hunchbacked and pigeon-chested, he was sharp-witted and diligent, quickly earning Olaf’s trust.

Olaf looked down at Vakili. “What number child were you in your family? The fourth?”

Vakili shook his head. “My father died before I was born. My mother remarried twice, so I have four sisters, one brother, and five half-brothers. But my mother and stepfather despised my appearance and cast me out when I came of age. That’s why I was willing to come to Vinland.”

Olaf rarely chatted idly with his subordinates—except for Pikku—because he was too young and still an Oarsman, so he tried to maintain an air of authority and mystery.

This was the first time he had heard about Vakili’s family. Though he felt no particular sympathy—misfortune was common in this era—he still said, “Work hard, and I won’t mistreat you. Believe me, your family will regret abandoning you.”

Vakili looked at Olaf with fervor and nodded. “I believe you, Oarsman! Following you, I’ve already married a tall and shapely wife. I know the Icelandic Vikings speak of your miracles, and I know you’re a prophet blessed with wisdom by the Lord. I’m honored to serve at your side!”

Olaf nodded. “Stay loyal, and your future will be even brighter.”

“As you wish!” Vakili bowed deeply. “Vakili will be your loyal hound forever, Oarsman!”

After watching the sugar-making for a while, Half and Gerny grew bored. Their stomachs full of sugar, they begged Olaf to take them hunting.

Olaf thought it was a good idea—early spring was when animals were most active after the harsh winter. “Alright! Let’s go ice fishing at North Lake this afternoon, and we’ll hunt tomorrow. We’ll bring Tom and the others!”

“Best brother ever!” Half cheered, and Gerny hugged Olaf before the two children rode off on a gray horse and a white reindeer toward Hrut City.

Hrut City’s surroundings had been hunted so thoroughly that few animals remained, but Olaf still worried that starving Vinland white wolves or black bears might wander near in early spring. If they harmed his siblings, it would be trouble. He quickly mounted his horse and hurried after them, his hand resting on the firelock musket in his saddlebag.

Chapter 113: Fishing and Hunting

Olaf caught up with Half and Gerny just as they reached the three scattered lakes north of Hrut City. The two had slowed their pace, waiting for their older brother to join them.

Half’s gray horse was still lively, snorting and tossing its head, while Gerny’s white reindeer looked exhausted, its mouth frothing and its sides heaving with labored breaths—clearly worn out from the journey.

“Olaf, let’s have a competition!” Half challenged, looking at his second brother with a smirk.

Olaf knew these lakes were home to trout and salmon, both delicious but difficult to catch. The rivers and lakes of Vinland couldn’t compare to the dense schools of cod, herring, and flounder found in the open waters. But since they were just doing this for fun, the difficulty didn’t matter.

The two brothers each cut a sturdy branch from a lakeside tree, sharpening one end into a spear. This was a traditional fishing method—building a stone weir in shallow waters, draining it slowly to trap the fish, then spearing them in the confined space.

This technique was unknown to the Icelanders and other Europeans. Even the Beothuk of Vinland had learned it from the Inuit, a method passed down for thousands of years.

Olaf and Half weren’t fishing for sustenance—their status meant they didn’t need to labor for food. Like European nobles, they hunted for sport.

Each brother took their wooden spear to the lake’s edge, peering into the gaps between the stones. Spotting a fish, they thrust their spears into the water with a splash. Olaf pulled out a thrashing trout.

Gerny clapped and cheered, then called out, “Half, you’re falling behind!”

Olaf flicked his wrist, sending the fish flying onto the shore at Gerny’s feet. With a stomp of her boot, the fish lay still.

Half was strong and sharp-eyed but impatient. Every time he saw a fish, he stabbed recklessly, scaring them away with the commotion. After an hour, Olaf had speared eight fish, while Half had only managed three—and had slipped, covering himself in mud.

Gerny teased Half, who refused to admit defeat. Olaf laughed and said, “Gather the fish and take them home. The slaves can have fish soup tonight!”

They strung the fish on their spears, hanging them from their saddles before heading back.

By the time they returned, the sky was dark. Olaf tossed the strings of fish to the slaves, and the three pushed open the door to the warm castle.

Haldor and Katrin were sitting on the sofa, drinking and chatting. Seeing Olaf and the others return—Half still caked in mud—they burst into laughter.

“Go change your clothes!” Olaf muttered, and Half quickly dashed to his room.

“What were you up to?” Haldor asked, setting down his cup.

“Father, Olaf took us fishing!” Gerny said excitedly, sitting beside him. “And he said he’ll take me hunting tomorrow!”

Haldor nodded approvingly. “Good. We Vikings are brave and skilled. Now that the weather’s warmer, it’s good for you to get out more. But don’t go too far—there are still white wolves roaming the peninsula.”

After a while, Katrin went to prepare dinner, and Gerny left to change. Olaf, recalling his earlier thoughts, asked his father, “What do you think Vinland lacks most as a free state?”

Haldor, always busy, hesitated before answering. “Compared to Iceland and other nations, I think we lack churches and clergy. With them, we’d have schools and scholars, and people would have a place for weekly worship.”

Olaf knew his father, a prominent landowner in 17th-century Iceland, was being progressive. Churches stabilized society, and their schools spread knowledge.

“I agree,” Olaf said. “We lack churches. Our Viking and indentured white slaves’ children have no way to learn reading or knowledge, which isn’t good for Vinland’s development. I think we should invite some Protestant ministers from Europe this year, even a few educated Puritans from Plymouth, to start a school and teach language.”

“That’s a good idea,” Haldor said after some thought. “I can ask Kadir to send a few educated Puritans or even ministers.”

Olaf understood the importance of education but also recognized its role in shaping ideology. The Middle East was dominated by Islam, and Europe by Catholicism and Christianity, because mosques and churches were central to daily life, controlling children’s education from a young age. How could they not produce devout believers?

Olaf didn’t oppose Christianity. He believed the Protestant Reformation was right—churches shouldn’t control secular power or plunder national wealth. Otherwise, the state would become a mere tool of the church.

Introducing Protestantism to Vinland was something both the Icelanders and the indentured white slaves had longed for. As devout Christians, they wanted sacred churches for worship and education for their children.

Moreover, Protestant churches didn’t conflict with royal authority. Bringing in Puritan or Lutheran ministers would stabilize society and spread education without threatening Haldor’s rule.

But Olaf saw a danger: advanced Christian culture could destroy the primitive beliefs of the Beothuk and other Indian tribes. Normally, that wouldn’t be a problem.

However, Haldor had only recently replaced the Indians’ sky god with himself. In the future, Haldor and his descendants would be the foundation of the Indians’ faith and the ideological basis for ruling them.

If Protestant ministers flooded Vinland, they would inevitably try to convert the Indians, undermining the divine status of Haldor’s lineage.

Olaf shared his concerns, and Haldor grew cautious, rubbing his chin. “Maybe we could choose older, timid ministers and limit their activities?”

Olaf shook his head. “Can we monitor them twenty-four hours a day? I think we should use Protestant ministers, but only one or two who are easy to control. They can run a school with selective teaching and limited worship and preaching.”

In the future, they could look for ministers from Iceland or Norway. Unlike their southern counterparts, northern ministers were more flexible, often blending primitive religious culture with biblical teachings. For example, the image of Santa Claus came from their interpretation of vague biblical descriptions mixed with traditional beliefs. They saw these differences as varying understandings of God.

Olaf believed these ministers could help merge the Indians’ primitive beliefs with Viking and Christian traditions, creating a pan-Viking religion acceptable to both Vikings and slaves.

Chapter 114: The Religious Nation Circle and the Celestial Empire’s Tributary Circle

Olaf’s words had a profound impact on Haldor. Though Haldor had been influenced by Norse paganism since childhood, at heart, he was like all Icelanders—a lamb of the Lord, steadfast in his belief in Christianity and the Bible.

Now, Olaf was advocating for the manipulation of religion, which left Haldor deeply unsettled. His lips trembled as he said, “The Bible is unerringly sacred. How can we merge faiths? Olaf, watch your words. The Lord is everywhere. If we blaspheme, we will be condemned to hell!”

Seeing his once fearless father pale with unease, Olaf realized he could push no further. He also understood the exclusivity of Christianity was a thorny issue. He shrugged and said, “Fine. What I mean is, before our rule is firmly established, the Indian slaves shouldn’t have the right to worship Jesus Christ. They should continue believing in their primitive sky gods and divine bloodlines! If you want to invite priests from Plymouth to establish schools and preach, I have no objections.”

Haldor fully grasped Olaf’s meaning now. He smiled and nodded, saying, “I understand. I will handle this carefully. This year, Ulf is in Basque City, Kadir is in Plymouth. You, Hudik, and Jot should go to Europe. While you’re there, invite some priests from Norway and Iceland.”

“Vinland is destined to become a kingdom. How can it remain a godless wilderness?” Haldor sighed before rising to relieve himself.

Olaf understood his father’s intentions. In this era where faith in Christianity symbolized civilization, and kings required coronation by the Church, Haldor’s ambition to become the King of Vinland—or even the King of the Americas—necessitated the Church’s support and recognition. Whether it was the Catholic Church, the Lutheran Church, or any other sect, as long as a respected elder could preside over the coronation ceremony, Haldor would be acknowledged by God and the civilized world as the rightful ruler of Vinland and beyond. Only then could he engage with European nations—and the world—as an equal.

This unspoken rule existed because European civilization had unified under Christianity. Though they once revered the Pope as their spiritual leader, even after the Reformation, they still upheld Christianity as the state religion. European civilization was, in essence, Christian civilization—a religious nation circle. Those who did not conform to this circle faced exclusion, suppression, or even invasion and annihilation.

Unless, of course, the outsider was a powerhouse that the European Christian circle could not challenge. Unfortunately, Vinland was not such a force. Haldor’s faith compelled him to seek entry into this circle, and Olaf understood this completely. Though Olaf himself did not believe in Christianity, he respected religion and recognized its significance in Europe, comparable to the status of Confucianism in the Celestial Empire—not as a religion per se, but as a system of moral and ethical teachings.

European kings required coronation by the Pope, bishops, or patriarchs to be considered legitimate, much like how petty kings of tributary states in the Celestial Empire’s circle needed imperial decrees to be recognized as legitimate rulers.

At its core, this was about cultural identity and the propagation of universal values. The Celestial Empire’s culture was superior and powerful. Nations that did not want to lag behind or face subjugation—and those that aspired to civilization—sought to join this circle. Some even aimed to surpass it after learning and growing stronger, like a cultivator seizing another’s body.

The European religious nation circle operated similarly. The key difference was that Europe had not achieved unification. Within the circle, nations vied for dominance, united only by their religious and cultural identity but lacking an overwhelming religious theocracy. Otherwise, the tributary relationships might have been far more oppressive than those of the Celestial Empire.

Olaf had intended to discuss finding doctors, but Haldor’s reaction stirred a whirlwind of thoughts in his mind.

Leaning back in his chair, Olaf pondered how to best utilize the numerous Native American tribes in North America. He concluded that Christianity must not be imposed on them. Instead, the Hrut family should be mythologized, creating a divine bloodline akin to Japan’s imperial family. Only then could a small ruling class effectively govern the ignorant masses.

Olaf believed that while the Viking Raid absorbed members and fused collective consciousness to stabilize the ruling group, they should also adopt the Japanese emperor’s method of mythologizing their lineage. This would provide the most legitimate claim to rule over the Native Americans.

Vikings represented civilization and nobility. The predominantly white Vikings were all converts to Christianity. Olaf knew that neither he nor his father could challenge Christianity’s place in the hearts of white people. Thus, establishing churches in Vinland was inevitable.

However, once churches were built and priests began preaching, the Native Americans would be influenced. If too many converted to Christianity, the divine authority of the Hrut family would crumble.

Therefore, Olaf believed that religious propagation in Vinland must be restricted and regulated. In the future, it might even be necessary to establish a religious bureau for oversight.

Religion must serve as a tool of politics, not its master. Otherwise, it would be detrimental to the nation, the people, and the rulers.

Olaf was not a Christian. Strictly speaking, he was an atheist. His considerations regarding religion were purely about how it could benefit his family’s rule and the expansion of the Viking Raid’s power.

After contemplating the regulation of Christian activities in Vinland, Olaf thought of an even better, permanent solution: the fusion of Christianity, Native American sky god worship, and Norse mythology, as he had discussed with his father, Haldor. This would create a culturally and religiously grounded Viking ethnicity, a viable religious culture that wore the skin of Christianity but was infused with Norse mythology and primitive sky god worship. Such a blend would be easy to control and would not invite hostility from the European Christian circle.

However, Olaf knew he could not accomplish this alone. He needed experts with profound knowledge of Norse mythology and deep insights into Christianity. Otherwise, a misstep could result in a monstrosity that not only failed but also branded him a blasphemer and a global enemy.

Religion was a serious matter. Judaism had split into Catholicism due to differing cultural interpretations and insights, turning the two into bitter enemies. By the Tang Dynasty in China, it had further divided into Islam, leading to even more conflict.

In recent centuries, Catholicism had branched into Eastern Orthodoxy and Protestant sects, causing internal strife within Christianity, Catholicism, and Eastern Orthodoxy, even sparking wars like the Thirty Years’ War.

The numerous sects born from Judaism had shaped the world’s geopolitical landscape up to the twenty-first century, all due to religion’s exclusivity and uniqueness.

The Celestial Empire’s religion, skilled in assimilation, had avoided religious wars and persecution, placing it thousands of years ahead in thought.

Olaf’s planned religious reform aimed to use Christianity as a foundation, integrating elements of Norse mythology and Native American worship to create a new Christian sect that would not provoke excessive hostility from mainstream Christianity while aiding the Hrut family’s rule.

At present, Catholicism and Christianity were not the benign symbols they would become in later centuries. They still wielded significant influence and power. While it was an exaggeration to say they could make or break nations with a single word, they came close. Decades later, wasn’t Charles I beheaded by the Puritans?

Of course, if Christianity had already become the malleable entity of later centuries, easily twisted into heretical cults, Olaf and his father would not have taken it seriously. They might have even dared to abolish Christianity in Vinland, reviving Norse paganism, and ordering their subjects to worship Odin and Thor, thereby restoring the Viking spirit that had been dulled.

Chapter 115: Preparations Before the Vikings Set Out

Ever since Olaf and Haldor had discussed education and the church, father and son had rarely broached the subject again.

Haldor had been steeped in civilized society from a young age and was a devout Christian, though perhaps not as fervent as those in the southern nations. Still, his heart belonged solely to the one true God, Jehovah. The gods of his ancestors—like Odin—were nothing more than relics of a bygone era, their twilight long past. The only remnants of the old ways that remained among the Icelanders were ancestor worship and a belief in spirits.

A decade ago, Olaf had shown signs of something extraordinary, leading Haldor to believe his second son was a manifestation of their ancestors, a prophet sent by God. Thus, Haldor had always treated Olaf with great respect and affection, readily accepting and absorbing the insights Olaf shared.

At first, Haldor had thought that under the guidance of this prophet and through his own efforts, he might become a legendary hero, and his son Olaf might rise to the stature of a saint like Moses—or at the very least, a figure like Saint Paul.

But after hearing Olaf’s words, Haldor lay awake all night. After much contemplation, he realized his son might aspire to be something even greater—perhaps another Jesus. Though Haldor trusted and loved Olaf deeply, matters of faith and the soul were not to be taken lightly. He decided to proceed with caution, taking things one step at a time.

The first step was to recruit a few learned and upright priests or Puritans from Plymouth to establish a church and a church school in the inner city of Hrut City. This would address the need for worship among the white settlers and provide education for the children.

As for the future—whether Olaf would follow in the footsteps of Martin Luther and reform Christianity, or even integrate elements of the old Norse religion—Haldor felt that was beyond his concern. If Olaf had the ability, Haldor would support him silently. That, in itself, would be his greatest contribution.

By February 1630, Hrut City had awoken from its winter slumber. The city of over ten thousand people buzzed with astonishing efficiency.

Each day, under the leadership of the Aettangr Oarsman, Vikings, slaves, and indentured white slaves labored according to Heiner’s instructions.

The White Wolf soldiers and Viking warriors formed twelve hunting parties, leading some slave warriors to hunt across eastern Vinland. Eighteen Aettangr groups took turns sending ten of their members daily, along with indentured white slaves and native slaves, to fish. The remaining eight Aettangr groups began leading their private slaves and white slaves to clear land—land that would later be designated as communal fields for the Viking Raid, to be cultivated and managed by indentured white slaves.

As agreed upon at the start of the year, the Vikings now enjoyed greater rights. Their private property was protected and respected, but they also had to fulfill their duties—corvée labor, taxes, and military service.

From now on, each Viking household was required to work one day a week without pay. The rest of the time, they were free to hunt, farm, or pursue their own affairs. Additionally, every able-bodied Viking man between the ages of sixteen and fifty was obligated to serve in the Viking forces, training once a week. This was an undeniable duty.

Though the workload for the Vikings in Vinland had decreased, the city’s two thousand two hundred Vikings—nearly two thousand of them adults—were not the primary labor force. Most of the work was carried out by the White Wolf soldiers, indentured white slaves, slave warriors, and ordinary slaves. Thus, the hunting and fishing parties returned with bountiful hauls each day.

In their free time, the Vikings often went out in groups to fish or hunt. A portion of their spoils was given to the Viking Raid, but even so, their lives were far easier than under the governor’s exploitation in Iceland. The city’s leaders could see that, starting this spring, the Vikings were growing wealthier.

Life under Haldor’s rule was improving, and the Vikings’ enthusiasm soared. The indentured white slaves, too, vied to prove themselves, hoping to shorten their contracts and become Vikings.

Olaf spent his days moving between the malt sugar workshop and the various factories—breweries, porcelain kilns, and other workshops. While overseeing production, he also learned much. Though he had initially only known the general processes, the daily operations revealed new challenges, which his workers solved through skill and collective ingenuity.

With the Vikings’ rights now secured, Olaf could no longer exploit the two Aettangr groups under him as freely as before. Thus, the Viking workers in his brewery and sugar workshop now earned ten copper coins a day.

Olaf had introduced employment contracts in his factory and sugar workshop. Each Viking worker received wages based on their role, working six days a week with Sundays off. Among the slave apprentices, those belonging to artisan masters could earn one to five copper coins, though the income ultimately went to their Viking owners.

Since February, Olaf’s factory and sugar workshop had been spending over a hundred and forty copper coins a day—nearly a shilling’s worth.

But Olaf had ample personal reserves: thousands of pounds of dried meat, potatoes, sweet potatoes, and several thousand gold marks in coins. For now, he could easily afford the wages.

He could have asked his father, Haldor, to cover the workers’ pay, but Olaf wanted to amass greater wealth through his factory and its products. So, he had struck a deal with Haldor—a contract system where he would fund the factory entirely himself, and the profits from sales would be split evenly between them.

In truth, Olaf stood to gain more than half the profits. Since no one oversaw his expenditures on wages and materials, he could claim whatever costs he wished.

By March, Olaf had taken to calculating his expenses on paper. The carpenters, stonemasons, and pen-makers consumed the least materials and were the cheapest to maintain, so their profits were low. They were essentially producing at a loss for personal use. Thus, apprentices in these trades were dwindling. Only the carpenters, who could craft furniture, had managed to train two slave apprentices to mastery. The stonemasons and pen-makers, meanwhile, had little to do.

The tanners, responsible for producing leather boots and clothing, were always busy. On average, they produced seven or eight pairs of shoes, hats, or garments each week. Based on last year’s sales, this was enough to meet the demands of Hrut City’s Vikings and the surrounding colonies, making it a modestly profitable venture. But for Vinland, the real purpose of this business was strategic—to gradually infiltrate the native populations through trade, which would prove invaluable in the future.

For instance, gathering intelligence, sowing discord, hiring enforcers…

The porcelain workshop in Olaf’s factory was also operating at a loss. Each month, Olaf sent slaves to collect mineral-rich soil and gather bones—mostly from fish and meat drying. After boiling the bones into broth for his slaves to drink, he would dry and grind them into bone powder, free of fat, suitable for porcelain production.

Though the porcelain workers earned ten copper coins a day, Olaf was confident that once his bone porcelain reached Europe this spring, it would bring him a hundredfold, even a thousandfold return!

The sugar and brewery workshops were also running at a deficit, but Olaf remained optimistic. He knew these products were luxuries for Europe’s wealthy—necessities for nobles who lacked fine cuisine and entertainment. The sweet “Eastern Malt Sugar” and the crisp, refreshing “Water of Life,” which surpassed whiskey in quality, were sure to be in high demand.

As Olaf reviewed the daily wage expenditures and the growing inventory of goods, a satisfied smile spread across his face.

Spending a shilling a day on wages and materials to produce bone porcelain, malt sugar, and spirits—three high-end commodities with exorbitant prices in Europe—was more profitable than plundering!

Chapter 116: Planning the Vinland Livestock Farm

With the increased efficiency of the sugar and alcohol factories, the daily production of sweet potato and potato pulp from sugar production, along with the filtered dregs from the finished alcohol, amounted to hundreds of pounds. Initially, Olaf had the workers take the sugar production residue home to feed their native slaves and livestock.

However, as the filtered dregs from the finished alcohol increased, the combined amount became too much for the Viking workers to consume at home. After all, this stuff wasn’t very palatable, and the slaves couldn’t eat too much of it.

Seeing the growing piles of alcohol dregs and sweet potato pulp in the warehouses and sugar factories, Olaf recalled his earlier idea—establishing a large-scale livestock farm.

Agriculture, the fundamental industry for human survival and development, in its narrow sense, refers to crop farming and animal husbandry. Currently, Vinland’s crop farming had seen tremendous development, fundamentally relying on manure and high-yield crops like corn, squash, sweet potatoes, and potatoes. However, animal husbandry was still in its primitive state.

At present, only Hrut City had a rudimentary form of animal husbandry. Bakens City still followed the Beothuk people’s fishing, hunting, and gathering lifestyle, with no development in animal husbandry. Haldor City, being newly established with a small population, also had no development in this area.

After considering all options, apart from the Viking family animal husbandry in Hrut City, only Greenland was engaged in reindeer farming.

Previously, animal husbandry couldn’t develop efficiently due to a lack of feed and management. Now that feed was abundant, Olaf felt it was entirely possible to utilize Viking women and private slaves in Hrut City to establish a large-scale livestock farm. He planned to adopt a labor-based shareholding system where each family would send two to three people to manage, feed, and collect feed.

The current era was different from Olaf’s previous life. In this era, labor was excessively exploited. Ordinary families’ women had to do farm work, housework, make clothes, sew, and take care of children, leaving them with almost no free time.

Now, in Vinland’s Viking families, since each family had at least two or three private slaves, the most tedious and laborious tasks like housework and farm work had liberated the household heads and women. Men typically participated in two days of collective labor and military training per week, and the rest of the time, they would engage in fishing and hunting to accumulate wealth for their families. Women’s lives had become much easier.

Olaf now wanted to establish a livestock farm, and the labor force could be the idle Viking women. Since the Vikings, mainly Icelanders and white slaves, were originally farmers and herders in Europe, they had seen or even raised poultry and livestock, and most understood the characteristics of livestock and poultry. Vikings managing the livestock farm would be much better than the Beothuk or Inuit people who didn’t understand animal husbandry.

Olaf had over a hundred private slaves under him. Like other Vikings, the slaves, led by the production team leaders, engaged in daily activities like gathering, fishing, and chopping wood. Even strong women had to do these jobs to accumulate resources like dried meat, dried fish, pelts, and firewood for their masters.

The Beothuk and Inuit people were most skilled in hunting, fishing, and gathering edible nuts and berries. So, apart from having the slaves collect timber, stone, and do engineering work for Hrut City, most of the time, the Viking masters had the slaves gather resources and wealth for themselves.

Initially, Olaf wanted to establish a livestock farm using his private slaves for feeding and management. However, he realized that concentrated animal farming could increase the risk of livestock diseases. Moreover, breeding, management, and disease prevention required experienced Vikings skilled in animal husbandry. To make the livestock farm successful, Olaf felt he had to involve the Vikings.

The success or failure of animal husbandry depended entirely on the responsibility and skills of the feeding and management personnel. Carelessness could lead to deaths from disease, freezing, low conception rates, difficult births, and high mortality rates.

To reduce losses, increase breeding rates, and lower mortality rates, Olaf felt he had to make the Vikings involved in feeding and management shareholders of the livestock farm. This way, every surviving animal and every additional cow, horse, pig, or sheep would mean a share for them, ensuring they would care for the animals as if they were their own children.

Olaf had thought out the basic plan for establishing the livestock farm and chuckled, saying, “Am I taking the path of common prosperity?”

Muttering to himself, Olaf went to find Heiner. He searched from the council hall to the military fortress and finally, after inquiring, rode home to a farmstead in the west of the city managing five hundred acres of farmland, where he found Heiner.

At this moment, Heiner was wearing a black bear pelt coat, with the white collar of his undershirt peeking through the front gap. He was inspecting the spring plowing work around the farmstead.

Today was Wednesday, and the spring plowing in Hrut City had been in full swing since Monday.

Vikings led their private slaves in plowing their own land, while white slaves led native slaves in plowing the Haldor family’s land and collective land.

To ensure a high yield this year, deep plowing was necessary before planting to bring the nutrient-rich soil from the deeper layers to the surface. This would make the soil softer, beneficial for seed germination and rooting, allowing sweet potatoes, potatoes, and other crops to be more productive. This knowledge came from the draft of the agricultural book.

This year, the Vikings planned to plant sweet potatoes and potatoes on eighty percent of their land, with the remaining twenty percent for corn, squash, beans, and vegetables. Few people were planting the traditional crops of wheat, rye, barley, and oats.

For the collective land and the Haldar family’s farmland, according to Haldar’s plan, half of the land would be used for potatoes and sweet potatoes, and the other half for the “three sisters” (corn, beans, and squash) and wheat and vegetables.

Poor people might only pursue high yields to ensure they don’t go hungry, but Haldar, as the Viking Raid General and the lord of Vinland, had to ensure his family could eat black bread and flour. This wasn’t just about the richness of the diet and eating habits, but more about representing his dignity.

Influenced by Haldar, the leadership in Hrut City, from the Oarsmen and above, would also set aside a small portion of their land for rye and oats to be able to eat bread and flour. It seemed that, invisibly, black bread and flour had become a kind of food representing the dignity and status of the Vikings, much like how in ancient times, nobles ate fine grains and commoners ate coarse grains, using the yield of food to express value and consuming precious food to display status.

Almost all the developable land around Hrut City had been developed, with an area of nearly six thousand acres. In two more months, another thousand acres could be developed, and then the cultivable land in the southern part of the southeastern peninsula that Hrut City could radiate would be almost fully developed.

In the future, to increase cultivable land, they would have to start from the northern part of the peninsula, near Haldar City. In a few years, Jot and Hoskuld also planned to reclaim one or two thousand acres of wasteland in the southwest of Haldar City, temporarily planting corn, black beans, sweet potatoes, and potatoes.

So, starting from February, Haldar City had been bustling with activity. Every day, they led dozens of white slave militia and three thousand native slaves to cut down trees and bushes outside the city, burn grass to clear land, and finally plow the fields.

Chapter 117: Resources and Livestock Farm Location

Haldor and Heiner had planned for the long-term development of Vinland during the winter of 1629. Once Bakens City in the west stabilized, they could mobilize the population to establish several settlements in southern Vinland, build city-states, and cultivate the wilderness.

According to Haldor and the others’ final plan, Vinland would have fifty to sixty thousand acres of arable land in five to ten years, and in a few decades, it could develop up to one hundred to two hundred thousand acres.

In reality, based on land area and topography, Vinland could develop about one-tenth of its total area into arable land. However, excluding the necessary forest reserves and the excessively cold northern regions, only the land east of Longling Mountain in the south could be utilized for agricultural cultivation, amounting to less than three percent of the total area.

Iceland, after several hundred years of development by thousands of families and tens of thousands of people, had only developed over two hundred thousand acres of land, and almost all developable land had been utilized.

Several hundred years ago, their ancestor Hrut controlled over ten thousand acres of arable land and ten thousand acres of forest, becoming one of the richest and most powerful family leaders in Iceland, holding a seat as a major member of the Icelandic Parliament. Before its decline, the Hrut family had controlled one-twentieth of Iceland’s arable land and forest resources, making it a top-tier powerhouse.

Even as a top-tier powerhouse, the Hrut family only had over ten thousand acres of arable land, which paled in comparison to the three to four thousand acres owned by any large landowner in Ireland.

Heiner’s brother-in-law, Rory O’More, the leader of the O’More family in northern Ireland, owned one hundred thousand acres of arable land and two hundred thousand acres of forest, yet he was not the largest landowner in Ireland.

Often, the size of land area does not determine national strength, but the amount of arable land does. France and Germany had over thirty percent of their land as arable, making them the most populous regions in Europe and long-term strongholds of continental power.

Even the island nation of Britain had over fifteen percent of its land as arable, allowing it to support enough population for colonization and conquest, eventually occupying the South Asian subcontinent, which had one-fifth of the world’s arable land and population, and rising to become the British Empire where the sun never set, advancing to the top tier of global powers.

From population, arable land resources, and other aspects, Iceland was indeed a poor and backward region, with no capital to compete with any country. The environment shaped the Icelandic people’s character and lifestyle, keeping them closest to their ancestors, accustomed to a business model combining agriculture, maritime trade, and piracy.

Due to the scarcity of arable land, Iceland’s agriculture was primarily pastoral, with cultivation as a secondary activity. Limited resources had led to extremely slow population growth over the centuries.

Once fully developed, Vinland’s arable land resources would be more than three times that of Iceland, and its forest resources would be over six times greater. Currently, nearly ten thousand Beothuk people were scattered across the western and northern regions, and they would eventually be assimilated. With these resource foundations, Haldor and the others believed that given time, developing Vinland to surpass Iceland would not be difficult.

In fact, apart from population, Vinland’s resources were indeed much better than Iceland’s.

Olaf dismounted in front of the fortress. Heiner, who had started growing a mustache, beckoned him over. Once Olaf was seated, two indentured white slaves by Heiner’s side took out a warmed, watered-down wine jug from a nearby wooden cabinet and poured two bowls for Heiner and Olaf.

This wooden cabinet was a portable storage tool made by a carpenter, with insulation properties, capable of carrying books, drinks, and dry rations. It was a convenient treasure chest for travel, though it could only be carried by hand or on a cart, making it unaffordable and impractical for most people except Viking nobles with private slaves.

Heiner, as a traditional Scottish nobleman, had not abandoned his noble demeanor. He took a sip of the warm wine and asked, “Olaf, what brings you here?”

“You are the civil affairs official appointed by my father, General Haldor. How could I not consult Lord Williams about doing something?” Olaf replied with a smile.

Since Olaf wanted to establish a livestock farm as a private business venture, he did not plan to seek his father’s help but instead asked Heiner, who was more knowledgeable about the details, for assistance.

Heiner knew Olaf had come for a serious matter, so he chuckled and asked, “What is it?”

Olaf then shared his idea of starting a livestock farm. After thinking for a moment, Heiner asked, “Where will you find feed?”

“Currently, the brewery produces two hundred pounds of distiller’s grains daily, and the sugar factory produces three hundred pounds of potato residue. If that’s not enough, we can send people to cut grass. The young branches and leaves from tree cutting can also be used as feed.”

“Where will you find livestock handlers? Who will manage it? Hrut City currently has no idle people, and the native slaves don’t know how to feed and manage livestock…”

“Viking families all have private slaves, and most of the wives are from Iceland, Ireland, or Scotland. They can handle feeding and management.”

“Where will you purchase the livestock and poultry for the farm?”

“My family, uncle’s family, and Jot’s family all have cattle, horses, and sheep, though pigs are fewer. However, they will multiply over time. As for chickens, ducks, and geese, each family has plenty, and we can buy some more.”

…

Heiner’s series of questions were answered by Olaf without hesitation. Heiner nodded and said, “What you say makes sense. I think this can be done.”

“What do you want me to help you with?”

Olaf pointed towards Hrut City and said, “I want to build the livestock farm on the southwestern hillside of the outer city. Can you take a look and see if it’s feasible? If it is, I’ll need some wood and stone. Don’t worry, I can pay for them.”

Hrut City covered an area of five to six hundred acres, divided into an inner city and an outer city.

The inner city housed Haldor’s fortress, military stronghold, council hall, and the residences of the Vikings and their slaves, covering less than one hundred acres. It had basic city walls, moats, and gates. The outer city was home to some White Wolf soldiers and slaves, as well as Olaf’s factory.

Overall, over ninety percent of the population lived in the inner city, while the outer city was mainly used for defense, housing White Wolf soldiers and a small number of armed slaves.

The southwestern hillside of the outer city that Olaf mentioned was a gentle slope with a considerable area, reaching a height of only four to five people. Both sides were covered with trees and shrubs, and a few thousand steps to the west was a river flowing south. The environment was decent, and building a livestock farm there would not have to worry about waterlogging from rain or snow. Additionally, it was upwind, so the odor of manure could be blown to the southeast, preventing it from lingering in the pens and forming toxic gases.

Heiner smiled slightly, understanding Olaf’s intentions, and said, “Some wood and stone are not expensive. I can authorize it for you, and I believe General Haldor won’t mind when he finds out. However, I can’t help you build the livestock farm. We are currently in the middle of spring plowing, which won’t end until April, so I’m sorry.”

Olaf had not intended to have Heiner send people to build the livestock farm for him. He only wanted the materials and hoped Heiner would speak to the five hundred Viking households in the city to see how many would be willing to invest. They could contribute labor with livestock management skills or invest with their own livestock and poultry.

Chapter 118: Vikings Lead the World in Per Capita GDP

Heiner listened to Olaf’s idea with a spark of interest but was deeply confused. He furrowed his brow and asked, “I can help you promote it, but how do you plan to divide the shares? How do you calculate human labor as investment? And how do you value livestock?”

Olaf had already thought this through. He smiled and said, “I plan to issue one thousand shares. Investing one Viking laborer grants ten shares, and they must work five days a week—feeding, managing, or preparing feed. Essentially, it’s labor as investment, with meals provided daily. At year’s end, profits will be distributed based on performance.

For livestock, one cow or horse is worth five to ten shares depending on value, one sheep is one share, and chickens, ducks, and geese are equivalent in value to sheep for one share.”

“Once all one thousand shares are issued, they will all be in the hands of the Vikings. At year’s end, profits will be distributed based on performance. If we gain ten cows, after deducting two or three for operational costs, the remaining seven will be divided among all shareholders. For example, if seven cows weigh over eight thousand pounds, one share would get seven or eight pounds of beef, ten shares would get seventy to eighty pounds, and the same applies to horses, sheep, chickens, ducks, and geese—all distributed proportionally.”

Heiner’s eyes lit up. “What if we don’t slaughter the livestock? How do we distribute then?”

“Profits will be distributed based on estimated value. For example, if a cow is worth about four pounds of silver, the seven cows would be valued at around thirty pounds of silver. One share would get over twenty copper coins. If a Viking invests one laborer or two cows, they would get three hundred copper coins, worth half a silver mark.”

Hearing Olaf’s grand promises, Heiner, who was encountering illegal financing for the first time, didn’t grasp the risks of failure where everyone’s investment would vanish. Instead, he admired the idea. “Sounds pretty good!”

Of course, even the shrewdest people can be blinded by familiarity. Heiner didn’t want to dwell on the risks of Olaf’s livestock farm. After all, every venture has risks, and as long as the basic conditions are met, it’s worth a try.

After discussing with Heiner, Olaf rode his horse leisurely to the factory. Along the way, he saw many of Haldor’s private slaves scattered across the island, searching for maple trees to collect sap.

Since last year, Haldor had decreed that all maple trees on Vinland belonged to the Viking Raid. No one was allowed to cut them down or collect sap without permission. However, after the spring maple syrup production, a portion would be distributed to the Vikings.

No one objected to Haldor’s decision. After all, Royal Jelly was Olaf’s invention, and since Vinland operated under the Viking Raid system, Haldor, as the Raid General, held military, financial, and personnel authority—making his position and power far greater than European feudal lords. The Vikings dared not disobey the general’s orders, though they still fell short of the authority of the Far Eastern banner lords.

By March, the climate and timing were perfect for the critical two to three weeks of sap collection and sugar production.

Starting in March, Haldor’s hundreds of private slaves, along with indentured white slaves, scattered across Vinland to collect maple sap, which was then brought back to Haldor’s fortress to be boiled into maple syrup.

Although Olaf’s sugar workshop now produced forty to fifty pounds of sugar daily using sweet potatoes from the warehouse, Haldor only received 20% of this, while the Viking Raid as a whole took 50%. The rest, including costs, belonged to Olaf. Thus, Haldor’s share was minimal, and he remained far more invested in the maple syrup business than in Eastern Malt Sugar.

Though production was limited to once a year, last year’s output reached over two thousand one hundred cans, totaling more than forty thousand pounds—rivaling the sugar production of Spanish and Portuguese plantations in Central and South America.

The combined sugar output from these plantations was entirely sold in Europe, accounting for over 30% of Portugal’s fiscal revenue. The Spanish-Portuguese union’s sugar exports dominated over 70% of the European market.

While the “Royal Jelly” branding elevated the value of maple syrup, it still contained significant moisture. However, every era had its overhyped commodities—like mung beans, maca, and black goji berries.

The grand name of Royal Jelly, its unique flavor, and golden amber color surpassed the usual black or ginger-yellow sugar, allowing Olaf to market it as a mysterious, health-boosting luxury—far more than just a sweetener. Thus, premium pricing was no issue.

With Olaf’s development and the Viking Raid’s strong execution and resource extraction after taking control of Vinland, the island’s long-accumulated resources were quickly harvested and turned into wealth.

Last year, Vinland and Greenland’s combined production of furs, syrup, jerky, dried fish, wine, timber, and other goods generated over four hundred thousand silver marks in revenue—excluding minimal costs. This alone matched Iceland’s annual tax revenue and half of Ireland’s agricultural taxes.

Iceland had a population of fifty to sixty thousand, with over two hundred merchant and fishing ships, hundreds of thousands of sheep, and tens of thousands of cattle and horses. Ireland had two to three million people and vast farmland. Yet Vinland, through extracting nature’s luxuries, had pushed its two thousand six hundred Vikings to the world’s highest per capita GDP—six hundred taels of silver per person annually.

In a world without industrialization, where only Holland was a commercial nation and all others relied on agriculture—with agricultural taxes making up over 40% of national revenue, sometimes even 70-80%—Vinland’s agriculture barely met self-sufficiency. Its wealth came entirely from trade, rivaling the tax revenue of small nations. This was an alarming rate of rise.

The New France and New England settlers, having estimated Vinland’s income, were secretly shocked. Champlain and McG both acknowledged Haldor’s greatness, no longer daring to entertain hostile thoughts.

…

Since Haldor took full control of Royal Jelly production, Olaf no longer interfered with the business. After all, he had other projects like bone porcelain, malt sugar, the elixir of life, and the livestock farm. There was no need to compete with his father over maple syrup, especially since he wouldn’t win.

Currently, Vinland’s most profitable businesses—furs and maple syrup—were entirely controlled by Haldor. Starting this year, Vikings would receive a small share, while white slaves and native slaves worked for nothing.

Chapter 119: Saherimnir Breeding Farm

After Olaf and Heiner Williams exchanged ideas about establishing a large-scale breeding farm, Hrut City appeared calm on the surface. However, Heiner spent every day promoting Olaf’s breeding farm. Within three days, more than half of the Vikings knew that Young Master Olaf intended to emulate the East India colonial companies of England and Holland, recruiting Viking manpower and livestock as shares to establish a breeding company.

Since there were only one thousand shares, Heiner did not dare to make decisions on his own. He only allowed interested Vikings to register temporarily, with final approval resting with Olaf.

A few days later, Haldor also learned that the breeding farm Olaf had mentioned before the New Year was actually going to happen, and many Vikings were willing to invest. After finishing a meal one day, he waved his hand and said, “I’ll give you thirty sheep from the family flock, two cows and draft horses, and even a female hybrid horse. How many shares does that count as?”

Olaf laughed heartily and said, “You’re a Viking Raid general and willing to invest—you should get at least ten shares.”

Haldor chuckled and waved his hand, saying, “Alright, once your farm is built, just take them over.”

Olaf quickly stood up and bowed respectfully to his increasingly imposing father before happily returning to his room to write a note: “Haldor—ten shares—Olaf,” proving that Haldor now held ten shares in the future breeding farm.

“What are you planning to name your breeding farm?” Haldor suddenly asked as he handed the share certificate to his wife beside him.

Olaf hadn’t had time to think about this question yet. Hearing this, he paused for a moment before asking, “I haven’t decided yet. How about you help me come up with one?”

Haldor smiled slightly, his eyes flickering as he said, “How about Saherimnir Breeding Company?”

“Saherimnir…”

Olaf repeated the name his father had suggested, feeling a strange familiarity. When he saw the mysterious and peculiar expression on Haldor’s face, he suddenly remembered that Saherimnir was a divine beast from Norse mythology—a wild boar that the gods endlessly slaughtered and consumed, only for it to reappear unharmed the next day. It was an inexhaustible resource.

In Norse mythology, Saherimnir and two other goats were destined to be food, despite being divine beasts. Their status and presence in the myths were so low as to be almost negligible.

Haldor’s choice of this name was clear—he hoped that the livestock and poultry in Olaf’s breeding farm would multiply endlessly, just like Saherimnir, never to be exhausted.

At first glance, the name seemed unproblematic. But coming from Haldor, a Christian, it was essentially an act of impiety—placing the future of the breeding business in the hands of a Norse myth, now considered heretical and outdated, rather than in Christian faith.

While the Icelanders’ devotion to Jesus had always been somewhat reserved, openly displaying such sentiments in a public enterprise revealed much—such as Haldor’s softened stance on Olaf’s previous mentions of religious reform.

Olaf was clever—or rather, perceptive—and immediately understood his father’s deeper meaning.

Seeing Olaf’s gaze, Haldor knew his second son had grasped his intent. He smiled and said, “Yes. I’ve thought about it. As a prophet bestowed upon our family by God, you must possess extraordinary qualities. Jesus was killed by the Jews and resurrected to establish Christianity. Since you can speak of religious reform, I believe it must be God’s will. So, I’ve decided to support your cause for now—but you must think carefully before acting!”

After speaking, Haldor moved his lips slightly, but the final words remained unsaid: “I don’t want you to become another Jesus…”

Olaf understood that his father, a Raid general, had deliberately chosen a name from Norse mythology for the breeding company—a signal of the Viking Raid’s leniency toward the traditional Norse polytheistic religion. Taken further, it even hinted at the possibility of a Norse pagan revival.

The name “Saherimnir Breeding Company” spread the next day. Olaf knew to intentionally promote it, instructing his friends and Icelanders familiar with Norse mythology to explain the stories to white slaves and native slaves.

Olaf didn’t actually want to revive Norse paganism. For one, the religion was fragile, lacking systematic doctrines, scriptures, or compelling teachings to captivate minds. It had originated among the Germanic ancestors in the harsh, barren lands of Scandinavia. In a different environment or among another people, a religion where gods could be killed by their own kind would never have survived.

For a religion to endure and convince people, its deities must be portrayed as invincible. The “Three Brothers” of Jerusalem claimed that the Lord created the world in six days and rested on the seventh.

Hinduism boasted that any of its main gods could destroy the world, while Daoism had the Three Pure Ones, celestial beings of creation—yet they never spoke of resting after creating the world.

Buddhism went further, teaching that all existence was but an illusion—a dream, a bubble, a shadow. One cycle of reincarnation could mend the regrets of the last, a concept far more sophisticated than the “Three Brothers’” threats of apocalyptic judgment.

Even though the “Three Brothers” had grown from a single flower in Jerusalem and their civilization had swept the globe, Buddhism and Daoism still carved out their own spaces.

How could Norse mythology compare to Christianity? Their god said, “Let there be light,” and there was light. Their god said, “Let there be a flood,” and the world reset.

But Norse mythology? The first living being was a cow, which then gave birth to a giant. The cow licked ice and salt, producing the ancestor of the gods. The giant, fearing competition for the cow’s milk, killed the god. From the god’s corpse came his descendants, and from the giant’s body came his children. The god’s offspring and the giant’s children united to produce new gods, who then killed the primordial giant and used his body to create the world…

From the very birth of their gods, Norse mythology portrayed deities who were neither omnipotent nor omniscient—they could be killed and had many flaws. For example, Odin, the king of the gods, had to sacrifice an eye to drink from the well of wisdom, rather than being born with it. This showed that the Norse gods were of a lower caliber compared to the supreme deities of other religions.

Even more absurdly, while other religions used the apocalypse to frighten their followers, Norse mythology had already experienced its apocalypse, nearly wiping out all the gods.

On the positive side, Norse mythology reflected reality—death and rebirth were equal. In ancient and medieval times, this made them a fearless people. But when Christianity arrived, it quickly abolished the lowbrow, defenseless polytheistic religion. The fearless berserker Vikings became brave and combative Northmen, their danger level dropping by three stars.

Regardless of the reasons, the people of Iceland had followed Catholicism and Christianity for over six hundred years. The original polytheistic religion had become mere mythology, occasionally discussed as stories but never openly acknowledged. After all, Christianity was an exclusive religion—with the Lord as the one true God, any other so-called deities were idols, heresies, or devils.

For a Christian to openly discuss heretical gods in the medieval era was to invite a warming session on the stake.

Due to religious suppression and Christianity’s rejection of Norse paganism, the people of Iceland basically no longer believed in the old religion. At most, they believed in the existence of ancestral spirits or Frey’s little sprites in trees and stones. Over centuries, these harmless beliefs had organically integrated with Christian culture.

Now, Haldor had named Olaf’s breeding company after a Norse mythological beast, invoking its divine power to bless the company’s future. Strictly speaking, this was already a step toward heresy.

However, in Vinland, far from the religious atmosphere of Europe and without any church priests, no one paid attention to this. Instead, many Icelanders, as well as Irish and Scottish white slaves, discussed and spread Norse mythology, treating it as mere legend. What they didn’t realize was that once Norse mythology took root in their hearts, Olaf’s religious reform—using Christianity to absorb Norse mythology and create a “new Protestantism” favorable to the Hrut family’s rule—would face almost no resistance.

Sometimes, Olaf felt that in this land of the Americas, not reforming Christianity would be an injustice to the “Almighty God”!

Chapter 120: Signing the Contract

As Norse mythology spread rapidly through Hrut City, Heiner approached Olaf with a list filled with names. Handing it over, Heiner said, “Our Viking Raid’s people heard that you, Young Master Olaf, are starting the Sahkrimnir Farming Company, and they’re all eager to invest. Over five hundred households have signed up, and I’ve joined in with five shares myself. What do you think?”

Olaf glanced at the list, quickly counting the names. From Heiner to the oarsmen, production leaders, and other chiefs, each had invested between five and two or three shares. The rest of the Viking households had mostly put in one share each. Livestock made up the majority of the investments, accounting for six or seven out of ten, while some had invested through their wives’ labor, totaling over twenty people.

As for Heiner’s five shares, it was likely just to set an example and reassure the other Vikings.

“Excellent!” Olaf clapped his hands and laughed. “Lord Williams is truly prime minister material!”

Heiner let out a soft hum, seemingly unimpressed by Olaf’s flattery, but still spoke in a relaxed tone. “I did a rough estimate—everyone has taken up over seven hundred shares. I heard the general bought one hundred shares? You should keep one hundred for yourself. That should be about right.”

Hearing Heiner’s words, Olaf’s heart stirred. He realized Heiner had deliberately controlled the Vikings from exchanging too many shares, fearing it might dilute Haldor’s and his own shares, which would cause trouble.

Understanding that Heiner had been looking out for him, Olaf felt a warmth in his heart and smiled. “Brother-in-law, you must have also calculated how everyone plans to exchange their shares. Tell me about it.”

Heiner didn’t beat around the bush. He cleared his throat and said, “In total, there are fourteen cattle, eleven draft horses, one warhorse, one hundred fifteen sheep, twenty-three pigs, over three hundred chickens, ducks, and geese, and twenty-eight Viking women workers. That adds up to seven hundred forty-six shares.”

Olaf knew this data was definitely something Heiner had calculated at home. He quickly took out a charcoal pencil from his pocket and jotted it down on the list.

“Your sister heard you’re starting a farming company and wants to work there too. She’s one of the twenty-eight women workers,” Heiner said, slightly embarrassed.

Olaf instantly understood his brother-in-law’s noble sensibilities—he thought it was beneath his wife to work in farming. But Icelandic women wouldn’t listen to their husbands’ arrangements. From the look of it, his cousin had insisted on coming.

“Don’t worry, I’ll make my cousin the assistant manager and factory head of the farming company. She’ll be in charge of managing the other women workers, and I’ll give her an extra twenty shares. How’s that?” Olaf said, knowing what his brother-in-law meant and wanting to take care of his cousin.

“Thank you, Olaf!” Heiner said, relieved, then added, “You don’t have to take too much of a loss with the shares.”

“We’re family, and you’re my good friend. How could I treat my sister poorly?” Olaf grabbed Heiner’s shoulder and nudged him playfully, winking.

Heiner looked at the young man beside him, who was the same height as him, with a mature and cunning expression, and couldn’t help but feel happy and warm inside. He praised, “If your sister knew how much you’re looking out for her, she’d be proud for days! You…”

The two walked side by side toward the assembly hall. Olaf turned his head and said, “I’ll write up a contract based on this list, specifying everyone’s investment method and share. Then, this afternoon, you can gather them in the assembly hall to sign and confirm.”

“Got it. I’ll arrange it right away.”

“Also, the western slope outside the city is still barren. We need to start building the factory immediately. I think each investor should send one slave to help with the construction. I’ll also find a few white slaves who are skilled in construction to supervise. With over five hundred people working every day, I think it can be completed in less than a month!”

Olaf spoke confidently, looking at Heiner. Heiner thought for a moment and said, “That’s not difficult. I’ll send out a notice, and the timber and stone can be delivered to the western slope tomorrow. Don’t worry.”

Olaf chuckled and bid farewell to Heiner, heading to the assembly hall to find paper and pen to transcribe the contract.

When the Viking Raid was first established, it consisted of eighteen hundred Vikings. Haldor was the Raid General, Haig was the Pasde District Chief, managing everyone, and Hudik, Jot, Kadir, and Hoskuld were the four Mannafylki oarsmen, the true powerholders. Below them were nineteen Aettangr oarsmen, one of whom, the Inuit Aettangr led by Pikku, had gone to Greenland, leaving eighteen Aettangr on the island.

After a year of development, the gender imbalance among the Vikings was resolved last year when six hundred white female slaves filled the void for the white-born Vikings and some Beothuk Vikings. Including natural population growth, the Vikings in Hrut City now exceeded two thousand five hundred. Even excluding the five hundred Viking soldiers in Plymouth, the thirty in Basque, and the twenty or so in Haldor City, Hrut City still had two thousand Vikings living there. These were the true inhabitants of Vinland and Haldor’s core supporters.

Although the population had increased, it wasn’t by much, not even exceeding the Pasde threshold of twenty-five hundred people, so the Viking Raid hadn’t undergone any adjustments. Even though the eighteen Aettangr and four Mannafylki had grown considerably in population.

However, it was foreseeable that when the Viking Raid next adjusted, the number of Viking households would surge by several hundred due to marriages and family divisions.

Since there had been no family divisions yet, the over two thousand Vikings were investing in the farming company by household, totaling just over five hundred households. For example, Kadir was one household, Heiner was one, Hoskuld was one, and Kalm and Kalhu, being unmarried, were still part of Hoskuld’s household.

Even with only over five hundred households, Olaf didn’t plan to write five hundred separate contracts for everyone to sign. Instead, he intended to sign two contracts with the eighteen Aettangr oarsmen. Each Viking could then sign under their respective oarsman’s name. One copy would be kept by Heiner, and the other by Olaf. After all, commercial contracts were still a relatively new concept in Europe, and the Vikings of Vinland knew nothing about them. Signing a contract was just a formality.

After much effort, Olaf spent over an hour drafting the two contracts, wasting three or four sheets of paper in the process, leaving his wrist sore.

The assembly hall’s noon bell rang at twelve. Olaf put away the contracts and went home for lunch, then rested for an hour before returning to the assembly hall.

By the time Olaf approached the assembly hall in the afternoon, many Viking women were already waiting at the entrance, led by the wives of the production leaders and oarsmen.

Icelandic culture was entirely different from the Middle Eastern Islamic culture and the Eastern Celestial Empire culture, and it also had many differences from other European countries. Although most were details, one significant difference was the high status of Icelandic women in the family.

Typically, Icelandic parents couldn’t decide their daughter’s marriage; they had to seek the daughter’s opinion and consent. After marriage, women and men enjoyed nearly equal status in the household. For example, women could initiate divorce, control and enjoy the family’s wealth and property, and make many decisions involving wealth and family reputation. Thus, Icelandic men greatly respected their wives.

If comparing women’s rights, even in other Nordic countries like Sweden, Norway, and Denmark, women’s status and rights weren’t as independent and prominent as Icelandic women’s.

In the 17th century, European women still couldn’t work in military or political fields, and many women weren’t wanted for jobs, although their status wasn’t low, they were somewhat respected. Especially, they could go out in public and make small decisions independently on behalf of their husbands.

Compared to European women, Icelandic women could not only go out but also engage in production and life independently. They could remarry freely after divorce and even have children out of wedlock without facing condemnation outside the family.

Chapter 121: Cousin Vanhild

Olaf was not surprised to see only women waiting for him at the entrance of the meeting hall. Given Iceland’s tradition of high female status, women sometimes represented their families in decision-making. He greeted everyone and led them inside, then invited them to sit.

“Olaf! You finally remembered to bring us folks from Hrut Village along to make money! Erik has always said he’ll follow you forever! Back in Iceland, I already knew you and General Haldor weren’t ordinary people! Look, I was right, wasn’t I?”

Since not everyone had arrived yet, they chatted idly. A freckled woman in her thirties joked with Olaf.

Olaf recognized her as Lunde’s second wife. His first wife had died of illness ten years ago, and this woman had been married five years ago. Back in Iceland, as a stepmother, she had been cold to Erik. But since coming to Vinland, Lunde had become an Aettangr oarsman, and Erik had risen to production team leader. With over ten private slaves in the household, the woman now carried herself like a noble lady and treated Erik much better.

She spoke to Olaf with unusual politeness, then glanced proudly at the other women, as if boasting: See, I call Olaf by his name—this shows how close we are.

Among the women present were the wives of Valitu, Nilahu, and others—honest, hardworking farm women who had no intention of flaunting their authority before Olaf.

Most of the women remained silent, though a few secretly envied this woman for having a good husband and a good son.

Olaf paid no mind to the women’s petty rivalries. After exchanging a few polite words, he looked toward the door, hoping the last two oarsmen’s wives would arrive soon so they could sign the contract and be done.

A moment later, a tall, fair-skinned woman entered. She wore a woolen coat, and her golden hair flowed freely, nearly the same shade as Olaf’s.

“Cousin Vanhild!” Olaf stepped forward and embraced her warmly.

“You’ve grown taller, Olaf. Maybe you’ll be taller than me by next year.”

Vanhild was the only daughter of Uncle Kadir, inheriting his height, hair color, and striking beauty. Though only twenty-two, she had been married to Heiner for four years and already had two children.

Olaf and his cousin chatted as they walked to the innermost sofa in the hall and sat down.

Vanhild’s arrival signaled that all the key figures needed for the contract signing had arrived. Without delay, Olaf presented the contract, explaining the plans and intentions behind establishing the Sahkrimnir Farming Company. He then wrote his name under the 154 shares allocated to the original shareholders, followed by his father Haldor’s name under the 100 shares. This meant the Haldor father and son held 254 shares, while the remaining 746 were shared among the others.

After Olaf signed both copies of the contract with his and his father’s names, Vanhild and the other oarsmen’s wives signed on behalf of all the Vikings. Whether literate or not, every woman present signed her name or marked an initial beside the oarsmen’s wives’ names.

Finally, Olaf handed one copy of the contract to Vanhild and appointed her as the assistant manager and factory director of Sahkrimnir Farming Company. As compensation, she received an additional twenty shares from Olaf’s 154, bringing her total to twenty shares.

In the future, Vanhild would oversee the company’s management and the farming operations. The remaining twenty-seven Viking women workers would all be under her supervision. Additionally, ten shares from Olaf’s portion would be set aside to reward outstanding workers.

After announcing the company’s establishment, Olaf outlined several management rules. Vanhild then stood and spoke, urging everyone to work together for the success of the farming company and contribute to Vinland’s livestock industry.

Olaf could tell his cousin had practiced her speech—likely with Heiner’s help.

Once the establishment ceremony and contract signing were complete, before Olaf could speak, Vanhild took charge. She addressed the crowd: “I just counted—over two hundred households aren’t represented here. After the meeting, please notify your neighbors. Tomorrow, all five hundred and forty households must send one slave to the western slope outside the city. General Manager Olaf and I will lead everyone in building the farming facility. Only after the buildings are ready can we house the livestock—cattle, horses, pigs, sheep, chickens, ducks, and geese—that everyone has invested in.”

The Viking women in the hall responded loudly to Vanhild’s first order as factory director. Among them were over thirty Icelandic women, nearly all present. The rest were white Viking women. There should have been over two hundred Beothuk Viking families represented, but only one had sent a delegate—a white woman.

This white wife belonged to Olos, the former high priest of Great Waterfall City and now an oarsman. He had purchased her at a high price last year. She attended the meeting on behalf of her family and also as an individual investor.

Olos was only twenty, but since last year, he had shown unwavering loyalty to Haldor and the Viking Raid. In return, he had been granted Viking status and the position of Aettangr oarsman. Now, he had even married a fair-skinned white woman. Regardless of his true feelings, his actions and words fully supported General Haldor and Young Master Olaf.

Though Olos knew nothing about farming, upon learning that his wife had experience raising poultry in Ireland, he ordered her to attend the meeting and invest. It was clear that Olos cared little about profit or loss—he simply wanted to support Young Master Olaf.

Olaf was familiar with Olos, this clever and quick-witted Beothuk Viking, and held him in high regard. After Vanhild finished speaking, Olaf turned to Olos’s wife and said, “When you return, tell Olos to make sure all the Viking women under his Aettangr come forward. Have them speak with Director Vanhild first to get acquainted. Then, tomorrow, they must not be late for the factory construction. If any investing household fails to send someone tomorrow, don’t blame me for removing their names from the contract. They won’t be allowed to participate in future profitable ventures!”

“Rest assured, Young Master Olaf! I’ll tell Olos as soon as I get back!” The young white woman hurriedly bowed in agreement. As she moved, the hem of her dress revealed her slightly bowed legs, likely a result of childhood malnutrition.

Olaf had once seen an Irish white slave with goiter. He wondered how someone from an island like Ireland could be iodine-deficient.

Knowing this world had many incurable diseases, Olaf wasn’t surprised. He nodded and said, “Very well. Tomorrow morning, after breakfast, please have all the ladies bring their servants to the western slope to begin construction!”

Chapter 122: The Farming Company Takes Shape

The next morning, after breakfast, Olaf mounted his horse and led two sturdy private slaves to the western slope outside the city. Before they even arrived, they saw hundreds of Viking women accompanied by an equal number of male private slaves waiting for them.

The slaves crouched on the ground, their gazes dull and expressions numb, with shovels, wooden sticks, and other tools scattered beside them. The Viking women, meanwhile, huddled together in lively conversation. The stark contrast between the two groups created an atmosphere of ice and fire.

Olaf surveyed the scene and, seeing that his cousin Vanhild had not yet arrived, instructed all the slaves to begin leveling the land and clearing the stones and grass from the slope.

Soon, the hundreds of slaves were hard at work. Olaf watched for a while before hearing the sound of hurried footsteps behind him. Turning, he saw Tom, Halik, Ilugi, Eriksson, Hari, Solrak, and Val—his seven closest companions—arriving with a group of over a dozen Icelandic youths and more than twenty private slaves.

“You’re here?” Olaf chuckled. “This is the busiest time for spring plowing.”

“We heard your farming company was starting construction,” said Red-Haired Lixstrom, the second-in-command of Olaf’s group, speaking on behalf of everyone. “How could we not come to help?”

Olaf stepped forward to warmly shake hands with his younger brothers before smiling. “I knew you’d come. I heard that yesterday, some of our indentured white slaves and slave warriors caught a whale. I had it brought here—we’ll eat it at noon. It’s been over a month since we’ve all had a good time together!”

Tom and the others laughed heartily before waving for their slaves to join the land-leveling efforts.

The white birch forest of Hrut City had essentially been a village-wide relocation, with over ninety percent of the population having moved to Vinland, except for a few elderly. Among Olaf’s group of friends, he had been the youngest at ten years old when they arrived, while the others were all over fourteen. Now, three years later, the precocious Icelandic youths looked nearly like adults. The oldest among them, Ilugi and Val, had just turned eighteen.

Yet, Olaf’s intelligence, emotional maturity, status, and even height kept him firmly in command of his friends. Despite their growth, the youths still respected and looked up to him as their leader.

At the core of this group were Olaf and his seven closest companions, surrounded by over a dozen Icelandic youths, and beyond them, several dozen younger Viking brothers of indentured white slave origin. Olaf had always taken care to nurture this future foundation, and with the groundwork laid over the past two years, these youths were now well-versed in stories like the Romance of the Three Kingdoms and eager to practice Viking martial arts.

As the youths stood together chatting, Olaf, though only thirteen, was already the second tallest in the group at over 180 cm, surpassed only by Halik, who now stood at six feet two inches.

At seventeen, Halik’s height and build had already placed him among the tallest in Vinland, nearly matching Haldor, Nilahu, Ulf, and Kadir. With proper nutrition, he might even surpass his elders in a year or two and challenge Haig, the tallest man in the settlement.

Olaf knew that Icelanders matured early, growing rapidly from around age ten and usually finishing by fifteen or sixteen, with the latest by seventeen or eighteen. He believed he still had another eight or nine centimeters of growth left, ensuring he wouldn’t be shorter than his brother or father. Satisfied with his physique in this life, he often enjoyed the feeling of looking down on others when speaking.

As they talked, seven or eight white slaves skilled in construction arrived. Since the indentured white slaves of Hrut City belonged to the Haldor family, Olaf had no trouble mobilizing a few—he had simply sent a slave to summon them before leaving.

Once the construction workers arrived, Olaf took out a blueprint from his pocket. This was the result of his late-night planning over the past few days—a design for the farming company.

Though not an engineer or designer, Olaf had simply planned based on the slope’s terrain. He pointed to the blueprint, explaining to the white slave artisans how to lead the slaves in constructing the farming facility.

In Olaf’s plan, the four- or five-acre slope would first be cleared of weeds, shrubs, and stones. Then, at the highest point, pens would be built, with staff housing and an entrance gate constructed on the wind-sheltered northern side.

On the lower southern side, a manure pit would be dug, with trenches leading from the pit to the pens and the semi-open activity areas on the slope to collect rainwater and wastewater, all draining into the manure pit.

The western slope wasn’t too far from the river to the west, so workers would dig an irrigation channel to bring water closer, making future operations more convenient.

Besides the northern office buildings and slope pens, an activity area and manure pit would be built on the southern side, while a half-underground, half-above-ground feed storage warehouse would be constructed on the eastern side.

After explaining, Olaf handed the blueprint to the artisans. At that moment, Vanhild arrived with several private slaves from her household. Though she knew little about construction, as the manager of the farming company and its assistant director, she naturally wanted to show her commitment. She eagerly joined in, asking questions and overseeing the work.

The Viking women, finding the scene uninteresting, handed their slaves over to Vanhild’s management before taking their leave. Among them, over two hundred women from yellow Viking families, several dozen white women, and over a hundred Beothuk women hesitantly approached Vanhild. Two representatives stepped forward to apologize.

Vanhild knew the yellow Vikings still harbored some inferiority and were reluctant to mix with the white Vikings. She offered a few words of comfort before sending them away.

After watching for a while, Olaf temporarily assigned his private slaves to assist Vanhild in supervising the workers and slaves before leading the youths back to Haldor’s fortress to cook the whale meat.

By noon, Olaf and his group arrived at the western slope construction site with a horse-drawn cart carrying over a dozen barrels of boiled sweet potatoes and potatoes, along with a barrel of whale meat stew.

The hundreds of slaves took their break to eat the sweet potatoes and potatoes, while Olaf and his group, along with the white slave artisans and Vanhild, used wooden plates and forks to enjoy the whale meat flavored with tomatoes and cilantro.

After the meal, Vanhild ordered half a barrel of meat broth to be diluted into three large barrels of soup for the slaves.

Once everyone was fed, the white slave artisans resumed leading the slaves in construction. Since the site had been cleared that morning, the afternoon was spent transporting the piled stones and timber up the slope, beginning modifications. First, the stones were used to lay the foundation, followed by wooden roofs and upper walls.

The white slave artisans processed the timber, while the more skilled native slaves worked the stone. The rest transported materials and dug foundations for buildings, walls, manure pits, and trenches.

The air on the western slope gradually filled with the scent of earth and sand. As time passed, the foundation of the farming company took shape.

Construction on the Sahkrimnir Farming Company began on March 4th, and by mid-month, its framework was already visible. With over five hundred and sixty people working daily, progress was rapid. The experience gained from building Hrut City made this construction even more efficient.

Since the farming company’s main structures were the five northern buildings and the slope pens, with the rest being pits, trenches, and wooden fences, the construction difficulty was relatively low. By April, it was essentially complete.

After nearly a month of supervision, Vanhild had grown darker and leaner, but watching the farming company take shape filled her with satisfaction and renewed energy.

With the basic structure complete and only internal pen expansions remaining, the facility was ready for use. Thus, starting in late March, Vanhild began urging Olaf to bring livestock into the pens.

Chapter 123: Insufficient Production Capacity

On April 2nd, Olaf entered the nearly completed farming company to inspect it. Afterward, he instructed Vanhild to notify all shareholders to bring in their “capital.”

From the afternoon of the 2nd, Vikings arrived one after another, bringing sheep, chickens, ducks, geese, pigs, cows, and horses to the western slope company. After Olaf and Vanhild inspected and verified them, the female workers led the animals into their respective pens.

The Sahkrimnir Farming Company had fifteen pens: three for cows, three for horses, four for pigs, four for sheep, and one mixed pen for poultry like chickens, ducks, and geese.

Besides these common livestock and poultry, there were also five huskies. At this time, huskies were still hunting dogs, and their excellent comedic genes had not yet emerged. These five dogs were all well-bred by the Inuit, who used them to hunt seals in winter. Almost every Inuit tribe had a pack of Inuit dogs.

Last year, Haldor also got a pack, and by now, they had reproduced once, resulting in seven or eight dogs always outside Haldor’s fortress. Whenever they saw Haldor, Olaf, and other owners return, they would wag their tails and approach.

However, Olaf himself did not like keeping pets, so he paid little attention to cats and dogs. He usually did not play with these dogs that had a strong odor. This time, to guard and protect the farming company, he had slaves bring five of the fattest dogs from home to keep in the company.

By the next morning, Viking women were still bringing slaves with sheep and pigs. It wasn’t until the evening of April 3rd that Olaf and Vanhild confirmed that all the animals and crossbows invested by the shareholders had arrived.

“Currently, the pens are almost full. We have fourteen cows, eleven draft horses, one hundred and fifteen sheep, twenty-three pigs, and three hundred and twenty-two poultry. Twenty-seven Viking female workers have also arrived today! Also, my mother sent a mixed-breed horse with some Arabian blood. This horse is a stallion and needs to be well-fed. In the future, it will be used to improve the draft horse breed and add a cavalry unit to our Viking Raid!”

Vanhild smiled at Olaf and said, “This afternoon, I had these female workers familiarize themselves with the situation and took out the distillery’s lees and potato residue to feed them once.”

“Cousin Vanhild, you’ve done a great job,” Olaf nodded and then asked, “How do you plan to arrange the security of the farming company at night?”

“I will have two of my private slaves live in the farming company. They can also run errands for me. I trust them,” Vanhild seemed very confident in her slaves.

Olaf was still a bit worried and said, “I plan to leave two indentured white slaves in the company as employees. They can also increase the security at night. What do you think?”

“Good,” Vanhild shrugged and said, “Let’s do that.”

Olaf and Vanhild left two yellow and two white slaves in the company and departed.

Riding his own mixed-breed horse, Olaf thought about the current situation in Vinland. There were about forty to fifty horses, but most were draft horses or inferior horses. Only seven could be used as riding warhorses. Among them, Haldor’s fortress had three, Kadir’s uncle had two, Haig’s uncle had one, and Hudik’s family had one.

Of the three horses in Haldor’s fortress, one was always used as Haldor’s mount, one was ridden by Olaf himself, and the other was taken by his brother Ulf to Bakens City.

Kadir also took one to Plymouth. Now, the best horses that could be used to train cavalry were only four. Kadir’s family had sent a batch to the farming company.

In the future, they needed to increase purchases and breeding to have more high-quality horses in Vinland. If they wanted to expand into the North American continent, they needed a strong cavalry that could move swiftly across the vast land. Otherwise, they would not only fail to suppress the rebellious natives but also face high governance costs.

After the farming company officially started operations, the hundreds of pounds of residue produced daily by the sugar and alcohol factories were transported back to the farming company’s warehouse by female workers and slaves driving ox carts.

Most of the time, cows, horses, sheep, pigs, and poultry could finish the previous day’s feed. However, the female workers only performed simple feeding and care tasks. Most of the time, the four indentured white slaves and slaves stayed in the factory. The twenty-seven Viking women’s role was to quickly teach the four slaves how to care for the livestock through hands-on experience, handle simple diseases, assist in births, and milk the cows.

Besides feeding, the Viking female workers also had to milk the cows, shear the sheep, and, when they had time, drive the ox carts and horse carts to cut grass. Any uneaten fresh feed was dried and stored, and they also had to clean up the manure.

The farming company was busy every day, and the workers had many tasks to complete.

At first, Olaf stayed in the farming company to observe, but later, he found that everyone was diligent, especially his cousin Vanhild, who arrived early every morning and left late at night. This made Olaf feel at ease about the farming company.

He first handed over a feed production guide he had written to his cousin Vanhild and then gradually reduced his visits to the farming company, shifting his attention to the factory, bone porcelain workshop, sugar workshop, and alcohol workshop.

Unknowingly, Olaf had already established a handicraft factory, a sugar factory, an alcohol factory, and a porcelain factory in Vinland, supporting half of Vinland’s export products.

In April, all the people Haldor had sent out to various places completed their tasks. Thousands of large maple trees and many medium and small maple trees on Vinland Island were tapped for sap to make sugar, providing a mountain of maple syrup for Vinland’s sugar industry. At the same time, the warehouse’s fur, dried meat, and dried fish continued to increase.

Since the sugar workshop had been producing continuously since the beginning of the year, in three months, it had produced over six thousand pounds of malt sugar, stored in pottery jars and neatly stacked in the warehouse.

The alcohol factory started operations in spring, producing alcohol and distilling simultaneously. The tens of thousands of gallons of original mash produced before the year were distilled into “water of life” and stored in wooden barrels. Currently, there were over ten thousand gallons stored, totaling more than a thousand barrels.

The eight to nine million pounds of sweet potatoes and potatoes in the cellar had now been consumed by over three hundred thousand pounds. This amount, if used for human consumption, would be enough to feed the entire population of Hrut City, over ten thousand people, for half a month.

Based on the consumption and output ratio, Olaf estimated that it took about eight pounds of sweet potatoes or potatoes to produce one pound of malt sugar and twenty-seven pounds to produce one gallon of distilled alcohol.

Olaf remembered that in the Celestial Empire, before the reform and opening up, rural areas used sweet potatoes to make alcohol, with a ratio of three catties to one catty. This calculation was about the same. However, the quality and alcohol content of the “water of life” were not as high as the distilled liquor of later generations. This might be due to the primitive varieties of sweet potatoes and potatoes at that time, which did not have the high starch content of the improved high-yield and high-quality varieties of later generations.

Olaf felt that at the current production rate, an average of over a hundred thousand pounds of sweet potatoes and potatoes were consumed each month, which was too inefficient. In a year, only over a million pounds could be consumed, not even one-eighth of the cellar’s storage.

The current grain storage in the cellar was a little more than half of the two thousand three hundred acres of land cultivated last year.

This year, due to the increase in cultivated land and the doubling of potato and sweet potato planting, the harvest would be two to three times that of last year if nothing went wrong. Therefore, starting this year, the alcohol factory and sugar factory needed to be expanded and more equipment added. They had to open several more production lines to increase the scale. Only in this way could they quickly and as much as possible convert the grain into malt sugar, starch, high-proof liquor, and other high-value and long-term storable commodities.

Chapter 124: The End of Spring Plowing

Before falling asleep, Olaf dipped his quill in ink and wrote down the most important tasks for the year in his notebook. The first was to expand the production lines of the brewery and sugar factory, which required purchasing more equipment, tools, and windmill and waterwheel devices from Europe.

Since he was already writing the year’s plans, Olaf decided to add a few more items.

“Second, purchase as many cotton seeds and other plant seeds as possible. This year, we aim to establish a cotton plantation base on the southern plains of Quebec.

Third, buy spinning machines to prepare for cotton weaving…

Fourth, recruit Arab doctors and physicians from the Ming Dynasty, and once again seek to purchase scientific books from the Ming Dynasty and Europe…”

Olaf listed roughly six tasks in order of priority, reviewed them one last time, and then put away his notebook to sleep.

Time always seemed insufficient for the busy people of Vinland. The spring plowing that swept through Hrut City, Haldor City, and Bakens City concluded around the seventh or eighth of April.

The true grain base of Vinland, the five thousand acres of cultivated land around Hrut City, and the newly reclaimed thousand acres of land near Avalon Forest to the north were all planted with seeds. The first irrigation was carried out through the canals dug during the land reclamation.

Of the six thousand acres of land, over four thousand six hundred acres were planted with sweet potatoes, potatoes, and corn, while the rest were planted with rye and other crops. The newly reclaimed thousand acres of land belonged entirely to Haldor. Although the main crops were potatoes and sweet potatoes, all kinds of grains and vegetables were distributed and planted.

Vinland’s climate was inherently cold, compounded by the effects of the Little Ice Age, which meant that only cold-resistant crops with a half-year growth cycle could be cultivated. If it weren’t for the fertile, undeveloped land that had been untouched for tens of thousands of years, combined with Olaf’s selection of high-yield crops and the promotion of fertilizer production techniques to enhance soil fertility, the Vikings would not only struggle to develop the economy but also face the primary challenge of filling their stomachs.

The North American colonies were developing normally. The slow development of the English, French, and Dutch colonies, and even the frequent collapse of some colonies, was primarily due to the difficulty in solving the food problem.

Initially, North American colonists came for fur and cod, paying little attention to or lacking skill in cultivating land and planting crops. Their supplies relied entirely on trade with local natives. It wasn’t until the 1620s that the colonies of the three countries began to develop agriculture to barely fill their stomachs.

The second major constraint was the low resistance to diseases and backward prevention and control awareness under primitive living conditions.

More than a decade ago, a colonial outpost in New England was wiped out by a smallpox outbreak, with dozens of people dying within two years. This problem arose from poor diet and clothing leading to malnutrition and low immunity, coupled with a lack of understanding of epidemic prevention and control. In recent years, even with an annual increase of thousands of people in New England, seven or eight out of ten would die within a year or two.

The third reason was the outbreak of wars between the colonies and the numerous and fierce Indian natives. The natives had a strong sense of territoriality, and the expansion of colonial land inevitably led to conflicts with them. Moreover, the arrogant European colonists looked down on the primitive natives, making conflicts more likely. Except for France, which now had one or two tribal allies, New England only began to try to win over the natives and support the Iroquois Confederacy after suffering multiple setbacks.

As for New Netherlands, true to its merchant nation roots, it had been buying off nearby tribes from the start, clearly purchasing land with items the natives needed and selling it to colonial merchants in their country, gradually building cities and developing.

Vinland originally stood its ground due to its different location and the bravery of Haig and others, which surpassed that of the English and French colonists. However, the development speed in the first eight years was also very slow. It wasn’t until Haldor and Olaf brought over a hundred Icelanders that Vinland began to rise rapidly in various aspects.

But the first real step towards rise was cutting off the supply of fur and royal jelly developed by Olaf for New France. After the snowball effect of the first bucket of gold, with a large increase in indentured white slaves and sharp weapons, they swept through Vinland Island. The second step was the high-yield crops of potatoes, sweet potatoes, and the Three Sisters developed by Olaf.

If we flatten the summary, the rise and rapid development of Vinland was actually one wave after another, with no pause in between.

This year was a brand-new year where the food problem was completely resolved. Olaf clearly knew that this year would be a critical year for unleashing potential and promoting the rapid development of Vinland. The combined value of fur from the fur industry, syrup from the sugar industry, malt sugar, high-proof liquor from the brewing industry, and bone china would exceed that of last year. Moreover, the abundance of food signified that starting this year, Vinland, Greenland, and Basque City could expand and capture slaves without worrying about population growth. With the economy and population exploding simultaneously, how could Vinland not take off again?

In Haldor City, Jot and Hoskuld had dozens of indentured white slave militiamen and three thousand Beothuk slaves under their command. Most of these slaves belonged to the Viking Raid, with a small portion being their private slaves. Since establishing a basic camp, they had been planning to expand the city and docks while cultivating land to plant potatoes, sweet potatoes, corn, squash, and beans.

After months of unremitting efforts, they had reclaimed over a thousand acres of cultivated land. After this spring plowing, eighty percent of the land was planted with potatoes and sweet potatoes, and the remaining twenty percent with the Three Sisters and a small amount of vegetables.

Of course, while developing infrastructure and agricultural planting, Hoskuld also personally led a team to hunt and fish, accumulating a small amount of fur and a large amount of dried fish. In early April, he prepared to personally deliver these goods back to Hrut City to supplement the commodities to be sold in Europe this year.

The situation in Bakens City was similar to that in Haldor City. Bakens Governor Blackstone, following the guidance of the white slave agricultural technicians who brought potatoes and sweet potatoes, planted sweet potatoes, potatoes, and the Three Sisters on the vast lands south of Bakens Lake. He also ordered the surrounding small tribes to do the same.

Since last winter, a considerable amount of fur obtained from hunting in the west and dried fish caught and processed in the Bakens Lake and other water systems had been accumulated. Blackstone wanted to meet his master, Viking Raid General Haldor. Therefore, as soon as the spring plowing ended in April, Blackstone began preparing the goods and sent people to escort the agricultural technicians to Hrut City to report his intention to personally transport the goods to Hrut City to meet Haldor.

Unlike Bakens City and Haldor City on Vinland Island, the distant Basque City and Plymouth’s Ulf and Kadir had personally led the wealth they had accumulated over a long period in the two places—fur, jade, doghead gold, dried fish, and more—left the two places at the end of March. Leading some of their subordinates, they boarded Viking longships and the two armed merchant ships left in the two places last year, heading to the southeastern corner of the Vinland peninsula, Hrut City.

This news was conveyed by the governors of the two places during the busy spring plowing season. Before their departure, they also sent someone to inform Haldor and Olaf. Both knew that Ulf and Kadir should arrive at Hrut Port successively after April 5th. The separated family members of Haldor and others, as well as Kadir’s wife and family, eagerly awaited their arrival every day, sending people to guard the port, hoping to see their sons, friends, husbands, and fathers at the first opportunity.

Chapter 125: The Banquet

On the afternoon of April 5, 1630, a towering armed merchant ship and eight smaller, crudely crafted Viking longships sailed into Hrut Port.

The Viking longships of Vinland were built by the people of Iceland using ancestral techniques passed down through generations, with wooden planks and clinker construction. Though the craftsmanship was rough and primitive, the simple requirements meant the wood processing was far inferior to the methods used in Holland, England, and Portugal—both in durability and sturdiness. But under Vinland’s backward production and living conditions, the ability to build Viking longships at all was a testament to the collective effort of the people, so no one complained.

After the ships docked, the towering figure of Kadir disembarked, followed by his Viking guards.

Kadir was already forty years old, but his body remained incredibly strong. Though he was only two years younger than Katrin, he deeply respected his sister and treated her children as his own. This was because she had doted on him when they were young, and their bond was unbreakable. It was this deep affection that had driven Kadir and Hoskuld to rebel and kill officials for their brother-in-law.

Once all the soldiers had disembarked and formed ranks, Kadir, dressed in a striped wool robe and a white wolfskin coat, lumbered down the gangplank like a polar bear, his face still bearing traces of last night’s farewell banquet hangover.

By this time, Haldor, Katrin, Olaf, Vanhild, and five or six other relatives had arrived at the dock by oxcart or horseback.

“My dear sister! Brother-in-law… my Stisna… Vanhild… I missed you all so much in Plymouth!” Kadir embraced Haldor and Katrin before hugging his wife and daughter. Finally, he ruffled Olaf’s hair and said, “My golden-haired boy came to greet his uncle too?”

“What did you bring me?” Olaf wasted no time, immediately asking for gifts.

“Hah!” Kadir laughed heartily, then waved for his guards to bring over two chests. Two Calvinist priests, both in their forties or fifties, followed.

One chest was opened to reveal neatly stacked beaver pelts with a captivating sheen. The other was filled to the brim with coffee beans—clearly gifts Kadir had obtained in Plymouth.

“This is what I brought back. Olaf, you can pick first. Let me tell you, these coffee beans, when roasted, ground, and brewed, give off an amazing aroma. Add sugar and milk, and the taste is incredible!”

Olaf was indeed delighted. He had grown tired of the strange Nordic cuisine and was eager to try coffee, so he politely thanked his uncle.

“Are these the two priests you brought from Plymouth?” Haldor glanced at the two men before asking Kadir.

Kadir nodded. “These are DeGula and Duca, both learned and kind elders. After receiving your orders, I invited them to establish a church and school.”

“Thank you for coming, elders!”

Haldor thanked the two priests, who politely made the sign of the cross over their chests and said, “Lord Haldor, we are all called by the merciful Lord. Vinland needs the children of the Lord to spread the gospel.”

Haldor trusted Kadir’s judgment. His brother-in-law had been a village leader for over a decade, so the two priests he brought must be honest and easy to manage. With a warm and courteous demeanor, Haldor immediately ordered oxcarts to take them to a place to rest and eat. In the afternoon, he would help them select a site to build a church and school.

Half an hour later, Haldor and the others returned to Hrut City. Knowing that Kadir and the hundreds of Viking soldiers he had brought back were eager to see their families, Haldor waved his hand and said, “Go home first. Tonight, come to my fortress—I’ll host a banquet to welcome you all back!”

At the mention of a banquet, the Viking soldiers cheered, shouting things like “Long live the general!”

Kadir, along with his wife, daughter, and his son-in-law Heiner, who had just arrived, bid their farewells and returned to their own home.

Katrin was happy that day, but after Kadir left, she felt a pang of longing and murmured, “I wonder when Ulf will return?”

“Soon,” Haldor reassured his wife.

Olaf glanced at the small barrel of coffee beans carried by a private slave and grinned. “Let’s go home and try Kadir’s coffee. I’ve heard this new drink is only for royalty and nobles in Europe!”

Hearing this, Katrin and Haldor grew curious. After a few more words of laughter, they all returned to their castle.

That evening, hundreds of people gathered inside and outside Haldor’s fortress. The two priests were also invited into the great hall to sit with Kadir’s family.

Before long, Haldor’s private slaves and white slave chefs brought out seven or eight kinds of meat—fried whale, roasted seal, pickled cod, boiled mutton, smoked venison—and began portioning them in front of everyone. There was also a large pot of mutton offal soup with raisins, hazelnut black bread, sweet potatoes, and regular potatoes. Beside them sat a large basin of maple syrup and malt syrup for spreading on the bread.

The aroma of meat, bread, and sweets filled the hall and even drifted outside, making the guests’ mouths water.

Inside the hall, animal fat candles and braziers were lit, and outside, more braziers were set up. The flickering candlelight and dancing flames illuminated Haldor’s fortress like daylight. To the two English priests, it felt like being back in London’s St. Paul’s Cathedral.

Soon, Haldor clapped his hands, signaling the arrival of the most important part of the banquet for the Vikings—ten barrels of strong liquor.

“Is this the liquor from Olaf’s distillery? I’ve heard about it since I returned to Hrut City. They say it tastes amazing!” Kadir asked with a smile.

Haldor laughed. “Yes, this is the ‘Water of Life’ from Olaf’s distillery. It’s even stronger than whiskey. My Vinland warriors have returned, so tonight, we drink the good stuff!”

“Thank you, generous general!”

The hearty voices of gratitude rose one after another, eventually merging into a single phrase. The resolute and decisive tone of the men made the two English priests, witnessing the true spirit of Viking men for the first time, jump in surprise, their hearts pounding.

The guests at this banquet were all battle-hardened Viking men—some white Vikings, some yellow Vikings. The white Vikings included Icelanders, Irishmen, and Scotsmen, while the yellow Vikings were Inuit and Beothuk. But now, they all spoke fluent Icelandic, united under Vinland’s unique new Viking culture.

This so-called new Viking culture was essentially a blend of traditional Icelandic customs with Christian influences, using Icelandic as its foundation. However, it lacked cohesion, and as Christianity spread, it would likely fracture—after all, Christian culture was dominated by Latin and French, so once the faith took root in Vinland, Icelandic culture could no longer remain the dominant force.

Because of these issues with the new Viking culture, Olaf had considered reviving the traditional Norse pagan traditions to merge with Christianity, hoping to strengthen their cultural foundation and prevent it from being led astray.

…

As the night deepened, hundreds of people sat in the hall, corridors, and outside, feasting, drinking, and chatting. The sounds of chewing, conversation, and praise for the liquor filled the air.

Vikings raised in harsh lands had no shortage of love for alcohol. Tasting the “Water of Life,” which surpassed beer, wine, and even whiskey, they erupted in cheers.

“This is the drink for real men!”

“Exactly! ‘Water of Life’—the name couldn’t be more fitting!”

“Young Olaf is extraordinary! To brew such a potent liquor—our Viking men are truly blessed!”

“Indeed…”

“Hahaha…”

Chapter 126: Vinland’s Educational Direction

The evening banquet was lively and bustling, and by the time it ended, it was already late at night.

The Vikings, supported by their families, left Haldor’s fortress in a drunken stupor. Hudik, Haig and his wife, Kadir and his wife, Heiner and his wife, and other high-ranking officials, along with Haldor and Katrin, had also drunk too much. It was their first time consuming large amounts of the Water of Life, so when the aftereffects hit, they couldn’t handle it.

Olaf was still fine, having only shared a couple of drinks with his friends. Thanks to his height, weight, and strong physique, he only felt slightly tipsy before soaking his feet and going to bed.

The next morning, news came from the docks that Ulf, the governor of Basque City, had returned with thirty Viking soldiers.

“Ulf is here too!” Katrin, who was tidying up in the room, heard Heiner’s messenger telling Olaf and Haldor. Excited, she ran out and asked, “Yes, my brother is back.”

After Olaf nodded, Katrin turned to grab some clothes, then frowned and said, “Let’s go to the docks to meet him. This child spent the winter in Basque; he must not have eaten well. I wonder if he’s lost weight?”

Half an hour later, Olaf, Haldor, Katrin, Half, and Gerny met Ulf, who was leading more than thirty men, on the way to the docks.

Ulf had a stubbly beard on his chin and was wearing the black bear pelt robe Haldor had given him. He rode a tall, sturdy black-and-white horse. Seeing Haldor and the others, he quickly rode over, dismounted, and embraced his father, mother, and younger brother, then pinched his little sister and younger brother’s cheeks.

“Gerny, did you miss your big brother?”

Gerny wiped her face with a hint of disdain, snorted coldly, and turned her head away, but her eyes still lingered on her big brother.

Seeing the little girl’s reaction, everyone burst into laughter. Ulf took out a necklace strung with what looked like white jade beads from his pocket and handed it to her, saying, “This is a necklace I had made from walrus tusks. It’s a gift for you.”

Gerny took it and happily put it on, then smiled and kissed her brother.

Ulf smiled and took out a longer one, handing it to his mother. “This is your gift.”

“My child has grown up.” Katrin took the necklace and caressed Ulf’s face, feeling the roughness of his skin. She said with concern, “How was your time in Basque? Did you suffer?”

“I am the governor of the western part of the Labrador Peninsula in Basque. How could I suffer?” Ulf patted his chest and laughed. “Mother, don’t worry. Your son is already twenty-two years old. My father was already married to you and had been to sea three times by this age.”

After a few words, everyone returned to Haldor’s fortress. That evening, another banquet was held, but this time it was limited to high-ranking officials like the Oarsmen and close friends and family.

DeGula and Duca, the two priests, were also invited to attend the family banquet and met Ulf.

Before the banquet began, Haldor clearly told the two that he planned to build a church and a school on the east side of the inner city, which would be entrusted to them to manage. However, for now, they would have to make do with the simple residential houses allocated to them for holding mass and teaching Viking children literacy, hymns, mathematics, and other cultural subjects.

DeGula and Duca were the most gentle and honest among the Puritans of Plymouth. Kadir had shown exceptional courage and military prowess multiple times when he was the de facto ruler of Plymouth. Last year, he even led a team to eliminate a nearby Pequot tribe, killing over forty native warriors and capturing more than fifty men, women, and youths as slaves.

Thus, Kadir’s status in Plymouth grew higher, and nominal leaders like McG became increasingly deferential to him. Last month, when Kadir received Haldor’s messenger and learned that Hrut City was preparing to build a church and a school to address the education of the next generation, Haldor also told him to carefully select controllable individuals to ensure that the priests would do whatever Haldor instructed.

Kadir didn’t think much about Haldor and Olaf’s plans to reform Protestant Christianity. He simply chose the two most honest and timid Puritan priests who had attended university and brought them personally.

Hearing Haldor’s words, DeGula and Duca first glanced at Kadir. Seeing no change in his expression, they stood up to express their gratitude.

“Thank you for your care, Lord Haldor. The conditions in the New World are backward, and we will make do with simplicity. As long as we have a place to live and preach, that is enough. Rest assured, we will wholeheartedly educate the Viking youths of Vinland. However, we would like to know what aspects you would like us to focus on in our teaching?”

The two old priests were indeed wise with age. They clearly understood their roles and knew that their task in Vinland was to teach cultural knowledge to the youths and lead a church. They were not to interfere in any other matters, nor could they.

Thus, when facing future teaching and even preaching work, the two consciously adjusted their attitudes and asked Haldor, aiming to understand how to gauge their boundaries.

Haldor was very satisfied with the two priests’ attitudes, which made him even more confident in Kadir’s management of Plymouth City.

Haldor glanced at Olaf, who naturally stood up and spoke in English, “Respected elders, my father’s intention is that you two should focus on language, literature, and scientific industry in your teaching. Hymns and Bible stories should be temporarily minimized.”

The two old priests frowned upon hearing this, wanting to say something but realizing that the other party had not restricted them from speaking, only asking them to speak less for now. Thinking of Kadir’s ruthless methods, DeGula coughed lightly and was the first to respond, “Very well. We will follow Lord Haldor’s instructions.”

“Oh, there’s one more thing we would like the two elders to be mindful of. The language and culture of the native slaves are primitive and crude. To prevent you from being harmed, please do not casually interact or communicate with the natives. We will assign a white slave militiaman to protect your safety and meet your daily needs.”

Olaf’s additional words didn’t make DeGula and the other think deeply. They were not like Elder Blaister, who had lofty aspirations and was a devout believer, nor did they have the bearing of a leader. They only wanted to do their jobs quietly, so they didn’t realize that not being able to interact with the Indian natives also meant they wouldn’t have the opportunity to preach to them. Or perhaps they did realize it but didn’t care, instead expressing their thanks to Haldor for sending someone to protect them.

After some casual conversation, the night grew darker. Seven or eight lamps were added to the hall, making the room even warmer and brighter.

At this time, the cooks brought out roasted meat, boiled sausages, fried fish, and other foods, which were divided and served on wooden platters to everyone.

Several native female slaves poured the Water of Life from bone porcelain bottles into porcelain cups and served them to the guests.

Haldor raised his glass and said a few words, and the banquet to welcome Ulf home began.

After the banquet, the drunken Ulf excitedly pulled Olaf along with him, Half, Heiner, and others to talk about his management in Basque City, such as hunting and fishing, expanding the city, building toilets and manure pits, and cultivating land outside the city to prepare for planting high-yield crops.

Listening to Ulf’s systematic and detailed account, it was clear that he had managed Basque City well. However, Olaf and the others also knew that Ulf didn’t need to exert much effort; he just needed to replicate the Vinland model. After all, the main factor hindering Basque City’s development—the issue of food supply—had been resolved. He only needed to make good use of the slaves and soldiers at his disposal.

The temperature and climate of Basque City were much colder than that of Hrut City on the southeastern peninsula of Vinland. In fact, the climate and temperature, combined with the interference of the Little Ice Age, were almost the same as those in northern Iceland, allowing only the cultivation of cold-resistant rye. Moreover, due to the long winters, the growth cycle of the rye seedlings was short, resulting in lower yields when harvested in early winter compared to warmer regions.

However, with the introduction of potatoes and sweet potatoes, which could be planted in spring and summer and harvested in as little as three to four months, Ulf had also abandoned the cultivation of black rye. Instead, he planned to bring back some sweet potatoes and potatoes when he returned in a few days and plant them when it warmed up at the end of April. By the time the cold set in around October, he could harvest them. Even if the yield was lower, it wouldn’t be less than the potatoes and sweet potatoes Olaf had planted outside Hrut City last summer.

Regarding Ulf’s idea of planting sweet potatoes and potatoes in Basque, Olaf, who had become somewhat of a potato expert and sweet potato professor, naturally had a say. He fully supported his brother and reminded him that the temperature and climate in Basque were even worse than in the northern part of Vinland Island. Therefore, crops in high-altitude cold regions could only grow from late spring to late autumn, a period of six months. Poor climate conditions would slow growth, and yields would naturally not be ideal. However, during the three hottest months of summer, it was crucial to ensure adequate water and fertilizer, which would make a significant difference.

Ulf nodded happily, but since he was already drunk, it was uncertain whether he would remember any of this when he woke up the next day.

…

A few days after Kadir and Ulf returned to Hrut City, Haldor, Haig, and the others were in a daze for two or three days, perhaps because they were so happy that they got drunk almost every day. Fortunately, the lower and middle-ranking Oarsmen, production team leaders, and Heiner were able to carry on their work as usual, so Hrut City did not encounter any problems.

Chapter 128: A Bounty of Export Goods

On the morning of April 9th, around 10 o’clock, Governor Blackstone of Bakens City arrived in Hrut City with ten White Wolf soldiers, one hundred White Wolf troops, and five hundred natives carrying furs and dried fish.

After over a year apart, Blackstone, once thin and dark, had grown noticeably plumper and paler. Dressed in furs and wearing a High Priest’s feathered crown adorned with gold and jade, he led the procession to Haldor’s fortress to pay his respects to his master, General Haldor.

Haldor’s attitude toward Blackstone was entirely different from his treatment of Ulf, Kadir, and the others. Even upon learning of Blackstone’s return, Haldor made no move to greet him, instead waiting leisurely at home for Blackstone to come and pay his respects. This was the stark reality of their master-servant relationship, and as a ruler, Haldor knew the importance of maintaining proper boundaries.

Upon entering, Blackstone prostrated himself on the ground, crying out in fluent Icelandic, “Your faithful hound, Blackstone, greets the great Heavenly God!”

Haldor chuckled lightly. “Rise.”

Blackstone slowly stood, then bowed deeply to Katrin, Olaf, Ulf, Half, and Gerny in turn.

Haldor waved him to a seat before speaking. “You’ve done well in Bakens. I’ve heard all about it. If you have any difficulties, speak up, and I’ll resolve them.”

“There are none, my lord,” Blackstone replied earnestly. “Everything I have is a gift from you. I am content and dare not ask for more…”

In Haldor’s presence, Blackstone was tense and cautious, a far cry from his domineering demeanor in Bakens City. This was the natural reverence he felt in his heart.

After a few words, Haldor noticed Blackstone’s unease and offered some encouragement. Blackstone then respectfully announced, “Your loyal servant has brought you two thousand pelts, over ten thousand dried fish, and five hundred carefully selected young slaves. Please accept them, my lord.”

Last year, Haldor had requested several hundred strong young slaves from Blackstone to supplement the workforce for Jot and Hoskuld’s construction of Haldor City. Blackstone took this as a sign that his master needed more young laborers, so this time, he had brought the five hundred strongest and brightest.

Haldor knew that Ulf intended to use Basque City as a base to gradually expand westward into the continent, a plan that aligned with his own vision. With potatoes and sweet potatoes now providing ample food supplies for Vinland, the next step was to train enough elite soldiers to send to the mainland for colonial expansion.

He was pleased with Blackstone’s offering of five hundred young slaves, feeling that his investment in this slave had not been in vain.

Blackstone’s visit to Hrut City was not only to pay his respects and present slaves, furs, and dried fish but also to deliver a message from the guards he had sent to protect the three mining managers—Edward, Robert, and Hunter—at the three mines in Longling Mountain. The northern iron mine was proving difficult to extract, requiring another month to locate the weakest points for excavation.

However, Robert’s coal mine and Hunter’s copper and gold mines had already found viable extraction sites. With the help of several dozen slaves sent by Blackstone, they had begun initial mining, yielding some combustible coal sludge, coal chunks, and low-grade metal-infused ore.

The coal was manageable—coal sludge and chunks could be used directly—but the low-grade surface ore posed a problem. Extracting the minimal metal content required more advanced and precise equipment for crushing and screening, which would have to be purchased from Europe.

In addition to reporting on the mining progress and difficulties, the three managers requested more tools and equipment. Currently, the slave miners at the three sites had only three or four pickaxes and shovels, mostly relying on stone tools, which were inefficient and prone to breaking. The work of ten men in a day was barely equivalent to half a day’s work for an ordinary English miner.

Besides the need for furnaces and other smelting equipment, essential tools like pickaxes were also in short supply. Haldor noted this down, planning to purchase some from Europe this year.

Two days later, Jot and Hoskuld returned from Haldor City.

After a few lively days of reunion, Haldor began organizing the loading of goods onto the ships. The furs and dried fish from Hrut City’s warehouses, combined with those from Basque City, Bakens City, Haldor City, and Plymouth, had exceeded last year’s quantities.

This year’s prepared goods included a portion set aside for local use, along with a vast amount of dried fish, several thousand pelts, hundreds of large timber logs, two hundred barrels of wine, and two thousand jars of maple syrup.

These goods represented the entirety of Vinland’s and its surrounding regions’ wealth for the year. With a nearly twenty percent increase over last year, the total value, based on last year’s prices, should reach around twenty-three to twenty-four thousand pounds of silver, equivalent to over twenty-three thousand pounds of gold.

Since these goods were produced entirely through the labor of his Viking warriors and slaves, the costs were minimal. Haldor and Heiner had roughly estimated that, after distributing a portion to all the Vikings, this year’s basic income should still match last year’s.

With Europe embroiled in constant warfare, the prices of meat, grain, and alcohol had skyrocketed. Each year, the prices of dried fish and wine continued to rise, much to Haldor’s delight. He believed that if the wars persisted for a few more years, his profits would only grow.

This year, Vinland’s exports included new high-proof spirits—“Water of Life”—as well as Eastern Malt Sugar and starch. Currently, there were one thousand three hundred barrels of Water of Life, six thousand two hundred pounds of malt sugar, and over five hundred pounds of starch.

After consulting with Olaf, Haldor decided to keep one hundred barrels of alcohol and one hundred pounds of malt sugar for local use, selling the rest in Europe.

Whiskey, being the only high-proof spirit available in Europe at the time, was priced at over twenty times that of beer. A large ten-gallon barrel could fetch between two hundred forty to two hundred sixty shillings, nearly fourteen pounds of silver.

The Water of Life, with its superior taste and higher alcohol content, should theoretically command an even higher price than whiskey. Even at whiskey’s price, one thousand two hundred gallons of Water of Life could fetch sixteen thousand eight hundred pounds of silver. As a new luxury item, high-proof spirits were becoming increasingly expensive due to rising grain prices, making them a luxury only the wealthy and nobility could afford.

Eastern Malt Sugar, if properly packaged, would also sell well. However, selling such a large quantity of royal jelly and malt sugar at once would inevitably drive prices down and extend the sales period.

Still, six thousand pounds of malt sugar could fetch at least three thousand pounds of silver, and possibly even exceed six thousand pounds.

The sugar and alcohol factories had been operating for four months, from last winter to now, producing over twenty thousand pounds of silver in value—far surpassing any European factory. Even the Spanish plantations in South America only yielded a few hundred thousand pounds of silver annually. Vinland’s annual income had already far exceeded the combined total of New England, New France, and New Netherlands, approaching one-third of Spain’s South American colonial income.

Beyond the major exports like Water of Life, malt sugar, syrup, and furs, Vinland had another powerful commodity: bone china, crafted by Olaf and the potters over several months.

Currently, two hundred ten intact pieces of bone china had been produced in various sizes and styles, including seven complete tea sets, with the rest being medium to large bottles and jars.

The shape and style of these bone china pieces differed entirely from the official and civilian kiln wares imported from the Ming Dynasty, with only a few products bearing slight similarities.

Their only advantage was their sturdy, smooth texture and classical design. The drawbacks were their lack of aesthetic appeal and monotonous color, primarily white. While they couldn’t compare to Ming Dynasty porcelain, no one could deny they were genuine porcelain.

As long as the price was set low, they wouldn’t be hard to sell.

High-quality porcelain from the Ming Dynasty could fetch exorbitant prices in Europe, with even ordinary official kiln wares or fine civilian pieces selling for dozens to hundreds of pounds of silver. Even the most common porcelain pieces wouldn’t sell for less than one mark or half a pound of silver. Thus, the most profitable European merchants were those dealing in porcelain, sugar, silk, and spices from the Far East, with the Dutch East India Company monopolizing ninety percent of the market.

This monopoly over the vast Far Eastern market was a key reason why the newly independent Dutch Republic—a small nation of just over forty thousand square kilometers with a population of only two million—had risen so rapidly.

The two hundred pieces of high-value bone china were a product Olaf held in high regard. Though the quantity was small and the quality not yet refined, Olaf viewed bone china production as equally important as sugar and alcohol manufacturing.

Olaf’s factory had been operating since last year, with most of its products consumed locally. Some had also been traded with the French and natives for small quantities of furs and copper coins.

High-proof spirits, malt sugar, and bone china were the true wealth-generating commodities. Olaf estimated that if these three products sold well, they could generate thirty thousand pounds of silver in revenue—enough to purchase thirty sturdy hardwood merchant ships, even more robust than the Thor’s Hammer and the Hope. Without considering armaments, this would be sufficient to establish a transoceanic trade fleet. If properly armed, it could support the purchase of ten fully equipped merchant vessels.

Chapter 129: London

In the 1630s, the world’s centers were Quanzhou in the Ming Dynasty and Amsterdam in Europe. The Asian commercial circle was controlled by the Zheng Zhilong Group, while the largest European commercial entity was based in Holland.

This situation would persist for half a century until the fall of the Zheng family in Taiwan and the Dutch defeat by the British navy. Only then would the British Empire rise to dominate the five continents and four seas, becoming the unrivaled “empire on which the sun never sets,” rivaling the French Empire, the strongest power on the European continent.

After Olaf and Haig led their fleet into Port 8 under the guidance of the harbor flagman, Olaf stood at the ship’s railing, gazing at the distant London with a sense of disappointment.

Olaf and Haig had spent over ten days at sea, narrowly avoiding danger, before approaching Ireland. There, they encountered a pirate fleet of three ships. After a boarding battle, Haig personally led the soldiers to kill four pirates without injury, causing the pirates to suddenly retreat.

It was only a week ago that the fleet found its bearings and arrived in Dublin. They spent two days selling some malt sugar, royal jelly, furs, twenty thousand pounds of dried fish, and two sets of bone china, earning over ten thousand pounds in silver. During the transaction, Haig, Olaf, and the others stayed at O’More’s villa, and O’More helped sell a significant portion of the goods.

Olaf and O’More then discussed two business deals: recruiting young Irish men as white slaves and helping the Irish purchase firearms and ammunition. After leaving Lorin to reunite with her family, Haig and Olaf, accompanied by a steward sent by O’More, left Ireland for London, the capital of England.

Since Haig had become O’More’s son-in-law, his personality made it impossible for him to discuss business with O’More.

In his youth, he followed his brother, and all business negotiations were handled by Haldor. Later, in Vinland, he focused on development for two years. When Ulf came of age, he took him to Europe to sell furs and dried fish, leaving most of the negotiations to Ulf. A few years later, Ulf took over completely.

Now that Olaf had come along, Haig was worried that continuing the white slave trade and arms procurement with his brother-in-law would harm Vinland’s interests. He decisively stated that this business trip would be entirely handled by his nephew Olaf. Olaf took charge, engaging in several rounds of verbal sparring with O’More, ultimately securing two major deals. O’More had painstakingly arranged for his sister, who had lost her fiancé, to marry Haig, but he didn’t gain any advantage. Instead, he was so angry that he stomped his feet. Finally, Haig couldn’t bear to see it and promised to personally gift his brother-in-law a cannon.

Only after Haig’s promise did O’More’s anger turn to joy. After hosting a family banquet, he personally saw off Olaf and Haig.

After leaving Dublin, Olaf and Haig prepared to lead the fleet directly to Amsterdam, Europe’s largest port, where they could sell a large quantity of goods within one to two weeks.

However, as soon as the fleet left Irish waters, five sailors fell seriously ill with colds and leprosy. Knowing that if the disease spread in the confined ship cabins, the entire crew of over twenty would soon be infected and unlikely to survive without medical care, Olaf and Haig decided to head to London first to treat the sick before proceeding to Amsterdam.

Olaf had expected London, as the capital of England, to be a bustling and massive city. But when the ship docked at the West India Docks on the Isle of Dogs, surrounded by the Thames, Olaf clearly saw the golden sunset reflecting off the western river, with low, dilapidated wooden houses and scattered fields and forests on both sides. Most villages were connected by muddy dirt roads, with only a two-to-three-person-wide gravel path extending from the dock to the north side of the river, disappearing into the woods and mist.

This first impression of London was worse than Reykjavik, let alone Dublin and Edinburgh. Compared to international metropolises like Amsterdam, it wasn’t even fit to carry their shoes.

Haig emerged from the cabin, seemingly noticing Olaf’s disappointment and disdain. Pointing westward, he said, “This is just the West India Docks in eastern London. I came here twice with Haldor over a decade ago. I didn’t expect this port to be much larger than before.”

Olaf came to his senses and looked at the port, discovering dozens of docks with hundreds of large ships and several hundred small boats.

It was afternoon, and the sailors on the large ships were busy, using planks and cranes to transfer goods from the ships to the small boats or vice versa.

On the eastern side of the Thames, a narrow wooden bridge spanned the river, its height limited, allowing only small wooden boats to pass beneath. Sailors rowed back and forth under the bridge, transporting goods from the docks to the faintly visible town in the west.

“Five more bridges west is where London’s city government and the Whitehall Palace are located,” Haig said, pointing at the Thames to the west.

Olaf’s heart stirred, realizing that the port he was in was just the outskirts of London, far from the city center. To see the true face of 17th-century London, he needed to travel further upstream along the Thames.

Haig noticed Olaf’s curiosity and restlessness, which was typical of a teenager. He laughed heartily, stroking his silver-white beard, and said, “Once I get the tax registration card, we can go into the city and have some fun.”

Olaf nodded. Haig first instructed someone to call a doctor to examine the sick sailors, then took two Icelandic Vikings ashore to pay the fees and obtain the tax card at the management committee. He also listed several goods that had been on the ship at the exchange, and by morning, merchants would come to inspect the goods.

The weather in London was warmer than in Vinland. Haig instructed the sailors and guards to watch over the ship and goods, then he and Olaf changed out of their fur clothes, putting on clean undergarments and trousers, and donning linen robes. They took five sturdy Viking guards and disembarked.

The seven of them walked to the western exit and hailed the smallest wooden skiff. After agreeing on the price, they squeezed in.

The boatman pushed the oars a few times, and the skiff slowly left the West India Docks, heading upstream along the Thames.

After passing through four bridge arches, Olaf saw neat, beautiful two-story buildings along the Thames. The people on the banks and bridges were no longer just poor commoners and laborers.

Well-dressed Englishmen, some with bags and others with baskets, walked along the road. Beggars and prostitutes darted about, and merchants with carts and shops with signs began to appear. Luxurious carriages also appeared on the roads along the river, and through the wooden lattice windows, one could see elegantly dressed women and gentlemen with canes.

Before the fifth bridge, the skiff stopped. Haig took out a few dozen copper coins from his pocket and handed them to the boatman. Then, everyone leaped onto the riverbank and climbed the moss-covered steps to the shore.

When his feet touched the solid, smooth stone pavement, Olaf saw 17th-century London for the first time—the capital of England and one of the top ten cities in Europe.

The city had wide streets paved with stone, lined with grass and flowers. Even horse manure was being cleaned up, showing that the core area of London had already taken shape as a city.

“That tall palace is the king’s residence?” an Icelandic Viking asked, pointing at the towering palace complex in the southwest, standing out among the one- and two-story stone and wooden buildings.

Olaf and Haig also immediately noticed the palace complex. It was four stories high, made of rock, with colorful paint and various carvings and patterns—a blend of Baroque and Nordic styles. It wasn’t as sacred and towering as a grand cathedral, but it was much more luxurious.

“That’s the royal palace built during the time of James I. I heard that after Charles I ascended the throne, it was expanded several times. It’s truly magnificent!” Haig shook his head in admiration.

Olaf remembered hearing about this palace in Amsterdam two years ago with his uncle and brother. He smiled and said, “I heard in Amsterdam that Whitehall Palace is one of the largest in Europe. Seeing it in person, it’s indeed impressive! Haldor’s fortress in Hrut City and the governor’s residence in Reykjavik can’t compare to even one of its buildings!”

“Haha, you should know that a royal palace is built with the resources of an entire nation. Even if we invested all of Vinland’s income over the past few years into building a palace, we couldn’t create even a tenth of Whitehall Palace…”

Haig was well aware of the vast power and wealth of a nation, so he chuckled lightly.

Olaf neither agreed nor disagreed, but in his heart, he scoffed: It seems the famous Buckingham Palace of later years hasn’t been built yet, or it’s not well-known. But this palace is indeed larger than the future Buckingham Palace! It’s a shame that the palace is guarded by royal guards. If only we could get closer to see it clearly…

But what good is your palace, no matter how grand?

Olaf thought of nineteen years later, when Whitehall Palace, also known as Westminster Palace or Whitehall, would be the residence of Charles I, the king of the united kingdoms of England, Scotland, and Ireland. The king, who lived in this magnificent palace, would have his head chopped off outside its gates.

Knowing this great event that would destroy the English pirate monarchy, Olaf couldn’t help but feel a sense of schadenfreude, despising the decadent Charles I.

What’s so great about you? A king who gets his head chopped off…

Thinking of Charles I’s head, Olaf also thought of Cromwell, who would behead him. Olaf mused that he was still young and might have the chance to meet the future Lord Protector, who had just lost his job and returned to being a lord of the manor after Charles I dissolved Parliament. After all…

Burning the cold stove is what a time traveler should do!

Chapter 130: Whitehall Palace

As the sky gradually darkened over London’s streets, Olaf and Haig casually found a tavern and, accompanied by five guards, took a seat at an empty table. They ordered three cheese pizzas, roasted fish, soybean rice, and other main dishes, followed by seven pints of black beer.

Soon, the food and beer arrived. After they finished eating and listened to the idle chatter of Londoners in the tavern for a while, they left before nightfall.

Normally, there would have been a couple of drunken thugs trying to swindle money from outsiders, but upon seeing the two towering giants, Olaf and Haig, along with their unnamed, burly companions, they decided to behave themselves.

…

In the 17th century, London’s streets were only lit by a few taverns at night, while most shops had closed for the day, leaving the streets increasingly deserted.

Taking advantage of the remaining daylight to see their surroundings clearly, Olaf glanced at the colorful lights shining through the stained-glass windows in the distance, silently cursing the extravagance and corruption of the English king. Then, he and Haig boarded a small boat back to the West Indies port.

When Haig and Olaf returned to the ship, two doctors were waiting for them with somber expressions.

Seeing the bloodstains and multicolored medicinal residues on the middle-aged doctors’ robes, it was clear they had just treated patients.

“Mr. Haig, your crew seems to have been afflicted by some evil at sea. We have administered medicine, performed enemas, and conducted bloodletting. The leper has been treated with heated bird droppings, which initially showed promise, but just now, their condition has worsened!”

“What should we do?”

Most of the afflicted were indentured white slaves. The death of a native slave was one thing, but the loss of four indentured white slaves would require compensation to their families. More importantly, indentured white slaves were a scarce labor resource in Vinland, and Haig was unwilling to let the patients die.

Olaf furrowed his brow. He knew that the traditional European treatment was bloodletting, but how could bloodletting cure all ailments? The problem was, he didn’t know what disease the sailors had contracted, and even if he did, he had no medicine to treat them.

Not being a professional, Olaf didn’t dare to question the doctors, so he could only say, “Please continue the treatment. May I ask how you plan to treat the patients?”

“We have discussed it and decided to perform another bloodletting on the four afflicted patients, this time two ounces, along with internal administration of goat’s beard and spider eggs. It should be effective.” The two doctors solemnly delivered what Olaf considered a ridiculous joke.

Olaf nearly laughed out loud. He waved his hand and said, “No need. Just use the simplest treatment methods!”

“This…” The two doctors exchanged glances, clearly wanting to persuade Olaf further.

Haig already knew that Olaf opposed treatments like bloodletting. Although Haig didn’t fully trust these methods, the problem was that besides these professionals, no other doctors could be found.

After some thought, Haig also said, “Doctors, please use the simplest treatment methods.”

“Then please prepare some wine, heat it, add a little salt, and have them drink some. It might be effective, but…”

This time, before the doctors could finish, Olaf quickly instructed his men to follow the prescription.

The next morning, when Olaf woke up, he received terrible news: of the five patients, the leper was still barely alive in his room, while the remaining four had fallen into comas overnight. The last one was running a high fever that wouldn’t break.

Olaf and Haig had no way to deal with the situation. They could only order their sailors and guards not to come into contact with the patients, fearing the possibility of infection, and then spent an additional twenty shillings to have the two doctors continue treatment.

After eating a meal of potato and sweet potato mash with meat, Olaf and Haig heard someone outside speaking English in a standard London accent. Haig listened carefully and laughed heartily, “Business has come to us!”

Olaf swallowed his food and also heard clearly that a merchant outside the ship was loudly inquiring, seemingly preparing to purchase furs.

Having weathered over twenty years of storms, Haig, and Olaf, who had been instructed by Haldor, both understood one thing: they couldn’t fully expose the valuable cargo on their ships—furs, bone china, malt syrup, and the Water of Life. After all, during the pan-European war, the ruling class of any European country had revealed their true nature as bandits.

If the powerful became greedy, not only would Haig and Olaf face mortal danger, but Vinland’s year of hard work and accumulation would be destroyed in an instant. Therefore, they brought over three hundred elite men who could turn into violent pirates at any moment. However, to avoid danger and trouble, when Haig registered at the exchange, he only listed a small amount of furs, malt sugar, syrup, and other valuable goods, while the majority were timber, dried fish, and alcohol.

Through the exchange’s registration, everyone would have a good impression of this ship fleet from Iceland, believing it had some long-distance navigation capabilities and strength, possessing valuable bulk commodities and a small amount of luxury goods. Such merchant fleets docked at London’s West Indies port five or six times a week, so they weren’t particularly conspicuous.

If Haig had registered at the exchange that the timber was just a cover, and the real goods were over two hundred pieces of porcelain, one thousand two hundred barrels of high-proof liquor exceeding whiskey, six thousand pounds of malt sugar, two thousand jars of royal jelly, one hundred thousand pounds of dried fish, six thousand rare furs…

Even a fool would know that these dazzling, valuable goods were worth over two hundred thousand pounds of silver. Such a vast fortune would not only tempt officials and merchants at all levels but also prompt Charles I of Whitehall Palace to issue orders for open or covert seizure.

When wealth was too great, no one cared about gentility and moral etiquette; they only believed in the law of the jungle…

So Haig only registered one-tenth of the goods at the London exchange. Even so, it caused a sensation among London’s merchant and noble circles.

Because Haig’s fleet brought rare furs not commonly seen in the market—beaver pelts, river otter pelts, white wolf pelts, white bear pelts, black bear pelts—and also porcelain and malt sugar from the Far East’s Ming Dynasty, as well as a sweet drink that had become popular among the upper class in recent years—royal jelly. As for the high-proof liquor called the Water of Life, the British didn’t think much of it, considering it just a special kind of whiskey.

Haig was well aware that every year, his fleet in Amsterdam would attract dozens of large and small merchants who would take turns or appear together to bid on purchases. He had thought that the British would also come in large numbers this morning, but when his men brought the British merchant inside, Haig and Olaf were surprised to find only one middle-aged man wearing a woolen robe and a top hat. The man was richly dressed, with an extraordinary demeanor, but without the arrogance of a noble. Behind him followed two young attendants. Haig guessed he was either a wealthy merchant backed by a family or a front man for a great noble.

As Olaf and Haig observed the middle-aged man entering the cabin, the man was also observing Haig and Olaf sitting at the wooden table. Even seated, the two Icelanders appeared tall and burly, which subtly pressured Crock. He felt this was a natural reaction of a traditional English gentleman encountering a wild Nordic bear.

“Respected Captain Haig, I am Crock, the manager of the Essex Fur Company. I heard you have a large quantity of precious beaver pelts, so I came specifically to take a look.”

Crock politely greeted Haig and stated his purpose.

Haig stood up, shook Crock’s hand, and invited him to sit.

“Thank you, Mr. Crock, for coming. Please, have a seat.”

“Our furs all come from the deep forests of Northern Europe and Siberia, trophies won by local hunters with blood and time!” Haig spoke passionately, even recounting a tragic tale of a fur hunter he claimed to have witnessed in the dense forests of Northern Europe, as if he had seen it with his own eyes.

Chapter 131: The Essex Leather Company

Lies told often enough become truth, and Haig had honed his art of deception to perfection. Olaf couldn’t help but admire his uncle’s skill in the back of his mind.

Haig’s smooth talk might have worked on ordinary merchants, but Crock was a seasoned veteran of the marketplace. Though he appeared every inch the gentleman, beneath that veneer lurked the cunning of a rogue.

“Yes, Mr. Haig, I believe every word you say,” Crock agreed amiably. “So if the beaver pelts are of superior quality, our company is willing to pay a premium! Sir, might we see the goods?”

Crock had been nodding along with Haig’s every word, only now politely requesting to inspect the merchandise. He remained completely unruffled by Haig’s salesmanship.

Olaf sensed he was dealing with a master merchant and shot his uncle a meaningful glance, signaling him to stop talking. At the same time, he ordered the white slave sailors in the hold to bring up some sample furs for Crock to examine.

Soon, a dozen complete pelts were spread out on the table.

Only after Haig gestured his permission did Crock reach out to touch them, savoring the silky smoothness beneath his fingers. “Excellent!” he exclaimed. “Mr. Haig, what price are you asking?”

Haig pointed to each pelt in turn. “Beaver pelts at twenty-two pounds of silver each, river otter pelts at seventeen pounds, black bear pelts at forty-six pounds, fox pelts at ten pounds, white wolf pelts at thirteen pounds, and white bear pelts at one hundred pounds each…”

Crock shook his head repeatedly at Haig’s quoted prices. After some haggling, the final price was knocked down by over twenty percent before the deal was struck.

Crock purchased all two hundred beaver pelts, two hundred river otter pelts, ten black bear pelts, one hundred white wolf pelts, two white bear pelts, and over a hundred squirrel pelts. Then the two men drew up a contract.

After the contract was signed, Crock shook Haig’s hand with evident satisfaction. “The total comes to eighteen thousand pounds of silver. I’ll have someone bring the money over shortly. It’s a large sum, so it may take some time to gather.”

“What’s the hurry?” Haig laughed. “Mr. Crock, why not stay for lunch on the ship?”

“Thank you for the invitation, Mr. Haig!” Crock accepted graciously, then continued, “I hear you also have porcelain from the Ming Dynasty. Might I take a look?”

Haig glanced at Olaf, who smiled and said, “Mr. Crock, are you interested in porcelain as well?”

“Who wouldn’t appreciate fine porcelain?” Crock chuckled. “Our company’s owner, Sir Bulchir, wishes to purchase some quality pieces, so he asked me to take a look while I was here.”

“Oh? Your company’s owner is a noble sir? Then he must appreciate our porcelain!” Olaf casually agreed, then personally fetched a set of white porcelain teaware.

Bone china looked almost identical to white porcelain at first glance, so fooling European amateurs was no problem. Olaf presented this set as genuine Ming Dynasty imperial ware.

Crock carefully examined the teaware, then declared with certainty, “This is clearly porcelain from the East, though the style seems somewhat different from what I’ve seen before…”

“This is a custom design tailored to European tastes. We have several similar pieces.”

“That’s truly excellent.” Crock reluctantly let go of the teaware, then cautiously asked, “Mr. Haig and this young gentleman, what price are you asking for this set?”

“I’m Olaf, Mr. Crock.” Olaf introduced himself with grave seriousness.

“Very well, Mr. Olaf.”

Olaf had no idea of the market price for porcelain, so he casually replied, “You’re welcome to make an offer. The porcelain market is quite transparent, after all.”

Seeing the young man toss the ball back into his court, Crock smiled slightly and said, “Based on my experience, this set’s monochromatic design means it won’t fetch a high price. I could offer you one thousand shillings.”

One thousand shillings equaled over forty pounds of silver. Olaf raised an eyebrow and shook his head. “Impossible! We paid fifteen hundred shillings for this in the Ming Dynasty. You should know that if we weren’t stopping to care for sick crew members, we’d be heading straight to Amsterdam. If you bought this from Dutch merchants, you’d likely pay three thousand shillings or more!”

Crock looked at Olaf with resignation, convinced that this youth of eighteen or nineteen was actually a seasoned merchant. He steeled himself for some hard bargaining.

After a long negotiation, Crock selected seven sets of bone china teaware and several pairs of vases from Olaf’s stock—all produced in Olaf’s bone china factory. The final price was one thousand three hundred and eighty pounds of silver.

Olaf had over two hundred pieces of porcelain, but the finest and most valuable had been cherry-picked by Crock. The rest were of lesser quality, so he would have to sell them to smaller merchants.

After purchasing the porcelain, one of Crock’s attendants entered with servants carrying two chests of gold coins.

Once the coins were verified, both parties shook hands and parted ways. Haig took the contract and five thousand shillings to pay the taxes, only relaxing after receiving the official receipt.

In the afternoon, seven or eight more merchants arrived, though their purchasing power was limited. Together, they bought five hundred pounds of royal jelly and three hundred pounds of malt sugar. A wine merchant took all two hundred barrels of wine in one purchase.

Royal jelly, with its unique flavor and royal associations, sold at its usual premium. Malt sugar and starch, however, were harder to move.

Olaf eventually lowered the price by thirty percent, selling the malt sugar at the same rate as ordinary black sugar. Only then did a few merchants dare to try it, purchasing three hundred pounds in total. The starch didn’t attract any interest at all.

Grain merchants, general merchants, and sugar specialists were all willing to buy Olaf’s royal jelly and malt sugar. However, the wine trade in London was dominated by a few nobles like the Earl of Warwick, who controlled ninety percent of the market. The wine merchant who bought Olaf’s stock had limited capacity. After tasting the “Water of Life,” he gritted his teeth and paid Olaf’s price—thirty percent higher than whiskey—for one barrel.

…

The fleet remained docked at London’s West India Docks for about five days. Starting from the second day at noon, merchants from London and Scotland came daily to purchase malt sugar, royal jelly, and dried fish. Though the docks were bustling from morning till night, the total daily sales never exceeded one thousand pounds of silver.

London’s limited size meant sales volumes couldn’t match Amsterdam’s. Additionally, with two sick sailors still recovering, they had to take things slowly.

Over those five days, three of the five sick sailors died and were hastily buried.

One of the healthier white slave sailors gradually recovered, while another slave afflicted with leprosy—whether due to strong resistance or the doctors’ haphazard treatments—began to show improvement. The lumps and red patches on his head and face started to fade, indicating slow but steady recovery.

The improving health of the sailors relieved Haig and the others.

Haig had been planning to leave London for Amsterdam, but Olaf insisted on waiting a few more days, concerned about potential relapses in the sailors’ conditions.

On the sixth day, besides local English merchants, traders from Denmark, Norway, Holland, and the Baltic region also arrived.

Word had spread through London’s commercial circles about the fleet at Dock 8 selling porcelain, royal jelly, Eastern malt sugar, and spirits stronger than whiskey. The foreign merchants who came this time had greater purchasing power than the locals, buying two to three times as much.

After Haig and Olaf sold three hundred jars of royal jelly, sixteen hundred pounds of malt sugar, two hundred and sixty barrels of “Water of Life,” and thirty thousand pounds of dried fish, Crock sought them out again. He personally invited them to a banquet two days hence at Bulchir Manor in Chelmsford. The invitation came from his boss, Sir James Bulchir, Chelmsford’s preeminent merchant.

Through their interactions with English merchants in London, Olaf and Haig learned that the Essex Company was London’s largest leather concern, specializing in tanning and production. Its owner, Sir James Bulchir, was one of London’s most prominent merchants and the largest landowner and noble in Essex County—a man of considerable influence in the Kingdom of England.

The invitation from Sir Bulchir left Haig and Olaf both honored and hesitant.

Haig’s guard was up. He knew their recent earnings of over thirty thousand pounds of silver had likely attracted attention. England was a nation that produced professional pirates and adventurers. If not for concerns about repercussions and the fleet’s hundreds of armed guards, someone might have already made a move!

Though wary of Bulchir’s intentions, Haig wasn’t one to shy away from trouble. He met Crock’s gaze with a smile and asked in a low voice, “Please thank Sir Bulchir for the invitation. We’ll certainly attend. But Mr. Crock, could you tell us why the sir wishes to invite us?”

Chapter 132: Sir Bulchir

Haig’s inquiry was extremely rude—it was practically an insult to the nobleman who had invited him. Social etiquette dictated that one could only accept or decline an invitation, not question why they had been invited. Strictly speaking, this was a blatant disregard for aristocratic decorum.

Crock merely furrowed his brow, inwardly scornful of the uncouth Icelander, but his expression remained cold and indifferent. “Mr. Haig, I cannot answer your question. However, to my knowledge, Sir Bulchir is quite fond of the porcelain you sell, and Sir Stephen, who is also a guest at the Essex estate, has shown interest as well.”

“Sir Stephen?” Olaf’s eyebrows shot up in surprise. “You mean Sir Carnavon Stephen, the Governor of Ireland?”

“Yes, sir.” Crock shrugged lightly.

“Has the Governor of Ireland returned to London?” Olaf turned to Haig, who muttered in response.

Crock’s expression made it clear he knew something but had no intention of sharing it with the two of them. Knowing that Stephen was part of the gathering, Olaf and Haig breathed a sigh of relief. After all, he was an old nobleman they had dealt with for years—it was likely Stephen who had invited them.

Just half a month ago, Olaf had sold furs, royal jelly, malt sugar, and the Water of Life to the Governor’s residence and Lord Bowes. As a long-time customer, Olaf had even waived several dozen pounds of silver in change, earning verbal praise from both dignitaries.

He hadn’t expected that after just half a month, Governor Stephen would return to London—whether for official business or personal reasons, no one knew…

Olaf quickly made up his mind. With a smile, he bid farewell to Crock, then agreed with Haig to visit the Essex estate in two days’ time.

With their plans for the day after tomorrow settled, Olaf and Haig decided to leave for Amsterdam as soon as they returned from the gathering.

During his week in the West Indies port, Olaf had not been idle. Besides dealing with merchants from various regions, he had been gathering information about England and the European nations, compiling and analyzing it in his mind to grasp the latest developments in Europe’s political landscape.

The Catholic League and the Protestant Union were now in a state of suspended major conflict, with only minor skirmishes continuing.

The Thirty Years’ War had essentially stalled since last April, when King Christian IV of Denmark signed a treaty with the Habsburg Emperor.

At this point, the Holy Roman Empire, seeking to reduce military expenditures, had disbanded the forces under Wallenstein’s command. France and England, meanwhile, were searching for new proxies or waiting for the right moment to intervene directly.

The shifting tides of Europe seemed to slow and grow monotonous by May 1630.

Upon learning of the changes in the war between the Protestant and Catholic alliances, Olaf breathed a sigh of relief. The events were unfolding just as he remembered from the “Thirty Years’ War.” Denmark had signed a treaty with the Holy Roman Emperor in May 1629, after which the Empire’s forces began securing ports in the Baltic Sea and constructing warships.

The tense but temporary peace lasted until July 1630, when the Lion of the North, the King of Sweden, would cross the Baltic Sea with French and English funding and even mercenary support, launching an invasion into northern Germany. The Swedish advance would continue until the Battle of Lützen in November 1632, where King Gustavus Adolphus II, the undefeated commander of the Swedish forces, would fall in battle. The Swedish offensive would then shift to a defensive stance, followed by France’s direct intervention. Denmark would seize the opportunity after the death of the Northern Lion to attack Sweden, leading to a chaotic series of battles between the Franco-Swedish-English coalition and the forces of Denmark, Spain, Holland, and the Holy Roman Empire. The war would finally conclude in October 1648 with the signing of a peace treaty, marking the victory of the Protestant Union.

Olaf knew that in just two months, the Swedish forces would march south, and the name of Gustavus Adolphus II would shake all of Europe.

While gathering information about Europe, Olaf also kept a close eye on the London market. He spent over eight thousand shillings purchasing several thousand sets of pickaxes, shovels, and other mining tools, while also inquiring about the sale of iron smelting furnaces.

Though the Industrial Revolution had not yet begun, becoming a powerful nation in Europe still required access to high-quality iron ore, which was essential for forging superior firearms and cannons.

Currently, the countries and regions in Europe with large, high-quality iron mines under active exploitation included Sweden, France, England, Germany, and Holland. England’s iron smelting technology, in particular, was world-class, on par with that of Holland and Sweden.

When Olaf purchased the pickaxes, he examined them and found the iron to be of excellent quality. Determined not to spare any expense, he decided to buy an iron smelting furnace in England and hire several blacksmiths to help Vinland increase its iron ore production and steel refining.

Over the past few days, Olaf and Haig had noticed a phenomenon: in the West Indies port of London, over a dozen ships were simultaneously recruiting indentured white slaves and free settlers, preparing to relocate them en masse to the New England region of the West Indies.

Upon investigation, Olaf discovered that this was a colonization effort by the Massachusetts Bay Company. They had first commissioned manor lords near Cambridge to recruit free settlers and indentured white slaves, then conducted deceptive propaganda at the docks, portraying the New World as a land of gold. Every day, dozens or even hundreds of people eagerly signed up, trading all their possessions for a ship ticket in the hope of striking it rich overnight.

Olaf recalled the future state of Massachusetts in New England and felt a pang of urgency. He knew that the Virginia Colony had already been established on the southern East Coast—this would become the future state of Virginia. If the Massachusetts Colony was established this year, it would become the future state of Massachusetts.

He realized that England’s colonization of the New World was about to enter a phase of large-scale population migration. Within a decade or two, over a hundred thousand English colonists would settle along the East Coast of North America. Vinland’s dominance would quickly crumble as the English population grew. They had to expand as much as possible while New England was still weak!

Olaf’s sense of urgency deepened as he watched the English indentured white slaves and free settlers board the ships under the guidance of their manor lords. As one ship after another, bearing the flags of the Massachusetts Bay Company, departed for North America, his mood grew heavier.

“The situation in North America is changing with the influx of English settlers!” Olaf said to his uncle.

Haig was well aware of England’s many hostile actions against New France and understood that as the New England colonies grew in population, future conflicts—or even war—between Vinland and New England were inevitable. They had to remain vigilant and prepare in advance.

“Olaf, what do you think we should do about the English as their power grows? Should we control them like Plymouth does, or maintain friendly trade relations?” Haig knew that as Vinland developed, they couldn’t just rely on force. He was troubled and sought Olaf’s advice.

Olaf thought for a moment, then shook his head. “We don’t need to offend the English. North America is vast. We just need to keep expanding inland, securing more land, people, and resources. New England won’t be a threat to us for a while. Once our territory and population grow, we can take New England whenever we want!”

Chapter 133: Mr. Cromwell, Good Day

European nobles and wealthy merchants often mingled and utilized one another, so social gatherings like banquets and balls were quite frequent. In any European country or city, such events were held daily, large and small.

A significant portion of the royal and noble income was devoted to these lavish affairs—a tradition, a habit ingrained in their society.

Soon, the day of Sir Bulstrode’s banquet arrived. Olaf and Haig rose early, washed up, and donned their newly tailored wool suits. The garments had been commissioned just two days prior at a tailor on Elizabeth Street and were only delivered the night before.

The two suits had cost eight hundred shillings in gold coins. Normally, they would have been paired with silk stockings imported from the Ming Dynasty in the Far East to give their legs a refined appearance. However, Olaf was adamantly opposed to wearing silk stockings. In the end, Haig relented, and they settled for ordinary long trousers, tucking the hems neatly into their riding boots—a practical yet presentable look.

After inspecting each other’s attire and ensuring everything was in order, they sprayed themselves with the expensive perfume they had purchased alongside their suits. Then, accompanied by ten Viking guards, they disembarked from their ship and left the harbor.

One of the guards led out the twelve fine horses Haig had bought the day before from a nearby stable. Mounted on their steeds, the group set off along a small path heading north toward Essex County.

Essex lay northeast of London, roughly thirty miles away. Riding at a swift pace, they arrived in the county seat by late morning, where they caught sight of the low, crumbling ancient city walls and the assorted buildings beyond.

After inquiring about the location of Sir Bulstrode’s estate, they found it situated before a wooded area north of the county seat. The courtyard was already filled with over a dozen ornate carriages, and several servants stood waiting.

“Good day, gentlemen!” A young servant approached with a bow. “Might I ask if you are here for the banquet?”

“My master and I are Haig and Olaf, merchants from Iceland, invited by Sir Bulstrode…”

One of the Icelanders stepped forward to explain in English. The servant quickly bowed again. “Then please, Master Haig and Master Olaf, come inside. The banquet begins at noon!”

Haig and Olaf dismounted, intending to enter with their ten guards, but the servant politely stopped them, requesting they surrender their swords and daggers for safekeeping. Haig complied without hesitation, and once their weapons were handed over, they proceeded through the main gate into the estate, arriving at the grand hall connected to the rear garden.

The hall and garden were already filled with long tables laden with cakes, sausages, bacon, pickled fish, puddings, and other delicacies. Servants moved about, pouring red wine and whiskey into crystal glasses.

Many elegantly dressed men and women had already gathered in small groups, chatting. The towering figures of Haig, Olaf, and their guards immediately drew attention as they entered. Olaf murmured, “Esbjörn, you and the others should disperse and get something to eat.”

The guards glanced at Haig, who gave no sign of objection, so they nodded and scattered.

Ignoring the curious gazes around them, Haig and Olaf helped themselves to some food.

Before long, an elderly servant approached them, bowed, and spoke in Latin, “Master Haig, Master Olaf, my lord requests your presence.”

Haig barely understood, but Olaf responded fluently in Latin, albeit with a slight Icelandic accent, “Please, lead the way.”

As the old servant guided them toward the hall, Olaf leaned toward his uncle and whispered, “Sir Bulstrode wishes to speak with us.”

“Very well,” Haig coughed lightly. “My Latin is poor. If they start speaking formally, you’ll have to handle it.”

Olaf nodded, but before he could reply, he noticed a round table ahead, piled high with fine food and various drinks. The moment they drew near, the rich aroma of the Water of Life filled his senses. Behind the table sat six men of varying ages and demeanors, two of whom appeared to be wearing wigs.

The six men had been conversing quietly but fell silent as Haig and Olaf approached, greeting them with smiles.

Haig and Olaf returned the smiles, then stood before an elderly man and bowed. “Esteemed Lord Stephen, it is a pleasure to see you again!”

The man in the fur-lined wool coat, with his curled mustache, was none other than Ireland’s Governor, Carnavon Stephen. He gave a slight nod, then gestured toward the two of them as he addressed his companions. “Earls Allen and Newfrank, Sir Bulstrode, Hampton, and young Cromwell, these two fine gentlemen are the Icelandic noble descendants I mentioned—Haig and his nephew, the remarkably clever and mature young Olaf. Each year, they supply me with the finest beaver pelts and royal jelly.”

The nobles of varying ages nodded in acknowledgment, then smiled at Haig and Olaf. A man of similar age to Stephen rose and said, “Welcome, Master Haig and young Master Olaf, to my banquet. I am James Bulstrode. This is the Earl of Newfrank, son-in-law to the Prince of Orange in Holland. This is the Earl of Warwick, Allen. This is my son-in-law, Mr. Cromwell. And this is Hampton, formerly a member of Parliament, now a full-time merchant.”

Bulstrode’s witty remark drew laughter from the younger Earl of Newfrank and the others. Hampton shook his head, and from their conversation, it was clear they all harbored resentment toward King Charles I for dissolving Parliament two years prior and imposing autocratic rule.

Haig and Olaf greeted the nobles with proper decorum, though Olaf found himself particularly intrigued by the young man named Cromwell, studying his thin, curly-haired face for a moment longer.

These nobles had already seen the porcelain, Water of Life, malt candy, royal jelly, and furs that Bulstrode had purchased from Haig and Olaf, and they were quite interested. They quickly negotiated with Haig for their respective shares, though since the quantity he had reported was limited, he dared not promise anything on the spot. Instead, he agreed to gather another batch of goods by next month.

Before long, the high-ranking nobles and merchant representatives had finalized a massive deal worth one hundred thousand pounds of silver, with delivery set for June.

Once the negotiations concluded, Governor Stephen indicated they were free to leave. Haig and Olaf discreetly withdrew from the circle and moved to a table on the periphery to eat.

After some time, musicians and dancers took the stage, filling the banquet with graceful movements and enchanting melodies.

The guests paused to watch. Olaf glanced back at the main table and noticed that Governor Stephen and the two most distinguished earls had disappeared, likely retiring to another area. The host, Bulstrode, was dancing with a young lady in the center of the hall, while Hampton and Cromwell stood nearby, sipping whiskey.

A thought struck Olaf, and he quickly made his way over.

“Mr. Cromwell, good day!” Standing before the man who was roughly his height but a decade older, Olaf smiled lightly and greeted him.

Chapter 134: Befriending the Future Lord Protector

“Good day, Mr. Cromwell!”

Hearing someone address him in Latin, Cromwell sensed the voice was young yet somewhat familiar. Turning, he saw the young merchant from the fallen Icelandic noble family—Olaf.

Cromwell’s upbringing and character prevented him from underestimating the foreign youth. After warmly shaking Olaf’s hand, he smiled. “Good day, Mr. Olaf! You look quite young—perhaps nearly ten years my junior—and yet you already represent your family in trade. Truly impressive!”

Olaf did not directly answer Cromwell’s probing about his age. After all, how could he admit he was only thirteen? Though physically just over thirteen, his height and build surpassed that of the average Englishman. Coupled with his downy, golden beard, mature speech, and demeanor, he appeared to be a Nordic youth in his early twenties. Dressed more maturely today, Cromwell naturally assumed him to be in his mid-twenties.

Olaf clearly recognized this and saw no need to reveal the truth. A minor would struggle to earn respect, but a promising young man was another matter entirely.

After some small talk, Olaf curiously asked, “My cousin by marriage is from the Williams family of Edinburgh, Scotland. He once mentioned that his family is related to the late Thomas Cromwell, the formidable Chancellor of England from decades past. He said there is only one Cromwell family in England—does that make you a descendant of the Chancellor?”

Cromwell chuckled elegantly and nodded. “If your cousin is indeed from the Williams family, then we share the same lineage. My great-grandfather, Chad Williams, inherited all of Thomas’s estate and carried on the Cromwell name.”

“So, you are Olaf Cromwell of Huntingdon?” Olaf pressed, his eyes gleaming.

Cromwell looked surprised. “You’ve heard of me? Huntingdon is but a small place.”

He added, “My family is neither noble nor lowly—just an ordinary gentry household. However, my great-grandfather, grandfather, and uncle were all remarkable men.”

Olaf now confirmed that the middle-aged man before him—with his brown hair, blue eyes, and the mole on his right brow—was none other than the future Lord Protector, Oliver Cromwell, who would one day execute Charles I. Gazing at the mole, Olaf smiled. “Lord Oliver Cromwell, your reputation precedes you. I’ve heard tales from Huntingdon, and your fearless stance as a member of Parliament two years ago was truly admirable! I hold you in high regard.”

Cromwell laughed heartily. “I appreciate your kind words. You don’t speak like an Icelander—it seems Lord Stephen was right about your family’s long history.”

The reception soon concluded. Olaf and Haig bid farewell to Governor Stephen and Sir Bulstrode among others before returning to the docks. Haig then led fourteen ships to Amsterdam to sell part of their cargo, intending to bring the remainder back to London for delivery to the noble merchants they had met at the reception.

Olaf had deliberately sought to befriend Cromwell at the reception, and their conversation had been so pleasant that they had become friends. As the reception ended, Cromwell invited Olaf to visit his estate in Huntingdon. After consulting with Haig, Olaf decided to stay in London and gladly accepted the invitation.

Before Haig’s departure, Olaf instructed him to purchase sufficient cotton seeds, livestock, weapons, and other goods in Amsterdam. The remaining hemp cloth, food, skilled workers, and white slaves could be acquired in London.

Haig left behind one armed merchant ship and thirty guards before setting sail with the fleet.

Olaf spent a day on the ship before being fetched by Cromwell’s servant. He instructed the sailors to watch over the vessel, then, accompanied by four guards and attendants, rode northwest toward Huntingdon.

By the time he arrived at Cromwell’s estate, it was afternoon. Dismounting, Olaf saw Cromwell himself come out to greet him, accompanied by a slender, beautiful woman and a charming boy of three or four whom she held by the hand.

The boy bore some resemblance to his father but took after his mother most—Sir Bulstrode’s daughter.

After exchanging greetings with Cromwell’s family, Olaf was led into the parlor. Noticing Olaf’s repeated glances at his son, Cromwell pointed to the fleshy growth on his lower lip and the dark mole on his brow. “The boy takes after his mother—handsome and unblemished.”

Olaf knew Cromwell possessed an unshakable inner strength, which allowed him to accept his physical flaws with equanimity. This ordinary display of self-awareness deepened Olaf’s impression of the future Lord Protector.

“What’s your name, child?” Olaf smiled, producing a paper-wrapped piece of malt candy from his pocket to offer the boy.

“I am Charles Cromwell, sir,” the four-year-old Charles replied with surprising composure. After answering, he politely expressed his gratitude and, upon seeing his parents’ approving glances, accepted the candy.

“Charles is quite the charmer—”

Chapter 135: Discussing the Past and Present, Speaking of Heroes

The parlor of Cromwell’s estate was quiet, with Olaf and Cromwell sitting across from each other on the sofa, each holding a cup of steaming coffee.

It was noon, and after breakfast, the two had been discussing the trajectory of the pan-European war, as well as the significant impact the future victory or defeat of the Protestant Union or the Catholic League would have on the overall situation in Europe and England.

Though Cromwell was far from the political arena, his heart was set on the highest echelons of power. His ability to immediately assemble a model army and achieve continuous victories proved he was a genius in strategy and tactics. He had also studied countless ancient and modern battles, particularly those of the Thirty Years’ War, which he now followed closely.

One could say that every person’s success is the result of many days and nights of accumulation. Momentary success might be a stroke of luck, but long-term success is undoubtedly a testament to one’s strength.

Cromwell’s insights and perspectives were uniquely sharp. If Olaf hadn’t known the outcome of the Thirty Years’ War, it would have been difficult to contribute meaningful ideas during their discussions.

However, because Olaf knew the ins and outs of the Thirty Years’ War, he could deduce high-level opinions and ideas based on the consequences, forcing Cromwell to take him seriously.

Over the three days Olaf had spent at Cromwell’s estate, the two had already discussed matters for two and a half days. They had covered topics ranging from Nordic culture, the failure of King Christian IV of Denmark, and the colonization of the East Indies by England and Holland. They had exchanged numerous opinions, and Olaf had gained a clear understanding of how European royal elites of Cromwell’s caliber viewed the major events unfolding in their time. This gave Olaf a clearer grasp of the era he was in.

Olaf, supported by historical records from his past life, often presented novel and profound viewpoints that left Cromwell pondering for a moment. Some he disagreed with, while others he applauded.

“I’ve heard that King Christian IV has rarely appeared in public since his defeat. Denmark’s economy is in ruins, and the Jutland Peninsula is filled with homeless refugees. The Danish parliament and ministers are all worried about restoring the people’s livelihood! I heard from my father-in-law that last month, King Christian IV visited London to seek a loan from King Charles I to alleviate Denmark’s plight. To increase revenue, he even raised the ship taxes in The Sound and the taxes in Iceland by thirty percent. It’s said that prices in the Baltic Sea have soared, and the Icelanders are full of resentment. It seems Denmark will take a long time to recover its strength…”

As he spoke, Cromwell suddenly remembered a rumor and said, “You’re from Iceland, do you know if this rumor is true?”

Olaf remained composed as he considered the various pieces of information in Cromwell’s words, then shook his head and said, “Since 1627, the Governor of Iceland has been forcing us to pay war tribute. To be honest, the Icelanders can no longer bear the oppression!”

Often, people tend to sympathize with distant tragedies while ignoring the suffering of those around them, a misguidance caused by habitual thinking.

England had oppressed the Irish for hundreds of years, but after hearing Olaf’s words, Cromwell sympathized with the Icelanders. From his personal judgment of the political situation and the perspective of future revolutionaries, he advised, “As we discussed yesterday, if Gustavus Adolphus II leads the Swedish army to defeat the forces of the Holy Roman Empire, Denmark will inevitably become a vassal of Sweden! Therefore, Denmark’s power will continue to weaken, and Iceland might be able to seek more rights!”

Olaf nodded and said softly, “Thank you for your concern, Mr. Cromwell. We will strive for it!”

Due to their foreign status, Olaf and Haig had been unaware that King Christian IV of Denmark had been a guest at Whitehall Palace for over a month, seeking a loan from King Charles I of England. This matter concerned the speed of Denmark’s recovery, so Olaf was very interested and inquired about the details.

The king’s visit was significant news among the English nobility and gentlemen. Cromwell was well-informed about the details. After some thought, he said, “His Majesty King Christian IV’s request has not been answered. King Charles dissolved parliament two years ago and stopped supporting the Netherlands and France in their attacks on Spain. Without parliament, he cannot collect taxes, and King Charles is now struggling with financial problems. Why would he lend money to a defeated Denmark just because of a little blood relation?”

“So King Christian IV’s loan request failed?” Olaf raised an eyebrow, his lips curling into a mocking smile.

Cromwell waved his hand and said, “More or less. King Charles entertains the Danish king and his entourage daily at Whitehall Palace with lavish food and drink, but he keeps saying there’s no money for a loan. I heard that the Danish king lost his temper twice in private and expressed his intention to leave four days ago. I think they will return to Copenhagen in the next few days…”

Cromwell was not surprised by Olaf’s tone, as he also despised the reckless King Charles I. This mutual understanding was part of the foundation of their relationship.

Olaf sneered inwardly, thinking: Denmark can’t get a loan, so it will take at least five or six years to relieve the suffering of the people and heal the wounds of war. This year, if Sweden makes a move, it will shake the world, and King Christian IV will be restless. At that time, while Denmark is still weak, we can ally with Sweden. With the support of the Nordic lion, Gustavus Adolphus II, we can find the best opportunity for Iceland’s independence!

After several days of discussion with Cromwell, combined with his own memories, Olaf had a more systematic understanding of the pan-European war.

Regarding the occupation of Iceland and gaining independence, Olaf also had more mature ideas.

Based on the future situation of the European war, Olaf understood that before Gustavus Adolphus II’s death in 1632, Sweden was the leader of the Protestant Union and the most powerful man on the European continent. During his lifetime, King Christian IV of Denmark and the ruling Patriarch and Tsar of Russia had to behave themselves and be good neighbors.

According to various sources, since signing a treaty with Denmark last year, Wallenstein, the foremost mercenary general of the Holy Roman Empire, had gradually lost the emperor’s favor.

Olaf knew very well that this “third jewel in the crown” would be dismissed by Emperor Ferdinand II of the Habsburgs this year and sent back to his fiefdom to live as a wealthy man. It wasn’t until two years later, after the imperial commander Count Tilly was killed by Gustavus Adolphus II, that Wallenstein was reinstated and then had a “duel of heroes” with Gustavus Adolphus II.

After becoming the supreme commander of the Holy Roman Empire again, Wallenstein engaged in a stalemate with Gustavus Adolphus II near the Electorate of Saxony for nearly half a year. Ultimately, at the Battle of Lützen, Gustavus Adolphus II was killed, Wallenstein was defeated, and Sweden’s triumphant southern offensive was halted.

However, with great power in his hands, Wallenstein also developed the idea of preserving his strength and secretly negotiating with Sweden. Coupled with his many atrocities—levying troops, burning, killing, and looting in the German allied states—the northern German states continuously demanded that the emperor punish him. Finally, with the tacit approval or even instruction of Emperor Ferdinand II, the renowned general Wallenstein was assassinated the year after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death.

Through the conflicts between the two great generals, Gustavus Adolphus II and Wallenstein, Olaf was certain that the professional soldiers recruited and trained by Sweden, with their improved formations and tactical arrangements, were overall more powerful than Wallenstein’s forces.

However, Wallenstein’s army also possessed top-tier combat power in Europe at the time, and with a numerical advantage (he organized 70,000 troops upon his return, while the Swedish king initially led only over 4,000, and even before the decisive battle, they were less than 20,000), they were the first true rivals of Gustavus Adolphus II.

History proved that Gustavus Adolphus II ultimately died in the war against Wallenstein.

Olaf was certain that if the soldiers of Vinland participated in the war as Protestant mercenaries under Gustavus Adolphus II’s command, they would earn the support of the ambitious Gustavus Adolphus II, though the extent of that support would be limited.

But when Gustavus Adolphus II and Wallenstein’s armies were locked in a stalemate in 1632, if they could provide even a little more strength to tip the scales of victory in their favor, Gustavus Adolphus II would be willing to offer more promises and support.

Therefore, Olaf decided to persuade his father and uncle to join the Protestant Union in 1632 at the critical moment under the banner of Iceland’s independence forces. By becoming close allies with Sweden and helping them repel or even defeat Wallenstein’s German army, they could gain Sweden’s support in diplomacy and military affairs, making Iceland’s independence no longer a pipe dream.

Chapter 136: Blast Furnaces and English Indentured White Slaves

Olaf stayed at Cromwell’s manor for a full week, during which the two men engaged in lively and enjoyable conversations.

Although Cromwell had not yet had the opportunity to step onto the political stage, nor did he have experience in leading troops or governing a nation, many of his political ideas—such as granting independence to the church, ensuring churches were not subordinate to one another as fully religious institutions, and requiring the government to establish a parliament for reform—were already firmly established in his mind. He also aimed to suppress the elders who controlled both political and religious power in the nation.

Olaf, knowing Cromwell’s future achievements, understood that what Cromwell spoke of now was what he would eventually accomplish. Some things he would succeed in, while others he would continue to explore throughout his life.

Olaf knew that Cromwell was a Puritan Independent and would later become the Chairman of the Council of State in the English Republic, making him a leader of the bourgeois revolutionary camp. His radical political views fundamentally aimed to protect the interests of the middle class and the new bourgeoisie, suppressing the old nobility while completely ignoring the common people. However, this was a limitation of the era. If a complete revolution were attempted now, it would surely fail.

Olaf had previously struggled to understand the world clearly due to his young age and lack of knowledge about 17th-century Europe. In Vinland’s primitive society, he could still offer advice and assistance, but his plans and strategies for future involvement in Europe were unclear.

After a week of conversation with Cromwell, Olaf became more inclined to view 17th-century Europe through Cromwell’s perspective. The Age of Exploration had led to a rapid increase in the number of new gentry and wealthy merchants—members of the bourgeoisie—over the past century. However, nations had not reformed to grant these new bourgeoisie corresponding social status. Instead, they continued to plunder and wage war recklessly, deepening the conflict between the ruling class, represented by the monarchy and nobility, and the new bourgeoisie. Although disputes between the Protestant and Catholic churches had erupted in recent years, the fundamental issues remained unresolved.

Olaf clearly realized that his next step in intervening in European affairs should focus on the demands of the new bourgeoisie. If he could guide these people to revolution, overthrow the old dynasties, and establish new nations where gentry, merchants, and nobility shared power, chaos would likely ensue across the nations.

In that case, not only would Iceland’s independence be possible, but even dominating Europe would become a real possibility.

Beyond admiring Cromwell’s erudition and political insight, Olaf appreciated his generosity and straightforward enthusiasm. When Cromwell learned that Olaf was leaving, he gifted him a large gold ring weighing half a mark as a parting gift and invited Olaf to visit again the next time he came to London.

After a week together, Cromwell’s fondness for Olaf had grown significantly. He genuinely liked this young man who was neither arrogant nor fond of showing off. With his golden hair, blue eyes, and golden beard, Olaf was handsome and spoke pleasantly. He was warm-hearted and kind, and his words revealed a bold and fearless spirit in the face of danger and hardship. Cromwell was certain that this young man had the potential to become a great figure.

Not only did Cromwell like Olaf, but his wife, Elizabeth, and son, Charles, also adored him. Olaf always had fascinating and captivating stories to tell them, such as the tale of a magician named Harry Potter…

“Olaf, you haven’t finished telling me Harry Potter’s story! I want to know when he will avenge his parents! That wicked Dark Lord is despicable!”

As Olaf was about to leave, young Charles clung to his beloved Uncle Olaf, refusing to let go and insisting he tell more of the story.

Olaf chuckled softly, glancing at his beautiful sister-in-law before saying, “I’ll tell you the rest next time I come, little Charles. You must understand that Harry Potter has to go to school. I can only find out what happens next when he’s on vacation, and then I’ll come back and tell you. Does that make sense?”

The four-year-old Charles Cromwell was instantly convinced, his eyes sparkling as he nodded. “Yes! Yes! Uncle Olaf, you must tell me next time if Harry Potter defeats the Dark Lord!”

“Don’t worry, I will. I’ll make a special trip to ask Harry Potter myself and tell you next time!” Olaf patted Charles’s head before handing the child back to Elizabeth.

Amid the reluctant farewells from the Cromwell family of three, Olaf left the manor with his servants and guards, riding back to his ship in the West Indies port.

After ensuring everything on the ship was in order, Olaf took two guards to the exchange and purchased some water-powered hammer forging tools.

In the afternoon, one of Cromwell’s servants arrived with a merchant to see Olaf.

Earlier, Olaf had asked Cromwell to help him purchase some iron-smelting blast furnaces and had also mentioned his intention to recruit a batch of indentured white slaves in England.

At that time, England’s colonization of Scotland was just beginning to thrive. This year, the Massachusetts Bay Company had already organized the first batch of lords of the manor and indentured white slaves to establish a colony in New England. The entire company was also planning to relocate all its personnel and funds to New England to focus on developing the colony.

The island of New Scotland in the southwest of Vinland had also begun to see Scottish colonial companies gradually migrating there. However, due to severely limited financial conditions, New Scotland was unable to develop.

Olaf’s half-month stay in London felt incredibly fulfilling and pleasant. Only when surrounded by abundant resources and exposed to the music, fashion, and news of wars and politics from the center of the world did Olaf feel that life was meaningful. Compared to the monotonous life in Vinland, returning to Europe seemed an inevitable choice—a necessary step back into the civilized world.

Olaf not only purchased various mining and ore-sifting tools but also bought some linen and daily necessities. He also noted the changes in the colonial efforts of England, France, and Holland in the New World. This made him realize the need to suggest to his father, upon returning to Vinland, that they adjust their approach to interacting with New England.

In the future, England would increase its colonial efforts in the New World, so Vinland needed to accelerate its encroachment onto the continent and strengthen its control over New England.

Five days earlier, during a conversation with Cromwell, Olaf had asked him to help purchase some iron-smelting blast furnaces and to recruit a batch of indentured white slaves.

Cromwell already knew that Olaf’s family had established a colonial outpost in the New World, so he readily agreed to the request. He sent a servant to ask his cousins, cousins-in-law, and father-in-law for help. Now, the servant had arrived with a merchant to see Olaf, indicating that the matter had been successfully arranged.

“Ilidan, you’re here. What brings you?” Olaf asked after inviting the two men into the ship’s cabin.

“Mr. Olaf!”

Cromwell’s servant, Ilidan, was well aware of Olaf’s standing in his master’s eyes, so he bowed politely before introducing the other man. “My master sent me to bring this gentleman to you. He is the manager of the largest ironworks in Oxfordshire. He plans to reopen a factory in Scotland and is selling his equipment. When he heard you were looking to buy blast furnaces, he came to see you.”

Olaf turned to the man in the leather jacket with curly black hair, smiling as he shook his hand. “Very well, let’s discuss business.”

Chapter 137: Returning to Vinland to Develop Industry

After a round of haggling, Olaf paid one thousand pounds of silver to purchase partial components of two towering iron-smelting furnaces, along with a set of blueprints for constructing a blast furnace and two skilled workers.

After bidding farewell to the merchant who left with the contract and the money chest, Olaf remembered the matter of recruiting indentured white slaves and turned to Ilidan, asking, “Dan, thank you and your master!”

Ilidan, a man in his thirties with graying hair, was Cromwell’s childhood playmate. Hearing Olaf’s gratitude, he bowed and said, “You’re too kind, Mr. Olaf. You and my master are good friends, and he instructed me to make sure this was done for you. It’s all part of my duty!”

“Still, I must thank you,” Olaf said, ordering his men to fetch over a dozen beaver pelts. He took out two and handed them to Ilidan, then pointed to the rest and said, “Take these back to Brother Cromwell. They should be enough for Little Charles and Sister Elizabeth to make two fine fur coats!”

Ilidan accepted the pelts without hesitation, wrapping them in coarse cloth with a smile. “I’ll tell my master right away how deep your friendship runs!”

Olaf nodded and asked, “Any progress on the indentured white slaves?”

“Sir Bulstrode’s connections are extensive, and the Cromwell family elders are all influential figures. They’ve all sent people to help you recruit. I expect results by tomorrow or the day after. I’ll go check on it—don’t worry!” Ilidan said softly and attentively.

Watching Ilidan handle everything with such precision, Olaf couldn’t help but miss the days when Pikku was by his side. Though Pikku wasn’t as educated as Ilidan, he was fiercely loyal and diligent, always ready to lend a hand.

“I wonder how Pikku is doing now? Will Greenland be unified this year…”

…

Two days later, Ilidan visited again, informing Olaf that the recruits would arrive to board the ship the next morning.

Since a merchant vessel and the Thor’s Hammer remained at the dock, they could carry over three hundred people. However, Haig’s fleet would return soon, so Olaf didn’t limit the number of recruits.

“A total of four hundred and twenty-one people, mostly adult men, with a few families among them.”

Olaf nodded upon hearing this, then had some silver coins brought to Ilidan and said, “I’ll have someone accompany you to thank the gentlemen who helped. Please lead the way, Dan.”

Ilidan refused the money this time, smiling as he said, “I’d be happy to guide you to Sir Bulstrode and the others to express your gratitude, but I cannot accept money. It would go against a servant’s professional ethics, sir!”

Seeing Ilidan’s firm stance, Olaf didn’t insist. Instead, he had half a pound of malt sugar brought out and said with a smile, “This is a sweet treat for your children and wife. It’s not worth much, but please accept it.”

Ilidan, unable to refuse further, accepted it with a wry smile. “Your warmth and hospitality truly command respect, sir!”

Olaf smiled faintly, then sent someone with Ilidan to deliver gifts to Sir Bulstrode and the other families who had helped recruit the indentured slaves.

Sir Bulstrode and the others had only helped because of Cromwell’s request. They had no direct connection to Olaf, so the favor was ultimately between Olaf and Cromwell, and between Cromwell and the others.

But Olaf wanted to maintain a close and comfortable friendship with Cromwell, so he spared no expense, sending gifts of furs, malt sugar, and liquor from the ship to each household as thanks.

After the gifts were delivered, Olaf left a favorable impression on many nobles and merchants, establishing tenuous connections that would make future business dealings easier.

This also indirectly boosted Cromwell’s reputation, as having such a generous and well-connected friend reflected well on him.

The next morning, Olaf received three hundred indentured white slaves and left two nearly recovered sailors to wait for Haig and deliver a message.

That evening, the two ships, loaded with people, supplies, and wealth, departed London.

Under Olaf’s orders, the captains turned the ships south upon leaving the Thames River, preparing to cross the English Channel westward and sail across the Atlantic back to Vinland.

Before leaving, Olaf had purchased several dozen pounds of cotton seeds in London, along with over a hundred pounds of turnip seeds, some chili seeds, and other vegetable seeds. Through Cromwell, he also acquired many technical books, such as The Nature of Ores, On High-Temperature Techniques, and On Metals, all to systematically advance Vinland’s mining and iron-smelting industries.

Originally, Olaf had planned to wait for Haig’s return before heading back to Vinland together. But upon learning that the Massachusetts Bay Company was preparing to relocate to New England with nearly a thousand people, he knew he had to return early to formulate a strategy against the New England settlers.

So, without waiting for Haig, Olaf arranged for the two recovered sailors to stay at the West Indies port and wait for him. Then, he personally led the indentured slaves and the purchased goods out of London. After more than ten days of smooth sailing, they finally returned to Vinland.

Olaf arrived at Hrut Port on May 28th.

Vinland’s weather was colder than London’s. Even in summer, long robes were necessary. But the warm welcome from Haldor, Katrin, Half, Gerny, and the rest of the family made Olaf feel no chill.

First, Olaf handed the three hundred indentured slaves over to Heiner for arrangement. Then, he ordered the slaves to unload the water-powered forging equipment, iron plates, pickaxes, shovels, and even some weapons and firearms from the ship, transporting them to Haldor’s fortress for temporary storage.

By the time everything was settled, it was already the next evening. Only then did Olaf have the heart to enjoy a lavish dinner with his family, sharing his experiences and business dealings in Ireland and London. He focused particularly on the Massachusetts Bay Company’s aggressive migration to New England and the developments of the pan-European war.

Haldor, Heiner, and the others fell into deep thought. Then Olaf said, “I’ve also brought back iron-smelting craftsmen, blast furnace blueprints, components, iron plates, and water-powered ore-processing equipment. I think this year, besides focusing on agriculture, hunting, and fishing, we should prioritize developing mining and iron-smelting in Vinland!”

“Slow down! There’s too much information at once—I need time to digest it!” Haldor coughed lightly, waving his hand. “Let’s discuss Vinland’s next steps tomorrow!”

Heiner nodded in agreement. “Yes, development can wait. It’s not urgent.”

“Half a month ago, Kadir sent word that English merchant ships had already reported that London would send eight large ships with nearly a thousand settlers around April. They’re people from the Massachusetts Bay Company, who are investing heavily in New England trade. Under the leadership of their general manager, they plan to land at Salem Bay, north of Plymouth, and build the largest colonial city in history in terms of investment and manpower!”

Heiner’s speech quickened, his excitement showing.

Haldor thought for a moment, then looked at Olaf and said, “We’ve discussed this before. Clearly, the Massachusetts Bay Company intends to replace Plymouth as the center and ruler of New England! After investigation, we found that Massachusetts has been heavily involved in New England’s commercial affairs in recent years. Moreover, this company obtained a colonial charter from King Charles I of England last year. Now, with the general manager bringing all employees and recruits, their ambitions are significant. So, I’ve ordered Kadir to take this seriously—he must ensure his control over New England isn’t exposed while keeping a close eye on the Massachusetts Bay Company’s movements!”

Olaf pressed his lips together and said in a low voice, “Before I returned, I learned that the Massachusetts Bay Company has the support of the English royal family. The general manager is a county magistrate and a lord of the manor with vast wealth and influence. The first batch of settlers this year numbers around a thousand, and next year, they’ll increase migration based on the situation. So, I think we must decide on our policy toward the New England settlers before the Massachusetts general manager arrives. Do we coexist peacefully, allow them to develop, or strike while they’re vulnerable and eliminate them?”

Olaf’s eyes narrowed as he looked at everyone, finally letting out a cold snort. “My opinion is that Vinland already has sufficient troops and weapons. We can accelerate our conquest of the western continent while taking a harder stance. We cannot allow an uncontrollable neighbor with development potential and powerful backing to exist near us!”

Olaf’s decisive words echoed in the hall. Haldor laughed heartily and said, “Good! That’s my son! Why don’t we deploy troops in advance and give our new neighbors a crushing blow?”

Heiner’s eyes flashed with a sharp glint before he sighed softly. “Since Olaf says the Massachusetts Bay Company has the support of Charles I and powerful nobles, we can’t be too direct in dealing with them. Otherwise, we won’t be able to trade in Ireland and Britain in the future, and there’s a risk of our fleets being intercepted. After all, England’s navy isn’t weak, and many merchant ships have privateering licenses. We have no reason to put ourselves in danger!”

“Heiner is right,” Haldor agreed.

Katrin scoffed. “What’s there to fear? We Icelanders are experts at sea piracy. Why would we fear English merchants?”

Chapter 138: The Fox’s Scheme

Katrin and her two younger brothers were fearless individuals. Though she was a woman without formal education, she displayed remarkable courage in many matters.

As Haldor’s wife, Katrin held a position of high status and influence. When she openly supported Vinland’s declaration of war against the Massachusetts Bay Company to suppress New England, the atmosphere in Haldor’s fortress instantly grew heated.

Before long, the Viking leaders had reached a consensus—they would deliver a crushing blow to the people of New England and prevent them from growing stronger.

Haldor still wanted to hear Olaf’s opinion, but Olaf had no fully formed plan. He knew they couldn’t allow the Massachusetts Bay Company to develop freely in the New World, but he hadn’t yet decided on the best way to deal with them.

The meeting soon concluded with a decision: Vinland would quickly organize its forces to intimidate—or even attack—the Massachusetts Bay Company upon their arrival, ensuring control over the new colony just as they had with Plymouth.

After the others had dispersed, Heiner signaled Olaf, who then led him back to his own room.

“Olaf, do you really think we should openly threaten the Massachusetts Bay Company with force? Do you think we can control them?” Heiner asked, frowning as he sat down.

Olaf thought for a moment before replying, “If we attack and take control after they establish their colony, it should work. But it will certainly anger the powerful figures in London. However, England currently lacks the resources and capability to send their navy to retaliate against us.”

Heiner shook his head. “That may be true, but we still need to conduct business in Europe. If Britain uses its powerful navy to block our ships in the English Channel, we won’t stand a chance. If we can’t sell Vinland’s furs, maple sugar, and spirits, we’ll have to rely on the French to sell them for us. That would mean lower profits and our wealth ending up in someone else’s hands—a very unfavorable situation!”

“You’re right! That would be a huge risk!” Olaf agreed, suddenly alert. “Why didn’t you bring this up earlier?”

“I saw how eager everyone was to go to war. I didn’t want to dampen their spirits, so I thought I’d discuss it with you first,” Heiner said with a cunning smile.

Olaf instantly understood that Heiner didn’t want to offend those like Katrin who were pushing for war. He laughed and said, “So you want to convince me first, then have me talk to my parents?”

“Exactly,” Heiner admitted frankly, his voice serious. “You must understand, Olaf, that while Vinland may seem powerful, we have critical weaknesses—our population is too small, and our supply of strategic resources depends entirely on selling our local goods in Europe. If any part of that chain breaks, Vinland will collapse into nothing more than an ordinary colonial estate. Don’t be fooled by our surface prosperity into thinking we can rival an entire nation!”

Seeing the warning in Heiner’s eyes, Olaf firmly declared, “Don’t worry, I haven’t lost my senses. I understand what you mean. I’ll persuade my parents not to let Vinland come into direct conflict with the Massachusetts Bay Company, so we don’t offend the powerful figures of the British Isles.”

“But we can’t just sit by and watch the Massachusetts colony grow stronger. That would only bring us harm, not benefit!”

Chapter 139: Dog Bites Dog

The existence of New France actually helped Vinland divert the attention of many European countries, especially England. To the arrogant European nations, the Vinland colonists were not particularly noteworthy. This was partly because Kadir controlled Plymouth, and with McG’s cooperation, the British had not obtained accurate information about Vinland.

With New France in the picture, many of Vinland’s affairs could be conducted through New France. This not only diverted attention but also ensured that New France would be entangled in the various conflicts in North America, unable to extricate itself.

Olaf and Heiner refined some details, and by dinnertime, Olaf had prepared his argument to persuade Katrin and Haldor to agree to Heiner’s plan.

Katrin only wanted to prevent her brother from facing danger and hardship. Upon learning that Heiner’s plan could deal a heavy blow to the Massachusetts Bay Company without exposing Vinland’s involvement to the British, she naturally had no objections.

Haldor also understood that his wife’s main concern was Kadir’s safety. He worried that if the Massachusetts colony, the closest to Plymouth, were to assist Plymouth in expelling the Vinlanders in the future, Kadir would be in grave danger.

Heiner’s strategy was clearly more sophisticated than a direct military confrontation by Vinland. It could suppress the Massachusetts Bay Company without revealing their involvement or causing damage to Vinland’s forces. All Vinland needed to sacrifice were some glassware, luxurious decorations, blades, and ironware—things that posed no problem for the wealthy Vinland.

After a brief discussion, Haldor and Katrin agreed to Heiner’s plan on the spot. However, Haldor raised a concern.

“This is a good plan, but who will execute it? We must ensure the Iroquois can handle the British from the Massachusetts Bay Company. It would be pointless if they are just sent to their deaths!”

Olaf had also considered this issue. The Vinlanders had clashed with the Iroquois before. The tribe’s warriors were fearless and had decent combat skills, but their disadvantage was the lack of advanced weapons and armor. Moreover, their combat style was chaotic, with no real tactics.

Facing colonists armed with numerous firearms or even small-scale regular armies, sending one or two tribes’ warriors would be akin to sending them to their deaths.

“We can provide them with some advanced weapons first. The firearms and blades we bought from Holland all have French or Dutch markings. If the Iroquois use these weapons, not only will their combat effectiveness improve, but the British will also suspect the French of being behind it!”

Olaf suddenly came up with a way to muddy the waters further and said excitedly.

Haldor thought for a moment, then waved his hand. “We can’t give the Iroquois too much support, and definitely no firearms or plate armor. We should create the impression that the Iroquois obtained these weapons and equipment from the French. If it’s obvious that someone gave them these weapons, the British and the French aren’t fools—they’ll investigate and eventually figure out it was us.”

Olaf nodded. “You’re right. Then we’ll give them some blades, leather armor, and send some bows and crossbows! Even if they turn against us later, it won’t be much of a threat.”

Haldor clapped his hands in satisfaction. “Good. Tomorrow, come with me to see Heiner. If we’re going to do this, we should do it thoroughly. My mind isn’t as quick as yours, so explain the details to me again tomorrow.”

Over the course of a meal, Vinland’s strategy against the Massachusetts Bay Company, which was about to arrive in New England, shifted from a direct confrontation to a cunning scheme of setting wolves against leopards.

The next morning, when Haldor and Olaf met Heiner in the council chamber, he laughed heartily and said, “I knew Olaf would convince you.”

Haldor didn’t say anything. He sat on the sofa and asked, “Tell me your detailed plan.”

Chapter 140: The Massachusetts Colony

After finalizing the plan to deal with the Massachusetts Bay Company, Haldor sent Heiner personally to Plymouth to coordinate with Kadir and McG.

With Heiner gone, Haldor took charge of Hrut City’s affairs, with Olaf assisting his father in managing them.

Life in Hrut City was simple, and daily issues were few. Olaf thought of the slaves still toiling in the Longling Mountain mines with wooden sticks and stone shovels. He quickly arranged for his subordinate, Captain Gilson, to take two artisans from London, along with white slaves and other laborers, to deliver cross-pickaxes, iron shovels, and other tools to the three mines in the Longling Mountains. They also brought water-powered ore processing facilities and blast furnaces.

Once the skilled workers arrived with the white slaves and native laborers, they could begin constructing iron and copper smelters. With better tools, the miners’ efficiency and speed would greatly improve.

Considering that charcoal was still the best fuel for smelting—since coal contained too much sulfur before being processed into coke, which, despite reaching high temperatures, would degrade the quality and hardness of the iron—Olaf, who had no expertise in smelting from his past life, dared not experiment recklessly. He could only stick to traditional methods.

To ensure sufficient charcoal for future smelting of iron, copper, and even gold, Olaf, after consulting with Haldor, ordered all slaves in Hrut City to leave some charcoal unburned when cooking. Each Viking household was also required to submit two pounds of charcoal daily, with penalties doubling the next day if the quota wasn’t met.

Haldor’s commands were always strictly followed in Hrut City and throughout Vinland. The extra effort in cooking was a small price to pay for supporting the raids.

After Gilson and his hundred-odd men departed aboard the Thor’s Hammer, Olaf turned his attention to cultivating turnips. Unlike potatoes and sweet potatoes, turnips could be dried and stored as rations, eaten fresh, or pickled, making them a more versatile crop that could compensate for some of the shortcomings of potatoes and sweet potatoes.

Following the methods described in the agricultural manual, Olaf instructed his men on planting the seeds, watering, and managing the fields. Hundreds of pounds of turnip seeds could cover five or six acres of land. He cleared the riverbanks, harvested the greens, and replanted the turnips.

The manual specified that turnips thrived in cool, shaded conditions and should be sown in late summer or early autumn. Abundant rainfall would help them take root quickly, and as the weather cooled, the roots would absorb nutrients rapidly, growing plump. By early winter, they could be harvested.

It was already June, which was technically too early, but Vinland’s climate resembled that of the Celestial Empire’s northeast. Compared to Xu Guangqi’s experimental fields in Jizhou, the temperatures were lower, extending the growing season. Thus, planting had to begin earlier.

…

While Olaf and his men were busy planting turnips, Heiner, Kadir, and McG had already unified their strategy in Plymouth’s church. Following Heiner’s plan, they prepared a “generous gift” for the Massachusetts Bay Company.

Heiner had initially worried that McG might hesitate to act against the company, but to his surprise, McG agreed readily and cooperated enthusiastically.

After finalizing the details, McG took his leave, intending to personally seek the aid of a prominent Iroquois Confederacy chieftain.

Once McG left, Heiner quietly asked Kadir, “Father, why is McG so obedient? Doesn’t he care that the Massachusetts Bay Company colonists are also English and Puritans?”

Kadir scoffed, “McG became Plymouth’s leader and council chairman only with my support and a thousand elite soldiers. He’s killed many from the Plymouth Company. Their ships found out this spring but lacked the strength to retaliate, so they imposed an economic blockade—no trade, no supplies. If I hadn’t given them potatoes and sweet potatoes, Plymouth would have starved. In such circumstances, how could McG not cooperate wholeheartedly?”

Heiner nodded. “No wonder. Without our support, Plymouth would starve, and McG wouldn’t remain in power. He has no choice but to show loyalty.”

“Stay a few more days,” Kadir said with a grin. “Wait for McG to finalize things with the Iroquois before you return. And while you’re at it, tell your mother-in-law I’d like her to come stay with me for a while.”

Heiner, knowing his father-in-law was only forty and still had needs, agreed without hesitation.

…

The Iroquois differed slightly from other Native American tribes. Though fierce warriors, their society was matriarchal. The leaders were usually elder women, while their husbands and sons handled external affairs like war and hunting. Gathering, production, and tribal management were overseen by the female leaders.

The closest Iroquois Confederacy tribe to the Massachusetts Bay was the Pequot, a large eastern tribe.

McG prepared some fine glassware and a beautiful silk scarf, then, accompanied by a Huron slave fluent in English, set off to visit the Pequot chieftain in the forests northwest of Plymouth.

After promising sufficient rewards, the Pequot agreed to cooperate with McG’s request and attack the Massachusetts Bay Company colonists once they landed in the northern bay.

McG returned to Plymouth in high spirits and reported the news to Kadir and Heiner.

Relieved, Kadir said, “I’ll send a few White Wolf soldiers with you to deliver some weapons to the Iroquois. They won’t stand a chance against the Massachusetts Bay Company otherwise. Do you think ten sets of weapons and armor will suffice?”

McG nodded. “The Iroquois Confederacy has over a hundred thousand people. The Pequot tribe I contacted has over three thousand, and they oversee more than a hundred smaller tribes, totaling five to six thousand. If prepared, they can mobilize over three thousand warriors. With some long spears, leather armor, and bows, they should be enough to handle the Massachusetts Bay Company.”

“Good,” Kadir said, waving his hand. “Then deliver them in the next two days.”

“Yes, Commander Kadir!” McG bowed respectfully before hurrying out.

Heiner stayed for dinner in Plymouth, planning to return to Vinland the next morning. However, early the next day, McG entered the church and found Kadir and Heiner in the back room, just finishing breakfast.

“The Massachusetts Bay Company arrived at the northern bay last night!” McG had stationed men there days ago to monitor the company’s arrival. That morning, before dawn, his subordinate had knocked on his door with the news.

“You look like you haven’t even washed up or eaten yet,” Kadir said with a slight smile. “Sit down and join us.”

Moments later, McG sat beside Heiner. A Viking guard served him a bowl of oatmeal and a roasted lamb leg.

Kadir spoke warmly, “This is from a ewe injured by a dog yesterday. We feared she wouldn’t survive, so we butchered her. Try it—the flavor is quite good.”

McG thanked him before tearing into the lamb leg.

Last year, Kadir had helped McG seize control of Plymouth. Miller, Governor William, and several dozen resisting settlers had been killed, and their property confiscated. Kadir had allowed McG to distribute some of the wealth to the people, but the livestock—cattle and sheep—had been seized and kept in the church’s backyard and stables.

Thus, the lamb they ate that morning had once belonged to Plymouth’s former leader.

Regardless of its origins, having meat was always a joy.

After breakfast, Kadir questioned McG in detail about the Massachusetts Bay Company’s arrival.

Learning that they had landed the previous evening, Heiner exhaled slowly. “They’ll start building their colony today, but it’ll take two days to unload all their supplies. The camp won’t be fully constructed for another week or two. We shouldn’t rush—we need to wait until they’re settled and can’t easily flee before making our move. For now, we observe.”

McG acknowledged the order and sent more of his trusted men to monitor the northern bay. Kadir, still uneasy, dispatched a dozen agile White Wolf soldiers to scout the area.

Heiner knew this was his first time leading a strategic operation and couldn’t afford any mistakes. He decided not to return to Vinland, sending one of his private slaves and a Viking subordinate back to report. He would remain in Plymouth, refusing to leave until he saw the Massachusetts Bay Company’s destruction with his own eyes.

Chapter 141: Savage Attack

The Massachusetts Bay Company arrived at Massachusetts Bay, two hundred miles north of Plymouth, on June 12, 1630.

Governor John Winthrop of Massachusetts immediately began leading a thousand settlers to establish a colonial camp upon landing at the natural harbor in the northern bay, naming the settlement Salem.

Winthrop hailed from a traditional landowning gentry family in Suffolk, England. Before serving as president of the Massachusetts Bay Company, he had been a lawyer in the royal court and a county magistrate. Due to his loyalty to the crown and exceptional abilities, he was promoted to governor of the Massachusetts colony and had been preparing for immigration and colonization since the previous year.

Finally, this year, he had gathered enough manpower and resources to lead the first batch of a thousand people to the colony site selected by the Massachusetts Bay Company.

Since the Massachusetts Bay Company had been involved in New England colonization activities several years prior, they placed great importance on the bay north of Plymouth. Besides Salem, they had also chosen Shawmut Peninsula in the center of the bay, planning to establish one or two colonial cities.

Winthrop was well-prepared, with enough provisions to last through winter, as well as large quantities of linen, glassware, weapons, firearms, horses, and livestock.

While dispatching people to build the city, Winthrop led a hundred guards and some gifts of linen, wool, and glassware to explore the western forests of Salem, hoping to find Indian tribes, establish stable trade relations, and secure peaceful development time and trade in food and furs.

However, something shocking soon occurred. They discovered two villages with over a hundred inhabitants each, but the natives’ attitudes were extremely cold, even hostile, completely rejecting Winthrop’s request for trade and driving them away.

Soon, Winthrop and his party returned to Salem in disarray.

“Should we raid those two villages?”

Winthrop’s guard captain, Brown, suggested. He was a vigorous middle-aged man who trusted the firearm in his hand and firmly believed that with one command from Winthrop, he could lead his men to sweep away the two “pigsties” of the dirty and rude savages.

Winthrop lightly waved his hand and said, “One or two native tribes are easy to destroy, but there are powerful tribes on the continent. The Iroquois number nearly a hundred thousand, and there are too many Indian savages like the Cree and Huron. We have few people now, haven’t built a defensible city, and haven’t cultivated land for farming. If we don’t get along with the surrounding natives, we won’t make it through this winter.”

“But those savages are too rude!” Brown said through gritted teeth.

Winthrop lightly shook his head, puzzled. “In theory, the Indian natives are very simple. They have always been willing to trade furs and food with us. But these natives seem to fear something. Otherwise, we could send someone to Plymouth to ask about the situation.”

Winthrop’s deputy, Hook, had always been in charge of the Massachusetts Bay Company’s trade and thus had the most information about the New World.

He frowned and said, “Plymouth has always resisted our participation in their colonial trade activities. In previous years, they were only somewhat friendly to the Creek Company. I’m not sure they would be willing to deal with us…

Moreover, before coming here, I heard that Plymouth recently had a coup. The Puritans killed Plymouth’s governor and retook control of the city, even using the help of a group of pirates to become stronger. Since this spring, Plymouth has been very exclusive and closed off. Going to ask them might be useless…”

Winthrop said worriedly, “If we can’t successfully establish the camp within two or three years and bring returns to the domestic investors, they will not only stop economic aid, but we won’t be welcomed back home. But years of failed attempts by our company to establish colonies have told us that to succeed, we must establish good relations with the Indian natives. Relying on their food, slaves, warriors, and furs is the foundation of our initial establishment!”

Winthrop’s concerns were the fundamental issues of establishing the Salem camp, and everyone understood.

After discussing for a while, Winthrop suddenly proposed, “Since the surrounding natives are temporarily difficult to approach, we need to seek other help. John Smith, the governor of Virginia, is said to be a good man, and our company has some business dealings with them. Why not ask him for some help when necessary and establish some food trade relations? Also, the Icelanders in Vinland have developed very well in recent years and are said to have conquered a lot of land. We can also contact them.”

Winthrop’s decision reassured everyone, and they immediately sent two eloquent subordinates. Hook led a group to sail south to Virginia, planning to contact Smith before going to Vinland.

After discussing for a long time, Winthrop felt a heaviness in his heart. He believed the situation in the New World was far more difficult than he had imagined. But now that he had led the Massachusetts Bay Company to relocate to the New World, he had to make the colony succeed.

Winthrop looked at the map of the east coast of the New World on the table and pointed to a peninsula in the southern bay of Salem, surrounded by a cross-shaped outlet, saying in a deep voice, “While establishing the camp, we must also send people to Shawmut Peninsula to take a look. The environment there is very good, and it’s closer to the south—Plymouth, Virginia, and New Netherlands. The environment with the native neighbors in Salem is not optimistic, so we must be prepared to relocate at any time!”

After Winthrop’s decision was made, that afternoon, Brown led several dozen people to the southern Shawmut Peninsula for an on-site inspection, preparing to choose a suitable hill to establish a stronghold.

The Salem camp quickly took on the appearance of a village with the efforts of a thousand people. In a week, all the supplies on the ship were moved to the camp’s houses, and people began fishing, logging, and engaging in production and daily life.

Brown and Hook also returned to Salem one after another. Hook brought back goodwill from Virginia Governor John Smith and a total of a thousand pounds of corn and black beans.

“This is food that Governor Smith gave us for free. He has agreed to maintain good trade relations with us and will provide assistance when we need it.”

The weary Hook, without time to rest, led Winthrop to the simple dock and pointed to the supplies the sailors were unloading, telling his governor the exciting news.

Winthrop’s furrowed brows, which had been tight since arriving in Salem, finally relaxed. He praised Governor Smith’s generosity and commended Hook’s competence.

Unfortunately, after Brown told Winthrop some news, his brows furrowed again.

“Are you sure? Are you certain it’s Plymouth’s ship monitoring us?” Winthrop asked Brown again, seemingly incredulous.

Brown said in a deep voice, “Yes, I chased after them to ask, and although they were evasive, I recognized them as Plymouth people based on their accent and ship characteristics. The way they were monitoring the Massachusetts Bay area clearly wasn’t a temporary action. I think Plymouth’s leaders might have unimaginable intentions toward us, or perhaps hostility!”

“Plymouth’s population is about the same as ours, but we have over two hundred trained musketeers. Even if it comes to a fight, we’re not afraid of them.”

Winthrop first boosted his men’s morale, then looked at Hook and said, “Don’t go to Vinland yet. Go to Plymouth again and make sure to see Pastor McG. We need to understand their true intentions. I suspect they’re worried we’ll become the leaders of New England. After all, we’re a colonial company with a license from His Majesty, while they’re just illegal colonists. Their hostile actions out of fear of us annexing them can be understood, but you must tell them to maintain peace with us. Tell Pastor McG that we’re willing to communicate with them on equal terms and help each other!”

Hook readily agreed and set sail again.

Winthrop had just sighed in relief and was about to visit the dozen or so immigrants who were ill from the unfamiliar climate with Brown when he suddenly heard a deafening roar from the west.

“It’s the battle cry of the savages!”

Brown furrowed his brows, drew the long sword from his waist, and said, “The nearby natives are attacking!”

The hundreds of people in the camp panicked immediately. Winthrop also drew his long sword and struck it forcefully against Brown’s sword, creating a piercing clang.

“Everyone, calm down! The establishment of every colonial camp will provoke hostility from nearby native tribes. As long as we show enough courage and might, we can intimidate them and subdue them! Men, the first crisis of the Salem camp has arrived. Let’s drive back the ignorant, primitive, and filthy Indian savages together!”

Winthrop possessed exceptional leadership and influence. His words instantly quieted the camp.

Brown also stepped forward and quickly assembled the colony’s guards. In less than five minutes, two hundred musketeers formed a square formation within the camp, and over three hundred men armed with knives, swords, and axes stood ready.

Chapter 142: Massachusetts Becomes a Thing of the Past

As the guards of the Massachusetts Bay Company assembled, the towering figure of Brown, standing behind the musketeers, saw hundreds of Native American warriors clad in leather armor and wielding long spears charging from the west, north, and south of the colonial camp.

The warriors shouted excitedly, surging forward like a dark tide. Their terrifying war paint and the predatory gleam in their eyes struck fear into the hearts of all who saw them.

But Brown and the employees of the Massachusetts Company were hardened men, long accustomed to the prospect of bloodshed. They swallowed hard and steadied their nerves.

Silently calculating the distance, Brown raised his hand and roared when the enemy was less than two hundred paces away, “Men! Five shillings for every savage you kill! Fire at will!”

Bang! Bang!

Two hundred musketeers hastily lit and fired their weapons. Bullets whizzed through the air, accompanied by the acrid smoke of gunpowder.

In Brown’s eyes, the grotesque faces of the Native American warriors grew clearer—only to be shattered by bullets. The first volley felled seventy or eighty attackers, leaving a sudden gap in the horde before the Salem camp.

Behind the first wave of warriors, over a hundred more armed with bows, European longbows, and crossbows surged forward. As the colonists fired, these warriors loosed their arrows. Over a hundred shafts flew through the air, wounding more than thirty musketeers and killing two outright.

Brown, the leader of the guards, was not so fortunate. As he retreated, an arrow struck his left leg, though it missed any vital areas.

Gritting his teeth against the pain, Brown steadied himself with the help of a soldier, then hacked off the arrow shaft with his sword. “Musketeers, fall back and reload! Militia, hold the line against the savages!”

Knowing their lives and fortunes were at stake, the people of the Massachusetts colony moved swiftly. The musketeers retreated to reload while over three hundred armed men formed a defensive line.

“Ahhh… Waaahhh…”

The fallen warriors’ spears were snatched up by those behind them, who continued the charge, stabbing fiercely at the Massachusetts militia.

Due to the spears’ greater reach, the Native Americans gained the upper hand immediately, killing or wounding over twenty colonists in an instant.

Brown thrust his sword into the chest of a spear-wielding warrior, blood spraying him as he pulled the blade free. Panting heavily, he ordered, “Spread out! Pair up against the savages!”

Before he could finish, an arrow struck his left eye. His vision darkened, and he collapsed, unconscious. A warrior stepped forward and drove his spear through Brown’s chest.

Brown twitched violently before bleeding from his mouth and nose, then lay still.

“Brown!” John Winthrop cried out, rushing forward with his sword.

Whoosh! Whoosh!

Several arrows suddenly flew from afar, two grazing Winthrop’s body before one struck his chest. He staggered, blood pouring from his mouth and nose, and fell to the ground.

The deaths of their two leaders left the defenders of the Salem camp leaderless and in disarray, unable to withstand the savage onslaught.

The precarious situation quickly turned into a rout. Even the severely wounded Winthrop was pursued and speared to death by a swift warrior.

The surrounding Massachusetts colonists panicked.

Soon, word spread through the camp that Brown and Winthrop had been killed by the accurate arrows of the Native Americans. The militia and musketeers were already in chaos.

Suddenly, another wave of war cries erupted in the distance. The faces of the militia and musketeers turned pale. Those who looked saw hundreds more warriors joining the battle.

Though over a hundred musketeers and two hundred militia fought desperately, killing over a hundred warriors, the sheer number of attackers overwhelmed them. The Massachusetts colony finally fell completely.

…

Before long, the most timid two hundred women and nearly three hundred indentured white slaves fled the camp to the docks, preparing to swim to the ships.

But among the attacking Native Americans were skilled hunters who approached the shore, occasionally loosing volleys of arrows to kill those who had escaped the farthest.

Soon, only over a hundred musketeers and militia remained. They broke free from the warriors’ assault and escorted the remaining women to the ships.

In the end, over a hundred musketeers and militia abandoned over a hundred indentured slaves and several dozen women, fleeing south with the remaining hundred women and hundred slaves.

By then, the Massachusetts colony had over a thousand warriors who were not regular soldiers and lacked discipline. After the colonial resistance fled, the warriors did not pursue. Instead, they stormed the wooden huts, looting the colonists’ fine clothes, linen, wool, alcohol, glassware, and iron tools.

These everyday European items were precious luxuries to the Native Americans. A single iron pot could be traded for three women.

Risking their lives to chase down whites was far less profitable than plundering the houses. Many lone white women wore jewelry and fine clothes, which were also tempting.

On the morning of June 20th, the Salem camp became a sea of flames. That day, the Iroquois Confederacy and the Massachusetts Bay Company colonists engaged in the largest battle between the English and Native Americans since the colonization of North America.

The Massachusetts Company, caught unprepared, failed to fully utilize the power of their firearms, leading to their complete defeat in just over half an hour.

This battle would later be known as the “Battle of Salem.” The Massachusetts Bay Company suffered the loss of Governor John Winthrop and Captain Brown, along with eighty-seven musketeers, ninety militia, over sixty women, and over a hundred indentured slaves captured. They also permanently lost the Salem colony.

The Pequot tribe of the Iroquois Confederacy, who led the attack on Salem, deployed over eighteen hundred elite warriors. After losing over five hundred warriors, they finally captured the Salem camp, their faces alight with joy as they carried away their spoils.

Over a hundred indentured slaves and several dozen women were killed, with only the youngest taken back to the tribe.

The Massachusetts colony, established on June 12th, was completely wiped out by noon on the 20th. Only over five hundred people escaped on three ships.

That afternoon, Heiner, Kadir, and McG, anxiously waiting in the Plymouth church, received reports from their subordinates: the Massachusetts colony had been utterly destroyed by the Pequot.

“Excellent! The Pequot have proven reliable!” McG exclaimed, clapping his hands.

Heiner glanced at McG’s somewhat unhinged smile, subtly furrowing his brow before nodding. “Are you certain the Massachusetts governor is dead? Only half escaped?”

A subordinate who had been observing near the northern bay confirmed, “Yes!”

The precise answer made Heiner smile. Just as he was about to speak, he heard footsteps approaching.

Two Viking guards entered and said, “Leader! Lord McG, Mr. Hook from the Massachusetts colony insists on seeing you!”

Kadir asked, “Have the Massachusetts colony’s ships arrived in Plymouth?”

McG shook his head. “Did you see where the ships went?”

Most of the subordinates who had been spying in the bay shook their heads, except for one young man who said, “I returned last. I did see three ships docked at the pier. I heard crying from the ships, so they must be from the Massachusetts Bay Company.”

McG frowned and said gravely, “Then Hook must know. He’s the vice president of the Massachusetts Bay Company. Even though the remaining people are weak for now, as long as London continues to fund them, the Massachusetts colony will be rebuilt eventually!”

“What do you mean?” Kadir narrowed his eyes, looking at McG.

McG said sternly, “If we’re going to deal with the Massachusetts Bay Company, we must eradicate them completely. If we leave Hook alive, and they find out we hired the Pequot to attack them, it will cause us huge trouble in the future!”

Kadir nodded quickly. “Clearly, you’re right. What do you think, Heiner?”

Heiner also believed that killing Hook would completely dismantle the Massachusetts Bay Company. But surely they couldn’t kill all five hundred people at the port. More importantly, if Hook died, the Massachusetts Bay Company would have no future.

“Since Pastor McG wants to cut the grass and roots, please handle it yourself. But it must be done cleanly, without any leaks!” Heiner said to McG.

McG knew he had already boarded the pirate ship and could not turn back. Losing Vinland’s support would mean losing his status and power, leading to retaliation from the Plymouth Company and a miserable death.

McG clearly understood that he could not die and could not lose his leadership in Plymouth. This was for himself and for the late Elder Blaister, as well as George and Byram.

After Heiner spoke, McG felt the gazes of Heiner and Kadir lingering on him. His heart grew cold, knowing they were still concerned about his loyalty to Vinland. He quickly said, “Lord Heiner, Leader Kadir, rest assured. I will personally meet with Hook and ensure the matter is handled without a trace!”

“How do you plan to do it?” Heiner asked uneasily. “Can you tell us?”

McG cleared his throat and began to explain his plan.

McG was an ordinary pastor, his only exceptional trait being his vast knowledge and culture. He was not skilled in intrigue, so the only method he could think of to kill Hook was poison.

Asians and Europeans, when plotting harm, often thought of poison.

Current poisons were mainly derived from herbs, with animal venoms like snake venom as supplements. European poisons were primarily extracted from the bark and sap of yew trees, as well as castor beans, monkshood, wild parsley, and over a dozen other highly toxic plants.

McG found a plant in the western forests of Plymouth similar to the European lily of the valley. This plant, with its white bell-shaped flowers and small orange-red fruits, contained a deadly poison.

McG decided to offer Hook a drink during their conversation, lacing the wine with the juice of the North American lily of the valley. With the right dosage, it would kill Hook days later, making it appear as if he had died from illness.

In the medically deprived and harsh environment of North America, hundreds of colonists died from disease each year. One more death would not be suspicious.

After hearing McG’s plan, Heiner and Kadir both approved.

In the end, McG met alone with the panicked and desperate Hook in the church’s prayer hall, where Hook sought refuge.

A few days later, that afternoon, Hook fell ill on the Massachusetts Bay Company’s ship docked at the port and died two days later without recovery.

The employees, indentured slaves, and families of the Massachusetts Bay Company, having lost their only leader, were completely at a loss.

After McG announced that he would accept them as citizens of Plymouth, the five hundred people gratefully joined Plymouth. The four brigantine ships became the property of Plymouth, temporarily under McG’s control.

Three hundred and forty employees and families of the Massachusetts Bay Company became citizens of Plymouth. Over a hundred and sixty indentured slaves had their contracts transferred to McG. With the successive deaths of its leaders, the Massachusetts Bay Company was completely wiped out.

Although the financial backers of the Massachusetts Bay Company were still living in luxury in London’s palaces and villas, they would soon be shocked by the news of the company’s bankruptcy and demise.

In June 1630, the Massachusetts Bay Company, which should have shone brightly and even laid the foundation for the future state of Massachusetts, withered and died under the intervention of the Vinland Vikings without taking root in the land of North America.

The history of colonization in North America had spanned several decades, with France being the first to begin colonization. However, the successful beginning of North American colonization was marked by the establishment of New France in Quebec, New England in Virginia, and New Netherlands, among others.

But over these decades, the development of colonies had been slow and unremarkable until the successful establishment of the Massachusetts colony. Within a decade, seven or eight colonies, including Maine, were also established. The English had migrated over a hundred thousand people to New England in the past fifty years.

Thus, the Massachusetts colony was a turning point in the colonization of North America by the United Kingdom of England. From it, the North American colonial enterprise entered a period of rapid development.

But now, with the sudden rise and intervention of the Vinland Vikings, the fall of the Massachusetts Bay Company cast a shadow of decay over the English colonization of North America. Perhaps the English spring in North America had suddenly turned into winter.

The only question was how long this winter would last, or whether the English colonial spring would ever come again.

Chapter 143: Dominance in North America

The collapse of the Massachusetts Bay Company had strengthened Plymouth City, the ruling power of New England, by half its manpower. This allowed New England’s population to surpass two thousand once again after the purges of last year’s war, making it the second most powerful colonial presence in North America, second only to Vinland.

However, Plymouth City’s leader, McG, was well aware that while they were nominally an independent colony, they were in reality a vassal of Vinland—a protected territory under Viking Raid General Haldor. To ensure their survival, they had to maintain loyalty and cooperation.

After Hook’s death and the absorption of the remaining Massachusetts Bay Company personnel into Plymouth, Heiner attended Kadir’s farewell banquet before leaving Plymouth and returning to Hrut City by ship.

Haldor held a family banquet in his fortress, with abundant food and drink. The attendees were limited to Haldor and his wife, Heiner and his wife, and the three children, Olaf, Katrin, and Ulf.

During the banquet, Olaf noticed that his cousin Vanhild’s belly was slightly swollen. Upon inquiring, he learned that she was three months pregnant—this was Heiner and Vanhild’s first child after marriage.

Considering the poor hygiene conditions at the breeding farm, Olaf decided to have Vanhild temporarily manage the brewery and sugar factory instead, while he personally oversaw the breeding farm.

Vanhild, of course, had no objections to her cousin and CEO’s decision and readily agreed.

As they ate and talked, Heiner recounted all he had seen and heard during his days in Plymouth.

Upon hearing that McG had poisoned and killed Hook, the vice president of the Massachusetts Bay Company, Olaf lost his appetite for the wine in his cup and the venison steak on his plate.

Hook’s incident made Olaf more vigilant. He immediately said, “We must be on high alert regarding McG poisoning Hook. Currently, Vinland’s management is still quite crude. We need to strengthen the management of our food and drink to prevent accidental poisoning or being harmed by unknown poisons! Especially remind Ulf and Kadir!”

In Haldor’s household, all meals were personally overseen by Katrin, along with some loyal slaves. Since the food was all produced by their own labor, it was generally safe. However, there was no management system for food and drink, which left a loophole—if someone with ill intent secretly poisoned the food, there was a risk of harm.

The more Olaf understood the hardships of life, the more he cherished his health. He solemnly requested that Haldor establish regulations for the food and drink of their own household, as well as the governors of Basque City, Bakens City, Plymouth City, and Greenland. There needed to be a system where food selection, processing, and serving were all inspected and controlled by loyal and professional individuals.

Especially for the food in Haldor’s fortress, if necessary, a slave should be trained as a taster to prevent poisoning.

Haldor and his wife always took Olaf’s requests most seriously. Given that food safety was indeed a matter of life and death, and as Vinland grew stronger and enemies increased, preventing poisoning had become a necessary measure.

Under Haldor’s direction, Katrin, Heiner, Olaf, and others studied and established a management system for the food transportation and preparation in Haldor’s fortress. Two independent individuals were appointed to oversee the process. Meanwhile, Katrin began training the most loyal slaves in culinary skills, preparing to cultivate a group of cooks. In the future, these cooks would be given as rewards and protective measures to subordinate leaders, ensuring their culinary desires and food safety.

The news that the Massachusetts Bay Company had been wiped out by the Pequot tribe of the eastern Iroquois Confederacy just a week after landing quickly spread through the mouths of sailors and merchants from the Creek Company who had arrived in Plymouth for trade. This caused a huge uproar in Virginia, New Netherlands, Quebec, and other regions.

Speeches and opinions advocating “fear of the natives” and “hatred of the natives” gradually gained the upper hand in various colonies.

Soon after, Virginia, New Netherlands, and Quebec began to unite with friendly allied tribes to launch attacks on non-compliant and hostile tribes in the surrounding areas. In less than a week, they had wiped out several small tribes, killing and capturing over a hundred people in some cases, and in others, like Virginia and Quebec, over three hundred natives were killed, and nearly a hundred native slaves were captured.

Although the cleansing operations around the colonial camps deepened the relationship between the colonies and their native allies, it also further antagonized the hostile native tribes.

For example, Quebec’s relationship with the Huron tribe became even closer, but several outposts of New France were retaliated against by the Iroquois. In early July, the Iroquois organized seven to eight hundred warriors to launch a devastating attack on a newly established basic agricultural fortress in the southern plains of Quebec, killing twenty French soldiers and fifty Huron farmers, and burning dozens of acres of wheat.

This tragic event enraged both Champlain and the Huron tribe, prompting them to mobilize their armies to engage in a decisive battle with two major Iroquois tribes in the southern plains.

The raging wars on the North American continent had no impact on the isolated Vinland Island overseas. Instead, they promoted Vinland’s commercial activities.

In late June, Champlain sent someone to Vinland to meet with Haldor, seeking to purchase some food and supplies. Surrounding native tribes also sent people to purchase ironware.

Haldor selectively granted some native tribes a certain quota for ironware trade. As for whether they bought iron pots, iron kettles, or iron knives to grind into weapons or use in daily life, Olaf, Haldor, and others did not interfere.

In just ten days from late June to early July, Hrut City, through trade in ceramics, leather armor, ironware, food, and other goods with natives and the French, obtained over a thousand beaver pelts, over a thousand river otter pelts, more than five hundred sable pelts, and over a thousand one hundred reindeer pelts. Moreover, ninety percent of these resources were contributed by the natives of the Iroquois Confederacy.

Hrut City sold all its stockpiled ironware, as well as rusty, chipped long spears, swords, damaged firearms, broken plate armor, leather armor, bow and arrows, and crossbows. Although this left Vinland’s military supplies in short supply, considering that Haig would bring back numerous military supplies upon his return, it would have been a waste not to sell the stockpiled waste and obsolete items at a high price.

Hrut City made a fortune from the war between New France and the Iroquois, which also made the war between the French and the Iroquois more protracted and gradually put the French at a disadvantage.

After all, the number of Huron people was less than that of the Iroquois, and the number of New France soldiers was too small. The Iroquois, who had obtained ironware, already had a killing power superior to the Huron. On the North American battlefield, where the main force was natives wielding wooden clubs, stones, and bone clubs, dozens of iron knives could often decide the outcome of a battle.

While Hrut City was watching the fire from across the river and making a fortune from the war, Ulf, the governor of Basque City, had long begun to sharpen his weapons and lead his five hundred and thirty governor’s guards to conquer the entire Labrador Peninsula by force. Any discovered Indian natives were conquered and relocated, and those who dared to resist were killed. However, since the Labrador Peninsula was a barren and cold region with small tribes and few people, facing over five hundred armed soldiers, they had no courage to attack. At most, some unmarried youths fled, and basically no Indian tribe or Inuit tribe dared to resist.

After entering July, outside Basque City, there were two thousand Indian natives and over six hundred Inuit people stationed. These people generally relied on themselves for food, and the other half was provided by Ulf with sweet potatoes and potatoes to fill their stomachs. However, Basque City’s food storage was limited and could not withstand a large population eating for a long time.

Therefore, on July 2nd, Ulf sent someone to Hrut City to request the mobilization of ships to relocate the native slaves in Basque City.

In the span of a month, Ulf had completely pacified the northern and entire western regions of Labrador and was preparing to continue expanding westward after the two thousand six hundred slaves were sent to Hrut City.

Chapter 144: Haig’s Return

After returning to Hrut City, Olaf first dispatched workers and equipment to Longling Mountain’s copper mine to construct blast furnaces for smelting copper and the associated gold ore.

By the end of June, Olaf had begun working at the Sahkrimnir Farming Company while handing over the brewery and sugar factory operations to his cousin Vanhild.

Olaf had decided to personally oversee all matters at the farming company to ensure a suitable work environment for his pregnant cousin Vanhild. Only now did he have the time to fully engage in its management.

Since its official opening on April 2nd, the Sahkrimnir Farming Company had been developing smoothly under the joint efforts of Vanhild, Viking women workers, and slaves. Although poor management in the first month had led to the death of one cow and two pigs, by June, over a hundred chickens, ducks, and geese had begun laying eggs. Chickens and ducks laid an egg daily, while geese laid one every two days.

Every day, the Viking women workers collected around a hundred eggs, selling some in Hrut City and storing the rest in the warehouse.

As for cattle, horses, pigs, and sheep, many had been selected for breeding, and in a few months, calves, piglets, and foals would be born.

The operations of the Sahkrimnir Farming Company were mostly routine—daily livestock management, feed collection and preparation, and manure removal.

After two months of operation, the company had already established fixed systems and patterns under Vanhild’s management. Every morning, noon, and evening, Viking women workers and company slaves carried out their assigned tasks. Half of the women workers were responsible for feeding, transporting materials, making feed, shearing wool, and collecting eggs, while also checking the animals’ health.

The slaves handled manure and other miscellaneous tasks.

What pleased Olaf was discovering a pen of over fifty reindeer of varying sizes during his inspection of the farm. These small reindeer were clearly the young ones captured by the hunting team after Vanhild had recently joined forces with Heiner. They were now being raised collectively, and some might even have come from the herds of certain chiefs.

There was also a warren for rabbits—a pit dug on the sunny side of a slope, containing dozens of rabbit holes. From a distance, one could see dozens of rabbits of different sizes. Upon inquiry, Olaf learned that these rabbits had been bought from New France and Vinland Vikings, as well as captured on the island. In just two months, over twenty baby rabbits had been born, and it wouldn’t be long before they could enjoy rabbit meat.

The addition of the reindeer pen and rabbit warren showed that Vanhild had been thinking about expanding the farm’s scale and projects. Currently, the fixed ration of potato and sweet potato residue was sufficient. Summer was a season of abundant growth, with lush grass and trees. Normally, cutting some grass, collecting young branches and leaves from felled trees, and combining them with sweet potato and potato residue and bone meal could meet the feed and nutritional needs of the livestock and poultry in the farm. Thus, domestication of reindeer to increase the number of animals was indeed a good choice.

In his previous life, during the years when pork prices soared, Olaf had paid attention to information about the livestock industry. He knew that livestock feed was made from grains, soybean residue from oil pressing, bone meal, fish meal, and other ingredients, sometimes with added mineral trace elements. More importantly, salt was added to the feed to ensure the animals had balanced nutrition, grew faster, and became stronger.

So, when Olaf handed over the Sahkrimnir Farming Company to Vanhild, he also gave her a book—a three-page document he had written based on his knowledge from his previous life about professional livestock farming. It was roughly at the level of feed recipes heard in agricultural markets. Therefore, he instructed Vanhild and the others to explore the proportions in practice, ensuring that the feed contained bone meal, fish scale powder, salt, and other substances.

After all, only with balanced and comprehensive nutrition and sufficient food could the livestock and poultry in the farm thrive, creating wealth for Olaf and the other Viking shareholders.

Vanhild and the many Viking women workers told Olaf that the livestock and poultry loved the feed prepared according to his instructions, and it also reduced the risk of illness. Therefore, they were always researching how to add plants beneficial to human health into the feed.

Olaf praised this idea loudly and encouraged the women workers to go ahead with it.

…

In mid-July, Haig returned to Hrut Port with twenty-six ships. Waiting for him were Haldor, Katrin, Olaf, Gerny, Half’s family, and Heiner.

Haig and his wife, Lorin, both looked unwell. Even when Heiner told them that Vinland had become the dominant Viking Raid family in North America, with hundreds of thousands of square kilometers of land, the couple did not cheer up.

“What’s wrong, Haig?” Haldor hadn’t noticed yet, but Katrin had already embraced her younger brother and sister-in-law, softly inquiring.

Lorin sighed lightly and said, “On our way back, we took a detour north to avoid some floating ice and encountered many shipworms. The oldest ship, the Hope, was severely damaged by the shipworms and sank at sea. We also lost some grain, weapons, and cloth. Over a hundred indentured white slaves and five Viking sailors died of illness. Haig feels very guilty…”

“No need to say more!” Katrin hugged Haig and said, “Your safe return is the best news. Losing a ship and some supplies due to an accident is not a big deal. The deaths were also accidental; you don’t need to blame yourself!”

Haldor also stretched out his burly arms to embrace his younger brother and said, “Don’t be sad. We in Vinland have plenty of money. Whatever was lost can be bought again next year. As for the deaths, that was God’s will! Come on, forget your troubles, and let’s have a good drink tonight!”

Haig’s eyes reddened, and he laughed heartily, “Alright! Brother, this time I bought eleven armed merchant ships and firearms ammunition…”

After hearing Haig’s report, Haldor, Olaf, and the others knew that Haig had made a lot of money in Amsterdam and London. He had also commissioned eleven armed merchant ships in Amsterdam, along with corresponding cannons and two thousand of the most expensive new flintlock firearms. Additionally, he had purchased over ten thousand sets of plate armor and long spears.

This time, Haig also brought back two thousand five hundred indentured white slaves. Among them, two hundred were Englishmen recruited from London, and the rest were Irishmen recruited by his brother-in-law O’More.

Over the past two years, Haig and O’More had become family, and Haig had gone to great lengths to help him purchase firearms and cannons. Their relationship had grown deeper, and this year, O’More had even reduced the fees for recruiting white slaves, selecting only young couples and healthy single men for Haig.

Besides the white slaves, there were seven people Haig had hired in Amsterdam—refugees from the German region with some education. They were perfect for reinforcing the teaching staff under DeGula and the others.

Haldor looked at the two thousand four hundred indentured white slaves who had disembarked and smiled so widely his mouth couldn’t close. He nodded and said, “Haig, you’ve done well.”

Although this year’s fleet had encountered adversity, losing a ship and many lives, combined with the three hundred people Olaf had brought back earlier, Vinland’s indentured white slaves had increased by two thousand seven hundred. In the future, the priests DeGula and Duca would use worship and preaching to indoctrinate these slaves. They and their descendants would become the backbone of the Vikings!

Currently, the number of Viking whites and indentured white slaves in Vinland had exceeded five thousand. Including the more than five thousand slaves added in Basque City and Bakens City over the past month, the population under the command of Viking Raid General Haldor had increased to nearly ten thousand. Hrut City had a population of thirteen thousand, Haldor City had over six hundred, Bakens City governed over seven thousand, Basque City governed over four thousand, and with the addition of Plymouth’s one thousand elite soldiers, Haldor actually controlled a population of twenty-six thousand, with a military force of over four thousand.

Three years ago, Haldor’s Fortress in Vinland had only over four hundred people. No one could have imagined that in just over a thousand days, Vinland would undergo such earth-shaking changes and become the most powerful colony in North America.

Haldor’s mood was not affected by the deaths of the Viking sailors and white slaves or the loss of ships and goods. Instead, he was full of confidence in Vinland’s future. Laughing heartily, he led his brother and the others back to the city on horseback, while the heavily pregnant Lorin rode in a carriage accompanied by Katrin and Vanhild.

The group went straight to Haldor’s fortress, where Katrin immediately ordered the servants to prepare bathwater and meals, while Haig and Lorin went to their room to rest.

Chapter 145: Hrut City Militia

After Haig returned to Hrut City, Vinland’s strength grew significantly. This European expedition sold all their goods, earning nearly three hundred thousand pounds of silver—a vast fortune.

However, Haig spent most of it, primarily on purchasing ships, weapons, and recruiting indentured white slaves. A smaller portion went to cotton, vegetable and fruit seeds, grain, cloth, books, and more. The remaining five hundred thousand pounds in gold and silver coins were handed over to Haldor, who distributed over twenty thousand pounds to the Vikings based on cost. Haig received three thousand gold shillings.

Vinland now had a substantial population for a colony, with twenty-eight ships—twenty-six of them armed merchant vessels, over half equipped with heavy cannons. While their naval power couldn’t compare to England, Holland, or Spain, it surpassed Denmark and Sweden, with more than half the warships of those two nations combined. The only gap between Vinland and the Nordic navies was the lack of large, sturdy flagship and fewer warships.

With ample sweet potatoes, potatoes, corn, and squash, along with excellent urban management and sanitation, the spread of variolation and improved hygiene had nearly eradicated infectious diseases in Vinland.

Food and health were secured, and with the addition of over two thousand white slaves, another five to six thousand slaves from Basque City and Bakens City would soon arrive in Hrut City. Haldor and Hudik were eager to train a new militia, centered around the six hundred semi-professional white slave militia trained before and after the New Year. They planned to expand this force to three thousand five hundred soldiers and two thousand auxiliary troops by incorporating indentured white slaves and native slaves.

On the third day after Haig’s return, Heiner sent over ten large ships carrying two thousand Indian natives and six hundred Inuit from Basque City.

Ulf had informed Haldor in advance. Due to the harsh climate of the Labrador Peninsula, unsuitable for agriculture, the native population was sparse. Thus, after a month of effort, Ulf could only gather two thousand six hundred people.

Along with the slaves came over a dozen towering, muscular moose with massive antlers.

The North American moose, the largest animal in the northern cold regions, was absent in Iceland and Vinland, so Olaf had never seen one. However, they were found in Scandinavia, so Haldor, Hudik, and Haig were not surprised, though Olaf was fascinated.

The moose were a gift from Ulf to Olaf’s Sahkrimnir Farming Company. These massive creatures, comparable to large cattle or horses, could be domesticated as livestock, offering significant economic value and potential as labor or meat.

The two thousand slaves were carefully selected young and strong laborers, with half being male. After professional training, they could replace the older slaves in Hrut City for agriculture, gathering, fishing, hunting, and construction.

Once these new slaves were trained, the older, loyal slaves who spoke Icelandic could undergo formal military training to become militia.

Heiner divided the two thousand six hundred slaves into groups under eighteen Aettangr. Although these slaves were private property of the Haldor family, their low status meant the eighteen Aettangr’s two thousand Vikings could still manage and punish the slaves assigned to their households.

According to Haldor, Heiner, Hudik, and Olaf’s plan, within one or two weeks, the new slaves would gradually replace the old ones.

This was a trade between the Haldor family and the Viking households—exchanging new private slaves for the old, assimilated loyal slaves to bolster the military.

The Haldor family owned over a thousand private slaves, all skilled workers and farmers. Haldor and Olaf had selected over three hundred physically strong males from these slaves, planning to free them from lifelong or hereditary slavery, rewarding them with a contract to become indentured servants, giving them a path to advancement.

These three hundred slaves might become the core leaders of the new militia.

After another week, four thousand young and strong slaves from Bakens City arrived in Hrut City.

Over seventy percent of these four thousand slaves were male, with the remaining thousand being young, healthy women.

Clearly, these four thousand were carefully selected by Blackstone from the western and northern natives of Vinland, with several dozen leaders already speaking basic Icelandic.

With Hrut City’s population surge, over ten ships were repurposed as fishing vessels, catching large quantities of cod in the North Atlantic east of Vinland.

As the city’s cellars rapidly consumed sweet potatoes and potatoes, Heiner had slaves build over ten public toilets within the city and five additional cesspools outside for centralized waste treatment.

Even with daily production from breweries and sugar mills, and increased food consumption due to population growth, Heiner and Olaf’s calculations reassured them.

The stored sweet potatoes, potatoes, squash, corn, and beans in the cellars and warehouses could sustain Hrut City’s nineteen thousand people until winter. By early winter, the eight thousand acres of land would yield a harvest surpassing last year’s, ensuring no food shortages.

Nearly four thousand indentured white slaves and over eight thousand native slaves in Hrut City relied on the Haldor family for food, as all their wealth belonged to the family. The indentured white slaves’ contracts were with Haldor, and the native slaves’ wealth and lives were entirely under the Haldor family’s control. Daily, these ten thousand people consumed over twenty thousand pounds of potatoes, sweet potatoes, and some vegetables from Haldor’s fortress cellars and warehouses.

Haldor’s fortress currently held about six million pounds of grain, including pickled vegetables, alcohol, and sugar—enough to feed his family, white slaves, and private slaves for a year.

However, as the Viking Raid general and master of Vinland, Haldor also had to provide for over two thousand Vikings in the Raid. Periodically, he rewarded Vikings involved in production and hunting with food, nearly doubling the fortress’s grain consumption.

Food was the most basic aspect of population growth. Without Olaf introducing high-yield crops like potatoes, sweet potatoes, corn, and squash to Vinland, the current level of development wouldn’t have supported the daily consumption of tens of thousands, let alone generating surplus for sale.

Thus, every well-fed Viking, indentured white slave, and native slave revered Olaf and General Haldor, understanding that their prosperity depended on the Haldor family.

Vinland operated under the Viking Raid system, where Haldor and the Vikings controlled all wealth. Haldor and Haig held the most wealth, including vast lands, all large ships, maple sap extraction rights, and mine ownership.

This system was the most effective and combat-ready organization for colonial development. Vikings, white slaves, and slaves were willing to contribute to the Viking Raid because slaves and white slaves had the chance to become Viking lords, and Vikings could exchange slaves for more slaves, land, status, and rights.

This seemingly upwardly mobile system for all was fundamentally about continuous territorial expansion, conquest, and enslavement, building the interests of the Viking Raid masters and servants on the backs of colonized North American natives—essentially bleeding the poor natives dry.

Olaf saw through this clearly. He knew that regardless of his involvement, the future of North America would leave no voice or presence for the Indians. By integrating the Indians into the Viking Raid, even if their current status was primarily as slaves, through relentless effort, many would eventually become Vikings, even intermarrying with whites. Ultimately, the ruling class of Vinland, Labrador, and more of North America would include Indians. Olaf believed he was saving the Indians.

And on the path to saving their people, it was only right that the Indian natives contributed their meager strength.

In mid-July, after the significant increase in indentured white slaves and native slaves, Olaf and Heiner began variolation for over eight thousand people to prevent future smallpox epidemics and severe consequences.

With Katrin and other Viking women skilled in variolation, after practicing on tens of thousands, they had become experts. With the slaves’ cooperation, within a week, over eight thousand people were inoculated.

The reactions and some failures from the inoculation lasted until early August before the vaccination process was completely finished.

Over half of the two thousand white slaves had already had smallpox in Europe, so only about thirteen to fourteen hundred underwent variolation. Their overall resistance was decent, with nearly a hundred falling ill and forty dying—a failure rate of about 7.1% and a mortality rate of 2.8%.

In later times, these ratios were shocking, but compared to 17th-century medical standards, Olaf, the inventor of variolation, and practitioners like Katrin were like the merciful God Jehovah.

Since the Indian natives had no immunity to smallpox, their variolation success rate was much lower than that of the indentured white slaves.

Over six thousand Indians and six hundred Inuit were inoculated, with about twelve hundred Indians and nearly a hundred Inuit falling ill. Of the thirteen hundred who fell ill, nearly seventy percent died, leaving only five hundred of the strongest young survivors.

After this round of variolation, the new arrivals in Hrut City had smallpox antibodies, eliminating a future threat. It also demonstrated the mysterious power of the Viking lords to thousands of indentured white slaves and native slaves—even a disease as terrifying as smallpox, comparable to the Black Death, could be silently prevented. They didn’t understand antibodies but knew that after being pricked in the nose with a wooden stick by Viking women, they developed resistance to smallpox after a two-day fever. It was truly miraculous.

As for those who fell ill and died, everyone chose to ignore them.

After all, life was hard, and being able to live well was a great blessing. Who had the energy to worry about others?

Chapter 146: Military Reform

Starting in August, Hudik, Haldor, and Haig began selecting white slaves and native slaves to expand the militia forces in Hrut City.

Since joining the militia meant eating meat twice a week and having the chance to improve one’s status, nearly all male white slaves and native slaves eagerly volunteered.

After discussions, Haldor, Hudik, Haig, and Olaf established the following terms for the militia: indentured white slaves who joined would have their training and combat time count double toward their contract term. Those who achieved varying levels of merit would receive reductions in their contract duration, ranging from three months to five years. The highest reward—freeing them from their slave status and allowing them to become Vikings and join the Viking Raid—was reserved for extraordinary feats, such as improving tactics or firearms and cannons. Though such achievements were nearly impossible for ordinary individuals, the promise alone boosted the morale and fighting spirit of the white slaves.

Native slaves, due to their lower status, received different treatment. Those who performed exceptionally in training and combat would be rewarded with material goods, and those who achieved merit could be promoted to squad leader positions or even elevated to ten-year indentured servants. Once they became indentured servants, they had a chance to eventually become Vikings.

Even slaves had aspirations—they wanted better lives for themselves and their descendants. Faced with an opportunity to change their fate, they were desperate to seize it.

After careful selection, Hudik, Haldor, and Haig chose one thousand strong, young indentured white slaves and two thousand native slaves. Among the two thousand native slaves, only a small portion were newly acquired; most were slaves owned by Vikings or private slaves of the Haldor family.

In addition to these three thousand slave militiamen, there were the six hundred white slave militiamen previously trained by Hudik. Together, they formed a legion of three thousand six hundred men, with three thousand five hundred as legion soldiers and one hundred as the legion commander’s personal guards.

Currently, European nations had varying military systems, and Vinland’s Viking legions and White Wolf soldiers were similarly disorganized. While no issues had arisen yet, as the military expanded, command confusion during battles was inevitable.

Olaf realized that Vinland’s military should undergo systematic reform before it matured. He proposed to Haldor and Hudik that they establish a unified military structure and a corresponding merit-based nobility system under the leadership of the Viking Raid. This would streamline management, facilitate coordination, and provide a clear basis for rewards, making the system more standardized.

Initially, Haldor and Hudik thought it was too soon, but after Olaf’s persuasion, they recognized the need for a unified military structure.

They called in Heiner, and the four of them spent two days in discussion. Ultimately, following Olaf’s suggestions, they finalized a military structure and a merit-based nobility system.

According to the approved system, Vinland’s military would be organized into legions of one thousand five hundred men. Forces exceeding three thousand would be considered combined legions.

Each legion would be led by a legion commander, with the next level being battalions of five hundred men, led by battalion commanders. Battalions would consist of four companies, which in turn would be divided into platoons and squads.

Beyond the military structure, a simplified merit-based nobility system was established, though it was exclusively for Vikings. White slaves would only qualify after earning their freedom through merit. Native slaves faced an even harder path—they first had to become indentured servants through merit, then further reduce or eliminate their contracts before becoming Vikings and qualifying for the merit-based nobility system.

The Viking merit-based nobility system, from lowest to highest, was as follows: “Private” – “First Class Private” – “Corporal” – “Sergeant” – “Staff Sergeant” – “Knight” – “Senior Knight” – “Master Knight.”

Once promoted to “First Class Private,” one would receive a fixed salary, with higher ranks enjoying better treatment. Upon becoming a “Knight,” one could have personal attendants, though they had to be recruited independently.

According to Haldor’s plan, Vikings ranked Sergeant and above could serve as platoon leaders or higher, while Knights would typically hold company commander positions. Having one or two attendants was reasonable and would boost their motivation.

As for ranks beyond Master Knight, since Haldor himself was only a Viking Raid general, they were not established yet.

With these two systems in place, the Viking forces, now one thousand strong, began recruiting more Vikings. After two years, many children had grown up, so Haldor decided to start recruiting Vikings from the age of fourteen to fill the remaining five hundred positions.

Currently, Vinland had over three thousand Vikings, with women and children making up half. The remaining nine-tenths were young, strong men, though there were fewer than three hundred white Vikings, with the rest being yellow Vikings.

Due to the high fertility rate of yellow Vikings, eight-tenths of the newly recruited five hundred were yellow Viking youths, with the remaining two-tenths being white Vikings.

After the merit-based nobility system was announced, the original one thousand Viking soldiers were all promoted to First Class Privates, with some leaders receiving ranks from Corporal to Staff Sergeant. The newly selected five hundred Viking soldiers were all Privates, trained daily by Hudik with Olaf assisting.

The previously formed three thousand six hundred-strong Hrut City militia was reorganized into two legions and one reinforced battalion, personally trained by Haldor.

In August 1630, the four thousand-strong army assembled in Hrut City trained daily outside the city, practicing formations and firearms.

Since the selected recruits were the most loyal native slaves and indentured white slaves, Haldor allowed non-Vikings to become musketeers for the first time.

All five hundred Viking soldiers were trained as musketeers. From the three thousand six hundred slave militiamen, one thousand eight hundred were selected as musketeers, one thousand seven hundred fifty as long spearmen, and fifty were prepared by Haldor to be trained as cavalry, addressing the only deficiency in Vinland’s military.

Before motorization, cavalry’s mobility and rapid deployment were unmatched. Before firearms and cannons reached a certain level, cavalry was an indispensable part of a nation’s military. Only later, as firearms became more powerful and motor vehicles surpassed horses, did cavalry become obsolete in warfare.

Currently, in Europe’s major wars, mercenaries were primarily composed of cavalry and infantry, with artillery as support. Cavalry was also equipped with flintlock muskets, making them versatile in both close and ranged combat. Thus, in many battles, cavalry played a decisive role.

Haldor and Hudik had long wanted to establish a cavalry unit, but Vinland lacked sufficient warhorses, making it impossible.

However, this year, Haig brought back thirty fine warhorses from London, including thoroughbreds and Anglo-Arabians, though most were geldings, with only five stallions and seven mares.

With these thirty warhorses, plus the thirty-odd usable warhorses already in Vinland, they could now form a small cavalry unit.

When Lord Protector Cromwell first rose to prominence in 1642, he started with just a sixty-man cavalry unit, which grew to seven or eight thousand within a year. Later, the “Iron Cavalry” and “New Model Army” were built around this core.

Having experienced real battles and commanded thousands in Vinland, Haldor and Hudik understood the importance of cavalry. Additionally, considering Vinland’s vast, roadless lands in the New World, cavalry was essential even for messaging. Moreover, through battles, they discovered that natives feared cavalry, making its development crucial for future conquests.

Vinland’s population was growing rapidly, with food and sanitation ensuring steady growth. In a few years, they would see a population explosion, so manpower was no longer a concern.

However, acquiring enough warhorses remained a challenge.

Horses were a strategic resource in Europe. While draft horses were more common, purebreds and Arabians were expensive, and nations were reluctant to export them in large quantities, selling only small numbers.

Thus, relying solely on purchases and breeding, it would take Vinland ten to twenty years to amass enough warhorses for a large cavalry force.

Haldor, Hudik, and Haig understood that developing warhorses would take time, so they were patient. However, Olaf felt the timeline was too long.

Chapter 147: Moose Cavalry and the Siege of Quebec

Unable to increase the number of warhorses from Vinland’s stables in a short time and finding procurement difficult, Olaf considered finding an alternative. Cavalry was indispensable for Vinland’s conquest of the New World, so he sought a substitute for horses.

Clop, clop. If they could find an animal to replace horses as mounts, they could quickly train a large number of cavalry. However, few animals in the world could serve as cavalry mounts.

Throughout thousands of years of civilization, people in both the East and West had used oxen, donkeys, camels, and elephants as mounts and beasts of burden. But in warfare, only elephants, camels, and horses had been used as cavalry companions. Oxen were too slow and cumbersome, while donkeys were too temperamental for battle. Northern civilizations had chosen horses for their docile nature and sufficient strength, while desert regions favored camels.

In the hot southern regions, dense jungles and extensive waterways made long-distance horse raids impractical. Locals discovered the massive yet docile elephant, leading to the birth of “ancient tanks”—war elephants.

Generally, animals larger and more enduring than humans could serve as mounts or draft animals. If they were intelligent and temperamental enough to obey human commands, they could be trained for war.

Olaf distinctly remembered that during the Northern Wars eighty to ninety years later, King Charles XII of Sweden had trained a unit of moose cavalry, which played a significant role in battles against Russia and Poland.

Olaf still recalled his astonishment when he first saw the moose his brother Ulf had sent over a month ago. The moose’s towering frame and powerful legs were comparable to a draft horse but more agile. Such an animal was indeed suitable for training as a cavalry mount.

The moose, the largest deer in the world, was named for its camel-like hump. North American moose were the largest, measuring three meters in length, over two meters four at the shoulder, and weighing seven hundred kilograms—similar to a draft horse. Though less explosive in power, they surpassed draft horses in speed and endurance. With a temperament akin to camels and horses, they were excellent candidates for domestication.

Previously, the harsh northern climate had not fostered a strong civilization, so moose domestication had never been attempted. Moose cavalry, like camel cavalry in the Middle East, had only appeared sporadically. Now, Olaf felt it necessary to systematically and seriously domesticate moose to create a moose cavalry for Vinland.

If the King of Sweden could do it, so could Olaf.

After expressing his idea of domesticating moose as cavalry mounts, Haldor, Hudik, Haig, and Heiner all approved and expressed great confidence.

In Haldor’s simple worldview, Olaf had never failed at anything, suggesting he was at least a prophet blessed by God, like Moses. So when Olaf proposed domesticating moose to replace horses for cavalry in Vinland, Haldor and the others believed he could certainly succeed.

Judging by their confidence, Olaf’s self-assurance paled in comparison to his father, uncle, and brother-in-law’s faith in him.

The more he felt their confidence, the more Olaf dared not fail. He began spending every day at the farming company, studying moose behavior with the workers and domesticating them using horse-training methods.

Though progress was slow, after a few days, the staff could already approach the moose closely—a good start. With persistence, complete domestication was achievable.

Clop, clop. Olaf’s work with the moose reminded him of the North American bison. The Indians had lived on the continent for thousands of years but had never attempted to domesticate bison, leaving their production methods and productivity backward. By the 17th century, no city-states had emerged in North America; primitive tribes still dominated. The Maya, Aztecs, and Incas in Central and South America had also developed unevenly, with institutions, culture, and technology far behind China’s feudal era—at best, they were in the Bronze Age.

With the arrival of the Age of Exploration, their discovery and extinction by Westerners seemed inevitable…

Olaf thought that once they had enough experience domesticating moose and deer, they could have Ulf capture North American bison for domestication or crossbreeding with Vinland’s cattle to expand livestock farming.

Having grown fond of the work, Olaf felt he had become half a livestock expert. He enjoyed researching and improving Vinland’s strength in any way possible. The stronger Vinland became, the higher his status as a member of its leading family, the more resources he would have, and the greater his future influence on the world.

As September arrived in North America, the weather was pleasant in light, long-sleeved linen robes. Outside Hrut City, crops grew lush and dense. Due to the cold climate and high latitude, pests and diseases were not severe in Vinland’s crops.

Even during the hottest period, slaves could handle pests and weeds in the fields daily. The caught insects and grass could be used as feed for the farming company, so this year’s harvest in Vinland looked promising.

Clop, clop. The cattle, sheep, and pigs at Sahkrimnir Farming Company had begun reproducing. These days, Olaf, Viking women workers, and farming slaves were all busy, but the number of piglets, lambs, calves, and even foals had increased significantly. Poultry like chickens, ducks, and geese had grown by seventy to eighty.

The increase in livestock meant that the investment over the past half-year was paying off. The Vikings were delighted by this good news, as only the farming company’s profits could ensure year-end dividends.

Amid the laughter in Hrut City, a messenger from Quebec City arrived with a plea for help from New France’s Governor Champlain.

Clop, clop. After receiving the letter, Haldor immediately summoned the Viking Raid’s high-ranking members in Hrut City for a meeting at the military fortress.

When Olaf arrived, over a dozen oarsmen had already gathered.

Haldor had Heiner brief them on Champlain’s situation. It turned out that New France had been in continuous battles with the Iroquois Confederacy. Initially, New France, with the Huron tribe’s population and firearms, had killed many Iroquois. But later, the Iroquois somehow obtained iron knives, swords, long spears, leather armor, broken plate armor, longbows, and crossbows.

Already outnumbered, the Iroquois gained advanced weapons and overpowered the Huron. Though French soldiers were formidable, their mere hundred firearms couldn’t tip the scales.

As the war intensified, the Iroquois seized all of New France’s lands on the south bank of the Saint Lawrence River, even breaking through fortresses. New France had lost forty to fifty soldiers, and most outposts were indefensible. Now, eighty percent of New France’s population was holed up in Quebec City, fending off sporadic Iroquois attacks.

With harvest season a month away, the loss of land meant Quebec City had lost the chance to gather this year’s crops. The Huron, struggling to survive, could no longer aid Quebec. Though the Saint Lawrence River and Quebec City’s walls made it nearly impregnable to the Iroquois, their harassment prevented the French from foraging or harvesting. Pessimistically, if the Iroquois kept harassing, starvation in Quebec City was inevitable.

Champlain initially thought to use the company’s warships to blockade the river and strike the Iroquois, but the French were too few, and the Iroquois too many.

Clop, clop. The Iroquois couldn’t take Quebec City and feared the armed merchant ships, but Champlain couldn’t defeat them either. They hid in the forests outside Quebec City, launching sporadic ambushes, leaving Champlain helpless and exhausted.

To avoid missing the harvest and winter starvation, Champlain reluctantly sent an envoy by company ship to ask Haldor for military aid.

After Heiner explained Champlain’s situation, everyone realized that selling weapons to the Iroquois had backfired on the French, leading to murmurs.

Haldor cleared his throat, and the room fell silent as everyone looked to their leader.

Haldor asked, “You all know the situation. Should we save Champlain? What do you think?”

Though it was a meeting of mid-to-high-ranking members, only a few could truly contribute. Most oarsmen lacked the insight to strategize, looking instead to Olaf, Heiner, Haig, and Hudik.

Haig, preoccupied with his wife’s impending childbirth, also looked to Olaf and Hudik.

Hudik, the most knowledgeable in military matters, spoke first: “Vinland is now fully integrated with three legions and over twenty armed warships. We have the strength to advance into the New World. Expanding inland means facing wars with the Iroquois, Huron, Cree, and dozens of other tribes…”

“Quebec City is like a nail driven into the barbaric New World by Europe. Having New France distract and divide the Indian natives is beneficial to us. I think we should save Champlain, then launch a full attack to cripple the Iroquois, making them unable to resist. Then we can take their land, making the southern plains and northern Labrador the two legs of Vinland’s expansion into the New World!”

“Stabilizing Labrador and the southern Iroquois territory will let us thrust into the heartland like scissors!”

Hudik’s final words revealed his strategic intent, clarifying everyone’s thoughts.

Haldor laughed heartily, agreeing with Hudik, and decided to send troops to aid New France.

Olaf and Heiner also approved of Hudik’s plan, but the burly Nilahu had a concern.

Clop, clop. Seeing everyone silent, Nilahu couldn’t help but ask, “Hudik, if we defeat the Iroquois, won’t New France lose their enemy? They’re allies with the Huron. Won’t they take our land later?”

Hudik waved his hand lightly and said, “Have you forgotten how many warships and soldiers Vinland has?”

Nilahu scratched his head and asked, “What does that mean?”

Olaf knew this big man was as simple-minded as his son Halik, so he explained, “New France is different from the Indians. They rely on Quebec City and Governor Champlain to maintain their colony. The Indian natives only have canoes and no strong ships or cannons, so they can’t threaten Quebec City. But Vinland has enough armed merchant ships and a powerful army to smash Quebec City. Do you think it would be easy for us to destroy them if we sailed up the Saint Lawrence River in less than a day?”

“Yeah!” Nilahu laughed and said, “Since we can crush the French anytime, why keep them around?”

Olaf then realized that Nilahu and many others might not understand why New France should be preserved, so he explained in simpler terms: “Aren’t the French and the Huron fighting the Iroquois, weakening each other? Their strength will decrease due to the conflict. We can let the French fight the Iroquois and Huron in the heartland while we encroach on the land from the east coast. After we digest the occupied land, we can continue to expand inland. Only by keeping the French to consume the native Indians can we better gradually devour North America.”

After Olaf’s explanation, everyone understood Hudik’s strategic layout and eagerly volunteered for battle.

Haldor thought for a moment and said, “Our two militia legions are well-trained. This time, I and Hudik will each lead a legion to relieve Quebec and then destroy the Iroquois’ main force!”

Hudik’s eyes gleamed with excitement, and the scar at the corner of his eye twitched slightly as he said, “We should have McG gather information on the Iroquois’ specific situation and the locations of the three major tribes leading the war. It’s best to first destroy the main forces of the three major tribes and then deal with the scattered savages.”

Olaf silently praised Hudik’s shrewdness and the importance he placed on battlefield intelligence. He also thought that with the so-called ally McG helping to undermine the Iroquois, this expedition was sure to succeed!

Chapter 148: Marching to Annihilate the Natives

After meticulous planning, Haldor decided to mobilize in five days, assembling the two legions of Hrut City and the newly formed cavalry unit—a total of three thousand and fifty men—led by himself and Hudik to reinforce Quebec.

Following the meeting, one of Haldor’s personal guards set sail from Hrut Port, heading south toward Plymouth.

This messenger carried Haldor’s orders to Plymouth, instructing McG to gather intelligence on the Iroquois to aid Haldor in making more precise and advantageous military deployments.

While awaiting the messenger’s return, Haldor, Hudik, and the others began daily drills for the troops, particularly intensifying the firearms training for the musketeers, sparing no bullets in their rigorous practice.

Olaf knew his elder brother, Ulf, had gone to Labrador as governor, where he had already begun establishing military achievements and cultivating his own faction. According to Icelandic tradition, the eldest son, Ulf, should inherit the family estate. However, Haldor intended to pass the position to Olaf instead. Though the brothers appeared close on the surface, Ulf was already maneuvering to secure his future inheritance of their father’s status and wealth.

Olaf, of course, understood his brother’s intentions and thus persuaded their father to agree, hoping to keep Ulf away from Hrut City. This would give Olaf more opportunities to grow and establish himself in Vinland’s center of power, increasing his chances of inheriting the family business in the future.

This western expedition by Haldor was clearly a pretext to relieve Quebec’s siege, but in reality, it was an opportunity to annihilate the Iroquois forces and seize their lands and people.

With McG acting as a spy to relay information, and the Iroquois’ long spears, leather armor, and bows and arrows proving ineffective against plate armor and firearms, Olaf believed this battle would be a crushing victory. Thus, he rejected his father’s decision to leave him behind to oversee affairs and instead requested to join the campaign under the guise of gaining experience and understanding warfare.

Olaf’s goal was to accumulate military merits, but Haldor did not approve.

Haldor believed that while Olaf was mature in mind and physically stronger than most ordinary men, he was still too young. Vinland’s future development could not do without Olaf’s wisdom, so his beloved second son could not afford even the slightest mishap.

More importantly, Haldor intended for Olaf to succeed him decades later, leading Vinland to greater strength. He believed Olaf had the intellect for it, so he planned to leave Olaf as acting city lord after he and Hudik departed, allowing him to gain experience in managing the city-state.

To prevent any missteps in Olaf’s decision-making, Haldor specifically left Heiner behind to assist him.

After Haldor’s earnest persuasion, Olaf realized he was essentially being tasked with the role of a “crown prince overseeing the nation.” Vinland would have plenty of time to conquer the continent and earn military merits in the future. For now, independently managing a city-state of sixteen thousand people was indeed a rare opportunity.

Four days later, Haldor’s personal guard returned to Hrut City, weary from travel, and reported to Haldor the intelligence McG had gathered from the Iroquois.

It turned out that upon arriving in Plymouth, the messenger met with Kadir and McG, delivering Haldor’s letter to the two of them.

After reading it, they learned that the Viking Raid planned to take advantage of the Iroquois’ recent victory over the Huron and French forces to strike against them. Kadir immediately remarked, “A rare opportunity.”

McG, who had no qualms about betraying the Massachusetts Bay Company—his fellow Englishmen—felt even less remorse about betraying the Iroquois. He personally took gifts to two major Iroquois tribes, extracting detailed information about the Iroquois Confederacy’s campaigns against the Huron and New France, which he then handed over to the messenger to bring back to Hrut City.

Haldor and Hudik thus learned that the three major Iroquois tribes had assembled a force of over ten thousand warriors, divided into three groups. After consecutive battles with the five-thousand-strong allied forces of the Huron and New France, they had ultimately crushed two major Huron armies and defeated the French soldiers. Two of the smaller forces were currently engaged in sweeping through smaller Huron tribes, still entangled in skirmishes.

The largest force, numbering five thousand, was besieging Quebec City while simultaneously harassing and invading the surrounding Huron, Cree, and Abenaki tribes.

From McG’s intelligence, it was clear that the Iroquois had become extremely arrogant and aggressive after defeating the Huron Confederacy. Their recent expansion had been severe, and they had sent back at least ten thousand slaves to the dozens of large and small tribes in their rear, indicating they were in an unstoppable rampage.

McG also informed Haldor that while in the Iroquois villages, he had learned that although the Iroquois had achieved victory and expanded their territory, they had also suffered significant losses. Many Iroquois families were requesting shamans to perform soul-summoning rituals for their fallen men, praying for the gods’ blessings so their spirits could ascend to the gods’ halls and enjoy eternal peace.

“McG is an indispensable friend to Vinland!” Haldor praised McG with great satisfaction.

Hudik agreed, “His abilities are excellent. I think I might even become friends with him.”

Olaf scoffed inwardly: Wasn’t it you who used to look down on him for being weak?

With the intelligence McG provided, Haldor and Hudik formulated a detailed battle plan. They decided to split their forces into two routes, landing on the south bank of the Saint Lawrence River on both the eastern and western sides of Quebec City. First, they would eliminate the Iroquois on the south bank, then use armed merchant ships to blockade the Saint Lawrence River, cutting off the retreat of the Iroquois on the north bank.

Once the south bank was cleared, they would coordinate with Ulf in Basque City, surrounding the Iroquois on the north bank from three directions. This would not only lift the siege on Quebec but also wipe out a significant portion of the Iroquois eastern forces. Then, they would advance westward along the Saint Lawrence River, finishing off the weakened Huron and the two western Iroquois forces.

If all went according to plan, after this war, the most powerful tribes in northeastern North America—the Huron and Iroquois—would no longer have the strength to resist. Within a thousand miles of Quebec, no major tribe would pose a threat to Vinland’s or New France’s colonial activities.

The remaining Abenaki, though numerous, were not a significant force, and the Cree in the northeast were too scattered to compare with the Huron or Iroquois.

Thus, it could be said that as long as the Huron tribes centered around western Quebec and the Iroquois tribes centered on the southwestern plains were eliminated, the entire middle and lower Saint Lawrence River region would have no natives capable of resisting the Viking Raid’s colonial expansion.

On September 11th, Haldor and Hudik, accompanied by Champlain, led the messenger, three thousand and fifty militiamen, eighty Viking officers, and several dozen white slave sailors aboard sixteen armed merchant ships, fully armed, as they departed from Hrut City, heading toward the mouth of the Saint Lawrence River, preparing to sail upstream.

Before departing, Haldor appointed Olaf as the acting city lord of Hrut City, granting him full authority over its affairs. He also appointed Heiner as the temporary deputy city lord to assist Olaf in managing the city-state.

As Olaf saw them off, he packed three carts with anti-inflammatory herbs like honeysuckle, purchased from the Ming Dynasty through Kuiyi, along with the highest-proof “head pot” liquor from the distillation of the Water of Life, to be used as disinfectant and antiseptic agents, and sent them to Haldor’s ship.

This expedition was Vinland’s largest military operation in two years, and with all new recruits, Olaf’s confidence was not particularly high—unless Hudik and Haldor, along with eighty Viking officers, were leading and managing them.

But now, with Haldor and Hudik personally commanding the troops and Haig leading the cavalry, the two legions were equipped with experienced Viking officers. As long as the situation wasn’t completely one-sided, the Vinland militia would not falter against any enemy.

Especially since these three thousand militiamen knew that the Viking veterans, White Wolf soldiers, and even some Beothuk warriors had all fought against the Indian natives before. With their sharp firearms and impenetrable plate armor, defeating the primitive and ugly Iroquois would not be difficult.

Now, the native slave militiamen, who considered themselves part of the civilized world, looked down on the primitive and ugly Iroquois. Both they and the white slave militiamen had extremely high morale.

This was not only because they possessed advanced weapons and were led by the undefeated General Haldor, Commander Hudik, and Commander Haig, but also because General Haldor had promised before the expedition that those who achieved military merits would have the chance to rise above their slave status.

The three thousand militiamen were all young and ambitious. They had seen with their own eyes how their predecessors, through hard work and struggle, had become Viking lords, living luxurious lives with meat, wine, and servants at their beck and call. Their ambitions, stirred by such examples, had rapidly inflated, all eager to prove themselves in battle and “elevate their status,” becoming true lords of Vinland—the Vikings.

People with hope could always unleash unimaginable potential and fighting spirit. Now, Haldor and Hudik led two legions of men brimming with hope and ambition.

At this time, Europe had not yet systematically recruited standing armies. The Vinland militiamen were all young, healthy men who had undergone nearly two months of professional training and possessed strong fighting spirit. As long as they did not face elite royal guards or mercenaries from Europe, their combat effectiveness was still formidable.

Chapter 149: The Military Factory Moves Forward

After Father, Uncle, Hudik, and the others led the troops away, Hrut City suddenly became much quieter. After all, with one-sixth of the population gone, the daily sounds of running, shouting, and gunfire from morning till evening had all vanished, leaving many citizens who had grown accustomed to the noise feeling somewhat unsettled.

Olaf and Heiner spent their days managing the remaining white slaves and other slaves, assigning them tasks while also observing the production and daily life of the Viking households, as well as the extent of pests and diseases in the fields.

Though the daily tasks weren’t numerous, the endless stream of trivial matters kept them busy. Olaf mostly left these to Heiner to handle.

By now, Hrut City was in no way inferior to the major cities of Europe. It boasted a massive population for its time, clean streets and canals, churches, church schools, and a city government—the only thing missing was shops.

However, Haig and Olaf had brought back many handmade goods, linen, and even cosmetics from Amsterdam and London. The Vikings could exchange their accumulated furs, dried fish, and silver coins for these items at Haldor’s fortress.

Since it was all within the family, Katrin, who oversaw the bartering, only marked up the prices fivefold from the purchase cost—far more reasonable than the merchants of New France and New England.

Given Vinland’s monopolized trade, much of the private wealth the Vikings had accumulated since spring had ended up in Haldor’s fortress.

Olaf sometimes felt that although the Vikings had become the ruling class in Vinland, owning land, servants, and the rights to hunt and gather, allowing them to plunder wealth in this new land, the Haldor family’s monopoly meant that the actual value of their wealth was halved when converted—if not less, considering the taxes imposed by the Viking Raid.

Compared to the oppressive governors of Iceland and Ireland, or even King Charles I of England, General Haldor seemed like a benevolent figure. Olaf often thought this was an era where the least terrible leader would be hailed as great and virtuous.

“So, if I just avoid being the worst, I’ll be praised as a saintly leader by comparison!” Olaf mused.

A few days later, the white slaves and other slaves who had been sent to deliver charcoal to the mining factory at Longling Mountain returned with exciting news—the copper mine’s water-powered crushing machine and blast furnace had been completed. Hunter, the factory manager, along with two ironworkers, had successfully smelted a batch of copper ingots and a mark’s worth of gold, which they had brought back to Hrut City.

Olaf and Heiner examined the two full crates of copper blocks, picking up a couple and striking them together to hear the crisp metallic clang. Olaf burst into laughter, knowing that the blacksmiths in his factory would soon be busy.

Though the iron mines in the northern Longling Mountains were still under exploration and no ore had been extracted yet, the copper mine could already produce metal tools. Copper was even more corrosion-resistant than iron when used for ship components.

Olaf was well aware that many nations used iron cannons and firearms, as well as copper-iron alloy cannons. In earlier years, when iron-smelting technology was less advanced, copper cannons and guns had been more common. Clearly, copper could also be used to make firearms, which meant Vinland could now embark on the path of independently developing and manufacturing its own guns and cannons.

At the time, half of Europe’s intellectuals were either clergy trained in seminaries or elite graduates from universities, many of whom possessed knowledge of firearms and cannon production.

Olaf immediately turned to Heiner, who had graduated from Oxford. Heiner shook his head lightly and said, “The principles behind flintlock muskets and firelock muskets aren’t complicated—I have a general idea of how they’re made, but I’ve never experimented with it. And I don’t have the craftsmanship of an artisan. As for cannons, I’m not very familiar with their production either. I’d need to study it further.”

“Do DeGula and Duca know how to make cannons?” Olaf asked, recalling the Jesuit missionaries in the Ming Dynasty—Matteo Ricci, Johann Adam Schall von Bell, Ferdinand Verbiest, and Father Guo Jujing. Though he couldn’t remember which one, even if they had initially claimed not to know how to make cannons, the Celestial Emperor’s decree had eventually compelled them to produce Western-style cannons.

Missionaries sent abroad were usually well-versed scholars, knowledgeable in theology, mathematics, music, and various tools. Perhaps these two elderly priests knew how to manufacture cannons and firearms.

Chapter 150: Defeating the Iroquois

After the two elderly priests agreed, Olaf happily entrusted the construction of the armory to Heiner and the two men, promising unconditional support for any resources or manpower they needed.

Once Heiner eagerly led the two men to find a suitable site for the factory near the Muskox River outside the city, Olaf delightedly picked up the gold nugget sent from the Longling Mountain copper mine, fondling it as he muttered to himself, “The gold deposits in Longling Mountain shouldn’t be large, as they weren’t famous in later times. But even if there are ten or twenty tons in reserve, that’s enough for me!”

What Olaf cared most about was the situation at the three mining sites in Longling Mountain. Coal and metal ores represented money and were the foundation for industrial development. If Olaf wanted to truly develop Vinland into a power comparable to a nation, besides increasing the population, he needed his own industrial base.

Now that the copper mine in Longling Mountain had reached production, even though the output was only a few hundred pounds, it was a good start.

Moreover, the Longling Mountain copper mine had associated gold deposits. As long as they persisted in mining, Vinland’s gold, copper, and other precious metals would continue to increase. Europe still used gold, silver, and copper coins as currency, and the Celestial Empire’s tributary circle also used these three. So, as long as Vinland could mine gold and copper, these were essentially money—strategic resources that would lead Vinland to prosperity.

Thinking of the Longling Mountain copper and gold mines, Olaf planned to follow the latest coal shipment to Longling Mountain in a few days to inspect the three mining sites and also visit Bakens City to see how Governor Blackstone was managing the city.

…

While Olaf was busy setting up the armory in Hrut City, Haldor, Hudik, and Haig had already landed on the south bank of the Saint Lawrence River two days earlier, as planned.

After landing, Hudik and Haig split their forces to sweep the entire southern plain of the Iroquois Confederacy warriors. Haldor led nearly a hundred Viking soldiers and sailors to navigate sixteen armed merchant ships, blockading a ten-mile stretch of the Saint Lawrence River east and west of Quebec, preventing the large Iroquois forces in the north from crossing the river to escape south.

Since the strategic objective of this expedition was to annihilate the Iroquois Confederacy, Hudik and Haig’s troops shot to kill any Iroquois they encountered, taking no prisoners. In four days, they cleared a forty-mile radius in the south, killing nearly a thousand Iroquois warriors and wounding over a thousand more.

Half of the two regiments were musketeers, and the rest were long spearmen. The three thousand militiamen wore plate armor, which the Iroquois’ bows and arrows couldn’t penetrate. When the Iroquois charged in formation, they were scattered by the volleys of hundreds of flintlock firearms before they could get close, suffering heavy casualties.

The four days of continuous battle still resulted in thirty to forty casualties for the two regiments. Some died from illness—vomiting, diarrhea, and severe dehydration—while others died from stepping into Iroquois traps, breaking limbs beyond healing.

This western expedition differed greatly from the conquest of Vinland. It wasn’t just that the Iroquois were more troublesome than the Beothuk; there were other reasons.

For example, the Vinland militia regiments were unfamiliar with the terrain of the southern plains of the Saint Lawrence River, making their march less swift and convenient. They also suffered several ambushes by small Iroquois units, losing over a dozen men.

Additionally, the Vinland militia soldiers wore heavy plate armor. Although this made it easy to defeat the Iroquois in battle, when the Iroquois were wounded and fled, only Haig sent his cavalry to pursue and kill them. The other Vinland soldiers couldn’t keep up and didn’t dare to chase.

The wars on Vinland Island involved direct attacks on Beothuk tribal villages. To defend their homes and families, the natives had no choice but to fight the Vikings to the death, resulting in their conquest.

But the Iroquois were fighting the Vinland militia far from their homes on the southern plains and forests of the Saint Lawrence River. They were more familiar with the geography and skilled at evasion and ambush.

If the Iroquois’ opponents weren’t Vinland militiamen wearing plate armor and wielding flintlock firearms, they might have been harassed and ambushed by numerous small units, leading to continuous unnecessary losses, declining morale, and defeat without a fight.

Fortunately, the Vinland militia feared neither the Iroquois’ bows and arrows nor their harassment. The flintlock firearms in the hands of the Vinland musketeers had a longer range and greater power than the Iroquois’ bows and arrows. Every exchange resulted in heavy casualties for the Iroquois.

Even if the Vinland militia didn’t pursue the wounded Iroquois, the injured could only retreat to their villages to recover. Due to poor hygiene and medical conditions, bullets lodged in their bodies were difficult to remove, and most wounded Iroquois warriors would experience inflammation, fever, and then death.

Thus, Hudik was happy to let the Iroquois warriors escape with their wounded. This would greatly undermine the Iroquois’ morale and drain their resources and manpower, becoming a burden to the Iroquois.

Four days later, when there were almost no signs of Iroquois on the south bank, Hudik and Haig knew that the remaining troops had been mostly dealt with, and the rest didn’t dare to show themselves.

The next step was to concentrate on dealing with the main Iroquois forces blockaded on the north bank.

During the blockade, Haldor saw Iroquois warriors trying to cross from the south bank to the north bank in small canoes to inform the main Iroquois forces. He also saw fleets heading from the north bank to the south bank.

Since the Iroquois used simple canoes or rafts, one or two people could sneak across during dusk or night, but larger groups would be more noticeable.

Haldor’s warships detected three such attempts, and continuous cannon fire shattered and sank the small boats on the river.

Many Iroquois were either torn apart by cannonballs or drowned in the river, ultimately meeting their end at the riverbed.

Haldor knew that some individual savage warriors might have slipped through, but his goal in blockading the Saint Lawrence River was to prevent the main Iroquois forces—numbering over ten thousand elite warriors—from escaping south. Thus, he wasn’t too concerned.

When Hudik and Haig returned to the south bank, Haldor knew it was time to launch the final assault on the Iroquois on the north bank. He first sent a messenger to notify Ulf, who was camped at the mouth of the Chicken Beak River north of Anticosti Island. Ulf then led six hundred elite troops from the eastern Labrador Peninsula westward to block any possible escape routes for the Iroquois to the east.

After the messenger was sent, Haldor ordered the landing.

Ten armed merchant ships carried over three thousand people across the river, landing at a suitable spot about ten miles west of Quebec City on the north bank. The sixteen armed merchant ships remained anchored in the river, continuing to blockade the waterway.

After three thousand one hundred people landed, they carried only five days’ worth of dry rations and enough ammunition for fifty shots. The two regiments then advanced northward from the distant western slopes of Quebec City, moving eastward in a southern and northern formation.

Since the soldiers in both regiments wore plate armor, their daily progress was slow, but this ensured that they could explore over ninety percent of the surrounding environment, preventing any Iroquois from escaping unnoticed.

As they marched, Haig sent his cavalry out as scouts to survey the terrain ahead and locate the Iroquois.

Within two hours, they discovered a group of over a thousand Iroquois warriors. Haig first led the cavalry to kill over a dozen Iroquois, then lured the pursuing main force slowly backward.

Soon, Haig’s cavalry notified Hudik and Haldor in the rear.

Hudik and Haldor advanced from the west to the east and soon saw Haig and over forty cavalrymen leading more than a thousand shouting Iroquois in pursuit.

As the Iroquois chased them, they fired arrows from their bows, but Haig and the knights on their fast horses dodged the arrows.

Haldor stood on the slope and laughed heartily, waving his hand as he commanded, “Long spearmen on the sides, musketeers in the middle, advance and fire!”

Following Haldor’s orders, one thousand five hundred militiamen formed a square formation and marched down the slope. By then, the Iroquois had been lured to within two hundred paces of the slope.

At the Viking officer’s command, seven hundred twenty-five musketeers fired in three volleys, their flintlock firearms unleashing powerful bullets that struck down waves of brave Iroquois warriors.

Although the Iroquois courageously fired their longbows and crossbows at the militia regiment, the arrows that could easily kill the Huron people only sparked and clanged against the militia’s iron armor, unable to penetrate the sturdy plate armor.

The three volleys quickly ended, and as the smoke cleared, the musketeers stood in place to reload, while the long spearmen, as trained, flanked from both sides to shield the musketeers.

Over a thousand Iroquois warriors suffered three volleys in succession, with over four hundred killed or wounded on the spot.

The terrifying firearms had taken the lives of nearly half of the invincible warriors. The surviving Iroquois, seeing the dense forest of iron spears just over a hundred paces away, felt their hearts tremble, their limbs grow weak, and their hearts pound as if about to leap out of their chests.

This ambush had stunned the Iroquois warriors and dealt them a fatal blow.

Due to centuries of battle habits, the bravest leaders always charged at the front, leading their warriors in deadly combat with the enemy. Thus, facing the firearms, the front-line leaders also suffered fatal blows. After three volleys, not a single great chief remained standing among the Iroquois.

No one knew who was the first to turn and flee, but like a bursting dam, all the surviving Iroquois picked up their wounded comrades and fled.

Some ran north to the hills, others escaped east to the mountains. Seeing how swiftly they disappeared, Haldor knew that even without plate armor, the Vinland militia couldn’t possibly catch up.

Chapter 151: The Vikings’ Unstoppable Victory

The fleeing Iroquois were about to disappear from Haldor’s sight when suddenly, dense gunfire erupted from the north, and the sound of galloping horses and battle cries faintly came from the east.

“It’s Hudik and Haig!” Haldor chuckled, waving his hand to command the army to split into two groups and pursue the enemy to the north and east.

According to the battle plan devised by Haldor, Hudik, and Haig, Haig led the cavalry to scout the terrain while exploiting the Iroquois’ fear and hatred of horses to lure them into Haldor or Hudik’s ambush.

Then, Haldor and Hudik would launch a pincer attack, with Haig’s cavalry providing cover and assistance.

So far, the plan had gone smoothly. When Haldor arrived in the north, he saw Hudik’s army advancing in a square formation.

In the open space before the two armies lay the bodies of Iroquois warriors, and fewer than two hundred warriors were fleeing eastward in panic.

Hudik and Haig’s armies, like two large nets, encircled the enemy from the north, west, and south. The range of their flintlock firearms completely outmatched the Iroquois, and with their numerical advantage, it was a complete dimensional crushing.

The surviving Iroquois from the north fled east to join the hundred or so who had escaped earlier, but they had not gone far when they saw dozens of armored warriors riding terrifying beasts, accompanied by the thundering of hooves and flying mud. The warriors wielded large axes and long swords, swiftly cutting down the fleeing Iroquois.

No matter how fast the Iroquois ran, they were easily caught and killed by the mounted warriors. A few brave warriors tried to block the slaughter, but their long spears and wooden clubs were instantly broken by the knights, who then disemboweled them.

Even the few lucky Iroquois warriors who dodged the blades were struck by the beasts, their chests shattered, organs displaced, and they died instantly, spitting blood.

Fifty knights, led by Haig, moved like a bone-carving knife, killing Iroquois with each charge, taking thirty to forty lives per round.

The Iroquois were completely scattered like water droplets hitting the ground, fleeing in all directions, while many chose to kneel and surrender, begging for mercy.

Half an hour later, Haldor, Hudik, and Haig rode at the front of their three thousand-strong army, accompanied by a young French officer who continuously praised the strength of Haldor’s troops and expressed his hope that General Haldor would quickly relieve Quebec City.

Haldor reassured the Frenchman, stating that the army would advance directly to surround the Iroquois besieging Quebec City.

The ambush of the Iroquois warriors had been a success. A total of 892 Iroquois warriors had been eliminated, with over two hundred severely wounded later finished off.

There were 101 lightly wounded and surrendered warriors. After interrogation, a few dozen had escaped, but the effective annihilation of a large number of Iroquois warriors made the battle’s outcome satisfactory.

Originally, Haig wanted to kill the hundred lightly wounded and surrendered warriors, but Hudik thought that the terrified slaves posed no threat and could help the musketeers carry ammunition and supplies.

Since the Beothuk language had many similarities with the indigenous languages of the east coast, they could communicate simply with the Iroquois.

After the slave militia interrogated the prisoners, Haldor and his men learned that the closer they got to Quebec City, the more Iroquois warriors they would encounter. The number of Iroquois warriors around Quebec City differed from what Champlain’s messenger had reported.

Champlain had said there were over five thousand Iroquois warriors around Quebec City, but the Iroquois prisoners gave varying numbers.

From three to four thousand to over ten thousand, Haldor knew this was due to differences in the Iroquois warriors’ cognitive abilities and mathematical skills. After detailed questioning and consideration, Haldor and Hudik concluded that there should be over six thousand Iroquois around Quebec City. They had already eliminated a thousand, leaving about five thousand.

After this victory, the soldiers of both armies were filled with confidence and high morale. Although they only carried five days’ worth of rations and supplies, and each musketeer had about forty-five bullets left, considering the Iroquois’ strength and intelligence, as well as their own advantage of over three thousand troops, Haldor believed they could defeat the Iroquois within three days and eliminate most of the enemy.

Arriving at a river ahead, Haldor and Hudik ordered a rest to eat lunch. Due to their overwhelming strength and the blocked river preventing the Iroquois from escaping, the two armies were not afraid of cooking fires alerting the large number of Iroquois to the east.

Under the knights’ vigilance, the two armies quickly finished their lunch and continued to split into northern and southern routes, with Haig’s cavalry leading the way toward Quebec City in the east.

…

Half a month after Haldor and his men left Vinland, Olaf had just returned from the mines of Longling Mountain to Hrut City when he received a batch of over seven hundred Iroquois slaves and eighty wounded men sent by his father by ship. He also received the good news that the Viking Raid General had led the army to annihilate the Iroquois warriors besieging Quebec City.

Olaf had no doubt about his father’s army’s victory; the only question was how long it would take and what the outcome would be.

For Olaf, professionally trained young soldiers wearing plate armor and carrying firearms against seventy percent of soldiers armed with primitive bows and arrows, wooden clubs, and stone clubs was like the Eight-Nation Alliance entering Beijing, or even a greater disparity.

Olaf knew that if the Vinland army’s cavalry could be increased two or threefold, the army’s overall combat power against the indigenous people of the New World would make one against a hundred not a fantasy.

Often, when there was a heavenly gap in soldier quality, weaponry, and combat awareness, personal bravery and more warriors were of no avail.

This battle had captured over seven hundred slaves, many of whom were lightly wounded. Haldor’s intention was to reward all the slaves from this battle to the meritorious Viking officers, white slaves, and even slave soldiers. Therefore, Olaf and Heiner discussed and temporarily placed the prisoners in several agricultural fortresses outside the city. This way, they could keep them away from Hrut City while allowing the Vikings, white slaves, and slaves in the city to guard the prisoners.

To prevent the prisoners from rebelling, Olaf organized over thirty guards from his Aettangr Vikings and private slaves, armed with firelock muskets, to guard the prisoners in the agricultural fortresses.

The prisoners were escorted back by a Viking officer and over fifty white slave musketeers. The Viking officer was Haldor’s confidant, Valitu.

From Valitu, Olaf learned about his father, Hudik, and Haig’s uneventful battles in Quebec City over the past few days. Before their food and ammunition ran out, they had completely defeated the over five thousand Iroquois warriors besieging Quebec City.

Through continuous pursuit and interception, a large number of Iroquois were killed, a small number escaped to the northern Labrador Peninsula, and over a thousand fled east but were intercepted and heavily defeated by Ulf leading six hundred elite troops.

When Valitu escorted the slaves back to Hrut City yesterday afternoon, the battle on the north bank of the Saint Lawrence River had basically ended.

The Vinland army had lost over a dozen men, but none were killed in battle. There were over a dozen militia injured by firearm explosions, and some were injured by stepping on traps or being ambushed, totaling several dozen.

The Iroquois army was completely defeated, with over three thousand five hundred killed, nearly a thousand dying from injuries, and over seven hundred captured. The main Iroquois forces around Quebec City had been essentially wiped out by eighty percent, and the remaining few Iroquois could not resist.

To pursue the victory, after sending some food and supplies to Champlain, Haldor sent Valitu back to Hrut City with the wounded and prisoners to report. Then, he, Hudik, Haig, and Ulf led the two armies and six hundred elite troops, guided by several prisoners familiar with the terrain and Huron people, toward the western Huron territory. They planned to help the Huron people and take down the entangled Huron and Iroquois people.

Olaf hurriedly asked Valitu about the number of Huron people and the Iroquois attacking them. He learned that the Huron had over ten thousand soldiers, the Iroquois had seven to eight thousand, and after half a month of fighting, both sides had suffered significant losses.

Olaf thought that with three thousand six hundred modern soldiers and advanced weapons and equipment, fighting one to two hundred thousand Iroquois and Huron warriors would not be much more difficult than the battle they had just finished. So, the worry he had been carrying since Haldor left finally disappeared.

Soon after Valitu and his men returned to Hrut City, Hoskuld and Jot from Haldor City, and Blackstone from Bakens City sent people to Hrut City to inquire about the recent developments of the Raid General’s western expedition.

As the news of Haldor’s great victory spread through Vinland, over three thousand men had defeated twice as many enemies without a single casualty.

This was just an army composed of white slaves and indigenous slaves, led by eighty Viking officers and General Haldor, Hudik, and Haig, and they had easily achieved victory.

What if it were the Viking army? Would the victory be even more effortless?

In the hearts of all Vinland people, the answer was self-evident. The Viking army’s invincibility and unstoppable attacks had become an unshakable truth for most Vinland people. They had never seen European mercenary armies or royal armies; they had only seen their own Viking army, which always easily defeated indigenous warriors. Therefore, the Viking army’s strength had deeply rooted in their minds, indelible.

Chapter 153: Territory Greatly Expanded

On September 15th, Haldor’s army swept across both banks of the Saint Lawrence River, relieving Quebec City from the Iroquois threat. They killed 4,500 Iroquois warriors and captured 700, then continued their westward advance.

On the 28th, Olaf received another 2,800 prisoners escorted back by Nilahu, along with news of Haldor, Hudik, and Ulf’s successful campaigns. They had repeatedly defeated over 3,000 Iroquois warriors and captured 2,300 Huron people and 500 Iroquois prisoners, sending them back to Hrut City.

In the northern part of the North American continent, many tribes resided, with the Cree being the most widespread. Their territory spanned the northern and northeastern regions of the Great Lakes, overlapping with the Huron people.

According to Nilahu, while pursuing the Iroquois in the west, they also subdued the Huron people, who had been devastated by the Iroquois. They discovered that the Iroquois, while occupying Huron lands and seizing their population, had also dealt with the neighboring Cree.

However, to avoid unnecessary complications, Haldor, after defeating the Iroquois, only announced the subjugation of the severely weakened Huron people. He did not attempt to conquer the Cree but instead politely returned them to their original tribes.

The Great Lakes region was one of the most densely populated areas by Native American tribes in northern North America. The Cree lived in the north, the Huron people in the northeast, the Iroquois in the east and southeast, the Sioux to the west, and two or three other tribes to the southwest. Controlling the Great Lakes meant controlling the entire eastern part of North America. Therefore, Haldor’s strategic goal was to bring the eastern two lakes of the Great Lakes region under his control, which meant occupying the territories originally belonging to the Iroquois, Huron people, and a small part of the Cree.

Olaf, Haldor, Hudik, and the others were well aware that although the reason for this western expedition was somewhat unexpected, it was undoubtedly the best opportunity for Vinland to establish itself on the continent.

They had never imagined that the Iroquois, after obtaining iron tools and advanced weapons, would become so ambitious as to attempt to conquer the Huron people, whom they had been fighting for over a hundred years. Indeed, they had forced the Huron people and New France to retreat continuously.

The Iroquois’ ambition had also been fueled by their victory over the white settlements in Massachusetts Bay with their advanced weapons. If the powerful whites could be defeated by the Iroquois with advanced weapons, how could they not be ambitious?

The situation in North America had completely deviated from its original course of development. If Vinland did not intervene, the Iroquois might have trapped Champlain and others, completely annexing the Huron people’s territory and becoming a regional power.

However, the natives lacked the means to gather information and the judgment to understand Vinland. They thought the strongest white allies were Plymouth, and that Vinland, far away in the eastern sea, was not even as strong as New France. But the result was that after a month of fierce battles between the Iroquois and the Huron people, Vinland’s army reaped the benefits.

The western army of the Iroquois Confederacy, which had been rampaging through the Huron and Cree territories, was furious and terrified upon learning that Haldor’s army had annihilated the eastern coalition besieging Quebec City. They quickly organized their forces to confront the Vinland army, but with only over 7,000 men, they were no match for the 3,600-strong Vinland legion.

After three consecutive defeats, the western coalition finally suffered heavy casualties and fled in disarray.

Haldor then announced the takeover of the Huron people’s territory and prepared to lead the Huron people in a counterattack against the Iroquois Confederacy to completely annihilate the Iroquois and avenge their grievances.

After continuous defeats by the Iroquois army, the Huron people were barely able to resist. A large number of warriors had been killed or injured, and most of their leaders and priests had been slaughtered by the Iroquois. Thus, nearly 100,000 square kilometers of Huron territory had lost its ability to resist, leaving only a few injured warriors and many women, children, and elderly in the various tribes.

After driving out the Iroquois, Haldor also killed a few warrior leaders who dared to resist. The remaining Huron chiefs and shamans showed complete submission, fully agreeing to submit to the rule of the Vinland Viking Raid as slaves.

For the Huron people, the Iroquois were enemies with a blood feud, while the Vikings of Vinland were clearly great saviors. Moreover, the Vikings were ten times more powerful than the Iroquois, who were completely powerless against the Vikings. If the Huron people did not want to be annihilated, they had to obey.

The Huron shamans and chiefs also heard that many Beothuk people on Vinland Island had been freed from slavery and given the same status as white lords because they had surrendered early to the Vikings and performed well.

This rumor was confirmed when they saw the Viking officers managing the Vinland army, as more than half of the dozens of Viking lords had yellow skin.

After announcing the takeover of the Huron territory, General Haldor expressed sufficient goodwill to the Huron people, promising that they could continue to live in their original lands. However, they had to recruit some young and capable warriors or youths to be sent to Hrut City, where they would be trained as militia in the future.

At the same time, all current warriors were conscripted to follow him in attacking the Iroquois Confederacy. He also established standards for military achievements based on the number of enemy heads taken. For those who truly distinguished themselves, Haldor would free them from perpetual slavery, changing their status to five-year indentured servants.

After the contract ended, they could become high-ranking Viking lords. With the invincible Viking lords leading the charge against the Iroquois, the Huron people were enthusiastic. In just two days, Haldor had conscripted over 2,000 young and strong warriors.

There were also over 3,000 women and children in the Huron tribes who had lost their husbands and fathers in the war.

Haldor and Hudik, Haig, and Ulf selected over 2,000 healthy Huron people without disabilities or diseases, along with 500 Iroquois prisoners, and sent them back to Hrut City.

After the personnel left, Haldor led over 3,000 troops and 2,000 Huron warriors towards the southeastern Iroquois Confederacy camps.

After compiling the data, Haldor’s newly promoted Huron chief, Deer Leg, informed his esteemed master that the Iroquois had a total population of only about 100,000, with over 10,000 warriors. Even if all able-bodied men were counted, the number would not exceed 30,000.

After more than a month of chaotic battles, the Huron people had suffered heavy losses, and the Iroquois had also lost one or two thousand people. Recently, Vinland had killed or injured over 10,000 more, and the Iroquois Confederacy’s experienced hunter-warriors had been almost completely wiped out.

Although the 2,000 Huron warriors were still no match for the Iroquois, with the addition of over 3,000 Vinland militia, they could definitely eliminate the Iroquois’ resistance in one fell swoop.

Regarding the annihilation of the aggressive enemy, the Iroquois Confederacy, the Huron people were very enthusiastic. The remaining eleven original Huron leaders and the more than thirty new leaders appointed by Haldor all vied to offer strategies to Haldor. Now, they were eager to act as guides and assistants, wanting only to help Haldor’s army destroy the Iroquois Confederacy and then become indentured servants or even Vikings who could enslave the Iroquois. This was the only way for the Huron people, who had been bullied for one or two hundred years, to suppress the Iroquois.

The rescued Cree people also attached themselves to the powerful Vinland army, sending over 500 warriors to assist the Vinland army and Huron warriors in launching a counterattack against the Iroquois.

On October 10th, after Ulf and Haig, leading the Huron people in canoes, brought back tens of thousands of pounds of potatoes, sweet potatoes, ammunition, alcohol, and other supplies from the middle reaches of the Saint Lawrence River, Haldor knew that the time had come to attack the Iroquois Confederacy and launch the final decisive battle.

On October 15th, having basically occupied and stabilized the Huron territory, Haldor, led by the Huron and Cree people familiar with the mountainous terrain, personally led over 5,000 troops across the Saint Lawrence River upstream of Lake Ontario. After assembling the troops on the south bank, 1,500 Huron people carried plate armor and ammunition for the two militia legions. Five hundred Cree and five hundred Huron people, along with cavalry, scouting ahead, searched for Iroquois Confederacy villages.

On the afternoon of October 15th, they found a village, and the 1,000-strong vanguard native army killed most of the Iroquois in the village. That night, they set up camp in the village to rest.

On October 16th, they encountered a newly organized Iroquois army of 5,000. The two armies faced off for less than an hour, and the Iroquois army suffered heavy casualties, fleeing in defeat. The cavalry and 2,500 native troops took over 1,000 Iroquois heads, then cut off their noses as proof of military merit.

On October 24th, the Vinland coalition forces successively broke through two major Iroquois tribes, killing two major chiefs and several elder leaders of the tribes.

On October 26th, Haig led the cavalry to rout 500 Pequot warriors, followed by 2,000 Huron warriors who attacked the Pequot tribe, burning, killing, and looting. The last of the three major tribes in the Iroquois Confederacy’s leadership core was thus completely destroyed.

After killing a large number of Iroquois warriors, Haldor and Hudik, Haig, respectively took control of the three major tribes. They then had the Huron and Cree people cleanse the Iroquois territory, searching for those who dared to resist or even hated the coalition forces, then publicly tried and executed them in various tribes to intimidate the Iroquois.

The great purge was accompanied by terrible bloody slaughter. The Huron and Cree people continued to arbitrarily kill the Iroquois. By November 16th, when Haldor ordered the purge to stop, over 20,000 Iroquois had been killed or forced to their deaths.

The war that had begun in August had caused heavy population losses among the many tribes on the eastern side of the Great Lakes, with an average reduction of 20% in population. The Iroquois were left with less than two-thirds of their original number.

Although this man-made war was terrible, for the Iroquois, and even the Huron and Cree people, their nightmare had only just begun.

On November 14th, Haldor ordered the abolition of the five major Huron tribes and the three major Iroquois tribes. The Iroquois Confederacy and the Huron Confederacy were merged and then incorporated into Vinland’s territory. He then announced the establishment of three city-states on the basis of the three Iroquois tribes, named Gang City, Bay City, and Kuo City. In the Huron region, a large city named Huron City was to be built.

On the 15th, after a day of discussion with Hudik and others, Haldor rewarded the entire personnel. The families of the more than 50 deceased Vinland militia members were all freed from slavery and became Vikings, receiving land and servants.

Viking officer Haldor selected a dozen people to serve as city lords, deputy city lords, and guard commanders in the four newly acquired cities. He also divided a legion of 1,200 men to each city to manage the native slaves and maintain security, under the command of the Viking city lords.

Over 300 indentured white slave soldiers were freed from their contracts due to their merits. They all became Viking lords with 50 acres of land in the three cities and 10 Iroquois servants.

The remaining white slaves had their contract terms reduced to varying degrees, and many received more than two Iroquois female slaves.

All slave militia were freed from slavery and became indentured white slaves. Then, 52 slave militia members were directly promoted to Vikings, also receiving land and servants in Kuo City of the Iroquois region.

The 2,000 Huron warriors were all rewarded and freed from slavery. The eight most enthusiastic performers were rewarded by Haldor with a one-year indentured slave contract and appointed as militia captains in the three Iroquois cities, temporarily assisting the city lords and deputy city lords in managing the Iroquois.

Since the 500 Cree people were not under Vinland’s jurisdiction, Haldor gave each of the 500 Cree two Iroquois child slaves, with additional female slaves as rewards for those with greater merits.

Chapter 154: Haig’s Son Named Arthur

The news of Haldor’s great army’s successive victories on the North American continent and the expansion of Vinland’s territory spread rapidly back to Hrut City, Bakens City, and Haldor City in Vinland.

The developments in the North American landscape also quickly reached Plymouth, Quebec, New Netherlands, Virginia, and other regions closely monitoring the war.

In the increasingly cold November of the North American continent, Peter Minuit, the governor of New Netherlands, keenly judged that the future of North America would no longer be a contest between England and France, but rather Vinland’s dominance. Thus, he decided to visit Vinland’s leader, Haldor, after some time.

Upon learning that the Massachusetts Bay Company had been destroyed by the natives, and that the north had seen three months of continuous warfare, ultimately won by the Icelanders of Vinland Island, John Smith, the governor of Virginia, became highly vigilant. He chose not to intervene, deciding instead to cautiously observe the situation while increasing vigilance against the natives around his own colony.

Hearing that Vinland had occupied the territories of the Iroquois and Huron people, becoming the largest and most powerful colony in North America, the English in Plymouth felt the most conflicted. They had long resented their city lord, McG, for submitting to Vinland, but feared the one thousand Vinland soldiers stationed in the city. Thus, they showed only superficial respect to McG in their daily lives.

As Vinland grew stronger, many shrewd Englishmen had completely sided with McG, willing to contribute their strength to the “Great American Co-Prosperity.”

In Quebec City, Champlain and Thiers, the New France lieutenant recovering from a leg wound, relied on food aid from Vinland. They had nothing but praise for their powerful and kind allies.

When Ulf left the three Iroquois cities and returned to Basque City, he made a special stop in Quebec City. At Champlain’s banquet, he thoroughly humiliated Thiers, avenging the insult Thiers had dealt to Basque the previous year.

The French were left embarrassed, but had no choice but to endure it.

After Ulf’s departure, Haldor also led the remaining two thousand men back to Hrut City.

When Haldor, Haig, and Hudik led the army back to Hrut City, snowflakes were drifting through the air. Under Olaf’s arrangement, over ten thousand people braved the wind and snow, bringing wine, water, and roasted sweet potatoes to welcome them at Hrut Port.

The cheers at Hrut Port echoed through the sky, moving Haldor and his men to the point where they couldn’t stop grinning. The soldiers behind them also stood tall, feeling as though they had entered the most glorious moment of their lives.

Back in Hrut City, Haldor ordered everyone to rest for a day. Then, all Vikings and their families and private slaves in the Viking Raid were rewarded with ten pounds of sweet potatoes and potatoes each.

That evening, Haldor’s fortress held a banquet to entertain the high-ranking members of the Viking Raid.

As they sat in Haldor’s fortress chatting, Haig gently tugged at Olaf’s sleeve and asked, “Why isn’t Lorin here?”

Olaf glanced at his father, who was holding his younger siblings, then solemnly said to his uncle, “Lorin is about to give birth. She waited for you all for a while, but then her stomach started hurting. My mother took her to the room to rest.”

Hearing this, Haig quickly stood up and, led by a servant, went to the back room to see his wife.

Haldor and the others first discussed the campaign and the governance of the three Iroquois cities and Huron City with Olaf and Heiner. Olaf remembered the vast plains owned by the Iroquois, which he had long wanted to use for cotton cultivation to develop the textile industry. He shared his thoughts with his father once more.

As a Scot, Heiner understood that the traditional wool and weaving industries of Great Britain had been declining in recent years. He also knew that rare cotton fabric was currently a novel commodity in Europe. If Vinland could cultivate and weave cotton, becoming rich enough to rival a nation would be easily achievable.

After Heiner’s analysis, Haldor and Hudik understood what establishing a cotton cultivation base and textile industry would mean for Vinland. Thus, Haldor nodded and said, “The Iroquois and Huron people are now the best slaves. We can send some Vikings and white slaves skilled in agriculture to the Iroquois region to lead the Iroquois and Huron people in finding suitable land to cultivate. At the same time, the four cities currently under construction must be completed to the standards of Hrut City, including water channels, toilets, and manure pits.”

After more than an hour of discussion, the leadership of the Viking Raid formulated detailed development plans for Huron City and the three Iroquois cities. However, relying on the temporary city lords appointed by Haldor before his return to Vinland made execution difficult.

Thus, Haldor hoped that Heiner and Olaf would select and recommend several dozen people skilled in technology, construction, planning, agriculture, and other fields to be sent to the mainland specifically to oversee city construction and population management.

Olaf and Heiner had managed Hrut City for several months and could instantly think of suitable candidates. However, Olaf realized a more serious problem: how to manage or handle the Iroquois and Huron people.

If they could ensure the loyalty of the Iroquois and Huron people, then to prevent the Vinlanders from infecting them with smallpox, influenza, cholera, and other viruses that the Indian natives had no immunity against, leading to massive deaths among the Iroquois and Huron people, should they proceed with vaccination?

If vaccinated, and the two tribes’ populations reached fourteen or fifteen hundred thousand, equivalent to seven times that of Vinland, it would absolutely be an unstable factor in the future.

But allowing the Iroquois and Huron people to die would not benefit Vinland either. After all, Vinland had too few people, and losing a large number of Iroquois and Huron laborers would leave the vast conquered lands unguarded and undeveloped.

After Olaf raised this issue, Haldor’s fortress fell silent as everyone contemplated the pros and cons of each choice.

Haig, looking anxious, came out from the back, breaking the silence.

Haldor quickly asked, “Haig, how is it?”

Haig gently shook his head and said, “Katrin is with her in the room. Lorin is about to give birth. I need to wait.”

“Don’t worry, God will bless Lorin!” Haldor saw his brother’s impatience and unease, stood up, and hugged Haig tightly. Then, he ordered someone to bring a barrel of the Water of Life. Everyone stopped talking, drinking wine in silence as they waited.

After about an hour, when the self-striking clock chimed to announce two in the afternoon, Katrin, looking exhausted, walked into the living room, holding a baby wrapped in a blanket. She smiled and said, “Haig! Come see your son!”

Haig suddenly stood up, knocking over the chair beneath him, then rushed to Katrin like a bear, gently extending his large hands to hold the wrinkled little baby with silver-white hair, then laughed heartily.

After everyone looked at the child for a while, Katrin took the child and Haig to see Lorin.

The people in the living room then discussed Haig’s child. Olaf noticed that everyone was deliberately avoiding the topic of whether to vaccinate the Iroquois and Huron people.

Because if the two Indian tribes were not vaccinated, the Iroquois and Huron people would face terrible diseases equivalent to plagues, quickly killing nine out of ten of them.

This would severely affect Vinland’s rule and management of the Iroquois and Huron regions. Future city construction, land cultivation, and hunting production activities on the mainland would also face a shortage of labor.

If things turned out that way, no matter how much land they acquired, they wouldn’t be able to capitalize on it. In fact, it would not benefit Vinland and might instead attract the covetous eyes of many interested parties, such as the French, Dutch, and English.

But vaccinating the Iroquois and Huron people, everyone was worried that with advanced crops like potatoes and sweet potatoes, and agricultural technology, the populations of the two regions would increase significantly. In the future, the two tribes might very likely rebel against Vinland and the Vikings. Whether it was Haldor, Hudik, Heiner, or Olaf, they were all very worried, as the population ratio gap was indeed too large.

Currently, no one could think of a perfect solution, and Olaf did not dare to express his opinion lightly. So, everyone continued to drink wine and eat the boiled sausages and fried meat patties just brought in from the kitchen.

Haig quickly returned, beaming, picked up a cup of wine, drank it, and laughed, “The ancestors bless us, Lorin and the child are both healthy!”

Everyone heard this and sighed in relief.

In this era of backward medicine, illness or injury carried the risk of death.

Giving birth was even more likely to result in “saving the mother or the child, but not both” problems. Difficult births had always been a major issue plaguing everyone.

Moreover, problems like children being born disabled or unhealthy were not uncommon. Olaf knew that between himself and Ulf, there was a sister who had died from illness at birth. His father, Haldor, also had a sibling who was a foolish child, who was hastily married off to an old widower and then lost contact.

The backwardness of the times meant there were many indescribable pains, but since survival itself was difficult, how could anyone care about other sufferings? For example, people who randomly interfered in others’ affairs, common in later generations, were almost non-existent now. If they had the time, they would first consider how to fill their stomachs and do their own work.

“Give the child a name!” Hudik patted Haig’s shoulder and said with a smile.

Haig scratched his head, remembering the story of King Arthur of England that his wife had told him. He clapped his hands and said, “From now on, this child will be called Arthur!”

“Arthur!”

“What a resounding name!”

“I wonder if he will meet his Merlin!”

“Haha…”

Haldor’s fortress was filled with laughter and joy. Without waiting for evening, everyone had already started drinking heartily.

The lively atmosphere even affected the usually rational Olaf, making his mood light as he drank two cups of wine.

Chapter 156: Making Coal Briquettes

The countless goods brought back from Greenland had delighted Haldor’s family. Katrin first selected Arctic fox pelts for herself and her daughter to make shawls, and also picked out two Arctic bear pelts to make bear fur cloaks for Haldor, Olaf, Ulf, and Half.

Haig also received an Arctic bear pelt, with the explanation that it was for Arthur and Lorin.

As time gradually approached December, Vinland’s weather had reached what people considered winter temperatures. Though the rivers and lakes had not yet frozen, the mornings and evenings were already exceptionally cold. Everyone knew that within ten days, perhaps even sooner, the world would enter the bleak, icy depths of winter, when no one could survive without burning fires indoors for warmth.

Haldor’s fortress had begun burning fires for warmth as soon as the weather turned cool in November. The fireplace had never been without firewood, but Olaf, who went out early and returned late, discovered that the coal he had ordered to be moved to the kitchen had not been used. After asking his mother, he learned that coal was difficult to ignite and produced a lot of smoke during combustion. A household of yellow Vikings had nearly died from carbon monoxide poisoning after using coal for heating, and even now, one of their children remained paralyzed in bed.

The coal had not shown enough advantages; instead, it had revealed terrifying flaws. This left the two boatloads of coal sent from the mine piled up in the backyard of Haldor’s fortress, barely selling and hardly usable.

Olaf deeply regretted the safety accident caused by improper coal use and secretly thought to himself that it was fortunate this was the current era. If it were the future, where hospitals had to compensate for patient deaths, his family would have to pay a fortune.

After earnestly asking his mother to provide some compensation to the Viking family affected by carbon monoxide poisoning, Olaf took some coal to the factory and gathered several craftsmen to research the honeycomb coal of the future.

The application of coal as a domestic fuel had undergone many changes. Initially, it was burned directly as loose coal. Later, to reduce smoke and toxic gases and make coal easier to ignite and more durable, laborers in the late 19th and early 20th centuries invented coal briquettes.

Crushed coal mixed with soil or even grass could be formed into round balls, which burned longer and produced less smoke.

However, the most easily ignited, durable, and least smoky coal was still honeycomb coal. That type of coal was easy to ignite and durable, an important part of Olaf’s childhood in his past life. Whether for winter heating or year-round cooking, honeycomb coal was the most basic fuel.

Now, the longhouses where the Vikings of Hrut City lived mostly had smoke chimneys, so burning coal or wood could provide warmth. As long as the coal was improved into easily ignitable and durable honeycomb coal, and the prevention of carbon monoxide poisoning was properly communicated, using honeycomb coal for winter heating would become the trend.

As for indentured white slaves and native slaves, limited by economic conditions, they generally burned some firewood for warmth at night during winter and huddled together for warmth during the day.

To promote coal, Olaf decided that after successful production, he would distribute ten honeycomb coal briquettes to each household for free. Once everyone wanted to use them, he would set the price at one copper coin for two briquettes. Indentured white slaves could definitely afford them, and if native slaves worked hard, their masters would be willing to buy some for them. Especially for Haldor’s family’s private slaves, Olaf had already decided that his slaves and the family’s private slaves would all receive some honeycomb coal for winter.

Although Olaf had not yet developed honeycomb coal, he did not consider this task difficult.

Olaf’s memory told him that honeycomb coal was made by pressing prepared coal mud with an iron tool.

The key was not pressing the coal balls. Olaf and several blacksmiths discussed and quickly sketched a diagram. Olaf recognized it as a tool for pressing honeycomb coal, and the blacksmiths went to make the tool using copper ingots.

Mixing the coal mud was even easier for Olaf. Though he didn’t know what was added to honeycomb coal hundreds of years later, it was nothing more than soil, sawdust, etc. Olaf discussed with the other craftsmen and had people use the wind-powered equipment on Razor Mountain to crush the coal into powder. Then, they brought some soil, added water to make mud, filtered out the stones that settled at the bottom, and mixed the mud with the coal powder, creating a black mud pile. They then rolled it into coal balls and left them to dry in the sun.

By the next afternoon, when Olaf returned to the factory, he found that the surface of the coal balls was almost dry. At this point, the blacksmiths had already forged four molding tools. Olaf continued to mix the mud with the workers and used the tools to press the coal balls. After testing, only one of the four tools worked flexibly. After watching Olaf press the coal balls himself for a while, the blacksmiths took the failed tools to modify them.

By the third afternoon, a fully functional coal ball press had been successfully made and put into production.

At this time, the coal balls made by hand on the first day had also dried. Olaf conducted an on-site experiment, having someone bring coal blocks and coal balls to ignite simultaneously. The final result was that the coal balls were indeed easier to ignite than the coal blocks, though their durability was slightly worse, and the smoke was less than that of burning coal blocks.

The success of the experiment delighted Olaf. He waited another day and then compared the combustion of coal balls, coal blocks, and honeycomb coal. All the craftsmen and apprentices in the factory came to watch. The final result was that honeycomb coal was the perfect product in terms of ignitability, durability, and smoke during combustion.

Amid the cheers of the crowd, Olaf announced the official establishment of the Olaf Factory Honeycomb Coal Plant. He then selected several craftsmen and many apprentices to work on crushing coal and making coal, promising them wages no lower than those at the brewery and sugar factory.

The craftsmen and apprentices chosen to work at the honeycomb coal plant were quite happy. Although the coal-making site was a bit dirty, the income was higher than making other things in the factory workshop.

After a week of continuous work, tens of thousands of honeycomb coal briquettes were produced. Olaf then distributed ten to each household in Hrut City and announced the sales price as one copper coin for two briquettes.

Currently, there was basically no commercial activity in Hrut City. Even if there was some, it was monopolized by the Haldor family. Apart from Vikings and some indentured white slaves who could use copper, silver, or even gold coins for transactions, most people were still at the barter level.

However, every item had a price. One pound of potatoes or sweet potatoes cost one copper coin, a fresh cod or dried cod in Hrut City cost forty copper coins, a beaver pelt was worth twenty-five copper coins, a reindeer pelt was worth twenty-five…

Since the commercial activities of Hrut City’s people were based on actual needs, the naturally formed commodity prices did not match many places in the European market and were even severely contradictory. However, the people of Vinland had already adapted and accepted this.

An adult Viking or indentured white slave could create an average market value of ten to twenty copper coins in Hrut City through private hunting or fishing. Therefore, no family could afford to burn coal; that was not burning coal but burning food. They thought it was better to use the firewood they chopped themselves.

However, the wealthiest in Vinland were the families of those who participated in the Viking Legion, Militia Legion, and White Wolf soldiers. They could become rich for three years from a single battle through looting.

There was also the monthly distribution of food by Haldor through the Viking Raid to the families of Viking soldiers, militia, and White Wolf soldiers. Even the least slave militia could receive thirty pounds of potatoes or sweet potatoes each month. If they were Viking soldiers, their income was ten times that of slave soldiers.

Viking soldiers, White Wolf soldiers, and militia leaders with substantial incomes did not feel pressured to buy honeycomb coal. Therefore, in Olaf’s eyes, the seven to eight hundred families behind these people were the future customer base for honeycomb coal.

Most families, after receiving the honeycomb coal, used one or two pieces when cooking or heating, and then honeycomb coal became the winter heating godsend in the hearts of the Vinland people because it did not have the smoke of firewood. As long as there was a pipe, most of the toxic gas from honeycomb coal could be vented out, and the remaining amount was not harmful to people.

More importantly, honeycomb coal was much more durable than firewood. A few pieces of honeycomb coal could burn all night, and it was usually enough to add one piece at night.

But burning firewood required adding wood seven or eight times, or even eight or nine times, at night to keep the fire from going out.

Though the days passed, Vinland’s temperature continued to drop.

Hrut City in December was already exceptionally cold. After experiencing the benefits of honeycomb coal, Haldor had one thousand pieces sent to Haldor City, Bakens City, and Basque City, and specifically instructed them on the key points of use. They must ensure that the exhaust chimneys were well-made, not allowing smoke to be unvented or even backdraft. They must ensure that the smoke was smoothly vented, which was the first priority in using honeycomb coal.

Chapter 157: Tragic News

As Christmas of 1630 approached, Vinland was hit by a heavy snowstorm. Before the howling winds and snow arrived, Olaf’s factory had already shut down, and the breeding company had long since reinforced and insulated their enclosures.

Though the outside world was bitterly cold, with ice and snow covering everything, and both humans and animals rarely venturing out, Haldor’s fortress was warmer this year than in previous years. Katrin attributed this to the new fuel Olaf had invented—coal briquettes—which burned longer and hotter than firewood, making them far superior for both cooking and heating.

The Haldor family had been in high spirits ever since returning from their victory in Haldor. They had already made plans to celebrate Christmas in grand fashion.

Katrin had heard that Virginia and Plymouth were celebrating something called Thanksgiving, a holiday to give thanks to the Indians who had helped them. She thought that in such a joyless primitive society, people needed to find ways to entertain themselves. After discussing it with her husband and son, she decided to introduce a similar holiday in Vinland during the coldest and most tedious part of winter. Of course, the Vikings’ Thanksgiving would not be about gratitude toward the Indian natives. In the Haldor family’s view, their Thanksgiving would be a celebration of their ancestors from the Viking era six or seven hundred years ago—those brave, free, and resilient warriors who had left their mark on Iceland, Greenland, and Vinland. Now, under the leadership of the Haldor family, the Icelanders had reclaimed Vinland and Greenland and even set foot on the North American continent. This glorious moment was certainly worthy of remembering their ancestors and giving thanks.

Thus, Katrin announced through the Viking families that on the third Sunday after Christmas and New Year’s Day—the coldest time of the year—all Vikings would celebrate Thanksgiving.

Celebrating such festivals would help the people of Vinland feel a sense of belonging to Viking culture, which was beneficial for both the nation and its people. Haldor fully supported this idea. After Katrin’s announcement, he also issued an order as the Viking Raid General, requiring everyone in Hrut City to observe Thanksgiving. He even planned to increase publicity next year to ensure that all colonized regions would follow this tradition and the Viking culture behind it.

Inside the warm fortress, Haldor, Haig, and others spent their days drinking, playing cards, and playing board games.

This leisurely life was actually quite monotonous and dull, but given the harsh environment and the danger of freezing illnesses—or even death—no one ventured outside unless absolutely necessary.

Olaf had assumed he would spend the winter inside the fortress, just like in previous years, and would not go out until the end of January next year.

But three days after Christmas, on a cold winter night, a burly man dressed in a seal-skin coat pounded on the door of Haldor’s fortress.

Since Haig’s family was staying in the fortress to take care of Arthur, it was Lorin who opened the door. She did not recognize the man outside and was about to ask who he was when the man spoke in Icelandic: “Is General Haldor at home? I am Bich, a guard of Lord Jot from Haldor City.”

Haig and Haldor, who were drinking in the living room, had already heard Bich’s loud voice. They laughed and said, “Bich, come in and warm up! Why aren’t you with your uncle? What brings you back?”

Bich was a villager from White Hazel Forest Hrut Village and also Jot’s nephew. He had just married Solrak’s eldest daughter last year, with Hoskuld as the witness. Haldor and Haig remembered this young man, so they were quite surprised to see him.

Bich entered the warm hall, took off his hat, and knelt on one knee with reddened eyes. In a deep voice, he said, “General Haldor! Commander Haig! My uncle is dead!”

“What!”

Haldor and Haig, who had been drinking merrily, jumped up in shock. Haldor grabbed Bich and demanded sternly, “What happened? Explain yourself!”

“In October, my uncle caught a cold. After drinking hot grape wine for a few days, he seemed to recover. But last month, he suddenly developed a boil on his lower back. It was extremely painful to touch but didn’t seem dangerous, so he didn’t pay much attention to it. Ten days ago, he started coughing constantly, his body burned with fever, and the weather was too cold for him to return. I took care of him, but his condition worsened. He struggled to breathe, couldn’t eat, and passed away two afternoons ago…”

“Ah!”

After hearing the details of Jot’s illness and death, Haldor let go of Bich and staggered back to the sofa, staring blankly at the floor.

The commotion in the living room had drawn everyone’s attention. Lorin, Katrin, who was busy in the kitchen, and Gerny, Half, and Olaf, who were resting in their rooms, all rushed over and heard the tragic news of Jot’s death.

Olaf thought of his quiet and reserved Uncle Jot and of red-haired Tom, who was still waiting at home in Hrut City for his father to return in the spring. He sighed inwardly: How heartbroken Tom must be! Jot was such a good man!

“Jot was such a good man!” Katrin said tearfully as she walked over to Haldor and hugged her husband.

Haig muttered, “Has Jot’s body been brought back?”

Bich wiped his tears and snot and said, “Mr. Hoskuld, my father, and a few others took a boat to bring my uncle’s body back. They are on their way from the dock to here. I rode ahead to deliver the news!”

“Take us there quickly!” Haldor said, putting on his outerwear and finally donning the polar bear fur coat that Katrin handed him.

Haig also put on his coat, and the three of them rode out of the fortress toward Hrut City.

After more than an hour, Katrin sent a few slaves to check on them. They finally reported that Haldor and the others had returned to the inner city with a carriage carrying a coffin and were now heading to Jot’s house.

Katrin and Olaf had already put on their coats. They instructed Lorin to stay home and look after the children, then mother and son, accompanied by two servants carrying torches, made their way through the ice and snow to Jot’s longhouse.

By the time they arrived at Jot’s house, it was already filled with Vikings both inside and out. Inside were relatives and neighbors from Iceland, many of whom were silently weeping around the coffin placed in the courtyard.

By the light of the brazier in the courtyard, they could see the bearded young man Lixstrom, his face filled with grief. Behind him stood his mother, talking with Hoskuld, Haldor, Haig, Heiner, and others.

Katrin quickly went over and hugged Jot’s wife, softly comforting her.

Olaf stood beside Tom and gently nudged his shoulder with his elbow. In a low voice, he said, “Sorry, buddy. I just found out. Uncle Jot…”

Tom’s red hair was blown by the cold wind as he looked up at Olaf, forcing a stiff, dry smile. “It’s okay. No one can predict when misfortune will strike.”

Olaf sighed deeply. Hearing footsteps in the snow behind him, he turned to see Nilahu, Solrak, Valitu, and others, followed by their wives and sons.

Soon, Tom and Olaf were surrounded by more than a dozen young men. However, those closest to Tom were Halik, Ilugi, Hari, Val, Eriksson, and young Solrak. They all embraced Tom deeply, then stood silently by their friend’s side.

It was already late at night. Haldor and the others had spoken with Jot’s wife for a long time, finally deciding that the memorial service and burial would be held the next day. They also discussed compensation for Jot’s family for the loss of their pillar—five hundred acres of land, one hundred slaves, fifty feet of linen, and ten pounds each of gold and silver.

There was also the matter of Tom’s future work, but that would require further consideration.

After settling these matters, Haldor left Hudik to assist Jot’s family, while he returned to Haldor’s fortress with his own family, Heiner, Hoskuld, Kalm, and Kalhu.

On the way back, Olaf noticed that his father, uncles, and cousins all looked extremely grim. Once they entered the living room, Haldor ordered some strong liquor. After downing a cup, he let out a roar from his throat: “Jot! My good brother! Hoskuld, since Jot had that request, next year we will set aside everything and gather all of Vinland’s forces to take back Iceland! Let Jot’s body rest in peace in Hrut Village!”

“What?!”

Olaf was shocked. His father and uncles had previously agreed to wait two more years before returning to Iceland, until Vinland had enough strength to challenge Denmark. But after visiting Jot’s family, they had changed their minds and decided to launch a counterattack on Iceland next year?

Haldor finished speaking and began drinking silently with Haig, Hoskuld, Heiner, and the others. It seemed everyone was in agreement, and the decision to attack Iceland next year had been finalized.

Sensing the tension in the air, Olaf walked over to Katrin and asked, “Mom, why does Dad suddenly want to go back to Iceland?”

Katrin nodded and said, “It is time to go back!”

Then, in a low voice, she explained to Olaf, “Your Uncle Jot’s dying wish was to be buried in the land of White Hazel Forest Hrut Village. After your father learned of this, he decided at Jot’s house that we would return to Iceland next year. He told Hudik to start planning how to get there, and in the spring, we will organize a large army to take back Iceland!”

As she spoke, Katrin looked at Haldor with admiration, her expression saying, “My man is so domineering!”

Olaf was speechless. He thought to himself: Can matters of national survival and military strategy be decided on impulse?

But looking at the atmosphere in the living room and the grief on Haldor and the others’ faces, Olaf felt that his father’s decision was both correct and heartwarming. He thought: A true man should love and hate boldly and charge forward without hesitation. His father’s desire to fulfill Jot’s last wish was not just a personal emotional plea but also helped complete the image of General Viking Raid, which would help increase the loyalty of all the people of Vinland.

Chapter 158: Return to Iceland

After a while, Olaf digested the command to “return to Iceland” and sat down beside them, asking, “Father, Uncle, have you already decided to return to Iceland? Is this inevitable?”

“Of course. Only dead fish drift with the current. We must forge ahead and reclaim everything we lost in Iceland!”

Haig stroked his beard and said in a deep voice, “Your uncle and I have long been eager to return to Iceland for revenge. Now we have four to five thousand troops, thirty-eight ocean-going ships—thirty-five of which are armed merchant ships—and our warriors are all seasoned veterans. Even on the European continent, this would be a force capable of tipping the balance between the Catholic League and the Protestant Union. Taking Iceland and crushing Sigfoss and Governor Kolsvin of Iceland—what difficulty is there in that?”

Hoskuld nodded in agreement, then turned to Heiner and asked, “You’re the smartest among us. What else do we need to prepare?”

Heiner set down his wine cup, yawned, and said, “With our current strength, taking Iceland is simple. The real question is how to hold it.”

“Hold Iceland?” Katrin joined the discussion, saying, “Wasn’t Denmark crushed by the Habsburgs? Didn’t you and Haig say that King Christian IV couldn’t even secure a loan from King Charles of England this year? Clearly, Denmark’s finances have been drained by years of war, and their army has been decimated. They have no strength left to launch an expedition to Iceland! So I say, you have nothing to worry about!”

Hoskuld was utterly convinced by his sister’s words. He stood up and said, “Exactly! Denmark lost to the Catholic League, and even two of the king’s nephews died in battle. The Jutland Peninsula was ravaged by mercenaries—it’s a wasteland. Denmark won’t recover its strength for another ten years. Next year is the perfect time to strike!”

Hoskuld’s words won everyone’s agreement. Even Olaf thought next year was a good opportunity. But England was also close to Iceland. If the Danish king sought British help, his father’s occupation of Iceland could lead to a blockade by the powerful British navy. The likelihood was small, but it couldn’t be ignored.

Moreover, Denmark’s navy was not weak—rumored to have seventy to eighty warships. If King Christian IV used his navy to blockade Iceland, or even attacked any Icelandic ships, it would severely impact Vinland’s trade, turning Iceland into a burden.

Olaf cleared his throat and first laid out the possible outcomes he had anticipated before concluding, “Father has already decided to return to Iceland, and we do have the strength. But we must prepare countermeasures in advance! If we can’t handle unexpected situations, it could be a fatal blow!”

“Olaf’s mind is sharp!” Hoskuld laughed heartily and said, “Why doesn’t the fountain of wisdom favor my two foolish sons?!”

Kalm and Kalhu, sitting nearby, scratched their heads awkwardly. Heiner, however, pondered and said, “Olaf is right. We can’t ignore potential dangers. Taking Iceland isn’t hard, and turning it into a free state isn’t either. But no one can predict how Denmark will respond. It might be more intense than Olaf suggests, or it might not. But we must plan ahead!”

“As the old saying goes, trust your brothers with your back, but give your axe to your enemy!”

Haldor clapped his hands and said, “Jot’s sudden death has also reminded me that I’m already forty-two, and my strength is declining. If I don’t take revenge now, I might lose the chance! Jot’s passing has strengthened my resolve to return to Iceland. The task of taking Iceland and seeking vengeance will be handled by me, Haig, Hudik, and Ulf. Olaf and Heiner, you will stay in Vinland. As for any potential variables and the Danish king’s reaction, you can take your time to devise strategies. We have plenty of time before the expedition—enough for a lamb to be born and grow!”

Haldor’s words brought the debate to a close. After finishing their drinks, everyone dispersed to rest. The next morning, they ate something before heading to Jot’s home together.

It wasn’t until the afternoon, after Jot was buried, that Haldor, Haig, Olaf, and the others returned to the fortress. After the servants prepared hot water, they bathed and went straight to bed.

Jot’s death seemed to make the winter even colder.

The quiet and lonely life continued until the Viking Thanksgiving the following year.

The Vikings finally had a legitimate reason to celebrate, venting their restlessness and sorrow.

Haldor’s fortress invited several dozen families, and everyone ate, drank, sang, and danced.

Olaf and a group of young men chatted in the second-floor parlor and rooms.

Since returning to Iceland was now a certainty, after a month of discussion, almost all the Vikings in Hrut City knew that the general would lead them back to Iceland the following year to help the Icelanders break free from Danish oppression and embark on a new path of self-reliance.

The topic of returning to Iceland remained hot from 1630 all the way into January of 1631.

Even in the second-floor parlor, the group of young men discussed the upcoming Viking raid on Iceland, which might begin in just two or three months.

The nature of youth meant they admired excitement and heroism. Returning to Iceland and liberating their people was both thrilling and heroic. Every young man participating in the Thanksgiving celebration yearned for it. Some of the older ones had already strongly requested to join the Viking army and contribute to the expedition to Iceland.

After a lively discussion, Halik noticed that his older brother had been sitting silently on the sofa the whole time and patted him, asking, “Olaf, why aren’t you saying anything?”

Olaf already knew that Halik, Tom, Kalhu, Val, and Hari all wanted to join the army and become national heroes who liberated Iceland.

These young men were all of age, with the oldest being nineteen. Last year, they had already served as production leaders in the Viking raids. Now, they were indeed ready to join the Viking army or take on roles as city administrators.

Their backgrounds and relationships with Olaf and himself had already determined that on the lands led by the Viking raids, they would start at a peak that others could never reach in their lifetimes.

If nothing went wrong, these young men would become the backbone of the Viking raids, leaders in Vinland, and even in the North American colonies.

These young men had attended church school for several years and had received a good family education. They had also been influenced by Olaf’s teachings for many years. In terms of education and personal qualities, they had already surpassed their fathers’ generation and even ninety-nine percent of ordinary people.

Olaf was very pleased and supportive of these young men actively finding their goals and having a positive attitude toward contributing to the Viking cause.

Olaf was the leader of this group and even all the Viking youths. His attitude might not change their way of thinking, but it could certainly influence them greatly.

Olaf’s strong support for Halik and the others’ choices made the hesitant young men firm in their resolve to enlist.

“Establishing military merit is the first pursuit of a Viking!” Olaf affirmed, “Our ancestors relied on their prowess in battle and daring to fight to find us homelands like Iceland, Vinland, and the North American continent… Now, we must seek the glory of our ancestors, using our strong military might to drive out the Danes occupying Iceland and declare that the Vikings have returned!”

Olaf didn’t have a talent for speeches, but with plenty of practice and meticulous thinking, his words held a terrifying power of persuasion among the young men who trusted him. His words made the youths shout “Long live the Vikings!” and united them in their determination to participate in the expedition to Iceland.

Olaf had always hoped that his most loyal followers, the people he trusted the most, would rise as high as possible. Only then would his own strength grow. If these followers became the backbone of the Viking raids, his brother Ulf would never be able to challenge his position as the heir to the Viking general. Moreover, in the future, even if Ulf tried to compete, these powerful followers would ensure that Ulf couldn’t surpass Olaf.

Olaf had already figured out the essence of leadership. He believed that no matter how capable a leader was, without followers, they weren’t a leader. An incapable leader with strong soldiers was still a powerful leader. The essence of leadership was having people under you.

With a team, one could unleash tremendous power. Olaf looked at the young men gazing at him with admiration and felt quite pleased: My team isn’t bad at all!

Chapter 159: Three Meetings to Finalize the Plan

While Olaf was preaching to his companions about fighting for Viking glory, Haldor and the others on the first floor were discussing the plan to take Iceland by force this year.

After multiple discussions before and after the New Year, including this one, Haldor, Hudik, and the other high-ranking members had formed a clear plan to expel the Governor of Iceland and lead Iceland toward independence and self-governance.

At the end of this discussion, Haldor, in his capacity as the Viking Raid general, officially announced that in February, they would gather Vikings, white slaves, and indentured servants from Vinland and even North America to form a unified force. They would use two months to train three legions totaling four thousand five hundred men. Then, in April, they would take this year’s goods to Iceland. After capturing Reykjavik, they would use both trade and force to coerce the local leaders into pledging loyalty. Afterward, they would attempt to sell goods abroad.

If the Danish king organized a large army to attack Iceland, Haldor and his men had countermeasures ready.

First, regardless of the Danish army’s strength, they would fight them on Iceland. If they defeated the Danish expeditionary force, Iceland could achieve independence, and there was even a possibility of establishing a free state or kingdom.

If they reached a stalemate with the Danish army, they could seek negotiations. Denmark would not want to prolong the conflict in Iceland, so as long as they could secure Iceland’s autonomy, it wouldn’t matter if Haldor controlled Iceland under the title of Earl of Iceland or Governor of Iceland.

As for the possibility of Denmark and Britain joining forces to form a powerful alliance to completely annihilate the Icelandic Viking army, Haldor and Haig had already prepared a countermeasure.

The Irish and Scots had long been unable to tolerate Charles I. Scotland had already seen scattered uprisings, and Ireland was a powder keg ready to explode at any moment. If Haig and Haldor were willing to strongly support the Irish rebellion, Haig’s brother-in-law, O’More—the silent organizer and leader of the Irish uprising—would be more than happy to stab Britain in the back. Then, Iceland’s crisis could be easily resolved.

In the hearts of the people in Hrut City, Denmark’s strength was still far greater than that of Vinland and Iceland. However, organizing an expeditionary force to take Iceland from Haldor’s Viking army was practically impossible unless Haldor acted tyrannically in Iceland, causing the Icelandic people to rebel against him. Otherwise, given Haldor and his men’s understanding of the Icelandic people, they would wholeheartedly support independence. With the combined strength of Iceland’s fifty to sixty thousand people and Vinland, they could already rival the weakened Denmark.

Forming the Viking expeditionary force was the top priority. According to the discussions among Haldor, Haldor’s high-ranking officials, and others, the three legions would be entirely led by Viking officers at the rank of captain and above. The two Vinland militia legions would be merged with the original Viking army, and additional Vikings would be recruited to fill the remaining positions. The goal was to ensure that all mid-level and higher-ranking officers were Icelandic Vikings, while the rest would be white Vikings and yellow Vikings.

The overall idea was to form an expeditionary force of three legions. Haldor wanted to train an elite fighting force while keeping complete control over this armed group. As long as he had the Viking expeditionary force, even if North America turned against him, he could lead his troops to suppress the rebellion. After taking Iceland, he could rely on this force to govern and rule.

Last year, they had brought back several thousand slaves from the mainland. After undergoing variolation, only twenty percent had died. The remaining slaves, believing they had been blessed by Haldor’s divine power, had become much more loyal and reverent. This spring, even if all four thousand five hundred men were fully mobilized, Hrut City would still have enough labor.

After the Thanksgiving celebration ended, Viking youths and some Vikings who had originally been assigned to city management work all became officers in the Viking expeditionary force.

Before February, Hrut City had already restarted its production mode. Large numbers of indentured white slaves and slaves continuously sliced and diced potatoes, sweet potatoes, squash, corn, and turnips, then roasted and dried them over fires to make dry rations that could be stored long-term without moisture.

This time, they needed to produce enough rations to feed nearly five thousand people for over a year, so they mobilized more than three thousand people and windmills to process eight to nine million pounds of food. In addition to food, the military supplies they needed to prepare included pickled vegetables, jerky, dried fish, Water of Life, malt sugar, leather shoes, and more.

Not to mention the most critical military weapons, which needed to be inspected and polished in advance.

While Hrut City was actively preparing for the Iceland expedition, Olaf also put on the polar bear fur coat his mother had sewn for him and led the workers back to work. The Olaf Factory’s key sugar refinery, distillery, and blacksmith shop had all resumed production.

The two batches of copper ingots and over four hundred pounds of gold sent before the New Year were to be handed over to the blacksmith shop for forging and smelting. In this era, these were as good as money. Olaf took out shillings and pence, preparing to have the blacksmiths make molds to produce gold coins and copper coins.

Since copper and gold were relatively soft metals, once the molds were made, they could use water-powered hammers to stamp gold and copper coins onto copper and gold sheets.

Most gold coins at the time were impure, and many counterfeit coins circulated in the market. However, due to the backwardness of minting technology and the lack of metals that could convincingly pass as gold, shrewd merchants could always tell the difference between real and fake coins.

The gold mined in Vinland was not very pure, but the gold coins produced were similar to most of those circulating in the European market, and some were even purer.

Olaf believed that minting a batch of gold and copper coins, combined with the tens of thousands of pounds of currency in his family’s vault, would be more than enough for his father to buy the loyalty of the people in Iceland.

The North American natives were primitive and savage, and they already had the custom of taking slaves during conquests. Therefore, Haldor and his men in Vinland adopted the Viking Raid system, absorbing indentured white slaves and native slaves into it, which everyone could accept and recognize.

However, the Icelandic people shared the same culture and ancestry as Haldor and his men. There were still many relatives and friends of various families on the island. Whether in terms of cultural foundation or ideological awareness of civilized society, it was impossible to conquer the Icelandic people by force and incorporate them into the Viking Raid as indentured servants or even slaves.

In fact, when Haldor’s army arrived, defeating the Danish guards and expelling the Governor of Iceland to avenge past grievances would be simple, and the Icelandic people would welcome them with applause.

But when Haldor wanted to rule Iceland and become the leader of the Icelandic people, he would need the support of the local leaders and their families.

It was unrealistic to rule Iceland entirely through military oppression. Moreover, Haldor could not bring himself to do so emotionally. Even if he forced it, it would have negative effects and might even cause the Icelandic Vikings to turn against him.

In discussions among Haldor, Hudik, Haig, and Olaf, the future governance of Iceland after its conquest would largely remain the same. However, they would use the superior conditions offered to Vikings within the Viking Raid to attract Icelandic people to join. This way, they would become part of the elite and naturally be willing to maintain the existence of the Viking Raid and remain loyal to Haldor.

Moreover, the Icelandic people, who shared the same culture and ancestry, were the cornerstone of future rule over North America. Only by relying on the Icelandic people, developing them, and training large numbers of Icelandic people as rulers could they balance the power of the North American natives, white slaves, and Vikings. This would even ensure long-term balance within the Viking community itself.

Currently, the number of white Vikings was already lower than that of yellow Vikings. The first and even second generations could remain loyal to the Haldor family, but future generations might not.

Haldor, Olaf, and the others were very concerned about the disparity in numbers. Without absorbing the most suitable Icelandic people into the Viking Raid, it would be impossible to resolve the hidden danger of the Viking Raid being overthrown and changed in the future.

Thus, the Icelandic people were the best candidates for the Vikings and the best foundation for the Haldor family’s ruling position.

If the majority of the Vikings were white Vikings of Icelandic descent, no matter how many generations passed, the roots of the Vikings would still be the Icelandic Vikings and white Vikings. The yellow Vikings, natives, and others would never be able to overturn their rule.

Chapter 160: Training the Troops

In February of 1631, the weather in Vinland began to warm slightly, though the rivers remained frozen.

After days of preparation, the formation and training of Hrut City’s expeditionary force had begun.

Haldor sent messengers to Plymouth and Basque City to inform Kadir and Ulf of their return to Iceland. Within days, the two men arrived with their armies.

Since capturing Iceland was the most crucial strategic objective this year, Haldor and his men were determined to be fully prepared. Nearly all their skilled warriors were to be taken, leaving only the more docile Kalm to temporarily govern Basque City, while Haldor’s fortress was entrusted to Jot’s nephew, Bich.

Plymouth was of paramount importance, and the newly conquered territories of Huron and Iroquois were equally vital. It was imperative to consolidate control over these regions without delay.

Following Hudik’s advice, Haldor appointed Brun, Polly, and Hilt—three young men—to govern Plymouth, Huron, and Iroquois, respectively.

These rapidly rising young leaders had been assigned critical tasks by Haldor. As per the requirements set at the beginning of the year, Brun was responsible for overseeing developments in Plymouth while guiding the New Englanders to align with Vinland. Polly was tasked with managing the three cities of Iroquois, and since he was adjacent to Brun, the two could support each other, forming an arc with Hilt in the north to solidify Vinland’s newly acquired territories.

This year, the focus was on accelerating the development and land reclamation in Iroquois. The vast plains in the northern part of Iroquois were to be cultivated as quickly as possible, with cotton and grain planted in the spring. The Huron region, being further north, had a less favorable climate for agriculture compared to Iroquois, but land could still be reclaimed to plant sweet potatoes and potatoes in the summer.

Beyond agriculture, the Huron people, living east of the Great Lakes, could increase their hunting of beavers and freshwater fish. With advanced tools like fishing nets, harpoons, and traps provided by Vinland, the Huron region could become a major producer of furs, grain, and dried meat.

In Olaf and Haldor’s plans, if the Iroquois and Huron regions could be mobilized this year, utilizing the native workforce to cultivate land and develop agriculture, grain production by early winter could increase three or fourfold.

Both the Huron and Iroquois regions already had a significant number of guards. Hilt and Polly did not need additional reinforcements; they took their private slaves, personal guards, and large quantities of seeds—sweet potatoes, potatoes, corn, and more—and immediately assumed their posts.

As for cotton seeds, due to their limited quantity and lack of planting experience, Olaf decided to personally oversee experimental cultivation with skilled farmers, so he did not have Polly take any.

Originally, Plymouth had one thousand elite soldiers, but Kadir brought most of them back. After discussions with Hudik and Kadir, Haldor had Brun take five hundred White Wolf soldiers and five hundred Inuit warriors sent back by Ulf. The five hundred Viking soldiers remained to join the Viking expeditionary force.

After the three young governors took office, they began large-scale land reclamation with their subordinates. Even Brun was opening up land at the border between Plymouth and Iroquois, preparing to plant corn and squash.

In fact, since last year, both New France and Plymouth had learned that Vinland possessed high-yield crops. However, they did not understand the specifics and assumed that simply planting potatoes, sweet potatoes, and corn would yield high grain production. After failing to obtain these crops, they had European merchant ships bring seeds for their own cultivation. Due to a lack of experience and knowledge of plant habits, the harvests in both regions were poor, barely matching the yields of rye and oats, much to their disappointment.

Upon his return, Kadir mentioned that McG had repeatedly requested agricultural guidance from Hrut City, such as techniques for planting sweet potatoes, potatoes, and corn, as well as the use of manure as fertilizer.

Previously, McG had caught a glimpse of these methods and, despite opposition in Plymouth, insisted that the New Englanders spread manure on their fields. However, this had almost no effect on increasing grain production and even caused many seedlings to wither and die from the manure.

Because of this, McG’s reputation in Plymouth had severely declined, with people accusing him of forcing them to pollute their food with filthy manure.

Yet McG had clearly heard from the residents of Hrut City that using manure as fertilizer resulted in high crop yields. He believed that Haldor and his men must possess a special method for purifying manure, so he repeatedly asked Kadir to share this knowledge.

Although McG’s request was sincere and Kadir did not consider it a major issue, Kadir was not knowledgeable about farming and could not independently assist Plymouth in developing its agriculture. He had no choice but to represent McG and make the request to Haldor.

Haldor listened and glanced at Olaf. He knew that Olaf was strictly against the leakage of Vinland’s information, especially regarding agriculture, bone china, and sugar production technologies. Though Haldor felt his son was being overly cautious, he respected Olaf’s decisions, recognizing the pivotal role Olaf had played in their success.

Olaf thought that as Vinland grew stronger, Plymouth would eventually become part of Vinland. Now was the time to build goodwill, so after a moment’s consideration, he said, “The technology for making fertilizer from manure must not be disclosed. It is a powerful tool that can double or even multiply grain production, and we cannot let it out. However, we can freely teach Plymouth the techniques for planting potatoes, sweet potatoes, and corn.”

Kadir felt that Olaf was giving him face and nodded with a smile. “McG will be satisfied with these techniques. In a few days, I will send my personal guards to inform him, and he will surely be grateful to us.”

Olaf pretended to be reluctant, but in his heart, he thought: Potatoes and sweet potatoes are already being cultivated in the East and West as staple foods, though they haven’t become widespread. In ten or twenty years, planting techniques won’t be a secret. For now, sharing them will make the people of Plymouth grateful, which is good.

With the addition of young Vikings from Viking families and many young private slaves from the Haldor family, the three Viking expeditionary forces quickly reached their required numbers.

Haldor and Hudik appointed Vikings to all officer positions in the Viking expeditionary forces. The three forces were each led by Haldor, Hudik, and Haig.

Under these three leaders, the three major forces had three deputy commanders: Hoskuld, Kadir, and Ulf. Additionally, the fifty cavalry originally under Haig’s command were placed under Ulf’s leadership.

After the forces were organized, the three leaders began daily drills outside the city, focusing on marching, charging, and shooting. Since these three forces would soon face the Danish army, they could no longer rely on the tactics used against the natives.

Currently, firearms dominated the western battlefield. Due to their immense power, even plate armor could be severely damaged by the impact of bullets. For the sake of marching speed, soldiers on European battlefields typically wore only half-plate armor and iron helmets, leaving their limbs and joints unprotected.

On the European battlefield, in addition to long spearmen and musketeers, there were also artillerymen and cavalry. However, the most significant roles were currently played by musketeers and cavalry, with artillerymen mostly serving as auxiliary troops.

But with Gustavus Adolphus II’s campaigns in Germany, the coordination between cavalry and artillery, as well as the increased proportion of musketeers in the forces, would gain importance. In the future, artillery would also receive more attention.

To prepare for their return to Europe, the forces had to be trained in the most advanced combat methods. Thus, all soldiers in the three Viking expeditionary forces wore half-plate armor. Musketeers made up two-thirds of the forces, with the remaining third being long spearmen. The proportion of musketeers was the highest in current military formations. Additionally, half of the lightest nine-pound cannons were unloaded from the ships and pulled by wagons, forming a force of fifty cannons and 102 artillerymen, led by Valitu.

In this era, artillery did not require precision; it was purely about synchronized barrages to strike concentrated enemy forces or fixed targets, such as cities.

Given these characteristics, artillery and musketeers were somewhat similar. As long as money was spent on ammunition, weapons, and training, skilled soldiers could be cultivated without requiring comprehensive abilities.

Most of the over one hundred artillerymen were adult slaves selected by Haldor from his private slaves for their diligence, with a few being sailors originally trained by Hudik in the use of cannons. After entrusting the artillery force to Valitu, Haldor ordered him to spare no cannonballs in training a capable artillery unit.

Throughout February, the forces focused on professional training in marching, sitting, lying down, and charging, with shooting drills conducted every five days.

By March, the forces were essentially formed, and the focus shifted to shooting and the coordination between cavalry and artillery. Although the number of cavalry was small, if used effectively, they could play a significant role.

From March onward, the Viking forces operated in a semi-detached state. One day was spent collecting maple sap, hunting, and fishing, while the next day was dedicated to regular training and shooting drills. Thus, every other day, the citizens of Hrut City could hear the loud cannon fire and dense gunshots from outside the city.

Three years of continuous procurement had resulted in mountains of ammunition and weapons stored in Haldor’s fortress and military strongholds, though there were only a little over two thousand boxes.

Haldor and Hudik knew they could not afford to waste resources. To conserve supplies while achieving the best training results, they stipulated that each musketeer would have five bullets for shooting practice daily, while artillerymen could only fire twice.

Even with controlled ammunition consumption, the three forces still used over twenty boxes of ammunition each day. At this rate, the stockpile in Hrut City would be exhausted in less than three months.

However, Haldor planned to lead the army to attack Iceland in early April, so there would be enough military supplies to last until the battle.

After 1631, due to the impending campaign against Iceland, everyone was highly focused. Vinland displayed unprecedented cohesion and efficiency. The Viking Raid maintained its special role in military-style management, ensuring that Hrut City, and even Vinland, the Iroquois region, and the Huron region, operated efficiently.

Chapter 161: Preparations Complete

March was the best time of year to collect maple sap, the only season when the sap was rich in nutrients.

Following Haldor’s arrangements, countless indentured white slaves and slaves were dispatched to Vinland, as well as the Iroquois and Huron regions, to collect sap and boil it into syrup on-site before transporting it back to Hrut City.

The Iroquois, Huron, and Labrador Peninsula regions were home to far more maple trees than Vinland, with ninety percent of them suitable for sap collection and syrup production. Since hunting for furs and fishing would yield little in this month, Haldor had deployed ninety percent of his white slaves and slaves to gather sap. Given the vast size of the Iroquois, Labrador Peninsula, and Huron regions—many times larger than Vinland—even with the slaves’ efforts, the task was impossible to complete alone. Thus, Haldor ordered the governors of the three regions to send slaves to assist the workers from Vinland.

Kalm, Polly, and Hilt eagerly dispatched over a thousand natives to help the slaves from Vinland collect sap and boil it into syrup.

Later, Brun from Plymouth also learned of this and sent his soldiers to collect sap and boil syrup.

According to Haldor’s requirements, all maple trees belonged to General Viking Raid, but since he had sent people out, the local governors could freely produce and use syrup as they pleased. Often, strict slogans were shouted, but management was more lenient in practice.

Haldor understood that those who followed him needed to benefit, so every governor, beyond the wealth generated from their land and slaves, also received salaries and provisions from Viking Raid, as well as the wealth they could amass from their positions—furs, syrup, jade, grain, and more. This income far exceeded any other, making the position of governor the ultimate aspiration for any Viking, one they would gladly die for.

Busy days always passed quickly, and soon it was April. By then, Vinland’s temperatures had warmed considerably, and a thin fur coat or two layers of linen robes were enough to keep out the cold.

Though Vinland was at a high latitude, it was warmed by the Caribbean current, and according to Icelandic sagas, when the Icelandic ancestors first colonized Vinland hundreds of years ago, the island did not freeze in winter.

However, this was the Little Ice Age, and temperatures were much colder than centuries before, so Vinland’s climate was not much warmer than Iceland’s.

As the weather grew warmer, the sugar-boiling workers Haldor had sent to various regions began returning one after another. Goods piled up like mountains in Hrut City and were transported to the docks.

Since the expedition was imminent, Blackstone from Bakens City arrived in Hrut City with a year’s worth of accumulated furs and other goods, along with two hundred White Wolf soldiers.

These White Wolf soldiers were elite warriors Haldor had left under Blackstone’s command two years prior to manage western Vinland. Over the years, Blackstone had trained several hundred new warriors with the help of ten Viking warriors of slave origin, organizing them in a legion-style system. With sufficient forces at his disposal, he brought the two hundred veteran White Wolf soldiers back to be placed under Haldor’s command.

Haldor had already completed the training and integration of the expeditionary force to Iceland and did not intend to take these two hundred White Wolf soldiers with him. Instead, he handed them over to Olaf, who would remain in Hrut City. On April 3rd, he also summoned the four governors of the North American continent for a handover meeting.

At the meeting, Haldor clearly outlined the battle plan for Iceland and appointed Olaf as the primary leader of the North American colonies in their absence. Before their return to Vinland, all affairs would be managed by Olaf, Katrin, and Heiner.

However, once Haldor and his army departed, Vinland’s forces would become significantly weakened. Hrut City would only have a few private slaves and over two hundred White Wolf soldiers. Haldor City and Bakens City’s armed forces would consist of only native warriors. The only formidable forces would be Plymouth’s five hundred White Wolf soldiers and the six hundred militia from the Iroquois and Huron regions.

But the destruction of the Massachusetts Bay Company last year and the chaos in North America seemed to have temporarily halted Europe’s desire for expansion and migration to the continent. As a result, the strength of New France, New England, New Netherlands, and Virginia had not increased.

After Haldor led the main force away, relying on the stockpiled firearms and over a thousand armed men, along with the ability to quickly mobilize one to two thousand slave warriors, Vinland would still hold overwhelming power in North America.

At the meeting, after Haldor announced Olaf’s appointment as overall commander, all attending governors and Viking Raid family managers expressed their support for General Haldor’s arrangement, pledging to unite closely under Young Master Olaf’s leadership and do their best under his guidance.

Though Olaf was somewhat disappointed he couldn’t go to Iceland, he was pleased to take charge of the colonies in his father’s absence.

Ulf, however, was displeased. But he thought about the future—after conquering Iceland, its large population would join Viking Raid. As one of the main commanders of the expedition and a high-ranking member of Viking Raid, he would be the first to receive a significant portion of Iceland’s human resources. Compared to Olaf, his future power base would be much stronger.

Considering the immense benefits of following his father to Iceland, Ulf suppressed his dissatisfaction and naturally embraced his younger brother, offering his blessings.

Olaf knew his brother might be unhappy, but since both brothers aspired to inherit their father’s position, their future conflicts would only grow larger and more apparent. He understood that after the great battle, their relationship might change the next time they met.

Thinking of the future strife between brothers, Olaf cherished the moment and tightly embraced his much taller and stronger brother, saying in a deep voice, “Take care on your journey! Protect yourself! Protect Dad!”

Ulf’s eyes seemed to redden as he cleared his throat and patted Olaf’s right shoulder, saying, “Take care of Mom and our brothers and sisters!”

After the meeting, Haldor, along with Hudik, Kadir, Hoskuld, Nilahu, Valitu, and their families, took Tom and his mother to the Avalon Forest in the northern part of the city, where they found Jot’s grave.

The native slaves then dug up the grave with shovels and lifted out Jot’s coffin.

Since Jot had wished to be buried in the white birch forest of Hrut Village in Iceland, Haldor planned to take Jot’s coffin with him on the expedition.

Before the burial, Haldor had ordered specialists to preserve Jot’s body through salting and drying, specifically for the purpose of returning it to Iceland the following year.

After the two priests, DeGula and Duca, prayed for half a day, the ceremony was complete, and Jot’s coffin was reinforced and carried back to his home. It would be taken aboard the ship when they set sail in a few days.

After exhuming Jot’s coffin, the slaves began continuously transporting military supplies and goods to the armed merchant ships docked at the port, which had been freshly maintained by the shipbuilders.

This expedition would involve over four thousand five hundred soldiers and several hundred sailors, totaling nearly five thousand people. Thus, Haldor prepared thirty-three armed merchant ships.

Originally, thirty-two ships could carry five thousand people with sufficient supplies, but considering various factors, Haldor decided to prepare an extra ship for safety. He planned to leave two armed merchant ships and three ordinary ships for Hrut City and Olaf. Based on past experience, five ships would be enough to meet any needs in Vinland, the mainland, and Greenland.

On April 5th, Olaf gathered all the young members of his group at his home and had the white slave cooks and private slave cooks prepare a lavish feast of dishes and desserts, personally seeing off the young brothers who were about to follow their elders back to Iceland.

The Viking youths had impeccable backgrounds, and with a few military achievements and training in the army, they would be promoted upon leaving military service.

These youths held great expectations for their futures and were eager to elevate their status and gain power through battle.

Olaf fully supported his close companions, and after the banquet, he personally gifted each of the dozen Viking youths and over thirty white slave youths a flintlock pistol.

These shorter and lighter flintlock guns were actually more expensive than regular ones. In European armies, only cavalry were equipped with such weapons, though some were also used by noble guards.

Last year, Haig had only purchased over two hundred of these in Amsterdam, equipping some cavalry and gifting the rest to several chiefs.

Olaf had been rewarded with fifty flintlock pistols by Haldor for his outstanding work as the temporary lord of Hrut City during the expedition against the Iroquois, keeping everything in order.

Now, Olaf gave them to his confidants. The intoxicated youths showed their true emotions, moved to tears as they clung to Olaf, some already weeping.

Tom, now a squad leader in Haldor’s Viking expeditionary army, gripped Olaf’s hand tightly and said in a deep voice, “Olaf, I will miss you!”

The other youths immediately began pledging their loyalty…

Chapter 162: Olaf’s Daily Life as Regent

On April 8, 1631, after everything was prepared, Haldor led the army to gather in Hrut City, then bid farewell to his family and marched hastily to Hrut Port, where they boarded ships and departed.

Haldor’s departure marked the beginning of Prince Olaf’s regency!

After watching the fleet disappear into the distance from the harbor, Olaf and Heiner returned to the council hall to discuss the spring planting for Hrut City, Haldor City, Bakens City, and other areas this year.

“After two years of cultivation, the indentured white slaves and slaves have become skilled. The planting of potatoes, sweet potatoes, corn, and rye in Hrut City and Haldor City should proceed smoothly as long as it’s arranged. Some Viking families even started planting sweet potatoes the day before yesterday,” Heiner said casually.

Heiner then added, “However, the private slaves at Haldor’s fortress still need to be mobilized to continue reclaiming land and planting crops on the peninsula. You can never have too much food.”

Olaf nodded in agreement. “That’s true. I’ll leave the spring planting in Vinland to you.”

“What will you be doing?” Heiner raised an eyebrow and asked.

“I bought spinning machines last year, and they’re almost rusting away. So, I plan to go to the Iroquois region to plant cotton myself,” Olaf said with a smile.

“If we can successfully cultivate cotton on the Iroquois plains this year, we’ll be able to produce our own cotton fabric in the future!”

Heiner, clearly aware of Olaf’s plans, nodded and asked, “When do you plan to go?”

Olaf knew that planting needed to follow the seasons. Although the climate in North America differed somewhat from that of the Ming Dynasty, it was similar to the regions beyond the Great Wall. If he didn’t plant now, he would miss the opportunity.

Cotton originated in Central and South America, Southern Europe, and Central Asia. The most primitive varieties were southern crops. However, due to cotton’s short growth cycle, it could also be cultivated in greenhouses in the north, planted in spring, and harvested in autumn.

Olaf knew that in the future, Xinjiang and Central Asian countries would become major cotton producers in the world. Therefore, he was confident that the Iroquois plains, with a latitude and climate similar to southern Xinjiang, would be suitable for cotton cultivation.

Olaf had already formulated a detailed plan for cotton cultivation on the Iroquois plains. This year, he didn’t aim for high yields but focused on ensuring the cotton plants survived and matured, providing enough seeds and experience for large-scale planting next spring.

“I’ll set off immediately. I’ll leave Hrut City in your hands!”

Olaf was now focused on cultivating cotton as soon as possible. Personally, he wanted to wear cotton clothes and sleep under soft cotton blankets. On a larger scale, he wanted Vinland to have a strong textile industry base. Currently, cotton textile production in the entire West was in its most primitive stage.

Vinland, with cotton, could produce cotton fabric and then sell it in Europe, with vast market prospects. In Olaf’s mind, the future cotton business was not inferior to the silk trade!

“If you need anything, send someone to deliver a message or a letter.”

Heiner had always supported and helped Olaf wholeheartedly, seemingly convinced subconsciously that Olaf was a future great leader on par with Caesar.

Nodding, Heiner stood up and said, “I’ll arrange for someone to prepare supplies for you and select some experienced farmers.”

Olaf smiled at his cousin-in-law and good friend, saying, “Not too many, thirty or forty people will be enough. I also need to bring some private slaves. And thank you, Heiner!”

Heiner raised an eyebrow, nodded, and left. His expression didn’t change, but his steps seemed lighter.

After Heiner left, Olaf hummed a tune as he walked to the bed and pushed open the wooden window, looking at the quiet city streets outside. He murmured softly, “I never thought that coming to primitive North America would lead to the life of an entrepreneur. Maybe I can use my knowledge of the future and the resources around me to change the world and create my own history!

It’s a shame I’m too young! I wonder what Iceland is like now? If everything goes well and we have the population resources of Iceland to support us, our strength will increase several times! God bless! May my father have a safe journey!”

As Olaf spoke, he stood straight, his broad shoulders blocking the cold wind and sunlight from the window. Judging by his appearance and physique alone, one would think he was a young man in his twenties, not a boy under fifteen.

On April 9, after having breakfast with his mother, aunt, and siblings, Olaf took more than thirty private slaves and forty skilled indentured white slaves and left Hrut Port by boat, heading west along the Saint Lawrence River to Quebec City.

With the experiences and many changes from last year, Champlain and Thiers had become very low-key and obedient. They warmly received Olaf and inquired about Haldor and Hrut City.

The news of Vinland organizing a Viking expedition to Europe had not been leaked, nor was there any intention to leak it. So, Olaf just smiled and evaded, “This season is the time for planting. Vinland has been busy for half a month. This time, I’m here to plant some crops in the Iroquois region…”

According to the “Quebec Alliance” previously signed between Vinland and New France, New France owned half of the land and rights in the northern Iroquois plains and Labrador regions. However, seeing that Olaf had no intention of giving up any benefits, Champlain wisely did not bring this up.

Champlain laughed bitterly, “Yes! We in Quebec have too few people. So far, not much land has been reclaimed along both banks of the Saint Lawrence River, and the wheat yield is not high. I heard that the farmers in Vinland are all planting experts. Could you ask Olaf to send some agricultural experts to guide us?”

Champlain’s request was not unreasonable. According to their allied relationship, they could provide help. More importantly, the weak Quebec, even if it received agricultural guidance, would not gain much strength and would not threaten Vinland’s ruling position.

Without hesitation, Olaf smiled and agreed, “No problem! The people I brought this time are all experienced farmers. After we finish planting in the Iroquois region, we will specially teach you!”

Champlain cursed Olaf in his heart for being slippery but thanked him with a smile on his face.

Due to the arrow wound from last year, Thiers seemed to have a slight disability in his right leg, and his spirit had changed greatly. When speaking to Olaf, he seemed extremely humble and cold, but his behavior was somewhat modest.

Olaf knew that his elder brother Ulf had humiliated Thiers in Quebec last year, causing him to lose his dignity. He didn’t expect it to have such a great impact on him.

Olaf was worried that Thiers might be mentally unstable and could do something harmful to their relationship, so he didn’t dare to stay long in Quebec. After attending a banquet, he boarded a ship to the south bank.

Knowing that the Iroquois region was to be developed, the Iroquois Governor Polly had already built a simple dock on the south bank. Next to the dock was a small stone fortress with more than twenty Huron warriors.

After the ship docked, Olaf specifically brought the Huron and Iroquois slaves to speak a few words first. Then, the warriors in the fortress knelt down in fear to welcome him.

Olaf, seeing that everything was normal and there was no danger, led the private slaves and indentured white slaves carrying long spears and a cow off the ship. Then, under the leadership of an indentured white slave, the Huron warriors went to unload the supplies, tools, and seeds from the ship.

The northernmost city in the Iroquois region was Bay City, located north of Lake Saint-François, as called by the French. Olaf first arrived at Bay City and met the city lord O’Neil, who came to welcome him.

O’Neil was a Viking of Irish descent. Although he was not old, his face looked aged. He had always been one of Haldor’s personal guards, and Olaf had some impression of him.

O’Neil first led Olaf and his party into the expanded Bay City. Although it still looked primitive and dilapidated, the ditches and toilets had been built.

The center of Bay City was originally a stone temple, which O’Neil had renovated into a central area where the front was dedicated to the Haldor Heavenly God, and the back was the city lord’s office and living quarters.

The hundred or so soldiers under O’Neil lived in the longhouses around the temple.

After entering the back hall of the temple, O’Neil casually invited Olaf to sit down and then reported his work situation, mentioning that he had arranged for servants to cook venison and invited Olaf to a whole boiled deer for lunch.

After listening to O’Neil’s report, Olaf had a clear understanding of Bay City’s situation. He learned that Bay City had more than two thousand Iroquois, over eighty Huron people, and more than a hundred Vinland soldiers. Around Bay City, there were over a dozen large and small tribes, totaling more than six thousand people. The entire Bay City area was originally one of the three major tribal regions of the Iroquois Confederacy.

Since last year, O’Neil had ordered the Iroquois to build Bay City, construct houses for the soldiers, and increase the hunting of animals like beavers using traps provided by Vinland.

By now, the city construction had taken shape, but it would take another year or two to approach the model of Hrut City.

Regarding land reclamation, since most of the Iroquois workers had limited intelligence and learning abilities, their progress in land reclamation was very slow. Currently, the entire Bay City area had less than three hundred acres of land that had been deeply plowed and cleared of stones and plants. If this pace continued, by the end of the year, at most one thousand acres could be developed, and this was only achievable by continuously exploiting the Iroquois labor force.

Olaf had anticipated this situation. In the ten-plus years since his rebirth, he had seen too many fools. Many Icelanders and natives, lacking culture and information, were stubborn and eccentric, with weak abilities to learn new things.

If it weren’t for the special political system of the Viking Raid that integrated all of Vinland’s resources and manpower, unleashing a certain potential, Vinland wouldn’t have developed.

Now, the development of the Iroquois and Huron regions relied on the natives. Achieving the current level was already due to O’Neil’s diligent and responsible work.

Olaf first affirmed O’Neil’s achievements and said that he would objectively speak well of O’Neil’s merits to his father Haldor upon his return.

O’Neil was very pleased and thanked him, then packed a small box of jade and doghead gold that he had collected from the Iroquois and gave it to Olaf.

O’Neil appeared very clever, but Olaf could tell from his behavior that the current Viking leaders did not have large appetites, or perhaps they lacked the courage and ambition to be sufficiently greedy. Therefore, giving him treasures was a matter-of-course expression.

Olaf naturally accepted the free wealth. Since he had received O’Neil’s gifts, O’Neil would now be part of his faction. More interactions would ensure that he had some control over Bay City.

Olaf was very satisfied with O’Neil, who behaved like an old bureaucrat, but he was also curious. He felt that under normal circumstances, few people knew how to bribe their superiors.

Soon, the whole boiled deer was brought up by the servants. O’Neil also took out a pot of wild grape wine brewed last year in the Iroquois region for Olaf to taste.

After eating and drinking with O’Neil, Olaf smiled and asked, “Which part of Ireland are you from? Your way of speaking is clear, not like that of a poor farmer!”

O’Neil sighed lightly, drank the wine in his cup, and said, “Young Master Olaf, the Weisfort family was originally a large landowner in northern Ireland. My grandfather was even a cardinal. However, because Charles I promoted the Anglican Church, our family’s land and assets were confiscated. Later, my father was arrested, and our family members scattered everywhere. The family declined when I was in my teens, and I became a tenant serf of the O’More family! If I hadn’t come to Vinland and met General Haldor, I might never have had a chance to rise!”

“So, you have such a family background. No wonder you know… know many things. Work hard in the future. As long as you are loyal, I will help you!” Olaf said with a smile.

“Thank you, Young Master Olaf!” O’Neil smiled and poured another cup of wine for Olaf.

…

The next morning, Olaf led his men to plant cotton seeds in a newly reclaimed open field outside Bay City.

Olaf had a total of over a hundred pounds of cotton seeds. He concentrated them on a sunny slope, planted them, watered them, and then covered them with last year’s corn stalks from the Iroquois to keep them warm.

Although the Iroquois region was somewhat south of Vinland, the temperature was not warm. To make the cotton sprout faster, Olaf had to use the most primitive method.

After planting the cotton, Olaf stayed in Bay City. A few days later, the city lords of the other few cities and the Iroquois Governor Polly came to pay their respects to Olaf.

After receiving reports from everyone, Olaf had a thorough understanding of the situation in the Iroquois region.

The three cities in the Iroquois region were very backward and primitive in terms of land reclamation and food cultivation. Even with the guidance of experienced farmers sent from Hrut City, the efficiency was extremely low.

After observing that the cotton had sprouted, Olaf sent half of his people to the three cities to continue training and teaching the slaves in the three cities about planting techniques.

After waiting for about ten days, the cotton planted on less than half an acre of land had basically grown into seedlings about a foot high. After counting, the germination rate was about eighty percent.

At this time, the temperature began to warm up. Olaf felt that it was time for formal transplantation. So, he led his men and the slaves from Bay City to carefully dig up the cotton seedlings from the slope, keeping the soil around the roots, and then transplanted them to nearby plots.

To ensure better growth and avoid competition for soil nutrients, each cotton plant was spaced about two steps apart.

Looking at the busy indentured white slave farmers and slaves in the field, Olaf felt a mix of emotions. He sighed at the clumsiness and sluggishness of the Iroquois, but also felt hopeful about the future cotton harvest.

Chapter 163: Return to Iceland

While Olaf was diligently experimenting with cotton cultivation in the Iroquois region alongside farmers and slaves, Haldor’s fleet had already traversed the North Atlantic from Vinland, drawing near to the northernmost reaches of Iceland.

After more than half a month of relentless travel, Haldor and his men felt as though their joints were rusting from exhaustion.

As they neared their destination, Haldor and Hudik stood at the prow, gazing northeast, hoping to catch a glimpse of Iceland’s silhouette amidst the vast, endless sea.

“God bless us, our journey has been smooth with favorable winds and fair weather! Perhaps it’s a good omen!” Hoskuld, the most superstitious among them, remarked as he pulled out a paper packet and a wooden pipe from his pocket. He carefully packed the pipe with tobacco, lit it with a tinderbox, and took a few puffs, exhaling a cloud of white smoke. “Kadir, the tobacco you brought from Plymouth is quite fragrant. No wonder the nobles used to smoke and drink coffee. The Spaniards must have made their fortune from the natives growing tobacco and sugarcane in South America, right?”

“Hehe, but we’re not doing too badly ourselves!” Hoskuld chuckled, taking another deep drag.

Ever since Kadir had brought back Creek Company’s tobacco from Plymouth, Hoskuld, Haig, Haldor, and others had taken to smoking it occasionally. But among them, Hoskuld had developed the strongest addiction.

Kadir took out a small pouch of tobacco, carefully packed his pipe, lit it, and took a puff before saying, “The tobacco Haig the berserker seized from that Spanish merchant ship the other day is even better than what I bought before. Brother, you should try some.”

Hoskuld’s eyebrows shot up at the mention. He pinched a bit, lit it, and took a puff before shaking his head. “The flavor is good, but it’s damp. It’s a bit harsh!”

The central Caribbean Sea and the northern North Sea had become havens for pirates. English, Icelandic, and Norwegian pirates occupied the islands in these regions as bases, from which they plundered passing merchant ships, seized goods, and even took hostages for ransom.

Haldor, Haig, and many other Icelanders had engaged in this trade. Over the years, traveling between Vinland and the North Sea, they had encountered pirates numerous times. Usually, upon realizing they were fellow pirates, they would keep their distance. On the rare occasions when conflicts arose, the Vinland fleet’s strength easily repelled any attacks.

However, this time, Vinland had assembled all its regional resources into a large fleet to return to the North Sea. Naturally, they did not encounter a single pirate ship along the way.

A few days earlier, while idle on the ship, Kadir and Haig, both drunk, had first competed in an arm-wrestling match to test their strength, then moved on to a contest of courage.

Haig and Kadir each captured a narwhal in the sea, then presented the two long tusks to Haldor. After Haldor, the dwarf, measured them, Kadir’s narwhal tusk was found to be the longest and heaviest, meaning Kadir had won.

But Haig flew into a rage instead. With a loud shout, he led more than twenty of his men in a ship to chase down and plunder a merchant vessel flying the Spanish flag.

After Haig stripped off his upper garments, revealing his muscular arms, and charged onto the Spanish merchant ship wielding a large axe, the battle ended quickly, and Haig sobered up.

In the end, Haig transferred the Spanish ship’s cargo of tobacco, spices, and sugar onto his own ship before letting the Spaniards go.

This brief episode brought a small windfall to the Viking expeditionary force and showcased Haig’s fearless spirit.

After witnessing Haig’s formidable prowess, Haldor and the Viking soldiers couldn’t help but think of the legendary berserkers from ancient Viking tales—those terrifying warriors who feared neither death nor pain.

Hearing the discussions among the crowd, Haldor wanted to bestow an honor upon his brother. So, as Haig returned victorious, bare-chested, presenting the spoils of tobacco, Haldor loudly declared, “Haig’s bravery in battle is plain for all to see. I proclaim him the First Berserker of the Vikings!”

At that moment, all the Viking soldiers raised their hands, shouting fervently, “First Berserker of the Vikings! First Berserker of the Vikings!”

Haig felt like a hero, excited for days afterward.

The title of “First Berserker of the Vikings” was now firmly established, making other high-ranking commanders somewhat envious. Thus, Kadir and Hoskuld emphasized the word “berserker” in their speech.

Haldor also noticed the envy and dissatisfaction in their words, but he was inwardly pleased.

For Haldor, the supreme commander of the Vikings, entering Iceland and potentially facing a large-scale war, shaping Haig into the First Berserker was meant to ignite the morale and competitive spirit of all participants. He firmly believed that anyone influenced by Viking culture would aspire to the honor of being a berserker.

After days of observation, Haldor was already quite pleased, feeling that his plan had succeeded.

The group continued to discuss the scenery around Iceland and the ships for a while. Kadir and the others hinted at the idea of selecting a few large ships to plunder, thereby displaying their own courage.

But as they were nearing Icelandic waters, Haldor didn’t want any unnecessary complications, so he skillfully steered the conversation away with a smile.

“How late is it?” After chatting for a while, Haldor turned his head and shouted toward the cabin.

Ulf quickly stepped out and said, “It’s already 3 PM. We should be reaching Iceland soon!”

“Isn’t that Iceland?” Hudik, with the sharpest eyes, suddenly pointed toward the sea ahead.

Everyone turned to look and soon saw a vast white expanse on the sea—a massive landmass. It was Iceland, which they hadn’t seen in many years.

After a while, the fleet approached the southwestern tip of Iceland. On the sea, more than a dozen large and small boats were fishing, and two ships heading north were clearly laden with goods.

The appearance of a fleet of thirty-three large ships in Icelandic waters was an extremely rare event in Iceland’s history.

The Icelandic fishermen noticed Haldor’s fleet, but seeing its imposing manner, no one dared to approach, and they all quickly moved aside.

The various leaders standing at the bow, seeing their own formidable appearance, let out strange cries and laughter. The fishermen who moved aside could only curse and glare in private, not daring to even look for long.

Facing the sea breeze, Haldor and the others quietly watched as the mountains ahead grew closer, their expressions constantly changing.

Under the guidance of the flagship’s helmsman, the fleet entered Iceland’s coastline and slowly approached the Seltjarnarnes Peninsula in the southwest. This peninsula had fertile land and was the beautiful homeland where Haldor and his people had lived for decades. It was also the foundation of the Hrut family’s centuries-old enterprise.

As the familiar homeland came into clearer view, Olaf, Haig, and the others couldn’t help but laugh.

“Home!” With Nilahu’s loud, slightly off-key shout, the Icelanders and soldiers on the ships erupted in cheers.

However, the Icelanders were cheering because they had arrived home, while the others were cheering because they had finally reached their destination.

Hudik turned his head and saw only a few small boats fishing in the surrounding waters. He said, “Order the ships to prepare! Once we reach the barren beach south of Hrut Village, we’ll execute the plan quickly!”

Haldor seemed a bit nervous and nodded, saying, “Signal with the flags!”

Following Haldor’s flagship signalman waving the flags, the more than thirty ships behind understood the general’s intentions.

Various commands were issued layer by layer, and the Viking expeditionary soldiers on the thirty-three ships quickly sprang into action. They first checked their personal belongings, put on their leather armor, then slung their firearms and waited in the cabins.

After another half hour, the ships gradually approached the shore.

Since the west and south sides of the Seltjarnarnes Peninsula did not have deep-water ports for ships to dock, even a Viking longship would run aground. To prevent the large ships from running aground, Haldor had ordered the fleet to drop anchor in advance.

The fleet then anchored a few hundred feet from the shore. Each large ship lowered two dinghies in succession. The Viking expeditionary force, led by their leaders, quickly approached the shore in the dinghies. Their movements were swift and silent. If any European military commander saw this, they would surely praise the military discipline of the Viking soldiers.

The barren beach near Hrut Village had only been inhabited by people from the northern Hrut Village, making it very safe and hidden. However, the first batch of people to land, including Haldor, still sent dozens of soldiers to stand guard around the area.

Since each dinghy could only carry about a dozen people, and fewer if carrying horses, it took two hours for the more than four thousand soldiers on the ships to assemble on the shore. The last to remain on the ships were a few hundred soldiers, sailors, and artillerymen.

These deployments were part of the final strategic plan decided days earlier. According to the plan devised by Haldor and his men, they would first land on the barren beach south of White Hazel Forest Hrut Village. Then, Haldor and his main force would march overland straight to Reykjavik, while Hudik would lead the artillerymen and more than four hundred soldiers and sailors by ship to blockade Reykjavik’s harbor.

The purpose of this was to prevent the Governor of Iceland, Kolsvin, and the arch-enemy Sigfoss from escaping. It was also to block news of the attack on Iceland.

Since Reykjavik’s harbor had some cannons, disembarking the troops after entering the harbor would be inconvenient, making it difficult to quickly assemble an attacking force. This could not only cause casualties but also alert the enemy, allowing them to escape.

However, marching overland from White Hazel Forest Hrut City to Big Port would take less than a day, and blockading the harbor from the sea with cannons was not difficult. This way, they could take Reykjavik in one fell swoop. Haldor and his men were confident that this simultaneous land and sea attack was the best method, ensuring that the enemy could not escape as long as they were in Iceland.

As for why they were attacking Big Port… it wasn’t just because the two major enemies were there…

More importantly, Reykjavik was Iceland’s largest city, home to at least one-fifth of Iceland’s population, including the wealthiest and most influential people. So, if they could take Reykjavik in one stroke, Iceland would be as good as conquered. The next step would be to consider how to pacify the people and manage the territory.

Haig personally signaled Hudik to set sail for Big Port the next morning, as the ship’s speed was much faster than the army’s marching pace. It would take only three hours to reach Reykjavik.

But Haldor and his main force would have to march all night to get there.

After Hudik responded with the flags, Haldor gave the order to depart and led the main force in a long column toward the northern White Hazel Forest Hrut Village.

Since they would reach Reykjavik by the next morning after marching and resting, the army only carried two days’ worth of dry rations and twenty rounds of ammunition to increase their marching speed. Five ox carts carrying some bedding were already fully loaded.

After walking for about twenty minutes, Haldor, Haig, Kadir, Hoskuld, Ulf, and the others at the front on horseback saw the thatched stone houses and some long stone-walled houses of White Hazel Forest Hrut Village.

“The village is here!” Haldor’s heart warmed, and he slowly walked up the stone path leading into the village. He straightened his legs and looked around, then frowned and said, “What’s going on? There’s not a single person in the village? Didn’t Sigfoss send anyone? But the fields on both sides of the road are clearly growing wheat seedlings!”

With deep suspicion, Haldor and the others entered the village, only to find all the houses in disrepair. Every villager who saw their neglected homes was emotionally affected.

“What is it?!”

Several mounted scouts rode ahead into the streets to investigate and soon discovered a few figures hiding in the courtyards.

Before long, Haldor saw several people brought over by the scouts. They were the elders who had been left in the village years ago. However, while more than a dozen had been left behind, only three remained now. Their clothing and emaciated appearance clearly showed they had been living in dire conditions.

“Haldor! You’re finally back!”

Haldor dismounted, and the elders hugged him, weeping bitterly.

Soon, the military officers who were originally from Hrut Village also gathered.

Amid the chaotic questioning and the elders’ tearful accounts, Haldor and the others finally understood what had happened after they left.

It turned out that not long after Haldor had taken most of the villagers away from Iceland, the governor’s guards and Sigfoss’s people had stormed into Hrut Village. After interrogating a few elders and learning the situation, the furious governor and Sigfoss had ordered the confiscation of all property in Hrut Village, placing it under Sigfoss’s management.

Sigfoss, delighted to have acquired four hundred virgates of land in Hrut Village, had sent his family and servants to cultivate and manage it. Each year, during planting and harvest, he would send over a hundred people with livestock, but at other times, only seven or eight servants would stay in the village to oversee it. However, this year, only two people were left to guard it.

Sigfoss, having gotten his wish, could not ignore the law since Haldor had transferred all assets to the elders before leaving. In the end, Sigfoss could only leave a few acres of land for the more than a dozen elders, but he imposed extremely high agricultural taxes, making it difficult for the elders to bear. Soon, more than half of them had died from hunger and hardship.

If it weren’t for the last three elders occasionally receiving aid from relatives in nearby villages, they might not have lived to see Haldor’s return.

Chapter 164: Attack on Reykjavik (1)

Upon hearing the tearful pleas of the village elders, learning that Sigfoss had indirectly driven eleven of the village’s elderly to their deaths, Haldor and the other Icelanders flew into a rage, as if each had become a berserker.

“Devil! Sigfoss is a demon who deserves to rot in hell!”

“Damn it! Why doesn’t God strike him down with a bolt of lightning!”

“Bastard! He’s worse than a man-eating wolf! Scum!”

“Old West was such a kind man! And they killed him! Devil’s heart! Satan’s methods!”

…

The Icelanders’ condemnation and curses against Sigfoss echoed through Hrut Village.

After a long, chaotic outburst, Haldor and the others gradually calmed down.

“Where do Sigfoss’s people live?” Haldor and Haig asked simultaneously, their eyes blazing.

An elder spoke sternly, “Right in your longhouse, Haldor. There are only two of Sigfoss’s servants there now, and they’re both wicked!”

“I’ll go and bring them here!” Haig roared, mounting his horse and leading a group of cavalry away.

Though Haig hadn’t returned home for over a decade, Iceland, including the white birch forest and Hrut Village, had barely changed in centuries. To Haig, everything in the village looked the same as it had ten years ago.

Haldor’s original longhouse stood on the gentle slope to the east of the village. It had been occupied by Sigfoss’s servants for several years. Haig’s fury burned as he resolved to capture the two servants Sigfoss had stationed in Hrut Village and kill them to avenge the murdered elders.

It was nearly dusk. The golden light of the setting sun bathed Haldor’s longhouse, making the flowers blooming on the grass roof appear even more vibrant.

The sound of galloping hooves grew louder, approaching the longhouse. Those inside heard the thunderous hoofbeats and pushed open the door to look outside.

Haig narrowed his eyes and saw a short man step out. With a squeeze of his legs, his horse surged forward like the wind into the courtyard. Bending low, he reached out and grabbed the terrified man.

“What’s going on?!” A tall woman also came out, only to see seven or eight burly men on horseback in the courtyard, with her husband held aloft by the leader. Terrified, her legs gave way as she tried to flee.

One of the young cavalrymen under Haig’s command drew a short axe from his waist and threw it backward.

Thud! The axe struck the woman in the lower back, sending her crashing to the ground with a cry of pain.

The young cavalryman quickly rode forward, leaning down to drag the nearly unconscious woman onto his horse.

Haig glanced appreciatively at the young man, then said, “You’re Tuba, aren’t you? From the Inuit tribe?”

The young man with flat features bowed slightly, speaking in accented Icelandic, “Great commander! I am Tuba! Thank you for remembering me.”

“You’re quick and reliable,” Haig praised with a smile, then tossed the trembling man in his hand to a nearby knight.

“Interrogate them thoroughly!”

…

After Haig and the knights left, the Icelanders and Vikings, having learned of Sigfoss’s atrocities from others, continued to curse him and his servants.

After a while, amid the furious condemnations of the Icelandic Vikings, Haig and his cavalry returned at full speed. Two dark figures were thrown to the ground by the knights, followed by the pained cries of a man and a woman.

“Ouch! Ouch…”

Haig dismounted, drew the large axe from his horse’s back, and walked over, kicking the couple on the ground. “These two are Sigfoss’s servants! The second steward, Margaret, and Sydney!”

Margaret and Sydney, nearly knocked unconscious by the fall, scrambled to their feet upon hearing Haig’s words. Looking around at the fierce, fully armed men, their hearts turned cold. At first, they thought they had encountered pirates, but recognizing Haldor, they realized it was their master’s enemies come for revenge.

Fearful of being beheaded, the scrawny Sydney trembled on the ground, pleading, “Lords! Haldor! If you want revenge on Sigfoss, don’t drag us into it! We’re just workers he hired; we’ve never harmed your family!”

Sydney was short, while Margaret, in her thirties, was voluptuous and still had some beauty. Normally, she relied on her relationship with Sigfoss to maintain her position as the second steward, but last year, the mistress discovered their affair and banished her to Hrut Village.

Both had already found life difficult, and now they had encountered Haldor seeking revenge. At this critical moment, Margaret was less composed than Sydney. Seeing that Haldor remained silent after her husband’s plea, she finally came to her senses, tearing open her blouse to expose her ample bosom, pleading, “Haldor! You can’t kill the innocent! If you spare us, we’ll work for you for free! We’ll be your loyal servants!”

Haldor remained unmoved. Turning to the three village elders, he asked, “Have these two harmed you?”

“They’re better than the previous ones, but they’re still not good people!” an elder coughed twice before coldly humphing.

Haldor waved his hand. “Kill them! We’re about to attack Big Port; this will boost our morale!”

Haig chuckled and stepped forward. With a flash of his large axe, the pleading couple was beheaded.

Wiping the few drops of warm blood from his face, Haig shouted, “Drag the bodies away and bury them!”

Several soldiers dragged the bodies away for burial. Seeing it was getting late, Haldor ordered the army to rest temporarily in Hrut Village.

After most of the soldiers had been led by the villagers to various rooms to rest, Hoskuld approached Haldor and asked in a low voice, “Jot’s coffin is on the cart behind. Tom just asked me when the burial will be. What do you think?”

Haldor slapped his forehead, grinning. “I almost forgot! Quickly, gather everyone in the village. Let’s hold a ceremony for Jot and bury him here. We must fulfill our old comrade’s last wish as soon as possible!”

Following Haldor’s orders, nearly two hundred Icelanders and some soldiers soon took Jot’s coffin from the cart. Young Solrak, who had studied theology and knew how to sing psalms, prayed for Jot. After the prayers, they buried Jot’s coffin in the village cemetery.

By the time Jot was buried, the moon had disappeared. Haldor, holding a torch, returned to the longhouse and finally had his dinner.

After eating, Haldor prepared to rest. He had just finalized the detailed plan with the other leaders to lead the army in a night march to attack Reykjavik in the early hours. Now, he needed to rest, but considering his lack of intelligence on Iceland, especially Big Port, Haldor decided to summon several leaders. He wanted to make further arrangements and obtain the latest intelligence on Big Port as soon as possible.

The white birch forest and Hrut Village were near only three other villages. Though they had once had close ties, since Haldor had led the entire village to relocate, no one had paid attention to Hrut Village. Thus, even with thousands of people staying in the village tonight, the neighboring villages remained unaware.

The desolate village, while saddening the Icelandic Vikings and deepening their anger toward Sigfoss, also better concealed Haldor’s army’s military strategy and movements.

Thousands of soldiers entered the houses to rest. Some cooked meals, others stood guard, and the rest quickly lay down on furs to sleep.

Before going to bed, Haldor gathered several legion commanders and deputies for a meeting, finalizing the detailed strategy for the raid on Big Port. After the meeting, Hoskuld, Kalhu, and Kadir left with a few guards on horseback. They were tasked with investigating the changes in Iceland and Reykjavik over the past few years, especially the current situation of the Governor’s Mansion, the Big Port garrison, and individuals like Sigfoss and Kolsvin.

…

When the self-striking clock Haldor carried with the army struck three in the morning, he abruptly awoke and ordered the entire army to set out within half an hour, marching north toward Reykjavik.

Hrut Village was not far from Reykjavik to the north, and the road had been traveled for hundreds of years. Haldor and his men were confident they could find their way to Reykjavik even with their eyes closed.

Thus, the army marched under the moonlight, quickly leaving the Seltyana district and passing through the forest where Haldor had been assassinated by Ozul years ago.

According to Haldor’s estimates, even if all the guards in the Governor’s Mansion and the families of the various leaders in Big Port were armed, they could not organize a force of a thousand. Moreover, Big Port had no city walls for protection. The Viking expeditionary force should be able to take Big Port without any resistance.

However, since it had been three and a half years since they had returned to Iceland, and fearing unexpected changes, Haldor had sent Kadir and Kalhu to scout the situation before going to bed the previous night.

Though Kadir and Hoskuld’s families had left Iceland with Haldor, since no one could prove it, their properties had certainly been preserved. Even Kadir, upon returning to his village, would still enjoy the same prestige and status as before, as most of the villagers were either his relatives or descendants of former serfs who had become freemen. Whether out of affection or obligation, Kadir would be well-treated and respected upon his return, and he could learn about the changes in the village and even Iceland over the past three and a half years.

Hoskuld was from Big Port. His family did not own much land but had a herd of cattle. When Hoskuld left with his family, he had already sold the herd. Now, returning home, Hoskuld and Kalhu would only find a dilapidated house, which might even have been occupied by relatives.

However, their goal was to gather information. They were not very concerned about their remaining property. After all, if they could take Iceland, the Hoskuld family would gain a hundred or a thousand times their original assets. If they failed, their original assets would no longer matter.

As dawn broke, Haldor’s army approached the southern district of Reykjavik. A few early-rising villagers had already spotted the advancing army. Most Icelanders, unaccustomed to seeing large armies, were terrified and hid in their houses, clutching knives and axes, fearing a pirate invasion.

As the sky grew brighter and the sun began to rise in the east, Kadir finally caught up with the army on horseback, accompanied by his guards.

“General Haldor!” Kadir rode past the army and approached Haldor, panting. “I finally caught up with you!”

“I was just thinking that if you didn’t come soon, we would have to stop and rest,” Haldor said with a soft smile. “What’s the situation? Any changes?”

“I asked Simmer. He said that apart from Kolsvin’s increased exploitation of the Icelandic people over the past few years, there haven’t been any major changes! However, the Governor’s Mansion seems to have a few dozen more guards than before!”

Kadir pointed behind him as he spoke. “Simmer learned of our plan and happily brought over twenty men to join us. They’re riding behind. I was worried you’d be concerned, so I rushed ahead!”

“Simmer is a good man!” Haig laughed. “Are Kolsvin and Sigfoss in Reykjavik?”

“Simmer went to Big Port last month to attend a meeting where Kolsvin announced tax increases. Denmark wants to rebuild after the war, so they’re raising agricultural and commercial taxes everywhere, especially in Iceland, where they’ve added another thirty percent. If it weren’t for Sigfoss and a few bishops and Kolsvin suppressing the opposition, the leaders from the eastern regions would have rebelled! After three days of negotiation, they still raised the taxes by twenty percent.”

Kadir chuckled. “When I returned to Gray Mountain Village, Simmer and the others were grinding their teeth and sighing. They were shocked when I told them we were going to attack Reykjavik and liberate Iceland. Not only did they bring their own men, but Simmer also sent his brother to coordinate with the other leaders! I think even if we didn’t attack Reykjavik, Kolsvin wouldn’t be able to remain the Governor of Iceland!”

Hearing Kadir’s account of Gray Mountain Village, Haldor realized that Denmark’s defeat in the war might have led to harsher exploitation of Iceland, intensifying the people’s resentment and the opposition between the regions and Big Port.

However, Haldor was well aware that Danish merchants had long controlled seventy percent of Iceland’s maritime trade.

As long as the Danes controlled Iceland’s maritime trade, they held the lifeline of Iceland. Iceland could not produce enough cloth or grain on its own. If Denmark cut off the supply, Iceland might not starve immediately, but economic collapse would be imminent.

Thus, as long as Kolsvin did not drive the Icelandic people to despair, giving them a chance to breathe, the leaders of the various regions would never dare to rebel, let alone succeed in doing so.

But Haldor felt the situation was different now…

Because he, the Viking Raid general, had arrived with over four thousand troops and a powerful navy. This signaled the overwhelming force that would change Iceland’s landscape and future had entered Iceland and was already in action. Soon, it would completely transform Iceland’s current state and future…

Haldor believed that if he offered the Icelandic people more lenient policies than the Danish-appointed governor, reducing taxes and tributes, it would not be difficult to win their wholehearted support. Under his leadership, Iceland could achieve food security and even independence!

In the eyes of the poor, struggling to make ends meet, Haldor’s appearance was not just the emergence of a saga hero but the arrival of a liberator, a great savior for the laboring people of Iceland!

Chapter 165: Attack on Reykjavik (2)

After hearing Kadir’s account of the situation in Iceland, Haldor clearly recognized that the conflict between the regional leaders and the Governor of Iceland had reached a boiling point.

Previously, everyone had dared not speak out, fearing the Governor’s guards and the might of the Kingdom of Denmark. But now, with Haldor leading a large army back to Iceland, as long as he achieved some success, the rebel forces in Iceland would rise in response.

“Simmer was brave even as a child. I remember he once hunted whales and walruses alone. He made the best choice!”

Haldor praised with a smile.

Kadir then spoke of Simmer’s admiration for Haldor and his willingness to sacrifice for Iceland’s independence.

After a while, a group of knights in leather armor and half plate armor caught up with the main force. Hearing the commotion, Kadir turned his head and, without waiting for his troops to intercept, laughed heartily and went forward to greet them, then led them to Haldor.

“General Haldor, this is Simmer’s brother!”

“Simmer, you know Haldor. He is very happy you have joined us!” Kadir laughed heartily as he introduced the two.

Haldor had met Simmer a few times when he was a guest at Kadir’s home. He had fond memories of the young man, now a strapping adult.

Both men dismounted, clasped hands tightly, and Haldor said, “Thank you for joining us! Simmer, Kadir has already told me what you have done for us. I think you are already one of us!”

“These past few years, I have loved listening to the saga stories of you and Haig. I wanted to follow Kadir to Vinland with you, but Kadir said you would return eventually, so I waited. Finally, I have waited for you!”

“At first, I was a little worried that the men you brought would not be enough to deal with Kolsvin and Sigfoss…”

Haldor’s warm and friendly attitude moved Simmer deeply. As he spoke, he laughed heartily, then looked around in delight at the disciplined army, laughing, “Haha! I didn’t expect you to bring back such a powerful army, General Haldor. Not only can you defeat the Governor of Iceland and lead Iceland to independence, but you could even challenge the King of Denmark for supremacy in the North!”

Haldor did not take Simmer’s naive words seriously. He laughed heartily, then pulled Simmer along to introduce him to everyone.

Haldor and his men, who had seen the world through their cooperation with partners in Holland and Britain, were well aware of the details of the recent European wars.

Every country involved had sent tens of thousands of troops, not to mention the most expensive cavalry units, which numbered several thousand.

Without mentioning military training and leadership, the lack of cavalry and overall troop numbers alone showed that Haldor’s army could only be considered a somewhat powerful mercenary force, pale in comparison to a nation’s army.

However, while Haldor understood this in his heart, he had to maintain an attitude of fearlessness towards the Governor’s guards, Danish soldiers, and even any powerful European nation. This was the ultimate way to ensure high morale and unwavering confidence in victory.

Thus, the confidence Haldor exuded in their brief conversation completely won over Simmer and the warriors he had brought. They admired General Haldor as they would a hero from a saga, believing they were part of a historic event that would change the world and be remembered for generations. Soon, they displayed a strong desire to fight and unwavering loyalty.

As they chatted, ten minutes had passed. Haldor looked at the eastern sky, which was slightly brightening, and waved his hand, saying, “Hurry up and march! We must attack Reykjavik before Kolsvin and Sigfoss find out!”

General Haldor’s orders were relayed down the chain of command. The army, which had rested for a moment, quickly mobilized and marched rapidly northward toward the great port of Reykjavik.

Simmer and the warriors he had brought were organized into a separate unit, following Kadir’s legion. Although they had not undergone professional military training, they were all brave and skilled fighters, mostly former pirates, so they could still be effective in battle when needed.

The army of several thousand men formed a long line, marching continuously northward. Apart from the dull sound of footsteps and hooves, there were only occasional horse whinnies, snorts, and human coughs. After the monotonous and rapid march, they finally arrived around nine in the morning. At the front were Haldor, Haig, and others on horseback, who were the first to see the faint outline of Reykjavik in the smoke ahead.

At this time, many people in the villages on both sides of the road south of Reykjavik had just gotten up and gone out, and they also saw Haldor’s army.

Almost all the villagers were scared and fled far away, and many of the timid ones hid back in their rooms, trembling.

The Icelandic villagers could never have imagined that one day, when they went out in the morning, they would see a dense, fierce-looking army in the morning light. They suspected it was a powerful pirate attack, but they also wondered what kind of pirates would have such a disciplined army.

“Clop, clop…”

As the villagers on both sides of the road fled, several horse hooves suddenly sounded in the morning fog, getting closer and closer.

“Someone?!”

Haig and Ulf rode forward to meet them, worried that they might be guards or merchants from the great port, and to prevent their whereabouts from being exposed, they had to quickly capture them.

Haldor and the others gripped their weapons and looked ahead, seeing Hoskuld and Kalhu father and son riding out of the fog.

“Haldor!”

Seeing Haldor’s army, Hoskuld was overjoyed.

Haldor also hurried forward to greet them.

After Hoskuld rode closer, without any pleasantries, he directly said, “I returned to the great port last night and inquired about the situation. Other information is not important; I’ll tell you later. The important thing is that I heard Kolsvin will return to Denmark in a few days. It is said that the Danish king wants to promote him to Governor of Norway. Sigfoss has been running to the Governor’s mansion every day, saying he is preparing gifts for his brother-in-law! Our return is timely! If we attack the great port now, we can capture Sigfoss and Kolsvin!”

“Great! It seems our return is perfectly timed! This is completely Jot’s guidance! Thank him!” Haldor said emotionally.

Kadir and the others laughed heartily, then gathered to discuss.

After a moment, Hoskuld frowned and said, “When I left the city this morning, I saw several knights entering the city. I suspect that others who have discovered the problem have reported to Kolsvin. If he and Sigfoss know that a large army is attacking, they might escape!”

“Then let’s speed up! Let’s occupy Reykjavik this morning and capture Kolsvin and Sigfoss!” Worried that the opportunity for revenge within reach might change again, Haig hurriedly said.

Haldor and the others knew that every minute that passed, Kolsvin and Sigfoss in Reykjavik might learn of the approaching army, so Haldor also responded to everyone’s opinions and ordered the army to speed up again.

Under the urging of Ulf’s cavalry, the army sped up again and finally entered the southern district of the great port half an hour later.

At this time, the sun had risen in the east, and there were already many people walking or driving on the stone roads in the southern district, busy making a living.

The originally leisurely Icelandic residents were suddenly frightened by the dark army coming from the south, their faces pale, dropping their packages and items and fleeing in panic, while continuously shouting “God” from their mouths.

In the chaos of chickens flying and dogs jumping, Haldor knew that the battle to attack the great port had begun. He needed to occupy the entire great port and traffic arteries in just half an hour, so he sternly ordered, “Full alert, quickly occupy the traffic hubs! Open fire at any time if you encounter resistance or the Governor’s guards!”

With Haldor’s combat instructions issued, the soldiers of the three major legions maintained their combat posture under the commands of their respective company and battalion leaders. The long spearmen gripped their long spears, looking left and right, while the musketeers held their flintlock firearms, looking ahead as they marched.

“Bang!”

When Haldor led the army to occupy the sparsely populated southern district, inhabited by the poor and fishermen, without any danger, and was about to focus on entering the central district, they suddenly heard a loud, dull cannon fire from the northwest direction of the seaport.

“Is it Hudik?” Haldor frowned and quickly looked at Ulf.

Haig urged, “Quickly send someone to the dock to check!”

“I’ll go myself!”

Ulf quickly agreed, turned his horse around, and personally led three cavalrymen to rush to the dock.

When Ulf approached the dock, he saw the entire port in chaos. Two large ships that were unloading cargo had capsized, revealing several black holes made by cannonballs. Several merchants in fine clothes were standing in the distance, weeping and shouting, seemingly trying to stop the cannon fire from the sea. Clearly, the damaged ships belonged to them.

The dock, usually crowded with sailors, laborers, and various merchants, carters, and servants, was now empty, with everyone covering their heads and running east and north in panic, fearing that the iron cannonballs falling from the sky would crush their skulls.

Ulf stood up on his horse, legs straight, and looked at the western sea where a line of ships had formed a chain like a wall, revealing hundreds of black holes of cannons. Several cannons occasionally fired, shooting cannonballs at the ships docked in the port flying the Danish flag.

Suddenly, gunfire sounded not far to the east. Ulf widened his eyes and saw that in the distance, a hundred or so musketeers in half plate armor had formed a square formation and were quickly running towards the dock.

In the chaos, the musketeer guards did not notice Ulf, who was not far away on horseback in full military attire. On any other day, Ulf’s appearance alone would have been enough to arrest and interrogate him.

Ulf knew that the Governor’s guards had come to the dock to rescue, but those hundred or so firearms could not deal with the armed merchant ships on the sea; at most, they could only intimidate the panicked people.

Knowing that there was nothing more to see, Ulf glanced at the tall Governor’s mansion, sneered, turned his horse around, and hurried back to Haldor’s army, quickly reporting what he had seen and heard.

Haldor chuckled and said, “Hudik is truly swift! As expected of an old comrade with tacit understanding! Now that the dock is blocked, let’s quickly seize the traffic hubs in the southern and northern districts. Kolsvin and Sigfoss will have nowhere to escape!”

“Haig! You lead a legion to blockade and surround Sigfoss’s mansion. Kadir and Hoskuld lead a legion to control the various districts of the great port. I will personally lead the army to surround the Governor’s mansion and capture Kolsvin! Whether we can occupy Iceland and be ennobled depends on this battle today!”

Haldor quickly and clearly issued his orders. After everyone agreed, Haig hurriedly rode to find the legion he commanded, organized the troops, and led them straight to the residential area of the nobles and rich in the central district of Reykjavik.

As the deputy legion commander, Kadir became the highest commander when the legion commander Hudik commanded the navy and could not command the soldiers. He and Hoskuld quickly gathered their legion and then led the army into the central district, preparing to first control the dock and the central commercial area, and then control the northern, southern, and eastern districts.

Simmer and his men, as a responding uprising force, followed Kadir as arranged by Haldor.

The army of more than three thousand men quickly left under the leadership of their commanders. Haldor looked at the much thinner army behind him and the extremely quiet streets, sneered, and said, “Ulf, you go to the Governor’s mansion first! If the Governor’s guards are not there, seize it first! If they are, surround and blockade the Governor’s mansion, and do not allow anyone to enter or exit!”

Ulf led fifty cavalrymen and left first, arriving at the Governor’s mansion shortly after.

Ulf and several sharp-eyed knights found that the Governor’s mansion was already tightly closed. Upon careful observation, they could faintly see the presence of gun barrels in the lookout holes on the first and second floors. Clearly, the Governor’s mansion was prepared for defense.

“It seems Kolsvin already knows we have attacked Reykjavik!”

As he spoke, Ulf sent more than thirty cavalrymen to guard both sides of the street, then sent two more to check the situation at the dock.

Soon, Haldor personally led the legion to arrive. Ulf was reporting the situation, and the two cavalrymen sent to the dock had just returned.

“General! Deputy Legion Commander! The soldiers under Legion Commander Haig and Legion Commander Kadir have already taken control of the dock and harbor, killing eight Governor’s guards and capturing ninety!”

Haldor smiled and nodded. He felt that the situation in Iceland after his return was progressing much more smoothly than he had imagined. However, since Kolsvin and Sigfoss had not been captured yet, he could not show optimism, so he said seriously, “Send someone to persuade the people in the Governor’s mansion to surrender. Tell Kolsvin that as long as he surrenders, I can spare his life!”

Several Viking officers approached the Governor’s mansion and began to loudly call for surrender, stating that it was Viking General Haldor who had attacked Iceland, with the purpose of liberating Iceland and leading the Icelandic people to freedom, away from Danish oppression and exploitation.

There seemed to be some commotion inside the Governor’s mansion, and the response to Haldor was several gunshots and a Viking officer’s right leg being hit.

“Damn it!” Haldor cursed, waved his hand, and ordered a strong attack.

But a volley of random gunfire did not cause any significant damage to the Governor’s mansion, only adding some scars to the door. Instead, seven or eight soldiers of the Viking expeditionary force were killed or wounded by cold gunfire from inside the Governor’s mansion.

Haldor was furious in his heart but quickly calmed down. He cursed himself for being reckless, then gathered the troops to surround the Governor’s mansion, and said, “We will surround the Governor’s mansion for three days, making those inside suffer from hunger and thirst and surrender, or gather firewood to pile on the house and burn them to death! Just like Flosi burned Njal and his sons! But we only need to take revenge on Kolsvin, so tell them my plan. If they still do not surrender, then find some firewood and burn down the Governor’s mansion!”

Chapter 166: Assault on Reykjavik (3)

Haldor, having regained his composure, swiftly resumed his role as a leader, and his orders were executed without delay.

Before long, soldiers hauled large quantities of firewood from the harbor. Several loud-voiced Viking warriors then approached the governor’s mansion, loudly conveying Haldor’s ultimatum—this was their final warning.

Just as Haldor was about to lose patience and order his men to pile the firewood around the mansion and set it ablaze, the grand doors of the governor’s mansion suddenly swung open. A well-dressed elderly man emerged, trembling, with his hands raised high.

“Don’t shoot! I… I am Agran, the domestic affairs officer of the governor’s mansion. Governor Kolsvin has sent me to negotiate your surrender with Lord Haldor!”

Agran spoke in a panic, repeatedly bowing to Haldor.

Several soldiers stepped forward, seizing Agran and binding his hands behind his back before forcing him to his knees before Haldor.

Seeing this man—Kolsvin’s lackey, who had long oppressed the people of Iceland under the governor’s banner—Haldor felt a surge of satisfaction. He stared at Agran’s increasingly wrinkled face and asked coolly, “Do you still remember me, Lord Agran?”

Agran had already recognized Haldor atop his tall horse. With years of experience as an official, he knew full well that whether Haldor was a pirate, a mercenary for another nation, or, as rumors claimed, had risen to prominence in Vinland, his current strength made him untouchable.

Recalling how he had once tormented Haldor, Agran inwardly groaned. Hearing Haldor’s mocking tone, he quickly forced a smile and bowed. “Ah, it’s Lord Haldor! From afar, I mistook your bearing for that of the marshal himself. I never expected it to be you! It seems you’ve prospered abroad. God bless you! This is truly an honor for Iceland!”

Haldor, however, felt no comfort from the flattery. Instead, he frowned.

The soldiers restraining Agran tightened their grip, barking, “Stay still!”

Agran cried out in pain, pleading, “Ow… easier! Lord Haldor! I… I bear you no grudge, nor have I wronged you! You…”

Haldor watched Agran’s performance with cold detachment until the man’s face paled and beads of sweat formed from the pain. Only then did he signal the soldiers to ease their hold.

Agran collapsed to the ground, gasping for breath, his trembling hands unable to rub his aching shoulders. He could only grimace in agony.

“What did Kolsvin send you to say?” Haldor asked coldly.

Agran’s mind raced. “Lord Haldor, the governor now realizes he was deceived by Sigfoss, leading to your wrongful exile. The duel between Mr. Haig and young Sigfoss should have been settled without further consequences—there should have been no arrests or confiscation of your property. The governor has instructed me to tell you that if you withdraw your forces, he will pardon all past offenses, punish Sigfoss, and restore your wealth twofold!”

Though Agran’s mind had dulled with age and indulgence, in this moment, it sharpened. Before leaving the mansion, neither he nor the governor had known who was attacking Reykjavik, let alone how to negotiate if it turned out to be Haldor. Yet, having served multiple governors and risen from the lowest ranks, Agran instantly acted as if he had been prepared all along.

Haldor laughed heartily. He didn’t believe Agran’s words, but a peaceful takeover of the governor’s mansion was still preferable. Feigning consideration, he said, “Hmm… I trust Governor Kolsvin. Then, Lord Agran, please lead my men to meet the governor.”

“This…” Agran hesitated, eyeing the fierce soldiers around him.

Haldor said coldly, “Rest assured, we will uphold the dignity of nobility.”

The dignity of nobility was a concept respected across European cultures. Over a hundred years later, Napoleon Bonaparte was imprisoned twice rather than executed—a testament to this principle.

Throughout Europe’s thousand-year history, whether in wars between nations, civil wars, or even conflicts that overthrew regimes or destroyed entire countries, the leaders were always nobles, great and small, never commoners or serfs.

The unbridgeable gulf of status in Europe was unbreakable, and the reverence for bloodline was deeply ingrained. Thus, nobles, regardless of victory or defeat, always afforded their opponents the dignity befitting their station.

Hearing Haldor invoke the dignity of nobility, Agran reluctantly nodded. “Very well. Please have your soldiers follow me to meet the governor.”

What Agran didn’t know was that Haldor was not yet a noble—merely the son of a country squire. The reliability of his words was questionable…

Soon, a dozen elite White Wolf soldiers in half-plate armor followed Agran into the governor’s mansion.

As they neared the mansion’s guards, they struck swiftly, subduing the thirty soldiers guarding the gate.

With the first wave of Viking warriors shouting in excitement, over a hundred more rushed into the mansion. Soon, the three-story stone fortress echoed with chaotic noises—occasional cries of pain from men and shrieks from women.

After some time, once the mansion had fallen silent, Haldor rode in with his guards.

Nilahu and Gilson emerged from the fortress, bowing before Haldor. “All resistance has been eliminated, my lord. Please, enter.”

Haldor dismounted and, guided by the two, entered the fortress.

The grand hall was in disarray. The walls were lined with over a dozen oil paintings of middle-aged or elderly men in fine attire—portraits of Iceland’s past governors.

Under the gaze of these former governors, Haldor stepped onto the red carpet of the first-floor hall. The carpet and its surroundings were littered with the mangled bodies of the mansion’s guards and servants. Blood soaked the carpet, deepening its crimson hue and filling the air with a metallic stench.

Nilahu and Gilson quietly ordered the soldiers to remove the corpses. Haldor, expressionless, stepped over the bloodstained carpet and debris, crossed the hallway, and ascended the stairs.

Dozens of the mansion’s guards had been subdued or killed in the fight. The once-elegant furniture lay shattered, and the opulence had given way to ruin. Yet, Haldor felt a strange satisfaction at the sight.

Thud… thud…

Moments later, as he reached the second floor, Haldor saw a young couple with their two children sitting on a sofa in the warm, grand parlor.

The gray-haired, curly-haired man in a kilt was none other than Governor Kolsvin, and beside him sat the beautiful daughter of the Sigfoss family. Their two children, aged three or four, were the fruits of their union.

Agran crouched in a corner of the hall, hugging his head and trembling—clearly terrified by the Vikings’ brutality.

Kolsvin and his wife, however, remained composed. They sat upright, their expressions calm, as if posing for a court painter. Yet, Haldor’s sharp eyes detected their forced composure—their pale lips, clenched fists, and the trembling children in their arms betrayed their fear and helplessness.

Haldor casually approached Kolsvin, sitting across from him on a sofa. Leaning back, he sank into the soft leather, crossing his legs as he gazed at Kolsvin’s evasive eyes. “Governor, it’s been a long time.”

“Haldor!” Kolsvin’s body trembled. Squinting, he feigned indifference. “I never expected you to become a pirate commanding thousands of mercenaries! And the warships that bombarded the harbor an hour ago—they were yours as well, weren’t they?”

Haldor smiled faintly, glancing around. “Our governor is quite clever.”

The others chuckled softly.

Amid the mockery, Kolsvin scoffed, feeling his wife’s body tense beside him. He patted the child in his arms, hoping to ease their tension.

After a moment, he spoke softly, “In just a few years, you’ve gone from an exiled criminal to one of the most notorious pirates in the world. Though you now sit before me, I still find it hard to believe.”

Haldor sneered. “The governor only cares about oppressing the people from his lofty position. Why would he concern himself with an Icelandic criminal? But… Governor, you should consider your future.”

Kolsvin’s eyes flickered with panic. His voice trembled slightly. “What do you want? If you only seek revenge against Sigfoss, perhaps Denmark might overlook your insolence. But if you dare to kill an official, rebel, or murder a governor—a noble of royal blood—your ragged ships and pirates won’t stand a chance against Denmark’s mighty army!”

Haldor remained noncommittal, glancing around the lavishly decorated parlor before smiling. “I didn’t return to Iceland just for revenge. I’ve come to lead Iceland back to the freedom and independence it had over six hundred years ago. We Icelanders will break free from Denmark’s oppression and exploitation!”

“What?! You’re openly rebelling?!” Kolsvin, momentarily forgetting his fear, exclaimed, “Have you lost your mind? Do you want to start a war? King Christian IV will have you captured and hanged!”

Haldor coldly retorted, “Hanged? We’ll see if his army is capable of that.”

With that, Haldor lost interest in conversing with Kolsvin. His triumphant mood had faded.

“Take Kolsvin and his family away and imprison them. We’ll decide their fate after the battle.”

As Haldor spoke, he casually waved his hand. Soldiers promptly dragged Kolsvin’s family and Agran to the small, dark prison behind the governor’s mansion—the same place where Haldor had been tortured for two days years ago. Now, the tables had turned.

Within two hours, the once-filthy governor’s mansion was cleaned and restored to order under the Vikings’ efforts.

Haldor, resting on the sofa, along with his personal guards and officers who had moved in, waited quietly for reports from the other two legions while preparing to provide support if needed.

…

As Haldor settled into the governor’s mansion, Kadir and the Hoskuld brothers had already sealed off Reykjavik’s harbor, northern, and southern districts, even capturing over a dozen looters.

Meanwhile, the wealthy district east of the governor’s mansion fell into an eerie silence.

Every street was lined with Viking soldiers armed with long spears and firearms. Before a lavish two-story villa adorned with gardens and lawns stood three rows of musketeers and over two hundred long spearmen.

All Icelanders who saw this house would admire it, saying, “Lord Sigfoss’s villa is truly magnificent!”

Yet, who could have imagined that one morning, the grand estate of Reykjavik’s most prosperous man, Lord Sigfoss, would be surrounded by soldiers? It was as if they had seen a ghost!

Behind the soldiers, Haig, clad in half-plate armor, sat atop his horse, gazing at the tightly shut gates. His expression shifted several times before he finally ordered, “Break down the door! Then rush in and capture Sigfoss and his entire family!”

Sigfoss’s family was alert. When the harbor was bombarded, they had barred their doors and armed themselves, preparing to resist pirates. Little did they know, their greatest enemy, Haig, would come instead.

Peering through a crack in the window, Sigfoss’s face darkened. He looked at his twenty-odd family members and three sons, saying, “Haig has brought many men—three to four hundred outside, armed with firearms and backed by warships. It seems the rumors of his fortune in the sagas are true. But we won’t surrender! Haig and Haldor will kill us. Wait here. When Haig approaches, we’ll rush out and kill him! Then we’ll go to the governor’s mansion—there are still over a hundred guards there. The local leaders will come to our aid once they learn Haig has rebelled and murdered, and even the Danish navy will return to rescue us. So don’t panic!”

Sigfoss’s wife drew a dagger from her waist. “Haig and his men look more like real soldiers than my brother’s pirates. Could they be mercenaries?”

Sigfoss, already irritated, snapped, “Don’t mention your brother! If he had killed Haldor, we wouldn’t be in this mess!”

The woman’s face paled instantly. Then, Sigfoss’s second son looked up. “Father! Stop arguing! Haig’s men are about to attack!”

Hearing his son, Sigfoss quickly peered through the window crack and saw Haig’s soldiers lifting a log to ram their gate.

Boom!

The deafening crash shook the doors and windows slightly, sending dust drifting down. The Sigfoss family tensed, some even trembling in fear.

Sigfoss gripped his firelock musket tightly. “Three of you, go to that window. We’ll open fire together and kill those at the door!”

After a few more rams, Sigfoss’s heart raced. He lit the matchcord, shouted, and signaled his family to open the window and fire at the men at the door.

Bang…

Chapter 167: The Assault on Reykjavik (Conclusion)

As Sigfoss fired at the Viking soldiers battering his door, dozens of gunshots suddenly erupted out of nowhere. Thick smoke billowed outside Sigfoss’s villa, accompanied by a hail of bullets.

Bang! Bang! Bang!

The two wooden windows on the second floor of Sigfoss’s home were shattered, revealing broken curtains and splintered wardrobe walls.

Sigfoss hadn’t even managed to hit the Viking soldiers below when he felt his body go weightless. A searing, numbing pain shot through his left shoulder. When he came to, he found himself sprawled on the floor. Glancing down at his bleeding shoulder and the chaos around him, he realized he had been shot.

His two sons-in-law and a nephew lay dead by another window, their chests and heads riddled with bloody holes, their lifeblood pooling beneath them. Clearly, they had been killed instantly.

Staring at the gruesome sight of his kin, Sigfoss’s emotions twisted into something complex and indescribable. A thought involuntarily surfaced in his mind: Haig has ambushers outside! Sigh… It seems today is my doom.

In the blink of an eye, Sigfoss’s wife and daughters witnessed the horrific deaths of their loved ones. Though they were no strangers to hardship, the suddenness of it all left them paralyzed with fear.

The women in the room screamed hysterically, unable to comprehend how their family had been gunned down so swiftly. After all, it had been their sons-in-law who fired first!

From afar, Haig watched as the overconfident Sigfoss was felled by the musketeers he had stationed in the corners. A cold smirk twisted his lips. “Did you think what you saw was all the men I had?” he sneered. “Hmph, I wanted to toy with you!”

Laine, Haig’s longtime servant who had risen to become a Viking officer, led the musketeers in taking down the ambushers hiding upstairs. Then, they joined the assault on Sigfoss’s villa. The sturdy front door, battered relentlessly by the Viking soldiers, finally began to groan under the strain.

Moments later, with a loud crack, the door gave way. Haig let out a triumphant laugh and waved his hand. “Charge!” With that, he led the charge himself.

A dozen Viking sharpshooters took the lead, followed by several dozen musketeers and long spearmen. They gunned down or hurled throwing axes and short spears at any armed men or women they encountered in Sigfoss’s home. In no time, the Vikings had slaughtered over a dozen of Sigfoss’s family members.

Upstairs, Sigfoss, supported by his son, slowly rose to his feet. Just as he was about to urge his wife and children to flee, the sound of gunfire erupted from below. His face paled—Haig had stormed the villa. If they remained trapped in the room, death was certain. “We must break out!” he urged.

Eleven of Sigfoss’s family members, still unharmed, grabbed firearms from the floor or knives and axes from nearby. Under Sigfoss’s lead, they burst out of the room.

Sigfoss and his family had expected a brutal fight, believing that if they could break through Haig’s encirclement, they might escape with their lives. But as they descended the stairs and rounded a corner, their expressions twisted in horror.

Instead of Haig and his men, they were met with row upon row of black gun barrels.

Haig, Laine, and their men had already taken position downstairs, awaiting their prey. The moment Sigfoss and his family appeared, Haig’s eyes gleamed with vengeful excitement. “Fire!” he roared.

Bang! Bang! Bang!

Before Haig’s command had even finished, over a dozen shots rang out.

Sigfoss and his group of more than ten were cut down before they could react. The youngest—nephews, grandsons, and servants—who had been at the front, were riddled with three or four bullets each and died instantly. Sigfoss, his wife, children, and grandchildren—seven in total—were knocked to the ground, but only his wife and youngest son had been hit.

Haig watched coldly. Seeing that Sigfoss was still breathing, he let out a cold laugh. “Capture all of Sigfoss’s family! Kill anyone who resists! Plunder their wealth as you please!”

The men cheered at the order, and hundreds of soldiers swarmed into the courtyard of Sigfoss’s seven or eight longhouses. The cries of women and children, along with other chaotic noises, filled the air.

When the dust settled, Haig’s personal guards set fire to Sigfoss’s villa.

Watching the flames dance before him, Haig felt an overwhelming sense of satisfaction. He threw his head back and laughed, then turned to the dejected Sigfoss family, bound together. “Sigfoss! You dog!” he bellowed. “Look at your home! Look at your family! Look at what’s become of you! This is the end for a man who’s done nothing but evil! Hahaha!”

Sigfoss’s family hung their heads in despair. His wife and daughters trembled, his sons were pale, and his grandchildren had long since fainted from terror.

Sigfoss ran a hand through his hair. “You’ve won, Haig,” he said. “You’ve killed my son and destroyed my family. Years ago, when I drove Haldor away and seized your family’s fortune, I thought I had triumphed. But now, I see I’ve utterly failed.”

“Haig, I know my life is forfeit. But I beg you—spare my children and my wife. They are innocent in all this.”

Haig was well aware of the Icelandic tradition of vengeance not extending to family members, but he couldn’t make that decision alone. Moreover, he had no intention of sparing Sigfoss’s kin. He merely sneered, “So, you’ve finally learned to beg.”

Sigfoss was about to plead further when his wife suddenly rose, her hair disheveled, her eyes burning with fury. “Haig, you’ll burn in hell!” she shrieked. “You killed my son! You monster! My son-in-law, Kolsvin, is the cousin of King Christian IV of Denmark and the Governor of Iceland! You dare attack my home? Kolsvin will capture you and flay you alive!”

“Hahaha…”

Haig and his men burst into laughter, as if they had heard the funniest joke in the world.

“What are you laughing at? Shut up!” Sigfoss’s wife screamed, her terror mounting.

Tom, the red-haired Viking officer who had joined Haig, smirked. “Your beloved son-in-law, Kolsvin, has likely already been captured by Lord Haldor.”

“You lie! Ah!”

Sigfoss’s wife protested, but deep down, she believed it. Otherwise, why would Haig dare attack their home in broad daylight? Why hadn’t the governor’s guards come to their aid? It was entirely possible that Kolsvin was in trouble himself!

The thought that their only protector might be in peril sent Sigfoss’s wife into a faint.

Sigfoss trembled. Only now did he realize the immense power Haldor and Haig had amassed. Even if Denmark drove them out in the future, his family and Kolsvin’s lives would be in grave danger.

Though Sigfoss struggled to believe that the Haig brothers had built such a formidable army in just a few years, the evidence before him was undeniable. He had to find a way to save his family…

Glancing at his loved ones, Sigfoss’s eyes darkened with despair. If Kolsvin has been captured by Haldor, then nearly everyone in the Sigfoss family, except for Marcos, has been either captured or killed by the Haig brothers! he thought bitterly. God, why do You favor these murderers who killed my son?

…

On April 22, 1631, Haldor led a Viking expeditionary force of over four thousand men to Iceland.

The next day, Haldor, Haig, and their forces stormed Reykjavik, the capital of Iceland. Hudik commanded the armed merchant ships to blockade the harbor.

After crushing all resistance and seizing the governor’s mansion and Sigfoss’s home, Haldor quickly took control of the situation with his three military units and gradually secured Reykjavik.

On the morning of April 24, to calm the Icelanders who had been terrified by the army, gunfire, and corpses the day before, Haldor and Haig—who had spent a triumphant night in the governor’s mansion—convened with their officers. They then dispatched soldiers to summon the original governor’s officials, the leaders of Big Port, and the elders of the three churches to the governor’s mansion. There, they planned to declare the end of Danish rule in Iceland and the beginning of an independent era under Haldor’s leadership. They also intended to ask the three elders to use their religious influence to pacify the people of Big Port and for the leaders to pledge their loyalty.

Several hours passed, and as noon approached, under the enthusiastic guidance of Viking soldiers armed with firearms and long spears, over a dozen officials and seven or eight leaders nervously entered the governor’s mansion’s front hall. Under the direction of Valitu, Lunde, and Solrak, they cautiously took their seats.

A little while later, the three church elders arrived with the help of the guards.

The front hall of the governor’s mansion had always been the center of the Icelandic governor’s power. Each year, tax collection and information dissemination were conducted here, with all the island’s leaders gathered for the court assembly.

This time, however, the leaders and elders who entered the hall felt nothing like they had before. Anxiety and unease weighed heavily on their minds, making them wary of the Viking warriors inside and outside the hall, fearing they might turn violent at any moment.

Moments later, Hoskuld, Kadir, and Ulf entered the hall through a side door. Seeing that the three elders had arrived, they quickly approached.

“Elder Hongrode, Elder Amie!” Hoskuld and Kadir greeted the elders, making the sign of the cross.

Hoskuld turned to the unfamiliar face. “And you must be Elder Felibe,” he said. “I heard last night that Elder Orikel passed away two years ago. What a fine man—such a shame.”

Amie spoke solemnly. “Yes, Orikel has returned to the Lord’s embrace. But Hoskuld and Kadir, you both look as strong and healthy as ever. Truly, God’s blessing is upon you.”

A younger elder stood quietly beside them, saying nothing.

Two of the three elders were old acquaintances of Hoskuld, Kadir, and Haldor—Elder Hongrode, who had traded arms with Haldor, and Elder Amie, the mentor of Olaf, Tom, and Solrak.

Hoskuld had been familiar with the late Elder Orikel, but upon returning to Big Port the previous day, he had learned that Orikel had died two winters ago from severe asthma. Soon after, Norway had sent a new elder—Aylenria Felibe, the man standing before them.

After a brief exchange, Hoskuld turned to the younger Elder Aylenria. “You must be Elder Aylenria,” he said. “We have urgent matters to discuss. Please forgive any rudeness from my men.”

Aylenria had already spoken briefly with Hongrode and Amie upon arriving at the governor’s mansion. They had informed him that Haldor and Haig, during their exile, had thrived, assembling a formidable force with over thirty armed merchant ships. Now, they had returned for revenge.

Since neither Hongrode nor Amie bore any grudge against the Haldor family—and in fact, had varying degrees of connection to them—they both seemed at ease.

Reassured by the two elders, Aylenria relaxed and engaged in polite conversation with Hoskuld and the others, expressing his willingness to assist Haldor when needed.

The elders’ direct and amiable attitudes pleased Hoskuld. After introducing Ulf to them, he sent someone to fetch Haldor and the others.

Unbeknownst to Amie and Aylenria, Elder Hongrode was well aware that Haldor and Haig had made their fortune in Vinland, North America.

Hongrode’s family controlled the Danish East India Company’s business, and King Christian IV had once planned to follow in the footsteps of Holland, France, and Spain to colonize the West Indies. Though this plan had been abandoned after a military defeat, Hongrode’s family had kept a close eye on European trade, particularly in Amsterdam, and the changes in the East and West Indies.

To be precise, Hongrode and his backers had learned as early as the previous summer that Haldor and Haig had sold a vast amount of goods in Amsterdam, amassing a tremendous fortune.

Intrigued, Hongrode had intensified his efforts to gather intelligence. By the following autumn, he had a clearer picture of Haig’s commercial dealings in Europe, which only deepened his curiosity and admiration.

From the value of the goods alone, Hongrode deduced that Haig’s annual profits had already surpassed those of his own East India Company.

That spring, Hongrode learned of the colonial changes in North America the previous year. Ships returning from New England brought news of the latest developments in the Vinland Icelandic colony led by Haldor and his men.

It was safe to say that Hongrode was the most knowledgeable person in Europe regarding Haldor and his associates. However, due to Haldor and Olaf’s secrecy about Vinland, Hongrode only had fragmented information about the true state of affairs there.

But Hongrode knew that the wealth Haldor and Haig had accumulated from furs, honey, and other commodities was enormous—enough to build a powerful force.

Thus, when he learned the day before that Haldor had led an army to occupy Reykjavik and captured Governor Kolsvin and his enemy Sigfoss, Hongrode was initially shocked but quickly accepted the reality.

A merchant’s instinct for investment also kicked in. Hongrode sensed an opportunity—Iceland was about to change hands. He began contemplating how to maintain a friendly and harmonious relationship with Haldor, Iceland’s current and likely future ruler for some time to come.

Chapter 168: The Situation Stabilizes

In the reception hall of the Governor’s Mansion, Hoskuld, Kadir, Ulf, and the three invited elders, along with many leaders, engaged in lively conversation.

After a while, Haldor, Hudik, Haig, and others, dressed in traditional Icelandic attire, entered together.

Although Haldor had already become the de facto ruler of Big Port, he needed the cooperation of those present to stabilize the situation, so he remained very courteous.

After the three major figures of the Viking Raid warmly greeted the three elders and others, everyone took their seats and began to talk.

After some casual conversation, Haldor took Elder Amie’s hand and said, “I am very grateful to you, Elder Amie, for your guidance of Olaf. In a few days, I will have Olaf return to personally express his gratitude to you.”

Elder Amie was somewhat confused by Haldor’s thanks. He knew he had treated Olaf well, but Olaf’s intelligence and eagerness to learn also meant that he hadn’t imparted much knowledge to the boy. Nevertheless, he accepted Haldor’s gratitude and stated that Olaf was his most outstanding student.

Little did Elder Amie know that whenever Olaf introduced new technologies and cultures in Vinland, he would attribute them to the teachings of Elder Amie, claiming they were the latest knowledge from Rome. Thus, the deeply convinced Haldor expressed such gratitude to Elder Amie.

After chatting for a long time, the three elders realized that Haldor had called them there for a reason. As religious figures, they had no preference for whether Iceland was ruled by the Danes or self-governed by Icelanders. In fact, Elder Amie, being Icelandic, was inwardly pleased with the idea. Additionally, Haldor had subtly and overtly assured them that the interests of the three major churches would not be affected and that they would even receive special care. Thus, the three elders clearly expressed their support for Haldor.

As the situation gradually came under control, Haldor’s spirits rose. He looked at the people in the hall and solemnly said, “Comrades, ever since Naddodd discovered Iceland eight hundred years ago, our ancestors migrated to this glacier-covered island to pursue freedom, escaping the oppression of the church and the king. But five hundred years ago, Iceland became a territory of Norway. For centuries, we have been oppressed by governors sent by Norway and Denmark, who plundered the wealth our people had accumulated over the years, continuously exploiting the blood and sweat of the Icelandic people, and even disrespecting the laws established by our ancestors, trampling on the dignity of the Icelandic people. For many years, we have suffered greatly…”

Countless ancestors had wanted to break free from the oppression of the Danish-appointed governors, but the small and weak Iceland could not resist. Each governor sent by Denmark would arbitrarily humiliate, massacre Icelanders, and plunder their wealth. Were they willing to accept this? Were they willing for themselves and their descendants to be slaves of the Danes? He was not! So he rebelled! They needed to seek Iceland’s independence and self-governance…

Only Elder Amie among the three elders was Icelandic. As he listened to Haldor’s passionate and somewhat inflammatory speech, he couldn’t help but feel excited. The other two elders listened quietly but secretly admired Haldor’s eloquence.

However, the other leaders, officials, and high-ranking members of the Viking Raid in the reception hall were stirred by Haldor’s words. Almost everyone’s eyes widened, their breathing quickened as they watched Haldor’s impassioned speech, and at the most exciting moments, they even danced and cheered.

After speaking for a long time, Haldor inevitably felt a bit parched. At this moment, Gilson brought a cup of grape wine. Haldor took it and drank half, observing the crowd out of the corner of his eye as he drank. Seeing that everyone’s emotions had been guided by him, Haldor happily straightened his back again and spoke loudly.

“Everyone knows how Kolsvin and his lackey Sigfoss conspired to seize the wealth of the Icelandic people and harm their families. I, Haldor, was forced by Kolsvin and Sigfoss to ultimately choose to flee Iceland. But God blessed me! Under the guidance of my ancestors, I went to Vinland and established a huge estate, with a powerful army…”

Although his life was already extremely prosperous, far surpassing his days as a regional leader in Iceland, he still couldn’t sleep at night! Friends, thinking about our Icelandic compatriots still under the tyranny of the governor made him restless. Now that he had the ability to save the Icelandic people, he had to take on this responsibility!

He constantly thought of his suffering compatriots, his heart tormented, fearing that if he returned a day late, more Icelandic families would be destroyed. So… he led a large army back!

Comrades! He had already captured Kolsvin, the governor of Iceland sent by Denmark to oppress them, and Sigfoss, who conspired with Kolsvin. He believed that the time for Iceland and its people to break free from Danish rule had come. He wanted to lead everyone back to the good times of the free republic five hundred years ago. So he invited everyone here. He needed everyone’s support and help!

With that, Haldor warmly looked around and asked, “I wonder if you are willing to join the movement to establish the Icelandic Free Republic?”

Haldor’s words showed that his return to Iceland was not just for personal grudges but more to lead the Icelandic people to independence and self-governance. In recent years, due to Denmark’s military actions, the governor of Iceland had increased various taxes and war contributions, making almost all the leaders resentful. Haldor’s words moved them and gave them an opportunity, a chance to enter the center of Icelandic power. Previously, Iceland was led by governors sent by Denmark, and Icelanders could at most be officials, unable to become governor’s assistants. But now, with Icelanders managing themselves, showing loyalty to Haldor at this time might make themselves and their families more glorious and powerful in the future.

So after Haldor finished speaking, knowing that the general wanted them to express their stance, everyone became very active.

“Haldor, what do you want us to do! I, Mamik, will definitely obey!”

“That’s right! I am also willing to contribute to Iceland’s freedom!”

“Lord Haldor, you are truly a great man!”

The leaders and officials eagerly expressed their loyalty and support to Haldor, who had already taken control of Big Port. Then, the three elders also spoke in praise of Haldor leading the Icelandic people to break free from Danish exploitation.

Seeing that everyone was so cooperative, Haldor felt a great relief and laughed heartily, saying, “I plan to temporarily sign a proclamation as the acting Viking General of Iceland, announcing to everyone in the 28 districts of Iceland and the three districts of Big Port that Iceland is no longer a colony under the Danish-Norwegian Union but a free republic led by me, Viking General Haldor. Then, I will convene a meeting with the leaders of the 28 districts, including the village heads and tax officials, to meet with the leaders from various regions. I plan to maintain the current situation temporarily and also exempt this year’s agricultural tax to stabilize the people’s hearts and reduce the pressure on the Icelandic people. What do you think?”

After Haldor finished speaking, he looked around, and his “I have finished speaking, who agrees? Who disagrees?” attitude made everyone’s expressions change, and they hurriedly stood up to agree.

“Lord Haldor is truly a hero! This order represents your determination! I am willing to support you!”

“Yes! I have long known that Lord Haldor is a natural leader! Exempting the agricultural tax is truly a kind act! The Icelandic people will love you forever!”

“I will go back immediately to help you with the propaganda. I think when the people in various districts of Iceland know that you have returned to lead the Icelandic people to have the rights of a free republic, they will all support you as the leader!”

…

All the leaders were eagerly expressing their respect and support for Lord Haldor. Although they were straightforward Icelanders, they did not dare to have any disobedience or disrespect for the powerful Haldor. After all, he was a ruthless man, and Lord Haldor’s order to exempt taxes was indeed a great benefit for everyone, so more than half of their words were genuinely heartfelt.

Regardless of whether the participants had other thoughts in their minds, from their performance, they were all flawlessly cooperative. Everyone expressed their support for Haldor and showed the minimum attitude.

After the meeting, Haldor happily summoned the scribes of the Governor’s Mansion to write various documents and announcements. Essentially, they declared the fact that Iceland had become independent and stated that it was under the leadership of Viking General Haldor. There was also an order to exempt this year’s agricultural tax and to let the people live in peace.

After Haldor personally checked and confirmed there were no mistakes, the officials and Viking soldiers handed the documents to the leaders of each district, while the announcements were kept by the Viking officers.

Haldor planned to have the Viking army as the main force to propagate throughout the 28 districts of Iceland and the three districts of Big Port, and to summon the leaders of each district of Iceland to the Governor’s Mansion in Big Port. These local leaders were deeply rooted, with large families and resources, and were the foundation of the previous governor’s rule. Moreover, the churches in each region were generally managed by the relatives of the local leaders serving as deacons and pastors. Haldor wanted to quickly take over the governor’s legacy, stabilize the situation, and rule Iceland. He needed all the regional leaders to swear allegiance to him. This idea was not only Haldor’s but also the unanimous opinion of the Viking Raid leadership. To quickly inherit the governor’s power and rule Iceland, Hudik and others had already decided to use the army to eliminate a few unruly troublemakers if necessary.

At noon that day, Viking officers carrying the announcements rode away from Big Port on fine horses. They took soldiers armed with firearms and the announcement documents to various parts of Iceland for propaganda and invited the local leaders to come and pay their respects to Lord Haldor.

In the afternoon, the highly cooperative officials of the Governor’s Mansion, the church personnel of the three districts, and the leaders had stabilized the tens of thousands of people in Big Port through their active work. It could be said that many citizens of Big Port had already started to go out, and even the shops on various streets had resumed about sixty percent of their commercial activities.

With the end of the war and Big Port’s pledge of allegiance to Haldor, the tense atmosphere that had persisted in Reykjavik for several days finally began to ease.

However, just as Haldor was about to have some afternoon tea and take a nap, an official from the Governor’s Mansion and two Viking officers quickly entered Haldor’s office, hurriedly reporting another piece of news: Sigfoss’s nephew, Marcos, a former official of the Governor’s Mansion, had suddenly disappeared at noon. It was said that he had escaped during lunch. Because Marcos had been behaving normally these past two days, he had deceived everyone and had not attracted any attention.

Waving his hand to dismiss the few people, Haldor coldly snorted, thinking of the Sigfoss family, one of the top families in Iceland, with extensive connections and hundreds or even thousands of relatives. Now, almost all direct relatives had been captured, but there were still people like Marcos and others who had escaped and might cause trouble.

After thinking for a moment, Haldor wanted to clearly understand the Sigfoss family’s network of relationships, so he ordered someone to retrieve the genealogical records of the regional leaders that had been stored in the Governor’s Mansion library for many years. He planned to understand the situation and then send more people to suppress and guard the areas closest to the Sigfoss family to prevent them from raising an army and causing trouble.

Because of Iceland’s small population, its cultural system had basically maintained its primitive state from hundreds of years ago. Thus, the governor only relied on Danish law, Icelandic law, and biblical teachings to manage the Icelandic people, while the management of each region was entrusted to powerful families passed down through generations.

Reykjavik’s management and understanding of the local leaders relied on the genealogical copies submitted by the local leaders. The main content of these genealogies was the inheritance and lineage of the leader’s family, as well as the family’s land, property, personnel work, and marriages with other families.

It could be said that mastering the genealogies of the regional leaders’ families would give one a deep understanding of the entire Iceland.

The close relatives of the Sigfoss family had been captured by Haig, and they were currently imprisoned in the dungeons of the Governor’s Mansion. However, there were still some distant relatives of their family, with about twenty people in Reykjavik alone.

Now that Sigfoss’s nephew Marcos had escaped, Haldor felt somewhat alarmed. Although the boy might have run away out of fear, it was not impossible for him to join forces with the Sigfoss family’s power distributed in other regions to resist him. Therefore, he must quickly understand the scope of the Sigfoss family’s power and then specifically dismantle and control it.

While Haldor was buried in the genealogical records of the Sigfoss family, Hudik, Kadir, Hoskuld, and Ulf entered the Governor’s Mansion conference hall together. They walked lightly through the corridor and then into Haldor’s office. It was only when they sat at one corner of the long table in front of Haldor that he noticed them. Clearly, the four of them had come together for something relatively important.

“Haldor! My general, the Danish sea merchants and the servants of Elder Hongrode have come together to invite you to a banquet. This is already the third invitation in two days!”

After greeting Haldor, Hudik frowned and said in a deep voice.

Haldor looked up and asked, “You can go in my place. Oh, right, what is their purpose? Do they want to leave Iceland?”

“I have already gone twice. You guessed right; it’s because our fleet has blocked the harbor, and their merchant ships want to leave but can’t, so they have to come to us.”

Haldor asked doubtfully, “Why are they in such a hurry? Have you checked their identities? Are they all legitimate merchants? Tell Hongrode to please reassure the Danish sea merchants. I can make a promise that we will protect the property and personal safety of the Danes. I will not restrict the freedom of the Danes, but the premise is to stabilize the situation in Iceland! Once I stabilize the situation in Iceland, I will naturally open the harbor and let them come and go freely. Now they are in such a hurry to leave. What does that mean? Could it be that they want to report to the Danish navy?!” With that, Haldor coldly snorted.

Chapter 169: The Campaign Against the Traitor Haldor

In the northeastern region of Iceland, there was a large city deep in the interior called Grímstunga. Though it was called a city, it was really just a large village.

In the 17th century, apart from national capitals, most cities were underdeveloped, and Iceland’s situation was even worse.

To put it bluntly, apart from Reykjavik, which had the appearance of a city, all other regions in Iceland were essentially villages, differing only in size.

This city was adjacent to Comb Valley and was originally a settlement for serfs in the valley. Over time, it had quietly grown into a city and was one of the more populous central regions in the northeast.

Iceland’s terrain and geography meant that the interior of the island was covered in glaciers and volcanoes, with high elevations, making it difficult to find suitable places for human habitation. Thus, despite Iceland’s large size, people lived in clusters around the island, with over ninety percent of the thirty-plus regions established along the eastern, western, southern, and northern coasts, primarily as port cities.

Grímstunga was one of the few large regions deep in the interior. It had always been known for its lush grasslands and a small amount of arable land.

Originally, the Herman family and the Weis family had occupied the entire Grímstunga and Comb Valley regions. Later, the heir of the Herman family fell ill and died. The Weis family, relying on their in-laws in Big Port, Sigfoss, bribed Governor Kolsvin and annexed the two regions six years ago, taking control of the entire area. Weis thus became the most prestigious and wealthy man in the northeast.

Over the past few years, backed by his in-laws Sigfoss and Governor Kolsvin, Weis had grown arrogant and domineering in the northeast, effectively becoming a second governor.

But one evening, Sigfoss’s nephew, Marcos, suddenly knocked on Weis’s door and informed him in secret that Haldor, the former leader of White Hazel Forest Hrut Village, the exiled criminal who had killed guards and escaped Iceland several years ago, had suddenly returned with a large band of pirates. They had attacked Big Port, captured Governor Kolsvin and Sigfoss, and with three to four hundred pirates, defeated the governor’s guards, now rampaging through Big Port.

Marcos told Weis that the governor had asked him to organize a militia for rescue. If they waited a few days for the Danish suppression forces to arrive, Weis would be the greatest hero, and titles and lands would be within his grasp.

Convinced by Marcos’s words, Weis was delighted at the prospect of becoming a noble. He sent his family’s young men to gather males to form a militia and brought out seven or eight firelock muskets, two sets of iron armor, over a dozen sets of leather armor, and various knives, axes, bows, and arrows from the storeroom as military supplies.

Marcos, to persuade Weis to form a militia against Haldor, did not truthfully inform him that Haldor had over four thousand troops, half of whom were musketeers. Otherwise, Weis would never dare to openly resist.

Moreover, both Weis and Marcos were now convinced that Denmark, upon learning of the Icelandic rebellion, would surely send troops to suppress it. Then, Haldor would meet a tragic end, which was why Marcos and Weis were forming a militia to resist Haldor.

By the end of April, Grímstunga had assembled a militia of over two hundred men, which was still expanding. Weis and Marcos drilled the militia daily, feasted with them, and coordinated with other leaders in the northeast, hoping to combine their forces.

One morning, seven or eight knights wearing half plate armor rode through Comb Valley and entered Grímstunga’s square, where they found over fifty young militiamen practicing javelin throwing.

“Who are you?!” The militia was managed by Weis’s eldest son, Kamhes. He narrowed his eyes, stepped forward, and shouted loudly.

“Messengers of General Haldor of the Viking Raid in Big Port, sent to deliver official documents and proclamations to Leader Weis of Grímstunga. Is Mr. Weis at home?”

The leader of the knights, a middle-aged man with curly hair, took out a document from his waist and replied. The soldiers behind him were yellow-skinned men with flat features.

Kamhes’s expression changed, and he shouted, throwing a short spear.

“Dogs of the traitor Haldor from Big Port?! Men, attack and kill them!”

Kamhes’s javelin was dodged by several knights bending and sidestepping, but they were in Grímstunga’s square. Before they could turn their horses to leave, they were surrounded by dozens of militiamen. Then, over a hundred more men emerged from the surrounding houses and alleys, each armed and excitedly looking at the knights like hunters who had found their prey.

“Grímstunga has openly rebelled! Everyone, retreat quickly!” The leading knight drew his long sword and shouted.

The eight knights, trapped in the crowd, could not charge and could only swing their weapons to fend off the surrounding militiamen. But soon, two knights were struck by javelins and fell from their horses, killed by the militiamen.

The knight leader knew they could not resist and took a deep breath, saying, “The northern resistance is weakest now. Let’s concentrate and charge north. If even one or two of us can escape, we can inform General Haldor of Grímstunga’s situation! The general will avenge us!”

“Men, charge!”

Six knights broke free from the surrounding militiamen and finally formed a stream, charging in one direction. The militiamen along the way began to scatter slowly, as not everyone could stand their ground against six charging horses.

Seeing the six knights about to break free, Weis and Kamhes, standing outside the crowd, remained calm. Father and son, along with several militiamen skilled in archery, were drawing their bows. Several bowstrings trembled, and seven or eight arrows whistled through the air, instantly striking down three knights.

Cavalry trapped in a crowd and unable to maneuver were the best targets. The remaining three knights knew they would likely not escape and decided to act. One knight threw his long spear, striking the hindquarters of the horse in front, the sharp spearhead tearing through the horse’s skin. The horse, feeling the pain, suddenly accelerated and broke through the encirclement. The remaining two knights resolutely turned their horses and charged towards Weis and the others, who were drawing their bows to block them.

The two knights gripped their long spears tightly, their eyes firmly fixed on the archers ahead. They seemed to hear the sound of the bowstrings tightening. Both had made peace with the possibility of death and, squeezing their horses’ flanks, shouted, “Long live the Viking Raid! Charge! Charge! Charge!”

…

Reykjavik

Regarding whether Danish sea merchants could leave the port and when, Haldor’s stance was firm: they were not allowed to leave for the time being, at least not until the Icelandic regime under his leadership stabilized. After all, if they left, Denmark would learn of the sudden changes in Iceland, and the next step would be a Danish blockade or even military intervention. Currently, Haldor could only try to stabilize his position and maintain control over Iceland.

As Hudik and others finished their conversation in Haldor’s office, Haldor’s stance was quickly conveyed to Hongrode and several Danish sea merchants visiting Hongrode’s home.

A group of people sat together in Hongrode’s home, anxiously waiting. Soon, Hongrode, who had just seen off the visiting Hudik, pushed open the door and entered.

“How did it go? What did Haldor say?”

Hongrode shook his head and said, “He said not to be anxious, that once he stabilizes Iceland, he will let everyone come and go freely. He also said that anyone eager to leave now is trying to inform Denmark. If anyone insists on leaving, the one currently in charge of the governor’s mansion might resort to violence! So I say, all of you should behave.”

“Ah!”

“This delay of a month or two will ruin our entire year’s work, and we won’t be able to account for it when we return to Denmark!”

“Elder Hongrode, please speak to him again!”

Hongrode shook his head again and said, “You all know that Haldor has captured Kolsvin and Sigfoss. He has also sent many people to various regions to declare sovereignty. You should all be clear about his methods. He has the ability to kill freely in Iceland. Even if Denmark might return in the future, Haldor’s army can eliminate all opponents and anyone who displeases him. So we should all obey!”

“You can’t only think about your gains and losses. Think about what’s more important, money or life! Have you all forgotten the two ships at the port that were destroyed for trying to leave? The shipowner Anderson was a friend of ours. Wasn’t he beheaded by Hudik for resisting Haldor?”

Hongrode mentioned the violent incident a few days ago when Hudik blocked the port, and everyone fell silent.

After a long while, the most respected merchant among them, Vilson, looked solemnly at Hongrode and said, “We are all Danes or Norwegians. It seems Haldor might be hostile towards us. So we can only ask you, Elder, to help us leave. If you can help us, when we return to Denmark, we won’t mistreat you and are willing to give enough benefits to Haldor or Hudik and others. What do you think…”

Hongrode smiled and said, “Willing to spend money, many things are still possible, but not in the next two days. Next week, perhaps next week will be a turning point!”

Under Hongrode’s persuasion, the Danish sea merchants left his home dejectedly and went to Vilson’s residence to drink.

After drinking too much, Vilson felt depressed and thought of his father, the steward of the Ulf family, who had always been respected in various places in Denmark. He never expected to be restricted in Iceland. In his anger, he cursed, “When I return to Copenhagen, I will tell Lord Fitz about Haldor’s rebellious acts in Iceland and make sure the Danish king sends a large army to exterminate him, or I will be too frustrated!”

“Brother, keep your voice down!”

Several Danish sea merchants quickly pulled the shouting Vilson and advised him to be low-key.

But the already drunk Vilson became more excited, his voice growing louder. Soon, the door was kicked open by patrolling Viking soldiers, and the questioning soldiers arrested Vilson and his companions, sending them to prison.

As news of General Haldor’s notification spread through Big Port and neighboring areas, Iceland, which had been quiet for hundreds of years, slowly began to boil.

The chaotic situation quickly turned calm under the suppression and deterrence of military horses and firearms.

Haldor and several leaders were instructing the officials in the governor’s mansion to conduct a census of the people in Big Port and dispatch several dozen Viking soldiers to the three districts to serve as regional police to maintain order.

After all matters were handled, Haig and Hoskuld reported to Haldor on the confiscation and investigation of assets belonging to Kolsvin and related individuals.

Haldor listened with a mix of shock and anger, coldly laughing, “Has Kolsvin been the Governor of Iceland for five years? At most, five years! How did he amass nearly one hundred thousand marks in gold and silver? Sigfoss, his accomplice, must have also benefited greatly.”

Hoskuld took out two more sheets of paper and handed them over, saying, “Kolsvin originally had some family assets, but since he was to be transferred to Norway this year, he sold off his assets and land, making his wealth easy to investigate. The four large barrels of gold and silver found in the governor’s mansion’s backyard and his mistress’s house on Warren Street in the East District are all his assets. The rest are furs, porcelain, self-striking clocks, clothes, etc., worth several thousand to ten thousand marks.

Then there’s Sigfoss’s assets. Hehe, his family has been operating for hundreds of years, and with his recent association with Kolsvin, he has made a lot of money buying land. His liquid assets amount to over twenty thousand marks in gold and silver, not to mention the porcelain, furs, etc. But the most valuable are the over one thousand virgates of land under his name, of which only three hundred virgates are arable, including the land in the white birch forest. The rest are grasslands, currently holding over ten thousand sheep and three hundred cattle and horses, which are extremely valuable!”

“Very well. Sigfoss and Kolsvin’s assets must be accounted for properly. The liquid assets should be temporarily stored in the governor’s mansion. Once the situation stabilizes, I will set aside a portion to reward everyone. The land, houses, livestock, etc., should be maintained as they are for now, but after some time, a portion will also be rewarded to everyone. By the way, the Sigfoss family is said to be the wealthiest in Iceland, so it’s impossible that this is all their wealth. Since Sigfoss is going to die anyway, Haig, you tell him that if he hands over all his hidden wealth, his family’s lives will be spared! If he doesn’t, then let his entire family go find Satan!”

Haig nodded excitedly and was about to leave, rubbing his hands together.

Suddenly, Hudik entered with several panting Viking soldiers, shouting as he walked, “Haldor! Sigfoss’s in-law, Weis, along with Marcos, who escaped a few days ago, has declared in Grímstunga that they will campaign against the traitor Haldor! They have already united with three or four leaders in the northeast. Our soldiers were attacked by them, with over a dozen killed, and the rest escaped to report to me!”

Haldor and the others hurriedly stood up and looked at the three soldiers Hudik had brought in.

“General! We have disgraced the Viking Raid!”

Haldor could not have imagined that, facing an army of four thousand five hundred men, there would still be people in Iceland daring to oppose him. But looking at the disheveled soldiers sent to the northeast to deliver the message, it seemed the situation had already occurred.

Haig impatiently asked for details, and the three soldiers, one by one, explained the situation of recruiting a militia in the northeast centered around Grímstunga to resist.

Sigfoss had two in-laws in Iceland. One had died of illness a few years ago, and his assets were taken over by Sigfoss. The other was Weis, the leader of the northern Comb Valley region in the large Grímstunga district in the northeast. All the fertile land in the valley and the forests and grasslands around the Dettifoss waterfall were private property of the Weis family. He governed four villages with over a hundred people, and his family was prosperous, making it the strongest force in the northeast of Iceland. In recent years, due to his relationship with Sigfoss, he had become increasingly arrogant.

A few years ago, when Haldor attended the court assembly, Weis had acted as Sigfoss’s frontman against him. According to Haldor’s plan, Weis was also on the list to be dealt with.

Sigfoss’s relatives were spread throughout Iceland, but the closest and most powerful among them was Weis from the Grímstunga district in the northeast of Iceland.

Marcos had surprised Haldor and the others by fleeing and joining Weis. The two had the audacity to resist Haldor, which infuriated Haldor and his men.

Chapter 170: Dealing with the Rebellion

Weis and Marcos, despite knowing that Haldor had over four thousand elite soldiers and dozens of warships, displayed extraordinary courage. Not only did they join forces with other leaders from the northeast to kill the Viking soldiers Haldor had sent to assert his authority, but they also openly raised the banner of “campaigning against the traitorous villain Haldor and rescuing Governor Kolsvin and Mr. Sigfoss.”

This was a blatant provocation, trampling on Haldor’s dignity and status as a Viking general and the current occupier and ruler of Iceland. Those in the governor’s residence who heard the news were furious, cursing and mocking Weis and Marcos for their audacity.

“If Weis and Marcos lead the resistance against us, and we don’t quickly capture them, other regional leaders will follow their example and lose their fear of us!”

After a few cold laughs in the room, Haldor turned to his most capable subordinates and brothers, asking, “Hudik, Haig, Hoskuld, who among you will go and capture Weis?”

Haig stepped forward first, declaring loudly, “I will go! With a cavalry unit and five hundred musketeers, I can sweep through the northeast. Brother, I will personally go, wipe out Sigfoss’s faction, and deal with anyone who defies us. Then Iceland will truly be yours, Haldor, where your word is law!”

Haldor was about to agree but changed his mind at the last moment, deciding to send Haig and Ulf together. He then instructed Hudik to prepare three ships to take a faster sea and land route to the northeast.

As Haig and Ulf left to gather their forces and board the ships, Hoskuld asked Haldor, “Brother-in-law! Although we have a large army in Big Port, how can four thousand men manage the vast expanse of Iceland? Iceland has a population of over fifty thousand, and the local leader families are deeply rooted and not easily subdued. Today, Weis claims to rescue Kolsvin and oppose us; tomorrow, another regional leader might rebel!”

“What do you suggest?” Haldor rubbed his temples, saying, “There’s been too much happening these past few days; my head is spinning. I never thought managing Iceland would be dozens of times harder than Vinland. Compared to the Indian natives, this is much more difficult!”

“Using the same methods we used in Vinland won’t work here. Now that we’ve occupied Iceland, we need to figure out how to govern it and gain the support of the Icelandic people. It will take time to study this.”

Hoskuld narrowed his eyes and said, “I think to prevent other Icelandic leaders from using the governor’s name to rebel, we should quickly execute Kolsvin and Sigfoss! This will show our determination and resolve, removing any excuse for rebellion. More importantly, it will intimidate those who are wavering, making them realize that if even the governor and Sigfoss can be killed at will, they won’t dare to oppose us!”

Haldor thought for a moment, then looked at the others. Seeing that Nilahu, Solrak, and the newly arrived Kadir all agreed, he said, “Alright! When we decided to lead Iceland in breaking away from Denmark, we prepared for a possible war with Denmark. Since we’ve already offended Denmark, we might as well go further!”

“Killing Kolsvin and Sigfoss won’t necessarily offend Denmark more than we already have by leading Iceland to break away from Denmark! By dealing with Kolsvin, we show Denmark our resolve! Let King Christian IV know that we will not compromise!”

Kadir chuckled.

Hoskuld snapped his fingers and said, “Exactly! We can’t just quietly kill Kolsvin and Sigfoss. We need to make sure everyone supports us in killing them, or at least doesn’t sympathize with them! This way, Haldor killing Kolsvin will make him a hero in Iceland! It will boost the cohesion of the Icelandic people!”

No one could think of a better idea than Hoskuld’s proposal. After a while, Haldor sighed and said, “It’s a shame Heiner and Olaf aren’t here; they would definitely have ideas!”

The atmosphere in the living room froze for a moment. A small-framed Indian officer behind Kadir stepped forward, first bowing respectfully, then straightening up and saying, “I have a method to offer to the Heavenly God.”

Haldor and the others turned to look, seeing that the speaker was Olos, the former city priest of Great Waterfall City, who had become a Viking and officer, always showing himself to be honest and loyal, gradually becoming a platoon leader and sergeant.

Because Olos managed the Beothuk-born Viking soldiers very effectively, he had also won Kadir’s favor and was brought to the governor’s residence.

Olos’s words reminded Haldor of this young man. He waved his hand and said, “Speak. What is your method? If it’s useful, I’ll reward you with fifty marks of gold!”

“Thank you, Heavenly God General!” Olos respectfully thanked him and said, “I’ve heard that the Icelandic people’s old laws liked to have the leaders of each district discuss the crimes of the accused at public trials before punishing them. The Beothuk people also had a tradition of collective punishment by tribal members…

So I think, since the Governor of Iceland, Kolsvin, and Sigfoss already have other enemies or oppressed commoners, if we find these poor people and hold a public trial to convict Kolsvin and Sigfoss of heinous crimes, then, respected Heavenly God, your order to kill them will be the most sacred and noble correct action. It will also bring you great prestige. Most Icelandic people, upon learning of the public trial, will understand your greatness and correctness, so supporting your leadership will be the only correct choice!”

Olos’s words caused Haldor, Kadir, and the others to think deeply. As Olos waited anxiously, Haldor burst into laughter and said, “Get up. Later, Kadir, take him to get fifty marks of gold as a reward! Olos, you are very clever. I think we can do as Olos suggests.”

Kadir and the others also agreed with Olos’s opinion. After discussing and refining the details, Haldor entrusted Hoskuld and Olos with the task of organizing the public trial to convict and execute Kolsvin and Sigfoss.

A few days later, the residents of Reykjavik and the surrounding villagers knew that Haldor was going to hold a public trial to punish Kolsvin and Sigfoss. Meanwhile, Hoskuld had found more than a dozen Icelandic people who had been oppressed by the two and had undergone special training in speech and accusation to make their statements at the trial emotional and resonant.

During these days, Elder Hongrode also visited Haldor twice. On the second visit, he presented a self-striking clock inscribed with gold and silver threads and twelve colored gemstones.

This self-striking clock was a luxury item custom-made in Marseille by the Danish sea merchant Vilson for his master, Fitz Ulf. Originally, it was meant to be a birthday gift from Master Ulf to King Christian IV of Denmark. However, now that they were stranded in Iceland and had missed the date to return to Denmark, they couldn’t make it back to Copenhagen before King Christian IV’s birthday, so the gift had lost its greatest value.

To leave Iceland as soon as possible and return to Denmark, then ask his master and the Danish king to send a large army to rescue Iceland from the villain Haldor’s hands, Vilson had already decided to take the initiative to report the news and secretly decided to give this self-striking clock, originally intended for the Danish king, to Haldor through Elder Hongrode’s hands, aiming to make Haldor show mercy and allow them to leave early.

Of course, Hongrode wasn’t helping for free. His exact words were: “There aren’t many people who can speak to Haldor. To persuade Haldor, it would damage my reputation and relationships. Without ten or twenty thousand, I wouldn’t be willing to go…”

To achieve his goal, Vilson also had other Danish sea merchants contribute over seven thousand pounds of silver to give to Hongrode, so Hongrode truly pondered his words and went to visit Haldor.

To achieve his goal, Hongrode’s first visit was just to chat idly with Haldor and express the innocence of the Danish sea merchants and their willingness to accept the fact that Iceland had changed hands.

By the second visit, after presenting the expensive and luxurious gift, Haldor’s attitude had changed somewhat. He then smiled and said, “After the public trial, I plan to lift the port blockade. Please tell the sea merchants this news. I believe the captains who want to trade and make money will welcome an open Iceland!”

“That’s natural.” Hongrode nodded happily and said, “I think perhaps my family’s ships would also be willing to engage in trade with the Icelandic people under the leadership of General Haldor. Only friends can provide help and protection to merchant ships in the stormy seas. We all want to be friends with you!”

Haldor understood Hongrode’s goodwill and warmly said, “We have cooperated pleasantly before. In my view, we became close friends years ago when you sold me firearms! Elder Hongrode, I look forward to close cooperation between Iceland under my leadership and your family!”

“Thank you for your trust!” Hongrode nodded and said, “I believe we will have more cooperation in the future!”

“That’s natural!”

In their friendly conversation, everything was resolved smoothly.

…

Haig and Ulf quickly led the cavalry and musketeers by ship to the northeast of Iceland to suppress the rebellious forces of Weis and Marcos.

Haldor and Hongrode also reached a consensus, agreeing that as long as Hongrode and the others supported the trial of Kolsvin and Sigfoss, after the public trial, the Danes could leave Iceland.

After two days, Hoskuld and Olos had brought back to Big Port more than twenty Icelandic people who had been oppressed by Kolsvin and Sigfoss, as well as many who had been punished by Kolsvin for crimes.

These people were managed by Olos, who taught them every day how to reveal Kolsvin’s ugly face and the nature of Sigfoss’s lackeys, with mature speeches gradually being memorized by the people.

After Hoskuld reported the situation to Haldor, Haldor felt the time was ripe and personally ordered that on the morning of May 1st, a public trial of Kolsvin and Sigfoss be held in the West Square outside the governor’s residence.

At that time, leaders from all over Iceland who were not openly opposed to him would come to Big Port. Judging the two in front of everyone would be a good show of killing the chicken to scare the monkeys, absolutely establishing Haldor’s ruling position.

Things developed exactly as Haldor and Hoskuld had predicted.

In the last week of April, Reykjavik gradually welcomed more than twenty leaders. The first ten or so to arrive were leaders and clan elders who had some relationship or even good relations with the Haldor family.

After warmly receiving the leaders, Haldor entered a busy period of work. Big Port had just experienced a turmoil, and the compensation for the dead and injured, the dealing with various assets, would take a month to complete.

While Haldor was busy, Haig and Ulf had arrived at Fontur Point in the northeast of Iceland and docked at Solsport, the only place in the northeast suitable for large ships to dock.

According to Icelandic legends, the northeast, southeast, southwest, and northwest of the island each had a guardian spirit protecting them. Due to the characteristics of the terrain, they were the Red-Tongued Golden-Clawed Eagle, the Black Bull, the White-Clad Old Man, and the Red-Tongued Golden-Clawed Dragon. Fontur Point, where Haig and Ulf arrived, was the tongue of the northeastern guardian dragon, and the nearby Vatnajökull Glacier to the south was the White-Clad Old Man.

Due to Iceland’s unique geographical location and environment, most of the population lived in the west, with the eastern population concentrated on the east coast and the northeast, and very few in the southeast.

The northeast region had lost control due to the rebellion of Weis and Marcos, which also made the eastern region unstable. Even the leader of Solsport, Ona, was in a wait-and-see attitude. After receiving the summons from Haldor’s soldiers, he only sent one of his village heads to attend the meeting in Big Port.

When Haig led the large army to gather at the dock, the obese Ona finally arrived, looking surprised as he walked forward with his family members holding knives and axes behind him.

“Are you officers from Big Port?”

“Who are you? I am General Haldor’s brother, Haig, and this is General Haldor’s eldest son, Ulf. Because Weis and Marcos are causing trouble, we have been specially ordered to come and suppress the rebellion!”

Upon learning Haig’s identity, Ona waddled forward with his big belly and stretched out his large hand, saying, “I am the leader of the Solstice region, Ona. Welcome, General Haig and Young Master Ulf!”

After shaking hands with Haig, Ona frowned and asked, “The messengers sent by General Haldor to invite the local leaders to Big Port should have arrived, right? Why are you still in Solstice? Are you going to join Weis?”

After Haig spoke, Ulf and the surrounding soldiers all stared at Ona menacingly.

Ona’s forehead sweated, and he quickly bowed and said, “General Haig misunderstood! I… I was ill a few days ago and couldn’t go in person, so I already sent someone to apologize to General Haldor for my absence.”

“I don’t see you looking sick with your rosy complexion!” Ulf sneered and asked, “Are you better now?”

Ona quickly nodded and said, “Just recovered! Just recovered!”

Ulf coldly smiled and said, “Then why haven’t you gone to Reykjavik yet? We came to suppress the rebellion not only to deal with the rebellious Weis but also to inspect the entire northeast and eastern regions. Anyone who doesn’t support General Haldor will be arrested and taken to Big Port for disposal!”

Hearing Ulf’s threat, Ona glanced at the hundreds of soldiers holding firearms and the dozens of fierce cavalry behind Haig and Ulf. He didn’t dare to argue and quickly said, “I will go this afternoon! I will act immediately!”

Haig and Ulf were finally satisfied and nodded, then asked Ona about the situation of Weis’s rebel army.

Chapter 171: Uprooting the Nest

Weis had spent several days assembling a force of several hundred men, becoming the dominant leader in the northeastern region. Though other leaders harbored reservations, none dared openly defy him. Two regional leaders had even switched sides, bringing their followers to join the militia in Grímstunga.

Ona, the leader of the Sólst region, had always been a shrewd merchant. Initially, he had tried to remain neutral, waiting to see how events unfolded. But after witnessing Haig’s formidable fleet, artillery, five hundred musketeers, and fifty cavalry, he realized Weis’s forces were no match for Haig. Thus, when Haig questioned him, Ona cooperated fully, revealing everything he knew about Weis’s rebellion.

Weis had initially been a lone rebel in his region, but his persuasive rhetoric had won over several northeastern leaders, who now supported his military actions.

Recent reports from Marcos, along with the appearance of Haldor’s soldiers, had confirmed the mutiny in Big Port—Haldor had rebelled and imprisoned Governor Kolsvin.

Marcos and Weis had been spreading the word that Denmark, upon learning of Haldor’s rebellion, would send a massive force to crush it. They claimed that Haldor and his followers would face brutal execution at the hands of King Christian IV.

Denmark had ruled Iceland for centuries, ruthlessly suppressing several uprisings—such as the religious conversion movement, where a bishop was executed and dozens of devout followers were arrested.

Though many Icelanders feared and resented Danish rule, they believed Denmark’s army could easily crush Haldor. The northeastern people had never witnessed Haldor’s ironclad army, the might of four thousand five hundred soldiers, or the devastating volley fire of hundreds of musketeers. They had no idea how terrifying the Viking Raid truly was.

Thus, Weis had rallied many northeastern leaders under the banner of Denmark, whether openly or secretly.

After hearing Ona’s report, Haig realized that the entire northeastern population had been deceived by Weis and Marcos.

Marcos had told them that Haldor only had a few hundred pirate allies and had seized control of Big Port through a surprise attack. If the eastern leaders united, they could assemble a force of over a thousand men, defeat Haldor, march into Reykjavik, rescue Governor Kolsvin and South Harbor leader Sigfoss, and earn the favor of King Christian IV—perhaps even titles and rewards.

But when Ona saw Haig and Ulf’s army, he knew they had been lied to. Haig and Ulf laughed and told him that Big Port still had four thousand troops—a force capable of crushing any resistance.

Ona condemned Weis and Marcos, then sent over twenty young men from his family and fifty men from his region to guide Haig’s army toward Grímstunga in the southwest. Ona himself took some gifts and set sail for Reykjavik as quickly as possible.

…

Under the guidance of Ona’s militia, Haig and Ulf’s army followed the Sander River through the snowy hills of northeastern Iceland, finding the shortest path through Comb Valley. They moved swiftly, reaching Grímstunga.

On the morning of April 28, Haig and Ulf ordered a thirty-minute rest before the valley. After a quick meal, Ulf and two cavalry scouts rode ahead to survey the situation.

It was around 9 a.m., and mist lingered in Comb Valley. Beyond the valley lay Grímstunga, Weis’s stronghold. Ulf observed about a hundred houses behind a fence, with many wagons and people chopping wood and drawing water. Dozens of men practiced with bows and throwing axes in the open space.

“Fifty… seventy-two… eighty-three!”

Ulf counted roughly eighty people in the village. Recalling Ona’s report that Weis had united three villages with nearly four hundred men—over two hundred of them fighters—he nodded. “That’s about right. Weis’s men are all here. We can wipe them out completely!”

Ulf turned his horse and returned to Haig, reporting his findings. He couldn’t help but mock, “Weis and Marcos aren’t fighters. They’re fools—they didn’t even post guards at Comb Valley. Uncle, by the time they realize we’re here, it’ll be too late!”

Haig chuckled. “None of them have ever fought a real battle. How could they guess we’d come so fast? The Icelanders may be descendants of Viking raiders, but centuries under Danish rule have dulled their spirit. Their blood runs cold compared to their ancestors. Let’s show them what happens to those who dare resist—let their blood reignite the fire in Iceland’s veins!”

He raised his voice. “Forward! We’ll flatten Grímstunga and crush every traitor who dares defy us!”

Ulf, his heart pounding, raised his arm and shouted, “Flatten Grímstunga!”

The men behind them roared in unison, the valley echoing like a boulder striking the earth.

Ten minutes later, five hundred and fifty Viking raiders charged toward Grímstunga under Haig and Ulf’s command. The five hundred musketeers raised their flintlock firearms.

Bang! Bang!

Mist still clung to Grímstunga, but as noon approached, it began to thin. Suddenly, rapid gunfire erupted.

The militia training in the village square saw darkness before their eyes as dozens collapsed.

Sixty or seventy young men fell in an instant. The survivors, seeing their comrades with bullet wounds in their chests, shoulders, or heads—some dead, others writhing in agony—were terrified. They crouched, gripping their weapons tightly.

Ding ding! The church bell in Grímstunga’s square tolled urgently, signaling an enemy attack. Every adult in the village was to take up arms and defend their home.

Amid the frantic ringing, a cavalry unit emerged from the mist, followed by a slow-moving square formation of infantry.

Weis and Marcos, clad in leather armor and wielding firelock muskets, rushed out. Behind Weis were six sons, three sons-in-law, and their cousins—about fifty or sixty men, his most trusted followers and the core of his militia.

Weis had originally had eight sons. His second son had been killed years ago during a raid, and his fourth son, married to Sigfoss’s daughter, had lived in Big Port. Marcos had told Weis that his fourth son had been shot dead resisting Haig.

This was why Weis was determined to fight Haldor—to avenge his son.

Kamhes, Weis’s eldest son and second-in-command in Grímstunga, quickly gathered everyone. “It must be Haldor’s lackeys attacking! Father, we fight to the death!”

Weis watched as the cavalry neared the village, led by a towering, white-haired man. He squinted. “Haig!”

“Haig himself is here?!” Marcos paled, his voice trembling. “Mr. Weis, maybe we should flee!”

“Fifty cavalry—we can’t escape! We fight!”

Weis had calmed himself. Stepping forward, he drew his longbow, nocked three arrows, and fired at Haig.

Haig deflected two arrows with his large axe, the third grazing past him.

Haig spurred his horse forward, roaring, “Weis! Surrender now, and I’ll spare your life! Resist, and you’ll lose your head!”

When Weis saw his arrows had no effect, he signaled his men to fire. The cavalry charged, and though ten arrows struck, four riders fell before reaching Weis’s group.

Haig grinned cruelly, swinging his axe with the force of his horse’s speed. The blade whistled as it arced down. Weis barely dodged, while Kamhes and two brothers thrust their long spears to block.

Standing two meters tall, Haig could wield shipbuilding timber with ease. In his youth, he had gained fame by wrestling bulls and horses. He was confident no one in Iceland could withstand his full-strength swing.

His confidence was justified. The axe shattered three spears, then cleaved Weis’s left shoulder.

By the time Haig turned his horse, Weis lay dead, his face frozen in terror. Had it not been for the skin holding his waist together, he would have been split in two.

Kamhes and his brothers wailed over Weis’s body before charging at Haig with their weapons.

“Kill Haig! Avenge our father!”

“Kill Haig! Avenge our leader!”

“Revenge!”

Weis’s death made the people of Grímstunga realize they had to kill Haig or be killed themselves. Led by Kamhes, they surged forward, trying to surround the cavalry and drag them from their horses.

Haig and his riders fought fiercely, killing over a dozen militiamen. But one rider, slowed by his horse’s turn, was pulled down and speared to death by seven or eight men.

Haig saw his defensive circle shrinking. Though confident he could escape, his men were trapped.

“Why aren’t the musketeers firing?!” Haig glared at the approaching square formation, furious. “Do they want me dead?!”

As if answering his plea, the front row of over a hundred musketeers suddenly fired.

Bang!

Scorching flames erupted as lead bullets, propelled by gunpowder, flew hundreds of feet into the crowd behind the militiamen.

“Ah—!”

“Ow!”

“Hiss—!”

Nearly a hundred militiamen fell, most wounded. The sight of their comrades’ agony and screams shattered the morale of the poorly trained fighters.

Women and youths were the first to drop their weapons and flee, ignoring Kamhes’s desperate shouts.

Their flight triggered a full collapse. The two to three hundred soldiers surrounding Haig joined the retreat, discarding their long spears, axes, swords, and flails as they ran, gasping for breath, some even whimpering in terror.

In just ten seconds, the crowd’s panic turned into a full-scale rout. Only Kamhes and a few others tried to rally the fleeing men, but even Marcos bent over and ran for the village exit.

Haig watched the disorganized retreat, like seals fleeing a hunter. He smirked. “With these fools, Weis thought he could oppose us? Pathetic! Spare the others, but Marcos dies!”

He took a short musket from his saddle, aimed at the fleeing Marcos, and fired.

The musket wasn’t precise, but Haig’s decade of training guided his shot. The bullet struck Marcos in the back, sending him crashing to the ground.

“Go check!” Haig ordered two riders.

They galloped over, returning shortly with Marcos’s body tied to a rope. “General! Marcos is dead!”

Haig examined the bloodied, twisted corpse. “Weak,” he muttered. Turning to the huddled Kamhes, he coldly ordered, “Kill the stubborn rebels! Seize all the traitors’ assets in the northeast!”

The afternoon sun burned away the mist over Grímstunga, revealing a village drenched in blood—a scene like hell itself.

Haig sat tall on his horse, his white beard glinting gold in the sunlight, his armored form gleaming like a painting of Charlemagne’s southern campaign.

Perhaps, years later, when Haig was old and frail, someone would paint The Pacification of Grímstunga based on his memories—a record for his family and a testament to his deeds.

Chapter 172: The Public Trial

May 1st was the day Haldor had set the previous month for the public trial of the great villain Sigfoss and the great evil, the great parasite Kolsvin.

At seven o’clock in the morning, as the bell rang, Haldor rose from bed with the help of two young servants Kadir had found in Gray Mountain Village to serve in the Governor’s Mansion. After washing up and changing clothes, he sat in the dining hall and enjoyed a breakfast prepared by an Icelandic chef.

After finishing breakfast, Hudik, Kadir, Hoskuld, and Olos entered the Governor’s Mansion.

Haldor, with a good appetite, ate an extra slice of bread before instructing, “Notify the leaders from various regions who have arrived these past few days and the people of Big Port. Soon, we will hold a public trial in front of the Governor’s Mansion to judge Kolsvin and Sigfoss!”

Olos bowed and said, “I have already sent someone to notify them.”

“Only twenty of the twenty-eight leaders from Iceland’s regions have arrived. The twelve from the west and six from the center are all here, but only five from the east have come.”

Hoskuld expressed his displeasure, rubbing his fingers as he spoke.

Haldor asked, “Which five did not come?”

“Grímstunga, Eyjarsstaðir, Neskoistaðir, Bakafjörður, and Hebun. Apart from Grímstunga, which has already rebelled, two have sided with Weis, and the rest are also up to no good,” Hoskuld sneered.

Haldor nodded and said, “These are all territories of powerful families. It doesn’t matter if they are not convinced; our strength will make them submit! Once Haig destroys Grímstunga, the other villages will be eager to pay their respects to us!”

“Haldor is right!” Hudik’s eyes twitched as he said, “Let’s hang Kolsvin first, then have Haig destroy Weis and his men. Then no one in Iceland will dare to disobey!”

After a while, Olos’s soldiers hurried in.

“Outside the Governor’s Mansion is already packed with people. Elder Hongrode, Elder Amie, and Elder Felibe have also arrived. They asked me to inquire when the public trial will begin.”

Haldor smiled and said, “It’s not early anymore. It seems our friends can’t wait. Olos, bring Kolsvin and Sigfoss to the square.”

After Olos left, Haldor looked at Hudik and the others. “Let’s go to the square as well.”

Moments later, over a hundred fully armed soldiers emerged from the Governor’s Mansion, escorting Haldor and the other leaders to the square. The soldiers then dispersed, pushing the onlookers to the sides while inviting the three elders to stand beside Haldor.

After a few pleasantries, the soldiers brought several wooden chairs. Haldor, Hudik, Hoskuld, Kadir, and the three elders sat down to wait.

A while later, the sun grew hotter. Olos, accompanied by a dozen soldiers, escorted the disheveled Kolsvin and Sigfoss.

Sigfoss and Kolsvin had once been dressed in luxurious attire, their beards and hair meticulously groomed. Now, however, they wore filthy clothes, reeking of foul odors, their hair a tangled mess, and their beards unkempt.

Though their appearance differed from the memories of the onlookers, the crowd soon recognized the former governor and Sigfoss from their facial features.

As the two were led forward, the murmurs of the crowd grew louder, and their gazes toward Haldor became increasingly fearful.

Olos bowed to Haldor and said, “General! The criminals Kolsvin and Sigfoss have been brought here. Shall we proceed with the public trial?”

Haldor nodded. “Begin!”

Olos approached Hoskuld and whispered, “Please preside over the trial, sir!”

Hoskuld stood up and walked to the two criminals, whose hands and feet were bound with ropes. He looked around and said, “Those present are all residents of Big Port and leaders from various regions. I see familiar faces, and you should all recognize me, Hoskuld.

Today is a good day for us Icelanders to publicly try the Danish-appointed governor who enslaved and oppressed us, Kolsvin, and his accomplice, Sigfoss. Think back—have Kolsvin and Sigfoss ever bullied you? Have they seized your property? If so, step forward boldly! General Haldor will ensure justice is served!”

After Hoskuld finished speaking, the crowd fell silent for a moment before a dozen men, women, and children stepped forward, weeping as they declared themselves victims. At Hoskuld and Olos’s signal, the soldiers allowed them to approach, and the crowd surged forward to beat Kolsvin and Sigfoss.

Having suffered days of torment in prison, Kolsvin and Sigfoss were weak and disoriented. With their hands and feet bound, they could not resist the assault. Soon, they were beaten bloody.

Only when their noses were crooked and their teeth were knocked out did Hoskuld order the soldiers to drive the attackers away. He then urged the crowd to calmly confront the criminals and boldly declare the crimes of Kolsvin and Sigfoss before General Haldor and all Icelanders.

“Kolsvin and Sigfoss drove my husband to his death and raped me…”

“Sigfoss sent his steward to seize my land and livestock, ruining my family! Because I couldn’t pay the war tribute two years ago, Sigfoss offered me a high-interest loan, and then…”

“They killed my wife and children! Last year, Kolsvin kept increasing taxes, and my wife was ill…”

After a dozen people recounted the atrocities of Sigfoss and Kolsvin, the Icelandic onlookers were filled with righteous indignation. For years, especially recently, they had suffered under the burden of war tributes and increased taxes. Watching the weeping crowd, the residents of Big Port and most of the leaders felt sympathy and hatred toward Kolsvin and Sigfoss.

After a while, someone in the crowd shouted to execute Kolsvin and Sigfoss. The call for their deaths grew louder and more unified.

Suddenly, a voice rang out from the crowd: “Kill Kolsvin! Icelanders must govern themselves!”

The emotionally charged crowd echoed: “Kill Kolsvin! Icelanders must govern themselves!”

…

After a moment, Hoskuld stepped forward and loudly declared, “Kolsvin is a foreign lackey who oppressed and harmed our Icelandic compatriots! Sigfoss is his evil accomplice! Over five years, they plundered countless wealth from the Icelandic people, harming tens of thousands. Kolsvin and his lackey Sigfoss have for years extorted half of our hard-earned wealth for Denmark, amassing thirty to forty thousand marks, and seizing vast lands and properties worth over a hundred thousand marks!”

As Hoskuld finished speaking, the crowd grew even angrier, for some of their hard-earned money had contributed to Kolsvin and Sigfoss’s ill-gotten gains.

Amid the crowd’s condemnation and curses, Kolsvin and Sigfoss, already dazed from the beating, tried to defend themselves but could only cower on the ground, trembling.

Seeing the crowd’s fervor, Haldor realized he had become a hero in the eyes of the Icelandic people—a leader who would bring them freedom. He stood up and walked to the front of the stage.

As the crowd saw Haldor approach, they excitedly raised their hands and shouted, “General Haldor!”

Haldor waved his hands and loudly said, “Please, everyone, be quiet! Let me say a few words.”

Whether it was Haldor’s charisma or the soldiers’ intimidation, the crowd quickly quieted down, focusing their attention on him.

Haldor did not waste words. He first condemned the centuries of oppression Denmark had inflicted on the Icelandic people and declared that he had taken power to lead Icelanders toward a prosperous, oppression-free future. He also stated that a large portion of the confiscated wealth from Sigfoss and Kolsvin would be used for Iceland’s development, education, healthcare, and industrial growth.

In Haldor’s speech, everyone heard his deep affection for Iceland and his determination to build it into a strong and wealthy nation. Every Icelander felt warmth in their hearts and raised their fists in praise of General Haldor.

When the crowd quieted again, Haldor waved his hand and declared, “I order the execution by hanging of the heinous criminals Kolsvin and Sigfoss, to be carried out immediately! With the blood of these two villains, we declare Iceland’s independence from Denmark and our resolve to become a free republic!”

Olos raised his clenched fist and shouted with tears in his eyes, “Long live General Haldor! Long live the Free Republic of Iceland!”

A yellow-skinned man’s emotional cry made the Icelanders feel a pang of regret, as if they had not appreciated their own. Soon, all the Icelanders raised their fists and shouted, “Long live General Haldor! Long live the Free Republic of Iceland!”

Quickly, Kolsvin and Sigfoss, father-in-law and son-in-law, were hanged by Viking soldiers in front of the Governor’s Mansion. The only difference was that Sigfoss did not beg for mercy or struggle, while Kolsvin was so terrified that he wet himself.

As the two corpses swayed on the ropes, Haldor basked in the sunlight and the cheers of the Icelandic people. He closed his eyes, savoring the moment, feeling that he had surpassed all of Iceland’s ancestors and would leave a significant mark in history.

Due to their fear of Haldor, no one claimed the bodies of Kolsvin and Sigfoss by the next day.

Finally, Hoskuld sent someone to drag the bodies away and bury them.

From this day forward, the once-powerful Governor of Iceland, Kolsvin, and the great landowner Sigfoss became part of Iceland’s past. Under Haldor’s leadership, Iceland entered a new era as a self-governing republic.

…

“General Haldor, the investigation in Big Port is complete. Twelve criminals and opponents have been arrested. Shall we exile them?”

“Exile them to Greenland to do hard labor.”

“Understood, sir!”

“General, now that the situation is stable, to establish your authority and leadership, I think it’s time to announce the establishment of the Free Republic of Iceland! Of course, if you are willing to be king, we and the Viking soldiers would be overjoyed.”

Inside the Governor’s Mansion, Haldor and the high-ranking officials discussed various post-war governance matters. Upon hearing Hudik’s final question, everyone held their breath and looked at Haldor, for his decision would determine Iceland’s fate and everyone’s future. Most of the high-ranking officials hoped Haldor would declare himself King of Iceland, allowing them to be ennobled as counts and barons.

As a 17th-century landowner, Haldor was naturally interested in becoming king. However, he recalled the words of Olaf and Heiner before his departure. Though their phrasing differed, their meaning was the same: they advised Haldor not to claim kingship after occupying Iceland.

In the European world dominated by universal religious culture, whether a country followed Eastern Orthodoxy, Christianity, or Catholicism, the doctrine of the divine right of kings was propagated. Even the coronations of Orthodox and Catholic kings and emperors required the presence of the pope, patriarch, or archbishop.

This was the political correctness after converting to Christianity. Thus, even if Haldor expelled Danish forces and effectively ruled Iceland, he could not rashly declare himself king. Doing so would violate a major taboo in European cultural circles and place Iceland in an unfavorable position in international public opinion.

The impact on public opinion was secondary. The main concern was that if Haldor rashly declared himself king, it would thoroughly provoke Denmark, possibly leading to a major war. If he merely expelled the Danes and demanded self-rule and independence, Denmark would not be as provoked and might choose to negotiate. This would give Iceland time to develop and unite with Vinland, and by the time Denmark recovered from its losses, Iceland, along with Vinland and North America, would have grown strong enough to defend itself.

Haldor originally agreed with Olaf and Heiner’s views and had decided to only expel Kolsvin after occupying Iceland, declaring it a self-governing territory or free republic.

However, to establish his authority and demonstrate his resolve among the island’s people, Haldor, under the persuasion of several ruthless men, had already hanged Kolsvin and was increasingly tempted by the idea of kingship.

After half a day of contemplation, Haldor decided not to take such a significant risk. He cleared his throat and said, “To avoid isolation in Europe and not humiliate Denmark, thereby avoiding unnecessary trouble, I think we should temporarily establish the Free Republic of Iceland, and I will serve as its Grand Duke!”

Everyone smiled upon hearing this, especially Hudik, Hoskuld, and Kadir, who were the most pleased. Haldor’s decision represented significant progress from his previous stance.

Originally, Haldor had planned to establish the Free Republic of Iceland and lead the people as the Grand General of Iceland. But after days of persuasion, he had decided to establish a free republic and serve as Grand Duke. Though this was not as prestigious as being king, it still signified a sovereign state. Moreover, with a Grand Duke, could there not also be marquises, counts, viscounts, and barons?

With a republic, everyone present would be heroes of the republic. With a Grand Duke, they would all be nobles—marquises, counts, viscounts, and barons—beneath the Grand Duke!

Chapter 173: The Free Republic of Iceland

A soldier hurried into the governor’s mansion and, after reporting to the guard captain Gilson, the two pushed open the door and entered.

“General! Haig and Ulf have sent word—the rebellion led by Weis and Marcos has been crushed. Seventy-two rebels were killed, and one hundred and eighty were captured. They are now on their way back to Big Port.”

Upon hearing Gilson’s words, the meeting room erupted in excitement.

“Excellent! Haig and Ulf did well!”

“Once this news spreads, no one in Iceland will dare defy Lord Haldor!”

“We must send messengers to announce this in every district!”

“Since the leaders from each district are still here, we should gather them and spread the word. And summon those who haven’t arrived yet! Let them see what happens to those who oppose us!”

…

Haldor listened to the lively discussion and laughed heartily. “You all speak well! We must let every Icelander know the consequences of opposing me, Haldor, the Viking general! And we should take this opportunity to bring all the district leaders under our control!”

“Hudik, send someone to notify the remaining districts immediately. If they don’t come, replace them!”

Hudik quickly agreed. “Yes, I’ll arrange it at once. Though I suspect the leaders in the east already know of Weis’s fate. They might already be on their way!”

After Haldor and the others refined the details of the nation’s founding, they decided that once Haig and Ulf returned to Big Port, all the leaders would be summoned. Then, a grand assembly would be held, where compliant leaders from across the land would serve as representatives in the court assembly, gradually perfecting the political and administrative systems of the Free Republic of Iceland.

Haldor’s simplest statement was: “Even if Iceland is a military state, we must not let it show. We must have everything other nations have!”

A day and a half later, Haig and Ulf returned to Big Port. They first went to the former governor’s mansion—now the Grand Duke’s residence—to pay their respects to Haldor, the Grand Duke of the Icelandic Republic, and then reported on the elimination of the rebel forces led by Weis and Marcos.

“Weis and Marcos were killed in the battle. Those captured are their family members and village elders from other settlements.”

Haldor nodded. “Hand them over to Hoskuld. He is currently in charge of Iceland’s security and the handling of criminals.”

“Understood!” Haig said excitedly. “Brother, have you already established the Free Republic of Iceland? And you’ve become the Grand Duke? That’s truly inspiring!”

Ulf also smiled. “We were surprised when we heard the news. But Father, what does ‘Grand Duke’ mean? Is it like a grand duke?”

Haldor shook his head. “Even the greatest duke must answer to a king. Without a king, to whom would the duke pledge loyalty?”

Haig and Ulf scratched their heads in confusion.

Haldor laughed. “If I became king, it would provoke hostility from Denmark and even other European nations. After all, we are not traditional nobles, nor do we have the support of the church. But being a general is too lowly, and being a duke would require a king to serve. So, I thought I would become a Grand Duke—a title equivalent to the highest lord or sovereign of a nation. In other words, I am the Grand Duke loyal to the Icelandic Republic, neither a duke nor a grand duke of the Holy Roman Empire, nor a prime minister. It is a title representing the nation, the highest-ranking noble of Iceland, equivalent to a prince of the republic!”

“What do you think of the name I came up with?” Haldor asked with a smile.

Haig and Ulf naturally praised Haldor’s ingenuity, declaring that the establishment of the Grand Duke was the first step toward Iceland’s greatness.

After some casual conversation, Haig thought of the high-ranking officials, including himself, and asked, “Brother, now that you’re the Grand Duke, what about me, Hudik, Kadir, and Hoskuld? Shouldn’t we be rewarded with titles and positions?”

Haldor nodded. “You, Hudik, Kadir, and Hoskuld can be made viscounts. We can also appoint a few barons and distribute some land. There will be more wars in the future, and those who distinguish themselves can be promoted.”

Haig frowned in anger. “You become Grand Duke, and I’m just a viscount? How can you say that with a straight face?”

Haldor’s expression turned awkward. Ulf quickly stepped forward to mediate. After a moment’s thought, Haldor said, “You are my brother, so you should have a higher rank. How about an earl? Iceland is small, both in land and people. You must understand.”

Haig reluctantly accepted. “Our family’s legacy was built by us brothers. You can’t be too stingy. But Brother, our three sisters have also come to Big Port. What do you plan to do about them?”

Haldor furrowed his brow. “Our eldest sister, Udrid, and second sister, Freda, have decent families. Their husbands and sons are freemen with some skills. We can promote them to officials. But what about our youngest sister, Mund?”

Haig also frowned, unable to speak.

Ulf, being older, remembered all three aunts. He knew that the first and second aunts were older than his father and had married farmers in the northwest Lautral and Ornes regions of Iceland over twenty years ago. Before he left, he rarely saw the two aunts and their families, but he knew his father and uncle had deep affection for them.

As for the youngest aunt, Mund, Ulf had a vivid memory. Not only because she was only about ten years older than him but also because she was intellectually disabled.

In Ulf’s memory, Aunt Mund was a woman who struggled with daily life, had speech and movement difficulties, and was married off at the age of twelve to an old widower in the Hebun region of southeastern Iceland. She had several children, with the eldest daughter also being disabled, while the younger daughter and son were normal. However, their family’s economic situation was always poor, as her husband only knew how to herd sheep and had no other skills.

After a moment of silence, Ulf said, “In Iceland, we can’t be too obvious in helping Mund’s family. Since Father has just dealt with Kolsvin and Sigfoss, who oppressed the Icelandic people, if we help Mund’s family too openly, it might invite criticism and accusations of favoritism. I think it would be better to send Mund’s family to Vinland and have Olaf give them some land and servants. They will surely live happily there.”

“Ulf, you’ve thought this through well,” Haldor said with a nod. “What do you think, Haig?”

“I think there’s no better idea than this,” Haig said with a smile. “Perhaps our two sisters would also be willing to go to Vinland.”

“Our sisters’ families are currently staying in the courtyard that once belonged to Sigfoss and Kolsvin in Big Port. They might be eager to see you. Invite them to the Grand Duke’s residence for dinner tonight and tell them about the opportunity to enjoy life in Vinland. The two sisters’ families can choose freely,” Haldor said to Haig with a smile.

“I’ll go visit them and invite them to tonight’s dinner,” Haig said eagerly, turning to leave.

“You should go with your uncle and get to know your cousins,” Haldor said, glancing at Ulf beside him.

“Alright.”

Ulf responded and quickly walked out.

…

On a quiet evening in Reykjavik, Iceland, a lively banquet was held at the Grand Duke’s residence. In addition to the invited guests, famous Icelandic bards, musicians, and dancers were invited to perform. The entire mansion was lit with whale oil lamps, and the burning fat mixed with spices emitted a faint fragrance.

Among the guests invited to the banquet were Haldor’s three sisters, three elders, and more than a dozen leaders closest to Haldor, as well as mid and high-ranking members of the Viking raids.

Nearly a hundred people gathered on the first and second floors of the Grand Duke’s residence, listening to the music of harps and lyres, the songs of the bards, and watching the graceful dances. They enjoyed delicious food, desserts, beer, wine, whiskey, and the Water of Life.

All the Icelandic attendees praised the royal jelly, malt sugar, and Water of Life that General Haldor had brought back from Vinland. Hongrode, holding a piece of bread spread with royal jelly, was lost in thought for a moment before exclaiming, “It seems Haldor not only has a rich colony in North America but also special channels for honey and sugar. Perhaps I can have my family try to cooperate with him. If Haldor shares his channels, the Danish East India Company could become as powerful as the British or even the Dutch East India Company!”

Moved by the royal jelly and malt sugar, Hongrode firmly decided on a course of action. He then walked into the back courtyard and approached Haldor, who was speaking with his family.

Haldor was chatting with his three sisters and warmly giving gifts to his nephews and nieces. When he noticed Hongrode waiting nearby, he turned and apologetically smiled before quickly excusing himself.

“Elder Hongrode, what can I do for you?” Haldor asked, taking out a handkerchief to wipe his hands.

Hongrode spoke gently. “Lord Haldor, you know my family is responsible for the trade of the Danish East India Company. So, I am very interested in the royal jelly, Eastern malt sugar, and even the Water of Life you have brought. Would you be willing to discuss this with me?”

Haldor knew that after taking control of Iceland, his family could no longer engage in business directly. Finding a representative was necessary. Hongrode’s inquiry gave Haldor an idea. “Of course, I am willing. But whether your family is willing to cooperate with me is not something you can decide alone. After all, my relationship with Denmark is not friendly at the moment.”

Hongrode smiled. “Businessmen only care about profit. I’m sure you’ve seen this from the Dutch. With enough money, the Dutch would sell their country. Although my family would not sell Denmark, you and Iceland have always been Denmark’s overseas colonial territories. While Iceland’s independence will anger King Christian IV and all the nobles, it does not cause significant harm or danger to Denmark itself. So, we are definitely willing to be your partners and friends!”

“Personally, I believe that after many years, seeing Lord Haldor, the Grand Duke, again, I know you will successfully lead the Icelandic people. Even if Denmark sends troops, it will be difficult to change this. So, I think now is the best time to cooperate with you. Ten good opponents are not as good as one bad friend. Do you understand my meaning?”

After speaking, Hongrode smiled at Haldor.

Haldor naturally shook Hongrode’s hand. “We can discuss business matters later. I believe Iceland is willing to become partners with your family!”

“That would be our honor.”

Hongrode thanked him with a smile and then leaned close to Haldor, whispering, “This afternoon, the Danish sea merchants left. The leader among them is a subordinate of Fitz Ulf, who is the son-in-law of the Danish king. Once the sea merchants return to Denmark, everything about Iceland will be known to the Danish court and people. You must be prepared. King Christian IV may send troops to campaign against you, or he may not. But I will ask my family to keep an eye on the news.”

Haldor’s expression turned serious, and he frowned. “Thank you for the warning. I appreciate your kindness, Elder Hongrode. I don’t think Danish troops can harm Iceland, let alone be a match for me. But if it’s convenient, could you help procure some ammunition?”

Hongrode nodded subtly. “No problem. I’ll arrange it immediately. I think even if Denmark sends troops, we can mediate on your behalf. Perhaps if Iceland offers some benefits, the impoverished king will acknowledge your and Iceland’s independence.”

After the banquet, the leaders from the eastern districts finally arrived, albeit late. They nervously greeted Haldor, expecting to be reprimanded or even punished. But instead, they received comforting words from Grand Duke Haldor, which made the latecomers’ emotions fluctuate between anxiety and relief, ultimately leading them to submit and pledge their loyalty.

On May 5th, Haldor invited the leaders of the 28 districts, the leaders of Big Port, and the three elders to the front hall of the Grand Duke’s residence. He declared the official establishment of the Free Republic of Iceland, with Haldor serving as the supreme leader, the Grand Duke. Below the Grand Duke, the court assembly was established to manage Iceland’s affairs. Apart from the executed Sigfoss and Weis, the 29 attending leaders and three elders became the 32 members of the court assembly.

The court assembly and its members were responsible for managing local affairs and providing suggestions to the assembly, serving as an auxiliary management body to the Grand Duke.

After the establishment of the court assembly, the 32 members elected a presiding elder. After a round of voting, Elder Amie was chosen as the presiding elder.

Following the establishment of the court assembly, Haldor, through the assembly, passed a bill to establish a national congress, which was officially formed on the morning of May 6th.

The national congress was responsible for managing Iceland’s development, construction, livelihood, industries, and even the use of funds. It was basically composed of several ministers and a prime minister, along with some officials.

After the establishment of the national congress, Haldor appointed Hudik as the prime minister, Hoskuld as the minister of law and fisheries, responsible for Iceland’s security management, criminal justice, and the planning and management of the fishing industry.

Kadir was appointed as the minister of commerce and agriculture, responsible for tax collection in Big Port, the planning of the Reykjavik commercial district, and the planning and management of Iceland’s agricultural cultivation and livestock farming.

Ulf was appointed as the powerful minister of finance, directly responsible for managing Iceland’s tax revenues and public funds, as well as the allocation and distribution of funds.

Haig was appointed as the minister of civil affairs and religion, responsible for population statistics and management, as well as the statistics of Iceland’s Protestant sects. In the future, Haldor planned to have Haig reform Iceland’s Protestant sects, finding a way to integrate certain elements of Norse mythology to ensure that while the Icelandic people believed in Christianity, they also maintained loyalty and reverence for the Haldor family.

After the establishment of the national congress and the appointment of officials, almost all of Iceland’s current affairs had clear personnel management. The power of local leaders was greatly reduced, but Iceland took the most important step toward regularization and nationalization.

No one dared to voice any dissent. Everyone raised their hands in approval of the establishment of the court assembly and the national congress. These two inspiring pieces of news quickly spread throughout Iceland, exciting every Icelander who heard them.

Chapter 174: The Great Reform of the Viking Raid

After the establishment of the National Assembly, Haldor instructed the assembly members to delay their return home, as he had another major matter to discuss and pass in the court assembly.

This concerned the merger of Vinland and Iceland and the integration of the Icelandic people into the Viking Raid management system.

Haldor and Hudik, among others, had long since internally unified their opinions. Only by incorporating the Icelandic people into the Viking system could the leadership core and position of the Haldor family remain unshaken for a hundred years.

Moreover, after Iceland’s independent establishment, Denmark would certainly not rest. Sending troops to attack was inevitable; the only difference would be the strength and size of the forces.

Although Haldor had four thousand five hundred Viking expeditionary soldiers at his disposal, facing Denmark, a strong Nordic power, no one, including Haldor, was confident of victory.

However, they firmly believed that with all their might, they could repel the Danish forces. To achieve this goal, they agreed to conscript a large number of soldiers in Iceland after establishing the republic, aiming to train a ten-thousand-strong army. After all, there were plenty of cannons and firearms on the ships, enough to equip a ten-thousand-strong force.

Conscription involved many issues, such as welfare, treatment, military pay, and pensions. Additionally, it relied on local leaders. Haldor felt that simple conscription might not be effective and could easily lead to public resentment if mishandled.

After careful consideration and listening to everyone’s opinions, Haldor finally decided to take a comprehensive approach. He would directly integrate all Icelandic people into the Viking Raid system, instantly elevating them to Viking lords with the natural right to enslave the American natives and acquire land and slaves in North America. This would make the Icelandic people, who had longed for quality land for hundreds of years, completely obedient and loyal.

For the Icelandic people, the prospect of better climate and quality land was the most compelling condition, more effective than any rhetoric.

Once the Icelandic people became Vikings, they would be obligated to send their male family members to serve as Viking militia, training and fighting. This would not only save Haldor a significant amount of military expenditure but also allow the Icelandic people to embrace the spirit of national entrepreneurship, dedicating themselves to the cause of defending their homeland with peak combat effectiveness and willpower.

Haldor believed this was the best choice.

Initially, when the court assembly heard that Grand Duke Haldor wanted all Icelandic people to join the Viking Raid organization under his command, they were resistant and shocked. However, after hearing the explanations from Haldor and others, they realized the benefits of joining the Viking Raid were irresistible to the Icelandic people, and everyone was tempted.

After a round of discussions, all the regional leaders of Iceland agreed to integrate their respective regions into the Viking Raid. Based on the varying populations of each region, each leader would simultaneously serve as a regional leader and a high-ranking member of the Viking Raid, at least securing a position as a Mannafylki Oarsman. A few major regional leaders, such as those from Eyjarsstaðir, Selfoss, Borgarnes, and Big Port, each managed over two thousand people and could barely qualify as Pasde Ship District Chiefs.

Becoming an Oarsman, a Steersman, or even a Ship District Chief in the Viking Raid meant having greater legal rights than before, with a strict organizational system. Each leader was delighted, even though they seemed more loyal to General Haldor within the Raid. However, the interests of all Vikings were now bound together, making formal changes irrelevant.

If it were just the Viking Raid system, it would clearly be a hierarchical exploitation, with a rigorous system. Those who could become leaders were naturally enthusiastic about joining the Viking Raid to become powerful Vikings. However, for ordinary Icelandic people, it was difficult to motivate them.

But the Viking Raid was born in Vinland, built on the exploitation of tens of thousands, and in the future, hundreds of thousands of Indian natives. Only by becoming a Viking could one legitimately and openly exploit the Indian natives, enslave them, and plunder their wealth.

If the Icelandic people knew the implicit status and benefits of joining the Viking Raid, they would not resist or oppose it. Faced with the opportunity to instantly become colonizers and superior beings, all the leaders attending the Grand Duke’s meeting knew that no Icelandic person would want to give up this chance…

The court assembly quickly passed the proposal for the Icelandic people to join the Viking Raid. Then, Elder Amie, the court assembly leader, formally submitted the application to Grand Duke Haldor. Haldor personally signed the order, and the regional leaders, accompanied by officials and soldiers from the Grand Duke’s residence, returned to their respective regions.

The promotion of the Viking Raid and the first population census of each region were carried out simultaneously. After the population census of all regions was completed, the data would be compiled at the Grand Duke’s residence, followed by the allocation of conscription quotas and training.

Since becoming a Viking meant obtaining land and even slaves in the New World, almost no one opposed the implementation of the Viking Raid system.

After more than a month of statistics and compilation, when the officials from various regions returned to Big Port, Haldor and others also obtained the first complete population data of Iceland.

“Sixty thousand eight hundred and fifty-five people, thirty thousand and forty-one males, thirty thousand eight hundred and fourteen females…”

“This population includes over four hundred people who are still engaged in trade or piracy outside and have not returned to the island. Basically, there are no omissions!” Haig added after reading the book written by the officials.

In the conference hall of the Grand Duke’s residence, Haldor, Haig, Hudik, Hoskuld, Kadir, Elder Amie, and more than a dozen others were seated. After Haig reported the population statistics, Saul, the original port area manager and now the leader of the Grand Duke’s officials, stood up and said, “Your Highness, the Grand Duke, and all the lords present, the personnel rosters from all regions have been brought back. The entire island’s sixty thousand people are to be incorporated into the Viking Raid. However, according to the system previously established by Your Highness, the Viking Raid is fully staffed at twelve thousand five hundred people. How should the personnel be planned? This requires Your Highness’s planning!”

Although Heiner and Olaf were not by his side, making Haldor miss them even more, over the past few days, he and several core figures had been discussing the reorganization of the Viking Raid due to the significant increase in population. Therefore, he directly issued the order: “The sixty thousand people from Iceland and the original two thousand five hundred Vikings add up to exactly enough to form five Viking Raids. To establish the correctness of the Viking Raid and ensure the leadership position of the Vikings, and to better manage the Vikings, Iceland and Vinland will henceforth be managed and ruled by five Viking Raids. The five Raids will be of equal status, with populations divided by region. Big Port has the largest population; part of it will merge with the old Raid, and the southwest will be incorporated to form two Raids. The south and the true east will merge into one Raid, the northeast and the true north will merge into one Raid, and the northwest, with its larger population, will form one Raid…”

Since the Viking Raid was a military organizational structure, personnel appointments and changes within the Raid did not require the participation of the Icelandic Free Republic’s court assembly and could be decided solely by the supreme leader, Haldor. Therefore, after announcing the decision to establish five Viking Raids, Haldor directly appointed five Viking Raid Generals.

“The Southeast Viking Raid General will be Hudik, the Northeast Viking Raid General will be Hoskuld, the Northwest Viking Raid General will be Kadir, the Southwest Viking Raid General will be Haig, and the Big Port Viking Raid, which is the old Viking Raid, will be commanded by Ulf. Above the five Viking Raids, the position of Grand Marshal will be established, which I will hold. All Viking Generals will report to the Grand Marshal…”

After Haldor issued a series of commands, everyone knew that after Iceland was incorporated into the Viking Raid, the original two thousand Vikings and the sixty thousand new Vikings would be reorganized into five Viking Raids. However, the four Raids in the northeast, southeast, northwest, and southwest were each divided into twelve thousand five hundred people, while the Big Port Raid, merged with the old Viking Raid, had thirteen thousand five hundred people, making it the most populous Viking Raid.

Above the four Raids was the Grand Marshal Haldor, who managed all the Raids and Vikings.

Before this meeting, Haldor and several generals had already discussed and drafted the personnel for the Mannafylki Steersmen and Pasde Ship District Chiefs of the five Raids.

After Haldor finished speaking, Ulf, as the General of the Big Port Viking Raid, which was a merger of the original Viking Raid and the elite population of Big Port, stood up as the second-in-command of the Viking Raid. He held a document listing the appointments of twenty-five Ship District Chiefs and one hundred and twenty-five Mannafylki Steersmen for the five Raids and began to read them aloud.

This round of appointments saw almost all the old followers of Haldor, especially those from the Hrut Village era, being appointed as Ship District Chiefs or Steersmen. Additionally, the original twenty-nine Icelandic leaders were all appointed as Steersmen. Some maintained their original positions, while others had their powers and jurisdictions limited. However, since this was a reform promoted by the Grand Duke, they had no choice but to accept it, regardless of their thoughts.

After this major reform, Haldor believed that his control over Iceland had achieved a generational leap. He immediately ordered all major and minor leaders to take up their posts in the four major regions. The five generals were to establish general’s fortresses in their respective regions for clear management. Additionally, each Viking Raid was required to train a legion of Viking soldiers. The families of these soldiers would receive fifty acres of land and two slaves in Vinland.

After the meeting, the five Viking Generals summoned their respective district chiefs, steersmen, and others, appointing their subordinates within the Raid, such as oarsmen and captains.

Once the five Viking Raids had their relationships sorted out under the leadership of their respective generals, the local leaders, who were also steersmen, left Big Port.

Within a few days, the many changes in Iceland and the welfare benefits for the Vikings quickly spread to every corner of Iceland, leaving every Icelandic person both caught off guard and excited by the great changes.

Soon, the regional leaders from all over Iceland, accompanied by young men and women, began constructing general’s fortresses in four locations—Hebun, Solsport, Naiteri, and Hrut Village—for the Viking generals to reside, work, and lead.

By mid-May, the four generals—Hudik, Hoskuld, Kadir, and Haig—set off for their respective regions with two ships carrying rewards for soldiers and laborers, as well as weapons and equipment.

Ulf, as the General of the Big Port Viking Raid, took the lead in summoning major and minor leaders to discuss conscription.

Since a large amount of goods brought from Vinland this year had not been sold, some sugar and alcohol were distributed as rewards to subordinates. Additionally, some were used by the five major Raids as rewards for constructing general’s fortresses and recruiting and training soldiers.

While the five major Raids were busy recruiting and training, Haldor sent two warships back to Vinland to report the good news and prepare to bring his family over.

After Iceland restored its former tranquility, Haldor remembered the matter of rewarding the four thousand five hundred and fifty soldiers of the expeditionary force. After calling back the four generals, the six of them discussed for two days and finally decided to implement rewards for all soldiers of the Viking expeditionary army.

The rewards were divided into three main parts: first, the abolition of slave status and promotion to Viking; second, military rank promotions; and third, material rewards.

After the entire army was rewarded, the legions of the five major Raids were fully recruited. Then, the five generals each led a group of Viking officers back to train the newly recruited legion soldiers.

Although Iceland experienced small-scale wars and blockades this year, due to the massive supplies brought by Haldor, Iceland’s economic activities became more active. Every Icelandic person had greater expectations for future life.

Last month, Haldor lifted the blockade on Reykjavik Port, granting Danish and Icelandic merchant ships the right to free passage. The Danish sea merchants all returned to Denmark, while some Icelandic merchants also went out to do business.

Iceland’s ports did not freeze all year round, so every month, merchant ships from Denmark, Iceland, England, and Holland entered and exited, bringing grain, cloth, and other daily necessities to Iceland, while purchasing and taking away Icelandic dried fish, dried meat, sheepskins, whale oil, and other resources.

Although Iceland had changed from Danish Iceland to a free republic, Haldor still maintained an open and free attitude towards the outside world. Therefore, after entering May, more than a dozen British and Dutch merchant ships had successively entered the port to dock and engage in trade activities.

However, apart from two ships from the Hongrode family, the previously active Danish ships were no longer seen.

After Hongrode met with the family’s captain, he learned about the situation in Denmark and went to the Grand Duke’s residence to visit Haldor, informing him of some not-so-good news in private.

“Denmark has already learned about the coup in Iceland and the news of Kolsvin’s death. King Christian IV is extremely angry and has declared his intention to send troops to campaign against Your Highness…”

After saying this, Hongrode paused, noticing that Haldor’s expression did not change, and continued, “However, the Prime Minister and many ministers have persuaded the King to understand that Denmark’s current economic situation and national conditions make it difficult to organize a large army immediately. Therefore, they plan to take military action against Iceland after this autumn’s harvest!”

Haldor nodded and coldly snorted, “Even if they come now, we are not afraid. The Danish royal guards only number a few thousand and are completely incapable of supporting an expedition. Hiring mercenaries will also take time. By the time they attack, my soldiers will be trained. I don’t believe that over ten thousand Viking soldiers cannot defend Iceland!”

“With your well-trained soldiers and advanced firearms, defending Iceland will not be difficult.” Hongrode praised with a smile, then said, “But you should also know that Kolsvin’s father, Christian, who has just retired from the position of Governor of Norway, is the uncle of King Christian IV and also Kolsvin’s father. After learning of his son’s tragic death, Christian went mad and pressured the King to send troops to Iceland. Now, knowing that there is no money or manpower, he has gone to Pomerania and Prussia to recruit soldiers himself.

You also know that the pan-European war is currently in a stalemate. If Christian is willing to spend money, he might be able to recruit a decent army! Therefore, the time for Denmark to attack Iceland might be advanced!”

Chapter 175: Good News Reaches Hrut City

Hongrode relayed the intelligence he had gathered from Denmark to Haldor, warning him to prepare in advance. This was the best way to pledge his loyalty to Haldor.

Hongrode informed Haldor that although King Christian IV of Denmark was not a major figure in Denmark and his power was limited, he had served as the Governor of Norway for thirty years and was a wealthy man. He was willing to spend money to recruit mercenaries, and King Christian IV would likely organize an expeditionary force to attack Iceland at his request.

“Oh?”

Haldor raised an eyebrow after hearing Hongrode’s words and said, “Thank you for the elder’s reminder. If Iceland can repel the Danish army and establish its position, I believe you and your family will be our eternal partners!”

Haldor’s words were equivalent to a promise. As a businessman, Hongrode loved investments, and Iceland was now a force that might completely break free from Denmark’s control. Judging by Haldor’s actions and the strength of his army, there was an eighty to ninety percent chance they could repel the Danish army. Although Denmark did not have the saying “snow in the midst of charcoal,” Hongrode understood that showing kindness to Grand Duke Haldor now would yield tenfold or even a hundredfold returns in the future.

After Hongrode left, Haldor summoned Ulf and, after a long conversation, sent envoys to the four generals’ fortresses. He planned to notify them that within one or two months, or at the latest after the autumn harvest, they would face an invasion by the Danish army. He ordered the four Viking generals to hasten the training of new recruits.

After the four envoys departed, Haldor instructed Ulf to take five large ships and leave Reykjavik for Amsterdam.

These five ships were loaded with bone china, malt sugar, maple syrup, Water of Life, and beaver pelts, among other furs. In addition to Vinland’s specialty goods, there were also numerous treasures and wealth confiscated from the Governor’s Mansion and Sigfoss’s residence. Haldor intended to exchange all these goods and wealth in Amsterdam for a large number of cannons, firearms, and warships to counter the impending Danish army attack on Iceland.

As Ulf’s fleet set sail south from the port, Olaf, far across the Atlantic in Hrut City, received the Viking warriors sent by Haldor. He learned that his father had already occupied Iceland and established the Icelandic Free Republic. He also received notice that Haldor intended to bring their family and the families of several leaders back to Iceland.

Katrin was overjoyed upon hearing the news and happily led Half and Gerny to pack their belongings. Olaf and Heiner also drank a large cup of wine.

Vanhild’s cousin had given birth to a daughter who looked very much like her last month, and Heiner had been in high spirits these days. Learning that Haldor’s attack on Iceland had gone smoothly made him even more excited.

“Olaf! I think we will be able to return to Iceland soon!” Heiner said, holding Kadir and Haldor’s personal letters, smiling. “They want to incorporate all Icelanders into the Viking Raid. In the future, the number of Vikings will grow to fifty or sixty thousand. If even half of them migrate to Vinland, it will greatly strengthen our management and core forces. In the future, it won’t be difficult to recruit large numbers of Indian natives and occupy the land!”

Olaf nodded in agreement. “Yes! In the future, the Viking Raid should be the foundation of Iceland and Vinland. Daily life will be managed through a strict hierarchy of generals, district chiefs, steersmen, and oarsmen. Militarily, the core force will be the Viking military, supplemented by the White Wolf soldiers and Indian native soldiers. As long as we make becoming a Viking through merit a noble goal, the Indian natives will compete to fight for us!”

Heiner also nodded, as they had discussed these matters many times before.

After a while, Lorin, holding Arthur, walked over and asked, “Olaf, Heiner, has Haig taken Iceland with Haldar? Can we return to Europe?”

Although Lorin was a noble in Vinland, enjoying the service of white slaves and Indian slaves, and had the best material treatment, she did not like Vinland and always wanted to return to the civilized life in Europe. After hearing a few words from Katrin, she eagerly asked Olaf.

Olaf shrugged and said, “Yes, Aunt Lorin, my father has ordered my mother and you to return to Iceland.”

“God bless! That’s wonderful.” Lorin smiled, kissed her son, and quickly went upstairs to pack her luxurious clothes and jewelry.

After Haldar’s army left, Olaf and Heiner spent every day managing the vast country, which included Vinland, the Iroquois region, the Huron region, Labrador, and Plymouth City. The total area of the Viking colonies in North America had exceeded five hundred thousand square kilometers, with a population of over one hundred thousand. There were many things to handle almost every day.

To make things easier and to prevent the governors from becoming too powerful, Olaf and Heiner transferred most of the Viking women workers from the Shahrimnir Company to serve as inspectors. These inspectors assisted the local governors and Olaf and Heiner in handling government affairs.

The Viking women workers had been learning some knowledge and culture from Vanhild and Olaf in the breeding company and were now among the few educated people in Vinland. The more than twenty capable women could help the local governors manage affairs, reducing everyone’s workload and also serving as a supervisory role over the local governors.

As for the breeding business of the Shahrimnir Company, it was filled by newly trained slave workers.

After a happy discussion for half a day, Heiner frowned and raised a concern.

“Olaf, what if Denmark is unwilling to let Iceland be independent and sends a large army to attack Iceland? Will General Haldar and the others be in danger?”

Olaf had never seen the armies of various European countries active on the European battlefields in recent years, so he was not sure whether the Viking military could withstand the Danish army. However, thinking about the French guards in Quebec, Olaf realized that the professional soldiers of European countries might have better shooting skills than the Viking soldiers, but their military discipline might be worse. If the Danish army was not much stronger than the French soldiers, the Viking expeditionary force, which advocated combat, should be able to hold off up to ten thousand Danish soldiers.

“It should not be a big problem. Hudik, my father, Haig, and Kadir are all experienced warriors. They will definitely prepare for the Danes in advance.”

Olaf nodded affirmatively and then softly said, “I think Hudik and the others will expand Iceland into the Viking Raid and recruit soldiers to prepare for war. The Icelanders are brave and good at fighting, and many are skilled in combat and throwing axes. With a little training, they will have considerable combat power. Denmark was defeated only two years ago and may not have enough strength to support a large number of troops in overseas operations. Even if my father and Hudik cannot defeat the Danes, as long as they can hold them off, the Danish retreat is only a matter of time. The consumption of overseas operations is not something everyone can support!”

“I agree with you.” Heiner clapped his hands and said with shining eyes, “General Haldar should be able to repel the Danish attack. However, King Christian IV and King Charles I of England are uncle and nephew. If England helps Denmark, given England’s distance and strength from Iceland, Iceland will find it difficult to resist for long!”

“Hiss!” Olaf gasped and said, “You are right. The possibility of British intervention is small, but if they do, it could change the balance of power…”

After thinking for a long time, Olaf looked up and said, “Immediately take out the stored malt sugar, grain, dried meat, and dried fish. We need to recruit young warriors in the three Iroquois cities and Huron City, where the Indian native population is the largest. We must hasten the training of a team that can follow orders. If the situation in Iceland is unfavorable, we must immediately go to support them! The two returning ships should not rush to bring people back to Iceland! I will prepare two ships of goods to go to England, explore the situation, and exchange money to buy a few troop transport ships!”

“You are leaving directly? Maybe things are not that bad!” Heiner found it hard to accept and subconsciously tried to dissuade him.

“No! Any situation that is possible must be prepared for. If my father and the others fail in Iceland, not only will we taste the bitterness of losing our loved ones, but the French and British, knowing that we are weakened, will not have evil thoughts? So if Iceland falls, Vinland will not be safe!”

Olaf’s tone became more and more determined as he spoke, and finally, he stood up and said, “You must personally go to the Iroquois and Huron regions to recruit soldiers and strive to train two military units. Some of the old soldiers stationed in various places should be transferred as officers and instructors, but more than half should be retained to maintain the situation. I will take all the stored goods to exchange for lower-quality large-bellied ships. Five ships should be enough for troop transport needs. We must prepare for the worst and prevent the situation from deteriorating to the point where we cannot aid Iceland, causing all our efforts to be in vain!”

After deciding to go to Europe personally, Olaf and Heiner quickly gathered people to transport all the furs, sugar, and alcohol in Hrut City onto two ships. Then, with a hundred or so sailors and guards, they set sail.

Half a month later, Olaf’s two ships sailed east from the North Sea Canal into the port of Amsterdam. After selling goods for two days, he suddenly discovered that there were already many bone china, furs, malt sugar, and Royal Jelly on the market. This made Olaf very curious. After careful inquiry, he learned that a group of Icelandic merchants had sold a large batch last month. This made Olaf realize that his father had sent someone.

Although the price of Olaf’s goods was suppressed by one or two percent due to the recent large sale from Iceland, there was no issue with unsold goods because the commodities were in high demand.

After half of the goods were sold, Olaf took the checks to the shipyard on the north bank of the Zaan River. After comparing several shipyards, Olaf found that if he only wanted to make large-bellied ships, the prices were almost the same in every shipyard, and new orders would take ten days to half a month. This made Olaf anxious, as he only wanted to find a shipyard with good samples to buy a few ships quickly. After all, he wanted to return as soon as possible and go to Iceland to see the situation. Time was precious…

With a dozen guards, Olaf walked to the east side of the riverbank and suddenly found a shipyard with a quiet entrance, completely different from the other shipyards that were constantly operating large equipment and making noise. It seemed as if it had already closed down.

“What does the paper on the door say?” Olaf walked closer and found a large white paper pasted on the half-closed door, with Dutch text he did not recognize.

A guide Olaf had hired at the dock for ten Dutch guilders quickly walked over and then came back with a smirk, saying, “Young Master Olaf! This is the De Groot Shipyard, and now they want to sell the entire factory, including the equipment and workers. I heard last year that they were selling, but I didn’t expect that no one has bought it yet. Hehe, but it’s normal that no one buys it. Who told Haubert to build a submarine for King Gustavus Adolphus II and ruin the reputation… That damn Vasa… People say it’s a submarine… Haha…”

Olaf frowned. He was satisfied with everything about this guide named Scold, except for his chatter and muttering.

Just as he was about to coldly hum to interrupt, he suddenly remembered that he had heard about this several years ago. He thought for a moment and suddenly realized that it was in 1638 when he followed his uncle to Amsterdam to sell goods and buy ships. At that time, the shipyard owner, Mr. Arent De Groot, had told them the story, and Haig had been moved by De Groot’s story, ordering six ships from this shipyard. But after several years, how had this shipyard gone bankrupt…

“Scold, tell me what happened to the De Groot Shipyard? Weren’t they doing very well before?”

Hearing the boss’s inquiry, Scold immediately became serious and said, “Several years ago, the De Groot Shipyard was indeed very prosperous because their chief shipbuilder, Mr. Henrik Haubert, built a warship for the ‘Lion of the North,’ King Gustavus Adolphus II. But probably two years ago, the Vasa, which took two or three years to build, sank in the Baltic Sea on its maiden voyage. This not only angered King Gustavus Adolphus II but also completely ruined the reputation of Mr. Henrik Haubert, the master shipbuilder. Due to the impact of this incident, the business of the De Groot Shipyard declined sharply, and they soon became unable to operate. Last year, President Arent De Groot began to sell their shipyard, but with the example of the sunken ship, no one dared to buy them…”

After listening for a long time, Olaf nodded and thought: Previously, De Groot built very good ships for us. Maybe the reason for the Vasa’s sinking was not a technical problem with the shipbuilder… Just in time, Vinland urgently needs to build its own shipyard, lacking skilled shipbuilders and complete equipment. This shipyard might be able to be taken away as a package…

“Scold, go and ask if Mr. De Groot or anyone else responsible is here. I want to talk to them…”

Scold agreed and quickly pushed the door open, then came out a moment later with a middle-aged man and an old man.

Olaf recognized the middle-aged man as Mr. De Groot, whom he had met twice earlier this year. However, De Groot clearly did not recognize Olaf, whose height and appearance had changed significantly over the years.

After the introductions, Olaf learned that the dispirited old man in front of him was the chief shipbuilder, Mr. Henrik Haubert.

After questioning and discussion, Haubert firmly stated that the sinking of the Vasa was not his responsibility. It was because King Gustavus Adolphus II had been micromanaging, repeatedly overturning the ship’s construction plans and demanding that it be built according to his own intentions. Even though Haubert had pointed out the existing safety hazards to King Gustavus Adolphus II, the Vasa was ultimately built according to the king’s will and sank as expected.

“The sinking of the Vasa was completely due to an amateur directing a professional!” De Groot finally confirmed, then smiled at Olaf and asked, “I wonder if you, young master, are willing to buy our shipyard?”

“What does your shipyard have?”

“There are 500 cubic meters of wood… 300 logs… skilled workers… and six large-bellied merchant ships and three armed merchant ships that were previously built but returned due to that incident…”

After hearing De Groot’s account, Olaf was very tempted and asked, “How much are you selling it for?”

“630,000 Dutch guilders!”

“That’s too expensive!” Olaf shook his head and said, “You haven’t sold it for two years, which shows the price is too high. If you really want to sell, you need to lower the price.”

“What price can you offer?” De Groot blinked and asked.

Olaf thought for a moment and said, “300,000 Dutch guilders!”

“What?! That’s too low!” De Groot shouted, “This is impossible!”

“Don’t be anxious.” Olaf waved his hand and said, “I don’t need the shipyard’s land. All the technical personnel, materials, and existing ships together are worth 300,000 Dutch guilders. If you agree, we can sign the contract immediately, and I will give you a check. If you don’t agree, I think you might have to wait a few more years…”

After a heated debate, Olaf finally paid 320,000 Dutch guilders to purchase all the technical personnel, inventory materials, equipment, and nine large ships from the De Groot Shipyard.

In terms of price alone, Olaf did not get much of a bargain. In fact, under normal market prices, these items would not be worth more than 400,000 Dutch guilders.

But Olaf wanted the ready-made ships and was particularly interested in the master shipbuilder Henrik Haubert. Olaf believed that once Haubert arrived in Vinland, with this master representing the highest Dutch shipbuilding craftsmanship, the Vinland shipbuilding industry would quickly take shape. With the abundant timber in North America, the day when they could build their own ships for their own use was not far off.

Chapter 176: Meeting at Big Port

After purchasing the shipyard, Olaf had spent nearly all the gold, silver, and goods he had brought with him, paying them to De Groot. Only less than thirty percent of the cargo remained on the two ships.

The current state of Iceland weighed heavily on Olaf’s mind. After acquiring the shipyard and the ships, he no longer wished to linger in Amsterdam.

To hasten his return to Iceland, he took the initiative to approach the Kolank Trading House, selling them the remaining goods at a price one-tenth below market value. He then exchanged all the money for grain and, as July approached, set sail with eleven large ships, leaving Amsterdam behind.

When Olaf’s fleet arrived at the Reykjavik docks in Iceland, it was July 1st. The weather was already quite warm, though in Iceland, so close to the Arctic, people still wore outer garments.

Under the guidance of the flag-bearers of Big Port, the ships were moored, and Olaf, accompanied by his men, disembarked. He found that Big Port looked much the same as it had in his memories from a few years ago, except for two wooden houses under construction. Olaf guessed they had either been destroyed in battle or were being expanded.

“Olaf… young master?”

A Viking soldier on duty at the harbor recognized Olaf and hurried forward, his voice filled with delight.

“You are?” Olaf looked at the group of young men with yellowish skin, then at the white man leading them. After a moment, he said, “You were with Hoskuld when he went to Haldor City, weren’t you? Now you’re an officer.”

“Yes, Second Young Master! You’ve come at last! Iceland is ours now, and everyone is overjoyed! Oh, by the way, the Grand Duke is in the duke’s manor. Let me take you there!”

Olaf nodded, and the group made their way through the harbor toward the eastern part of the city, where the former governor’s mansion—now the duke’s manor—stood.

As they approached the main gate of the manor, Ulf happened to ride out on horseback. Spotting Olaf, he let out a loud shout and laughed, “Olaf! What brings you here?”

Dismounting, Ulf embraced his brother, and the two exchanged a few words.

“Olaf! Why are you alone? Didn’t Father tell Mother and Half to come too?” Ulf asked, puzzled.

Olaf smiled. “I came first to make sure everything is safe and normal before bringing Mother and the others. Where’s Father?”

“You’re being cautious, and rightly so.” Ulf clapped his hands. “Father’s inside. I’ll take you to him. He’s been talking about you nonstop lately.”

Ulf led Olaf into the duke’s manor. They passed through the gallery and entered the inner keep, climbing to the second floor before encountering several Viking guards. Leading them was Gilson, Olaf’s former personal guard captain.

“The young master has arrived!” Gilson greeted him joyfully, kissing the back of Olaf’s hand.

Olaf smiled. “We’ll catch up later. Is Father here?”

“The Grand Duke is in a bit of a temper,” Gilson explained. “There’s been an outbreak of smallpox on the island recently. The Grand Duke wants to use the variolation method from Vinland, but no one here knows much about it. They’ve been puzzling over it for two days without success. Your arrival is perfect timing!”

Olaf nodded, but before he could speak, he heard his father’s slightly hoarse voice from inside the room: “Gilson! Who are you talking to out there?!”

“Father! It’s Olaf! He’s back!” Ulf pushed open the door and announced loudly.

A flurry of hurried footsteps grew nearer, and the towering figure of Haldor suddenly appeared, enveloping Olaf in a tight embrace. He stroked Olaf’s golden hair and said, “Good boy, you’re finally here! Why didn’t your mother come with you?”

“Hah! I knew you wouldn’t trust the situation in Iceland, so you came to check for yourself, didn’t you?” Haldor chuckled.

Olaf laughed heartily. “You’ve hit the nail on the head, Father.”

“How is Vinland? Is your mother doing well?”

…

Half an hour later, Haldor, Olaf, and Ulf sat together in the room. Haldor and the others recounted in detail how they had taken control of Iceland, their plans for governance, and how they intended to integrate the Icelanders into the Viking raids. They also inquired about the situation in Vinland and other places.

Olaf gave a brief overview of Vinland’s circumstances before concluding, “Since you’ve already begun large-scale military training, and my brother even went to Amsterdam to trade goods for weapons and ammunition, it seems that even if Denmark sends a large army to attack Iceland, we should be able to hold our ground!”

Haldor let out a hearty laugh, his voice tinged with pride. “Iceland is now a nation under our family’s rule, Olaf, Ulf. In the future, if we can secure a marriage alliance with a princess from a European kingdom, establishing a united kingdom of Iceland and Vinland won’t just be a dream!”

“Yes! Our father truly is one of the greatest patriarchs of the Hrut family!” Olaf praised with a smile.

After Olaf and Ulf had spent half an hour flattering Haldor, he finally waved his hand and asked, “Olaf, you mentioned you brought me a gift. What is it?”

“It’s grain, Father.” Olaf pointed out the window. “I know Iceland has always lacked arable land, and with a major war looming, you might need to stockpile more food. So, I bought several shiploads of grain to bring here.”

Haldor was delighted to hear this. He reached out and gave Olaf’s shoulder a firm pat, his eyes gleaming. “Oh! Olaf, you truly are my greatest help. To be honest, I’ve been worried these past few days. If Denmark and Iceland end up in a prolonged war, how will we feed tens of thousands of people on the island? The situation could become dire very soon. But with the grain you’ve brought, it should be enough to last Iceland two years. I must thank you for this support. When you return, tell everyone in Vinland that I will reward them—reward all our kin in Vinland!”

“I’ll let them know. Father, should I have Mother and my younger siblings come back to Iceland now?” Olaf asked casually.

Haldor pondered for a moment. “I think it’s best if they don’t come just yet. The Danish army will be attacking Iceland soon. It would be better to wait until we’ve repelled the Danish expeditionary force and secured our position before they return.”

After half a day of discussion, Olaf went to rest.

When Kolsvin had been appointed Governor of Iceland, he had expanded the governor’s mansion. The original three-story building had been enlarged seven or eight times, with two corner towers and a round fortress added.

Olaf was led by a servant to a room on the third floor of the northern corner tower, where he spent the evening dining lavishly with Haldor and Ulf.

…

The day after returning to Iceland, Olaf first went to visit his teacher, Elder Amie, then spent the next two days eating, drinking, and playing with his childhood friends.

On the third day, Hoskuld, Haig, Kadir, Hudik, and the others, having heard the news, rode back to Big Port. They had come both to report to Haldor on recent developments and to see Olaf, who had returned from Vinland.

Olaf met his long-unseen uncles and elders in the duke’s manor. Though their appearances hadn’t changed much, their demeanor and bearing had shifted noticeably.

“After all, they’re now Viking raid generals with the power of life and death over their territories. Circumstances truly change a person…”

“Following the traditional Japanese titles of the time, perhaps Uncle Haig is now the Heavenly Demon King of the First Sect, and Hudik is the Great Wheel King, Ghost Warrior Maru… Their careers have certainly diverged from their past as farmers, fishermen, and petty pirates. It’s only natural they’ve taken on a heroic air…”

Chapter 177: Vinland Shipyard

After staying in Iceland for a week, Olaf knew that everything there was on the right track. Still worried about Vinland, he took sailors, crew members, and shipyard artisans with him, leaving Reykjavik and following the familiar sea route back to Vinland.

After drifting at sea for half a month, the fleet encountered a pirate ship likely from Britain. As usual, after a brief cannonade, the enemy realized Olaf’s fleet was not to be trifled with and slowly retreated.

By the time Olaf returned to Hrut Port, it was nearly August. The weather in Vinland was scorching, and along the eastern coastline, British and French fishing boats were busy catching and drying fish. Although the upheaval in North America last year had reduced the number of fishing vessels, there were still thirty to forty ships in total.

“Last year, Ulf drove away all the fishing boats from the northern shore, so there are far fewer English and French fishermen now,” Olaf remarked, shaking his head. “Fishermen and pirates are cut from the same cloth—they can turn into pirates at any moment. Vinland’s strength is still weak; it’s best not to interfere with them for now. Once Iceland stabilizes, we can designate exclusive fishing grounds for Vinland.”

Upon returning to Hrut City, Olaf was immediately surrounded by his aunt Lorin, his mother Katrin, his sister Gerny, and his brother Half, all eagerly asking about Iceland.

Olaf recounted the situation of his father, Uncle Haldor, and the others in detail, answering their questions along the way. Finally, he declared, “Don’t rush. Wait until next spring. Father and Uncle are still preparing to repel the Danish expeditionary force. If you go now, you’ll only distract them!”

“But…” Lorin, missing her husband dearly, was about to insist on returning to Iceland immediately when Katrin pulled her back.

“Lorin, don’t be hasty. Haig and the others are laying the foundation for us and our children. In the future, we and our children will have a safe and stable place to live. Now, Iceland is about to face a major battle with the Danes. If we go back now, we’ll only distract them.”

Having lived together for a year, Lorin deeply respected her elder sister-in-law Katrin, who had taken good care of her and been very generous. Under Katrin’s persuasion, Lorin sat back on the sofa, holding Arthur.

“Olaf, when can we go back?” she asked.

“Next spring! I’ll send a ship to gather information next spring. As long as everything goes well, we can live in Iceland by next spring!”

…

After Olaf and Katrin persuaded Lorin to stay in Vinland a little longer, Olaf instructed the slaves and white slaves to prepare for the construction of a shipyard in Hrut Port under the leadership of Master Henrik Haubert and his apprentice artisans.

After surveying the terrain and the port, Master Haubert found Olaf and said seriously, “Olaf! Young Governor, the terrain and water depth of Hrut Port are not suitable for a large port, and the surrounding area is not suitable for building a shipyard. There isn’t even a proper place to launch new ships. So, I think we need to choose another port!”

Olaf thought for a moment and said, “There’s a newly built Haldor City to the northeast of the peninsula. Its port is a natural sheltered harbor with deep water, completely sufficient for our needs. Let’s go take a look!”

Haubert thought for a moment and said, “I’ll gather my apprentices right away. We need to hurry. I saw the mountains of timber in your warehouse, and much of it has already been processed and can be directly used to make planks. To be honest, I’m itching to get started. You’ve hired me, and I want to build a sturdy and durable ship for you first to make up for the damage the Vasa’s failure did to my reputation and image!”

“Haha, I understand your thoughts, Haubert. Your wish will come true!” As he spoke, Olaf turned his head to look at the shipwrights from Olaf’s Factory who were exchanging shipbuilding techniques with Haubert’s apprentices. He then loudly declared, “Everyone, pack your things. We’re leaving for Haldor City tomorrow!”

…

Under Olaf’s arrangements, a team of over three hundred people, including shipwrights, carpenters, blacksmiths, white slaves, and native slaves, quickly assembled. They loaded their tools and supplies onto ships and set off from Hrut Port in the morning. By noon, they had sailed around the southeastern peninsula and arrived at the eastern harbor of Haldor City.

Upon seeing Haldor City’s harbor, Haubert exclaimed in delight, “This is indeed a natural large harbor! After dredging and renovation, it might be able to accommodate several thousand large ships at once!”

Haldor City was a new city with a small population, so it was far less impressive than Hrut City. The dock was very simple, and the city itself had only about twenty longhouses and a larger black stone fortress.

As Olaf and his party disembarked, they saw hundreds of people inside the city laying stone roads, using leftover stones from house construction and stones collected while clearing land for farming.

Leading the slaves was a young man with red hair and a beard. Upon spotting Olaf’s ships, he quickly led his people to welcome them. Seeing Olaf, he bowed and greeted, “Subordinate Bich Bichson, acting lord of Haldor City, greets Young Master Olaf!”

Since Haldor had taken almost all of Vinland’s elite to attack Iceland, the positions of governor and city lord left behind in Vinland had mostly been filled by young people. Bich’s merits and abilities might have been slightly lacking for a city lord, but he was, after all, Jot’s nephew. Before leaving, Haldor had promoted him to lord of Haldor City and granted him ten clever and capable private slaves to assist him.

Bich was also a villager from White Hazel Forest Hrut Village and had always been familiar with Olaf. Now, however, their statuses were worlds apart. Bich was also convinced in his heart that Olaf was a prophet sent by the gods, so he showed great respect and reverence.

“Are you building roads? How are the farming and fishing going this year?” Olaf asked casually.

“Everything is going well. This year, we’ve reclaimed five hundred acres of farmland…” Bich quickly began reporting on his work. Olaf found it amusing and gently interrupted him.

“There will be plenty of time to talk about that at dinner. First, arrange accommodations for everyone. I plan to build a shipyard in Haldor City. These are all artisans and laborers. You need to cooperate well with the future chief master of the shipyard, Master Haubert!”

With that, Olaf smiled and introduced Haubert to Bich.

After exchanging a few polite words, Bich handed his work over to his deputy and personally led Olaf, Haubert, and the others to Blackstone Fortress.

Blackstone Fortress was much simpler and smaller than Haldor’s fortress, with only about twenty rooms and two parlors. At first glance, it was extremely similar to Haig Fortress, the predecessor of Olaf’s Factory.

Originally, Blackstone Fortress was the living and administrative quarters built by Jot and Hoskuld in Haldor City, as well as the political and military center of the city.

Later, Jot passed away, and Hoskuld returned to Hrut City. Blackstone Fortress remained without a new owner until this spring.

Now that Olaf had arrived, Bich willingly vacated the two-story northern building of Blackstone Fortress for him to live in, moving himself to the front part of the fortress.

Olaf unhesitatingly enjoyed the privilege of taking over the nest, having grown accustomed to enjoying and using the privileges of a feudal leader.

Chapter 178: Preparations in Full Swing

After Olaf led his men to Haldor City, the site selection for Olaf’s shipyard was quickly completed under the efforts of Master Habert and his apprentices.

The next day at noon, Habert eagerly sought out Olaf, recommending three most suitable locations.

“Mr. Olaf! The southeastern and northeastern corners are the best spots…”

Olaf watched as Habert spoke with great enthusiasm, then pointed to the southeast and said, “Let’s build it there!”

With Olaf’s decision, the shipyard was ultimately constructed in the southeastern coastal area of Haldor City’s inner harbor.

That same afternoon, Habert led his apprentice workers to transport equipment, timber, and other materials to the site. He then directed the workers and slaves to level the land and begin constructing buildings, sheds, and walls.

By mid-July, the shipyard in Haldor City was already in the midst of intense construction. After the basic framework was completed, the shipbuilders, along with their apprentices, began setting up scaffolding, cranes, waterwheels, windmills, and other large and small equipment. These were the most advanced tools in the Dutch shipbuilding industry, supporting their sophisticated shipbuilding technology.

By August, as the weather reached its hottest, the shipyard was basically completed. Inside the workshops, craftsmen in short sleeves were busy with the wood in their hands—some working together to carry and cut timber, others treating newly felled and dried wood with preservatives to strengthen its quality. Eighty to ninety craftsmen and apprentices were all hard at work.

Meanwhile, the shipyard’s leader, Habert, was inspecting the materials and components processed by the apprentices and craftsmen. After his inspection, he let out a sigh of relief and said to the apprentices beside him, “Sam, Bitton… You’ve all been doing very well lately. Starting tomorrow, I’ll personally teach you the core design blueprints, and then we’ll work together to build a sturdy and durable ship for young Master Olaf!”

The apprentices around Habert included those who had followed him from Amsterdam and others who had joined him in Hrut City. They all knew that Master Habert possessed the world’s most advanced shipbuilding techniques and designs, and that they now had the opportunity to become first-rate shipbuilders.

“Alright, Teacher!”

They all responded eagerly, then rolled up their sleeves and continued preparing materials.

While Haldor City was intensely engaged in the shipbuilding industry, the Raid General’s residence in Iceland’s five major regions also received a summons from His Highness Haldor, the Grand Duke of Iceland.

It turned out that in mid-July, Hongrode’s family had sent ships to Reykjavik, reporting that King Christian IV of Denmark had assembled a large army of over eleven thousand men and forty warships, preparing to set sail at the end of the month to attack Iceland.

Hongrode, representing his family, was playing both sides—his family in Denmark had leaked much information about Iceland to the Danish side and even provided some financial support. Meanwhile, Hongrode in Iceland showed his support and loyalty to His Highness, the Grand Duke Haldor.

After receiving the private letter from his family, Hongrode went to the Grand Duke’s residence early the next morning to meet with Haldor and inform him of Denmark’s military preparations.

Haldor asked, “Who is leading the troops? Is King Christian IV personally commanding the expedition?”

Hongrode shook his head and said, “His Majesty seems disheartened and unwilling to lead the troops himself. He has appointed his second son-in-law, Magnus, as the commander, with Governor Christian as the deputy commander.”

Haldor sat steadily, smiling as he asked, “Christian is Kolsvin’s father? That royal relative in his late fifties? There’s nothing to worry about with him. What about Magnus? Is he an excellent military commander?”

Hongrode thought for a moment and said, “Magnus comes from a prominent Danish family, and his family has always been responsible for training and commanding the Royal Guard. Previously, when King Christian IV personally led thirty-five thousand troops across the Baltic Sea into northern Germany, Magnus served as the deputy commander of over ten thousand guards. Although he hasn’t established any great achievements in his years of military service, he has certainly grown into a mature military commander. He may not have exceptional abilities, but he is steady and reliable! With excellent soldiers, he will be a formidable opponent for us!”

Haldor pondered for a moment and said, “What is the composition of Denmark’s eleven thousand soldiers? We cannot be careless!”

“From what I know, half are Scottish and English mercenaries, and the rest are Danish guards.”

“Thank you for your help, Elder. After we repel the Danish coalition forces, you can go to Vinland.”

Haldor knew that Hongrode had always wanted to go to Vinland to preach. Of course, his purpose was not just preaching but also to understand Vinland’s development, the roots of the Viking Raids, and the origins of unique and high-quality goods like molasses, bone china, royal jelly, and the Water of Life. He sought to uncover the special products and the channels behind them.

Haldor was very satisfied with Hongrode’s assistance and attitude, so he did not intend to be stingy.

Although Hongrode was a priest by name, he was essentially a merchant. His family had contracted the Danish East India Company, and now he and his family wanted to help Haldor establish companies in Vinland, the West Indies, and other places for trade.

Haldor’s words were a kind response to Hongrode’s goodwill. Hongrode understood that His Highness the Grand Duke was preparing to share a portion of the profits with him, so he patted his chest and said, “Your Highness! Rest assured, I will always be your loyal subject, and my family behind me will always be your most reliable friends!”

After this conversation between Haldor and Hongrode ended, soldiers carrying Haldor’s orders went to notify the five Raid Generals to come to the Grand Duke’s residence to discuss plans to counter the Danish expeditionary force.

On August 5th, after the Northeast Raid General Hoskuld returned last, in the meeting hall on the second floor of the Grand Duke’s residence, Grand Duke Haldor first shared the situation of the Danish expeditionary force, then together with the five Raid Generals, they formulated a detailed battle plan.

The meeting lasted until the afternoon before it ended. Haldor then invited them to stay for dinner in the castle. The next day, the Northeast Raid General Hoskuld, the Southeast Viking Raid General Hudik, the Northwest Viking Raid General Kadir, and the Southwest Viking Raid General Haig departed one after another. The Big Port Raid General Ulf was the first to take action.

According to the previously formulated plan, the five Raid Generals were each to train a formidable legion. Nearly three months had passed, and with the original old legion soldiers and officers as the backbone, each Raid legion had basically taken shape.

Thus, after listening to the reports from the five Raid Generals about the legions under their command, Haldor became increasingly confident.

This time, to deal with the Danish expeditionary force, apart from Ulf’s Big Port Raid, the remaining four Raids were to be fully mobilized to Big Port. This included four Viking Raid legions totaling seven thousand five hundred men, plus over a thousand guards from the Grand Duke’s residence and some militia. Haldor could thus gather nearly ten thousand warriors to face the Danish soldiers.

On August 6th, Haldor received the latest news from Hongrode: the Danish side planned to assemble their large army at the Copenhagen harbor on the 5th and set sail with fifty warships. Hongrode estimated that the Danish army was already at sea.

Based on the distance, Haldor and Ulf estimated that the Danish army would arrive in Iceland by the 10th at the latest, or as early as the 9th.

Judging by the time, Iceland only had three days to prepare, and the four Raid legions only had three days to prepare—both to return to Big Port and to divide their defensive areas. Time was very tight.

Chapter 179: The Storm Approaches

August 9, 1631. Reykjavik, once bustling, had fallen eerily quiet. The streets, usually teeming with life, were now occupied only by a handful of residents purchasing daily necessities and a large number of Viking soldiers.

The Big Port, which had only recently recovered eighty percent of its pre-war vitality, had been placed under strict lockdown days ago in preparation for the impending arrival of the Danish army. Under the watchful eye of Viking soldiers, all Icelanders remained indoors. Meanwhile, numerous Viking Raid generals, under the command of several leaders, were converging on Reykjavik—Haldor’s final preparations for the battle against Denmark.

Haldor and Ulf had spent the past week in full battle regalia, standing ready.

Over the past few days, the two Raid generals closest to the Big Port—Haig and Kadir—had already returned with their Viking Raid forces and been stationed accordingly.

Messengers from the more distant northeastern and southeastern Raid generals had informed Haldor that their forces were still en route and would not arrive at the Big Port until at least noon the following day.

Haldor placed great importance on defensive measures. After personally inspecting the fortifications of the Big Port and the Grand Duke’s residence, as well as the artillery and other defensive forces, it was already three in the afternoon.

Only now did Haldor, Ulf, Haig, and Kadir finally have time to sit down for a late lunch. The meal was simple—just a bowl of meat porridge, a plate of salted shark, a few smoked puffins, and some sliced black bread.

After finishing the porridge, Haldor wiped his mouth and asked, “We now have three Viking Raid forces and fifteen hundred of the Grand Duke’s guards—six thousand men in total. Even if the Danish army arrives now, I believe we can hold the Big Port! What do you think?”

Haldor’s question was not meant to invite dissent. He simply wanted everyone to stand united, their confidence unwavering as they prepared to repel the Danish expeditionary force.

Those present were Haldor’s closest friends and kin. They understood his sentiments well, and all agreed that fighting on home turf as the defending force, their current six thousand men were more than enough to drive back the Danes.

“Your Grace speaks the truth! We’ll send the Danes back to Copenhagen with their tails between their legs!”

“Denmark? They’re nothing but a pack of losers who couldn’t even hold their own against the Holy Roman Empire. How could they ever hope to match us?!”

“Hah! Exactly…”

The group mocked Denmark, which had recently fallen from its position as the dominant power in Northern Europe to become the laughingstock of the continent. Haldor then asked, “The Danish navy is still formidable. We cannot afford to be careless. Are our warships well hidden?”

Ulf nodded. “They’ve been concealed in the Bjarg Strait to the northwest. There’s a crude harbor there—formerly a stronghold of the Black Bear pirate gang. Kadir wiped them out last month and discovered it was a decent natural harbor. It’s secluded, close to Reykjavik, and all our warships from the Big Port are now docked there.”

Haldor thought for a moment. “I remember now. The former leader of the Black Bear pirates was a relative of Sigfoss—that pig-nosed Ozul who tried to assassinate me! The place is indeed well-suited.”

“We have too few warships, and no shipyards to supply or repair them. We can only protect our vessels and engage the Danes on land. If we can deal a heavy blow to their forces, the Free Republic of Iceland will secure its place in the world!”

Haig sighed deeply. He could not recall a time in his life when he had felt so frustrated. Though unafraid, Iceland’s lack of timber and skilled shipwrights meant they could neither build nor maintain large vessels. Their meager fleet left them powerless to challenge Denmark at sea, forcing them to wait passively on land for the enemy’s arrival.

Sensing the group’s morale dip, Ulf quickly stood up. “Don’t lose heart! If we can cripple the Danish expeditionary force, if we can make them bleed, they will learn to respect us!”

Kadir, who seemed to have caught a cold, spoke hoarsely. “Exactly. Once the Danes land, we’ll wipe them out. After that, they won’t dare think of attacking us for another year or two! And once we’ve consolidated Iceland’s population and resources with Vinland, we won’t have to fear Denmark ever again!”

Kadir’s words echoed the sentiments of most Viking Raid leaders. Haig clapped his hands. “That’s right! The Danes have more ships and cannons, and they’re better at naval warfare. So we won’t fight them at sea. We’ll wait for them here on Iceland. In a fair fight, I refuse to believe Viking men can lose to Danish cowards!”

“Hah…”

The group laughed heartily, their daily ritual of camaraderie boosting their spirits. They all turned to Haldor with renewed confidence.

“Your Grace! Is there anything else we need to prepare?”

Haldor recalled the clever strategy Olos had suggested to him a few days prior. His confidence grew. Waving his hand, he said, “You’ve all done well. Now, we wait. I’ve already prepared enough surprises for the Danes. I’m certain none of us will be disappointed.”

Time ticked by…

As the Viking soldiers in Reykjavik made their final, tense preparations, the afternoon sky suddenly darkened. A chilly wind swept in, bringing with it a fine, persistent rain.

“It’s raining!” Hearing the patter outside, Haldor pushed open the stained-glass window and looked out. The rain was growing heavier, and his mood grew somber.

Gilson entered, his voice grave. “Your Grace! It’s raining!”

“Yes… In this rain, our firelock muskets will be useless. If it gets any heavier, even the flintlock firearms will be difficult to use. If the Danish army arrives now, it will throw all our plans into chaos!”

Haldor frowned deeply. His mood had soured.

In Haldor and his comrades’ strategy, the Viking Raid forces held little advantage over the Danish expeditionary army.

The Vikings lacked the Danes’ battle experience, and their numbers were inferior. Their only edge was the widespread equipping of flintlock firearms and an ample supply of ammunition.

To maximize this advantage, all five Viking Raid forces had undergone specialized training. Every soldier had been drilled in musketry alongside other combat skills. The Icelandic forces were no longer a one-dimensional army—they now fielded musketeers, long spearmen, throwing axe troops, and even archers. Each man had been pushed to his limits in training, all in preparation to unleash their full combat potential against the Danish expeditionary force.

For Haldor, the pressure was immense. He viewed the Danish expeditionary force as his greatest adversary, fearing that inadequate preparation would lead to defeat and disgrace.

The Viking Raid forces were fully armed with flintlock firearms. Their plan was to ambush and engage the Danish expeditionary force upon landing, using volleys to inflict maximum damage and achieve the best possible outcome.

Though Iceland’s population was only half that of Denmark, the Viking forces possessed more firearms—a fact that gave Haldor and his allies their best chance at victory.

Their strategy relied on using firearms to immediately kill, wound, or rout the Danish troops, giving them a fighting chance at triumph.

But fate was unkind. Just as the Danish warships and transports were nearing Iceland, the rain began to fall. Though the downpour hindered both sides, it disrupted Haldor’s carefully laid plans, making it difficult to execute his strategy of delivering a crushing first strike to the Danes.

Chapter 180: The Great Battle Begins

The sudden rain disrupted Haldor’s original strategic plans, limiting the effectiveness of the Viking musketeers and adding more uncertainty to an already precarious future. This was something Haldor found hard to accept.

Just as Haldor was anxious and worried, the door was suddenly pushed open by Haig, with Olos following behind. Water dripped from their beards and plate armor, splattering onto the wooden floor and instantly soaking a large patch.

Haig’s face was ashen, his hands clenched tightly as he spoke rapidly: “Brother, the ships on patrol at sea just reported… The Danish navy has approached Iceland and is about to enter Reykjavik harbor!”

Haldor’s mood shifted like the seasons in an instant, but relying on his years of colonial experience and rich knowledge, he suppressed his inner turmoil and calmly stood up. “Summon all the leaders of the legion immediately. We will occupy the buildings around the harbor and block the Danish army!”

After speaking, Haldor turned to Olos, his gaze firm as he asked, “Now it all depends on whether your strategy will work!”

Olos’s expression was resolute as he replied in a low voice, “Your Highness! The musicians and poets are all ready. After we leave, the lamps will be lit in the duke’s mansion, and music will play. Hongrode’s personal servant will also go to the harbor to wait. We will definitely defeat Denmark! You can rest assured!”

Haldor felt slightly relieved and nodded.

The messengers Haldor sent out quickly left the duke’s mansion and disappeared into the rain over Big Port. Haldor changed into his military attire, and with Haig and others, along with their personal guards, they braved the rain and left the duke’s mansion, heading to the harbor. The decisive battle that would determine the fate of the nation was about to begin, and Haldor had to command and supervise it personally.

When Haldor arrived, Ulf was directing soldiers to drive all the residents out of the buildings around the harbor. After the ships that had been patrolling outside the harbor returned, Ulf quickly acted to clear the residents from the harbor area. The buildings inside the harbor were already packed with over three thousand Viking soldiers holding firearms, a location Ulf had prepared two days in advance for the ambush.

Haldor and the others’ original plan was to find suitable shooting positions within the harbor, dispatch some musketeers to ambush, and have the remaining large number of soldiers attack head-on in the square, achieving the best results with a two-pronged attack.

Ulf, young and impetuous, had his own ideas. He expanded the layout of the shooting positions, preparing to ambush his entire legion to deliver a heavy blow to the Danish soldiers as they landed.

But today, with the rain, Ulf keenly realized that a frontal attack would leave the musketeers at a disadvantage under the rain. Therefore, he decisively commandeered all the houses inside and outside the harbor, planning to have all the Viking soldiers enter the rooms to shoot at the Danes. Even if they couldn’t heavily damage them, they could at least prevent the Danish soldiers from advancing deep into Reykjavik. As long as the Danish soldiers were trapped in the harbor, the scales of victory would tip in Iceland’s favor. The Viking raid legions from the northeast and southeast were expected to arrive in Reykjavik by this afternoon at the latest. The addition of three thousand fresh troops would greatly enhance Iceland’s strength, giving them a total of nine thousand soldiers. This would allow them to use their home-field advantage and comparable manpower to drive the Danish expeditionary force back into the sea.

Ulf saw his father appear and hurriedly rode over, saying, “Father! I have already commandeered all the buildings around the harbor, inside and out. We have stationed all our troops there. When the Danish legion lands, they will definitely form a square formation and attack the duke’s mansion. We can wait until they enter the ambush zone and then launch a volley attack, which will surely inflict heavy casualties on the Danish soldiers!”

Haldor and Haig were both seasoned generals, though they had never led a war against a powerful European civilization. However, their combat awareness and experience were abundant.

As soon as Ulf finished speaking, Haldor understood and straightened up, looking at the misty sea in the distance. He said in a deep voice, “The Danish warships will probably enter the harbor in less than ten minutes! Everyone, quickly lead your soldiers into the suitable shooting houses! Wait for my command. I will fire the first shot, and then everyone can shoot freely!”

“Yes! Your Highness!”

The Viking legions, led by their respective officers, entered the houses inside and outside the harbor, then wiped the gun barrels and took out two waterproof leather bags filled with gunpowder and bullets to load their ammunition.

A continuous drizzle enveloped Reykjavik harbor, making the afternoon harbor unusually dark.

Taverns, inns, blacksmith shops, grain stores, and other shops all lit their lamps. The orange-yellow light seeped out from the windows of the houses inside and outside the harbor, appearing warm and cozy. However, there were no residents living in any of these rooms. All the residents had been driven to the church in the East District by the Viking soldiers to live temporarily. These rooms were now packed with Viking soldiers, sharpening their knives and waiting for the Danish army.

Ulf, Haig, and Kadir, the three legion commanders, were scattered in the best shooting positions on the east, south, and north sides of the harbor, constantly looking out, hoping to see the Danish ships from the misty western sea.

Haldor and his two hundred personal guards hid in a corner shop on the east side of the harbor. It was a two-story stone house. The first floor sold sundries and daily necessities, and the stairs outside led to the second floor, which was a bar selling beer and whiskey.

Haldor wiped the water droplets from his body with a towel while holding a monocular telescope, looking at the distant sea.

A moment later, Haldor’s hands trembled, and his shoulders and back stiffened.

“The Danish warships have entered the harbor!”

Haldor muttered, and the chaotic thoughts in his mind threatened to surge again.

In the fine rain, one after another, tall and slender two-story warships, led by a three-story flagship, pierced through the rain and waves, entering Reykjavik harbor.

The lookout sailors on the warships, seeing the empty harbor, hurriedly went down to report. The already slow-moving fleet slowed down again. Amidst the tense soldiers and gunners holding cannonballs and torches on dozens of warships, the fleet gradually entered the harbor.

On the second floor of the flagship was the cockpit, and behind the cockpit was the command room of the supreme commander of the Danish expeditionary force.

Now, in the narrow and cramped room, there were more than a dozen people. At the forefront were two generals wearing half-body armor with golden patterns. Both had helmets with a golden shield emblem, featuring three crowned lions—the lion shield emblem of the Danish royal family, which only royal members and highly esteemed ministers were qualified to wear.

The much younger general had bright blue eyes. He was thin, with sunken cheeks, but his eyes were sharp, and he had a large hooked nose, giving him a very imposing presence.

Next to the young general stood the old general with graying hair and beard. He was obese, with somewhat grayish eyes, exuding an unhealthy glow. However, the old general’s expression was extremely excited. He pointed at Reykjavik harbor in front of the window and growled, “Magnus! Haldor and Haig, those traitors, are right ahead! After we dock, we will attack with all our might, using the Danish iron army to crush Haldor’s pitiful forces. We will show the Icelandic scum that they will forever be nothing but maggots, worms, and crawling insects under His Majesty’s red carpet!”

Magnus, the second son-in-law of King Christian IV of Denmark, raised an eyebrow. Over the past week, he had grown tired of the neurotic old man beside him. However, this nobleman named Christian, who shared the king’s name, was not someone he could afford to ignore or offend.

Magnus sighed inwardly but maintained a gentle and refined demeanor as he said, “Lord Christian, your stove is excellent. However, for this campaign against the Icelandic rebels, His Majesty has appointed me as the supreme commander. Therefore, please follow the king’s orders!”

Christian coldly snorted, “Rest assured, I am not yet senile. As long as you don’t act like a coward, I will certainly follow the general’s instructions!”

Chapter 181: Prelude to the Symphony

Crack!

The gloomy sky suddenly lit up with a white flash, followed moments later by a thunderous roar that shook the heavens.

The Danish fleet entered the harbor of Reykjavik, surrounding the entire port before revealing their dark cannon barrels. After waiting a moment and finding no enemies on the docks, the Danish commander, Magnus, ordered some ships to dock and organized soldiers to disembark and stand guard.

Soon, the empty harbor of Reykjavik was filled with a thousand-strong Danish army. They formed a square formation, clad in half plate armor and wielding long spears.

A tall figure in a black robe, holding an umbrella, suddenly appeared in the empty harbor. He quickly approached the Danish army and, after presenting a medal proving his identity, was escorted by several Danish officers to the flagship.

Entering the cabin, the figure removed his hood, revealing the face of a middle-aged man. He looked at Magnus, dressed in luxurious armor, and Christian, then knelt on one knee and bowed his head. “I am Inubia, the personal servant of Elder Hongrode. He sent me to present intelligence to General Magnus!”

The Hongrode family had a glorious history in Denmark spanning hundreds of years. Though they had never produced a prime minister, they had once held two ministerial positions. The current patriarch, Hongrode’s father, was a prominent figure in the Danish Lutheran Church.

Over a decade ago, when King Christian IV of Denmark outsourced the East India Company, Hongrode’s father had invested and taken over its operations. In recent years, the business had thrived, contributing an annual fee of one million two hundred thousand shillings to King Christian IV—equivalent to one hundred twenty thousand silver marks.

Given the family’s influence and financial interests, Hongrode, as the heir, was a figure the Danish government could not afford to overlook. He was a frequent guest at the Danish royal court. In the conflict between Iceland and Denmark, Hongrode and his family had maintained a neutral stance, hedging their bets. Personally, Hongrode was inclined to support Haldor’s quest for Icelandic independence, driven by self-interest.

During the tenure of Governor Kolsvin and others, the Hongrode family’s business had been barred from Iceland, and Hongrode himself had not received sufficient respect from Kolsvin. This had led Hongrode to dismiss Iceland as merely a Danish colony. If he helped Haldor and Iceland achieve independence, he and his family would gain immense wealth and political resources.

A merchant’s loyalty to their kingdom depended on how much wealth the kingdom provided them. If Olaf were in Iceland, he would advise his father, Haldor, to maintain the closest possible relationship with Hongrode. When Hongrode decided to betray Denmark’s interests, he would do so thoroughly, hoping to secure the best price. Haldor of Iceland was the best buyer…

Merchants like Hongrode might not understand the phrase “sending charcoal in the snow,” but as a merchant family, they understood the principle. Betting on Haldor’s victory was risky but promised great rewards. Moreover, Haldor and his army had given Hongrode considerable confidence, so he had already leaned toward supporting Haldor.

A few days earlier, when Olos had visited, Hongrode had personally received this high-ranking Viking official, whose appearance differed from Europeans. He had also accepted the strategy proposed by Olos.

It turned out that Olos, to ensure the Danish expeditionary force would march straight to the Governor’s Mansion upon arriving in Reykjavik rather than cautiously searching the surrounding buildings, had followed Haldor’s suggestion. He hoped Hongrode would send a trusted aide to guide the way. Only with Hongrode, who was loyal to Denmark, leading them would the Danish commander be convinced.

Current events were unfolding according to Olos’s plan.

Magnus questioned Inubia and examined the medal bestowed upon the Hongrode family by the late king. After confirming his reliability, he asked in a deep voice, “What is the situation now? Why is the harbor empty? Where is Hongrode?”

Inubia cleared his throat and said, “My master was invited by Haldor to attend a banquet at the Grand Duke’s Mansion. Since Haldor killed Kolsvin and became the Grand Duke of Iceland, he has been recklessly reforming the island, imposing heavy taxes, and indulging in feasts and revelry at the mansion every night. The people of Iceland are suffering greatly, and now they can’t even secure basic necessities. The harbor has long lost its former prosperity!”

“General! My master has had me wait at the harbor every day. Before he left for the banquet today, he instructed me to tell you to seize the opportunity and attack the Grand Duke’s Mansion immediately. Right now, Haldor’s mansion is filled with the generals and leaders of the Viking Raid. If you can capture them all at once, Iceland will return to Danish rule!”

Before Magnus could speak, Christian suddenly exclaimed, “Excellent! Magnus, with Hongrode’s intelligence, we should organize the army to march straight to the Governor’s Mansion! If we delay any longer, Haldor’s Viking soldiers might mobilize!”

Magnus was a cautious man. Having fought alongside his father-in-law, King Christian IV, in northern Germany and against the armies of the Holy Roman Empire, he had witnessed many powerful armies and formidable generals.

Although having Hongrode as an inside man was reassuring, and the small island of Iceland with only a few tens of thousands of people could not shake Denmark’s rule, Magnus still calmed Christian and asked, “Tell me, how many troops does Haldor have, and how many are currently stationed in Reykjavik?”

Without hesitation, Inubia replied, “Haldor has over four thousand soldiers. My master mentioned this in his previous report to you. These soldiers are all fierce warriors, and more than half are musketeers. My master had already warned you to be careful. Recently, there was a rebellion in northeastern Iceland, and Haldor sent a third of his troops to suppress it. There should be over three thousand soldiers in Big Port now…”

Inubia’s account matched the information Magnus had received from other sources, convincing him of its authenticity. He quickly ordered all ships to dock and the soldiers to disembark and assemble.

Iceland was extremely remote from any European country. Even the fastest ships would take three to four days to reach the nearest Scotland or Norway. For Icelanders, without large ships, crossing to Europe was impossible.

Due to Iceland’s unique environment and location, after Haldor occupied the island, he had dispatched Viking generals to manage the four regions, registering and controlling all Icelandic ships. Ships within the island were temporarily prohibited from leaving, and any returning ships were immediately seized.

Thus, there was no possibility of information leaking from Iceland. Moreover, most Icelanders were unaware of valuable intelligence.

Denmark’s understanding of Iceland and Haldor was entirely based on the accounts of Danish merchants who had returned from Iceland and figures like Hongrode. In the minds of Magnus, Christian, and King Christian IV, the so-called Icelandic Free Republic and Grand Duke were merely a group of mercenaries and pirates, numbering around four thousand, with half equipped with firearms and possessing over twenty large ships. They indeed had a strength approaching that of a regular army.

However, if Denmark were to mobilize its entire nation against Iceland, Christian IV, Magnus, and others did not believe Haldor and his forces would pose a significant threat.

In the pre-war meetings, everyone had identified two fatal flaws in the so-called Viking Raid of Iceland. The first was the lack of cavalry. In an era where cavalry held immense power, with two thousand cavalry and three to four thousand regular soldiers, the Danish expeditionary force could easily defeat or even annihilate the Icelandic Viking Raid.

The second fatal flaw was Iceland’s lack of shipyards and the timber to support them. Whether in naval battles or using Denmark’s powerful navy to blockade and control Iceland, this was a good method to weaken and defeat Haldor.

Chapter 182: The Climax Strikes

Believing he had the overwhelming strength to crush Iceland, Magnus set out with unwavering confidence. Backed by King Christian IV of Denmark, he led a massive naval fleet, three thousand cavalry, and eight thousand mercenaries to invade Iceland.

Due to the disparity in intelligence, the Danish forces were completely unaware that Haldor had the support of Vinland in North America behind him.

No one could have imagined—or even fathomed—that in less than two months, Haldor would use the wealth of land and slaves from distant Vinland to win over the hearts and resources of Iceland, even training an army of nearly ten thousand men.

Information asymmetry was a decisive factor in battle. With Denmark’s current battle plan, victory was already an uphill struggle.

Upon receiving firsthand intelligence from Inubia—information that greatly favored their side—Magnus and Christian’s confidence soared. Once the troops were assembled, the two men donned deer-hide raincoats and, with the help of attendants, mounted their tall, sturdy Arabian horses, riding to the front of the formation.

“This rain couldn’t have come at a better time! It seems Haldor wasn’t prepared, or perhaps the rain has left the harbor unguarded. We should strike quickly, breach the Duke’s Manor, and capture Haldor and his band of traitors. Then Iceland will return to His Majesty’s rule!”

Christian extended his hand, letting the raindrops fall into his palm, then turned to speak.

Magnus pondered for a moment. Though it all seemed too easy, considering Iceland’s centuries of peace and its barren, impoverished state—lacking any foundation to resist—he wasn’t particularly worried about Haldor. Thus, he agreed with Christian’s proposal.

After a brief pause, Magnus, still mounted, ordered the entire army to advance through the rain. He demanded they reach the former Governor’s Mansion in the East District—now called the Duke’s Manor—within ten minutes to capture Haldor and his men in one fell swoop.

The Danish army, already formed into a square formation, moved instantly upon receiving the layered commands. Like a coiling dragon, they advanced toward the only brightly lit structure in the dim, rainy east—the former Governor’s Mansion.

Magnus and Christian, as the supreme commanders, led the cavalry through the center of the army. Surrounded front and back by Danish soldiers carrying firearms and long spears, the massive force snaked its way from the docks into the harbor’s plaza.

Though Magnus trusted Hongrode, the gloomy, overcast weather revealed faint glimmers of lamplight from the buildings around the harbor. In the distance, the towering Duke’s Manor shone with light, and the faint strains of the “Frog Galliard” could be heard.

Familiar with banquet music, Magnus and Christian recognized the “Frog Galliard” as a piece revised twenty years prior by the English musical master John Dowland.

The lively dance tune echoed through the rainy night, convincing Magnus and Christian that the intelligence Hongrode’s servant had brought was accurate—Haldor was indeed hosting a banquet in the manor, with no Viking soldiers lying in ambush nearby.

Though convinced, Magnus remained cautious. He dispatched several hundred cavalry to patrol the flanks of the formation, guarding against potential Viking ambushes, scouts, or escape attempts.

The waterlogged stone streets splashed underfoot as the army of over ten thousand men, like a long serpent, advanced from the docks to the crossroads connecting the harbor and the East District.

From the second floor of a stone building at the northeast corner of the crossroads, Haldor peered through a crack in the window. Behind him, soldiers held their breath. The dull, rhythmic footsteps and thunderous hoofbeats outside grew louder, heightening their tension.

Haldor had watched the Danish army assemble at the distant docks before setting out. His gaze remained fixed on the two figures at the center of the cavalry, heavily guarded. Though the distance made their features indistinct, Haldor keenly sensed they were none other than Magnus, the commander of the Danish expeditionary force, and his deputy, Christian.

As the Danish vanguard neared the edge of the ambush zone and the two commanders entered the kill zone, Haldor knew the moment to strike had arrived. He personally took up a loaded flintlock pistol, quietly pushed the window open just enough to expose a palm’s width, and fired.

Bang!

The gunshot, like thunder, echoed through Reykjavik’s harbor at dusk. Many Danish soldiers initially mistook it for thunder, but as shouts of “Enemy attack!” erupted from the front lines, they hastily drew their firearms.

Haldor’s single shot felled two Danish soldiers. As the soldiers below scrambled in confusion—some looking at the fallen, others scanning their surroundings—the doors and windows of dozens of buildings around the harbor burst open, revealing Viking soldiers with raised guns. Over five thousand Vikings fired in unison, their merciless bullets tearing into the nearly defenseless Danish troops.

The sudden volley of over five thousand gunshots roared like thunder in their ears. Two to three thousand Danish soldiers, unable to take cover, were struck—some in the head, others in the chest or abdomen. Helmets and armor were pierced or deformed, killing or stunning them instantly.

The luckier ones were hit in non-vital areas like arms, legs, or shoulders, leaving them incapacitated but alive.

“God! That cunning Haldor!” Magnus had ducked behind his horse at the first gunshot. When he looked up, he saw Viking soldiers pouring out of buildings in all directions. His army of over ten thousand had yet to fire a single shot or engage in close combat, yet nearly a third had already fallen.

Christian, startled by the gunfire, had tumbled from his horse and crawled out of a gutter. Without bothering to wipe the mud from his face, he pointed around in terror, shouting, “The Icelandic rebels have appeared! Order the men to return fire!”

Magnus slapped his forehead and bellowed the command to retaliate. The remaining eighty percent of the Danish soldiers quickly formed a square formation. Over five thousand musketeers, undeterred by the rain, raised their firearms and fired back at the Viking soldiers visible in the windows and doorways. The patrolling cavalry charged toward the buildings where the attackers had appeared.

Bang…

After firing their first shots, the Viking soldiers retreated into the buildings, crouching to reload for a second volley. Thus, ninety percent of the Danish counterattack missed its mark, only damaging doors, windows, and walls.

After retaliating, the Danish soldiers, led by the cavalry, charged toward the buildings where the Vikings were stationed. But as the cavalry approached, the Vikings emerged again for a second, even deadlier volley.

This time, most of the casualties were Danish cavalry. As before, most were only wounded, but whether dead or injured, the Danish expeditionary force suffered real losses.

After the second volley, the strongest Viking warriors armed themselves with long spears, short spears, and hand axes, crouching behind doors and windows. When the Danish soldiers drew near, they unleashed a barrage of throwing axes, javelins, and even arrows, forcing the Danes to retreat after leaving several corpses behind.

The Icelanders had inherited the thousand-year-old Viking art of throwing axes and javelins, a skill that had once shaken Europe. Even now, Icelanders used these techniques during raids. In close combat, the power of throwing axes and javelins was immense, capable of inflicting heavy casualties.

After repeated strikes, the Danish soldiers’ morale plummeted. They fired two more volleys at the buildings before slowly retreating in a tight formation, firing as they went, terrified that the Vikings might suddenly reappear and kill them.

Chapter 183: Blood Battle

The Danish expeditionary force landed in the afternoon around four o’clock, but before they could even reach the East District where the Duke’s Manor in Reykjavik was located, they were ambushed by the Viking Raid. Within half an hour, they were forced to retreat in disarray back to the harbor.

The Viking soldiers, taking advantage of the sudden attack, effectively killed and wounded a large number of Danish soldiers. The Danish soldiers, hampered by the rain, found it difficult to load their ammunition, and the gunpowder often became damp, resulting in a high proportion of misfires after the second round of shooting.

The Danish army was unable to advance and could only retreat to the docks under the reluctant roar of Christian.

At this point, only over seven thousand Danish soldiers were still standing; the rest were either injured and being carried or had already perished on the harbor’s ground.

Magnus and Christian, as the mounted commanders, were immediately targeted by the Viking marksmen. Fortunately, the distance was too great, and they were unharmed. To save their lives, the two had long since abandoned their prized steeds and, under the protection of their guards, retreated to the flagship.

With both the main and deputy commanders retreating to the sea, the soldiers at the docks also scrambled to squeeze through the narrow passage behind them, each desperate to board the ships, as if boarding would guarantee their survival.

Standing by the window, Haldor watched the chaotic and disheveled Danish soldiers in the distance, his heart swelling with pride. He knew that after this battle, neither he nor any Viking soldier, nor even the Icelanders, would ever fear the Danes again.

With a grand gesture, Haldor joyfully commanded, “Pass my order—full assault! Let’s drive the Danes back into the sea in one fell swoop!”

Haldor’s personal guards were the first to leave on horseback to relay the command. Following them, several dozen soldiers armed with firearms rushed out of the house, shouting, “Full assault! Drive the Danes back into the sea!” as they charged toward the harbor.

Haldor’s command became the outlet for the elated Viking soldiers to vent their emotions after repelling the Danes. All the Viking soldiers roared as they rushed out of the rooms, each clutching a loaded firearm, with short spears and throwing axes at their waists, striding toward the harbor.

Every Viking soldier’s face gleamed with excitement. They no longer saw the Danish soldiers as formidable foes but as lambs to be slaughtered, eager to charge forward and use the Danes’ blood as a stepping stone for their own promotions.

Due to the prolonged rain, the barrels of the Danes’ firearms were filled with water, rendering them useless. All the Danes could do was grip their long spears, swords, and other weapons, forming a square formation under the shouts of their officers as they awaited the Viking soldiers.

The Viking soldiers ran faster and faster, their formation dissolving. As they closed in, they fired their guns, dropping a few Danes, then discarded their firearms, grabbing the javelins and throwing axes at their waists and hurling them with all their might.

The Danish soldiers once again suffered an onslaught of firearms and throwing axes, losing another batch of brave fighters.

After two waves of attacks, the Viking soldiers drew their long spears and axes, engaging the Danish soldiers in close combat.

At this moment, the remaining two thousand Danish cavalry, under Magnus’s command, had already assembled in a corner of the harbor. Gripping their lances, they charged full force toward the Viking soldiers occupying the docks, attempting to use the cavalry’s spearhead to shatter the Viking soldiers and turn defeat into victory.

In many battles, a cavalry charge could be the decisive factor in determining the outcome. Magnus and Christian had pinned their hopes on the two thousand Danish royal cavalry.

“Boom… boom…”

The charge of the Danish royal cavalry was like an unstoppable tidal wave, and the brave Viking soldiers were utterly unable to halt the cavalry’s advance.

Hundreds of Viking soldiers were trampled and crushed by the cavalry. Soon, the Danish cavalry had charged from the docks to the easternmost end of the harbor, cutting down and trampling three to four hundred Viking soldiers along the way, with over a thousand more injured.

Haldor knew that the harbor square was ideal for cavalry charges. With the rain making firearms impractical, there was no effective means of resistance at short notice. To prevent another Danish cavalry charge, Haldor personally summoned the several hundred cavalry hidden in the East District and ordered the Viking soldiers to take cover in nearby buildings.

The over six hundred cavalry hidden in the East District were the entirety of Iceland’s current cavalry forces. Haldor had originally intended to keep them as a fresh reserve to either salvage a losing situation or pursue a victory. However, the one-sided victory was now showing signs of collapse due to the sudden intervention of the Danish cavalry, forcing Haldor to use his last resort.

“Clop… clop…”

The sound of hooves grew louder. Haig, Haldor, Kadir, and Ulf went forward to meet them, taking the reins of four sturdy horses from the Viking cavalry and mounting them. Then, Haldor looked at the Danish cavalry in the distance, drew the long spear from his horse’s back, and shouted, “Charge!”

“Charge!”

With only a third of the Danish cavalry’s numbers, the Viking cavalry, led by Grand Duke Haldor and the three Viking generals, fearlessly galloped toward the Danish cavalry. Soon, the two groups of cavalry collided.

The neighing of horses, the clashing of weapons, the sound of sharp blades piercing flesh, and the thud of heavy objects hitting the ground filled the air. When the two groups of cavalry passed through each other and turned their horses to face each other again, the Viking cavalry had lost a third of their numbers, but the Danish cavalry had also suffered a third of their losses. The disparity in numbers resulted in the same proportional casualties, and each Danish cavalryman was somewhat moved, with fear even appearing in their eyes.

In reality, the Viking cavalry had the advantage of being well-rested, while the Danish cavalry was already exhausted. Additionally, the Viking cavalry was led by Haldor and other major leaders, which ignited a stronger fighting spirit in the Viking soldiers. This was why the battle ended in a draw. If they clashed two more times, the Danish cavalry could still leverage their numerical advantage to achieve final victory.

Haldor, Haig, and Ulf were all splattered with fresh blood on their bodies and faces, the blood of the enemies they had slain. Kadir, due to a moment of carelessness, had a wound on his right arm from a Danish cavalryman, but he discarded his long spear and picked up a large axe with his left hand, coldly staring ahead, seemingly indifferent to his own pain.

“Brother, Kadir is a berserker too!” Haig exclaimed in admiration.

Haldor nodded slightly and said, “Today, all the Vikings who fought are berserkers, worthy of the blood of our Viking ancestors! The Danish cavalry is hesitating to charge again—they’re already afraid. Let’s charge once more and try to rout them!”

“Grand Duke’s order—the enemy is already afraid. Charge!” Kadir endured the excruciating pain, feeling his muscles twitching with every movement of his wound. He tightened his back muscles and, with a loud shout, was the first to charge.

The Danish cavalry, fearing the Viking cavalry, hesitated to charge again. The Viking soldiers hiding in the surrounding buildings, seeing their Grand Duke leading the cavalry to a draw with the Danish cavalry, were excited and rushed out again. They hurled their throwing axes and short spears at the Danish cavalry with all their might. Additionally, three to four hundred Viking marksmen aimed their undampened firearms at the Danish cavalry and pulled the triggers.

Before the Danish cavalry could muster the courage for a second charge, they were surrounded and attacked by the Viking soldiers. After half a day of entanglement, the Danish cavalry left behind over six hundred corpses before breaking through the encirclement and escaping back to the docks. By then, the majority of the Danish infantry had already fled onto the warships.

Chapter 184: The Invincible Vikings

Magnus, his face pale from the sudden and crushing defeat, stood at the bow of the ship, disheveled and exhausted. He had barely managed to rally his scattered troops, only to see the Danish royal cavalry—his last hope—ambushed and nearly annihilated by the Viking cavalry and musketeers. His already foul mood darkened further.

As the remaining cavalry broke through the encirclement and neared the docks, Magnus hastily ordered his men to cover their retreat. But behind them, Haldor himself led the Viking cavalry in relentless pursuit. Magnus dared not delay. He issued command after command, ordering the dozens of warships blockading the harbor to open fire on the shore, buying time for the royal cavalry to board while hoping to kill Haldor and his men in the barrage.

Boom! Boom…

Over a hundred cannons roared in unison, their iron cannonballs screeching as they tore through the harbor. Haldor and his men, seasoned in the ways of artillery, knew better than to stand their ground. They leapt from their horses and pressed themselves into the dirt.

When the barrage finally ceased, the harbor was unrecognizable. Six buildings lay in ruins, and the once-smooth stone pavement was now pockmarked with over a hundred craters.

Haldor quickly turned to check on his soldiers. Aside from a dozen unlucky Vikings and a few horses reduced to pulp, most had survived the assault.

Realizing the Danish expeditionary force intended to exploit their superior firepower to bombard the harbor, Haldor shouted, “All units, retreat from the harbor! Get out of the cannon fire’s range!”

Haig and Ulf scrambled to their feet, ordering the Viking soldiers to withdraw.

The Danish ships were anchored at the docks, allowing them to fire relentlessly at the harbor and shore. The Vikings could no longer inflict any meaningful damage on the Danes. Lingering would only lead to more unnecessary deaths.

Time dragged on. The light rain had turned into a downpour, and Reykjavik, now shrouded in darkness, offered no light—no torches could be lit in the storm. Haldor led his men in a blind retreat through the night.

The Danish warships, unable to see their targets, fired wildly at the docks. No longer concerned with precision, the battered Danes vented their frustration through the relentless bombardment.

The cannon fire over Reykjavik’s harbor raged all night. By dawn, as the eastern sky lightened, Magnus, Christian, and the Danish soldiers stood on deck, staring at the devastated harbor.

The once-bustling port was now a wasteland. Every building had collapsed, some reduced to rubble. The smooth stone pavement was now a jagged, uneven mess.

The entire harbor, along with the eastern, southern, and northern districts near the docks, had been pummeled. Within a kilometer radius of the docks, the land had been plowed over by cannon fire.

The excessive use of artillery had caused over a dozen cannons to explode during the night, costing the Danes another forty lives.

Neither Magnus, aboard the ship, nor Haldor, in the Duke’s Manor, had slept a wink. Both men and their subordinates remained in full battle gear, watching each other warily.

Seeing the harbor reduced to ruins, Magnus and Christian felt a grim satisfaction.

“Damn Haldor! Those cursed Icelanders! After a night of bombardment, they must have suffered heavily!” Christian didn’t realize it, but his hatred for Haldor was now tinged with fear. Unconsciously, he sought emotional balance.

Magnus, however, remained calm. He shook his head. “Even if we killed two thousand Icelanders, it wouldn’t change the fact that we’ve already lost this battle.”

Recalling the latest casualty report, he continued grimly, “Out of eleven thousand soldiers, over two thousand were killed in a single day, and more than four thousand wounded. I doubt I’ll escape dismissal when I return to Denmark. God help me—who could have imagined the Icelanders were so cunning? They must have known Hongrode was ours all along. They deceived him, and they deceived us!”

Even now, Magnus refused to believe Hongrode had betrayed them. In his mind, impoverished Iceland held no appeal for Hongrode, so there was no reason for him to betray Denmark for such a barren land.

Christian shook his head. “With no proper care on the ships, who knows how many of the wounded will survive? We were careless.”

Magnus nodded solemnly. “We have barely four thousand infantry and a thousand cavalry left. Haldor knows the terrain, and he still has several thousand men. If we keep fighting, we won’t win—we might even face total annihilation. Old Governor, should we retreat?”

“Retreat? Impossible!” Christian instinctively objected, but after a pause, he realized their surviving forces were no match for Haldor. Though they had no way of knowing how many of Haldor’s men remained after the night’s battle and bombardment, the string of defeats had left both Christian and Magnus fearing Haldor.

The two highest-ranking commanders of the Danish expeditionary force now saw Haldor as their most formidable enemy—comparable to Wallenstein, the legendary mercenary commander of the Holy Roman Empire.

In their hearts, they believed it would take at least three times their current strength to stand against Haldor’s Vikings. After a moment’s thought, Christian nodded. “Our losses are too great. We can’t afford any more meaningless sacrifices. You’re right, Magnus. We should retreat.”

Magnus sighed deeply, his shoulders slumping as he issued the withdrawal order. Then he collapsed into his chair, muttering, “I must be the most disgraceful military commander in Danish history… I have no face to see His Majesty…”

Christian was no strategist, but he was a master of political maneuvering. He quickly devised a plan, leaning in to whisper to Magnus, “Don’t despair, young man! Half of this army was funded by my own purse. The consequences won’t be as dire as you think. And we can shift the blame—after all, last night was chaotic. Haldor didn’t just have four or five thousand men; he suddenly had over ten thousand! That’s why our losses were so heavy. Don’t you agree?”

Magnus repeated the words in confusion, then his eyes lit up. “Exactly! Haldor’s forces weren’t the four thousand Hongrode claimed, nor the four thousand the Danish merchants reported—they were nearly twenty thousand! We were surrounded! If not for our brilliant tactics and desperate breakout, we might have been wiped out entirely!”

“You’re a quick learner,” Christian said with a nod, then added meaningfully, “But that alone won’t be enough.”

“What else must we do?” Magnus asked respectfully.

Christian’s voice was heavy with implication. “As the supreme commander, you fought desperately to break free. Surely, you must have been gravely wounded… perhaps even unconscious for two or three days…”

Magnus understood instantly. He ordered his personal guards to slash his thigh, arm, and shoulder.

Then, exhausted from sleeplessness and wracked with pain, he truly passed out.

Chapter 185: The Face of War

The sporadic cannon fire that had been echoing outside had ceased for nearly half a day. Haldor glanced at the self-striking clock on the wall and rasped, “It’s almost four o’clock. Why has the cannon fire stopped? Is Magnus sending more men ashore?”

Ulf rubbed his forehead and said, “I’ll send someone to check.”

Soon, three knights departed from the front hall toward the harbor.

Half an hour later, Ulf, who had been waiting outside the hall, saw the returning knights. His face lit up with joy as he hurried back into the front hall.

“Father! The rain has stopped! The Danes are gone! Magnus and the Danish warships have retreated!”

Hearing Ulf’s words, Haldor suddenly stood up and waved his hand. “Let’s go to the harbor and see for ourselves.”

Moments later, Haldor, Ulf, Haig, Kadir, and over four hundred Viking cavalry appeared near the harbor. Their faces were ashen, their expressions grim. The sight of the harbor, devastated by a night of bombardment, filled them with sorrow and deepened their hatred for the Danes.

Though they had triumphed and driven the Danes away, the harrowing state of the harbor left no room for celebration. Instead, the Vikings demanded to pursue the retreating Danes.

Haldor, however, was not blinded by victory. He knew his few dozen armed warships were no match for the Danish fleet. After a moment’s thought, he said, “We have repelled the Danes from the north. This is a historic moment for Iceland, marking our successful break from Danish subjugation and our path toward independence and freedom!

But we must remain vigilant. The next Danish attack could be even more ferocious!”

Ulf nodded. “Father is right. We cannot let our guard down. But now that we have won, we must compensate the fallen and wounded soldiers and rebuild our homes. This will consume much of our resources and energy.”

Haig scoffed. “Olaf sent enough food last time. Iceland lacks only food, timber, steel, and a few other resources. Let’s use the food to compensate everyone. We can also mobilize citizens and soldiers to rebuild the harbor and cities, rewarding them with food.”

The leaders discussed their plans, and Ulf sent people to the ruined harbor to clear debris, search for Viking bodies, and dispose of the Danish corpses.

As the storm cleared, a red sun gradually rose in the eastern sky, casting warm sunlight over the sea and Reykjavik, making everything shimmer with golden light.

Haldor and the others stood on their horses before the ruined harbor, silently watching as soldiers dragged bodies from the wreckage—some Vikings, some Danes. There were fewer Viking bodies, while the Danish corpses were piled haphazardly, ready to be thrown into the sea to feed the fish. The Viking bodies were carefully placed on carts, to be buried outside the city later.

After an hour and a half, the sun was high in the sky. The citizens of Reykjavik emerged from their homes, and the three elders from the church led the residents of Big Port to the docks.

Overnight, Reykjavik Harbor, once the most prosperous place in Iceland, had been reduced to ruins. This was a catastrophic disaster. Every Icelander who saw the devastation felt fear, but also deep respect and admiration for Haldor, the Grand Duke, and the Viking Raid for repelling the mighty Danes. A quiet pride swelled within them.

“The stronger the Danes, the greater the Icelanders who defeated them. Who says we are Danish slaves? Under the wise leadership of Duke Haldor, we too can become a mighty nation like our Viking ancestors!”

Though proud that Iceland had shed its colonial status, the residents of Big Port, who had spent the night in the church, looked pale as they rushed into the ruins, desperately digging through the wreckage of their homes for clothes, furniture, and belongings.

“This is my life’s savings!”

“Danish devils! Damned bastards! God…”

“May the gods bring disaster upon Copenhagen!”

The harbor residents wept over the ruins, not daring to blame Haldor or the Viking soldiers, but cursing the Danish soldiers who had destroyed their homes with cannons.

Haldor waved his hand lightly, and Olos quickly approached. “Your Grace, what are your orders?”

Haldor, his lips cracked and dry, said, “The harbor’s reconstruction is in your hands. You have full access to manpower, funds, and supplies. Do your best to ensure the harbor’s people have homes no worse than before.”

“Your Grace, rest assured! I will get it done!”

Olos loudly pledged his loyalty, his heart racing. He knew that with this victory, his standing in Haldor’s eyes would rise. He would no longer be just a squad leader, a sergeant, and the Steersman of the Big Port Viking Raid. His ambition did not stop at being a mere Mannafylki Steersman—he believed he could become a Pasde district leader or even a Viking Raid general. This task from Haldor was his first step toward advancement.

…

Haldor and the others did not feel their exhaustion until the sun was high. After giving further instructions, Haldor returned to rest.

In the afternoon, over twenty ships of various sizes entered Reykjavik Harbor—these were the Viking Raid forces from the northeast and southeast, led by Hoskuld and Hudik.

The fleet approached the broken docks. Hoskuld and Hudik stood on the deck, their faces calm as they surveyed the ruined harbor and the busy Viking soldiers and Icelandic citizens.

“It seems we’re too late,” Hoskuld sighed, quickly ordering the gangplank extended before hurrying ashore.

Hudik followed closely, leaving their subordinates to organize the soldiers before quickly approaching Olos, who had come to greet them. “Where is Duke Haldor? Have the Danish forces arrived? What’s the situation? Did we win? Were the losses heavy…”

Hudik and Hoskuld’s minds were filled with questions as they saw the state of the harbor. Upon seeing Olos, they couldn’t help but fire off a string of inquiries.

Olos, however, was not flustered by the generals’ questions. He bowed respectfully before recounting the previous night’s battle—the Danish forces landing, the Viking army’s counterattack, the Danish warships bombarding the harbor all night, and their eventual retreat. His tone was measured, his pace steady, as he detailed the entire battle.

After Olos finished, Hudik and Hoskuld finally understood what had happened. They exhaled in relief, their faces a mix of shock, joy, lingering fear, and guilt—such complex emotions were a first for both of them.

“Ah, it’s our fault. The northeast and southeast fleets took too long to gather, delaying our arrival. Fortunately, Duke Haldor commanded brilliantly, and your strategy worked. Otherwise, I wouldn’t have been able to rest easy,” Hoskuld said coldly.

Hudik agreed. “Exactly. Thank goodness we won. We did our best to hurry, but we were still too late.”

After a moment of self-reproach, Hudik suddenly asked, “Where are Duke Haldor, Ulf, Kadir, and Haig?”

Olos quickly pointed toward the Duke’s Manor in the east. “Duke Haldor and Young Master Ulf have returned to the manor to rest. Generals Kadir and Haig have also returned to their residences. Everyone has been up for a day and a night—they must be exhausted. You two should go to the manor and wait. Also, lend me your soldiers.”

“How so?” Hudik narrowed his eyes. “What do you need them for?”

Olos smiled shyly before speaking firmly. “Duke Haldor has tasked me with rebuilding the harbor. Since many soldiers are rotating shifts to rest, I’m short on manpower. Since you two have brought troops back, I thought perhaps the Vikings who didn’t fight could help with the reconstruction. It would also be a way for you two to assist Duke Haldor.”

Chapter 186: The Aftermath of War

Olos had already moved Haldor out of the way. Hudik and Hoskuld, feeling a pang of guilt for arriving late, left their subordinates under Olos’s command to assist in rebuilding the harbor. The two of them then rode swiftly to the Duke’s Manor.

Upon entering the manor, with the help of the guards, they removed their plate armor and weapons. Lightly dressed, they settled into the guest room, sipping coffee and smoking. After an hour, the sound of the door opening signaled the arrival of Haldor, clad in a silk robe, accompanied by Ulf.

“When did you two arrive?” Haldor greeted his old comrades with ease before pouring himself a cup of hot coffee.

Hudik and Hoskuld remained seated, first expressing their regret for arriving late. Then, they voiced their shock and admiration for Haldor’s feat—leading three Viking Raid legions and the Duke’s Manor guards to defeat the Danish expeditionary force.

Amid their praise, Haldor boasted of his brilliance. As dusk approached, he grinned and said, “Tonight, with all of us old comrades reunited and having triumphed over the Danes, we should hold a proper banquet at the Duke’s Manor to celebrate!”

“Excellent!”

“Absolutely!”

Ulf interjected, “Shouldn’t we also reward the soldiers who distinguished themselves?”

“Indeed!” Haldor’s grin widened. “Tomorrow, compile a list of those who earned merit and present it. We’ll convene a Viking Raid council to discuss it. This is an internal matter of the Raid—no need to involve the parliament. We can decide among ourselves!”

…

That evening, the Duke’s Manor chefs brought out their finest reserves—dried fish, cured meats, fine wines, syrups, salted shark, smoked puffins, blood sausages, and fresh whale and cod. They also slaughtered over a hundred sheep, twenty cattle, a dozen pigs, and more than a hundred and fifty chickens and ducks on the spot, preparing for an extravagant feast.

This banquet was the most lavish Haldor had arranged since returning to Iceland, surpassing even the celebration after capturing Reykjavik and the founding of the Icelandic Free Republic.

Haldor intended not only to host the high-ranking officers of the Viking Raid—generals, district chiefs, and steersmen—but also to invite every soldier to partake.

Though Iceland’s resources were scarce, hosting a grand feast for thousands of soldiers was no small feat. However, Haldor had brought ample supplies, and Olaf had previously contributed a great deal of food. Moreover, the expenses for such gatherings were personally funded by Haldor, so while the Icelandic parliament might struggle to bear the cost, it would only deplete a fraction of the Grand Duke’s wealth.

After the banquet, Reykjavik returned to its usual bustling state. Since the docks were still under reconstruction, the commercial district had temporarily relocated to the southern and northern districts. The citizens of Big Port were abuzz with tales of the Icelandic army’s victory over Denmark, marveling at how, under Haldor’s leadership, the Viking spring had arrived once more.

August in Iceland was a month warmer than usual for the entire island.

As news of Grand Duke Haldor leading the Viking Raid to defeat the mighty Danish expeditionary force spread from Big Port to other regions, the Icelandic people grew increasingly confident and joyful. Their daily strides seemed to carry an extra spring, and they wholeheartedly embraced the transformation from Danish subjects to Icelandic Vikings.

The Saga of the Hrut Family began circulating rapidly across Iceland, a spontaneous tribute from the people to their revered Grand Duke Haldor.

With the saga’s spread and the tales of Haldor’s triumph over the Danes, he became a legendary figure in Iceland, surpassing all his ancestors and earning a place alongside Europe’s Caesar in the hearts of the Icelandic people.

This adoration manifested in a surge of young men—and even women and youths—eager to join the Viking Raid and serve Haldor, or to seek positions in the Duke’s Manor in Big Port.

Haldor, Ulf, Hoskuld, Hudik, and Haig knew that Denmark, having suffered a crushing defeat, would not let this stand. King Christian IV would surely seek revenge, and Iceland might soon face a second Danish invasion.

While the Viking soldiers’ bravery played a role in their victory, the decisive factors were Hongrode’s betrayal and Olos’s strategy. The Danes’ unfamiliarity with Iceland and the Viking soldiers also contributed to their downfall.

Post-battle reports revealed that the Viking forces had lost just over five hundred men, while the Danes suffered nearly two thousand six hundred casualties—a staggering five-to-one ratio. This victory, achieved with fewer troops against a larger force, cemented Haldor’s place in European military history, if not as a great general, then as a notable figure.

After engaging the Danes, Haldor and his men recognized that Danish soldiers were well-organized and disciplined, with superior marksmanship compared to the Vikings.

More critically, the Viking Raid lacked sufficient cavalry. Even if all of Iceland’s finest horses were pressed into service, they could train at most two thousand cavalrymen. Training cavalry was far more challenging than training musketeers; it typically took over a year to produce a competent cavalry unit.

For Haldor, however, training cavalry was not insurmountable. Each of the five Raid districts already had hundreds of fine horses for training. Most Icelandic men were skilled riders, needing only to learn battle commands and charges.

According to Hudik, who oversaw military training in the five districts, it would take at least another six months to train the Viking cavalry to a level where they could face Danish or other European cavalry.

After the banquet, Haldor and Haig convened to discuss promotions for meritorious officers. They also identified their weaknesses and planned to expand recruitment in the five districts, intensifying training for cavalry, musketeers, and infantry.

By the end of August, the generals of the Northeast, Southeast, Northwest, and Southwest Raid districts had returned to their stations with their legions, launching large-scale military drills.

News of Iceland’s independence and the repulsion of the Danish expeditionary force spread across Europe through British and Dutch merchants who had traveled to Reykjavik for trade.

Grand Duke Haldor of the Icelandic Free Republic became a figure of interest in England, France, Spain, Sweden, and other nations, while Denmark seethed with hatred for both Iceland and Haldor.

According to intelligence gathered by Hongrode, Magnus and Christian had returned in disgrace. The Danish court was in turmoil, and King Christian IV immediately stripped them of their ranks, plunging into a series of post-defeat arrangements.

Originally, Hongrode had used his servants to feed false information to Magnus, but regardless of the reason, he had to admit guilt. However, Hongrode’s family launched a financial offensive, presenting King Christian IV with two hundred thousand marks of silver from the East India Company’s dividends to support the crown. In response, the king overlooked Hongrode’s transgressions.

After several rounds of debate in the Danish parliament, King Christian IV made a decisive move against Iceland: all Danish merchants, including those from Sweden, Poland, and the northern German duchies sailing the Baltic Sea, were forbidden from engaging in trade with Iceland.

Christian IV intended to use this commercial blockade to prevent Iceland from exchanging its abundant wool, furs, and fish for scarce resources like textiles, grain, and timber. He and his officials believed that resource-scarce Iceland, once isolated, would collapse within a year or two, making a second invasion effortless.

Christian IV’s calculations were sound, but Hongrode knew they were flawed. Haldor had the backing of Vinland in North America, a land of fertile soil and abundant resources capable of sustaining Iceland’s population of fifty to sixty thousand. With Vinland’s support, Iceland need not fear Denmark’s blockade.

Hongrode believed that if Haldor could integrate Iceland’s tens of thousands of people into the Viking Raid system and combine Vinland’s resources with Viking and Native American slave labor, the potential and energy unleashed in a year or two would be three to five times greater than now. At that point, Denmark would lose all hope of reclaiming Iceland.

With this realization, Hongrode became even more resolute in his decision to align with Haldor. However, to ensure his family’s long-term service and friendship with Haldor, he could no longer remain in Iceland. The enmity between Iceland and Denmark was now a matter of life and death. While Hongrode had deceived Denmark once, staying longer would expose him to immense risk.

After several discussions with his family, Hongrode’s cousin, Gandis, arrived in Iceland as the manager of their trading firm, replacing Hongrode as the family’s representative to serve Haldor. Meanwhile, at Denmark’s behest, Hongrode used religion as an excuse to bid farewell to Haldor and temporarily returned to Copenhagen.

During his farewell, the two men engaged in a long, intimate conversation lasting two hours, even sharing afternoon tea in Haldor’s office.

They discussed numerous details of future cooperation, including commerce and missionary work in North America.

Haldor understood Hongrode’s intentions and happily saw off his partner and friend, agreeing that the following year, Hongrode would visit Vinland under the guise of the West India Company to preach and deepen their collaboration.

Chapter 187: News of Victory Reaches Vinland

Since September, Denmark’s blockade of Iceland had begun to take effect.

Within a week or two, the harbor of Reykjavik had received fewer than ten Dutch merchant ships. Haldor had not restricted the Vikings’ freedom of trade, so Icelandic merchants still managed to exchange dried fish, sheepskins, cowhides, and wool for food, linen, utensils, and timber, which then circulated throughout the island.

Because Haldor had waived taxes for all Icelanders this year, every household was relatively wealthier than in previous years. Even though the Danish blockade prevented the exchange of many goods, the quality of life for Icelanders had not declined—in fact, it had improved compared to before.

Under the leadership of Grand Duke Haldor, Iceland had become the most prosperous it had been in centuries, and every person sincerely appreciated him.

The people of Iceland, undeterred, followed Haldor and the parliament’s call to restore production, continuing their pastoral and agricultural work while joining the militia under their local leaders for regular training.

Haldor and Ulf, residing in Reykjavik, knew that relying solely on the few Dutch ships was insufficient to sustain Iceland’s exports. Over time, the island would struggle to meet the needs of its fifty thousand inhabitants.

However, Haldor and Ulf already had a strategy to counter the Danish blockade. Currently, even the boldest Dutch merchants could only sneak in small numbers, making it impossible to increase trade volume.

But Haldor had more than just Iceland at his disposal. In fact, Iceland’s importance paled in comparison to Vinland, as Vinland surpassed Iceland in resources, land, and even population.

Iceland’s only advantage was its population—all Icelanders, like Haldor, shared the same ethnicity and culture. This unity allowed the Vikings to fully integrate Iceland, strengthening the Haldor family’s power base and providing a stabilizing force for Vinland’s long-term rule. Additionally, Iceland’s existence gave Vinland a foothold in Europe, allowing them to intervene in major European affairs and reap benefits.

As soon as Gandis, the manager of the Hongrode Trading Company, informed Haldor of Denmark’s blockade of Iceland, Haldor immediately dispatched Gilson, Tom, and others to Vinland. Their mission was to deliver the good news of Iceland’s victory to Olaf and to have him prepare sufficient food and supplies for Iceland’s future needs, to be brought back by Katrin, Lorin, and others.

With Vinland as his backing, Haldor remained unshaken, even amused by Denmark’s futile efforts.

In early September, while handling affairs in the council hall, Olaf received Gilson, Tom, Halik, and others, learning of the Danish expeditionary force’s defeat in Iceland.

This news quickly spread through Hrut City and Haldor City, reaching Bakens City and Longling Mountain within two days.

Every Viking left behind, regardless of age or gender, celebrated joyously, holding immense admiration and reverence for General Haldor’s unparalleled achievements.

Tens of thousands of slaves, though unaware of why their masters and Viking lords were rejoicing, knew that their Heavenly God, Haldor, had triumphed over a powerful enemy, seizing land and people. Thus, they too felt excitement, proud to have such a mighty Heavenly God as their master.

As Katrin, Lorin, Half, Gerny, and others joyfully packed their belongings, preparing to leave Vinland and return to Iceland as noble elites of the civilized world, the messengers Olaf and Heiner had sent to Labrador, the Iroquois and Huron regions, and Plymouth also arrived, meeting with the governors of these areas and delivering Olaf’s personal letters.

The governors finally learned of Haldor’s victory over the Danish expeditionary force and sent the wealth they had plundered as gifts to Hrut City to celebrate this great occasion for Haldor and the entire Viking raid region.

Large quantities of dried fish, furs, jade, gold, silver, and timber were transported to Hrut Port. Olaf, in high spirits, oversaw the continuous influx of supplies. Though the quantity and value were far less than the batch from earlier in the year, the fact that such wealth had been amassed in just half a year showed how fiercely the governors had plundered.

“The finest timber should be sent to the shipyard for processing into shipbuilding materials. The rest can be simply modified and transported to Iceland as construction materials! The dried fish and furs must be stored carefully to prevent moisture damage! And the jade and silver should be moved to Haldor’s fortress, along with the copper and gold ingots from the copper mine…”

Olaf wore a silk robe and a felt hat, his golden beard trimmed to less than an inch. He seemed to have grown taller, standing at the docks with Heiner, directing the white slaves and slaves in their work. He now appeared much more imposing than Heiner.

Heiner had gained some weight, his face rounding out. He stood beside Olaf, speaking little, only occasionally supplementing Olaf’s instructions. It was clear the two had developed a seamless partnership.

After arranging everything, they left the slaves at the docks and rode their horses back to Haldor’s fortress.

“I heard from Vanhild that the Sahkrimnir Farming Company is thriving. The cattle, sheep, pigs, and horses are nearly at full capacity?!” Heiner said.

Recently, Vinland’s sweet potatoes and potatoes had been infested with pests. Heiner had led the slaves and Viking families in pest control to protect the crops, only finishing the task the day before.

This was the worst agricultural disaster Vinland had faced in years, so Heiner had rarely been home in the past month, leaving little time to communicate with his wife or stay updated on the farming company’s operations.

Olaf chuckled, tugging at the reins as he looked toward the distant farm. “Livestock farming is a long-term endeavor. The longer you invest, the greater the returns. The pigs, sheep, cattle, and horses have already reproduced once or twice—some even three times—so their numbers have grown significantly. I plan to distribute some of the young animals as dividends to each household for free-range farming. This will ease the pressure on the farming company while fulfilling this year’s dividend. What do you think?”

Heiner nodded with a smile. “You and Vanhild can decide. I don’t understand much about the farming company, but if you give me a piglet or two now, my family can raise them. That would be great!”

“Haha!” Olaf laughed. “This is what I call efficient resource management! Every Viking household has private slaves, so raising a few livestock is perfect. If they’re all crammed into the farming company, it’s bound to cause disease outbreaks!”

As they spoke, they returned to Haldor’s fortress. Olaf had Half keep Heiner company while he went to the underground storage to inspect the newly arrived gold, silver, and jade.

Since spring, continuous mining at Longling Mountain had reached deeper, high-quality ore layers. Large quantities of premium copper and gold ore were being extracted, so the monthly shipments of copper and gold ingots to Hrut City had increased more than threefold compared to last year.

Olaf made a rough estimate. Including the gold and silver sent by the governors, he now had over fifteen hundred pounds of gold ingots, several dozen tons of copper, several thousand pounds of silver, and over a hundred turquoise and gemstones.

This wealth was comparable to Vinland’s annual fur harvest, if not greater. Olaf, pleased with himself, picked up a gold ingot, feeling its satisfying weight in his palm. He muttered to himself, “Denmark’s blockade of Iceland—just as expected. But with the supplies I sent earlier, Father should be able to hold out this year. Due to last year’s and this spring’s plundering, Vinland’s production this year will be much lower than before. However, with the gold and copper mines continuously providing precious metals, we should have even more wealth next year. We’ll be able to exchange for large quantities of supplies and weapons to aid Iceland. King Christian IV’s schemes won’t succeed!”

Chapter 188: Personnel and Supplies Arrive in Iceland

On September 10th, Katrin and Lorin, accompanied by Half, Gerny, and the nearly one-year-old Arthur, led several dozen slaves carrying over a dozen chests of clothing and wealth, boarding a ship from Hrut Port to set sail for distant Iceland.

This journey to Iceland was overseen by Heiner, with Vanhild and their daughter also in the party. Bringing the core leadership’s families back to Iceland was both their request and a means to reunite Haldor and his kin, while also signaling to all Icelandic Vikings that Haldor would forever regard Iceland as the foundation of his rule.

Olaf remained in Vinland to hold the fort. Heiner, with his family and over a hundred agile guards, departed Vinland aboard four large ships laden with copper bars, gold ingots, Water of Life, malt sugar, porcelain, pottery, furs, dried fish, timber, and other abundant supplies.

Upon returning to Vinland in July, Olaf immediately began preparations to establish a shipyard. Habert, serving as the chief master of the shipyard, had been busy every day for the past two months—either crafting sturdy, durable ships from pre-processed timber and parts or handling fresh timber and manufacturing components.

To date, the Olaf Shipyard in the eastern bay of Haldor City had produced ten slender, fast troop transports and three durable armed merchant ships, which could be converted into warships with the addition of cannons.

Olaf was highly satisfied with Habert’s work and specially rewarded him with two Iroquois girls.

After Heiner and the others departed, merchant ships arriving from Europe to North and Central America brought news to the colonists and subjects of Virginia, Quebec, and Plymouth that Iceland had established itself as a nation and defeated the Danish expeditionary force. Vinland instantly became the focal point of North America, with every colonist suddenly realizing that the Viking general Haldor of Vinland had returned to Iceland, leading its people to break free from Danish rule and establish a new nation.

Merchant ships from various countries now understood that Haldor, the Grand Duke of Iceland, was also the ruler of Vinland, solving a long-standing mystery in Europe.

Why had Iceland, with its barren resources, harsh environment, and sparse population, managed to repel the Danish expeditionary force and achieve independence?

The answer lay in Vinland, North America, which boasted three times the land of Iceland, enslaved tens of thousands of natives, and had a large number of indentured white slaves. Combined with Iceland’s strength, defeating the Danish expeditionary force made perfect sense.

In mid-September, Governor Champlain of Quebec dispatched an envoy to Vinland, seeking an audience with Haldor. Olaf understood his intentions and directly informed the envoy that his father, Haldor, was no longer in Vinland but serving as Grand Duke in Iceland.

The envoy showed no surprise. Instead, he smiled and presented Champlain’s congratulatory letter along with a silver gift box. Opening it revealed over a dozen green and red crystal gemstones of varying sizes.

“These are?” Olaf raised an eyebrow and asked.

Champlain’s envoy bowed, lifting the silver box. “These are gifts from Governor Champlain to Haldor, congratulating him on ascending to the throne as Grand Duke and celebrating Iceland’s independence. Please accept our governor’s sincere goodwill, young Olaf.”

Olaf nodded. “Then thank Governor Champlain.”

Olaf’s personal guard, a burly young man with small eyes who bore a striking resemblance to Gilson, was indeed his younger brother, Gilfa. Seeing his master nod, he took the silver box and placed it before Olaf.

Olaf picked up the largest green gemstone, examining it closely. He found many impurities inside and, after inspecting a few more, only found two of the purest green gemstones.

“Rumor has it that Canada has a place that produces emeralds. These must be emeralds!”

Olaf pushed the silver box aside with a smile and asked, “Is Governor Champlain doing well?”

Half an hour later, Olaf personally escorted Champlain’s envoy out. After watching the envoy leave, he turned to the Gilson brothers beside him and said, “Send someone to ask the governors on the mainland if Quebec is facing any difficulties or changes. Champlain is not a generous man. His sudden gift must have some motive!”

Gilson, who had stayed in Vinland to continue protecting Olaf, nodded and went to arrange it himself.

Olaf intended to return home for a drink and rest but suddenly remembered the pest infestation that had swept through the potatoes and sweet potatoes in Hrut City and even Haldor City. Although it had improved in recent days, the increasingly hot weather made Olaf worry about a recurrence, so he decided to inspect the fields.

After a round of inspection, it was already two in the afternoon when he returned to the castle. Olaf had the kitchen prepare a pot of stewed mutton and ate it.

After several hours of inspection, although most of the sweet potato and potato leaves still showed significant damage, the fresh, tender leaves were intact, indicating that the pest problem had been resolved.

Although the harvest in a few months would see a decrease in potato and sweet potato yields, increased watering and fertilization should mitigate the impact.

After his nap, Olaf organized his notes, which detailed recent work and future plans. Despite several setbacks over the past six months, everything was progressing well. Olaf believed this autumn’s harvest would be another bumper crop, and with the yields from the Iroquois Plains, the total grain production would be more than double that of the previous year.

Copper, gold, and even coal production continued to rise. Last month, Bich, the lord of Haldor City, accidentally discovered an open-pit coal mine in the western mountains while quarrying stone. As a result, the Longling Mountain coal yard had been relocated to Haldor City, providing a more convenient and abundant supply for the residents of both cities.

Resource production had improved exponentially in many areas. The breeding farms were thriving, and even the population was increasing, mostly slaves. But even a newborn, in ten or twenty years, would become a warrior loyal to the Haldor family.

With Iceland now serving as a second base and the Viking raids adding fifty to sixty thousand core population, Olaf felt that even if Vinland increased its Indian slaves by hundreds of thousands, it could still be effectively governed. He encouraged the increase in slaves.

With the changing seasons, the fishing and merchant ships had only two or three good months left before winter.

Although Olaf had not yet openly driven away foreign fishing vessels from Vinland’s waters, the aggressive fishing attitude of the Vikings and slaves, eager to provoke conflicts, had forced Spanish, French, and even British fishermen to retreat to more southern areas. Fortunately, the North Atlantic fishing grounds were vast, so the fishermen had no need—or daring—to compete with the people of Vinland.

Merchant and even pirate ships traveling between Central and South America and Europe were also decreasing, either staying in the Caribbean or returning to Europe to wait for next year. The number of ships traversing the Atlantic had been gradually declining since September and would nearly cease in two months.

Olaf no longer concerned himself with matters in Europe or Iceland. Whether there were changes or problems, he had neither the time nor the strength to intervene. He knew that the only thing he and Vinland could do now was to develop diligently, turning Vinland into a comprehensive and powerful region to support Iceland in the future.

Since taking on the role of regent, Olaf had been busy, and after Heiner’s departure in September, he became even busier.

He even began traveling across the various territories under Vinland’s control to gather more timely information and address minor issues. His greatest fear was oversight and accidents, as Vinland was already severely understaffed. At times, he didn’t even have someone to consult with, forcing him to push himself harder.

Chapter 189: North American Turmoil (1)

Time always slipped away unnoticed in the midst of busyness. By the time Olaf had made his rounds through Haldor City, Bakens City, and even the Longling Mountain mines before returning to Hrut City, it was already October 10th.

It was now deep autumn, and Vinland’s climate had begun to cool. Many trees, though their leaves had not yet changed color, had started to shed them. The maple leaves, in particular, had turned a vibrant red in vast swaths, creating a breathtakingly beautiful sight.

Olaf had only been back in the castle for two days when the private slaves he had sent to the Iroquois, Huron, and other regions began to return one by one. They each reported on the situation in their respective areas. As the information poured in, Olaf’s brow furrowed.

“Everything seems normal everywhere, no major incidents. But why have all the personnel Quebec sent to explore the western interior returned to Quebec City? And why has Champlain, after his father carved out a domain in Iceland, sent such valuable jewels in such an obsequious manner? Could there be some hidden scheme?”

Olaf muttered to himself, then leaned over the desk to examine the reports from other regions.

“The report from Huron City states that the Ojibwe people living around the Great Lakes have begun to gather in large numbers in the northeast… And the Huron people have also seen their French allies frequently coming and going within their territory, much more often than before…”

Olaf searched through the reports for half a day, only to find these two points confusing. Where there was abnormality, there was surely something amiss. The French had long been in the habit of exploring westward through Huron territory, but the increased frequency suggested they had discovered something.

“Why are the Ojibwe gathering in large numbers in the northeast of the Great Lakes?” Olaf mused aloud, then called for Gilson. When Gilson entered, Olaf instructed, “Go find a few Huron people. I have some questions for them.”

Half an hour later, Gilson brought three middle-aged Huron slaves into Haldor’s fortress. After they had all knelt and paid their respects to Olaf, he asked, “Can you all speak ancient Norse?”

The youngest of the Huron slaves spoke first in fluent ancient Norse, “Master! I can speak it. I’ve been learning from the Viking masters for the past few months. Whatever you wish to ask, just ask me!”

Olaf nodded and asked, “Are you familiar with the Ojibwe?”

The three slaves chattered in Huron for a while before the younger one replied, “We Huron people and the Ojibwe have been neighbors for hundreds of years, so we know them fairly well.”

“Do the Ojibwe have a habit of migrating? Under what circumstances would they gather in large numbers in one place?”

“The Great Lakes are rich in aquatic life, with fertile land, and buffalo and reindeer come to drink there. So every settlement nearby is an excellent location. Neither the Huron people nor the Ojibwe have migrated their tribes for decades…”

Olaf pondered for a moment, realizing the Huron slaves might have misunderstood his question, so he repeated it.

After some discussion among the three Huron, the younger one finally said, “If the Ojibwe are gathering in large numbers in one place or migrating, it must be at the behest of their alliance chief. Usually, it’s either to prepare for a large-scale war or to sign a treaty with another tribe.”

“Oh?” Olaf narrowed his eyes and pressed, “Do the Ojibwe have enemies? Who would they go to war with?”

“The Ojibwe’s neighbors are us Huron, the Cree, and the Ottawa. Our three tribes haven’t had any major conflicts with the Ojibwe in the past decade. In fact, a few years ago, with the help of Monsieur Champlain in Quebec, our chief signed a peace treaty with the Ojibwe…”

A spark of insight flashed in Olaf’s mind as he asked, “Is Champlain’s relationship with the Ojibwe good?”

“It’s pretty good. The Ojibwe have been trading with Champlain, exchanging furs for beads and weapons!”

Olaf asked a few more questions before dismissing them with a wave of his hand. Just as the slaves were leaving, Tom, Halik, Ilugi, Hari, and a few others entered. They had stayed in Vinland on Haldor’s orders, as he was concerned that Vinland might be short-handed and that Olaf’s rule might have some oversight, so he had sent Olaf’s companions back to assist him.

“Olaf, what’s wrong?” Tom asked, sitting down beside him.

Olaf shook his head slightly and said, “I think the French might be up to something with the Ojibwe! But I can’t quite figure it out…”

Tom chuckled lightly, “No need to overthink it. Just send someone to ask the Ojibwe directly. With Vinland’s current influence, as long as we show friendliness and engage in trade with the Ojibwe, they won’t dare to deceive us.”

Olaf suddenly looked up, hugged Tom, and said self-deprecatingly, “You’re right! I was overthinking it. We can just go and investigate directly!”

Soon, Tom and Halik set off from Hrut City on a special mission. They took a ship up the Saint Lawrence River into the Great Lakes, planning to first go to Huron City to find Governor Polly, and then, with Polly’s help, arrange a meeting with the Ojibwe.

Things went exactly as Olaf and the others had predicted. Tom’s journey to the Huron was smooth. After Polly sent someone to communicate with the Ojibwe, Tom quickly entered the area where a large number of Ojibwe had gathered and met with the Ojibwe chief, Stone Bull.

After some communication, the Ojibwe signed a peace and friendship agreement with Vinland and obtained a promise to trade with the Vikings through Huron City. Tom also clarified the situation and quickly returned to Hrut City, his face full of excitement as he told the dozing Olaf on the sofa in the afternoon.

“Olaf! The Ojibwe migrated at Champlain’s request! Champlain’s people discovered two adjacent gold and silver mines in the Ojibwe territory. Now, Champlain has gathered the Ojibwe at the mining sites to use them to mine for him!”

Tom’s words instantly jolted the sleepy Olaf awake. He suddenly looked up, staring at Tom as he asked, “Is that true? Tell me everything in detail!”

Tom and Halik sat down, took a sip of water, and then detailed everything they had seen and heard.

It turned out that ever since Champlain became governor, he had been tasked with two major missions in exploring the North American continent: first, to find a route to China, and second, to locate precious metal deposits. Whether it was due to Vinland’s rise or other reasons, this summer, Champlain’s subordinates discovered two adjacent silver and gold mines in the northeast of the Ojibwe territory. According to preliminary surveys, both mineral veins were quite substantial.

Knowing his own forces were weak and manpower insufficient, Champlain reported the news to Paris, urgently requesting additional professional personnel and armed forces. At the same time, he worked hard to maintain good relations with the Ojibwe, his hosts, planning to use these natives as cover to buy valuable time before the arrival of the main French military and personnel.

In Champlain’s plan, as long as His Majesty Louis XIII sent one or two legions, the greatly strengthened New France would gain the power and status to defend itself, thus monopolizing the mines. However, if Vinland discovered the gold and silver mines before the French support arrived, New France might lose the riches within its grasp.

If the person in charge of Vinland were still Haldor, he might indeed have been fooled by Champlain. But Olaf was extremely vigilant, fearing that any carelessness on his part might affect Vinland and Iceland’s strategic plans. This time, he had uncovered the changes in the Ojibwe territory and learned about the gold and silver mines.

“Olaf, let’s send troops to occupy those two mineral veins!” Tom said, his face flushed with excitement, his demeanor so infectious that anyone who saw him would be affected.

Olaf nodded and said, “We must occupy them, but we can’t do it under the pretense of seizing the mineral veins. That would completely offend France. The Icelandic Free Republic has just been established, and offending France would be very disadvantageous for us!”

“So what do we do?” Tom asked, frowning.

“The old way!” Olaf sneered and said, “Let the native savages deal with the Ojibwe. Then we can step in to mediate, and naturally take over the land and resources without leaving any evidence!”

Chapter 190: North American Turmoil (2)

The vast lands of North America were teeming with countless buffalo, reindeer, and other wildlife, home to thousands of large and small tribes. Though these Indians had no concept of nationality, they distinguished themselves by their tribes.

Due to the climate, environment, and abundant resources, the Indians of North America, regardless of tribe size, primarily relied on hunting and gathering for survival, supplementing it with some agriculture. This made them a primitive nomadic civilization with a strong martial spirit.

European colonizers had easily seized land and enslaved the natives in Central and South America, but colonizing North America proved far more difficult. Not only were the native enemies fierce and skilled in battle, but the harsh environment and difficult supply lines made it even harder.

Currently, Vinland controlled the most territory, governing and interacting with over a dozen Indian tribes. The Huron people, Iroquois, and Beothuk had been directly incorporated into the Viking raid system at its lowest level, while some Abenaki and Cree had been indirectly included.

The land between the Iroquois region and Vinland Island belonged to the Abenaki, whose territory was no smaller than the Iroquois region, though it was less suitable for farming. The Abenaki were not an easy tribe to deal with, so Vinland had maintained friendly trade relations with them. Additionally, the Labrador region had hired some Abenaki as mercenaries to conquer the northern Inuit.

Now, Champlain, the governor of New France, had discovered gold and silver mines north of the Great Lakes and planned to use the Ojibwe to exploit them. Olaf was not about to allow this.

But if Vinland intervened, even if they could seize the mines, it would offend the Kingdom of France. France was a pillar of the Protestant Union in the pan-European war and would likely lead its allies to victory. With Iceland’s strength, opposing France, the foremost power in Europe, was not a wise move.

Denmark was already Iceland’s enemy, and Britain’s relationship with Denmark made them a potential threat as well. If Iceland also made an enemy of France, it would be difficult to survive in Europe.

Olaf instantly thought of a clever strategy—using the Abenaki to fight the Ojibwe and the French. Though he had used a similar tactic before, pitting the Iroquois against the Massachusetts Bay Company, the Abenaki could still be exploited. After using them, they could even be incorporated into the Viking raid slave system.

Olaf’s plan was flawless. After explaining it to Tom and the others, the young men looked at him with admiration, clicking their tongues in awe.

That afternoon, Gilson sent a guard to Bakens City to summon Governor Blackstone. Two days later, Blackstone arrived with two soldiers.

Olaf hosted a banquet at his home for Blackstone, where he revealed his plan to use the Abenaki against the Ojibwe and the French. Blackstone, not daring to neglect Olaf’s wishes, immediately agreed to personally meet with the Abenaki leaders and persuade them to act.

Olaf praised Blackstone and offered to provide the Abenaki with any favorable conditions, as long as they could defeat the Ojibwe and the French. Just like before, a batch of long spears and swords from the warehouse could be sent to the Ojibwe first.

The next morning, Blackstone set off with a ship full of supplies and soldiers, heading to the Abenaki territory south of the Saint Lawrence River.

The surrounding tribes were aware of how Vinland had used iron weapons to hire the Iroquois against the British. However, the Iroquois’ downfall was due to their over-expansion and simultaneous wars with the Huron people, the French, and even the Vinlanders. Thus, apart from the French, no one suspected that the Iroquois’ defeat was orchestrated by Vinland.

For the Abenaki, Vinland was a wealthy and powerful entity. Blackstone, as one of Vinland’s governors, had come to request cooperation, which the Abenaki accepted.

After a day of negotiations, Blackstone promised them various benefits and delivered over a thousand iron spears in advance. The Abenaki agreed to attack the Ojibwe and share the land with Vinland after the war.

Blackstone returned to Hrut City with satisfactory results to report to Olaf. Meanwhile, the Abenaki, now equipped with Vinland’s support and sturdy iron weapons, believed they could expand. Under their leader’s command, warriors and young men from several tribes quickly gathered along the southern banks of the Saint Lawrence River.

In less than five days, the Abenaki assembled a force of seven to eight thousand warriors, each armed with iron weapons—some obtained through years of trade with Vinland, others gifted by Blackstone. These elite warriors, clad in leather armor, were joined by over ten thousand common laborers carrying bows and arrows and wooden clubs studded with stones.

The Abenaki, carrying pots filled with food, boarded wooden boats and traveled upstream into Ojibwe territory.

With their overwhelming advantage in iron weapons—three to four times more than the Ojibwe—the Abenaki warriors swept through the unprepared Ojibwe villages, slaughtering indiscriminately. By the time the Ojibwe reacted, seven or eight villages had already fallen. They could only muster over ten thousand male warriors and five thousand young women.

The Ojibwe camp also had nearly a hundred French musketeers, led by Captain Thiers. However, faced with thousands of Abenaki warriors, even double the number of French musketeers would have been powerless to stop them.

In the end, all the French musketeers were killed, and the Ojibwe leaders were either slain or captured. The vast Ojibwe lands were completely occupied by the Abenaki, and tens of thousands of Ojibwe became their slaves.

When this disaster reached Quebec, Champlain instantly fainted.

After the crowd and the Quebec bishop carried Champlain to bed and drew eight ounces of blood, he finally regained consciousness.

“Governor! How are you?” The newly arrived Marseillais, Bishop O’Neill, leaned over Champlain, revealing a mouthful of yellow teeth as he asked.

Champlain, weakened by the loss of over two hundred milliliters of blood, spoke sluggishly, his memory faltering. “Elise… where are you?”

The men gathered around Champlain stiffened, exchanging glances but saying nothing.

After a long while, Champlain finally came to his senses. His voice hoarse, he sighed, “Ah… Elise ran off with my bodyguard this spring…”

“Bishop O’Neill! Did you know? The gold mine I worked so hard to find has been seized by the Abenaki! And soon, Olaf of Vinland will find out! I’ve been in Quebec for over ten years, yet I haven’t made even the slightest contribution to His Majesty Louis… Oh God…”

Champlain grew more agitated as he spoke, his pale face flushing slightly. Since Vinland’s rise, he had lived in constant fear. After his mistress and bodyguard fled this spring, his mind had been in disarray. This illness had only deepened his desire to return to the embrace of Jehovah.

Seeing the governor’s distress, O’Neill quickly pressed a hand to Champlain’s chest, offering comfort for a while. When that proved ineffective, he finally said, “Governor, you are the most trusted by the Prime Minister and His Majesty. The Prime Minister’s Anti-God League has already gained the upper hand in the pan-European war. The Lion of Sweden has conquered northern Germany, and his forces are now marching toward Austria. We are on the verge of victory! You only need to wait. Once His Majesty and the Prime Minister triumph, they will surely send reinforcements to support us!”

“You speak the truth, Bishop!” Champlain’s bodyguard said. “You are the founder of New France and the symbol of Quebec. You must take care of your health. Only with your leadership can we hold on!”

“That’s right! Under Governor Champlain’s leadership, we will persevere. Whether it’s the Vikings, the Vinlanders, or the Indian natives, they will all fall beneath the swords of the French cavalry!”

“That’s right…”

“Well said…”

Half a day later, Champlain regained some of his strength. His sharp instincts, honed through decades of struggle in both primitive societies and French high society, told him that the Abenaki attack on the Ojibwe might not be as simple as it seemed.

Every Abenaki warrior had iron weapons—far too many, even accounting for years of trade with Vinland. Moreover, since establishing New France in North America, the Abenaki had never launched a large-scale attack on the Ojibwe…

Could it be Vinland?

A chill ran down Champlain’s spine as a possibility struck him—Vinland might be unable to resist the temptation to annex him and the surrounding tribes. This thought consumed him, for the situation bore a striking resemblance to the Iroquois’ destruction of the Massachusetts Company the previous summer. He had long suspected Vinland’s involvement in that incident. Now, comparing the two, Champlain’s heart grew cold.

After much contemplation, Champlain’s mind was in turmoil, though his outward demeanor remained calm. He felt a renewed vitality in his frail body and unconsciously murmured, “Send someone to Vinland to gauge Olaf’s intentions. If this is his doing, then we… Ah… The weather is growing colder, and no French ships will arrive before the new year. If this is Olaf’s doing, we won’t be able to leave the Saint Lawrence River…”

Chapter 191: The Storm Over North America (3)

October 30th, the north wind howled, and light snow fell.

Olaf sat in the council hall, clad in a polar bear fur coat sewn by his mother, Katrin. Tom, Solrak, Halik, Ilugi, Hari, Val, and Eriksson sat beside him.

Across from Olaf were the leaders of the agricultural forts beneath Hrut City—loyal Vikings left behind or Haldor’s private slaves, the most trusted and reliable among them.

These leaders were now reporting to Olaf on the progress of their respective crops.

The vegetables had all been harvested. Apart from personal consumption and pickling, Olaf had purchased a large quantity of privately owned vegetables from the Vikings. He planned to pickle them all and sell them to the natives of the American continent in exchange for furs.

The sweet potatoes, potatoes, and corn grown in Vinland, the Iroquois plains, and the Huron region had all ripened and were ready for harvest. The Vikings only occupied a little over twenty percent of the land in these three areas. This portion required no oversight from Olaf—Viking families and their slaves would handle the harvest themselves. However, the remaining vast tracts of land would need Olaf to coordinate his private slaves, white slaves, and available Vikings for the harvest.

Vinland had never lacked for labor—slaves and workers—with a third of them being skilled farmers. But due to the eastern expedition to Iceland, Vinland now faced a severe shortage of farmers. Although there were still many Iroquois and Huron slaves, as nomadic hunters, they were not well-versed in agriculture. Thus, the harvest would still rely primarily on Vinland’s existing white slaves, private slaves, and Vikings, with several hundred or even thousands of Iroquois and Huron slaves assisting.

After discussion, Olaf decided to assemble a force of five hundred Vikings and white slaves to handle the grain harvest in the Iroquois and Huron regions, while the remaining workers would slowly progress through Vinland’s harvest.

Once the matter was settled, Tom and the others went to notify the relevant personnel. Olaf had just stretched lazily when Gilson and Blackstone hurried in.

“Master!”

“Young master!”

Olaf nodded, gesturing for them to sit, then asked, “How did the campaign against the Ojibwe go?”

Blackstone’s face was weathered, his lips cracked, but he smiled as he replied, “The Abenaki we supported were fierce and capable! After more than a week of fighting, they completely wiped out the Ojibwe warriors by yesterday afternoon. They seized vast Ojibwe lands and enslaved half their population, while the rest fled westward. I ordered them to guard their new territory before rushing back to report to you!”

“Excellent!” Olaf clapped his hands with a grin, then asked, “And the French? Any reaction?”

“Just as we suspected,” Blackstone said. “The Ojibwe settlement was where gold and silver mines were discovered. Champlain sent Captain Thiers with nearly a hundred musketeers to guard it, but the Abenaki killed them all. Now, the Ojibwe lands and mines are ours. Young master, why not have the Abenaki destroy Quebec as well? The entire New France only has fewer than three hundred musketeers left—it would be easy to wipe them out!”

Blackstone fell silent, waiting for Olaf’s decision.

Olaf pondered for a moment, then shook his head. “If word gets out, we’ll become the enemy of all North America—even the entire American continent—and France will turn against us. Too risky… Besides, Champlain’s envoy visited me just yesterday. I suspect he’s already suspicious.”

Blackstone was about to press further when Olaf suddenly smiled. “But if we could eliminate Champlain and his men, we’d absorb New France’s territory and connect it with the Iroquois region, Huron region, and Labrador—all in one sweep. Quite tempting… And since Champlain is already suspicious, we have no choice but to act.”

“Fortune favors the bold,” Olaf continued. “Vinland is our Viking stronghold, the foundation of Iceland’s rise. We must seize every opportunity to grow stronger. New France was always destined to be absorbed—now is our chance to take the gamble! Blackstone, you and Gilson will go yourselves. Make it thorough, make it clean. Don’t let a single Frenchman escape. Once they’re gone, eliminate any Abenaki who know too much.”

Olaf’s expression was solemn, his tone resolute. He reached out and gripped Blackstone and Gilson’s hands firmly. “The fate of Vinland rests on you two. Handle this well.”

Gilson and Blackstone knelt in acknowledgment. Then, Gilson hesitated. “Master! How many men should we take? Many Abenaki know the truth—what if—”

“Use poison!” Blackstone cut in. “I heard that when you rescued Master Haldor in Iceland, you used green potatoes to poison the enemy. Now that it’s potato harvest season, we can bring some small, green potatoes. We’ll invite the Abenaki to a feast under the guise of gratitude and poison them with the potatoes. What do you think, young master?”

Olaf gave Blackstone an approving look, then hesitated. “The toxin in green potatoes isn’t that potent—it takes a large dose to be fatal. But with the natives’ primitive medical knowledge, even a couple of bites causing diarrhea could be deadly… Actually, I’ve heard that the British in Virginia once gave blankets infected with smallpox to Indian chiefs. The natives have no resistance to smallpox…”

Blackstone’s face darkened as he recalled the devastation smallpox had wrought on his own people over the decades. He nodded. “I understand! Please grant us some smallpox virus powder, master!”

Vinland had nearly eradicated smallpox thanks to Olaf’s variolation method, making it impossible for Blackstone and Gilson to find the virus. But Olaf possessed powder made from the mucus, wounds, and scabs of smallpox patients—brimming with the virus. With just a small amount, they could wipe out the Abenaki leadership in one fell swoop!

Olaf silently praised Blackstone’s quick thinking. Smiling, he retrieved a ceramic bottle from his desk and handed it to Blackstone. “This virus can’t withstand high temperatures. Don’t mix it with food—it spreads through the mouth, nose, and blood. Use it wisely.”

After receiving their orders, Blackstone and Gilson swiftly gathered their men and headed to the former Ojibwe lands, where they met with the Abenaki chief.

In their eyes, the Abenaki chief and his leaders were already as good as dead. To convince them to destroy Quebec City and sweep through New France, the two men made grand promises—equality with the Vikings, full support, firearms, and fine horses.

The Abenaki, naive and untouched by the world’s cruelty, believed every word. They quickly mobilized over ten thousand elite warriors, armed with iron weapons, and set sail down the Saint Lawrence River, roaring toward Quebec City on the northern bank.

Quebec City had sturdy walls and two 24-pound cannons, but only five hundred defenders. After three days of relentless assault, the Abenaki breached the walls and overran the city.

Originally, three armed merchant ships were docked in Quebec’s harbor—one French trade vessel and two local defense ships. But forewarned by Blackstone and Gilson, the Abenaki sent divers to board and slaughter the French sailors, cutting off any chance of escape for those inside the city.

Before the Abenaki attack, Champlain—weakened by repeated bloodletting—had already died. After the city fell, his confidants, subordinates, and even the cathedral’s bishop were all beheaded. Not a single man, woman, or child in Quebec City was spared.

With Quebec City fallen, the Abenaki pressed eastward, attacking New France’s remaining outposts. Every Frenchman they encountered was slaughtered without mercy.

By mid-November, New France had ceased to exist. Hundreds of Frenchmen had perished at the hands of the Abenaki.

But soon, the Abenaki themselves fell ill. Starting with their chief and leaders, disease spread rapidly. Within a month, more than half the tribe was infected, and over a third had died. The toll would have been even higher if not for some Abenaki having survived previous smallpox outbreaks, granting them immunity.

As temperatures plummeted in December, the once-mighty Abenaki tribe crumbled. Fewer than thirty percent of their original number survived, and many of those were still suffering from the disease.

On December 1st, Blackstone and Gilson returned to Hrut City, reporting to Olaf, who had just finished the harvest.

Olaf unfurled a map, sketching on it with charcoal. He pointed to the vast expanse now encompassing Vinland, Labrador, the Saint Lawrence River, and both shores of the Great Lakes. “Now, Vinland’s territory has grown several times over. In sheer land alone, we surpass France and Germany combined!”

Chapter 192: The Storm Over North America (4)

After years of development and expansion, Vinland had not only secured Vinland Island but also the entire eastern part of the Labrador Peninsula, the Iroquois Plains, and the lands of the Huron people. Though the territory was vast, it was not entirely contiguous. Now, with the Labrador Peninsula fully under their control and the annexation of New France, the Abenaki lands, and the Ojibwe territories, Vinland’s domain had finally coalesced into a single, cohesive whole.

As Olaf revised the map, the rough outline of Vinland’s territory emerged—encompassing the northeastern and eastern regions of the Great Lakes, stretching north and west of what would one day be the city of Boston, and extending from New York to Lake Erie along the easternmost edge of the North American continent. The total area now spanned roughly three million square kilometers.

Even at their peak, France and Germany combined had only reached a million square kilometers. In terms of sheer landmass, Vinland now rivaled the Ottoman Empire.

But territorial size alone did not guarantee strength. The true measure lay in the effective use of that land—territory where people could live, farm, and develop industry. Much of Vinland’s newly acquired land lay north of the Saint Lawrence River, where the harsh climate of the Labrador Peninsula made agriculture impossible and large-scale settlement unfeasible. As a result, the land Vinland could truly utilize remained limited.

France and Germany, by contrast, boasted over half their land as arable farmland, rich in mineral resources, supporting large populations and industrial development—the very foundation of a powerful nation.

Olaf was keenly aware of Vinland’s shortcomings: a lack of manpower and severely underdeveloped resources. Even with the recent conquest of Iceland, the total Viking population stood at just over seventy thousand, supplemented by two hundred thousand Indian slaves. To reach the level of an average European nation would require at least twenty more years of development…

Gilson and Blackstone, both native-born North Americans, lacked a clear sense of scale when they looked at Olaf’s map. They had no frame of reference for the might of European powers. But Tom and Hari, who had just walked over, gasped in astonishment.

“Olaf! Has Vinland really grown this large? God! Compared to Vinland now, Iceland seems so tiny…”

“Yes! With such vast lands in North America to develop, why would we ever return to Europe?”

Olaf looked at his two companions and smiled. “North America may be vast, but we can’t live like primitive savages! Only by maintaining ties with Europe can we access new technology, acquire advanced weapons to defend ourselves, enjoy the finest clothing, the most delicious food, obtain spices, and absorb advanced culture…”

Tom nodded in understanding, and Hari, with his dark beard, added, “We are civilized men at the center of the world. Colonizing North America doesn’t mean we forget our European roots. I see it now! Olaf, sometimes I feel so fortunate to follow you. For centuries, life in Iceland was monotonous and repetitive. If not for you and Prince Haldor, we would have lived and died like our ancestors—marrying, having children, and fading away. But now, our lives are rich, we wield great power, and we’ve achieved greater deeds than our forefathers ever did! It’s an incredible feeling!”

Hari’s heartfelt words resonated with the others, and they all pledged their loyalty to Olaf. He listened with a warm smile, his heart swelling with gratitude, before finally raising a hand to quiet them. Then he spoke:

“Our Viking ancestors left the embrace of the Scandinavian goddess and crossed the Baltic Sea, conquering France, Germany, and the British Isles, shaping Europe and the world. Now, it is our turn to come to America, to conquer Vinland, Labrador, and every corner of North America, and forge our own era of glory!”

Olaf had always possessed a gift for oratory, even as a child in Iceland. Over the years, his speeches had grown even more compelling, capable of stirring emotions and even inciting action. His powerful words, combined with his towering frame, resolute gestures, and stern expression, left Hari, Tom, and the others trembling with excitement, as if they were ready to charge into battle at that very moment.

“Olaf! We will always be your right and left arms!”

“We will conquer North America!”

…

After the fervor had settled, Olaf turned to more practical matters—the administration and development of the newly acquired territories of New France, the Ojibwe lands, and the Abenaki regions.

North America’s population was sparse. The tribes along the southern bank of the Saint Lawrence River were relatively large, but their numbers were still small—a consequence of the high latitude. In this era, aside from the great nation in the Far East, no other country could boast a population nearing one hundred million.

Eighty percent of the Americas’ population was concentrated in the fertile, warm climates of Central and South America. From what Olaf recalled from his past life, before the establishment of the Thirteen Colonies, North America had only one or two million Indians.

Based on his current interactions, Olaf estimated that even if there were some discrepancies, the Indian population of the North American continent would not be much higher.

With so few natives and such vast, sparsely populated lands, Olaf believed that maintaining control over the two million square kilometers they had seized would not be difficult, given their firearms and loyal soldiers. The real challenge lay in development—how to effectively integrate resources to grow the colony.

Vinland’s advantage was its diverse industries and relatively advanced agriculture, but its greatest weakness was its lack of manpower. Olaf was confident that with a hundred thousand white settlers, he could build a proper city-state within five years and multiply production tenfold.

Unfortunately, Vinland’s current population consisted of Indians who spoke different languages, had different cultures, and lived in a primitive state. Transforming them into skilled agricultural and industrial workers was no easy task. Even if they disregarded future risks and focused solely on training, it would still take years.

When it came to governing Vinland and planning its future, no one besides Olaf had any meaningful insights. Tom and the others could only offer vague, unhelpful comments—they had no concept of statecraft.

Olaf knew that if Heiner were here, he might have offered some valuable advice. But for now, everything rested on his shoulders. After half a day of contemplation, he decided to make the most of Vinland’s limited manpower.

He divided the newly acquired territories. The former Ojibwe lands were split in half—one portion was assigned to the Huron region, and the other to New France.

The northern bank of the Saint Lawrence River near Labrador was placed under the governance of Kalm, the governor of Basque City, becoming the first district of Greater Labrador.

The Abenaki lands and the eastern part of New France on the southern bank of the river were merged into the Abenaki District. With this reorganization, Vinland now had two new regions—New France and Abenaki—while the Huron and Labrador regions expanded accordingly.

New districts required new governors and personnel. Olaf understood the strain on their resources and did not expect too much. He planned to send his most trusted subordinates to oversee military administration.

Under the current circumstances, maintaining control and extracting resources like furs would suffice.

After careful consideration, Olaf decided to appoint Solrak, Ilugi, and Hari to govern the Abenaki District, with Solrak as governor and the other two as deputy governors. They would be supported by several hundred Viking soldiers they had brought with them.

Tom and Halik, meanwhile, would lead several hundred of Olaf’s armed private slaves to Quebec City, where they would serve as governor and deputy governor, overseeing the New France District, which included part of the former Ojibwe lands.

Chapter 193: The Storm in North America (5)

After personally seeing off Solrak, Tom, and the others at the docks, Olaf returned to the Olaf Factory and inspected the production in each workshop—the brewery, sugar refinery, and porcelain factory.

The number of workers had tripled compared to before. The former apprentices had all become skilled laborers, and many indentured white slaves and young native slaves had been selected to join the factory as apprentices.

Although the factory’s daily expenses had increased threefold, the returns had grown significantly as well.

In the warehouse, Olaf saw mountains of wooden, stone, copper, and pottery goods, along with hundreds of bone china vessels—mostly simple white porcelain bottles, plates, bowls, and basins, with a few more exquisite pieces. These were the most valuable items. Originally, there had been many more, but Heiner had taken most of them back to Iceland recently.

Accompanied by the artisans, Olaf spent half a day admiring the porcelain before reluctantly moving on to the warehouse storing liquor and malt sugar.

Vinland had an abundance of potatoes and sweet potatoes, so the brewery and sugar refinery could operate daily. They had even expanded their scale this year. When Heiner left, he took dozens of tons of liquor and malt sugar with him—enough to supply tens of thousands of people in Iceland, whether for personal use or sale.

Although Heiner had emptied the warehouse, a month and a half of production had already yielded new stock. Olaf entered to find over a hundred pottery jars of distilled liquor and several hundred sealed jars that would be ready for distillation in two months.

Across from the jars were dozens of smaller containers, their mouths covered with cloth, filled with malt sugar made from starch.

“Not bad. By next spring, the warehouse will be full again!”

Olaf chuckled, recalling the mountains of potatoes, sweet potatoes, corn, squash, and turnips harvested this autumn. He decided to expand the brewery and sugar refinery further next year.

“With the current population of Vinland and Iceland, the grain produced this year in Vinland, the Huron region, and the Iroquois region could feed everyone for three years—even with this year’s reduced harvest. Otherwise, it might have been thirty percent higher…”

Olaf muttered to himself, “This year, every Viking family has been busy expanding their cellars to store their grain. Our family’s grain alone weighs thirty million pounds—over ten thousand tons in modern terms. That’s enough to feed tens of thousands for a year! We’ll keep twenty percent for making malt sugar and liquor, twenty percent to feed the private slaves, and ship the rest to Iceland next spring!”

While this year had brought a bountiful harvest and territorial expansion, the cotton Olaf had painstakingly planted on the Iroquois Plains had dealt him a heavy blow.

In spring, Olaf had personally led reliable white slaves and private slaves to plant nearly an acre of cotton. Only eighty percent of the seeds sprouted.

By summer, the cotton plants were growing well, but soon, the flower buds began falling off en masse. By harvest time, less than half had bloomed and borne fruit. Olaf suspected the North American climate differed from Central and South America, but he had no solution.

Though the yield was low, there was still some harvest—less than a hundred pounds of cotton after picking, leaving Olaf deeply disappointed.

After obtaining the cotton, Olaf first had the seeds extracted. He found the number and quality of the seeds were worse than those planted in spring.

Based on this year’s experience, he estimated that next year’s harvest would be even more dismal.

The poor yield was one thing, but Olaf had overlooked a more pressing issue—he had no way to process the cotton into fabric.

Turning cotton into cloth required several steps: ginning to make it soft and fluffy, spinning into thread, and then weaving into fabric. Each step required specific tools and techniques. Olaf had no experience in textiles from his past life and knew nothing about the process. Faced with piles of raw cotton, he was at a loss.

After consulting many Viking and native women, they devised a simple method: pounding the cotton balls with stone hammers and wooden rods, then pulling and stretching them to soften the fibers.

The skilled weavers then used the spinning wheels Olaf had purchased to spin the cotton into thread and weave it into cloth.

After half a month of hard work, they produced over ten feet of cotton fabric. When Olaf tested it, he found it fragile—perhaps due to poor weaving or low-quality cotton. Still, the soft texture pleased him.

Under Olaf’s guidance, the Viking women made him two quilts and two sets of underwear from the cotton. After that, little remained.

Undeterred by the setback, Olaf planned next year’s planting and decided to visit Europe in spring. Besides delivering grain to Iceland, he aimed to purchase better cotton seeds and learn advanced spinning and weaving techniques. He also intended to follow up on Kuiyi’s search for a traditional Chinese physician in the East.

After finishing his inspection, Olaf returned home. He drank a glass of wine before sitting at his desk, taking out his cherished notebook. The worn pages were filled with his thoughts and plans, written in simplified Chinese and Arabic numerals.

“Developing cotton cultivation and Vinland’s textile industry is the top priority for 1632… First, purchase the latest spinning machines… Preferably the Huang Daopo spinning machine from the Ming Dynasty—it’s said to be far more advanced than current European models… Second, visit England to strengthen ties with the future Lord Protector and, through him, gauge England and other European nations’ attitudes toward Iceland… Third, find a way to bring a proper physician from the Ming Dynasty. I’ve been sick lately—though drinking honeysuckle tea and hot water helped, what if I get something worse? I must find the most advanced and reliable medical expertise for myself and my family…”

Olaf was only fourteen, but his face showed no trace of youthful innocence. His eyes held a steady, weary gaze, as if he were not a boy but a middle-aged man burdened by life.

He felt the weight of responsibility. Since his father and the others had gone to Iceland, he had taken charge of Vinland. Countless matters pressed upon him, and lately, insomnia had plagued him.

Yet Olaf did not resent the pressure. He understood that these hardships were tempering him. Once Iceland stabilized, his father would surely send reinforcements—or even his elder brother, Ulf, might return. After all, the title of “King of Vinland” was not one to be given up lightly…

Chapter 194: Pikku’s Happy Life

While Olaf was struggling with the burden of managing the vast Vinland alone, Pikku, the governor of Greenland, over a thousand miles to the north of Vinland, was overjoyed. This year, Vinland had sent three ships loaded with grain, timber, copperware, and other resources that Greenland desperately needed.

As the Abenaki people launched their attack on the Ojibwe territory, the autumn harvest in Vinland had just concluded. This was the time of year when supplies were sent to Greenland.

Given that this year’s grain harvest was larger than in previous years, Olaf decided to increase support for Greenland without hesitation. He dispatched three armed merchant ships, not yet equipped with cannons, loaded with fresh potatoes, sweet potatoes, corn, turnips, squash, as well as pickled vegetables, raisins, liquor, malt sugar, timber, copperware, and ironware, sending them to Nuuk, Greenland’s sole economic and political center and the only large, permanent settlement.

Thanks to the bumper harvest this year, Olaf allocated thirty percent of the tax revenue collected from various households to support Pikku’s colonization efforts in Greenland. The cultivated area had expanded significantly compared to last year, so even with reduced yields, the total output was still higher than the previous year. Thus, the resources sent to Nuuk had all increased, especially the grain, which had nearly doubled.

Over the past two years, Pikku had found more than two Inuit girls as wives for each of his over two hundred Viking men of Inuit descent and four hundred White Wolf soldiers. By the time winter arrived this year, they had already added over five hundred children. Pikku knew that these families were the foundation of his rule over Greenland and also the foundation of his master, Olaf’s, rule. Therefore, he had always given these families the best treatment.

Pikku himself had taken seven wives, all daughters or even wives of local chieftains, who had borne him four children. This made Pikku very satisfied, so much so that he became increasingly generous with his harem.

After this year’s supplies arrived, Pikku gave all the raisins, the smallest portion, to his women as a reward.

Greenland was vast beyond the imagination of ordinary people, but more than half of the northern region was uninhabitable. Even the Inuit had to live in family units of fewer than ten people to survive a nomadic lifestyle.

Starting last year, Pikku had completely unified Greenland. Even the Inuit living in the most remote corners had submitted to Pikku, offering bear pelts, seal skins, whalebone, and walrus ivory, among other treasures. In return, they received potatoes, sweet potatoes, squash, turnips, and other foods, some fresh but mostly processed into dried fruits.

According to statistics, the total number of Inuit in Greenland was only over twenty thousand. Pikku, with his abundant food and resources, had established a system of tribute and food exchange. All the Inuit on the island regularly traded their surplus furs, walrus ivory, narwhal tusks, and even whale oil, skin, and baleen for sweet potatoes, turnips, squash, potatoes, and other delicious foods.

Due to their living environment, the Inuit had a diet heavy in meat, but now their menu had expanded to include many new foods. Especially when they had accumulated enough animal fat or wood to occasionally make roasted sweet potatoes or baked potatoes, these dishes were enjoyed by young and old alike.

After the impact of high-starch foods, the Inuit of Greenland could no longer resist the desire and habit of “trading” with King Pikku. Strictly speaking, Pikku was not only the leader of Greenland but also the sole patron and customer of the over twenty thousand Inuit on the island.

With abundant food and the initial success of reindeer farming, hundreds of reindeer now roamed the islands and slopes around Nuuk. This summer, Bell, the head of the reindeer farm, had even established three or four new grazing sites to the north and south of Nuuk.

To be precise, excluding hunting income, Greenland now had about two thousand reindeer of all sizes and over a hundred musk oxen. Bell and others continued to recruit Inuit workers to handle tasks such as collecting dung, shearing wool, sawing antlers, milking, and slaughtering. Each grazing site had also built sturdy, warm wooden houses for the workers to live in.

Greenland’s harsh climate led to sparse vegetation, with thin moss and grass that recovered slowly after being grazed by animals. Although the island was vast, the populations of large and small animals were not large, and their development was slow.

However, after the Nuuk reindeer farm’s domestication and professional breeding methods, the reindeer population continued to grow. Every slope where the reindeer had grazed had its vegetation severely damaged, requiring more than three years to recover. Fortunately, there were still few grazing sites, and many places where reindeer could live, so there were no problems for now.

But Bell had already noticed this issue and planned to increase the number of slaughter workers to periodically cull the old and weak reindeer, controlling the population growth to avoid damaging Greenland’s fragile ecosystem.

In Olaf’s plan, Greenland was positioned as a large pasture, a place to provide Vinland with meat, furs, and wool. Therefore, Pikku focused on developing reindeer farming and fishing.

Using the wood sent from Vinland to build large ships, Nuuk had formed more than a dozen fishing teams. Each team’s daily catch exceeded that of ten kayaks in the past. This not only ensured the livelihood of over three thousand people in Nuuk and the surrounding seven or eight settlements but also continuously produced fish jerky, which was piled up and prepared for shipment to Vinland.

Under the development of Pikku, Bell, and others, Greenland had been generating revenue since last year. This year, in addition to fish jerky, seafood, and furs, they had also added stable products such as reindeer hides, reindeer jerky, reindeer antlers, and reindeer milk.

Pikku had made a bold declaration in Nuuk, urging everyone to work hard and send Olaf, his master in southern Vinland, a thousand reindeer hides, reindeer jerky, reindeer antlers, and reindeer cheese by next spring.

The rule of Greenland was centered in Nuuk, and the core of Nuuk’s rule was the White Wolf soldiers and Vikings. Over the past two years, Pikku and the White Wolf soldiers had completely integrated, becoming inseparable. As the highest-ranking Oarsman among the Vikings of Inuit descent, Pikku’s power and experience as governor continued to grow. The large number of sturdy sea vessels, sharp iron tools, and powerful army had given him a reputation among the Inuit tribes of Greenland that no one had achieved in a thousand years.

Among the many tribes in the east, west, south, and north of Greenland, some called Pikku the Great King, some saw him as the incarnation of a deity, and others feared and revered him. But King Pikku had indeed become the greatest figure on Greenland and the first grand chieftain in Inuit history to unify the entire island.

Pikku thoroughly enjoyed his current life. For him, he had reached the point where he could have whatever he wanted…

Every morning when he opened his eyes, he was surrounded by beautiful women of all shapes and sizes, attending to his every need from eating to dressing. Even the matters in bed could be enjoyed lying down with various pleasures.

When he went out, every Inuit who saw him had to kneel and pay respects. Even the White Wolf soldiers and Vikings respected and obeyed him. With a single command, he could wipe a tribe off the face of the earth or turn a poor Inuit youth into a tribal leader.

Pikku thought that the heaven the white masters spoke of might be like this life…

Because of his happiness, Pikku became even more grateful to Olaf. When he learned from the captain and sailors who delivered the goods that Lord Haldor had returned to the distant east to become the Grand Duke of Iceland, and that Master Olaf was the lord of Vinland, Pikku was very happy and vowed to personally go to Vinland next year to congratulate his master.

When he heard that Lord Haldor and others had led the Viking army to a great battle against the Danes in Iceland, Pikku became very nervous. But when he learned of their great victory, he rejoiced.

When the captain told Pikku that Master Olaf was worried that Iceland might have to fight Denmark again next year and had even sent Heiner to escort Lady Katrin, Miss Gerny, and others to Iceland, Pikku became serious.

After the three large ships loaded with the hunting gains of the past half-year left Nuuk, Pikku immediately summoned the two leaders of the White Wolf soldiers and white men like Bell, making a decision.

That was to form an army with the White Wolf soldiers as the core, recruiting young and strong Inuit men from all over Greenland. This army would be sent to Master Olaf next year as Greenland’s contribution to Master Olaf and Lord Haldor’s great cause of ruling Iceland and Vinland. After all, wars always needed soldiers.

Pikku’s decision was unanimously agreed upon by everyone. Since this year’s grain harvest was even larger than last year’s, and the yields from fishing, hunting, and farming had also provided a large amount of meat, Nuuk now had enough resources to support the training of a large army.

After half a year of professional training by Hudik in Vinland, the quality of the White Wolf soldiers had become very mature. Pikku and the two White Wolf leaders, Nan and Serokino, believed that one White Wolf soldier could lead five Inuit militia. After simple planning, Pikku decided to recruit two thousand Inuit men to form an army of twenty-four hundred.

In reality, Pikku already had an Inuit militia of over a thousand men. This was a team he had formed with his Viking men as the core, absorbing the Inuit people he had conquered in the first year. Over the past two years, they had achieved many merits.

However, after the White Wolf soldiers left, Pikku lost an arm. To ensure his ruling position and deterrence, he had to keep the militia he had trained firmly in his hands.

Chapter 195: Spring of 1632

In 1631, the center of the world in the eyes of the East was the Ming Dynasty, where disasters struck relentlessly—earthquakes, famines, civil unrest, and rebel uprisings—all weakening the already declining empire. Meanwhile, the Later Jin successfully produced their first batch of cannons, named the Tianyou Zhuwei Grand General.

In the West, the center of the world remained much the same as before. The pan-European war, which had raged for over a decade, saw the Protestant Union’s leading figure shift from Christian IV of Denmark to Gustavus Adolphus II of Sweden.

Gustavus Adolphus II lived up to his reputation as a military genius. Under his brilliant command, Europe’s first professional standing army, composed and trained entirely of native soldiers, dominated northern Germany, capturing cities and expanding their gains.

The emperor and generals of the Holy Roman Empire were deeply alarmed. After dispatching several renowned commanders to reinforce their forces, they seized Magdeburg—a city that had sided with Sweden—and carried out a brutal massacre in the name of cleansing Protestants. Nearly thirty thousand people were slaughtered, and the Holy Roman Empire’s forces pressed onward, threatening the left flank of Gustavus Adolphus II’s army.

Gustavus Adolphus II responded swiftly, forming an alliance with the Protestant nobles of northern Germany. He consolidated an army of nearly fifty thousand men and engaged the Holy Roman Empire’s forces under the famed general Tilly in a decisive battle, crushing them and seizing vast territories in central and northern Germany.

The year 1631 was destined to be Gustavus Adolphus II’s stage. His string of victories elevated him to the status of a legendary commander, earning the respect and fear of Europe’s rulers.

By the latter half of 1631, the war had temporarily paused. Representatives from Sweden, France, and the Holy Roman Empire gathered in Bavaria, southern Germany, for negotiations. However, the Duke of Bavaria, acting as the Holy Roman Empire’s frontman, had no real intention of peace. He merely engaged in empty talks with Sweden. Everyone knew that once the cold winter passed, the war would resume in the spring.

Unlike the tense atmosphere in Germany, Vinland and Iceland remained peaceful havens throughout the winter of 1631. People stayed indoors, warming themselves by fireplaces, stoves, or charcoal braziers, living a simple life of eating and sleeping, with little reason to venture outside.

For the Vikings and Indian slaves of Iceland, the winter’s cold and long nights made outdoor activities impossible. Even though Iceland’s ports never froze, no one went fishing. Tradition dictated that fish be dried in the summer to sustain them through the winter.

Vinland’s quietude stemmed from its sparse population and the rigid hierarchy of Viking rule. Labor, earnings, status, and duties were all strictly regulated, leading to a predictable way of life. With no production possible in the cold winter, nearly everyone spent over a month indoors, sustained by potatoes and sweet potatoes.

Then, in January 1632, the Viking Thanksgiving arrived, suddenly bringing Vinland to life.

The Viking Thanksgiving, created by Katrin in imitation of the English colonists in North America, differed significantly in its purpose. While the English gave thanks to the Indians, the Vikings honored their ancestors who had discovered Iceland, Greenland, and Vinland centuries ago. Without their ancestors’ voyages, there would be no Vinland or Greenland today. During the festival, families brought out their finest wines and meats for feasting, and even the slaves received gifts from their masters. The indentured white slaves were also rewarded by Olaf. The Thanksgiving had become a celebration not just for the Vikings but for everyone in Vinland.

Olaf had long grown weary of Vinland’s monotonous life. While other seasons kept him busy, the winter’s confinement left him bored and restless. Seeking some excitement, he hosted a grand banquet at Haldor’s fortress, gathering all the Vikings stationed in Hrut City for a day of feasting and revelry.

After the Thanksgiving festivities, Vinland’s weather gradually warmed. Factories resumed operations, and spring hunting expeditions began.

As Olaf busied himself, Iceland also welcomed the spring of 1632.

Iceland had been silent for over a month during winter, but with spring’s arrival, it slowly regained its usual bustle. Big Port, in particular, saw commercial activity resume in late January, with Icelandic merchant ships carrying wool, sheepskins, cowhides, and dried fish setting sail in early February.

Grand Duke Haldor of Iceland had just issued new tax regulations, imposing levies on agriculture, fishing, herding, and trade. The people quickly realized that the taxes collected by the Icelandic parliament were a third less than what the previous governor’s office had demanded. After centuries of exploitation, the Icelanders finally tasted the sweetness of self-governance, and their gratitude was profound. Every citizen eagerly paid their taxes and approached their work with renewed vigor.

Haldor earned the title of the “Benevolent Grand Duke,” and the people of Iceland were more than willing to contribute, their spirits high as they engaged in their daily labors.

Big Port and the other four military districts, aside from managing civilian affairs, were also busy training soldiers.

Though training had been suspended for over a month due to winter, the Viking soldiers still displayed remarkable discipline and execution. More than half of the five Viking Raid units were Icelanders—tall, strong, and raised in a culture of seafaring and plunder. Many had trained in swordsmanship, javelins, and throwing axes from childhood, making them formidable warriors after professional training.

While the wealthy merchants of Big Port sent ships out for trade and raiding, Haldor, following Heiner’s advice, dispatched two vessels from the northeastern peninsula back to the port. They were to transport goods sent from Vinland before the new year to Amsterdam for sale.

Late last year, just as winter began, Heiner, along with Katrin, Lorin, and other family members, had returned to Iceland. The Viking leadership had spent the winter reunited. Though the Duke’s Manor hosted banquets every few days, Haldor, Ulf, Heiner, and the others did not indulge. Instead, they planned to break Denmark’s blockade in the spring, using their fleet of nearly forty large ships to trade in Amsterdam. They intended to sell Vinland and Iceland’s specialties while purchasing timber and munitions.

Gandis, the manager of the East India Company, also met with Haldor and secured exclusive rights to Iceland’s products. This meant that all trade between the Icelandic Vikings and foreign merchants would have to go through Gandis’s East India Company—a gesture of gratitude for Hongrode’s support and assistance the previous year.

Currently, Denmark had used diplomatic pressure to halt British trade with Iceland. Denmark controlled the Baltic Sea’s exits and restricted its own merchants, as well as those from Sweden and Poland, from sailing to Iceland.

However, Dutch merchants were the boldest, continuing to trade secretly with Iceland. Over the winter, Haldor and his associates had planned to take the initiative in the spring, sailing to Amsterdam for commerce. To prevent their ships from being attacked by the Danish navy in the North Sea, Haldor instructed Gandis to first contact his relatives in Denmark to gather intelligence on the Danish fleet’s movements.

Chapter 196: The Unyielding King Christian IV

Gandis was unknown in Copenhagen, as the Hongrode family was vast, and he was merely a distant branch residing in the countryside. Moreover, his mission to Iceland on behalf of the family had been kept secret, allowing him to operate freely.

Currently, Gandis’s identity in Iceland was that of a Slavic merchant—a cover to better serve Haldor and relay Danish intelligence to Iceland, facilitating his treacherous actions.

Gandis swiftly dispatched his family’s merchant ships to sea. A week later, he obtained authentic information from Denmark and reported it to Haldor.

After Magnus and Christian’s defeat last year, both had been disciplined. King Christian IV had paid substantial pensions to the surviving mercenaries and royal guards, further straining Denmark’s finances, which had only just begun to recover from the pan-European war.

The small Icelandic uprising had not initially concerned King Christian IV. However, the Danish army’s failure to conquer Iceland and their subsequent crushing defeat had enraged him, filling him with deep shame.

The consecutive failures had severely wounded the pride of the Nordic powerhouse, Denmark. King Christian IV could barely tolerate losing to the Holy Roman Empire’s alliance, but losing to tiny Iceland was unbearable. He forced the parliament to approve the reconstruction of a powerful Danish navy and army, aiming to annihilate Iceland’s opposition and reclaim the island, which had “always” been under Danish control.

After over a dozen discussions and plans at the start of the year, Denmark decided to borrow from England. Initially, King Christian IV had relied on familial ties, but now Denmark was willing to pay interest to King Charles I. The wealthy Charles naturally agreed.

In February 1632, the 1.2 million shillings promised by England were transported back to Copenhagen by the Danish navy.

King Christian IV personally counted the coins before ordering the newly promoted Minister of Finance, Fitz Ulf, to distribute the loan to the shipyards and Magnus according to the year’s plan.

The Copenhagen shipyard boasted Denmark’s most advanced shipbuilding equipment and technology, along with the most skilled workers. It was comparable to Amsterdam’s shipyard and had been producing warships and merchant vessels for the nation for years. This time, King Christian IV, preparing for a large-scale assault on Iceland, ordered thirty armed warships.

Magnus, being the king’s son-in-law and one of Denmark’s few great generals, was still relied upon by King Christian IV. After much deliberation, Magnus was allowed to redeem himself by continuing to recruit and train soldiers and lead the attack on Iceland.

Gandis informed Haldor that, according to King Christian IV’s plan, the recruitment and training of troops would take only half a year, with the attack on Iceland scheduled for September. Before then, the Danish navy would patrol the North Sea and station a fleet of ten warships in the Faroe Islands to blockade Iceland.

After thanking Gandis, Haldor ordered the summoning of the Viking Raid generals for a meeting to strategize against the impending Danish invasion in half a year.

This time was different from the last. Denmark was now prepared and had secured a loan from England, essentially mobilizing the entire nation to conquer Iceland. For the small island, this was a critical moment—any misstep could lead to utter destruction.

Haldor felt immense pressure and lacked confidence, so he relied on the five Raid generals and Heiner, hoping they could devise a clever strategy and diligently train the troops.

In March, the Raid generals arrived in Big Port one after another. After several meetings, primarily following the suggestions of Hudik and Heiner, Haldor formulated Iceland’s defense strategy.

They would construct bastions at the Big Port docks and immediately relocate the residents to the North and South Districts. The area from the docks to the Central District and East District would be transformed into a battlefield filled with defensive fortifications and traps. The focus of resisting the Danish landing and attack would be on the docks, Central District, and the East District behind the Duke’s Manor as the final line of defense. As long as these three lines held with all of Iceland’s forces, Reykjavik would not fall.

As long as Reykjavik stood, the Icelandic Free Republic and Grand Duke Haldor would endure. Reykjavik’s importance and status in Iceland were irreplaceable. If Big Port fell, even if Haldor retreated to other regions to fight Denmark, the people’s morale would collapse. Without Big Port’s support, the Viking Raid trapped on the island would struggle to survive and would eventually be annihilated.

In late March, Haldor, as Grand Duke, convened the parliament and congress, declaring that the Icelandic Free Republic was entering a special period of martial law. All regions would be governed by the Viking Raid, suspending all external commercial and daily activities. All Vikings would be reorganized under the management of generals, district leaders, steersmen, oarsmen, and production team leaders, adopting a rationing system.

While the people lived under the planned economy rationing system previously proposed by Olaf, the five Raid generals focused on training elite soldiers. They implemented a strict military training system where all Viking soldiers were fully dedicated, undergoing daily rigorous training in formation, assault, firearms shooting, javelin and throwing axe, and long spear thrusts.

War was imminent, and Iceland instantly shifted into combat mode. The entire island and its people transformed into a massive bastion, making thorough preparations.

Over the past half year, the Viking Raid system had taken root in Iceland. Life as a Viking was indeed better than before. Grand Duke Haldor was benevolent and wise, a great military leader who had defeated the powerful Danish invaders. Additionally, the distant lands of Vinland served as a tangible “carrot,” promising Indian slaves and fertile land. The Icelandic Vikings willingly accepted the rationing system, following the Viking Raid’s distribution of work and rations, all to endure this year and repel the Danish invasion. Victory would secure Indian slaves and Vinland’s fertile lands, allowing them to live as prosperous Viking lords.

The Icelandic people were unaware of the tale of “plucking plums to quench thirst,” and Haldor did not know it either. However, he understood the principle of “drawing cakes to satisfy hunger.” As long as they could defeat the Danes again, Denmark’s national strength would decline further, making it impossible for them to confront Iceland for the next three to five years. This would give Iceland time to develop and integrate with Vinland, unleashing its potential. In the future, Iceland could achieve true independence and strength, becoming a nation capable of equal dialogue and cooperation with others.

To have the Icelandic people make temporary sacrifices and contribute to the collective, Haldor did not hesitate to make another promise: after defeating Denmark this year, he would increase the rewards of land and slaves in Vinland. For example, regardless of other merits, every Icelandic Viking would receive a native slave as a basic reward.

Upon learning of the benevolent Grand Duke’s new reward decree, the Icelandic people, who had never experienced such kindness from their ruler and had always been exploited, were moved once again.

For their own happiness and their benevolent ruler, the Icelandic Viking people worked with even greater enthusiasm and passion.

Chapter 197: Thriving Industries

Spring in Vinland was warmer than in Iceland, and Olaf had felt this ever since arriving. According to the elderly Beothuk slaves, Vinland had been much warmer decades ago—so much so that winters often saw no snow or ice.

Olaf was skeptical of this claim, though not entirely dismissive. The entire world was in the midst of a mini ice age, and Vinland, Iceland, and Greenland were indeed colder than before.

Years of relentless hunting had nearly driven beavers, muskrats, and other animals to extinction on the island. This year, the hunters of Hrut City and Haldor City had labored to set traps and snares, yet in a week, they had only managed to catch a little over a hundred beavers and muskrats, and just over forty white wolves.

Olaf knew that excessive hunting had devastated Vinland’s ecosystem. The once-abundant wildlife was now scarce. To ensure this year’s fur production did not decline, he dispatched men to Labrador, Quebec, Abenaki, Huron, Iroquois, and Plymouth, ordering the governors to intensify hunting efforts. He also used glass beads, glassware, porcelain, and iron tools—items favored by the natives—to encourage them to trade their furs.

While the spring hunting season was in full swing across Vinland, Olaf’s factories were working overtime to produce various goods. He spent his days shuttling between the workshops and breeding farms, overseeing the industrial development of Hrut City while also sending people to Haldor City to check on the progress of shipbuilding.

A few days later, as the weather grew warmer, Tom suddenly returned to Hrut City with good news.

The jurisdiction of New France stretched along both banks of the Saint Lawrence River, extending to the vast lands centered around Quebec. At its easternmost point lay the northern part of the Nova Scotia Peninsula and Cape Breton Island. Over the past few years, the Nova Scotia Peninsula had been a target for Scottish colonial companies, but due to Vinland’s rise and the fall of the Massachusetts Bay Company, the Scots had abandoned their colonization plans. Recently, the area had become a haven for pirates.

However, with Vinland’s growing influence and the efforts of Hudik and Ulf two years prior to drive out pirates and fishing vessels, the number of pirates in eastern Nova Scotia had dwindled. Most had relocated to the Bahamas in the south.

After becoming the governor of New France, Tom’s first order of business was to lead troops in inspecting all settlements within the territory and meeting with the Huron, Cree, and Abenaki inhabitants. His final stop was the Nova Scotia Peninsula, where he discovered an open-pit coal mine in the northern part of the peninsula.

Knowing how valuable coal briquettes were to Olaf, Tom immediately rushed back to Hrut City to deliver the news.

Olaf recalled that he had once heard of a large coal mine in Nova Scotia—an open-pit mine, no less.

Coal mining in Vinland was difficult, with low output and challenging transportation. The mine in northern Nova Scotia was far superior.

Without hesitation, Olaf sent word to Robert, the manager of the Longling Mountain coal mine, instructing him to inspect the site in Nova Scotia. If feasible, the entire mining operation would be relocated there.

The shipyard in Haldor City, primarily using refined materials brought from Amsterdam and mature timber crafted by the Vikings over the years, had been operating under the guidance of old Mr. Habert since summer. On average, they could produce two ships per month. To date, they had built twelve sturdy vessels for Olaf. These ships were the latest Swedish warships—long and narrow, with three decks, capable of hoisting four sails in various configurations. They were fast on the sea and could mount up to twenty-four cannons, making them ideal for naval combat.

Olaf had inspected them himself and found that the ships built by Habert were far superior to those his father and uncles had brought to Iceland. He couldn’t help but marvel at his good fortune in securing Habert’s expertise.

Habert had proven his exceptional skill and mastery of shipbuilding. After the shipyard resumed operations in the new year, Olaf tripled his wages and gifted him two female slaves and two male slaves.

Habert sent a personal letter of thanks via his apprentice, expressing gratitude while also noting that the spare parts brought from Amsterdam last year had been exhausted. Currently, they were making do with copper strips for rivets and other components, but these were barely sufficient. He earnestly requested that Olaf procure more shipbuilding parts and equipment this year. Attached to the letter was a list detailing the specifications, quantities, and even prices of the required items.

Olaf carefully stored the list away, only to be immediately drawn into the bustling harvest of Vinland’s specialties.

Maple syrup was a unique product of Vinland and the first major invention Olaf had introduced. Harvesting began at the end of February and had to be completed by late March. The sap was then boiled down into syrup and stored in clay jars. The golden “Royal Jelly” could be shipped to Europe in exchange for vast sums of gold and silver.

Vinland’s primary exports were furs, maple syrup, malt sugar, liquor, and dried fish, supplemented by starch, wine, raisins, jerky, porcelain, copper strips, and timber. The overall value of these goods was extremely high and continuing to rise. However, the highest revenue still came from furs and sugar—maple syrup and malt sugar included.

Producing malt sugar required large quantities of potatoes and sweet potatoes, and daily output was low. The cost was four to five times that of the raw ingredients.

Maple syrup, on the other hand, was harvested from wild maple trees once a year. Apart from labor and firewood or coal briquettes for boiling, the cost was minimal, yet the returns were enormous.

In the European sugar market, Spanish cane sugar and Vinland’s malt sugar each held half the market share. The high-end segment was dominated by Vinland’s “Royal Jelly” and Eastern white sugar. Olaf valued the maple syrup industry as highly as any other, fearing that limited time might affect this year’s output and next year’s production. He threw himself entirely into the sap collection process, constantly urging governors and workers to prioritize the task. He also dispatched people to the highest-yielding maple trees, marked in previous years, to ensure they were tapped first.

While the nine districts of Vinland were busy hunting for furs, the maple sap collection gradually took on greater significance.

Since the start of spring, the Vikings, white slaves, and native slaves had been working tirelessly under Olaf’s direction, contributing to the increased production of Vinland’s specialties.

The busiest time in Vinland was always spring, as it was the season for hunting, maple sap collection, sugar boiling, and spring planting. For nearly three months every year, everyone—Viking lords included—was kept busy.

Time flew by, and when Olaf finally lifted his head from his endless tasks, he realized that two months had already passed.

After confirming with the old steward Spier, Olaf accepted that it was already the end of March, and April was just around the corner.

The island’s temperature had begun to rise, and flowers and leaves were starting to bloom. Vinland’s late spring was nearly over.

Chapter 198: The North American Native Slave Legion

Olaf finished his breakfast—a hearty combination of toast, venison, and oatmeal—prepared by his household slaves. He then donned a light cotton robe and draped a fur coat over his shoulders before stepping out.

These past few days marked the period when the six regions beyond Vinland—Labrador, Iroquois, and others—were delivering their goods to Hrut City: maple syrup, furs, timber, and dried meat. Olaf calculated that the morning’s shipment should have arrived by now, so he set off early for the docks to oversee the inventory.

To ensure swift and accurate accounting, Olaf had sent word to the school early that morning, summoning DeGula and Duca, the two elderly priests, along with several dozen Viking and white slave students.

Following Olaf’s educational priorities for Vinland, these students had first been taught mathematics—the skill he deemed most practical for the colony’s current needs. Olaf placed great importance on mathematical talent, even personally authoring the textbooks used by the two priests.

After over a year of instruction, though few of the Viking or white slave children were particularly bright, more than half could now perform basic arithmetic—addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division—making them perfectly capable of tallying goods.

Over the past year of governing Vinland, Olaf had developed a keen awareness of the colony’s many shortcomings. The population was small, illiteracy widespread, and most inhabitants—even many of the Indian slaves—spoke poor ancient Norse. While managing them wasn’t particularly difficult, their execution and responsiveness were lacking, often worse than the white slaves. Many tasks required excessive time for deployment, execution, and even communication, with diminished results.

Olaf understood that this stemmed from the fact that most of Vinland’s subjects were ignorant and simple-minded native slaves. For now, he had no intention of providing them with advanced education, fearing that if they grew too clever, they might cause trouble. After all, the Icelanders’ goal was to rule Vinland—and eventually all of North America—peacefully. To achieve this, they needed to keep the far more numerous Indian slaves docile and unthinking.

Olaf was beginning to grasp the mindset of the Great Khans and Living Buddhas who had ruled the Qing Dynasty. Governing a vast population with a tiny minority was like sitting on a powder keg—one dared not give the conquered people even the slightest chance to rise up.

After a year and a half of schooling, the church school in Hrut City had produced several dozen young students from Viking and white slave families. According to DeGula’s projections, the top performers would soon be ready to graduate.

As the nominal headmaster, Olaf planned to assign these graduates to promising positions—accountants, clerks, or other administrative roles to assist the governor and other high-ranking officials.

Olaf was confident that as long as the church school continued to cultivate talent, Vinland’s future would be bright. He would no longer have to struggle with the colony’s affairs as he had this past year, constantly overwhelmed and stretched thin.

Two days later, the six regions beyond Vinland, along with Bakens City and Haldor City on the main island, had all delivered their supplies to Hrut City. After a thorough inventory, the goods were stored in the warehouses.

Olaf flipped through the neatly organized ledgers, filled with the students’ meticulous handwriting under the priests’ guidance. Each entry listed the product name, specifications, quantity, and origin—clear and easy to understand.

He didn’t need to calculate anything himself; a quick glance told him that this year’s shipments of furs and maple syrup were lower than last year’s, especially the furs, which had seen a significant drop. The most affected regions were Vinland itself and the Labrador Peninsula, likely due to overhunting the previous year.

Olaf mused that if Iceland could secure its independence in Europe within the next two years, Vinland would need to ease its hunting of beavers and other animals, allowing the wildlife time to recover. Otherwise, they risked killing the golden goose.

Olaf’s concern for the animals was purely pragmatic—he feared exhausting the resource. Years of life in Vinland had hardened him, eroding any remnants of compassion he might have carried from his past life.

With all the supplies accounted for and the factories overflowing with goods, Olaf decided it was time to take a shipment to Europe.

Just as he was about to order an inspection of the fleet in preparation for the journey, a large ship arrived from Iceland, carrying wool fabrics, linen, and a message from Haldor.

From the accounts of Haldor’s personal guards and the Viking captains, Olaf learned that Denmark was mobilizing its entire nation, expanding its army and navy, likely preparing for another assault on Iceland.

Last year’s failure had not dealt Denmark a crippling blow, nor had it taught them a lesson. Instead, it had provoked an even fiercer backlash. Though Olaf had suspected this might happen, the reality still shocked him.

It was the early 17th century, and Europe’s total population was just over one hundred million. Only two nations—the Holy Roman Empire (including Austria, Hungary, and the electorates) and France—boasted populations exceeding twenty million. Spain and Portugal’s combined kingdom, the Ottoman Empire, the Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth, and the Russian Tsardom each had over ten million. England barely scraped by with nearly ten million.

Beyond these major powers, most countries had populations of only one or two million. Denmark, having absorbed Norway, was a Nordic powerhouse with two million people and a formidable military. Similarly, Sweden, which had annexed Finland, also had two million citizens and a strong army.

Under Gustavus Adolphus II’s reforms, Sweden’s artillery and land forces had become exceptionally powerful, as proven in conflicts with Poland and the German states. To counter Denmark, Sweden’s navy was rapidly expanding. With its vast territory, Sweden had already surpassed Denmark, becoming the dominant Nordic power, capable of overpowering both Russia and Poland.

Though Denmark had suffered a defeat while leading the Protestant Union, its naval strength remained intact. Its current status as a major northern power relied on its fleet of sixty warships.

Two million might not seem like much, but compared to Iceland’s sixty thousand and Vinland’s two hundred thousand, Denmark was a colossus—and one with a powerful navy.

If Denmark launched a full-scale invasion of Iceland, Olaf wasn’t confident in Iceland’s survival, let alone victory.

However, with Sweden looming as a greater threat, Denmark should be conserving its strength rather than wasting resources on Iceland, a target of little strategic value. Olaf suspected that Christian IV’s decision to attack Iceland wasn’t about Iceland itself but about flexing Denmark’s muscles before the other European powers—Iceland was merely the sacrificial chicken in a game of intimidation.

Regardless of Denmark’s motives, Olaf was determined not to let Iceland fall. The Icelandic Free Republic had to endure, and his father’s position as Grand Duke had to remain secure.

Olaf decided to liquidate all of Vinland’s resources this year, converting them into weapons, equipment, and supplies to send to Iceland. This would bolster Iceland’s chances. He also resolved to accelerate ship production in Haldor City, aiming to build more vessels to support Iceland. Additionally, he would expand and train Vinland’s militia, ensuring he had a capable fighting force ready to aid Iceland when the time came.

In an instant, dozens of thoughts flashed through Olaf’s mind, but he remained resolute in his decision to expand the military at all costs.

After loading the Icelandic ship with potatoes, sweet potatoes, and other provisions, Olaf summoned the governors of the nine regions to Hrut City for a meeting. Two days later, once everyone had arrived, he briefed them on Iceland’s situation and Denmark’s plans for a second invasion. Amid the governors’ eager declarations of support, Olaf issued his orders: each region was to provide a set number of warriors based on its population. The seven more populous regions—Iroquois, Huron, New France, Abenaki, Labrador, Bakens City, and Plymouth—were each to select over a thousand healthy young native warriors, while the remaining regions were to send between one hundred and three hundred.

Once selected, the warriors were to be sent to Hrut City, where Olaf would personally oversee their organization into a proper military force.

Olaf intended to arm them with flintlock and firelock muskets from the warehouses, forming a North American Native Slave Legion with private slaves and existing militia as its core. It was the best he could do under the circumstances.

Though time was short and the Indian slaves lacked discipline, Olaf believed that even with low combat effectiveness, their sheer numbers—eight to nine thousand—would provide significant firepower. In close combat, they could fight freely, and even if their performance was lackluster, it would still be better than nothing. After all, native warriors armed with sharp iron weapons were no pushovers in melee.

For the Icelandic Free Republic, every additional bit of strength increased the chances of defeating or repelling Denmark.

Chapter 199: The Greenland Regiment

During the year and more that Olaf had been “regent” of Vinland, he had treated the governors and city lords with kindness. But at this meeting, he broke from his usual demeanor, not only strictly assigning quotas and deadlines to the governors but also establishing a system of rewards and punishments.

After the meeting concluded, the nine governors bid Olaf farewell and hurriedly left Hrut City, preparing to return to their posts to recruit militia.

Olaf, meanwhile, gathered the Viking women and the families of the white slaves, instructing them to work with the tailors in his factory to craft military uniforms and boots from animal hides.

By early April, Hrut City—and indeed all nine districts of Vinland—were bustling once more. Previously, the focus had been on spring plowing, but now, the priority was the formation of the slave army.

Olaf tasked the governors with recruiting militia, while he himself took charge of drafting training plans and preparing all necessary supplies. He also ordered the shipyards in Haldor City to accelerate production and inspect the already-built vessels.

After nearly a week of relentless work, Olaf finally sorted out all matters, both big and small, by April 8th. He then assigned Duca and DeGula, the two priests, along with a dozen of the most outstanding students, to oversee and manage the operations.

With help at hand, Olaf finally let out a sigh of relief. He returned to the castle and ordered the cook to prepare a large pot of mutton, intending to enjoy a hearty meal. But just as the steaming mutton was served, before he could take a single bite, the door was pushed open by the household steward.

Spier, the old steward who had followed Haldor since Iceland, was the sole survivor among the servants who had accompanied Haig in colonizing Vinland over a decade ago.

However, Spier’s health was not good. During the coldest winters, he often suffered from asthma—after all, he was already sixty-seven years old.

“Master! Cough cough… Pikku from Greenland has arrived! He’s brought over two thousand native soldiers. He said he was worried that the forces in Iceland might be insufficient, cough… so he’s come to deliver the Greenland Regiment to you!”

Spier coughed a few times as he spoke rapidly, his face turning red after just three sentences.

Olaf quickly stood up and said, “Spier, don’t rush! Go and bring Pikku here at once. Have his Greenland Regiment settle in this area for now.”

Spier took a few slow breaths before replying, “Alright! I’ll go right away.”

With that, Spier hunched over and disappeared.

Olaf sat back down, his mood greatly improved. He gnawed on a mutton leg while trying to control his excitement.

Pikku was both Olaf’s servant and friend. Though distance had kept them apart in recent years, their bond seemed to have deepened. After a year of settling into life in Vinland, Olaf was genuinely pleased to hear of Pikku’s arrival.

Moments later, footsteps grew louder, and when the door was pushed open, Pikku, clad in a snow-white polar bear fur coat, entered.

Pikku now had a full beard, and his eyes were sharp. Upon seeing Olaf, he quickly stepped forward, dropped to his knees with a thud, and declared loudly, “Pikku greets his master! How is your health? I have been longing to see you day and night in Greenland, and today my wish has finally come true!”

Pikku’s voice was powerful, but by the end, his tone had softened, and tears welled in his eyes.

Olaf’s eyes reddened as he stepped forward to help Pikku up.

“I’m doing well! How about you? I heard you’ve taken two more wives? How many children do you have now?” Olaf asked with a smile.

Pikku wiped his tears as he stood up, grinning. “It’s all thanks to your blessings, master. I now have seven wives and four children, with two more on the way. When the children are a little older, I’ll send them to serve you!”

Olaf chuckled and sat down, pointing to the pot of mutton in front of him. “Have you eaten? Try the potato-stewed mutton!”

Neither the Icelanders nor the Inuit were ones to stand on ceremony. Pikku rubbed his hands together, sat down, grabbed a mutton leg, and devoured it ravenously. Olaf laughed softly, using a fork to pick up two potatoes and place them on Pikku’s plate.

“Eat more! How does it taste?”

“Delicious!” Pikku grinned. “Following the master means good food! My wives back home can’t cook worth a damn—this is far better! Next time I return to Greenland, master, you must give me some spices. Mistress Katrin used to cook seal meat with spices, and it was amazing…”

Food was always an eternal topic among humans, as the desire to eat was of utmost importance.

As Olaf and Pikku ate the mutton and chatted, their relationship seemed to return to how it had been years ago. Both enjoyed this relaxed and pleasant atmosphere.

After about ten minutes, the two had finished an entire basin of mutton before ordering the tableware to be cleared and replaced with porcelain teacups. A skilled Indian slave woman boiled water on a coal stove to brew tea for them.

There wasn’t much tea in Haldor’s fortress—only a few pounds, a luxury purchased from Europe the previous year.

Tea was indeed a luxury in Europe at the time, affordable only by nobles and wealthy merchants. Due to different dietary habits, European aristocrats preferred to add sugar to their tea to balance its bitterness.

Olaf, however, was more flexible with his tea. Sometimes he brewed it in the traditional Eastern style, while other times he made milk tea with sugar and milk.

This time, he served Pikku plain brewed tea. Seeing Pikku frown after a sip, Olaf laughed and said, “You don’t like it? Elise, go fetch some milk and sugar syrup. Make Pikku a cup of milk tea.”

Elise, a native slave woman with fairer skin and delicate features, bowed and left. Moments later, she returned carrying two jars of milk and sugar syrup. After mixing the brewed tea several times, she placed a cup of fragrant, milky-white liquid in front of Pikku.

Pikku swallowed hard, then took a sip. The sweet, rich flavor made him smile.

“Master! Your milk tea is truly wonderful! It tastes even better than wine!” Pikku beamed after downing half the cup in one go.

Olaf chuckled. “Milk tea is easy to make. I’ll have Elise teach you later. When you leave, take some tea leaves with you so you can make it yourself back home.”

“Thank you, master!”

“Pikku, what made you think to bring troops to support us? What happened?” Olaf raised an eyebrow and asked.

Pikku then explained his concerns about Haldor struggling to defend Iceland, and how he now had over twenty thousand Inuit subjects under his command. He believed it was only right to spare some men to form a regiment as fresh reinforcements for Vinland and Iceland.

Olaf was pleased with Pikku’s loyalty and asked, “How many men did you bring? How is their combat strength?”

“I left Chief Serokino behind to hold the fort and brought 2,400 elite soldiers. I named this regiment ‘Greenland,’ meaning we are your Greenland servants. The core officers in this army are the over three hundred White Wolf soldiers I took to Greenland. Over the years, seventy or eighty have died in battle or from illness, leaving only the elite. The two thousand Inuit warriors were carefully selected from various regions—healthy, intelligent young men who were already skilled hunters in their own tribes. Chief Nan trained them for over a week, so they now have decent combat skills!”

Olaf nodded upon hearing this. He had never equipped Greenland with a large number of firearms, so this Greenland army still relied on traditional weapons like long spears and bows. Moreover, due to differences in soldier quality and combat training compared to Europeans, the so-called Greenland Regiment had rather low combat effectiveness. However, since the regiment consisted of young men, their skills would improve significantly after a period of professional training.

Olaf was currently organizing Vinland’s slave army, so he was delighted by Pikku’s decision to bring reinforcements and was happy to have an additional two thousand troops at his disposal.

Olaf believed that with strict military training and management, and after two months of firearms training, the Greenland Regiment would be ready for battle. After all, like the Indian warriors of North America, the Inuit were brave fighters. Their current weaknesses were only in organization, discipline, and familiarity with firearms. Once these shortcomings were addressed, they would undoubtedly become a formidable force.

Chapter 200: The Six Legions of Vinland

On April 8, 1632, Pikku returned to Vinland with the Greenland Regiment, along with dozens of goods from Greenland—seal skins, walrus ivory, whale oil, whale hides, whalebone, polar bear pelts, muskox hides, reindeer hides, dried fish, and more.

As Governor of Greenland, Pikku personally presented the mountain of goods to Olaf, along with several barrels of cheese made from reindeer milk—Greenland’s unique specialty at the time.

Olaf knew these items were of great value and, in his capacity as Vinland’s highest leader, happily bestowed upon Pikku the title of “Superior Knight,” along with a set of bone china vases and teaware as a reward.

Originally, Olaf had intended for Pikku to stay only a few days before returning to Greenland. After all, the region had only recently been unified, and without his most trusted general stationed there, Olaf feared unrest or delays in this year’s revenue.

But when Pikku learned that Olaf planned to personally lead a great army to Europe, he immediately declared his intention to follow his master. Since Denmark was still preparing to attack Iceland this year, Olaf’s formation of the Vinland Slave Legion was undoubtedly meant to support Iceland in the coming war. Pikku could not abandon his master at such a critical moment.

Seeing Pikku’s sincerity, Olaf agreed to his request. From April onward, a bearded, yellow-skinned, small-eyed man remained constantly by Olaf’s side—not only serving and protecting him but also taking over tasks like washing his feet from the female slaves at Haldor’s fortress.

At first, Pikku was rusty in serving Olaf, having grown accustomed to being served in Greenland. But within two days, he had regained his former skill.

With Pikku back at his side, the loneliness in Olaf’s heart nearly vanished. His appetite improved, and he and Pikku shared two cups of strong liquor every day.

Olaf had just turned fifteen this year, and his physical development was nearly complete. However, he still felt no strong physiological desire for the opposite sex. Though the native female slaves around him were attractive, their submissive demeanor left him indifferent.

Olaf’s loneliness was more psychological—he had no confidant. After Heiner’s departure, he didn’t even have a friend to talk to, leaving him increasingly melancholic and isolated.

Though Pikku lacked education, he had lived with Olaf for years and shared many common experiences. His companionship alleviated much of Olaf’s loneliness.

Pikku was the person Olaf trusted most outside his family, and his loyalty made their time together relaxed and comfortable.

Olaf and Pikku inspected the warriors of the Greenland Regiment together. Olaf admired the vigor of the over two thousand Inuit soldiers and four hundred White Wolf officers. He then selected several captains from the guards of Hrut City and had them, along with the White Wolf officers, train the Greenland Regiment according to the military manuals Hudik had previously established.

Olaf’s mind was sharp and clear these days. After arranging the training matters for the Greenland Regiment, he suddenly realized that once the Vinland Slave Legion was formed, combined with the Greenland Regiment, his forces would exceed ten thousand. With so many people gathered, infectious diseases were inevitable. The practice of variolation had not been implemented in the Abenaki District, New France, Plymouth, or Greenland—all potential hazards.

Thus, Olaf ordered Viking women to inoculate the soldiers of the Greenland Regiment with smallpox powder. When the slave legions from various regions arrived, they would also be screened, and those who had neither contracted the disease nor been inoculated would receive variolation.

In April, most production and daily life in Vinland had come to a halt. Only the factories remained busy, while indentured white slaves and native slaves handled tasks like weeding, pest control, logging, fishing, and hunting. Most Viking families were occupied with boiling salt and drying fish.

By mid-April, the native slave legions selected and formed by the governors of Vinland’s nine districts had arrived in Hrut City under their personal leadership.

Hrut City, which had been quiet for a year, suddenly became lively with the arrival of over twelve thousand people.

Olaf ordered the soldiers to be settled first. Fortunately, the previously constructed housing in Hrut City was sufficient, so the nearly ten thousand Indian native warriors and over two thousand Inuit soldiers from Vinland’s nine districts had warm shelters.

Though each district’s governor had prepared ample dried provisions, Olaf still ordered the official granaries of the Viking raids to support the food and drink for the twelve thousand slave soldiers.

After personally inspecting the slave soldiers brought by each district, Olaf was generally satisfied. He immediately convened a deployment meeting attended by the governors of the nine districts and the Governor of Greenland.

At the meeting, Olaf proposed reorganizing the Indian native slaves sent by Vinland’s nine districts, breaking up their original order to form new legions.

Olaf knew that the mainland’s Indian natives were not a docile people. As a hunting and fishing culture, they were fierce and valued freedom. Though Vinland had temporarily maintained control by eliminating the original chieftains and promoting new leaders, most Indian natives had not truly submitted.

Thus, the loyalty of an army composed of Indian natives was questionable. To ensure he could firmly grasp the newly formed slave legions, Olaf had to exploit the animosities between the various Indian tribes to divide them.

Following Olaf’s strategy, he would reorganize the nearly ten thousand Indian native warriors from Vinland’s nine districts into five slave legions, each with roughly two thousand men. The composition of each Vinland Slave Legion was carefully balanced.

Among the nearly ten thousand native slaves, the most numerous were the Iroquois, Huron, and Abenaki, followed by the Cree and Pequot, with the Beothuk being the fewest. Except for the Beothuk, who had lived on Vinland Island for a long time and had little conflict with other groups, the remaining tribes had varying degrees of hostility—especially the Iroquois and the Huron, Cree, and Abenaki, who had centuries of blood feuds.

To better control these uncivilized savages and turn them into sharp blades in his hand, Olaf formed three legions from the most numerous Iroquois, Huron, and Abenaki. However, the mid-level and high-ranking officers of these legions were his private Beothuk slaves and a few indentured white slaves.

The other two legions included a minority of the three major tribes, with the rest being Cree and Pequot. In these legions, the Cree and Pequot fully served as mid-level officers, with a few in high-ranking positions. Olaf believed that by mixing the five legions in this way, they would exist in a state of mutual competition and vigilance, allowing him to maintain complete control.

Though coordination between the five legions in battle might be problematic, Olaf did not dare to expect too much. He only hoped they could be commanded normally and exhibit some combat effectiveness.

Beyond the five Vinland Slave Legions, there was the Greenland Regiment, whose status subtly overshadowed the others. These six legions were collectively known as the Six Legions of Vinland, Olaf’s sole and most powerful force at present.

After the meeting, all matters were resolved, especially the leadership issue.

Olaf himself would serve as the Grand Commander of the Six Legions of Vinland, with Pikku as his deputy. Pikku would also remain the commander of the Greenland Regiment, with Nan as his deputy.

The remaining five slave legions would be led by Tom, Solrak, Ilugi, Polly, and Brun. Once Olaf led the great army out of Vinland, the region would be temporarily overseen by Kalm and Hilt. Olaf had no grand demands of them—he only asked that they stabilize the situation during the summer and autumn, ensuring the agricultural planting in both the Iroquois Plains and Vinland proceeded smoothly.

Chapter 201: Vinland’s “Baturu”

After two days of meetings and discussions, Olaf made several personnel adjustments and established six Vinland military legions, each averaging two thousand men, within Hrut City.

This was the only and most powerful armed force Olaf currently had at his disposal, the new force he planned to take to Europe to support Iceland.

Although this new legion had various issues and couldn’t even execute simple commands properly, Olaf knew that the simple-minded native warriors were best suited to be soldiers. With some training, and the hope of future achievements to become chiefs, tribal leaders, or even Viking lords, all six legions would become sharp blades in Olaf’s hands.

After organizing the legions, Olaf ordered the retrieval of over three thousand outdated firelock muskets and ammunition from the warehouse. He had the six legion commanders select the most loyal, agile, and quick-witted soldiers—five hundred per legion—to begin training three thousand musketeers.

Vinland’s most advanced flintlock muskets had already been taken to Iceland, leaving Olaf with only firelock muskets, barely enough to support the training of musketeers in the six legions. Olaf planned for each legion to train not only musketeers but also a large number of pikemen and a small number of cavalry.

The spear armory was well-stocked, so Olaf wasn’t worried about that. However, the usable horses in Vinland, including breeding farms, barely amounted to fifty. But Olaf had been preparing for this situation over the past two years.

If horses were insufficient, moose could be used instead.

If history wasn’t changed, decades or even a century later, Sweden would train moose cavalry, which had played a certain role in battles against Tsarist Russia. Therefore, Olaf wasn’t worried about whether moose could be trained as cavalry mounts.

Over the past two years, Olaf had been capturing and taming moose across Vinland. The Shahalimnir Breeding Farm in Hrut City had already tamed over three hundred moose, while Labrador, Huron, and Iroquois each had dozens to over a hundred.

Moose were large herbivores, surpassing ordinary horses in size and weight, with endurance and speed comparable to top racehorses. The only drawback was the difficulty in taming them. However, after one or two generations of breeding, it was possible to cultivate docile and obedient mounts suitable for the battlefield.

Currently, the number of tamed moose in Vinland was considerable. Apart from breeding stock, the remaining male moose had been castrated and trained. While they might not yet be capable of charging in formation, they were already suitable for marching and travel.

Over ninety-five percent of the soldiers in Vinland’s six legions had no riding skills. Even with some adaptation to the moose, they would likely only reach the level of riding for pre-battle marches. Charging in formation would probably not be achievable in the short term.

Olaf’s expectations for the cavalry weren’t high. With the moose replacing horses in sufficient numbers, moose from various regions were soon sent to the Shahalimnir Breeding Farm in Hrut City.

With the existing stock and additional deliveries, the total number of moose reached over eight hundred, including two hundred calves and over two hundred pregnant or nursing females. The remaining usable moose numbered less than four hundred.

Olaf personally selected eighty to ninety sturdy and tall young moose from the calves. Combined with the usable horses in Vinland, he finally gathered five hundred and three mounts. He kept a young gray-white moose for himself as a mount, and the rest were assigned to the five hundred strong, skilled archers selected from the six legions to train as cavalry.

In April, all of Vinland mobilized to prepare for the great war.

The six Vinland legions also began daily training under the leadership of their commanders and officers. The training curriculum followed Hudik’s original plan, with some adjustments by Olaf. In the mornings, pikemen practiced thrusting and defense, while musketeers drilled in lined-up musket volleys. Although the current muskets lacked rifling, were simply made, and had poor range and accuracy, training could still improve precision to some extent.

In the afternoons, they practiced large-scale marching to enhance command execution, discipline, and individual combat skills.

The eighty-plus cavalry from each legion were separated from their respective units and placed directly under Olaf’s command. Every day, they trained with moose, bows and arrows, javelins, and spears, navigating through forests.

Olaf personally led the moose cavalry, training their riding skills and the ability to coordinate archery and foot combat.

Even with three more months of training, Vinland’s cavalry wouldn’t possess the combat capabilities of mature cavalry. Olaf planned to play to their strengths and avoid their weaknesses. As long as his cavalry could charge on moose without breaking formation, they would pass. In combat, they would dismount and use bows, arrows, and spears, while on the moose, they could only throw javelins. Once these combat skills were mastered, they could coordinate with the legion’s square formations to provide cover and support.

Although firearms had become the mainstay on the battlefield, cavalry was still the most dazzling protagonist of the current era. European cavalry used mobility for charges and penetration, with pistols and carbines capable of unleashing powerful force. This combination of firearms and close combat was still in the exploratory stage, but when used well, it had a significant impact. Overall, cavalry could play a decisive role in many battles.

The Lord Protector, currently holed up in the countryside of Huntingdon in northeast London, was a master of cavalry. In the future, he would unify the British Isles and send Charles I to the scaffold with his trained iron cavalry.

Olaf thought he might ask Cromwell to help train his legions, as they were friends.

Unlike Europe, which relied on firearms, the cavalry of Asian nations like the Ming Dynasty and Japan still purely used close combat. Currently, the most formidable cavalry that relied on mounted archery was the Eight Banners, which had broken away from the Ming Dynasty to establish their own state.

The powerful armed forces of the Later Jin were currently all cavalry. They moved like the wind, could charge on horseback, and dismount to fight on foot at any time. Their mounted and foot archery were both precise and lethal. Combined with their fierce combat style and willingness to learn, they now possessed even more powerful general cannons, making them the foremost power in the Far East.

The five hundred cavalry Olaf selected were all young, strong, and skilled archers, similar to the Jurchen of the Later Jin. Currently, Olaf didn’t have enough pistols for the cavalry, so he could only train and use them like the Manchu Eight Banners.

It was true that the Manchu Eight Banners were formidable. Olaf thought that training his cavalry, which lacked firearms, into “Eight Banners elite troops” was a viable method. Perhaps even the Danish army wouldn’t be a match for these “Baturu”…

Even if in future battles the “Baturu” couldn’t defeat modern European armies, Olaf had no choice but to see it through. After all, his six Vinland legions were too backward and had much to learn. Relatively speaking, the fastest way to improve combat effectiveness was to emulate the Baturu with cavalry and coordinate infantry with muskets and pikes.

Olaf wasn’t a military genius, and the most militarily knowledgeable people around him—Hudik, Haldor, Haig, Kadir—were all far away in Iceland. To train an army that belonged to him and was useful, Olaf could only haphazardly research and train.

With his experience from future knowledge, Olaf believed that regardless of the gap in weapons, equipment, and individual combat skills, as long as his army could follow orders and obey commands, they would possess a certain combat capability.

Fortunately, the six legions under Olaf’s command were all young and naive natives. Over ninety percent of them believed Olaf’s claim of divine bloodline and that loyalty and bravery would bring them land, servants, women, and livestock, and that achievements would make them Viking lords.

Thus, the soldiers of the six Vinland legions had near-perfect obedience in their hearts. All that was lacking was the execution of various combat commands like “advance,” “retreat,” and “charge.”

Chapter 202: The Divine King Church

During training, to ensure the soldiers’ nutrition kept up, Olaf spared no expense in their meals.

Under Olaf’s personal supervision, the soldiers of Vinland’s six regiments enjoyed fragrant meat and fish daily, along with sweet potatoes, squash, and other hearty foods. To guarantee quality and taste, Olaf ate with the soldiers every day.

The native soldiers, who had never tasted food seasoned with spices, believed they were feasting on dishes prepared by the divine chef Andhrímnir in Valhalla—using the sacred boar Shahalimnir and the divine goat Heiðrún. Combined with Olaf’s paternal care—eating, sitting, and training alongside them—the soldiers’ reverence and loyalty deepened. Many were deeply moved, feeling more content and warm than ever before.

Two years prior, Olaf had instructed the Vikings and native chiefs in Vinland to vigorously promote Norse mythology to dilute Christianity’s influence. Over time, whether out of genuine belief or mere curiosity, the Vikings, indentured white slaves, and even native slaves had come to cherish the vivid Norse myths.

Among the simplest-minded natives and Inuit, their primitive shamanistic beliefs had been absorbed into Norse and Christian mythology. Under the guidance of Vinland’s Viking rulers, the advanced faiths that had developed over millennia swiftly obliterated the indigenous traditions.

Now, across all nine regions of Vinland, the natives had embraced a unique “new faith” called the Divine King Church. According to its doctrine, after Odin and the World Tree perished, the new god Jehovah created heaven and earth. Then, the Holy Son Jesus descended as the human king, with Haldor, Olaf, and others as the divine bloodline of Odin, Jehovah, and Jesus—destined to rule the world.

The Divine King Church was currently spreading only among Vinland’s native tribes, lacking a formal ecclesiastical structure. Yet, it had expanded rapidly. Olaf estimated that its followers had already reached over two hundred thousand and were infiltrating neighboring native territories beyond Vinland’s control.

At this rate, within five years, the entire eastern and northern native populations of North America might fall under its influence. This was an unexpected boon for Olaf—it would not only solidify his family’s rule, much like Japan’s emperor claiming descent from the sun goddess, but also serve strategic purposes in future conquests.

Though the Divine King Church thrived among the tribes, the indentured white slaves and Vikings remained indifferent. Even the elderly priests DeGula and Duca denounced it as heresy. However, upon learning it was merely a pastime for the natives and that it reinforced white dominance, they ceased their objections.

Olaf had deliberately fostered the Divine King Church, aiming to bind his family’s rule to religious belief through ideological control. He believed that only by dominating the minds of North America’s natives could his family’s reign endure.

Once the church matured, its doctrines would align with Christian teachings, allowing Olaf to establish a new Protestant sect in Iceland and Vinland.

With the simple logic of “if monks can do it, so can I,” Olaf reasoned: If Charles I could become the pontiff-emperor of the Anglican Church, why couldn’t I become the pontiff-emperor of the Divine King Church?

In the monotonous lives of Vinland’s people, Vikings and indentured whites found solace in church activities and prayer, while the natives gradually adapted…

After reviewing the church’s progress through its current organizer and founder, Blackstone, Olaf rewarded him with a suit of plate armor and a rare white wolf pelt.

Once Blackstone left, Olaf resumed training, riding his gray-white moose, Haysen, across the grasslands near Avalon with his cavalry.

Days passed in a cycle of drills, meals, and rest.

By mid-May, Olaf was satisfied with the progress of his cavalry, musketeers, and long spearmen.

The weather had grown warmer. Though Vinland lay at high latitudes, the trees were lush. Ships from England and France had halved compared to previous years. A few fishing boats dotted Vinland’s waters, while the rare merchant vessels only dared dock in Virginia and Plymouth. Only Creek Company’s ships still stopped at Hrut City for supplies and trade—barely one or two a month.

While focusing on military training, Olaf did not neglect production—especially the gold, copper, and iron mines of Longling Mountain, as well as the iron deposits near Haldor City. He treated these as top priorities, checking progress every fortnight.

A small mining camp had been established on the Nova Scotia Peninsula. Solrak, the Abenaki governor, provided Robert, the manager, with abundant slaves and supplies, allowing him to relocate Longling Mountain’s coal mines to the peninsula’s north.

On the afternoon of May 10th, Robert personally escorted two ships of high-quality coal back to Hrut City. After inspecting the coal, Olaf was delighted—it was far superior to Longling Mountain’s in both quality and ease of extraction.

Robert estimated that by June, the northern coal mines would be fully operational, producing three hundred to three hundred fifty thousand pounds monthly—enough for Olaf to establish a coal briquette factory and export to Europe.

Europeans primarily used coal for cooking and heating, burning raw coal, which was difficult to ignite, smoky, and short-lived. Wealthy households still preferred charcoal.

Olaf’s coal briquettes solved most of these issues. He was confident they would fetch high prices in Europe. Moreover, he planned to bundle them with coal stoves and later introduce honeycomb coal, ensuring strong sales.

Accustomed to developing Vinland’s resources, Olaf thought deeply about every idea. However, producing and selling coal briquettes and stoves would have to wait. Only after breaking Iceland’s blockade and securing European recognition for the Free Republic of Iceland could his plans come to fruition.

In mid-May, after two rains, Olaf learned from a Creek Company ship that Denmark had lent Charles I an additional three hundred thousand. He feared Denmark’s invasion was imminent.

Worried he might be too late to aid his father against Denmark, Olaf deemed Vinland’s six regiments sufficiently trained. He ordered Habert, the master shipbuilder of Haldor City, to bring all ships to Hrut City with his apprentices.

On May 24th, fifteen sleek, towering armed warships from Vinland’s shipyards entered Hrut Port. Combined with the three cannon-equipped armed merchant ships already docked, Olaf now commanded eighteen world-class vessels. Though not as advanced as Denmark’s, Sweden’s, or Holland’s flagship Clacker and Galleon models, they rivaled the latest large galleon warships.

Chapter 203: Olaf’s Expedition (1)

Upon learning that the ships had arrived in port, Olaf eagerly rushed over, carefully inspecting each vessel. He examined the newly built hulls coated with animal fat, the sturdy timber, sails, and masts, ultimately praising Master Habert’s exquisite craftsmanship with admiration.

Habert’s frail figure straightened with effort, his sun-browned face flushing with excitement. Though he had experienced many ups and downs and thought himself beyond such vanity, Olaf’s praise still filled him with joy. “Even at sixty-two, I feel stronger here in Vinland. As long as Young Master Olaf allows me to build ships for Vinland, I believe I can work another decade!” He declared firmly, slapping his bony chest, earning a round of applause.

The fifteen large ships had exhausted all the materials and components Habert had brought from Amsterdam. He repeatedly urged Olaf to purchase enough supplies from Europe for the year ahead. Olaf assured him before sending Habert and his apprentices to rest.

…

With the ships docked and supplies neatly stored in the warehouses, Olaf knew the time had come. On the morning of May 25th, soldiers from Vinland’s six legions began loading supplies and goods onto the ships. Valuable furs, liquor, malt sugar, royal jelly, and bone china were placed in the middle decks of the large vessels, while provisions were stored below.

Olaf planned to take over ten thousand people to Europe, but the eighteen large ships could only carry just over six thousand. The remaining four thousand had to board smaller troop transports. Vinland had two types of troop ships: the Viking longships built by the Icelandic Vikings, unsuitable for ocean crossings, and the double-decked cog ships built by the shipyard in recent years. Though not large, each could carry about a hundred people and was sturdy enough for long voyages.

Olaf had ordered the Vinland shipyard to inspect, maintain, and reinforce the cog ships in early spring, and now they were ready for use. A few days later, on the afternoon of May 29th, over ten thousand soldiers from Vinland’s six legions boarded the eighteen warships and thirty cog ships. Under Olaf’s command, they set sail from Hrut Port, blowing long horns, playing harps, and singing Viking battle songs.

The expedition fleet of forty-eight ships carried 12,038 people. Apart from the experienced Viking sailors, the remaining crew consisted of indentured white slaves and seasoned Beothuk slave soldiers. Barring major incidents, they could handle any challenges at sea. All ships followed Olaf’s flagship, the “Whale Watcher,” reducing much of the workload.

Before departing, Olaf established many policies. Under his arrangements, Vinland would be temporarily governed by local governors. Since Tom, Solrak, and Ilugi had become legion commanders, the governorships of Quebec and Abenaki were handed to Halik and Hari. Olaf also established the Vinland Nine Districts Governors’ Council before leaving, which would rule Vinland until his return.

Olaf believed this loose autonomous organization was best suited for Vinland’s current gradual development. Even if there were delays and losses, once Europe stabilized and Iceland gained full recognition, he could return to Vinland without worries and resume ruling his people.

Currently, leaders like Haldor focused their development efforts on Iceland, driven by cultural identity and homeland sentiment. Europe was the center of civilization, and returning to Iceland meant entering the civilized world. However, Olaf knew that Iceland, with its barren land and harsh environment, had limited development potential. Its small size couldn’t support a large population—even in the 21st century, Iceland only had three hundred thousand people. Olaf was determined to secure North America. By continuously expanding Vinland’s territory and claiming the lands of future America and eastern Canada, with their fertile soil, mineral resources, timber, fisheries, and indigenous slave labor, becoming a powerful nation was only a matter of time.

Olaf saw Iceland as a bridgehead for Vinland to extend its influence into Europe, participate in European affairs, and acquire advanced technology and talent. The true foundation lay in developing North America. As he once told Heiner: “With Iceland, Vinland can become a great power. But without Vinland, Iceland will never rise and might even become a colony again. I must hold onto Vinland and develop it!”

Deep down, Olaf harbored a secret ambition: if he could solidify his foundation in the two or three years before his father returned to Iceland, manage Vinland well, and rely on the leaders he had promoted and the six legions under his command, he would have the strength to compete with his brother Ulf for succession…

By late May, the Atlantic was no longer as calm as in spring. Though the North Atlantic storms weren’t yet frequent, Olaf’s fleet encountered two significant storms after a week at sea. The tall, sturdy warships weathered the storms easily, but the smaller cog ships suffered damage. Two cog ships collided in the rough seas, their hulls severely damaged and unable to proceed.

With losses in the fleet, Olaf ordered the soldiers and sailors from the two damaged ships to transfer to his flagship. He rallied the crew with the Viking cry, “Vikings fear no storm!” and continued eastward. The harsh weather and fright caused illness among the reindeer and horses in the holds, and many soldiers suffered from seasickness, vomiting, and even exhaustion. Olaf knew treatment would have to wait until landfall, so he tried to comfort them with encouraging words.

Through Olaf’s persuasion, the suffering soldiers regained their spirits, gritted their teeth, and resolved to endure. The storms had initially blown the fleet off course, but after half a month, they approached an unfamiliar continent. Olaf stood at the bow, gazing eastward. When he could make out the coastline as a massive harbor city, he sighed in relief. The city’s architecture resembled Dutch cities, and in this era, only European nations with thriving maritime trade could have such large harbor cities. North Africa certainly wouldn’t. Olaf thought they might have reached the English Channel or the Bay of Biscay.

Amid the crew’s cheers, Olaf said to Tom beside him, “Though this city is unfamiliar and not England or Holland, its style suggests we’re still in Europe. Perhaps we’ve reached southern Holland… or France… or Spain…”

Tom knew almost nothing about Europe. His experience matched his youthful age, unlike Olaf, the prodigy. Hesitantly, Tom said, “God bless us! We’ve finally seen land. But Olaf, if this isn’t a familiar place, could we run into trouble? Our fleet and numbers are too large…”

Olaf understood Tom’s concern about being mistaken for pirates. He quickly replied, “We’ll raise the Christian cross flag to show we’re Christians. Iceland has just gained independence and doesn’t have a national flag yet. Our family crest is just a simple black bull, but we didn’t prepare it, and even if we did, no one would recognize it…”

Chapter 204: Olaf’s Expedition (2)

As Olaf spoke, dozens of ships of varying sizes suddenly emerged from the harbor not far away.

From their sleek silhouettes, the black muzzles of cannons protruding from their sides, and the massive rams at their bows, it was clear these were warships. As they drew closer, Olaf and his men could see the menacing fleet of armed merchant ships and warships bearing the double-headed eagle emblem approaching to surround them.

“Have we run into pirates? Or are we being mistaken for enemies?!” Tom exclaimed in surprise.

“This is… the Habsburg double-headed eagle? Have we reached Spain?” Olaf furrowed his brow, then shouted orders, “Quickly, raise our cross flags! We must have entered a city under Habsburg rule. Our fleet is too large—it’s probably drawn the navy’s attention. They likely want to investigate. But if they have ill intentions, everyone must be prepared for a fight!”

Olaf’s orders were swiftly carried out. Moments later, as the two sides closed in, they exchanged flag signals twice before Olaf relaxed.

The other side communicated via flag signals and Latin shouts, informing Olaf that they had arrived at Lisbon, a major port city of the Spanish-Portuguese United Kingdom. Olaf had his signalman relay that they were Icelandic merchants returning from Africa.

After several exchanges, the Spanish navy demanded to board and inspect the ships to ensure they weren’t pirates in disguise.

Olaf couldn’t refuse and had to comply. Soon, a medium-sized ship approached Olaf’s flagship, and a plank was extended. Several soldiers in half-plate armor cautiously crossed with firelock muskets in hand, followed by an officer wearing a gilded helmet. The officer first sized up Olaf and his men before inquiring in standard Latin about their origins and purpose.

Tom and the others stepped forward to explain, while Olaf politely bowed with a hand over his chest and said, “We wish to enter the port to resupply and sell some of our specialties. Perhaps you’ve heard of them—royal jelly, Eastern malt sugar, Water of Life, and bone china are all signature products of the Icelandic merchant group!”

“Oh?!” The officer nodded, grinning. “Your goods are quite famous. If they weren’t so expensive, I’d actually like to buy a few bottles of Water of Life and a few pounds of malt sugar!”

Olaf understood the hint and quickly had Tom fetch proof of taxes paid in Amsterdam and other places in previous years, along with a leather pouch of Water of Life and several pounds of malt sugar blocks. He handed them to the officer and said, “This isn’t a gift for you alone—it’s for you to share with your family and friends. If they enjoy it, they can come purchase more.”

The officer nodded in satisfaction. “You’re quite generous! I’m Kata, a lieutenant in the Lisbon navy. I welcome you and your fleet to Lisbon! If you need anything, let me know. I’ll have my friends try your gifts!”

Half an hour later, with Kata’s assistance, Olaf’s fleet was exempted from the Spanish navy’s tedious inspections and guided into the harbor. As for the tens of thousands of people on board, Olaf passed them off as slaves purchased from the Pacific and South America.

Olaf had intended to treat Kata to a meal to express his gratitude, but Kata said he was still on duty, so they arranged to meet that evening instead.

With Kata’s help, Olaf first hired several Arab doctors to treat the sick soldiers on board. He also sold off the sick reindeer and horses at a low price. Then, he personally listed his goods at the exchange. Within an hour, Portuguese and Spanish merchants came aboard to inspect the merchandise.

After a brief inspection, Olaf sold fifty jars of malt sugar and royal jelly. Two hundred barrels of Water of Life were purchased, along with fifty sets of the finest bone china. As for furs and other goods, there were no immediate buyers. Compared to France, Holland, and England, there weren’t many fur traders in Portugal and Spain. Furs weren’t the most sought-after commodity in Lisbon, so Olaf fully understood why the Spanish and Portuguese favored liquor, malt sugar, and porcelain.

That evening, Olaf and Tom, along with a few others, treated Kata and his subordinates to a lavish feast at a luxurious restaurant outside the harbor.

During the meal, Kata informed Olaf that Spain and Portugal had vast colonies in Central and South America, which supplied Europe with large quantities of cane sugar. However, the Icelandic merchant group’s royal jelly and malt sugar had already begun to affect the interests of Spanish sugar merchants. That afternoon, many people had been inquiring about them.

Kata told Olaf that while the Portuguese might just be envious, the Spanish were not to be trusted. Even though Olaf’s fleet was large, with thousands of slaves, the Spanish might still try something underhanded.

Olaf understood Kata’s good intentions. Although his words might have been somewhat biased against the Spanish, it also meant that their situation might not be entirely safe. Perhaps someone was already eyeing their fleet. After all, competitors were rivals, and their malt sugar and royal jelly were cutting into the Spanish sugar merchants’ business…

After the feast, Olaf bid farewell to Kata and returned to his ship, where he summoned the six legion commanders to his cabin to discuss countermeasures.

After much deliberation, Olaf decided to leave Lisbon early the next morning and head north to Amsterdam as soon as possible. Currently, the most free and protected commercial environment in Europe was in Holland. With Holland’s volume and trade, Olaf’s goods could be sold out within three or four days.

Olaf also wanted to purchase some new smoothbore muskets in Amsterdam through his contacts at the East India Company to replace the firelock muskets used by his six legions. Additionally, after the long journey, more than a dozen reindeer had fallen ill from being cooped up in the ship’s hold, so he needed to buy some horses as replacements.

Purchasing food, fresh water, and textiles could be done in any city, but buying military supplies like firearms, ammunition, horses, and steel had to be done in Amsterdam. This was because Holland’s regulations weren’t strict for profit—anything could be bought as long as the money was right. Secondly, Olaf had already established a business partnership with the Dutch East India Company. Through them, he could smoothly acquire anything available for purchase.

Of course, some items required close relationships and exorbitant prices, but fortunately, Olaf had both the connections and the money. He was one of the most loyal friends of the merchants in the Dutch Republic.

The next morning, Olaf handed over the tax documents to the port officials, and the fleet left Lisbon’s docks, heading north toward the Bay of Biscay under the watchful eyes of the navy.

After leaving Lisbon, Olaf and Tom were relieved by their decision, as several unidentified ships had been trailing them. Olaf suspected they were Spanish or Portuguese merchants, but their numbers were few—no match for his fleet in a real fight.

As they sailed northward on high alert, the pursuing ships gradually disappeared within half a day.

Olaf knew that the Spanish merchant fleet and ships were too few to dare to continue the chase. If they had stayed in Lisbon a few more days, the group trailing them might have recruited enough men and ships, leading to an inevitable battle.

“Kata is quite decent!” Tom sighed in admiration. “If we get the chance, maybe we can make him a long-term friend!”

Olaf nodded. “Next time, we’ll bring enough soldiers. I think we can give Kata a fortune to thank him. He’s proven himself a friend and saved us a lot of trouble!”

Chapter 205: Olaf’s Expedition (3)

Olaf’s fleet left Lisbon three days ago and had since passed through the Bay of Biscay and the English Channel, entering the calm waters of the North Sea.

Upon entering the North Sea, the number of ships on the horizon gradually increased. Though they appeared to be merchant vessels, many English, Icelandic, and Norwegian ships could easily turn into pirate vessels at a moment’s notice.

Olaf’s fleet was a formidable presence in the North Sea, and all ships gave them a wide berth.

After half a day, Olaf finally spotted a man-made canal stretching across the land to the northeast. This was the canal connecting the North Sea to the province of Holland, dug by the industrious Dutch twenty years prior.

Since the canal’s completion, the Dutch had been reclaiming land from the sea, first turning the ocean into Lake IJssel, then gradually encroaching upon the lake, transforming its southern regions into solid ground.

A few years ago, navigation for large ships on Lake IJssel had even been restricted, as the Dutch were preparing to construct a massive dam in the north to fully enclose the area. Though Holland was a small, low-lying country with far fewer people and less territory than England or France, their spirit of self-improvement and diligence surpassed that of any other nation of their time. Their rise to become the “sea carriers” was only natural.

This canal, stretching from the North Sea southeastward into the heart of Amsterdam, had made an outstanding contribution to Holland’s economic development and was a cornerstone of their path to maritime dominance.

Compared to Denmark’s monopolization of the Baltic Sea’s exit, charging exorbitant “crossing fees,” Holland’s self-funded canal, which facilitated the passage of ships from all nations without charging a single penny in “tolls,” made them seem like a paragon of virtue.

Olaf understood that the Dutch had succeeded because they recognized that convenient transportation led to thriving commerce, and with commerce came wealth. Denmark, on the other hand, only knew how to fleece others, causing resentment among the eastern Baltic states and leading to a decline in Copenhagen’s commercial atmosphere over the past century. It was now far inferior to major cities like London, Lisbon, and Paris, let alone Amsterdam.

The fleet traveled through the canal for over three hours before entering Amsterdam’s inner city canal, docking at the West Harbor, where numerous docks and port areas were being developed on both sides of the river. From the moment they entered Amsterdam, Olaf could clearly see the vibrant energy and vitality of the city. The faces of the people on the streets were filled with hope for the future—something even the Icelanders, English, and Portuguese lacked. Olaf believed that only the Vikings’ own indomitable spirit could rival that of the Dutch.

Soon, under the guidance of the flag bearer, the fleet docked and came to a rest. Planks were laid across the ship’s side, and port officials and soldiers boarded the deck with an air of authority.

After attempting Dutch and French to no avail, the middle-aged tax official switched to English. “Where are you merchants from?”

Olaf, who had barely understood, replied in English, “We are an Icelandic trade delegation, here to sell our specialties in Amsterdam. We come every year and know the rules!”

The tax official nodded. “Good, that saves me the trouble. Go to the exchange to handle your business. Recently, Sweden has been at war with Austria in Germany, and Denmark has attacked your Icelandic Grand Duke. Many things in Amsterdam—grain, wine—have gone up in price. Your Icelandic dried fish, salted fish, and Water of Life should fetch a good price!”

Olaf and Tom’s expressions changed abruptly. They grabbed the official and demanded, “When did Denmark send troops? What’s the situation like?!”

The official frowned, shaking off Olaf and Tom, and coldly replied, “I don’t know. Ask the northern merchants!”

With that, the official left with the guards, muttering curses as he went. “Rude barbarians, northerners…”

Normally, Olaf and Tom would have been furious, but they had no mind for it now.

“Olaf! It seems we’re too late. Denmark has already made their move. We must go support them at once!” Tom said, his face pale.

Pikku, as always in such situations, remained silent in the background, not wanting to disturb his master’s thoughts.

Olaf remained silent, deep in thought. The other ship captains—Solrak, Ilugi, Polly, and Brun—soon arrived on Olaf’s ship and learned from Tom that Denmark had already sent troops.

“Olaf! What should we do? Should we go to Iceland immediately?”

“No! I think we should gather more information first!”

The group spoke in hushed tones, but Olaf raised a hand to silence them. “Don’t rush! We don’t know the details yet. We need to find some Danish merchants in Amsterdam and ask them! Even if Denmark has attacked Iceland, we shouldn’t panic. Iceland has been prepared for this, with nine thousand Viking warriors and cannons and firearms defending Reykjavik. It won’t fall to the Danes in half a month or even a month! If we’re lucky, we might even repeat our past victory!”

The group fell silent, accustomed to following Olaf’s lead.

“What do you think we should do?” Ilugi, though only nineteen and three or four years younger than Brun and Polly, had matured quickly after his father’s unexpected death. He had taken on the role of Oarsman, leading slaves and Vikings, and his position had risen to Ship District Chief. He was the first to speak up.

Ilugi’s words brought the others back to their senses, suppressing their panic over the news of Denmark’s attack on Iceland. They all turned to Olaf.

Olaf addressed Ilugi. “You take Tom and the others to the exchange to list our goods. Sell them at the price I set if anyone is interested. I’ll go with Pikku and Brun to find the East India Company’s assistant manager and see if we can get the latest news.”

With that, Olaf turned and went below deck to change. Amsterdam was not like Vinland; it was a world where hierarchy was strict, and one’s attire and demeanor reflected their status and manners. Even though Olaf had collaborated with the Dutch East India Company before, he needed to dress in fine clothing to show respect when visiting their executives.

Moments later, Olaf emerged wearing a long robe and cotton trousers made from the finest swan velvet from the Far East, with small leather boots on his feet.

With his golden hair, golden mustache and beard, piercing eyes, fair skin, and tall stature, he looked like a nobleman straight out of a painting.

Half an hour later, dark clouds gathered in the sky, and a heavy rain began to fall.

Pedestrians in Amsterdam quickened their pace, seeking shelter under shop awnings. Those with umbrellas opened them leisurely.

A carriage slowly made its way through the streets, stopping in front of the East India Company’s stock exchange. Behind the exchange lay the company’s headquarters.

The coachman hurriedly got out and opened the door. “Respected sir, we’ve arrived at the East India Company.”

Pikku and Brun stepped out of the carriage, each taking an umbrella from under their arms and opening it over the door.

Olaf cleared his throat and stepped out. Brun casually tossed two silver coins to the coachman, and the three of them walked into the towering gates of the East India Company amid the coachman’s profuse thanks, their feet splashing through the wet streets.

“Gentlemen, may I ask who you’re looking for?” As Olaf and his companions entered the grand hall of the East India Company, a young girl in a silk dress approached them before they could take in their surroundings, speaking in fluent Latin.

Olaf smiled gently. “I am Olaf of Iceland. I’m looking for Mr. Frederick Kuiyi. He was previously a commercial assistant for the East India Company in Batavia. We are friends and have some business matters…”

The girl thought for a moment, then smiled. “Mr. Kuiyi has been promoted to commercial specialist this year. He is still in Batavia and hasn’t returned…”

“That’s wonderful news!” Olaf exclaimed. “Is his assistant still here? For the past two years, I’ve been in contact with him through his assistant, Mr. Hans. Is Mr. Hans available?”

The girl nodded. “Mr. Hans went to the docks with the manager. Please wait a moment.”

Olaf nodded, and the three were led by the girl to a room on the side of the hall to wait.

Olaf and his companions sat on the sofa without speaking.

After twenty or thirty minutes, a thin man in a jacket, with his shirt collar visible, entered the hall, holding an umbrella.

The girl approached him and whispered, “Mr. Hans! Your friend, Mr. Olaf, is waiting for you!”

Hans raised an eyebrow. “Alright, take me to him.”

Chapter 206: The Siege of Reykjavik (1)

The wooden door creaked open, and Olaf looked up to see Hans, whom he had met once before. He quickly stood up and walked over, extending his right hand.

“Mr. Hans! Long time no see!”

Hans had been arrogant before entering, but upon seeing Olaf, his expression instantly warmed. He smiled and stepped forward, gripping Olaf’s large hand tightly, looking up at the towering young man. “I’ve been eagerly awaiting your arrival these past few days. I even sent someone to the harbor to inquire about you.”

“Hahaha…”

As the girl closed the door behind them, Olaf and Hans took their seats. Olaf first introduced Tom and Pikku to Hans, then couldn’t wait to ask, “Hans, your company has excellent intelligence. I’ve just returned from North America and heard that Denmark has already made a move against Iceland. Is that true?”

Hans had collaborated with Kuiyi and Olaf multiple times and had met Haig and Ulf more than once, so he knew a fair bit about Olaf and his companions.

However, Holland’s resources were limited, and managing the East India Company was already their greatest effort. Thus, they didn’t envy the Icelanders’ development in the West Indies.

Because of their familiarity, Hans and some of the company’s upper management had learned last year about Olaf and Ulf’s father, Haldor, becoming the Grand Duke of Iceland and establishing a nation. After all, news of Denmark’s defeat had quickly spread across Europe.

But for the employees of the Dutch East India Company, the cold and barren Iceland wasn’t considered a desirable place. They never paid attention to impoverished regions and didn’t take the matter seriously.

However, after hearing that Denmark’s expeditionary force had failed and was now blockading Iceland, the Dutch, while marveling at the Icelanders as true descendants of the Vikings with abundant martial spirit, also saw a money-making opportunity. Thus, starting last year, Dutch merchants increased their trade activities with Icelandic merchants, even sending more merchant ships to Iceland than in previous years.

As soon as Olaf finished speaking, Hans understood his concern. He lowered his voice and said, “I just received the news myself. Since it’s already June and you haven’t come until now, I’ve been worried about how to notify you these past few days… Ahem…

On the 16th of last month, Christian IV still appointed his son-in-law, Magnus, as the commander of the Danish expeditionary force, and they set out! Two weeks ago, they blockaded Reykjavik. I’ve heard that they’ve only been making probing attacks so far, and there’s no news yet that Iceland has been breached. You can rest assured, Olaf!”

Hans’s explanation was clear and concise, as was his habit. Olaf nodded and said, “Thank you! May God bless you! How many troops has Denmark assembled this time? How many ships have they deployed?”

Hans clicked his tongue twice and said, “With the loan from England, Denmark seems determined to make a strong showing. According to Denmark’s official statement, Christian IV has recruited over thirty thousand soldiers in his own country, plus hired mercenaries, totaling more than thirty thousand troops. Not counting transport ships, they have over eighty warships. Tsk, tsk, Denmark is really going all out. Even after consecutive defeats and not having recovered, they can still mobilize so many soldiers and ships. It seems they’ve bet everything they have…”

Hans’s astonishment was lost on Olaf, who was too worried about his parents in Iceland. Denmark’s eighty-plus warships and over thirty thousand soldiers were more than double, almost triple, the force they had used in their previous attack on Iceland.

The previous victory in Iceland had been partly due to luck and partly due to the Danes’ underestimation of their enemy. But this time, the Danes would not be so careless. The overwhelming force meant that Iceland had no chance to fight back against the massive Danish fleet and expeditionary force; their only option was to defend and resist.

Although Olaf was worried about Iceland’s safety, he was also confident in his father, uncles, and Hudik’s military skills and tactics. He knew that even though Denmark’s forces and fleet were powerful, it would be impossible for them to quickly capture Reykjavik, which had been preparing for half a year.

If Iceland could hold out, time would work in their favor. The Danish army’s insufficient supplies would eventually force them to retreat.

Olaf guessed that Haldor and the others were also planning to wear down the Danes until they retreated.

Without Olaf’s army, wearing down the enemy was Iceland’s best strategy. But Olaf was not content with that. As he talked with Hans, he thought about strategies and soon came up with several countermeasures.

After asking about Denmark’s situation for a while, Olaf had a good grasp of it. Then he asked, “I heard that Mr. Kuiyi has been promoted. That’s great news!”

“Yes! Mr. Kuiyi’s work has been outstanding, and he’s highly valued! Last month, he sent me a letter of recommendation, asking me to take over his position.” Hans said with a smile.

“That’s double happiness! Congratulations, Mr. Hans!” Olaf quickly took out a small bag of gold nuggets from his pocket and handed it over, saying, “This is a small token of appreciation for your long-term help!”

Hans took it and felt the heavy weight, smiling as he said, “Thank you, Mr. Olaf! Is there anything else you need my help with?”

Olaf didn’t stand on ceremony and said, “I need to return to Iceland as soon as possible to reinforce it. So, all the goods currently on the ship will be sold to you in bulk. Please give me a fair price, and then I want to exchange all the proceeds for cannons, smoothbore muskets, and their corresponding ammunition. Please help me get this done as quickly as possible!”

Hans frowned and said, “Neither of these tasks is difficult, but doing both at once and quickly is really asking a lot… But since you’re my friend, Olaf, a little trouble is nothing…”

Without waiting for Olaf to thank him, Hans quickly left the room and soon returned with two employees of the East India Company. “Mr. Olaf, let’s go to the docks together. I need to take inventory of the goods.”

“Then please follow me!” Olaf stood up, picked up the felt hat from the table, put it on, and said.

Olaf led Hans and the others back to the docks and boarded the ship to take inventory of the goods. After some haggling, Hans finally bought all the goods at a price one-tenth higher than last year’s.

Due to the tense situation this year, the prices of various supplies were constantly rising. If Olaf wasn’t in a hurry, he could have slowly sold the goods on the ship and made at least twenty percent more Dutch guilders. But what he lacked most now was time, so he had to accept the loss.

The next day at noon, except for some jerky and dried fish that were kept for use, all the various goods on the ship were unloaded.

After finishing the business with Hans, Olaf took out a stub and a check for twenty thousand Dutch guilders and had Tom buy food, fresh water, and other supplies. He was ready to leave Amsterdam at any time. As soon as Hans delivered the five thousand smoothbore muskets, sixty 24-pound cannons, and the corresponding ammunition, Olaf could immediately set sail with his fleet.

Time flew by, and three days passed. Olaf was anxious during these three days and sent people to ask Hans multiple times. It wasn’t until Hans personally came to the docks to tell Olaf that the delivery would be made that night that Olaf’s torment finally ended.

That evening, Olaf, along with Tom, Pikku, Brun, and the other six army commanders, brought their most elite guards to meet Hans and the dozens of carriages loaded with weapons and ammunition.

With the combined effort of cranes and personnel, by early the next morning, all the items were finally loaded onto Olaf’s flagship and the adjacent galleons.

The heavy cannons and boxes of ammunition and firearms would have taken three days to load if done by sailors alone. But with the advanced tools like cranes, pulleys, winches, and trolley jacks commonly found in Dutch shipyards and docks, Holland’s efficiency and speed in shipbuilding and cargo handling far surpassed other European countries. This was one of the main supports for the small Holland’s rapid rise.

With the goods sold and the weapons purchased, one of the main tasks of the European trip was completed. The remaining task was to resolve the crisis in Iceland.

Olaf no longer seemed urgent. He happily shook hands with Hans and said goodbye. Before long, the fleet, having obtained clearance from the Dutch navy, sailed through the canal and smoothly entered the North Sea, heading north.

Chapter 207: The Siege of Reykjavik (2)

Iceland stood in the distant northwest of the European continent, a solitary island far from the mainland. Unlike the fertile British Isles, Iceland’s land was barren, its environment harsh, and for hundreds, even thousands of years, it had remained largely unknown.

For centuries, the wars that raged across the continent had spared Iceland, leaving it as its name suggested—a secluded paradise. But now, the sea west of Reykjavik, Iceland’s capital and largest city, was filled with dozens of warships, all flying the Danish flag of a red cross on a white field, marking them as part of the Danish military.

At the center of the fleet was the largest vessel, a four-decked galleon, bearing not only the Danish flag but also the royal lion emblem, signifying the presence of the royal envoy and supreme commander, Magnus.

A sea mile to the east lay Reykjavik’s harbor, yet not a single warship was anchored there. The docks were sparse, with only a few scattered buildings and two newly constructed bastions standing on the northern and southern shores—clearly a defensive measure by the Icelandic Free Republic against invaders.

The Danish expeditionary force had arrived at Reykjavik’s gates two days prior, and Magnus had become unusually cautious, even overly so. He first sent small boats from the larger warships, dispatching agile soldiers to approach the harbor. But when they were met with arrows and cannon fire from the bastions, they retreated in fear. Magnus had thus learned that Haldor’s defenses at the docks were formidable.

After half a day of observation, Magnus ordered twelve Clacker-class warships to advance in a wedge formation into the harbor. Cannons on both sides and the bows of the ships were fired at the two massive bastions. The first volley of dozens of cannonballs missed entirely, but after adjustments, half of the third volley struck the bastions—yet they showed no sign of damage.

It was clear that the bastions were built to withstand cannon fire, as even after enduring over a dozen hits, they remained largely intact. Soon, the bastions began to retaliate, firing their own cannons from the angles and gaps in their walls.

The first day’s battle was dominated by four hours of cannon fire, ending only when two ships were left battered and nearly sunk. Magnus then ordered the fleet to retreat.

Through his telescope, Magnus saw that the bastions had only suffered minor damage. At this rate, it would take half a month of continuous bombardment to destroy them, and the cost to the fleet would be significant.

Magnus knew that a direct assault was not the best strategy, but without taking the bastions, the fleet could not approach Reykjavik. That night, he sent small boats with soldiers to launch a surprise attack on shore, but over a hundred Icelandic knights emerged from behind the bastions, slaughtering the Danish soldiers and forcing the survivors to flee back to the ships.

The next day, Magnus discovered that the bastions had been repaired overnight. He realized that a frontal assault would be difficult, if not impossible, without great sacrifice. But having been defeated by Haldor’s Viking soldiers before, he feared that committing all his forces to break through the bastions would leave him vulnerable to ambushes once inside Reykjavik. Magnus could not afford another failure, so under immense pressure, he convened a meeting of his officers aboard the flagship to discuss strategies for attacking Reykjavik.

Two days passed quickly. After much deliberation, Magnus finally adopted the suggestion of Kormakur, the eldest son of the Norwegian governor Christian, to send soldiers to find suitable landing points north and south of Reykjavik. Once ashore, the army would regroup and sweep into the city.

Kormakur’s reasoning was clear: since Reykjavik’s harbor was heavily defended by Haldor’s forces, including knights and bastions, a direct assault would be costly and time-consuming. Instead, the Danish army should leverage its numerical superiority, landing at weaker points on the island and advancing overland. Though this would still take time, the difficulty would be greatly reduced.

Christian had fallen gravely ill the previous winter, and despite the efforts of the royal physicians sent by Christian IV, he remained in a coma. When the Danish expeditionary force was assembled, Christian IV honored his uncle’s earlier request, appointing Kormakur as chief of staff to accompany Magnus.

Kormakur’s strategy was shrewd and tailored to Iceland’s circumstances, though he was merely an ordinary Danish nobleman who had studied botany at the University of Copenhagen and had no military expertise. Magnus admired his strategic insight, unaware that the plan was actually devised by Christian, who had exhausted his mind to conceive it. However, due to poor medical conditions, Christian had not lived to see his plan implemented, leaving it to Kormakur to execute.

Christian had gathered all available intelligence on Iceland and studied its maps extensively. He identified three key weaknesses in Iceland compared to Denmark’s forces:

First, the naval disparity was vast. Iceland’s fleet was less than a tenth the size of Denmark’s, giving Denmark complete control over the invasion and the ability to blockade Iceland at any time.

Second, Iceland’s population was too small—just over sixty thousand. Even if all able-bodied men were trained and armed as militia, they could only muster one or two thousand troops, a ragtag force that would crumble against Denmark’s elite army.

Third, Iceland’s geography and climate were major weaknesses. With its vast, sparsely populated lands and numerous glaciers and wastelands, most of the population was concentrated in Reykjavik. This meant Iceland lacked strategic depth and the capacity for a prolonged war of attrition.

If Denmark could take Reykjavik, it would effectively control all of Iceland. Even if Haldor and his forces fled into the mountains, Denmark would not need to pursue them. By blockading Reykjavik and Iceland’s ports, the harsh environment—lack of resources, extreme cold, and the unforgiving glaciers—would do the work of defeating Haldor’s forces.

Christian understood that the key to the Icelandic campaign was Reykjavik. Whoever controlled Reykjavik controlled Iceland. If Haldor held the city, Denmark would eventually retreat. But if Denmark took Reykjavik, Haldor and the leaders of the Icelandic Free Republic would face certain death.

Chapter 208: The Siege of Reykjavik (3)

The issues Christian could see were also apparent to Haldor, Heiner, Ulf, Hudik, Hoskuld, and Kadir. That was why they had spared no expense in constructing bastions at the docks, deploying two legions of three thousand Viking soldiers and two hundred precious cavalry across several strategic points inside and outside the fortifications.

In the upper floor of the Duke’s Manor, Ulf stood by the window in full battle regalia, scanning the docks through a telescope.

Since yesterday, the Viking raid’s high command had been closely monitoring every move at the docks from within the Duke’s Manor. Haig had taken command of the cavalry and bastions at the docks the night before.

Behind Ulf, in the same room, Haldor sat on a sofa in a breastplate, discussing with Heiner and Hudik the various possible Danish assault strategies.

After ten minutes, heavy, hurried footsteps approached. Haig entered, clad in half plate armor, a steel helmet on his head, a short musket in his left hand, and his right gripping the handle of a large axe. His face was etched with urgency.

“Haldor! Hudik!”

Haig’s voice was grave. “From the bastion, I saw that half of Denmark’s warships are gone. It seems they’ve left, but I don’t think they’re truly gone. Heiner, do you think the Danes have some underhanded scheme?”

“Oh?” Heiner, Haldor, and the others furrowed their brows.

At this critical juncture of life and death, none of Iceland’s high command dared to underestimate Denmark’s commander or soldiers.

“We’ve stationed enough troops at the docks, and we have the bastions. Could Magnus have realized a direct assault is too difficult and split his forces to other harbors? Maybe he plans to attack Big Port by land?” Hudik stood up before Heiner could speak.

“Very likely,” Heiner frowned. “Denmark left half their warships to blockade Big Port and sent the other half to land elsewhere before attacking Reykjavik. It’s not surprising—Magnus is a renowned Danish general after all.

Currently, Denmark has crossed the sea, and their supply lines are strained. They can’t sustain a prolonged battle. They don’t want to risk a direct assault on the harbor, so they must be looking for other landing points to attack by land!”

“Exactly!” Ulf stepped beside Haig, his voice low. “Heiner is right. We can’t wait. We must use our familiarity with the terrain to prepare in advance at potential landing sites near Big Port. We should strike first, throwing the Danish forces into chaos the moment they land!”

As he spoke, Ulf’s eyes gleamed as he looked at Haldor and Hudik.

Haldor and Hudik nodded in approval, but Hoskuld coldly interjected, “Denmark’s army outnumbers and outmatches ours. In open battle, our advantage is minimal. One misstep could lead to devastating losses. I don’t think it’s wise to take such a big risk. We should focus on fortifying the East District and the city instead!”

Hoskuld’s opinion made Hudik and Haldor nod in agreement, while Heiner fell into deep thought.

Reykjavik was Iceland’s only major city. The docks, Central District, North District, South District, and East District together housed twenty thousand citizens, with nearly ten thousand more in the villages under the North and South Districts. Though the city’s area was far smaller than it would be centuries later, its framework was already in place.

The docks and Central District were situated on a narrow, elongated peninsula at Reykjavik’s easternmost tip. Beyond the Central District lay Lake Tjörnin, steaming year-round from geothermal activity.

The former Governor’s Mansion, now the Duke’s Manor, stood behind the square on the eastern side of Lake Tjörnin. To the east of the manor was the affluent East District, while the north and south were residential areas for the citizens. This layout had remained largely unchanged for centuries.

The docks and Central District’s narrow terrain made them naturally defensible, and with the bastions, Haldor and his men had turned them into an impregnable fortress.

However, the entire city of Reykjavik was built on a larger peninsula. The northernmost point of the North District and the southern end of the South District were both coastal, unsuitable for docking ships. With guards maintaining order in each district to prevent civil unrest, even if Danish soldiers attempted to land on the coasts of the North or South Districts in small boats, they would be detected immediately. Thus, no one was worried about those areas.

In the eyes of Haldor, Ulf, Hudik, Hoskuld, and the others, the real concern was the area east of the East District. The south and east of the East District faced roads from the north, south, and east of Iceland. Any Icelanders coming by land instead of sea would have to pass through the outskirts of the East District. Therefore, if the Danish army sought to land elsewhere and attack Reykjavik, they would inevitably have to start from the East District.

Hoskuld’s point was that Iceland had fewer people and fewer troops, making them unsuitable for a war of attrition against the Danish army. Building defensive fortifications in the East District and holding their ground would be more effective.

“The East District is the first line of defense against a land attack on Big Port. We must defend it with all our might, but Ulf’s suggestion is also valid.”

After discussing with Hudik and the others for half a day, Heiner pondered before saying, “Why not send small, elite cavalry units skilled in marksmanship to scout the north and south? If they spot Danish forces landing, they can report immediately while harassing them, weakening their morale and slowing their advance, buying us time to prepare!”

“Prince Haldor, what do you think?”

Heiner was the most educated among the Vikings, with a strong family background and a talent for learning. More importantly, over the years, he had been in constant communication with Olaf, mutually improving. In recent years, he had also devoted himself to studying the battles and famous generals of the pan-European war, achieving a high level of strategic understanding.

After discussing with Hudik and the other commanders, Heiner proposed a relatively sound countermeasure. Haldor agreed without hesitation and immediately ordered Ulf and Haig to each lead a cavalry unit to scout the northern and southern coasts.

After Haig and Ulf had been instructed and left, Haldor turned to Hudik and said, “You will personally command three legions to find a position to defend in the East District. The Danish warships outside the harbor haven’t withdrawn yet, so the Duke’s Manor can’t be left undefended. Hoskuld, you will go with Hudik to the East District. Kadir and Heiner will stay…”

The atmosphere in the Duke’s Manor was heavy. Everyone knew that every decision and deployment now would determine the future of Iceland and all those present. The weight on their shoulders was immense.

Hudik bowed solemnly, then shook Haldor’s hand warmly before turning to leave.

Half a month ago, five raid generals had brought five legions into Reykjavik. Haldor had spared no expense, taking all the money, food, and dried meat from the Duke’s Manor’s vaults and the national treasury. Some were given as rewards to the soldiers, but most were used as supplies to sustain the thirty thousand people in the small city of Reykjavik.

Thanks to the potatoes, sweet potatoes, and squash sent from Vinland last year, as well as the rye and oats bought from Holland, along with the dried and salted fish prepared last year, the national reserves alone were enough to feed the over ten thousand soldiers and tens of thousands of citizens for a year. With the additional supplies from the Duke’s Manor’s private stores, they had enough to last until next winter.

The logistics were abundantly sufficient, which greatly boosted the confidence of Haldor and the other leaders, as well as the Viking soldiers and the citizens of Big Port. Though they couldn’t be entirely confident of defeating Denmark, they were certain they could defend their homeland and wear down the Danes until they retreated on their own.

Chapter 209: The Siege of Reykjavik (4)

The sudden disappearance of nearly half of the Danish warships immediately put Haldor and the others on high alert. They quickly deduced that Magnus intended to find another landing site and launch a flanking attack on Big Port.

Haldor remained at the Duke’s Manor to command the rear, while Hudik and Hoskuld led over three thousand Viking soldiers to the streets of the East District.

Upon arrival, Hudik drove the residents out of the streetside houses and ordered most of the soldiers to hide inside the buildings. A smaller group was tasked with destroying the roads, digging trenches, and setting traps within them.

Hudik and Hoskuld knew the weight of their responsibility. They were determined to hold the East District’s defensive line at all costs, even if it meant their deaths. The two generals worked tirelessly, personally overseeing the reinforcement of buildings and positioning the six twenty-four-pound cannons they had brought on the highest ground in the East District—the ruins of Sigfoss’s estate.

Sigfoss’s estate had once been the largest house in the East District, perched on high ground. But last year, Haig had burned it to the ground, leaving behind a barren, charred hill—perfect for mounting cannons to overlook the streets of the East District from over a thousand feet away.

As they busied themselves strengthening the defenses, time slipped by. By afternoon, Hudik, standing behind the trenches, suddenly heard the sound of hoofbeats from the northeast. He signaled the surrounding soldiers to silence and leaped over the trench, standing on a mound to peer into the distance.

The vast expanse of grassy black earth stretched before him, dotted with a few sparse trees. On the flat northeastern plains, two Viking knights on sturdy horses slowly came into view.

Clop… clop…

The hoofbeats grew louder as the two riders approached. By the time they reached Hudik, Hoskuld had also arrived.

“Have you found the Danes?!” Hoskuld asked urgently.

The two riders dismounted, and the lead one, panting heavily, reported, “General! We followed Prince Ulf north to search for the Danish army. We found them at Whale Fjord—they’ve already landed and are reorganizing their forces. Prince Ulf estimates they have five to six thousand men, including over a thousand cavalry and four cannons. He ordered us to return and report while he stays behind to harass and delay them…”

Hudik and Hoskuld exchanged glances. They knew that what Ulf had discovered was only a portion of the Danish expeditionary force, but even this fraction was far better equipped than last year’s forces. Clearly, Denmark had committed everything to this campaign.

“The enemy is approaching. Everyone, prepare yourselves! Musketeers, load your bullets and pack your powder. Long spearmen, remember your duties. Follow my commands…”

Hudik turned and shouted his orders. As the commands from the two generals spread, the East District’s defenses tightened further. The entire district fell silent, save for the soldiers’ breathing and the occasional snort of a horse—quiet as a winter’s night.

About half an hour later, as the sun neared the western horizon, Haig and his men arrived from the south.

Haig led his cavalry at full gallop, each horse carrying not only a rider but also one or two Viking civilians.

“What happened, Haig?!” Hudik frowned as Haig stopped before the trench.

“Hah… The Danish bastards landed near Hrut Village! When I arrived, they were burning, killing, and looting in Will Village and Hrut Village. There were five to six thousand of them in the south, but they split up to raid the three villages in the Seltyana district. I managed to kill a hundred or so Danes in Hrut Village and brought the remaining villagers back!”

Haig first helped a young boy off his horse before dismounting himself, his face flushed with rage as he cursed.

Haig’s southwestern Viking garrison had always been stationed in Hrut Village. The Danish army’s rampage there was a direct insult to him, and the deaths of many of his people had sent him into a fury.

Hudik and Hoskuld were also enraged, though they knew that since Haldor had become Grand Duke, most of the villagers had moved to Big Port, leaving only a few families of Viking soldiers in Hrut Village. The other two villages had suffered far worse—Will Village alone had likely seen hundreds killed or robbed.

“We have limited forces and can’t go to their aid now. We’ll have to avenge them later!” Hudik’s eyes gleamed with a fierce light as he declared.

Hoskuld spat on the ground and cursed, “Those Danish devils! I’ll cut off every last one of their heads!”

Haig grinned. “I killed plenty of Danes in Hrut Village. They were so furious they sent cavalry after me, but I killed another twenty or thirty on the way back and shook them off. The Danes will be here soon—we need to prepare for battle!”

Hudik cleared his throat. “Hoskuld and I have set up defenses. Sigfoss’s estate has been turned into a high ground position, and the cannons are there. Once the Danish soldiers approach the East District, we’ll hit them hard. And…”

As the three spoke, the soldiers of the two legions stationed in the East District learned of the Danish landing and the devastation in Hrut Village. Some soldiers, following Hoskuld’s orders, escorted the villagers brought by the cavalry into the houses to rest. The rest of the soldiers seethed with anger, gripping their weapons tightly.

The two legions Hudik and Hoskuld had brought were the Northeast Raid Legion and the Southeast Raid Legion, composed of their most trusted men. Though they had no direct ties to Hrut Village, the shared hatred for the enemy had boosted their morale.

If the soldiers of the Southwest Raid Legion stationed at the docks learned that their homes had been ravaged by the Danes, they would likely explode in rage…

Time passed slowly. The streets of the East District were now completely severed, with trenches, traps, and barricades everywhere. Behind them stood rows of Viking musketeers and long spearmen, while the reinforced houses hid more soldiers. On the artillery position stood Hudik and Hoskuld, with Haig and his cavalry resting nearby. Everyone was ready, waiting for the Danish forces from the north and south to appear.

The sky darkened gradually. Just as the last light of the sun was fading and distant objects became indistinct, Hudik, with the sharpest eyes, suddenly squinted and pointed toward the northeast. “What’s that?! Cavalry?”

As if in response to his judgment, the sound of hoofbeats grew louder, like rolling thunder.

A group of cavalry became increasingly visible to the waiting Viking soldiers. Everyone tightened their grip on their weapons, holding their breath.

As the cavalry drew nearer, Hudik, Hoskuld, and the others recognized the tall figure leading them—it was Ulf.

“It’s Ulf!”

Ulf was covered in dust, and only seventy or eighty cavalrymen remained with him. As they approached the East District, they saw Hudik and Hoskuld riding out from the chaotic, construction-like defenses to meet them.

“Quick! The Danish cavalry is right behind us! Let us in so we can block them!”

Ulf had no time for formalities. His voice was hoarse as he shouted.

Hudik’s expression changed, and he quickly signaled his men to remove the wooden barricade blocking the only path before leading Ulf and his cavalry into the East District.

As soon as Ulf and his men entered, another thunderous sound of hoofbeats came from the northeast—clearly, the pursuing force was two or three times larger than Ulf’s group.

Hudik frowned. “The Danish cavalry is all chasing us?”

Ulf swallowed hard. “There must be at least eight hundred, if not a thousand. We ambushed them three times on the way and killed many Danes. They’re so enraged they’re determined to catch us!”

“Good! We’ll face the Danish royal cavalry head-on!” Hudik sneered.

Under the dimming sky, a dark tide of cavalry emerged from the northeast. Their charge kicked up clouds of dust, making them appear like an overwhelming force. Over ninety percent of the soldiers in the East District had never seen such a spectacle, and their hearts pounded like drums.

The wrinkles at the corners of Hudik’s eyes twitched, his gaze gleaming with excitement. He drew his longsword and shouted, “Soldiers! Hold the pass! For our families and friends behind us! For our brothers and sisters! For our merciful and great Grand Duke Haldor! For our Icelandic Republic! For ourselves! Slaughter the Danish bastards!”

Hoskuld, Haig, and all the soldiers raised their weapons and roared, “Slaughter the Danish bastards!”

Ulf and his cavalry, despite their exhaustion, joined in the cry, “Slaughter the Danish bastards!”

…

The sun set swiftly, and with the appearance of the Danish iron cavalry, Iceland’s daylight faded. But it was in the night that Iceland would face its true trial by blood and fire.

This baptism was rare in the ancient history of Iceland, and for the newly born Icelandic Free Republic, it was a defining moment. If they endured, the nation would thrive; if they faltered, all their plans would crumble like spring water flowing east, leaving only regret for future generations…

Chapter 210: The Siege of Copenhagen (1)

The North Sea was calm, with sunlight shimmering across the water. Olaf lay on the deck, basking in the sun, his body relaxed but his mind in turmoil.

Ever since he learned that Iceland was under siege by Denmark, Olaf couldn’t stop worrying. He feared that if Reykjavik fell, his parents and family would be captured or slaughtered. He longed to rush to Iceland and fight alongside his father and brothers.

But reason told him that bringing his native troops to Iceland would be futile. The Danish navy, the strongest in the region, had surrounded Reykjavik. Even if Vinland’s six legions were as elite as those of Germany or France, their eighteen warships and dozens of cog ships would be no match for Denmark’s overwhelming naval power. They would either drown or be crushed by cannonballs.

Olaf was rational. He knew that charging into the massive Danish fleet with his small force would be like a moth flying into a flame—utterly hopeless.

After learning of Denmark’s invasion from Hans, Olaf’s first instinct was to rush to Iceland and join his father in repelling the invaders. But as his ships entered the North Sea, he calmed down.

Though his heart still burned with anxiety, he maintained a composed exterior. As a commander, his every word and action influenced his twelve thousand subordinates. In times of crisis, secrecy was paramount. He had to ensure that his six legions remained confident in Iceland’s victory.

Once he regained his composure, Olaf devised a strategy to save Iceland: “Besiege Wei to rescue Zhao.”

Denmark was an old Nordic power with a population of over two million. Though recent wars with German soldiers and mercenaries on the Jutland Peninsula had reduced their numbers, the population had stabilized around two million.

After their defeat in the pan-European war, Christian IV had been licking his wounds and rebuilding his strength while emulating Sweden’s successful military reforms. Denmark had recruited over ten thousand regular soldiers, supplemented by five thousand royal guards and mercenaries, forming a force of thirty thousand to invade Iceland.

However, the Danish-Norwegian union, with its two million people, had only a million able-bodied men. Mobilizing nearly twenty thousand troops meant one in every fifty or sixty men was conscripted—a staggering ratio for a nation weakened by consecutive defeats. It was a desperate gamble, sacrificing agriculture, fishing, and industry to wage war.

Olaf wasn’t sure how many troops remained in Denmark, but based on the data, he estimated no more than five thousand, possibly even fewer. He believed the best way to save Iceland and repel the Danish expeditionary force was to exploit Denmark’s vulnerability while their main army was away. He would lead his troops to attack Copenhagen, the Danish capital.

With Denmark’s defenses weakened, an attack on Copenhagen would force Christian IV to recall his forces from Iceland. If Olaf’s six legions could breach the city and capture the king, it would be a decisive victory—though he knew the odds were slim.

Denmark’s expeditionary force consisted of over eighty warships and thirty thousand elite troops. Iceland’s ten thousand Viking soldiers and Olaf’s twelve thousand native warriors stood no chance against them. Olaf understood that rushing to Iceland’s aid would be suicidal, dooming both himself and his father.

But Denmark’s cities were now poorly defended, presenting a weakness Olaf could exploit. By personally leading an attack on Copenhagen, Denmark’s symbolic heart, he could strike fear into Christian IV. Even a feigned assault with twelve thousand men and dozens of ships would be enough to unsettle the Danish king.

Magnus would never allow his father-in-law, the king, to remain in danger. The Danish forces besieging Reykjavik would surely retreat, easing Iceland’s crisis.

This “Besiege Wei to rescue Zhao” strategy was Olaf’s only viable option. He sat up from the deck and coldly declared, “You can besiege Reykjavik, but I can besiege Copenhagen!”

Olaf’s fleet sailed north through the North Sea, hugging the western coast of the Jutland Peninsula before entering the Skagerrak Strait.

The windmills along the eastern shore had long disappeared from view. The fleet adjusted its course southeast, preparing to enter the Kattegat Strait and make straight for Copenhagen to the south.

As they entered the Kattegat Strait, they began to encounter merchant ships from Holland, England, Denmark, Sweden, and even Russia—all trading between the cities of the Baltic Sea. Olaf knew his father had been a frequent visitor to the Baltic in his youth, but this was his first time approaching it.

The boundary between the Baltic and North Seas was the Sound Strait, stretching from Helsingør in Denmark to Copenhagen. Passing through the Sound meant entering the Baltic, and doing so required paying the toll set by the Danish king—a tax that accounted for nearly thirty percent of Denmark’s annual revenue. Two years ago, Denmark had raised these tolls again, much to the dismay of foreign merchants.

Denmark still maintained its dominance in the Nordic region. As far as Olaf knew, at least until the end of the Thirty Years’ War, both sides of the Sound Strait belonged to Denmark, allowing them to control and tax traffic from both directions.

But decades later, Christian IV, in an attempt to curb Sweden’s rise, would launch an attack on Sweden. The result would be catastrophic—Denmark’s mighty navy would be annihilated by a combined Dutch-Swedish fleet. The eastern shores of the Sound, now under Swedish control, would be permanently lost to Denmark, defining the nation’s future borders.

“Denmark is too small, too dependent on the Sound, and lacks visionary leadership. Its decline is inevitable… Hmph… Christian IV… You dream of using Iceland as your stepping stone? I’ll tear off your paper tiger mask!”

Olaf gazed at the approaching Sound Strait, where towering watchtowers stood on both shores—identical in architectural style. He recognized the narrowest point of the strait, where tolls were collected.

The eastern shore was Helsingborg, the western Helsingør. The eastern fortress was small but had a tall watchtower equipped with two bronze cannons. The western shore jutted out in a triangular formation, its tip crowned by a massive, imposing fortress.

This fortress was called Kronborg. The Danish navy had long collected tolls from passing ships at the narrowest point of the Sound, between Helsingborg on the east and Kronborg on the west.

Chapter 211: The Siege of Copenhagen (2)

As they approached The Sound, Olaf knew that as an Icelander with an army of mysterious native warriors, pretending to be merchants would never fool the Danish navy stationed at Kronborg. The only option was to prepare in advance and strike the moment they were close enough, aiming to seize Kronborg and eliminate the Danish navy garrison.

“Pikku! Inform all ships—those with cannons take the lead, while the cog ships without cannons keep their distance. Once we begin bombarding Kronborg, the cog ships will seize the opportunity to land and capture Helsingør! The several thousand soldiers on the cog ships are under your direct command!”

Olaf placed a heavy hand on Pikku’s shoulder, his voice grave. “You must take Helsingør for me—don’t disgrace me!”

After years of warfare and leading armies and people in Greenland, Pikku was no longer the timid slave boy he once was. Calmly, he knelt and replied, “Rest assured, master! Even if I die, I will take Helsingør. I will not delay your grand strategy!” With that, he rose and hurried toward the ship’s railing, preparing to lower a small boat to command the soldiers on the cog ships.

Olaf leaned over the bow, watching the departing boat, and shouted, “Pikku! If you succeed, you will be Vinland’s first berserker—I will celebrate your victory myself!”

Pikku bowed repeatedly on the boat before it vanished among the cog ships.

The eighteen warships had already received the signalman’s orders. All ships stood ready, with soldiers loading cannonballs and gunpowder beside the cannons. The leaders of each ship stood on deck, eyes fixed on the flagship ahead, awaiting Olaf’s command.

Tom stood on the deck of the second-largest ship behind the flagship, now clad in a breastplate with a long sword at his waist and a firearm in his arms. Behind him stood several dozen elite Huron warriors from Vinland. As the second-in-command, Lixstrom was the only one besides Olaf and Pikku who knew of Olaf’s plan to strike Copenhagen directly—a bold move to relieve pressure on Iceland. Over the past two days, he had been eager for action, and as Helsingør drew nearer, he gripped his smoothbore musket tightly.

“Men, keep your eyes sharp! Once General Olaf gives the signal, close in on Kronborg and open fire!” Tom shook his greasy red hair and barked the order.

Helsingør had become a military stronghold for Denmark due to its control over The Sound. The soldiers and navy stationed there for security and tax collection had spurred commercial growth, transforming it into a bustling city of twenty to thirty thousand people.

As Helsingør came into clearer view, Olaf narrowed his eyes at the Gothic-style towers and churches. The bustling harbor and streets spoke of prosperity, but the most striking feature was Kronborg, jutting like a dagger into the coastline.

Kronborg was the linchpin of Denmark’s control over The Sound and a branch base for the Danish navy. Normally, it should have been heavily fortified with warships and soldiers. Yet, Olaf only saw three warships comparable to his own eighteen, along with a dozen smaller vessels.

A smile crept across Olaf’s face as he muttered, “Just as I suspected—Denmark has truly emptied its nest. Even the guard over The Sound is nothing but a few kittens and puppies. The Danish navy is utterly depleted!”

Three warships and a dozen small boats were no match for Olaf’s eighteen, but for the weaker eastern Baltic cities and ordinary merchants, they were more than enough to dominate.

Moreover, Denmark’s only formidable neighbor, Sweden, had already marched deep into Germany, leaving no time to concern itself with The Sound. Thus, for the Danes, their remaining naval forces were still among the strongest in the Baltic.

Vinland’s eighteen ships drew closer to Helsingør. The warships outside Kronborg’s harbor reacted instantly, sailing out to meet them. The three largest Danish warships revealed their dark cannon mouths, while the signalmen on their decks frantically waved flags, demanding Olaf identify himself and submit to inspection.

Olaf ordered his signalman to inform the Danes that his fleet was an armed Dutch merchant convoy, hoping to buy time.

But less than ten minutes later, the Danes seemed to lose patience. Suddenly, they fired several cannonballs. Though the shots fell far short of Olaf’s fleet, they still startled him.

“The Danes are threatening us! They demand we drop anchor and wait for their soldiers to board and inspect us!” the Viking signalman turned and urgently reported to Olaf.

Olaf was about to order an immediate attack, but then he reconsidered. If he struck now, many Danish sailors would escape, and Copenhagen would be alerted in advance. If Denmark mobilized its forces and rallied more warships, his mission to save Iceland might fail—and he could face defeat or death.

Olaf’s mind raced as he weighed the pros and cons. Finally, he said in a low voice, “Sorgeir! Tell the Danes we will stop and allow them to board for inspection and collect taxes!”

Without a word, Sorgeir raised his flag. Moments later, the ships dropped anchor. A Danish warship approached Olaf’s flagship, securing itself with grappling hooks. Dozens of Danish sailors armed with firearms and long swords boarded the deck.

Olaf smiled and said, “Attack!”

In an instant, seventy to eighty Viking musketeers appeared on the deck. Their firearms erupted in flames and smoke, dropping over thirty Danish soldiers before they could react.

The remaining Danes hastily raised their firearms to return fire, but few managed to pull the trigger.

Most of the Danish soldiers collapsed as javelins hurled by charging warriors pierced their chests and skulls. The rest were swiftly surrounded and slaughtered by the warriors.

Within five minutes, all forty-plus Danish soldiers who had boarded Olaf’s flagship were dead. Only when no Danes remained standing did Olaf rise from the deck, coldly snorting, “Board their ships and kill them all!”

Olaf’s command was icy and decisive. Unaware of it himself, he no longer hesitated at the thought of killing. Just a few years ago, he would have been reluctant—but people change, often silently and completely.

The soldiers on Olaf’s flagship were the elite of Vinland’s six legions, including many of Olaf’s private slaves who served as his personal guards. Numbering over two hundred, they nimbly leaped from the planks and ropes onto the Danish warship, which had just begun to react, and engaged the remaining seventy to eighty soldiers in fierce combat.

The gunfire from the Danish warship and Olaf’s flagship echoed across The Sound. Two Dutch merchant ships waiting in line to sail south quickly turned and fled.

The remaining two Danish warships and other small boats reacted swiftly. As Olaf’s soldiers boarded the Danish warship, the Danish navy immediately closed in on Olaf’s fleet. The two warships pushed out their cannons and began bombarding Olaf’s flagship and the ships behind it.

The two Danish warships had only twenty or so heavy cannons and a few light guns. While these might have been formidable on land, their power was unremarkable at sea.

Chapter 212: The Siege of Copenhagen (3)

The Danish navy’s volley of cannon fire consisted of fewer than thirty cannonballs. The varying sizes and poor accuracy meant most missed their mark—only one iron ball shattered the deck of Olaf’s flagship, while two others struck the side.

Olaf sat calmly in the cabin, observing the chaos outside. He bellowed, “Order the fleet to target the Danish ships with precision fire! Aim to cripple their navy within two volleys!”

The eighteen large ships quickly adjusted, angling their hulls as they ignited their cannons. The dark cannon mouths erupted in flames, accompanied by thunderous roars. Over a hundred cannons from the fleet’s starboard side unleashed scorching cannonballs in unison.

Propelled by gunpowder, the cannonballs screamed through the air, smashing into the Danish warships’ hulls, sides, decks, and even masts.

Though Olaf’s gunners lacked the precision of the Danish navy, the sheer volume of over a hundred cannonballs ensured that more than a dozen struck the two large Danish ships, while three or four smaller vessels took one or two hits each.

The two large Danish ships were sturdy and towering—solid iron balls could only damage their hulls unless they were struck repeatedly. But the smaller vessels could not withstand 24-pound cannons; a single shot could blast a two-foot-wide hole in their sides, and a hit to the mast would snap it instantly.

Olaf’s fleet had prepared thoroughly. Though their gunners lacked accuracy, they made up for it in numbers. After seven or eight exchanges, the two Danish warships were battered and listing.

As for the smaller Danish ships, three had already been sunk, seven were crippled, and the rest fled south in terror. But Olaf had anticipated this—three large ships gave chase with full sails, while over ten cog ships lurking behind surged forward like arrows loosed from a bow.

Two hours passed swiftly. After the Danish navy’s crushing defeat, Olaf ordered his forces to bombard Kronborg. The remaining cog ships landed to attack Helsingør from the west.

Helsingør had two docks, north and south, but Kronborg stood between them. This massive bastion housed hundreds, perhaps thousands, of Danish soldiers, along with bronze cannons capable of repelling any assault from the sea.

But the Danish soldiers inside Kronborg never expected an attack at their weakest moment, especially not from a fleet of over ten large warships. Under the relentless barrage from Olaf’s ships, Kronborg was powerless to retaliate. The few cannonballs they fired were blocked by the large ships entering the northern dock. Soon, waves of Vinland soldiers disembarked, forming ranks before marching toward Helsingør under their officers’ command.

Helsingør was just an ordinary 17th-century European town—small, sparsely populated, and primarily home to fishermen. By the time Olaf’s legions stormed the streets, the roads were deserted. The townsfolk had barricaded themselves in their homes, trembling behind locked doors and windows.

Pikku, Tom, and Ilugi rode up on reindeer and horses, waving to each other from a distance.

Pikku knew only three legions had landed. He quietly summoned a guard and instructed, “Tell the other two legion commanders that General Olaf orders us to sweep through Helsingør. Take all wealth and food, and kill any who resist!”

With Olaf’s command, the three legion commanders led their forces into Helsingør’s streets. Soldiers kicked down doors, stormed homes, and rampaged like bandits—burning, killing, and looting. The once-peaceful coastal town was transformed into a living hell in an instant.

Screams, cries, collisions, and cannon fire blended into a cacophony. But from his flagship, Olaf saw only the unfolding of a symphony of fate for the Danes.

Though Danes and Icelanders shared the same ancestry and language, the Danes had never treated the Icelanders as their own. For centuries, Danish governors had bled Iceland dry, even resorting to violence to slaughter countless Icelanders.

Centuries of deep-seated hatred, coupled with the life-and-death struggles of the past two years and the desperate siege of Iceland, left Olaf no room for hesitation or mercy. He could only unleash the brutality of his Vinland legions—weakening Denmark while sending a message to its rulers that Iceland would not be easily subdued.

The sun soon set, and the usual bustle of merchant ships in The Sound vanished, as if they had caught wind of the chaos.

As darkness fell, the three Vinland legions returned from their pillaging of Helsingør, their torches casting eerie shadows. Covered in blood and laden with spoils, they rejoined the main force. Olaf showed no interest in their atrocities, merely ordering them to continue the assault on the partially collapsed Kronborg.

After holding out for an hour, Kronborg fell. Every Danish soldier inside was slaughtered by the Vinland warriors—roughly eight hundred in total.

By the time night fully descended, the three large ships and over ten cog ships that had pursued the fleeing Danish navy returned. Solrak, Brun, and Polly reported the results to Olaf.

In the chase, twelve Danish ships were sunk. Two hundred and thirty-one Danish soldiers were killed or drowned, nearly two hundred were captured, but three ships managed to escape.

Olaf rubbed his temples. War was not a game—there would always be imperfections. He accepted that he had not annihilated the Danish navy entirely.

Soon after, Olaf received reports from Tom and others on casualties. In the naval and land battles, the Vinland legions lost sixty-five men, with eight severely wounded and eighty lightly injured.

Olaf considered the day’s battle a victory. The Danes had suffered over a thousand dead or captured, while Vinland’s losses were just over a hundred—a ten-to-one exchange ratio. It was a complete and utter triumph, even if Vinland’s forces had outnumbered the Danish navy by more than tenfold.

As Olaf pondered the battle’s gains and losses, he awaited the return of Tom and the others from their looting of Kronborg and the surrounding areas.

Suddenly, the self-striking clock in the cabin chimed. Olaf glanced at it by candlelight—it was already 8 PM. His stomach growled in protest.

Hunger overrode all else. He ordered the army to eat. Soldiers set up iron pots on the ruins of Kronborg or the docks, lit fires with scavenged wood, and boiled hearty meat stews with fresh vegetables and meat. They ate with fresh bread.

After dinner, Olaf stepped onto the deck, gazing at the dark, ghostly silhouette of Helsingør in the distance. His heart trembled, and he sighed, “Blame your King Christian IV for this.”

Moments later, the six legion commanders—Pikku, Tom, and Ilugi among them—gathered before Olaf for the routine military debriefing. The battle was over. They discussed losses and gains, analyzed mistakes, and Olaf verbally commended those who had performed well, promising substantial rewards after the war—such as elevated status and decorations.

Chapter 213: The Siege of Copenhagen (4)

At the military meeting after dinner, all the legion commanders dismissed the strength of the Danes, as today’s victory had been too easy.

However, Olaf still poured cold water on their confidence. He believed the Vinland expeditionary force and the Kronborg navy had a vast disparity in strength. Moreover, the naval forces stationed at Helsingborg on the eastern coast of The Sound had not come to the aid of the western coast despite knowing of the attack. While it was more likely that their strength was inferior to Kronborg’s, it was also possible they had prioritized the bigger picture and had already gone to Copenhagen to report the news.

At the end of the meeting, Olaf told everyone that this great battle concerned the rise and fall of Iceland for a hundred years and the lives of all present. Therefore, they must remain vigilant and take it seriously. To prevent Copenhagen from organizing an armed defense and countering them after receiving the news, Olaf ordered the fleet to sail south with all their might that very night to attack Copenhagen.

Having taken Helsingør and Kronborg in half a day, Olaf and the legion commanders were brimming with confidence. They had even devised a slogan and strategic goal for this southern campaign: “Break through Copenhagen and capture Christian IV alive!”

All the Vinland legion warriors returned to their ships and slept fully clothed in the cabins.

The Vinland fleet continued to sail south through the night. Although Olaf and the other ship captains had never been to The Sound before, the night was clear enough. Following the western side of the strait, they sailed south until four in the morning, when Olaf, who had just fallen into a deep sleep, was awakened by Pikku.

“Master! We’re almost at Copenhagen! I just took our prisoners to look, and they said the island ahead is Amager Island!”

Olaf rubbed his face and asked, “What does Amager Island mean?”

Copenhagen was the capital of Denmark, located at the eastern end of Zealand, which was not the largest island in Denmark. The Danes had established their capital here to control The Sound and the entrance to the Baltic Sea.

Olaf and his men had never been to Denmark and knew nothing of Copenhagen’s geography. However, the Danish soldiers they had captured in Helsingør that afternoon were very familiar with Copenhagen.

According to the prisoners, adjacent to Copenhagen was the much smaller Amager Island. The strait between the two islands was as narrow as a large river, and Copenhagen’s main docks were built at the eastern end of Amager Island.

Copenhagen also had several smaller docks. On the northeastern coast of Copenhagen, there was another naval base called Kalvebod Fort. Based on the simple sketch drawn by the prisoners, Olaf and Pikku now had a better understanding of Copenhagen.

Olaf felt a chill run down his spine. He realized he had been too careless about war, rashly deciding to attack Copenhagen without doing his homework or preparing adequately. He had not even done the most basic intelligence gathering. Fortunately, the Danish navy was too weak; otherwise, yesterday afternoon’s surprise attack could have ended in a disastrous defeat for the Vinland forces, costing over ten thousand lives.

Seeing that it was already four in the morning and knowing the fleet was approaching Copenhagen, Olaf felt a sense of urgency. He ordered the fleet to drop anchor and then invited Tom and the other legion commanders aboard to continue planning the attack.

Before departing the previous night, Olaf and his men had already devised a plan. However, Olaf now felt that the plan was too vague and that they did not know enough about Copenhagen’s geography or garrison. They needed to refine their strategy based on the Danish prisoners’ sketches.

On the sketch, besides Kalvebod Fort on the northeastern coast of Copenhagen, there was also a small island before entering the harbor between Copenhagen and Amager Island. On this island stood the Tre Kroner Fort, which had cannons, Danish soldiers, and several medium and small warships. It was the last line of defense protecting Copenhagen.

“We completely overlooked Kalvebod Fort and Tre Kroner Fort last night. If we rashly charge in, we might suffer a major loss!” Olaf sighed.

Red-haired Tom scratched his beard and said, “Yes! Kalvebod Fort and Tre Kroner Fort are like two sharp knives guarding Copenhagen. If we want to attack the city, we must first take down these two forts!”

Solrak had been unwell these past few days, his face gaunt. He coughed lightly and said, “We have enough warships and a large number of troops. We can completely flatten Kalvebod Fort and Tre Kroner Fort one by one and then launch a landing attack on Copenhagen!”

Ilugi’s eyes were deep and profound. He said in a low voice, “Copenhagen is the royal capital of Denmark, home to hundreds of thousands of Danes, as well as nobles and wealthy merchants. What if Christian IV recruits nobles and wealthy merchants to form an army to resist us? Perhaps before we even take down the two forts, the Copenhagen militia will attack us!”

Ilugi’s reminder made everyone’s hearts tighten. They knew that nobles and wealthy merchants had servants and guards, and many high-ranking nobles even had private armies. If Christian IV gave the order, they could be organized, and with a population of hundreds of thousands in the Danish capital, it could unleash a powerful fighting force that could push back the Vinland army.

Olaf knew he had to play it safe now. As long as they besieged Copenhagen and made the Danes feel the tension and urgency, the Danish army besieging Reykjavik would be called back.

Relying on the ten thousand native allied forces to capture Copenhagen was a fantasy. They should stick to the most basic strategic objective.

“We cannot become reckless because of yesterday’s victory. We must remember that our strength is still somewhat weak compared to Denmark. Therefore, we cannot attack Copenhagen itself. We only need to take down the fortresses guarding Copenhagen, such as Kalvebod Fort and Tre Kroner Fort, to remove Denmark’s defensive power and expose their soft underbelly. Only then will the Danes, who do not know our actual combat strength and troop numbers, panic, and the nobles in Copenhagen will fear us, prompting them to call Magnus back to protect them…”

Olaf looked around and said in a deep voice, “Remember, our goal is to resolve the crisis in Iceland. So let’s first take down Kalvebod Fort!”

Olaf made the decision, and everyone had to accept it, regardless of their thoughts. Although the warlike Pikku and Tom still harbored unrealistic fantasies of capturing Copenhagen, the remaining commanders understood Olaf’s intentions.

The legion commanders left Olaf’s flagship and returned to their own ships to issue combat preparation orders.

The Vinland expeditionary fleet quickly raised their anchors and, with sails fully unfurled, sailed south rapidly.

As Olaf’s army advanced towards Kalvebod Fort in the northeast of Copenhagen, seventy miles west of the now dead and ruined Helsingør, in the eastern streets of the Hillerød region, a Danish knight riding a horse arrived. This knight wore half plate armor, and his helmet was embedded with the golden lion emblem of the Danish royal family, proving his identity as a royal guard officer.

The morning sun shone on the streets of Hillerød, and the sound of the officer’s horse’s hooves awakened the residents on both sides of the street. Before the people could fully wake up, professional militia patrols had already arrived.

“Who is it… a royal constable?!”

The officer swallowed and said hoarsely, “I am Captain Dulotding of Kronborg! My horse can’t go on. Give me a horse. I need to go to Frederik’s Castle. I have military intelligence to report to His Majesty the King!”

Chapter 214: The Siege of Copenhagen (5)

At the heart of the Hillerød region in northern Zealand lay the sapphire-like Slotssø Lake, upon whose three central islets stood one of Europe’s most beautiful, luxurious, and majestic palaces—Frederiksborg Palace.

Frederiksborg Palace was not the largest among Europe’s royal residences, but its architectural style was unparalleled.

A single, relatively wide stone bridge connected the shore to the first islet, where visitors were met with a grand corridor flanked by towering walls, buildings, and gunports—clearly the first fortress encircling the palace.

Beyond the fortress islet, a second stone bridge led to the remaining two islets, where the palace’s blue tiles and red bricks formed a stunning complex. The plaza adorned with bronze statues of Poseidon and the Valkyries, along with its fountains and gardens, seemed like a fairy tale brought to life.

The ruler of Denmark, Christian IV, resided on the third floor of the palace, just beyond the fountain plaza.

It was now early July, and Denmark’s weather had grown warm and pleasant. The palace gardens burst with blooming flowers, their fragrance filling the air.

General Magnus and his deputy, Staff Officer Kormakur, had sent their battle reports to the palace last week. Christian IV learned that the Danish forces had stormed Reykjavik and were now engaged in fierce street battles with the rebel forces led by Haldor in the East District. All signs pointed to an imminent Danish victory.

With the Icelandic rebels on the verge of capture, Christian IV felt his dignity somewhat restored. These past few days, he had taken to spending his mornings leisurely in the garden, sometimes accompanied by his mistress.

But this morning, only two trembling gardeners tended to the flowers. They had heard the sound of shattering porcelain and the king’s furious roars from upstairs, signaling his wrath.

“Kronborg couldn’t hold out for even two hours?! Useless! While Magnus is besieging Reykjavik, how could dozens of warships appear right under our noses? This is…!”

The Rose Hall was lavishly decorated, with Eastern rhinoceros horns and African ivory displayed alongside Parisian masterpieces. The tables were adorned with exquisite porcelain and jade from the distant East, in Seres.

Before a long table draped in gold-threaded cloth, Christian IV, clad in a woolen robe, stood with a livid expression, his chest heaving. At his feet lay golden fried fish, pudding, milk, and shattered glassware and porcelain teacups. Nearby, a colorful rug bore a pair of silver knives and forks, stained with milk and the creamy white and golden hues of royal jelly.

Christian IV had lost his usual composure. His eyes bulged, the veins on his forehead throbbed, and he gritted his teeth as he glared at the young officer kneeling before him. “Dulotding! You are my trusted confidant, raised by my own hand. I recall your grandfather was merely a knight, wasn’t he?”

Dulotding swallowed hard, his voice hoarse. “Yes, Your Majesty! My grandfather was but a country knight. It is only through your grace that I have risen to the rank of captain in the Danish navy, achieving a status beyond my ancestors. I shall never forget your benevolence!”

In an era without formal military ranks, the title of captain carried as much weight as that of a general. As the highest-ranking officer at Kronborg, Dulotding held a respected position in the Danish navy. Yet, after a grueling journey, he had arrived to deliver devastating news during Christian IV’s breakfast: the Icelandic rebels had launched a surprise attack on Kronborg the day before. Dozens of warships and thousands of soldiers had overrun Helsingør in just two hours, slaughtering countless civilians and Danish troops.

Christian IV struggled to believe it, but he saw no reason for Dulotding to deceive him. His fury and agitation surged. He roared, smashing everything in sight, and dispatched his ministers to investigate.

After receiving their preliminary reports, Christian IV coldly demanded, “I gave you everything you could ever want, yet you’ve cost me Kronborg! Iceland is nothing but a cold, desolate, impoverished land. Even if Haldor has a small colony called Vinland in America, it couldn’t possibly support dozens of warships and thousands of soldiers. And he already has thousands of troops in Iceland! Could his colony in America be larger and wealthier than my Denmark?!”

Unaware of Vinland’s recent expansion, Christian IV dismissed the idea. His fixed perception of Vinland and Iceland blinded him to the colony’s prosperity under Olaf’s guidance. He didn’t even realize that the royal jelly he cherished, supposedly from Africa, was actually a specialty of Vinland.

“You’re spouting nonsense, exaggerating the rebels’ strength! Even if Haldor’s men attacked Kronborg, they couldn’t possibly have dozens of warships and thousands of soldiers!”

Christian IV shook his head, glaring at Dulotding.

Dulotding’s face flushed, his voice trembling. “Your Majesty, I speak the truth! The attackers were well-equipped soldiers, dark-skinned like the Indians of the Caribbean. Many of their leaders were tall Nordic men, and I heard them speaking Icelandic!”

Christian IV waved him off. “Wait outside. I’ve sent men to Helsingør to verify your claims. If they prove true, I’ll spare you. But if you’ve exaggerated to lessen your guilt, I’ll have you hanged!”

Dulotding retreated, dejected. Christian IV paced restlessly, muttering curses against Haldor and the Icelanders.

Time passed slowly. By noon, three ministers rushed in, their faces etched with panic.

Christian IV grabbed the lead minister, a middle-aged man. “Ulfy, what’s the situation?”

Ulfy, recently promoted to Minister of Finance, owed his position to the king’s favor and his family’s influence, but he was also shrewd and capable. Clutching Christian IV’s icy hands, Ulfy’s handsome face furrowed slightly. “Your Majesty, please take care of your health.”

Christian IV pressed on. “Tell me, is Dulotding’s report true?”

Ulfy’s expression darkened. “Yes, Your Majesty. We met many women and children fleeing from Helsingør to Hillerød. They told us of the Icelanders’ atrocities yesterday. It seems all the men in Helsingør have been slaughtered.”

Christian IV gasped, nearly collapsing. At fifty-five, he felt his age and frailty for the first time.

Ulfy helped his father-in-law to a seat, while the other ministers offered their reassurances.

After a long silence, Christian IV straightened up. “Where are the Icelandic scoundrels now?”

“They’re clearly heading to attack Copenhagen!”

“Our expeditionary force is besieging Reykjavik. This Icelandic army must be seeking revenge! Your Majesty, order Magnus to return at once to protect you!”

Christian IV hesitated, waving his hand. “Prepare immediately. We’ll take the royal guards to Copenhagen!”

Ulfy and the others hurried away. Frederiksborg Palace soon buzzed with activity as people rushed in and out. Wagons and oxcarts loaded with supplies lined up at the stone bridge, ready to depart.

Around three in the afternoon, Christian IV, clad in military attire, rode out of the palace gates on an Arabian steed. Behind him, Dulotding, now cleaned up, followed on a yellow-maned mixed-breed warhorse.

Four ministers awaited them outside. Ulfy stepped forward. “Your Majesty! Soldiers from Helsingborg and Copenhagen’s envoy have just arrived. They say they sent word to Copenhagen last night. The mayor and the two legion commanders stationed there have been preparing for battle since this morning. Sure enough, the Icelandic scoundrels appeared outside Kalvebod Fort this morning. With the entire city’s support, they couldn’t breach the fort!”

“The defenders at Kalvebod Fort are still engaging the Icelandic scoundrels. Everyone hopes for Your Majesty’s swift return to take command!”

Christian IV nodded, his expression grave. Furrowing his brow, he asked softly, “Ulfy, do you think we need to recall Magnus? Are these Icelandic attackers at Kalvebod Fort worth disrupting our plans to conquer Iceland?”

Ulfy’s face remained calm, but his heart raced with tension and excitement. After pretending to ponder, he replied, “Dulotding is one of our young Danish officers. Over the years, he’s done much to eliminate pirates and defend the nation. Yet Kronborg, the first line of defense in The Sound, fell to the Icelandic pirates in just two hours. What does that tell us? The Icelandic pirates are not to be underestimated!”

“They have eighteen galleons and carracks, all equipped with heavy cannons. Half of their thousands of soldiers are musketeers—enough to challenge German troops on the southern shore of the Baltic Sea…”

“Copenhagen is our largest city, thriving in trade, densely populated, and home to many foreign merchants. It is the face of Denmark. While our remaining forces should be able to repel the Icelandic pirates, if even a small band breaches the city, it could cause major chaos. A few fires and some destruction would not only tarnish Denmark’s reputation but could take years to recover from…”

Ulfy was clever. He and Magnus, his brothers-in-law, had been locked in a power struggle for years, each wary of the other. He feared Magnus would gain glory by conquering Iceland. Now, as his father-in-law sought his counsel, Ulfy wanted to persuade him to recall Magnus but dared not say so outright. Instead, he guided Christian IV to consider the potential risks.

Christian IV wavered. “Iceland will stay put in the North Sea. We can attack it anytime. But these Icelandic pirates could cause trouble at any moment! We can’t keep playing defense forever. We need Magnus back to strengthen our navy and crush them!”

Muttering to himself, Christian IV made up his mind. “Ulfy, send a ship to Iceland immediately. Summon Magnus and his troops back. We must block these Icelandic pirates in The Sound and annihilate them!”

Ulfy’s lips curled slightly as he bowed. “Yes, Your Majesty. I’ll see to it at once.”

After Ulfy’s temporary departure, Christian IV put on a show of vigor, inspecting his thousand-strong guard. Then, he climbed into his carriage and ordered the departure. The Danish king’s escort and the supply wagons set off in a grand procession from Frederiksborg Palace in Hillerød.

Chapter 215: The Siege of Copenhagen (6)

On July 4th, Christian IV’s special envoy quickly departed from Hillerød and found an old galleon in a harbor city on the western coast of The Sound. They then set sail for distant Iceland to deliver the order to Magnus to return and defend the king.

As the envoy distanced themselves from The Sound, Christian IV’s carriage, along with the royal guards and accompanying ministers, were also hastening toward Copenhagen.

Along the northeastern coast outside Copenhagen, cannon fire occasionally echoed. Olaf stood at the bow of the whaling ship, commanding the fleet of eighteen large ships armed with cannons to bombard Kalvebod Fort in the distance.

Since early morning, before the sun had even risen, the fleet had been attacking Kalvebod Fort. Now, after more than eight hours, the bombardment continued at a measured pace. Olaf was deliberately being mysterious, not wanting Copenhagen to know his true strength and numbers. As long as the fleet’s overwhelming firepower kept up the assault, Kalvebod Fort would eventually crumble.

Olaf’s strategic goal from the beginning had been to intimidate Christian IV and threaten Denmark’s nobility, causing them to panic and summon Magnus back to resolve Iceland’s crisis.

But Olaf was unaware that when he had captured Helsingør the previous night, Christian IV had been only a few dozen miles away. If he had launched a full-scale assault on Frederiksborg Palace, the chance of capturing the Danish king and achieving complete victory would have been high. However, he did not know Christian IV’s whereabouts and had not bothered to investigate carefully.

Due to a misjudgment based on habitual thinking, Olaf had assumed Christian IV would be residing in the royal palace in Copenhagen, overlooking the Danish royal family’s fondness for building palaces.

Since ascending the throne, Christian IV had spent heavily to renovate Frederiksborg Palace, and in recent years, he had mostly lived in the palace seventy miles west of Helsingør.

Olaf later learned of the situation and sighed with regret, believing his inexperience had let the big fish slip away.

Perhaps it wasn’t that Olaf had overlooked Christian IV, but rather that his memory truly lacked knowledge of Christian IV’s living habits. He had not interrogated the captured soldiers in Helsingør, so he could only follow his habitual thinking and attack Copenhagen, assuming that was where Christian IV resided.

By a twist of fate, Olaf had taken Helsingør but missed Christian IV, who was only half a day’s journey away, and instead turned toward Copenhagen, two hundred miles distant.

However, upon learning the news, Christian IV also rushed back to Copenhagen and sent someone to recall Magnus.

Olaf, still attacking Kalvebod Fort, did not know that his strategic goal had already been achieved.

Kalvebod Fort was one of the bases of the Danish navy, with two more bastions than Kronborg in Helsingør. It had many soldiers and cannons. Initially, it had held its own against Olaf’s fleet, but as Olaf’s ships continued their relay attacks, Kalvebod Fort’s cannons gradually became unusable due to overheating.

From noon onward, Kalvebod Fort had almost been in a state of passive defense.

Cannonballs of various sizes struck the bastions of Kalvebod Fort, causing tremors like earthquakes and thunder, sending dust flying inside. The soldiers could only futilely fire through the gun ports at the Icelandic pirate ships on the shore. All the bullets fell into the sea, causing no damage to Olaf’s warships.

The sun slowly sank in the western sky, and the clouds at the horizon turned the sea a golden red. Olaf and Tom stood under the mast, counting the number of cannonballs expended that day. Not far away, a cog ship flying the Icelandic cross flag quickly approached.

Soon, Pikku leaped onto the deck via the gangplank and knelt before Olaf, saying, “Master! The navy at Tre Kroner Fort has all retreated into the harbors of Copenhagen and Amager Island. I see that the defending forces in Copenhagen are insufficient, and they are now preparing for a strict defense!”

Olaf nodded. According to the prisoners’ confessions and various signs, ninety percent of Denmark’s forces and warships had gone to attack Iceland. Now, facing his expeditionary army, they could only adopt a posture of full retreat. Kalvebod Fort and Tre Kroner Fort seemed to have been abandoned, serving only as pawns to delay his attack.

Seeing Copenhagen’s belated response, Olaf knew that Christian IV had likely given up on the idea of a costly confrontation with him. They intended to defend completely, preserve their strength, and buy time. Perhaps they had already prepared to call back Magnus.

An idea struck Olaf, and he said lightly, “Since Copenhagen is fully defended, we can’t let them down. Tom, Pikku, immediately order the entire army. Tom’s troops will land first, unload several cannons, and approach Kalvebod Fort to attack again. Our cannons will be pulled two hundred paces closer, and we must blast the bastions within the range of the defenders’ firearms!”

Pikku and Tom were excited and eagerly turned to leave.

Soon, several large ships and more than a dozen cog ships of the Vinland expeditionary force docked outside the range of Kalvebod Fort.

Using the dinghies carried on the large ships, the soldiers made more than ten trips, finally unloading twelve cannons from the ships and bringing them ashore, pulling them to a hill six hundred paces north of Kalvebod Fort.

After several rounds of test firing and adjustments, the cannons finally hit Kalvebod Fort accurately. This time, due to the closer distance, the damage to Kalvebod Fort was severe. Olaf looked through the telescope for a while and grinned, “In less than two hours, Kalvebod Fort will be breached. Then, with the reindeer cavalry covering the musketeers’ charge, we will definitely take Kalvebod Fort!”

Time passed minute by minute. By the time the sky darkened and everything hundreds of meters away became blurred, Olaf, knowing that Kalvebod Fort could hold out for at most a few more minutes, had to order a retreat.

In this era, unlike later times, there were no lighting tools other than torches at night. Once night fell, it was pitch black. The soldiers’ quality was limited, and field battles could not exert even one-tenth of their combat power, with the risk of friendly fire.

Olaf’s fleet anchored near the shore north of Kalvebod Fort to rest. The night watch soldiers lay hidden on the shore, crouching in the dinghies by the shore, waiting for possible night raids from Copenhagen.

But to Olaf’s disappointment, there was no reaction from Kalvebod Fort or Copenhagen throughout the night. This puzzled Olaf. In his past life, he had read many stories where ancient generals would arrange elite night raids. He thought Denmark must have someone skilled in military tactics, but they had not arranged any night raids to disrupt his army. Olaf felt a hint of confusion.

In reality, Olaf did not know that Christian IV had only returned to Rosenborg Palace in Copenhagen at 10 PM. This was a palace castle hidden in forests and gardens, not inferior in beauty to Frederiksborg.

The order for Copenhagen to abandon the rescue of Kalvebod Fort and to retreat and defend strictly was issued in advance by Christian IV, who was on his way to Copenhagen. His purpose was to preserve strength and wait for Magnus to return and rescue them.

Christian IV also realized on the way that Ulfy was right. The Icelandic pirates were not weak; in fact, they could be considered comparable to a regular army. They were likely a force sent by Haldor, knowing they could not defeat the Danish expeditionary force, to make a desperate attempt to threaten him.

Christian IV now worried that the Icelandic pirates might truly attack Copenhagen. If that happened, he would indeed become a sinner for all time, a laughingstock for the world.

To ensure sufficient force to protect Copenhagen, Christian IV could only abandon the rescue of the surrounding areas, retract effective forces to protect Copenhagen and the harbor of Amager Island. Everyone knew that as a port city, Copenhagen, like Reykjavik, was the symbol and soul of the country, as well as its foundation.

As long as the harbor was defended, the enemy at sea could not attack the mainland. Christian IV now planned to use several fortresses like Kalvebod Fort and Tre Kroner Fort to wear down the Icelandic pirates, ultimately relying on the defensive forces gathered in Copenhagen to block the Icelandic pirates’ attack at the harbor.

According to Christian IV’s plan, in a week, Magnus would be able to return to The Sound. Then, the Icelandic pirates would be trapped in Copenhagen harbor, and he would be able to behead all these villains and vent his anger!

Chapter 216: The Siege of Copenhagen (7)

Before six o’clock the next morning, the eastern sky began to brighten—a hallmark of summer, where daylight always lingered longer. And in the Nordic regions near the Arctic, the summer days stretched even further.

Olaf had spent the night tangled in worry over Christian IV’s potential night raids and other schemes, his mind a whirl of chaos. Tossing and turning, sleep eluded him until the early hours of dawn finally dragged him under.

Pikku, Tom, Solrak, Ilugi, and the others rose early, swiftly arranging breakfast for the soldiers. Once the six divisions had eaten their fill of smoked meat, roasted sweet potato slices, and half a cup of diluted spirits, the new day’s battle was set to begin.

Tom’s division had led the landing assault yesterday; today, Solrak would take command of his own division to continue the attack.

The other five division commanders ordered their troops to prepare for landing operations. Then, after a night of eerie silence, the shore erupted once more with the thunderous roar of cannons.

“What’s happening?” The moment the cannons boomed, Olaf jolted upright in bed. His eyes were dark with exhaustion, but his ears caught the muffled blasts from outside the ship.

A private slave guard rushed in. “Master! What’s wrong?”

Olaf asked, “Where is the cannon fire coming from?”

“It’s General Solrak leading the attack on Kalvebod Fort. General Pikku said you were too tired and didn’t want to disturb you…”

Olaf shook his head slightly. “Bring my half plate armor and clothes.”

A short while later, with the help of his guards, Olaf donned his clothes and armor, then wiped his face with a towel from a basin of warm water before striding onto the deck.

“Master! We’ve just prepared oatmeal porridge, fried whale meat, and hazelnut bread. Shall we bring it to you on deck?”

Olaf silently watched the distant fortress taking a beating, then nodded. “Bring it.”

Soon, two slaves carried over a table, chairs, and the food, setting it up for him.

Olaf sat down and ate heartily. In less than ten minutes, Tom, Pikku, Polly, Brun, and Ilugi arrived upon hearing he was awake.

“You’ve come at the right time,” Olaf said, swallowing the last bite of bread. “I estimate Kalvebod Fort will have a breach in half an hour. Send two more divisions to minimize casualties and take the fort!”

Brun and Polly stepped forward instantly. “We are students of Teacher Hudik and wish to test our mettle against the Danish forces. Please, General Olaf, allow us to fight for Vinland!”

Olaf could tell from their expressions and words that they had planned this. Of the six division commanders, he had his own assessments. Pikku had done well managing Greenland independently, gaining experience through campaigns. Tom, Ilugi, and Solrak had only truly been tested last year under their fathers’ command in Iceland. These four varied in skill, but overall, they were still green—far from seasoned leaders.

Brun and Polly, however, were older and had trained under Hudik the longest. Years ago, they had already led troops independently. Last year, their father had sent them back, trusting in their combat prowess to strengthen Vinland’s forces.

Olaf considered them the most capable of the division commanders. Seeing their eagerness, he agreed readily. “The rest of you, watch closely. See how Generals Brun and Polly handle the Danish defenders!”

Brun and Polly quickly led their troops ashore in longboats, swiftly assembling on the rough coastal path before marching toward Solrak’s artillery position to the beat of drums.

Kalvebod Fort’s three bastions were sturdy and well-constructed, but after ten hours of relentless bombardment and thousands of cannonballs, cracks began to spiderweb through the walls, and gaps appeared.

Inside the bastions, only a dozen or so cannons remained. After yesterday’s exchange with the warships, the constant firing had overheated them, leaving the Danish soldiers inside anxious, waiting for the day their defenses would crumble.

The Danish soldiers had never imagined being trapped in their own fort, pounded by enemy ships with no means to fight back. Denmark, Europe’s third and Scandinavia’s foremost naval power, had ruled the Baltic Sea for centuries. They were used to bullying others, never being bullied themselves.

Olaf’s expeditionary fleet had breached the Sound, surged into the Baltic, and bombarded Copenhagen. The actual damage paled compared to the psychological blow. But Vinland and Iceland were still too weak. Olaf knew that if he had double the troops and ships, he would dare to launch a full-scale assault on Copenhagen.

Vinland’s rise was built on the exploitation of the natives and the ruthless extraction of resources. To Europeans, North America was little more than a source of furs.

The Danes never suspected that Haldor and Olaf, through Vinland, could amass taxes rivaling the tolls of the Sound, building a fleet of dozens of warships and an army of twenty thousand musketeers.

This information asymmetry led to Denmark’s strategic blunder, culminating in Olaf’s forces now at their doorstep.

Christian IV, sleepless all night, racked his brain trying to figure out which nation was backing the Icelandic pirates attacking Kalvebod Fort. His suspicions fell on Gustavus Adolphus II of Sweden.

With Gustavus Adolphus II’s string of victories in northern Germany, Sweden had become the most talked-about power in Europe.

Christian IV knew that Dutch merchants had been in contact with Sweden’s Chancellor Axel Oxenstierna since the beginning of the year, hinting at potential cooperation in overseas colonization. He sensed danger—perhaps Gustavus Adolphus II was plotting against him.

Though uncertain, Christian IV was resolved. He would wait for Magnus to return and then crush the Icelandic pirates besieging Copenhagen.

Bang…

A volley of gunfire erupted in the open field before Kalvebod Fort. Danish soldiers pouring out of the bastions exchanged fire with Vinland’s musketeers. Men fell every second as the two sides closed in.

The fortress held around a thousand defenders—far fewer than the three Vinland divisions—but their marksmanship surpassed that of Vinland’s slave soldiers. Though smoothbore muskets were inaccurate, skilled musketeers could still land shots with practiced ease.

After three volleys, despite Vinland’s numerical advantage, both sides suffered similar casualties.

Solrak worried about the mounting losses and hesitated, furrowing his brow as he looked to Brun and Polly.

Brun said, “We have over seventy cavalry and a hundred reindeer to pull the cannons. We can send the reindeer cavalry to harass the Danish flank. I’ll lead them myself!”

Polly nodded. “Are there any sharper shooters among the artillerymen? Pick them out for targeted fire to break the Danish formation!”

Soon, the reindeer cavalry under Brun’s command, armed with muskets, broke from the formation in a wide arc, circling toward the Danish left rear.

Polly knew that as the two formations closed, the Danish soldiers would soon be out of cannon range. Time was tight—he had only one chance to fire.

Calmly, he selected the most experienced artillerymen, adjusting the cannon mouths according to the techniques taught by their teacher, Hudik. With a shudder, the cannons unleashed a volley toward the Danish rear.

Chapter 217: The Siege of Copenhagen (8)

Whoosh…

Twelve cannonballs screamed through the air, most of them slamming into the ground behind the Danish soldiers’ square formation, sending up fountains of dirt and stones seven or eight meters high.

But three of the cannonballs found their mark, tearing through the Danish ranks. The spinning, red-hot projectiles shredded the bodies of over twenty soldiers in an instant.

Even the seasoned Danish troops, who had faced the Holy Roman Empire’s soldiers many times before, were shaken by the gruesome sight. Yet, as veteran warriors, their formation held—at least for the moment.

The Danish officers quickly ordered their men to scatter, and the battered square formation accelerated its charge toward the main force led by Polly and Solrak.

Rat-tat-tat…

A towering reindeer carried over seventy knights, appearing to the northwest of the Danish formation. Brun waited until the herd drew near before signaling for the soldiers to dismount.

By then, Polly and Solrak had already ordered the Vinland musketeers to open fire on the Danish ranks. The Danes could only return fire head-on, unable to spare any musketeers to engage Brun’s forces.

Moments later, Brun and his men raised their firearms in unison, firing a volley into the backs of the Danish soldiers. With the gunfire, Brun watched as forty or fifty Danes crumpled to the ground.

Before the Danes could react, some of their musketeers dropping to the ground and turning to face the threat, Brun and his men had already remounted their reindeer and galloped away.

Reindeer lacked the stamina of fine horses and were easily spooked by gunfire and cannons. Thus, the reindeer cavalry could only rely on the reindeer’s mobility for travel. In battle, they had to dismount beforehand to fire their weapons, lest they startle the reindeer and be thrown to their deaths.

The Danish army was already outnumbered by the three Vinland legions. With the reindeer cavalry harassing them intermittently, the Danes’ morale plummeted rapidly.

Seeing the Danish formation completely scattered, Polly and Solrak knew the time for the final battle had come. They ordered a full charge.

Over ninety percent of Vinland’s soldiers were enslaved Native Americans. Their strengths lay in their swift movements and ferocity in close combat. The disciplined firing lines and square formations of traditional warfare did not suit them. Olaf had little faith in the Vinland legions’ ability to fight in such formations, but he was confident that in close combat, Vinland’s soldiers would not lose to any other nation’s troops of equal number.

Forced to stand and exchange fire from a distance, only to be picked off by Danish bullets, the nearly six thousand Vinland soldiers had been seething with frustration.

Upon hearing their legion commanders’ orders, the three legions instantly broke free from restraint. Ignoring all formation and order, the soldiers grabbed their long spears and charged toward the Danish troops.

The fifteen hundred Vinland musketeers also discarded their firearms, drawing the throwing axes and short spears from their waists as they sprinted after the long spearmen, eager not to be left behind in the slaughter.

Olaf stood at the prow of the ship, observing the battle on the distant shore through his telescope. Nodding in satisfaction, he remarked, “The natives of Vinland are already primitive and savage, unafraid to fight and kill. Now, indoctrinated with Viking culture, they’ve taken on some of the spirit of berserkers. Excellent!”

Under Olaf’s distant gaze, the two forces collided. The Vinland soldiers, outnumbering the Danes by more than four to one, instantly engulfed them.

Blood, the clash of weapons, cries of pain, and the ringing of metal on metal combined into a symphony, painting Copenhagen, bathed in the morning sun’s golden glow, as an epic city—like a scene from a Viking saga or a tableau from Homer’s epics.

An hour passed quickly. Not a single Danish soldier remained standing on the battlefield before Kalvebod Fort.

The Vinland soldiers, under their officers’ command, began clearing the field—carrying away the bodies of their comrades and aiding the wounded. The sea breeze from the shore dispersed the thick scent of blood, mingling with the salty tang of the sea, creating a nauseating stench.

Olaf remained steadfast at the prow. Before the battle’s end, he had already sent cog ships to scout Copenhagen’s harbor for intelligence. Now that Kalvebod Fort had fallen, the next step was to consider an assault on Tre Kroner Fort, further tightening the noose around Copenhagen.

From Kalvebod Fort, one could march directly into western Copenhagen, but this required a powerful combined land and naval force. If Copenhagen’s defenses could not be breached quickly, the naval forces must not falter. Any misstep would leave the landed troops with no retreat.

Olaf dared not take such a risk. He did not believe his six legions alone could break Copenhagen’s defenses. His plan was to level Tre Kroner Fort next, ensuring no remaining forces could support Copenhagen’s shores, thus stripping the Danes and Christian IV of their last sense of security.

After half an hour, the Vinland soldiers had looted the meager supplies from Kalvebod Fort. Olaf watched as the soldiers returned to the ships with a handful of prisoners. Then, Brun, Polly, and Solrak—all beaming with excitement—boarded the Whale Watcher to report to Olaf.

“General Olaf! The Danish garrison at Kalvebod Fort numbered 1,412 men. We have annihilated them all and captured 72 prisoners. We’ve also seized countless ammunition and firearms from the fort. Hahaha…” Brun grinned, counting on his fingers.

Olaf didn’t bother correcting Brun’s choice of words or his math. He knew that the people of Vinland, and even Iceland, might have limited education, making their speech and numerical accuracy… questionable.

Olaf asked, “What about our casualties?”

Brun and Polly exchanged glances, clearly having no statistics. Olaf let out a cold snort, and the three hurried to the stern to send someone to gather the numbers. Moments later, they returned, with Solrak forcing a smile. “Olaf, don’t be angry! We forgot to count earlier. Our three legions lost over two hundred men, with another three hundred wounded. Half of the wounded are lightly injured, but the other half… probably won’t last a few more days.”

Olaf frowned, displeased with the trio’s attitude. He let out a cold snort and said, “You are all legion commanders! You must not look down on your own soldiers. Though they are natives, they fight bravely for us without fear of sacrifice. We must care for them and show them concern! Go comfort the wounded at once! Don’t let our soldiers shed blood and tears!”

Olaf was usually mild-mannered, but his presence was not weak. His outburst surprised Solrak, Brun, and Polly, leaving them somewhat shaken. They quickly lowered their heads in admission of their mistake, pledging to follow Olaf’s orders, though they still harbored some resentment.

Olaf knew that Solrak and the others, like many, might not understand his intentions, but as long as they followed his orders, that was enough.

“Over five hundred casualties—that’s nearly a tenth of our forces! And this is with our advantage in artillery and numbers!”

Olaf sighed and said, “I saw through the telescope—Danish soldiers are indeed highly skilled. If the numbers were equal, the Vinland legions might not be a match for the Danish army…”

“But—” Solrak began, clearly unwilling to accept this, but Polly quickly pulled him back and said, “Yes, from the earlier exchange of fire and close combat, I noticed the Danes’ marksmanship is far superior to ours—more accurate. And in close combat, they don’t fear our numerical advantage. We must take the Danish forces more seriously!”

Olaf’s expression softened slightly at these words. “If we remain arrogant, disrespecting our own warriors while underestimating our enemies, defeat will not be far off! Remember, our Viking generals and the Grand Duke are still besieged on Iceland by the Danes!”

Olaf’s reminder made Solrak and the others lower their heads in shame. The atmosphere grew awkward. Pikku, lacking the social grace to smooth things over, could not tolerate any disrespect toward Olaf. Even the slightest neglect or defiance was unacceptable. He sneered, “Solrak, how many battles have you even fought? Do you think you’re an expert now?”

“You—” Solrak was about to retort, but the others quickly intervened, each pledging their loyalty and vowing to obey Olaf’s commands, to take the Danish army seriously, and to achieve the greatest victory with the least sacrifice.

Chapter 218: The Siege of Copenhagen (9)

Olaf’s expression only returned to normal after hearing the others’ responses. This was part of his growing mastery of political maneuvering—he needed to maintain some principles while also appearing unpredictable to keep his subordinates in line.

Clearing his mind of distractions, Olaf recalled the ships he had sent to scout Copenhagen’s harbor. He turned to Pikku and Tom, asking, “Any changes at Copenhagen’s harbor? Have the scouting ships returned?”

Tom, who had arrived late and witnessed Olaf’s outburst, stepped forward, still somewhat bewildered. “They just returned. I’ve already asked. Copenhagen’s docks are completely sealed off, bristling with defenses and soldiers. It seems Christian IV is determined to hold the harbor against us!”

Olaf nodded, muttering to himself, “Copenhagen means ‘Merchant’s Harbor’ in Danish. It’s the wealthiest and most prosperous city in the Baltic and all of Scandinavia. Forcing Copenhagen to close its harbor has already dealt a severe blow to Denmark’s revenue, slowing their recovery.”

Pikku, standing beside Olaf, chimed in, “You’re right, master! We’ve disrupted Denmark’s trade and humiliated them before all of Europe. The Danes won’t dare attack Iceland again!”

Ignoring Pikku’s flattery, Olaf continued questioning Tom, “Copenhagen’s harbor should have had hundreds of merchant ships. Now that The Sound is wider than usual, have all the foreign ships left?”

“Yes, General,” Tom replied, shaking his red hair. “Almost all foreign ships have departed. Vakili, who just returned from scouting, told me there are a few Swedish and Dutch merchant ships outside Copenhagen. They seem to want to meet you—probably to do business.”

“Vakili?” Olaf frowned. “The white slave from my sugar workshop?”

“Yes, General,” Tom said, glancing at Pikku. “Vakili is clever and a good shot with cannons. Pikku and I promoted him. Now he’s the captain of a cog ship.”

Pikku quickly added, “Vakili said he served as your white slave for years, contributing to your family. So we gave him this opportunity.”

Olaf pressed further, “You mean the short, ugly Vakili?”

“Yes, master,” Pikku confirmed, with Tom nodding in agreement.

Olaf smiled. “Bring him to me. I only ordered a ship to scout for intelligence—I didn’t expect it to be him.”

After a moment, Vakili limped in quickly. Though his appearance was unremarkable, his movements were agile, his eyes sharp, and his face lit up with a grin as he bowed. “Subordinate Vakili greets General Olaf! How have you been, young master? Are you well? Have you eaten?”

Olaf smiled and nodded, suppressing his discomfort at Vakili’s overly familiar greeting. He had encountered many like Vakili during his years traveling between Iceland and Vinland—people whose ignorance and rigid behavior made them seem odd.

“Keep up the good work. Earn more merits, and I’ll reward you when we return,” Olaf encouraged before asking, “What did you see when you scouted Tre Kroner Fort and Copenhagen?”

Vakili recounted everything in detail. Olaf listened without comment, confirming what Tom had said—no ships had entered or left the harbor for over two hours, meaning it was indeed blockaded.

“What about the Dutch and Swedish merchant ships?”

Vakili scratched his head. “When the four or five Swedish and Dutch ships saw me from afar, they started waving flags and shouting. At first, I thought they meant to fight… but then they sent a sailor in a dinghy, saying they wanted to meet you—to do business.”

Olaf waved Vakili aside and, after a moment’s thought, turned to his commanders. “Do you think we should meet with the Dutch and Swedes?”

Ilugi lifted his gaunt face, speaking firmly, “General, we should meet them. We’ve dealt with the Dutch for years—they’ll do anything for profit. If they say they want to trade, they mean it.

As for the Swedes, we don’t know them well, but Sweden and Denmark aren’t on good terms. Denmark still holds Kalmar, and everyone knows the Swedes resent it. With Gustavus Adolphus II winning battles against the Holy Roman Empire, he might even be eyeing the imperial throne. Now that we’re attacking Copenhagen, the Swedes will want to help us. If they’re working with the Dutch, it could benefit us.”

Olaf praised Ilugi’s clear reasoning, though the others were still processing his words. He missed Heiner’s sharp mind.

After a pause, Tom and Solrak clapped their hands. “Right! Ilugi’s guess makes sense. If we ally with Gustavus Adolphus II, Iceland will have a powerful backer!”

Olaf nodded, smirking. “Gustavus Adolphus II won’t seek us out, but those Swedish merchants are likely connected to their nobility. They can offer some assistance. Alright, Vakili, bring the Swedish and Dutch merchants here—but confiscate their firearms first. I won’t risk an ambush.”

“Don’t worry, General!” Vakili bowed and left, calling over his shoulder, “I’ll take their weapons!”

The sun climbed higher, heating the deck. Olaf led everyone back to the cabin for coffee. It was now 10:40 AM. The battlefield at Kalvebod Fort had been cleared, and the fleet awaited Olaf’s order to advance to the next target—Tre Kroner Fort.

Ten minutes later, Vakili’s booming voice announced, “General! Mr. Simon of the Dutch Tulip Trading Company and Mr. West of the Swedish Malmö Company have arrived!”

Olaf straightened his clothes and nodded. Pikku shouted, “The general will see them!”

“Understood!” Vakili entered with two gentlemen behind him.

“Esteemed General Olaf, I am Simon. We’ve come to discuss business,” Simon said, bowing slightly. A middle-aged man with a freckled face, he spoke in Latin with a smile.

Beside him stood the towering West, nearly Olaf’s height, grinning at him.

Olaf invited them to sit before asking, “What business do you propose?”

“We have cannons, firearms, and ammunition on our ships. Since you’re besieging Copenhagen, we thought you might need weapons—so we’d like to sell them to you.”

Simon pulled a list from his pocket and handed it to Olaf. “Here are the prices and quantities. Are you interested?”

Olaf reviewed it, finding the quantities reasonable and the prices fair. He nodded. “We have gold and copper ingots. If you’re willing, we can trade them for weapons. If that’s not enough, we can supplement with porcelain, malt sugar, and furs.”

Simon and West exchanged glances before agreeing, “Very well.”

Olaf instructed, “Tom and Solrak, go with Mr. Simon and Mr. West to inspect the goods.”

West subtly signaled Simon, who then led Tom and Solrak away. Olaf sensed West had more to say, so he sipped his coffee, waiting for the man to continue.

Chapter 219: The Siege of Copenhagen (10)

As the others left, only five or six people remained in the cabin.

Olaf, Pikku, Tom, Solrak, and Ilugi sat to one side, watching West. Each had a different expression—Pikku studied West with keen interest, trying to discern how he differed from Icelanders or Irishmen. Tom and Solrak were curious about West’s intentions, while Olaf remained outwardly calm, though his sharp gaze made even the seasoned West feel a hint of pressure.

West cleared his throat and stood, stepping forward. His cold demeanor suddenly shifted to one of curiosity as he spoke in stiff Icelandic, “I never expected General Olaf to be so young and handsome. It’s quite surprising to both myself and Chancellor Oxenstierna. I am West, representing the Swedish Chancellor Oxenstierna to meet with you, General.”

Olaf’s eyebrows twitched, his mind stirring. Chancellor Oxenstierna was one of the most capable political figures in Swedish history. After the death of Gustavus Adolphus II, the chancellor had controlled the court for decades, stripping Queen Christina of her power until his own death decades later.

Olaf recalled that during the Swedish-dominated phase of the Thirty Years’ War, after Gustavus Adolphus II fell at Lützen in Germany, Oxenstierna became the supreme leader of the Swedish military and the ruler of the nation. He led Sweden to consecutive victories against the Holy Roman Empire and Denmark, building upon Gustavus Adolphus II’s foundation to further elevate Sweden’s power. This proved that the chancellor was not just a politician but also a formidable military strategist.

A thought struck Olaf—West was Oxenstierna’s man. His visit wasn’t just about selling weapons; there was more to it.

“I have long admired Sweden’s Lion King and Chancellor Oxenstierna,” Olaf said with a reverent expression. “I hear that His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II is now sweeping through Germany, having already subdued four or five states. Truly impressive!”

West’s face lit up with pride. “His Majesty is wise and mighty. He will surely lead the Protestants to victory over the old and corrupt Catholic League…”

“General Olaf,” West continued, “I am here on behalf of the chancellor. Two days ago, our merchant ships passing through The Sound discovered your capture of Kronborg. The chancellor ordered me to contact you yesterday, hoping you would cooperate with us. If you and Iceland are willing to establish a vassal relationship with Sweden, we can provide you with weapons, ships, and even loans.”

West had been boasting about Gustavus Adolphus II for some time before realizing Olaf wasn’t responding. He finally got to the point.

Olaf couldn’t help but clap his hands. “Thank you for the chancellor’s high regard. Your offer is quite tempting! Unfortunately, I am not the leader of Iceland and cannot speak for Prince Haldor.”

West remained composed, persuading calmly, “You are Prince Haldor’s son and highly regarded by him. If you are willing to convey our proposal, I believe our cooperation can be achieved.”

Olaf wasn’t bothered by West’s familiarity with his background. He knew that after Iceland’s independence last year, information about his family would be known to various nations. The only uncertainty for Sweden, Denmark, England, and others was the situation in Vinland. But that wouldn’t remain a secret for long.

After a moment’s thought, Olaf looked at West with a profound gaze and asked, “What does Sweden want from Iceland? I doubt His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II or Chancellor Oxenstierna would do charity for Iceland.”

West smiled. “Young general, your wisdom far exceeds your years. I believe you will become an important figure in Iceland’s future.”

After flattering Olaf, West continued, “The chancellor needs Iceland to become a Swedish vassal. If you and your father object, it can be a nominal vassalage. Our purpose in providing aid is to weaken Denmark and suppress that ambitious but incompetent King Christian IV.”

Olaf’s eyes flickered. “The chancellor is worried that Iceland cannot withstand Denmark’s attacks and blockades, so he wants to support Iceland to drain Denmark’s resources? Hah, His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II is a man of great talent. Is he really worried about Denmark making trouble behind his back?”

West, being Swedish, was used to the directness of Nordic speech. He didn’t hide his thoughts. “His Majesty doesn’t take Christian IV seriously, but he left the chancellor to guard the borders and the cities on both sides of the Baltic Sea. The chancellor knows that Christian IV is jealous of His Majesty and fears Denmark might betray Sweden. That’s why many people have been sent to Copenhagen to gather intelligence. Your arrival with the Icelandic navy has given the chancellor an opportunity to weaken Denmark and seize control of the Baltic Sea.”

West slowly revealed Oxenstierna’s plans before solemnly asking, “Now, General Olaf, do you agree to cooperate with us?”

Olaf appeared deep in thought, but inwardly, he was delighted.

Iceland wasn’t small, but its high latitude and harsh geography only allowed for limited farming in the south and large-scale grazing. Agriculture couldn’t support a large population—fifty to sixty thousand was already impressive. Centuries later, Iceland’s population would only reach around three hundred thousand.

If Iceland relied solely on its own resources, Denmark’s expeditionary force would have crushed it last year, reimposing colonial rule. But Haldor’s strength lay in the resources, population, and wealth of Vinland in North America. Only by integrating with Iceland could they repel Magnus.

However, even with Vinland and Iceland combined, the core population of Icelanders and Europeans was still too small. Developing land and fisheries required a large workforce, even skilled labor. The native Americans couldn’t be relied upon.

Thus, the combined strength of Vinland and Iceland could only barely defend against Denmark, always at risk of being overrun. Otherwise, Olaf wouldn’t have resorted to besieging Copenhagen to relieve the siege of Reykjavik.

Iceland’s independence as the Icelandic Free Republic was still just news in Europe. No kingdom had yet recognized the republic’s existence, making alliances a distant dream.

But now, Sweden had taken the initiative to seek an alliance. The cost for Iceland was merely becoming a nominal vassal of Sweden. With Denmark and Norway’s lands and the vast North Sea separating them, Sweden had no real means to annex Iceland.

Olaf believed that becoming Sweden’s vassal in exchange for support and recognition of Iceland’s independence was a worthwhile deal. Sweden was rising and would remain a major Nordic power for at least half a century. He saw no reason to refuse.

“I agree to cooperate with Sweden,” Olaf said with a smile, rising to shake West’s hand. “However, the specifics must be discussed with my father, Grand Duke Haldor. But I can assure the chancellor that Iceland and Sweden’s cooperation will succeed because we need each other’s existence and help!”

West eagerly took Olaf’s hand, smiling. “You will be proud of your wise decision. The chancellor and I know that Prince Haldor respects and relies on you greatly. He not only entrusted you with the colony of Vinland in the Americas but has even declared in Iceland that you will inherit the title of Grand Duke. With your status equivalent to that of a crown prince and regent, you have full authority to make decisions on Prince Haldor’s behalf.”

Olaf wasn’t swayed by West’s flattery. He was inwardly alarmed by Sweden’s intelligence-gathering capabilities and resolved to strengthen the protection of information regarding Iceland and Vinland. Outwardly, he smiled and asked, “Do you and the chancellor want me to sign a cooperation treaty with Sweden first?”

West laughed. “That is indeed Chancellor Oxenstierna’s intention. He has already informed His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II of the situation. Rest assured, His Majesty will agree. You only need to consider how to request aid from the chancellor.”

Chapter 220: The Battle of Tre Kroner Fort (1)

Olaf was deeply displeased by West’s superficial politeness and underlying condescension, but he knew Sweden was an ally Iceland desperately needed. Sweden’s strength and status were indeed formidable enough to look down on Iceland.

After all, several duchies, counties, and electorates in northern Germany had already pledged allegiance to Gustavus Adolphus II. Compared to these ancient, fertile, and populous German states, Iceland was insignificant.

Olaf understood what he needed to do. This was no time for pride. So, he suppressed his irritation, warmly inviting West to a feast aboard his ship after their handshake, where they drank several cups of strong liquor.

Once the meal was done and West had burped in satisfaction, he took his leave with a smile. “General Olaf, as the Governor-General of Vinland and heir to the Icelandic Free Republic, I believe you can swear allegiance to His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II on your own authority, even without consulting Prince Haldor. Then, the Chancellor can sign a treaty beneficial to Iceland, and we will truly become one family. What do you say?”

Olaf had already grasped Sweden’s intentions during the banquet. He knew that, as the Governor-General of Vinland, he was effectively the second-in-command after his father, Haldor. With the situation so urgent, there was no time to consult his father in Iceland. Olaf accepted West’s proposal.

“I am, of course, willing to submit to the Lion King. But I wonder, what are the Chancellor’s plans? When can I meet him?”

West chuckled at Olaf’s question. “Rest assured, General. The Chancellor is stationed in Szczecin, Pomerania. I will send someone to invite you once I return.”

Olaf knew Pomerania was the northernmost state in Germany, traditionally under the Holy Roman Emperor. But last year, after Gustavus Adolphus II entered the war, Pomerania, like its neighbors, had switched allegiance to Sweden, becoming a Swedish vassal.

It was no surprise that Oxenstierna was in Pomerania. What Olaf didn’t know was that this year, Oxenstierna was not only stationed in Szczecin to oversee the German vassals on the southern shore of the Baltic Sea, but he had also been appointed by the Lion King as the Governor of Brandenburg-Prussia, effectively becoming the power behind the throne of the current disabled leader of Prussia, Duke George William.

Prussia had been a “servant of three masters”—the Holy Roman Empire, Poland, and Sweden—since last year. It wasn’t until the end of the Thirty Years’ War that George William’s successor, the Great Elector William, led Prussia to rise, eventually unifying the fragmented Germany two hundred years later and dominating Europe, crushing the French.

Gustavus Adolphus II had already advanced south into Bavaria, negotiating with Austria to replace the Holy Roman Empire’s influence in Germany.

To secure his rear, Gustavus Adolphus II had stationed Chancellor Oxenstierna in Szczecin, the crossing between Sweden and Germany, fearing a Danish betrayal.

After seeing West off, Olaf ordered the fleet to set sail and attack the last stronghold before Copenhagen—Tre Kroner Fort.

If they could capture this small, loop-shaped island fortress at the harbor’s entrance, nothing would stand between them and Copenhagen.

Olaf knew that if Christian IV hadn’t already sent ships to recall Magnus, attacking Tre Kroner Fort would surely provoke him.

After days of continuous assaults on Kronborg and Kalvebod Fort, the fleet had expended a large amount of cannonballs and gunpowder. Olaf had worried that even if they had enough to take Tre Kroner Fort, they wouldn’t have enough left to bombard Copenhagen.

But now, with copper bars, gold ingots, and goods, they had obtained a large supply of munitions from the Swedes and Dutch. Olaf felt they could continue their lavish assault.

The fleet soon arrived at Copenhagen’s harbor. Standing at the bow, Olaf could see the strait between the two islands, like a great river, and the prosperous and beautiful city of Copenhagen on the northern shore.

Olaf thought Copenhagen was a beautiful city. Seeing the three- and four-story buildings lining the streets and the magnificent churches, he believed Copenhagen’s wealth currently surpassed London, second only to Amsterdam.

“What a wonderful place. It would be a shame not to fire a few cannons at it!” Olaf grinned, then ordered the fleet to attack Tre Kroner Fort in succession.

Tre Kroner Fort’s structure and position differed from Kalvebod and Kronborg. As soon as the fleet approached, several cannons roared from the island fortress, and several cannonballs flew out, striking the deck and side of a ship, causing the massive galleon to sway violently, terrifying the sailors and soldiers aboard.

“Scatter! Scatter quickly!”

Olaf, watching from afar, felt a sinking feeling and immediately ordered the fleet to disperse. He knew Tre Kroner Fort must have thirty-six-pound or heavier cannons, even mortars. Such cannons were too large for most ships to mount due to recoil, but their range and power were immense.

The eighteen warships quickly fanned out and retreated several hundred feet.

Olaf realized that engaging in a direct artillery duel with the heavily armed island fortress with just a few ships was suicidal. After some thought, he summoned the six legion commanders for a meeting.

After half a day of discussion, they decided to unload the cannons from the eighteen large ships onto cog ships, mounting four cannons on each. Taking advantage of the cog ships’ smaller size and greater maneuverability, they would approach Tre Kroner Fort.

Time passed as they prepared. Olaf personally inspected the galleon that had been hit by cannon fire, ordering the ship’s craftsmen to repair it with the tools and timber they carried.

By the next afternoon, the cannons from the eighteen large ships had been unloaded and distributed.

Over two hundred light and medium cannons were mounted on more than forty cog ships. After a few test shots, Olaf, Tom, Pikku, and the others confirmed everything was in order. The forty-plus cog ships formed three long lines, spaced a nautical mile apart, and advanced toward Tre Kroner Fort.

With more targets but smaller ones, the fortress’s cannons were less effective. A volley from the dozens of heavy cannons on the island only grazed one cog ship, blasting a large hole in its stern. The remaining ships approached Tre Kroner Fort without further incident.

In this era, firearms were slow, and cannons were even slower.

From loading ammunition and firing to cooling and cleaning the barrel before reloading, a single cannon cycle took over five minutes.

Even with continuous use and cooling with water, the interval would gradually increase. Most cannons were made of bronze or steel. Frequent use caused slight deformation in bronze cannons, and with the steel-making technology of the time, frequent cooling with water risked the cannon exploding.

After evading a volley from Tre Kroner Fort’s heavy cannons, the cog ships closed in. Their cannons roared, and iron cannonballs whistled through the air, striking the island’s fortifications. Though the damage wasn’t immediately visible, all the Vinland warriors and sailors cheered.

Everyone understood that the fleet’s cannons hitting Tre Kroner Fort for the first time marked the beginning of Vinland’s effective counterattack.

Chapter 221: The Battle of Tre Kroner Fort (2)

Boom…

Two fleets of cog ships sailed in from Copenhagen’s harbor entrance, approaching Tre Kroner Fort before turning their hulls to fire cannons from one side. During the intermittent cannon fire from the fort, four warships had already completed their mission and turned back toward the northern Baltic Sea.

Though the accuracy of the cannons was as unreliable as firearms, sheer numbers ensured that seven or eight cannonballs struck Tre Kroner Fort.

After a brief pause, the fort’s second volley suddenly erupted again. This time, the cannons had been fine-tuned, and their accuracy improved significantly. Dozens of iron balls—half of them—landed in the sea, while the rest struck the cog ships.

Some cog ships had gaping holes blasted into their bows, but they remained operational. Others had their hulls shattered, allowing seawater to rush in. Clearly, they wouldn’t last much longer before sinking.

European shipbuilding at this time had yet to discover the benefits of watertight compartments, so any significant damage to the hull would lead to severe leaks and eventual sinking. Olaf watched the distant damaged ships through his telescope, frowning. He recalled that the great nations of the Far East, such as Fujian and Guangdong, had already mastered the technology of watertight compartments. It seemed he would have to ask Kuiyi to help lure over a few shipwrights in the future.

Tre Kroner Fort wasn’t large, but its defenses were sturdy, and it was armed with heavy cannons. To take this tough nut, they could only rely on the sheer number of cog ships and their cannons.

Olaf had long anticipated the damage and even the loss of some cog ships, but now was not the time to dwell on it. He ordered Polly and Brun to quickly assist the damaged ships to shore. Those that could be repaired should be fixed, while those beyond repair should have their personnel and supplies transferred as quickly as possible.

The two fleets of cog ships were undeterred by the withdrawal of a few damaged vessels. The cog ships continued to approach Tre Kroner Fort one after another, circling to allow their cannons on both sides to aim and fire at the island fortress.

…

Behind Tre Kroner Fort lay the entrance to Copenhagen’s harbor. The sound of cannon fire could be heard several miles away, even at the docks and the city’s squares.

The citizens of Denmark barely ventured onto the streets. Most stayed at home, praying to God—praying for General Magnus to return soon, praying for Tre Kroner Fort to repel the cruel Icelandic pirates.

However, the area in front of King Christian IV’s palace was bustling. Since yesterday, His Majesty had called upon the citizens to join the militia, led by the royal constabulary, to defend against the invading Icelandic pirates and protect their homeland.

The people of Copenhagen knew well the suffering inflicted by the Germans on the Jutland Peninsula. They had once thought the war was far from Copenhagen, but the Icelandic pirates had shown them that war and disaster could strike at any moment.

Many male citizens of Copenhagen gathered friends and headed to the palace garden gates, congregating on the green lawns before joining the militia organized by the royal constabulary.

Time was of the essence, and the militia had no time for training. However, to prevent the Icelandic pirates from entering the city and harming the people, Christian IV opened the armories, allowing the royal constabulary to distribute swords, armor, and firearms to the militia leaders composed of local gentry.

Christian IV was making final preparations. If Tre Kroner Fort fell to the Icelanders and their forces entered Copenhagen, he could only hope that the city’s citizens would rise up at his call to fight the Icelanders. Then, his three thousand royal constables and the nearly two thousand naval forces he had gathered could unleash their full combat potential to repel the invaders.

Time passed minute by minute, and the distant cannon fire seemed like a signal, rising and falling, making the hearts of Copenhagen’s citizens race. They had no appetite for lunch.

The cannon fire was like a death knell, relentlessly tormenting the Danish psyche. The timid couldn’t help but let their imaginations run wild. Many merchants secretly dug pits in their courtyards to hide their gold and silver.

The noble lords, however, summoned their ruthless servants and guards from their country estates to their city villas. Everyone was fully armed, their faces pale with anxiety as they waited in the gardens for the final judgment.

The cannon fire had been ringing out all day. Only in the evening did the people of Copenhagen manage to fall into a restless sleep. But by the next morning, the cannon fire from the sea jolted them awake again.

Though Tre Kroner Fort’s cannons were heavy, their numbers were less than a tenth of Vinland’s navy. After hours of exchange, like Kalvebod Fort, Tre Kroner Fort’s cannons began to misfire and explode.

Seeing the number of cannonballs fired from Tre Kroner Fort gradually decrease, the Vinland soldiers grew excited. Olaf couldn’t help but grin.

After waiting another two hours, only half of the cog ships remained intact, but the distant Tre Kroner Fort had nearly been reduced to ruins.

The original square-shaped fortress had half of its walls collapsed, and the number of cannons firing at the Vinland ships had dwindled to less than ten.

As the number of cannonballs fired from Tre Kroner Fort suddenly dropped from nine to six, Olaf sensed the opportunity had arrived.

“All ships, close in on Tre Kroner Fort! The first to land and slay the enemy shall be elevated to Viking status, rewarded with ten marks of gold, and twenty female slaves!”

Olaf had always believed in his strong money-making abilities, so he was generous with his rewards. His orders were quickly relayed by loud-voiced soldiers to the more than twenty ships bombarding Tre Kroner Fort.

The Vinland soldiers, long tired of being cooped up on ships exchanging cannon fire with the Danes, excitedly brandished their weapons. Though they had shed the European civilization of Iceland, they still retained some primitive cultural traits. Shouting and brandishing weapons were characteristic of the Iroquois in battle.

Soon, twenty ships approached Tre Kroner Fort. From the half-collapsed fortress, a few cannonballs flew out, smashing the bows of two cog ships. Simultaneously, bullets poured from the firing holes, instantly cutting down dozens of native soldiers standing ready on the decks.

The Vinland army couldn’t accept casualties before even engaging in battle. They roared, and as the ships neared the island, they eagerly leaped into the sea, swimming ashore before charging toward the fortress with weapons raised.

The cannons on the ships were instantly lit, and cannonballs rained down from above, striking the fortress at close range, instantly silencing the gunfire from within.

After losing several dozen men, the Vinland native soldiers stormed into the fortress through the collapsed breach. A brutal melee erupted inside.

The several hundred Danish soldiers within the fortress were resilient, but they were no match for the endless stream of Vinland warriors.

In less than half an hour, a bloodied Vinland officer emerged from the fortress breach, climbing the ruins and waving his long knife as he shouted, “The Danes have been slaughtered! We are victorious! We are victorious! Long live General Olaf! Glory to the Vinland army! Long live General Olaf! Glory to the Vinland army!”

From the ruins of Tre Kroner Fort came the rough Icelandic cheers, spreading gradually to the fleet. Soon, Olaf heard the loud voices of the Vinland army’s soldiers, feeling the joy overflowing in their cheers.

Olaf laughed heartily, lowering his telescope, and asked Tom and Pikku beside him, “Who is that officer cheering on Tre Kroner Fort?”

Tom and Pikku looked through their telescopes and shook their heads. Finally, Solrak said, “His name is Aruna, an Iroquois. He is very brave and skilled in battle. I appointed him as a battalion commander. It seems he led the men to capture Tre Kroner Fort.”

Olaf nodded and said, “Good. Later, Solrak, you confirm it personally. The soldiers who captured Tre Kroner Fort will be richly rewarded!”

Chapter 222: Bombardment of Copenhagen (1)

The fall of Tre Kroner Fort sent waves of exhilaration through the entire Vinland expeditionary force.

Cheers and praises for Olaf and Haldor in various languages echoed across the warships, coalescing into a single resounding cry: “Long live the great and merciful Heavenly God!”

For the Vinland slave soldiers, Tre Kroner Fort was merely an impregnable stronghold. But for the legion commanders and high-ranking officers, its capture meant that the Danish capital, Copenhagen, now lay exposed—its defenses stripped away, leaving the city vulnerable to direct assault.

The thought of bombarding Copenhagen and besieging Rosenborg Palace was enough to stir their blood.

Pikku had been attending to Olaf’s needs, with Tom also by his side. The three of them were in the cabin, poring over a map to identify the next weak point in Copenhagen’s defenses, when the other four legion commanders suddenly entered together.

“General! We can attack Copenhagen now!”

“Our ships can enter the Danish straits and bombard the docks. It’s time to teach the Danes a painful lesson!”

The legion commanders were as eager as polar bears about to feast on a seal, each vying to present their tactical plans.

Olaf smiled and nodded, inviting them to gather around the crude hand-drawn map. Pointing to the vast urban area of Copenhagen and Rosenborg Palace, five miles north of the harbor, he said, “Copenhagen is the largest city in Denmark, even in all of Scandinavia, with nearly three hundred thousand inhabitants. Christian IV won’t sit idly by. He’s consolidated his forces, using Kalvebod Fort and Tre Kroner Fort to slow our advance, likely deploying the rest of his troops within the city. He might even have mobilized citizens and nobles to form a militia. After several major battles, our own forces have suffered heavy losses. Tom, Solrak, if I recall correctly, we only have a little over ten thousand able-bodied warriors left, don’t we?”

Tom and Solrak exchanged a few quiet words before replying, “As of now, we’ve lost over four hundred warriors in battle, with nearly seven hundred wounded. We have eleven thousand men still fit for combat.”

Olaf nodded. “With hundreds of thousands in Copenhagen, they could easily muster one or two militia regiments on short notice. Combined with the Danish forces pulled back from the forts, our eleven thousand would stand no chance of breaking into the city. Spreading out would be even worse—like drops of water vanishing into a river. Forget about attacking Rosenborg Palace; blockading the docks and bombarding Copenhagen is still an option.”

As Olaf laid out the balance of power, the legion commanders instantly sobered up.

This was an era unlike later times, when professional armies dominated the battlefield. The concept of a standing army had only just been established by Gustavus Adolphus II. The quality of warriors across European battlefields varied wildly, and few forces could completely overpower militia units.

The six Vinland legions were not of particularly high quality. Relying on them to storm Copenhagen would likely drown them in a sea of civilians.

Olaf dared not take the risk. He continued discussing their strategic objective: to force Magnus to retreat while doing everything possible to weaken Denmark.

“Maintaining our threat against Copenhagen is our top priority. Denmark lacks the ships to challenge us, so they can only passively defend in the shadows. We must not reveal our true strength or combat capabilities. Starting today, our main goal is to blockade Copenhagen’s harbor while sending the remaining ships to patrol the coast, bombarding all buildings along the shoreline and implementing a scorched-earth policy in the surrounding areas.”

Olaf had long since lost the mercy he had possessed years ago. Though he was driven by the urgent need to resolve the crisis in Iceland, the deeper reason was his growing assimilation into this era.

The six legion commanders rubbed their hands together in anticipation before dispersing to carry out their orders. Soon, the Vinland navy set sail for Copenhagen’s harbor.

After approaching Tre Kroner Fort, Olaf ordered Ilugi and Pikku to leave five hundred men each, along with supplies and cannons, to repair the fortress and secure the rear for the Vinland army.

Once the soldiers on the island began their clanging work, Olaf led the fleet south into the strait between Copenhagen and Amager Island.

At first, both shores were nothing but trees and land, devoid of any signs of human habitation. After a few minutes, low buildings became visible on the western shore—clearly the fishing villages on the outskirts of Copenhagen. The shore of Amager Island also had a few villages, but they were sparse and scattered, nothing like the bustling population on the western shore.

Olaf pointed to both shores and said, “Have Pikku send men to raid the villages on both sides. Kill all the able-bodied men, but leave the elderly, women, and children. Take all the grain, silver, furs, fabrics, and livestock back!”

Pikku quickly received the order and dispatched several hundred of his most capable men, who set off in two cog ships.

Soon, the two ships reached the eastern and western shores, and the men transformed into Icelandic pirates, descending upon the villages.

As wails of despair rose from the fishing villages on both shores, Olaf’s fleet was already nearing Copenhagen’s docks.

Olaf rubbed a gold coin between his thumb, index, and middle fingers, feeling its uneven texture. He muttered to himself, “I’m no butcher or executioner. I’m merely building a greater Nordic prosperity… Hahaha…”

With a cold laugh, Olaf dismissed the tragic fate of the Danish fishermen from his mind and fixed his gaze on the massive harbor ahead.

Copenhagen’s harbor was the largest in Scandinavia. In peacetime, merchant ships from various nations came and went constantly, and the docks were filled with over a hundred ships of varying sizes. But now, it was eerily quiet.

Olaf counted carefully. Aside from over twenty small merchant ships and five large vessels, there were only three warships. The place looked desolate.

The three warships were positioned across the water, their sides revealing a dozen dark cannon mouths. Flanking them were five large ships, seemingly also armed with cannons. The twenty-odd small ships were anchored in front of the larger ones, apparently serving as a defensive barrier.

“This is all the defense Christian IV has mustered at the docks,” Olaf sneered. “We’ve already moved our cannons back onto the large ships. With eighteen warships firing in unison, these pathetic things won’t last half an hour!”

As Olaf predicted, the eighteen warships soon entered firing range and exchanged volleys with the eight Danish ships at the docks.

After several dozen minutes, two of Vinland’s eighteen warships had damaged sails and hulls, with seawater seeping in.

But the Danish ships were all battered, listing heavily and on the verge of sinking. The shore was littered with Danish sailors who had jumped overboard, struggling to swim ashore.

“Tell Tom to send men to tow the two damaged warships to the southern docks of Amager Island. While they’re at it, they should occupy the place and find people to help repair the ships!”

Olaf turned to look at the southern docks opposite Copenhagen’s harbor, pointing to the equally quiet but undefended port.

The Inuit guards beside Olaf quickly relayed the orders. The two galleons dispatched two cog ships to seize the southern harbor and begin towing the severely damaged vessels.

By now, the sky was growing dark. Olaf glanced at the western horizon and saw that the sun was halfway below the sea. He knew today’s battle was over.

After sinking Denmark’s remaining warships, Copenhagen’s docks fell silent. Olaf even sent two warships to locate several shipyards south of the docks based on the maps. With a barrage of cannon fire at dusk, they reduced the shipyards to ruins, and the Danish warships under construction vanished into the night.

Feeling that Denmark had completely lost its naval combat capability, Olaf finally gave the order for the fleet to have a hearty meal and take shifts to rest.

Around midnight, just as Olaf had gone to bed, he heard footsteps outside his door.

“General!” the guard said in a low voice. “Mr. West from Sweden has arrived. Also, the ships sent to raid both shores have returned.”

Olaf suddenly sat up from his bed, rubbing his eyes. “West is already here? How did the raiding go?”

The young guard forced a smile. “They seized countless grain, countless fabrics, countless silver, countless cattle and livestock…”

Olaf frowned. He knew his Inuit guards spoke decent Icelandic, but their vocabulary was still somewhat limited. The guard probably meant “a lot” but ended up saying “countless.”

“Bring West to the cabin. I’ll be right there,” Olaf said, putting on his clothes. “And call Pikku.”

The guard quickly left. Olaf put on his boots, adjusted his collar, and stepped out of the room, ready to meet West at the bow’s pilot cabin.

Chapter 223: Bombardment of Copenhagen (2)

Accompanied by two burly Inuit guards, Olaf stepped into the cabin. No sooner had he sat down than Pikku hurried in, his eyes still crusted with sleep.

“Master, what do you need?” Pikku asked anxiously as he approached.

“Have the ships raiding the northern and southern shores returned? Oukh can’t give a clear account of the spoils. Since both ships are yours, tell me—how did the battle go, and what did we gain?” Olaf first motioned for Pikku to tidy himself up before asking with a smile.

A flash of excitement crossed Pikku’s face, and he grinned. “They’re back. You were asleep, so I thought I’d wait until morning to report. Those Danish fishermen are really well-off! I counted it myself—we took hundreds of marks in gold and silver, over a thousand feet of cloth, hundreds of cattle and sheep, and more than two hundred horses.”

Olaf nodded. “Set aside a portion of the gold and silver for the soldiers on those two ships—one-fifth of the total. Then give the order: slaughter all the sheep for food, keep the cattle for now, and select the best horses to keep for riding.”

Pikku nodded in agreement. After years as master and servant, they understood each other well. Olaf didn’t ask how many Danes had been killed, and Pikku didn’t volunteer the information.

Though Pikku didn’t say it, he didn’t care much about the thousand or so Danes who had died. But he knew that if he told his master, the kind-hearted man would lose sleep over it for weeks.

“West is here again,” Olaf said, rubbing his temples. “Probably with news about the Iceland-Sweden cooperation. Sit beside me and wait.”

Pikku took a seat next to Olaf. After a moment, the guard Oukh announced from outside, “Master, General! Mr. West has arrived.”

“Show him in,” Pikku said before Olaf could respond.

Soon, Oukh led the towering West into the cabin. West was dressed in a Swedish military uniform. He removed his hat and bowed before shaking Olaf’s hand. Only after sitting down did he let out a long breath. “I never expected that in less than two days, you would already be attacking Copenhagen. Christian IV must be losing sleep over this.”

As he spoke, West winked mockingly. Olaf didn’t join in the ridicule. Both men knew that for Iceland to bombard Copenhagen was already pushing boundaries. If they truly wanted to capture or kill Christian IV, not only would their strength be insufficient, but even if they were strong enough, the other European nations wouldn’t stand for it.

The Danish royal bloodline was noble, and through a tangled web of marriages, it was connected to several other royal families. While the European powers might watch with cold amusement as Christian IV suffered humiliation, if a commoner like Haldor tried to take his place, they would unite to crush Iceland.

“Mr. West, you didn’t rush here just to watch Denmark’s downfall, did you?” Olaf, sleep-deprived and in no mood for small talk, cut straight to the point.

West yawned. “I met with the Chancellor last night and came straight back. Lord Oxenstierna has already discussed and agreed with His Majesty via correspondence. The Chancellor has asked me to invite you, General, to represent Iceland in Szczecin to meet with him and sign a treaty making Iceland a Swedish vassal state. Once the treaty is signed, we can provide you with substantial support.”

Olaf had anticipated this outcome. He was generally in favor of Iceland becoming a Swedish vassal and believed his father, Haldor, would approve. After all, for Iceland’s current population, aligning with Sweden was a tremendous opportunity.

In Europe, there were distinctions between vassal states and tributary states. Sweden had initially wanted Iceland to become a vassal, but Olaf had insisted on a tributary relationship. West’s arrival confirmed that Sweden had agreed.

A vassal state was like Norway under Denmark—nominally a country but completely controlled in diplomacy, military, economy, and personnel.

A tributary state had more autonomy. Though nominally under a suzerain, it retained sovereignty, much like the electorates and duchies in the Holy Roman Empire. Some small nations even managed to be tributaries to two or three major powers simultaneously.

By becoming a tributary, Iceland could secure the greatest legal freedom. Even if Sweden wanted to interfere, it could only appoint a nominal governor—a figurehead “emperor above the emperor.”

“Please ask Mr. West to rest. Tomorrow morning, we’ll go to Szczecin together to meet the Chancellor,” Olaf said after a moment’s thought.

After West left, Pikku, who had been holding back, finally blurted out, “Master, isn’t Iceland far from the European continent? Why not just rule Vinland and Greenland as kings and live freely? Why become subjects of Sweden?”

Olaf understood Pikku’s sentiment. If they avoided Europe and lived in isolation, they could indeed rule Vinland as kings and develop quietly.

But Vinland’s territory was expanding, while the core population of Icelanders and whites was pitifully small. Relying solely on natural growth, it would take a century or two to increase the population sufficiently. They might even end up like the Latin countries of later generations, becoming mixed-race nations, which would create a sense of alienation from Europe.

During Europe’s age of great exploration and development, if Vinland remained isolated, within a generation or two, cultural and demographic changes would leave them unable to keep up with Europe’s first industrial revolution. The ultimate fate might even be colonization by European powers.

Olaf didn’t want to leave his descendants a degenerate Vinland, nor did he want his generation to be cut off from the prosperity of Europe. Living as a king among Indian natives couldn’t compare to the quality of life of a European noble.

Olaf considered explaining using Prussia as an example—a Swedish tributary that would later grow into the powerful nation of Germany. But he changed his approach. “Pikku, you don’t understand. Right now, in the Far East, the most powerful Ming Dynasty has a tributary in the northeast called the Jianzhou Guard. No, it’s more like a vassal. But in a century or two, with the Ming’s help, it grew rapidly and broke away, becoming the Later Jin, which is now constantly attacking the Ming, seemingly trying to replace it.”

Pikku listened in confusion. Olaf shook his head and continued, “By becoming a Swedish tributary, we’re only nominally submitting to Sweden. In reality, we remain an independent nation managing our own affairs. Look at Prussia in the German lands—nominally a tributary to both Poland and the Holy Roman Empire, and now also to Sweden, yet they enjoy high autonomy.

Iceland is far from Sweden, separated by Denmark, Norway, and two thousand nautical miles. Even if Sweden wants to control us, as long as they haven’t annexed Denmark, we can maintain our actual independence.

By submitting to Sweden, our conflict with Denmark becomes Sweden’s conflict with Denmark. We can focus on developing ourselves and even receive Sweden’s support. Isn’t that good for Iceland?”

Pikku sat in silence for a long time before nodding vaguely. “So we’re only nominally subjects of Sweden. Then, if we develop well, can we follow the example of the Later Jin under the Ming and rebel as Swedish subjects, taking Stockholm to become the new rulers of Sweden?”

Olaf looked at Pikku in surprise. It was the first time he had seen such insight from him.

“If we become strong enough, we could consider it. But Europe is different from the Far East. If we try to replace them and don’t handle relations with other nations well, we might end up facing an anti-Iceland alliance…”

Chapter 224: Fortunate Iceland

After West left, Olaf and Pikku chatted for a while longer before retiring to their rooms for the night.

The next morning, Olaf invited West to join him for breakfast—grilled lamb chops and pan-fried beef steaks.

Once breakfast was finished, West returned to his ship to make preparations, while Olaf summoned the six legion commanders for a meeting to give them final instructions before his departure.

The commanders were already aware of West’s invitation for Olaf to personally travel to Szczecin to sign an alliance with the Swedish Prime Minister. Initially, they had been puzzled, but before Olaf could explain, Pikku shared the thoughts he had pondered the night before.

After much discussion, they all accepted the decision for Iceland to become a tributary state of Sweden.

“While I’m away, command of the six legions will be entrusted to our red-haired legion commander, Lixstrom. Do not alter my orders—continue the blockade of Copenhagen and raid both the northern and southern shores. Consume whatever wealth and livestock you can, but spare the horses. They are the foundation of our future cavalry…”

Among the six commanders, Polly and Brun were the most capable, but as the supreme commander, Olaf prioritized loyalty and obedience. Pikku was the most reliable in this regard, but since he was not white, the next best choice to take over the Vinland expeditionary force was Tom.

Tom was not particularly clever, but he nodded and said, “Olaf, rest assured. I guarantee everything will be the same when you return.”

Olaf nodded. “I estimate the round trip will take two days. It’s been a week since we attacked Kronborg and over five days since we assaulted Kalvebod Fort. I suspect Magnus has already received the news. By the time I return, we can withdraw!”

After dismissing the six commanders, Olaf ordered the signalman to communicate with West’s ship. The two vessels then set sail from the harbor outside Copenhagen toward the Baltic Sea.

Olaf did not know whether Christian IV had already sent ships to recall Magnus, but he was not worried that Magnus would remain unaware or fail to come.

Dutch merchant ships traversing the Sound had never feared war—they would continue trading in Iceland and undoubtedly carry the news there. Even without Christian IV’s orders, Magnus, as the king’s son-in-law and confidant, would surely rush back upon learning of the attack on Copenhagen.

Olaf’s guess was accurate. As he accompanied West toward Szczecin on the southern shore of the Baltic Sea, Magnus, who had been battling in the East District of Reykjavik for a week, suddenly received a personal letter from Christian IV. The letter stated that Icelandic pirates had captured Kronborg and were now attacking Copenhagen. The king ordered him to immediately lead the army back to Denmark to crush the Icelandic pirates.

Magnus was stunned. Glancing at the East District, which was gradually falling under his control, and watching the Icelandic soldiers fleeing toward the central city of Reykjavik, he sighed deeply, knowing the opportunity to seize Reykjavik was lost.

“General, what’s wrong? Give the order to pursue!”

Kormakur, the military advisor of the Danish expeditionary force, saw the general’s face darken after reading the king’s letter, ignoring the recent victory over the Icelandic defenders. He hurriedly asked.

Magnus gave a bitter smile and handed the letter to Kormakur. “We must return to Denmark at once.”

“What?!”

Kormakur exclaimed in shock. After reading the letter, he clenched his fists and cried out, “Damn it! We were so close to retaking Iceland! Just give us three days—no, two days—and we would have succeeded!”

“How could the Icelanders still have ships and troops to attack Copenhagen? This is unbelievable!” Kormakur sighed in disbelief.

Magnus shook his head. “Perhaps it’s their pirate forces from America, or maybe they’ve allied with other nations. We must leave Iceland immediately. Kormakur, gather everyone for withdrawal!”

The order to retreat quickly reached the Danish soldiers. Regardless of their acceptance, they hastily ceased their pursuit of the Icelandic soldiers and the pillaging in the East District. They swiftly formed into a square formation and retreated toward the coastal harbor where they had landed.

Inside the Duke’s Manor, Haldor, with his mouth full of blisters, along with Ulf, Hudik, Hoskuld, and others, were solemnly issuing orders for the city’s citizens to fight to the death against the Danish invaders, preparing for a final battle in the Central District.

But just as the orders were being relayed from the manor, a frantic voice suddenly rang out from outside the door: “Prince Haldor! The Danes are retreating!”

“What!”

“What!”

…

The entire room erupted in astonished exclamations. Haldor furrowed his brow and said, “Come in. What’s happening?”

A tall and burly Icelandic soldier entered. He was the former village chief and tax collector of Will Village, Wilik, and the father of Big-Head Olin. Now, father and son had become leaders of the Viking raid in Big Port. During this battle, Wilik served as the liaison between the Central District and the East District. After discovering the Danish soldiers retreating from the East District, Kadir and Heiner had quickly sent someone to follow them while instructing Wilik to inform Haldor.

When Wilik relayed the news that the Danish army had abandoned their gains and fully retreated, the room fell into silence.

Haldor and Hudik exchanged bewildered glances, utterly confused.

“This… what’s going on?”

Hudik narrowed his eyes and said, “No matter the reason, the Danes retreating is good news. We should immediately redeploy all forces from the Central District to the East District to prevent a Danish counterattack!”

“Right!”

…

The atmosphere in the room instantly livened as everyone discussed how to continue their defenses. Heiner and Kadir entered, laughing heartily.

Heiner said, “No need to send troops. The Danes have already boarded their ships at the shore and left. It seems they’re returning to Denmark.”

“Oh?” Haldor breathed a sigh of relief but was even more puzzled. “What are the Danes up to? Could it be that the German army defeated Sweden and is now attacking Denmark?”

“That’s unknown, but I’m sure something has happened in Europe. We should send Gandis to Denmark to investigate. We should also dispatch ships to the Faroe Islands and England to see what’s happening. Maybe we can get answers from Dutch merchant ships,” Heiner suggested after some thought.

Haldor had always regarded Heiner as his foremost strategist and immediately agreed, sending someone to summon Gandis.

Post-war Reykjavik had suffered heavy losses, with the five Viking legions losing thousands of soldiers, severely weakening their strength. However, the outcome was ultimately favorable.

The Duke’s Manor and the council proclaimed to the citizens that under the leadership of the Grand Duke, the Viking soldiers had fought valiantly and repelled the Danish invaders, securing Iceland’s freedom once more.

Citizens who had hidden in their homes for half a month to avoid the war emerged onto the streets upon hearing the Viking soldiers’ voices. Overjoyed, they embraced the defenders of their homeland, bringing them wine and food. Many citizens, led by council members, brought slaughtered cattle and sheep to the Duke’s Manor, expressing their devotion to their ruler.

After returning home from the manor, Gandis quickly dispatched ships to Denmark. Five Viking warships also departed from Iceland. As Iceland’s rulers sought to understand the situation, the five Viking legions began helping the citizens rebuild their homes.

To motivate the citizens, Haldor not only provided generous compensation to families affected by the war but also rewarded those who had suffered property losses.

Prince Haldor’s prestige soared once again. As Ulf walked the streets, he often heard citizens shouting, “Long live Prince Haldor!” This made him think that perhaps he could persuade his father to take further action.

Chapter 225: The Szczecin Alliance (1)

The Baltic Sea was calm, its waters shimmering under the gentle breeze.

Two large ships, flying the flags of Sweden and the cross, sailed south from the mouth of the Peenestrom River in the Pomeranian Duchy. From Peenemünde to Wolgast, and then to the fortified Kaninburg guarding the estuary, the Swedish warships signaled with their flags, and the two vessels stationed at Kaninburg promptly cleared the way.

The two ships smoothly entered the Szczecin Lagoon, navigating eastward through the waterways.

Upon entering Szczecin Bay, they sailed into the Oder River, which originated in Poland and flowed through northern Poland and Germany before emptying into the lagoon at Szczecin, merging with the Baltic Sea.

By the time the two ships docked at Szczecin Harbor, it was already nine o’clock in the evening.

Szczecin was the capital of the Pomeranian Duchy, a hub of military, political, and economic activity. Towering embankments and watchtowers lined the shore, marking it as an ancient city steeped in history.

The night enveloped Szczecin in darkness, but the grand, ancient ducal castle on the western bank of the Oder River glowed faintly in the distance.

West, accompanied by Olaf and his guards, took a small boat from the docks to the western bank of Szczecin, then rode in a carriage to the ducal castle.

“Duke Bogislaw XIV resides in this castle. He is now a subject of His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II, so the Chancellor also stays here,” West said, pointing to the towering fortress before them.

Olaf gazed at the massive castle in the night and remarked, “This castle is enormous, much larger than the Duke’s Manor in Iceland.”

West explained, “This castle has over five hundred years of history. Each generation of dukes has expanded and renovated it, making it nearly as grand as the royal palace in Copenhagen.”

As they entered the castle gates, the guards were from the duchy, but upon seeing the Swedish soldiers behind West, they waved them through without a single question.

Olaf marveled inwardly at the power of Gustavus Adolphus II and Sweden. Under West’s guidance, they arrived at a tall building in the northwest corner of the castle.

“Lord Olaf, it’s quite late tonight. Please rest here, and I will arrange for you to meet the Chancellor first thing in the morning,” West said, summoning an elderly servant from the castle. He spoke in Swedish, “Have him arrange a room for you. If you have any needs, just let him know.”

After giving the servant a few more solemn instructions, West smiled warmly and bid Olaf farewell.

Olaf understood that meeting the Chancellor required preparation, so he followed the old servant away.

The servant quickly led Olaf to a room on the second floor and said in Swedish, “Please rest here, sir. Your servants and guards can stay in the adjacent rooms.”

Icelandic was one of the oldest Nordic languages, and the languages of Norway, Denmark, and even Sweden were similar, though Norwegian and Danish were closer, while Swedish was more distinct.

Olaf only caught a few words, so he asked in Danish, “I am Icelandic. What did you just say?”

The old servant hurriedly bowed and replied in the common Nordic language, Danish, “Honored guest, please enter the room to rest. This is the Rose Hall, where the duke entertains distinguished guests. You may dine first, and then I will arrange for a maid to prepare your bed and assist you in retiring for the night. Your servants may also rest in the rooms around the Rose Hall.”

Olaf nodded. “Very well.” He then pushed open the door and entered the grand hall.

Luxury was a hallmark of European palaces, and the opulence of the ducal castle was breathtaking.

The great hall of the Rose Hall was already lit with fragrant candles, illuminating the space as bright as day.

The walls were adorned with massive oil paintings, ivory carvings, and displays of porcelain and lacquerware from the East. Olaf roughly estimated that the value of the items in the hall alone exceeded one thousand gold marks.

In the center of the hall stood a long dining table draped in embroidered silk, set with gold and silver tableware, several bottles of wine, and dozens of covered silver platters. Olaf knew these must be the delicacies prepared by the ducal castle to welcome him.

Olaf invited his guards, including his captain, Oukh, to join him for the meal. As they sat at the long table and lifted the lids, they saw roasted pork, smoked meat, fried fish, bacon, ham, and various other meats, along with pastries, sweets, and a plate of masterwort.

Olaf had Oukh pour everyone a glass of wine. After taking a sip, he picked up his knife and fork and began to eat heartily.

Only after seeing their lord begin did the twenty-odd guards reach for the food, devouring it ravenously while gulping down wine.

By the time everyone had eaten and drunk their fill, the table was a mess. During the meal, four young and beautiful maids entered—all professionally trained. The three older ones busied themselves with cleaning up, while the youngest and prettiest approached Olaf and softly said in Danish, “Honored sir, allow me to escort you to your guest room.”

Olaf nodded and stood up, instructing as he walked, “Oukh, take everyone to rest as well. We have important matters to attend to tomorrow.”

“Yes, my lord!” the others quickly replied.

Moments later, Olaf, led by the maid, entered a candlelit room fragrant with the scent of flowers. The girl smiled and said, “Please have a seat, sir. I will fetch water for you to wash your hands and feet.”

The cold climate of the Nordic regions meant that the Black Death had ravaged Eastern and Western Europe far more severely than the North. Unlike the French, who were terrified into neglecting hygiene, the Nordic people had always been diligent about cleanliness.

The Pomeranian Duchy, located near the Baltic Sea and deeply influenced by Sweden, had hygiene habits that pleased Olaf.

After a moment, the girl returned with a wooden basin filled with hot water. She first dampened a silk handkerchief and wiped Olaf’s face and hands. Then, kneeling on the floor, she extended her fair, delicate hands to remove his boots and socks, placing his feet into the basin.

“Sir, is the water temperature to your liking?”

Olaf nodded, and the girl’s small hands began to gently massage his feet in the water.

After about ten minutes, as the water cooled, the girl carefully dried Olaf’s feet with the silk handkerchief, then stood up, lifting the basin. She softly said, “Please wait a moment, sir. I will go prepare for your bedtime and then assist you in retiring.”

Olaf was taken aback by her words and was about to ask a question, but the girl had already walked away.

Olaf’s heart raced as if scratched by a cat. At fifteen years old, Nordic people matured quickly, and Olaf’s physique, appearance, and other aspects were already those of a grown man. The needs that came with manhood had begun to emerge.

Previously, he had been too absorbed in the affairs and wars of Vinland to give it much thought, but now, suddenly faced with a beautiful and gentle white girl, his hormones surged.

Olaf lay in bed, lost in thought after the girl’s words. Soon, he heard footsteps by the bed. Looking up, he saw the same girl, now wearing a silk nightgown. Her silver-white hair cascaded over her shoulders, and the thin fabric did little to conceal the curves beneath.

The girl blinked her large eyes, her delicate nose above thin, red lips, her fair skin looking as if it would break at the slightest touch—a sign of youth.

Olaf’s Adam’s apple bobbed as the girl climbed onto the bed, her sweet scent filling the air.

“Honored guest, I am Sally, sent by Minister Hari to serve you. I… I am still a virgin. Please be gentle with me…”

Sally spoke shyly, closing her eyes. Her long eyelashes trembled, betraying her nervousness and excitement.

Olaf restrained his impulses and asked, “Does your duchy always use girls to entertain guests?”

Sally opened her eyes, thought for a moment, and said, “I was selected to enter the palace last year and have been learning how to serve nobles and manage affairs. I’ve heard others say that only the most honored guests are attended to by us newcomers. You must be a very important person. Sally is honored to…”

As she spoke, Sally removed her nightgown, revealing her beautiful body. The scent of her skin filled Olaf’s nostrils, and he could no longer resist. He reached out his large, strong hands and embraced her.

In one of the bedrooms of the Rose Hall, an intense battle unfolded—one where the invader, armed with a long spear, conquered the new land, only for the natives to rise in rebellion. The struggle continued until the invader completely overpowered the natives, bestowing upon them a precious gift before it all came to an end.

Chapter 226: The Szczecin Alliance (2)

The next morning, when Olaf awoke, he found the smooth, warm body beside him gone. He sat up and saw Sally, already dressed in her maid’s uniform, tidying his clothes.

“Respected Olaf, you’re awake?” Sally said, flashing a smile as bright as pearls.

Olaf, his broad chest covered in thick golden hair, flexed his muscular arms as he pulled on his shirt. Glancing at the scattered crimson stains on the sheets, his expression softened. “Sally, why didn’t you sleep in a little longer?”

“I’m just a maid. I have to serve you,” Sally replied gently.

A pang of guilt struck Olaf. He smiled and said, “From today onward, you’re no longer a maid.”

In his heart, Olaf had already decided to claim Sally from the Chancellor when they met. She would become his mistress.

No woman wanted to spend her life serving others. Sally’s heart swelled with joy at Olaf’s words. She believed her future would be one of wealth and comfort by the side of Iceland’s great man.

“Thank you, Mr. Olaf,” Sally whispered, embracing him and planting a soft kiss on his lips.

A fire ignited in Olaf’s loins, and he was about to indulge in a morning workout when Oukh’s voice interrupted from outside the door.

“Master! Mr. West is here.”

“Ask him to wait in the parlor.”

Olaf rose, and with Sally’s help, donned his finest silk garments. Then, with the bearing of a noble, he strode out of the room.

Upon seeing Olaf, West smiled. “Respected General Olaf, you look every bit the heir to a duchy today.”

Olaf didn’t respond. Instead, he gestured toward the dining table. “Let’s have breakfast. When will the Chancellor see me?”

West glanced at Sally, who followed behind Olaf, then smiled. “The Chancellor said we should come after breakfast. He’s already had the alliance treaty drafted. Once you sign, it can be announced to the world.”

Olaf nodded, and the two sat at the table. Sally soon pushed in a cart laden with a pot of porridge made from oats, nuts, and creamed cabbage, along with soft bread, sausages, and pickled fish.

After a quick meal, Olaf and West made their way to the heart of the duchy’s power—the throne room of the ducal castle. Since last year, it had been occupied by Sweden’s Chancellor.

Entering the empty throne room, West addressed an attendant standing before an office. “I am West. This is Olaf. The Chancellor sent for us.”

The attendant nodded and opened the door. Olaf and West stepped inside, their eyes taking in the small room cluttered with official documents and books.

Behind a desk buried under stacks of papers sat a gaunt old man in a black robe and round cap. His nose was aquiline, his eyes deep-set, and his forehead and temples etched with deep wrinkles. His beard and mustache were neatly trimmed into fashionable curls.

Hearing their approach, the old man looked up, his wise eyes gleaming as they met Olaf’s. “West, is this the Icelandic prodigy, the genius, Governor Olaf of Vinland?”

“Yes, Chancellor,” West replied, bowing respectfully.

Olaf extended his right hand. “You must be Lord Oxenstierna. As Sweden’s Chancellor, your reputation and the Emperor’s glory have spread across the seas. Even our small Iceland has heard of you.”

Oxenstierna’s warm hand clasped Olaf’s, and he smiled. “Please, have a seat. This year, our campaigns have gone well. His Majesty has brought much of Germany under his control. Recently, he’s been negotiating with Emperor Ferdinand II to peacefully transfer German rights. That’s why things are so busy. I haven’t had time to tidy the room.”

Olaf smiled. “Meeting you, I understand the saying ‘the able are burdened, the wise are weary.’”

“A few years ago, I read about you in an Icelandic saga—a long poem. You only had a small part, but your father and uncle had remarkable stories. I’d like to meet your father, Grand Duke Haldor, and Mr. Haig someday.”

Oxenstierna, though decades older than Haldor, spoke to Olaf as an equal.

Olaf explained that the sagas were merely the work of Icelandic scholars and clergy, then asked, “You invited me here to represent Sweden in signing an alliance with Iceland, didn’t you? You know my army is waiting for me in Copenhagen, so let’s not waste time.”

“Ah, old age makes one prone to rambling,” Oxenstierna chuckled, stroking his beard. “West should have told you our intentions. Initially, we planned to make Iceland a vassal state of Sweden, but since you’re unwilling, becoming a tributary state is acceptable. However, the name ‘Icelandic Free Republic’ will have to change to ‘Icelandic Duchy.’”

“That’s no problem. It’s just a name.”

Olaf spoke as if he were already the Grand Duke of Iceland. “But now that we’re under Sweden’s rule, what can you and His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II offer us?”

“Haven’t you been troubled by Danish attacks and blockades these past two years? If you join Sweden, Christian IV won’t dare act against you. Icelandic merchants will also gain access to the Baltic Sea, and the markets of Sweden, Poland, even Russia, will open to Icelandic and Vinland goods. If you need our aid, we can provide it—though not for free, of course.”

Oxenstierna’s deep eyes gazed calmly at Olaf.

Olaf asked, “Iceland and Vinland have harsh climates and scarce resources. We need Sweden’s help with money, horses, weapons, and ships. Can you provide that?”

“Of course,” Oxenstierna replied with a confident smile. “But we need to establish the West India Company, and we’ll need your cooperation.”

Olaf’s heart skipped a beat. So the Swedes are eyeing North America! No wonder they’re willing to offer aid.

Olaf didn’t want Sweden meddling in North America, but he couldn’t outright refuse.

Before Olaf could think of a response, Oxenstierna continued, “I plan to establish the New Sweden colony in North America to search for furs and minerals. Your Vinland is said to be thriving, surpassing the English, French, and Dutch colonies. I think the Swedish West India Company will need your help to gain a foothold. Do you think our cooperation would be suitable?”

Olaf’s heart raced. He quickly replied, “Of course. As Governor of Vinland, I can assure you I’m willing to assist the Swedish West India Company in finding and establishing suitable colonies in North America.”

“Excellent. Thank you, Olaf.”

Oxenstierna’s eyes narrowed slightly as he casually added, “Once our colonies are established and His Majesty returns victorious from Germany, Sweden will provide Iceland with no fewer than ten armed merchant ships and military supplies worth no less than three hundred thousand marks. But this is on the condition that we truly establish a tributary relationship. Don’t you agree?”

Olaf nodded. “Naturally. We Icelanders are also Scandinavians. We’ve longed to be part of the Swedish Kingdom. Perhaps we can help Sweden secure enough colonies in the West Indies—on the condition that we’re not just tributaries, but family. Don’t you agree?”

“Of course.”

Oxenstierna laughed heartily. “Sweden is different from Denmark and England. We won’t treat our kin in Iceland as a colony, but as brothers. We will be the model for Nordic nations.”

“Chancellor, your words echo my thoughts. Iceland will be a loyal subject of Sweden’s Lion King!”

Olaf laughed and stood to shake the Chancellor’s hand once more.

Chapter 227: The Szczecin Alliance (3)

After several verbal sparring matches over the details of the subordinate relationship, Olaf and Oxenstierna each found the other to be a formidable opponent. In the end, however, they reached an agreement.

West clapped his hands with a smile and said, “This will be a moment for the history books. I’ll have a painter capture it and hang it in the Szczecin palace so that future generations will always see the friendship between Iceland and Sweden.”

Oxenstierna’s lips curled slightly, seemingly pleased with West’s suggestion. He then said, “Go fetch the draft of the alliance my secretary prepared. Let Olaf take a look. If there are no issues, we can sign it.”

West quickly walked to a pile of documents in the corner and, after a moment, retrieved two parchment scrolls covered in dense Swedish and Icelandic text.

“Lord Olaf, Chancellor, please.”

Taking the scroll, Olaf glanced over it and found the content to be quite simple. It only stated that Iceland would submit to Sweden as a tributary state and would align with Sweden in foreign wars, among a few other points.

The looser the terms of the treaty, the more favorable it was for the small nation of Iceland. However, in reality, with national strength being constant, the alliance was nothing more than a piece of paper. Olaf nodded in satisfaction and said, “I think I can sign this.”

“That’s good. West, go prepare the hall and invite Duke Bogislaw XIV. As the host and a duke, he can serve as a witness.” Oxenstierna waved his hand, dismissing West.

Olaf sat quietly on the sofa, while Oxenstierna, without saying a word, buried himself in the pile of documents again.

About an hour later, West’s voice came from outside the door: “Chancellor, everything is ready. Duke Bogislaw XIV is already seated in the throne hall.”

Oxenstierna looked at Olaf and smiled, “Lord Olaf, let’s go to the throne hall. The union of our two nations is a grand occasion that should be treated with solemnity and witnessed by important figures. Don’t you agree?”

“Chancellor, you’ve thought of everything.” Olaf agreed and stood up.

The two men walked out of the room one after the other, and the two parchment scrolls were naturally taken by some secretary.

Passing through two halls, Olaf and Oxenstierna entered the largest and most luxurious throne hall in the ducal castle. Under West’s guidance, they sat at the most prominent round table.

On the table was only a pristine satin cloth. Besides Olaf and Oxenstierna, there was an elderly man dressed in splendid robes and wearing a crown. After West’s introduction, Olaf recognized him as Bogislaw XIV, the Duke of Pomerania.

The three exchanged polite greetings and then sat down comfortably.

Duke Bogislaw XIV, as the host and witness, gave a speech. The gist of it was that under God’s guidance, Gustavus Adolphus II had already achieved great victories for the Protestants. In the future, Protestantism would undoubtedly become the mainstream in Europe and even the world. Iceland, as a small country in a remote region, had been the first to submit to Sweden, which was what everyone had hoped for…

After Bogislaw finished speaking, it was time to sign the alliance.

Oxenstierna unrolled his parchment scroll and signaled the secretary to bring Olaf a quill dipped in ink. Under the witness of West and Duke Bogislaw XIV, the Chancellor of the Kingdom of Sweden and the Second Prince of the Icelandic Free Republic, the Governor of Vinland, signed their names on the alliance. They then exchanged the documents and signed again.

After both copies of the alliance were completed, Bogislaw, as the witness, also signed his name. Finally, Olaf and Oxenstierna each held a copy. From that moment on, the Icelandic Free Republic became a thing of the past. Henceforth, Iceland would only be a subordinate duchy of the Swedish United Kingdom.

“Olaf, His Majesty issued a decree yesterday appointing your father, Prince Haldor, as the Duke of Iceland, and you as the Earl of Vinland.”

Oxenstierna’s expression became very amiable as he smiled and said, “The documents and golden seals are here. West, go fetch them for Earl Olaf.”

West, led by a clerk, walked out and, after a long time, came back carrying a gift box and a roll of gold-lacquered red wax paper.

Olaf took it and examined it carefully. The paper was covered in beautiful Swedish text. Although Olaf couldn’t understand most of it, he could make out some words—indeed, there were his and his father’s names and the title “Duke of Iceland.” Below was Gustavus Adolphus II’s personal signature and a circular seal.

Opening the wooden gift box revealed a golden shield-shaped badge about the size of a palm. The top was shaped like a crown, and the bottom had a lion relief. Turning it over, the back read “Swedish United Kingdom—Iceland Duke.” Below the large badge was a smaller one of the same style, with “Earl of Vinland” engraved on the back.

Olaf knew this was the badge of the Duke of Iceland. He smiled and embraced the documents and badge, then said, “Thank you for His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II’s bestowal. When I return to Iceland, I will express His Majesty’s kindness to my father. The Duchy of Iceland will surely be a loyal subject of Sweden!”

With Olaf representing Iceland’s submission to Sweden, the mission in Szczecin was complete.

Thinking of the legion waiting in Copenhagen, Olaf was eager to bid farewell to Oxenstierna. He also requested some military supplies from Sweden and, by the way, asked Duke Bogislaw for Sally.

Duke Bogislaw XIV couldn’t even remember having a maid named Sally. He smiled and agreed to Olaf’s request, even joking with a wink, “Lord Olaf, you’re quite the romantic! If you like the maids in my palace, I’ll have someone pick a few good ones to send to you later.”

Olaf laughed heartily, “Then thank you, Your Grace. You can never have too many beauties…”

“Hahaha…” Bogislaw laughed heartily, thinking that Olaf was a man of passion, very much to his liking.

Regarding Olaf’s request for supplies, Oxenstierna was very amiable and readily agreed to provide 500 warhorses and 1,000 smoothbore muskets with corresponding ammunition.

However, Olaf keenly noticed that after Oxenstierna agreed, Duke Bogislaw XIV’s face twitched, and he coughed a few times.

Olaf understood that Gustavus Adolphus II was currently leading a personal command in the German region and had occupied most of the lands and states. It seemed that the supplies given to him would have to be drawn from the Pomerania Duchy and other large and small states.

“The supplies will be temporarily taken from the Pomerania Duchy’s warehouses and various locations. The remaining portion will be supplemented once other countries have prepared it. Duke Bogislaw, do you think that’s acceptable?” Oxenstierna politely asked Duke Bogislaw XIV.

Duke Bogislaw XIV, who was about the same age as Oxenstierna, nodded obediently and said, “Chancellor, your arrangement is perfect. It should be this way.”

Oxenstierna then turned and said, “Ulf, you and West go fetch them. The guns and ammunition can be taken immediately, but the horses will take a day or two. However, we can temporarily use the horses from my garrison’s stables to fill the gap until the military horses arrive from various places.”

From Oxenstierna’s words, Olaf deduced that he was assisting Gustavus Adolphus II in managing the entire northern Germany from Szczecin. He was also responsible for coordinating the resources and forces of northern Germany and Sweden to support Gustavus Adolphus II on the front lines.

Olaf suddenly remembered that after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death, the successor, Queen Christina, had most of her royal power usurped by the Chancellor during her decades-long reign. That Chancellor must have been Oxenstierna. Olaf now realized that Oxenstierna’s power was probably second only to Gustavus Adolphus II at present, let alone after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death.

Recalling the Battle of Lützen, after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death, the supreme commander of the Swedish army was Chancellor Oxenstierna. Olaf gained a clearer understanding of the capabilities of the seemingly harmless old man before him and couldn’t help but feel a sense of vigilance and caution.

Chapter 228: The Szczecin Alliance (4)

On the morning of July 14th, Olaf, son of Grand Duke Haldor of Iceland and Governor of Vinland, signed an alliance on behalf of Iceland with Chancellor Oxenstierna of the Swedish Kingdom. From that day forward, Iceland became part of the Swedish United Kingdom, another duchy under the rule of His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II.

By the afternoon of July 15th, through the efforts of West and the officials of the Pomeranian Duchy, the first batch of Swedish aid to Iceland—five hundred warhorses and one thousand smoothbore muskets—had been assembled before nightfall.

Olaf inspected each item carefully before joyfully ordering his men to load the horses and supplies onto the Whale Watcher. Under the cover of night, he bade farewell to West with a wave, and the Whale Watcher departed from the Szczecin harbor, heading north through the lagoon into the Baltic Sea, bound for Copenhagen.

After Olaf had left with his spoils, West hurried back to the castle before nightfall to report to the Chancellor.

Upon hearing that Olaf had taken the military supplies and horses and left, Oxenstierna let out a cold snort and said, “You must send someone to Copenhagen to continue monitoring Olaf and his army’s movements. That young man is cunning and ambitious—I don’t like him. Especially since he doesn’t truly fear or submit to Sweden, which makes me dislike him even more!”

West was surprised by the Chancellor’s judgment, but given his position, he could only agree. “Understood, I’ll send someone immediately.”

Just as he was about to leave the room, West turned back and asked, “Sir Oxenstierna, what if Magnus of Denmark leads his army back to The Sound ahead of schedule? The Vinland forces under Olaf won’t stand a chance against Magnus. Should we help them?”

Oxenstierna hesitated for a moment before replying, “Starting tomorrow, we will announce to all nations that Iceland has become part of the Swedish Kingdom. If Olaf manages to escape Magnus, so be it. But if he and his forces are wiped out by Magnus, that will give us the perfect excuse to take action against Denmark. Once His Majesty stabilizes southern Germany, we will have the freedom to deal with Denmark! The future master of the Baltic Sea will be Sweden!”

West had always considered himself a clever man, and the Chancellor and the dukes of the realm had valued him for that very reason.

So, though West understood that Oxenstierna disliked Olaf—even if he himself rather liked the young man—he knew his duty was to follow orders without question.

West quickly left the castle and gave detailed instructions to his spies. He ordered them to keep a close watch on Olaf’s forces in Copenhagen and to report immediately if Magnus’s Danish army returned to Denmark before Olaf’s departure, leading to a battle between the two.

Knowing that the Chancellor had no intention of aiding Olaf, West realized that if Magnus managed to corner Olaf south of The Sound, the outcome for Olaf and the Vinland forces would be grim.

In the end, the result would only weaken both Iceland and Denmark, deepening the hatred between them, while giving Sweden the opportunity to invade Denmark and reclaim Kalmar.

Twenty years ago, Christian IV had launched the Kalmar War to suppress Sweden, slaughtering Swedish people, humiliating the old Swedish king, and seizing the strategic northern city of Kalmar.

For twenty years, this had been a festering wound in the hearts of the Swedish people. Every Swedish subject hated Denmark to the core, waiting for the moment when Denmark grew weak enough to provide a justifiable reason to wage war, reclaim what was lost, and exact vengeance tenfold.

Now, Denmark’s strength had been severely depleted by consecutive defeats against the Holy Roman Empire and Iceland. Both Gustavus Adolphus II and Oxenstierna had set their sights on reclaiming lost territory and replacing Denmark as the dominant power in Northern Europe.

Olaf’s arrival in Copenhagen with the Vinland forces presented Sweden with the perfect opportunity—a chance to crush Denmark once and for all and take its place.

Oxenstierna’s original plan had been to use Iceland as a pawn, much like Pomerania.

But after meeting Olaf, he had changed his mind. Oxenstierna saw Olaf as defiant yet capable—a man who, if confined to the barren lands of Iceland, could be molded into a loyal servant. However, Iceland still held vast colonies in North America, and Olaf himself was the Governor of Vinland.

From what Oxenstierna had learned, Vinland’s land was several times larger than Iceland, with a far more favorable climate. Under such conditions, if Iceland successfully integrated its colonies, it would have the potential to break free from Swedish control.

As a nobleman who had held power in the Swedish Privy Council for decades and the youngest Chancellor in Swedish history, Oxenstierna despised uncontrollable forces. Thus, his original plan had shifted. Now, he hoped Magnus would return soon, so that the Danish and Icelandic forces could annihilate each other in the Baltic Sea, weakening Iceland in the process.

As for Haldor, the loss of his son would only drive the Icelandic Duke to seek revenge and protection, binding him even closer to Sweden. And as for the North American colonies, Sweden would naturally take its share.

Olaf, having left Szczecin, was unaware that the Swedish Chancellor, with whom he had just established friendly relations, had already abandoned him—even preparing to watch coldly as he battled Denmark. But Olaf did not fully trust Sweden either, so he planned to begin arranging a retreat as soon as he returned to Copenhagen.

…

The Whale Watcher sailed swiftly through the night, aided by the southwest wind, rushing toward Copenhagen. By the next morning, as the ship cut through the morning mist, the first rays of sunlight revealed the half-restored Tre Kroner Fort. Clearly, his native slave soldiers were stationed inside.

Upon seeing the Whale Watcher approaching with its snow-white cross flag, a soldier quickly emerged from the fort, waving a red flag in response.

Standing on the deck, Oukh ordered the flag bearer to signal back. The Whale Watcher then skirted the waves before the fort and entered Copenhagen’s harbor.

After a solid night’s sleep, Olaf rose with Sally’s assistance, washed up, and ate a simple bowl of meat porridge.

Feeling refreshed and energized, Olaf laughed and said, “I think today is the most invigorating I’ve felt since setting out a month ago. With Sweden’s banner behind us, Iceland can finally develop in peace!”

Sally, lacking experience in such matters, simply smiled and replied, “You are a man of great deeds, General. My duty is only to take care of your well-being.”

“You’re right,” Olaf said. “Go back to your room and rest. I’ll go up to the deck. Don’t leave without my orders.”

After giving Sally a few instructions, Olaf, with the girl’s help, changed into his military uniform and prepared to go out.

Chapter 229: The Tragedy of Copenhagen

Stepping onto the deck, Olaf saw Oukh and the other guards waiting. He asked, “Have we reached Copenhagen?”

Oukh smiled and replied, “Yes, master. We are already outside Copenhagen’s harbor. Look ahead—our fleet is still blockading the harbor.”

Olaf walked to the bow and peered into the distance. The morning mist was thick, but he could still make out the familiar sight of ships large and small crammed together outside the harbor. Each vessel flew a white flag emblazoned with a cross—the temporary banner he had designed for Vinland and Iceland.

Taking out his spyglass, he surveyed the streets of Copenhagen. Few pedestrians remained, and beggars and starving corpses had begun to appear in the alleys. Though their suffering was pitiful, Olaf felt only satisfaction. He forced himself not to dwell on it, instead recalling the atrocities the Danes had committed against his family and the people of Iceland. A surge of vengeful pleasure welled up within him, and his mood grew increasingly buoyant, nearly breaking into a smile.

“Excellent! We’ve blockaded Copenhagen’s harbor for four days now. If Pikku and Tom have followed orders, they should have sent men to raid the villages and towns along the northern and southern coasts.”

Copenhagen was now cut off from external supplies. With no way to plunder the surrounding fishing villages and towns—already stripped bare by Olaf’s forces—the city’s hundreds of thousands of inhabitants relied solely on the meager provisions from the northern cities of Zealand. But even that was insufficient. The constant threat of cannon fire had left the citizens in a state of panic, and the frenzied hoarding of food must have begun days ago. The once-prosperous capital of Scandinavia was now on the brink of collapse, with the poor and slow left to starve, perhaps even on the verge of rebellion.

Olaf was pleased that his subordinates had strictly adhered to his commands during his near two-day absence. He couldn’t help but admire their discipline.

If not for the looming threat of Magnus’s army, Olaf was confident that a month-long blockade would be enough to bring Copenhagen to its knees without a single battle. The city would descend into chaos and self-destruction, making his conquest of Denmark’s capital effortless.

As for the supply of his own forces during the blockade, the long Danish coastline offered ample villages to plunder, and the rich fishing grounds provided sustenance. Would provisions for thousands of men truly be a problem?

But Olaf knew he didn’t have the luxury of time. Magnus’s army was likely already on its way back, and if they moved swiftly, they might have already reached the Skagerrak Strait between Norway and the Jutland Peninsula.

Returning to the harbor outside Copenhagen, Olaf’s sense of urgency only intensified. He summoned the six legion commanders to inquire about the blockade’s progress and the raids on the surrounding fishing villages and coastal towns.

From Tom’s report, Olaf learned that Copenhagen had attempted a nighttime assault the previous evening, sending men to swim toward the fleet. However, the night watch on the cog ships had spotted them, and a barrage of cannon and musket fire—though inaccurate—had left over a hundred Danish soldiers dead before the rest fled in disarray.

In Olaf’s absence, Pikku had overseen the raids on the outskirts of Copenhagen and the coastal towns along the harbor straits. To date, they had razed over twenty fishing villages and six towns, seizing untold supplies and food, along with two to three thousand marks in gold and silver. They had also captured nearly a thousand horses and over a thousand cattle and sheep.

Olaf nodded in satisfaction, then pointed to a map on the table. “What about Skoladeholm at the southernmost tip of the strait? Are there Danish troops there? Have they been eliminated?”

Skoladeholm was the narrowest point of the strait between Copenhagen and Amager Island. From Copenhagen’s harbor, one could sail south through the straits between Falster, Lolland, Zealand, and Funen, bypassing The Sound and arcing through Danish territory into the Kattegat Strait, thus escaping Denmark.

Olaf had been calculating his final escape route. If Magnus’s forces blocked The Sound, his only chance to evade the Danish navy and flee would be to navigate through Denmark’s archipelago, bypassing The Sound entirely. But this plan required complete control of the fortresses and coastal towns south of Copenhagen.

Pikku studied the map for a moment before replying, “The coastal towns along the southern strait have all been taken. You’re referring to the isolated fortress similar to Tre Kroner Fort at the southern entrance to the Baltic Sea. However, that island only has a small watchtower in the northwest and a few dozen Danish soldiers. They were all killed yesterday afternoon.”

Olaf nodded approvingly. “Good. Now send two cog ships to wait north of Helsingør. If they spot a large Danish naval force, they are to return immediately. We will use Tre Kroner Fort to slow Magnus’s pursuit while we sail south from Copenhagen’s harbor, through the Danish archipelago, and into the northern straits. Then we can return directly to Iceland!”

Only now did Olaf reveal his full plan, and the legion commanders were visibly stirred, praising his strategy.

Olaf waved his hand dismissively. “You must select the finest cog ships and the most skilled captains and sailors. They are our eyes and ears—there can be no mistakes!”

“Understood, General!”

“And the warriors we leave at Tre Kroner Fort must be the bravest and most skilled. They are to fight to the death to cover our retreat. Keep their numbers below two thousand, but equip them with more than half of our firearms and over twenty cannons. Prepare quickly!”

Olaf outlined the strategic arrangements he had refined during his journey to and from Szczecin, and the others immediately sprang into action.

Soon, the entire Vinland expeditionary force and militia were in motion. Four large warships, accompanied by over a dozen smaller vessels, departed from Copenhagen’s harbor, heading for Tre Kroner Fort. Among them were two ships tasked with scouting the northern reaches of The Sound.

As the Vinland expeditionary force busied itself with preparations, Copenhagen began to descend into chaos and rioting.

Copenhagen was a purely commercial harbor, home to a massive population. However, more than half of the supplies needed to sustain its over two hundred thousand inhabitants relied on the daily flow of goods through its harbor.

When the Vinland fleet attacked Kalvebod Fort last week, Copenhagen’s merchant ships began to flee en masse. By the time the Vinland fleet assaulted Tre Kroner Fort, the harbor was nearly empty, save for a few Danish merchant and warships.

Within a week, Copenhagen had lost its external supply of food and goods. The provisions from Zealand were utterly insufficient to support the city’s vast population. Panic spread among the citizens, and within days, they began hoarding supplies, especially food.

The grain merchants of Copenhagen demonstrated the finest qualities of their profession. As soon as the blockade began, they raised prices and limited daily supplies to a thousand or two pounds. This sent prices soaring, with costs nearly doubling each day. By the time Olaf returned from Szczecin, grain prices in Copenhagen had surged a hundredfold.

The skyrocketing prices only deepened the citizens’ panic. When news spread of the failed night raid led by the royal soldiers and militia, the people of Copenhagen were left utterly desperate.

The first riots erupted on Børgergade Street, three miles northeast of Rosenborg Palace, where starving mobs looted and burned grain shops. The unrest quickly spread to neighboring streets, even reaching the nearby St. Paul’s Cathedral.

Though the royal constabulary swiftly suppressed the rioters, disturbances broke out in the southern districts and other parts of the city. In a single day, over fifty shops and homes were looted, and thirty fires raged across Copenhagen.

Inside Rosenborg Palace, King Christian IV’s eyes were bloodshot with rage. He stormed through the halls, smashing precious porcelain from the Far East, while summoning his ministers to discuss countermeasures. Yet, beyond deploying troops to quell the unrest and opening the royal granaries to distribute food and stabilize morale, the ministers had no fresh ideas.

Deploying troops was necessary, but the royal granaries were far from sufficient. They still had to feed the royal constabulary and militia. If that supply were cut off, Copenhagen might collapse from within, even without an Icelandic attack.

Christian IV was no fool. He gritted his teeth and endured, rationing food to ensure the royal constabulary and militia were fed, while distributing meager portions to the poor near the palace to prevent unrest at his doorstep. In the end, he could only pray to God for Magnus’s swift return.

Chapter 230: Magnus’s Army Returns to Reinforce

For Olaf and the Vinland expeditionary force blockading Copenhagen, every day was monotonous. Aside from the occasional excitement of raiding when their shifts allowed, the rest of the time was spent watching the distant fires, smoke, and chaos in the city of Copenhagen.

Olaf and the six legion commanders knew that Copenhagen was on the verge of collapse, but Magnus’s army could return at any moment.

The defenses of Tre Kroner Fort had been continuously reinforced. They had salvaged two usable cannons from the ruins and unloaded more than twenty additional cannons from their ships. With over a thousand musketeers and eight hundred long spearmen, the fort had regained the combat strength it had when the Danish defenders resisted the Vinland expeditionary force days ago—perhaps even stronger.

From the Danish navy prisoners, Olaf and the others learned that Magnus’s army was even larger than Hans had described. With over a hundred warships, transport ships, and thirty thousand soldiers, the Danish army had the strength to crush the combined forces of Iceland and Vinland.

If not for the fact that attacking Germany required land forces and Denmark currently lacked sufficient cavalry, the Danish army’s numbers and strength alone would have given them the confidence to challenge the Holy Roman Empire.

In naval warfare, Olaf estimated that Denmark was still among the top three in Europe.

His own fleet had only a dozen large warships capable of facing the Danish navy; the rest of the cog ships were no match. Additionally, neither he nor the legion commanders had experience commanding large naval battles. If they engaged Magnus’s Danish navy on the open sea, Olaf doubted they could even escape.

To ensure he had enough strength to resist Magnus’s army when they arrived and slow their pursuit, Olaf placed great hope in Tre Kroner Fort. After the fort was repaired, he even personally inspected the island.

Returning to the Whale Watcher, Olaf finally felt at ease. He picked up his telescope and looked at the desolate and ruined districts of Copenhagen, the distant fires and smoke. Though the distance made the details unclear, the faint sound of gunfire still reached his ears, making him smirk.

“Copenhagen is getting more chaotic by the day!”

“Master, I think if we wait a few more days, Copenhagen will collapse!” Pikku laughed.

Olaf nodded, about to speak, when suddenly a long whistle sounded. He and Pikku frowned—it was the warning signal from Tre Kroner Fort.

“What’s happening?!”

Olaf and Pikku quickly turned to look toward the sea outside Tre Kroner Fort. A cog ship flying a white cross flag was rapidly approaching the fort, and the crew on deck was waving flags, clearly signaling an enemy attack.

“Has Magnus’s army arrived?!” Olaf frowned and immediately ordered all ships to assemble.

As the Vinland expeditionary force’s ships gathered, the cog ship had already been intercepted by two cog ships in front of Tre Kroner Fort and was quickly approaching the Whale Watcher.

Moments later, the cog ship drew near the Whale Watcher. A Beothuk man in his thirties, panting heavily, climbed onto the deck of the Whale Watcher, found Olaf, and knelt down, shouting, “General! The Danish army has returned! They attacked us as soon as they saw us. Only I escaped and returned. They are still chasing me and will be here soon!”

Before Olaf could react, as if confirming the Beothuk man’s words, the sharp whistles and gunfire from Tre Kroner Fort suddenly rang out.

Olaf and the legion commanders looked north and could faintly see a massive fleet appearing on the sea in front of Tre Kroner Fort, each ship flying the Danish flag.

“It’s Magnus’s return!”

Olaf exclaimed, and then he heard a series of cannon fire from Tre Kroner Fort, followed by a continuous barrage from the Danish navy.

Magnus, who had been marching urgently, showed no intention of communicating. Concerned for the safety of Copenhagen, as soon as he discovered that Tre Kroner Fort was occupied by the Icelanders and that the harbor outside Copenhagen was filled with Icelandic warships, he issued the order to attack.

“Boom…”

The Danish warships, upon approaching Tre Kroner Fort, immediately engaged in fierce cannon fire. The sound of cannons and whistling cannonballs filled the air, and soon, ships and the fort were struck by the violent barrage.

Olaf looked at the Danish navy stretching for several nautical miles and swallowed hard. He knew that Tre Kroner Fort wouldn’t hold for long. It was time for him to escape.

With a deep sense of guilt, he looked at the distant Tre Kroner Fort, still bravely resisting an enemy ten times its size. Olaf solemnly gave the order: “Order all ships to weigh anchor and set sail immediately. All ships follow the Whale Watcher. We will withdraw from Copenhagen in an orderly manner!”

The Whale Watcher led the way, and the dozens of large and small ships of the Vinland expeditionary force quickly formed a long line, leaving the harbor of Copenhagen and disappearing into the depths of the strait between Zealand and Amager Island.

On the deck of the flagship in the center of the Danish navy fleet, Magnus and Kormakur both held telescopes, looking at Tre Kroner Fort and the rear of Copenhagen. When they saw the Icelandic fleet fleeing south, they both slapped their thighs and shouted, “Not good! The Icelanders are escaping!”

Familiar with the terrain and geography of Denmark, Magnus and Kormakur knew that the Icelandic fleet’s departure from the harbor of Copenhagen without engaging in battle meant they had planned to escape through the northern straits among Denmark’s many small islands.

Tre Kroner Fort was located in the middle of the strait leading to the harbor of Copenhagen. If the island fortress was not taken, any pursuing warships approaching the small island would be struck and sunk by the close-range cannons. Thus, the Icelanders using Tre Kroner Fort as a shield was cunning to the extreme.

“General! The Icelandic scoundrels are too cunning. I cannot let them escape, nor can I allow them to enter the heart of Denmark. I humbly request to lead the galleys from the east side of Amager Island and pursue them south. We are extremely familiar with our country’s waterways and islands and will surely catch up to the Icelandic scoundrels!”

Kormakur did not want to let the Icelanders escape and also did not want to miss out on the great merit. Thus, he volunteered.

Magnus’s relationship with Christian IV was different from Kormakur’s. For the royal son-in-law, the greatest merit was to rescue the king in time and rush into the palace to offer comfort. After some thought, he said, “Good, Kormakur, you lead half the ships and pursue them as quickly as possible. You must annihilate the Icelandic pirates in the Baltic Sea!”

“As you command, General!”

After Kormakur agreed, he turned and left. Soon, a fleet of nearly thirty galleys, the fastest and best-equipped with cannons, split off from the warships in front of the harbor of Copenhagen. These galleys were the elite of the Danish navy.

Kormakur personally led this fleet of galleys from the east side of Amager Island, preparing to go around the east side of the island and pursue Olaf and the others south.

After Kormakur left, Magnus continued to order the fleet to bombard Tre Kroner Fort, aiming to destroy the island fortress’s defenses within two hours using their overwhelming cannon advantage.

After the Icelandic warships left the harbor, the soldiers Christian IV had sent to gather intelligence at the docks quickly reported the situation to Rosenborg Palace.

When the sound of heavy cannon fire came from the direction of Tre Kroner Fort, the worried Christian IV in Rosenborg Palace personally went to the top of the tower and used a telescope to look north.

When he faintly recognized that the ships besieging Tre Kroner Fort were his own navy, the old king suddenly laughed loudly, threw down his telescope, and shouted, “Immediately organize the royal constabulary and militia to stabilize the streets of Copenhagen. At the same time, open the warehouses and distribute food to stabilize the people’s hearts!”

The ministers in Rosenborg Palace, upon hearing the news, also appeared beside the king, continuously cursing the Icelandic pirates and confidently predicting the tragic fate of the Icelandic pirates under General Magnus’s cannons, as if they had all become prophets like Moses.

Chapter 231: Strait Pursuit Battle (1)

The fleet passed through the western side of the small island at the southernmost tip of the strait called Skoladeholm and entered the vast ocean. Olaf studied the map, questioning a few obedient Danish prisoners beside him, then ordered the fleet to advance at full speed. They were to skirt the southern side of Zealand, navigate through the islands of Denmark, and reach the northernmost strait, which would lead them directly into the North Sea and back to Iceland.

The fleet consisted of ships of varying sizes, and their sailing speeds were not uniform. To ensure the slower cog ships were not left behind, the larger galleons like the Whale Watcher controlled their speed. Olaf frowned and said, “Isn’t this speed too slow?”

After about half an hour, the fleet passed the Kerteminde Bay and approached the southeastern tip of Zealand, near the island of Møn.

Once they passed through the Storebælt Strait between the two islands, the fleet would enter the Danish inland sea. From there, they could head north, bypass the Sound, and enter the Kattegat Strait.

The Kattegat Strait was not as narrow as the Sound, and its vast expanse would allow Olaf’s fleet to evade Magnus’s large army. Unless Magnus’s fleet could pursue relentlessly without needing supplies, it would be difficult for the exhausted Danish expeditionary force to continue the long chase.

There were towns and harbors on Møn and the southeastern part of Zealand, but their defensive forces were severely insufficient. As Olaf’s massive fleet approached, all coastal towns and fishing villages rang their bells, and the citizens and villagers hastily gathered their belongings and livestock, fleeing into the forests of the island’s interior.

As the Danes fled in panic, Olaf’s fleet reached the Storebælt Strait, where the ships lined up to enter the narrow strait one by one.

The Whale Watcher had not traveled far into the strait when a sudden cannon blast echoed from behind.

Olaf stood up from the cabin and asked, “What’s going on? Oukh, go take a look!”

Oukh and two guards quickly went out. After a moment, they returned with tense expressions and said, “The Danish navy is catching up! Our ships are firing cannons to warn us. At this distance, our fleet won’t be able to completely pass through the strait before they catch up!”

Olaf narrowed his eyes, quickly went out, and looked through the telescope for a moment before ordering, “Tell the six legion commanders immediately to leave all the cog ships in the strait and destroy them to block the strait. Then, gather everyone onto the eighteen large ships. We need to preserve our strength.”

Oukh quickly left. After a moment, the large and small ships crowded at the entrance of the strait began to move. All the soldiers on the small ships used planks to transfer to the large ships, and the remaining cog ships dropped anchor at the entrance of the strait.

About twenty minutes later, all the large ships had passed through the strait one by one. The Danish fleet behind them was catching up, almost reaching the edge of the cannon range.

Olaf put down the telescope in his hand and ordered, “Fire!”

Ten seconds later, the cannons on the eighteen large ships ignited simultaneously. The cannons struck dozens of cog ships at the entrance of the strait. The small and crude cog ships were severely damaged by hundreds of cannon shots, and five of them even had holes in their hulls, slowly sinking into the sea.

After Olaf’s round of cannon fire, dozens of cog ships were sacrificed, but the strait was effectively blocked, rendering the already narrow strait impassable.

After the cannon fire, the Vinland expeditionary force boarded the remaining eighteen large, deep-draft ships and passed through the Storebælt Strait, heading into the Danish inland sea.

The Vinland expeditionary force originally had over twelve thousand people. After half a month of battle, only about eight thousand five hundred remained. There were also over two thousand horses, including those from Swedish aid and looted ones, several hundred other livestock, some food supplies, and ammunition.

Olaf was well aware of his resources. When they were in Copenhagen, he had ordered all supplies from the cog ships to be transferred to the large ships, knowing that in any battle with the Danish army, the cog ships would not survive.

The Vinland fleet’s speed was not fast, but the strait blocked by the cog ships would delay the Danish navy’s speed. Olaf believed that by the time Magnus and his men caught up, he would have already left the Danish inland sea and entered the vast North Sea.

As Olaf had predicted, the fleet had been sailing for more than two hours, but there was still no sign of the Danish fleet in the telescope.

The Vinland fleet smoothly passed through the strait and continued north. However, due to the hand-drawn Danish map, the sizes of the islands and straits were inaccurate. By the afternoon, the fleet saw a coastline ahead. Olaf knew they had gone off course and ordered the fleet to dock. He sent people ashore to capture a few Danish fishermen. After interrogating them, they learned that the land ahead was the small island of Glænø in the southwest of Zealand. To pass through the strait on the western side of Zealand and head north, they needed to go west for sixty nautical miles.

Olaf sighed in relief, grateful that the detour was not too far, and adjusted the compass to correct the course.

After nightfall, the fleet finally entered the Great Belt Strait between Zealand and Funen.

Their luck seemed to run out after the first detour. As the fleet sailed north through the Great Belt Strait at night, the map’s north-south orientation did not match reality.

In the middle of the night, the fleet discovered land ahead again. Olaf sent people ashore to capture fishermen and interrogate them, learning that they had reached the Reersø Peninsula on the western side of Zealand. To reach the North Sea, they needed to adjust their course westward.

Olaf personally adjusted the angle and made detailed records in the navigation log. The Vinland fleet quickly left the Reersø Peninsula and continued.

Time passed slowly as they sailed. By dawn, Olaf estimated the distance and thought they should have left the strait.

Ten minutes later, the fleet approached a large island. After sending people to investigate, they learned it was Samsø Island, located between the Jutland Peninsula, Funen, and Zealand. From Samsø Island, they could adjust their course northeast and soon enter the vast Kattegat Strait.

Olaf ordered the fleet to continue. After a short while, they suddenly heard hurried footsteps, and Oukh appeared with a panicked expression.

“What’s wrong?” Olaf asked displeasedly.

Oukh urgently said, “Master! Legion Commander Pikku just sent someone to warn us. He discovered a large number of Danish warships pursuing our fleet from behind!”

After the fleet left the Storebælt Strait, Olaf had stationed Pikku at the rear to observe the situation every half hour and report any enemy movements.

“So soon?”

Olaf sighed and cursed, “Those Danish dogs are relentless! Damn it!”

The eighteen large ships of Vinland were not slow, and it should have been difficult for the Danish fleet to catch up. However, due to unclear maps and sea conditions, Olaf’s fleet had deviated from their course three times, causing delays and allowing the Danish navy to catch up.

The Danish navy was familiar with the sea conditions. Olaf knew it wouldn’t be long before they were caught up during the day. He understood that if they were caught, the fate of the Vinland expeditionary force would not be good. After much thought and looking at the map, he gritted his teeth and said, “Summon the six legion commanders immediately for a meeting! It seems we have no choice but to fight a desperate battle!”

Chapter 232: Strait Pursuit (2)

After a night of relentless pursuit, Kormakur was on the verge of giving up when he suddenly spotted the Icelandic pirates ahead. The black specks in the distance filled him with rage—he longed to chase them down and blast them to pieces with his cannons.

Kormakur urged his fleet onward, pushing them to their limits across the familiar waters. He estimated that within three hours, they would close in on the Icelandic pirates.

…

The command room of the Whale Watcher was silent. Olaf and six legion commanders sat around a wooden table, their expressions grim after Pikku delivered the news that the Danish navy was closing in. The atmosphere was thick with tension.

Olaf could have left Copenhagen days earlier, ensuring a safe retreat, but he had no way of knowing when Magnus would return. If he had sailed north, he risked running straight into another Danish fleet in the Sound or the Kattegat Strait, leaving no room for evasion.

In critical moments, Olaf was always cautious. After much deliberation, he had decided to take a tactical risk—stationing ships in the Sound to monitor the Danish navy’s movements. Once they detected the fleet’s return, he would lead his own ships through the Danish inland waters, slipping past the enemy’s southern advance and emerging behind them in the northern Sound.

But Olaf had not accounted for the inaccuracies in his navigational charts. The Danish pursuit had caught up, and now, with time running out, drastic measures were needed.

After a moment of silence, the red-haired Tom turned to Olaf. “General, what do you think we should do? Fight the Danish navy head-on?”

Olaf studied the faces around him. Everyone knew that engaging the Danish fleet in their current state would be suicide—like smashing eggs against stone.

After a pause, Olaf spoke in a low voice, “We can’t run much longer.”

His words sent a chill through the room. If the Danes had caught up in a single night, they would soon be upon them.

“Pikku,” Olaf said, turning to him, “what do you suggest? Any ideas are welcome.”

Pikku stood. “Our ships are too few, and our cannons and vessels are no match for the Danish navy in number or quality. If they catch us, we’re all dead. So, I propose we select a suicide squad—sacrifice one or two ships and some warriors to delay the Danish pursuit, buying time for the rest of us to escape.”

The others turned to Olaf. Brun, Polly, and Tom suspected that Pikku’s words were Olaf’s own, but as the supreme commander, Olaf could not be the one to suggest abandoning part of his force.

After a moment, Polly spoke. “I agree with Legion Commander Pikku. For the safety of the general and the majority, we must leave some behind to hold them off.”

The others murmured in agreement. Olaf then made his decision. “Each legion will select fifty warriors skilled in operating cannons and ships. We’ll leave them behind with the last two vessels—those damaged in the assault on Tre Kroner Fort.”

The brief meeting ended, and the six commanders returned to their ships to select the suicide squad.

The Vinland expeditionary force was composed mostly of native slaves and Inuit, who were more obedient and less likely to question orders. Soon, the two ships were cleared of supplies, leaving only cannons and ammunition. Three hundred warriors, drawn from the six legions, boarded the vessels and turned south toward the distant Danish fleet.

These warriors had been indoctrinated in Vinland to believe in Olaf’s divine bloodline. After their recent victories under his command, they saw the approaching Danish ships as no real threat. With Olaf’s protection, their superior vessels, and their powerful cannons, they were certain they could crush the pursuing enemy.

Olaf and the legion commanders had assured the three hundred warriors—and the rest of the fleet—that the Danish navy would crumble easily, but only if they fought smart, not recklessly.

Naval warfare with ironclad ships and cannons was entirely foreign to the Vinland warriors. They had only known combat with clubs, stones, and bone-tipped arrows. Even now, their understanding of warfare was limited to lined-up musket volleys on land. Their recent exposure to naval battles had come only under Olaf’s leadership.

If Olaf and the commanders claimed that two ships could defeat ten times their number, the slave soldiers would believe it without hesitation. Thus, the three hundred warriors charged toward the Danish fleet with fanatical zeal.

Even the eight thousand warriors aboard the remaining sixteen ships envied the three hundred, believing they were about to earn glory. Olaf, after questioning a few of them, realized their fervor stemmed from their recent victories—it had inflated their confidence to dangerous levels.

The Vinland slave warriors, unaware of the true situation, had been conditioned to believe in Olaf’s divine bloodline. Now, even if ordered to fight to the death, they would do so willingly, convinced that dying in battle would earn them a place in Valhalla.

Olaf marveled inwardly at Blackstone’s ability to cultivate the Beothuk priests and Pikku’s officers, who had, in just over half a year, turned nearly ten thousand slave warriors into loyal, fanatical followers.

As the three hundred warriors and two ships raced south to intercept the Danish navy, the remaining sixteen Vinland vessels continued northward, seemingly bound for the Kattegat Strait.

Time passed swiftly. By midday, the fleet had entered the vast North Sea. Olaf finally felt at ease.

Having studied the ancient Icelandic art of navigation since childhood, Olaf was now an experienced sailor. He consulted his navigation logs, which contained records from his father and uncle, as well as his own observations. He confirmed that they had indeed entered the Kattegat Strait. From there, following the route northwest into the North Sea would lead them back to Iceland.

No longer navigating blindly, Olaf’s confidence soared, and the fleet’s speed increased.

As the sixteen Vinland ships pressed onward, Pikku kept watch from the stern, scanning the horizon with his telescope. Hours passed, and as dusk fell, there was still no sign of the Danish fleet.

At dinner, Pikku reported to Olaf, who nodded. “Since we’ve only seen scattered Dutch and Swedish ships, it means we’ve shaken off the Danish navy. Now that we’re on the main shipping lanes, our speed has increased. The Danes won’t be able to catch us now.”

After a few words of encouragement, Olaf ordered a feast—cattle and sheep were slaughtered to reward the warriors for their efforts.

Before the invention of the train, sailing ships and steamships were the fastest means of transportation. Even centuries later, with the advent of locomotives, ships remained vital. Though their speed might not match trains, they did not require stops or slowdowns. Capable of continuous travel for twenty-four hours, they were an efficient mode of transport, facilitating trade and cultural exchange between continents.

The Vinland fleet sailed through the night. By dawn, they had passed the strait between the Jutland Peninsula and Norway, entering the open North Sea. Still, there was no sign of the Danish navy—they had truly escaped.

Olaf rose early, attended by Sally. The two stood on deck, enjoying the sunrise with buttered rye bread. After the pleasant breakfast, Olaf issued his orders: strict discipline, full speed ahead. They would push to reach Iceland in three or four days.

Chapter 233: The Aftermath of War

Olaf once again thwarted Kormakur’s pursuit by sacrificing a few ships to block his path. By the time Kormakur had destroyed the two Icelandic warships that had chased his fleet like mad dogs, he found not a single pirate had surrendered—both ships and their crews had sunk into the sea, as if they had always been part of it.

The damage inflicted by the two Icelandic warships on the Danish navy was minimal—only sixty Danish soldiers killed or wounded, and one ship severely damaged and taking on water.

When Kormakur led his fleet into the Kattegat Strait, he found the vast sea empty—Iceland’s fleet had long since vanished without a trace.

Kormakur let out a cold snort of frustration and glanced at the captain beside him before turning away. “We head to Copenhagen at once!”

The month-long siege of Reykjavik had taken a heavy toll on the Danish forces. Of the thirty-four thousand soldiers who had set out, fewer than twenty-five thousand returned, with two to three thousand of them wounded. The only part of the expeditionary force that had suffered no losses was the fleet.

But upon returning to Copenhagen, Kormakur’s pursuit of Olaf had cost him a ship—one that had been so badly damaged it could not be repaired and sank.

When Kormakur reached the Copenhagen harbor, he found the battle for Tre Kroner Fort already over. Two warships were docked at the battered fortress, clearing away enemy corpses and gathering spoils.

Kormakur summoned the officer in charge and asked, “When did the battle end? What was the situation?”

The officer saluted before replying, “The fighting ended this morning. The Icelandic pirates on the island were all yellow-skinned, somewhat resembling Arabs, but they did speak Icelandic. Nearly two thousand of them were killed, and only a dozen or so were captured.”

“And General Magnus?” Kormakur pressed.

“The general has already disembarked and gone to the palace to see His Majesty,” the officer said. “Sir, did you manage to destroy the fleeing Icelandic pirates?”

Kormakur nodded and immediately returned to his ship, ordering the fleet to Copenhagen’s harbor. He intended to personally enter the palace and pay his respects to the king. Though most of the enemy ships had escaped, he had still sunk two and killed hundreds of Icelandic warriors—enough to account for his actions.

Inside Rosenborg Palace, nobles and ministers had gathered, more lively than during usual court sessions. At the head of the hall, King Christian IV sat regally on his throne, holding his scepter, wearing the golden crown he rarely donned due to its weight, and dressed in luxurious royal robes. He smiled warmly at his subjects below.

Among the ministers and nobles, the central figure was Magnus, clad in full military regalia. He was surrounded by well-wishers, all eager to speak with him.

After Copenhagen had been besieged and attacked by the brutal Icelandic pirates for nearly half a month, Magnus had arrived like a divine savior, defeating the pirates and lifting the siege. To the citizens of Copenhagen, he was a hero.

The decision to send Magnus to invade Iceland had been made by King Christian IV and the parliament. The sudden Icelandic pirate attack on Denmark had caught everyone off guard.

Before Magnus’s return, many had cursed him for his slowness, wishing to flay him alive. But now that he had returned victorious, they hailed him as a hero—just like the European fable of the boy and the genie in the bottle.

After inquiring about Magnus’s campaign in Iceland and learning that tens of thousands of Icelanders had been killed, King Christian IV chuckled. “Though we didn’t take Iceland, how many people can that little island have? How many men? They won’t recover from this for five or ten years. In a few years, we’ll launch another campaign and completely subjugate Iceland, hanging Haldor and Olaf and all who attacked us!”

“You speak wisely, Your Majesty!”

“Though the Icelandic pirates attacked Copenhagen and Kronborg, they didn’t truly harm us. In a few years, we can prepare another expedition!”

The ministers all echoed the king’s sentiments. To the nobles and powerful figures, the thousands of Danish fishermen and farmers who had died in the Icelandic raids meant nothing. Even if tens of thousands had lost their livelihoods, it only meant more tenants for their estates—hardly a bad thing.

Soon, Kormakur arrived at the palace and expressed his concerns and regrets to King Christian IV.

The king magnanimously consoled him and inquired about the pursuit of the Icelandic pirates.

Kormakur calmly exaggerated his achievements, claiming all the ships Olaf had abandoned in the strait as his own victories.

Upon learning that Kormakur had destroyed two galleons and forty to fifty cog ships, drowning over a thousand Icelanders, King Christian IV was delighted. He rewarded Kormakur with the governorship of Norway and bestowed honors upon the other officers involved.

The Danish court thus unified its stance: though Denmark had not won the war, Iceland had not gained any advantage either. Strategically, Denmark had achieved a basic victory, depleting Iceland’s manpower and resources.

But everyone deliberately ignored the fact that Denmark had been blockaded and besieged by Icelandic pirates for over a week—the most tragic event for a European nation in the medieval era.

Inside the ducal castle of Szczecin, Chancellor Oxenstierna was busy processing official documents regarding the transfer of weapons and ammunition from the homeland. Suddenly, the door opened, and West entered, expressionless. He spoke in a low voice, “Chancellor, Magnus has lifted the siege of Copenhagen. Olaf has escaped, though not without significant losses.”

Oxenstierna paused for a moment before smiling. “He’s lucky to have gotten away. How is Magnus’s army faring? Were the losses in Iceland heavy?”

“The port of Copenhagen has only just reopened. The intelligence from my scouts won’t arrive until tonight.”

West sneered. “Haldor and Hudik are well-known. For Olaf to have been trained by them, they must be military strategists. Magnus’s mediocre talents must have cost him dearly.”

“Let’s wait for the information,” Oxenstierna said, though he shared West’s suspicions. He preferred to see the facts, which would help him adjust Sweden’s diplomatic relations with Denmark.

“Chancellor, now that Olaf has escaped, should we announce that Iceland has become a principality under the Swedish Union?”

Oxenstierna nodded. “Since Olaf has fled, we can make the announcement. But we must say that Iceland pledged allegiance to us after Olaf’s defeat and escape. Otherwise, Denmark might accuse us of sending Olaf to attack Copenhagen.”

“Understood.” West was about to leave when Oxenstierna suddenly called him back. After a moment’s thought, he said, “The negotiations between His Majesty and the Holy Roman Empire seem to be concluding. Emperor Ferdinand II is unwilling to cede suzerainty over Germany to us. I think war will resume soon. When that happens, I will likely lead troops to the front to support His Majesty. Szczecin will be left in your care. Be prepared.”

“What?” West’s heart leaped with joy. As a young noble from a knightly family, he had never imagined himself so close to becoming a governor. He hastily bowed in gratitude, pounding his chest as he vowed eternal loyalty to His Majesty and Chancellor Oxenstierna.

“You remind me of myself when I was young,” Oxenstierna said. “I was just as passionate and energetic at your age. Do well, and come to me with any difficulties.”

West, overcome with emotion, said, “Thank you, Chancellor. You’ve shown me the care of a father. I am truly grateful…”

Oxenstierna genuinely appreciated the young man. After exchanging a few more words, he nodded with a smile and dismissed West.

Chapter 234: The Second Young Master Returns to Iceland (1)

While Denmark’s Rosenborg Palace and Copenhagen were still reeling from the expulsion and elimination of some Icelandic pirates, self-soothing in the aftermath, Olaf’s fleet was already cutting through the waves of the North Sea, swiftly advancing.

Six days later, Olaf stood on the deck, spotting the familiar island with its glaciers and volcanoes in the distance.

Soon, the fleet sailed past the southern straits of Iceland, where they saw many Icelandic fishermen at work. Among them were only the elderly, women, and youths—hardly any able-bodied men in sight.

Iceland had a population of only sixty thousand, with men making up nearly half. At most, there were thirty thousand men in total. Subtracting the elderly and children, nearly half of the adult men had been conscripted as Viking raiders to fight in Reykjavik. It was only natural that those left behind in various regions were mostly the elderly, women, and children.

The Icelandic fishermen grew wary as the fleet approached, gripping their weapons and scanning the horizon. But upon seeing the white cross flag, they recognized it as one of their own and resumed their work.

Olaf waved to the fishermen with a smile, while Pikku shouted loudly, “Hello! We are soldiers of the Vinland militia! Under the leadership of Young Master Olaf, we have just attacked Copenhagen and returned victorious! Has the Danish army caused much harm to our Iceland?”

The fishermen fell silent for a moment after hearing Pikku’s words. After exchanging a few whispers, they erupted in excitement, shouting, “Long live Prince Haldor!” Their fishing boats quickly gathered around. Leading them was a tall elderly man who looked up at Olaf and said to the fishermen on the neighboring boat, “The young master on the ship is indeed very handsome, somewhat resembling Prince Haldor, especially in build. And he has yellow-skinned Vinland militia by his side—it must be Young Master Olaf!”

“Greetings, Young Master Olaf.”

Over a dozen fishermen bowed in respect. The leading fisherman then said, “Young Master Olaf, we are fishermen from Vik Town, under the management of General Haig. My name is Havr, and I am a production team leader. It is an honor to meet you, young master.”

Olaf nodded with a smile and asked, “Do you know how the battle at Big Port is going? Have our Viking warriors suffered heavy losses? Has the Danish navy invaded coastal villages, such as Vik Town?”

Havr was momentarily confused by Olaf’s rapid questions. After a pause, he said, “Young master, the town chief mentioned two days ago that General Haig hasn’t returned to Hrut Town from Big Port yet. But according to Town Chief Koten, General Haig has sent his personal guards back. They said we had already repelled the Danish invaders, but over three hundred of our two thousand Viking raiders from the southwest have fallen in battle and gone to heaven. The town chief said that General Haig will personally bring condolence money and medals in a few days, and then we will know whose children have been unfortunate.”

Olaf nodded, thinking to himself: With over three hundred dead out of two thousand Viking raiders from the southwest, the defense of Reykjavik must have been fierce and brutal.

“Has the Danish navy invaded Vik Town?”

“Not at all, young master. We are not afraid of them. If those Danish dogs dare to come, we will deal with them. You might not know, young master, but when I was young, I was quite the seafarer. Once, with a few of my companions, I seized a large French merchant ship…”

The old man vividly recounted his glorious youthful exploits. After listening for a while, Olaf waved his hand and bid farewell.

The fleet continued toward Reykjavik in the southwest of Iceland. A few hours later, they saw the harbor of Reykjavik, scarred by the ravages of war.

The two bastions of the harbor still flew the white cross flag, indicating that soldiers were still stationed inside. In the docking area, there were dozens of ships of various sizes, including two Dutch merchant ships, one British merchant ship, and the rest were Icelandic vessels. There were also two warships.

As the large fleet of warships approached the docks, the two warships fearlessly closed in, waving flags to inquire about their origins.

Moments later, upon learning that it was the second son of the Grand Duke of Vinland returning, the soldiers on the docks rushed out to form a welcoming line, led by none other than Olaf’s beloved uncle, Haig.

After the fleet docked, Olaf was the first to disembark. After a warm embrace with his uncle, Haig exclaimed in surprise, “Olaf, you’ve grown taller again! Haha, now you’re almost as tall as me. Isn’t it time you got married?”

Olaf smiled shyly and gestured to Sally, who followed behind him, saying softly, “This is a woman I obtained from the Duchy of Pomerania.”

Before Haig could fully process his shock, Olaf pulled Sally to his side and instructed, “Sally, come greet my uncle, General Haig of the Southwest Viking Raid!”

Sally, a meticulously chosen maid from the Duchy of Pomerania, had been trained in courtly etiquette since childhood. She gracefully curtsied and said, “Sally greets General Haig. I wish you good health.”

Haig laughed heartily, nodding in approval. He pointed at Olaf and whispered, “You’ve finally come of age? Your parents will be overjoyed when they find out. You’re much better than your brother. Recently, your mother has been worried sick about your brother’s marriage.”

“What’s wrong with my brother? He’s in his mid-twenties—it’s about time he got married,” Olaf said with a smile.

“Your mother has gathered all the eligible beauties from the leaders’ families for your brother to meet, but he insists on marrying Gandis’s sister.”

“Isn’t Gandis the spokesman for the Hongrode Elder family stationed in our Iceland? His family is quite good. If my brother marries someone from their family, it would be beneficial for us.”

“If only it were that simple… But that woman was previously married. She’s a widow. Her husband was killed by pirates in the West Indies, and she has a daughter who is over a year old. If your brother marries her, the honor of the Haldar family will be tarnished.”

Haig frowned and sighed.

“Then…”

Olaf knew that while Icelanders did not place as much emphasis on marital status as the Chinese and European nobles did at the time, families with good lineage still found it somewhat disgraceful to marry a woman who had been previously wed.

If it were just an ordinary Icelandic commoner or a small leader’s family, Ulf’s decision might not face much resistance. After all, Gandis’s family was indeed powerful and could offset some disadvantages.

But now, their family had become the most noble Grand Dukes of Iceland, practically equivalent to the kings of small European countries. Such a family would inevitably emulate the royal courts of mainland Europe, learning the etiquette and norms of high society, moving toward civilization and the circle of power.

As the eldest son of the Grand Duke, if Ulf were to marry a widow, it would tarnish the honor of the Grand Duke’s family and hinder his father Haldor’s path to becoming true royalty. Olaf understood his father’s political ambitions and the damage that the eldest son marrying a widow would do to the family’s reputation. Thus, he could also understand why Haldor and Katrin found it difficult to accept.

However, Ulf was a man of strong and resilient character. If he had truly set his heart on that woman, it would be hard to change his mind. Olaf suspected that his elder brother might feel threatened by his own claim to the inheritance and thus insisted on marrying Gandis’s sister to strengthen his position through this alliance.

Olaf believed that if his brother wasn’t purely in love with Gandis’s sister, he was likely drawn to her family’s influence. After all, the Gandis family was one of the most prominent in Denmark, with a power that no Icelandic leader could match.

The more Olaf thought about it, the more plausible it seemed. His brother might be using the Gandis family’s influence to counterbalance his own claim to the inheritance. After all, his father Haldor had openly stated that he intended to pass the position to him.

Of course, it was also possible that his brother both wanted to utilize the Gandis family’s power as external support and was genuinely in love with his sister.

Olaf thought that if his brother truly loved that woman, he could help him. After all, brotherly love ran deep.

For Olaf, he already controlled the six militias of Vinland and the vast lands of Vinland. His father’s current development goals were focused on Iceland, so in the future, he could focus on developing the entire Vinland region, including Labrador, the southeastern Great Lakes, and Vinland Island. Olaf believed that within ten years, Vinland would explode with immense potential, possessing ten or twenty times the wealth, population, and resources of Iceland. With Vinland as his foundation, Olaf feared no storms.

In Olaf’s eyes, his brother Ulf did not possess the strength to challenge his inheritance of their father’s position. Moreover, his own ambitions were not limited to the small island of Iceland but extended to the vast expanse of North America. If his brother truly wanted to be the Grand Duke of Iceland, he could leave Iceland to him. Of course, Olaf was determined to keep Vinland firmly in his grasp.

Chapter 235: The Second Young Master Returns to Iceland (2)

Olaf and Haig were in conversation when the sound of hooves approached. Olaf looked over and saw his father, Haldor, his mother, Katrin, and his relatives—Ulf, Half, Gerny, and others.

Olaf embraced each of his family members in turn, then briefly introduced Sally. Katrin happily hugged Sally, and Haig asked, “Earlier, Olaf said Sally was someone he brought back from Pomerania. How did you end up there? And you brought Vinland’s army with you? Are you here to support Iceland in battle?”

Olaf smiled and nodded, then recounted his experiences over the past few months.

Upon learning that Olaf had immediately assembled an army in Vinland upon hearing of Iceland’s crisis, then traveled to Holland to engage in trade and gather military funds while gathering intelligence, Haldor couldn’t help but burst into laughter.

But as the story continued—how Olaf, upon learning that the Danish army had already begun attacking Iceland, realized that sending Vinland’s army to support Iceland would be futile, like throwing eggs against a rock or moths into a flame—he decided to lead his forces directly to Copenhagen. He captured Helsingør, Kronborg, and Kalvebod Fort in succession, blockaded the harbor, and bombarded Copenhagen. As Haldor, Haig, Katrin, Ulf, and the others listened, their expressions grew strange—a mix of excitement, gratitude, and lingering fear.

“Good lad!”

“Little brother, you’re amazing!”

“We owe you everything!”

…

Several of them affectionately hugged, patted, and kissed Olaf, overwhelming him. He quickly broke free and asked, “What’s wrong?”

Haig laughed heartily. “You’re a clever one! So smart! You were right—Magnus’s army is strong, and after more than a week of fierce fighting, we nearly couldn’t hold Iceland. Thanks to you attacking Copenhagen, they panicked and retreated. Haha, brother, we’ve been puzzled these past few days about why Magnus didn’t press deeper into the Central District after taking the East District. Now we know—it’s because you attacked Copenhagen! Magnus had to retreat when his own backyard was on fire!”

Haig and the others finally understood why Magnus’s army had withdrawn so swiftly after occupying the East District. Everyone praised Olaf’s brilliant strategy of attacking Copenhagen. Even Ulf, looking at his younger brother—who was nearly as tall as him—seemed nervous and awkward.

…

Inside the Grand Duke’s Manor in Reykjavik’s Central District, the air was filled with music—harps, lyres, and mouth organs played in harmony, interspersed with the melodies of flutes. The lively Nordic and traditional Icelandic tunes filled the manor with joy, and even the seabirds perched on the rooftops and trees joined in the merriment.

After Olaf led the Vinland army to Iceland, Haldor immediately sent for Hudik, Kadir, Hoskuld, Heiner, and others, who were overseeing repairs and restoring livelihoods in the East District. He also had Ulf arrange accommodations for the six thousand soldiers and two thousand horses, along with hundreds of cattle and sheep from Vinland.

By midday, Olaf had returned to the Grand Duke’s Manor with his parents and relatives. Haldor was overjoyed and praised Olaf’s intelligence and courage, personally recounting to Heiner and the others how Olaf had “surrounded Wei to save Zhao,” rescuing Iceland and its people.

Everyone praised Olaf’s actions, and at the evening banquet, Icelandic bards, musicians, dancers, and the wives of the leading families from Big Port were invited. Olaf became the center of attention.

A quick-witted bard even composed a song on the spot about Olaf’s deeds.

Inside and outside the manor, all other sounds gradually faded, leaving only the bard’s voice accompanied by the lyre. The song was so captivating that even the guards outside the castle listened in rapt attention.

Amid the toasts, Olaf quickly became drunk. When he woke the next morning, it was already past eight o’clock.

Sally wiped Olaf’s hands and face with a warm towel, then softly said, “Get up and eat something. The Grand Duchess sent over a pot of oatmeal and fish porridge.”

Olaf reached out and gently touched Sally’s smooth face, then got up, put on his robe, and sat at the small table to eat two bowls of porridge.

The warm porridge revived him. As he set down the porcelain bowl and was about to speak, he suddenly heard Pikku outside say, “Master, Lady Katrin asks you to come over.”

Olaf stood up and turned to say, “Sally, don’t go out for now. Familiarize yourself with the manor. I’ll speak to my mother, and she’ll arrange things properly for you.”

Sally obediently nodded, but the deep glow in her eyes dimmed.

Olaf quickly made his way to the second floor of the manor’s rear courtyard, where he found his mother watching little Arthur take his first steps with Lorin.

“Our great hero has arrived,” Lorin said with a smile.

Katrin gently touched Olaf’s face and said, “You’ve worked hard, my child.”

Olaf picked up Arthur and played with him for a moment before sitting on the sofa and asking, “Mother, what did you call me for?”

“Sigh… Olaf, you’ve heard about your brother’s marriage, haven’t you? He insists on marrying Gandis’s sister. Normally, your father and I shouldn’t interfere, but that girl has been married before and has a child. This might not be good for our family.”

Katrin sighed deeply before finally asking, “Olaf, you won’t disappoint your mother, will you?”

Olaf looked at his mother’s cautious expression and smiled. “Mother, just say what you mean. Sally is a maid I brought back from Pomerania. I am the son of Iceland’s Grand Duke and the Governor of Vinland. My marriage will naturally be to someone of suitable status. You can rest assured—I know the difference.”

Katrin let out a long sigh of relief. Lorin laughed and said, “See? I told you Olaf is mature and knows what he’s doing. Now you can relax.”

Katrin nodded. “Your father told me last night that he has decided to enact a law. Based on your great service in saving Iceland, he will officially designate you as his heir. If you also disregarded the family’s reputation, he would be deeply disappointed. Fortunately…”

Olaf nodded and asked, “Will my brother be very upset when he finds out?”

“But your father said that Iceland is poor, and Vinland is also backward. Our heir needs someone as capable and intelligent as you. For the sake of the family, we have no choice but to disappoint Ulf.”

Olaf fell silent for a moment before asking, “Where is Father?”

“He went to inspect the post-war reconstruction in the East District. He wanted to take you with him but thought you needed more rest, so he went alone.”

Olaf felt a warmth in his heart. “I have something to discuss with him. If you have nothing else, Mother, I’ll take my leave.”

Olaf quickly returned to his room, retrieved a box, and left the manor.

He was about to ride his reindeer, Haysen, to the East District when Pikku tried to follow, but Olaf waved him off.

As soon as he left the manor, Olaf saw Heiner riding a sturdy horse. Heiner smiled and asked, “Where are you going?”

“I have something to discuss with my father,” Olaf said, then kicked Haysen, bringing the reindeer closer to Heiner. The two men shook hands warmly.

“What’s the matter? Need my help?”

“Actually, I do,” Olaf leaned in and whispered, “When I attacked Copenhagen, I made an agreement with the Kingdom of Sweden. They can provide us with material support and various forms of aid, such as recognizing us as a nation, but we must become a tributary state of Sweden.”

“That’s great!” Heiner said with a smile. “Sweden is the strongest country in Europe right now, and they’re Denmark’s neighbor. With their help, we won’t have to worry about Danish attacks in the future.”

As he spoke, Heiner’s expression suddenly changed. He lowered his voice and asked, “You haven’t already signed the agreement with Sweden, have you?”

Olaf nodded. Heiner sighed. “You’re so bold! Making such a decision without Haldor’s approval. Even if it’s a good thing, it’s still against the rules. What if he gets angry with you?”

Olaf laughed. “That’s why I came to you. Help me explain later. Father trusts you the most. If you speak up for me, he won’t be angry.”

“Alright,” Heiner agreed readily. “I’ll speak for you, but I can’t guarantee it’ll work.”

“Heiner, why are you talking nonsense with me? Who taught you to speak like a bureaucrat? Hehe, just say something—it’ll help. I’ll buy you a drink later.”

Olaf grinned and nudged Heiner’s elbow, laughing.

Chapter 236: Iceland’s Great Savior

Olaf and Heiner arrived in the East District, where the once-luxurious residential area of Big Port had been reduced to ruins. Crumbling houses were everywhere, and Viking warriors and citizens worked together to clear the debris, dismantle dangerous structures, and build new homes.

“Yesterday, you mentioned that our five Viking legions lost over two thousand men and four thousand were wounded in the defense battle. I found it hard to believe, but seeing this, it’s clear the fighting was brutal!” Olaf exclaimed in astonishment.

Heiner recalled the fierce battle from ten days ago and said, “If we hadn’t stockpiled enough supplies and weapons in advance, if our soldiers hadn’t been fearless in the face of death, the East District would have fallen long ago. We would have been forced to retreat into the island’s interior with our remaining troops.”

As they turned a corner past a dilapidated villa, they saw Haldor, dressed in formal attire, speaking with Haig, Ulf, Hudik, and a few others.

Seeing Olaf approach, Haldor waved with a smile. “Come over here.”

Olaf and Heiner dismounted and joined Haldor. Olaf greeted Hudik and the others before asking, “If we rebuild the entire East District, won’t that drain Iceland’s treasury? Do the local councils agree?”

Haldor laughed heartily and replied, “How much money does Iceland have in its treasury? Half the cost of rebuilding the East District will come from the Duke’s Manor’s private funds. In this great battle against the Danish army, our Icelandic warriors fought bravely and suffered heavy losses. The East District has been reduced to ruins. As the Grand Duke of Iceland, how can I not do my utmost to compensate the people?”

“The Grand Duke is benevolent!” The guards behind Haldor praised admiringly.

Heiner stepped forward, frowning. “The Grand Duke is indeed benevolent, but Magnus’s retreat was because Olaf led troops to attack Copenhagen, not because Iceland’s own strength could rival Denmark’s. Next time Denmark attacks, they will be fully prepared. We…”

Heiner deliberately left the rest unsaid, allowing everyone to imagine the dire consequences. Hudik’s eyelids twitched as he said, “Damn it! Why don’t we just move all the Icelanders to Vinland?”

“But would the people of Iceland agree?” Kadir, originally a leader of the First District and most familiar with the Icelanders’ thoughts, shook his head. “If we force the Icelanders to relocate to Vinland, their morale might collapse…”

“This…”

Ulf glanced at Olaf and Heiner, then whispered, “Father, we could send Heiner and Uncle Hudik to England and Germany to seek recognition from European nations. If someone acknowledges the existence of the Icelandic Free Republic, Denmark will hesitate to attack us again. If we can form an alliance with a country, that would be even better. We should bring some gold and treasures to bribe the high officials and nobles.”

Haldor sighed deeply and said, “It’s difficult! Iceland is not like the duchies in Germany. Our land is barren, our population is sparse, and we have no gold or silver mines. Which country would help us?”

Heiner chuckled lightly and said, “Your Highness, Olaf has already made contact with Sweden during the attack on Copenhagen. He even met the Swedish Chancellor, Oxenstierna. They have reached a preliminary agreement for an alliance.”

“Oh?” Haldor’s eyes gleamed with excitement as he asked, “Olaf, what happened?”

Heiner cleared his throat slightly, and Olaf instantly understood. He said, “Father, Denmark is a strong Nordic country and was once the suzerain of the union of Sweden, Norway, and Denmark. But now, Gustavus Adolphus II has risen to prominence. Sweden first defeated Poland and then swept through southern Germany. Sweden has now become a major power, while Denmark has suffered consecutive defeats in Germany and at our hands. Sweden likely wants to suppress Denmark and take the position of the strongest Nordic country.”

Olaf laid the groundwork before continuing, “When I attacked Copenhagen, Swedish ships took the initiative to contact me. Their captain, West, is a Swedish official who came to Denmark for both business and intelligence gathering. Since Gustavus Adolphus II personally led the army deep into Bavaria in southern Germany, Sweden is vulnerable. West was sent by Chancellor Oxenstierna to understand the movements of neighboring countries. When West discovered our large army, he took the initiative to contact us and expressed a willingness to help us connect with Chancellor Oxenstierna to see if the two countries could cooperate. However, he proposed that we become a vassal of Sweden, like the Duchy of Pomerania, the Duchy of Mecklenburg-Schwerin, the Duchy of Güstrow, the Duchy of Prussia, and the city-states like Beck. I was worried that Iceland would lose its sovereignty, which would not be in everyone’s best interest, so I did not agree…”

Olaf finished speaking and looked at everyone. This was a deliberate pause he had left to give himself a way out.

Heiner skillfully played his role, sighing loudly, “Oh! What’s the big deal? Iceland’s territory, population, resources, and historical and cultural heritage are far inferior to the duchies in Germany. Even they are vassals of the Holy Roman Empire and the Swedish Kingdom. There’s no shame in us becoming a vassal! Moreover, becoming a vassal of Sweden means Denmark can no longer attack us at will. If Christian IV wants to annex Iceland again, he will have to go to war with Sweden and defeat Gustavus Adolphus II. Is that possible? Your Highness, don’t you think Olaf is being too cautious?”

As Heiner spoke, he also asked Haldor a question. Under Heiner’s guidance, everyone understood the pros and cons, and their faces showed regret. Only Ulf’s expression of regret was mixed with a hint of relief, as if Olaf’s failure to achieve another great feat made his position as heir more secure.

Haldor wanted to say something about Olaf, but he knew that Olaf had already done so much for Iceland and made so many contributions. So he waved his hand and said, “Although Olaf was a bit too cautious, we will have another chance to join the Swedish Kingdom. I think we can send Haig and Heiner to Sweden after some time to meet Chancellor Oxenstierna.”

Heiner raised an eyebrow and smiled, “Your Highness, don’t be in a hurry. It seems Olaf has more to say.”

“What else do you want to say? Don’t blame yourself, child.” Haldor looked curiously at Olaf’s strange expression and comforted him.

Olaf suppressed a smile and said, “Actually, I ended up cooperating with Sweden. Because West came back after a couple of days and found me again. I told Chancellor Oxenstierna that I agreed to Iceland not becoming a vassal like the others, but a tributary state, so we could have a bit more sovereignty. Similarly, their help to us would be lessened. However, as long as we agreed, Sweden could still provide some assistance and acknowledge our status as a nation independent from Denmark. The condition is that we recognize Sweden as our suzerain and accept the appointment of a governor by Sweden in the future…”

Olaf hesitated, and Haldor urgently asked, “That’s great! Did you agree?”

Olaf saw that everyone was looking expectant, so he nodded and said, “The opportunity was rare, and I didn’t have time to report to you, Father, so I took the liberty of agreeing.”

“Good!”

“Herut’s descendants should be decisive!”

“You did well.”

Everyone laughed heartily, and then Haig laughed and said, “No wonder Sally is the one you brought back from the Duchy of Pomerania. Did you bring her back when you went to sign the alliance?”

“Yes, Uncle.”

Olaf laughed heartily and said, “At that time, I followed West to Szczecin to meet Oxenstierna and, as the Icelandic envoy and Governor of Vinland, signed the alliance treaty with him to join the Swedish United Kingdom on behalf of Iceland. I have brought back the alliance document and the medal. Take a look.”

Olaf took out a box from the leather bag on Haysen’s back, opened it, and took out the alliance document and the golden medal of the Duke of Iceland.

Haldor looked at them lovingly several times before passing them to others. He patted Olaf on the shoulder and said, “So what if the Icelandic Free Republic becomes the Duchy of Iceland? Haha, as long as Iceland is safe, even if it becomes a county, it’s fine! Olaf, you did well. Not only did you save Iceland, but you also resolved the endless crises Iceland would have faced in the future. You are truly a treasure bestowed upon me by our ancestors, the great savior of Iceland!”

Due to Olaf and Heiner’s seamless cooperation, no one realized that Olaf had acted first and reported later. Instead, they thought he was brave and decisive, fighting for Iceland’s future interests, and everyone admired him.

Europeans and Nordics, unlike the Celestial Empire, which values face over substance, Haldor and the others had no reservations about Iceland becoming a tributary state of Sweden. They even felt that being able to ally with the strongest European power, Sweden, and becoming a tributary state was already Olaf’s achievement. So everyone focused on the fact that Sweden had taken on the enmity and crisis between Iceland and Denmark, making Iceland temporarily safe.

Everyone was very happy. After Haldor finished speaking, Haig, Hudik, Kadir, and the others also excitedly shouted, “Olaf! Iceland’s great savior!”

“Olaf, the blessing of our ancestors!”

“Olaf! God’s masterpiece!”

“Olaf, Iceland’s great savior!”

Chapter 237: The Heir of Iceland

Olaf and Heiner quickly returned to the Duke’s Manor from the East District. Back in their room, they drank beer and discussed the state of European affairs.

Regarding the ongoing pan-European war—what Olaf knew as the “Thirty Years’ War”—Heiner had a clear understanding. He believed that while Gustavus Adolphus II was a once-in-a-millennium genius, Sweden was still a fledgling northern European nation. Its national strength and population paled in comparison to the southern powers. The sparse population of the north meant that even with his exceptional abilities, Gustavus lacked the decisive force to end the war in one stroke.

Once the Holy Roman Emperor raised and deployed massive armies from Austria and other regions, and Spain made its move, Gustavus Adolphus II would surely face setbacks. The war would then descend into chaos.

Though Heiner also held little regard for the Holy Roman Empire and believed the Protestant Union had a greater chance of victory—especially with England and France not yet fully committed—he was certain this war would not end anytime soon.

Olaf had always admired Heiner, considering him a brilliant mind lost in the river of history. His governance of Vinland had already proven his extraordinary talents.

After hearing Heiner’s analysis, Olaf recalled his own memories of the Thirty Years’ War and sighed deeply. “Heiner, your grasp of Europe’s international situation is nearly flawless. Once Vinland rises, I will ensure your abilities have a proper stage to shine.”

Heiner was deeply grateful for Olaf’s trust and respect. He gripped Olaf’s hand firmly and said in a low voice, “I believe that day is not far off.”

…

The day after Olaf returned to Iceland, Haldor ordered the leaders from across Iceland to gather in Big Port for a meeting.

A week later, with all the leaders assembled, Haldor announced in the assembly hall before the Duke’s Manor that Iceland had entered into an alliance with the Kingdom of Sweden. He revealed Olaf’s attack on Copenhagen and how it had saved Iceland, explaining that the “Icelandic Free Republic” would now be renamed the “Duchy of Iceland,” and his own title would change from Grand Duke to Duke.

The news stunned everyone. They praised Olaf’s bravery and Haldor’s wise leadership, expressing their fervent loyalty to Duke Haldor.

Seeing the high spirits of the crowd, Haldor delivered another piece of news: due to Olaf’s contributions, he had decided to designate Olaf as the heir to both the Duchy of Iceland and the Vinland territories.

Haldor’s status, identity, and prestige made it difficult for anyone to oppose his decisions. Olaf’s achievements and displayed abilities were rare talents seen only once in centuries. The leaders and council members did not believe the Duke had violated ancestral traditions; instead, they felt that given Iceland’s current complex situation, the people truly needed an heir as capable as Olaf.

After unanimous approval from the assembly and the leaders, the position of heir to the Duchy of Iceland shifted from Ulf to Olaf. Ulf, his face ashen, left the assembly hall without a word.

Though Haldor was somewhat angry, he understood his eldest son’s mood and decided to have his wife comfort him.

For the past week, Olaf had been helping Haig, Hudik, and others rebuild the East District. Initially, he had ordered the legion commanders to assist the Viking soldiers with their respective troops, but coordination issues and minor frictions arose. Even the Viking generals could not ensure the Vinland legions followed orders without hesitation.

In the end, Olaf had to step in personally to maximize the efficiency of the Vinland legions.

Amidst the bustle, Olaf saw his brother Ulf riding a horse with a grim expression, a rifle on his back, accompanied by a few guards. Olaf hurried forward and asked with a smile, “Ulf, where are you going? Hunting?”

Ulf scoffed coldly. “Olaf, don’t pretend. You’ve gotten what you wanted. You’ve finally become Father’s designated heir, taking away my inheritance. I hope that when you become the Grand Duke of Iceland, you’ll remember our brotherly bond!”

Ulf turned to leave, but Olaf furrowed his brows and stopped him. “What’s wrong? Did Father say something? Brother, you know many things are beyond our control. And I never intended to take anything from you.”

“What’s the point of saying that now!” Ulf pushed Olaf’s hand away and rode off, his voice carrying in the wind. “I can’t even choose my own marriage, and now you’re taking my inheritance too. Do you all look down on me, Ulf?”

Olaf’s heart sank, and he bit his lip, but in the end, he said nothing.

After arranging his tasks, Olaf entrusted them to Tom and Ilugi before riding Haysen back to the Duke’s Manor.

By then, the Althing had already concluded, and the leaders and council members were leaving. Many approached Olaf with smiles, offering greetings.

“Olaf, thank you for everything you’ve done for Iceland!”

“Iceland’s great savior! The Haldor family is truly heroic. The Duke’s decision to make you his heir is wise indeed!”

“I am Erik, the councilor of Stathar. They call me Ironhead Erik. It’s a pleasure to meet you today, Prince Olaf. I hope you’ll have the chance to inspect our work in Stathar!”

Olaf responded to the overwhelming enthusiasm of the leaders and council members, finally extricating himself from the crowd after some time.

Haldor chuckled and whispered to Heiner beside him, “Olaf is still too young, but he should start interacting with Iceland’s leaders, big and small. It will help his future.”

Heiner smiled lightly. “With Your Grace’s guidance, Olaf will surely become a worthy heir.”

“Father, what did you say?” Olaf asked, leading Haysen to Haldor.

Haldor smiled. “I merely announced that you would be my heir. It seems everyone is quite welcoming.”

“So? Are you satisfied?”

Olaf was genuinely moved, but he hesitated. “What about Ulf? I saw him riding away. Should we comfort him?”

Haldor sighed. “Europe is at war, and the situation could change at any moment. Iceland cannot afford another great war. We need the most intelligent and capable heir to help me govern Iceland and protect it and Vinland in case of emergencies. Ulf is decent, but he doesn’t have your skills in diplomacy, economics, and internal governance. Iceland doesn’t need a warring general; what we lack most is a wise ruler. For Iceland’s sake, we have to ask him to make this sacrifice.”

Olaf thought for a moment and said, “Father, I think you shouldn’t make Ulf lose too much face. If possible, perhaps he could inherit Iceland, and I could inherit Vinland. That way, our family’s rule would still be secure.”

Haldor shook his head firmly. “No. Vinland and Iceland are too far apart. If they each have their own ruler, they’ll become two separate nations in a generation or two. I won’t allow our lands to be divided. I’m glad you’re so kind, Olaf, but if you want to compensate Ulf, you can only grant him some land in Vinland or even a duchy. But that’s something you can decide after you become the Duke of Iceland.”

Seeing his father’s resolve, Olaf did not press further. The two quickly returned to the Duke’s Manor and asked Katrin to persuade Ulf. Katrin promised to do her best.

But as night fell, Ulf still had not returned home. Haldor grew worried and sent several squads to search for him.

By midnight, the soldiers brought back a drunken Ulf. Upon questioning, they learned that after shooting a few seabirds, Ulf had found a tavern and stayed there. If Haldor’s soldiers hadn’t found him, he might have kept drinking.

Haldor and Katrin tenderly had Ulf put to bed. The next morning, Ulf woke early but still refused to speak to Olaf, even after Katrin told him that Olaf was willing to share Iceland with him.

Ulf felt no gratitude. He saw Olaf’s offer as charity, and his heart still burned with anger and humiliation, though he had no outlet for his rage.

Chapter 238: Saving Emperor Gustavus Adolphus II

The news that Olaf was the heir to Iceland, along with his attack on Copenhagen, the transformation of the Icelandic Free Republic into the Icelandic Duchy, the Grand Duke becoming a Duke, and Iceland becoming part of the Swedish United Kingdom, spread rapidly through the leaders and elders returning to their respective regions. Gradually, the news reached even the most remote mountainous areas of Iceland.

All Icelanders learned of the Haldor family’s efforts to preserve Iceland. They also learned that Prince Olaf had avenged the centuries of oppression by the Danes on behalf of the Icelandic people. Almost all Icelanders approved of Duke Haldor’s decision and couldn’t help but shout, “Olaf is Iceland’s great savior!”

The new song “Iceland’s Great Savior,” sung by the bards, also spread widely across Iceland as the story fermented and spread.

Every lovesick Icelandic girl admired Prince Olaf in Big Port, and every brave Icelandic boy worshipped the invincible Prince Olaf. Olaf’s reputation in Iceland quickly rivaled that of Duke Haldor, making him one of the only three living legends in Iceland’s centuries-long history.

The saga epic of the Hrut family was also being continued by many Icelandic writers and poets. However, in the new chapters, Haig’s role became smaller, and the protagonists became Haldor and Olaf.

After living in the Duke’s Manor for over half a month, with the assistance of the six legions from Vinland, the reconstruction of the East District was initially completed.

Dutch, British, and Swedish merchant ships began to appear in the harbor of Reykjavik, exchanging southern goods such as fabrics, clocks, cosmetics, coffee, and porcelain from the Far East for Icelandic resources like sheepskins, wool, dried fish, malt sugar, and liquor, injecting new vitality into Iceland’s economy.

Seeing Iceland’s improving conditions, Olaf recalled that Vinland and Greenland had been without leaders for half a year and over three months, respectively. He called Pikku and several legion commanders to prepare to send Pikku and Tom back first.

Tom and the others did not dare to oppose Olaf’s request, but Pikku wanted to continue following his master. The environment and climate of Greenland made it impossible for external enemies to invade, and the subjugated Inuit people had no ability or opportunity to unite and rebel. Even if he didn’t return for a year or two, Greenland would still be under the governance of Olaf, the Governor of Vinland.

After some thought, Olaf agreed with Pikku’s idea. After discussing with everyone, he temporarily sent Brun and Polly back to Vinland, while he and the others would stay a little longer.

Polly and Brun had both married and started families in Iceland last year. They expressed their desire to bring their wives to Vinland. Olaf thought for a moment and smiled, “Bring them along. Don’t we have many Icelanders who have received land and servants in Vinland? I’ll talk to the Duke later and see if we can let these people go to Vinland as well. They need to receive their own land and servants!”

With the matter settled, Olaf went to find Haldor and expressed his thoughts. Haldor was discussing with Heiner the plan to establish a national fishing company to boost fishing production this year. After all, Iceland’s resources were scarce, and stimulating the economy could only be done by developing the most abundant resource—fish.

After hearing Olaf’s words, Heiner smiled slightly and thought to himself, “Olaf is really cunning. Vinland has a small population, and he is indeed eyeing Iceland.”

Haldor didn’t think much and nodded directly, “What you said makes sense. We promised them land and servants, and we need to fulfill that promise. I will order the warriors and leaders who have received land and servants in Vinland to report their names as soon as possible. We will send them to Vinland in batches to receive their land and servants and arrange their settlement!”

“Okay, Father.” Olaf nodded and then asked, “I heard you are planning to withdraw the Viking legions?”

“You heard about it? Yes, the daily consumption of so many people in Big Port is not a small number. Now that the East District has been built, and Denmark won’t attack us again, we can let them go home!”

Olaf smiled slightly and asked, “Your idea is good, but Father, haven’t you thought about Iceland participating in the pan-European war to enhance our international status?”

After a pause, Olaf continued, “Now Iceland has nearly twenty thousand troops and dozens of large and small warships. Our strength is not weak. We are now part of the Swedish Kingdom. Emperor Gustavus Adolphus II is deeply engaged in battle with the Habsburgs in Germany. Shouldn’t we send troops to help him and take the opportunity to make a fortune in Europe?”

Haldor thought for a moment and said, “You mean helping Gustavus Adolphus II fight an easy battle? Shouldn’t we consult with Sweden before sending troops?”

“Time is tight, and the situation on the battlefield is changeable. Iceland is too far from Europe. If we consult with Sweden, we might not be able to do anything!”

Olaf coldly snorted and said, “Last night, I dreamed of the ancestor Hrut. He told me that the Habsburgs have employed the famous southern general Wallenstein. Gustavus Adolphus II will soon be injured and killed in the decisive battle against Wallenstein. I received a revelation. We must send troops, Father. We must go to save Gustavus Adolphus II. Then Iceland will become the closest ally of Sweden. Only if the Lion King of Sweden lives will Sweden truly be the strongest country in Northern Europe. Only then can Iceland rely on Sweden for peaceful development and even receive Sweden’s help!”

Olaf invoked the ancestor Hrut, and Haldor had to believe him. Moreover, Olaf had never lied in all these years and had never deceived him on important matters. He firmly believed that Hrut had foreseen the future and pointed out a path to strength for Iceland.

“The rise of Sweden is indeed due to the efforts of Emperor Gustavus Adolphus II. If this Lion King dies, Sweden’s momentum will surely be hindered, and it might even retreat or be defeated by Germany. Our opportunity to rely on Sweden to suppress Denmark and seek peaceful development will also be lost…”

Heiner appropriately helped Haldor analyze the situation. After saying a few words, Haldor suddenly changed his expression and said in a deep voice, “Alright! I agree to Iceland sending troops to assist Sweden in battle! However, Olaf, how many people do you think we should send? Or did the ancestor Hrut give any clear indication?”

Olaf thought for a while and said, “The ancestor didn’t specify, but he said we only need to save Gustavus Adolphus II. Whether we can defeat the Holy Roman Empire’s army is Sweden’s business. We only need to save Gustavus Adolphus II’s life when he is in danger!”

Olaf’s words had a hint of the “thick black pot repair method.” It took Haldor a moment to understand the meaning. Heiner, however, thought of “The Prince” and agreed, “Iceland is a small country. We don’t have a chance to earn Sweden’s respect, but saving Gustavus Adolphus II’s life will make us Sweden’s benefactors or close partners!”

Haldor nodded and asked, “Heiner, Olaf, tell me how we should send troops. How many people are appropriate? When should we send them? We need to make a plan in advance.”

Chapter 239: The Cultural Identity of the Viking Raid

Olaf and Heiner exchanged glances. Heiner tentatively offered a few suggestions, and Olaf added his own thoughts. After both had spoken, Haldor expressed his approval.

Twenty minutes later, Olaf reviewed the plan in his mind before speaking: “Our goal is to rescue Gustavus Adolphus II. We’ll select a small, elite force of cavalry, keeping the numbers under three thousand. The fleet should also be kept minimal. Once we reach Europe, we’ll enter through the port of Bremerhaven in northwestern Germany, near the Dutch border, and proceed along the Weser River deep into German territory. Both Bremen and the neighboring city-states are watching the conflict between Sweden and Austria. Since we’re merely passing through to join the battle, and the outcome is still uncertain, they won’t dare to obstruct us. We can travel by waterway to Hanover, then disembark and ride to the Electorate of Saxony—that’s where Gustavus Adolphus II and Wallenstein are engaged in battle!”

Haldor clapped his hands together upon hearing this and laughed: “Excellent! I’ll immediately issue orders to the Viking generals to assemble the cavalry.”

In Iceland, the highest ruling class was never the aristocracy or gentry found in other European nations, but rather the five Viking Raid generals. As for the leaders of the parliament and the mayors of various towns, they all answered to the generals of their respective Viking Raid districts. Thus, whatever Haldor wished to do, whether it was starting a war or anything else, could be accomplished without going through parliament or congress. The Viking Raid could issue mobilization orders directly, rendering parliament and congress powerless before them.

Olaf had previously studied in detail the system his father and Hudik had devised, where the Icelandic parliament and congress coexisted with the Viking Raid. He had marveled at their ingenuity, seeing parallels to the military government of Myanmar and Aung San Suu Kyi.

Now, as Haldor declared his intention to mobilize through the Viking Raid, Olaf knew that a elite cavalry force would be swiftly assembled. He had complete confidence in his father and uncles’ abilities. While they might not excel in economic or civil development—being more familiar with fishing, farming, and herding—their keen sense for war and combat prowess rivaled even the renowned generals of Europe. In some areas, they might even surpass them.

Soon, Big Port bustled not only with trade but also with the urgent preparation of warships and military supplies.

Under Haldor’s personal selection, eleven brand-new warships were chosen. Each was equipped with cannons, fitted with rams, and boasted new sails—undoubtedly the finest among Iceland’s fifty to sixty warships.

As they awaited the army’s assembly, groups from various Viking Raid districts arrived in Big Port to receive land and slaves from Vinland.

Originally, Haldor had entrusted Ulf with managing this task, but Ulf had been in low spirits lately, spending his days hunting and whaling. Olaf gave up on accompanying his family and instead took charge of counting personnel and arranging ships.

Within days, over seven thousand Icelanders were ready. They boarded ships and followed Polly and Brun across the Atlantic to Vinland.

Before Polly’s departure, Haldor instructed him to inform the elders, including Hongrode, of their planned summer visit to Vinland. He also tasked Polly with facilitating Hongrode’s procurement and sale of Vinland’s specialties, urging him to notify all governors upon his return. Though Olaf was the governor of Vinland, Haldor was the supreme leader. Polly merely glanced at Olaf, and seeing no reaction, hastily agreed.

After bidding farewell to Polly and the others, within a week, the four Viking Raid generals returned to Big Port with their cavalry.

The streets of Reykjavik suddenly teemed with soldiers, but the citizens were unfazed, even comforting the startled Dutch and English merchants with smiles.

This time, Haig, Hoskuld, Kadir, and Hudik not only brought cavalry but also local scholars and poets.

After the Viking Raid armies returned with honor and good news, as tales spread across Iceland, the people, who had grown up with the sagas, wanted to celebrate their hard-won victory with a festival or some commemorative event. With the help of enthusiastic bards and leaders, they unified their opinions and decided to give each Viking Raid legion a name reflecting local characteristics. After all, names like “Southeast Viking Raid” or “Northeast Viking Raid” had never been particularly appealing.

The enthusiastic citizens of the four Raid districts and Big Port submitted a petition. Haldor, upon learning of this, deemed it a good idea and handed it over to the parliament for discussion. In a few days, the prepared bards, bishops, and leaders submitted a list of five new names for the Viking Raid districts, hoping for Haldor’s approval.

Haldor summoned Heiner and Olaf to his office, then took out the paper and smiled: “Our Icelandic people have rich imaginations. These names are excellent, incorporating our ancient legends and the remnants of our polytheistic beliefs. I think they’re great. Take a look.”

Olaf and Heiner leaned in to read. The paper bore several lines of elegant Icelandic script, clearly written by a learned individual.

“The Southeast Viking Raid can be renamed the White-Robed Divine Messenger Raid. The Northeast Viking Raid can become the Black Dragon Raid. The Southwest Viking Raid can be the Black Bull Raid. The Northwest Viking Raid can be the White Eagle Raid. And the old Viking Raid of Big Port, being the foundation and root of the Viking Raid, can be renamed the Golden King’s Shield Raid…”

Olaf recalled the ancient Icelandic myths that spoke of this volcanic island plagued by disasters. However, because the four corners of the island were each guarded by a spirit lord, Iceland had become a peaceful home for its people.

According to legend, the Vatnajökull Glacier in southeastern Iceland was the embodiment of a guardian spirit—a white-robed elder. The guardian spirit of the northeast was a black dragon that breathed fire and lava, and the Godafoss waterfall in the northeastern mountains was said to be the dragon’s resting place.

In the southwestern corner of Iceland, the guardian spirit was a golden-horned black bull that lived in the pure waters of Lake Kleifarvatn and the northwestern canyons, appearing whenever the white mist over the lake dissipated.

The western fjords of the Westfjords peninsula resembled a spreading eagle, and with its glaciers and snow-capped mountains, the Icelandic people believed the guardian spirit of the northwest was a white gyrfalcon living in the mountains.

The Golden King’s Shield represented the protection of the duke, symbolizing the determination to defend Iceland’s independent existence—a manifestation of political independence and loyalty to the Haldor family.

The legend of the four guardian spirits represented Iceland’s native culture. Although the Icelanders were immigrants from the Scandinavian Peninsula, centuries of life on the island had fostered a sense of independent democratic identity and native cultural support, as if they were native-born Icelanders.

Olaf believed that the Icelandic people’s spontaneous desire to give the five Viking Raid districts names rooted in local mythology and legend was not only to express regional identity and commemorate the fallen but also to demonstrate confidence in and recognition of their native culture.

If the Viking Raid incorporated Icelandic culture, it would more quickly become an indispensable part of the Icelandic people’s lives.

Olaf quickly understood and nodded: “This proposal is excellent. I think renaming the five Viking Raid districts is a great idea.”

Suddenly, Olaf recalled the national flag and emblem of Iceland from his past life, which also incorporated elements of traditional Icelandic culture.

After a moment of reflection, Olaf smiled: “We can also design a unique national flag for Iceland and create a ducal emblem. Using the national flag, emblem, and the renamed Viking Raid districts, we can fully transform the Icelandic people, the Haldor family, and the Icelandic culture rooted in this land into Vikings and Viking culture…”

Chapter 240: The Icelandic Sage, Haldor

Olaf’s proposal had been carefully considered. Since Denmark already had its own coat of arms and flag, and given Iceland’s competitive spirit toward Denmark, Olaf’s words struck a chord with Haldor.

Soon after, Haldor convened a meeting of the Viking generals to discuss reforms and finalize plans for the national flag, coat of arms, and the renaming of the Viking raids. Thanks to Olaf’s persuasive arguments and the support of high-ranking officials, the new names for the Viking raids were approved based on the list submitted by the assembly. The coat of arms and flag were adopted from Olaf’s sketches.

Two days later, the Icelandic Duchy announced the new names for the five Viking raids, each now imbued with stronger Icelandic cultural and national elements.

The Southeast Viking Raid was renamed the White-Robed Divine Messenger Raid, still led by General Hudik. The Northeast Viking Raid became the Black Dragon Viking Raid, still commanded by General Hoskuld. The Northwest Viking Raid was renamed the White Eagle Viking Raid, with General Kadir remaining in charge.

The Southwest Viking Raid was renamed the Black Bull Raid, with Haig continuing as general. The Big Port Viking Raid was renamed the Golden King’s Shield Raid, with Ulf still serving as general. To compensate for his lost inheritance rights, Haldor approved Ulf’s marriage to Gandis’s sister and granted him a significant portion of the confiscated lands from the Sigfoss and Kolsvin families.

The national flag and coat of arms were also unveiled after the meeting. Both were designed by Olaf based on his memories of Iceland’s flag and emblem from his past life. The generals and officials, understanding their significance, approved them unanimously.

The Icelandic flag featured a blue background with a slightly off-center red cross, bordered by a white outline. The three colors—red, white, and blue—symbolized Iceland’s volcanic activity and geothermal energy, its glaciers and snow, and the vast surrounding oceans of the Atlantic and Arctic.

The coat of arms was simpler: a Viking longship with a shield bearing the national flag at its center, surrounded by four spirits—a white-robed elder, a black dragon, a black bull, and a white eagle.

The flag remained largely unchanged from Olaf’s memory, but the coat of arms differed from the original. Instead of the coastline beneath the shield and guardian spirits, Olaf incorporated the Viking longship—a symbol of their ancestors’ migration to Iceland, Vinland, and Greenland—to represent the united grand duchy’s maritime foundation and naval development.

Everyone approved of Olaf’s vision. After the meeting on August 21st, news of the renamed Viking raids spread rapidly, along with the official designs of the Icelandic flag and coat of arms.

Women in Reykjavik were summoned to sew the flags, while blacksmiths were ordered to craft the emblems. Within days, the Duke’s Manor, the assembly hall, and the docks were adorned with the red, white, and blue Icelandic cross flags. The coat of arms was also displayed, and the five generals’ districts quickly produced their own flags and emblems, ready to be raised upon their return.

The Icelandic Duchy’s recognition by the Swedish Kingdom and its incorporation into the united kingdom, along with the repulsion of the Danish expeditionary force and the Vinland expeditionary force’s bombardment of Copenhagen, became the three greatest pieces of news for Iceland in 1632.

The people of Iceland, especially in Reykjavik, showed immense enthusiasm upon seeing the new flag and coat of arms. Almost every citizen took to the streets, rushing to buy fabric to make flags. The surge in demand caused fabric prices to double within days.

Fortunately, merchant ships from Holland and England soon arrived with large quantities of fabric, stabilizing the market.

By the end of August, the three-thousand-strong cavalry had completed its training. Olaf and Haldor led the troops through multiple drills, including cavalry charges, flanking maneuvers, and coordinated retreats with artillery.

Gustavus Adolphus II had earned his reputation as Europe’s “Eternal Emperor” through his military prowess, particularly his effective use of artillery in coordination with cavalry. Olaf understood the importance of artillery on the battlefield and prepared to deploy over a dozen cannons, ranging from ten to twenty pounds, along with the necessary draft horses.

Haldor’s decision to assist King Gustavus Adolphus II in Germany was swiftly executed. Initially, Olaf had requested to lead the campaign, with General Hudik as the field commander. However, Haldor, taking Olaf’s prophecy seriously, decided to personally lead the expedition alongside Hudik to ensure no mistakes were made.

Before departing, Hudik and Heiner were tasked with securing supplies, while Haldor appointed Ulf as the acting head of the assembly to manage domestic affairs. The remaining Viking raids were to maintain order in their respective regions.

At first, Ulf, Kadir, Haig, and others had insisted on joining the campaign in Europe, but Haldor, considering Iceland’s stability, ordered them to stay. With only three thousand cavalry, he believed he, Hudik, and Olaf were sufficient.

On the afternoon of August 30th, Haldor, clad in a half-plate armor adorned with gold and jewels, bid farewell to his family and the assembly officials alongside Olaf and Hudik, also in armor. They boarded a ship and departed from Reykjavik’s harbor.

The Icelandic expeditionary force consisted of eleven warships, three thousand cavalry, and over a hundred loyal white slaves and native slaves serving as the duke’s personal guard.

The commanding officers included Hudik, Olaf, Haldor’s trusted subordinates, and Olaf’s five confidants—Pikku, Tom, Ilugi, Halik, and Eriksson.

Though Iceland was not as resource-rich as Vinland, centuries of development had made it prosperous. Beyond its thriving fishing industry, Iceland boasted a robust livestock sector with cattle, sheep, pigs, and horses, as well as related industries like fish preservation, leatherworking, and wool weaving. With proper management, Iceland’s economic potential was substantial. Under Haldor’s leadership, taxes had been waived for a year, and even after reinstatement, they were nearly halved compared to previous years. This tax relief stimulated economic activity.

Two months after the Danish army’s departure, Iceland’s fishing yields had already matched half a year’s usual output, and livestock sales were booming, giving Reykjavik the bustling atmosphere of a major trading hub.

The national treasury had grown significantly, allowing Haldor, as the Duke of Iceland, to finally exercise his noble privileges. The supplies for the three-thousand-strong army were drawn from the national treasury rather than the nearly depleted ducal coffers.

Officials in the assembly praised Haldor, saying: The Duke has devoted himself entirely to Iceland and its people, showing great selflessness. He has even used his family’s private property to reward those who sacrificed for their homeland and helped the displaced rebuild. He treats money as mere dirt, truly a benevolent father to the Icelandic people. Iceland is blessed to have such a great leader and ruler—it is divine favor and the people’s fortune!

Supplying provisions and military equipment for such a leader was their duty. Even if the people of Big Port and Iceland contributed their entire fortunes, it would not suffice to repay the Haldor family’s immense kindness.

After Haldor’s fleet left Iceland, the people gradually realized that their benevolent ruler had fearlessly led a campaign against a powerful enemy. Their admiration for him grew, and tales of his greatness spread.

The new Protestant branch in Iceland, the Divine King Church, led by Heiner, Hoskuld, and Olos, began shaping public opinion. They gathered minstrels and bishops, holding several meetings. Eventually, Icelandic intellectuals and cultural figures collaborated to compose a saga epic rivaling The Saga of the Hrut Family. By unanimous decision, the epic was titled The Icelandic Sage, Haldor.

Chapter 241: Ming Dynasty Doctors

Following the plan set by Olaf, Haldor, and Hudik, they were to first lead their fleet to Holland. Last year, Olaf had written to Kuiyi requesting doctors from the Ming Dynasty or the Arab region, as he had no trust in European doctors who seemed more likely to kill than heal. Whether it was for his own family’s illnesses and injuries or for treating wounded soldiers, he needed reliable physicians.

According to Kuiyi’s reply and Hans’s input, Ming Dynasty doctors or Arab physicians weren’t hard to find, but the cost would be high. They would arrive later this year on ships returning from the Far East with spices.

Olaf, who had read about the “Thirty Years’ War” in web novels, knew that Gustavus Adolphus II had died from three gunshot wounds at the Battle of Lützen. His trip to Germany was to lend a helping hand—saving Gustavus Adolphus II’s life when he was gravely injured. Thus, he had to secure doctors in Amsterdam.

On September 7th, Olaf and Haldor’s fleet sailed into Amsterdam via the North Sea canal, gradually docking at the harbor under the guidance of port personnel.

“Father, you and Uncle Hudik rest on the ship first. I’ll go find Hans and see if the Ming Dynasty doctors have arrived,” Olaf said, dressed in his finest attire.

At fifteen, Olaf was tall and handsome, and with the added prestige from the bombardment of Copenhagen, Haldor had complete confidence in his second son. He retrieved a heavy leather pouch from beneath his bed, the clinking of gold coins inside as he handed it to Olaf. “Go ahead. Take some gold coins with you. Also, buy some gunpowder and bullets. We’ve used up a lot in the two major battles. We should bring some back to Iceland.”

“Alright, Father,” Olaf nodded. “Don’t go out unnecessarily. The Grand Duke of Iceland is quite the figure this year. If you run into any Danes with ill intentions, it could be trouble.”

“Hmph, if we do, we’ll just kill them,” Haldor snorted. “Don’t worry. Hudik and I will stay on the ship and play ‘Fighting the Trolls’ until you return.”

Only then did Olaf leave with Pikku and Tom.

The fleet had brought over three thousand horses, a hundred reindeer, and some sheep for food. Olaf, Tom, Pikku, and a dozen guards selected their mounts and left the docks, heading straight for the East India Company.

At the East India Company, Olaf left Pikku to guard the horses with the other guards while he and Tom went inside.

After waiting in the tea room for about ten minutes, Hans hurried in, smiling. “Mr. Olaf, you’ve arrived! You’re quite the celebrity now! Tsk, tsk, bombarding Copenhagen, representing Iceland in joining the Swedish United Kingdom—I was shocked when I heard about it!”

Olaf stood up and shook Hans’s hand, chuckling. “It was all for survival. Mr. Hans, when are you leaving for the East Indies?”

Hans smiled. “I still need to hand over my current work. I should be leaving in about two months.”

“Then I’ll wish you smooth sailing in advance,” Olaf said sincerely before asking, “Have the doctors Mr. Kuiyi arranged from the Ming Dynasty and the Arab region arrived?”

“Arab doctors are closer to us, but they’re hard to find. Europe is in the midst of a religious war, and Arabs are considered heretics. They’re unwilling to come, and we’re worried about trouble, so we didn’t help you look for any.

However, Mr. Kuiyi has hired two doctors for you. They should be at sea now.”

Olaf nodded. “When exactly will they arrive?”

“It’s hard to say. If they’re fast, half a month. If slow, maybe a month.”

Olaf mentally calculated the time, then nodded. “Alright, I’ll stay in Amsterdam for now. When the Ming Dynasty doctors arrive, send someone to notify me.”

“Of course, Mr. Olaf.”

…

Olaf and Hans discussed some trade cooperation matters, focusing on the East India Company’s desire to exchange Far Eastern spices for Vinland or Icelandic specialties, mainly beaver pelts and the Water of Life.

Olaf knew Hans wanted to secure a long-term cooperation contract before leaving Amsterdam. After half a day of haggling, they finalized a trade agreement granting each other priority rights, with three trade sessions each year in spring, summer, and autumn, taking place in Iceland, Amsterdam, and Iceland, respectively.

Olaf chose to trade twice in Iceland to encourage more Dutch merchant ships to visit. Where there were merchants, there would be consumption, which would boost Iceland’s GDP.

After settling the business matters, Olaf returned to the docks and reported to his father, Haldor. After a brief discussion, they agreed. Haldor basically approved of Olaf’s decision to stay in Amsterdam and wait for the Ming Dynasty doctors.

For Haldor, Olaf, and the others, their plan to join the war in Germany wasn’t about truly joining the Protestant Union against the Holy Roman Empire. It was an “angel investment”—knowing Gustavus Adolphus II would be injured and die at the Battle of Lützen, they intended to save him, earning immense merit and securing a high status and special privileges within the Swedish United Kingdom.

Olaf remembered that Gustavus Adolphus II had died around November 1632, meaning the decisive battle with Wallenstein at Lützen would be in November. It was now early September, leaving about a month. Waiting a few days for the Ming Dynasty doctors wouldn’t delay their plans. Moreover, saving Gustavus Adolphus II without bringing skilled doctors was out of the question—they had to bring doctors with them.

Time passed slowly. As Olaf, Haldor, and Hudik experienced the bustling life of Amsterdam, Europe’s premier metropolis, an East India Company employee arrived at the docks. He informed Tom, who was on guard, that the Ming Dynasty doctors had arrived.

Tom quickly sent someone to find Olaf. Haldor and Olaf, who were at a clothing store buying clothes for Katrin, Gerny, and Sally, hurried to the East India Company upon hearing the news.

Entering Hans’s office, Olaf asked, “Mr. Hans, have the people I requested arrived?”

Hans first bowed respectfully to Haldor, then shook Olaf’s hand. “Yes, Mr. Olaf. The Ming Dynasty doctors have arrived by ship and are resting upstairs in the stock exchange building. I’ll send someone to fetch them. However, since you don’t speak their language, would you like me to send a translator with you?”

Olaf had never revealed that he spoke Chinese. He asked, “Do you have a translator? Who are they?”

“They’re people who returned with the fleet. There’s a Portuguese man who came back from Macao and knows some Chinese, so he stayed on the ship to work. There are also some native servants from Batavia in the East Indies. Since there are many Chinese there, they also know some Ming Dynasty language. Who would you prefer?”

Hans smiled as he looked at Haldor and Olaf.

This was Hans’s first time meeting Haldor, but as a local figure in Amsterdam, he and the company’s higher-ups had long known that Duke Haldor had come with the fleet. Since they hadn’t shown themselves, Hans hadn’t taken the initiative to meet them. Now that Haldor had come to the East India Company with Olaf, Hans had to show the Grand Duke of Iceland the respect and hospitality he deserved.

Chapter 242: Song Qinghe and Zheng Yiguan

After discussing the matter of choosing a translator with Olaf, Haldor decided to wait and see before making a decision. Meanwhile, Hans tactfully conveyed the company directors’ request to host a banquet in honor of Prince Haldor.

As news of the Icelandic army’s bombardment of Copenhagen and Iceland’s status as a tributary state of Sweden spread, Haldor’s reputation as the Duke of Iceland began to soar. No longer was he dismissed as a rebellious pirate by the wealthy and influential of various nations; instead, he was hailed as the hero who led Iceland to independence.

Iceland, the only large island in the North Sea region besides the British Isles, boasted vast fishing grounds and abundant livestock products, making it a valuable and highly promising territory. Previously under Danish colonization, other nations had been unable to intervene. Now that Haldor had led Iceland to independence, Holland, as a commercial maritime power, sought to strengthen ties with Haldor and secure a share of Iceland’s North Sea fishing resources and other assets.

Haldor understood the Dutch intentions and was not surprised. With a smile, he agreed.

The next morning, Hans personally brought several men dressed in flowing wide sleeves and square headscarves—men from the Ming Dynasty—to Olaf’s ship, the Whale Watcher.

As Olaf and Haldor stepped onto the deck, they saw the Ming men, whose attire and appearance were distinctly different from Europeans.

“Prince Haldor, Mr. Olaf, I have brought the Ming physicians as requested. The eldest among them is named Song, and the other two are his students. The rest, who are dressed similarly to the Ming people, are native servants from the East Indies. They have always served as translators. Additionally, Mr. Demendoza from Portugal is also fluent in Chinese…”

After exchanging greetings with Haldor and Olaf, Hans waved his hand and introduced the people behind him.

Olaf paid little attention to the Southeast Asian natives. Instead, he carefully examined the Ming men dressed in deep robes and short jackets, then looked at Demendoza, who had a head of thick, curly black hair. In Latin, he asked, “Demendoza, can you tell the Ming physicians that I am willing to provide them with a life free from want? All they need to do is serve me for a period. When they return home, they will receive a substantial sum of money…”

Demendoza respectfully agreed and then conveyed Olaf’s words in a peculiar Chinese dialect to the Ming physicians.

Olaf listened with a frown, unable to understand a word. The dialect Demendoza spoke was neither Cantonese nor Hokkien, yet it bore some resemblance to both.

The elderly man in the Confucian robe nodded and spoke a few words in the same dialect. Demendoza then translated, “Mr. Olaf, Dr. Song Qinghe says he is willing to serve you. However, he requests an annual salary of one hundred gold coins, and his students require ten gold coins each…”

Dr. Song Qinghe’s demands were several times higher than what European physicians typically earned, bordering on extortion. However, Olaf, looking at Song Qinghe’s white beard and gaunt face, which gave him an air of a transcendent sage, nodded in agreement.

After half a day of communication, Olaf decided to keep Song Qinghe and his three disciples, as well as Demendoza as a translator. As for the Southeast Asian natives who could speak a few words of Latin and Cantonese, Olaf did not even bother to ask about them.

Olaf arranged for Song Qinghe, his disciples, and Demendoza to be settled in. Hans then took Haldor to the banquet. Originally, Olaf had also been invited, but he disliked the lively atmosphere of feasting and singing, so he stayed on the ship.

That night, Haldor returned late, drunk and supported by his attendants. Olaf sent someone to assist Haldor to rest and also sent for Song Qinghe to prepare a sobering soup.

Half an hour later, Pikku sent someone to bring Song Qinghe and his three disciples before Olaf. In a cold voice, he said, “Master! Song Qinghe and his men are frauds. They made a sobering soup for the old master, but when I had the guards who accompanied the old master and also drank alcohol try it, it had no effect. Instead, it gave them diarrhea. When they realized they couldn’t deceive us, they tried to escape, but I caught them red-handed!”

“Master, what should we do with them? Should I throw them into the sea to feed the fish?” Pikku said, his eyes flashing with malice, terrifying Song Qinghe and his disciples.

Olaf frowned and asked, “Where is Demendoza?”

“Seems like he drank too much before bed and hasn’t woken up yet!”

Olaf thought for a moment and then asked in Mandarin, word by word, “Song Qinghe, can you understand what I’m saying?”

Song Qinghe and his disciples were stunned when they heard Olaf speak. They seemed to realize the danger they were in. Song Qinghe swallowed hard and cautiously said, “I… I can understand. Young master, you speak like the official language of the Central Plains. I am a scholar, so naturally, I can speak a few words of it.”

Olaf felt a sense of familiarity listening to Song Qinghe’s Cantonese Mandarin. He smiled and said, “Tell me about your background, and be truthful. If you lie to me, I’ll let him deal with you. He loves throwing people into the sea to feed the sharks!” As he spoke, Olaf pointed at Pikku, who was covered in beard and looked fierce.

Song Qinghe’s heart trembled. He paid no mind to the shock of a golden-haired barbarian speaking fluent Central Plains Mandarin and quickly said, “Young master, rest assured, we will tell the truth. But if you blame us for not making the sobering soup, it’s really unfair. We are alone here, and we have no medicinal herbs. How can we prepare a prescription to sober up Prince Haldor?”

Olaf remained silent and nodded for Song Qinghe to continue.

Song Qinghe composed himself, cleared his throat, and began to recount their story.

By the time Song Qinghe finished, half an hour had passed. Surrounded by fierce-looking barbarians, Song Qinghe and his disciples were terrified, fearing that one wrong word would lead to them being eaten alive by the Western devils.

It turned out that Song Qinghe was a Hakka from Fujian. He and Demendoza both spoke the Hakka dialect. However, he had always practiced medicine in Fuzhou. Unfortunately, earlier this year, after treating a local gentleman named Zheng Shibiao, the man suddenly died. The Zheng family had extensive business overseas and even had pirate ships as their enforcers. Especially Zheng Shibiao’s eldest son, Yiguan, was a powerful figure in both the underworld and the official circles. He was not only a general of the Five Tigers in the imperial court but also the leader of tens of thousands of pirates.

Fearful of being killed by the Zheng family in retaliation, Song Qinghe and his three disciples fled to Macau overnight. After many twists and turns, they boarded a ship to Batavia. However, they were still anxious, fearing that the Zheng family would take their heads at any moment.

Upon hearing that the manager of the East India Company, Kuiyi, was recruiting doctors, the four of them signed up and ended up in Europe.

Olaf listened for a long time and believed most of the story. He asked, “Is that Zheng Yiguan named Zheng Zhilong?”

A flicker of fear flashed in Song Qinghe’s eyes as he trembled and said, “Young Master Olaf, have you heard of him too? That Yiguan’s real name is indeed Zheng Zhilong!”

Olaf marveled at the twists of fate and asked, “Are you really a doctor? What kind of illnesses can you treat?”

“I studied under Master Ma, who was known as the Hidden Sun. I have studied classics such as the Shennong Herbal and the Emergency Prescriptions Kept in One’s Sleeve. Although I started as an itinerant doctor, in the past ten years, I have opened three large and small pharmacies. Unfortunately, my later years have been troubled. Now, thinking back, that Mr. Zheng clearly had a heart attack, an incurable condition. I shouldn’t have prescribed medicine for him, which led to this disaster!”

As Song Qinghe spoke, his eyes twitched, and he nearly shed tears.

Olaf saw that the master and his disciples did not seem to be acting and waved his hand to have them released. After they were seated, he asked, “Dr. Song, may I ask if you are confident in treating injuries from blades and guns? Have you ever treated gunshot wounds?”

“This…”

Song Qinghe pondered for a moment and said, “I won’t hide it from you, Young Master Olaf. The fishermen in Fujian are fierce and often engage in swordplay. I have considerable experience in treating injuries from falls and blows. Even gunshot wounds, as long as they are not fatal, can be treated. However, we left in a hurry and brought insufficient medicinal herbs. To be honest, we only have two bottles of golden wound powder, which can only be used temporarily for three to five people. If you need us to treat the wounded, we will need to purchase some more medicine…”

Chapter 243: First Stop: Bremen

Although Olaf had believed Song Qinghe’s words, the matter was of great importance. The next morning, he still had Pikku bring a vagrant from the street, cut a wound on the man’s hand, and had Song Qinghe treat it.

Only after Song Qinghe skillfully applied the medicinal powder, dressed the wound, and three days had passed with the vagrant’s wound scabbing over and gradually healing did Olaf and Haldor finally feel at ease.

Olaf felt that with high-concentration distilled alcohol and Song Qinghe’s wound medicine, he could fully treat injuries from swords, knives, and guns.

In Olaf’s plan, he intended to join his father in the German region to participate in the war, but his target was not the Catholic League. No matter the outcome, Iceland would not benefit.

Olaf understood that Sweden, since the reforms of Gustavus Adolphus II, had embarked on the path of a Nordic power. Even after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death in battle, Sweden would dominate the north for decades until its decline in the next century at the hands of Tsarist Russia.

Olaf positioned Iceland to use Sweden to counterbalance Denmark. Knowing that Gustavus Adolphus II would be fatally wounded in the Battle of Lützen in November, he saw this as a golden opportunity to extend a helping hand.

Olaf believed that if he could save Gustavus Adolphus II’s life after his injury, Iceland would become Sweden’s close ally and could freely navigate the Baltic Sea in the future.

According to historical developments, after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death, Christian IV of Denmark would no longer fear Sweden and would launch a surprise attack on Sweden in the later stages of the Thirty Years’ War. Although the outcome was tragic, with Iceland now independent, Christian IV might harbor thoughts of attacking Iceland for revenge after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death.

Whether from the perspective of maximizing Iceland’s interests or avoiding future Danish attacks, Olaf now had to attempt to participate in the Battle of Lützen and save the doomed Gustavus Adolphus II.

Olaf was well aware that Iceland was too small to qualify for participation in European affairs. However, he did not want Iceland to be powerless in future major European events such as technological development and the Industrial Revolution. After all, Vinland’s development also required continuous technology, resources, weapons, and talent from Europe.

By using Sweden to participate in the affairs of various European countries, Olaf aimed to transform Iceland from a remote island outside the European continent into one of its members. This was his fundamental goal.

The purpose of their trip to Amsterdam had been accomplished. After bidding farewell to Hans and other leaders of the East India Company, Olaf and Haldor led their fleet out of the harbor.

A few days later, the fleet approached the southwestern tip of the Jutland Peninsula. Further south lay the nominal territory of the Holy Roman Empire, though in reality, numerous duchies and free city-states governed themselves, revealing their opportunistic nature in this pan-European war.

The wealthiest and most powerful free city-state in the northwestern corner of Germany was Bremen. However, with the pan-European war entering the era of Gustavus, Bremen, like its other Protestant neighbors, had submitted to the might of Gustavus Adolphus II, maintaining actual neutrality while nominally belonging to both sides.

The Icelandic fleet arrived at the Hafen port of Bremen on September 23, during the hot rainy season, when the Weser River’s flow was much greater than usual.

Hafen port was home to a Bremen-funded navy with ten warships and a thousand soldiers. As the fleet flying the Icelandic national flag and the Icelandic duke’s emblem approached, the Hafen navy quickly intercepted them.

The two fleets soon came within cannon range. After communication between the flag bearers, the tense atmosphere gradually subsided. Soon, several officers from Bremen arrived. Only after Olaf presented the golden medal of the Swedish Duke of Iceland did the Bremen fleet clear the river channel.

At Haldor’s command, the fleet sailed upstream along the Weser River, entering the city of Bremen, where they met the mayor and generals of Bremen. Haldor, as the Duke of Iceland, was a figure of great importance in Bremen. Coupled with Gustavus Adolphus II’s recent victories in southern Germany, Haldor and his party received a warm welcome and endless banquets.

After several rounds of feasting and probing, Olaf and Haldor realized that the officials of Bremen might have misunderstood. They thought that Haldor and his party had brought the Icelandic army not merely to assist Gustavus Adolphus II in battle but seemingly to monitor cities like Bremen, hence their extreme caution. They even sent Haldor many expensive porcelain items and gold and silver jewels.

After discussing, Haldor and Olaf understood the intentions of the people of Bremen. They decided to play the role of special envoys with a secret mission, occasionally making a fuss, which instead made Haldor feel like a fish in water in Bremen. The city even took charge of all the supplies for the army. Whenever Haldor needed information about the southern battlefield, it was promptly delivered, making him reluctant to leave.

After staying in Bremen for a week, Olaf obtained various battlefield news through different channels.

The largest battlefield was in southern Germany, but there were currently no major battles. Since last month, Gustavus Adolphus II and Wallenstein had been facing off in Nuremberg with their armies, like two top predators—a lion and a black bear. When they meet in the wild, they do not immediately fight but observe each other’s weaknesses. Only when one shows fear or flaw does the great battle erupt.

Olaf was not familiar with the German region, so he did not know where Lützen was. After making a request, within two days, the mayor of Bremen sent a hand-drawn map of the German region. Although lacking in detail, it realistically depicted the territories of various city-states and duchies, especially the towns, rivers, and mountains.

Olaf knew this was a military map of Bremen, meant to show loyalty to Gustavus Adolphus II, but regardless of their intentions, it was useful to him.

After searching the map for a long time, Olaf finally found the name Lützen in the southwestern corner of Leipzig. He was in high spirits and laughed, then puzzledly asked, “So it’s there. But now Gustavus Adolphus II and Wallenstein are facing off in the much more southern Nuremberg. How will they fight in Lützen, over a hundred miles to the northeast, in a little over a month?”

Olaf’s confusion was something no one could explain. The battlefield was ever-changing, and unless one was a participant or a later researcher, few could understand the intentions of the battle’s leaders at the time.

Although Olaf found it strange, he absolutely trusted his memory and did not overthink it. Instead, he began preparations to go to Lützen.

While continuing to send people to the front lines to gather information, Olaf also dispatched several dozen cavalrymen. He was not entirely confident in relying on others’ eyes and ears to understand the situation; he needed reliable firsthand information from his own people.

For Olaf, the current strategic deployment was as crucial as guiding Haig to Vinland fifteen years ago. Handling it well or poorly would completely determine the fate of his family and Iceland. To avoid any mistakes, he had to be highly vigilant and fully focused. As soon as a major battle or troop movement occurred at the front, Olaf decided to persuade Haldor to lead the army to Lützen to get involved.

Nuremberg was the second-largest city in the Duchy of Bavaria, second only to the capital Munich. It had the fertile Pegnitz River basin, which could produce abundant crops and food. The most famous products were soft gingerbread and black beer.

Hundreds of years later, Nuremberg would be the stronghold of Siemens, but now, even the first Industrial Revolution had not yet begun. Nuremberg was purely a large agricultural city of strategic significance.

Gingerbread was a snack made by baking flour, honey, sugar, dried nuts, and spicy spices like pepper. It was generally believed to have originated in the German region and was now a food for Christmas or large celebrations. Nuremberg’s gingerbread was different from others; it was a soft gingerbread with a bread-like texture and a very unique taste, making it a famous delicacy far and wide.

Chapter 244: Gustavus Adolphus II

Nuremberg was the second-largest city in the Duchy of Bavaria, second only to the capital, Munich. It boasted the fertile Pegnitz River basin, which yielded abundant crops and food, most famously soft gingerbread and black beer.

Centuries later, Nuremberg would become the stronghold of Siemens, but for now, even the first Industrial Revolution was nowhere in sight. Nuremberg was purely a strategically significant agricultural hub.

Gingerbread was a snack made by baking flour, honey, sugar, dried nuts, and spicy seasonings like pepper. Generally believed to have originated in Germany, it was now a food for Christmas or large celebrations. Nuremberg’s gingerbread differed from others—it was a soft gingerbread with a bread-like texture and a unique flavor, renowned far and wide as a delicacy.

Nuremberg and the Duchy of Bavaria were still part of the Catholic League, a region firmly controlled by the Holy Roman Empire. It wasn’t too far from Austria, where the Habsburgs resided, placing it at the forefront of Gustavus Adolphus II’s clashes with the Holy Roman Empire.

Gustavus Adolphus II had negotiated with the Holy Roman Empire in Nuremberg several times, but the results were far from ideal. Though he had defeated their renowned generals, the Habsburgs showed no intention of a truce. They were furious at Sweden’s ambition to replace Austria as the overlord of the German states.

After the negotiations collapsed, Wallenstein, the Holy Roman Empire’s foremost general, led his army to Nuremberg. In the ancient valley outside the city, the two military commanders faced each other, waiting for the right moment to engage in a decisive battle.

Gustavus Adolphus II resided in a village that had been turned into a military camp. As he ate freshly baked soft gingerbread, he pointed at a map, explaining his strategic intentions to his officers.

“Our army numbers less than thirty thousand, and our battle lines have advanced deep into the south. We cannot recklessly start a war. We must wait for reinforcements from the rear! I have already ordered Chancellor Oxenstierna to lead the reserve forces and supplies to support us. Once they arrive, we can annihilate Wallenstein in one fell swoop and force the Habsburgs to submit completely!”

Gustavus Adolphus II was in high spirits. His mustache was meticulously trimmed, and his handsome, scholarly demeanor was accentuated by his exquisite armor and piercing eyes.

The Swedish officers, overshadowed by this legendary commander, could only nod in agreement like obedient tools.

Amid their chorus of assent, Gustavus Adolphus II narrowed his eyes and looked into the distance, speaking gravely, “Wallenstein will never dare to attack first! But you must remain vigilant. If the Holy Roman Empire’s army loses its mind, bury them outside Nuremberg!”

Time passed swiftly during the military standoff. As October drew to a close, after three days of continuous rain, the temperature suddenly dropped. However, for the Swedes, accustomed to the Nordic climate, this was nothing.

One morning, Gustavus Adolphus II suddenly received a letter from the rear. After reading it, he summoned Baron Weis, whom Chancellor Oxenstierna had sent a few days earlier, and asked, “Weis, did the Chancellor invite the Duke of Iceland to join the war? How come the rear reports that Duke Haldor of Iceland and Earl Olaf of Vinland have personally led a large army to northwestern Germany? Is this the Chancellor’s backup plan?”

“Your Majesty, the Chancellor did not inform me when I left, so I do not know,” the lean Weis replied, spreading his hands.

Gustavus Adolphus II frowned. “Could Haldor be here to show his loyalty?”

Just as Gustavus Adolphus II was puzzled by the news of the Icelandic army appearing in the rear, the front lines suddenly changed.

Scouts sent to spy on Wallenstein’s camp reported that his army had retreated northeastward during the night.

Gustavus Adolphus II had been holding back because his army was deep in enemy territory. He lacked the preparation and confidence for a decisive victory against Wallenstein. But now, Wallenstein’s retreat to the northeast delighted him. The Lion King, well-versed in the German region, quickly realized that the northeast was the Electorate of Saxony. The duke there had been ambiguous, neither daring to resist nor as obedient as Prussia. If Wallenstein’s army pressed forward, the Saxon duke would surely aid him against Sweden. If this also provoked the northern duchies that had already submitted to Sweden to rebel, all their efforts would be in vain.

Gustavus Adolphus II keenly sensed that Wallenstein’s goal might be the northern German states that had already surrendered to Sweden. He hastily ordered, “Prepare the troops immediately! We must pursue Wallenstein as quickly as possible. We cannot let him disrupt our plans in the north. Weis, you must personally deliver my orders to Chancellor Oxenstierna. Tell him to stabilize the north quickly and organize a large army to assist me in attacking Wallenstein. Also, have him keep an eye on the Icelandic army. If necessary, let Haldor and his men help us against Wallenstein…”

…

After staying in Bremen for over half a month, Haldor and Olaf suddenly received a messenger sent by Chancellor Oxenstierna, bearing a personal letter from the Chancellor.

Olaf read in the letter Oxenstierna’s joy and relief at Haldor and his son bringing troops to aid in the war. He also requested that Haldor’s army follow his orders and immediately gather in the Duchy of Prussia.

After discussing, Haldor and Olaf readily agreed and politely saw the messenger off.

Two days later, the scouts returned with news that Wallenstein’s and Gustavus Adolphus II’s armies were heading toward the Electorate of Saxony.

Olaf’s heart stirred, and he carefully examined the map before smiling. “It seems the Battle of Lützen is about to begin!”

“Father, we cannot go to Prussia. Following Oxenstierna’s arrangements will only earn us minor military merits, and there’s a risk of being used as cannon fodder. But if we go directly to Lützen and save Gustavus Adolphus II, that will be the true purpose of our month-long efforts!”

Olaf pointed to the insignificant town of Lützen on the map as he spoke to his father.

Haldor nodded. “Olaf, you’re right. We cannot follow Oxenstierna’s arrangements. We haven’t had deep interactions with him, and blindly obeying someone on the battlefield is unwise. But if we disobey his orders, won’t that contradict the purpose of our journey…”

Haldor’s doubt made Hudik nod slightly. Olaf thought for a moment and said, “We haven’t disobeyed Chancellor Oxenstierna’s orders. We have already agreed with the messenger, and in two days, we will set off to meet the Chancellor in the Duchy of Prussia. Even if we tell the people of Bremen this…”

“It’s just that we’re not familiar with the German region. On the way, we might inevitably get lost and end up in Lützen, then participate in the war and save Gustavus Adolphus II…”

“Clap clap…”

Hudik couldn’t help but applaud and laugh. “Olaf, you’re truly clever! That brain of yours is amazing!”

Haldor also grinned. “Of course. As long as we save His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II, it doesn’t matter if they believe us or if Oxenstierna suspects our excuses. With such a great achievement and the friendship of His Majesty, our goal will be accomplished! Olaf, this operation is yours to command. Hudik and I will respect your opinions and arrangements!”

Chapter 245: People in Turbulent Times

Haldor, in his joy, entrusted the command of the operation to rescue Gustavus Adolphus II to Olaf, based on his trust in Olaf’s divine revelation memories.

Olaf did not decline. After assembling the troops, he purchased some carriages and draft horses from Bremen. Then, leaving over a hundred soldiers to guard the fleet, the father and son, along with Hudik, led the remaining men and all the military supplies and provisions out of Bremen, heading southeast toward Lützen according to the map.

Lützen was a town in the Leipzig city-state, and Leipzig belonged to the Electorate of Saxony. To the north of Saxony was all part of northern Germany, and most of the states in the north had already pledged allegiance to the Lion King of Sweden.

The Icelandic army, in addition to flying the Icelandic national flag and emblem, also had Swedish flags made in Bremen. Wherever they went, they faced no resistance.

The villages and towns along the road were mostly in ruins. Upon seeing the approaching army, emaciated elders and children would occasionally flee in terror. Young women were almost nowhere to be seen.

The fields outside the villages were filled with withered wheat stalks swaying in the wind, and weeds were everywhere. It was clear that no one had tended to the fields for a long time.

Haldor and Hudik showed no change in expression, seemingly indifferent to the tragic world before them. Olaf, however, felt a pang of sorrow and ordered Pikku to bring in a few villagers to gather information.

Soon, Pikku and several knights returned quickly, throwing a few bound elders from their horses and shouting, “Get up and kneel before the Duke of Iceland and the Earl of Vinland!”

Pikku only spoke Icelandic, and the elders couldn’t understand a word. They just trembled and cowered on the ground.

Haldor glanced at Hudik, who dismounted and walked up to the elders, softly speaking in heavily accented southern German, “Get up. We are soldiers of the Swedish Kingdom. We have some questions for you.”

“Soldiers of the Swedish Kingdom?” The elders opened their cloudy eyes, looking at Hudik, then at Haldor and the others on their tall horses, and finally at the Swedish flag held high by the soldiers behind Haldor.

The elders suddenly seemed to come alive, trembling as they got up, kowtowing to Hudik, even kissing the ground in front of his boots, and pleaded in trembling voices, “Sir! We are just villagers from Moen Village. We don’t even have land or livestock. Please spare us…”

Hudik crouched down and smiled, “Don’t be nervous. We are soldiers of the Icelandic Duchy under the Swedish Kingdom. This is His Grace, Duke Haldor of Iceland. We are here to help His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II fight the Catholic armies from the south. You are all Protestants, and we are here to protect you!”

Most of northern Germany had converted to Protestantism. The spark that ignited this pan-European war was the Holy Roman Empire’s attempt to punish the states that had converted to Protestantism. The northern German states had long been flirting with Denmark and Sweden.

Hudik thought his words would calm the elders, but they continued to plead for mercy.

Hudik, seeing that the elders were not answering his questions, lost his patience and shouted, “Shut up! Answer only what I ask! Say one extra word, and I’ll cut off your heads! Understood?!”

In these special times, intimidation always worked better than explanation for the uneducated masses. As soon as Hudik finished speaking, the elders quieted down, hastily replying, “Understood, sir!”

“Why are there no young people in your village? Why are the fields untended?” Hudik asked, pointing to the distant village and the surrounding wheat fields.

One elder, coughing heavily, clearly suffering from a serious illness, while a slightly younger elder straightened up, his eyes filled with sorrow, and said in a deep voice, “Reporting to you, sir! It was ten years ago, or maybe seven or eight years ago, the Danish lords and the soldiers of the southern emperor fought here. The winners were better—they just took grain and livestock. Even though they took everything, at least they spared our lives…

But if you encountered defeated and fleeing lords, oh God! They were worse than bandits and robbers. They would burn, kill, and loot in the villages, taking women, grain, livestock, and money. Any resistance would be met with slaughter.

Our village originally had over three hundred people. Now, after ten years, apart from a few old men and women and a few children, there’s almost no one left. The young women and men either fled to the mountains or the east, or were taken or killed…”

The sixty-something-year-old man’s eyes gradually reddened as he spoke. He raised his hands, black with dirt under the nails, and rubbed his eyes, crying, “Sir, you are a Swedish military lord. We’ve long heard that Swedish military lords don’t rob the poor. Please spare us!”

Hudik ignored the elder’s words and continued asking, “Have any armies come by recently? How many…”

The elder, looking at Hudik and the soldiers behind him with their gleaming weapons, nervously recalled and stammered out his answer.

After Hudik had asked all the questions he could, he had the elders untied and let them go.

Haldor and Olaf watched Hudik’s harmonious interaction with the elders. Haldor was not surprised to hear that soldiers from the Holy Roman Empire and Denmark were rampaging and looting in northern Germany, as looting during war was a long-standing tradition for soldiers, even against their own people.

Olaf, however, looked down on the Holy Roman Empire soldiers for looting their own people. But thinking of the Ming Dynasty of the same era, where killing civilians to claim merit and looting during chaos were common practices of the Ming army, he realized that this was simply a unique era.

Watching the hunched, emaciated elders supporting each other as they slowly left, Olaf felt a deep emotion, even a pang of sorrow. After a moment, Hudik returned to Olaf and Haldar, concisely reporting the various pieces of intelligence he had gathered from the elders.

After a while, Hudik suggested, “There should be a group of three hundred to five hundred mercenaries from the Holy Roman Empire scattered nearby, living off looting the villagers. They might interfere with us. Should we eliminate them?”

Haldar looked at Olaf and asked, “What do you think, Olaf?”

Olaf knew that killing some soldiers from the Catholic League would count as a military achievement, so he gritted his teeth and said, “If it won’t delay us too much, let’s do it!”

Hudik’s eyes twitched, and he smiled, “I’ll take the troops myself. You continue on your way. I should be able to catch up with you tomorrow!”

After saying this, Hudik counted out a thousand troops and galloped toward the northeastern forests.

Olaf worriedly asked, “Father, will Uncle Hudik be alright? The enemy is the regular army of the Holy Roman Empire, and their numbers might not be accurate…”

Haldar smiled, “It’s fine. If there were many of them, they wouldn’t be able to stay in this area because it’s too barren and can’t support too many people. Hudik is leading cavalry, and everyone has guns. There’s absolutely no problem.”

Chapter 246: Prelude to Lützen

Haldor had complete confidence in Hudik’s abilities, but even more so in his own Viking cavalry. His unwavering words were proven true by midday the next day.

As the sound of hooves grew louder behind them, Hudik, dusty and bloodstained, arrived with his nearly unscathed cavalry, catching up to the Icelandic army that had already reached the borders of Hanover. He presented Haldor and Olaf with several bloodied heads.

“Olaf, Haldor, these are the leaders of the Austrian mercenaries. They had some reputation in Germany a few years back, with a few battle honors to their name. But they were no match for our Viking iron cavalry, haha! We’ve killed them, so we have a good excuse for not answering Oxenstierna’s summons.”

Olaf found the bloody sight distasteful and frowned, looking away. He murmured, “Saying we were harassed by Austrian stragglers and couldn’t march properly is a good excuse. But we should exaggerate their numbers…”

Haldor nodded in agreement, then laughed heartily. “Well done! I’ll record this as a merit for you all. When we return, I’ll reward everyone with cloth and grain!”

“Thank you, Your Grace!”

Hudik turned and loudly announced Haldor’s decision to the troops. Over a thousand soldiers cheered upon hearing the news, their voices echoing across the Hanoverian plains.

After Hudik easily wiped out a few hundred Austrian stragglers, the Icelandic army no longer needed to conserve energy for meal breaks and night watches. They could now march at full speed during the day.

With the army moving faster, they soon passed through Hanover and approached the territory of the Electorate of Saxony.

Along the way, they saw nothing but ruined walls and desolate villages. Corpses and skeletal remains littered the ground, emitting a foul stench. Wild dogs and foxes gnawed at the bones of the dead. The grim and desolate scene sent shivers down their spines. Decades of war had left Germany, the main battlefield, in tatters, barely able to endure.

Seeing the devastation, Olaf couldn’t believe this was the same land that would become the heart of Europe centuries later. The phrase “nine out of ten households deserted” suddenly came to mind. He felt no words could describe the scene more accurately. He believed he was witnessing the cruelest aftermath of war in the world.

Over the past few days, scouts had spotted groups of refugees armed with long spears and knives, banding together for protection. But upon seeing Haldor’s army, they fled in terror into the forests. Local militia forces also dared not show themselves to block the Icelandic army.

It wasn’t until they entered the Electorate of Saxony that they finally saw a small town protected by a castle. Olaf checked the map and found the place was called Wendeburg, a border town.

The castle housed a few hundred soldiers. A third of these local constables were armed with firearms, while the rest carried long spears. They stood guard on the castle walls, nervously watching the Icelandic army below.

After a long standoff, Olaf finally sent a soldier fluent in German to explain the Icelandic army’s origins and purpose. Only then did the castle gates open, and a few officers emerged. They dared not show any hostility or negligence, not just because of the overwhelming force, but also because the Electorate of Saxony was now a tributary state of the Swedish United Kingdom. They were obligated to cooperate with the Icelandic Duchy’s army, at least in name.

The officers from Wendeburg, accompanied by a dozen soldiers driving carts, approached Olaf’s army. Their carts were loaded with food and wine.

“You don’t plan to let us into the city?!”

After the German-speaking soldier translated the conversation, Olaf learned the officers’ intentions. His expression darkened as he frowned and asked, “What are you afraid of? That we’ll occupy Wendeburg? Hmph, you Saxons have also followed His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II into battle. Why don’t you trust us?”

The officer quickly smiled and explained. Olaf waved his hand dismissively. “Forget it. We won’t make trouble for you. Since that’s the case, send us some tents and supplies!”

In these turbulent times, as the weaker party, the small border town of the Saxon Electorate couldn’t stop any powerful army from invading. But their duty also prevented them from allowing the mysterious Icelandic army into the city. If the Icelandic army entered and revealed their fangs, burning, killing, and looting, they would be the ones to blame.

Olaf understood the officers’ thoughts and didn’t intend to make things difficult for them. He only asked for some supplies.

The officers returned to the castle as if pardoned, and half a day later, they sent the supplies Olaf had requested.

That evening, Olaf, Haldor, and Hudik settled into the central tent, while most of the soldiers crowded into the other tents, leaving only a few on guard duty.

The next morning, the castle sent hot food. Haldor and Olaf rewarded the soldiers with the delicious meal, while they themselves only had their guards cook a pot of dried fish and barley porridge.

After entering Saxony, the army’s progress slowed significantly. Wallenstein and Gustavus Adolphus II’s armies had already entered Saxony, and an attack was possible.

Olaf and Haldor had no intention of getting involved in the battle between the two armies. They occupied an abandoned village outside Magdeburg, northwest of Leipzig.

Every day, besides sending soldiers to scout ahead, Olaf, Haldor, and Hudik were troubled by an outbreak of dysentery in the army.

Perhaps due to the unfamiliar environment or the rampant plagues in war-torn Germany, the Icelandic expeditionary force had been experiencing symptoms of vomiting and diarrhea for several days. At first, Olaf and Haldor paid little attention, thinking it was just a reaction to the local conditions. But as the days passed, the situation worsened.

Olaf called for Song Qinghe, the army’s physician. After examining the patients, Song Qinghe informed Olaf that the soldiers had contracted dysentery from drinking contaminated water. His medical supplies were insufficient, so he could only use local resources, having the soldiers find radishes and other vegetables to help detoxify. He and his disciples searched the wilderness daily for herbs with cooling and detoxifying properties to brew medicines.

After three or four days of treatment, the dysentery stopped spreading, and the sick soldiers began to recover. By this time, it was November 1632, and the weather was growing colder.

As a state that had sided with the Swedish Kingdom, Saxony had sent over five thousand troops to assist Gustavus Adolphus II in fighting the southern alliance since spring. However, a few months ago, the returned Wallenstein led his army to attack Leipzig, killing many Saxons.

In October, Wallenstein, aiming to cut off the Swedish Kingdom’s supply lines, suddenly marched north from Nuremberg to Leipzig, intending to attack Saxony again. He wanted to capture Saxony in one fell swoop and trap Gustavus Adolphus II in southern Germany, using the approaching winter to wear down the Swedish army.

But although Wallenstein moved quickly, Gustavus Adolphus II, a renowned general, reacted swiftly. Just one day after Leipzig was captured, Gustavus Adolphus II appeared with his army in the western Leipzig region. He defeated a small detachment of Wallenstein’s forces and captured Naumburg.

Wallenstein, fearing Gustavus Adolphus II might escape, abandoned the newly captured Leipzig and chose to lead his army to meet Gustavus Adolphus II.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s battle lines were stretched too thin, leaving him with fewer troops than Wallenstein’s army. Wallenstein saw an opportunity to defeat Gustavus Adolphus II and withdrew two nearby armies of twenty thousand men from the east, north, and south to attack Gustavus Adolphus II from the southwest.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s scouts quickly detected the movements of the Catholic League army. After consulting with his deputy commander, Duke Bernhard, he worried that his forces were too few to defeat Wallenstein. Thus, he decided to fortify Naumburg, hoping to wait for reinforcements while conserving his strength. He planned to join forces with Oxenstierna’s reinforcements to defeat Wallenstein’s Catholic League army in a pincer attack.

Chapter 247: The Battle of Lützen

As a relentless early winter rain poured down for two days, a thick fog enveloped the area around Leipzig, so dense that one could not see their own hand in front of their face.

The continuous drop in temperature made northern Germany unusually cold, but the heart of Gustavus Adolphus II, stationed in Naumburg, burned with excitement. Recent reports from his scouts revealed that Wallenstein’s forces near Leipzig were scattered, pillaging for supplies. This meant Wallenstein’s provisions were running low.

The Thirty Years’ War was a revealing mirror, exposing the true nature of each nation’s armies.

Though the Catholic League had the support of Austria, Spain, German city-states, Bavaria, and other regions, they had barely provided any food or supplies to the mercenary armies on the front lines. What sustained the German forces was not honor, but the right to pillage and plunder across Germany at will.

Danes, Englishmen, Frenchmen, Swiss, Bohemians…

For over a decade, soldiers of all kinds had ravaged Germany, reducing rural villages by nearly half and wiping out three-tenths of the towns. The Swedish army maintained better discipline, but still relied on heavy taxation and large quantities of provisions from the relatively stable and prosperous northern duchies.

As the weather grew colder, the massive consumption of food by the gathered armies became a pressing issue. Gustavus Adolphus II had enough supplies, including what he had plundered, to last over two weeks. Thus, he planned to hold Naumburg, waiting for reinforcements while depleting Wallenstein’s forces.

But today’s intelligence suggested Wallenstein’s army was low on supplies and dispersed. If he moved quickly, he could strike Leipzig and pierce the heart of Wallenstein’s forces.

Gustavus Adolphus II keenly sensed the opportunity. As the supreme commander of the Protestant Union, he swiftly led his army from Naumburg toward Leipzig, unaware that Wallenstein had already departed with twenty thousand troops.

Soon, Gustavus Adolphus II’s ten thousand Swedish soldiers and Wallenstein’s twenty thousand met near Lützen, southwest of Leipzig.

The mid-November chill seemed to ease slightly that day, but the already heavy fog thickened further.

The poor visibility slowed both armies. Only when their cavalry heard the snorting of horses in the mist did they realize the enemy’s presence, sending out small units to engage in skirmishes.

The Protestant Union had only six thousand cavalry. Gustavus Adolphus II personally commanded the left center, and upon hearing the commotion ahead, he led his personal guard forward. Learning the enemy was nearby, he ordered the cavalry to cover the musketeers as they fired in unison.

“Bang…”

The dense gunfire and lead shots seemed to thin the white fog. Swedish soldiers quickly adjusted their formations, continuously firing into the mist ahead.

Wallenstein’s soldiers were instantly killed by the Swedish volley, purely because they couldn’t see and were firing blindly. Wallenstein’s forces quickly adjusted and returned fire.

Half an hour later, the chaotic shooting had caused fewer than a hundred casualties on either side. But the fog was too thick, and neither Gustavus Adolphus II nor Wallenstein dared to deploy their cavalry, fearing they might lose their way and stumble into enemy lines.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s army had sixty cannons, a third more than the Catholic League. Knowing the fog made rash attacks or retreats unwise, he decided to use his artillery to break and scatter the Catholic League forces hidden in the mist.

Gustavus Adolphus II was indeed a military genius. His linear tactics and artillery-cavalry coordination were leading and transforming European warfare. Under his command, the artillerymen pushed the cannons forward from the flanks, igniting the fuses toward the gunfire in the mist.

“Bang…”

After a barrage, Gustavus Adolphus II sensed the enemy’s firepower weakening. He and his deputy, Duke Bernhard, each led a cavalry unit to cover the musketeers as they charged into the fog, seizing the moment of Wallenstein’s disarray to strike.

Shouts and gunfire echoed through the mist, merging into a torrent. The scent of blood and gunpowder mixed with the fog, driving the soldiers on both sides into a frenzy, running and killing without thought.

After hours of fighting, Gustavus Adolphus II felt he had broken through part of Wallenstein’s forces. He turned his horse and rode up a slope where the fog was thinner, surveying the battlefield. He saw his army and Wallenstein’s forces divided into over a dozen separate battles. The musketeers in the center, slower due to their formation, had been surrounded by seven or eight thousand Catholic League soldiers in a distant valley.

It was noon, and though the sun still hadn’t appeared, a cold wind from the north began to disperse the fog.

The battlefield became clearer to Gustavus Adolphus II. He knew that if he didn’t rescue the surrounded musketeers immediately, victory would be difficult.

As the fog lifted, Gustavus Adolphus II spotted the Catholic League’s encampment on a hill ahead. The cannons within were raining scorching cannonballs onto the battlefield. Outside the camp, fresh trenches and barricades had been dug to prevent Swedish surprise attacks.

Gustavus Adolphus II was certain Wallenstein was in that encampment. Enduring the dull ache of an old wound, he donned a light leather armor. Years ago, during a battle with Poland, he had been shot, and the pain still lingered, preventing him from wearing heavier iron armor.

“Target the Catholic League encampment! Charge with me!”

Gustavus Adolphus II raised his long spear in prayer, then led the charge, singing the Swedish military anthem.

“You are ancient, you are strong, you stand in the northern mountains,

Your serene beauty brings joy to the heart!

Hail to you, the most beloved land on earth,

Hail to your sun, your sky, your green fields,

Hail to your sun, your sky, your green fields.

…

Recalling the glorious years, you were revered,

Your fame once echoed across the world.

I know you are the same now and forever.

Yes, I wish to live and die in the north,

Yes, I wish to live and die in the north.”

…

The mournful Nordic military song spread among thousands of cavalry. By now, the fog had mostly dissipated. The army’s drummers and buglers played the charge, and the Swedish cavalry began to move slowly. The drumbeats gave rhythm to the thunderous hooves, and the Swedish iron cavalry, like a blade, charged through cannon fire and bullets into the enemy lines. Gustavus Adolphus II, protected by a royal cavalry unit, was the first to reach the enemy, shooting and killing a cannon operator.

The fierce battle continued until noon. The Swedish iron cavalry seized the position, and the Catholic League soldiers retreated in disarray, abandoning their cannons to Gustavus Adolphus II.

After counting the captured cannons, Gustavus Adolphus II was pleased to find he now had nearly a hundred. He immediately ordered them to be turned around to bombard the rear of the Catholic League forces surrounding his infantry. Meanwhile, he prepared his cavalry, ready to strike like a dagger into the back of the Catholic League once their formation was broken.

Chapter 248: The Rescue (1)

The brutal slaughter was the main theme of Lützen today.

From dawn, the Swedish army and the Catholic army had been engaged in a grueling tug-of-war across three hills and the plains of the valley in Lützen. Both sides’ soldiers were exhausted and parched, yet they could not rest, hoping only for a swift victory, which instead ignited even greater fighting spirit.

Cavalry charges clashed, long spearmen and musketeers engaged in close combat, and by now, the square formations had dissolved. The battle had devolved into a contest of sheer will and endurance.

The Protestant army led by Gustavus Adolphus II was outnumbered by the Catholic League forces under Wallenstein. Initially, upon contact, the Protestants had been forced into a defensive retreat. But after Gustavus Adolphus II personally led his troops to seize the enemy camp, leveraging the power of their formidable cannons, the Protestant Union swiftly turned the tide, pushing the Catholic League’s lines into continuous retreat.

Just as the Swedish army’s fortunes improved and victory seemed within grasp, the reinforcements Wallenstein had sent to forage near Leipzig arrived.

The addition of over three thousand fresh troops to the battlefield instantly shifted the balance. The Swedish army was plunged into desperate fighting and gradually encircled.

Gustavus Adolphus II noticed the situation in the valley behind him and realized Wallenstein’s forces intended to divide and annihilate his infantry. He turned his horse, preparing to abandon the captured artillery camp temporarily to rescue the Protestant Union infantry trapped in the valley.

By now, it was around three in the afternoon. The overcast sky and low temperatures caused mist to rise again in the valley.

After Gustavus Adolphus II led his cavalry away from the hillside, Wallenstein’s forces reoccupied the artillery camp. Using the abandoned cannons, they bombarded the valley, hoping to kill or rout Gustavus Adolphus II’s army and prevent them from rescuing the surrounded Protestant troops.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s cavalry, centered around his Royal Guard, fearlessly charged through the smoke, cannon fire, and bullets into the thin, chilly evening mist. As the cold vapor enveloped him, Gustavus Adolphus II shivered, but his army had reached the rear of the Catholic League forces.

A tragic and chaotic battle erupted in the afternoon at Lützen. Gustavus Adolphus II personally led his troops, instantly breaking the Catholic League’s encirclement of the Protestant army. However, the Swedish cavalry had advanced into the sea of infantry, making it difficult to maintain their high mobility.

Amid the slaughter, a Catholic League corporal spotted the approaching Gustavus Adolphus II. He called over several of the best musketeers and ordered one to raise his firearm, aiming at the clearly protected figure at the center of the cavalry—Gustavus Adolphus II. Though they did not recognize the King of Sweden, they were certain they had found a noble enemy commander.

Bang!

A gunshot blended into the cacophony of battle—gunfire, cannons, war cries, horse neighs, and human roars—yet the bullet that followed cut through the evening mist and struck Gustavus Adolphus II on his horse.

A sharp pain surged through Gustavus Adolphus II’s left arm, a familiar sensation telling him he had been shot.

His left sleeve was instantly stained red with blood. Gritting his teeth against the pain, he forced himself to stay conscious. With his right arm, he tightened the reins, attempting to turn left toward his Royal Guard.

The Royal Guard quickly flanked Gustavus Adolphus II, their faces pale with terror as they saw their bloodied monarch. They apologized in a flurry of voices, pleading for him to retreat to the rear.

Gustavus Adolphus II knew he was the backbone of the Protestant army. If he retreated wounded, the troops would lose their fighting spirit, and the army might collapse like snow under the scorching sun.

Duke Albert of Saxony-Lauenburg had led his Pomeranian and Saxon soldiers alongside Gustavus Adolphus II for two years. He was the first to notice the commotion in the direction of Gustavus Adolphus II’s cavalry and quickly led his men toward it.

Albert was a duke of northern Germany and, by bloodline, had a claim to the Electorate of Saxony. However, his main holdings were in the Duchy of Pomerania, and he had always shown reliable loyalty to Sweden.

“Your Majesty! You…” Seeing Gustavus Adolphus II covered in blood and pale-faced, Albert’s heart trembled. He urged his horse forward. “I will escort you off the battlefield immediately…”

Gustavus Adolphus II raised his right hand slightly, intending to ask Albert to keep his injury a secret. But due to excessive blood loss, his mind grew dizzy, and he nearly fell from his horse. Albert quickly reached out to steady the Lion King. After catching his breath, Gustavus Adolphus II said, “Take me away, but be careful. The soldiers must not know…”

Albert nodded, ordering his men to ride alongside the king’s horse while keeping a close watch on Gustavus Adolphus II, who was on the verge of fainting from blood loss.

With Gustavus Adolphus II wounded, command of the nearby Protestant forces naturally fell to Albert. He feared that a direct retreat would shake the morale of the Protestant Union. If the army discovered that Gustavus Adolphus II had been shot and fled, they might lose the courage to fight the Catholic League.

Albert protected Gustavus Adolphus II’s horse as they broke through the encirclement, intending to circle around the battlefield’s outskirts to return to the rear. However, the army’s tense reaction to Gustavus Adolphus II’s injury had already exposed his identity. Wallenstein’s officers had spotted the wounded king, and they eagerly pursued, raising their firearms to fire at the fleeing figure slumped on his horse.

Bullets continuously struck the soldiers shielding Gustavus Adolphus II with their bodies. Soon, the cavalry unit suffered heavy losses, leaving only Albert’s personal guards and a dozen cavalrymen. Gustavus Adolphus II’s figure became exposed in the gaps between people. Seeing the bloodied back of Gustavus Adolphus II, the pursuing musketeers and dragoons of the Catholic League were filled with excitement.

The bullets drew closer to Gustavus Adolphus II. Both he and Duke Albert felt the grasp of death, yet they were powerless to resist, able only to flee desperately.

Crack!

A crisp sound rang out as a soldier to Gustavus Adolphus II’s right was shot in the neck and tumbled off his horse. Gustavus Adolphus II’s heart tightened, knowing the next bullet might be for him. He gritted his teeth, preparing to draw his firearm with his right hand, but he could no longer control his arm…

Bang! Bang!

A chaotic volley of gunfire erupted from the left, seemingly not far away. Gustavus Adolphus II’s heart jolted, thinking it was the Catholic League’s musketeers. He sighed inwardly: Am I to die at Lützen? God, I cannot burden the Union…

But just as Gustavus Adolphus II was about to issue his final command—ordering Duke Albert to abandon him and lead the remaining troops to safety—he suddenly heard Albert’s urgent, joyful voice: “Your Majesty! We are saved!”

“What? Has Duke Bernhard arrived?” Gustavus Adolphus II asked hopefully.

“No, not yet. Duke Bernhard has not broken through the encirclement.”

“Then who is it?”

“It is the Duke of Iceland! I see their banners bear the emblem of the Icelandic duchy that you bestowed. It must be Duke Haldor and his men! The Duke of Iceland has saved us!”

As the vision of divine reinforcements descending to rout the pursuing enemy became clearer, Duke Bernhard’s tone shifted from hesitation to certainty, finally becoming light and relieved: “Duke Haldor of Iceland has arrived just in time! It must be God’s will! Your Majesty, hold on. Soon, Duke Haldor will escort you back to the rear, where you can receive treatment to stop the bleeding!”

Gustavus Adolphus II opened his eyes and looked back, seeing a cavalry unit charging into the rear of the Catholic League forces, slaughtering their soldiers. The most striking figures were two towering generals, their personal guards bearing two banners—one the emblem of the Icelandic duchy, the other the Vinland earldom.

“The Icelandic reinforcements have arrived! God bless…”

Upon seeing the Icelandic army’s performance, Gustavus Adolphus II’s heart relaxed, and he fainted.

Haldor, Olaf, and Hudik personally led their troops to scatter and kill several hundred pursuers before turning to catch up with Duke Albert and Gustavus Adolphus II, who were nearly back to the rear.

“How is His Majesty? I am Duke Haldor of Iceland, and this is my son, Olaf.” Haldor looked at the figure slumped on the horse, presumably Gustavus Adolphus II, and shouted in Danish.

Sweden had only broken free from Danish control a few decades ago, so many Swedes could still speak and understand Danish, especially among the nobility and officials.

Before Haldor’s question could finish, Duke Albert said, “Greetings, Duke Haldor! We are deeply grateful for your rescue. His Majesty and we owe our lives to you; otherwise, the consequences would have been unthinkable! I am Duke Albert of Saxony-Lauenburg. His Majesty has been shot and is now unconscious. We must return to Naumburg immediately to have the army doctors treat him!”

Chapter 249: The Rescue (2)

Haldor, appearing as a divine reinforcement from the heavens, saved Gustavus Adolphus II, Duke Albert, and others from peril, escorting them safely back to Naumburg.

Since Gustavus Adolphus II had not perished, military command remained in his hands. However, news of his injury spread, dampening the morale of the Protestant forces. Soon, the Protestant army began to retreat, eventually falling back to Naumburg under the leadership of Duke Bernhard and other commanders.

Unlike the outcome Olaf remembered, his involvement in the Battle of Lützen had altered the fate of Gustavus Adolphus II, who was no longer destined to be shot dead on the battlefield. Consequently, the story of the Swedish army avenging their fallen king and defeating the Catholic League never came to pass.

The Battle of Lützen concluded in the evening, with the Protestant Union in disarray, retreating to Naumburg. Though the Catholic League emerged victorious, they were severely weakened and could only besiege Naumburg, waiting for reinforcements before launching another assault.

Upon entering Naumburg, Gustavus Adolphus II was taken to a room by a Tartar physician for treatment. Duke Albert, Haldor, and Olaf waited outside. Initially, Haldor had intended to recommend his Ming physician, but Olaf subtly tugged at his father’s sleeve, signaling him to hold off for now.

It turned out that Olaf and Haldor had arrived near Naumburg a few days prior, concealing their identities in a dilapidated village deep within the forest. Each day, they gathered intelligence on the Leipzig area, particularly Lützen.

When they learned that both the Catholic and Protestant forces were amassing in large numbers, Olaf and Haldor knew the battle was imminent.

Olaf waited until scouts confirmed that the Swedish army had indeed left Naumburg before setting out with his father, Hudik, and three thousand Viking cavalry. As they neared Lützen, they split into several groups, disguising themselves as bandits and hiding in the nearby forests. The German region was fertile, with abundant forests, and years of war had left the woods infested with outlaws. As long as they did not attack military units or disrupt marches, even if discovered, they would not face mortal danger.

When the sound of cannon fire echoed across the Lützen battlefield in the morning, Olaf, Haldor, and Hudik led their cavalry out of the forest, approaching the battle.

By the time they reached Lützen, it was midday, and the morning fog had dissipated. The Catholic and Protestant forces were locked in fierce combat. With only three thousand men, the Viking army could hardly turn the tide in a battle involving tens of thousands. To preserve their strength, Hudik suggested waiting.

Olaf took out his telescope and scanned the battlefield for a long time. He spotted two potential Protestant commanders who resembled Gustavus Adolphus II. However, the king’s distinctive features were well-known, and based on the color of the beard visible beneath the helmet and the blurred facial features, Olaf confirmed that the commander leading the cavalry was indeed Gustavus Adolphus II.

Olaf had not come to Lützen to participate in the Thirty Years’ War but for political opportunism—to save Gustavus Adolphus II, who was fated to die in battle, and thus gain immense political capital and prestige.

After locating Gustavus Adolphus II, Olaf and Haldor continued to lurk in the woods outside the battlefield. Olaf kept a close watch on the distant battlefield through his monocular telescope until the afternoon fog rose. He saw Gustavus Adolphus II leading his troops into the Catholic League’s encirclement. Soon, the unit attempted to break out, but the king’s clothes were stained with blood, and he was on the verge of fainting.

Olaf knew the moment had come. He ordered his army to strike, swiftly eliminating the Catholic forces pursuing Gustavus Adolphus II’s cavalry while covering the Lion King’s retreat from the battlefield.

Now, instead of dying in battle, Gustavus Adolphus II had been shot and wounded, unconscious, and retreated to Naumburg. The Swedish army, which historically had rallied to avenge their fallen king and defeat the Catholic League, was now in retreat. The entire castle was shrouded in gloom, with soldiers and generals alike anxiously praying for the king’s recovery, hoping God would bless and save his life.

Olaf sensed the heavy atmosphere in Naumburg and recalled that Gustavus Adolphus II had only been shot in the left arm—an injury that, in theory, was not life-threatening. Thus, he discouraged his father from offering their physician’s services, deciding to wait and see.

For Olaf, even if the Swedish military doctors succeeded in treating Gustavus Adolphus II, the credit for saving the king would still belong to him and his father. If the Swedish doctors failed, they could step in at the critical moment with Song Qinghe’s medical expertise, maximizing their gains.

While Olaf, Haldor, Hudik, and Duke Albert waited, several high-ranking commanders, led by Duke Bernhard, arrived in bloodstained armor, their faces etched with urgency.

“Duke Bernhard!” Duke Albert greeted them hastily.

“How is His Majesty?” Duke Bernhard, a stern man in his forties, asked breathlessly, his brow furrowed with concern.

“The king was shot in the arm. Fortunately, Duke Haldor of Iceland came to our rescue, or we would have been doomed. However, His Majesty’s injuries are severe, and he remains unconscious. He is currently receiving treatment!”

“Oh?” Duke Bernhard glanced at Olaf and Haldor. Duke Albert quickly introduced them.

Under Duke Albert’s introduction, Olaf and Haldor met the high-ranking officials of the Swedish United Kingdom and the Protestant forces in northern Germany. Together, they waited anxiously outside the room for news of the treatment.

…

After an hour of anxious waiting, the doctor emerged, holding a red-hot branding iron that emitted the scent of seared flesh.

“How is he?” Duke Bernhard asked urgently. As a veteran Swedish noble with royal ties—his family had even produced a king before the unification of the Nordic region—he was deeply invested in Gustavus Adolphus II’s well-being, both personally and for the sake of the nation.

The doctor, clad in a black cloak and a bird-beaked mask, removed the mask to reveal a gaunt face. He was a Tartar. “The king’s wound has been cauterized to stop the bleeding,” he said. “However, he has lost a great deal of blood, and the bullet could not be removed. There is still a risk of infection. We must wait two days. If he survives…”

Olaf realized that the Tartar doctor had used a branding iron to cauterize Gustavus Adolphus II’s wound—a method that relied on high heat to seal and disinfect the injury. In an era without antiseptics, this might indeed be the most advanced treatment for external wounds.

…

Gustavus Adolphus II remained unconscious, forcing everyone to stay in Naumburg and wait. The defeat in the Battle of Lützen had resulted in roughly equal casualties for both sides, but the Protestant forces had lost most of their cannons to the Catholic League. This left the ten thousand Protestant soldiers defending Naumburg in a precarious position.

That evening, Duke Bernhard, acting as deputy commander, convened all high-ranking military officials to discuss defense strategies. He also invited Haldor and Olaf to attend.

After rallying the troops, Duke Bernhard informed them that Prime Minister Oxenstierna was leading a force of one hundred thousand—comprising English mercenaries, Swedish soldiers, and Pomeranian troops—that would soon arrive. Once reinforcements arrived, they would surely repel Wallenstein’s forces besieging Naumburg.

Everyone placed their trust in Duke Bernhard’s words, as it was common knowledge that Oxenstierna had been gathering troops, securing supplies, and marching south to provide support. According to the original plan, they were supposed to reach the Electorate of Saxony that very day.

After the meeting, all Protestant forces were assigned defensive duties. The small town of Naumburg was packed with troops, but supplies would only last a week. Haldor and Olaf’s three thousand Viking cavalry, who had brought their own rations, were allocated some wine. Duke Bernhard explained that compensation would be provided after the siege was lifted, but Olaf, Haldor, and Hudik could sense they were being sidelined—or treated as outsiders.

Olaf did not share his father’s anger. Instead, he dissuaded Haldor from confronting Duke Bernhard, reiterating their purpose in coming to Lützen: to save Gustavus Adolphus II and earn immense merit.

Now that their goal had been achieved, all they had to do was wait for the king to awaken. If his condition worsened, they could send Song Qinghe to treat him. Once Gustavus Adolphus II recovered, all current injustices could be repaid in full.

Chapter 250: Saving the King (3)

The first patriarch of the Hrut family, as described in The Hrut Family, was Haldor and Haig’s ancestor, known as the “Grey Cloak Jarl.” He had once aided the Norwegian king in battle and saved his life, earning the title of Jarl, along with gold, silver, and the king’s own grey cloak.

With the support of the Norwegian kingdom and his reputation as a hero, Hrut was able to claim vast lands in Iceland and become a key member of the Althing. Inspired by their ancestor’s deeds, the Haldor family had always been motivated by the idea of aiding the king for personal gain. Thus, when Olaf claimed to have received divine revelation that he could save Gustavus Adolphus II, who was fated to die in battle, Haldor gave his full support.

Duke Haldor of Iceland and Earl Olaf of Vinland led their forces to rescue the besieged Gustavus Adolphus II. For this deed, Olaf and his son would surely earn the respect of the Swedish royal family, but they would also inevitably face the jealousy of other ministers and nobles in the Swedish United Kingdom.

Gustavus Adolphus II had not yet awakened, and during the defense against the Catholic League, the Icelandic Viking Raid had already suffered unfair treatment. Apart from Duke Albert, no one else had spoken up for Iceland’s interests.

Haldor and Olaf eventually accepted Duke Bernhard’s arrangement for the Icelandic Viking Raid to take on night defense and the first line of defense. This was not because the father and son were weak-willed, but because they had been lurking in the forests near Leipzig for a long time and were well aware of the Catholic League’s troop strength and supplies. They knew that Wallenstein’s scattered forces, which had been foraging in various places, had likely not yet fully assembled. Moreover, the Catholic League had suffered heavy losses earlier, making it difficult for them to launch an attack on Naumburg in the short term.

Life inside Naumburg was dull. It was not until the next day that Olaf and Haldor learned from Duke Albert that Gustavus Adolphus II had awakened and begun eating. After learning of the Icelandic Viking volunteers’ assistance, Gustavus Adolphus II wished to meet Haldor and Olaf in person.

However, Duke Bernhard declined the request on the grounds that the king’s condition had not yet fully recovered. Haldor, upon hearing this, cursed Duke Bernhard as shameless, but he was currently powerless to retaliate and could only endure for the time being.

Upon learning of Gustavus Adolphus II’s awakening, the morale of the Protestant League forces in Naumburg instantly recovered. The gloomy atmosphere and anxious mood were swept away, and soldiers and officers excitedly discussed how the Lion King would lead them to vengeance once he recovered.

But their joy was short-lived. Gustavus Adolphus II suddenly fell into a high fever, his wounds festering with infection. Even after the Tartar physician administered medicine and applied herbal remedies, there was little effect.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s condition rapidly deteriorated, and he fell into a coma once more. The military physicians were at a loss, and after much discussion, they decided to abandon the king’s severely infected left arm, resorting to the most traditional European treatment—amputation.

If they amputated Gustavus Adolphus II’s infected left arm, the issues caused by the infection could be resolved. But what about the problems that would arise after the amputation?

No one dared to make the decision alone, as the mortality rate after amputation was high. However, waiting any longer would also make it difficult to save the king’s life.

After several rounds of discussion, everyone still reserved their opinions, deciding to wait for Chancellor Oxenstierna’s arrival to make the final decision.

At this time, Olaf also learned through Duke Albert that Gustavus Adolphus II was indeed in a high fever and coma due to his infected wounds. He thought that now was the best time to act, so he took Song Qinghe to see Duke Albert, telling him that his personal physician came from the distant eastern land of Qin and possessed miraculous medical skills that might be able to treat Gustavus Adolphus II’s injuries.

The mysterious eastern kingdom had long been a paradise in the minds of European nobles. Tales of its wealth, along with rare goods like silk, porcelain, and sugar, had captivated the European aristocracy for centuries.

Duke Albert looked at Song Qinghe, whose appearance and attire differed from Europeans, and after asking Olaf a few details, he happily took Olaf and Song Qinghe to see Duke Bernhard, hoping that Song Qinghe could treat Gustavus Adolphus II.

But Duke Bernhard did not trust Song Qinghe and refused Olaf and Duke Albert’s request.

Duke Albert, furious, took Olaf and Song Qinghe back to his room, slamming the door and cursing the arrogant Duke Bernhard.

Olaf did not join in Duke Albert’s anger but only sneered coldly. Finally, he said, “Your Grace need not be angry. Duke Bernhard will pay for his ignorance. Chancellor Oxenstierna should arrive in Naumburg today. He will allow my physician, Song, to treat His Majesty. When the king awakens and learns of the situation, even if he understands that Duke Bernhard’s intentions were cautious, he will still be displeased…”

“You’re right, Olaf. The chancellor should arrive today. Wait—”

Before Duke Albert could finish, a guard outside the door shouted urgently, “Your Grace! Chancellor Oxenstierna is attacking the rear of the Catholic League! Duke Bernhard orders us to join the attack on the Catholic League!”

Olaf and Duke Albert exchanged a smile, then quickly stepped outside.

Olaf took Song Qinghe and left Duke Albert’s room, returning to the Icelandic Viking Raid’s encampment—a garden that had now been built into simple wooden houses.

Haldor had also received the notice and was gathering soldiers. Moments later, the Icelandic Viking soldiers, along with the Saxon troops and the forces led by Duke Albert, charged out of Naumburg as the first wave.

Chancellor Oxenstierna led the Swedish and Pomeranian forces to engage most of the troops besieging Naumburg. Haldor, Hudik, and Olaf, after breaking out of the castle, saw only two to three thousand musketeers in a square formation ahead, with distant gunfire, cannon blasts, and white smoke—clearly, Oxenstierna’s forces were fiercely battling Wallenstein’s army.

“The enemy’s numbers are few. This is our chance to earn merit! Men, follow me and charge! Break through the Catholic bastards’ encirclement, shatter their army, and welcome Chancellor Oxenstierna!”

Haldor stood tall on his horse, shouting loudly, and the Viking cavalry surged forward like a flood, braving the Catholic League’s hail of bullets.

In the early stages of hot weaponry in the 17th century, firearms and cannons were muzzle-loaded and lacked rifling, making their accuracy rather poor. Hitting a moving target required very close range, considerable skill, and natural talent.

Generally, the terror of musketeers on the battlefield lay in their lined-up musket volleys. Hundreds or thousands of firearms firing simultaneously had devastating power, but against swiftly charging cavalry, the threat of musketeers was somewhat diminished.

Now, the Icelandic Viking Raid soldiers charged at full speed, and the Catholic musketeers’ aim and speed could not keep up with the Icelandic cavalry. Moreover, the number of musketeers in the encirclement was small, so most of the bullets missed.

By the time the musketeers had reloaded for a second volley, Haldor, Hudik, and Olaf could already see the faces of the musketeers ahead.

With a roar, Haldor signaled all the Icelandic Viking cavalry to grab the short spears and hand axes hanging from their horses, employing one of the Vikings’ three traditional skills—the “throwing axe technique.”

Short spears and throwing axes whistled through the air, killing or wounding one or two hundred Catholic musketeers and creating a gap in the encirclement.

The Icelandic Viking cavalry moved at incredible speed, and their long spears followed the throwing axes, piercing the scattered musketeers’ chests.

As the Icelandic Viking cavalry broke through the Catholic League’s encirclement, the Protestant cavalry that followed also charged into the breach, and in an instant, slaughter erupted within the encirclement.

Cavalry fell from their horses amid gunfire, horses trampled the mangled bodies of Catholic soldiers, and long spears occasionally pierced the chests of soldiers still reloading or wielding spears.

Chapter 251: Diagnosis

The Battle of Naumburg began when Oxenstierna led his forces to attack the Catholic League’s positions.

The Catholic League’s forces outnumbered those within Naumburg by more than twofold, and with the firepower advantage of their artillery positions, if the Protestant Union had simply attacked Naumburg, they would have been forced into a passive defense.

However, another major figure from Sweden’s rear, Oxenstierna, led over ten thousand troops, including artillery and cavalry, to reinforce them. Upon arriving at Lützen, they immediately engaged in a bloody battle with Wallenstein’s forces.

Oxenstierna had already gathered the remnants of the Protestant Union’s troops the day before and learned that Gustavus Adolphus II had been wounded on the battlefield. Thus, upon reaching the vicinity of Lützen, he ordered a fierce attack on the Catholic League, hoping to defeat them, lift the siege on Naumburg, and see Gustavus Adolphus II as soon as possible.

Initially, the forces led by Oxenstierna successively captured several camps of the Catholic League. However, when Wallenstein redirected the troops besieging Naumburg, they halted the Swedish Union’s advance.

During the stalemate between the two armies, the Viking Raid from Iceland and other Swedish legions within Naumburg broke through the encirclement. Some joined the battle to attack the Catholic League, while others directly assaulted the Catholic League’s artillery positions.

The Catholic League quickly suffered heavy casualties and began to crumble.

This year, Wallenstein was already fifty years old. Although his hair and beard were still black and his face remained handsome, he himself felt his energy waning.

Ambitious, Wallenstein, after being reinstated, aimed to defeat Gustavus Adolphus II and leave his name in history, becoming the brightest star in the pan-European war. He knew this might be his greatest chance for success. Thus, during the summer, he engaged in a strategic battle with Gustavus Adolphus II in Bavaria, ultimately choosing the northern city-state of Leipzig in winter to bury the Protestant Union.

Wallenstein’s plan was meticulous, and he achieved significant results—Gustavus Adolphus II indeed nearly died in the Battle of Lützen.

He was preparing to expand his gains, gathering a large army to besiege Naumburg, but the troops near Leipzig had barely assembled when they were attacked by Protestant forces coming from the direction of the Duchy of Pomerania.

Wallenstein knew it was Oxenstierna leading the Swedish reinforcements. Unwilling to let Gustavus Adolphus II escape, he could only order his men to intercept Oxenstierna, hoping to defeat the new Protestant legions.

Although Wallenstein was initially caught off guard by Oxenstierna and lost several positions, after personally supervising the battle, his forces adjusted and, leveraging their artillery and numerical advantage, gradually began to repel Oxenstierna’s Protestant forces.

Just as Wallenstein was about to press his advantage, he suddenly heard gunfire and hoofbeats from the rear. His face changed, and he quickly grabbed his telescope to look behind him, seeing thousands of Protestant cavalry breaking through the encirclement and charging into the rear of the Catholic forces.

“Quick! Retreat!” Wallenstein cried in alarm. At this moment, he had no time to wonder why the Protestant forces within Naumburg had acted so swiftly, breaking through his encirclement without any warning.

With the defenders of Naumburg attacking the rear of the Catholic League, the tide of the battle between the Catholic League and the Protestant Union had turned. Wallenstein’s forces were doomed to defeat; the only question was the extent of their loss.

Having fought on the battlefield for decades, Wallenstein immediately realized the situation was hopeless and could only order a retreat.

In the end, under the assault of Oxenstierna, Haldor, Duke Bernhard, and other Protestant commanders, over thirty thousand Catholic troops abandoned more than three thousand corpses and several dozen cannons, swiftly retreating from Lützen back to Leipzig to hold their ground.

After meeting with Duke Bernhard and Haldor, Oxenstierna had no time for pleasantries and immediately went to Naumburg to visit the still unconscious Gustavus Adolphus II.

Seeing the emaciated face and labored breathing of Gustavus Adolphus II, Oxenstierna’s eyes reddened, and he couldn’t help but shed tears.

As the most trusted minister and political and military partner of Gustavus Adolphus II, Oxenstierna was not only grateful for the king’s favor but also regarded the king, eleven years his junior, as a mentor and friend. Now, seeing the Lion King on the verge of death, Oxenstierna was heartbroken and quickly inquired about the king’s condition from the military doctor.

“The king is now in a coma with a high fever. Although I have cleaned his wounds, his body is too weak. I fear he only has a week left to live…”

As Gustavus Adolphus II’s condition worsened, the Tatar doctor was also at a loss. After being brought in, he could only explain with a sorrowful expression.

Oxenstierna quickly accepted the reality. His mind had already flashed through the subsequent steps of assisting the new monarch after the king’s death, but the reluctance in his heart and his concern for Sweden’s future made him sigh deeply. Spreading his hands, he sat on the sofa in the living room and said, “Does that mean the king is truly beyond saving? Is there no way to treat him?”

Oxenstierna spoke with a hopeful gaze at the Tatar doctor, who blinked and said, “May God bless the king!”

Disappointment was evident in Oxenstierna’s eyes. Just as he was about to accept the reality of Gustavus Adolphus II’s impending death, a loud voice spoke in somewhat broken Swedish, “I have a way to save the king!”

“Oh?” Oxenstierna looked at the speaker with surprise and asked, “Count Olaf, are you sure you can save the king?”

Olaf glanced at the ashen-faced Duke Bernhard and said gravely, “My military doctor comes from the distant Ming Dynasty. He possesses miraculous skills and can attempt to save the king’s life.”

“Quick! Bring him in to try,” Oxenstierna said urgently, with a hint of reproach in his tone, “Why didn’t you say so earlier? Delaying the king’s life would be a grave sin!”

Olaf turned and called in Song Qinghe and his disciple, who had been waiting outside the living room. As everyone looked at Song Qinghe in astonishment, Olaf coldly remarked, “I had already proposed that my doctor treat the king, but Duke Bernhard never agreed.”

“Oh?” Oxenstierna’s sharp gaze fiercely swept over Duke Bernhard. Without waiting for the duke to explain, he waved his hand and said, “Let’s not talk about that now. Please have this doctor treat the king.”

After speaking, Oxenstierna personally led Olaf, Haldor, and Song Qinghe and his disciple into the back room. At this moment, the room only contained the bedridden Gustavus Adolphus II, with no other people or objects.

“Doctor Song, please examine the king,” Olaf said to Song Qinghe in Chinese.

Song Qinghe nervously approached the bed. His disciple brought a soft stool, and he only dared to lightly touch the stool with his buttocks. Then, with a solemn expression, he took Gustavus Adolphus II’s pulse and lifted his clothes to examine the wound. After a moment of deep thought, he stood up.

“How is it?” Oxenstierna stepped forward and asked.

Olaf immediately followed up with a question in Mandarin. Song Qinghe cupped his hands and bowed, speaking in somewhat unstandard Mandarin with a Minnan accent, “Reporting to Master Olaf, the king’s wounds have festered and become infected. His body’s vital energy is imbalanced, and evil energy is rising, clouding his mind and spirit… His pulse is extremely weak, and I fear there are hidden injuries in his body. He is indeed in critical condition…”

Olaf waved his hand and said, “Just tell me if it can be treated and how.”

Song Qinghe was about to continue his lengthy explanation but was interrupted by Olaf. He could only stroke his beard and sigh, “It is indeed difficult to treat, but not impossible. We need to open the wound, remove the bullet, excise the rotten flesh and poisonous sores, then apply wound medicine externally and take tonic medicine internally. Daily acupuncture will be needed to regulate the vital energy and suppress the evil wind. If all goes well, results can be seen in half a month, and full recovery in two months…”

“But my wound medicine is sufficient, but the tonic decoction is nowhere to be found. Moreover, the king’s body is too weak. I fear that after treatment, his sores may recur, and even the greatest divine doctor may not be able to save him then…”

Chapter 252: Heaven-Appointed Leader of the New Faith

Song Qinghe hesitated as he shared his diagnosis of Gustavus Adolphus II’s condition, causing Olaf’s expression to darken. After a moment, he relayed the grim news to Oxenstierna in even more severe terms, then asked, “Chancellor, do you still wish for Doctor Song to treat His Majesty?”

Oxenstierna appeared somewhat dazed but understood that this Doctor Song from the Ming Empire had some confidence in his abilities. Glancing at the pale, bloodless face of Gustavus Adolphus II, he gritted his teeth and said, “Very well! Ask Doctor Song to treat His Majesty. If he fails, I promise he won’t be blamed.”

With Oxenstierna’s assurance, Olaf instructed Song Qinghe to proceed with the treatment while he and the others stood by, watching from a distance.

Song Qinghe’s disciple retrieved a cloth bundle from the medical kit and handed it to his master. Inside were rows of silver needles of varying sizes and shapes. Song Qinghe selected one and made a small incision on Gustavus Adolphus II’s left arm, squeezing out the pus before ordering his disciple—under Olaf’s direction—to cleanse the wound with the strongest alcohol available. Then, he took a small porcelain bottle from the bundle, uncorked it, and sprinkled a black powder over the wound. Though Olaf stood some distance away, the scent was unmistakably familiar. Could it be Yunnan Baiyao?

The room soon filled with the pungent mix of medicinal herbs and alcohol, yet no one seemed to notice the stench. All eyes were fixed on Song Qinghe as he performed his miraculous healing.

The art of acupuncture was unknown in the West, and even the Tatar physician present was stunned by what he witnessed.

After an hour of treating the wound and administering acupuncture, Song Qinghe, his face beaded with sweat, finally exhaled in relief. “His Majesty’s condition has stabilized for now. As long as the wound does not worsen and the malignant energy is suppressed, he should recover gradually.”

“Excellent!” Olaf exclaimed. “Doctor Song, you and your disciple shall each be rewarded with two taels of silver.”

“Many thanks, Master Olaf!” Song Qinghe and his disciple bowed deeply in gratitude. Rising, Song Qinghe continued, “For now, we lack the proper herbs, but we can prepare a pot of chicken broth—skimmed of fat and impurities—to nourish His Majesty. Alas, if I had known of this earlier, I would have brought a few ginseng roots from Fuzhou…”

Olaf’s eyes lit up at the mention. “Doctor Song, last year, after conquering the lands near Quebec, I received tribute from the tribes north of the Saint Lawrence River. Among the offerings were roots resembling the ginseng of the Ming Empire. They’ve been stored in the warehouse, though I took some to brew as tea. Would you examine them?”

Olaf then ordered Pikku to fetch the herbs from the Labrador tribes that he had kept, suspecting they might be American ginseng.

Pikku, familiar with Olaf’s habits, quickly retrieved two dried, bearded roots and handed them to Song Qinghe.

After a brief inspection, Song Qinghe broke off a strand and chewed it thoughtfully. “The taste is similar, though the medicinal properties may differ slightly. Still, it should help replenish vitality. Let us slice it and brew it for His Majesty to drink.”

Relieved, Olaf turned to Oxenstierna and explained, “Doctor Song has finished treating His Majesty. He intends to prepare a medicinal broth with this Eastern ginseng and chicken soup. If God wills it, and His Majesty’s wounds do not worsen, he should regain his strength within two weeks.”

“Excellent!”

Oxenstierna fixed Olaf with a determined gaze. “Olaf, your contributions to the nation are not forgotten, nor will I overlook the merits of you and Duke Haldor. The king’s health is vital to Sweden’s future and the fate of the Protestant Union. You and your physician must stay to care for him. Whatever they require, arrange for the guards to provide. We must restore His Majesty’s health. Do you understand?”

Moved by Oxenstierna’s plea, Olaf replied earnestly, “His Majesty’s safety is my greatest concern. Rest assured, Chancellor, I will spare no effort in his recovery!”

…

Whether it was Song Qinghe’s masterful skill, the disinfecting power of the strong alcohol, or the nourishing effects of the American ginseng and chicken broth, Gustavus Adolphus II awoke the next day, his complexion gradually regaining its color.

By the third day, with Olaf’s support, he was able to leave his bed and walk. Only then did he find the strength to speak beyond mere words.

After some idle conversation with Olaf about Iceland’s progress, Gustavus Adolphus II sighed. “Olaf, I thank you and Haldar for all you’ve done. I never expected you to come to my aid, nor that fate would prevent you from joining Oxenstierna, instead bringing you to the battlefield at Lützen to save me. It is truly miraculous!”

Olaf smiled with reverence. “My father always spoke of you as a ruler comparable to Caesar. Serving you is an honor for our family. After resolving Iceland’s crisis, we were determined to contribute to the great Protestant cause you lead. Despite the objections of our people, my father left behind a ruined Iceland and brought our elite forces to support you. Perhaps it was God’s will—we were lost in the fog for days, yet on the very morning of the Battle of Lützen, a path cleared before us, leading us straight to you!”

Indeed, Olaf thought, it must be that God, too, despises the deeds of the Roman Church. You, as the savior of the New Faith, bear a divine mission. It is through us that God aids you!

Gustavus Adolphus II, having cheated death and grown fond of the tall, handsome young man over the past few days, found himself nodding in agreement. “You’re right. It must be God’s will for me to fulfill the mission of defeating Catholicism. I shall have Oxenstierna spread word of this miracle to bolster the morale of our Protestant allies!”

Hearing the king’s resolute tone, Olaf’s mind raced. Truly, the great figures of history live up to their reputation, he marveled. Gustavus Adolphus II had instantly recognized the propaganda value of this narrative and chosen to embrace—and propagate—it.

If the tale of the king’s miraculous rescue on the battlefield were framed as divine intervention, and given how plausible it sounded, Gustavus Adolphus II—already the king of the Swedish United Kingdom and supreme commander of the Protestant forces—could bind the entire Protestant faction to Sweden’s divinely favored cause. Should they go on to crush the Catholic League, he might even become the next Caesar, uniting the continent.

This narrative, if woven with the mystique Olaf had suggested, would not only elevate Sweden’s standing and Gustavus Adolphus II’s prestige but also undermine the legitimacy of the Catholic League.

Of course, other European nations might doubt the story’s authenticity, but they would have no grounds to refute it. The arrival of the Viking Raid under Haldar and Olaf had been undeniably fortuitous, and Song Qinghe, the Ming physician, had indeed just arrived in Europe. The entire sequence of events—witnessed by Swedes, Germans, Englishmen, and even Frenchmen within the Protestant ranks—was too extraordinary to dismiss as mere coincidence.

In the eyes of 17th-century people, whose understanding of fate was simple and unquestioning, such a series of improbable events could only be the work of a higher power. And who but the Almighty God could orchestrate such a grand design?

Chapter 253: With Olaf, I Am Like a Tiger with Wings

Gustavus Adolphus II was a monarch of extraordinary vision and talent. Proficient in over seven languages, he was well-versed in mathematics, philosophy, and history, and was also a great military strategist and statesman. He had always been confident in his ability to conquer Germany and replace the title of Holy Roman Emperor.

Now, after hearing Olaf’s words, Gustavus Adolphus II could not help but feel a sense of divine mission descending upon him. His confidence grew, and he prepared to spread the news that he was the chosen one, adding another layer of security to his rule over the Protestant nations.

After suffering a crushing defeat at the hands of Oxenstierna and the Naumburg garrison, Wallenstein had retreated to Leipzig and made no further moves. Meanwhile, winter had arrived with a snowfall.

Although the winters in northern Germany were not as harsh as those in Iceland, they were similar to those in Vinland. In such weather, no war could be waged. Both the Catholic and Protestant armies had to stay in their warm houses, waiting for the arrival of spring.

After the battles of Lützen and Naumburg, Germany experienced a rare moment of brief peace. Thanks to the abundant food and supplies brought by Oxenstierna, which were sufficient to support the nearly thirty thousand troops through the winter, the Protestant army’s winter life in Naumburg and the surrounding villages was relatively comfortable.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s days of recuperation in Naumburg were also quite pleasant. Apart from being cared for and treated daily by Song Qinghe and his disciples, as well as Olaf, he spent his time discussing state affairs with high-ranking officials such as Oxenstierna, Duke Bernhard, Duke Albert, and Duke Haldor. The Lion King’s health was visibly improving.

Sometimes, when Gustavus Adolphus II was bored, he would play chess and chat with Olaf. As time went on, the king grew increasingly fond of the young man.

Gustavus Adolphus II had always considered himself a wise ruler. He did not believe that his fondness for Olaf was merely due to the young man’s flattery. The Lion King found Olaf to be a man of profound knowledge despite his youth. His views on the various European nations and his judgments on the pan-European war often aligned with his own. The king believed that it was truly a blessing from God for a remote and barren island like Iceland to produce such a genius.

Haldor and Olaf had demonstrated their loyalty to the Swedish Kingdom by traveling thousands of miles to join the war. Their rescue of Gustavus Adolphus II in his time of need had also shown their potential as fortunate generals. The king held Haldor and Olaf in high regard and was grateful to them. Their recent displays of talent, ability, and character only deepened his appreciation, leading him to grow closer to the two Icelandic leaders.

Duke Bernhard and other Swedish nobles showed clear hostility and jealousy towards Haldor and Olaf’s favor. In response, Haldor and Olaf ignored them outright.

Oxenstierna had long recognized Olaf’s abilities. In fact, half a year ago, he had been concerned that Iceland might become disobedient under Olaf’s rule. However, recent events and the king’s acceptance of the divine miracle story had temporarily put Oxenstierna’s mind at ease regarding Olaf. After all, Haldor and Olaf’s recent actions could only be interpreted as those of loyal subjects to Sweden.

In their attitude towards the Icelandic father-son commanders, both Oxenstierna and the Lion King were very close and respectful. However, as the king’s old friend and confidant, Oxenstierna could sense the king’s underlying thoughts.

Neither Gustavus Adolphus II nor Oxenstierna paid much attention to the small, isolated island of Iceland.

If it weren’t for Iceland’s colonies in the West Indies, which allowed Sweden to colonize America, neither Oxenstierna nor Gustavus Adolphus II would have been willing to recruit Iceland into Sweden with the title of duke.

Whether Iceland was obedient or would rebel in the future was something Gustavus Adolphus II might not have considered at all. Oxenstierna had considered it but did not take it seriously. As the leaders of the Swedish United Kingdom, they were well aware of Sweden’s strength and position, and that Sweden’s goal was the vast lands of the southern and eastern Baltic Sea. Iceland was no match for Sweden now, nor would it ever be.

As long as the Lion King of Sweden remained healthy and the Swedish Kingdom maintained its strong military, Iceland would remain loyally by Sweden’s side.

As leaders, they could not demand unconditional loyalty and blind obedience from their subordinates. Everyone had their own thoughts, and political relationships were often maintained through mutual interests.

A mature politician knew how to maintain the interests that the other party needed, thereby preserving a stable bilateral relationship.

Both Gustavus Adolphus II and Oxenstierna were mature politicians, and every action they took was carefully considered and planned.

They both understood that Iceland needed to rely on the powerful Sweden to resist Denmark. Regardless of whether Haldor and Olaf were truly loyal, as long as Sweden remained strong, they would maintain their loyalty.

In Gustavus Adolphus II’s mind, Haldor was a loyal outer lord. His loyalty and assistance could be exchanged for resources, money, and even more help from the king, thereby enabling Iceland to counter Denmark. After all, suppressing Denmark was entirely in Sweden’s interest.

Olaf, being young and having recently displayed extraordinary abilities and insights, was considered by Gustavus Adolphus II as a key subordinate to be cultivated.

Due to his fondness, trust, and gratitude for saving his life, Gustavus Adolphus II had praised Haldor and Olaf on multiple occasions. This had led to the near-complete isolation of Haldor and his son by the other officials in Naumburg.

However, Olaf and Haldor did not mind at all. As long as Gustavus Adolphus II valued them, their purpose in joining the war had been achieved.

From the current situation, Olaf’s risky investment had paid off handsomely.

Gustavus Adolphus II had taken the initiative to offer some cannons and firearms to Iceland. If Iceland had any additional needs beyond that, they could be sold to Haldor at a low price.

Sweden possessed iron mines of excellent quality. Currently, apart from the renowned Swedish army, Sweden was also famous for its weapons and equipment, especially its smoothbore muskets and cannons, which were of high quality, durable, and rarely exploded. The price of Swedish firearms in the European market had always been higher than those of other countries.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s promise to Haldor, whether in symbolic or practical terms, far exceeded the cost and sacrifice of this war. Haldor had been very happy these past few days, and Olaf had become even more enthusiastic in serving Gustavus Adolphus II.

Every day, at Olaf’s request, Song Qinghe performed acupuncture and pulse diagnosis on Gustavus Adolphus II. The Chinese scholar had gradually become familiar with this great European monarch. Chinese literati had a habit of writing travelogues and biographies, both of which could leave their names in history.

After arriving in Europe, Song Qinghe had been secretly writing about his experiences. These days, as Gustavus Adolphus II’s injuries improved significantly, Song Qinghe’s travelogue included more descriptions of the Western monarch.

After another treatment session, Song Qinghe received a bear pelt cloak as a reward from Gustavus Adolphus II. He returned to his room, happily put away the bear pelt, and then took out his writing tools to continue his travelogue.

“Today, at the hour of the snake, after performing acupuncture on His Majesty, the king bestowed upon me a white bear pelt cloak. The fur is pure in color, without any impurities, and is warm, soft, and smooth to the touch, cool as silk, and extremely comfortable. Truly a treasure! In the afternoon, I accompanied Olaf in serving His Majesty during his meal. The king and Olaf discussed state affairs with great enthusiasm. At one point, the king stood up and lightly patted Olaf’s shoulder, saying: ‘With Olaf, I am like a tiger with wings. It is a blessing from heaven! Olaf, though young, is measured in his actions and possesses intelligence far beyond the ordinary. He is the Liu Ji and Zhuge Liang of the West…’”

Hundreds of years later, Song Qinghe’s manuscript was discovered by later generations and named “Records of the Western Journey.” The sincere and heartfelt conversations and interactions between Olaf and Gustavus Adolphus II provided important support for later research into the relationship between the king and his minister.

Chapter 254: Winter’s Chill

As the Arctic winds grew fiercer, a heavy snowstorm finally swept across northern Germany. Leipzig, blanketed in snow, stood in silent stillness—trees laden with ice, rivers and lakes frozen solid. In such weather, no one dared venture outside.

The snow and bitter cold made warfare nearly impossible. Even if troops braved the elements, securing supplies was a struggle. A single night without shelter could decimate an elite army. With spring still far off, no battles would be fought across Europe. In Naumburg, under Oxenstierna’s direction, rations were reduced to conserve resources, and all soldiers not on duty were confined to their quarters to minimize energy expenditure.

Gustavus Adolphus II, nourished by a daily chicken and cared for by Song Qinghe and his disciple, had finally recovered from his injuries.

Over the past month, Olaf had forged a deep friendship with the king as his translator. Gustavus Adolphus II had repeatedly expressed his intention to promote Olaf and pledged substantial support for Iceland, offering funds, weapons, and horses to help Haldor and Olaf raise a loyal Viking Raid.

Haldor and Olaf were overjoyed by the king’s promises and expressed their gratitude on the spot.

Once Gustavus Adolphus II no longer required medical attention, Olaf’s role as translator became unnecessary. By mid-December, only Prime Minister Oxenstierna was permitted to meet with the king in his warm chamber. Other nobles and generals remained in their rooms unless summoned.

Olaf and Haldor rarely saw the king after that.

Yet, neither father nor son seemed to mind. Both were men of ambition, unwilling to be mere servants to a king. Confined to their quarters, Haldor, Hudik, and Olaf often invited Duke Albert to drink and chat.

With no wives or hunting to pass the time, the nobles in Naumburg had little to entertain themselves. Duke Albert, after learning the card game “Fighting the Trolls” from Olaf, became obsessed. Within half a month, the game spread among the nobility in Naumburg.

Occasionally, Duke Albert would bring other northern German nobles and generals to play cards with Haldor, Hudik, and Olaf. Sometimes, Duke Bernhard would join them.

As Haldor and his son grew closer to the Protestant leaders, tensions eased, and relations became more harmonious.

However, Haldor and Olaf were not naive enough to believe they had truly become friends with the Swedish United Kingdom’s elite or the Protestant leaders. Duke Albert had proven himself a man of honor, and the other German dukes and marquises were acceptable companions, given their similar status under Swedish rule.

Though most nobles secretly looked down on Haldor, a “country bumpkin” from Iceland, they had no choice but to accept him outwardly due to Gustavus Adolphus II’s favoritism toward the Icelandic duke and the Vinland earl.

While helping his father socialize with the Swedish United Kingdom’s high-ranking officials, Olaf did not neglect his studies.

The only educated person around him was Song Qinghe, a physician from the Ming Dynasty who had once served as a magistrate’s aide in Sichuan. Well-versed in the Four Books and Five Classics, Song Qinghe taught Olaf traditional Chinese characters and helped him study texts like the Agricultural Treatise and the Compendium of Materia Medica.

Though Song Qinghe was not an expert in farming, he could still explain the agricultural manuscripts to Olaf, who found his understanding improving daily.

Regarding the Compendium of Materia Medica, Song Qinghe treated it as a tool for teaching Chinese culture, explaining the shapes and properties of medicinal herbs. He critiqued the prescriptions within, stating: “Each person’s constitution differs, and illnesses vary in severity and cause. Even effective remedies may require adjustments, so the formulas in this book cannot be trusted blindly…”

Olaf had studied classical Chinese in his past life, but his practical skills were lacking. Under Song Qinghe’s guidance, his proficiency grew rapidly. He could now write hundreds of traditional characters and comprehend passages in the Agricultural Treatise that had once baffled him.

…

The winter of 1632 was colder than usual, and Olaf knew the Little Ice Age was to blame. He worried about the understaffed Vinland.

For most Germans, this Christmas was a struggle for survival. They had no means to celebrate Jesus’ birth in 1632, nor the heart to thank the heavens. With food and firewood scarce, their only thought was how to endure the winter.

In Naumburg, the Protestant forces lived frugally, but on Christmas Day, Gustavus Adolphus II demonstrated his kindness by ordering a cup of wine and a large piece of dried fish for each soldier to celebrate.

The men devoured the fish and wine, basking in the warmth of crowded rooms as they raised their cups in song, praising Jesus and their benevolent king.

After half a winter of silence, the soldiers in Naumburg finally had a night of revelry.

Meanwhile, in Vinland, the people of Bakens City, Quebec City, Huron City, the three Iroquois cities, Basque City, and Haldor City had no heart for Christmas.

A few days earlier, a blizzard had swept across North America, lasting five days. The storm destroyed countless wooden houses, and many perished—either crushed by collapsing structures or frozen in the snow.

The Vikings’ livestock—chickens, ducks, pigs, and sheep—also suffered heavy losses, as their shelters were the first to collapse.

Hrut City, located in southeastern Vinland, was the least affected, but even there, several houses collapsed, killing over twenty slaves and four indentured white slaves.

The Shahalimnir Breeding Farm, Vinland’s largest, had expanded its livestock pens to cover nearly the entire mountain and valley. Though the storm did not destroy the enclosures, the extreme cold still caused problems. Calves, foals, lambs, and piglets fell ill and died daily, despite the staff’s best efforts.

Soon, news of the destruction in Bakens City reached Hrut City.

The Nine Districts’ Governors’ Council was presided over by Solrak, the Abenaki governor and Olaf’s trusted ally. As the most educated among the governors, he knew the situation elsewhere was worse. He ordered coal stoves and fuel from the warehouses, mobilized the city’s laborers, and sent ships loaded with potatoes, sweet potatoes, and heating supplies to aid the affected areas.

Chapter 255: The Assault on Leipzig

A bitter cold, amplified by the buffs of the Little Ice Age, ravaged Vinland. The colony, painstakingly built over years, was reduced to near-primitive conditions in just a few days and nights. Governors across the land scrambled to dig shelters and build houses, tending to the disaster-stricken populace.

By the end of 1632, Vinland had shifted from a mode of development to one of survival.

Yet Olaf and Haldor remained blissfully unaware, spending their days in Naumburg drinking and playing cards with the nobles and officers of northern Germany, whiling away the time.

Before they knew it, January of 1633 arrived, bringing with it the promise of spring. But around Leipzig, the weather showed no signs of warming.

Every time Olaf met with Gustavus Adolphus II, he swelled with pride at having altered the course of history. Though he had previously colonized North America, driven out English and French settlers, and even led Iceland toward independence, these achievements had been mere footnotes in the eyes of Europe. Only now, by saving Gustavus Adolphus II—who should have died the year before—had he truly made an impact. The strength of the Protestant Union remained undiminished, and this year still belonged to Sweden.

In the original timeline, after the Lion King’s death, England and France had intervened directly. But now, that outcome was delayed, perhaps indefinitely. This “Thirty Years’ War” might not last thirty years, and its conclusion would diverge from history.

This grand struggle among European nations would reshape the post-war hierarchy and influence the course of history for centuries to come.

Olaf believed that with Gustavus Adolphus II alive, Sweden could lead the Protestant nations to victory over the Catholic League, emerging as a dominant Nordic power that would overshadow Russia. Iceland, following closely behind Sweden, would secure its share of the spoils.

The stronger Sweden became, the less Denmark could threaten Iceland. Vinland and Iceland would then have the time and resources to develop in peace.

Half a month passed, and the winter snows of Leipzig melted away. The rivers began to thaw, and the temperature gradually rose. By day, soldiers could step outside and feel the warmth of the sun on their faces.

As the weather improved, Gustavus Adolphus II dispatched scouts to gather intelligence on the surrounding area. Haldor and Hudik could sense that the king was preparing for war.

Soon, Duke Albert and General Vladimir, nephew of the Duke of Pomerania, joined Haldor and Olaf for a game of cards. During their conversation, Olaf learned that Naumburg’s food supplies were nearly exhausted. Whether for strategic purposes, vengeance, or the survival of the twenty thousand troops stationed there, Gustavus Adolphus II had no choice but to launch an attack on Wallenstein.

“So it seems His Majesty will take action soon,” Haldor remarked, discarding two deuces and flashing a card from his hand.

Duke Albert sighed, tossing his cards onto the table. “Indeed. He nearly died at Wallenstein’s hands last year. Now he’s determined to exact revenge.”

“True,” Vladimir chuckled, scratching his curly hair. “When has our Lion King ever suffered such a humiliation? Heh, Wallenstein’s in for a world of hurt.”

As the generals in Naumburg had predicted, it wasn’t long before Gustavus Adolphus II, confident in his knowledge of Leipzig’s defenses and garrison, summoned all his commanders to his chambers.

On the second floor of the eastern castle in Naumburg, a grand hall awaited them. When Olaf, Haldor, and Hudik arrived, most of the other commanders were already present. Over twenty dignitaries, clad in fine garments, filled the room, with Duke Bernhard and Duke Albert among the most distinguished.

“Haldor, Olaf, Hudik! Over here!” Duke Albert rose to greet them, while Duke Bernhard and the others nodded warmly at Haldor.

The three took their seats beside Duke Albert and his aide, Baron Stark. Before they could exchange more than a few words, Gustavus Adolphus II entered, dressed in a linen robe and wearing his crown, with Chancellor Oxenstierna at his side.

“Colleagues, His Majesty has gathered you here to discuss the campaign against Leipzig. What are your thoughts?” Oxenstierna announced, scanning the room.

Duke Bernhard seemed more impatient than usual. He stood abruptly. “His Majesty is a man of fortune, blessed by God and chosen by Heaven. We need only follow his command, and we shall surely defeat the Catholic League!”

Since the previous year, the tale of how Haldor and Olaf, guided by divine providence, had raced to Lützen and saved Gustavus Adolphus II had spread throughout Naumburg. Under the king’s and the chancellor’s direction, everyone was made to memorize the story and pray for the king and the Protestant cause.

Through this orchestrated indoctrination, every soul in Naumburg—from the lowest soldier to the highest noble—came to believe that Gustavus Adolphus II was indeed God’s chosen ruler. His prestige and authority soared to unprecedented heights.

Duke Bernhard led the pledges of loyalty, and the others quickly followed, showering the king with praise. What was meant to be a tactical discussion before battle had devolved into a session of flattery, extolling Gustavus Adolphus II as a sage and virtuous ruler.

True to his reputation as a wise monarch, Gustavus Adolphus II waved his hand to quiet the crowd before continuing. “I have received a sign from God. This campaign against Leipzig is destined for victory. If we fight bravely, we shall celebrate Easter together in the grand cathedral of Bavaria!”

“Victory to the Protestant Union! Long live Gustavus Adolphus II!”

The room erupted in cheers, the fervor only subsiding after a long moment.

Gustavus Adolphus II exchanged a glance with Oxenstierna, who then outlined the battle plan they had already finalized.

The assault on Leipzig was a strategic move to reclaim the Electorate of Saxony. Only by securing all of Saxony could Sweden project power into Bohemia and Bavaria, threatening the Habsburg emperor in Austria.

Retaking Leipzig would reassert control over northern Germany, ensuring Gustavus Adolphus II maintained his advantage over the Catholic League.

But Wallenstein had spent over half a year fortifying Leipzig, forcing the Protestant Union to retreat to northern Germany. He would not surrender it easily.

Though the hall resounded with cheers, the astute among them knew this would be a brutal battle—a clash of courage, endurance, and will, where neither side could afford to yield.

Oxenstierna’s plan called for a full mobilization. Not a single soldier would remain in Naumburg; the city would even be burned before the army’s departure. This left no retreat, forcing the Protestant Union to seize Leipzig in the harsh early spring or face the freezing nights.

The army was divided according to loyalty and familiarity. The core Swedish forces, numbering half the total, would be led by Gustavus Adolphus II himself.

A mercenary brigade of three thousand English and Scottish soldiers would be commanded by their British officer and Oxenstierna. The remaining ten thousand troops, split into eight smaller units, would be led by their respective commanders, forming the first wave of the assault.

The Viking Raid, with only three thousand cavalry, would be tasked with raiding the villages and towns around Leipzig to secure supplies for the main army.

Though this was a practical use of their forces, Haldor and Hudik sensed Gustavus Adolphus II’s consideration for them, deepening their gratitude toward the king.

Olaf, familiar with Gustavus Adolphus II’s high-level strategies, had been studying the king’s words and actions, searching for deeper meanings to apply to his own benefit.

After half a day of contemplation, Olaf understood. Gustavus Adolphus II was not only sparing the Icelandic forces from being used as cannon fodder in the first wave—earning a reputation for mercy—but also ensuring their loyalty for the second or third assaults.

Chapter 256: Wallenstein’s Transformation

On January 20, 1633, Gustavus Adolphus II led over twenty-two thousand Protestant Union forces from Naumburg, setting the city ablaze before advancing relentlessly toward Leipzig.

The two fortified villages outside Naumburg, where Wallenstein’s forces were stationed, were swiftly overwhelmed and destroyed by the Protestant army. This time, the Protestant Union forces displayed far greater morale and combat effectiveness than the previous year.

By the time Wallenstein received reports of the frontline collapse from fleeing soldiers in Leipzig Castle, the Protestant Union forces had already reoccupied Lützen under Gustavus Adolphus II’s command and were marching toward Leipzig.

“Damn it! It’s one thing that Gustavus Adolphus II survived being shot, but to recover fully and lead troops in battle—truly admirable! Both he and Oxenstierna are formidable foes. Together, they might make Leipzig indefensible!”

Wallenstein’s forces numbered less than forty thousand. The Battle of Lützen and the Naumburg campaign the previous year had cost him over five thousand men. Additionally, to sustain his troops, he had dispersed many to nearby villages and towns for supplies. Now, Leipzig Castle had only over eight thousand defenders. Even with reinforcements from surrounding areas and scattered soldiers returning, the total barely reached over ten thousand.

With such a force, Wallenstein stood no chance against Gustavus Adolphus II’s army. However, defending Leipzig was a different matter. Theoretically, the balance of forces, combined with nearby troops rallying and surrounding the Protestant Union forces, could allow the Catholic League to counter-encircle and defeat them.

But Wallenstein sensed Gustavus Adolphus II’s momentum was unstoppable, and his army’s combat effectiveness was beyond expectations. This made him lose confidence in holding Leipzig.

Wallenstein wanted to abandon Leipzig and retreat to the southern regions. However, after Gustavus Adolphus II was injured and defeated the previous year, he was trapped in Naumburg. The Protestant Union was leaderless, and the Catholic League’s situation was favorable. To prevent Wallenstein from becoming too powerful, Emperor Ferdinand II of the Habsburgs had torn up the conditions promised when inviting Wallenstein back. Through Maximilian I, Duke of Bavaria, he had sent a military supervisor to monitor Wallenstein’s actions.

After Wallenstein proposed the strategic purpose of retreat to the supervisor, Maximilian I’s brother-in-law, Mark Long, sneered, “Duke of Mecklenburg, you are the third jewel in His Majesty’s crown. The Emperor has high expectations of you and has provided the greatest support, granting you honor, power, and status. How can you hand Leipzig over to Gustavus Adolphus II without a fight? Are you so frightened by the lion’s approach that you’ve lost your nerve?”

Mark Long was a minor figure, but the people he represented were not to be trifled with. Wallenstein’s goal had always been to achieve military glory and help the Emperor create a unified Germany. Now that he had become a duke, his personal ambitions were satisfied, and this made the once-ambitious man fear losing what he had gained.

Wallenstein knew Mark Long understood neither strategy nor tactics. But if he insisted on abandoning Leipzig and retreating south, Mark Long would likely exaggerate the situation in his reports to the Emperor, possibly leading to Wallenstein’s dismissal once again.

Having been reinstated for less than a year, Wallenstein was unwilling to lose his power and status. Moreover, his previous dismissal and the bargaining with Emperor Ferdinand II the previous year had already strained their relationship.

Under Mark Long’s provocation, Wallenstein’s disappointment in Emperor Ferdinand II reached its peak. A fire burned within him as he recalled how the Emperor had gradually broken the promises made when inviting him back. The promise of no supervision had long been forgotten.

Although furious, Wallenstein dared not rebel. His identity and status meant he was merely the commander of a mercenary army, the supreme commander of the Catholic League appointed by the Emperor. Without the Emperor’s mandate, he would lose his authority to command the entire army.

Though Wallenstein understood all this, he could no longer tolerate Mark Long’s interference. He ordered his forces to defend Leipzig rigorously while summoning his trusted subordinates to discuss countermeasures. Ultimately, he made a decision that defied ancestral laws.

Soon, the Protestant Union forces arrived at the gates of Leipzig. This ancient city, after numerous battles and changes of hands, had become dilapidated, losing its former glory as the capital of Saxony.

Wallenstein, along with his subordinate, the Saxon army commander General Arnheim, and a few others, stood atop the central castle of Leipzig, watching the Protestant Union forces enter the city.

“Duke of Mecklenburg, do you think we can hold the city?” Arnheim, who knew Gustavus Adolphus II’s capabilities well, asked nervously.

Wallenstein stroked his mustache and said, “We must hold it. If we fail, we all die together. If we succeed, we can preserve everything we have!”

“But Oxenstierna’s forces have also arrived, and Sweden has more reinforcements coming. We’re outnumbered and outmatched!”

“Maximilian I clearly has troops but refuses to send them. He’s deliberately harming us!”

Wallenstein’s subordinates and Arnheim discussed for a while, growing increasingly uncertain. Wallenstein cleared his throat and said, “Enough talk. Relying on the Habsburg Emperor is useless. We must hold Leipzig, pin down the Swedish forces, and then negotiate peace with Gustavus Adolphus II. Perhaps we can include northern Germany in our interests. Then…”

Before Wallenstein could finish, he looked around. The expressions of the generals changed, and they all voiced their agreement.

Wallenstein trusted his subordinates and Arnheim, but secretly negotiating with the Protestants went against the Habsburgs’ interests. Such intentions must not be leaked. To bind everyone to his cause, Wallenstein thought for a moment and said, “Arnheim, Iswell, the south intends to use Sweden’s hand to weaken us. I’ve already experienced being abandoned once. I don’t want to be used as a rag by the southern lords again. Our fate must be in our own hands. Mark Long is a spy sent by Bavaria. To survive, we can’t let him live. Are you willing to help me eliminate him?”

“We are certainly willing to help the Duke resolve his troubles!”

“I’ll go right away!”

Arnheim and the others turned and left. Soon, Mark Long, who was writing official documents in his room, was strangled to death and left on the bed.

By then, the Protestant Union forces had begun to occupy buildings outside Leipzig Castle. The news of Mark Long’s sudden illness and death in the castle spread quickly.

With Mark Long’s death, a purge began within Leipzig Castle. Dozens of his confidants and over two hundred soldiers loyal to Bavaria were captured and killed.

The atmosphere in Leipzig Castle shifted to one of tense order, and the army responded swiftly, organizing defensive tactics.

That evening, the Protestant Union occupied all buildings outside Leipzig Castle, pacified many Saxon civilians, but also requisitioned many homes to house the large army.

Gustavus Adolphus II had expected Wallenstein to send troops to harass and attack, so he kept his elite force of over ten thousand on high alert. To his disappointment, even after Leipzig Castle was completely surrounded, Wallenstein made no move.

Gustavus Adolphus II was surprised. Although all signs indicated that Wallenstein, the supreme commander of the Catholic League, was inside Leipzig Castle, he still suspected that Wallenstein might have already fled.

As Wallenstein’s old adversary, Gustavus Adolphus II admired him and was familiar with his combat style. Today’s events defied his expectations, leading him to ponder and ultimately change his pre-established siege plans.

Chapter 257: The Clash of Two European Titans

The comprehensive defense of Leipzig left Gustavus Adolphus II astonished. On the first day, he did not attack the city’s fortress as planned. Instead, he dispatched numerous cavalry units to scout the surrounding areas for any sign of the Catholic League’s forces, hoping to confirm whether Wallenstein had already fled.

Haldor, Hudik, and Olaf each led a thousand Viking cavalrymen through the forests north of Leipzig, pillaging the devastated villages along the way while also eliminating any small Catholic forces they encountered.

By that evening, Olaf’s troops had defeated and routed five Catholic units. These were all auxiliary forces Wallenstein had stationed nearby for supplies, numbering as few as two hundred and as many as five hundred.

When Olaf entered one of the villages, he discovered that the Catholic soldiers had wreaked havoc on the villagers. The entire village’s food supplies had been looted, leaving the elderly, weak, and sick to starve or freeze to death in their homes. After searching the village, he found only a handful of survivors.

In two other villages occupied by Catholic soldiers, Olaf found young girls who had been imprisoned and abused, their bodies covered in injuries, their minds shattered.

Filled with rage, Olaf ordered the execution of all captured and surrendered Catholic soldiers before leaving some food for the villagers and moving on to the next stronghold.

By late night, Olaf had returned to Leipzig and met with Gustavus Adolphus II, presenting him with hundreds of enemy heads still dripping with blood.

The others had already returned by then, and Olaf realized he was among the last to arrive. Gustavus Adolphus II briefly examined Olaf’s achievements, inquired about the situation, then removed a gold ring embedded with an emerald from his finger and handed it to Olaf. “Olaf has slain the most Catholic soldiers—excellent! This is a treasure I bestow upon you. Tomorrow, you will continue the assault. Everyone must sweep the surrounding areas of Leipzig clean, aiming to eliminate all of Wallenstein’s soldiers and leave the defenders inside Leipzig isolated and helpless!”

Olaf put on the ring and bowed in gratitude to Gustavus Adolphus II. Then, Oxenstierna led Olaf and the other leaders to their quarters in Leipzig to rest.

The next morning, Olaf, Haldor, Hudik, and the others woke up, ate some dry rations, and led their troops out to continue the sweep.

Since the nearby towns and villages around Leipzig had already been cleared the day before, they had to venture farther this time. The Catholic soldiers farther away had a day to react and might have already gathered to march toward Leipzig.

To avoid being outnumbered, Haldor, Olaf, and Hudik led three thousand cavalrymen together, continuing their sweep from the north of Leipzig toward the east.

In today’s battle arrangements, Olaf willingly followed Haldor and Hudik’s lead. The army advanced from the north of Leipzig straight to the east, aiming to secure the northeastern region of Leipzig.

Now, the north and west of Leipzig were entirely under the control of the Protestant Union. Only the northwest, west, and south still had Wallenstein’s large forces stationed. If these forces were eliminated, the defenders inside Leipzig would truly become isolated, like turtles in a jar.

The number of defenders in Leipzig was far inferior to that of the Protestant Union. After being besieged for several days without any attack from the Catholic League, Wallenstein, though he had complete control over his army, began to worry about the future.

As a top-tier military strategist, Wallenstein could guess Gustavus Adolphus II’s strategic intentions. Although he had long abandoned the idea of serving Emperor Ferdinand II, he did not want to truly lose to Gustavus Adolphus II.

To turn Leipzig Castle into an impregnable “steel fortress,” Wallenstein had his men continuously reinforce the castle daily, setting up traps and barricades inside.

The Protestant Union had besieged Leipzig Castle for about a week without launching an attack. The more than thirty thousand troops around Leipzig Castle were too scattered and lacked a unified commander, leading to disorganized resistance. They were all defeated and routed by the Protestant Union’s cavalry, suffering five to six thousand casualties.

After fully securing Saxony, Gustavus Adolphus II finally decided to attack Leipzig Castle.

At this point, Gustavus Adolphus II was certain that Wallenstein was inside Leipzig Castle. The latest intelligence reported that the Catholic reinforcements from Austria, Bohemia, Bavaria, and other regions had assembled and were coming to support Wallenstein.

Gustavus Adolphus II knew that if he could capture Leipzig and kill or capture Wallenstein before the Catholic reinforcements arrived, he could deal a severe blow to the Catholic forces, making his conquest of the German region a reality.

Inside Leipzig Castle, Wallenstein also understood that his chance to defeat Gustavus Adolphus II lay in using the castle to delay the Protestant army until reinforcements arrived. Then, he could defeat Gustavus Adolphus II and consolidate the Catholic forces in the German region. He could negotiate with the Protestant Union represented by Gustavus Adolphus II. As long as he could secure peace, he could gain a dominant position and rights in the northern region. With the support of the German Catholic League, he might even be able to rival the emperor.

However, as Gustavus Adolphus II’s old adversary, Wallenstein knew that if he wanted peace, he had to defeat Gustavus Adolphus II. If he surrendered, he would only face humiliation and a tragic fate.

Often, victory or defeat in war is the bargaining chip for negotiations. To achieve peace, one must first win.

Wallenstein immediately noticed the movements of the Protestant Union forces around Leipzig Castle. He knew that Gustavus Adolphus II had cleared the Catholic forces around Leipzig and was preparing to launch a full-scale assault on the castle.

“Full defense! Check the cannonballs and gunpowder again!” Wallenstein calmly issued the battle preparations. The two thousand soldiers in the small castle quickly took their positions.

By the time Wallenstein’s army was ready, Gustavus Adolphus II’s forces had also assembled outside the castle.

At Gustavus Adolphus II’s command, the drums sounded, and the long spearmen, musketeers, and artillerymen formed long lines in small square formations, advancing toward Leipzig Castle.

As they neared the castle, the artillerymen were the first to unload the cannons from the carriages, load them with ammunition, and ignite the fuses. Dozens of cannonballs whistled through the air, striking Leipzig Castle.

Since the first round was a test shot, most of the cannonballs did not hit the castle. However, the defenders inside Leipzig Castle seemed unwilling to give the Protestant artillerymen a chance to adjust. As smoke billowed from the castle’s firing ports, the accompanying roar of cannon fire sent cannonballs crashing into the Protestant artillery positions.

The linear formation was Gustavus Adolphus II’s unique invention. This formation could effectively reduce the damage from cannon fire. Thus, when the Protestant artillery positions were struck by the fierce cannon fire from Leipzig, only about twenty soldiers were killed or wounded, and two cannons and a carriage were destroyed.

The cannon fire was the prelude to war. After a few exchanges, the Protestant Union launched its assault on Leipzig Castle.

In the era of cold weapons, castles were nearly invincible. The dense and concealed firing ports could effectively kill any enemy attempting to approach. Moreover, the unique shape of the bastions and the multiple layers of protection made them difficult to breach, even against cannon fire.

However, with the advent of large cannons in the late Age of Exploration, bastion castles could no longer withstand the firepower of heavy cannons and mortars.

Previously, Olaf’s fleet had captured Kronborg, Kalvebod Fort, and Tre Kroner Fort through prolonged attacks using the heavy cannons on their warships.

With the recent updates to cannons and firearms, Gustavus Adolphus II’s linear formation could advance to the front of the castle, allowing the musketeers’ firepower to suppress the castle’s firing ports from various angles. The artillerymen near the castle could also attack it at close range.

Using the linear formation, Gustavus Adolphus II had destroyed countless German castles. Leipzig Castle was not the largest, so he was not worried about capturing it—only about how quickly he could do so.

Chapter 258: The Brutal Siege of Leipzig

The fierce battle for Leipzig Castle was the main focus of the conflict.

From the moment Gustavus Adolphus II issued the attack order, the Protestant Union soldiers charged relentlessly, only to fall one after another on the path leading to the castle.

The castle’s gunports constantly spewed bullets and cannonballs at deadly angles, cutting down the brave Protestant warriors.

However, the linear formation proved more effective in assaulting the castle. After losing over a thousand soldiers, a unit of Protestant musketeers and artillerymen finally managed to close in on the castle.

The musketeers raised their smoothbore muskets, unleashing a hail of fire upon the three gunports, each as tall as several men.

Simultaneously, the artillerymen adjusted their cannon mouths and fired a cannonball at close range.

Boom!

The cannonball struck the castle wall amid the rising smoke, exploding with a deafening roar. Stones flew in all directions, and the nearby gunports suddenly fell silent.

Gustavus Adolphus II had been closely monitoring the front lines from the rear. Seeing the castle effectively struck, he couldn’t help but smile.

But then, several cannonballs flew out from an unknown gunport, striking the nearby artillerymen and musketeers.

The artilleryman who had just raised his right hand in triumph was reduced to a bloody pulp, lying motionless in the dust alongside the wreckage of his cannon.

The musketeers, being more spread out, only lost three men to the blast. The remaining dozen quickly scattered and took cover, continuing to reload their weapons.

The siege of Leipzig Castle between the Protestant Union and the Catholic League intensified from that afternoon onward.

The Protestant forces, relying on their linear tactics, managed to advance to the castle’s gates after suffering heavy casualties. They then used cannons and muskets to attack the gunports and the castle itself.

However, the defenders inside Leipzig Castle were resolute and numerous. Any soldier felled by musket fire or cannon blasts was immediately replaced, and they retaliated fiercely, destroying the Protestant cannons and killing their soldiers.

The first day’s assault ended at nightfall. According to the post-battle statistics, the Protestant Union had suffered heavy losses—over a thousand dead, more than three hundred critically wounded, and over a hundred lightly injured. Gustavus Adolphus II estimated that the defenders’ casualties were likely less than a fifth of his own.

The day’s battle gave Gustavus Adolphus II a clearer understanding of the combat prowess of Wallenstein’s troops. He realized that if he wanted to breach the castle, the worst-case scenario might involve nearly ten thousand casualties. Even if he won, it would be a Pyrrhic victory, leaving him unable to continue his southern campaign.

But Leipzig Castle was a strategic stronghold that had to be taken. Without capturing it, the Protestant forces would be unable to advance southward, leaving their flanks and rear vulnerable to severe threats.

“Wallenstein, you truly are a worthy opponent!”

Gustavus Adolphus II was a man of resolute character and unwavering determination. Though exhausted from the day’s battle and feeling the ache of his long-healed wounds, he still summoned his officers to plan the next day’s tactics.

The northern German princes’ forces had been the main attackers that day and had suffered heavy losses. Thus, Gustavus Adolphus II mercifully decided that the second echelon would take over the next day.

The following day saw the same attack methods, but progress was equally slow.

By the time the fighting ceased that evening, the Protestant Union had again lost over a thousand men, while Leipzig Castle had only sustained minor additional damage.

Two days of assaults made Gustavus Adolphus II realize that quickly capturing Leipzig Castle was unlikely. Even if they continued at this intensity, taking the castle would decimate the Protestant forces and exhaust their cannon supplies.

The best alternative might be to besiege the castle and starve out the defenders. However, Catholic League reinforcements were expected to arrive within a week. While a week-long siege would deplete the castle’s food and supplies, most commanders wouldn’t hold out—but Gustavus Adolphus II knew Wallenstein could.

That evening, as they discussed the next day’s attack plans, morale was low. The main force for the next day would include the Icelandic Viking battalion.

Haldor, Olaf, and Hudik had long known they would be called upon the next day. But this kind of mindless charging, which only resulted in minor damage to the enemy’s castle, was not what they sought.

Iceland’s population was sparse, and manpower was hard to replenish. Haldor was unwilling to sacrifice his elite troops for Gustavus Adolphus II’s strategic goals.

Two days earlier, Haldor, Olaf, and Hudik had already been discussing countermeasures. Olaf didn’t want his men to die in vain, but he knew they couldn’t refuse Gustavus Adolphus II’s orders.

To avoid the battlefield, they had to employ other strategies. Olaf recalled that, historically, Wallenstein would be assassinated that year by order of the Holy Roman Emperor. This was because, after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death, the Catholic League’s main pressure had vanished. However, Wallenstein had secretly negotiated with the northern German princes and the Protestant Union, which the emperor found unacceptable. He also realized that Wallenstein had become uncontrollable.

Setting aside political factors and other reasons, the mere fact that Wallenstein’s power had grown too great was enough to warrant his execution. Moreover, European monarchs had a tradition of eliminating those who had outlived their usefulness—like the saying, “When the hare is dead, the hound is boiled; when the birds are gone, the bow is put away.”

Olaf believed that since Wallenstein had historically begun secret peace talks that year, it showed he had long intended to negotiate but had been waiting for the right moment. Only after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death would he have the best opportunity to unite the German princes.

With this in mind, Olaf thought perhaps they could have Gustavus Adolphus II communicate with Wallenstein. If they could recruit Wallenstein, the siege of Leipzig Castle might not need to continue.

As the post-battle meeting that evening was about to conclude, Olaf hastily stood up and said, “Your Majesty! I have important intelligence to report!”

Gustavus Adolphus II’s weary face twitched slightly as he remained seated and asked, “Speak. What is it?”

“Over the past two days, my soldiers have captured many of Wallenstein’s men in the northern forests of Leipzig. Among them was a messenger who told me that Wallenstein has been contacting the German princes since the beginning of the year, aiming to unite their forces and negotiate peace with our Protestant Union. At the time, he believed Your Majesty was severely injured and would either die or retreat, so he was very proactive. However, after the Battle of Naumburg, Wallenstein temporarily abandoned his plans for peace talks.

I think now that we hold the absolute advantage, and Wallenstein is trapped in Leipzig Castle, unaware of the outside world. Moreover, the Duke of Bavaria’s relationship with him is not good, so he likely doesn’t know if reinforcements are coming or if they will arrive in time. Perhaps we can exploit Wallenstein’s psychology, persuade him to surrender, or even negotiate peace…”

Olaf’s words were carefully prepared, and the so-called messenger from Wallenstein had been arranged in advance. His clear and logical speech moved Gustavus Adolphus II, who, after whispering a few words with Oxenstierna, asked, “Where is that soldier? Bring him in.”

Olaf sent Tom out, and soon he returned with a southern soldier.

This soldier was indeed one of Wallenstein’s men, captured by Olaf two days earlier during a raid. However, they had also taken his wife and children from the village, and Olaf had used them as leverage to coach the soldier on what to say.

The soldier only spoke German, which Gustavus Adolphus II also knew, but there were many German dialects. Ultimately, they had to use a military translator to relay the soldier’s intelligence.

“It seems Count Olaf is correct. According to this soldier’s testimony, Wallenstein does indeed have intentions of negotiating peace. He is highly capable and ambitious, not the kind of man who would willingly submit to Emperor Ferdinand II!”

Gustavus Adolphus II remarked with feeling.

Chapter 259: Peace Talks

Olaf’s suggestion, once confirmed by Gustavus Adolphus II, sparked widespread discussion among the attendees. Amid the murmurs, Gustavus Adolphus II quietly observed for a moment before discreetly asking Chancellor Oxenstierna for his opinion.

Oxenstierna furrowed his brow in thought for a long while before speaking. “Wallenstein is a rare military genius. If he were to bow before Your Majesty, it would be worth ten ships of treasure. However, he is Bohemian, and his ambitions are too great. In the future, we may find it difficult to control him.”

Gustavus Adolphus II let out a hearty laugh. “Chancellor, you are too cautious. If Wallenstein surrenders or negotiates peace with us, it would mean betraying the Catholic League. He would have no place left in southern Europe. To preserve his wealth and status, he would have to align himself with the northern German princes, which means he would have no choice but to be my loyal hound. Loyalty to Sweden would be his only option!”

Gustavus Adolphus II’s resolute decision sealed Wallenstein’s fate. He then turned to Olaf with a smile. “My dear Olaf, tomorrow you will take the lead. Find a way to speak with Wallenstein. If he is willing to surrender, I will grant him a dukedom and bestow lands upon him between Saxony and Prussia.”

Olaf pondered for a moment before replying, “Your Majesty, Wallenstein is a formidable figure. We all know that people treat a thousand-li horse differently from a plow horse. Similarly, to persuade Wallenstein to surrender, perhaps you should allow me to offer him even more favorable terms.”

Gustavus Adolphus II’s sights were now set on all of Germany. After a moment’s thought, he said, “I can grant you more authority. As long as Wallenstein is willing to surrender and join the Protestant Union, I will allow him to retain his army and titles. I am even willing to let him choose territories within the former Catholic League regions of Germany…”

True to his reputation as an unparalleled hero, Gustavus Adolphus II readily accepted Olaf’s advice and promised even more generous terms, giving Olaf greater flexibility in the negotiations.

“Thank you, Your Majesty. Your kindness will make Sweden’s name resound across the world!” Olaf bowed deeply before praising.

The evening’s post-battle meeting concluded with Gustavus Adolphus II’s agreement to recruit Wallenstein, and Olaf secured favorable terms to complete his mission.

Olaf believed that unless the conditions were exceptionally generous, Wallenstein would never betray the Catholic League, as it would mean losing all his supporters. This man was no gambler; he would surely have a backup plan.

But now, Olaf was confident. Gustavus Adolphus II, with his broad-mindedness, was willing to offer terms too good to refuse. Olaf felt that unless Wallenstein had no desire for peace and wished to die on the battlefield for the Catholic Emperor, he would not reject the offer. Recalling the Wallenstein from his memories, Olaf was certain he was not that kind of man.

The next morning, after breakfast, Olaf led his army to the front of Leipzig Castle. Pointing at the castle ahead, he said to Gilfa beside him, “You are a very brave man, no less courageous than your brother Gilson. I hope you can go to Leipzig Castle and convey our goodwill to Wallenstein. See if he is willing to pursue peace with me. I have assigned a soldier who speaks German to assist you.”

Olaf had two personal guards: Gilson’s younger brother, Gilfa, and Oukh. Both were former slaves and the most loyal to Olaf. Faced with the important task of inviting Wallenstein to peace talks, Olaf could only entrust it to Gilfa.

Gilfa’s small eyes narrowed, his face filled with a fierce determination. In a gruff voice, he said, “Master, rest assured. I will not fail my mission!”

With that, Gilfa removed his half plate armor, wearing only a thin linen robe, his hands raised high and empty. Accompanied by a soldier, he rode slowly toward Leipzig. As they approached, Gilfa shouted loudly in the few Swedish phrases he had learned in the past few days.

“I am an envoy sent by His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II. I request an audience with Lord Wallenstein!”

Gilfa only knew a dozen or so Swedish phrases, hastily learned under Olaf’s instruction over the past few days. The real communication with the other side would rely on the German-speaking soldier. The Saxon soldier repeated the message in German. After a moment of silence from the castle, a reply came in German.

“You two may enter.”

Gilfa and his companion rode closer to the castle gates. The gates opened, and a group of soldiers emerged. They inspected Gilfa and his companion’s horses and bodies. Finding no weapons, they escorted them inside the castle.

Half an hour later, Gilfa and his companion met Wallenstein and several of his officers in a palace within the castle.

Wallenstein was a thin, middle-aged man with black hair and a beard. His receding hairline made his forehead appear large, his eyes sharp, and his features handsome. Gilfa respectfully bowed to Wallenstein and loudly declared that he had come bearing Sweden’s goodwill and an olive branch from Gustavus Adolphus II.

The companion translated into German. Wallenstein and his men clearly understood, but none of them showed any reaction.

Gilfa’s mind raced. He remembered Olaf’s warning: if Wallenstein showed no interest in the peace talks, he should tell him that Bavaria and Austria had not sent any reinforcements to Leipzig, proving that the Holy Roman Empire had abandoned Wallenstein. If he refused the peace talks, the people inside Leipzig Castle would be doomed by Wallenstein’s actions.

Gilfa, in his innocence, did not realize the malicious intent behind his master’s words. He simply repeated them loudly. Before he could finish, Wallenstein’s expression changed, and he rose angrily.

“Enough! Silence!” Wallenstein stopped the Saxon soldier’s translation and turned, saying, “His Majesty the Emperor would never abandon us. How can we surrender just because of a few threats from Gustavus Adolphus II?”

Gilfa asked, “What did he say?”

The soldier replied softly, “They refuse to surrender, saying the Holy Roman Emperor will still support them.”

Gilfa let out a hearty laugh. “You are but a knife in the hands of the Holy Roman Empire. Who dies in the battles between you and the Protestant Union? Wallenstein, you have already been betrayed by your emperor once. Think about it—if your army is severely damaged and no longer useful as his blade, will your fate be any better than it was a few years ago?”

Gilfa’s words were exactly what Olaf had taught him. Wallenstein’s expression changed, and he was visibly moved. “What is your name? Are you a Tatar?”

“I am Gilfa, not a Tatar. I am an Icelandic Viking. My master is Lord Olaf, Count of Vinland in the Swedish Kingdom and the Icelandic Duchy. He saved the life of His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II. He greatly admires and respects your character and abilities. My master asked me to tell you that if you are willing to help the German people seek peace, he will also fight for the greatest benefits for you and your men from His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II.”

Gilfa secretly rejoiced, admiring how useful his master’s teachings were, and then delivered the final message.

Wallenstein’s expression turned strange, and he nodded in admiration. “So it was an Icelander who saved Gustavus Adolphus II. No wonder… I have long heard that Icelanders are brave warriors who twice defeated the Danish army and achieved independence. Looking at Duke Haldor and Count Olaf, they are both rare heroes of their time. Since Count Olaf is willing to be my friend, I cannot be too rude. Please tell Lord Olaf that I am grateful for his attitude and admire his abilities. I am willing to be his friend. If he does not mind, please ask him to come to Leipzig Castle tomorrow afternoon. I will personally host a banquet for him.”

Gilfa accepted on Olaf’s behalf and exchanged a few more words before Wallenstein had them escorted out.

Chapter 260: A Single Blade to the Feast

Gilfa and his deputy had just left Leipzig Castle when they were intercepted by Olaf and his men.

Gilfa dared not delay and quickly reported the situation.

After hearing the details and Wallenstein’s words, Olaf breathed a sigh of relief. Just as he was about to speak, he heard Gilfa sigh, “Master, I’ve messed things up. Wallenstein never mentioned anything about negotiations!”

Olaf chuckled, “You fool! If he invites me for a drink, that means he wants to talk.”

With a wave of his hand, he continued, “Wallenstein is willing to talk. You’ve done well. Go claim your reward later. I’ll take you to report to His Majesty now. Don’t say too much—just keep it brief.”

Olaf finished speaking, and Gilfa and his companion nodded obediently.

Moments later, Gustavus Adolphus II, Oxenstierna, and others also met with Gilfa and his companion, learning of Wallenstein’s stance.

Gustavus Adolphus II laughed heartily, “It seems Olaf was right. Wallenstein has been disillusioned by Emperor Ferdinand II. Since he’s willing to make contact, let’s halt hostilities for now. Tomorrow, Olaf will meet with Wallenstein, and we’ll discuss further.”

Oxenstierna smiled and nodded, then turned to Olaf, “Remember the conditions His Majesty mentioned yesterday. Don’t let Wallenstein get too arrogant. If push comes to shove, we’re not unwilling to pay a price to take Leipzig Castle!”

Olaf quickly nodded, “Understood. Tomorrow, I will persuade Wallenstein to submit to His Majesty!”

Oxenstierna neither agreed nor disagreed, narrowing his eyes as he stroked his neatly trimmed beard.

Gustavus Adolphus II, satisfied, smiled and ordered a golden goblet filled with strong liquor. He handed it to Olaf himself, saying, “If you can convince Wallenstein to surrender, Germany will be mine. Then, I can reward you with land, gold, and any official position! Blonde lad, it’s all up to you!”

Olaf eagerly agreed, downed the liquor, and withdrew.

That day, Leipzig remained quiet. The next afternoon, Olaf dressed in his finest attire, accompanied by over twenty of his tallest and most elite guards, along with the Saxon soldier who had served as a translator before.

Olaf first bid farewell to Gustavus Adolphus II, then set off for Leipzig Castle, seen off by his father, Haldor, Hudik, Duke Albert, and others.

Like Gilfa before him, Olaf and his entourage had their weapons confiscated before being led into a palace within Leipzig Castle.

As they entered, they were met with opulent decorations. The castle, once the residence of successive Saxon dukes, now belonged to Wallenstein as his private property. Expensive oil paintings, animal heads, ivory, porcelain, and tapestries remained untouched.

Olaf’s opinion of Wallenstein grew even more respectful. He knew that soldiers and bandits were cut from the same cloth, yet Wallenstein, after capturing Leipzig Castle, had not looted its treasures. Clearly, he did not care for mere gold and silver. Combined with what Olaf knew of Wallenstein’s later fate, he was even more convinced that Wallenstein was ambitious, with his sights set on the world.

A man’s desires lay either in women and wealth or in power. Since Wallenstein showed no exceptional greed for money, and given his rise to the upper echelons of society through marriage to a noble widow, it was clear he was a man of purpose, driven by a strong desire for power.

What’s frightening isn’t your desire—it’s your loyalty!

Olaf silently admired this thought, then watched as the doors were pushed open by soldiers. A middle-aged man with thinning hair and a black beard, dressed in noble finery, entered, followed by several generals and attendants.

“You must be Count Olaf. Indeed, you are tall and handsome!”

The man at the forefront approached Olaf, sizing him up before smiling, “Welcome to Leipzig Castle.”

Olaf quickly extended his right hand, “You must be Duke Wallenstein. On behalf of His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II, my father, Duke Haldor, and myself, I extend our sincerest greetings!”

Wallenstein was familiar with the northern custom of handshakes and naturally shook Olaf’s hand. Then, pulling the taller Olaf toward a long table, he asked, “What would you like to drink? Coffee or tea?”

Olaf smiled, “Tea will be fine.”

The attendant quietly withdrew, and Wallenstein, still holding Olaf’s arm, introduced his subordinates before inquiring about Haldor and the two Icelandic Wars of Independence.

Olaf skirted around the heavier details, focusing instead on the bravery of the Viking soldiers and their victories over Denmark, which had greatly embarrassed Christian IV.

Wallenstein loudly praised Haldor and Olaf, his eyes unabashedly revealing his envy.

Olaf was now certain that Wallenstein also wished to break free from Habsburg control, to have autonomy and status, perhaps even to become the overlord of Germany. Thus, he instantly perceived Wallenstein’s envy of Iceland.

Olaf understood that Wallenstein wasn’t envious of Iceland itself, nor of Haldor becoming the Duke of Iceland. He was envious of Iceland’s independence from Denmark and its autonomous destiny.

Olaf, skilled at rubbing salt in wounds, said, “You flatter us, Duke. My father once said that the general he admires most in his life is you! But when he heard a few years ago that you had been imprisoned in the countryside despite your great achievements, he was furious. Fortunately, God has blessed you, and you’ve finally emerged. I hope this time you receive the fair treatment you deserve!”

Wallenstein’s expression changed, his brow furrowing as he sighed, “Is that so? Thank Duke Haldor. But my background and status have never been taken seriously by the great nobles. Unless I can defeat the Protestant League, I won’t gain true respect!”

Olaf, hearing this, did not react with the expected awkwardness. Instead, he laughed heartily, “Duke Wallenstein, your thoughts are indeed correct. However, while your military talent is no less than that of His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II, and our forces are evenly matched, your authority and status are far inferior to His Majesty’s.

He is the supreme commander of the Protestant League, able to mobilize the resources and forces of the northern German states, the Swedish United Kingdom, England, France, and the entire Protestant League. His status allows his abilities to be fully realized.

But you are merely a commander of the Catholic League’s army. Behind you stands the Habsburg Emperor, remotely controlling your resources, reinforcements, and the rights of other commanders and coordinated operations. How much of your talent can you truly display? How much of the Catholic League’s strength can you command?

As a mere army commander, do you think you can defeat the entire Protestant League?”

Olaf, recalling the later example of the Beiyang Minister and Governor of Zhili commanding the Beiyang Army against the entire nation of Japan, only to suffer a crushing defeat in the First Sino-Japanese War, couldn’t help but sigh.

Wallenstein’s expression shifted, and he solemnly declared, “Olaf, your insight is remarkable. What you say is truly profound. You’re right—I have no control over any forces beyond my own army. The other Catholic League armies often engage in petty schemes, especially those dogs from Bavaria!

Cursing, Wallenstein sighed again, “To be honest, the support from the rear is far less than the obstacles. Even my supply issues I have to resolve myself. Sigh! Even if Gustavus Adolphus II had died at Lützen last year, I still wouldn’t have been able to defeat the entire Protestant League…”

After his sigh, Wallenstein stood up, respectfully nodding slightly toward Olaf, then had someone bring a pot of wine, preparing to drink a cup with Olaf.

Olaf saw that Wallenstein was showing some genuine emotion and agreed. The two drank several cups, and Wallenstein began to discuss the major battles of recent years.

Chapter 261: The Three Inches of Integrity

Olaf and Wallenstein drank and chatted, and before long, both were slightly drunk. The conversation shifted from military matters to the various anecdotes of European nobility and royalty.

In truth, Olaf’s tolerance for alcohol was not poor; his intoxication was purely an act, meant to draw closer to Wallenstein and extract more information from him.

At first, Olaf agreed with Wallenstein’s remarks, but later, as the topics strayed beyond his knowledge, he could only respond with vague murmurs of assent.

Olaf and Wallenstein, one speaking Danish and the other German, initially required translators to communicate. However, upon discovering they both knew Latin, they abandoned the translators and switched to Latin.

Olaf’s Latin was not particularly proficient, but it was sufficient for basic communication. Wallenstein’s Latin was excellent, and he made allowances for Olaf, who even felt his own Latin improving through their conversation.

After a moment, Wallenstein, his eyes slightly glazed, stood up unsteadily and said, “Brother Olaf, your wisdom is rare among those I have met. I believe your father must also be a capable man. With your assistance, Gustavus Adolphus II will be even harder to deal with!”

Olaf’s heart skipped a beat upon hearing this, sensing the hidden malice in Wallenstein’s words. However, he laughed heartily on the surface and stood up, saying, “You overestimate us, Duke. Our abilities are nothing special in the Swedish United Kingdom. Even in Iceland, my elder brother Ulf is far more capable than us. Moreover, Icelanders are relentless toward their enemies but will go to great lengths for their friends. We are friends now, so why should we fight? Continuing this conflict benefits no one. It would be better to make peace.”

Olaf’s veiled words made Wallenstein cough lightly before saying, “Brother Olaf is right. For the sake of peace, I can indeed negotiate with you. But is Gustavus Adolphus II truly committed to seeking peace?”

Olaf smiled slightly and said, “His Majesty is genuinely seeking peace! He told me that as long as you are willing to cease resistance, he can preserve your status, rights, and army, and even grant you a fiefdom in northern Germany. However, in return, you must submit to the Swedish United Kingdom and ensure the interests of the Protestant League in the German region are not violated.”

Wallenstein asked, “What about those of us who follow the Catholic faith?”

“Freedom of religion. As long as there is no mutual aggression, whether one follows Catholicism or Protestantism is their own business,” Olaf said solemnly.

Wallenstein nodded and said, “If I can trust you, the conditions you mention are indeed tempting.”

“Rest assured, Duke Wallenstein. As long as we can communicate openly and reach an agreement, I will earnestly request His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II to approve it and sign a treaty with you. In the future, we will become close allies instead of enemies on the battlefield!”

Olaf looked sincerely at Wallenstein and said, “I am willing to stake the fate of Iceland and my own future as a guarantee. I hope you believe in my sincerity!”

Although Wallenstein was moved, the matter concerned his life and the future of tens of thousands of people. He still laughed it off.

“Brother Olaf, it’s getting late. Let me treat you to some hometown delicacies—roasted pork chops!” With that, Wallenstein waved his hand, dismissing the attendants around them.

Soon, a variety of dishes were served, including roasted meat, boiled meat, and mushrooms and eggs cooked with cheese, along with some pickled vegetables, salted vegetables, and radish strips.

“Supplies are scarce on the battlefield. Brother Olaf, please make do with these.”

After the prayer, Wallenstein raised a glass of wine poured by an attendant and smiled, “May God bless you!”

Olaf clinked glasses with Wallenstein and began to eat and drink heartily. By now, he was certain that Wallenstein was willing to surrender to the Protestant League, so he ate with particular joy.

After they had eaten and drunk their fill, Olaf and Wallenstein dismissed everyone around them and began to discuss the preliminary conditions for peace—what Wallenstein could gain after his surrender.

Olaf was not particularly loyal to the Swedish United Kingdom; he only wanted to complete his mission and win over Wallenstein, this rising star. Therefore, without any hesitation, he laid out the most favorable conditions Gustavus Adolphus II had given him, stating that these were the best terms he could secure.

Wallenstein was not particularly averse to swearing allegiance to Sweden. As long as he could retain his rights, status, and army, it would not affect his authority.

Moreover, if the war continued, Wallenstein was concerned that his army would be depleted. Whether he surrendered or held out until reinforcements arrived, his future status would decline sharply.

Olaf’s sincerity deeply moved Wallenstein. He first stated, “Surrender is not out of the question. If you can help me secure a ducal title and corresponding fiefdom from Gustavus Adolphus II, I find that completely acceptable.

However, I require that the Swedish side not send a governor to oversee me, and the fiefdom must be in the prosperous central region of Germany. I think Elftburg would be suitable. It is adjacent to five or six free city-states, and its size can support a duchy.

Besides the fiefdom, I want the greatest autonomy, including but not limited to economic, military, and diplomatic affairs. I will only be constrained by supporting Sweden’s military activities and swearing allegiance to His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II. Do you think Gustavus Adolphus II can accept my demands? If he agrees, I can surrender Leipzig Castle and represent the German states under my control to surrender.”

Wallenstein’s straightforward attitude surprised Olaf. After some thought, he asked, “Although these conditions are somewhat harsh, I can advocate for you. My father and Duke Albert, among others, can help persuade the Lion King. Perhaps they can convince him to accept…”

“But…” Olaf furrowed his brow and asked, “Is Elftburg the only fiefdom you can accept? Are there other alternatives?

That piece of land is no less than Prussia and Saxony. It might not be easy to hand over to you, and it directly borders Bavaria. At the slightest provocation, the Catholic League army could launch a war from Elftburg. Facing the southern states, I think you might not be at ease.

Cough, as a friend, I advise you that a territory too large might be hard to manage, and one too small might not ensure your safety. I think we can find a more suitable fiefdom, but you must not be too greedy. If you are too greedy, it might make peace impossible.”

Olaf finished speaking and looked earnestly at Wallenstein to show his sincerity.

Often, those who have nothing are more daring to fight because having nothing makes them more courageous. However, those who have hope of achieving their goals, or those who have already achieved them, may find their spirit gradually weakened, even becoming feeble.

Olaf first accepted all of Wallenstein’s demands and considered them from his perspective, gaining Wallenstein’s trust. At this critical moment, he took a small step back, making Wallenstein, who saw his goal within reach, feel a tightness in his chest.

He hurriedly said, “Brother Olaf, it’s alright. If Gustavus Adolphus II does not agree, I can lower some of my conditions.

There isn’t much land in central and northern Germany that doesn’t belong to existing duchies, and even less good land. I need a piece of land that can support my army and people.

As long as my basic requirements are met, the fiefdom can be negotiated, and other rights can also be discussed. For example, I can give up diplomatic rights, but I must control the economy and military. You know I am Czech and have no foundation in northern Germany. Offending the Habsburgs is also dangerous. I can only rely on my own army!”

Olaf nodded and smiled, “Rest assured, Duke. I will certainly argue on your behalf. However, there are few city regions in northern Germany that do not belong to several states, and the most fertile lands are likely coveted by more than one person. Although the central region is large, it is the front line, and His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II cannot decide to give it all to you. It can be said that you cannot occupy it alone. After all, there are many meritorious individuals in the Protestant League, such as Prussia and Saxony, and everyone needs to share some land and population…

Moreover, even if Elftburg is given to you, you will have to face the pressure from southern Bavaria and eastern Bohemia alone. Given your relationship with them… I don’t think you would want to live in constant anxiety, would you?”

Chapter 262: The Alliance of Leipzig

Olaf’s counterquestion jolted Wallenstein back to reality. Only then did he realize the perilous situation he was in. If he did not side with the Protestant League, he would face the tragic fate of being abandoned by the Habsburgs. Even if he managed to hold out and miraculously repel Gustavus Adolphus II, he would still face the grim prospect of having his power stripped away by His Majesty the Emperor.

If he surrendered to the Protestant Union, there was still no guarantee he wouldn’t be used as a pawn to be sacrificed. Therefore, when choosing a territory, he needed to consider a place far from the conflicts.

Olaf, who understood history well, knew that a warlord who did not seek to carve out his own domain was not a true warlord. However, for a warlord to establish his own power, he needed an enemy of comparable or slightly superior strength. Currently, Wallenstein’s forces were no match for the Protestant Union, so his ambitious plans were bound to fail.

The act of harboring enemies to strengthen oneself might become Wallenstein’s main strategy after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death, but the current situation had changed. Faced with the powerful Protestant Union and the untrustworthy, backstabbing Habsburgs and Bavaria, Wallenstein’s best option was to surrender to the Protestant League and choose a territory far from the troubles.

Wallenstein had not carefully considered the arrangements after surrendering and now asked somewhat confusedly, “Brother Olaf, can you advise me?”

“Gladly!”

Olaf laughed heartily, muttering as he took out a map from his pocket and spread it on the table. He pointed at several places, listing their advantages and disadvantages. Finally, his finger drew a semicircle, pointing to a square piece of land between the Duchy of Saxony and the Duchy of Prussia. He smiled and said, “This place is not bad! Magdeburg is a free city-state and quite prosperous. There are also several allied duchies nearby. If you establish a duchy here, it might be very safe! I think this place is perfect!”

Wallenstein pondered for a moment, first nodding, then shaking his head. He said, “Magdeburg? That is good, but Magdeburg is the stronghold of Protestantism. Martin Luther founded the Lutheran Church there. I am a Catholic. Would it be inappropriate for me to rule there? The people would not be loyal and obedient to my rule…”

Olaf sneered, “At this point, Your Grace, are you still thinking about clinging to your faith? If you convert to Lutheranism, wouldn’t that solve the problem?”

Wallenstein was not a fanatic, or rather, the leaders of the European churches, as well as the nobles and kings, were not truly devout believers. Most of them used religion as a tool to rule the people and support their own power.

Wallenstein was no exception. He shrugged and said, “I can convert to Protestantism, whether it’s Lutheranism or Calvinism. But my soldiers are almost all devout Catholics. They come from poor backgrounds and are willing to sacrifice their lives because of their loyal faith in Catholicism. It would be difficult for me to make them change their faith and follow me.”

Olaf thought for a moment and muttered to himself, “It’s not difficult to make the poor people and soldiers convert to Protestantism. Just give them benefits and guidance, such as distributing more land to those who convert to Protestantism and reducing some taxes. Over time, they will completely change their allegiance. But it’s not something that can be done overnight…”

“Yes!” Wallenstein pointed at Magdeburg regretfully and said, “This land is very fertile. I heard that the Duchy of Prussia also covets it. Even if we ignore the issue of faith, Gustavus Adolphus II might not be willing to give it to me.”

Olaf chuckled, “Don’t worry, Your Grace. I remember passing through Magdeburg on the way to battle last year. To be honest, it might have been a prosperous city-state before, but after more than a decade of war, it has become a ruin. Although Magdeburg was once the stronghold of Protestant faith, the Catholic League also committed atrocities there years ago, plundering and ravaging it severely. From what I know, the population of Magdeburg might not be large anymore. If you bring your family and soldiers to settle there, it might make Catholicism the dominant faith… In other words, given the current state of Magdeburg, even if you go there as a lord, you don’t have to worry about the poor and sparse subjects causing trouble due to faith issues.”

“That…” Wallenstein’s eyes lit up, and he nodded, “It seems to be the case.”

Olaf swallowed and continued, “As for Prussia…”

As Olaf spoke, he thought of the iron-blooded empire that would unify Germany in the future and the first great elector, William, who led Prussia to rise. According to his age, William should have already married the daughter of Henry, the regent of Holland, and studied at Leiden University in the southwestern coastal area of Holland.

Thinking of the powerful nation that would plague Europe for several centuries, Olaf’s vigilance rose. The Count of Vinland, who also had ambitions in Europe, naturally did not want a powerful ruler to emerge in Europe or for Germany to unify. Without hesitation, he blurted out, “Although the Duchy of Prussia is currently obedient to Gustavus Adolphus II, that Duke William in the wheelchair is not as weak and incompetent as people think. He has been working hard to arrange for his heir to marry the princess of the House of Orange, which controls Holland, and sent that heir to live in The Hague in the southern part of Holland. This shows that he has other plans!”

Wallenstein had also met the ruler of the Duchy of Prussia, Duke William. He was a weak, thin, and disabled monarch with a wandering gaze. Now, hearing Olaf’s words, Wallenstein also became suspicious.

“Duke William sent his heir to Holland? And made that young man the son-in-law of the Prince of Orange? Hmph, it seems Duke William has curried favor with Holland. Prussia was a major battlefield in recent years, and its situation is not much better than Magdeburg. It seems he is pinning his hopes on the next ruler.”

Olaf also nodded and said, “The Swedish United Kingdom is now the rising star on the European continent and the most powerful country at present. Prussia and other German states have submitted to Sweden, but the Lion King does not want any German state to become stronger or larger because it would be unfavorable for Sweden’s rule over Germany. After all, Sweden and Germany are separated by the vast Baltic Sea…”

“If I persuade the Lion King from the perspective of ensuring the fragmentation of the German states and maintaining a balance of power due to similar territorial sizes, he might agree to grant Magdeburg to you, Your Grace. However, I might offend the Duchy of Prussia in the process…”

As Olaf spoke, he showed a troubled expression, but before Wallenstein could say anything, his gaze became firm.

“However, you and I are friends, and my father admires you the most. I think for your sake, I can take the risk and talk to His Majesty.”

Olaf finally made the difficult decision, and Wallenstein looked moved. He grasped Olaf’s hand and said emotionally, “Magdeburg is indeed the most suitable territory for me. Thank you, Olaf, for considering me. I am very fortunate to have met you, my dear friend. If you can help me achieve my goal, the Icelandic Duchy will be my closest ally in the future. I can support you in any way you need, including but not limited to money and troops!”

Olaf shook Wallenstein’s hand without hesitation and said firmly, “For our friendship, I will do my best, or rather, I will do everything possible to achieve the conditions we discussed today, ensuring that your status, power, and territory are guaranteed through the alliance!”

Wallenstein, who had married a noble widow in his youth to rise to power, showed his excellent acting skills. Hearing Olaf’s words, his eyes reddened, and he choked up, “Thank you, Brother Olaf! From now on, don’t be so polite, and there’s no need for honorifics. You can call me Von or Albrecht!”

Olaf also played along, loudly saying, “Dear Von! My respected brother, please wait for my good news!”

Von: In Europe, unlike China, names like Von and Jean are not just names but also represent the identity of ancient, hereditary nobles.

Chapter 263: A New Chapter in the Pan-European War

Olaf and Wallenstein’s bond deepened rapidly over the course of half a day. By the time Olaf was ready to leave, the two were already addressing each other as brothers.

If only Western culture had a tradition of swearing brotherhood—otherwise, Wallenstein would have surely pulled Olaf into a ritual of burning incense, drinking blood wine, and pledging before Guan Yu.

It was already late at night when Olaf left Leipzig Castle. As he stepped out of the castle gates with his guards, he didn’t have to go far before spotting Haldor, Hudik, Tom, and the others waiting for him with torches.

“Olaf! How did it go?” Haldor rode forward, first checking Olaf for injuries before asking.

Olaf greeted everyone in turn, then smiled and said, “Wallenstein agreed! He’s willing to surrender!”

“Excellent!” Haldor laughed heartily, clapping Olaf on the shoulder. “The ancestors bless us! God bless us! Olaf, you’ve lived up to our expectations. Let’s hurry back and tell the Lion King this good news!”

The group returned in high spirits to the finest estate in Leipzig, where Gustavus Adolphus II was staying.

At that moment, Gustavus Adolphus II, Oxenstierna, and Duke Bernhard were discussing the collection of military provisions and war contributions from the surrounding regions. Suddenly, they learned of Olaf’s return, and the king immediately summoned him.

“Golden-haired lad, how did it go? Did Wallenstein agree?” Olaf had barely stepped into the room before Gustavus Adolphus II’s impatient voice rang out.

Olaf knew that the Protestant League’s massive army gathered at Leipzig Castle was straining their logistics and basic supplies. The king was desperate for good news to break the stalemate.

“Your Majesty! With God’s favor upon you, persuading Wallenstein to surrender is no difficult task.”

Olaf laughed heartily and said, “After a day of persuasion, Wallenstein has basically agreed to surrender, though there are still some conditions to discuss.”

“Oh? What else does Wallenstein want?” Gustavus Adolphus II’s eyebrows twitched as he asked, “What did you say?”

On his way back, Olaf had already prepared a polished account of his persuasion, embellished with some exaggeration.

“I first…”

By the time Olaf finished, Gustavus Adolphus II, Oxenstierna, and Duke Bernhard couldn’t help but applaud.

“Well done!”

“Count Olaf is both brave and wise—a rising star of the Protestant League!”

“Olaf spoke well! He didn’t let His Majesty down!”

Gustavus Adolphus II nodded in approval and praised, “Well-reasoned and heartfelt. Olaf, you did an excellent job. Wallenstein’s surrender is no small feat. What reward do you want? How about granting you a fiefdom in Germany?”

Olaf replied humbly, “Whatever Your Majesty grants, I will accept. I only did what was expected of me. The credit belongs to everyone. If our Protestant Union hadn’t had the upper hand, no amount of generous offers would have swayed Wallenstein.”

Olaf’s words endeared him to everyone, especially Duke Bernhard, who couldn’t help but agree: “Exactly! Olaf is right. If Wallenstein doesn’t surrender to His Majesty, he’ll be trapped and doomed. His Majesty is merciful, offering him land and titles—if he refuses, he’d be a fool!”

Olaf took out a map from his pocket and pointed to Magdeburg. “Wallenstein wants Magdeburg as his duchy. The rest of the conditions will follow Your Majesty’s promises. Wallenstein isn’t very insistent on the minor details, but time is of the essence. The reinforcements from Bavaria and Bohemia will arrive soon. We can’t afford to delay. We should finalize the alliance with Wallenstein as soon as possible. Once he joins the Protestant League, he’ll have no way back, and Your Majesty can control him at any time.”

Wallenstein’s request didn’t surprise Gustavus Adolphus II. He knew that to tame a tiger, one must treat it with the respect and privileges befitting a beast of its stature. Expecting a tiger to obey while feeding it vegetables was pure fantasy.

Wallenstein was a fierce and powerful tiger. To control him, one must grant him the status and treatment of a beast king.

“Agreed!” Gustavus Adolphus II nodded decisively. “Tomorrow, Olaf, you will go and tell Wallenstein that I accept all his demands, and then he must immediately pledge his loyalty to me.”

Oxenstierna moved his lips but said nothing. Duke Bernhard, however, cleared his throat and advised, “Your Majesty! Duke Wilhelm is extremely loyal to you, providing soldiers, food, and funds every year. You previously promised to grant Prussia the land of Magdeburg after defeating the Habsburgs. Now, giving it to Wallenstein… Won’t this make Duke Wilhelm feel betrayed? It might harm our rule in northern Germany…”

Gustavus Adolphus II was a man of integrity, but he was also a great ruler. He understood that his opportunities to control Germany were limited. If he couldn’t subdue Wallenstein now, the arrival of the Holy Roman Empire’s reinforcements would lead to a protracted battle.

In the future, controlling and annexing the German regions would be ten times harder than it was now. If luck wasn’t on his side, he might never dominate Central Europe in his lifetime. For his political goals and life’s ambitions, Gustavus Adolphus II felt that breaking a promise wasn’t out of the question. He could always compensate Wilhelm from other lands later.

If Wilhelm behaved, he could be compensated elsewhere. If he didn’t, it would be a good opportunity to discipline him.

“Do we have to listen to a small country about how to dispose of the land we’ve conquered?”

Gustavus Adolphus II coldly snorted and said, “Oxenstierna, you handle this. Give Prussia and Saxony some compensation from other places to keep them from complaining. Once I control all of Germany, Europe will belong to Sweden—that is my ultimate goal!”

Oxenstierna’s eyes flickered with admiration as he smiled and said, “Your Majesty’s wish is our pursuit! I will ensure the other rulers are appeased.”

Olaf looked at Gustavus Adolphus II’s heroic and inspiring figure, his heart filled with admiration. He silently thought, “This is what a true heroic leader looks like! I wonder when I’ll have such courage and status?”

Thanks to Gustavus Adolphus II’s extraordinary leadership charisma, his decisions were carried out to the fullest. Oxenstierna, in his role as chancellor, overruled all objections. By the next morning, he had secured the approval of the various faction leaders in the army for the terms of surrender—granting Magdeburg to Wallenstein in exchange for his allegiance.

After the morning meeting the next day, Olaf, filled with sincerity, took the treaty already signed by Gustavus Adolphus II and went to Leipzig Castle.

When he entered the palace, Wallenstein was having breakfast. Olaf politely declined Wallenstein’s invitation and sat to the side, sipping water. “Von, I’ve persuaded His Majesty to agree to all your demands. With my honor as the Count of the Icelandic Duchy as guarantee, His Majesty believes in your sincerity. I’ve brought the alliance treaty. After we sign it, you will come with me to pay homage to His Majesty and surrender Leipzig Castle!”

Wallenstein had already guessed that Gustavus Adolphus II had agreed when he learned of Olaf’s visit, but he hadn’t expected full acceptance. He had mentally prepared to give up some interests and rights. Now, learning that the conditions were so generous, his mood improved greatly, and his gratitude toward Olaf deepened.

“It’s all thanks to you, my brother. I will never forget your help. I consider you my best friend!”

Olaf laughed heartily and affirmed, “Of course we’re the best of friends.”

A moment later, Wallenstein had the dishes cleared away, then took the treaty and carefully read through it twice. Finding no linguistic traps, he happily signed his name and affixed his personal family seal.

Chapter 264: The Union of Two Heroes

February 1, 1633. The weather today was much warmer than before, the winter chill no longer as cruel.

The siege of Leipzig Castle had lasted ten days, and the Bavarian reinforcements were now only three days’ march away.

That morning, Gustavus Adolphus II donned an elaborate ceremonial robe adorned with intricate decorations, placed a golden crown upon his head, and sat on a sofa in the grand hall, surrounded by the highest-ranking commanders of the Protestant Union—Chancellor Oxenstierna, Duke Haldor of Iceland, Duke Bernhard, Duke Albert, and over a dozen others—seemingly waiting for something.

Time passed slowly, and after an hour, as noon approached and the others grew impatient, Hudik entered with Tom.

“Your Majesty, Olaf has brought Wallenstein.”

Oxenstierna asked, “How many men did Wallenstein bring with him?”

Hudik thought for a moment before replying, “A dozen or so. I’ve left their weapons and men outside. The alliance treaty has already been signed by Wallenstein. Olaf says he has come to pledge his loyalty to Your Majesty.”

Gustavus Adolphus II laughed heartily and waved his hand. “Let them in.”

Soon, Olaf entered with Wallenstein, who wore a long robe and a top hat.

This was not the first meeting between Gustavus Adolphus II and Wallenstein. They had encountered each other in Bavaria the previous year, then as adversaries. Now, one was king, the other his subject.

Wallenstein, ever adaptable, removed his top hat, revealing his thinning black hair, and bowed deeply to Gustavus Adolphus II. In fluent German, he declared, “Great Gustavus Adolphus II, allow me, Albrecht von Wallenstein, to pledge my loyalty to you. I shall be your sword and shield, expanding your borders and conquering the four corners of the earth!”

Gustavus Adolphus II stood and approached Wallenstein, who was slightly shorter than him. He took Wallenstein’s hands in his own and smiled, replying in fluent German, “Dear Wallenstein, I have always admired your military prowess and appreciate your talents. Your loyalty will not go unrewarded!”

Olaf timely handed the alliance treaty to Oxenstierna, who examined it carefully.

After exchanging a few words, Gustavus Adolphus II and Wallenstein took their seats. Under Olaf’s introduction, Wallenstein continued to greet the other noble generals. When introduced to Haldor, Wallenstein looked at the towering man before him and smiled. “Duke Haldor, you seem younger than me by a few years, but your deeds are awe-inspiring. Your assistance to me is something I will always remember. I hope we can be friends in the future!”

Haldor laughed heartily and shook Wallenstein’s hand, praising him, “Your military talents are truly outstanding. Now that we are one family, I look forward to learning more from you.”

The hall buzzed with private conversations. After a moment, Gustavus Adolphus II had signed various decrees and looked at Oxenstierna.

As Chancellor and Chief Justice of the Swedish United Kingdom, Oxenstierna wielded considerable power.

Gustavus Adolphus II could bestow a title upon Wallenstein without the Privy Council’s approval, nor did he need Oxenstierna’s consent. However, to grant Wallenstein funds from the treasury or the governorship of Magdeburg as a duchy, he required Oxenstierna’s signature on a Privy Council decree to legally validate Wallenstein’s title and lands within and beyond the Swedish United Kingdom.

Confident in his and Gustavus Adolphus II’s abilities, Oxenstierna believed that even someone as capable as Wallenstein could not escape his grasp. Despite many advising him to refuse signing the Privy Council documents the previous night, he was unwilling to offend Gustavus Adolphus II.

Sensing the king’s intent, Oxenstierna signed the prepared Privy Council decree and handed both documents to an attendant.

The attendant presented the two documents to Wallenstein, who examined them and, satisfied, stood to express his gratitude and loyalty.

“Thank you, Your Majesty! I shall—”

Olaf glanced at the text, noticing it was written in both Swedish and German. He could understand the Swedish, as it was similar to Icelandic and Danish. The decree granted Wallenstein the title of Duke of Magdeburg, with full autonomy over his lands.

Gustavus Adolphus II laughed heartily. “You have received what you deserve. However, Magdeburg’s population is sparse. You will need to put in some effort to manage your lands well.”

“Thank you for your concern, Your Majesty.”

Wallenstein quickly adapted to his new role and asked, “Your Majesty, where are the Bavarian and Habsburg reinforcements heading to support Leipzig Castle? I wish for my legion to lead the charge and strike a heavy blow against the Bavarian dogs!”

Gustavus Adolphus II knew that Duke Maximilian I of Bavaria and Wallenstein had been at odds for years. It seemed that Wallenstein had played a significant role in Maximilian I’s downfall a few years ago.

Among those present, only Duke Albert was relatively naive; the others were not politically inexperienced. They understood that Wallenstein sought revenge against his political enemies, the cold-hearted Habsburg emperor, and to demonstrate his loyalty to Sweden.

As a former commander of the Catholic League now joining the Protestant Union, Wallenstein needed to earn the respect and trust of the Protestant forces by fighting his former masters and showing more enthusiasm than the Protestant Union itself.

Though Europeans did not understand the concept of a “blood oath,” they recognized similar notions. Gustavus Adolphus II nodded and said, “Very well. The Habsburg alliance has two large armies from Bohemia and Bavaria, each exceeding ten thousand men. According to our scouts, the Bavarian reinforcements number over ten thousand, led by Maximilian I, and are now near the southern part of Leipzig. You can lead the vanguard to defeat them. Since Bohemia is your homeland, I will send others to intercept them.”

Gustavus Adolphus II’s consideration warmed Wallenstein’s heart. He bowed and accepted the king’s command.

“Thank you for your thoughtful arrangement, Your Majesty. I am deeply grateful!”

With the urgency of war, Wallenstein politely declined Gustavus Adolphus II’s invitation to a banquet and eagerly led his large force from Leipzig Castle. After leaving behind some wounded and several thousand infantry, the remaining cavalry, musketeers, and artillerymen marched swiftly south.

By that afternoon, Wallenstein’s army, accompanied by several military supervisors from Oxenstierna, had left Leipzig and vanished into the southern forests.

Wallenstein’s departure relieved Gustavus Adolphus II. He knew that after surrendering and yielding Leipzig Castle, Wallenstein had no way back. Even if he wanted to return to the Catholic League’s camp, he would not be trusted or reused.

Now, Wallenstein had only one path—he must continuously attack his former masters for the Protestant Union to prove his worth and loyalty.

Gustavus Adolphus II was confident that with Wallenstein’s military strength and command abilities, Duke Maximilian I of Bavaria could only face a crushing defeat. Once the Bavarian army was defeated, the German region would be smooth sailing, with no more obstacles, allowing him to freely attack the heart of Bavaria and even Austria.

However, to achieve complete victory in the German region, Gustavus Adolphus II understood that he still needed to defeat the Bohemian reinforcements. As another stronghold of the Austrian emperor, the Bohemian army was not weak.

To gain the greatest advantage this year and fully control Germany, Gustavus Adolphus II decided to take personal command and personally defeat the Bohemian army.

Chapter 265: Sweden’s Moment of Glory

In February 1633, the fate of the Protestant Union, which had been stalled at Leipzig for half a year, finally changed.

With Wallenstein’s surrender, the Protestant League’s strength surged. Across the entire German region, apart from the southern duchies and counties such as Burgundy, Savoy, Milan, and Switzerland—numbering over a dozen—eighty percent of the remaining land had fallen into the hands of the Protestant League. Particularly in the north, the duchies and free cities had all sworn allegiance to King Gustavus Adolphus II of the Swedish United Kingdom.

After the fall of Leipzig, Germany had become Gustavus Adolphus II’s backyard. The Catholic League’s morale was at an all-time low, and the Habsburg monarchy—comprising over a dozen states including Austria, Bohemia, and Hungary—now faced the direct threat of the Protestant Union.

The Catholic League’s situation was precarious. Everyone knew that if the armies of Bavaria and Bohemia were defeated by the Protestant Union, Catholicism, which had dominated Europe for a thousand years, might be replaced by Protestantism.

The Habsburg Emperor, a devout son of the Catholic Church, was truly desperate. Even the Spanish United Kingdom had begun massing troops at the border, ready to join the battlefield at any moment.

When Leipzig Castle was besieged, the Catholic League had already sensed the impending collapse. Emperor Ferdinand II immediately sought the Church’s support for mediation and sent personal letters to Cardinal Richelieu and King Louis XIII of France, hoping they would cease their support for the Protestant League and return to the Catholic fold.

Richelieu and Louis XIII were well aware that to serve France’s interests, they must suppress the Habsburg Emperor. As the good neighbor between Spain and Germany, the French royal family had long sought to restore the glory of their ancestor Charlemagne and unify the European continent. Even if unification was impossible, they could not allow their two neighbors to grow too powerful.

A weak Spain and a fragmented Germany suited France’s interests. Faced with national interests, religious belief was no longer important.

Richelieu and Louis XIII did not accede to Ferdinand’s request. Even when the Pope sent someone with the same message, Richelieu still demonstrated the flexibility of his devout faith and his unwavering loyalty to France’s interests.

The Habsburgs had stood unshaken in Europe for centuries, growing ever stronger—not merely by selling themselves short, but by possessing a keen eye for political opportunism.

Spain and Austria had never believed they could successfully win over France. Even with their domestic finances strained, to prevent the Protestant League from controlling Germany, after the first wave of Bavarian and Bohemian reinforcements set out, the Habsburgs still launched a silver bullet offensive. Using their accumulated gold and silver, they recruited a large number of mercenaries, ready to send fresh forces to the German battlefield at any moment.

The first phase of the pan-European war, led by Denmark, had been the focus of all eyes. However, with Christian IV’s crushing defeat, the second phase, dominated by Sweden’s string of victories, made Denmark seem even more like a clown in people’s memories.

After Sweden joined the battlefield on behalf of the Protestant League, northern Germany quickly fell. By last year, they had controlled most of Germany. After Wallenstein’s return, he had schemed to defeat Gustavus Adolphus II and finally found an opportunity at Lützen. However, with the intervention of the Viking Raid, the Catholic League’s chance for a strategic victory was lost.

Since the end of last year, the Catholic League had been suffering consecutive defeats. By the time the surroundings of Leipzig were captured, the Catholic League had only one stronghold left in northern Bavaria—the besieged Leipzig Castle.

The Catholic League’s decline was undeniable. Kings, prime ministers, and politicians across Europe all understood that the war phase led by Sweden had given the Protestant League a phased victory.

With most of Germany lost, the Habsburgs knew that negotiating now would put them at a severe disadvantage. Therefore, after securing the Pope’s financial and other support, the Habsburgs decided to go all-in, driving the Protestant Union back to northern Germany before negotiating with Gustavus Adolphus II.

In the Habsburg Emperor’s mind, being able to split Germany north and south with Sweden would satisfy him. After all, Gustavus Adolphus II was too formidable—even Wallenstein was no match for him.

When the Bavarian army first clashed with Wallenstein’s rebel forces and suffered defeat, the Habsburgs realized that Wallenstein had not shown the loyalty he should have. Instead, he had become a traitor.

The news of Wallenstein leading his army to betray the Catholic League dealt a heavy blow to the Catholic world. Before this, Wallenstein had been the supreme commander of the Catholic League. Apart from his own thirty thousand troops, another forty to fifty thousand allied forces had been under his command.

But now, Wallenstein had surrendered with his mercenary army, and the Catholic glory in northern Germany had completely faded.

The defeated Maximilian I quickly regrouped his scattered forces and gathered the countless Catholic remnants hiding in the forests of the German region. He then swiftly retreated to defend the northern part of Bavaria.

While holding the northern Bavarian fortress, Maximilian I wrote to Emperor Ferdinand II every day, telling His Majesty that he had long seen Wallenstein’s treacherous nature and cursing him, hoping that God would soon send Wallenstein and his damned army to hell.

Maximilian I’s venting letters did not anger Emperor Ferdinand II because Maximilian I was one of the few confidants he could rely on now. If Bavaria also fell, not only would all of Germany be lost, but his imperial title might also have to be handed over to Gustavus Adolphus II.

After defeating Maximilian I, Wallenstein did not pursue the victory. Instead, he stationed himself at Elftburg, adopting a posture of prolonged defense. This infuriated Maximilian I, who had just reinforced the castle into an impregnable fortress, ready to make Wallenstein crash headfirst into defeat.

On the southeastern German battlefield, after a skirmish, the Bavarian forces suffered a thousand casualties and retreated to their territory, resulting in a stalemate.

The Bohemian army was a mercenary force personally recruited by the Habsburg Emperor. Composed of Germanic southern mountain tribes, these mercenaries had excellent combat skills and fierce temperaments. Their loyalty, nurtured by generous treatment, was above average.

Gustavus Adolphus II personally intercepted the Bohemian army southeast of Leipzig, giving him another surprise. The Protestant Union had encountered another tough opponent besides Wallenstein.

After a bloody battle, the Protestant Union suffered over two thousand casualties, and the Bohemian army lost over three thousand. However, the exhausted Protestant forces still failed to achieve victory.

The brave Bohemian army eventually occupied several high grounds and passes, causing Gustavus Adolphus II to lose the initiative and strategic advantage. He had to retreat and station his troops in the towns east and south of Leipzig.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s plan to decisively defeat the Bohemian reinforcements, penetrate into Bohemia, and threaten the Habsburgs to achieve unconditional negotiations had failed due to the initial setback.

Although most of Germany was now under Gustavus Adolphus II’s control, and the two battlefronts—one victory and one draw—had given the Protestant League its greatest achievement since the war began over a decade ago, Gustavus Adolphus II’s plan for a quick victory was still thwarted.

Chapter 266: The Habsburgs’ Dilemma

Gustavus Adolphus II grew increasingly impatient after failing to crush the Bohemian reinforcements. Every day, he sent troops to attack the Bohemian encampments, but each assault cost the Protestant Union hundreds of lives while inflicting little damage on the Bohemian forces.

Within days, Gustavus Adolphus II’s lips were covered in large, angry blisters from his frustration.

The Bohemian army was led by Ferdinand III, the eldest son and heir of the Holy Roman Emperor. To ensure the safety of the Habsburg heir, Emperor Ferdinand II had dispatched three renowned generals from Bohemia and Austria to assist Ferdinand III.

At twenty-five years old, Ferdinand III had already been crowned King of Bohemia and Hungary six years prior, ruling as the Archduke of Austria. Raised with the finest courtly education, he had aspired from a young age to become a wise ruler like his father and grandfather.

Knowing his own limitations in military command, Ferdinand III had delegated tactical control to the three generals upon arriving near Leipzig.

After repelling several of Gustavus Adolphus II’s probing attacks, the three generals sought an audience with Ferdinand III, urging him to authorize a full-scale offensive.

The veteran generals were well aware that Leipzig had been breached three or four times in the past two years. Its defenses were in ruins, making it an ostensibly easy target.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s forces had been engaged in relentless battles since the turn of the year, while the Bohemian army, fresh and eager, held the advantage in both timing and morale. A decisive strike now could be the key to victory.

Ferdinand III listened in silence before asking, “Gustavus Adolphus II’s forces are nearly as numerous as ours, and with Wallenstein now under his command, the two greatest commanders in Europe stand with the Protestants. Do we truly have a chance if we take the offensive?”

He studied the three generals carefully.

Though noble-born and educated in military academies, the generals had come to realize that their tactics, while confidently executed, were no match for Gustavus Adolphus II and Wallenstein. Even in defense, they had struggled to hold their ground, relying on natural barriers to wear down the Protestant attackers. The recent shift in momentum had left them uneasy.

Their push for an offensive stemmed from fear—prolonged defense risked sapping the Bohemian army’s morale, leaving them unwilling to face Gustavus Adolphus II in open battle.

Faced with the king’s questioning, the three generals exchanged uneasy glances. Finally, the youngest among them, Count Pipott, spoke up: “Your Majesty, we know full well the might of Gustavus Adolphus II and the reputation of Wallenstein, once the Catholic League’s greatest commander. But his defection has weakened us greatly. Germany now lies entirely under the Protestant Union’s heel. If we do not find a way to defeat—or at least repel—Gustavus Adolphus II, not only will Emperor Ferdinand II’s authority crumble, but Germany itself will slip from Habsburg control…”

Ferdinand III furrowed his brow and sighed. “Indeed… the Protestants press forward relentlessly.”

“Your Majesty! Maximilian I of Bavaria was defeated by Wallenstein just days ago and forced into retreat. The situation in Germany has deteriorated completely. This may be our last chance to strike. If we delay, the Protestants will regroup, and we will lose all hope of resistance!”

Count Pipott pressed on urgently. “Your Majesty, make your decision!”

“Years of war have drained our treasury and reduced Germany to ruins. I have been wondering—what good does continued fighting do for either side?”

A moment of hesitation flickered across Ferdinand III’s young face. Remembering his father’s instructions, he gritted his teeth and said, “Gentlemen, the fate of the Catholic League rests on this battle. I ask that you not only defeat—but at least repel—Gustavus Adolphus II. If we can retake Leipzig, we will regain some initiative and can negotiate with the Protestants without losing too much land or influence.”

“Please,” Ferdinand III said, bowing slightly as the three generals looked on in alarm. “Spain will soon send reinforcements. If we can blunt Gustavus Adolphus II’s momentum, we can secure better terms in the future.”

“Rest assured, Your Majesty…”

The three generals pounded their chests in confidence before departing to prepare their assault on the Protestant forces near Leipzig.

By mid-February, Germany remained the primary battleground between the Protestant and Catholic Leagues, with the fiercest fighting concentrated in the east around Leipzig and the southeastern border with Bavaria.

Though large-scale battles were confined to these two regions, skirmishes erupted elsewhere across Germany.

For years, the principalities and free cities of Germany had been plagued by raids from small Catholic and Protestant mercenary bands. The countryside had been ravaged, driving hunters, refugees, and bandits into the forests, overwhelming local governance.

Wallenstein and the Bavarian army remained locked in a stalemate, exchanging small-scale attacks every other day. Maximilian I, forced into defensive positions, seethed with frustration but knew he was no match for Wallenstein. He could only send desperate letters to the emperor, pleading for reinforcements.

On February 10th, the Bohemian army abandoned its defensive stance and launched a full-scale assault on the Swedish forces occupying Leipzig.

Gustavus Adolphus II was a military genius unmatched in centuries, excelling in linear formations and artillery coordination—tactics suited for offense rather than defense. However, Leipzig Castle was heavily fortified with superior artillery, and Gustavus himself favored heavy cannon use. As a result, the Swedish defenses boasted twice the firepower of the Bohemian army.

Facing relentless artillery barrages and cavalry harassment, the Bohemian assault faltered from the outset, suffering heavy losses.

The Bohemian musketeers were left dazed by the relentless cannon fire, while their cavalry, disrupted by the bombardment, struggled to regroup before facing volleys from the Swedish musketeers.

The Bohemians employed the Maurice square formation, which proved outdated against the more modern linear tactics of the Swedes. Lacking Wallenstein’s tactical brilliance to adapt, Ferdinand III and Count Pipott could not counter the linear formations effectively. Their initial assaults not only failed but resulted in even greater losses than the Protestants had suffered in their earlier attacks.

After the first day of battle, the Bohemians lost over three hundred men with five hundred wounded. On the second day, they focused their attack on the eastern town of Leipzig, concentrating their forces to better defend against the Swedish cavalry. Though they still failed to capture the position, their casualties were halved—a toll the Bohemian commanders could accept.

In subsequent attacks, the Bohemians adopted a strategy of gradual encroachment, chipping away at Leipzig’s outlying defenses. With insufficient bastions outside Leipzig Castle, Gustavus Adolphus II could not halt their advance. He was forced to retreat, planning to counterattack once the Bohemians were exhausted in terms of manpower, morale, and supplies.

Chapter 267: The Situation Takes a Sudden Turn

February in Leipzig was the most chaotic battleground in Germany. Every day, thousands of Catholic and Protestant soldiers clashed, their battles marked by the roar of cannons, the crack of firearms, the cries of combat, and the haze of smoke and cooking fires.

Under relentless pressure from the Bohemian forces, Gustavus Adolphus II wisely chose to consolidate his defenses, though he maintained daily resistance to wear down the enemy. Under his command, the Swedish, Pomeranian, Scottish mercenary, Saxon, and Prussian forces formed an interlocking defense against the Bohemian army.

Though the Icelandic Viking Raid consisted of only three thousand cavalry, they played a crucial role in supporting the Prussian and Swedish forces. For days, Haldor, Hudik, Olaf, and their men had been harassing the Bohemian rear and flanks as they advanced on Leipzig.

The Bohemian cavalry numbered six to seven thousand, but they were ill-suited for siege warfare. Spread thin across various fronts, the Viking Raid’s numbers allowed them to overwhelm isolated Bohemian cavalry units. With superior mobility and overwhelming force, the Viking cavalry killed dozens, sometimes hundreds, of Bohemian cavalry and straggling infantry daily, while also eliminating scouts. Ferdinand III and Count Pipott found the Icelandic Vikings an incessant thorn in their side.

By March, the Protestant Union had abandoned all outposts around Leipzig. Nearly all infantry and musketeers, under Oxenstierna’s command, had withdrawn into the city, reinforcing barricades and defenses. Meanwhile, the Swedish cavalry, Viking Raid, and Prussian cavalry—nearly ten thousand strong—scattered into the villages and forests around Lützen under Gustavus Adolphus II’s personal leadership.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s plan was to wait for the Bohemian forces to besiege Leipzig before launching a cavalry assault on Ferdinand III’s camp and rear lines. The best outcome would be the destruction of the command center and the capture of Ferdinand III; the worst would still shake the Bohemian forces, allowing a coordinated counterattack for victory.

Ferdinand III and Count Pipott never underestimated Gustavus Adolphus II. The recent Protestant retreat did not bring them joy but instead deepened their caution. Gustavus Adolphus II’s reputation as the “Lion of the North” was well-earned, proven in battles against Poland and his campaigns in Germany.

Though the Bohemian forces had the upper hand against the Swedish, Ferdinand III feared a trap. When his army approached Leipzig, he did not order an immediate attack. Instead, he stationed his forces on high ground around the city, fortifying their positions. Only after three days did he send musketeers and artillerymen to probe the defenses.

Oxenstierna immediately detected the reconnaissance and ordered the cannons and musketeers stationed on the high ground within Leipzig to open fire. Over a thousand Bohemian soldiers were scattered in less than twenty minutes, leaving behind three hundred corpses as they retreated.

After careful deliberation, Ferdinand III and his generals decided on a steady approach. They sent messengers to urge reinforcements while launching daily attacks from different angles to find weaknesses in Leipzig’s defenses.

Olaf felt his skills growing daily. Fighting alongside his father and Hudik, though his role was limited to harassment and support, the battles and his participation in Gustavus Adolphus II’s war councils had honed his abilities. He believed that in a year or two, he might become a capable commander.

He could sense that the tide of battle in Leipzig was firmly in Gustavus Adolphus II’s grasp. It wouldn’t be long before the Bohemian forces faced a crushing defeat.

Four days later, Ferdinand III, at the cost of a thousand lives, found a weak point in Leipzig’s defenses. A fierce assault followed, and after a day and night of brutal fighting, the Bohemian forces seized three city blocks. Ferdinand III and Count Pipott believed victory was within reach and ordered their troops to hold the captured areas.

Unaware, Ferdinand III’s forces had stretched thin as they advanced into Leipzig. If attacked from both sides, they would struggle to defend themselves.

Entering the eastern district of Leipzig, Ferdinand III saw the dilapidated Leipzig Castle in the distance. Noting its battered state, he nodded excitedly. “We’ve arrived at the perfect time. The Protestant forces haven’t repaired the castle yet. Taking it won’t be too difficult. Once we reclaim Leipzig, we’ll have a bridgehead in Germany. The Protestant forces won’t dare venture south, and southern Germany will thrive again!”

Count Pipott agreed. “Exactly! Your Majesty, guard the center while I lead a force to test the castle’s defenses.”

His request was immediately approved. A Bohemian force of over five thousand, equipped with siege weapons and cannons, formed a square formation and charged toward Leipzig Castle. The battle for the castle had begun once more.

…

On March 10th, after a day of fruitless attacks, the Bohemian forces retreated to the eastern district to regroup and await reinforcements. During the assault, they had come close to breaching the castle twice. Ferdinand III and Count Pipott believed that with increased forces the next day, they could capture the Protestants’ last stronghold. With the support of the Bohemian city-states and the Catholic League’s proximity advantage, they could secure Leipzig and gain better terms in future negotiations.

Both the Catholic and Protestant Leagues had reached a silent consensus: peace talks were inevitable. The Protestant League had shifted from Danish to Swedish leadership, while the Catholic League, backed by German Catholic princes, had fought the Protestants for over a decade. The prolonged war had reduced Germany to ruins, and both sides’ finances were exhausted.

In recent years, with Sweden’s entry into the war, negotiations had become a shared goal. The only disputes were over territorial and political concessions.

From the previous year to last spring, Gustavus Adolphus II had been in peace talks with Bavaria and the Habsburgs. However, his demands were too steep—the Habsburgs refused to cede northern Germany. This led to Wallenstein’s return to the battlefield, and in this year’s Battle of Leipzig, he had even defected to the Protestant side.

The current situation was vastly different from the previous year. Though Sweden and the northern German states were financially drained, the prospect of a decisive victory over the Habsburgs was within reach. Germany was closer than ever to being under their control. Gustavus Adolphus II had abandoned the idea of negotiations, opting instead to crush Bohemia and Bavaria before marching on the Habsburgs in Austria, forcing the Catholic League to relinquish all German territories and suzerainty.

The Habsburgs, however, had softened their stance. They sought only to halt Gustavus Adolphus II’s advance, secure a foothold in parts of Germany, and regain some strategic advantage to negotiate with Sweden from a stronger position.

The Habsburg emperor’s mindset had shifted entirely. He was now willing to accept terms he had rejected the previous year—abandoning vast swathes of northern Germany and the suzerainty over its duchies. Facing imminent defeat, Ferdinand II believed that relinquishing the unruly northern German states and city-states to Sweden might not be such a bad idea.

Unfortunately, opportunities slip away quickly, especially when circumstances change. Like the stock market, one hesitates to sell when profits are high, hoping for another surge, but by the time the market crashes, even breaking even becomes a fantasy.

Chapter 268: A Trap Sprung

On the morning of March 11th, Ferdinand III ordered his troops to eat a meal of dried meat and oatmeal porridge. Then, clad in half plate armor and a golden helmet, he appeared before his army and issued the command to attack Leipzig Castle.

Count Pipott and two other generals personally led their soldiers in an assault through three heavily damaged sections of the fortress. After hours of fierce battle, amid the thunderous cheers from the front lines, the Bohemian forces finally breached the walls of Leipzig Castle.

To expand their gains, Ferdinand III continuously dispatched the remaining ten thousand troops from the reserve, leaving only three thousand royal constabulary behind.

Through his telescope, Ferdinand III watched as the double-headed eagle flag of the Habsburgs was slowly raised over Leipzig Castle, a smile creeping across his lips.

But before he could savor his triumph for even three seconds, a sudden barrage of over a dozen cannon blasts erupted from the left rear of the camp. The scorching cannonballs rained down upon the encampment, inflicting devastating casualties on the densely packed royal constabulary.

Limbs and blood splattered in all directions, accompanied by the acrid stench of burning flesh. Cries of agony, screams of terror, and the panicked whinnies of horses filled the Bohemian command post.

Ferdinand III was fortunate—the nearest cannonball landed only a dozen paces away. He watched in horror as his personal guard, young Thomas, was reduced to a bloody pulp by the impact. The metallic tang of blood filled the air, overwhelming the young king, who had never before witnessed such brutality. His face paled, his mind blank with shock.

The captain of Ferdinand III’s constabulary was a middle-aged man named Thomas Alshyev, father of the slain young Thomas. A Bohemian noble and count, he was fiercely loyal to both Emperor Ferdinand II and King Ferdinand III.

Facing the sudden crisis, Thomas suppressed his grief and rushed to Ferdinand III’s side, urgently declaring, “Your Majesty! The Protestant League has launched a massive cavalry and artillery assault from the western and southern forests! Their target is clearly you! Our rear guard is fighting desperately, but Leipzig has already been taken by the three generals. Allow me to escort you to safety within the castle!”

Ferdinand III seemed paralyzed by fear, his body moving stiffly as he followed Thomas and his guards toward the city.

As they entered the streets before Leipzig Castle, distant shouts and a second volley of cannon fire reached their ears. Ferdinand III’s legs trembled, cold sweat dripping down his face.

Thomas felt the king’s body grow limp in his grip. Gritting his teeth, he hoisted Ferdinand III onto his back and strode forward, shouting orders to his men.

Before they could reach the castle, however, a crescendo of battle cries and clashing steel erupted from within its walls.

“What’s happening?!” Ferdinand III’s eyes widened in alarm as Thomas stood on tiptoe, straining to see.

Soon, Bohemian soldiers who had entered the castle came pouring back out through the breaches, shouting warnings of an ambush inside. Panic spread instantly among the Bohemian forces in Leipzig.

The reality was grim: outside the city, the Protestant League’s cavalry and artillery pressed in, while within the castle, a large force of Protestant soldiers lay in wait. The Bohemian army was caught between two fronts. Both Count Pipott and Ferdinand III realized they had fallen into the meticulously laid trap of Gustavus Adolphus II.

“Damn it!” Count Pipott finally grasped the gap between himself and the legendary commander. Though he refused to admit defeat, reason told him that once they had taken the bait in Leipzig, the outcome was sealed. Their only hope now was to break through the encirclement and escape.

“Your Majesty! Leipzig has become a death trap! Our soldiers outside cannot hold back the Protestant assault! Soon, we will be cornered and captured!” Count Pipott urged, “We must break out immediately! If we can escape the city, we can regroup the remnants of our forces and retreat to the eastern passes. We won’t be utterly defeated!”

Ferdinand III, his resolve shattered, only wanted to flee this cursed place as quickly as possible. “Do as the count says! Let’s break out at once!”

Of the three generals, only Count Pipott and another baron in his fifties remained. The third, General Segoni, was trapped inside Leipzig Castle. Knowing time was of the essence and rescue impossible, Count Pipott made a ruthless decision: “We must reorganize our forces and break out through the northern, western, and southern streets! Your Majesty, swap helmets with me. You will break north, then circle back to the eastern passes where two thousand of our troops remain—enough to protect you. If we haven’t rejoined you by nightfall… you must return to the kingdom at once and send envoys to negotiate peace with Gustavus Adolphus II…”

After exchanging helmets, Count Pipott ordered his guards to raise the double-headed eagle banner and leave Ferdinand III’s side.

“Count…” Ferdinand III understood Count Pipott’s intent. By impersonating the king, he would draw the attention of the Protestant forces, creating an opening for Ferdinand III’s escape—but at the cost of his own life.

Wiping away a tear, Ferdinand III led his remaining guards in a desperate charge toward the northern streets.

The southern district, formerly Ferdinand III’s command post, had become the fiercest battleground. Of the three potential breakout points—south, east, and north—the southern district was the most densely packed with both Protestant and Bohemian soldiers.

Count Pipott’s forces, attempting to break through the southern district, found themselves in a meat grinder. Every second, a soldier fell; every second, more joined the fray.

Gustavus Adolphus II personally led his cavalry through the southern district, scattering the Catholic defenders and storming into Leipzig. But the cavalry, trapped among the Catholic infantry, were forced to dismount and fight on foot. Gunfire, the clash of steel, and battle cries turned the southern district into the most chaotic battleground in Leipzig.

From two streets away, Count Pipott and Gustavus Adolphus II caught sight of each other. The latter’s image was already legendary, while Ferdinand III remained obscure due to his rare public appearances.

Count Pipott recognized the marshal atop his horse, surrounded by cavalry, as Gustavus Adolphus II. Meanwhile, Gustavus Adolphus II mistook the golden-helmeted Count Pipott beneath the double-headed eagle banner for Ferdinand III.

Delighted, Gustavus Adolphus II ordered his troops to charge, eager to capture “Ferdinand III.”

Count Pipott, his expression grave, steeled his resolve. He commanded his men to assault the Protestant forces, determined to break through to Gustavus Adolphus II. His goal was to strike down or wound the Protestant commander, ensuring Ferdinand III’s escape and securing lasting peace for the Catholic League.

“Almighty God! Protect the great Emperor Ferdinand II and King Ferdinand III! Grant them health and victory for the Catholic League…”

Loyal to the Habsburgs, Count Pipott prayed as he fixed his gaze ahead. He had made his decision—he would fight to the death, determined to take a piece of Gustavus Adolphus II with him…

Chapter 269: The Warrior Gilfa

The streets of the South District were not particularly wide. After Gustavus Adolphus II led his personal guards inside, the remaining large number of cavalry found it difficult to follow. According to Gustavus Adolphus II’s arrangement, the Prussian forces, Saxon forces, and Viking Raid were to block the escape routes in the east, west, and north districts to intercept fleeing Bohemian soldiers.

Gustavus Adolphus II intended to use Leipzig as a trap to capture the entire Bohemian forces from top to bottom. However, the opportunity to capture the biggest prize, Ferdinand III, was reserved for himself. The other forces could only follow and pick up the “leftovers.”

The Prussian and Saxon forces also had their own objectives. The Prussians wanted to gain more military achievements to secure land and diplomatic benefits in post-war negotiations. The Saxon forces aimed to reclaim their capital, Leipzig. Considering that the Bohemians would likely flee in large numbers from the east, the Prussians headed straight for the East District, while the Saxons entered from the West District, hoping to take control of Leipzig Castle more quickly.

Haldor, Olaf, and Hudik led the Viking cavalry without any urgency. Their purpose in joining the battle had already been achieved. Now, they only needed to follow Gustavus Adolphus II to earn some military merits and then return to Iceland after the war to receive their rewards. With a powerful ally, they no longer had to worry about Denmark causing trouble. Iceland and Vinland could develop in peace. If they could develop for a few decades, their “American Duchy” would surely become a powerful entity like the “United States” in another world.

Seeing that the East and West Districts were already being handled, Haldor pointed north and said, “Let’s go to the north of the city and see if we can catch some Bohemian fugitives!”

Olaf and the others were in a relaxed mood. The Viking cavalry circled around the west side of Leipzig and soon arrived at the northern outskirts of the city.

At this time, several hundred Bohemian soldiers were fleeing in panic along the northern streets. When they encountered the Viking cavalry, instead of scattering, they hurriedly protected a knight in plate armor at the center. The cavalry and infantry raised their firearms and fired at the Viking cavalry.

“Bang…”

The Vikings were caught off guard by the fierce resistance of the Bohemian soldiers. Dozens were hit instantly—some fell from their horses lifeless, while others, though wounded in the shoulder or arm, managed to stay on their horses.

“Spread out immediately! Charge!” Haldor and Olaf were momentarily stunned, but Hudik reacted quickly, shouting orders that Haldor repeated.

The Viking cavalry, already a well-trained elite force, instantly split into five columns. The vanguard of over five hundred cavalry fanned out, leaning forward as they galloped. The following cavalry accelerated and formed five columns as they advanced.

The five columns of cavalry turned into five swift arrows, reaching the Bohemian soldiers before they could fire a second volley.

The Vikings first threw short spears and throwing axes, then charged with long spears.

The Bohemian soldiers, formed in a circular formation, were struck by the axes and spears. Even with plate armor, the impact injured their internal organs, causing three or four dozen to fall. The remaining soldiers, before they could fill the gaps, were struck by the long spears and sent flying like broken sacks.

The Bohemian soldiers fought fiercely, but against the overwhelming numbers of the Viking cavalry, they were shattered within minutes.

Most of the Bohemian soldiers were killed in the resistance, but the core group of a dozen cavalry continued to try to break through the encirclement.

Tom and Pikku led two small squads of cavalry, circling to block the Bohemian knights. They had already noticed that the core of this group of Bohemian fugitives was a young knight protected by the cavalry. Although they didn’t know who he was, Tom and Pikku knew that capturing him would be a great achievement.

While others were pursuing and blocking the Bohemian soldiers trying to escape from the North District, Tom and Pikku joined forces to toy with the Bohemian knights desperate to break through.

Since the northern district was far from the battlefield in front of Leipzig Castle, few Bohemian troops had escaped from here. After the Viking forces appeared and blocked the exits, no one else could escape.

After ten minutes, hundreds of Bohemian soldiers had been killed or captured, leaving only a dozen cavalry struggling in the shrinking encirclement set by Pikku and Tom.

Haldor and Olaf had also arrived in the North District. Hudik had long since taken command, and Haldor and his son trusted his abilities, so they didn’t push forward.

Now, riding into the North District streets, Olaf saw the surrounded Bohemian cavalry from afar. Haldor scoffed and said, “That group of cavalry is of high quality. It seems they are the elite of the Bohemian forces. Maybe the one they’re protecting is a commander of the Bohemian forces!”

Olaf squinted and looked at the young commander on horseback. Taking out a telescope from his pocket, he saw that the man had smooth skin, a protruding chin, and was quite handsome, though his chin was too long and pointed, somewhat affecting his appearance.

Looking at Gilfa, Olaf ordered, “Take some men and capture their commander for me.”

Gilfa and Gilson were brothers who looked similar—both short in stature but much more robust than leaders like Pikku. They were rare warriors among the Inuit of Vinland. Now, Gilson was Haldor’s personal guard captain, and Gilfa was one of Olaf’s most reliable warriors.

Hearing his master’s command, Gilfa responded solemnly, took a long spear, and rode his horse forward.

Tom and Pikku noticed Gilfa approaching. Tom recognized Gilfa as his boss’s personal guard captain, and Pikku was Gilfa’s benefactor from the Oarsman. Gilfa rode up to them and relayed his master’s orders.

Tom looked back at Olaf from a distance and nodded. Pikku selected a dozen elite warriors to follow Gilfa in capturing the leader of the Bohemian knights.

Gilfa knew it was his benefactor’s goodwill and didn’t refuse. Leading a dozen Inuit warriors, he charged forward with a roar.

Two Bohemian knights rushed forward to block Gilfa. Gilfa’s arms bulged with veins as he swung his long spear with all his might.

“Crack!”

A crisp sound rang out as the two knights were knocked off their horses by Gilfa’s spear, which also broke in two.

“I remember the master mentioned that in the Far East, the Khitans have many strange weapons. Maybe I should have someone forge a large guandao for me. This long spear is too light and not durable enough…”

Gilfa suddenly recalled the stories his master had told the Vinland youths years ago—“All under heaven are brothers,” “The wars of three nations,” and more. He couldn’t help but admire the legendary Green Dragon Crescent Blade.

The two knights were instantly knocked off their horses by Gilfa. The remaining Bohemian knights were horrified, and four more charged forward.

Gilfa didn’t hold back. He grabbed the javelins and throwing axes from his horse and hurled them, knocking down two more.

The last two knights couldn’t even get close before being intercepted by the Inuit cavalry behind Gilfa. Several long spears stabbed and killed them.

Seeing that the Bohemian cavalry was nearly wiped out and the young noble at the center was trembling as he looked at him, Gilfa grinned and rode forward.

Chapter 270: Capturing a Young Emperor

The 17th century was an era of rapid firearms development, though the most advanced weapons were still front-loading smoothbore muskets. Their accuracy, range, and power were far inferior to later firearms, essentially equivalent to old cannon barrels.

In this age of firearms, if luck wasn’t against them, strong warriors could still wield considerable intimidation on the battlefield. Gilfa was one such warrior.

Mounted on his horse, Gilfa swung two hand axes as he charged toward the Bohemian cavalry. With a flick of his arms, the throwing axes struck the chests of two Bohemian riders.

At close range, Gilfa’s strength reached its peak. The axes cleaved through the iron armor on the knights’ chests with a clang, and the two riders, with axes embedded in them, slumped from their horses.

Only five Bohemian knights remained. The young nobleman with the long chin in the middle trembled, while the four surrounding knights gripped their long spears and firearms tightly.

“Dismount and surrender!” Gilfa roared from twenty paces away, then pulled out a short spear and hurled it with all his might.

The four knights raised their guns to kill Gilfa, but the Viking cavalry behind him fired first.

Bang! Bang!

The chaotic gunfire rang out. Three knights fell instantly, and a bullet struck Gilfa’s chest armor, leaving a dent.

Gilfa’s face paled as he coughed up blood, but his cheeks soon flushed red. Gritting his teeth, he said, “Good!”

With a squeeze of his legs, his horse surged forward. His right hand somehow grabbed another hand axe, hooking it to smash into the last knight’s face. The knight screamed and tumbled from his horse.

Only the long-chinned young man remained, frantically waving his hands and speaking in German that Gilfa couldn’t understand.

Gilfa reached out and grabbed the young man’s arm. With a grunt, he shook his arm and yanked him into the air.

The young man wore half plate armor, and with his own weight, he exceeded two hundred pounds. Yet Gilfa, though breathing heavily, showed no sign of strain.

“I am Ferdinand III, Archduke of Habsburg Austria and King of Bohemia! Please… please let me down!”

The young man shouted in several languages, finally stumbling through Swedish. Gilfa caught a few nouns and laughed. “You’re Ferdinand III?”

Ferdinand III widened his eyes. “Yes! It’s me! Please, sir, let me down. I will obey your command!”

Gilfa burst into laughter and turned to shout, “Men! I’ve caught a young emperor!”

…

Beneath a few pine trees north of Leipzig, Haldor and Olaf sat on their horses, gazing into the distance where the battle had mostly ended.

Suddenly, the Viking cavalry at the front erupted in cheers. Haldor and Olaf frowned.

Haldor’s personal guard captain, Gilson, stood up in his stirrups. “What is Gilfa doing?”

Moments later, Gilfa returned with several Viking riders. As he approached, everyone noticed the dented and damaged armor on his chest and his pale face—clearly, he had been shot, and the bullet’s force had injured his internal organs.

“Gilson, go fetch Master Song Qinghe and his disciples. Gilfa seems to be injured!” Haldor, who cared deeply for his soldiers, turned and said.

Gilson agreed and went to fetch Song Qinghe himself.

Gilfa dismounted, coughed lightly, then pulled Ferdinand III off his horse’s back and threw him before Haldor and Olaf’s horses. Smiling, he said, “Your Grace! Master! I’ve captured Ferdinand III, the leader of the Bohemian forces!”

“Oh?”

As soon as Gilfa spoke, everyone looked curiously at Ferdinand III on the ground. Seeing this fair-skinned, delicate young man, Olaf and Haldor could confirm he was of noble birth—his body bore no traces of hardship.

Hudik, who had rushed over upon hearing the news, stared at Ferdinand III’s long chin for a moment. Having grown up in Schwyz, Switzerland, Hudik had been a devout Catholic until the age of twenty and considered himself a subject of the Holy Roman Empire. Thus, he was well aware of the Habsburg emperors’ hereditary trait—the long chin.

Though years as a mercenary and life in Iceland had turned Hudik into a Protestant and a true Viking, his childhood memories remained.

Pointing at Ferdinand III, Hudik said firmly, “Haldor, Olaf, it seems he is indeed Ferdinand III. He looks just like Ferdinand II!”

No one knew Hudik better than Haldor. His eyes gleamed as he looked at Ferdinand III like a rare treasure. Smiling, he said, “Excellent! Reward Gilfa with one hundred virgates of land, one thousand marks of gold, twenty maidservants, promotion to senior knight, and the honorary title of Viking Berserker!”

For loyal subordinates who had achieved great deeds, Haldor never hesitated to reward generously. The soldiers who heard the rewards couldn’t help but gasp in admiration, then looked enviously at Gilfa, their hearts set on earning similar honors for their duke.

“Thank you, Your Grace! May God always bless you!” Gilfa, overjoyed, knelt and kissed Haldor’s shoe before staggering to his feet.

By now, Gilson had arrived with Song Qinghe and his two disciples. Hearing his brother’s rewards, he stepped forward, grabbed Gilfa, and said, “Don’t push yourself. Let Doctor Song examine your injury. Only when you’re healed can you protect our old and young masters!”

Gilfa coughed violently, wiping the blood from his lips. “Alright.”

Olaf walked over to Gilfa, patted his shoulder, and instructed Song Qinghe before sending them off for treatment.

After Gilfa left, Haldor, Hudik, Olaf, and the others observed Ferdinand III, who had risen shakily from the ground.

At twenty-five, Ferdinand III had led troops into battle for the first time and now experienced captivity for the first time. Shame, humiliation, anger, and fear intertwined, gnawing at his heart. His face alternated between pale and flushed, and his gaze darted about, avoiding eye contact with anyone.

“Are you Ferdinand III?” As a Swiss, Hudik spoke fluent German. He stepped forward, looking the young man in the eye.

Though Hudik was about the same height as Ferdinand III, the young archduke felt as if he were being looked down upon. Swallowing hard, he said, “Respected sir, I am indeed Ferdinand III. I am now your prisoner. I hope you will treat me well. My father, Emperor Ferdinand II, will ransom me!”

Hudik smiled slightly and translated for Haldor and Olaf.

“Haha, the young emperor speaks well.” Haldor nodded in satisfaction.

Olaf grinned. “We’ve crushed the Bohemian forces and captured their supreme commander, who is also the Habsburg heir and future emperor. It seems the pan-European war is about to enter peace negotiations!”

Hudik and Haldor laughed heartily. Seeing the leaders laugh, Ferdinand III forced a smile that looked more like a grimace than joy.

Chapter 271: A Timely Retreat

Ferdinand III held a position of great prestige, second only to the emperor within the Catholic League. Whether due to his status or the unspoken rules among Western nobles, Haldor found himself personally brushing the dirt off Ferdinand III after capturing him—the highest-ranking commander of the Catholic forces at present. He even offered a few kind words of comfort before ordering his men to guard Ferdinand closely.

After Gilson escorted Ferdinand III away, Hudik turned to his old comrade with excitement. “Haldor, with Ferdinand III in our hands, we’ve earned the greatest merit in the Protestant Union!”

Haldor chuckled, but Olaf let out a cold snort. “Don’t get too excited…”

“We’re not part of the Protestant Union’s core faction. Great achievements will only make others jealous and resentful toward us!”

Haldor’s face stiffened, and the scar near Hudik’s eye twitched. “Who dares cause trouble? The Viking cavalry fears no one!”

Olaf stepped forward, addressing both men. “We may not fear anyone, but we can’t handle underhanded schemes. Uncle Hudik, Father, I think with Ferdinand III captured, the Bohemian forces are completely defeated. The southern Bavarian army has been reduced to a cowering turtle by Wallenstein. Most of Germany is now under Protestant control. I expect negotiations will begin soon, and Europe will enter the Swedish era…”

Olaf spoke calmly, his gaze shifting meaningfully between Haldor and Hudik. “So we can’t defy Sweden’s demands or arrangements, nor can we cause trouble over petty disputes…”

Haldor and Hudik froze, then after a long pause, asked in unison, “Olaf, what are you saying? What do you want us to do?”

“I think once this battle ends, the pan-European war between Protestants and Catholics will return to the negotiating table. We saved Gustavus Adolphus II’s life, persuaded Wallenstein to surrender, defeated the Bohemian forces, and even captured Ferdinand III. The Protestant League has achieved an overwhelming victory. There won’t be large-scale wars for a long time. Staying by Gustavus Adolphus II’s side will only make others uncomfortable and lead to trouble. I think… it might be time to request leave from His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II…”

Olaf understood the dangers of outshining one’s master. The Icelandic Viking forces had already earned too much merit, provoking envy from the Swedish forces and other mercenary groups. Capturing Ferdinand III would only push Haldor and himself further into the spotlight—and further into isolation.

Their objectives in this war had been exceeded. Iceland and Vinland’s future development didn’t require support from the resource-poor and sparsely populated Swedish United Kingdom. With his plans, they could relocate large numbers of poor families from post-war Germany and the overpopulated British Isles to Vinland. Combined with native Vikings and the “yellow Vikings” of Vinland, the population could reach millions within a decade, laying the foundation for a powerful nation. With Iceland’s support, they could influence Europe and become a first-rate global power.

Olaf was confident. Once he succeeded his father, Vinland and Iceland would enter a period of rapid growth. In his lifetime, he could turn Vinland into a strong American nation. Combined with Iceland, they could project influence in Europe and become a true world power.

For Olaf, who harbored such grand ambitions, he didn’t want to be a subject under Gustavus Adolphus II—he wanted to be an emperor of the Americas.

Haldor and Hudik were surprised by Olaf’s suggestion. One was a common mercenary, the other a landowner from backward Iceland. Their ancestors might have been Norwegian nobles, but after centuries, nothing of that legacy remained.

Both leaders, of humble origins, were eager to secure their place in the Protestant Union’s power structure. They knew Gustavus Adolphus II was on his way to becoming one of Europe’s greatest monarchs. Following him promised far more than managing a few thousand people and livestock in Iceland.

Olaf understood their thoughts. For Europeans, Europe was the center of civilization. Whoever controlled most of Europe was the greatest ruler, the most powerful figure. The decisive battle between the Protestant and Catholic Leagues would produce a victor who would be remembered for centuries—and it was clear Gustavus Adolphus II would be that victor.

Following him meant securing a place in history, entering the heart of civilization. Compared to Europe’s wealth and splendor, poor Iceland and primitive Vinland were insignificant.

But Olaf disagreed. He told Haldor that the Viking forces were their foundation, and that foundation was Iceland and Vinland. Without it, Gustavus Adolphus II would have little reason to value them. To maintain high status and respect in the Protestant League or the Swedish United Kingdom, they needed to develop Iceland and Vinland.

Haldor always valued Olaf’s opinions, though he struggled to understand why Olaf prioritized Iceland and Vinland over the opportunity to rise through military merit in Europe. Years of trust made him accept Olaf’s judgment without hesitation.

“Son, after we present Ferdinand III to His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II, should we take our leave and return to Iceland? I was hoping to secure a fief in Germany like Wallenstein…”

Olaf heard the regret in his father’s voice. Iceland lacked manpower, and developing Vinland was already a challenge. A fief in Germany would require constant presence, and future conflicts involving Prussia, Russia, Poland, or the Habsburgs would turn Germany into a battleground. Even without war, rebuilding a war-torn city would drain resources better spent on Iceland and Vinland.

Olaf explained his reasoning. “For us, with Vinland at our disposal, land isn’t what we lack—it’s people and time to develop peacefully.

By presenting Ferdinand III, we become one of the greatest contributors to the Protestant League. If we voluntarily leave the center of power without demanding rewards, other factions won’t target us and may even owe us a favor.

In the future, Sweden will handle Iceland’s issues with Denmark, and our status will be recognized by European nations. If we focus on developing Vinland and Iceland, in a few decades, we’ll be a great nation ourselves. Why be a vassal to others?”

“The foundation of our power is Vinland and Iceland—that’s true. Enjoying great honors and rewards from military merit will provoke envy from other Protestant factions—that’s also true. Sacrificing our future for honor isn’t wise…”

Haldor muttered in agreement, nodding. Hudik’s face was grim, but he ultimately held his tongue.

Olaf continued to persuade them. Time passed slowly as Haldor and Hudik pondered. Finally, they agreed with Olaf’s plan: present Ferdinand III to Gustavus Adolphus II, giving him the upper hand in negotiations to ensure the Protestant League’s victory and end the Thirty Years’ War.

They would earn Gustavus Adolphus II’s gratitude and favor, then decline further rewards and return to Iceland and Vinland to focus on development.

Olaf claimed this was for Iceland’s future, as it currently lacked the strength to involve itself deeply in European affairs. Haldor agreed, and Hudik finally accepted.

Chapter 272: The Excited Lion King

After Gilfa led the Viking forces in crushing Ferdinand III’s guards, the Viking army settled in the northern district of Leipzig, searching through the buildings for hidden Bohemian soldiers. Inevitably, some civilians were caught in the crossfire, but by now, everyone had grown accustomed to such occurrences. Most citizens even cooperated, offering up their women, clothes, and food.

War was cruel to all, but it was kinder to the victors.

By dusk, the fighting inside and outside Leipzig had ceased. Gustavus Adolphus II sent for Haldor and Olaf, preparing to hold a meeting that evening to discuss their next moves. Only then did Haldor send word back to Gustavus Adolphus II that he had captured Ferdinand III, the supreme commander of the Catholic League and the Bohemian forces.

After the messenger left, Haldor and Olaf, accompanied by guards, led Ferdinand III out of the northern encampment and toward Leipzig Castle.

As they neared the castle, Olaf and Haldor saw Duke Bernhard standing at the entrance to greet them. They quickly exchanged greetings, and the duke nodded with a smile before his gaze shifted to Ferdinand III. His eyes lit up briefly, then he sneered and said, “So, the Duke of Iceland really did capture Ferdinand III? What luck! His Majesty wants you to bring Ferdinand III to the palace at once.”

“Very well. Please lead the way, Your Grace,” Haldor replied, sensing Duke Bernhard’s shifting emotions and growing more convinced of Olaf’s words.

The group quickly passed through the corridors, marred by bullet holes, bloodstains, and debris, and entered the palace of Leipzig Castle.

Gustavus Adolphus II sat on the throne in a long, earthy-brown robe. Though still recovering from his injuries, he had been personally overseeing the war since the new year. The prolonged strain and lack of rest had drained his energy, and his old wounds had begun to ache.

After drinking a cup of wine, his pale face flushed slightly. Though weary, his eyes gleamed with excitement. When he saw Ferdinand III enter, Gustavus Adolphus II suddenly stood up, steadying himself with a stagger. He laughed and said, “Excellent! Haldor, you truly are the left and right arm God has given me! To think you actually captured Ferdinand III—I was afraid he had escaped!”

Chuckling, Gustavus Adolphus II descended the three steps and stood before Ferdinand III. In stern, fluent German, he asked, “Respected Archduke of Austria, it is unfortunate that you have become a prisoner. But rest assured, I will ensure your living conditions are comfortable, and you will be treated with the same respect as in Bohemia. However, you must personally write a letter to Emperor Ferdinand II, urging him to admit defeat and surrender unconditionally!”

Ferdinand III had already anticipated his fate when he fell into Gilfa’s hands. Prepared, he displayed the grace of a royal with a long and storied history. With poise, he accepted Gustavus Adolphus II’s demands and expressed that he, too, opposed the war and desired peace.

Gustavus Adolphus II warmly embraced Ferdinand III and said to the young archduke, “Rest assured, I have no interest in Bohemia or Austria. I only ask that your father relinquish all territories north of Bavaria. Perhaps in the future, we might even become friends.”

Ferdinand III was shocked by Gustavus Adolphus II’s audacity, but considering the overwhelming advantage of the Protestant Union, he had to admit that abandoning central and northern Germany was the best choice for the Habsburgs. If the war continued, Bohemia and Austria might also become battlegrounds.

“I will convey your message to His Majesty the Emperor.”

“No, you misunderstand,” Gustavus Adolphus II said, shaking his finger. “Archduke of Austria, that is your message.”

Ferdinand III nodded, realizing that Gustavus Adolphus II wanted him to help persuade his father to cede the land. Though reluctant, given his circumstances, he could not afford to consider the nation’s interests or his ancestral legacy.

“Rest assured, I will write the letter to persuade His Majesty the Emperor at once!”

Gustavus Adolphus II stroked his beard and turned to his most trusted chancellor, saying, “Good, Oxenstierna, personally escort His Highness Ferdinand III to rest. Once he has written the letter, have his guards deliver it. Ensure the letter reaches the Habsburgs as soon as possible!”

After Oxenstierna bowed and left with Ferdinand III, Gustavus Adolphus II’s face, flushed from the wine and excitement, looked much healthier. His spirits had improved significantly. He embraced Haldor, then pulled Olaf into his arms, ruffling the boy’s golden hair. He laughed and said, “Thank you, Haldor, my friend. I owe this to you! And my dear little Olaf, my golden-haired boy, you are both the arms God has given me. I can foresee that by the end of this year, most of Germany will become part of the Swedish United Kingdom. Then, I will be a ruler who can stand alongside the greatest monarchs in European history—Caesar… Charlemagne… Gustavus Adolphus II… Hahaha…”

Achieving great deeds was the ultimate dream of every man. From a young age, Gustavus Adolphus II had aspired to be a great monarch. From battling Poland to fighting the Habsburgs, he had successfully taken the first steps toward becoming a great ruler. Now, there was no trace of the Catholic League in central and northern Germany, and the Habsburg armies had suffered consecutive defeats. With Wallenstein’s defection and Ferdinand III’s capture, the Catholic League was doomed.

Gustavus Adolphus II felt he was on the verge of overwhelming the Habsburg Emperor, taking control of Germany, and becoming another great emperor who would dominate Europe, creating an era of his own.

The thought of the future within his grasp made Gustavus Adolphus II feel as if he were drunk, unable to contain his excitement. Seeing Haldor and Olaf, who had saved his life, helped persuade Wallenstein to defect, and captured Ferdinand III, Gustavus Adolphus II was filled with gratitude and affection, even feeling a surge of warmth in his eyes.

“Brother Haldor! Golden-haired boy, what do you and your son desire? I think I should grant you the most fertile lands in Germany, have you return to Stockholm with me, and serve me forever. I will share all my glory and wealth with you! You need not return to that barren, backward, and primitive little island…”

Gustavus Adolphus II felt he needed to reward them generously to ease his own emotions. He genuinely believed he needed Haldor and Olaf’s help, and that the remote island in the North Sea, which could barely grow enough food, was not even as good as a single German city-state.

Olaf and Haldor expressed their gratitude repeatedly, but they also noticed the envious, jealous, and resentful glances from the other nobles and princes in the palace.

Haldor clearly realized that if he relied on his merits to receive generous rewards and became tied to the Lion King, Gustavus Adolphus II would trust him now due to his many contributions. But over time, the nobles and leaders of Sweden and its tributary states might secretly target him, and he could end up a prisoner or even killed for no apparent reason.

Haldor felt that he would be most at ease returning to Iceland and Vinland. Thus, he politely declined the several fiefs Gustavus Adolphus II had pointed out on the map for him and his son. In a deep voice, he said, “Thank you for your favor, Your Majesty, but we do not wish for any rewards. We only ask for your protection and support for Iceland. Now that you have thoroughly defeated the Catholic League, it is time for us to return to Iceland. After all, years of Danish attacks have left it far from peaceful and stable… We are very concerned about our homeland and our people… Please grant us permission to return to Iceland!”

Hearing Haldor’s words, Gustavus Adolphus II felt as if a bucket of cold water had been poured over him from head to toe. Seeing the determination in Haldor and Olaf’s eyes, his mood instantly soured.

He opened his mouth to say something but swallowed his words. Suddenly, Gustavus Adolphus II felt a sense of emptiness and fatigue. His expression darkened as he sat back on the throne. After a long while, he coldly humphed and waved his hand, saying, “We will discuss the matter of returning to Iceland later. Today, I am not feeling well and need to rest. You may all leave!”

Haldor and Olaf exchanged glances, then bowed and retreated.

The generals of the Saxon, Prussian, Pomeranian, and other armies, as well as the Swedish nobles, also left. They had always resented Haldor and Olaf’s favoritism, even ignoring them before. Now, hearing that Haldor had achieved another great feat, their feelings were mixed.

Although everyone was jealous, envious, and even hostile toward Haldor, they had all heard his request to return home. Though they all secretly despised Haldor’s small-mindedness and cursed him as a peasant, on the surface, they praised and supported his decision.

After all, if this outsider, Haldor, stayed by Gustavus Adolphus II’s side, it would not only reduce their presence and military achievements but also take a share of the spoils in the future division of German lands and resources. No one liked a competitor.

The Icelanders’ willingness to leave made everyone happy, and they expressed their willingness to provide all possible assistance when Iceland needed it.

Chapter 273: Terror Across Europe

When news of Ferdinand III’s defeat and capture by Gustavus Adolphus II reached Bavaria, Bohemia, and the Habsburgs, the Catholic League was thrown into panic.

Wallenstein, seizing the opportunity, launched a fierce assault on Bavaria, pillaging and burning five cities before retreating with his spoils.

France, Spain, England, Denmark, Poland, and even the Ottoman Empire soon learned of Gustavus Adolphus II’s triumphant leadership of the Protestant forces. It was clear to all that the Catholic League’s defeat was inevitable.

With Wallenstein’s surrender and Ferdinand III’s capture in less than half a month, coupled with the deliberate spread of the “Chosen One” legend by Gustavus Adolphus II, the entire European continent was in turmoil.

Gustavus Adolphus II had become a name that struck fear into the hearts of all emperors and kings. The restless Habsburgs of Spain quickly ceased their border skirmishes with France.

Christian IV of Denmark, holed up in Rosenborg Palace, sighed in despair, acutely aware of the powerlessness and crisis of having a mighty Sweden as a neighbor. What shamed him most was not just that Sweden had once been under Danish rule, but that Iceland, which had broken free from Denmark, had now joined the Swedish United Kingdom. Even Haldor had personally led troops to support Gustavus Adolphus II.

Christian IV thought of his two failed campaigns in Iceland and how Olaf had bombarded Copenhagen, leaving him humiliated. Now, they had turned to Sweden, and he had nothing to show for his efforts but embarrassment.

The hatred and shame gnawed at Christian IV day and night, leaving him restless and irritable. His ministers and attendants tread carefully around him.

Though Christian IV longed to rally his troops and attack Iceland or even launch a surprise assault on Sweden, his remaining rationality told him it would be like smashing his head against a rock—the rock would remain unscathed, but his head would bleed profusely.

Christian IV hated to admit it, but he truly feared Gustavus Adolphus II and the Swedish United Kingdom he led. With Gustavus Adolphus II at his peak, Denmark stood no chance.

Moreover, after two wars with Iceland and repeated attacks by Icelandic forces on Danish cities, Denmark had yet to recover from the pan-European war. Its economy and people were in decline, and it had lost the ability and courage to challenge Sweden.

Though unwilling to accept it, Christian IV had no choice but to face reality. His anger became a symbol of his impotence, mocked by Icelandic merchants and Swedes alike.

Charles I of England and Louis XIII of France had not expected Gustavus Adolphus II to not only recover from his injuries the previous year but to emerge even stronger. In just a few months, the Protestant forces had achieved a crushing victory.

Based on England’s political culture of continental balance, Charles I believed that suppressing the Habsburgs had been successful. To prevent Sweden from growing too powerful, he even took the initiative to contact the Habsburgs and prepare for peace talks.

France had long harbored ambitions in Germany. As a devout Catholic nation, France had sided with the Protestant League in this pan-European war to suppress the Habsburgs, aiming to keep Germany divided and perhaps gain some territory after the war.

Now that the Protestant forces led by Sweden had triumphed, Louis XIII and Cardinal Richelieu were pleased but also wary of Gustavus Adolphus II.

The Viking invasions of Northern Europe hundreds of years ago were the darkest period in Latin cultural history. Although many French people had Germanic ancestors, after centuries in the Latin cultural sphere, the French had long seen themselves as distinct from the Northern Europeans.

The rise of Sweden’s military power was not good news for France. Richelieu quickly sent envoys to reach a consensus with Charles I. England and France were the first to make peace with Spain, then sent a joint delegation to Leipzig to promote peace talks between the Protestant and Catholic Leagues, aiming to impose certain restrictions on Sweden through negotiations.

The major players in the European war had all developed a fear of Sweden’s Lion King. Even before peace had arrived, a consensus to contain Sweden had already been reached. This showed that the victory at Leipzig was the greatest triumph for the Protestant forces and Europe in centuries. Gustavus Adolphus II had proven through actual battles that his military prowess was unmatched and invincible.

Facing such a powerful neighbor, England, France, Germany, and Spain were all cautiously preparing to temporarily cede the European stage to him, then gradually weaken Sweden through other means. There were many methods, such as the Habsburgs’ Ferdinand III’s idea to support Russia. If the backward Eastern Russia could grow strong, it would challenge and threaten Sweden…

Poland-Lithuania, Sweden’s old rival, was so frightened that it rapidly conscripted troops and deployed them to the border to prevent a Swedish invasion. They also sent envoys to Leipzig to congratulate Gustavus Adolphus II on his victory, probing Sweden’s attitude.

1633 was destined to be the year of Gustavus Adolphus II’s dominance. After news of the Protestant forces’ great victory spread across Europe in March, Sweden had transformed from a Northern European power into a European power. In the hearts of some, Gustavus Adolphus II had become a figure comparable to Caesar.

After staying in Leipzig for some time, Haldor and Olaf once again requested to leave Gustavus Adolphus II. As envoys from various nations and tributary states came to pay their respects to the Lion King, the attitudes of the Duke of Iceland and the Earl of Vinland seemed particularly conspicuous.

Gustavus Adolphus II still refused, but Duke Bernhard and other Swedish nobles and Protestant commanders helped persuade him. Soon, Gustavus Adolphus II’s stance wavered.

It wasn’t until Oxenstierna also advised him that Gustavus Adolphus II finally granted Haldor’s request, bestowing upon him one thousand marks of gold, five thousand marks of silver, two thousand horses, and a number of firearms and cannons. Olaf received a ruby-encrusted ring that Gustavus Adolphus II had worn for many years, bearing his personal seal.

Though the wealth and honors they received were enough to make anyone envious, compared to the fiefs they would have gained by staying and the honor of serving the greatest king, these riches and deep favors seemed insignificant.

At a time when everyone knew that the spoils of war would soon be divided, the father and son from Iceland chose to leave. No one understood why. While some speculated that they feared being targeted and harmed by others, most thought Haldor was a fool.

Gustavus Adolphus II also didn’t understand Haldor and Olaf, but considering that Iceland had just been attacked by Denmark, he, as a benevolent ruler, believed that Haldor and Olaf were concerned for their people.

Gustavus Adolphus II felt that the kindness and benevolence they showed were even more worthy of respect. So, when bidding them farewell, Gustavus Adolphus II took Haldor’s hand and said, “Once you’ve settled matters in Iceland, come to Stockholm to find me. Together, we will create a new era!”

Haldor nodded and said, “Your Majesty, please take care of your health! Dr. Song examined you yesterday and said that your old injuries show signs of recurring, and you’ve caught a cold. Please take good care of yourself!”

Haldor’s sincere concern moved Gustavus Adolphus II deeply. Though his thin frame still exuded great strength, he embraced Haldor tightly and laughed, “I know my body. It’s just a bit of wind I caught the other day. From now on, I’ll listen to Dr. Song and drink a pot of chicken soup every day. I’ll recover soon! After years of battle, I’ve suffered countless injuries, but with God’s blessing, I’ve always turned danger into safety. Haha!”

Olaf also took Gustavus Adolphus II’s hand, looking at the great king who was slightly shorter than himself, and sighed, “Your Majesty! Once the peace talks are over, your achievements will rival those of Caesar and Charlemagne. I am truly happy for you and proud to serve you!”

Gustavus Adolphus II reached up and ruffled Olaf’s hair, smiling, “Golden-haired lad, come find me soon. I’ll introduce you to my dear little Christina. Maybe you can become friends. I hope you’ll become her knight, teach her military and other knowledge, and protect her safety. Would you be willing?”

Olaf thought for a moment. Though he was reluctant, he still said, “It is Your Majesty’s grace, so of course I am willing. Once I return to Iceland with my father and settle all the post-war issues, I will contact you, Your Majesty!”

Gustavus Adolphus II nodded in satisfaction, then waved as Haldor and Olaf led their two thousand nine hundred Viking cavalry and three thousand horses laden with gold, silver, and goods out of Leipzig. These rewards were all supplies gathered from the German regions. Besides Haldor, other nobles also received a portion.

Riding slowly away from Leipzig, Olaf felt a pang of reluctance. Over the past few months, Gustavus Adolphus II had truly shown the bearing and character of a great ruler, treating him and his father with sincerity and deep affection, making it hard not to develop feelings for him.

Hudik looked at Olaf beside him and whispered, “Reluctant? Want to be the princess’s knight?”

Olaf shook his head and said, “Gustavus Adolphus II is truly a flawless king. If we only had Iceland, we might have stayed. But besides Iceland, we have Vinland, which is a hundred times larger. As Viking men, I think we should set our sights on America!”

“Yes, if he weren’t a king, I’d want to be his friend forever, just like you, Hudik. But he is destined to be a great monarch, and we are outsiders in the eyes of the Swedes and Germans. If we want to live freely, we can’t stay by his side…”

Haldor chuckled and sighed, “You truly are a child possessed by the spirit of Hrut! He once refused King Harald’s invitation and returned to Iceland. You know, Hrut was in love with Harald’s mother! But he gave up the chance to be the king’s stepfather. Like him, you only think about managing your own land… Maybe that’s what Viking men should do!”

Chapter 274: Why Should Iceland Be Inferior to Britain?

Haldor and Olaf, leading nearly three thousand Viking cavalry along with horses, gold, silver, and other rewards bestowed by Gustavus Adolphus II, departed Leipzig. In just three days, they traversed the many city-states of Hanover and entered the territory of the Free City of Bremen.

The sheer magnitude and disciplined formation of Haldor’s army, coupled with the Swedish flags flying in their ranks, deterred both local officials and roaming bandits from causing trouble—if anything, they feared the Viking Raid might come after them instead.

As the army advanced into the lands of the Free City of Bremen and swiftly approached the city itself, the stationed officers and soldiers quickly took notice of the Viking forces.

Soon, a colonel arrived with supplies to greet the army and inquire about their movements and intentions. Accompanying him was a tall, bearded man.

After the supplies were exchanged and the colonel had gathered the necessary information, he confirmed that the army before him was indeed the Viking Raid from Iceland and that their commander was none other than Haldor, the Duke of Iceland.

The colonel saluted respectfully and said, “Duke Haldor! The city lord has sent me to convey his greetings. He has prepared a banquet in the city tonight and invites you to attend. Also… this gentleman arrived from Iceland yesterday. He has something to tell you.”

After exchanging pleasantries with the colonel, Haldor caught sight of a familiar figure standing behind him.

Haldor’s eyes narrowed as he recognized the man—it was Simmer, Kadir’s brother-in-law.

Seeing Simmer’s weary and dust-covered appearance, Haldor’s heart tightened. “Simmer? What brings you here? Has something happened in Iceland?”

Simmer stepped forward and embraced Haldor, his voice heavy. “I finally found you, Your Grace! Something terrible has happened in Iceland!”

“What happened?!” Haldor, Hudik, and Olaf all demanded, their eyes wide with concern.

“Last winter, the blizzards in Iceland were far worse than usual. Many people froze to death or suffered frostbite. This spring, over a thousand refugees who had lost their livestock came begging in Big Port. Ulf, Heiner, Kadir, and Hoskuld did what they could—they distributed sweet potatoes and potatoes and even provided timber for the refugees to build shelters in Reykjavik. But then, last month, news came from Vinland. The cold there was even more brutal than in Iceland. Hundreds have frozen to death, and countless livestock and slaves have perished. Ulf and Heiner were already stretched thin dealing with Iceland’s troubles, and they didn’t know how to handle Vinland’s crisis. That’s why they sent me to find you and bring you back…”

Haldor frowned. “It was indeed colder than usual last year—we felt it even in Germany! How are Katrin and Haig? Are they all right?”

Simmer quickly reassured him, “The lady and the generals, along with the nobles on the island, are fine. It’s just the poor villagers who suffered.”

“That’s a relief,” Haldor sighed, nodding. “This is urgent. Our ships are docked in Bremen’s port. We’ll set sail for home at once!”

Olaf had a horse brought for Simmer and asked, “Who brought the news from Vinland?”

“Kalm came himself. He said Vinland needs a large number of laborers, skilled workers, livestock, iron, and cloth. They still have enough food, but the real problem is that the nine governors of Vinland couldn’t handle the aftermath of the brutal cold sweeping the land. They want you to return and take charge.”

Simmer was well-acquainted with Olaf and knew the second young master carried an air of mystery. As a governor of Vinland himself, Simmer hurriedly relayed the details.

“The cold last winter has devastated both Iceland and Vinland. Greenland must be suffering just as badly.”

Olaf’s expression darkened as he muttered, “I never expected the Little Ice Age to be this severe. It’s not just the drop in temperature—the cold air itself has grown far more intense! If Vinland’s weather stays like this, cotton won’t grow. Only the fastest-maturing crops like sweet potatoes, potatoes, and corn will survive…”

Upon learning of the disasters in Iceland and Vinland, Haldor and Olaf’s moods soured. They led their army past Bremen, ignoring the city lord’s banquet invitation. They merely sent some gold and silver as a gesture before leaving the city and heading straight to the northern port of Bremen. After inspecting their ships, they spent more money to have local officials procure large quantities of food, fresh water, salt, and other supplies. Then, they set sail from the Weser River, bound for Iceland.

Eleven warships, along with the brigantine Simmer had arrived on, cut through the North Sea under the southwest trade winds. Along the way, they passed countless fishing boats casting their nets near the shore.

At this time, due to backward productivity and scarce resources, Europe’s population had not yet exploded as it would after the Industrial Revolution. At most, there were one hundred million people across the continent, and fewer than one in a thousand had the means to eat fish regularly—let alone fresh fish. Most could only afford salted fish, except for the highest nobility. In an era of poor transportation, fresh seafood was a rare luxury.

The underdeveloped productivity and low demand meant that marine fishing was not yet a thriving industry. Most fish were sold salted or preserved.

The North Sea fishing grounds remained the primary fishing site for coastal European nations. At current catch levels, supply and demand were in balance. But once large ships, advanced tools, and wide nets became widespread, even the future Newfoundland fisheries—and perhaps even Vinland’s—would struggle to meet demand.

As Olaf watched the coastal fishermen at work, his thoughts wandered. He recalled the waterproof bulkhead technology invented during China’s Han Dynasty—one of the greatest advancements in shipbuilding history. Now, with the successful example of Song Qinghe and his disciples, he could have Kuiyi invite several shipwrights from Guangdong or Fuzhou. Then, the shipyards in Vinland and Iceland could not only build ships rivaling those of Holland but also eliminate the risk of sinking from leaks. This would surely make Iceland’s shipbuilding industry thrive, providing a new economic path for the island.

With the Little Ice Age’s cold snaps devastating Vinland and Iceland’s agriculture, Olaf knew relying on farming alone was no longer viable. They had to develop industry—perhaps even leapfrog ahead of England to spark the first Industrial Revolution.

The Industrial Revolution’s emergence was the result of countless coincidences. Why had England, among all European nations, been the first to industrialize?

Olaf was no expert, but he understood that industrialization required several prerequisites: a large population providing abundant labor, continuous technological advancements, and a booming domestic commercial and industrial sector.

If Vinland and Iceland combined their strengths, developing commerce would not be an issue. Industry could gradually catch up to England and Holland through purchasing equipment and recruiting artisans. But technological progress and population growth could not be achieved overnight.

Olaf felt overwhelmed by the tasks ahead. Even if he dedicated himself entirely to them, success seemed distant. Yet, the thought of building a mighty empire with his own hands, reshaping the world’s balance of power, and becoming a great historical figure filled him with renewed determination.

“Both are islands—why should Iceland be inferior to Great Britain? Why must the Industrial Revolution be led by the British Isles? Why should the empire ruling a quarter of the world be the future British Empire? With colonies in North America, Iceland will surely surpass England!”

A series of rhetorical questions and self-affirmations fueled Olaf’s ambition, igniting a sense of defiance—Why should kings and nobles be born to their station? Why can’t I reshape the world?

Olaf failed to realize how deeply his recent experiences had affected him—witnessing Gustavus Adolphus II effortlessly carve out a new nation (the Duchy of Magdeburg) and rise above the Catholic League to become Europe’s foremost power had left an indelible mark on him.

He also didn’t notice how his time with Gustavus Adolphus II had broadened his horizons, shifting his ambitions from Iceland and Vinland to all of Europe—and beyond.

Though Gustavus Adolphus II had treated him and his father well and even offered them lands in Germany, Olaf’s heart now rebelled against the idea of being a vassal. Unconsciously, he had come to resent subordination.

England was still a second-tier European power. Recalling the sights of London and the unrest in Ireland, Olaf knew that before the rise of the Lord Protector, England was far from being a great power. He saw an opportunity—not just to surpass England, but to rise above it.

Unable to contain his thoughts, he muttered, “I’ll build Vinland into a powerhouse. I’ll take all of future America, Canada, and Mexico, and combine them with Iceland. I refuse to believe we can’t surpass England! In my lifetime, I’ll taste what it’s like to be the emperor of an empire where the sun never sets!”

A true man, born under the vast heavens, should never be content to live in another’s shadow.

Perhaps every confident soul harbors a Lü Bu within. Olaf believed he had the ability—and the confidence—to leverage North America’s colonial head start, develop Iceland and Vinland, and ultimately surpass England and France, even Sweden. He dreamed of making Vinland the future superpower that would dominate Europe—and the world.

Chapter 275: Natural Disasters Cannot Defeat the Viking People

On April 10th, while Gustavus Adolphus II led the Protestant League’s leaders in negotiations with England, France, and the Habsburgs in Prague, the capital of Bohemia, seeking peace in Europe, the great heroes of the Protestant League, Duke Haldor and Olaf of the Icelandic Duchy under the Swedish United Kingdom, were also about to arrive in Iceland with their Viking warriors.

After a week at sea, that morning, after breakfast, Olaf saw Pikku excitedly enter the room, saying, “Master, we’ve spotted Iceland!”

Olaf nodded and said, “Once we land, you must quickly take the supplies and food to Greenland. Last winter’s cold snap must have been severe, and Greenland likely suffered as well. That is our future storehouse of meat, milk, and leather. You must protect it well.”

Pikku nodded. “Understood. I’ll escort you home first, then return. Once things in Greenland are settled, I’ll send someone to inform you.”

Olaf nodded, thinking about the two groups of pirates they had encountered in the North Sea over the past few days. Although the pirate ships were small and their crews few, they hadn’t even dared to approach the Icelandic fleet, but this phenomenon made Olaf ponder deeply.

A thousand years ago, pirates had emerged in the North Sea, initially all Vikings from the Scandinavian Peninsula. Later, Viking raiders in longships swept across half of the European continent, even ruling England, France, and Germany, shaping the course of European development.

However, with the advent of firearms, Europe entered the Age of Exploration, and the ancient longship pirates nearly vanished. While the number of pirates today is far less than centuries ago, each pirate group is much larger in scale.

In the North Sea, due to the powerful navies of England, Holland, Spain, Denmark, and the massive warships of great merchants, pirates are rare. But in the distant Atlantic Ocean, pirate gangs from the Scandinavian Peninsula, Iceland, the British Isles, and even Spain still abound.

These pirates primarily target ships traveling to and from the West Indies and South America. Compared to the central and southern Atlantic, the cold northern regions are not the main targets of Atlantic pirates. Especially in recent years, after witnessing the powerful navy and aggression of Iceland in Vinland, there hasn’t been a trace of pirates within a thousand miles of Vinland.

But now, pirates that had nearly disappeared in the North Atlantic have reappeared, and in two groups. This made Olaf suspect that either the European wars had revitalized the pirate trade, or something had happened in the West Indies and South America, causing a rapid increase in pirates. Regardless of the reason, the emergence of many pirates was not conducive to communication and the “internal circulation” of resources and people between Vinland and Iceland.

“Once the impact of the disasters in Vinland and Iceland is resolved, we’ll need to launch a pirate-clearing operation in the North Atlantic. It will serve as military training, generate revenue, and ensure the safety and stability of the sea routes between Vinland and Iceland, free from interference!”

Olaf made up his mind about the fate of the North Atlantic pirates with a single thought, then led Pikku onto the deck, as if the pirates feared by the people were nothing more than minor thugs he could eliminate with a wave of his hand.

In reality, with the development of maritime technology and the use of large ships and cannons, pirates stood no chance against organized navies. Moreover, the Icelanders had been pirates since ancient times and understood all the habits and patterns of pirates, making it easy for them to find pirate hideouts. Therefore, for the Haldor family, which controlled hundreds of thousands of people and millions of square kilometers of land in Iceland and Vinland, sending people to deal with pirates was as easy as hunting or fishing, and the rewards would be even greater.

As for pirate retaliation, Olaf believed they would never dare to seek revenge against Viking warriors. The few who might escape would be enough to keep them away from Vinland and Iceland for the rest of their lives.

As they stepped onto the deck, they saw Haldor and Hudik also coming out. Tom and others were on the deck, gazing at the hazy outline of Iceland in the distance. After greeting everyone, Olaf told his father about the plan to eliminate the pirates.

Haldor’s love and regard for Olaf surpassed everything. After listening, he immediately nodded and said, “Alright, this matter is yours to handle. Arrange for the resources, money, and manpower you need. I’ll have several Viking generals assist you.”

Olaf smiled and said, “Thank you, Father.”

Hudik chuckled softly. “Olaf, your mind works differently from ours. Earlier, you insisted we return to Iceland, and I didn’t understand why. Now, knowing that Iceland and Vinland have suffered from the cold snap, I realize we had to come back, and sooner rather than later. After all, our roots are in Iceland and Vinland!”

“You want to deal with the unruly pirates? I fully support you. When the time comes, you can pick any strong laborers and soldiers from my Raid.”

Olaf sensed Hudik’s faint apology and quickly joked in gratitude.

As they talked, the outline of Iceland became clearer. Looking at the scenery ahead and then at the nautical chart, Haldor knew the fleet had reached the coastline near Hebun in the White Cloth Messenger Raid District.

“You’re in your territory now,” Haldor said to Hudik with a smile.

Hudik was a general of the White Cloth Messenger Raid, and Hebun was precisely where his general’s manor was located.

As a Viking Raid general, Hudik was the highest military and political leader in the White Cloth Messenger Raid District in southeastern Iceland, with immense power and prestige.

Seeing that they had arrived at his workplace, Hudik also showed a relaxed smile and said, “Haldor, let’s disembark and rest in Hebun for a night before going to Big Port.”

Haldor waved his hand and said, “The foundation of Iceland will always be in Big Port. Reykjavik has the largest population, and the disaster caused by the cold snap has driven many refugees there. If the problem isn’t resolved quickly and perfectly, it will remain a hidden danger in the future and may even damage my reputation and that of our Viking Raid system. We should go directly to Big Port.”

Hudik nodded and ordered the fleet to sail west along the coastline. They arrived at Reykjavik Harbor at 10 p.m.

Because Iceland is at a high latitude and it was summer, even at 10 p.m., the sun still hung in the Icelandic sky. This “workaholic” never seemed to tire and never set during the Icelandic summer.

Although it might be late at night in Germany, Reykjavik was still as bright as day, though there were few sailors and personnel at the docks.

Under the guidance of the Viking soldiers at the docks, the fleet entered the harbor and docked. Haldor, Olaf, Hudik, Tom, Pikku, and more than a dozen other leaders were the first to disembark, inquiring about the situation and changes in Reykjavik from the company commander of the dock garrison.

This commander was a distant relative of Hoskuld, named Red-Nose Orn. He wasn’t very capable but was loyal, commanding a 125-man firearms company guarding the dock bastions, with ten clever cavalrymen under him. Life was comfortable for him. Now, seeing the returning Duke Haldor, Orn knew this might be his chance to gain the duke’s favor, so he quickly reported the property and life losses caused by the winter cold snap in Reykjavik and many other situations.

After listening to Orn, Haldor, Hudik, Olaf, and the others were first impressed by the resilience and unity of the Icelandic Viking people.

During the cold snap, over a hundred houses in Reykjavik had collapsed, directly freezing more than ten people to death and injuring hundreds. Later, dozens more died from severe injuries. Most of the dead were poor people from the South and North Districts, and even more were residents of the northern towns of Reykjavik.

The situation in Reykjavik was quite severe, as it was home to one-third of Iceland’s population, and many conditions were still backward.

However, the northern towns also had houses collapsed by wind and snow. For the Icelandic people, the collapse of houses wasn’t a big deal; the key was the destruction of sheep pens, cattle sheds, and stables, which was a disaster that cut off their livelihood…

Iceland had little arable land, and the climate wasn’t suitable for farming, so for hundreds of years, the Vikings had relied on sheep herding to survive and thrive.

Now, a cold snap had left many Viking people homeless and without the livestock they depended on. To survive the spring and beyond, the displaced people had no choice but to flee to Big Port in search of a living, becoming a burden on the people of Big Port and the Viking Raid.

However, as refugees from various places continued to pour into Big Port, the people of Big Port also demonstrated the qualities passed down through generations of Icelandic people, welcoming the refugees, letting them stay in their homes and share their food. The Duke’s Manor, the Parliament, and the Congress all used potatoes and sweet potatoes to make porridge for the refugees, while Heiner, Ulf, and others recruited some refugees to help with the spring hunting of seals and whales, paying them to help.

From the government to the people, everyone selflessly helped the refugees. Although this was a fine tradition of the Icelandic people for hundreds of years, Haldor and the others were still moved.

Pikku, however, was indifferent, as in the Inuit value system, mutual help during disasters was basic, and even women and children were considered common property. As long as they could survive, any risk was acceptable.

Olaf highly praised the attitude and behavior of the people of Big Port, exclaiming, “Natural disasters cannot defeat the indomitable Viking people! Through this cold snap, we have proven that we are the most excellent people in the world!”

Chapter 276: Returning Home

A skilled ruler must always master one key trick: praising and even flattering the people under their rule. Since the people are a collective, individual citizens will be moved and inspired by such words. While praising the people, the ruler must also supervise and reprimand their own bureaucratic officials. Regardless of the actual circumstances, this attitude will always be the most beloved by the people.

Olaf believed that a ruler was like a star—the key was to maintain a perfect persona, with the core being love for the people like one’s own children, benevolence, greatness, wisdom, and omniscience.

Under Olaf’s guidance, Haldor followed this logic in governing as the Duke of Iceland. Upon arriving in Reykjavik, Haldor and Olaf first visited the docks, the South District, the North District, and the East District, inquiring about the people’s well-being, investigating the situation, and learning about the cold snap disaster and the resettlement of the affected citizens.

After more than half an hour, Ulf and Heiner finally realized where Haldor and Olaf were.

“Father, you’re back!” Ulf exclaimed. “Heiner and I went to the White Eagle Raid District to handle post-disaster issues. The cold snap hit hardest there—over two thousand households lost nearly all their sheep to freezing or the blizzard. What will these people do for food and shelter? We’ve been racking our brains over it…”

After a year apart, Ulf looked somewhat worn but also more composed. Haldor embraced his eldest son and smiled. “Simmer came to find us specifically. I knew both Iceland and Vinland had been struck by disaster—how could I rest easy?”

After a few words, Ulf affectionately took Haldor and Olaf’s hands and said, “Father, brother, let’s go home first. Mother and the younger siblings miss you!”

Haldor was delighted, and Olaf thought of his own mother, younger siblings, and the lovely Sally.

At the thought of Sally, Olaf’s heart warmed, and he couldn’t help but swallow hard.

As they entered the Duke’s Manor, Katrin, Half, Gerny, and Sally rushed out from the courtyard and threw themselves into Haldor and Olaf’s arms, hugging them tightly.

Olaf patted his sister, who was nearly as tall as his shoulder, and sniffed Sally’s hair, smiling. “Did you miss me?”

Half had grown taller as well. He grinned and said, “Brother, we all missed you. Mother and Sally even asked the bishop to pray for your safe return just two days ago.”

Katrin hugged her husband and then Olaf, kissing him twice. “Dear Olaf, you’re finally back. Thank God, my husband and son have returned safely from the German battlefield…”

After Katrin, Gerny, and the other women of the family expressed their affection, everyone joined hands and entered the house, sitting on the sofas to talk.

Pikku, Tom, and the others were given leave by Olaf to rest, while Song Qinghe and his apprentice were settled in the East District behind the Duke’s Manor. This was the most prestigious residential area in Iceland, home to nobles and officials. Song Qinghe was the health guarantor for Olaf’s family and had also saved Gustavus Adolphus II from a gunshot wound, earning great merit. Olaf was a man of integrity and would never mistreat him.

Gerny was now thirteen years old. The early maturity of the Nordic race had shaped her into a slender young woman, resembling a sixteen- or seventeen-year-old girl. Her features closely resembled Katrin’s, already showing the potential of a beauty.

Half, just a year younger than Gerny, had grown into a sturdy young man, though his hair color, inherited from Haldor, was brown, and his build wasn’t as tall as Ulf and Olaf had been at twelve.

Olaf, who had been away from home for a year, sat on the sofa, looking at Sally, Gerny, and Half beside him, feeling as if he had been away for an eternity.

Haldor’s mood wasn’t as complicated as Olaf’s. He was simply happy to be reunited with his family, chatting with each child before finally asking, “Where are Haig and Lorin? Are they in Hrut Town?”

Due to the rise of Haldor and Haig, Hrut Village, which had produced the Duke of Iceland and a Viking general, had been upgraded to a town. It was also the headquarters of the Black Bull Raid General. As the Black Bull Raid General, Haig spent most of his time in the general’s fortress in Hrut Town, handling affairs within the Raid District.

Katrin noticed the longing in her husband’s voice for Haig and smiled. “I’ve already sent Ulf to notify Haig. Maybe they’ll arrive by tomorrow afternoon. Then you can see little Arthur—he’s grown so strong!”

Haig’s son, Arthur, had been born when Haldor, Haig, Olaf, and the others were still trading furs and syrup in Vinland. In less than three years, they had become the leading figures of the Iceland-Vinland Grand Duchy, rising to prominence and even participating in the great European wars, conversing with Gustavus Adolphus II as equals. It was truly a twist of fate.

Thinking of Arthur, Olaf suddenly felt how quickly time had passed. Then Sally had the Indian maidservants bring several barrels of wine and beer, filling everyone’s cups. “Your Highness, madam, Olaf, today is a day worth celebrating for our family reunion, isn’t it?”

Katrin nodded in satisfaction. “Indeed, let’s all have a drink.”

As soon as she finished speaking, the sound of clinking glasses rang out. After a round of hearty drinking, Haldor and Olaf began recounting their experiences in the German war, focusing on how they had saved Gustavus Adolphus II at Lützen and captured Ferdinand III, the Archduke of Austria.

The fantastical experiences and thrilling battles led by Haldor and his sons with the Viking cavalry left Ulf, Half, and the other men yearning to join the fray. But Katrin, Gerny, and Sally could only feel waves of fear.

When Haldor mentioned how he and his sons had earned the admiration and friendship of Gustavus Adolphus II, Ulf’s eyes darkened, and he glanced at Olaf with a hint of resentment before casually praising, “It’s all thanks to the ancestors’ blessings. With Olaf helping Father, your battles must have gone smoothly!”

Haldor nodded with a smile, downed a cup of wine in one gulp, wiped the foam from his beard, and laughed. “Exactly! Olaf was guided by the ancestors and even helped Gustavus Adolphus II establish his identity as the divinely ordained leader of the Protestant faith. Now, the story of how we saved him under divine guidance has spread across Europe. Not only has it brought fame to Iceland and Olaf, but it has also added a layer of mystique to Gustavus Adolphus II. The higher his status and the greater his reputation, the more grateful he will be to us. Olaf’s wisdom is truly unfathomable—it seems he has been blessed with the waters of wisdom by the gods.”

Several barrels of beer were emptied amid the family’s laughter. By two in the morning, the brief twilight outside had finally darkened.

Though the dark period lasted only a little over two hours, the people of Iceland were accustomed to sleeping during this time.

After nearly a year of campaigning, the exhausted Haldor stretched and said, “Let’s all go to our rooms and sleep. We’ll have breakfast together in the morning.”

Half and Gerny reluctantly agreed. Olaf took Sally to his room and spent a few hours exercising, working up a sweat.

Just as Olaf was whispering sweet nothings to the slippery Sally, Haldor and Katrin were intimately wiping the sweat from each other’s bodies.

“You just got home and won’t even rest. You’ll wear yourself out…” Katrin gently stroked Haldor’s chest hair.

Haldor patted his chest and chuckled. “You know my stamina. Who was the one calling out just now…”

“Don’t talk nonsense.” Katrin tugged at Haldor’s beard, pulling his mouth into a grimace.

Katrin traced the wrinkles on Haldor’s face and asked, “Now that you and Olaf have achieved such great deeds, Iceland is fully recognized by the Protestant nations. Our family’s status is no lower than that of other dukes, even if our origins are humble. Does that make us nobles now?”

“Of course!” Haldor declared. “We are nobles now—the highest nobility in Europe!”

“Then your achievements truly surpass those of our ancestor, Hrut. Future generations of our family will take pride in your name.” Katrin smiled.

Chapter 277: A Matter of Marriage

Haldor was quite pleased with his achievements. Though he knew deep down that his rise to become the Grand Duke of Iceland, a name that would echo through the ages, was largely thanks to his son Olaf’s help, Olaf’s emergence was a blessing from their ancestors. And no matter how capable Olaf was, he was still his son. So Haldor was confident that his success was a combination of divine favor and his own hard work.

Hearing his wife’s praise, Haldor smiled smugly before thinking of Ulf. “How has Ulf been doing in the year Olaf and I were away? Still tangled up with Gandis’s sister?”

Katrin sighed. “He was still insisting on marrying her before, but recently he’s softened. Now that you’re back and our family’s status is recognized by the nations of Europe, he might change his mind.”

Haldor nodded, closing his eyes. “If he’s set on marrying a woman from the Gandis family, so be it. But if he changes his mind, I’ll arrange a good match for him… Duke Albert of Saxony-Lauenburg is a good friend I made this time. His family has a long and noble history, and he has several daughters of marriageable age. Perfect for an alliance.”

Katrin smiled. “I knew you were thinking of Ulf too. He may not be as clever or talented as Olaf, but he’s still our son, our eldest. We can’t ignore him.”

“You’re right. Our family’s influence is growing. Ulf won’t be able to hold Iceland and Vinland—only Olaf can secure and expand our foundation. But as the eldest, once Vinland stabilizes, we’ll carve out a duchy for him…”

Katrin was pleased with Haldor’s words. She could tell he had already planned this, so she kissed him and said, “They’re both our children. I’m touched you’ve arranged this.”

“I’m not just the Duke of Iceland—I’m your husband and their father,” Haldor said with a smile.

…

The next morning, Haldor and Katrin rose early and had the servants wake the others for breakfast.

Half an hour later, they entered the dining hall of the Duke’s Manor, where Ulf, Olaf, Sally, Gerny, and Half were already seated at the long table, chatting.

Seeing Haldor and Katrin enter, they all stood. “Good morning, Father, Mother.”

“Sit down, children,” Katrin said gently.

After grace, they began eating the meat on their plates. A moment later, Katrin glanced at Haldor and said, “God bless you, Ulf. Your father and Olaf went to Germany to fight, earning honor and respect for our family. Now the Haldors are recognized as a ducal house across Europe. As the eldest, your every word and deed represents our family…”

Before she could finish, Ulf stood up, eyes wide. “Mother, don’t say any more. I understand. From now on, I’ll follow Father and Mother’s arrangements for my marriage. As for Hildur, I’ll handle things with her.”

Ulf had yielded. Katrin had always worried about his marriage, but he had insisted on marrying Hildur until now. His sudden change relieved Haldor and Katrin.

Olaf, however, was wary. He knew his brother had pursued Hildur mainly for the Gandis family’s wealth, seeking external support to challenge his inheritance. But now Ulf had changed his mind. Olaf was surprised—his brother was stubborn, but now he seemed flexible. Perhaps a year apart had brought great change, or perhaps someone had advised him. Either way, it meant Ulf had new plans.

“That’s right,” Katrin said, not overthinking it. “Your father’s good friend is Duke Albert of Saxony-Lauenburg. Our families are well-matched. Duke Albert is highly trusted by His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II. We’re both foreign territories under Sweden—our Iceland and his Saxony-Lauenburg. We can become allies. Don’t worry, I’ll have your father send someone to propose to Duke Albert. He has several unmarried daughters.”

Strictly speaking, a duke’s daughter couldn’t be called a princess, just as his son couldn’t be called a prince. But in private, high nobility often used such terms affectionately, and the people of their lands did the same. So in Iceland, Gerny was also called a princess.

As rulers of their own territories, dukes were nearly as powerful as kings. If the Duchy of Iceland allied with Saxony-Lauenburg through marriage, the deepened relationship and political support would be highly beneficial.

Over a hundred years ago, the Electorate of Saxony had split due to the death of Duke Frederick, who failed to mediate between his two sons. The duchy fractured into the Ernestine and Albertine lines, dividing the land and forming a joint parliament in Leipzig.

With the rise of Protestantism, the electorate passed to John George, but the Albertine line of Saxony-Lauenburg still controlled lands like Meissen and maintained strong military power. The current duke was Albert.

Though both were dukes, Albert’s status was lower than John George’s. However, John George had shown insufficient loyalty to the Protestant League during the Thirty Years’ War. After Leipzig fell the first time, Gustavus Adolphus II sidelined him.

In contrast, Duke Albert of Saxony-Lauenburg had been active and brave in battle, earning Gustavus Adolphus II’s trust as the most loyal German prince. As Gustavus Adolphus II’s authority grew with each victory over the Catholic League, Duke Albert’s influence surpassed John George’s. Soon, the next ruler of Saxony might come from the Saxony-Lauenburg line.

Haldor wasn’t just seeking an alliance or friendship with Duke Albert. He was thinking long-term—marrying Ulf to Albert’s daughter would bind Iceland and Lauenburg together, giving them reason and standing to support Lauenburg’s claim over Leipzig. The political gains would be immense.

Haldor had only been Duke of Iceland for a few years, but he had grown quickly, becoming a skilled politician who weighed every decision carefully.

Of Haldor’s four children, only Ulf and Olaf were of marriageable age. After Katrin mentioned the arrangement for Ulf and saw him accept it calmly, Haldor turned to Olaf. “It’s time to consider your marriage as well.”

Olaf instinctively glanced at Sally beside him. Her expression flickered, but she quickly composed herself and stood. “I’ll go to the kitchen and hurry along the pudding and blueberry mashed potatoes. After the main course, everyone will want something sweet.”

Haldor waited until Sally left before nodding approvingly. “Our family was forced onto the path of heroes by Sigfoss. There’s no going back. Your marriages won’t be entirely your own choice—including yours, Olaf.”

Olaf was sixteen, old enough to marry, and had been Haldor’s right hand for years. Even now, Haldor didn’t think it was too early.

“Father, what are your thoughts on my marriage?” Olaf set down his cutlery and asked.

Haldor thought for a moment. “You’ve been to Szczecin. What do you think of Duke Bogislaw XIV?”

“That old duke? He seemed kind, quite elderly, without much ambition or talent. He cooperates with Swedish rule. The Protestant Union even has its main camp in Szczecin. Are you suggesting we ally with Pomerania through marriage?”

Haldor nodded. “Though we’re recognized, our standing is still new. Seeking marriage with England or France would be presumptuous. Better to ally with a duchy. Pomerania is an old and established duchy. More importantly, Bogislaw XIV has only one son and one daughter. His son died last year or this year, and his daughter is only fourteen. She won’t easily inherit the duchy. If you marry her, with our standing in the Swedish Kingdom and your favor with His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II, it won’t be hard to claim Pomerania’s inheritance after Bogislaw XIV’s death. With the king’s support, no one could object.”

Olaf didn’t know much about Pomerania’s history, so he wasn’t aware that Prussia also coveted it. But after hearing his father’s reasoning, he agreed it was the best option. “I’ll follow your decision, Father. I have no objections.”

Haldor smiled, stroking his beard. “I’ll send someone to inquire in the next few days. We’ve just returned from great victories in Germany. I doubt any duchy under the Swedish United Kingdom would refuse our proposal.”

Chapter 278: Disaster Victims to Be Relocated to Vinland

Haldor settled the marriages of his two sons over breakfast, and with that weight off his shoulders, he felt truly at ease. Only by forming ties with traditional nobility could his family’s bloodline flaws be truly resolved.

The next morning, Haig and Lorin arrived at the Duke’s Manor with Arthur in tow. Many disaster victims still lingered in Reykjavik, idle and prone to causing disturbances. To resolve the lingering issues as soon as possible, Olaf had gone to the North District early in the morning with Ulf and Heiner.

Lorin took Arthur to speak with Katrin, while Haig and Haldor greeted each other before calling over their old comrades—Big-Eared Valitu, Lunde, Hudik, and a few others—to drink together.

After a round of drinking, Haldor shared his plans to arrange marriages for Ulf and Olaf.

Haig clapped his hands in delight. “Brother, your idea is brilliant! Iceland is so remote that without ties to Europe’s traditional nobility, we’ll always be looked down upon. Once Ulf and Olaf are married, our family will no longer be seen as mere landowners. Maybe Arthur can even get a princess for a wife someday… Hahaha…”

Valitu, his voice deep and resonant, added, “Haldor’s thinking is thorough. You’re no longer just a Godi family in Iceland—you’re a true duke, second only to the king. The women on our island aren’t worthy of Ulf and Golden-Haired Olaf.”

Hudik, however, knew that Ulf had been deeply involved with Gandis’s sister, Hildur, and given Olaf’s unique circumstances, he asked cautiously, “Do Ulf and Olaf agree to this?”

Haldor chuckled. “Of course they do. This concerns the honor of our family for generations to come. Who would dare refuse?”

Only then did Hudik raise his cup in relief. “Let Olaf handle the disaster victims. He’s got more ideas than all of us old men combined. Drink up, lads!”

Lunde smirked. “The young ones are growing up. Some things must be left to them to handle, to train them. A young sea lion must learn to hunt on its own!”

Hudik pointed to the scar on his face. “I was on the battlefield before I turned twenty. This scar is from suppressing the Fronde in France. The young can’t be coddled—they need to train if they’re to inherit our positions.”

Haldor raised his cup as well. “Exactly. The young must be trained. But my sons, though young, are far more capable than you old fools! With Heiner, Olaf, and Ulf handling things, I can rest easy. We’ll just wait at home… Cheers…”

While the elders at the Duke’s Manor drank and bickered, Olaf, Heiner, and Ulf had already toured several districts of Reykjavik, questioning over a dozen disaster victims to gather firsthand information.

As they rode back to the manor, Ulf asked, “Heiner, Olaf, what do you think we should do to help these disaster victims? There are over two thousand of them in Big Port alone, mostly families. I’ve been distributing large quantities of potatoes daily and had the council and Pasde Ship District Chief find jobs for them in various trades. But these people are herders—the women only know how to milk cows and cook, and the men don’t have many other skills. It’s been a real headache!”

“The food problem is only temporarily solved. In the long run, it’s a major issue!”

Heiner also looked at Olaf. “I’ve been troubled by this too. Iceland’s geography is terrible—apart from a few arable lands along the southern coast, the rest is either glaciers, swamps, volcanoes, or grasslands. The people survive by herding. The cold snap has been severe, and livestock in other regions are freezing to death. We don’t have many fishing boats, and most herders don’t know how to cast nets or salt fish. It’s really difficult.”

Olaf scratched his head. “With Iceland’s limited population and few industries, finding opportunities for thousands of people isn’t easy.”

“But you two—don’t we have other lands besides Iceland? Can’t Greenland or Vinland support a few thousand people? Forget a few thousand—even tens or hundreds of thousands. If Iceland and Greenland can’t support them, can’t Vinland’s land?”

Heiner’s eyes lit up, and Ulf was also moved. “You mean relocate all the disaster victims to Vinland and Greenland? That’s actually a great way to solve the problem completely. After all, homes can be rebuilt, but livestock can’t be conjured out of thin air. Vinland has plenty of land, few people, and a warmer climate than Iceland. If they go there and cultivate a few dozen acres, they can support a family.”

Heiner blinked. “Yeah, Kalm went to the Black Dragon Raid District and hasn’t returned yet. He said the disaster in Vinland was worse than in Iceland. But as long as there’s land to grow food, they can recover in a few years. Iceland can’t bounce back that quickly—it takes more than a year or two to rebuild the sheep herds…”

Olaf’s suggestion was agreed upon by Ulf and Heiner, so they quickened their pace to report back to Haldor.

Ulf had mixed feelings about his younger brother Olaf—admiration for his talent and intelligence, which had elevated their family from Icelandic landowners to dukes, but also resentment for how Olaf’s brilliance overshadowed his own mediocrity, even making him seem incompetent.

Thinking about how Olaf had solved a problem that had plagued him for a month with just a few words, Ulf’s emotions were in turmoil. His horse galloped faster and faster, gradually pulling away from Olaf and Heiner.

Heiner watched Ulf ride off into the distance, then turned to Olaf with a smile. “You’re probably thinking of moving more people from Iceland to Vinland, aren’t you? Are a few thousand disaster victims enough to satisfy your appetite?”

“Lord Williams, your insight is truly remarkable. Nothing escapes you!”

Olaf laughed heartily. “Relocating the disaster victims to Vinland solves Iceland’s burden and gives them a new life. Years from now, when they’ve established themselves in Vinland, they can still return to Iceland. After all, Vinland and Iceland are one!”

On the way back, Olaf had been thinking: “Vinland is ten to twenty times larger than Iceland and far more habitable. Our development there is lacking—even a cold snap can freeze thousands to death in Vinland because there are too few Vikings! Too few white people! We don’t have enough trustworthy Vikings who can manage Vinland’s land, industries, and natives. We must relocate some Icelanders there to ease Vinland’s problems.”

“You’re right. Vinland’s problem isn’t a lack of resources or land—it’s a lack of people to utilize those resources! But over the past two years, we’ve sent Icelandic Vikings to Vinland. They took slaves, chose land, and then entrusted it to others before returning. Fewer than five hundred Icelanders remain in Vinland to manage it. They complain about the backward conditions there. Sigh, today’s Icelanders aren’t as hardworking as their ancestors.”

Olaf knew that while Icelanders weren’t wealthy, compared to the constantly warring Germans and the intensely competitive English, they had enjoyed centuries of stability. Thus, Icelanders had grown accustomed to the simple life of herding and fishing.

Of course, some exceptional Icelanders, upholding the Viking tradition, would go out to sea as pirates to make money. But such people were in the minority, which was why most Icelanders were unwilling to live in the wild lands of Vinland with slaves. For them, as long as slaves managed their estates and the governor’s men handled Vinland, they could just wait each year to sell the harvested grain for money.

Since last year, mid-to-high-ranking Viking raiders from Iceland had been going to Vinland to select land and slaves, but most returned the following year. By now, the land they chose probably hadn’t even been fully cleared.

Olaf had seen firsthand how the Native American farmers worked—they were far less diligent than the Irish white slaves. He felt that Vinland’s current rough development was too inefficient. Only by bringing more people from Europe—skilled farmers and craftsmen—could Vinland quickly become a civilized society.

But this required a sufficient number of Vikings as managers, especially core Icelandic Vikings, to ensure that Vinland wouldn’t become a nation independent of the Vikings in a hundred years.

Olaf believed that to effectively govern Vinland and turn North America’s vast resources into gold, silver, and firearms, they had to move Icelanders to Vinland. Moreover, Iceland’s current productivity was low, and resources were scarce. With over sixty thousand people, they were already nearing the land’s carrying capacity. Relocating some to Vinland would actually unlock Iceland’s development potential.

“The hardworking and frugal Viking spirit has been forgotten by the people of Iceland,” Olaf said, pressing his lips together meaningfully.

“What do you mean?”

Heiner felt a chill at the mention of the “Viking spirit,” as if the term carried deep significance and implied a movement. “What is the Viking spirit?” he asked.

Olaf smiled mysteriously. “You’ll find out in a few days!”

Chapter 279: The Viking Spirit

On the fourth day after Duke Haldor returned to Reykjavik, the four Viking Raid generals arrived at Big Port to listen to His Grace’s teachings.

After a simple family banquet, everyone was drunk, and Olaf also learned from Kalm the true extent of the disaster in Vinland.

Vinland had been struck by a winter cold snap that collapsed houses, crushing and freezing over a thousand native Indians to death. White slaves and Vikings also numbered in the hundreds, but the greatest damage to Vinland was the livestock and poultry frozen to death in the cold.

Vinland, with its vast land and rich vegetation, had long maintained a tradition of free-range livestock farming. Most of the large livestock in Hrut City were kept at the Shahalimnir Breeding Farm. In recent years, due to increased stock, besides slaughter and sales, they also sold calves, lambs, and piglets to other regions, forming a well-developed industry chain in Vinland.

Before leaving Vinland, Olaf had roughly counted the livestock: cattle, sheep, horses, and pigs were considered large livestock and could be accurately counted. The number of cattle and horses was the smallest, only a few hundred, while pigs numbered over two thousand. Sheep and goats were the most numerous, reaching tens of thousands. Poultry like chickens, ducks, and geese were harder to count, but a rough estimate put them at over tens of thousands.

The cold snap had brought great disaster to Vinland, killing more than half of the cattle, sheep, pigs, and horses, and nearly wiping out the poultry in various cities. Olaf listened to Kalm’s report, his face turning ashen as he urgently asked, “How badly was the Shahalimnir Breeding Farm affected?”

The Shahalimnir Breeding Farm housed all the livestock breeds in Vinland, including tamed reindeer and moose, with a massive population. It accounted for one-third of Vinland’s pig and sheep stock, half of the cattle and horses, and one-fifth of the poultry. If the Shahalimnir Breeding Farm had also been severely affected, Vinland’s livestock industry would be completely ruined, returning to square one.

Kalm hurriedly replied, “The houses at Shahalimnir are newly built and on high ground, so the disaster’s impact wasn’t severe. Only two sheds collapsed, crushing one cow and five reindeer, and freezing over a hundred chickens and ducks. The disaster itself wasn’t heavy, but before I left, many of last year’s foals, calves, and other young animals fell ill and died from the cold. We were worried about an epidemic, so we quickly expanded the sheds, killed the sick animals, and burned the carcasses. If we can prevent an animal plague, that would be the best outcome. Even so, all the hard work at our breeding farm last year has gone to waste…”

Olaf’s expression relaxed slightly as he sighed in relief, “At least it wasn’t a total loss! With Shahalimnir as a seed, Vinland’s livestock industry can recover in three to five years.”

“Governor Olaf is absolutely right!”

Hearing Olaf’s confident words, Kalm felt reassured. Having witnessed Olaf’s extraordinary governance in Vinland, Kalm, like the other eight governors of Vinland, believed that Olaf’s return would eliminate the impact and damage of the cold snap disaster across Vinland.

Understanding the disaster situation in Vinland, Olaf knew the solution wasn’t difficult. He only needed to bring a large population, livestock, and resources from Iceland to instantly transform Vinland from a post-disaster economic stagnation into a phase of rapid growth and development.

People are the foundation of wealth creation. Without people, even the richest resources cannot be utilized. Olaf planned to solve the problem of Iceland’s disaster victims and Vinland’s issues together, so he went back and had a long, heart-to-heart conversation with Haldor for over an hour.

Haldor accepted Olaf’s suggestions, not only agreeing to relocate the disaster victims to Vinland by providing land and livestock but also allowing Icelandic people to freely cultivate land in Vinland for three years and exempting agricultural taxes for ten years, attracting a large number of Icelanders to migrate to Vinland.

Haldor, Hudik, Hoskuld, Ulf, and others had deep feelings for Iceland. Although they knew Vinland was fertile and vast, they had no sense of belonging to it and still valued Iceland more.

But Olaf was different. He knew that relying solely on Iceland would eventually lead to their downfall. Only by seizing Vinland could they become a powerful nation.

To persuade Haldor, Olaf didn’t directly state that Vinland was the foundation and the land they needed to hold onto. Instead, he said that Iceland’s resources were scarce, and only by temporarily relocating a large number of Icelanders to Vinland could they help Vinland recover from the disaster’s aftermath, restore production, and even generate more income from agriculture, fishing, fur, and sugar industries in the coming years.

Iceland needed to have the strength to participate in European affairs at any time, and to do that, they must develop Vinland and use its land resources to support Iceland.

At the same time, Olaf also pointed out that Iceland’s decline and weakness over the centuries couldn’t be entirely blamed on the lack of resources and small population. Sweden also had a small population and underdeveloped agriculture, but they first broke away from Denmark’s union, then defeated Poland and the Holy Roman Empire, becoming the strongest nation in Europe.

Fundamentally, the Icelandic people had been worn down by a peaceful and stable life, losing the “Viking Spirit” passed down by their ancestors. Therefore, facing external enemies like Denmark and internal calamities like natural disasters and plagues, the Icelandic people must reclaim the weapon that made their ancestors strong—the “Viking Spirit.”

The Viking Spirit was the fighting spirit passed down by Viking ancestors, the spirit of conquering Iceland, Greenland, and Vinland, and the spirit of conquering England, Germany, and France. In essence, it was about not yielding to reality, not yielding to the environment, not yielding to disasters, daring to struggle, courageous in struggle, born in struggle, and dying in struggle!

…

The large-scale relocation of Icelandic people to Vinland was detrimental to the interests of the Viking Raid generals because it would reduce the number of people under their rule, leading to fewer soldiers and less tax revenue. Generally, it was good for the larger collective but harmful to smaller groups, so the smaller groups basically disagreed.

However, Haldor, Hudik, Hoskuld, Kadir, Haig, and others were Haldor’s staunch supporters. They hadn’t become greedy for pleasure after two years as Viking generals. After considering how this decision would help the Icelandic collective, they basically agreed.

After hearing Olaf’s speech on the “Viking Spirit,” the generals fell silent, pondering the term “Viking Spirit.” It wasn’t until much later that they gradually came to their senses, feeling as if their bodies and minds had been cleansed, and they loudly praised Olaf’s summary of the Viking ancestors’ spirit.

After discussing for half a day, the five Viking Raid generals internally approved the plan. Then, Haldor convened a court assembly, and the council members and national representatives gathered at the Duke’s Manor within two days.

After Haldor introduced the relocation plan, Olaf personally came out to persuade everyone. The representatives from various regions immediately approved the relocation of disaster victims, but they were somewhat hesitant about the relocation of ordinary citizens.

Olaf knew he had to talk about benefits with these people, so he laid out the preferential conditions for the Icelandic Vikings after relocation. He also brought up the “Viking Spirit” and spoke at length about it.

The official representatives might have been moved by Olaf’s words, or by the generous conditions, or by the “Viking Spirit.”

In any case, after half a day of discussion, the national assembly and council finally unanimously passed the “Icelandic Viking Relocation Act,” encouraging Icelandic people to relocate to Vinland to cultivate land and create wealth.

Within a few days, the people of Big Port and various Raid districts learned about the contents of the “Relocation Act.” Except for a few with unique ideas and wealthy lives, most Icelanders were very satisfied with the conditions of being able to cultivate land in Vinland for three years, permanently owning the cultivated land, and being exempt from agricultural taxes for ten years.

Besides the “Relocation Act,” the more popular topic was the “Viking Spirit” spoken by Olaf, the second son of Duke Haldor of Iceland and the Earl of Vinland.

After hearing the meaning of the Viking Spirit, people recalled the sagas passed down by their ancestors and the brave stories of their own ancestors. They felt that “not yielding to any power, daring to struggle, and courageous in conquest is the Viking Spirit” echoed the voices of their ancestors and accurately summarized the core of the stories they had grown up hearing.

Combining the examples of their ancestors and the “Viking Spirit,” people realized how weak and timid they were compared to their ancestors. The Viking Spirit was indeed slowly being lost in Iceland.

The Icelandic people suddenly felt shame and guilt. They first reflected on themselves and then decided to sign up for the relocation to the land colonized by their ancestors—Vinland—to seek the path of their ancestors and reclaim the Viking Spirit.

Chapter 280: Vinland is the Cornerstone of Iceland

Soon, the isolated land of Iceland was abuzz with the news of the migration. Whether it was the generous conditions offered in Vinland or the influence of the “Viking Spirit,” the common people of Iceland, unlike the lords who had already been rewarded with land and slaves in Vinland, were truly tempted. These were people who had lived in poverty for generations.

The Oarsmen and production team leaders in every village and town were quickly besieged by their people eager to move to Vinland. The Icelanders responded enthusiastically to the call for migration, and while everyone had expected some interest, no one had anticipated such overwhelming success.

By mid-May, five thousand households—approximately twenty thousand people—had signed up to join the migration from Iceland’s five Viking raid districts.

The people of Iceland had only been able to eat their fill since Haldor returned to Iceland and led them to independence. In just three short years, the population had not grown significantly. Even with the influx of newborns and the arrival of yellow and white Vikings from Vinland, the population had only increased by ten thousand.

With over seventy thousand people, Iceland remained a small and sparsely populated country in Europe. However, twenty thousand Icelandic Vikings in Vinland could solve Olaf’s greatest challenge.

Vinland, spanning nearly three million square kilometers, was mostly cold and inhospitable. Initially, the region had only around three hundred thousand Native American inhabitants. After wars and massacres, and once Olaf had subdued all the tribes, the native population had dwindled to less than two hundred thousand. Including the Vikings, indentured white slaves, and Inuit slaves left in Vinland, the total population was only around two hundred thousand.

Managing three million square kilometers with just two hundred thousand people was an impossible task. Worse, only one in a thousand of these people were capable of being administrators. This meant Vinland’s production system was extremely backward, and its development was painfully slow.

In the past, Vinland’s small population and military-slave system had barely kept things running. Olaf had originally planned to develop Vinland slowly over the next few decades, treating it merely as a supply base for food, timber, syrup, liquor, and porcelain. But after personally thwarting Denmark’s second military campaign against Iceland and traveling through Germany, where he met figures like Gustavus Adolphus II and Wallenstein, Olaf was no longer willing to wait. He wanted to increase Vinland’s population as quickly as possible and establish a complete social system and structure there.

This system would place Icelandic Vikings at the top of the pyramid, with Vikings of native and white slave descent forming the middle layer, managing the indentured white slaves and native populations at the bottom. It would divide labor across agriculture, industry, and handicrafts, developing Vinland’s workforce and resources to create efficient, revenue-generating industries. Olaf envisioned Vinland not just as a granary, fur warehouse, sugar factory, or liquor storehouse, but as a powerful nation.

Olaf’s plan for Vinland was already meticulously detailed. Whether it was relocating Icelandic refugees or addressing Vinland’s cold climate, these were just pretexts. The real goal was to find a way to move more than ten thousand Icelandic Vikings to Vinland while continuing to recruit farmers from Germany, England, and Ireland—those who had lost their land due to war or had been left homeless. These people would be the best labor force for Vinland, forming the base of the “Vinland Pyramid” and its most crucial link.

Thanks to the high-level cooperation of Haldor and other marshals and generals, as well as the support of parliamentary and congressional officials, combined with Olaf’s ingenious use of the “Viking Spirit” as a rallying cry, the migration of Icelandic Vikings to Vinland was a resounding success—even exceeding Olaf’s expectations.

The ruling class at the top of the pyramid was in place. Now, all that was needed was to fill the middle and lower layers with white slaves.

Olaf first sought out Heiner, discussing the plan with him for two days and refining some details before presenting the entire plan to Haldor.

Only then did Haldor realize the extent of his son’s ambition. But since Olaf’s reasoning was sound, he approved the plan to develop Vinland with Icelandic Vikings at the top, yellow and white Vikings in the middle, and white slaves and natives at the bottom.

Olaf knew he had convinced his father, so he continued, “Father, now that we have twenty thousand Icelanders willing to go to Vinland, I think we should start sending ships to transport them. As for the English, Irish, Scots, and Germans, I plan to go to England, Ireland, and Bremen myself to recruit a few thousand people first!”

Haldor thought for a moment and said, “With Lorin’s connections in Ireland, we can save a lot on expenses. Germany has the most war refugees, so we might not even need to spend money to recruit enough people for Vinland. We can hold off on England and Scotland for now.”

Olaf nodded after considering it. “Alright, Father, you’ve thought this through. I’ll go to Germany and Ireland.”

Haldor scratched his left cheek and said, “Take Hudik with you. He can help if you run into danger, and he can also serve as a translator in Germany.”

Olaf agreed and went to select his companions and ships.

Currently, Iceland had hundreds of warships and merchant vessels, with over a hundred under the direct control of the Viking raids. Among these, there were nearly equal numbers of large warships and large merchant ships, totaling seventy-three. These included ships brought from Vinland by Haldor and Olaf, as well as those captured from the Danes and pirates, and newly purchased vessels over the past two years.

If the thirty-two merchant ships were fully armed, Iceland would have seventy-three large cannon-equipped warships. While this was still less than the fleets of England, Spain, and Holland, it already surpassed the naval strength of Denmark, Sweden, France, and other major powers in terms of scale.

Transporting twenty thousand Icelandic Vikings would require seventy-three large ships. For a transatlantic voyage, Viking longships were too slow, carried too few passengers, were too conspicuous, and unsafe, so no one considered using them.

Without cargo, a large ship could carry eight hundred people, so transporting twenty thousand would only require thirty warships or merchant ships.

Olaf selected over twenty escort warships and eight large merchant ships for the Vinland migration fleet. He then chose ten warships and elite sailors for himself, preparing to use this fleet to travel to Germany and recruit German farmers.

By late May, the weather in Iceland had grown warmer. Under the guidance of Viking cavalry, people from all over Iceland gathered in Reykjavik. Families and groups appeared on the streets of the South District, North District, and the harbor, with men, women, and children curiously taking in the sights of the transformed Big Port.

Since this was a household migration to Vinland, most Icelanders were moving in groups of two or even three generations. They were the poorest of the poor, with fewer than one in ten bringing livestock. In fact, fewer than thirty percent had ever even visited Big Port before.

Big Port had been ravaged by war and bombardment, leaving it unrecognizable. The East District and the harbor had been demolished and rebuilt, while the South and North Districts had been expanded and renovated to accommodate the influx of refugees and address sanitation and epidemic prevention.

A notable feature of Reykjavik was the guard posts and bastions at every intersection. Besides military installations, there were also stone-built houses near the bastions and guard posts. Upon closer inspection, these were not residences but public toilets, with cesspits and large ceramic or wooden containers for collecting waste.

In addition to the toilets and military facilities, the wider, neater streets were another surprise. The houses lining the streets were newly built or renovated, with well-planned drainage channels in front of them.

Wastewater and rainwater flowed through these channels into rivers and then into the sea, while human waste was collected in public toilets. This was a policy Haldor and Olaf had implemented in Vinland to ensure environmental hygiene, reduce mosquito breeding, control infectious diseases, and collect waste for fertilizer production.

Chapter 281: The Migration Begins

The sights and sounds of Reykjavik left the people from all over in awe, as if they had arrived at the Roman Temple. Not only were they amazed and curious about the novel and towering buildings and the orderly streets, but they also felt ignorant and ultimately fearful because they could not understand the purpose of public toilets, drainage canals, and bastions.

The first batch of seven to eight thousand people preparing to go to Vinland arrived. Olaf, along with leaders Haldor, Ulf, Hudik, Hoskuld, and Kadir, attached great importance to this and personally went to the docks to address the crowd.

After the Duke and the five generals each gave their speeches, the disaster victims and the Icelandic people from various places were filled with enthusiasm, imagining the wonderful life awaiting them in Vinland.

Two days passed, and the migrants from all over finally gathered in the areas around Big Port. Haldor continued with a speech titled “The Viking Spirit Lives On.” This speech was personally written by Olaf, filled with depth, national sentiment, and the roots of Icelandic culture. Even Heiner, Elder Amie, and other highly educated Icelandic individuals praised it endlessly.

Haldor had practiced the speech privately for two days. This time, standing on horseback, he delivered it loudly, and the people immediately cheered excitedly, shouting, “Long live the Duke! Long live the Icelandic Duchy! Long live the gods! Long live God…”

After Haldor finished painting the grand picture, all the Icelandic people waiting to go to Vinland secretly rejoiced and were determined to make a name for themselves in Vinland.

At noon on May 30th, more than twenty thousand Icelandic people and disaster victims who had come to the harbor to migrate to Vinland waved goodbye to their seeing-off relatives and friends. Following several ship captains, oarsmen, and production team leaders, they boarded the large warships docked at the pier and finally set sail for Vinland with the “Vinland Dream” in their hearts.

Olaf originally wanted to personally lead the Icelandic Vikings back to Vinland, but since he couldn’t find a trustworthy person to go to Germany to recruit farmer refugees, Olaf ultimately had Heiner, along with Tom, Ilugi, Solrak, and others, lead three Vinland legions to escort and protect the fleet back to Vinland first.

After the thirty large ships from Iceland left the harbor, the population of Reykjavik suddenly decreased, making it seem like a ghost town.

The great migration of one-third of Iceland’s population leaving their homeland to develop Vinland was unprecedented in Icelandic history. However, both Duke Haldor and the numerous officials and members of the parliament left behind were full of confidence.

Vinland had vast lands suitable for growing potatoes and sweet potatoes, as well as countless grasslands and forests, which were enough for the Icelandic people to establish themselves.

Smart people knew that besides the resources on the land, Vinland also had better fishing grounds than Iceland and wild animals with precious fur, such as beavers, river otters, squirrels, seals, and moose. Following Vinland Governor Olaf for a few years would earn more money than in Iceland.

The migration of the Icelandic people was a bold attempt by the Icelandic government under Haldor’s leadership. Olaf, seizing the opportunity, loaded several ships with fish, fur, linen, and dried potatoes and sweet potatoes from the national treasury. Then, with Pikku, Brun, and Polly’s three legions of soldiers, he boarded twenty warships of varying ages and left Reykjavik. First, he went to Ireland to meet Rory O’More, a powerful landowner in northern Ireland.

The O’More family was a large family in Ireland with a history of several hundred years, and their influence covered both the north and south of Ireland. Rory had met Olaf twice many years ago, and later, his younger sister Lorin married Haig, making them relatives.

Olaf knew that in recent years, due to the increasing oppression and religious persecution by Charles I and the Anglican Church against the Irish, the resistance of the Irish had gradually strengthened. Even the landowners and gentry who originally lived in Dublin had hidden in the countryside.

Over the years, Iceland had not hesitated to help Rory and others purchase guns and ammunition and learned that the Irish, led by the O’More family, seemed to harbor disloyal intentions towards Charles I of England. It was possible that with a suitable opportunity, they would erupt in rebellion and riot.

As a promoter of the surging undercurrents in Ireland, Rory had not lived in his Dublin villa for two years but had moved back to his northern homeland, living in a manor in Derry.

Olaf’s fleet sailed south from the Icelandic waters. Even when passing the Faroe Islands, they did not stop for a drink. Three days later, they appeared at Derry Port in northern Ireland.

Since Derry Port was managed by the descendants of the O’More family, the news of the large Icelandic fleet quickly reached Rory’s ears. By the time Olaf stepped off the ship onto the dock, Rory’s steward had already arrived in a luxurious carriage.

“Master Olaf! My lord invites you for a drink.”

Olaf turned to Pikku and smiled, saying, “Uncle Rory is waiting for us. You come with me, and Brun and Polly stay to watch the house.”

Walking up to the carriage, Olaf greeted the old steward and got into the car. Pikku, Brun, and Polly wisely had their subordinates lead the horses off the ship. Then, Pikku and several guards rode on horseback, guarding the front and back of the carriage as they slowly left. Brun and Polly stretched and returned to the ship to rest.

Half an hour later, Olaf felt the carriage stop. Then he heard the old steward say, “Young master, we’ve arrived.”

Olaf got out of the carriage and found himself in front of an ancient castle surrounded by forests. The castle was not large but very comfortable, especially the large garden in front of the castle, which had several dozen feet tall oak trees. Under the trees, various flowers bloomed, and the fragrance filled the air.

“This is Derry Castle, with a history of more than five hundred years. It was originally a monastery, later bought and expanded by my lord’s ancestors to its current state.”

The old steward saw Olaf looking around curiously and proudly introduced it.

Olaf casually praised and agreed, then the old steward led Olaf into the castle. At the entrance of an oval-shaped hall, Olaf had Pikku and the others rest first, then he went in.

The hall was not large, smaller than the dining room of the Duke’s Manor in Reykjavik, but a long table occupied one-third of the area.

Rory sat at one corner of the long table. Seeing Olaf enter, he stood up and walked over.

Olaf looked at the once tall and burly man who now seemed somewhat short in front of him, with deep wrinkles at the corners of his eyes and forehead, and couldn’t help but feel a surge of emotions.

Rory was even more surprised by Olaf’s tremendous changes, praising him a few times before they sat down at the long table. The cook and servants quickly brought roasted lamb legs, fried pork chops, boiled sheep heads, roasted fish, and various other foods.

After the prayer, Rory personally opened a bottle of whiskey and laughed, “This is what the English made by mixing your Water of Life with their wine. The taste is not bad. Would you like to try it?”

Olaf nodded and said, “Why use the Water of Life to make it? Is it because the Water of Life is too strong?”

Rory had no good feelings towards the English and coldly snorted, “The English wine is far less expensive than the Water of Life, but when mixed, they can sell it at a high price. They are all cunning merchants!”

Olaf nodded and stopped the topic. After they had eaten for a while, Rory drank a few cups, his face slightly red, and said in a deep voice, “Olaf, tell me, do you still want white slaves this year? Last year, I heard that Denmark attacked you again and was worried sick. But we don’t have decent warships, and the soldiers aren’t trained. We can only pray to God for protection.”

Olaf smiled and waved his hand, saying, “Uncle Rory, don’t worry. Icelanders fear no strong enemies. Didn’t the Danes attack us twice and end up with bloody noses? Moreover, after Iceland joined the Swedish United Kingdom, my father and I went to Germany to fight last year. We saved Gustavus Adolphus II and personally captured the Catholic… Austrian Archduke Ferdinand III. Didn’t you know?”

Olaf, realizing he had said the wrong thing, remembered that the Irish believed in Catholicism, different from the Nordic countries and the British Isles, so his words were somewhat vague.

Rory’s expression changed after hearing this, and he asked in surprise, “Is there such a thing? Ireland is oppressed and blockaded by the English in terms of religion, and we can only get a small amount of domestic and foreign news from London each year. We still don’t know the latest news from the German battlefield. I didn’t expect that Duke Haldor of Iceland has made such a big splash internationally. It’s truly commendable… haha…”

Olaf, knowing he had misspoken, silently looked at Rory a few times and found that Rory did not express any regret over the setback of the Catholic League, so he finally breathed a sigh of relief.

Happily clinking glasses with Olaf, Rory began to loudly curse Charles I and the Anglican Church. Olaf knew that the Irish had been oppressed too much, so he just casually agreed.

Chapter 282: Ireland’s Desire for Rebellion

Due to Haig and Lorin’s relationship, Lorin quickly opened up to Olaf, and after a few drinks, he truly treated Olaf as family, cursing King Charles I of England and the Anglican Church.

Olaf refrained from expressing his own opinions but still echoed Lorin’s sentiments from the perspective of the Irish.

Lorin laughed heartily, grabbing Olaf and saying, “You’re a good lad, golden hair! Much better than those useless children of mine…”

Olaf recalled what Aunt Lorin had mentioned—Lorin had over a dozen children, most of whom had gone to study at Cambridge or Oxford, with hardly any showing interest in inheriting his estate.

Olaf offered a few words of comfort. Lorin, flushed and reeking of alcohol, seemed slightly intoxicated. He spat out a mouthful of phlegm and leaned in to whisper to Olaf, “What business brings you here this time? Still need Irish farmers?”

Olaf quickly replied, “I was just about to ask for your help, Uncle. We plan to heavily develop Vinland’s land, so we need more indentured white slaves. But as you know, we’ve been attacked by Denmark twice in recent years, and our silver and resources have been heavily depleted. Could we lower the price a bit…”

Lorin waved his hand and said, “Alright! Write down your conditions or tell my steward. I’ll handle it first thing in the morning. The price is negotiable. Our relationship is special. As long as you buy another thousand smoothbore muskets and ten cannons for me this year, the price of the white slaves can be halved!”

Olaf suspected Lorin might be drunk, but a fifty percent discount was an incredible deal, so he quickly agreed.

After settling the business, Lorin asked, “Golden-haired lad, I hear you have some friends in London. What’s the attitude of the London nobility toward Ireland?”

Olaf recalled the words of the future Lord Protector, who had discussed the Irish with him. He shrugged and said, “They look down on your stubbornness, but more than that…”

Olaf spoke vaguely, but Lorin was very sensitive. He slammed the table and said, “It’s contempt! I’ve always known how the arrogant English view us. Poor old John still thinks compromise can earn the English’s mercy. Bah! The Anglican Church wants to take all of Ireland’s wealth and land, turning us Irish into their slaves! Let me tell you, that’s never going to happen. We can defend Irish rights with muskets and blood!”

Olaf already knew that Lorin represented the Irish resistance. Believing that stirring up trouble in England would slow down the British colonization of North America, Olaf and Haldor had always strongly supported the Irish resistance, including assisting in purchasing weapons and buying white slaves to provide funds for the Irish resistance.

Lorin seemed drunk as he cursed and revealed some plans—his own and those of other Irish resistance leaders. Essentially, they planned to purchase arms, secretly train troops, and seize an opportunity to launch an uprising, aiming for Ireland to achieve independence like Iceland.

From what Olaf remembered, the Irish uprising had occurred after the Scottish Presbyterian uprising. At that time, the war to suppress the northern rebels had turned into an internal struggle between Parliament, led by Cromwell, and the royalists of Charles I. The Irish, seeing England embroiled in internal conflict, had mustered the courage to rebel and seek independence. The result was that the Lord Protector, Cromwell, led his iron cavalry to conquer Ireland, crushing the Catholic League’s army and securing centuries of British exploitation of Ireland until the early 20th century, when the Irish, as second-class citizens of the British Empire, finally found an opportunity to achieve independence.

The Irish struggle for independence was a history of blood and tears. Olaf admired the Irish in his heart, but he knew that Lorin had always been cautious and hesitant about armed rebellion, lacking confidence.

But this time, Lorin’s drunken words gave Olaf a different impression—Lorin and the Irish behind him seemed much more confident. The armed uprising had shifted from waiting for an opportunity to being ready to take action.

Olaf asked Lorin a few questions, then his expression changed, and he smirked.

It turned out that Lorin’s surge in confidence wasn’t due to buying more muskets but rather the successful independence of their neighbor, Iceland.

Under Haldor’s leadership, Iceland had executed their governor and won two defensive wars against the Danish navy. The Irish didn’t know about the silent efforts behind Iceland’s success.

They only saw the result—Denmark, a Nordic power, didn’t seem as strong as they thought. Even a small island with only tens of thousands of people could achieve independence. Ireland’s land area was similar to Iceland’s, and its population was tens of times larger. If Iceland could succeed, so could Ireland…

Olaf knew that England was already growing powerful. The population of the British Isles was more than five times that of Ireland and seven or eight times that of Denmark. With a population second only to France, the Holy Roman Empire, and Italy, England was reaping the benefits of the Age of Exploration, which would only increase, eventually leading the world into the Industrial Revolution over a hundred years later.

Denmark was a declining kingdom, while England was a rising star. Olaf didn’t think the Irish could succeed, but he didn’t want to discourage Lorin too much, fearing it might strain their relationship.

Olaf decided to wait until Lorin sobered up the next day to discuss it further. Then, he would analyze England’s colonies, population, the wealth created by the colonies each year, and the improved international status of the Protestants after the Thirty Years’ War to dampen Lorin’s excessive optimism.

Olaf believed that with Ireland’s population and arable land, seeking independence at the end of the agricultural era wasn’t impossible, but it had to be done when England was at its weakest, such as during the historical internal struggle between Parliament and Charles I. If the Irish had been sufficiently prepared at that time, they could have driven the English forces off the island and achieved independence with their population and resources.

Even if the Lord Protector took control of England a few years later, Ireland, with several years of independence, could seek diplomatic support from other European countries and join the English Republic as a federation or even a vassal state. This would ensure the right to internal self-governance and prevent the Irish from being excessively exploited.

The banquet ended with both Lorin and Olaf drunk. Olaf, supported by Pikku, slept in Lorin’s manor. The next morning, after waking up, Olaf didn’t forget his thoughts. After breakfast, he went to find Lorin and presented his views to the newly sober Lorin.

As Olaf spoke, Lorin listened attentively, even nodding in agreement at many points.

After Olaf finished, Lorin looked fearful and said in a deep voice, “Thank goodness you came, Olaf, or we would have doomed the Irish. You’re right; we’ve been too optimistic about Ireland’s prospects for independence…”

After a moment of reflection, Lorin thought of Iceland’s success. Originally, he had invited Olaf to drink to learn about Iceland’s success and replicate it in Ireland. But now that Olaf said it wouldn’t work, Lorin felt disheartened.

However, the more Lorin thought Olaf was right, the more another hope burned in his heart. From his sister and brother-in-law, he knew about Olaf’s status and importance in Iceland and understood that Olaf had played a crucial role in the success of both Vinland and Iceland.

Unable to see Ireland’s future clearly, Lorin grabbed Olaf and pleaded, “Olaf, help us analyze. What should Ireland do?”

Chapter 283: Master of Strategy, Olaf

Olaf did not hesitate for a moment when Lorin made his request. He immediately began analyzing the situation.

In Olaf’s mind, England was the most dangerous future enemy of Iceland and Vinland. Unlike France, which focused on the continent, England was an island nation through and through. It only sought to balance the power on the European continent to ensure no threat to the British Isles, then directed all its energy toward overseas colonization.

England’s rise was entirely due to the blood transfusions from its colonies—North America, British India, and Central America—decades and centuries later. Even though Iceland had seized the initiative and occupied most of the eastern coast of North America, even driving out the Massachusetts Bay Company, England still maintained the Virginia colony in southern Vinland. There was always a possibility of expanding their colonial reach and competing with Vinland for resources.

Olaf knew that if England’s population and development model were fully mobilized, Iceland would be no match. That was why he had taken advantage of the Thirty Years’ War, when England and France were focused on the continent, to expel the English and French colonists. But this had to be done subtly—Virginia was already a thorn in his side.

Now, with Ireland seeking independence, Olaf saw an opportunity. If he could support Ireland’s struggle for independence, England’s attention would be diverted to dealing with Ireland. Whether Ireland ultimately succeeded or not, it would weaken England to some degree, buying Vinland more time to develop.

Olaf believed that Iceland and Ireland shared the same interests in the Irish independence movement and could fully support it.

First, Olaf expressed his stance, deepening the impression by referencing their personal relationship, shared tragic experiences, and the idea of “leading independence to drive further independence.” He then analyzed what the Irish needed to do to achieve independence.

Olaf was well-versed in history and knew that the Irish uprising a few years later would ultimately fail. His attitude was cautious. He told Lorin that the Irish might only have one chance at independence and must be fully prepared.

Preparations included stockpiling firearms, horses, food, and armor—enough to sustain a prolonged war of ten years or more. Therefore, Ireland needed to increase its reserves or prepare for several more years.

Beyond the basic material reserves, Olaf also advised Lorin on the timing of the uprising. It had to be during a period of internal turmoil in England to have any hope of success.

As a major landowner in Ireland, Lorin had been gathering intelligence on England. He knew that Charles I had dissolved Parliament and that his tyrannical rule was gradually losing the people’s support. The Anglican Church’s suppression of the Scottish Presbyterians was no less harsh than its oppression of Irish Catholics, and Scotland itself was seething with unrest.

Lorin and the Irish leaders had originally planned to wait for the Scots to rise up before joining the fray.

The Irish understood that the Scots would not tolerate much more, especially since the Presbyterian Church had already begun making small moves. That was why Lorin was in a hurry—he was waiting for the Scots to rebel first, then he would lead the Irish in raising the flag of uprising.

After listening, Olaf nodded inwardly. He knew from history that this was exactly what the Irish had done. If the Parliamentary faction had not produced the Lord Protector, the Irish might have succeeded. Unfortunately, it was a case of two brilliant minds clashing.

Facing the militarily powerful “New Model Army” and the great Cromwell, Ireland had no chance of victory or even a stalemate unless someone like Gustavus Adolphus II emerged.

After some thought, Olaf said, “Uncle Lorin, when I was in London, I met several nobles and learned that England has no shortage of talent. They have a powerful navy and mercenaries. Although most of the mercenaries are currently deployed to the European battlefields, they could quickly return if there was domestic unrest. So, you must prepare for a protracted war. At the same time, actively reach out to the Scottish Presbyterians. If necessary, provide them with some assistance and support first. Use the Scottish rebels to further weaken England’s strength. Only then can you see England’s true power and seize the opportunity to rise up!”

Lorin nodded, then squinted and said, “Your strategic arrangement is similar to what we had in mind, but more comprehensive. Good, we’ll follow your plan. However, over the years, we will need you to help us purchase more weapons. Better yet, help us train an army. I know your father, Haig, and Hudik are all famous generals, and you’re not bad yourself. Your victory over Denmark has already proven your strength. I think if you can help us train an army, I can expand our forces and develop a combat-ready legion!”

Olaf had not expected Lorin to ask him and his father to train troops. He was taken aback for a moment.

Lorin, thinking Olaf was unwilling, explained, “England has spies and traitors everywhere in Ireland. We don’t dare to form an army and train troops, and we don’t have anyone skilled in warfare. We can only rely on you!

Rest assured, Olaf. If you help us train our troops, after Ireland’s independence, we will be Iceland’s most loyal friends!”

Olaf smiled and said, “Uncle Lorin, you’re too kind. Don’t worry, I can take charge of training your troops. But where will the soldiers come from? And where will we train them?”

Lorin laughed and said, “The young men from several major Irish families can serve as soldiers. There are also landless poor farmers and other impoverished people who hate the Anglican Church and Charles I to the core. They will be the most loyal warriors. We can easily gather five or six thousand men for a legion. As for where to train them, I haven’t decided yet. What do you think—should we send them to Iceland or find another place?”

Olaf’s mind worked quickly, and he immediately saw an opportunity to take advantage. He said, “There are always English merchants in Iceland. The movement of several thousand soldiers would be hard to hide. If the news leaks, it could cause trouble. Not only would it allow England to prepare in advance, but Charles I might also take action against you sooner!”

“Yes, but besides Iceland, where else is suitable?” Lorin thought for a moment, then his eyes lit up. “How about Vinland? I can select our young and strong soldiers and send them with you to Vinland. It’s sparsely populated, and the English won’t notice. If you can help us train an elite force, I’ll find two thousand families of young and strong farmers or craftsmen to serve as indentured white slaves for free. What do you think?”

Olaf grinned and said, “Deal. It’s settled then. I’ll go to Germany immediately to recruit refugees. You can start finding indentured white slaves and soldiers for me. When I return in July, we’ll go to Vinland. If things go well, in one or two years, or at most three or four, the Irish soldiers you give me will be trained into an elite force. Then, they can return to Ireland to wage war!”

Lorin readily agreed to Olaf’s arrangement. Although he wouldn’t be able to collect fees until he had recruited two thousand families of young and strong laborers for Olaf, he was happy.

In just a short time, the Irish would have their own elite army. Then, when the time came for the uprising, they would have the confidence and strength to fight for independence. For the sake of leading Ireland to independence, temporary sacrifices and contributions were acceptable.

Chapter 284: Song Qinghe’s Longing for Home

In the sweltering June of Ireland, Olaf bid farewell to Lorin, taking the gold, silver, and procurement list he had been given, and left Ireland. After several days of traversing the English Channel, he arrived in Holland.

Due to the urgency of time, Olaf left Brun and Polly in Amsterdam, intending for them to procure weapons needed by the Irish, while also stocking up on ammunition and gunpowder for Vinland.

More importantly, Olaf had written a personal letter and prepared a chest of gold ingots, which he entrusted to Polly to deliver to Kuiyi and Hans of the East India Company, who had assisted him before. Olaf was well acquainted with their bank accounts in Amsterdam, having deposited money for them over the years.

This gold was not only to preserve their friendship but also to request Kuiyi, who was far away in Southeast Asia, and Hans, who was about to head east, to help Olaf find some artisans from the Ming Dynasty, particularly those skilled in shipbuilding. Olaf was concerned that Kuiyi and others might discover the advanced waterproof bulkhead technology of Ming Dynasty shipbuilding, so he left one of Song Qinghe’s disciples, a middle-aged man named Huang Ping, with Polly. The plan was for Huang Ping to accompany Hans back to the East, where he would search for artisans and shipbuilders in Fujian and Guangdong, purchase Chinese medicinal herbs, and deliver letters and wages earned over the year to the families of his fellow disciples. Since Song Qinghe had no children and was alone, he entrusted his wealth to Huang Ping, who would distribute part of it to his fellow disciples and send the rest to their relatives in their hometown.

Thus, Huang Ping carried several important missions and tasks, which were crucial for Song Qinghe and his disciples to stay connected with their families and for Olaf’s development in shipbuilding, medicine, iron smelting, and casting. To ensure Huang Ping’s return, Olaf promised him a reward of one hundred taels of gold upon completion of his tasks.

Huang Ping, clutching several letters and a leather case of gold bars, gratefully bid farewell to Olaf and his master, Song Qinghe, at the docks. Olaf’s fleet stayed at the Amsterdam docks for only ten minutes before setting sail.

As the fleet sailed far away, Olaf noticed that Song Qinghe and another disciple were still standing at the railing, gazing longingly at the sea behind them. Looking at the land on both sides of the Grand Canal, Olaf cleared his throat and walked over.

Since Olaf could speak fluent Ming Dynasty Mandarin, the Portuguese translator, Demendoza, had been sidelined last year. Later, when Demendoza demonstrated his proficiency in music, dance, Latin, religion, mathematics, and geometry, Olaf and Haldor treated him as an honored guest. Last month, he had followed Heiner and others to Vinland. Olaf had tasked Demendoza with compiling textbooks for Viking youths in Vinland. With the firearms of the Viking soldiers and Olaf’s promise of gold and silver, Demendoza had become very obedient and loyal, promising multiple times before departure to first understand the situation in Vinland and work with several priests there to compile the textbooks, which Olaf would review upon his arrival in Vinland.

When Song Qinghe learned of this, he showed interest, seemingly wanting to spread Confucian culture. However, Olaf declined because Song Qinghe did not speak Western languages, and the translation of Confucian classics was too difficult.

Seeing Song Qinghe’s low spirits, Olaf chuckled, “Master Song, are you homesick?”

Song Qinghe came back to his senses and bowed, “Young Master Olaf! I am already sixty-five years old. The older one gets, the more one fears dying in a foreign land…”

Olaf, seeing Song Qinghe’s distress, knew he was deeply affected, so he said solemnly, “Master, rest assured. In a few years, I will send a ship to take you back home. With our Icelandic ships and cannons, Zheng Yiguan won’t dare to harm you! If anything happens to you, I will ensure you are buried in your homeland!”

Song Qinghe, hearing this, bowed deeply and said, “Thank you, Young Master Olaf. Although you are a foreigner, your conduct is reasonable and just, and your manner of speaking carries the air of a hero. I believe in your sincerity and will serve you well!”

Song Qinghe’s disciple also bowed and said, “In this foreign land where we know no one, it is fortunate that we met you, Young Master Olaf. My master has praised you countless times in secret, saying you treat him as a national scholar and instruct us to be loyal to you.”

Olaf laughed heartily and helped the master and disciple up, saying, “Please, both of you, rise.”

Holding their hands warmly, Olaf smiled and said, “To be honest, my Mandarin is a gift from heaven, so I think I might have been a Chinese in my past life. You should know that I have always treated you like family. This time, after recruiting German white slaves, we are going to Vinland to open up new lands, cultivate the land, and build cities. I still need both of you to advise me and safeguard the health of our Viking people!”

Song Qinghe and his disciple were shocked. Combining various sources of information, they deeply believed Olaf’s words. If Olaf was not a heaven-sent person, how could he have guided Haig to colonize Vinland at the age of two? How could he have learned Ming Dynasty Mandarin so effortlessly? They had spoken it for decades and still couldn’t speak it as well as Olaf!

Believing that Olaf was either an immortal reincarnated or a chosen one, Song Qinghe and his disciple became even more respectful.

“Young Master, rest assured, we will obey your commands…”

Olaf smiled and said, “The situation in Vinland is complex, with various factions of Native Americans, Europeans from different regions, and our Icelandic Vikings. I always think about how to unite everyone into one, forming an inseparable nation. I still need both of you to help me. You are both scholars from the Ming Dynasty. When you arrive in Vinland, help me think about how to unify the culture and religion of Vinland. There is a lack of talent to govern the region. If you are willing, becoming a county magistrate or prefect is not a problem. Even becoming a governor or the grand tutor of the Imperial Academy is possible. Are you willing?”

Song Qinghe and his disciple were delighted. Although they were doctors, they were also scholars who had studied the Four Books and Five Classics since childhood and had participated in the imperial examinations. Song Qinghe had even passed the county-level examination, while his two disciples were perpetual students.

Normally, without official titles, it would be impossible for Song Qinghe and his disciples to become officials. But Olaf’s words opened another door for them.

Song Qinghe saw a path to becoming an official in Vinland. Previously, he had expressed interest in helping Olaf spread Confucianism in the West, but Olaf had not agreed, so Song Qinghe had given up on the idea. Now, hearing Olaf’s words, he realized that not only could he spread Confucianism in Vinland, but he could also obtain an official position, even becoming a high-ranking official or the head of the Imperial Academy.

In China’s feudal era, intellectuals basically pursued politics to fulfill their ambitions. Those who became doctors did so as a family tradition, but most turned to medicine after failing the imperial examinations.

Now, seeing a path to becoming an official that was impossible in the Ming Dynasty, Song Qinghe and his disciple were instantly excited.

The master and disciple, with reddened eyes, expressed their loyalty, making Olaf instantly feel their sincerity.

Olaf appeared moved but secretly laughed: It’s easier to control those who want to be officials. Vinland is vast and sparsely populated, with a shortage of talent. Giving them the position of governor is not impossible, provided they have the ability.

Olaf laughed heartily and said, “Good! Both of you, if we are of one mind, we can create a powerful empire. Then, you two will be the Jiang Ziya and Liu Bowen of Vinland, leaving your names in history for eternity!”

Chapter 285: Can the Celestial Empire’s System Be Adapted to Vinland?

Under Olaf’s guidance, Song Qinghe and his disciple, as adherents of Confucian teachings, revealed their political ambitions without reservation, shaped by the influence of “all professions are inferior.” As devout followers of Confucianism and traditional Chinese religion, neither master nor disciple had abandoned—or could abandon—the pursuit of “scholarly excellence leading to officialdom” and “wealth and fame.” Their previous restraint had been due to lack of opportunity, but now that Olaf had shown them a path, they felt as if the Medicine King had bestowed his blessings, granting them a chance to enter politics.

Overwhelmed with gratitude, the master and disciple pledged their loyalty to Olaf, who, in turn, adopted the posture of the Duke of Zhou spitting out his meal to welcome guests, crafting a harmonious scene of “unity between ruler and minister.”

True to their word, Song Qinghe and his disciple displayed immense enthusiasm and devotion. Before the fleet even reached the port of Bremen, they presented Olaf with a document filled with meticulous script.

“Young Master! This is a governance outline my disciple and I spent a day and night drafting. Please review it!”

Olaf took the document and skimmed through it. Though he had learned to recognize most traditional Chinese characters under Song Qinghe’s tutelage, the text was written in classical Chinese, filled with archaic phrasing and convoluted expressions that he struggled to comprehend.

Closing the document, Olaf asked, “Could you two summarize it for me? We’re nearly at Bremen, and time is short. I’ll study your work in detail later.”

Song Qinghe, unaware that Olaf had no intention of reading his manuscript, excitedly replied, “Young Master Olaf! We have examined the governance essences of past dynasties in our land and reflected on the strategies of the founding emperors. Comparing your and Lord Haldor’s efforts in Iceland and Vinland, we’ve identified several similarities and gained some insights.”

Olaf, intrigued, asked, “Please enlighten me.”

Feeling like Zhuge Liang in the Romance of the Three Kingdoms, Song Qinghe cleared his throat and stroked his beard. “In our land, the Ming Dynasty was founded by the Great Ancestor, who established a prosperous era…”

After lavishly praising Emperor Hongwu and discussing the governance strategies of several wise rulers, Song Qinghe, as if savoring a fine meal, continued, “In my humble opinion, if you wish to establish an everlasting legacy with your Viking warriors, European slaves, and Vinland natives, you should emulate the strategies of the Great Ancestor and Emperor Yongle. There are three key methods:

First, internally, reduce taxes and encourage agriculture; externally, establish military settlements to guard the borders and cultivate land. This method is highly effective for nation-building. Light taxation stabilizes the people, and prioritizing agriculture ensures prosperity for both the court and the common folk. Within twenty years, the population will surely grow significantly.

Establishing military settlements not only shifts the burden of military provisions to local regions, relieving the central government, but also allows for gradual encroachment on native lands and populations. Over time, Vinland can expand its territory without war, as the natives’ living space dwindles. Eventually, Vinland may control more land than the United States did in its original timeline.”

Olaf’s eyes lit up. Familiar with the late Ming Dynasty’s history, he knew that the military settlement system, though initially effective, had become a tool for land consolidation and the creation of refugees. While the system had been sound at the dynasty’s founding—similar to modern military farming units—it had deteriorated over time. By the late Ming, the settlements were mere shells, their lands swallowed by hereditary officials, leaving many former soldiers landless and exploited.

Olaf smirked. The Ming Dynasty’s collapse had multiple causes—external threats like the Little Ice Age, the Manchu invasions, and internal issues like corruption and factionalism. But the root problem was the feudal cycle: land consolidation, population growth, and stagnant technology had doomed the system. The only solutions were agricultural or industrial revolutions, overseas colonization, or a change of dynasty.

Now, Song Qinghe’s proposal to adapt early Ming policies to Vinland intrigued Olaf. The military settlement system could be implemented by the Vinland Six Legions, allowing soldiers to settle with their families, cultivate land, and secure their livelihoods. With abundant land and few people, this could stabilize development, distribute the population, and encourage expansion. The soldiers, motivated to protect their families, would naturally clash with neighboring Native American tribes, gradually seizing land and capturing slaves—a slow but effective strategy.

“You are truly a modern-day Zhuge Liang,” Olaf laughed, pouring tea for Song Qinghe before asking, “What is the second strategy?”

Seeing Olaf’s thoughtful expression, Song Qinghe felt reassured, recalling his days as an advisor to a prefecture governor. Glancing at his disciple, he continued calmly, “The second strategy is to emulate Emperor Yongle’s dispatch of Admiral Zheng He to the Western Oceans. We should recruit European shipbuilders to construct warships, equip them with cannons and firearms, and build a powerful fleet. Internally, this would protect Iceland and Vinland from European naval powers like Britain and Denmark. Externally, it would safeguard our merchant ships from pirates. I’ve heard that the Americas are inhabited by natives. Our fleet could follow Zheng He’s example, spreading our culture under your and Lord Haldor’s authority, civilizing the savages and making them vassals of Vinland, creating a tributary system in the Americas. Would that not be magnificent?”

Olaf clapped his hands in admiration. “I never expected such brilliance from you, Master Song! This second strategy is excellent! What is the third?”

Song Qinghe smiled faintly and gestured to himself and his disciple. “We have followed you for a year, met King Gustavus Adolphus II, seen the captured Emperor Ferdinand III, and heard your accounts of Europe. One question has always puzzled us: how do European nations govern their provinces and counties? Who manages them?”

Olaf hesitated before replying, “From what I know, Europe lacks the complex administrative divisions of the Ming Dynasty. The smallest villages are managed by local gentry, while larger regions have parliamentary representatives. European nations are small and don’t require elaborate governance structures.”

“Then, how are their prime ministers and officials selected?”

“Some are outstanding parliamentarians, others are military nobles, and some are royal family members. Basically, it’s these groups…” Olaf replied uncertainly, sensing he was onto something.

Song Qinghe clapped his hands. “Excellent! So, European rulers are mostly nobles and royalty. You’ve mentioned that noble sons attend universities, which I assume are like our academies. But you have too few academies, and they cater only to nobles, which is unsustainable. How can you select talent with so few nobles? My third strategy is to introduce the Ming Dynasty’s imperial examination system to Vinland and Iceland. My disciple and I will establish academies to teach governance classics. In five or ten years, we can hold examinations to select scholars for your service.

Moreover, with the examination system, you can implement the Three Departments and Six Ministries, filling various official positions. Currently, European courts seem like child’s play—no strict hierarchy, no awe-inspiring officials or kings. It’s truly lacking…”

Song Qinghe nearly added, “far inferior to the Ming Dynasty.”

Olaf pondered Song Qinghe’s words and found them reasonable. Europe’s lack of unification and its inferior resources compared to the Celestial Empire meant that even in the 17th century, it relied on firearms and naval exploration to plunder global wealth. Without the Industrial Revolution a century later, Europe would have remained far behind Eastern civilization.

The Ming Dynasty’s population, land, and cultural depth had reached their feudal peak—a level no contemporary rival could match.

Olaf was struck by Song Qinghe’s three strategies. Though he was already implementing the second, the first (military settlements) and third (imperial examinations and feudal system) were compelling. In this era, the gap between the Ming Dynasty and the West was not insurmountable. Without the future benefits of colonization and industrialization, the Ming’s tributary system, imperial examinations, and feudal structure were unparalleled—perfect for both internal and external cycles, ideal for establishing regional hegemony and global economic dominance.

Olaf envisioned applying these mature Far Eastern systems to Vinland and Iceland. If the Ming’s institutions could be adapted to Vinland, they could transform these primitive lands into a mature feudal state, accelerating their development.

Perhaps, in a few decades, he could establish a stable “American Celestial Empire” in the Americas, radiating influence back to Europe and becoming an emperor uniting the East and West!

Chapter 286: Recruiting German Indentured Laborers

Song Qinghe had struggled in the imperial examinations in his early years. After working as a secretary for several years to support his family, he eventually gave up on the exams and instead studied under a renowned physician, mastering exceptional medical skills.

Though this old physician was well-versed in knowledge, his ability to write in the eight-legged essay style was lacking. Later, while serving under two county magistrates and prefects, he gained insights into the political landscape of the Ming Dynasty.

He had once thought he would live out his days in the countryside, never expecting that by a twist of fate, he would end up in the distant western lands of Europe, becoming a subordinate of Olaf, the heir to the Icelandic Duchy of Vinland. Upon learning that Olaf intended to make use of him, Song Qinghe did not want to miss this opportunity to enter politics. He worked through the night with his disciple to devise a set of governance strategies and proposed three key policies, which deeply impressed Olaf.

Although Olaf had not yet witnessed Song Qinghe’s administrative abilities, his proposals alone had already proven invaluable. Olaf believed that Song Qinghe, as a traditional scholar from the East, possessed a deeper understanding of political culture and the Celestial Empire’s systems than himself. He could use the Celestial Empire’s political and cultural framework to help establish a governance system suited to Vinland’s conditions. As for Song Qinghe’s desire to establish an academy to spread Confucian teachings, Olaf was willing to support it, though he remained skeptical about its feasibility.

The cultural differences between the Celestial Empire’s Confucianism and Western thought were too vast, and the language barrier made accurate translation and instruction difficult. Even if Song Qinghe managed to establish the academy, it was unlikely that the Vikings, indentured laborers, or natives would be able to learn from it.

After Vinland had suffered a disaster, Olaf came to realize that governing Vinland well was his most pressing task, and to do so, he needed a large number of talented individuals and a substantial population.

Song Qinghe and his disciple were among the few educated individuals in the Viking team, which lacked scholars. Not only were they doctors, but they also understood culture and politics, making them suitable for roles as officials or teachers.

Olaf and Song Qinghe’s disciple engaged in a deep and accessible discussion about the three governance strategies, unknowingly spending several hours. During this time, Gilfa brought in a pot of cooked salmon and crabs for them to eat.

An hour later, Gilfa entered and said, “Master, we’ve arrived at the port of Bremen.”

Olaf nodded with a smile and said, “Gentlemen, please go and rest first. Once I’ve finished recruiting the serfs, I will discuss the strategies with you in detail.”

Song Qinghe and his disciple stood up, cupped their hands, and said, “We will take our leave, my lord.”

Moments later, Olaf and Pikku disembarked with their troops. They first met with the mayor and guard captain of Bremen.

As the Earl of Vinland and a favorite of Gustavus Adolphus II, the officials of Bremen did not dare to neglect Olaf. They did not inquire about the purpose of his visit but arranged a lavish banquet for him.

After dining with several officials and local gentry and taking a turn around the dance floor, Olaf returned to the ship, burping as he went to rest.

At the banquet, Olaf inquired about the progress of the negotiations between the Protestant League and the Catholic League. As a member of the Protestant League and part of the Swedish United Kingdom, the mayor of Bremen naturally had firsthand information.

Since last month, representatives from the Habsburgs, Spain, Holland, Denmark, England, France, and Oxenstierna, among other members of the Protestant League, had begun arriving in Prague, the capital of the Kingdom of Bohemia, and had taken up residence in the royal palace, awaiting the arrival of His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II.

On May 28th, Gustavus Adolphus II finally recovered from the injuries he had sustained in battle and appeared in Prague with the royal cavalry, radiant and in high spirits. He received the homage and congratulations of all the leaders of the Protestant forces.

Now it was June 8th, and ten days had passed. According to a messenger who arrived yesterday, the first round of talks between the Protestant League and the Catholic League had taken place on June 1st. The negotiations focused on the ownership of northern Germany and the release of Ferdinand III. Although the results were not yet known, it was said that the negotiations were proceeding smoothly. The representatives of the Protestant League were arrogant and triumphant, while the representatives of the Habsburgs and the citizens of Prague were deeply saddened and angry.

Knowing that the negotiations were proceeding as scheduled, Olaf felt that the historical “Thirty Years’ War” might end this year with the “Treaty of Prague,” reducing the 1618–1648 “Thirty Years’ War” to a 1618–1633 “Fifteen Years’ War.”

The next morning, Olaf hired several Bremen merchants who were fluent in various German dialects and Danish. He and Pikku split into two groups, each accompanied by translators, and set off to recruit refugees in several cities in the northern German states.

With the news of the Protestant League’s victory spreading across Europe, the remaining Catholic soldiers and bandits hiding in the forests of northern Germany had fled to Bavaria. Many villagers and townspeople who had been hiding in the mountains and forests began cautiously returning to their impoverished and devastated hometowns, preparing to rebuild their lives.

When Olaf and Pikku reappeared in the free cities and duchies of northern Germany, they found that the once-ruined villages and towns now showed signs of life. Some houses had been repaired, indicating that with the war over, not only had the government regained its ability to lead and manage the people, but those who had been hiding in the mountains, surviving on wild grass and tree bark, had also dared to return home.

Olaf and Pikku’s two groups raised the flags of the Swedish United Kingdom and the Icelandic Duchy, and with the Bremen translators, they did not arouse any hostility or suspicion from the locals.

In every village and town they visited, Olaf and Pikku had their men announce that the Icelandic Duchy was recruiting disaster-stricken refugees to cultivate land in the West Indies. They promised that each person would only need to work for six years to gain their freedom and could then cultivate their own land, exempt from agricultural taxes for ten years.

For the Germans who had just regained peace and sought stability, their homeland’s population had been halved by the war, and much land lay fallow, ready for replanting. However, regardless of the era, the misfortunes of the common people could not move the hearts of the nobility and merchants.

When the German farmers returned home, they discovered that their land, left fallow, had been claimed by landlords and noble gentry. Those with connections could reclaim some of it, but those without had no choice but to become tenants of the landlords.

The war had crushed the people’s will and spirit. Although the German farmers felt they had suffered too much misfortune, they had to endure it for survival.

Originally, the German farmers had no choice but to become servants in the landlords’ households. But now, the nobles of the Icelandic Duchy had arrived, recruiting indentured laborers to develop plantation estates on the distant West Indies across the Atlantic. If they followed the Viking lords of Iceland, they would only need to work for six years for free to regain their freedom, receive land, and even have their agricultural taxes waived for ten years.

These conditions were not particularly good, but compared to the endless exploitation by the local landlords, the West Indies offered a glimmer of hope in “six years.”

Thus, with the propaganda efforts of the Bremen merchants, the lower-class people in the rural areas and towns of northern Germany who had lost their property and land reignited their hopes for the future.

Unless they were old and infirm or had already signed contracts of servitude with the landlords, the remaining households looked at their empty homes and hungry children, hardened their hearts, and, carrying their tattered clothes, utensils, and dry provisions, set off in groups toward Bremen.

Chapter 287: Smooth Progress

Several days passed before the leaders of the northern German states and free cities belatedly realized that the Icelandic Duchy had been raiding their lands and taking their people. Furious, they instinctively ordered troops to mobilize and teach the Icelanders a lesson. But before the forces could gather, they learned that Count Olaf himself was leading the expedition, accompanied by numerous Viking knights. Recalling King Gustavus Adolphus II’s favor toward Olaf and the formidable reputation of the Icelandic Viking knights, the lords swallowed their anger, contenting themselves with cursing behind closed doors.

Over the course of five days, Olaf and Pikku traversed more than a dozen large and small principalities and city-states in northern Germany. By the time they returned, they could see groups of farmers making their way toward Bremen. Though Olaf noticed some tax collectors and military officers intercepting the people, far more farmers broke through the blockades and continued on their journey to Bremen.

In mid-June, Olaf and Pikku returned to Bremen. By then, the city was already filled with over a thousand healthy German men and women, along with their children and belongings, all waiting to sign indenture contracts.

The highest-ranking military commander in Bremen was the same colonel who had dealt with Olaf before. Pointing to the chaotic crowd of farmers who looked like refugees, the colonel said to Olaf, “Your Grace, you’re finally back. These people are all leaving with you—take them away.”

Olaf frowned, understanding that Bremen was concerned about the potential for public order issues and the spread of infectious diseases like the Black Death. He nodded and said, “Don’t worry, we won’t stay more than two days.”

Olaf went to the docks and had a chest of silver brought out. He said to several Bremen merchants, “I’ll have to trouble you for a few more days. Teach my soldiers some basic German and help maintain order.”

The merchants, delighted with the silver, eagerly agreed. Then Olaf turned to Pikku and said, “Gather the soldiers immediately. Have everyone wear masks and inspect the registering households. Make sure there are no sick or disabled people. Then take a census. We plan to recruit five to six thousand households of indentured white slaves, with a total population preferably under ten thousand. Once we have enough qualified people, bring them aboard. Then we’ll go to Ireland to pick up the Irish white slaves and soldiers Lorin found for us, and we can return to Vinland!”

Olaf’s fleet consisted of only thirty large ships, each with two or three decks. At full capacity, including all supplies and people, they could carry no more than twenty-five thousand. Olaf had brought only Sally with him, along with the crew and the Greenland Regiment, totaling over two thousand people. After accounting for the several thousand from Ireland, the German indentured white slaves could only number around ten thousand.

This number could technically be increased, but that would raise many risks during the journey, such as outbreaks of infectious diseases and mass casualties. Olaf was no heartless slave trader; treating the indentured white slaves well would win their loyalty, as they were essentially future Viking citizens of Vinland.

Olaf’s fleet stayed in Bremen for two days. Even as German serfs from various regions continued to rush toward the port, Olaf had already selected eleven thousand people from six thousand three hundred and seventy-one German households. Among them, twenty percent were adult single men, ten percent were middle-aged and elderly families with some skills, and the rest were young families composed of men, women, and children.

Olaf was quite satisfied with these obedient and free German white slaves. Once all the slaves were aboard, he bid farewell to the mayor of Bremen and the colonel, and the fleet set sail, venturing into the waves of the North Sea.

…

Returning from Bremen to Amsterdam, they picked up Polly, Brun, and others, along with weapons and ammunition, and the fleet headed straight for Ireland.

As soon as the ship docked, Olaf saw Lorin waiting at the pier, accompanied by two equally sturdy young men whom Olaf recognized as his sons.

After disembarking and exchanging a few pleasantries, Lorin glanced at the petite and beautiful Sally behind Olaf, smirking as he whispered, “Blondie, that’s Sally, isn’t it? You know how to enjoy life. Did you get everything you needed?”

Olaf pointed to the large ships behind him and said, “They’re all on the ships. You can have your people take them tonight. What about my people?”

“Don’t worry, I’ve got them all. Two thousand good families, mostly honest farmers, with a few skilled craftsmen from various trades. How’s that? Only about six thousand people, not too many! And two thousand young Irish warriors—consider it a gift. Tomorrow, I’ll have Ail (Lorin’s eldest son) bring them over.”

Olaf smiled slightly and shook Lorin’s large hand, saying, “Working with you, Uncle Lorin, is always so pleasant. You’ve done a fantastic job!”

“Hahaha, you two brats should learn from him. Look how well Olaf speaks!” Lorin laughed heartily, glancing at his two sons beside him and scolding them.

The two young men were a few years older than Olaf but a few years younger than Ulf, right in the prime of their youth. Hearing this, they shot Olaf a somewhat disgruntled look.

Olaf chuckled helplessly and said, “Don’t flatter me. I still want to be friends with Ail and Herl.”

Lorin laughed again, reaching out to pull Olaf along as he said, “Good, let’s go back to the estate first. I’ve had some original brew of the Water of Life bought. Let’s drink some good liquor and let you young folks make friends!”

Olaf nodded with a smile and had Pikku fetch twenty barrels of the Water of Life as a gift for Lorin. Then he said to the beaming Lorin, “The liquor isn’t free, you know. Our fleet is loaded with indentured white slaves, and with the crew, the total number exceeds twenty thousand. It’s my first time bringing so many people to Vinland. You’ll have to help me procure some food and fresh water—I’m worried we won’t have enough for the journey.”

Lorin turned to Ail beside him and said, “Did you hear that? Remember Count Olaf’s request. This task is yours. Go to our warehouse and get some wheat, and have more bread and smoked meat made. Try to have everything ready by tomorrow.”

Ail nodded in agreement and rode off first. Olaf, accompanied by Sally and Pikku, rode with Lorin and his sons back to the estate for the banquet.

A lively feast lasted for several hours in the forest estate, with the melodious organ and Irish folk songs making Olaf hum along. By the time it ended at midnight, both host and guests were in high spirits.

Olaf, having drunk too much, didn’t wake up until noon the next day.

As Sally finished wiping Olaf’s hands, Pikku and Gilfa entered. Both had large beards and looked so similar that Olaf momentarily thought he was seeing twins.

Rubbing his temples and wiping the sleep from his eyes, Olaf asked, “What time is it?”

“Twelve o’clock, my lord,” Gilfa answered first.

“So late,” Olaf mumbled, putting on a thin coat and preparing to go out.

Pikku said, “Last night, we unloaded the weapons and gunpowder we bought for Lorin. This morning, the Irish serfs and regiment soldiers arrived. Brun, Polly, and I saw you weren’t up yet, so we went ahead to count the numbers and have them board the ships. I was worried about you just returning—do you want to go to the docks to take a look?”

Olaf asked, “Did Lorin give me the food I requested?”

“He did. Several carts were loaded, and everything was brought aboard.”

“Good. Send him thirty barrels of strong liquor and thirty jars of malt sugar. We can’t let Lorin come out on the short end,” Olaf said with a smile.

“Alright, I’ll take care of it when we return to the docks,” Pikku quickly agreed.

After giving Pikku several more instructions, Olaf felt a bit parched and wanted something to drink. Closing his mouth, he thought for a moment to ensure nothing was overlooked before having Sally pack his clothes. Stretching lazily, he went to find Lorin, planning to have a drink and discuss the details of the Irish uprising, as well as bid him farewell.

Chapter 288: Olaf, the Great Sovereign

By afternoon, Pikku had returned to Lorin’s estate to report that all personnel and supplies had been loaded onto the ships and were ready to set sail at any moment.

Olaf had long been eager to return to Vinland. He missed the mountains and rivers there, the scenery, the people, and most of all, the feeling of commanding thousands of troops and strategizing freely. This feeling made Olaf believe that heroes and great men were nothing compared to him.

Taking Sally with him, Olaf left Lorin’s estate and rode swiftly to the docks. Before boarding, he met with several captains to finalize the sailing route and plans. Then, with Sally by his side, he boarded the ship to rest.

Naturally, Song Qinghe and his disciple followed Olaf onto his ship. Worried about encountering pirates at sea, Olaf had assigned Pikku to command another ship during the earlier meeting. Thus, only a few dozen Inuit guards, including Gilfa, remained by his side. Only a small number of Irish and German white slaves were on board; the ship was mostly filled with Icelandic Vikings and legion soldiers.

The fleet left Ireland and followed the familiar route westward, crossing the Atlantic in two weeks, finally catching sight of Vinland Island in the distance.

“Land!” the sailors and soldiers on deck shouted excitedly. The past two weeks had not been as smooth as usual. The collision of cold northern currents and warm southern currents seemed to have sparked a storm, causing the fleet to encounter a massive rainstorm and gale. Although no major accidents occurred, the sudden temperature changes and poor living conditions had caused many of the indentured white slaves to fall ill with colds and fevers, which quickly spread.

The flu had only appeared five days ago but had already infected an entire deck of indentured white slaves. Olaf feared that if they waited a few more days, the entire ship’s crew would be infected, leading to severe illness and even death. Beyond this concern, other ships in the fleet might also suffer from the flu or other infectious diseases, which would be dangerous.

The longer the voyage at sea, the greater the risks. However, since the Atlantic crossing usually took no more than twenty days, vitamin deficiencies leading to sepsis were not a major concern for Olaf and the other leaders. Diseases like the flu, smallpox, cholera, diphtheria, and leprosy, however, weighed heavily on the minds of Olaf and the ship captains, who feared sudden outbreaks that could cause major incidents.

Only when Vinland came into view did Olaf finally breathe a sigh of relief. He muttered, “Once we reach shore, have all the sick isolated and treated on the ships to prevent the virus from spreading to the island. Gilfa, I’m putting you in charge of this.”

Gilfa, standing tall and proud like a gatekeeper, nodded. “Rest assured, master. As soon as the ships reach Hrut Port, I will quarantine the two ships with the sick. The people will be dispersed, observed, and treated. In less than half a month, more than half will recover. Our Vinland workers are tough!”

Olaf nodded. “Follow the procedures in the Epidemic Prevention Manual I drafted strictly. Wear masks when necessary, disinfect with charcoal and lime powder, and cremate and bury the dead immediately. If handled properly, the death rate, including children, won’t exceed one-tenth.”

Gilfa replied solemnly, “Understood, master. Please rest easy.”

After giving orders to control and quarantine the two ships with potential disease outbreaks, the fleet sailed for another three hours before finally entering the coastal waters of Vinland Island.

Over the past two years, Vinland’s navy had vigorously carried out the “Sea Purification Campaign,” driving pirates to the southern Bahamas, making the North Atlantic much safer.

The pirates, unable to contend with Vinland’s naval warships, had also found the northern Atlantic’s commercial environment lacking. Few merchant ships passed through, and those that did were mostly fishing boats—hardly worth the effort. Thus, the pirates had shifted their focus to the Caribbean, where Spanish, English, and French ships laden with gold, silver, sugar, rubber, and fruits sailed year-round. This was the true paradise for pirates.

As Olaf entered Vinland’s waters, he scanned the horizon with his telescope until the fleet reached the inner sea. He then set down the cylindrical instrument and laughed, “No English or French fishing boats in sight. The Sea Purification Campaign has been effective. Not only have we driven out the pirates, but other nations’ fishing boats don’t dare come here anymore. Excellent!”

After a few more words, the fleet began to line up and enter Hrut Port. Inside the harbor, over a dozen cog ships were docked—some being repaired, some drying nets, and others being loaded with abundant fish.

Upon seeing the fleet flying the Icelandic flag entering the port, the fishermen on the docks excitedly raised their hands. They knew the Viking raid lords had returned.

The flagship slowly entered the harbor. Olaf stood at the bow, watching everything come into clearer view. The crowd recognized him, and several cog ships and dock workers, including indentured white slaves and Indian slaves, raised their hands and shouted, “Lord Olaf! Lord Olaf! God bless you, Lord Olaf has returned!”

Though there were only a hundred or so people in Hrut Port, their voices seemed to pierce the heavens.

Olaf’s eyes reddened slightly as he nodded and waved to the crowd.

Song Qinghe and his disciple approached Olaf from behind. The disciple exclaimed, “I never expected Lord Olaf to have such popularity and prestige in Vinland. He is truly a great sovereign!”

Song Qinghe stroked his beard and smiled. “Such a foreign sovereign is rare in a century. We must assist him well and spread the teachings of Confucianism in this land. In the future, in Vinland, you and I may even be enshrined in the Temple of Confucius and receive eternal sacrifices!”

“You speak the truth, Master.”

Hrut Port was not a natural harbor. It lacked suitable docking areas for large numbers of ships, and the terrain was not ideal for building a dock. Previously, when Vinland had fewer ships, it had been manageable, but now that the fleet had grown, Olaf clearly felt that Hrut Port was too narrow and inconvenient.

He thought to himself that Haldor City, the capital of Newfoundland in his past life, had a natural deep-water harbor and significant strategic advantages. In the future, transforming it into Vinland’s commercial capital would be crucial. Thus, some of Hrut City’s population would likely need to relocate to Haldor City.

As Olaf disembarked, the dock workers gathered around him, bowing in greeting. He smiled and said, “Thank you all for your efforts for Vinland. God will bless you.”

With the spread of the Divine King Church in Vinland, the religion there had diverged from Europe’s. Vinland’s Christianity was a blend of Norse mythology and indigenous beliefs, superficially worshipping God Jehovah and reading the Old and New Testaments. However, at its core, it believed that Jehovah was the all-powerful lord reborn from the bones and blood of the Norse gods after “Ragnarök,” who had built a new world upon the old one’s ruins. Following Jesus Christ, Jehovah had chosen the hereditary leaders of the Haldor family as his earthly spokesmen. Thus, the Indian natives and Inuit in Vinland, regardless of whether they were Vikings or slaves, called Haldor “Heavenly God,” Olaf “Lord,” while white Vikings and white slaves addressed Haldor as “Your Highness” or “Sir.”

However, in Vinland, people of all statuses uniformly referred to Olaf as “Lord Olaf” or “Governor.”

Olaf had not held power in Vinland for long, but he had achieved much. In territorial expansion, he had far surpassed Haig and Haldor. Under his leadership, agriculture, commerce, handicrafts, and shipbuilding had flourished, benefiting most Vikings, including indentured white slaves and Indian slaves.

Of course, the Vikings had grown wealthier, while the indentured white slaves and Indian slaves had seen their daily meals increase from two to three, with potatoes and sweet potatoes in abundance, and even occasional fish or meat soup.

This life was far better than in their tribes, with better food and housing, which was one reason the Indian slaves were loyal. A greater reason was the opportunity to improve their status through hard work and military service, elevating themselves from slaves to ordinary indentured servants, or even becoming “Viking Lords.”

The first and second batches of Indian slaves in Hrut City who had elevated their status to become Vikings served as living examples, constantly inspiring the Indian natives and slaves within Vinland’s sphere of influence to strive to become “Vikings” and achieve their “Vinland Dream.”

Beyond the emerging “Vinland Dream” due to Vinland’s prosperity, the region’s religion and political-military structures were gradually merging. Olaf was confident that soon, Vinland would establish a stable pyramidal class society. While this might reduce societal vitality, a fixed class structure would ensure the stability of the ruling class’s position.

After questioning a few fishermen on the dock, Olaf learned that the large number of people brought from Iceland had overwhelmed Hrut City’s capacity. Thus, after leaving some Icelanders behind, Heiner had sent the rest of the fleet to Haldor City to develop it into the next Hrut City.

Olaf immediately understood that Heiner had also recognized Hrut Port’s shortcomings and was preparing to develop Haldor City. This shared understanding pleased Olaf greatly, and he couldn’t resist pulling Sally close, eager to celebrate.

Feeling Olaf’s strong grip, Sally whispered in his ear, “Master, why are you so excited again?”

“Do you see the land before us? It’s all mine. The thought of transforming my Vinland into a powerful nation excites me beyond words!”

Olaf pointed at the forests and rivers before him, his eyes gleaming. He chuckled, “When we return to Hrut City, I’ll show you my home…”

Sally’s face flushed slightly as she nodded. “Alright.”

Olaf restrained the heat in his lower abdomen, turned to the legion soldiers and the noisy indentured white slaves behind him, and roared, “We’ve reached Vinland! Follow me home, and I’ll deal with you tonight!”

…

While Olaf and Sally whispered to each other, Song Qinghe had already taken out a book from his bosom. Excitedly, he moistened the tip of his brush with saliva and began to write rapidly:

“I followed my lord to Vinland and saw the island’s people, young and old, content and at ease. All, from the golden-haired to the children, admire my lord’s benevolence and wisdom. Upon hearing of Governor Olaf’s return, the entire island emptied as the people welcomed their lord. I witnessed the joyous reception of the sage ruler by the multitude—a rare sight in the world. No ancient wise king or sage ruler could compare. Thus, it is clear that Olaf is truly a great sovereign of our time!”

Chapter 289: Assessing the Situation

The massive crowd quickly approached Hrut City. The cavalry guarding the city recognized Olaf and excitedly rushed back to report the news.

As Olaf entered Hrut City, he was greeted by the cheers of thousands of residents. Deeply moved, he inquired about the disaster’s impact and distributed some European fabrics to the hundreds of affected citizens. This act of kindness brought tears to their eyes as they shouted their gratitude.

In this era, the nobility relentlessly exploited the common people, often without regard for their lives. Though Olaf was not a ruler who loved his people like his own children, he respected their basic rights and sought to improve their living conditions. He built roads, canals, and public toilets, promoted hygiene and smallpox vaccines, and understood that a stable and harmonious environment would maximize productivity and population growth.

The laboring masses of Vinland couldn’t think too deeply—they only knew how to compare. Thus, Olaf’s benevolent rule, combined with the Divine King Church’s religious aura, made him seem godlike in their eyes.

After escaping the enthusiastic crowd, Olaf returned to Haldor’s fortress with Sally. Inside, only a dozen female slaves and two stewards remained. These servants, chosen for their loyalty, had kept the place immaculate in his absence, making Olaf and Sally feel as if they had never left.

After praising the servants, Olaf ordered the stewards to distribute dried fish and meat from the warehouse as a bonus for the staff. Then, he settled Sally in before heading to the council hall.

The council hall had always been the political heart of Vinland, where Haldor and later Olaf issued commands and discussed important matters. Even when Olaf was away leading the six legions to Germany, the Governor’s Joint Council would convene here whenever the nine governors gathered. Thus, upon returning to Vinland, Olaf’s first stop was the council hall to understand the current situation.

Heiner was busy relocating the Icelandic Vikings, so he had personally led a large group of Icelanders to Haldor City and had not yet returned. The clerks and accountants in the council hall, graduates of the first church school, were busy at their desks. Upon seeing Olaf, they hastily stood to greet him.

“Sit down,” Olaf said, walking over. “What are you working on?”

A young clerk, born into an indentured white slave family and a top student at the school, was about the same age as Olaf. He gathered his courage and stood up. “Governor Heiner ordered us to compile statistics on the disaster-affected populations in Vinland and other regions from last year and their current status. He said you wanted to see it.”

“Is it finished?” Olaf asked, nodding.

“Almost. You can review what we’ve done so far. The reports from the Huron region, Abenaki District, and Labrador are still being compiled, but they should be ready soon. The data comes from the various regional governor’s offices. Governor Kalm of Labrador and Abenaki Governor Solrak are away, and the governors of the Huron and Iroquois regions are with you on campaign, so the local lords are handling things. The data is coming in slowly and is a bit messy, so it will take a little more time to organize.”

Olaf nodded. “No rush. Keep working; I’ll wait.”

He took the completed reports and went upstairs to his office to review them.

The disaster reports for Vinland and the other regions matched what Kalm and Solrak had reported. However, the fates of the thousands of disaster victims—Vikings, slaves, and natives—varied greatly.

The Vikings had an internal mutual aid system within their raids, allowing them to rebuild their homes at minimal cost. The indentured white slaves and private slaves of the Vikings had also restored their lives by spring. As for the few unlucky souls who had frozen to death during the winter, their families were taken in by others to form new households.

Apart from the Vikings, indentured white slaves, and private slaves, the most severely affected were the Native American tribes in the North American territories. Lacking disaster preparedness, they could only endure the Arctic cold, resulting in thousands of deaths from freezing and illness.

However, the post-disaster handling in all regions was appropriate, preventing outbreaks of disease. The largest group of disaster victims, the Native Americans, were resettled in various cities and trained as farmers. Though farming was not difficult to learn, the natives struggled. So far, they could only handle basic land preparation tasks like clearing stones, removing turf, and breaking up rocks. The more skilled work of plowing and sowing was still handled by experienced Vikings, indentured white slaves, and the first batch of Indian slaves sent by Vinland.

Overall, last winter’s disaster had some impact, but it did not significantly affect Vinland’s economy. The core wealth creators—Vikings and indentured white slaves—were largely unaffected. The loss of Native Americans had little economic consequence.

However, the cold snap had severely impacted livestock. Fortunately, the returning fleet had brought back many animals, so recovery should take no more than two years.

Setting down the papers, Olaf sighed in relief. He called the clerk in and asked, “George, why haven’t this year’s maple syrup, porcelain, malt sugar, liquor, and furs been shipped to Iceland? Was it because of the disaster last year?”

George scratched his head. “Maple syrup production wasn’t affected, but the collection across Vinland was much lower than last year, so the total output this spring was only half of last year’s.

Fur collection wasn’t much affected, but gathering them was difficult. Many tribes had disaster victims, so there were fewer hunters collecting beaver pelts. Some tribes even refused to sell us other furs to prepare for this year’s harsh winter. Since you weren’t here, the governors didn’t dare to forcefully take them, so this year’s fur harvest is significantly lower than last year’s…

Malt sugar and the Water of Life resumed normal production in early spring, but Governor Kalm was worried that the cold snap might affect this year’s crop yield. If there was a reduction, it would be serious, so after discussing with Governor Hilt, they halved the production at the distillery and sugar factory…

The only thing that maintained high production was porcelain and pottery. The kilns have been operating normally, but all the goods are stored in the warehouse. Since you weren’t here to decide where to sell them in the spring, and there were no large ships to take them to Iceland, they’ve all been stockpiled…

This year’s fishing yield is higher than last year’s. We’ve prepared dried fish and meat to deal with possible cold snaps this autumn and winter…”

Olaf accepted that the governors had managed Vinland this way. He didn’t expect everyone to be as talented as Heiner, so he nodded and said, “Being cautious is good. Fortunately, our goods can be stored. How is this year’s spring planting?”

“The total planting area has increased by over fifty thousand acres compared to last year, and the same crops as last year were planted. However, the new land was also used to grow corn, squash, cowpeas, sweet potatoes, and potatoes. If the weather doesn’t cause any problems, this year should be another bumper harvest!”

George was meticulous and seemed to have all of Vinland’s data at his fingertips, answering Olaf’s questions promptly. Olaf praised him, took off a gold ring, and tossed it to him. “This is for you. You’ve done well. Has vegetable cultivation decreased compared to last year?”

George laughed, bowed in thanks, and put on the ring before joking, “It’s the same as last year. With the tens of thousands of Vikings and indentured white slaves you’ve brought, I doubt the pickled vegetables will last until next year…”

Chapter 290: Searching for a Cotton Planting Base

Olaf’s habit of giving gold rings to win people over was something he had learned from Gustavus Adolphus II. After all, he himself had received a ruby ring personally bestowed by His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II. That ring bore the king’s private seal and was an antique passed down for a hundred years—its value, both in reality and as a historical artifact, was beyond measure.

When George received the gold ring from Olaf, he was more excited than if he had found a pile of gold. He continued to report on the population growth in various parts of Vinland. Since the statistics only included indentured white slaves and Vikings, the increase wasn’t significant—only about eight hundred more people.

But compared to the over ten thousand people remaining in Vinland, this was already an eight percent growth rate. Though some would perish in the coming years, the improvement in material conditions had already secured the minimum guarantee for Vinland’s population growth.

Olaf believed that food production was the top priority, so he decided to visit various regions soon. He also wanted to explore further south from the Iroquois region to see if he could find warmer lands suitable for cotton cultivation.

Thinking of cotton, Olaf pretended to ask about it. Since cotton was a product personally overseen by him, it had received special attention last year. However, the cotton planted on the Iroquois Plains had suffered from pests, diseases, and harsh weather, resulting in a poor harvest. In the end, only a few hundred pounds of snow-white, mold-free cotton and a thousand pounds of cottonseeds were delivered to the warehouse in Hrut City.

Olaf knew without thinking that no one would plant cotton this year. Based on last year’s cold snap, this spring’s temperatures in North America were also low, which would affect cotton cultivation. With its long growing season, even if planted, this year’s harvest might be a complete failure.

Considering the Little Ice Age and the threat of Arctic cold currents in North America, Olaf decided it was safer not to use the Iroquois Plains as a cotton cultivation test site for now. Such a vast plain was better suited as a granary. As for cotton, he would have to find a warmer southern region.

Pondering, Olaf walked to the wall where a map of the eastern half of the North American continent was hung. He pointed to a colonial settlement in the south and smiled, “Virginia, what a fine place!”

Olaf set his sights on the Virginia colony. In his memories, after the founding of the United States, the Civil War was sparked by Southern plantation owners who refused to abolish slavery—they didn’t want to give up their cheap labor. The Southern states, including Virginia, formed the “Confederacy,” which insisted on maintaining slavery.

At that time, the Southern plantations relied on tobacco, grain, and cotton as their main cash crops. Olaf recalled that even his own ancestors had once bent over in the fields picking cotton. This made him realize that Virginia and the lands to its south were the most suitable for cotton cultivation.

Now, the North American continent was dominated by Vinland, with only two neighboring colonies remaining: New Netherlands, established by the Dutch in what would become New York, and Virginia, a more southern colony founded by the English.

Both colonies were weak, and Olaf felt he could easily take them over. But if he did, he would offend both England and Holland. He had already angered France, and if he made enemies of two more naval superpowers, life in Vinland and Iceland would become difficult.

However, if he didn’t take these colonies, Olaf worried that establishing new settlements in the south would expose his cotton cultivation and fertilizer production techniques. It would also give Virginia and New Netherlands more opportunities to interact.

“How can I allow others to sleep soundly on my bed?” Olaf believed that the best way to turn the south into Vinland’s cotton plantation was to connect the Iroquois region to Virginia, making all of it Vinland’s territory.

Waving his hand to dismiss George, Olaf took out his tattered notebook and spent hours scribbling at his desk. Finally, he decided to take action against Virginia, though he would spare New Netherlands—perhaps even ally with them against Virginia.

Many of Olaf’s memories had faded, but when he reviewed his notes on the rise of England and Holland, he suddenly realized that this was the time of Holland’s ascent. Twenty years later, England would also rise.

The two strongest maritime nations would fight four wars for naval supremacy, and in the end, England would defeat Holland, becoming the new “empire on which the sun never sets,” while Holland’s dominance as the “sea carrier” would rapidly decline.

Before the Industrial Revolution, Holland’s land area and population were only second-rate in Europe. But thanks to its advantageous geography and strong commercial culture, it had forged itself into a first-rate power. Unfortunately, its foundation was too weak, and after a few decades of glory, it collapsed.

Olaf felt that if he had to choose between England’s rise and Holland’s rise, he would prefer Holland. Holland posed the least threat to Vinland in North America—their main target was the East Indies. Even if they had ambitions in North America, Vinland could resist them without much difficulty.

But if England rose, they might replicate the Thirteen Colonies in North America. In that case, Vinland’s fate would either be reduced to something like Canada or outright annexed.

Thus, Olaf believed it was necessary to ally with New Netherlands in North America and suppress Virginia.

Having settled on his next course of action, Olaf stretched lazily, feeling a bit fatigued.

Now, Vinland had governor’s offices in every region, staffed with clerks and accountants trained in church schools to assist with administration. Since food was scarce in the colonies, even neighborhood disputes were settled by Viking raid leaders, so daily governance wasn’t particularly burdensome.

Seeing that things outside had quieted down, Olaf knew they were waiting for him to leave before dispersing. So he stepped out and said, “Go home, everyone. We’ll talk tomorrow.”

With that, Olaf led the way out of the meeting hall. Only after his towering, bear-like figure disappeared did the clerks and accountants inside let out a sigh of relief.

George wiped his sweat and said, “The boss is gone. Let’s head home too.”

Olaf had never noticed how his imposing physique and the aura he had cultivated from years of leadership and battle intimidated ordinary people. The young men in the meeting hall were all volunteers who followed him, and now, seeing the battle-hardened Olaf, they felt even more overwhelmed.

Returning to Haldor’s fortress, Olaf was greeted by a sweet fragrance as a soft body pressed against him.

Holding Sally in his arms, Olaf chuckled, “What’s wrong? Miss me?”

“Everything here is so strange, like a desert. And the house is full of those yellow-skinned oddities… I’m scared…” Sally whispered in his ear, her misty eyes glistening.

“Those are our Indian servants. Don’t worry, they’re very obedient and speak Icelandic—probably better than you do.”

Olaf carried Sally toward their room, grinning as he said, “If you’re not used to it, I’ll have some young indentured girls sent over to serve you in a few days. You’ll have company. If you’re still bored, you can learn some skills—boiling sugar and sea salt is simple, while sewing and weaving are a bit more complex, but you should be able to manage. Or you could help Cousin Vanhild manage the breeding company…”

Sally didn’t like any of Olaf’s suggestions. She shook her head and said, “I was raised learning court etiquette. I don’t know any other skills, and I don’t want to learn them. How about this—let me select some girls, young women, and boys from the indentured white slave families? I’ll train them myself to see if I can cultivate some well-mannered servants for Iceland and Vinland. That way, when we entertain important guests, they won’t look down on us for lacking refinement…”

“You want to train a batch of butlers, attendants, and maids for us? That’s a great idea. Why don’t you become the lady steward of Vinland’s earldom?”

Olaf’s teasing didn’t deter Sally. Instead, she excitedly lifted her chin and said, “Alright, I’ll be your lady steward. No matter who you marry in the future, I’ll always have a place in this home.”

As they entered the room, Olaf felt Sally’s light body in his arms, her gentle demeanor, her eyes sparkling like stars, and her lips rosy and alluring. His stomach warmed, and he kissed her, murmuring, “As you wish…”

Chapter 291: Vinland’s First Five-Year Plan (1)

Upon returning to Hrut City, Olaf first settled some of the indentured white slaves. However, the majority of the remaining white slaves were to be distributed by the governors of various regions once they arrived. After all, Hrut City’s land resources couldn’t accommodate too many white slaves. Other areas, especially the Iroquois, Huron, Quebec, and Abenaki regions, were in dire need of skilled indentured white slaves for farming and herding.

With nearly twenty thousand Irish and German white slaves and twenty thousand Icelanders, if utilized properly, they could be dispersed across various industries in Vinland’s Nine Districts, rapidly boosting Vinland’s economy and propelling it forward in politics, military, culture, and religion toward a civilized society.

Olaf believed that specific arrangements had to wait until Heiner and several governors arrived in Hrut City for joint discussions. So, he stayed in Haldor’s fortress, waiting.

Three days later, Heiner brought several city lords and governors back to Hrut City. Having brought the Icelanders back to Vinland, he had already settled most of them in various governor districts. He also brought the governors and city lords from various regions to Hrut City to meet Olaf and formulate this year’s development plan.

Olaf praised Heiner’s efforts, feeling that having Heiner’s help was like Liu Bei meeting Zhuge Liang.

That day, Olaf wore a white linen robe and, accompanied by Sally, personally welcomed Heiner, Hilt, Kalm, and others. After warm handshakes, Olaf first summoned everyone to the conference hall for a meeting and decided to host a grand banquet at Haldor’s fortress in the evening.

Heiner and Olaf walked hand in hand into the conference room. Heiner smiled and said, “I dispersed the Icelandic people: three thousand to Haldor City, one thousand to Bakens City, three thousand to Labrador, and three thousand each to the Iroquois, Huron, Quebec, and Abenaki regions. The remaining people and disaster victims were left in Hrut City.

These Icelandic Vikings all have their own Raid Ship District Chiefs and Mannafylki Steersmen managing them, so we don’t need to worry too much. As long as you, as the Governor of Vinland and the Earl of Vinland in the Icelandic Duchy, issue commands, they will obey.

Moreover, before we set out, Haldor had already appointed you as the Deputy Commander of the Viking Raid Expeditionary Force, making you the second most important figure among the five raids. Both publicly and privately, the Icelandic Vikings must obey you. This distribution ensures that each region has our most trusted personnel…”

Olaf understood Heiner’s intentions and smiled, “Thanks to you!”

Heiner chuckled, his thin face radiating warmth. Pointing at Kalm, Polly, Brun, Solrak, and Tom, he said, “You, as governors, didn’t stay in your regions but followed Olaf to fight in Europe. Now, you don’t even know the situation in your own territories. Let the city lords brief you first.”

Heiner brought the city lords of Huron City, the three Iroquois cities, Quebec City, and Plymouth’s city lord, Pastor McG. Except for McG, the others were all Viking Icelanders. Some, like Harry and Eriksson, were Olaf’s loyal followers, making them the most trustworthy.

As for Pastor McG, although he was an English Puritan, he had hanged Miller and Governor William with Kadir’s help, offending the Plymouth Company and Creek Company. Besides clinging to Vinland, he had no other choice. It could be said that without Vinland’s military support, McG would likely be torn apart by many in Plymouth City.

With strong external conflicts and pressures, McG had completely sided with Vinland, becoming a close friend and loyal ally of the Vinland Governor stationed in Plymouth. During Governor Brun’s absence, McG had shown reliable loyalty and competence, earning the recognition of the Vinland Governor’s Joint Council, which is why he was able to attend this internal Vinland meeting.

Olaf, who had been back in Hrut City for several days, also knew that McG had maintained Vinland’s interests in Plymouth, consistently aligning with Vinland. Even when the Creek Company, Plymouth Company, and New Scotland Company expressed their intention to support Plymouth’s growth and independence from Vinland last year, McG had refused them, earning the derogatory nickname “Half-Icelander” among British colonists in North America.

McG had demonstrated his loyalty through his actions. Olaf felt that he truly had no way back, especially since Puritans were already persecuted. Having killed Governor William and Speaker Miller, McG could only obediently serve as Vinland’s tool.

Nodding and smiling at McG, Olaf also addressed McG and the several city lords and deputy governors beside him, “Heiner wants you to speak, so go ahead.”

The city lords were mostly Olaf’s confidants. They first introduced the situation and then looked at Olaf.

Olaf smiled and said, “Everyone knows the situation. Heiner has also dispatched Vikings to various regions. Now, let’s start distributing the indentured white slaves. These indentured white slaves are all strong laborers, and many have various skills. We need to plan carefully to avoid wasting talent.”

The so-called discussion was actually just an exchange of opinions between Olaf and Heiner. The others’ knowledge and strategic thinking were insufficient to participate in these matters. Everyone came to the meeting to pay their respects to Olaf’s return and await his commands.

Olaf first handed over the five-year development plan he had drafted over the past few days to Heiner. It was divided into three major sections: livelihood, economy, and military.

The livelihood section included “medicine, education, and religion,” basically continuing the smallpox variolation, vigorously promoting public toilets and water channels, heavily relying on Song Qinghe and his disciples to open schools and train doctors, promoting loyalty to the monarch and patriotism, and heavily relying on the new Protestant elders and clergy brought from Iceland to open church schools in various regions, integrating Vinland’s religious forces, clarifying the existence of the Divine King Church, and establishing Vinland’s unique Christian Protestant culture…”

The economic aspect was relatively simpler, divided into agriculture, animal husbandry, fishing, industry, and commerce.

The primary focus of agriculture was to ensure that Vinland’s various districts increased their arable land by over ten thousand acres annually. Currently, even with new land being reclaimed each year, the total arable land in Vinland was only about thirty thousand acres. If it weren’t for the cultivation of short-growing, high-yield crops like potatoes, sweet potatoes, corn, and squash, it would be difficult to feed all the Vikings and slaves in Vinland.

Facing the potential threat of cold snaps, a major killer in agricultural societies, Vinland’s only recourse was to continuously reclaim more land. As long as Vinland’s arable land could be ensured to exceed one hundred thousand acres, relying on high-yield crops, it could have a baseline to prevent starvation. Even if disasters struck, previous reserves could support the population for a year or two.

Therefore, starting this year, Vinland would utilize the large number of indentured white slaves, Icelandic Vikings, and Indian slaves to rapidly develop and reclaim wasteland, quickly increasing Vinland’s arable land reserves. This was not only necessary for increasing food production and developing agriculture and the economy but also essential for coping with natural disasters.

The second focus, animal husbandry, would take two approaches: open guidance and rapid expansion of breeding companies. The emphasis was still on the expansion of breeding companies, not only increasing branches and breeding farms but also expanding the domestication of wild animals, such as the bison, reindeer, and moose on Vinland’s land, as well as llamas from South America. These could be explored as dual-purpose animals for fur and meat, with large-scale domestication and breeding.

With the successful experience of domestication in later generations, Olaf was confident that the Shahrimnir Company could succeed.

The third focus, fishing, only needed to make good use of Vinland’s fishing grounds. However, this also required Haldor’s shipyard to continue producing ships in large quantities. Olaf had brought back some equipment and tool parts from Amsterdam, believing that Haldor’s shipyard would experience a rapid production period. However, while manufacturing fishing boats, Vinland also needed to accelerate the training of fishermen, using Icelandic fishermen as the core to quickly train batch after batch of fishermen, thereby rapidly developing and expanding Vinland’s fishing industry.

Besides agriculture and fishing, Olaf also wanted to develop industry and commerce. Industry included traditional sectors like sugar manufacturing, brewing, and ceramics, which naturally were key industries to be supported and developed. Additionally, Olaf wanted to develop food processing and textile industries. With the expansion of windmill workshops, the large-scale procurement of looms, and the gradual training of tailors, these industries would develop within a few years.

In terms of heavy industry, the focus was on mining and metallurgy. Mining had great potential in Vinland. Currently, easily mined deposits in Vinland included gold and copper mines on Vinland Island, coal mines, iron mines in the Abenaki District, and gold mines in the Quebec District. Gold and copper were the currencies of the current era, while iron and coal mines were essential basic resources for developing military and industry.

Olaf believed that in Vinland’s future development plans, mining and subsequent metallurgy should be the top priorities in the industrial sector.

A healthy society required not only industry but also commerce, as commercial activities were essential for improving the quality of life through the exchange of goods.

Vinland had a small population and a simple system. Olaf felt that for now, it was still appropriate to adopt a planned economy model, meaning all commercial activities would be conducted exclusively through the “Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns” established by the Vinland Governor’s Office in various regional cities.

All resources, including food, cloth, fur, alcohol, sugar, meat, iron, etc., could only be purchased and sold through the “Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns.” Anyone caught in private transactions would be severely punished with exile.

Olaf didn’t understand what a planned economy meant for Vinland or its pros and cons.

He had no interest in commerce and didn’t plan to study it, as his fundamental goal wasn’t to establish a capitalist nation. Instead, he wanted to build a nation with strong military power. Therefore, the development of commerce, industry, and agriculture should all serve the national strength of the “Viking Empire” he envisioned for Iceland and Vinland.

Thus, agricultural development was to solve food shortages and increase the population, while industrial and commercial development was to keep resources under his control, enabling him to allocate national resources to do whatever he wanted.

With the first two foundational tasks accomplished, military development could then grow rapidly.

Chapter 292: Vinland’s First Five-Year Plan (2)

One aspect of Olaf’s five-year plan that wasn’t detailed regarding agriculture and industry was “cotton cultivation” and “raw material supply for textile development.” This issue couldn’t be resolved in Vinland at present, but Olaf was determined to address it within five years—and to solve it comprehensively.

The solution lay in external expansion—seizing the warmer, more humid lands to the south of Vinland, namely Virginia and the regions beyond.

In Olaf’s plan, Vinland’s future military development was set to be rapid and formidable.

Vinland’s population was small, but its resources were abundant. While development required progress on multiple fronts, the core strategy remained the plunder of native slaves from North America and the introduction of European indentured white slaves. This population structure was inherently unstable, with differences in religion, culture, and language making conflict and division inevitable over time.

Yet Olaf had already considered the “Viking raid.” By integrating all races and cultures under the Viking identity, he aimed to elevate indentured white slaves and native slaves through merit, granting them the highest social status. Thus, slavery and a rigid social hierarchy would endure in Vinland for the long term.

To secure their social standing and Viking identity, Olaf believed that both impoverished indentured white slaves and native Indians would abandon their original religions—whether primitive or Protestant/Catholic—and eagerly learn Icelandic, joining the Divine King Church. Over generations, the Vikings would truly become the dominant ethnicity in Vinland.

However, Olaf harbored a concern. He knew that indentured white slaves and native slaves were willing to strive for Viking status because of the privileges it afforded—including the right to own slaves. But as the Viking population grew, the native Indian population would dwindle. Decades later, if slaves became scarce or the lower tiers of Vinland’s social structure—comprising indentured white slaves, native savages, and slaves—could no longer sustain the upper echelons of Viking society, unrest or even collapse might ensue.

Yet future problems would be left to future leaders. For now, Olaf believed his approach was the only way to unite everyone and mobilize all resources given Vinland’s unique circumstances.

Facing the rise of Sweden and Holland, the impending ascent of the British Empire, and the watchful neighbor Denmark, the Grand Duchy of Iceland and Vinland had no choice but to swiftly unite its people and pursue a military-first policy, developing a powerful army and navy.

Olaf understood that Vinland’s unique social and economic structure required continuous, snowballing expansion—annexing native tribes and incorporating them as oppressed members, offering those previously exploited a chance to rise and change their status. Only by fostering the “Vinland Dream” could the people of Vinland be driven with boundless vitality.

For both public and private interests, as Vinland developed, more resources would be allocated to the military arms race.

In the five-year development outline, Olaf stated that universal conscription was the foundation of Vinland’s national defense. With a small population, the defensive forces would consist of the “Six Vinland Legions” as the regular army. Additionally, Viking raids would form the Viking Legion, while indentured white slaves and native slaves would comprise the militia. This way, Vinland’s armed forces would be established from top to bottom, ensuring effective reinforcement of combat power during wartime.

Beyond the army, Vinland needed a formidable naval fleet, with a focus on constructing larger battleships to dominate enemy firepower in naval battles.

Following military expansion and naval preparation, the final point was for Vinland to establish its own arms factories using coal and iron mines, producing cannons and firearms. Keeping the means of production in their own hands would not only conserve resources but also generate revenue through external sales.

Olaf’s “Five-Year Plan” was divided into three layers: livelihood, economy, and military. It was the result of days of discussion with Song Qinghe, with Olaf’s core ideas at its heart, though many details had been refined with Song’s help. Now, he presented it to Heiner for review, hoping to identify any oversights.

Heiner spent nearly an hour poring over the manuscript before setting it down, his eyes gleaming with admiration. “Olaf, you’re incredible! If we follow this plan, even if it takes ten, twenty, or thirty years to complete, Vinland and Iceland will become first-rate powers!”

Olaf was confident in the five-year plan concept pioneered by the Soviet Union. He believed that systematically planning national development with five-year intervals for adjustments was essential. Thus, he didn’t modestly dismiss Heiner’s praise but pointed to the outline and said, “There’s much more here that I’ve only briefly mentioned. The specifics of implementation require a detailed policy, as this affects the lives of hundreds of thousands in Vinland and every industry. We must proceed with caution.”

Heiner picked up the manuscript again, reading carefully before speaking. “The direction of development is flawless, but doing so much simultaneously will require a massive workforce. Our Vikings, indentured white slaves, private slaves, and official slaves simply aren’t enough…”

“Technical work should be handled by Vikings and indentured white slaves—such as fishing, weaving, and metalworking. But mining, herding, and land reclamation can all be done by slaves…” Olaf paused before asking, “Are you worried we don’t have enough slaves for this?”

Heiner scratched his head. “Exactly. Private slaves are treasured labor forces, like livestock—we can’t just conscript them. Using Viking raids and your family’s official slaves won’t be sufficient either. Are we supposed to capture natives from each district as slaves? That might cause a backlash!”

Olaf pointed to the map. “Who said we can only use our own people? The North American continent is teeming with Indian natives. Beyond Vinland, there are countless tribes and ethnic groups. If we need labor, why not go and capture them?”

Heiner shook his head. “The colonial companies in America and the West Indies have captured plenty of Indians to work as farmhands on plantations, but they’re terrible workers—they fall ill easily and are always trying to escape. Relying on them isn’t very effective.

Our Indian slaves in Vinland are decent, but that’s because they’re inspired by the success stories of the yellow Vikings and veteran slaves. Plus, the early converts among the Indians lead them with loyalty—that’s why the Iroquois, Huron, and Abenaki remain obedient.

The spread of the Divine King Church has also ensured that the native Indians and slaves don’t just fear us—they believe you and Prince Haldor are incarnations of the divine. That’s why they willingly serve us. This success is due to a combination of favorable conditions—timing, geography, and human factors. Future rapid expansion might not go as smoothly in making the Indian natives comply…”

Olaf knew Heiner spoke the truth, but Vinland had too much to accomplish and too few laborers. Moreover, developing the textile industry and cultivating cotton required bringing the southern lands of Virginia under Vinland’s control—expansion was inevitable.

Olaf shared his plans with Heiner. Once Heiner nodded in agreement that Vinland’s textile development required land suitable for cotton and jute cultivation, Olaf knew he had his support.

“Our goal is land and slaves. Once we conquer the land, we’ll seize the local Indian natives as slaves. We’ll use the old methods—kill those who resist, disperse the obedient ones as slaves across various regions, and allow backward tribes to remain in their homelands as long as they pledge loyalty to us…”

Olaf outlined his strategy for dealing with the southern Indian natives, and the attending governors voiced their unanimous approval. As men who had risen through battles on horseback, they relished the idea of crushing Indian natives with firearms.

For Vinland’s soldiers, campaigning against the Indian natives meant promotion, wealth, land, and slaves—an opportunity too good to pass up. Even the Indian slaves and indentured white slaves from Viking households, along with the assimilated Indian tribes across Vinland, clamored to enlist when they heard of the impending war.

Slaves and indentured white slaves who fought could free themselves from bondage and even rise to positions of power. Assimilated Indian natives who joined the fight could gain wealth and become Viking lords. Few would pass up a chance to elevate their social status.

For centuries, Indian tribes had been locked in endless conflict. The opportunity to adorn their honor with the heads of warriors from other tribes was one no Indian native would refuse.

To the Indian natives, aiding the civilized divine army in conquering backward tribes required no deliberation. Their minds held no concept of dividing camps by skin color, language, or culture.

With millions of Indian tribes across North America, the already assimilated Beothuk, Huron, Cree, Abenaki, and Iroquois saw the southern Blackfoot and Mohegan as far less worthy of kinship than the Vikings. In fact, they were eager to annihilate their southern neighbors, trading their heads for a chance to enter the civilized circle of the divine bloodline.

Chapter 293: Vinland’s First Five-Year Plan (3)

The discussion meeting regarding Vinland’s five-year plan lasted two days, but the actual concrete work was only communicated between Olaf and Heiner for a few hours. The others, including Tom, Kalm, Solrak, Hilt, and the rest, knew they only needed to listen and follow orders. Years of cooperation had made them trust that following Olaf’s lead was never wrong.

Olaf had two main purposes for convening this meeting. The first was to gather the governors and city lords from various regions to meet, chat, and understand the work situation, while also strengthening their relationships. After all, these people were his most loyal supporters.

The second was to prepare to inform them of the five-year plan, to prevent any delays or obstacles in the future when implementing the work.

After the “Five-Year Development Plan” was unanimously passed, Olaf held a grand banquet at Haldor’s fortress to entertain the high-ranking officials who had come to attend the meeting.

After a sumptuous feast, Olaf also bestowed some hemp cloth he had brought to the crowd. Only then did he readjust the personnel, allowing Polly, Brun, Solrak, and Tom to continue serving as governors in the Huron, Plymouth, Abenaki, and Quebec regions as needed. He also rewarded the city lords of the four regions, and continued to appoint Harry as the deputy governor of Quebec, while Ilugi was changed to the deputy governor of Huron. Halik, due to his lack of intelligence and poor work performance, was recalled from the Abenaki District to serve as the leader of Olaf’s Viking personal army. Gilfa and Val were sent to Abenaki to assist Solrak.

Hilt continued to serve as the governor of the Iroquois, but Olaf sent his cousin Kalhu to be the deputy governor. The large Labrador region also added Eriksson as the deputy governor. Thus, each major region had Olaf’s most trusted companions involved.

In addition to these personnel changes among the masters, to better manage each region, Olaf also selected some loyal and clever individuals from his Viking legion to serve as deputies in various city-states. This not only increased the number of bureaucrats in each region, improving work efficiency, but also indirectly weakened the power of the governors.

Olaf’s closest companions—red-haired Tom, white bear Halik, Solrak, Ilugi, Harry, Val, and Eriksson—all had clear official positions this time, becoming high-ranking officials in the Vinland region and entering the leadership core. Besides these companions, the leadership core of Vinland also included Heiner, Kalm, Kalhu, Hilt, Polly, and Brun. Among these six, Heiner was the most loyal to Olaf, while Kalm and Kalhu were also very close to Olaf. However, Hilt, Polly, and Brun were still most loyal to Haldor, only maintaining respect and obedience to Olaf as the governor of Vinland.

Currently, there was no conflict between Olaf and Haldor, so all the bureaucrats in Vinland could be freely arranged by Olaf. Olaf did not naively believe that there would be no disagreements or changes in the future between father and son, so he began to gradually cultivate his own trusted aides to take over Vinland.

Only Heiner saw through Olaf’s intentions because his actions were not obvious, or the promoted personnel were beyond doubt in terms of closeness and loyalty, so the public opinion after the personnel adjustment was overall positive.

By the time the banquet completely ended, it was already early July. At this time, the indentured white slaves in Hrut City had been allocated under the supervision of Heiner and Olaf, with nine-tenths divided among the governors of the seven regions: Quebec, Labrador, Abenaki, Huron, Iroquois, Bakens, and Haldor City. The regions that received the most people were Quebec and Abenaki, as these two areas had been developed by the French for over a decade, already having much land and buildings. Although the French had been completely wiped out, continuing to fill the population would allow these two regions to explode with potential surpassing the Champlain leadership era, creating vast wealth for Vinland through grain production and the mining of gold, silver, coal, and iron.

The Huron and Iroquois regions each received two thousand people. Although all nine districts of Vinland were sparsely populated, Huron and Iroquois had the best environment and climate, making them the most suitable for agricultural development, so they also received a significant number of people.

The Labrador region was the largest in area, but it was not suitable for agriculture, only for fishing, forestry, and animal husbandry. Therefore, Heiner only allocated over five hundred German white slaves who knew hunting and logging, and over a hundred Irish herdsmen to Kalm and Eriksson.

As for Bakens City and Haldor City, they only received a few hundred people. Plymouth, due to the presence of over two thousand English people still under Olaf’s intentional control and blockade, only added two hundred White Wolf soldiers to ensure the governor of Plymouth had enough protective forces to suppress Plymouth.

Finally, after the governors of each region were satisfied and left with the indentured white slaves, Hrut City became empty once again. Apart from the thirty or so boys and girls Sally had picked, the rest were divided among the various regions.

Olaf counted on his fingers and realized that although Hrut City was nominally the capital of Vinland, its population had already been surpassed by Abenaki City and Quebec City, and even Haldor City was catching up to Hrut City.

Considering that Hrut City lacked a good harbor, Olaf thought it might be worth considering moving the capital to Haldor City. As Vinland’s population increased and various industries flourished, Hrut City could no longer support the entire Vinland.

Actually, Quebec City was a good location, able to radiate to all regions, and its climate was similar to Haldor City. However, considering the historical issues of the city, coupled with the fact that French merchant ships had investigated the cause of New France’s destruction multiple times this year and had lodged complaints with Vinland, wanting to clarify the sovereignty issue of Quebec, Olaf knew that the French were not giving up and still wanted to reclaim Quebec.

Legally speaking, Quebec was indeed a city-state of New France established by the French, and this land also belonged to France. However, Olaf had covered his tracks well, and all evidence and information indicated that the Indian natives, having gained confidence from obtaining iron tools, had destroyed New France and killed a large number of French people. But Vinland had also avenged New France in the guise of a dream, with Viking soldiers killing a large number of Abenaki and Ojibwe people, taking the opportunity to expand their territory, and even taking over the administration of Quebec. However, French merchant ships had come to demand it back twice, and since Olaf was not present, they had been fooled by the governors.

Olaf felt a headache coming on when he thought of France. If it weren’t for the fact that last year the Protestant Union and the Catholic Union had reached a point where they needed to decide the outcome, and the Spanish army had also stationed troops at the French border, the French government would have sent troops last year upon learning that New France had been destroyed by Indian natives.

The situation in Europe was becoming clearer. As long as the Treaty of Prague was signed and the interests were divided among the countries, Europe would achieve temporary peace and stability. At that time, whether it was England or France, or even Sweden, they would all set their sights on the North American continent.

England could be dealt with for the time being because Olaf held the trump card of Ireland, which could keep England busy at any time. Sweden, due to its small population base, would not have much energy to compete for overseas colonies as the Eastern Russian Empire slowly rose.

France, however, was an old European power. Although its navy was weaker, it had a large population and a strong army. If France withdrew from the European battlefield, whether through open or covert means, Quebec would likely have to be returned. Moreover, France might send more soldiers and colonists to North America to compete with Vinland for interests. At that time, Vinland would have to deal with England and France simultaneously, and possibly even the Netherlands and Sweden, which would definitely not be a good thing.

Olaf felt that the news of his return to Vinland would soon be known by Virginia and New Netherlands, and the French would also find out. If the French came to him to demand Quebec back, as an ally who had signed a treaty with New France, he would find it difficult to refuse.

Returning Quebec was definitely not an option, but how to keep it for himself was something Olaf couldn’t figure out for the time being. He could only go to Heiner for advice.

Chapter 294: Vinland’s First Five-Year Plan (4)

Olaf rode his reindeer, Haysen, swiftly along the gravel path until he reached a stone-and-wood villa on the outskirts of Haldor’s fortress. Behind him followed Halik and a dozen Inuit guards.

Olaf pointed at the villa and said, “Halik, go knock on the door and tell Heiner I’m here to see him.”

Halik agreed and dismounted, walking over to the wooden door. He raised his thick hand and knocked, the door creaking in protest as he shouted, “Heiner! Olaf is here to see you!”

After sending off the governors from various regions and a large number of indentured white slaves, Heiner had been busy for days, feeling somewhat disoriented. He had just returned home to play with his daughter when he heard Olaf’s shout outside. Furious, he set down his daughter, Helen, and cursed, “Damn Olaf, your eyes are sharper than Rig’s! I just got some free time, and you show up! Can’t you let a man rest?”

After grumbling for a few moments, Heiner composed himself and had someone bring Olaf inside.

As Olaf entered the living room, he saw Heiner’s sour expression, while his cousin Vanhild held little Helen, smiling faintly.

Olaf quickly realized he had interrupted Heiner’s family time and said with a smile, “Sorry to disturb you. Vanhild, you know how endless the affairs of Vinland are…”

Vanhild was a career-driven woman. After returning to Vinland with her husband, she had already resumed her duties at the Sahkrimnir Farming Company. Over the past few days, she had been overseeing the cleaning of the livestock pens, preparing to sell a batch of livestock to the Icelandic Vikings who had migrated here. This would not only relieve pressure on the farm but also generate revenue for Vinland.

Seeing Olaf arrive, Vanhild knew her brother-in-law wanted to consult Heiner about something. She held Helen and said with a smile, “Go ahead, Heiner. Besides Olaf, you won’t find a friend who trusts you this much. You’re both men of great ambition; don’t mind us.”

Heiner nodded, kissed Vanhild and Helen, then turned to Olaf and said, “Why don’t you sit down? Halik, you too. What’s the matter?”

Olaf gestured for everyone to sit, then leaned in and asked Heiner, “It’s about Quebec. I’ve heard the French have come to Vinland several times this year to demand it back. We can’t possibly return Quebec to those Frenchmen, but we did sign a treaty with Champlain. If we renege, it’ll ruin our reputation and completely alienate France. What should we do?”

Heiner chuckled and said, “I knew you’d be worried. I’ve already thought about this a few days ago.”

“Oh?” Olaf’s eyes lit up as he asked, “What’s the plan?”

Heiner picked up the coffee a servant had brought and took a sip before saying, “There are many ways to solve this. The best would be if the pan-European war in Europe continues. That way, the French won’t have the energy to fight over Quebec, and the English and Dutch won’t be able to interfere in the changes in North America. We’ll have more time to grow stronger.”

“That’s true, but Gustavus Adolphus II has already achieved complete victory in the German region. The Catholic League probably can’t fight anymore. Maybe the Treaty of Prague has already been signed.”

Olaf shook his head and said, “With Sweden’s current advantage, there’s not much hope for further fighting. Are there other options?”

Heiner smiled slightly and said, “France may be a European power, but their navy is no match for Spain, England, or Holland—perhaps not even for Vinland’s navy. So even if we offend France, there’s not much danger. We absolutely won’t return Quebec, and the French won’t be able to attack us. So, after they’ve outwardly raged but inwardly accepted it, we can offer to buy the New France territory from them. The French will gladly accept, and we won’t have to worry too much…”

Olaf thought for a moment and agreed that Heiner’s analysis was sound. He nodded and said, “You’re right. Let’s do that.”

With the issue of Quebec’s ownership settled, Olaf didn’t want to leave just yet. He asked, “What about Vinland’s five-year plan? Have you figured it out? How should we proceed? All these matters will have to be handled by you.”

Heiner scratched his head and laughed, “Me? I don’t even have a proper position in Vinland. Without a title, it’s hard to manage people!”

Olaf raised an eyebrow, pondered for a moment, and recalled Song Qinghe’s previous suggestion to introduce the Ming Dynasty’s official system into Vinland. He said, “Vinland is still in its early stages. Although it’s a colony, Gustavus Adolphus II has already made me the Earl of Vinland. As long as my father doesn’t interfere, I can use my title to transform Vinland into an earldom. So, perhaps we can establish a civil official system here, with you as the chief official. What do you think?”

Heiner had originally thought Olaf would make him the deputy governor of Vinland or appoint him as a general in the Viking raids. But Olaf’s proposal made his eyes light up, and he asked excitedly, “How did you come up with this? Vinland was built from a primitive society step by step. To enter a civilized society, we do need a mature bureaucratic system. But wouldn’t using a privy council or a house of nobles be overstepping? Iceland doesn’t even have one yet… But using a parliament or congress might be too advanced for Vinland…”

Heiner lowered his head in thought, while Olaf grinned and said, “You’ve met Song Qinghe a few times. He suggested that we adopt the system of that powerful eastern nation—the Ming Dynasty. We could use imperial examinations to select talent, appoint officials of various ranks in the central and local governments… establish civil and military classes… open academies, and so on. What do you think?”

“That’s quite unique.” Heiner had never been exposed to the eastern imperial examinations or the nine-rank system. After Olaf’s explanation, he felt his horizons broadening. However, he knew that Vinland had very few intellectuals, and its nobility and landowners were insufficient. Replicating the Ming Dynasty’s imperial examinations, nine-rank system, or the privy councils and parliaments of various European countries was unrealistic. So, Heiner silently pondered.

Time passed slowly. After a while, Olaf suddenly said, “Vinland is ours, far from Europe, like a giant Iceland. So, I think we can establish our own official system, perhaps incorporating features from various civilizations. Even if it’s not perfect, we can adjust as needed.”

Heiner finished his coffee in one gulp and said firmly, “Good! Vinland must be built from scratch. We’ve already turned a primitive and backward Vinland into a colony with cities and civilization. Strengthening the management layer and introducing more standardized official systems is progress.”

Olaf and Heiner discussed for a long time, finally deciding that Song Qinghe could go ahead with opening an academy, but it must teach loyalty and medicine. The imperial examinations, privy council, and parliament were not yet suitable for Vinland’s conditions, so they would not be implemented for now. However, some aspects of the nine-rank system could be adopted, such as clearly defining the ranks of governors and city lords, and establishing distinct civil and military officials. Vinland had many tasks ahead, especially the various aspects of the five-year plan, which required many people to carry out. To clarify responsibilities and ensure the steady progress of each part of the five-year plan, Olaf and Heiner decided to define official positions and determine which officials would be responsible for advancing the five-year plan.

Olaf and Heiner had discussed their strategy for dealing with the French and decided on a plan to establish civil and military official positions in Vinland. However, since they were more familiar with European official systems, and European bureaucrats were clearly not as professional as those of the Ming Dynasty at the time, Olaf still leaned toward adopting more of the Ming Dynasty’s official system.

To better promote the reform of the official system, Olaf felt it necessary to consult Song Qinghe. So, he had someone invite Song Qinghe and his apprentice.

Chapter 295: Vinland’s First Five-Year Plan (5)

Soon, Master and disciple Song Qinghe, under Halik’s guidance, entered Heiner’s parlor. The two bowed respectfully to Olaf and Heiner before taking their seats.

The four of them spoke nonstop for three hours, until the evening sky darkened around seven o’clock. Only then did they head to the kitchen together to eat meat pies and drink porridge while finalizing the last details.

The next morning, Olaf and Heiner arrived at the council hall, gathering the clerks to transcribe the official system for Vinland that they had jointly formulated with Song Qinghe and his disciple.

After much discussion, combining the political and cultural histories of East and West with the wisdom of Olaf, Heiner, and the Song Qinghe master-disciple pair, the final product was born.

The official system established eighteen distinct ranks, divided into civil and military classes. However, due to Vinland’s unique circumstances, the number of official positions was limited. Currently, only the Grand Governor of Vinland held the rank of Supreme First Class, while other governors were ranked as Third Class civil officials. Deputy governors were ranked as Junior Third Class. Below the governors were the mayors of various cities, ranked as Fifth Class. All city auxiliary officials were uniformly ranked as Fourth Class. In the future, towns and villages would be established under the cities, with their officials likely ranked around Junior Seventh Class.

The civil officials were roughly divided into Grand Governor, Chief Assistant of the Governor’s Office, Regional Governor, Deputy Governor, City Lord, Agricultural Assistant, Security Assistant, Industrial Assistant, Commercial Assistant, Documentation Assistant, Financial Assistant, and a few others. Apart from these five or six types of civil officials, there were also military officials.

Vinland’s military officials were even simpler, consisting of Third Class legion commanders and Junior Third Class deputy legion commanders, with ranks descending to battalion commanders, company commanders, and so on.

The implementation of the official system now only clarified the status and identities of governors, city lords, and their assistants across various regions, as well as the salaries and benefits they were entitled to. It also officially appointed Heiner as the Chief Assistant of the Grand Governor’s Office, with a rank of Second Class, an annual salary of one thousand silver marks, and a grant of one thousand acres of land. His position and treatment were quite substantial.

Master and disciple Song Qinghe were also appointed as Education Assistants and Advisors to the Grand Governor’s Office. Song Qinghe was granted the rank of Fifth Class, with an annual salary of three hundred silver marks and a grant of one hundred acres of land. His disciple was granted the rank of Junior Seventh Class, with a salary and benefits amounting to one-third of Song Qinghe’s, but both were still very satisfied.

Heiner was very pleased with Olaf’s arrangement, as it not only resolved his own status and authority issues but also clearly defined the strict hierarchy, rights, and obligations of Vinland’s ruling class. This was a significant step forward in Vinland’s political system.

The clerks and accountants in the council hall were the first beneficiaries of the official system reform. They were also granted ranks around the Eighth Class, with increased salaries and benefits, making everyone very happy.

After the clerks had transcribed the official system documents under the name of the Grand Governor’s Office to be distributed to various regions, Olaf ordered Chief Assistant Heiner to issue the first command from the Grand Governor’s Office.

This command was to deliver the documents and appointment letters to various regions, handing them to the governors, city lords, and assistants, while also clarifying the location of the public fields that would support the officials.

Heiner was familiar with the clerks and assistants in the council hall. He directly selected the most quick-witted and intelligent ones, handed them the appointment letters, and personally chose guards and ships to send them off.

With the official system now in place, Olaf felt that he could rely on the clearly defined duties of the assistants and the system to promote reforms in Vinland’s agriculture, economy, industry, and other sectors.

Recalling that Song Qinghe had repeatedly requested to establish an academy to teach Confucian classics and medicine, Olaf first ordered Heiner to select land. Then, he entrusted Heiner to choose personnel from the indentured white slaves and Viking raid officials stationed in Hrut City to allocate resources for the construction of the academy. This would allow Song Qinghe and his disciple to cultivate doctors for Vinland in the future.

Increasing the number of doctors would fundamentally improve Vinland’s overall medical and health standards, raise the average lifespan, and reduce child mortality rates. It would even allow for military doctors to accompany troops, ensuring that soldiers received treatment for injuries and reducing losses from disease and pain. This was a great benefit to the nation and its people, forming the core of the medical sector in Olaf’s five-year plan for improving people’s livelihoods.

Establishing an academy was not difficult, but relying solely on Song Qinghe and his disciple to train traditional Chinese doctors was inefficient. There were issues with language and cultural barriers, as well as the difficulty and long learning cycle of traditional Chinese medicine. Olaf felt that over the next two years, it was necessary to find some Arab doctors from the Arab region. He also needed to continue asking Kuiyi to help him find famous doctors to strengthen the future Vinland Medical College.

Heiner and the Song Qinghe master-disciple pair quickly joined Demendoza to oversee the construction of the Vinland Confucian and Medical Academy. Demendoza had arrived in Vinland earlier than Olaf and his group and was tasked with compiling textbooks as commissioned by Olaf.

Over the past few months, Demendoza had worked with the two elderly priests, DeGula and Duca, to write textbooks, focusing on completing the foundations of mathematics and literature. Following Olaf’s instructions, he had also revised the theological content in the textbooks to align with the propaganda of the Divine King Church. Although DeGula and Duca were furious and expressed their disapproval, Demendoza remained resolute. With the White Wolf soldiers Olaf had sent to “assist” him standing by with their gleaming swords, DeGula and Duca had no choice but to grit their teeth and accept.

After the banquet where Olaf had hosted the governors, he personally reviewed the textbooks edited by Demendoza, including “Mathematics,” “Literature,” “Theology,” “Art,” “Latin,” “French,” and “English.” He found the content to be excellent, suitable for children and adolescents without prior knowledge.

Olaf was very pleased and rewarded Demendoza with the position of Second Education Assistant in the Governor’s Office, along with ten Indian slave girls, which delighted Demendoza greatly.

Olaf had never been stingy with rewards for capable individuals. He never concerned himself with temporary gains or losses, nor with gold and silver. Olaf had his eyes set on the entire world.

As he grew older and history changed, the rise of Britain and France constantly stirred a sense of crisis within him. He feared that the United States of America would still emerge, that the Anglo-Saxons would eventually drive him to a barren and desolate island, where he would spend the rest of his life in misery. Not only would he be unable to change the world, but he would also fail to change the fate of his own country and people, even his own family’s future.

Due to his concerns about future uncertainties, he worked tirelessly in the present. This was Olaf’s current attitude towards life, and it also infected those around him, like Heiner, filling them with determination every day. They began to solidly advance various tasks in medicine, education, industry, and other fields according to the requirements of the five-year development plan.

To develop Vinland, Olaf had relocated a large population from Iceland, Germany, and Ireland. He had also formulated plans to develop agriculture, industry, and commerce, aiming to quickly and effectively transform Vinland into a powerful nation. This way, he could resist the covetous eyes of the British, French, and Dutch, and then unite with Iceland and Greenland to possess the strength and opportunity to challenge Europe.

With the united efforts of the ruler and his ministers, and Olaf’s various operations, Vinland, despite experiencing a cold snap disaster, quickly recovered the following summer and began to develop with great enthusiasm.

Chapter 296: Relocating the Capital

While the Confucian Medical Academy was being constructed in Hrut City, Olaf also began inspecting his factories, breweries, and sugar refineries—all enterprises directly under his control. He checked the inventory of goods and ordered an expansion of production, instructing his subordinates not to worry about food consumption.

The weather in Vinland in July was exceptionally pleasant, cooler than previous years. Olaf enjoyed the comfortable temperature but also marveled at how severe the Little Ice Age had become.

Since Heiner had retained the blacksmiths from the Icelandic Vikings and indentured white slaves in Hrut City, Olaf, after urging the factories to operate at full capacity, prepared to expand them. He planned to add smelting workshops for iron, copper, and gold ores, laying the groundwork for future firearms production.

Vinland could easily solve its food and clothing problems by leveraging its vast land for pastoralism, animal husbandry, forestry, fishing, and agriculture. But to become a strong nation with a powerful military, it needed its own armories to produce steel and weapons.

Steel was a critical material across all eras, essential for military, civilian, and economic development. Olaf had long been determined to establish Vinland’s own steel industry.

Vinland already possessed coal, iron, copper, and gold and silver mines. Though lacking the technology to convert coal into coke, smelting ores still required charcoal, and Vinland’s boundless forests provided the perfect conditions.

However, the highest-quality iron and gold and silver mines were located far from each other—one in the Abenaki District in southwestern Vinland Island, the other north of Quebec City. Olaf believed in the principle of proximity, suggesting that factories should be built near the mines. Otherwise, the ores would have to be transported to Vinland Island.

After calculating the costs, Olaf considered the logistics of constructing factories in both locations—transporting equipment, training workers, and supplying provisions. Ultimately, building the factories in Vinland was more economical. However, for the sake of maritime convenience, the steel and precious metal smelting plant could not be built in Hrut City. Instead, it would be established in Haldor City.

This aligned perfectly with Olaf’s long-standing plan to relocate Vinland’s political and economic center to Haldor City. He decided to proceed with both initiatives simultaneously.

Once his mind was made up, Olaf consulted with Heiner. The next day, they issued the relocation order.

Under the decree from the Grand Governor’s Office, half of the eight thousand Viking households in Hrut City—those involved in politics and the military—were to move to Haldor City first to construct housing. Once the buildings were complete, the remaining indentured white slaves and native slaves would also be relocated in large numbers. In Olaf’s vision, Haldor City would become Vinland’s capital, while Hrut City would retain only its agricultural and livestock populations.

The Vikings, indentured white slaves, and even the native Indians in Vinland had no particular attachment to Hrut City. Combined with Olaf’s authority, no one dared question the relocation. The migration began in mid-July and was partially completed by August.

Thousands of Vikings and over a thousand indentured white slaves, led by Olaf himself, arrived in Haldor City. They selected a flat area south of the old city, then felled trees, leveled the land, dug channels, and gathered stones.

Governor Bich of Haldor City enthusiastically mobilized the city’s residents and indentured white slaves to join the construction effort. Within days, the expansion project had drawn over ten thousand participants. The city’s warehouses also distributed dried sweet potatoes, stored potatoes, and squash free of charge to the Vikings, indentured white slaves, and native slaves.

According to Viking raid traditions, Vikings enjoyed high privileges, with land to sustain them and opportunities to earn income through hunting and fishing. Thus, contributing to the collective effort was their duty—they were not entitled to communal food and were even expected to bring their own provisions.

However, the composition of the Vikings had changed. The addition of twenty thousand Icelanders had swelled their numbers to over thirty thousand, with more than seventy percent identifying as Icelandic Vikings. Many of these newcomers had only recently acquired land and slaves and had just undergone relocation. To compensate and support them, Olaf issued a universal decree: this year, Vikings participating in corvée labor would receive provisions from the Viking raid collective.

As Haldor City expanded its residential areas, docks, public toilets, water channels, factories, and roads, its grain reserves were rapidly depleted. Within half a month, Bich approached Olaf in distress.

Haldor City had been cultivated for a short time, and with many terraces near the harbor and few plains, its arable land was inferior to that of Hrut City and Bakens City. At the current rate of consumption, the city’s grain reserves would be exhausted before the autumn harvest.

Olaf acknowledged the truth in Bich’s concerns and ordered grain to be transported from the Iroquois and Huron regions. He also diverted some reserves from Hrut City’s warehouses to be shipped first.

As ship after ship of grain arrived at Haldor City’s harbor, Bich and all the city’s residents—both old and new—felt immense relief.

French merchants arrived in Vinland at the end of July and requested an audience with Olaf.

Olaf ignored the French colonial company’s demands regarding Quebec City but fully accommodated their requests for trade, even offering prices lower than before.

The French, seeing Vinland’s military strength and the bustling expansion of Haldor City, dared not act recklessly. They protested verbally while frantically purchasing Vinland’s malt sugar, porcelain, royal jelly, Water of Life, furs, dried fish, and wine.

After the French merchant ships departed Haldor Harbor laden with Vinland’s goods, Olaf and the Vinland government earned substantial income. They also knew that once the French conveyed Olaf’s stance back to Paris, the next response would reveal France’s true intentions.

Olaf trusted Heiner’s analysis completely. Whether Europe had concluded peace or continued its wars, France would struggle to gather the troops and navy required for a costly expedition to Vinland.

Given the current mindset and colonial habits of the French and Europeans, no government was willing to expend vast resources to wage war over an undeveloped or barely developed wilderness. Such an endeavor would not only be unprofitable but could also weaken the nation.

France, wary of its powerful neighbors Spain and England, lacked the naval strength to support a transatlantic war. Even if it had the capability, it would not dare to take such a risk.

Olaf was optimistic about Quebec’s future. Unless Louis XIII lost his mind, in a year or two, Olaf could secure the former New France territory through negotiation, making it legally part of Vinland.

No sooner had the French merchants left than ships from Virginia and New Netherlands arrived in Haldor City.

To gauge the attitudes of the two colonial companies toward North America, Olaf personally received them and, together with Heiner, attended the pricing negotiations.

New Netherlands behaved as it had in previous years, focusing solely on the pricing of Vinland’s specialties and haggling fiercely.

Due to Vinland’s expansion under Olaf’s leadership the previous year, some of Vinland’s secrets had inevitably been revealed to Virginia and New Netherlands. They learned that many of Vinland’s specialties, such as the Water of Life and the mysterious Eastern Malt Sugar, were produced locally.

Once they realized they could purchase luxury goods directly from Vinland, the Dutch, English, and French began frequenting Vinland for business cooperation starting last autumn. Their attitudes had become entirely submissive and friendly.

The Vikings of Vinland noticed a clear shift in behavior. Since spring, the English, French, and Dutch had stopped being picky about Vinland’s furs and instead eagerly purchased all of Vinland’s specialties, speaking politely and sincerely. Unbeknownst to them, this change was not due to Vinland’s expansion but rather Iceland’s integration into the Swedish United Kingdom and its rising prominence in Europe.

To the English, French, and Dutch, Iceland posed no threat. Even as Olaf led Vinland’s expansion in North America, turning it into a formidable colony, Europe still did not take it seriously. They knew that once the European wars ended and nations could focus on colonizing North America, tiny Vinland would quickly perish.

However, this perception changed when Iceland joined the Swedish United Kingdom and Haldor led a grand army to victory alongside Gustavus Adolphus II against the Catholic League.

After the Treaty of Prague, Gustavus Adolphus II became the most powerful man in Europe, controlling much of Germany. Sweden surpassed England, France, and Holland to become the strongest continental power.

With the Swedish United Kingdom at its peak, Iceland’s status also rose.

Now that Iceland had the backing of Europe’s strongest nation and Viking soldiers had proven their mettle in battle, the English, French, and Dutch colonial companies in North America adopted a policy of retrenchment. They actively sought friendship with Vinland, preparing to avoid conflict.

This decision marked a complete departure from history. The Scottish colonial company and additional English colonial companies that should have emerged were nowhere to be found.

By 1633, Vinland dominated North America. After the English and Dutch conducted their business and departed, Olaf clearly sensed the change in their attitudes. Rather than gloating, he engaged in two all-night discussions with Heiner, adjusting Vinland’s expansion plans accordingly.

Chapter 297: The Beginnings of Vinland’s Industry

The 17th century marked the dawn of the global colonial era. In the future, European nations, having tasted the sweet fruits of colonization, would pour even greater resources into their overseas ventures.

For now, however, the pace of European colonization remained sluggish. Olaf had always dreamed of monopolizing North America, ensuring that Vinland under his control would one day encompass all the lands of the future United States and Canada. Thus, his greatest wariness was reserved for England, another island nation.

Civilizations born on islands often harbored an unusual obsession with territorial expansion and colonization. England would later spearhead the Industrial Revolution, becoming the sun-never-sets empire that colonized the globe. Japan, too, would rise from obscurity to dominate much of East Asia. These achievements were undeniably tied to the unique traits of island civilizations.

With a population nearing ten million, along with abundant iron and coal reserves, England was already on the path to ascendancy in the 17th century. Iceland and Vinland, combined, still lagged far behind in population. Olaf believed that before England fully committed to colonization, he must expand Vinland’s territory to its greatest extent and develop it into an impregnable fortress. Only then could Vinland withstand the onslaught of English global colonization and avoid being seized.

Now, with Iceland and Vinland allied with the Swedish United Kingdom—and with Olaf’s intervention ensuring that Gustavus Adolphus II not only survived but led the Protestant League to victory—the Massachusetts Bay Company and New France had both fallen victim to Olaf’s schemes. The world’s political landscape had diverged drastically from the one Olaf remembered, rendering his past knowledge unreliable. To play it safe, he resolved to develop Vinland as swiftly as possible, aiming to build a large population and a robust industrial base. Only then could Vinland defend itself against any formidable foe.

Regardless of what the future held, Olaf knew that as European wars drew to a close, nations like England, France, Spain, and even Sweden, Denmark, and Holland would turn their gaze toward North America. If he failed to secure the largest possible territory and transform Vinland into a proper nation, he would inevitably have to share North America with other powers.

Throughout July, Olaf oversaw the relocation of the capital to Haldor City while also collaborating with Master Habert and his apprentices at the shipyard to develop watertight bulkhead technology. The shipyard, which had been idle for months due to delays in procuring the latest equipment and parts from Holland, had finally resumed its bustling operations.

Watertight bulkhead technology was a unique innovation of the Ming Dynasty, but it was not particularly complex. Olaf shared what he knew with Habert, and the master shipbuilder, true to his reputation, worked tirelessly with his apprentices. After just half a month, they presented Olaf with a model.

Olaf examined the galleon model for a long time, asking detailed questions about the watertight bulkheads. Finally, he praised, “Master Habert, you can now build a galleon with watertight bulkheads. Once it’s launched, we’ll conduct experiments. If the bulkheads prove successful, you’ll no longer bear the infamous title of ‘Submarine Builder.’”

“It’s all thanks to your idea, Olaf. Without your explanation of the key elements of watertight bulkhead technology, I never would have thought of it.”

Habert had always been a proud man, and his arrogance had only grown with age. Yet, after the failure of the Swedish shipbuilding project, he remained humble in Olaf’s presence.

After another half-day of discussion, Olaf placed an order for ten more galleons. Since the shipyard’s construction and raw materials were funded by Olaf, Habert only received a fee for building each ship, along with maintenance costs. However, Olaf was generous—he offered Habert and his apprentices wages far higher than those of any shipyard in Holland or England at the time. Additionally, all expenses for the apprentices, including food, lodging, and other necessities, were covered by the Vinland Governor’s Office. As a result, Habert’s net income actually surpassed what he had earned during his peak years running a shipyard in Holland. This was why none of the apprentices ever considered leaving.

Olaf understood that Vinland’s greatest advantage lay in its resources. Before the population could grow, he needed to allocate those resources wisely to ensure the Vikings of Vinland lived prosperous lives. Only then would the indentured white slaves of Europe be eager to immigrate to Vinland.

Becoming a resource-based nation was the best way to lay a solid foundation for development. Thus, while Olaf’s five-year plan focused on improving internal governance, healthcare, and public welfare, it also prioritized the development of agriculture, fishing, mining, and metallurgy.

By mid-August, Olaf had sent Pikku back to Greenland with a large stockpile of potatoes, sweet potatoes, liquor, and malt sugar, among other resources. Accompanying Pikku were two merchant ships laden with liquor, malt sugar, dried cod, royal jelly, bone china, and furs.

These two ships carried half a year’s worth of accumulated goods to Iceland, contributing to its development. This was the role Iceland assigned to Vinland—a supplier of raw materials and goods.

Though Olaf wanted to keep all the goods for Vinland’s development, he knew he couldn’t.

As Haldor City underwent rapid transformation, several smelting plants—into which Olaf had poured considerable effort—were completed. Inside, blast furnaces stood in orderly rows, and skilled workers, selected from the indentured white slaves, prepared for operations.

The gold, silver, and iron ores mined from Abenaki and Quebec, along with the gold and copper ores from Longling Mountain, had filled two warehouses.

According to the smelting plant’s manager, Hoover, the furnaces would be lit the next day.

Hoover was a German, originally a skilled worker at a smelting plant in the Duchy of Saxony. War had left him destitute and in debt, forcing him to sell himself and his two daughters and three sons into indentured servitude. After arriving in Hrut City, he was chosen by Olaf to oversee the smelting plant in Haldor City.

Hoover was deeply grateful to Olaf and worked tirelessly. He had personally overseen the construction of the blast furnaces from start to finish. He wanted to repay Olaf’s kindness and earn enough to free himself from his indentured status as soon as possible. Thus, he had already secured a large supply of charcoal and labor from Olaf, preparing to fire up the furnaces and transform the ores in the warehouses into precious metals.

On the first day the smelting plant began operations, Olaf was present. He watched as Hoover led the workers through the meticulous processes of crushing, screening, and loading the furnaces.

The next evening, as Olaf was urging the citizens of Haldor City to develop livestock farming, Hoover suddenly appeared, his face smudged with soot, clutching a box.

“My lord!” Hoover panted as he approached Olaf. “The first batch of steel has been smelted. The ingots have just cooled—I brought them right away. Take a look.”

He opened the box, revealing two steel ingots, each a foot long. Olaf picked one up, feeling its residual warmth. When he struck it, the sound rang clear and bright—it was indeed high-quality steel.

“Excellent work, Hoover,” Olaf said with a satisfied smile. “Maintain this quality, and I’ll reward the plant monthly based on production.”

He placed the ingot back in the box and continued, “The other furnaces should be lit soon. We can smelt copper, gold, and silver now. Remember, the rise and fall of Vinland depend on this smelting plant. You must ensure both quality and quantity…”

Hoover nodded repeatedly at Olaf’s instructions. With a simple smile, he said, “Rest assured, my lord. I’ll live at the plant from now on. I won’t stop until every bit of ore in those warehouses is turned into gold and silver.”

Pleased with Hoover’s assurance, Olaf praised him a few more times before ordering Halik to purchase several sheep from the Shahrimnir Company’s newly established branch in Haldor City. The sheep were slaughtered and sent to the smelting plant to provide the workers with an extra meal. When the steaming pots of mutton were brought out, Olaf joined Heiner and Hoover in sharing a bowl with the workers, much to their excitement.

In this era, Olaf’s leadership style was unlike any other. His actions deeply moved the indentured white slaves, who compared him favorably to the exploitative nobles back home. Their gratitude and loyalty were sincere and infectious, possessing a power that could inspire others.

Chapter 298: American Ginseng

By early August, several new wooden houses with a distinct Eastern architectural style had been constructed in Hrut City. These houses occupied a vast area, surrounded by courtyards and pavilions. Most importantly, a wooden plaque hung above the entrance, bearing four square Chinese characters—“Qinghe Academy.”

Master and disciple, Song Qinghe, had long awaited the completion of their academy. Now that it was finished, they placed the Four Books and Five Classics, along with medical texts such as the Yellow Emperor’s Inner Canon, Compendium of Materia Medica, and Treatise on Cold Damage, into the academy’s study. Some of these books were printed copies they had brought with them, while others were handwritten manuscripts transcribed by the master and disciple themselves. These texts would serve as the classics for educating the “savages” of the foreign lands in the future.

Song Qinghe and his disciple also began studying the Icelandic language, but due to their age and the vast differences between Minnan dialect, Mandarin, and Icelandic, their progress was slow. They could only manage basic communication.

To better recruit students, Song Qinghe, in his capacity as the first education assistant official of the Governor’s Office, invited Demendoza to serve as the vice-chancellor of the academy. He planned to entrust Demendoza with the tasks of recruiting students and handling translation and communication.

Demendoza did not dare to refuse and brought several of his attendants, all of whom were proficient in various languages. They would serve as translators and language instructors at the academy.

Since Olaf and the Grand Governor’s Office had proposed the goal of training doctors in Vinland, and knowing that being a doctor would be a promising profession in Vinland’s future, most families of indentured white slaves saw it as a viable path for their children.

After the completion of Qinghe Academy, Song Qinghe and Demendoza only needed to promote it once to attract over a hundred children from families of indentured white slaves. However, the youngest among these boys were only six or seven years old, while the oldest were in their late teens. Very few of them were literate.

After attempting to teach them for a few days, Song Qinghe, frustrated, sought out Demendoza and said, “Brother De, the younger children are manageable. Apart from the ancient Norse language taught by you and the instructors you’ve brought, my disciple and I can teach them the Three Character Classic and other introductory texts. In a few years, they should be ready to study the classics and medicine. But the older ones are quite dull—they can’t remember anything we teach them!”

Demendoza thought for a moment and replied, “The Count has said that our duty as education assistants is to cultivate talent. The younger children are more malleable. I think we should focus more on them, nurturing a few knowledgeable individuals to succeed us. As for the older children, even if they can’t learn much, we can simplify the curriculum. In three to five years, we can train them in a specific skill, allowing them to join the Count’s five-year plan.”

“What do you mean?” Song Qinghe asked, confused. “Teach them what?”

“Our five-year plan for Vinland aims to develop public healthcare, doesn’t it? I’ve heard the Count say he plans to hire more doctors from the Ming Dynasty and Arabia. At the same time, he wants our academy to train more doctors. It would take over ten years to train these young children into qualified doctors, right? But the Viking Legion needs military medics. What if we train these older children to become military medics?”

Song Qinghe pondered for a moment and said, “If we’re training military medics, we don’t need to teach them the Four Books and Five Classics. We can focus on teaching them how to treat wounds, detoxify, and handle plagues and other special ailments. It could be a fast-track program. However…”

As a Confucian scholar, Song Qinghe felt that running an academy solely to teach medicine was somewhat beneath their potential. But Demendoza was a thorough pragmatist. Hearing Song Qinghe’s assessment, he laughed heartily and said in somewhat broken Minnan dialect, “That’s perfect! Lord Olaf wants the five-year construction plan to succeed. We can take our time cultivating literary talents at the academy, but we need to hurry with the military medics. If we can train a large number of military medics within five years, Lord Olaf will be very pleased, and our futures will be bright!”

Song Qinghe and his disciple, who were deeply concerned about their political prospects, listened and nodded in agreement after some thought.

Thus, the students at Qinghe Academy were divided into classes. The clever children under ten years old were selected to study Confucian classics, Chinese studies, and basic medicine daily. The children over ten and the less bright ones under ten were combined into two large classes. Song Qinghe and his disciple taught them the basics of medical theory and how to treat injuries, sword wounds, and illnesses like cold damage.

With this arrangement, Qinghe Academy transformed from its previous chaotic state. Each day, more than a dozen teachers instructed the students in ancient Norse, Chinese studies, and medicine. The children gradually made progress.

By September, adhering to the principle of unity of knowledge and action, Song Qinghe decided to take the students to identify Chinese herbs and search for useful medicinal plants in Vinland. In early September, he applied for a large ship and, accompanied by over eighty students from the accelerated military medic class, set off for Quebec City. They planned to explore the nearby forests, search for herbs, and teach the disciples how to identify medicinal plants through practical experience.

Over the course of half a month, Song Qinghe and his disciple led the students through hundreds of miles in the Quebec region. They discovered over a dozen useful herbs and researched the effects of maple syrup in replenishing blood, benefiting vital energy, and treating constipation and heartburn.

However, the most exciting discovery for Song Qinghe and his disciple was the American ginseng they found in the mountainous forests north of Quebec, which closely resembled the wild ginseng from the Changbai Mountains in the Northeast.

A month earlier, Song Qinghe had heard Olaf mention that Vinland had a medicinal plant similar to the ginseng found in the Changbai Mountains of the Ming Dynasty’s Northeast. Now, they had finally found it.

Due to the rise of the Jurchens, the price of wild ginseng and Korean ginseng in the Ming Dynasty had been increasing year by year. This tonic and medicinal herb had become a top-tier medicinal material, comparable to snow lotus and lingzhi. Especially the wild mountain ginseng that was hundreds or even thousands of years old, which was worth a fortune.

Song Qinghe and his disciple collected over a dozen wild mountain ginseng plants, each hundreds of years old, from the deep mountains and old forests. They carefully wrapped them in red cloth, planning to dry them in the shade, keep some for their own use, and give the rest to Olaf.

After returning to Quebec, Song Qinghe spent two days lecturing his awestruck disciples on the preparation and use of medicinal materials. Finally, he led everyone back to Hrut City and personally brought the dried ginseng to Haldor City to present to Olaf.

Taking the wild mountain ginseng prepared by Song Qinghe, Olaf asked, “I’ve been too busy lately. I was thinking of having you compare Vinland’s ginseng with that from the Changbai Mountains. If they’re similar, can it be used as medicine? Can we sell some to the Ming Dynasty?”

Song Qinghe nodded and smiled, “I’ve already tested it. Vinland’s ginseng is similar in species to the wild ginseng from the Northeast, and their medicinal properties are also similar. However, the methods of preparation and consumption differ. Overall, it’s a high-quality medicinal material comparable to the wild ginseng from the Changbai Mountains.”

Olaf smiled slightly and said, “Then I ask Master Song to train a ginseng harvesting team. That way, Vinland will have a steady supply of ginseng.”

Song Qinghe pondered for a moment and said, “I’m not very skilled in ginseng harvesting, but there’s no one else available, so I’ll have to do my best. The climate and temperature of the Quebec Mountains are similar to those of the Changbai Mountains. I roughly estimate there might be tens of thousands of wild ginseng plants there. If we take only one percent, it will be enough for our own use.”

Olaf was always extremely tolerant and friendly to those who could help him. He took Song Qinghe’s hand and smiled, “I rely on your assistance, Master Song. Stay today, and let’s have a few drinks.”

Song Qinghe was quite moved and nodded, “It’s just my duty. I’m imposing on you, Lord. I’ll take this opportunity to report on the academy’s opening and the students’ progress…”

Chapter 299: Forging Weapons

August and September were the warmest months in Vinland. Although this year’s spring had been colder than usual, the brief summer and autumn still brought their customary comfort.

By the end of August, the expansion of Haldor City was nearly complete. Public toilets, canals, and roads were already in use, and various factories had begun production.

However, due to several malfunctions in the smelting plant’s blast furnaces, production had been halted for over ten days for repairs. It wasn’t until September that the foundry finally had sufficient iron, copper, and charcoal to resume operations.

Since Olaf had deliberately selected indentured white slaves with skills this year, there were no shortage of artisans among them from Germany and Ireland. Among these, there were hundreds of blacksmiths alone.

Olaf had reassigned these hundreds of blacksmiths to the foundry in Haldor City, tasking them with producing agricultural tools, blades, and smoothbore muskets for Vinland.

Given the constant wars in Europe, the manufacturing process for firearms was not particularly complex before the introduction of rifling. Many German artisans were skilled in crafting firelock muskets and the slightly more challenging flintlock muskets. However, since each component had to be handmade, efficiency was inevitably low.

Iceland was dotted with volcanoes, making sulfur abundant. Vinland, on the other hand, boasted vast forests, allowing for a steady supply of charcoal from logging. However, saltpeter was a rare mineral across Europe and North America.

Sweden, a powerful nation, possessed high-quality iron and saltpeter mines, enabling them to train an elite army even in harsh conditions. Other countries, lacking saltpeter and sulfur, had to purchase them or find alternative sources, such as extracting them from toilets or saline-alkali lands.

For Vinland to have its own arsenal, it naturally needed its own gunpowder factory to produce ammunition. This time, Olaf had brought back some Icelandic sulfur. Charcoal could be sourced locally, while saltpeter could be obtained by scraping the surface soil from public toilets, cesspools, and Shahalimnir Breeding Farm across various Vinland city-states and boiling it down to extract saltpeter.

Olaf believed that as long as the foundry could make good use of the iron and copper ingots from the smelting plant to produce usable firearms, the next step would be to appoint an assistant officer for saltpeter collection. This officer would gather saltpeter soil from toilets, pigsties, and other places across the land. Then, Vinland’s gunpowder factory could quickly open for business.

On September 13th, Olaf was taking a nap with Sally in the courtyard of the red maple forest at the center of Haldor City when Halik’s voice suddenly called out from outside.

“Olaf! The foundry manager, Val, has arrived. He’s brought some newly made firelock muskets and flintlock muskets.”

Olaf suddenly sat up from the bed, gently patting Sally’s smooth back, and whispered, “I’m going out. You keep sleeping.”

Sally murmured in her sleep, and then Olaf smiled slightly, put on his clothes, and pushed the door open.

At the door stood an Indian slave girl attending to Sally. Olaf gave her a few instructions before going downstairs. He saw Halik standing excitedly in the living room and teased, “Look at you, so eager. Haven’t you seen a firearm before?”

Halik scratched his head and said, “I’ve seen firearms before, and I know how to use them, but we’ve never seen firearms made in Vinland before.”

Olaf smiled slightly and asked, “Where’s Val?”

“Waiting in the outer hall. The Maple Palace will be the seat of the Grand Governor’s Office in the future, even more important than Haldor’s fortress. Song Qinghe has already said to strengthen the security of the Maple Palace, so from now on, only those above the rank of governor can enter,” Halik said, pointing to a row of stone and wood structures in the front courtyard.

Olaf nodded and said, “Let him come in. Val is one of our Icelandic Vikings, a fellow countryman who immigrated to Vinland last year. We can’t be too arrogant and rude.”

Halik nodded and said, “I know, he’s your cousin, but don’t you dislike him?”

Olaf looked at the honest Halik, shook his head, and said, “Val is my aunt’s son. Although my aunt’s family is quite vulgar and rude, they are still my relatives. I should take better care of them in the future. Alright, enough said. Go and let him in quickly.”

After Haldor successfully staged a coup and became the Grand Duke, relatives and old friends all came to Big Port seeking favors. Haldor assigned positions based on their abilities, but his younger sister, Demun, was physically disabled, and her husband was a drunkard fisherman. Their three children—the eldest daughter was disabled, and the other son and daughter were of average ability. To prevent resentment from the leaders across Iceland, Haldor gave Demun’s family some money and advised them to move to Vinland. He also told Olaf to allocate land and servants to them, planning to support the family with Vinland’s land and slaves.

But when Olaf returned this time, his cousin Val was not content with just being a landowner. He thought that since Olaf and the Governor of Vinland were cousins, he should be given an official position. Later, Olaf learned that Val had studied blacksmithing for a few days, so he appointed him as the manager of the foundry, which satisfied the entire family.

As Olaf was thinking about this relative, the short-statured Val entered, accompanied by two workers carrying a large wooden box.

The two workers put down the box and knelt on one knee in front of Olaf. Val also bowed slightly and said, “Cousin, take a look at the firearms we’ve just finished polishing at the foundry. These were made under my careful supervision. If you expect those poor devils to work hard and carefully, you’re dreaming. I…”

Val was uneducated and quite blunt, making Olaf frown as he listened. He quickly waved his hand and said, “How many flintlock muskets and firelock muskets have you made? Have you tested them? Can they fire properly?”

Val was taken aback for a moment and quickly said, “We need to test them. I haven’t tested them yet, but there’s no need to test them. I’ve supervised every step, so the quality is definitely good.”

Olaf looked at Halik and said, “Have someone test them to see how they perform. Compare them to the firearms we bought from Holland.”

After Halik agreed, he picked up the box and went out. A moment later, several gunshots rang out from outside the window, followed by Halik’s loud voice: “Olaf, the guns can fire. They’re not bad to use, but one of the flintlock muskets has a problem with the ignition. It took three shots to fire…”

Olaf glanced at Val and said, “Take that problematic flintlock musket back and have the artisans take a good look at what’s causing the issue. We need to improve the quality in the future.”

Val nodded repeatedly and said through gritted teeth, “Don’t worry, cousin. I’ll go back and scold them! Otherwise, I’ll deduct their wages! Tsk, they dare to deceive us. Don’t these slaves know who the master of Vinland is?”

Olaf shook his head inwardly but knew that there were very few people he could trust and who were capable. So he forced a stiff smile and said, “Val, my dear cousin, you must understand that everything in Vinland is just getting started. The foundry is the arsenal of Vinland and Iceland, the most important place. You must buckle down and help me and Vinland produce firearms and blades. If you do a good job, you can be promoted, become wealthy, and even be granted a title of nobility.”

Val’s face lit up with joy upon hearing Olaf’s words. He said delightedly, “Olaf, don’t worry. I swear to God that I won’t embezzle a single copper coin from the foundry, and I won’t let the workers slack off. I’ll definitely make you proud. Entrusting the foundry to me is a testament to our bond and your trust in my abilities. I…”

Olaf talked with Val for a while before having someone send him away. Then he said to Halik, “Send someone to tell Heiner to start researching the collection of saltpeter immediately and prepare to open a gunpowder factory. Now that our foundry in Vinland can mass-produce firearms, the production of ammunition must keep up.”

Halik had some objections to Olaf’s impatience and suggested, “I can send someone right away, but Val just said that even if the workers in the foundry are skilled, they can only produce two firelock muskets or one flintlock musket in ten days. I estimate that they can’t produce a hundred guns in a month. The gunpowder factory doesn’t need to be rushed. You can talk to Heiner about it tomorrow.”

“True…”

Olaf thought for a moment and said, “By the way, I need to go to the foundry tomorrow to see if we can establish a set of standardized part numbers for production. Then, we can have the workers divide the labor in an assembly line fashion and finally assemble and polish everything together. This will definitely be much more efficient than having one worker handle everything from making parts to assembly and polishing.”

Halik didn’t understand what Olaf meant but just nodded and said, “Alright, I’ll prepare the horses early tomorrow morning.”

Chapter 300: News from Europe

The next morning, Olaf woke up under Sally’s care and enjoyed a breakfast of maple syrup cheese bread, followed by a hearty lamb chop. Soon after, Heiner arrived.

After wiping his mouth and beard clean with a handkerchief, Olaf mounted his elk, Haysen, and set off for the foundry with Heiner and Halik.

At the foundry, Olaf inspected the workshops under the guidance of his cousin, Val. He observed the workers hammering away at the furnaces and iron ingots, and even witnessed the process of using water-powered hammers to forge steel plates. These sights convinced Olaf that the foundry had indeed entered a phase of proper operation.

Half an hour later, Olaf, Heiner, Val, and over a dozen master blacksmiths from the foundry discussed the possibility of implementing an assembly line.

Olaf believed that a qualified blacksmith should master all processes, but training one took too long. The foundry could now divide the production of flintlock muskets into components like barrels, stocks, and triggers. Apprentices could quickly learn to produce these parts, while master craftsmen would assemble them. This method would undoubtedly increase production speed and volume.

Heiner, a traditional Scottish noble who had witnessed the rise of England’s new bourgeoisie in the textile industry, understood the benefits of Olaf’s proposed assembly line and fully supported it.

Val, however, lacked the knowledge to grasp the concept. Seeing the confusion on the faces of the master blacksmiths, he asked, “Cousin, isn’t our current production method good enough? The factory will stabilize flintlock musket production in a few days. Why do we need an assembly line?”

Olaf frowned slightly, but before he could respond, Halik’s deep voice boomed in rebuke: “Does the Governor need your approval for his actions? He is the incarnation of the divine. We mortals should just follow orders without question!”

Val’s face flushed red, then pale. He glanced fearfully at Halik’s towering figure and muttered, “I didn’t say I wouldn’t do it. Why are you so worked up?”

Heiner quickly stepped in to smooth things over, and the decision to divide the foundry into several production lines for flintlock musket components was finalized.

Vinland boasted vast lands and abundant resources. Upon careful search, materials like flint and saltpeter were plentiful. The iron mine now delivered ore to Haldor City weekly. With the assembly line in place, the foundry could produce flintlock firearms continuously. To ensure a steady supply of raw materials for the military factory, Olaf ordered Heiner to appoint several procurement officers to oversee the acquisition of all necessary materials.

Olaf also planned for the foundry to produce cannons in the future. He had various models of iron cannons unloaded from the ships and brought to the foundry for the blacksmiths to replicate.

A few days later, a series of autumn rains arrived as expected, cooling Vinland’s hot weather. This rain served as a final wash for crops like potatoes, sweet potatoes, corn, and squash before the harvest. Once the weather turned cold next month, the harvest would begin, regardless of the crops’ maturity.

Vinland’s extreme climate allowed only about five months of crop growth. Besides short-cycle crops like corn, potatoes, sweet potatoes, and squash, only small amounts of rye and oats could be cultivated.

With the harvest approaching, Olaf ordered the mobilization of all districts. Each area was to prepare livestock, tools, and labor for the harvest. Any shortages were to be reported immediately so the Grand Governor’s Office of Vinland could allocate resources.

As reports from various districts flooded into the newly built council hall in Haldor City, the ships Olaf had sent to Iceland and Greenland returned one after another.

The ship from Greenland arrived two days earlier due to its closer proximity.

Olaf received many Greenlandic specialties from Pikku, including countless furs and dried fish, as well as large quantities of deer cheese, whale skin, whale oil, whalebone, and walrus ivory.

Greenland, with its vast and sparsely populated land and harsh environment, showed no significant changes even after last winter’s extreme cold.

For the Inuit natives who had lived in Greenland for centuries, the cold was never the limiting factor. They had ways to survive even the harshest winters. However, the extreme cold limited their environment, forcing them to rely on hunting and fishing. This lifestyle and the scarcity of resources made rapid population growth impossible in Greenland.

But since Pikku became governor and received annual support of timber and food from Vinland, the situation in the Greenland colony had completely reversed.

With a small population and ample food, Nuuk had no worries. Thus, last year’s cold snap did not significantly harm Nuuk. The Inuit’s hunted furs and meat were stored through trade with the colony’s potatoes, sweet potatoes, and other foods.

As the designated meat and fur supply base for Vinland and Iceland, Greenland had fully played its role this year, providing Vinland with more precious goods than ever before.

Olaf and Heiner made a rough estimate. The seals and sea lion furs alone were worth over a hundred thousand shillings. Adding other furs, dried fish, meat, cheese, and expensive whale products, Greenland had returned over a million Dutch guilders to Vinland this year. This amount could almost replicate the Icelandic navy if spent on warships and arms.

Olaf verbally commended Pikku from afar and ordered all goods to be stored. Next spring, half would be sent to Iceland.

While Olaf and Heiner were pleased with the substantial goods from Vinland, the merchant ships returning from Iceland also arrived in Haldor City.

Olaf received letters from his father, Haldor, his mother, Katrin, and other relatives. There were also over a thousand letters from Vikings in Iceland to their relatives who had migrated to Vinland.

After reading the letters, Olaf gained a clear understanding of this year’s events in Europe and the outcome of the decade-long war that had consumed the continent’s attention.

In mid-July, the Treaty of Prague was signed after three or four rounds of negotiations. The Protestant League had ultimately defeated the Catholic League. The end of the talks marked the freedom for any European nation to choose the Protestant faith without a unified sect. The previously fragmented Protestants now had the continent’s strongest kingdom as their backbone. Following the signing of the Treaty of Prague, the Protestant sects collectively bestowed an honorary title upon Gustavus Adolphus II—Protector of the Protestants.

Gustavus Adolphus II gladly accepted and soon issued orders to protect Protestants in the Swedish United Kingdom and German regions.

The contents of the Treaty of Prague were not publicly disclosed, but the various rumors spreading through Iceland revealed most of its details.

Although the Protestant League had won overall, Sweden’s pivotal role in the war and its absorption of Wallenstein’s army gave it an overwhelming military advantage post-war. Thus, during negotiations, Gustavus Adolphus II and Oxenstierna were exceptionally dominant and overbearing.

Though the Habsburgs ceded land and vassal state rights, Sweden took over 60% of the benefits.

France only secured parts of the Savoy Duchy under the Holy Roman Empire, the entire Upper Lorraine Duchy, and some free cities in the treaty, totaling an area comparable to the Saxony Duchy.

Holland gained independence from the Holy Roman Empire and France. Among the German princes, the Saxony and Prussia Duchies were the most devoted to the Protestant League. Although Saxony had sent troops to the Catholic Union, both duchies still requested Gustavus Adolphus II to cede adjacent lands to them during the Prague talks.

The final news indicated that Saxony and Prussia received some land, though not as much as they had hoped. Facing the Lion King’s arrangements, the two grand dukes had no choice but to accept reality.

Sweden emerged as the biggest winner post-war, with France as the second. England and Denmark, though part of the Protestant League, gained nothing.

The treaty not only clarified France and Sweden’s expansion and control over German territories but also reduced the Habsburgs’ influence to just southern Europe. Holland also gained full independent sovereignty.

Only Denmark and England came away empty-handed, which was not surprising.

As the first leader of the Protestant League, Denmark had fought hard but failed. Now, Sweden’s rise had overshadowed Denmark. Even with envoys actively negotiating in Prague, Gustavus Adolphus II’s desire to suppress Denmark meant that the Holstein Duchy, which Denmark had long coveted, remained under German jurisdiction and was swallowed by Sweden.

England, being an island nation, only sought to prevent European unification and the rise of strong nations. Since it had only contributed financially, the Treaty of Prague brought no substantial benefits.

Denmark, however, had contributed both money and manpower, nearly reducing its own country to ruins and forcing the people of the Jutland Peninsula to eat grass roots.

Despite such sacrifices, Denmark gained nothing from the Protestant League’s victory, especially the Holstein Duchy, which it had infiltrated for centuries and even controlled during the war. Located at the southern tip of the Jutland Peninsula, it was the only German duchy bordering Denmark. Denmark’s desire to annex this land had existed for three to four hundred years, but despite their efforts, it was snatched by Sweden.

Olaf found Denmark’s outcome—losing both the battle and the prize—amusing. He couldn’t help but wonder if Christian IV in the Copenhagen palace would be furious upon learning the results of the Treaty of Prague.

Olaf was not surprised that the war between the Protestant and Catholic Leagues ended earlier than in history. With Gustavus Adolphus II alive, Sweden was bound to dominate for a time.

However, the Habsburgs had suffered a worse defeat than he remembered. If England knew that their meddling, while suppressing the Habsburgs, had led to the rise of another powerful nation on the European continent, Charles I and the English privy council might already be regretting their actions or plotting against Sweden.

Chapter 301: Hongrode’s Visit

With historical precedents from various nations as reference, Olaf possessed an uncanny insight into Europe’s political landscape. He understood that while the Protestant world appeared victorious and the Swedish United Kingdom had risen to become Europe’s foremost power, Sweden’s ascent also marked the transformation of the dragon-slayer into a dragon itself.

Given Sweden’s population constraints and its neighbors—Russia and Poland—the Swedish United Kingdom lacked the true strength to dominate other nations. Its rise as the savior of Protestantism was largely due to Gustavus Adolphus II’s exceptional military prowess.

Olaf was convinced that if anything were to happen to Gustavus Adolphus II—whether illness, old age, or death—within a decade or two, Sweden would immediately become the target of England, France, and the Habsburgs, with Denmark, Poland, Russia, and others joining the fray. England, France, and Austria would not rest until Sweden was utterly defeated.

Denmark, Poland, and Russia were pragmatic; they did not want their neighbors to grow too powerful.

Thus, while Europe enjoyed temporary peace, it was a peace built solely upon Gustavus Adolphus II’s authority and military might. Once this lion fell, a storm of war would sweep across Europe with even greater ferocity.

Olaf took Europe’s situation seriously, but he also knew that with peace in Europe, nations like England, France, and Holland would intensify their infiltration and support of North American colonies. Vinland, under his rule, would face new challenges.

Olaf feared that Vinland’s favorable position might shift due to the influx of English and French colonists in North America. However, with the end of Europe’s wars, he had lost the courage to launch a war to annex Virginia.

To control the colonial development of England, France, and Holland without pushing Vinland into direct opposition with them, Olaf began discussing with Heiner how to engage and communicate with the colonists of these three nations.

While Olaf and Heiner were deep in discussion, three galleons flying the Icelandic cross flag entered Haldor Harbor.

But when the people on board revealed their identities, the White Wolf soldiers and Viking militia at the docks did not welcome them warmly. Instead, they raised their firearms, blockaded the three ships, and sent someone to Maple Palace.

Olaf and Heiner soon learned that three Danish merchant ships had disguised themselves as Icelandic vessels to enter Haldor Harbor. The two quickly led the militia to the docks.

Upon arriving, Olaf met the leader of the merchant ships and discovered that the dock guards had overreacted without proper verification. The owner of these three Danish ships was Elder Hongrode.

Hongrode was Danish, but he was also a founding hero of Iceland, a loyal subject who continued to provide goods and information to Iceland. He was a mentor and friend to Haldor and a respected elder to Olaf.

Olaf and Hongrode embraced warmly at the docks, then Olaf and Heiner invited Hongrode to rest at Maple Palace.

Over coffee, the three exchanged pleasantries for a while before Hongrode chuckled, “I never expected that in just a few years, you, Olaf, would grow so much and achieve great deeds on the European battlefield. Truly impressive! Even now, when I recall my decision to support your family, I can’t help but admire my own foresight.”

Olaf laughed, “I assure you, Elder, that you will be proud of your decision, and that pride will only grow with time.”

Hongrode’s slightly plump face beamed with a smile as he said, “Last time I came, my luck was poor—I arrived just as you were leading your army back to Europe. I wanted to discuss my company’s trade activities with Vinland, but I only managed to buy some dried fish and furs before leaving. This year, I went to the East Indies, traveling from Danish India to Dutch India, and even visited Batavia in the East Indies. I brought back plenty of spices, porcelain, and silk. Thinking I still had time, I came here again, and finally, I’ve seen you…”

Olaf caught the implication in Hongrode’s words and quickly said, “The Duke also told me that you are one of us and allowed your fleet to trade in Vinland, instructing me to take care of you. Last time, I wasn’t here, so I neglected you. Please forgive me.”

Hongrode hastily waved his hand, “Count, you are too kind. This time, I’ve brought some spices, fabrics, and livestock—things I thought Vinland might need. Later, you and Mr. Heiner can list Vinland’s requirements. My fleet will come to Vinland twice a year, delivering the goods you need and purchasing Vinland’s specialties like beaver pelts, seal skins, walrus ivory, whale hides, whale oil, malt sugar, and liquor. What do you think?”

“In the future, Iceland and Vinland will rely heavily on your help, Elder. Your caravans can trade freely in Haldor City, and the prices don’t have to be as high as those of the English and French. For furs, liquor, malt sugar, and other goods, we can offer a ten percent discount…”

Olaf knew that merchants sought profit, and Hongrode’s support for Iceland’s independence was also to gain access to Vinland’s vast market. So he readily agreed and stated the terms of their arrangement.

Hongrode was very pleased with Olaf’s attitude and smiled, “Good! You are indeed straightforward, Olaf. Rest assured, the goods my fleet brings each year will also be at cost price.”

Olaf hosted Hongrode at Maple Palace for two days. During this time, Heiner traded all the spices, linen, and silk on Hongrode’s ships for liquor and malt sugar. They also purchased a large batch of furs, whale oil, and ivory sent from Greenland, earning over ten thousand marks in silver and three thousand gold marks.

Hongrode was very satisfied with Olaf’s hospitality and even more pleased with the trade agreement between his family and Olaf’s Vinland. After agreeing to help Vinland find mathematicians, scientists, writers, poets, and artists in Europe next year, Hongrode left Haldor City with the procurement list Olaf had given him for next year’s trade. He also prepared to represent Denmark in exploring suitable islands for colonization in the West Indies.

Hongrode was not only an unofficial minister of Iceland but also a key figure in the Danish East India Company and a member of a traditional Danish noble family. For the past two years, he had been tasked by King Christian IV with an important mission for the East India Company: to find suitable locations in the West Indies for colonization, thereby increasing Denmark’s sugar and other related product revenues.

In Europe’s civilization of small nations, all countries needed to exchange goods. In this age of great navigation, a hundred years after its beginning, any ambitious king sought to establish overseas colonies for their nation.

As the king of a traditional maritime power, Christian IV had, since his accession, sought to establish effective colonies in the East and West Indies. He had even founded the Greenland Company in name only, aiming to bring Greenland back under Danish-Norwegian rule. However, the resources required to send effective hunting parties to govern Greenland made the Greenland Colonization Company a losing venture. Thus, Denmark had only established one colony in India, while the West Indies and Greenland remained mere verbal claims.

Olaf was aware of Hongrode’s responsibilities, but considering Denmark’s historical lack of presence in overseas colonization, he did not feel alarmed. He simply planned to observe from the sidelines.

Chapter 302: Vinland Minting

After Hongrode’s fleet departed, the goods in Haldor City’s cellar warehouse had decreased by thirty percent, but the gold and silver in the Grand Governor’s Office had increased by several crates. Even Sally, the seasoned steward who had seen much of the world, was thrilled, her eyes gleaming as she repeatedly exclaimed, “We’ve struck it rich!”

Olaf gazed at the vast amounts of gold and silver in the Maple Palace warehouse and suddenly remembered his plan to establish “Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns” across Vinland.

The total population of all regions in Vinland currently stood between two hundred thousand and three hundred thousand. However, about eighty percent were slaves or primitive people living in forest settlements. Only the Vikings and indentured white slaves, totaling around forty thousand, were integrated into urban life and needed to purchase various daily necessities.

Previously, Vinland had suffered from a scarcity of resources. Whether slaves, natives, or Vikings, their primary concern was securing food and clothing. It was only in the past two years that the Viking raid leaders had accumulated some gold and silver currency through agriculture and hunting.

Olaf was well aware that Vinland was merely a colony. Although it now had a government and officials at various levels in name, it was not a complete society. However, with the recent influx of Vikings and indentured white slaves, continuing barter trade in Vinland would be detrimental to social development and, more importantly, to Olaf’s control over Vinland’s economic lifeline.

As more people from civilized societies poured into Vinland, its society would enter a period of rapid development. Outdated commercial practices would inevitably be phased out, making the establishment of a clear currency system necessary.

Although Iceland had been established for over two years, its small population and lack of gold and silver mines meant it still relied on currencies circulating in the Baltic Sea region and gold, silver, and copper coins from countries like England and Holland.

Vinland was different from Iceland. Olaf believed that the gold and silver in his warehouse, along with the copper, gold, and silver continuously smelted in Haldor’s factory, could serve as Vinland’s current and future currency. He even considered unifying the currency of Iceland with that of Vinland, using gold, silver, and copper mined in Vinland.

Currency was the most crucial tool for a government or even a nation to control the national economy. Olaf, aspiring to build a Vinland Empire, was naturally reluctant to give up the opportunity to implement independently minted currency.

Considering that Heiner had already selected over a hundred men and women from the Icelandic Vikings who knew some mathematics and placed them in church schools to be taught arithmetic formulas and basic English, German, and Latin by the two elderly priests, DeGula and Duca.

Olaf thought he could have the hydraulic hammers in the foundry strike some copper, gold, and silver coins as Vinland’s unique currency. However, considering the content of metal currency, Olaf felt it necessary to consult professionals to make the content of Vinland’s currency as close as possible to the Dutch guilder. This would facilitate exchange in foreign trade, as Holland was currently the most developed financial center in Europe.

Olaf had always been a man of action. He took some Dutch guilders of different denominations from his home, mounted Haysen, and, under the protection of Halik and others, left the Maple Palace.

On one side of the river beside Haldor City stood a factory built with stones, clay, and massive logs. The tall chimney emitted rolling black smoke daily, and the stone walls resonated with loud noises. Especially the waterwheel in the water, which continuously turned, providing endless labor for the factory.

Olaf found two craftsmen in the foundry who understood the principles of the coin press. He promoted them to deputy factory managers. They would continue to assist Val in their daily work, but whenever the Governor’s Office needed to make coins, they would lead the workers in pressing them.

The coin press wasn’t difficult to make. By modifying the hydraulic hammer used for making plate armor, they could press thin sheets of copper, gold, and silver into coins with patterns and numbers.

In this era, currency didn’t have many variations; it was merely about the purity of the precious metals being higher or lower.

However, due to the limited discovery of minerals over the centuries, European currency counterfeiters mostly added copper to gold coins and tin to silver coins. Essentially, they used known metals with similar colors to replace gold and silver. But since copper and tin were significantly different from gold and silver, even slightly attentive merchants could distinguish real from fake money. Inferior counterfeit coins could also be identified for their quality and discounted in transactions.

Vinland had gold, silver, and copper mines that could continuously produce precious metals for Olaf. To ensure Vinland’s currency had international influence, he decided to mint it according to the composition ratio of the Dutch guilder.

A few days later, Val and the two deputy managers excitedly presented Olaf with a crate of brand-new copper, gold, and silver coins.

Olaf took a quick look. Among the three types of coins, there were only a few dozen gold and silver coins, but nearly a thousand copper coins. These were likely all the gold, silver, and copper ingots that Sally had sent to the foundry a few days ago.

Olaf reached out and grabbed a handful of copper coins, carefully examining the dark and smooth surface. He felt the uneven patterns, squinting at the simple Icelandic national emblem on one side and the number 5 on the other.

After examining the gold and silver coins, Olaf nodded with a smile and said, “Not bad. The equipment is outdated, but the craftsmanship is quite fine. In the future, copper coins will be made in three denominations of 1, 5, and 10 based on size and weight. Silver and gold coins will also use the same denominations of 1, 5, and 10, but the units will be called silver krona and gold krona.”

The three leaders of the foundry, fearing they might forget, quickly took out charcoal pencils and notebooks from their pockets, jotting down the information before bowing and retreating.

The term “krona” had not yet been adopted as a currency unit in the Nordic region. However, in Danish and Icelandic, the word meant “crown” and “gold,” implying the most precious and noble. In Olaf’s previous life, the currency units of the five Nordic countries were basically krona, so he knew that this term would be most acceptable to countries within the ancient Norse language range. Considering the future unification of Vinland and Iceland’s currencies and even introducing the Vinland currency system into other Nordic countries, Olaf decided to use “krona.”

…

Entering September, Vinland’s weather remained as hot and dry as in August, but the rainfall became more abundant, especially on Vinland Island, where precipitation was always higher than on the mainland.

The gold, silver, and copper coins that Olaf had been eagerly anticipating had now been minted in several dozen crates, and the gold bars, silver ingots, and copper blocks in his warehouse were nearly depleted.

Heiner, who understood Olaf’s thoughts, arrived at the Maple Palace early one morning with several Icelandic men in their twenties and thirties.

After exchanging greetings, Heiner pointed to the four young men and smiled, “Governor, these are the young Vikings I selected with the best mathematical skills and the most literacy. They are all from Iceland and can be trusted. If you are satisfied, the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns can be entrusted to their management in the future.”

Olaf looked at them, and they hastily bowed in greeting. Olaf’s gaze lingered for a moment on the face of a sturdy, tall, and simple young man before smiling and saying, “You are Big-Head Olin?”

The young man grinned and said, “Yes, Lord Olaf. I didn’t expect you to remember me. We used to wrestle a lot back then.”

As he spoke, Olin seemed to boast slightly, glancing at the others beside him.

Olaf laughed and waved his hand, “Please, everyone, take a seat.”

After everyone sat down, Olaf asked them some simple mathematical questions. Seeing their bright eyes and appropriate responses, he was very satisfied and said, “Heiner, you arrange it. These people can handle things independently.”

Heiner also nodded in satisfaction, “Good. I will draft a list of positions for you to review later. I estimate that by the end of the month, the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns in the thirteen cities of Vinland’s Nine Districts can open. I plan to purchase a few ships for the supply and marketing company. For now, the Governor’s Office will provide the capital. Once the taverns become profitable, they will repay us with interest at a monthly rate of three percent.”

Chapter 303: Advancing into the Heart of North America

Heiner’s abilities and knowledge made him the person Olaf trusted and relied on the most.

Olaf was highly satisfied with Heiner’s arrangements for the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns, and with a grand gesture, he approved all requests for funds, goods, and ships.

After all the details were settled, Olaf pointed to the box beside him and said, “These are the coins I had made—copper, silver, and gold. Take a look. The craftsmanship and weight are excellent. I plan to have the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns distribute these coins everywhere. Furs, grain, and dried meat can’t be stored easily and don’t have a standardized value. From now on, the taverns will price goods like linen, grain, pottery, porcelain, sugar, salt, spices, alcohol, and ironware according to our own currency. This will unify the system and help Vinland’s commerce develop. What do you think?”

Although Heiner had heard about Olaf’s coin minting days ago, he had been too busy to see them until now. Picking up a few coins, he weighed them in his hand, listening to the pleasant clinking sound. Smiling, he said, “Not bad. The craftsmanship isn’t as refined as English or Dutch coins, but it’s still good. The quality of the metal is excellent—these are first-rate coins.”

“Vinland should have its own currency,” Heiner continued. “Right now, Vikings and indentured white slaves trade using livestock as a measure, which is very inconvenient. But since there isn’t much commerce, they’ve managed. Now, with Vinland’s population growing, and more frequent contact with French, English, Dutch, and Danish merchant ships, our people must use currency. It’s not just convenient for us—it will also make tax collection and trade management easier.”

Olaf asked, “Should we establish a bank? It would make it easier for our people and foreign merchants to store and exchange money.”

Heiner thought for a moment before shrugging. “How many people do we have in Vinland? There are only a few dozen proper merchants, none of them major players, and our social structure isn’t fully developed. A bank wouldn’t be useful right now. In a few years, when the population grows and society prospers, that would be the right time. For now, if people want to exchange currency, we can handle it through the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns. We’re already sending coins to each tavern, so let them take charge of purchasing furs and goods with currency and managing exchanges between gold, silver, and copper coins. This saves manpower and makes management easier. When we’re ready to establish a bank, we can pull people from the taverns to make it happen.”

Olaf knew that Vinland’s biggest shortage was manpower. Currently, they were running four or five factories—mines, smelters, and foundries—along with the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns and Qinghe Academy. They had already recruited all the capable Vikings and indentured white slaves with any education or skills. The rest were either farming, herding, or being selected to work for Vinland’s newly established fishing company as hardworking fishermen.

Every sector was desperately short of hands. Vinland, still in its early stages of development, simply didn’t have the labor to turn Olaf’s ideas into reality.

This reality forced Olaf to calm down. He sighed inwardly, knowing that while he had grand ambitions for transforming and building Vinland, the biggest problem was the lack of people—not just educated talent, but skilled workers and ordinary laborers.

“Next year, we’ll have to increase our efforts to recruit white slaves from Germany, Ireland, and Scotland,” Olaf said with a cold humph. “Vinland’s population is still too small! If we had a million people, what couldn’t we accomplish?”

Heiner coughed lightly. “Our finances only allow us to recruit ten or twenty thousand indentured white slaves each year. Even with natural population growth, reaching a million would take at least twenty years. But if we accelerate our expansion on the mainland and capture more Indian slaves, we could shorten that time.”

Olaf looked at the map on the wall, which covered most of North America. Though somewhat distorted, the basic outlines were clear. He traced a large circle from the Iroquois westward and southward. “The interior of North America has a better climate than Quebec and Vinland, and there are more Indians there. Before winter, we can organize a large force to move south from Quebec, passing through the Iroquois to clear out the natives to the south and west. Then we can capture some obedient men, women, and children as slaves. This will increase our labor force, expand our territory, and even serve as excellent military training. It’s a win-win situation. Let’s have an autumn hunt before winter!”

The topic of territorial expansion came up again. Since occupying Quebec and the Abenaki two years ago, Vinland hadn’t expanded further. Olaf felt that this year, before winter, they could easily expand several hundred miles to the south and west, finding suitable land for next year’s cotton planting and supplementing the labor force for Vinland’s large-scale production and construction.

Heiner understood Olaf’s thoughts well, which was why he had brought up the subject. With a wave of his hand, he dismissed Big-Head Olin and the others, then leaned in to discuss military matters with Olaf.

Vinland currently stretched from Vinland Island in the east to the Arctic Circle in the north, the Great Lakes in the west, and Lake Erie and the Iroquois Plains in the south—a vast territory. After years of development, interactions with neighboring tribes were inevitable.

Tribes from the east to the Indian natives were all aware of the Vikings’ rapid expansion and martial prowess over the past few years. None dared to provoke them, let alone enter Vinland’s territory. This change surprised those who knew of the early struggles of the Plymouth, New Netherlands, and Virginia colonists living among the Indians. Clearly, the Indians weren’t inherently unwelcoming or submissive—the difference lay in the strength of their opponents.

In addition to earning the respect of their neighbors, Vinland also traded with them annually, exchanging salt, sugar, glass beads, ironware, and alcohol for beaver pelts, reindeer, buffalo hides, and bear pelts from the Indian tribes. The fur trade was the only stable source of income besides agriculture in the Iroquois, Quebec, and Huron regions. As a result, the local lords and Vikings involved in the trade were making fortunes, their faces flushed with success.

Olaf and Heiner learned of this situation soon after returning to Vinland. However, Olaf didn’t punish the Vikings for bypassing the Raid to trade furs privately. He merely imposed a light fine and then forgave them. This wasn’t because Olaf was particularly magnanimous, but because he ordered these Vikings to redeem themselves by continuing to engage with nearby Indian tribes and gathering intelligence for the Vinland Governor’s Office.

Nearly three months had passed since their return to Vinland. The Grand Governor’s Office had analyzed and summarized the reports from the Vikings in various regions, estimating the distribution, population, and combat strength of the surrounding Indian tribes. The conclusion was that although the Indian tribes in the interior of North America were more densely populated than those on the coast, Vinland’s six major legions possessed the strength to crush any native army. A single cavalry unit of five hundred could sweep across the entire North American continent. With the addition of two infantry legions and an artillery unit, they could conquer all the Indian city-states.

Thus, the governors of various regions were eager for battle, and the staff of the Grand Governor’s Office made it clear to Olaf that any military action would surely expand Vinland’s territory. Conquering all of North America was entirely feasible—the only question was when.

As Olaf and Heiner discussed their battle plans, they reviewed the logistics lists and several military strategies prepared by the Grand Governor’s Office staff. After five days of mobilization and preparation of military supplies, they finalized their decision to launch the campaign southward next Monday.

Chapter 304: The Expedition

September 26th, Monday. The sky was clear, with a gentle breeze brushing against the face. A light rain had fallen a few days prior, cooling the temperature in Haldor City. The people of Vinland now needed to add a thick outer layer in the mornings and evenings.

Though the scorching heat had gradually receded, Haldor City remained bustling with excitement.

The neat roads, paved with crushed stones, were lined with low houses. Not far away, the city center featured a large square, behind which lay a maple forest. Within the forest stood a somewhat modest three-story castle—Maple Palace, the residence of Vinland’s Governor and Count, Lord Olaf.

According to Olaf’s plan, Maple Palace was to be expanded into a square fortress covering over ten thousand square meters. However, due to time constraints and a shortage of labor in Vinland, only the southern gatehouse and bastions had been completed so far. Olaf temporarily resided there.

The streets of Haldor City were filled with soldiers dressed in linen robes and steel helmets. These soldiers, varying in height and complexion, stood in orderly formation in the square before Maple Palace, numbering over two thousand. Leading them were several knights mounted on tall horses, clad in half plate armor.

The Viking citizens of Haldor City gathered around the soldiers, eagerly discussing the potential gains from this expedition.

The indentured white slaves and native slaves, however, had no time or energy to pay attention to the assembled troops. Most had already gone to till the land, fell trees, or quarry stone. The few who remained in the city were burdened with heavy labor.

For the indentured white slaves and native slaves, the good life in Vinland was but a dream. Yet, the reason they did not resist or resent their situation was the possibility that, if they remained loyal and diligent, their dreams might one day come true.

After Olaf returned to Vinland, he dispatched five of the Six Vinland Legions to Quebec, Huron, Iroquois, Plymouth, and Abenaki to forage and garrison. These soldiers were scattered across various city-states, establishing military camps to assist local governors in maintaining order and defense.

More importantly, Olaf had adopted Song Qinghe’s strategy, planning to allocate land in the six major regions—Quebec, Huron, Iroquois, Plymouth, Abenaki, and Vinland Island—to establish military settlements. This would allow the six legions to become self-sufficient, ensuring their purity and loyalty while solving issues of supply and pay.

Vinland’s military consisted of Viking officers and slave soldiers. During battles, they were fully mobilized, but in peacetime, they were semi-mobilized. Apart from the Icelandic Viking cavalry, which was decent, the quality and combat effectiveness of the other legions did not satisfy Olaf.

Thus, Olaf had long intended to transform the Six Vinland Legions into professional forces, making them self-sufficient and detached from urban development. Apart from agricultural production, their lives would revolve around military training. Over time, their discipline and combat effectiveness would significantly improve, while also preventing them from becoming too entangled with local affairs, ensuring their loyalty to the Governor of Vinland.

Currently, all six legions had established simple camps on the land allocated by the Governor’s Office. Following the daily manual issued by the Governor’s Office, they trained, tilled the land, herded livestock, and felled trees, leading busy and fulfilling lives.

After Olaf and Heiner finalized their battle plan last week, they sent people to the six major military districts to select personnel. Since this operation did not require a large number of troops, only five hundred were drafted from each district. By yesterday afternoon, all personnel had arrived in Haldor City.

Neither Olaf nor Heiner planned to participate in this campaign. The commander chosen was Ilugi.

Ilugi was the oldest among Olaf’s companions, now twenty-one years old. His father had died in the first year of their arrival in Vinland, and he had since served as an Oarsman, gaining significant experience. Over the years, his ability to manage civilians and slaves had solidified, and his skill in leading troops in battle had grown. He was the only one among Olaf’s subordinates, apart from Brun and Polly, who could independently command an army.

Upon receiving his orders, Ilugi set out from Huron, personally leading the soldiers of the Huron Legion to Haldor City, where he received Olaf’s instructions for the southern expedition.

Ilugi wore a gray robe over his plate armor and rode a chestnut horse. He turned to look at the officers and soldiers beside and behind him, thinking of the weak and exploitable natives, his heart stirred with excitement. He murmured, “The time to build merit and achieve greatness has come. After this battle, who knows how many of our soldiers will rise to become Vikings? They will have land, women, and slaves, making the indentured white slaves and captives envious!”

The officers, recalling the eager expressions of their soldiers, couldn’t help but laugh.

“Haha… The general is right…”

“Who says otherwise? Our Viking raid rules are too good for these slaves…”

Amid the laughter, a group of knights emerged from the maple forest. Leading them was a burly man in a white robe, with golden hair, a golden beard, blue eyes, and fair skin—a handsome young man exuding masculinity. He rode a tall and docile moose, its antlers adorned with copper rings.

Behind the moose rider were more than a dozen sturdy knights. They rode their horses into the square, and Ilugi and the officers immediately dismounted, kneeling on one knee before the moose rider.

“Your servant Ilugi greets the Governor!”

“Your servant Hatchimus greets the Governor!”

“Your servant Oli greets the Governor!”

…

As the legion leaders knelt, the three thousand soldiers behind them also knelt, their heads bowed to the ground. Most of them were slaves, their status so low that their salute was the most profound.

Olaf laughed heartily, leaping down from Haysen’s back. He personally helped Ilugi and the others to their feet, patting their shoulders in encouragement. Finally, he stood before the kneeling soldiers and declared, “My dear soldiers, rise!”

With the clatter of armor, the soldiers stood up, their eyes filled with excitement as they gazed at the tall, majestic, and handsome Governor.

Olaf knew that the soldiers in the army were now devout followers of the Divine King Church, firmly believing that he and his son were prophets chosen by God. Thus, their loyalty to him had reached a fanatical level.

With a smile, he surveyed the crowd and nodded before speaking, “My dear soldiers! Comrades! You are about to represent Vinland in expanding new territories. This expedition is for honor, for changing your own fate, for saving the primitives who live in ignorance on the wild plains, and for our shared Vinland Dream!

Comrades, as per tradition, this expedition will be rewarded. Those who distinguish themselves will have their slavery terms reduced and may rise to become Vikings. Land, livestock, women, slaves—everything will be yours if you achieve greatness!”

Knowing that the soldiers’ education and understanding were limited, Olaf kept his words simple. Yet, to the three thousand soldiers, his speech was like heavenly music. The last few sentences particularly excited them, and they cheered loudly, eager to slaughter the natives on the mainland. Amid the chaotic cheers, a single word gradually emerged—“Battle!”

The unified shout grew louder and louder, eventually echoing through the sky, shaking the entire city of Haldor. The indentured white slaves and native slaves, who were busy with their work, heard the sound and looked on with envy.

The slaves were well aware that many of the veteran slaves who had joined the legions had already become Viking lords after participating in the European campaign. After this expedition, another large group would rise to become Viking lords. Seeing slaves like themselves become Vikings, no one could suppress their envy or even resentment…

Chapter 305: Crumbling Like Dry Wood

On the morning of September 26th at 10 o’clock, the Vinland Southern Expeditionary Force set sail from Haldor Harbor.

Accompanying the army were several dozen of the most outstanding students from Qinghe Academy. They carried high-proof liquor, medicinal herbs, and bandages made of hemp cloth, boiled, dried, and packed in leather pouches.

These students were the future military medics of Vinland and the first batch of trainee medics. Due to time constraints, their medical skills were still rudimentary. They could only handle simple external injuries and were unfamiliar with advanced techniques like bone-setting, amputation, or surgery.

Before their departure, Olaf had reassured them with a promise: on the battlefield, they would not be held accountable for any deaths. His goal was to relieve their pressure, allowing them to gain experience while saving as many wounded soldiers as possible.

After the Southern Expeditionary Force left, Haldor City returned to its usual tranquility. However, Olaf and Heiner remained busy, inspecting factories, shipyards, and farms daily, or traveling to Bakens City and Hrut City for oversight.

Beyond inspections, their primary focus was the final training and evaluation of personnel for the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns. By October, Olaf deemed the staff and goods of the taverns fully prepared. He ordered Heiner to account for the funds and merchandise in the warehouses and conscripted several hundred indentured white slaves and official slaves as laborers for the taverns. Under the leadership of Olin and others, all personnel and supplies were dispatched to various locations.

The Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns quickly established outposts in different regions and cities, meeting the Vikings’ demand for supplies. The Vinland currency, which Olaf had been promoting, began circulating as Vikings traded furs and other goods. Although only a minority of Vikings possessed wealth in Vinland society, commercial activities centered around the taverns were flourishing.

While managers from various taverns sent messengers to Haldor City with good news, Olaf also received a favorable report from Ilugi’s messenger.

Ilugi had stationed his large army in Iroquois territory, first sending troops to infiltrate nearby native tribes and winning over more than a dozen of the weakest tribes. Five days prior, he had led five hundred cavalry, two thousand musketeers, and five hundred artillerymen southward, accompanied by allied tribal forces, to attack the Prophet City, the stronghold of the Shawnee tribe—the most powerful tribe south of the Iroquois.

The Shawnee were the strongest tribe south of the Iroquois, with a more organized social structure and a larger population. They were a formidable tribe, even feared by the Iroquois.

The Shawnee were not only powerful but also open-minded. Over the past two years, they had actively engaged with the nearest white colony, Plymouth, trading furs for iron tools and expanding into the central and southern regions of the Appalachian Mountains.

On the North American continent, south of the Saint Lawrence River, lay a long mountain range that ran almost parallel to the coastline, separating the central plains from the coastal plains and plateaus. Consequently, most North American colonists had not ventured deep into the mountains, focusing instead on developing the coastal areas.

However, Olaf had always been eyeing the plains west of the Appalachian Mountains. This region was crisscrossed with waterways, lakes, and wetlands. Given time, it could be transformed into fertile farmland, suitable for growing crops north of the Iroquois. The plains west of the southern Appalachians were ideal for cultivating grapes and cotton.

Unfortunately, this land was currently occupied by the Shawnee and other native tribes, who had lived there for centuries and were the dominant force. Now, they faced their most critical challenge.

Before setting out, Ilugi had gathered intelligence on the central and southern Appalachians through tribes like the Mohicans and Cherokees. He had even managed to turn several outlying Shawnee tribes into traitors with liquor and malt sugar.

With local guides, Ilugi quickly obtained detailed information about the Shawnee and decided to lead his army directly to Prophet City, the stronghold of the Shawnee’s High Priest and Grand Chief.

Prophet City was an ancient city built by the Shawnee ancestors, home to tens of thousands of Shawnee and the heart of their tribe. It was located in a valley on the western side of the southern Appalachians.

For the hundreds of thousands of Indians living in the Appalachians, Prophet City was a great city. Generation after generation of prophets and chiefs had emerged from here. However, when Ilugi’s army suddenly appeared outside the city, the sound of gunfire and cannons shook the heavens. Within two days, Prophet City was breached by cannons and long guns.

Ilugi’s cavalry, musketeers, and artillerymen maintained discipline as they entered the city, but the over two thousand allied native warriors went on a rampage, looting and killing. Ilugi could not bear to watch and executed several dozen of the most violent warriors to suppress the chaos.

After capturing Prophet City, Ilugi immediately sent a messenger to report the good news to Olaf in Haldor City.

In Maple Palace, Olaf and Heiner questioned the messenger in detail before sending him away with Halik to receive his reward. Present in the hall were Olaf, Heiner, and Song Qinghe, who had just arrived with his students to treat Olaf’s illness.

Olaf had caught a chill the past two nights from not covering himself properly, leading to a fever. He cherished his health and had urgently summoned Song Qinghe.

Song Qinghe quickly stood up and offered his congratulations: “Congratulations, my lord! With your blessings, General Ilugi has crushed the Shawnee like dry wood. He is truly a legendary general. Vinland has expanded its territory to the south once more!”

Olaf coughed lightly and smiled, his voice heavy with a nasal tone: “Vinland’s martial spirit is strong. Defeating a native tribe is not difficult, but governing them is the real challenge.”

Song Qinghe asked in confusion: “Can’t we govern them like we did the Iroquois and Huron?”

Olaf shook his head gently: “The Shawnee have centuries of cultural heritage and a more complete social structure than the Iroquois or Huron. Governing them peacefully will not be easy.”

Olaf and Song Qinghe were speaking in Chinese, which Heiner did not understand. Heiner asked again in ancient Norse.

After Olaf repeated his conversation with Song Qinghe, Heiner smiled and said: “You’re right. The Shawnee will not submit easily. Many Shawnee outside Prophet City will flee westward to the plains. We must relocate the Mohicans, Huron, Iroquois, and other tribes to the areas around Prophet City. By diluting the Shawnee population and their language and culture with tribes loyal to us, the region will be completely under our control within a generation or two.”

Olaf nodded in agreement: “You’re right. That is indeed the best approach.”

Events unfolded as Heiner and Olaf had predicted. A few days later, reports from the front confirmed their suspicions.

After Prophet City was captured, the Shawnee near the Appalachians fled westward in large numbers. The natives’ exodus was massive, and Ilugi could not stop it. He could only intercept and capture some as slaves to supplement the labor force for the reconstruction of Prophet City.

Although the Shawnee were defiant, Ilugi coldly executed thousands of rebellious or troublesome Shawnee slaves. Eventually, the Shawnee were either killed or fled, leaving behind only those who were too terrified to resist, like quails.

Ilugi turned a blind eye to the Shawnee’s escape, knowing that their large population would be a hindrance to Vinland’s future rule. If a significant number fled now, the remaining compliant natives mixed with new settlers would not form a majority, and Prophet City could become a new district and city of Vinland.

The deliberate leniency of the Vinland Southern Expeditionary Force accelerated the Shawnee’s flight. Within half a month, the Shawnee in the southern Appalachians were nearly gone.

During this time, the surrounding small tribes rejoiced. They took the opportunity to capture many Shawnee as slaves and seized valuable lands, furs, and iron tools.

While tribes like the Mohicans and Cherokees were reveling in their gains, loyal native groups selected from various Vinland districts began arriving in Prophet City in groups of hundreds or thousands. They quickly joined Ilugi’s efforts to transform the city.

Finally, a diverse city-state emerged, ruled by Vikings under martial law, with slave soldiers and other Indian tribes as subjects, enslaving tens of thousands of Shawnee.

Chapter 306: Harvest and Marriage Prospects

The weather in October began to cool, and for the past half-month, Ilugi had been leading his army to clear out Shawnee strongholds near Prophet City, capturing and killing those who resisted or fled, while pacifying the tribes that surrendered. It wasn’t until the end of the month that he returned to Prophet City, covered in dirt.

By then, Prophet City had undergone a dramatic transformation. The central temple had been converted into a church, where several young priests in long robes preached the glory of the Lord to the native inhabitants daily. The Divine King Church had taken root and flourished rapidly in Prophet City.

The houses surrounding the church had been repurposed into residential areas and markets, while beyond them lay military camps. Further out were rows of low wooden houses, built by Viking lords’ slaves and the surrendered tribes for their own habitation.

Outside the low walls of Prophet City were the living quarters of the Shawnee slaves. They had built crude grass huts against the walls, with dozens crammed into each dwelling. Under the command of their white slave masters and other tribal lords, they performed grueling labor each day, surviving on nothing more than a single sweet potato or regular potato.

The harsh conditions and malnutrition led to widespread disease and high mortality among the Shawnee, with dozens dying each day.

Yet Ilugi and the Viking lords paid no heed. The Shawnee had rarely shown the same subservience as dogs, perhaps due to their strong cultural identity and intact social structure, or perhaps because Vinland’s influence over them had been minimal. In any case, they were far more difficult to tame than the Iroquois, Huron, or Abenaki.

To break the will of the tens of thousands of captured Shawnee and to make use of them, Ilugi had no choice but to turn a blind eye—or even encourage—the excessive exploitation and abuse of Shawnee slaves by his subordinates.

The Shawnee’s spirit and pride were gradually eroded by their miserable existence. Though their work efficiency was low, infrastructure projects such as public latrines, roads, and canals progressed steadily. Prophet City was slowly evolving into a major settlement in Vinland.

After rough measurements and estimates, Olaf’s advisors concluded that the land seized by Ilugi’s army from the Shawnee spanned approximately five hundred thousand square kilometers, bordering Virginia to the southeast.

The territory was vast, but nearly half of it was occupied by mountains, wetlands, and lakes. Most of the arable land was located in valleys and the western plains.

The Shawnee had been developing this land for some time, with many wetlands and valleys already cultivated for corn and squash. Now, with the decline of the Shawnee, these lands had become Vinland’s property.

After an autumn rain, the leaves of sweet potatoes and regular potatoes drooped—Olaf, Song Qinghe, and the Vikings who had studied agriculture knew this meant frost had arrived.

The solar terms developed by the ancestors of the Chinese people were not universally applicable due to differences in climate and latitude. However, North America’s climate closely resembled that of northern China, especially Vinland.

According to Song Qinghe, Vinland Island and the northern regions of the Iroquois were colder than Beijing, likely comparable to the climate beyond the Great Wall in the northeast. The southern Iroquois and Prophet City, however, were much warmer, similar to the climate of northern Zhili and Shandong.

By mid-October of the new calendar, it was roughly the time of the Frost’s Descent solar term in China. At this point, crops like sweet potatoes, regular potatoes, corn, and squash ceased growing, whether fully mature or not.

Knowing that the time for harvest had arrived, Olaf didn’t need to issue orders. Vikings from all regions, along with their indentured white slaves and native slaves, rushed to their lands to harvest the ripe corn, squash, cowpeas, rye, potatoes, and sweet potatoes.

Heiner had already arranged for agricultural officers and clerks to oversee the governors and official slaves in harvesting the collective lands of the Viking raids during the rain.

Olaf had been busy these past few days. His family was still in Iceland, yet the Haldor family’s lands accounted for one-fifth of Vinland’s arable land. Harvesting all of it simultaneously required more manpower and effort than Olaf could handle alone.

Fortunately, Sally was highly capable. The young stewardess had already trained the dozens of boys and girls recruited to the castle to be quite competent. Assisting their master in managing the estate and private property was part of their duties as personal attendants. Sally immediately dispatched these servants and maids, along with the personal guards, to various locations, assigning a few people to oversee the lands around each city-state. This quickly relieved Olaf of his tedious anxieties.

While all the Vikings, indentured white slaves, and native slaves in Vinland were engaged in the great autumn harvest, a battered Icelandic ship arrived at Haldor Port, bringing good news.

The ship carried over a hundred people, and its captain was a middle-aged man—Eriksson, the son of Haldor’s eldest sister, Udrid. He had always followed his father in the fishing and raiding business at sea. After Haldor became the Grand Duke, their family’s fortunes rose, and father and son became steersmen of Viking raids, surpassing the status of village chiefs.

Olaf warmly welcomed his cousin, personally greeting him and receiving him at Maple Palace.

Eriksson handed Olaf a letter from Haldor and said with a smile, “Cousin, your uncle has found you a good wife. He sent me to tell you and also to ask you to find me a job in Vinland. I plan to stay here for a few years to manage the land your uncle has given our family before returning…”

“Oh? Father has arranged a marriage for me? Cousin, feel free to stay in Vinland. Let me see what the Grand Duke has to say.”

Olaf nodded and let Eriksson enjoy his tea while he tore open the envelope and read the letter.

Haldor first mentioned in the letter that his eldest and second eldest sisters were worried that their lands in Vinland would be mismanaged or embezzled by their subordinates if left unattended. Therefore, they had sent Eriksson to Vinland to oversee the lands of both families and asked Olaf to arrange an official position for him in Vinland.

This was not a major issue, and Olaf, out of both duty and affection, agreed in his heart. He then continued reading the rest of the letter with curiosity about what his cousin had mentioned.

The latter part of Haldor’s letter informed Olaf that he had arranged a marriage for him. The bride was the only daughter of Duke Bogislaw XIV of the Duchy of Pomerania.

Haldor did not go into great detail about the courtship process in the letter. He only told Olaf that Bogislaw XIV had agreed and that even His Highness Gustavus Adolphus II was aware of and involved in the matter, which was why Bogislaw XIV had agreed so readily.

Haldor told Olaf that the princess, named Merkel, was very gentle and beautiful, though perhaps due to being born prematurely, her health had always been frail. Therefore, the engagement ceremony would have to wait until she had recovered sufficiently.

After reading the letter, Olaf sighed in relief, thinking to himself: Just as Father said before, nothing has changed. Bogislaw XIV has agreed, and the engagement can take place next year.

Olaf understood that the social norms of this era differed from those hundreds of years later. Nobles often formed alliances through marriage to stabilize their positions. If he wanted to become the heir to the Icelandic dukedom and join the ranks of European royal nobility, he had no choice but to marry into a traditional noble family. Considering his political future, Olaf had to accept marrying a duke’s daughter he had never met.

Chapter 307: Bullying with Power

At the banquet hosted for his cousin Eriksson, Olaf drank a few too many cups of wine. By the end, he was helped back to his bedroom by his attendants. Not long after, Sally entered with a bowl of maple syrup and herbal tea to sober him up, personally serving it to him.

The scent of Sally’s perfume filled Olaf’s nose, and a warmth spread through his lower abdomen. He pulled her toward the bed.

More than an hour later, Olaf and Sally lay naked in each other’s arms. Sally’s fingers lightly scratched at Olaf’s chest hair as she whispered, “Has the Duke already decided on your marriage? Is it Princess Merkel of Pomerania?”

Olaf, still half-drunk, responded with a nasal hum. Sally sighed deeply and said, “When I was in the duchy, I also served Princess Merkel. She is kind and gentle, but she seems to have been frail since birth, always sickly. Olaf, your marriage to her is actually good for me. I know her—she won’t make things difficult for me…”

Sally smoothed her damp hair from her cheeks and chest, her tone flat yet tinged with sorrow. But Olaf, drunk and exhausted, had already fallen into a deep sleep.

After talking for a long time without any response, only the sound of Olaf’s snoring filling the room, Sally frowned helplessly. She reached out to touch his face and whispered, “If only you weren’t the Earl of Vinland… Sigh…”

The next day, Olaf slept until past eight o’clock. Sally, her face radiant, attended to him as he washed up, then selected a wool coat for him. “It’s windy today, and a bit cold. You should dress warmly when you go out.”

Olaf’s heart warmed at her care, and he thought of his upcoming marriage to Princess Merkel of Pomerania. Feeling a pang of guilt, he pulled Sally into a deep kiss. As she caught her breath, he said, “Give me a child. Later, I’ll set aside land and an estate for you in Vinland—six guarantees for your future.”

Feeling Olaf’s sincerity and respect, Sally’s eyes reddened. She nodded and said, “Alright. It would be my honor to bear your child.”

…

Years ago, Haldor had granted Olaf’s three aunts a great deal of land, mostly around Bakens City. Olaf’s youngest aunt’s family had all moved to Vinland. Val had even become the director of a foundry. Though not a position of great power, it was still extraordinary.

Eriksson was well aware of his cousin Val’s experiences. After the banquet, he eagerly sought Olaf for an official position.

After much deliberation, Olaf decided to appoint Eriksson as the deputy governor of Bakens City. This would not only reduce Blackstone’s authority but also ensure that Bakens City remained firmly under the control of the Icelandic Vikings. It also gave Eriksson a high-ranking position, allowing this somewhat incompetent relative to manage the family’s estate and slaves in Bakens City without causing trouble due to his lack of ability.

Olaf’s good intentions did not satisfy Eriksson. He felt that his cousin was being too harsh. In his heart, he had expected at least the position of governor, but in the end, he only got the deputy governorship. Though unhappy, he accepted the arrangement, but resentment simmered within him.

Half a month later, when Eriksson arrived in Bakens City with his family and slaves, he finally lost his temper upon seeing that the governor was a yellow Viking of slave descent. He began to mock and belittle Blackstone, showing no respect for the governor, who was a native with yellowish skin. He even referred to Blackstone as a slave and ignored the governor’s authority, arbitrarily handling the affairs of Bakens City.

Blackstone, loyal to the Eriksson family, chose to endure. Eriksson’s reckless actions soon threw Bakens City into chaos. Work came to a standstill, and the crucial autumn harvest was nearly halted.

Olaf was initially unaware of his cousin’s misconduct in Bakens City. It was only when Heiner stormed into his office in anger that Olaf learned of Eriksson’s usurpation of authority. Not only had he oppressed and suppressed Blackstone and the other yellow Vikings, but he had also disregarded the property and personal safety of the slaves, arbitrarily seizing their belongings. To make matters worse, he had delayed the autumn harvest in Bakens City to have people build a castle for him.

Olaf was furious upon hearing this and felt sympathy and guilt toward Blackstone.

After much consideration, Olaf personally went to Bakens City and sternly reprimanded Eriksson for his actions. According to the laws of the Viking raids, he confiscated half of Eriksson’s land. Only after Eriksson admitted his wrongdoing and Val, who had rushed over upon hearing the news, interceded on his behalf did Olaf allow him to keep his position, letting him redeem himself through meritorious service.

Olaf’s handling of his relative’s tyranny was timely. He had considered his relative’s face while also supporting Blackstone and others, venting their grievances. Thus, public opinion in Bakens City quickly turned to praise for Olaf.

After the storm had passed, Blackstone did not continue as governor. He took the initiative to find Olaf and requested a transfer from Bakens City. His reasoning was simple: the conflict between him and Eriksson made it difficult to work together. He also wanted to contribute more to Olaf, so he asked for a change in his duties.

Olaf thought it over and agreed to his request. He considered his plan to expand Vinland’s presence on the mainland as a long-term project and strategic goal. This endeavor would require someone dedicated to the task, preferably someone familiar with the native culture. Blackstone was the perfect candidate.

After discussing it with Heiner, the Grand Governor’s Office established the Native Assimilation Department and appointed Blackstone as its first assistant officer. He was tasked with leading the native-born Vikings and slaves on the mainland to infiltrate other native tribes, gather intelligence on various clans, and assimilate natives into the Vinland family.

The Assimilation Department became a crucial department with ample funding and personnel. Blackstone gratefully accepted Olaf’s arrangement and, with several hundred private slaves assigned by Olaf, headed to Prophet City to establish an Assimilation Department outpost and begin operations in the surrounding area.

At the same time Blackstone left Vinland Island to take up his new post, Gilfa, the deputy governor of the Abenaki District, also returned to Haldor City.

To fully control Bakens City and restore stability to the only troubled area in Vinland, Olaf thought of his former personal guard captain, Gilfa.

Though Gilfa was also of native descent, he was exceptionally capable, brave, and had achieved great merits in Europe. He was a prominent figure in the Vinland region. More importantly, he was straightforward and bold, and few dared to provoke him. Thus, appointing him as the governor of Bakens City would surely bring everything under control.

In Maple Palace, Olaf appointed Gilfa as the governor of Bakens City without any opposition.

Gilfa was indeed a straightforward man. He did not feel joy at being promoted from deputy governor of Abenaki to governor of Bakens City after just familiarizing himself with the situation. Instead, he felt somewhat confused.

It was only after Heiner briefed him on the situation in Bakens City and emphasized the weight of his responsibilities that Gilfa excitedly pounded his chest and said, “Master, rest assured. I will manage Bakens City well. No matter who they are, if they dare to interfere with your plans, I’ll beat them up!”

Olaf laughed and scolded, “You fool!”

Heiner smiled and nodded, saying, “That’s exactly the straightforwardness we need.”

Olaf and Heiner chose Gilfa because Olaf wanted to entrust the governorship of Bakens City to his most capable and trusted subordinate, someone who could also suppress the arrogant relatives who abused their status.

Gilfa was a Viking of Inuit slave descent, but he had also served as Olaf’s personal guard and had achieved great merits on the European battlefield. His background and achievements made anyone think twice before underestimating him.

Gilfa returned to Vinland Island and first went to Haldor City to meet Olaf. After receiving Olaf’s instructions, he took over a hundred Inuit guards and arrived in Bakens City.

Gilfa was an uneducated straightforward man. He only knew how to be loyal and was never afraid of difficulties. He didn’t care about economic or livelihood issues. He knew that Olaf needed stability in Bakens City, that he needed Bakens City to cultivate a certain amount of land each year, increase the number of livestock, catch a certain amount of fish in Long Lake, and hunt a certain number of wild animals in the forests. So, after taking office, he first gathered the officials of Bakens City and had them compile the amount of resources Bakens City had contributed to the Viking raids over the years. Then, he took the highest value, drew his long sword from his waist, and coldly said, “I am different from others. I am Olaf’s hound. I have captured Ferdinand III on the European battlefield and killed Catholic soldiers. I don’t understand much else, but I know what Olaf wants, and we must do it!

Now that Vinland’s five-year plan has been issued, Bakens City is Vinland’s second city and must perform the best. So, I have decided that starting this year, the amount of land cultivated, the catch of fish, and the number of animals hunted in Bakens City must all increase. You are all the managers of Bakens City. Each of you will be responsible for a part. If anyone’s numbers do not increase, I will confiscate their family property to make up for it. Everyone is included! Remember that?”

After saying this, Gilfa intentionally or unintentionally glanced at Eriksson. Eriksson now knew that he could not act arrogantly in Vinland. Plus, knowing that Gilfa had killed people on the battlefield, he was taken aback and was the first to stand up and say, “What the governor says is right. We must all work hard to increase Bakens City’s income!”

A straightforward man has his ways. His ruthlessness, combined with his past merits, indeed intimidated Eriksson and instantly took control of the entire Bakens City. The autumn harvest, which had fallen behind by many days, returned to normal that day. Under Gilfa’s supervision, the leaders, after finishing their own fields, sent their slaves to help the official slaves harvest the crops and plow the land.

In less than a week, the progress of the autumn harvest in Bakens City caught up with other regions and was nearly completed.

Chapter 308: Granaries Full, Fish Warehouses Overflowing

By November 1633, the autumn harvest across Vinland had concluded. The Viking raid public fields accounted for twenty percent of Vinland’s total arable land, the Haldor family held another twenty percent, and the remaining sixty percent was distributed among the Vikings of Vinland and Iceland.

Under the supervision of personnel from the Grand Governor’s Office and Maple Palace, the harvest from the Viking public fields and the Haldor family estates was dried and shipped back to Haldor City. The public harvest was sent to the national treasury, while the private harvest was stored in the cellars and warehouses of Maple Palace.

Ten armed merchant ships and over thirty cog ships made two full trips to transport everything, but immediately afterward, the public grain collected by the Viking raids in various districts, inspected by the Grand Governor’s Office officials and regional governors, also needed to be transported to Haldor City.

Thus, in November, although the Vikings, indentured white slaves, and slaves had finished their busy farming season and could relax, the city lords, governors, Viking raid Oarsmen, Steersmen, and even Ship District Chiefs were all engrossed in the even busier task of sending grain to the capital.

According to the Viking raid system, each Viking was required to pay a certain proportion of grain to offset agricultural taxes, and other productions and livelihoods had corresponding collections. This was the foundation of the Vikings’ existence, and everyone conscientiously paid their due public grain. The Ship District Chiefs, Steersmen, and Oarsmen collected it all and escorted it to Haldor City under the city lords’ supervision.

In North America, November brought significant temperature fluctuations, with morning and evening temperatures dropping so low that people needed to wear two layers of coats. At this time of year, European merchant ships had ceased all activities in North America, marking the continent’s entry into the pre-winter pause.

Yet, within Vinland’s territory, the Saint Lawrence River and coastal areas remained bustling.

Ships of various sizes—Galley ships and cog ships—bearing the blue flag with the Icelandic red cross plied the river and sea, loaded with newly harvested potatoes, sweet potatoes, squash, turnips, corn, cowpeas, rye, oats, and even pickled vegetables, all rushing toward Haldor Harbor.

Standing in the square of Haldor City, Olaf and Heiner basked in the sun, watching the city lords and deputy governors from various regions, along with Viking leaders and indentured white slaves, busy transporting supplies into the warehouses. Both men grinned widely.

Although the exact grain yield and total production for the year in Vinland couldn’t be known until the supplies were inventoried, the current information allowed for a rough estimate.

Last year, Vinland suffered from a cold snap that caused massive livestock deaths, but Vinland’s climate made winter farming impossible. Crops like corn, potatoes, turnips, and sweet potatoes were typically planted after March. This spring was also cold, but it didn’t significantly affect the crops. The only reduction in yield came from several prolonged cold rains before this autumn’s harvest, which lowered the starch content in potatoes, sweet potatoes, corn, rye, and oats, leading to a slight decrease in production. However, turnips and squash had a bumper harvest. With these gains and losses, the agricultural officials estimated that this year’s grain production in Vinland would increase by thirty percent over last year. This was because Vinland had added over fifty thousand acres of fertile land and one hundred thousand acres of less fertile land this year, ensuring an upward trend in total grain production.

Three days later, after all the supplies transported from various districts were inventoried and stored in the warehouses, Olaf made a timely appearance. He rewarded the agricultural officials and clerks who had been busy for days with thousands of pounds of grain and a beaver pelt. Then, a grand banquet was held at Maple Palace, hosting officials from the Grand Governor’s Office, deputy governors and city lords from various districts, Ship District Chiefs, Steersmen, and Oarsmen from the Viking raids, as well as Vikings residing in Haldor City. The total population was about a thousand, but only over three hundred were allowed to enter the palace for the banquet.

This banquet consumed over ten thousand pounds of flour, a thousand pounds of malt sugar and syrup, twenty sheep, two cows, thirty pigs, and several hundred chickens, ducks, and geese. The Water of Life, beer, and wine consumed amounted to hundreds of barrels. The total value of the consumed supplies reached four thousand pounds of silver. However, Olaf did not begrudge any of it. He had seen with his own eyes the hard work of everyone, and as the highest leader of Vinland, he believed that to reward his loyal followers, a little money and resources should not be a concern.

Although Olaf was not a boss or leader in his previous life, he had gleaned some experience in leadership in this life. The most basic principle was to ensure that those who followed him lived well, which would keep them loyal.

After the banquet ended and people from various districts gradually left, Olaf and Heiner had the leisure to inspect the warehouses and cellars of the Vinland colonial government. They saw the abundant food supplies, with granaries full of grain, which brought joy to their hearts. The warehouses originally storing furs, malt sugar, liquor, and dried fish and meat were now packed with dried meat piled like mountains, a truly spectacular sight.

“Granaries full, fish warehouses overflowing—this is wonderful! Vinland currently has only three to four hundred thousand people. Excluding the self-sustaining native tribes, the urban population is only about a hundred thousand. Even if everyone eats for five years, they won’t finish all this grain!” Olaf, who had known the scarcity of resources in Iceland since childhood, exclaimed excitedly as he looked at Vinland’s endless supplies.

Heiner’s eyes also sparkled as he said, “The brewery and sugar factory can increase production efficiency now. Expanding two production lines is feasible. Potatoes, sweet potatoes, and squash can be stored in cellars for half a year or a few months without issue and can be slowly consumed. Other grains like barley, oats, corn, and cowpeas can be dried and stored without problems. However, turnips have high water content and can’t be stored for too long. We need to process them into pickles and preserved fruits immediately. Otherwise, cutting and drying them into rations would work too. In any case, they can’t be piled together for long, or they’ll spoil!”

Olaf nodded in agreement. “That’s right. This year’s turnip harvest is abundant, with over ten million pounds of fresh produce sent from various places. They must be processed before storage. Tomorrow, have the official slaves and indentured white slaves handle the turnips. The leftover scraps can be left for them to eat, which is a way to take care of them.”

“You are truly a benevolent governor,” Heiner remarked casually, then asked, “Do you also need me to send some people to process the turnips in your private cellars at Maple Palace?”

Olaf shook his head. “We have over fifty thousand private slaves, though more than half are scattered across various places. There are still over ten thousand in Haldor City. We can easily assign some people to handle it. You don’t need to worry. Winter is approaching soon, and I’m concerned about another heavy snowfall and cold snap. You need to urge all districts and cities to reinforce their houses. The Olaf Factory has produced over a million pounds of coal briquettes, which can now be sold through the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns. I think the price should be kept low, as long as we don’t lose money. We want all the Vikings, indentured white slaves, and private slaves in Vinland to feel the warmth of coal briquettes this winter, ensuring our population continues to grow!”

Heiner had enjoyed the benefits of coal briquettes over the past two winters. Moreover, Song Qinghe had lived in Beijing for several years and knew how to build a heated kang bed. Olaf was delighted and had Song Qinghe draw up plans to construct kang beds and double-walled rooms in Maple Palace and the homes of high-ranking Vikings.

With the supply of coal briquettes, this winter would definitely be warmer.

Heiner had complete faith in Olaf and immediately agreed, adding, “Should we consider halting mining operations? After all, temperatures are about to drop, and it will be tough for miners to endure the winter there.”

Olaf pondered for a moment before saying, “The open-pit mines are nearly exhausted. Gold, silver, coal, iron, and copper mines have all gone deep underground. The cold won’t hinder the workers much. As long as we stock up on winter supplies and prepare more coal briquettes and firewood for them, and send people to build some kang beds, we don’t need to stop this winter. Let them continue mining and pile the ore on the surface. We can transport it to Haldor City next spring. This way, it won’t affect our economic growth…”

Olaf seemed like a capitalist who would stop at nothing, but he wasn’t blindly exploiting the miners or ignoring their safety. Vinland’s foundation was too weak. Next year, they needed to continue recruiting white slaves from Europe, purchasing weapons and supplies, and maintaining the supply of goods to Greenland and Iceland. Balancing these aspects, relying solely on this year’s produce from Vinland was somewhat insufficient. Therefore, Olaf believed they needed the gold, silver, copper, and other precious metals mined this winter to support their efforts.

Because next year, apart from supplying Greenland and Iceland, recruiting white slaves, and purchasing weapons and supplies, Olaf also planned to recruit artisans and doctors from the Far East and the Middle East, and scholars and intellectuals from Northern Europe. The money required to bring in these talents would be even more substantial. Currently, the national treasury of Vinland only had ten thousand gold marks. Although Maple Palace’s private vaults held a lot of gold and silver treasures, Olaf was still worried it wouldn’t be enough. He could only hope that the gold, silver, and copper mines in Vinland would continue to yield ore this winter, adding more capital to Vinland.

Chapter 309: Deciding Life and Death Over Hot Pot

Olaf felt that the Little Ice Age had entered its most severe phase, as Vinland was hit by a heavy snowfall at the end of November, much earlier than usual.

With last year’s harsh winter as a warning, Olaf and Heiner were concerned about surviving this winter. So, after the harvest, they ordered preparations for winter across all regions.

These preparations included reinforcing and insulating homes, stockpiling coal briquettes, firewood, and food supplies.

Fortunately, the Grand Governor’s Office had begun preparations in the summer, so by November, the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns in each district were fully stocked with affordable goods, even for the newly arrived indentured white slaves.

Coal briquettes, salt, and grain were the top-selling items, but what truly interested the Vikings were malt sugar and the Water of Life.

After the heavy snow, the weather turned bitterly cold. Though the midday sun provided a few hours of warmth, the snow and ice slowly melted. Olaf stayed indoors at Maple Palace, enjoying his leisure time.

While Olaf remained indoors, Heiner could not afford to idle. Sales reports and restocking orders from the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns across the regions had been sent to Haldor City. Heiner personally oversaw the matter and came to Maple Palace to report to Olaf.

Olaf was not surprised that the taverns had generated over ten thousand marks in silver coins in a month, but he was pleased. “Restock the taverns in each city immediately,” he said. “Before the temperature drops further, this might be the last chance to restock. The Saint Lawrence River might freeze over next week. It’s too cold!”

Heiner nodded. “I’ll send someone right away.”

Olaf smiled. “Don’t rush around all day. Vinland’s affairs are manageable; just take them one by one…”

Heiner scoffed. “You’re comfortable being a figurehead, but do you know Prophet City has had three uprisings this month? If it weren’t for Ilugi and the brave soldiers, you wouldn’t be sitting so comfortably!”

Olaf chuckled awkwardly. “Thanks to you, brother-in-law. How about I treat you, Vanhild, and little Helen to hot pot tomorrow?”

Hot pot was a culinary invention Olaf had created out of his cravings, with a special pot forged by a blacksmith. Heiner had tried it a few times and couldn’t resist drooling at the mention. “You’ve got a conscience,” he said, grinning.

Heiner left Maple Palace, grumbling. Olaf stared at the map of Vinland on the wall, focusing on the red dot marking Prophet City. He scoffed and muttered, “The Appalachian Mountains isolate the Shawnee from Europeans, so they don’t know enough to fear or envy us. They’re not as submissive as the northern Indians. Maybe we need to kill a batch of them to break their spirit… But killing isn’t as thorough or effective as a plague, and it won’t stir up hatred… Maybe we should find some sick people…”

After a moment, Olaf made up his mind. That evening, during the hot pot feast, he instructed Heiner to search for smallpox, diphtheria, leprosy, cholera, and influenza patients across Vinland. Once found, they were to be sent to Prophet City, where Ilugi would arrange for them to interact with the nearby Shawnee, spreading infectious diseases into their tribes. Given the Shawnee’s poor health and primitive medical care, any epidemic would drastically reduce their population, leaving them unable to resist.

Heiner, like most colonists, did not view the Indians as fellow humans but as livestock. Hearing Olaf’s scheme, he smiled and fished out a large piece of lamb from the copper pot, dipped it in sauce, and took a bite. Satisfied, he said, “With the cold weather, it’s the perfect time for diseases to spread. We can’t guarantee other illnesses, but influenza and diphtheria will definitely appear. Vinland has strict epidemic prevention measures and Song Qinghe and his disciples to care for us, so we’ll be fine. But if these diseases spread to the Shawnee tribes, we can replicate what happened to the Abenaki in the southern Appalachian Mountains. It won’t be difficult. I’ll have the governors and managers of the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns in each region take charge. Once a patient is found, they’ll be sent to Prophet City immediately. Let’s get this done before winter sets in.”

Olaf quickly used a pair of chopsticks made from tree branches to fish out several pieces of lamb from the boiling pot, eating them eagerly. “I trust you to handle it,” he said, mouth full.

“Slow down! You’re eating all the meat!” Heiner had just felt a flicker of warmth in his heart, but seeing Olaf’s hands constantly grabbing meat, he panicked and stood up to join the scramble.

Vanhild and Sally exchanged glances and smiled. The weight on these two men’s shoulders was heavy, and only at times like this could they show their youthful nature.

Vanhild lovingly took out a handkerchief and wiped the soup stains from their clothes. “You’re both grown men. Why are you acting like children?” she said, laughing.

In early December, another light snowfall hit Vinland. Due to the continuous drop in temperature, the snow did not melt immediately. Streams and lakes froze, and even larger rivers began to show floating ice.

Those who had lived in Vinland for several years, whether Vikings or indentured white slaves, knew that the weather would get even colder in a few days. In less than half a month, the Saint Lawrence River would also freeze over. That was when everything would fall silent, and deathly stillness would descend.

As the Little Ice Age entered its most severe phase, the already high-latitude winters in Vinland grew even colder.

The last batch of supplies for the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns across Vinland had been delivered, and they had all returned to Haldor City before the Saint Lawrence River froze.

Olaf was in his room tinkering with steam engine blueprints. Though he didn’t fully understand them, he grasped the basic principles and wanted to sketch a simple design. Then, he would find a craftsman to work with and see if they could build a primitive steam engine.

Suddenly, he heard Sally say from outside the door, “Heiner is here.”

“Pour him a cup of honey water. I’ll be there in a moment.”

After a while, Olaf put away the blueprints and went to the living room to sit down.

Olaf took the honey water handed to him by a maid and smiled. “What’s the matter? Are you here to talk about the vacation?”

Vinland’s winters were harsh with heavy snow and cold, halting all production and confining life indoors. No one ventured out unless absolutely necessary, risking frostbite or catching a cold.

In Iceland, there was a tradition: from December to February of the following year was a long vacation.

For those living at high latitudes, the resources and money accumulated through hard work in spring and summer were consumed during the long winter. Thus, whether in terms of primitive resource accumulation or potential, high-latitude regions were far worse off than those further south.

Regarding the boring long winter vacation, the climate-induced reality in Vinland was similar to Iceland. So, both Vikings and natives adapted seamlessly to life there. The only ones who struggled to adapt were the indentured white slaves from England, Germany, and other places. However, with Vinland’s advance preparations for winter supplies and the improved quality of life after arriving, the indentured white slaves also obediently reduced their workload in December under the arrangement of the Viking leaders, entering the countdown to the long vacation.

Olaf thought Heiner had come to discuss the arrangements for the winter vacation across different social strata in Vinland. Instead, Heiner reported that they had found two diphtheria patients and over ten influenza patients, all of whom had been sent to Prophet City.

Prophet City’s temperature and climate were much warmer than Vinland’s, so it had only just seen its first snowfall. Ilugi could easily spread the viruses to the Shawnee tribes before the deep winter arrived, using the winter to naturally eliminate a large number of Shawnee.

Olaf nodded in satisfaction. “If everything goes smoothly, Prophet City will be completely pacified by next spring. Then, we can start planting cotton. The thousands of pounds of cotton seeds in my warehouse are almost spoiling…”

Chapter 310: Southern Inspection

Time had entered late February of 1634, and Vinland’s long winter was gradually fading away.

The snow covering the mountains and fields was slowly melting, especially around the lakes and streams. During the day, the ice that had sealed the water surfaces for dozens of days had finally thawed.

Olaf, who had gained some weight compared to last year, and Sally pushed open the window to look at the scenery outside, both breaking into smiles.

“In another week or two, it will truly warm up,” Olaf remarked with feeling. “But the spring hunting season should begin soon.”

“I’m about to go stir-crazy. I didn’t expect Vinland’s winter to be almost as long as Iceland’s, though at least the days and nights are normal. In a few days, I’ll go hunting with you,” Sally sighed.

Olaf nodded. “No problem. I’ll have someone prepare a bow and arrows and a firearm for you, along with a gentle colt.”

Smack!

Sally jumped up and wrapped her arms around Olaf’s neck, planting a kiss on his bearded face before softly saying, “I knew you loved me the most.”

Now seventeen years old, Olaf had completed his growth spurt over the previous winter. He stood taller than his father and brother, nearly matching his uncle Haig in height. His robust physique, golden beard and hair, fair skin, and sharply defined features gave him a strikingly masculine appearance, like a statue from ancient Greece.

Olaf effortlessly lifted Sally by the waist, bringing her lips to his for a deep kiss. “Once you’re pregnant, you’ll stay home obediently. When the ice and snow clear in a few days, I’ll take you hunting. Remember, you’re carrying my child, so stay put until I return.”

“Alright, you be careful on your trip south. I’ve heard the Shawnee are quite savage.”

Sally rubbed her still-flat belly and asked, “Will Lord Haldor and Lady Katrin be angry when they find out?”

Olaf knew what Sally was worried about and smiled. “Don’t worry. My parents respect my decisions. On this trip to Prophet City, I’ll select land for you and the child. The climate there is the best, and the land is fertile. I plan to give you all the land south of Prophet City as your estate. No matter what happens in the future, that will be your and the child’s land to rely on.”

Before Sally could throw herself at him in gratitude, Olaf grabbed a white bear pelt cloak and quickly left.

Downstairs, the maids and servants Sally had trained stood in orderly rows, bowing. Olaf pointed to a boy of about eleven or twelve. “Dak, go to the stable, saddle Haysen, and notify Halik. I’m going out.”

The fair-faced boy with hair redder than Tom’s bowed in acknowledgment and quickly left.

Olaf then turned to several girls standing nearby and picked one with chestnut hair. “Take them to the kitchen and prepare jerky and bread—enough for several days.”

Sally came down and personally led the maids to make the preparations.

Half an hour later, she came out and handed Olaf a bundle. He opened it to find dozens of pounds of smoked meat and fish, along with two bottles of liquor and a flask of water. Satisfied, he nodded. “Let’s go.” With that, he pushed open the door and left.

Dak stood in the courtyard with the towering elk Haysen, waiting. Seeing Olaf, he hurried forward to take the bundle and secure it to Haysen’s back, saying, “Lord Halik drank too much last night. It took me a while to wake him. He said he’d be right over and asked you to wait.”

Olaf frowned. “Didn’t I tell him a few days ago to prepare for a long trip? How could he still drink?”

Dak didn’t dare speak, standing respectfully.

Olaf patted the firearm at his waist, remembering he hadn’t taken gunpowder or bullets. “Go ask Sally for my ammunition case.”

Dak quickly went inside and returned with a hard leather case. Just then, the sound of hurried hoofbeats came from the gate.

Halik arrived with over a dozen guards.

“Why so early? It’s only seven o’clock,” Halik said, yawning with a smile.

Olaf took the ammunition case, mounted the elk, and said, “One look at your face tells me you’ve been drinking a lot lately. Be careful not to ruin your health.”

“Alright, I’ll drink less from now on.”

Halik nodded in agreement, then asked, “Where are we going?”

“To Prophet City. I told Heiner two days ago that we’d leave as soon as the streams thawed. He’s probably ready by now. Let’s go to the docks first.”

Olaf and Halik left Maple Palace and headed to the eastern docks. Dozens of ships of various sizes were docked there, along with over a hundred indentured white slaves and several hundred native slaves, all covered in mud and resting on the ground.

Standing before the slaves were over a dozen Vikings in long robes, led by Heiner, who sported a crescent-shaped beard.

Olaf approached Heiner, and the slaves all bowed. Olaf waved them off and asked Heiner, “Are the supplies loaded?”

Heiner nodded. “I’ve been here since early morning. The cotton seeds, vegetable seeds, grain seeds, and the medicinal herb seeds Song Qinghe sent before the New Year are all loaded. With the food and drink supplies, the ship is fully packed.”

“Good work,” Olaf said casually, looking at the clerks still bowing behind Heiner. “Get up, all of you. Take the slaves back and follow Heiner’s arrangements. Whether it’s production or work, do as he says. Today, regardless of status, everyone can go to the warehouse and get ten pounds of potatoes or one pound of jerky.”

“Thank you, Governor!”

“Thank you, Master! Long live the Master!”

Amid the chaotic cheers and thanks, Olaf dismounted and walked shoulder to shoulder with Heiner onto a galleon. Halik and the others dismounted, leading Haysen and the horses behind them onto the ship.

By now, over a dozen sailors and twenty gunners were preparing on deck. Olaf offered a few words of encouragement before entering the cabin.

Half an hour later, the warship named Walrus, with its massive ram at the bow, left Haldor Harbor and entered the icy waters near Vinland, where fragments of floating ice drifted.

“It’s still a bit risky to set out now. By evening, when the temperature drops, the sea will start freezing again…” Heiner, dressed in a sealskin coat, sighed.

Olaf shook his head slightly. “The temperature is already rising. Once we head south past the Nova Scotia Peninsula, there won’t be any more floating ice. We left early, so we should reach Massachusetts Bay before nightfall. There’s no need to worry.”

Heiner shrugged. “I forgot you’re a master navigator. I’ll trust your judgment. If both sea and land routes are clear, we should reach Plymouth City in two days. Then, three more days by land to Prophet City.”

Olaf nodded. “We’ll stay there for a few days to assess the situation in Prophet City—check if the climate and land are suitable for large-scale cotton, grain, and medicinal herb cultivation. We also need to see if the Shawnee and other natives have become more docile and what our neighbors in Virginia think. The English aren’t to be trusted. We must ensure Prophet City is on guard and doesn’t leak our agricultural techniques or other information from Vinland.”

Heiner despised the English. Hearing this, he narrowed his eyes and said in a low voice, “Our forces in Vinland are strong enough to wipe out Virginia, but openly attacking them would offend England and affect Iceland’s standing in Europe, not to mention our business. But leaving that tumor there is indeed disgusting… What if we hire some southern Indian natives to do the job? They could handle it.”

“It’s doable, but we’d have to choose the right people. After the deed is done, we must clean up those natives thoroughly. It requires careful planning.”

Heiner’s suggestion struck a chord with Olaf. They had used this tactic to eliminate the French a few years ago, and it could certainly be replicated. However, this time, they needed to be even more meticulous. If word got out, it might also raise suspicions among the already paranoid French.

Chapter 311: Southern Inspection (2)

Heiner and Olaf had endured countless trials—mutinies, colonial rule, rebellions, and independence—each battle hardening their hearts and sharpening their strategic minds. They no longer noticed how effortlessly they schemed against the British in Virginia or plotted against the unruly Shawnee near Prophet City. Deception and self-interest had become second nature to them.

Two days later, the warship Sea Elephant arrived at Plymouth Harbor. The British dockworkers, recognizing the Vinland vessels, dared not be negligent and welcomed them warmly. As soon as Olaf and Heiner stepped into the city, they were met by Brun, who had brought hundreds of soldiers to greet them.

In Brun’s mind, Olaf was not the type to indulge in leisure or travel often. Seeing him and Heiner arrive in Plymouth together was unsettling. He worried whether something major had happened on the continent or if his own excessive corruption in Plymouth had finally drawn their displeasure.

“Governor, why have you come? Is something the matter?” Brun asked cautiously.

Olaf smiled and shook his hand. “Heiner and I are here to inspect various parts of Vinland and see if there’s anything you need help with. How’s the winter treating you? Better than in Hrut City or Iceland, I hope?”

Brun’s heart lurched. The mocking tone in their voices told him they already knew about his embezzlement. But what governor didn’t skim a little off the top?

Seeing that they weren’t here to punish him, Brun—ever the quick thinker, thanks to Hudik’s tutelage—replied smoothly, “Plymouth isn’t exactly prosperous. I’m just keeping an eye on the British for you, Lord Earl. Even in winter, I don’t dare let my guard down. I was actually planning to visit Haldor City to discuss some concerns with you both. Now that you’re here, it’s perfect timing. After last year’s victory at Prophet City, shouldn’t we fully absorb Plymouth? Having the British Plymouth Company and Creek Company operating here is nothing but trouble!”

Olaf remained silent, but Heiner, already aware of his intentions, spoke softly, “If we take Plymouth, what do we do with the British? Even if they don’t dare provoke us, they’ll just take their business to Haldor City instead. That place is far more important! I say we keep Plymouth as a hub for foreign merchants—British, French, and others—to conduct their trade.”

Vinland had many secrets—agricultural and industrial innovations—that, for now, were safe under military rule and a small population. But if foreign merchants lingered in Haldor City or Quebec City, those secrets would inevitably be uncovered by those with ill intent.

Olaf had always wanted to preserve Plymouth as a British-controlled trading post—a way to avoid completely alienating them while also funneling foreign merchants into one place, much like how the Netherlands kept its political center in The Hague but its commercial heart in Amsterdam.

Brun couldn’t fathom Olaf’s full reasoning, so he simply nodded in agreement with Heiner’s suggestion.

Soon, the three men entered the governor’s mansion, a repurposed old church. Over mugs of beer, Olaf said, “Starting this year, Plymouth will no longer cultivate potatoes, sweet potatoes, or corn. No more land reclamation or fertilizer production. Your supplies will come from the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns—just collect them monthly. If you must grow something, stick to wheat and vegetables. Remember, our advantage over foreign nations lies in our agricultural innovations and breeding techniques. Plymouth will soon be swarming with British, French, Dutch, and Spanish merchants. We can’t risk exposing our secrets. Understood?”

Olaf wasn’t entirely confident in how long Vinland could keep its agricultural advancements hidden, but to prevent competitors from gaining an edge, he had no choice but to issue this gag order.

Brun drained his beer and said, “Rest assured, my lord. I’ll arrange it immediately. You two should rest. This afternoon, I’ll have someone escort you to the banquet hall—I want to host you properly…”

Heiner waved him off. “No need for a fuss. A simple meal tonight will do. Olaf and I are heading to Prophet City tomorrow. Prepare supplies and two guides who know the way.”

Only after learning their destination did Brun finally relax. “I’ll arrange it at once. Don’t let me disturb your rest—just call if you need anything. There are guards outside.”

After Brun left, Olaf and Heiner exchanged a small smile.

“Brun’s learned to be smooth,” Olaf remarked.

“He’s in his thirties now,” Heiner said coolly. “How could he still be as naive as when he first arrived in Vinland? But he’s diligent, loyal to you, and, most importantly, a capable commander. He’s the kind of man who can hold down Plymouth—or any region. We should continue to rely on him.”

Olaf frowned slightly at Heiner’s blunt assessment but said nothing. With a dismissive wave, he said, “Let’s rest. We’ll discuss anything else over dinner.”

The next morning arrived swiftly. Under Brun’s enthusiastic persuasion, Olaf and Heiner had indulged in a few extra drinks the night before. Brun had even raided his stores, serving dried meat, fresh game, British cheese, and sausages from Plymouth.

Though the meal wasn’t extravagant—mostly meat—it was flavorful. Overwhelmed by the hospitality, the two had eaten and drunk their fill before collapsing into bed until noon.

Halik, who had also drunk his share, had a higher tolerance and was up early, preparing for their departure.

After washing up, Olaf and Heiner drank a few cups of warm milk Brun had sent to help them recover.

By noon, they were eager to be on their way. Bidding Brun farewell, they took the two guides he had arranged and set off with a group of twenty on horseback, heading southwest.

After an hour, the open plains gave way to dense forests and rolling hills. Gazing at the distant, towering Green Mountains of the northern Appalachians, Olaf stretched lazily atop his deer mount and remarked, “The vegetation here is richer than in Vinland. The coastal terrain is more complex too.”

One of the guides, an Iroquois warrior, replied in broken Icelandic, “Sir, farther west, there are many valleys where the natives build their villages. If we had taken a ship south from Plymouth Harbor to New Netherlands or even Virginia, then to Prophet City, it would’ve been faster. Now, traveling by land, we’ll have to detour to the southwestern coast, cross the great river, and then head south for five more days…”

Olaf frowned and pulled out a crude map. Heiner pointed to the west of Plymouth and said, “That must be the Hudson River—the ‘great river’ he mentioned. Once we cross it, we’ll be east of Iroquois territory. Then it’s just a straight path south.”

Olaf folded the map away. “Then let’s move.”

Chapter 312: Southern Inspection (3)

In the 17th century, no civilized nation in the world had the capability to construct wide, smooth roads. Even in major cities like Beijing, Nanjing, London, Rome, and Paris, only the main thoroughfares were paved with stone, while the outskirts remained dirt paths.

Yet, North America was still entirely primitive and backward. Apart from Vinland itself, there wasn’t even a decent dirt road connecting the cities in other regions. Without the guidance of natives familiar with the terrain, one could easily lose their way.

Olaf and Heiner’s group traveled through the mountains and forests for two days, circling three mountain peaks and crossing five rivers of varying sizes before finally reaching Kuo City, the central hub of the Iroquois.

Upon entering the city, Olaf and Heiner were utterly exhausted, their appearances disheveled. Olaf silently vowed that once Vinland’s population surpassed one million, he would prioritize constructing official roads between the regions.

Hilt, the governor of the Iroquois, had been stationed in Kuo City all along. He was overjoyed by the sudden arrival of Olaf and Heiner.

Hilt was not yet thirty years old. Since childhood, he had followed Haldor and Hudik, and though he had a slight stutter, he was honest and trustworthy—one of the most reliable governors Olaf trusted, aside from his closest companions.

Upon seeing Olaf and Heiner, Hilt didn’t ask many questions. Instead, he first led them back to his residence, where his wife and two young children greeted the rulers of Vinland. Only then did he send his wife to prepare a meal while a maid took the children away.

“In… in this cold… weather, you two… suddenly coming to the Iroquois… and from Plymouth, no less… is there… some urgent matter?”

Olaf and Heiner warmed their hands by the fire before lifting their cups of hot beer and taking a sip. “We’re heading to Prophet City for an inspection,” they replied. “We thought we’d check on the other regions while we’re at it.”

“Good,” Hilt replied with a nod, his stutter making him a man of few words. He then refilled their cups.

Olaf and Heiner stayed in Kuo City for three days, observing the changes in the city and inspecting the operations of the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns, the governor’s office, and the Viking raids. Finally, they prepared to depart southward.

Upon learning of their plans, Hilt dispatched an additional squad to ensure Olaf’s safety. These men were primarily Iroquois slaves, fanatical temple devotees, fierce warriors, fluent in ancient Norse, and capable of serving as guides.

Olaf examined the squad and found them satisfactory. The next morning, he bid farewell to Hilt and set off southward along the river.

Two days later, they reached Gang City at the southernmost end, where they rested for a day before continuing.

Two days after that, they finally neared Prophet City. Along the way, they encountered a Mohican tribe. Though the Mohicans were not a powerful group, they had long maintained active trade and communication with the British in Virginia. When Ilugi had marched south to conquer the Shawnee the previous year, the Mohicans had even volunteered as guides, aiding Vinland in defeating the Shawnee. In return, they received land grants, and several chiefs and warriors were rewarded with long spears. Ilugi had also promised to petition Olaf after the new year to elevate them to Viking status.

Having benefited greatly from their alliance with the Vikings, the Mohicans showed no hostility toward Olaf’s group. Instead, they warmly offered food. Upon learning from the Iroquois slaves that the visitors were led by Olaf, the Viking chieftain, the small tribe became even more excited, presenting him with young women and furs.

Olaf understood that the Mohicans now regarded him as their overlord. In Native American tribal culture, different groups could form alliances, with the strongest tribe’s leader becoming the alliance’s head, responsible for protecting members and repelling enemies—a role that earned deep respect and admiration.

Seeing that the young women offered were quite attractive, Olaf accepted them, planning to reward them to his Inuit guards as wives.

By the time they reached Prophet City, it was already dusk. The soldiers guarding the city recognized Olaf and his group, saluted, and welcomed them inside.

As Olaf entered the ancient city, taking in the sights, the gray twilight gradually settled in.

“Prophet City is far more magnificent than Bakens City or Great Waterfall City,” Olaf remarked, turning to Heiner beside him. “Though it’s not a large city, its ancient and solemn atmosphere is impressive. It’s a shame it’s too dark to see clearly…”

Before Heiner could respond, a troop of cavalry thundered toward them. Leading them was the somewhat gaunt Ilugi, who reined in his horse and leaned forward. “Why are you here now? Couldn’t you have Blackstone or the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns give me a heads-up?”

“I missed you, so I came to visit,” Olaf chuckled, stepping forward to shake Ilugi’s hand. “How’s life in Prophet City treating you?”

Ilugi replied casually, “It’s not bad. The winters here are much warmer than in Hrut City, but there’s no shortage of troubles. We have too few Vikings, and the natives are all mixed together—different languages, different customs. It’s always a mess.”

“What kind of mess?” Olaf asked with interest.

Heiner quickly intervened, pulling them along. “It’s getting dark. Let’s settle in first, then we can talk over dinner. Let Ilugi show us some of Prophet City’s finest cuisine!”

A few hours later, in Ilugi’s study, over a dozen whale oil candles lit the room brightly. Around the wooden table sat Olaf, Heiner, Ilugi, and Halik.

After a hearty meal of charcoal-grilled steak and pan-fried lamb legs, washed down with several bottles of the Water of Life, they now lounged on the sofas, sipping coffee.

Ilugi set down his cup and asked, “Did you come to check on the task I was given before the new year?”

Olaf nodded. “I’d like to hear about it and see the results for myself. How did it go?”

Ilugi pondered for a moment before replying, “To be honest, when those two patients were brought to me, I handed them over to Hari. He’s my cousin—you’ve met him before. He was at dinner earlier. He’s my second-in-command now, very thorough. So I left it to him. He’d know the details best. Should I call him in?”

Seeing no objection from Olaf and Heiner, Ilugi stood and left, returning shortly with a tall, thin man.

“Tell them what you know,” Ilugi said.

Hari sat down and organized his thoughts before speaking.

Before the new year, Ilugi had given him the patients and instructed him to find a way for the Shawnee outside Prophet City to come into contact with them, hoping to weaken their resistance.

Hari didn’t dare delay. He immediately found several Shawnee prisoners in the city and had them live with the two sick individuals. Then, he took them outside the city to chop firewood before secretly releasing them, sending two quick-witted soldiers to follow and observe.

Before the heavy snows blocked the city, Hari received confirmed reports that the escaped Shawnee prisoners had returned to nearby tribes, and those tribes had begun to suffer deaths from illness.

Later, the winter freeze halted all movement, and Hari only managed to gather new information three days ago.

Over the winter, every tribe that had taken in the Shawnee prisoners had been devastated by disease. Those afflicted with diphtheria had seen nine-tenths of their populations wiped out.

Now, there was no Shawnee resistance left near Prophet City. Even three or four other tribal groups had suffered heavy losses from the plague.

Olaf and Heiner listened in silence. Ilugi then asked, “What about the Shawnee who fled to the western plains? Were they infected too?”

Hari frowned. “The infected Shawnee were only released at the start of winter. They couldn’t have made it to the west, so the main Shawnee forces should be unharmed.”

Ilugi, eager to impress Olaf and considering his role as the southern campaign general and governor of Prophet City, coldly ordered, “Then find more sick individuals. Search the remaining tribes and send them west. This summer, I’m deciding whether to continue south or move west. If we can wipe out the Shawnee with just a few sick individuals, we can advance in both directions this year.”

Hari stood and declared, “Understood, General! I’ll prepare at once!” With that, he swiftly left.

Olaf smiled faintly. “This outcome satisfies me. The resistance in the Prophet City region has been mostly eliminated. This year, we can establish agricultural and cotton plantations here.”

Chapter 313: Southern Inspection (4)

Olaf and Heiner stayed in Prophet City for three days. As the temperature continued to rise, they led the serfs and cotton seeds out of the city to search for suitable land to cultivate cotton.

Vinland’s territory was limited to the north, so Olaf could only consider planting cotton on the plains of the Iroquois. However, the climate there was still too cold for cotton, and the previous year’s yield had been very low, with many fields nearly barren.

Olaf had learned from experience and, with Song Qinghe’s help, had carefully studied agricultural books, gaining a deeper understanding of cotton cultivation. He decided to plant cotton in the southern Iroquois and western Virginia near Prophet City. Although this area wasn’t the southernmost part of the Americas, the temperature and climate were comparable to Jiangnan in China, making it perfectly suitable for cotton cultivation.

Olaf led the serfs to search for fertile valleys south of Prophet City. After a week, they found five suitable valleys. He allocated a cotton plantation spanning these five valleys, with himself as the lord of the manor. Besides thousands of acres of cotton fields, there was over ten times more land available for planting alfalfa, fodder, and grains—these would be the wealth Olaf planned to leave for Sally in the future.

This time, Olaf didn’t bring many private slaves, but Prophet City had a branch of Blackstone’s Assimilation Department, where all the staff were Olaf’s private slaves. Since the department had just been established and didn’t have much work, Olaf temporarily conscripted the entire staff. These people were somewhat educated and could be used to measure land, draw maps, and manage affairs. Once the private slaves and indentured white slaves from Vinland Island arrived next month to take over, the Assimilation Department could return to normal operations.

By the time Olaf returned to Prophet City, the land measurement work for the cotton plantation, pasture, and grain fields was halfway complete. The cotton seeds had also been planted in the warmest and most humid valley for breeding. In a month, once the plantations had serfs to take over, the cotton seedlings could be transplanted.

Cotton cultivation was crucial to Olaf’s subsequent textile industry development. He was extremely concerned about it. Only after confirming that the cotton seeds had begun to sprout did he feel at ease and return to the city, summoning Blackstone, Ilugi, and Heiner.

Upon seeing the three, Olaf first smiled and spoke of the successful establishment of the cotton plantation, then said with satisfaction: “This southern inspection has two purposes. One is to find a cotton cultivation base, which is now complete. Only one thing remains…”

Olaf drew out his words and glanced at Heiner. Heiner, understanding his meaning, asked, “What is the second matter?”

Olaf said gravely, “When I was in Europe, I heard that Britain is preparing to vigorously develop its colonial enterprises. Many colonial companies have already been established to come to North America. The British Isles have seven or eight million people. A large population coming to North America will surely encroach on Vinland’s resources and even land. If we give the British a chance to catch their breath, once they establish a foothold in North America, all of us here will be driven out of North America!”

Olaf’s alarmist words had a good effect. Blackstone and Ilugi’s expressions changed, and both men’s eyes flashed with a murderous intent, clearly harboring ill will toward the British.

“Young Master, why don’t we send troops now to destroy Virginia and leave the British with no place to land?”

Blackstone’s words didn’t move Olaf. He shook his head and said, “We can’t break ties with Britain. After all, Iceland is too close to Britain…”

Ilugi was more familiar with Olaf. After thinking for a moment, he said, “Otherwise, we can use the old method, the same way we dealt with the Massachusetts Bay Company and New France, to eliminate Virginia. Then, we can cultivate a group of natives not affiliated with Vinland. Wherever British colonial companies land, we can send them to attack. This will surely drive the British away.”

Olaf’s eyes lit up, and he happily patted Ilugi on the shoulder, laughing: “No wonder you’re a genius general who could lead an Aettangr at fourteen. Your ideas are indeed unique! Heiner, what do you think?”

Heiner also nodded in approval: “Ilugi’s idea is very mature. I agree.”

Olaf thought for a moment and said, “Using the natives’ hands to destroy Virginia isn’t difficult, but the hard part is not leaking the news. The previous two times, the news didn’t leak because neither Vinland nor North America was taken seriously. But now, various places and tribes in Vinland are inevitably infiltrated by British and French merchants. If the British find out that we’re behind this, we’ll have completely offended Britain!”

Ilugi frowned, and Heiner remained silent. After a moment of silence, Blackstone suddenly stood up and said in Vinland’s emerging vocabulary, “This slave, Blackstone, is willing to solve the problem for the young master!”

“Oh?” Olaf, full of joy, grasped Blackstone’s hand and asked, “What method do you have?”

Blackstone spoke slowly: “You sent me to Prophet City to establish the Assimilation Department. Although it hasn’t made much progress yet, I’ve become familiar with the surrounding tribes. After the Shawnee were defeated and retreated to the western plains, the surrounding area has been without a leader, and even the large and small tribes have been fighting among themselves. I can select one or two medium-sized tribes, provide them with weapons, and let them take action. After the deed is done, we can secretly execute them. One or two small tribes together amount to only three or four thousand people, which won’t be difficult to handle. Once all those in the know are sent to hell, who will know it was our doing?”

Olaf laughed heartily and hugged Blackstone before sitting down.

Originally, Olaf had intended to feign a stance, using the situation to pressure Ilugi into doing this. If things went wrong, he could push the responsibility onto Ilugi, dismiss him, and use him as a scapegoat to add another layer of cover between Vinland and the British and French.

But now, Blackstone had stepped forward, giving Olaf an even greater surprise.

Olaf felt that Blackstone’s plan was more rigorous and accurate. Moreover, entrusting it to him, Blackstone could carry it out as a native leader within Vinland. Whether the loose ends weren’t handled properly and the news leaked, or if there was an internal leak within Vinland, Olaf could push the responsibility for cleansing Virginia onto Blackstone.

As a white colonial governor, not noticing the small actions of a native leader within the colony was completely understandable…

Olaf greatly praised Blackstone’s intelligence and loyalty to his master, then promised him that if he could accomplish this task beautifully, he would promote him to be a Viking Raid district chief, allowing him to lead a Pasde independently, becoming a master second only to a Viking Raid general.

Blackstone was very grateful for Olaf’s promise. He had always thought that becoming a Viking lord and a city master was the happiest thing, but now he was being entrusted with even more by Olaf. He had never thought he would have the chance to become a Pasde district chief. He felt that if he became a second-tier leader within the Viking Raid, his status and power would far exceed that of the former governor of Bakens City. At that time, he could stand tall in front of the white Vikings and say—“I am also a lord.”

To ensure Blackstone could successfully complete the task, Olaf approved his request to allocate 1,000 close combat weapons and 100 longbows from the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns, even adding ten sets of full plate armor. Then, he sent the confident and delighted Blackstone with his voucher to find Big-Head Olin, the manager of the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns in Prophet City, to collect the supplies.

After Blackstone left, Heiner asked, “Can Blackstone accomplish this task?”

Olaf raised an eyebrow and said indifferently, “If he succeeds, the Assimilation Department will become the most important department of the Vinland Governor’s Office. In the future, expanding territory will be more valuable than the Six Vinland Legions. If he fails, we’ll just replace the department head and ask Ilugi to take over. What do you think, Ilugi?”

Ilugi looked into Olaf’s eyes, feeling that the memory of the sunny and heroic Golden-Haired Olaf was growing more distant. He shook his head to dispel the distracting thoughts, then stood up and said, “I’ll keep an eye on this matter. If Blackstone isn’t meticulous or if there are any oversights, I’ll help him cover them up!”

Olaf smiled and nodded, saying, “I trust you to handle this. Heiner, our trip to Prophet City wasn’t in vain, was it?”

Heiner smiled slightly and said, “Following you, Lord Olaf, how could there be no gains? I think we can continue to expand this year. Ilugi, you can start preparing now. Perhaps by summer, Olaf will order you to march south.”

Ilugi grinned and said, “That would be great!”

Chapter 314: West Plymouth

While Blackstone was busy seeking alliances with native tribes to counter Virginia, Olaf and Heiner had already left Prophet City and returned to Plymouth.

Governor Brun and Lord McG warmly received Olaf’s party. After a hearty meal, Olaf turned to Harry, the manager of the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns in Plymouth, and asked, “How’s business at the tavern?”

Harry was a seasoned Icelandic Viking, embodying all the traits of his people. Without hesitation, he replied, “Not great. Plymouth is a stronghold of the British colonial companies, with warehouses for both the Creek Company and the Plymouth Company. They don’t lack supplies, even in winter—they only need some food and drink. Business at the tavern isn’t booming, but the assistant managers from both companies have expressed interest in purchasing furs this year. I just sent someone back to Haldor City to report…”

Olaf nodded. “Just as I thought. Our population and strength aren’t enough to monopolize the entire North American continent. We must compromise with the English and French. Their colonial interests here lean toward furs and fish, which we can provide. Plymouth is perfect for becoming Vinland’s international trade hub…”

Heiner was already familiar with Olaf’s intentions, and Brun had heard of them as well. Both knew Olaf aimed to isolate other Vinland cities from direct trade with English and French merchants while keeping foreign commerce under the control of the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns.

As the current head of the taverns, Heiner wholeheartedly approved.

Establishing a trade zone in Plymouth would strengthen the governor’s authority and income, so Brun eagerly agreed.

Seeing no objections from either, Olaf smiled. “Most of Plymouth’s residents are British. We’ll build a new district west of Plymouth—let’s call it West Plymouth. From now on, West Plymouth will be under your management. It will serve as our warehouse for Vinland goods and housing for our personnel. You must enforce martial law to prevent foreign merchants from stealing our secrets…”

“But you’ll be in charge of constructing West Plymouth. Request any special supplies from Harry. Handle personnel and basic materials yourself. The warehouse and city framework must be ready before summer. We’ll start trials in West Plymouth this year! Harry, you’ll relocate the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns there.”

Olaf’s commands came one after another. Brun and Harry had initially thought to negotiate, but upon hearing Olaf’s resolute words, they suppressed their thoughts and agreed in unison.

They stayed in Plymouth for two days until the first British merchant ship arrived. Only then did Olaf and Heiner board the Walrus and return to Haldor City.

By now, French and Spanish fishing vessels had vanished from Vinland’s coastal waters, and British ships only appeared near Plymouth. Olaf was highly satisfied with the recent maritime cleanup operation.

Developing Vinland’s navy was a key military objective in the five-year plan. Olaf intended to recruit large numbers of indentured white slaves from Europe that summer and then enlist experienced sailors from among them to bolster Vinland’s navy. With annual increases, both the navy and the newly formed army would grow stronger.

Back in Vinland, the spring-winter hunting season had begun across all regions. Olaf and Heiner eagerly participated. In an era lacking entertainment, drinking and hunting were the favored pastimes of the elite.

Olaf became somewhat addicted to the thrill of the hunt, frequently organizing expeditions to hunt wolves, deer, and bison.

After the hunting season, each region retained its share before sending the remaining furs and dried hides from the year’s hunt to Haldor City. Olaf quickly tallied them and found this year’s fur yield comparable to last year’s, with a total value of around three hundred thousand pounds of silver.

Following the hunting season, the Grand Governor’s Office issued orders for maple sap collection and sugar production in the regions north of Prophet City. Meanwhile, Song Qinghe and his disciples set off for the lands north of Quebec, searching the forests for Vinland ginseng.

By mid-March, maple syrup from various regions was being transported to Haldor City. Since the establishment of the Grand Governor’s Office, quotas had been set for furs, grain, and maple syrup from each region (based on the highest yields from previous years, with grain quotas adjusted for newly cultivated land). This year, the supplies sent to Haldor City exceeded last year’s, and the regions retained a fair share—a win-win situation.

With the Viking Supply and Marketing Taverns operating in each region, the economic conditions, grain, fur, and syrup production were transparent to the Grand Governor’s Office. As long as the taverns remained uncorrupted, the annual quotas would remain realistic, ensuring mutual benefit.

After the maple syrup was stored, spring planting began across Vinland.

From mid-March onward, Vikings, indentured white slaves, and native slaves busied themselves in the fields. The seeds saved from the previous year were carefully selected and sown.

The bustling spring planting lasted nearly half a month, ending by mid-April. Even the northernmost Labrador Peninsula had thawed, bursting with spring vitality.

Around this time, Icelandic merchant ships arrived at Haldor Harbor, laden with linen, iron ingots, equipment parts, and daily necessities purchased from Holland.

Some of these ships belonged to Icelandic merchants, while a few were Haldor’s warships temporarily repurposed for trade. However, the largest fleet flew the Icelandic flag—Danish merchant ships owned by Elder Hongrode.

Hongrode arrived in high spirits. Last year, after returning to Europe from Vinland, he had made a fortune with Vinland’s specialties. The profits from a single trip to Vinland rivaled years of elite earnings from the East Indies colonies, so he had returned this year with another fleet.

Olaf and Heiner personally welcomed Hongrode. After the banquet, Heiner engaged in intense but friendly negotiations with Hongrode’s party, ultimately securing a deal worth over three hundred thousand marks in silver coins.

While Heiner took Hongrode to retrieve the goods, Olaf was in Maple Palace speaking with a stocky, middle-aged man.

“Uncle Solrak, you can visit Solrak in Abenaki later. He’s doing a fine job as governor!” Olaf said with a smile.

In Iceland, it was common for fathers and sons, even grandsons, to share names. The Solrak family was no exception, with both father and son named Solrak. To distinguish them, people referred to them as Big Solrak and Little Solrak. However, as a junior, Olaf couldn’t address Big Solrak so informally.

Big Solrak had brought Icelandic warships to serve as merchant vessels, both to train the Icelandic navy and to facilitate trade between Vinland and Iceland, increasing Iceland’s revenue.

He also brought a command from Haldor: Olaf was to return to Iceland after summer.

Haldor had decided to lead Olaf to Pomerania before September to arrange his betrothal to the only daughter of Bogislaw XIV. Then, before December, they would travel to Sweden to celebrate Gustavus Adolphus II’s fortieth birthday and attend his coronation as “the Great.”

Chapter 315: The National Anthem of Iceland

In the original timeline, Gustavus Adolphus II had already fallen in battle at Lützen by November 1632. However, Olaf’s arrival had altered Gustavus Adolphus II’s fate—and with it, the destiny of Sweden.

In the original history, Gustavus Adolphus II was posthumously granted the honorific title of “the Great” by the Swedish Parliament, a posthumous tribute to his legendary achievements that would echo through the ages. But now, Gustavus Adolphus II had survived, triumphing over the Catholic Union on the battlefield. He had become the greatest victor of the Protestant League, his accomplishments unparalleled, his personal prestige and territorial gains far surpassing those of the original timeline.

Thus, under the leadership of Prime Minister Oxenstierna, the rulers of the various smaller kingdoms within the Swedish United Kingdom proposed that the Swedish Parliament hold a coronation ceremony for Gustavus Adolphus II, bestowing upon him the title of “the Great” during his fortieth birthday celebrations this winter. This would proclaim to the world that Sweden had produced an emperor whose glory rivaled that of Alexander, Caesar, and Charlemagne.

As the Duke of Iceland and the Earl of Vinland within the Swedish United Kingdom, and as trusted comrades and loyal subjects of Gustavus Adolphus II, Haldor and Olaf were naturally invited by the Parliament to attend. Even if they hadn’t been invited, their bond with Gustavus Adolphus II was such that they would have prepared lavish gifts to present to him regardless.

“Looks like I’ll have to make a trip back to Europe!”

Olaf, who had returned to Vinland less than a year ago and was preparing to make great strides in its development, knew he would have to return to Europe this year. Though he felt reluctant, he understood that Vinland’s progress was inseparable from Iceland and Europe. Thus, he had no choice but to comply with Haldor’s arrangements.

After Big Solrak conveyed Haldor’s orders, he left to fetch the Abenaki, knowing how eager he was to see his son. Olaf didn’t try to stop him but instead invited Heiner to join him for hot pot, where he shared the news.

Heiner, chewing on a lamb chop, mumbled, “This is great news! Bogislaw XIV has no sons. If you marry his daughter soon, you’ll have the right to inherit the Duchy of Pomerania. Once Bogislaw XIV passes, you’ll be able to take over Pomerania and become its Grand Duke!”

With only Olaf and Heiner present, their conversation was unrestrained. Olaf shook his head and said, “Whether or not I can inherit Pomerania isn’t important to me. What I care about most is Vinland. But I am genuinely interested in attending Gustavus Adolphus II’s coronation ceremony.”

“Yeah, a living emperor is far more impressive than the so-called emperors of the Holy Roman Empire,” Heiner agreed.

“So, I’m really looking forward to the trip to Sweden…”

Olaf chewed on a piece of beef, thinking to himself: There aren’t many great emperors in Europe. After Gustavus Adolphus II, the next one will be Napoleon of France. Such heroic figures are rare indeed…

Half a month later, Solrak’s fleet returned to Haldor City from Abenaki. By then, Olaf had already made arrangements for Sally, entrusting her care to his cousin Vanhild. He had also delegated Vinland’s administrative affairs to Heiner and issued orders to the governors of each district, instructing them to behave and follow commands.

Afterward, Olaf set off for Iceland with this year’s supplies and over three hundred elite guards, sailing aboard two warships alongside Solrak’s fleet.

A week later, as the fleet entered the North Atlantic, they encountered a heavy storm and floating ice from the Arctic Ocean, which damaged two of Solrak’s ships beyond repair, forcing them to be abandoned.

Olaf’s ship, however, was a newly designed vessel equipped with watertight bulkheads. Even with minor damage, it remained seaworthy, much to Solrak’s astonishment.

Upon returning to Reykjavik, Solrak’s first order of business was to excitedly report the watertight bulkhead technology to Haldor.

Iceland was an island nation, and the Vikings were a people who had risen to prominence through maritime raids. Thus, Haldor, Solrak, and the other leaders were both shocked and delighted by this technology, which enhanced a ship’s endurance and survivability.

Olaf took the opportunity to mention that Vinland’s shipyard had developed watertight bulkhead technology the previous year, and this year’s practical test had confirmed its success.

Haldor, overjoyed, ordered Ulf to find several dozen shipwrights in Iceland to send to Vinland to learn the technology. Olaf, however, was concerned that Haldor and Ulf might not prioritize protecting the technology, allowing it to spread quickly across Europe. This would be detrimental to Iceland and Vinland’s shipbuilding industries and would undermine the advantage of Icelandic warships in naval battles.

Olaf pulled his brother and father aside and shared his concerns. Haldor agreed and instructed Ulf to select suitable shipwright apprentices from the families of Viking raid oarsmen and production team leaders. These individuals were loyal to Iceland and, being mid-to-low-ranking members of the Viking raids, were unlikely to betray their homeland. They were the most trustworthy candidates.

Upon his return, Olaf noticed that his brother Ulf was quieter than usual. When he asked his father, he learned that Ulf would also be accompanying them to Europe. Duke Albert had agreed to marry his third daughter to Ulf, so Olaf and Ulf would travel to Europe together to complete their respective engagement ceremonies. Afterward, they would join their father and future father-in-law in Stockholm to celebrate Gustavus Adolphus II’s fortieth birthday and the coronation ceremony where he would be crowned “the Great.”

Since the celebration allowed for family attendance and the engagements required parental presence, this European journey would include Haldor and his wife, as well as Ulf and Olaf. Haldor also wanted his youngest daughter and son to see the world, so they would be coming along as well.

It could be said that the entire ruling family of Iceland and Vinland—the Haldor clan—would be making the trip.

To ensure their safety and maintain the dignity of the Duke of Iceland, Haldor selected two thousand Viking raid soldiers to accompany them. These two thousand would be responsible for security during the European journey and would also serve as an honor guard.

In addition to the two thousand Viking Legion soldiers, there was also a fifteen-member band composed of Icelandic bards. Since the Icelandic Duchy needed its own court orchestra, they would provide music during the journey. Haldor had conscripted the bards before last winter, winning their patriotism with land and gold. The bards had quickly transformed into a court orchestra and had even composed a song titled Land of Ice and Fire as Iceland’s national anthem.

After listening to it, Olaf found the melody grand yet distinctly Icelandic, so he approved of it as the national anthem. However, there were no lyrics yet—or rather, the bards had written some, but Haldor wasn’t satisfied and hadn’t adopted them.

Now that Olaf had returned, Haldor trusted his judgment and shared his vision for the national anthem, hoping Olaf could compose appropriate lyrics.

“It should reflect Iceland’s landscapes, embody the Viking spirit, and showcase the ancient legacy of the Haldor family…”

Pondering his father’s requirements, Olaf gathered several priestly elders and learned scholars. After two days of deliberation in the grand cathedral, they produced a set of lyrics for Land of Ice and Fire that Olaf found satisfactory.

“Land of Ice and Fire! Land of Ice and Fire!

Your noble name is sung from ancient times to this day,

A thousand years, a million years, but a breath in your embrace!

Ice and fire weave the colors of your eternal crown,

We live under your protection,

In chaos, we rely on our heroic ancestors,

In peace, we rely on our heroic Grand Duke.

The northern winter is coming,

Against any foe, the Vikings never yield,

We embrace the sea and conquer the world!

…

The northern winter is coming,

We rely on our homeland and the Grand Duke’s protection,

Happily we live, embracing the sea and conquering the world!“

Olaf presented the lyrics he and Iceland’s intellectuals had crafted to Haldor. After reading them, Haldor was extremely pleased and summoned the court orchestra to perform the piece with the new lyrics. He had them play it five times in a row before finally stopping.

In high spirits, Haldor rewarded the orchestra with a generous sum of gold and silver. Then, pulling Olaf aside, he laughed and said, “Olaf, these lyrics are perfect! They capture everything I feel about Iceland and Vinland. This national anthem is grand in scope and meaning—it’s better than the anthems of Sweden or Holland by a millionfold!”

Chapter 316: Olaf’s Ambition

The national anthem of Iceland, Land of Ice and Fire, was officially released on June 1, 1634. It quickly spread through the Viking raids and churches, reaching every corner of the island within a week.

On June 10, an earthquake struck Iceland, collapsing over ten houses in Big Port and causing more than twenty casualties.

Since most of Iceland’s government officials were leaders within the Viking raids, their response was swift. They efficiently handled disaster relief, earning widespread praise.

Soon after, messages arrived from General Hoskuld of the Black Dragon Raid and General Hudik of the White Robe Raid. Both reported volcanic eruptions in their regions during the earthquake. They had already relocated nearby villagers and requested that Big Port send supplies and food.

Iceland was a land of fire and ice, dotted with active volcanoes, hot springs, and glaciers. Earthquakes and eruptions were common, but since it was far from major fault lines, the damage was far less severe than in places like Japan or the Malay Archipelago.

Under Danish colonial rule, Iceland had experienced eruptions and quakes every few years. But with its sparse population and few buildings, the disasters were usually minor—perhaps a few deaths or a village displaced by lava. The Danish colonial government was slightly better than the British in Ireland, but not by much. After all, the ruling class exploited their own people ruthlessly—what more could be expected for colonial subjects?

In the past, the Governor of Iceland would simply order local leaders to handle disasters themselves, offering at most a slight tax reduction the following year as a gesture of goodwill.

Having endured the harsh exploitation of colonial rule, the people of Iceland now found the governance of the Viking raids deeply satisfying. Their lives had improved dramatically, though this was due less to a change in rulers and more to the economic boost from Vinland’s resources.

After this disaster, the Viking raids’ efficient response was widely praised in parliament and among the people, creating a stark contrast with the former Danish governors. Loyalty to Haldor grew steadily.

Upon returning to Iceland, Olaf did not rest for even a day before joining his father in managing the island’s affairs and disaster recovery.

Haldor was decisive. To ensure Olaf could smoothly inherit his position decades later—or in case of an unexpected accident—he had always kept Ulf in charge of the Golden Shield Raid in Big Port while handling the ducal affairs himself.

But now, with Olaf back, Haldor entrusted the ducal matters to him, openly declaring Olaf as his heir.

Both Olaf and Ulf understood their father’s decision, and soon, all of Iceland knew that Olaf was the chosen successor.

Ulf’s spirits sank for a time after this, but Haldor paid him no mind.

By July, with the disaster handled, the time approached for the betrothal ceremony agreed upon with Duke Albert and Duke Bogislaw XIV. Haldor ordered the four raid generals to behave and entrusted affairs to his allies in parliament. Then, with Olaf, Ulf, and the rest of the family—six in total—along with three ships full of gifts, they set sail under the protection of ten large vessels and two thousand Viking warriors, leaving Reykjavik for the distant continent.

The journey was smooth, and a week later, they entered the Skagerrak Strait, where Norway and Denmark squeezed the Baltic and North Seas between them.

This was the first time an Icelandic fleet had entered Danish waters since the war. But since the ships flew not only the Icelandic flag but also the larger Swedish flag, declaring Iceland’s place in the Swedish United Kingdom, Danish merchant and naval vessels kept their distance.

Everyone knew of the enmity between Iceland and Denmark, so no one dared approach, fearing any proximity might spark conflict and make them scapegoats.

The Danish merchants wanted no trouble, but the navy had deeper concerns. They feared that any clash with the Icelandic fleet would provoke the “lion” beside them, leading to humiliating territorial losses and reparations—just as the Habsburgs had suffered. Denmark had no confidence in defeating Sweden.

Two and a half days after entering Danish waters, the Icelandic fleet finally neared Kronborg at the northern entrance of the Sound.

Olaf, returning to familiar grounds, felt a surge of emotions. Helsingør remained in ruins, but Kronborg had been restored. Standing on deck, gazing eastward, he could faintly see the even more imposing fortifications of Helsingborg across the strait. The contrast filled him with a quiet satisfaction.

Haldor, Half, Ulf, and Gerny stood on deck, watching the Danish naval vessels beyond Kronborg and Helsingborg. Half suddenly leaned toward Olaf, excitement in his voice. “Second brother, did you destroy this fortress? And the town over there—did you ruin that too?”

Olaf pointed at Kronborg and began boasting about his past assaults on the fortress and Copenhagen, leaving Half and Gerny—who had heard these stories countless times—staring in awe, their eyes sparkling with admiration.

After the siege of Copenhagen, Helsingborg had become a critical stronghold at the northern entrance of the Sound. Denmark continuously reinforced its naval presence there, so the fleet stationed here was twice the size of Kronborg’s, ensuring the defense of Denmark’s northern gate.

The news of Duke Haldor’s fleet passing through the Sound to attend King Gustavus Adolphus II’s coronation as “the Great” in Sweden had spread throughout Denmark. Though King Christian IV despised Haldor, he dared not make any moves, purely out of fear of Sweden.

As the ten Icelandic ships approached Kronborg, the navies of Helsingborg and Kronborg mobilized.

Over thirty medium and large warships blocked the channel. The ten Icelandic vessels quickly formed a defensive formation.

Soon, a ship approached the flagship Odin, where Olaf, Haldor, and the others stood. Within firing range, it waved a flag.

Haldor, Olaf, and Ulf understood the flag signals—Denmark intended to “escort” their fleet through the Sound.

In truth, it was surveillance and vigilance.

Iceland and Denmark remained adversaries, but since Sweden had taken Iceland under its wing, Denmark could no longer provoke war. And with Denmark’s repeated defeats and weakened state, it lacked the strength for another expedition against Iceland.

Aware of its own limitations, Denmark feared any disturbance from Haldor’s fleet. Thus, they could only monitor them closely until they passed through the Sound and into the eastern Baltic.

Olaf continuously observed the Danish navy, warships, and coastal villages through his telescope.

Once the fleet left Danish waters and the Danish navy faded from sight, Olaf declared firmly, “Denmark is in worse shape than two years ago. With Sweden’s rise, Denmark’s days are harder. Within ten years, we won’t need to worry about Danish raids. In fact, in ten years, I believe Iceland and Vinland will have the strength to conquer Denmark!”

Haldor frowned. “What did you say?”

Olaf gestured toward the sea, his voice resolute. “I said that within ten years, the Iceland-Vinland Duchy will have the power to crush the Danish army and annex Danish territory!”

Olaf’s bold ambition shocked Haldor, Ulf, and the others. Though they were exceptional men, their vision was limited. They had never considered conquering Denmark—at most, they dreamed of seizing a piece of Norwegian land as a continental foothold in the future. The idea of dominating the European mainland was something they had only vaguely imagined for future generations.

But now, Olaf had openly declared this ambition. Haldor was first startled, then delighted. He laughed, “Heroes must dare to dream what others do not. Olaf, you are Iceland’s Charlemagne!”

Ulf was also taken aback, then filled with self-doubt. He sighed inwardly, realizing the gap between himself and Olaf—and why their father had chosen Olaf as his heir.

Sensing Olaf’s conquering spirit, Ulf muttered to himself, Olaf, you truly are fearless! But perhaps only someone as bold as you could rival our ancestors…

Chapter 317: The Betrothal

Several days later, the Icelandic fleet entered the harbor of Szczecin, and Haldor, along with his family, moved into the ducal castle, where they met Duke Bogislaw XIV and his daughter, Merkel.

In Olaf’s eyes, Duke Bogislaw XIV appeared much more aged than he had two years prior. His clouded gaze and unstable breath made it clear that his time was drawing to a close.

However, Duke Bogislaw XIV had no sons—only a daughter and a nephew to rely on. Though his energy was waning, he still personally received Haldor’s family.

After a toast and a few welcoming words, the duke retired to rest, leaving the Swedish governor of Pomerania, Lord West, to preside over the gathering.

West and Olaf were old acquaintances, and after a few drinks, the two sat together, sharing stories of their recent experiences.

The next morning, Haldor, Katrin, and Olaf were invited to the duke’s palace, where they finally met Princess Merkel.

Merkel’s mother was not German but the daughter of a merchant family from northern Italy. Over a decade ago, Duke Bogislaw XIV had married her by chance, and she had given birth to Merkel. However, Merkel had been frail since childhood, often falling ill, and thus had been kept secluded within the palace, unknown to outsiders.

As Haldor and Katrin discussed the details of the betrothal and marriage with Duke Bogislaw XIV, Olaf sat nearby, curiously observing the small, frail girl seated beside the duke.

Princess Merkel was only fifteen years old. Though young, as the daughter of a noble house, she was already old enough to fulfill the duties of a political marriage.

Given Pomerania’s precarious situation and Duke Bogislaw XIV’s lack of heirs, neighboring nations had long coveted the duchy. As Merkel neared adulthood, suitors had flocked to seek her hand. However, though the duke was aging, he was not foolish. He saw through the ambitions of Prussia and Saxony, carefully screening each proposal. Only when he received the request from the Duke of Iceland for his heir did he agree—not because of Iceland’s strength, but because he knew Olaf and Haldor were favored by King Gustavus Adolphus II. Only by marrying his daughter to them could he ensure his legacy would not be seized by greedy neighbors.

Merkel was petite, her gown hanging loosely on her slender frame. Her skin was pale, her features delicate, but her face lacked color, and she sat weakly, her chest flat.

Accustomed to the “grandeur” of Nordic women, Olaf found Merkel too frail and unimpressive. Though slightly disappointed, he was relieved she was at least pleasant to look at and accepted the arrangement.

Merkel had been sickly since childhood and had never left the castle. Though well-educated, she lacked worldly experience and was unaware of life’s hardships. She stole a few glances at Olaf, seeing a towering, bearded giant, and her heart raced with fear. She no longer cared to examine his features, her mind filled with anxious thoughts.

Why does Olaf look so terrifying? Is he descended from Nordic giants? Will he take me to live in an ice cave? God, please don’t let Father agree to this… But if he does, how can I refuse? Can I refuse? What kind of life would I have if I married him…?

Merkel’s thoughts spiraled, her mind a whirl of confusion, and she zoned out.

Olaf, too, was lost in thought—but not about Merkel, whose looks and figure paled in comparison to Sally. Instead, he imagined himself, years from now, as Duke Bogislaw XIV’s son-in-law, inheriting Pomerania and uniting it with Iceland and Vinland.

After a while, Haldor and Katrin finalized the marriage arrangements with Duke Bogislaw XIV, deciding to hold the betrothal ceremony at the end of next month.

Nobles, of course, could not conduct affairs as simply as commoners. There were rules and formalities to observe, and as newcomers to the aristocratic world, Haldor’s family was eager to learn, accepting guidance with humility.

With Olaf’s betrothal settled, Haldor and Katrin bid farewell to Duke Bogislaw XIV and continued their journey to Saxony-Lauenburg, where they met Duke Albert. The duke received them with great hospitality.

Duke Albert was slightly older than Haldor but no more than fifty. He had many children, most of whom were grown. A man of generous spirit, he did not put on airs before Olaf, instead engaging him in warm conversation while occasionally observing Ulf and asking him questions.

In truth, Duke Albert had hoped to marry one of his daughters to Olaf, having fought alongside Haldor and Olaf and knowing Olaf’s intelligence and bravery. But since the father and son had set their sights on Pomerania, the duke had to abandon that idea and turned his attention to Ulf.

Ulf was nearly as tall as Olaf, though his features were rougher, and his hair and beard were brown like Haldor’s, lacking Olaf’s golden hue.

Still, Ulf’s height and appearance were rare even in Central Europe, and his upbringing in Vinland had given him an extraordinary presence. Duke Albert couldn’t help but admire him, thinking that the Haldor family truly produced no weaklings. Ulf was impressive—perhaps not far behind Haldor and Olaf.

As he mused, Duke Albert glanced at Half and Gerny, standing beside Katrin.

Half and Gerny were only eleven months apart—fourteen and thirteen years old, respectively. Due to the early maturation of Nordic people, Half was already as tall as Katrin, with dark fuzz on his upper lip. Though he lacked discipline and disliked studying, he was sturdy and handsome, a natural candidate for greatness.

Gerny, however, surpassed her brother. Perhaps blessed by God, she had inherited the best of her parents. Though young, she was already a stunning beauty—tall and slender, with skin like alabaster and features as exquisite as Venus descending from her pedestal.

Duke Albert thought to himself that, regardless of anything else, Haldor’s family would rise even higher in Europe’s nobility simply because of this daughter.

In a few more years, when she blossoms fully, every noble son in Europe will be clamoring to marry into the House of Iceland.

Recalling his own five daughters, all of whom were beautiful, and knowing that the more prosperous his in-laws became, the greater his own influence would be, Duke Albert’s mood improved greatly. He took Haldor’s hand and eagerly discussed the betrothal of their children.

For nobles, a betrothal was a way of announcing to other aristocrats that their child was spoken for—a necessary step in strengthening political ties between families.

Thus, betrothals were grand affairs, often attended by relatives and friends of both families, serving as a public declaration. The wedding itself would follow not long after.

After a friendly discussion between the two dukes, Ulf’s betrothal to Duke Albert’s fourth daughter was set for August 8th.

Since Olaf’s betrothal was scheduled for August 27th, Haldor decided to stay in Lauenburg until Ulf’s ceremony before traveling to Szczecin for Olaf’s betrothal. Afterward, they could join both families in traveling to Stockholm to celebrate King Gustavus Adolphus II’s birthday and coronation anniversary, ensuring a smooth transition between events.

Chapter 318: The Founder of Prussia

After staying in Lauenburg for over twenty days, the day of Ulf’s betrothal finally arrived. Haldor’s family attended in their finest attire, all garments tailored from the finest fabrics in Iceland before their departure. Adorned with the women’s jewelry and Haldor’s ivory cane, their ensemble was worth a staggering fifty thousand shillings in gold coins.

When Olaf first learned of the price, he was taken aback, feeling it was a waste. He believed that sum could have built five fully armed Walrus-class ships.

On the day of the betrothal, hundreds of guests arrived in Lauenburg—nobles and dignitaries from the Saxony Duchy, as well as representatives from neighboring duchies and counties.

This was the 17th century, long before capitalists could challenge the nobility. No matter how wealthy a merchant was, without special connections, they could not gain entry to the betrothal banquet of the children of two dukes. Thus, the entire hall was filled with elegantly dressed, refined nobles.

The duke’s mansion was brightly lit, the glow reflecting off the stained-glass windows, adding an air of mystique.

Amidst the clinking of glasses, nobles of all ranks flattered one another while occasionally sampling the food.

Olaf was not the center of attention today, so he stood in a corner with his younger siblings, eating pastries and observing the guests.

Representatives from neighboring states and regions had come to offer their congratulations, bringing lavish gifts—one set for Duke Albert and another for Haldor.

Within the Swedish United Kingdom, the various German states were all tributary states, though their strength varied. In the eyes of His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II, the proximity of dukes and counts differed.

Everyone, even the Habsburg emperor, knew that the two foreign lords most favored by Gustavus Adolphus II were Haldor, Duke of Iceland, and Duke Albert of Saxony. Next in line were the smaller states like Prussia, Pomerania, and Magdeburg.

Whether for diplomatic relations or their standing within the Swedish United Kingdom, the rulers of other states would not pass up this opportunity to strengthen ties with the two dukes.

At this betrothal banquet, Olaf paid little attention to the other states and regions. Even when the Duke of Magdeburg, Wallenstein, arrived in person, Olaf’s focus remained on a young, dark-haired boy of short stature.

The boy wore a gold-buttoned suit and calfskin boots, with a high nose and refined features. Despite his youth, he carried himself with remarkable maturity. He was the representative from Prussia—Frederick William, heir to Duke George William.

Frederick William: Ascended in 1640, a wise ruler who bridged the past and future of Brandenburg-Prussia, the founder of Prussia’s rise to power, and one of the outstanding absolutist monarchs of the 17th century.

This was Olaf’s only impression of the young man before him, but it was an impressive one.

Under Frederick William’s leadership, Prussia would spend two centuries expanding and rising, eventually unifying the German regions, achieving what no one before had. It would go on to wage two world wars, nearly conquering all of Europe.

Olaf did not see Frederick William as a threat to himself. First, Iceland now had a strong foundation in Vinland, and in a few decades, it would surely dominate much of North America, giving it the potential to become a superpower. Prussia’s rise would only pit it against France in a struggle for dominance in Europe, posing no threat to Iceland and Vinland for the next century or two.

Second, Prussia’s rise would not be the work of one or two rulers alone. Frederick William was capable, and his abilities could serve as an asset to the Icelandic Duchy. Strengthening ties between the two duchies would allow them to support each other in the future.

Olaf picked up a glass of whiskey and approached Frederick William, greeting him in Swedish: “Hello, Lord Frederick William.”

Since the outbreak of the Thirty Years’ War, Frederick William had been sent by his father to live in The Hague, Holland, where he had even been betrothed to the daughter of the Prince of Orange. Only after the war ended last year was he able to return home. Thus, Frederick William was unfamiliar with the nobles of his own and neighboring duchies, and his Swedish was still rudimentary.

“You… Hello,” William stammered, his face flushed as he shyly shook Olaf’s hand, looking up at the tall, handsome man before him.

William was too young and lacked diplomatic experience, so his father had assigned several close ministers to assist him. Most matters were handled by these officials, while young William merely represented his father, gaining exposure to the world.

William’s chief steward, Brandt, first bowed to Olaf before leaning in to whisper an introduction of Olaf’s identity and background to his young master.

William’s eyes lit up, his face flushing with excitement as he stammered, “You… You are Count Olaf of Vinland? I’ve long heard of how you saved the Lion King under divine inspiration, and of the might of your Viking Legion…”

William spoke excitedly, like a young fan meeting his idol, while Brandt apologetically smiled at Olaf.

Olaf smiled in understanding before engaging in a quiet conversation with young William.

Olaf’s purpose in approaching William was simply to establish a connection—a casual move, since before William’s ascension, Prussia was still a weak state. Old William was paralyzed from the waist down and incapable of governing, so Iceland had no need to forge deep ties with Prussia at this time.

However, by befriending young William now and maintaining a personal relationship, once William took the throne in a few years and began his reforms, Iceland could deepen its ties with him, offering mutual assistance.

When Olaf thought of Iceland, he was actually considering his father-in-law’s Pomerania Duchy.

Pomerania was adjacent to Prussia and historically the first state to be annexed by the Prussian Duchy—though in history, this was due to the old duke having no heir. But now, things were different.

Olaf’s status and identity made him a suitable heir to his father-in-law’s duchy. He could then ride the wave of Prussia’s rise, developing alongside it, and with the support of Iceland and Vinland, he could outpace Prussia’s growth. Together, they could secure a foothold on the southern shore of the Baltic Sea, becoming the wedge through which the Iceland-Vinland United Duchy embedded itself in the European continent.

Young William was inexperienced and guileless, and within half an hour of Olaf’s deliberate overtures, he was completely won over, becoming Olaf’s devoted admirer. For the rest of Ulf’s betrothal banquet, he stuck close to Olaf like a shadow.

After the betrothal ceremony concluded, young William followed Olaf northward, preparing to attend his elder brother’s betrothal ceremony in Pomerania.

Brandt was pleased to see his young master growing close to the heir of the Icelandic Duchy and the Count of Vinland. Far from discouraging the friendship, he occasionally encouraged it.

When Haldor’s party, along with Duke Albert’s family and young William’s entourage, entered Prussia, young William invited the two dukes to rest in his family’s castles along the way.

The two dukes enjoyed the young man’s attentiveness, and their opinion of this junior improved significantly.

Chapter 319: The Old Father-in-Law Is Not Confused

After two days of traveling north from the Prussia Duchy, they arrived in Szczecin, the capital of the Pomerania Duchy.

Szczecin, being a crucial port on the southern shore of the Baltic Sea, boasted a thriving economy. It was far more developed than the major cities of Prussia and Saxony. Both economically and strategically, it was a vital stronghold, which was why Sweden stationed troops and appointed a governor here. It was no wonder that the Prussia Duchy had long coveted this place.

Although Olaf had not yet formally betrothed Merkel, the officials of the Pomerania Duchy already regarded him as the heir. Thus, they treated Haldor’s group with particular reverence and enthusiasm.

Duke Albert’s family, along with young Wilhelm and Haldor’s family, settled into the ducal castle.

Every day, nobles from far and wide came to offer their congratulations, including heirs and ministers from neighboring countries. As a result, the ducal castle was abuzz with banquets daily.

Olaf was not idle during these days. He either took young Wilhelm around the city to buy curiosities or found time to meet with Merkel, presenting his betrothed with expensive gifts like silk handkerchiefs, small self-striking clocks, and porcelain.

Though Olaf had accepted the idea of marrying a woman he had no deep feelings for, he still hoped his future wife would become his lover. Thus, he seized every opportunity to cultivate their relationship.

Merkel, being young and having lived secluded in the palace, rarely ventured out or met outsiders. Initially, she was resistant and even fearful of Olaf’s advances.

But Olaf was not one to be detered by a young girl’s coldness. He won her over with two silk handkerchiefs embroidered with mandarin ducks, then shook her heart with a few old jokes and sweet words. Soon, Merkel accepted him.

Thus, before the betrothal, Olaf would meet with Merkel every few days, chatting and discussing books, much like courting.

A few days later, the betrothal ceremony arrived. Olaf woke early, and Katrin personally helped him into his formal attire, then placed a top hat on his head, laughing, “Our Olaf will charm thousands of girls the moment he steps into the hall. Come, let’s go show up those German dwarves.”

Olaf smiled faintly, sensing his mother’s lingering frustration from the dance a few nights prior, where her dancing had been outshone by the Duchess of Magdeburg.

He softly consoled her, and Katrin quickly forgot her troubles, eager to take her son to the throne room and let the guests see how tall and handsome the Haldor heir was.

Olaf spent the day in a daze, directed by maids and officials, even his words scripted. He merely listened as his future father-in-law and his own father, Haldor, delivered their speeches. Only when the ceremony ended did he return to the crowd to eat.

Ulf and his betrothed, Annie, were chatting with several noble couples when they suddenly saw Olaf and Merkel approaching for food. The couple smiled and greeted them. Ulf teased, “Olaf, are you hungry?”

Olaf raised an eyebrow, recalling how he had once said the same to Ulf, and laughed, “Just like you felt back then.”

The brothers burst into laughter, clutching their stomachs. “Hahaha…”

Annie and Merkel, unfamiliar with the brothers, could only watch in bewilderment.

The next morning, the guests who had attended the betrothal ceremony began bidding farewell to Bogislaw XIV. By afternoon, they had all departed.

That evening, Bogislaw XIV hosted a banquet for the Haldor family, Duke Albert’s family, young Wilhelm, and Governor West.

During the banquet, Bogislaw XIV mustered his strength to deliver a few formal remarks before taking Olaf’s hand, entrusting his son-in-law with the duty of hosting the guests.

Olaf understood that his father-in-law, knowing his days were numbered, had begun the transition of power. Though by rights, Merkel should inherit the duchy, Bogislaw XIV had never intended for his daughter to rule.

Now that he was passing the mantle to Olaf, it was clear he had thought it through. Olaf was unconcerned about any hidden motives—whether in status, power, or military strength, he was confident in facing any internal or external threats to the Pomerania Duchy.

Thus, Olaf graciously accepted, raising a toast with West, Duke Albert, and young Wilhelm in his new capacity as Bogislaw XIV’s son-in-law and heir.

As the banquet drew to a close and the guests grew flushed with drink, Bogislaw XIV suddenly perked up and declared, “Ladies and gentlemen, my health is failing, and I am too old to attend King Gustavus Adolphus II’s birthday celebration or his coronation. It is a great regret. Therefore, I ask Olaf to represent me and take Merkel to the event.”

Young Wilhelm and the ladies were unaware of the deeper meaning, but West, Brandt behind Wilhelm, Olaf, Haldor, and Ulf all understood. Bogislaw XIV intended to use this opportunity to secure Olaf’s inheritance of the Pomerania Duchy with the approval of the highest leader of the Swedish United Kingdom, Gustavus Adolphus II, thereby announcing it to the world.

Haldor and Ulf were secretly delighted, while Brandt and Duke Albert sighed inwardly. West’s emotions were more complex.

Olaf paid no mind to these complications. He helped his father-in-law up, then took Merkel’s small hand and promised, “Your Grace, rest assured. I will not disappoint you, and I will take good care of Merkel…”

Bogislaw XIV nodded as if he were hard of hearing, murmuring, “Good… good…”

Merkel blushed shyly, tugging at her hand a few times before giving up and letting Olaf hold it as she lowered her head.

The next morning, the servants of the ducal castle began packing their belongings and preparing carriages for their masters.

Haldor, Duke Albert, and young Wilhelm each had their own attendants, guards, and carriages, so they did not need the Pomeranian servants. They, too, began preparations early.

By noon, they had a simple meal of roasted suckling pig with oatmeal porridge, smoked beef sausage, and a dozen desserts before bidding farewell to Bogislaw XIV.

Olaf and Merkel were the last to enter. Bogislaw XIV lay in bed, his face sallow, his eyes barely open. Seeing only Olaf and his daughter in the room, he sat up with Merkel’s help.

“Olaf, you are a hero, ambitious and capable. I began investigating your family two years ago, and the more I learned, the more astonished I became. I suspect your family’s current foundation is largely your doing… cough…”

Bogislaw XIV suddenly coughed twice before continuing, “You must know that my Pomerania Duchy is sandwiched between Sweden, Poland, and Germany, with several convenient ports. Many are eager for my demise to seize my lands. But now that you are my son-in-law, Pomerania will pass to you. I don’t have long left. Merkel was poisoned as a baby and nearly died. For over a decade, I’ve guarded her carefully, fearing another attempt. I know those with ill intentions want to leave me without an heir.

I want you as my heir, with an army at your command and the trust of Gustavus Adolphus II. Who would dare challenge you?

Remember, take good care of Pomerania and Merkel. That’s all I ask…”

Bogislaw XIV, weak and breathless, spoke hurriedly and disjointedly, but Olaf understood.

Merkel was oblivious to her father’s implications, but Olaf narrowed his eyes and asked softly, “Was Merkel’s brother also…?”

Bogislaw XIV waved his hand. “No need to investigate. In royal families, such things are common. The culprits are many, and revenge is unnecessary. As long as you and Merkel inherit the duchy safely, their schemes will fail, and I can rest in peace.”

Olaf was relieved that his father-in-law did not demand vengeance for his short-lived brother-in-law. Though he had no intention of avenging him, he would investigate those who had poisoned Merkel and find a way to retaliate.

As Olaf pondered, Bogislaw XIV smiled faintly, turning to lie on his side. “Go to Sweden soon. The gifts are ready. Have Minister of the Interior Brigitte accompany you. He has served me for over thirty years—loyal and capable. He will be of great help.”

Olaf and Merkel slowly left the room and saw the fifty-something, dignified Brigitte waiting at the door.

“Respected Lord Olaf and Princess, the gifts, carriages, and guards are prepared. Duke Albert, Duke Haldor, and Lord Wilhelm are ready to depart. When shall we leave?”

“Now. We’ll go with them.”

As soon as Olaf spoke, Brigitte withdrew.

Olaf turned to Merkel and said, “Your father, my old father-in-law, is not as simple as people think. They say he’s senile, indulgent, and confused, but I see wisdom in his folly. He does what he must…”

Merkel recalled her childhood memories. “I remember my father was tall and imposing when he was young, but under Poland’s oppression, he aged quickly. The poisoning incident was a great blow to him…”

Merkel’s eyes reddened as she spoke. Olaf wrapped his arm around his betrothed, inhaling the faint scent of her perfume, and said, “Don’t worry. No one will dare bully you again!”

Chapter 320: Stockholm

After his betrothal, Olaf, now the son-in-law and designated heir of Bogislaw XIV, set sail for the northern shores of the Baltic Sea with gifts from the Pomerania Duchy, accompanied by Haldor, Duke Albert, and young William.

According to current European inheritance laws, Bogislaw XIV’s daughter was still a minor. Even if Bogislaw XIV were to die, Olaf could only serve as regent. However, Pomerania’s unique position meant he could not follow customary law.

Bogislaw XIV dared not explicitly name an heir for fear his daughter might be harmed.

Before Olaf’s arrival, multiple factions had intervened, pressuring Bogislaw XIV to designate his only nephew as heir due to Merkel’s youth and illness.

Bogislaw XIV understood the intentions of Poland, Prussia, and even Sweden. If he passed the inheritance to his nephew, his nephew would likely meet an untimely death after his own passing, and Merkel might not survive either.

With no heir, Pomerania would be divided among its neighbors, allowing Sweden to seize control of key ports like Szczecin.

Aware of others’ schemes, Bogislaw XIV defied convention by publicly naming Olaf as his heir and sending him to Sweden for the celebrations.

Olaf understood his father-in-law’s intentions and saw this as an opportunity. Once he formally married Merkel, he would become Duke of Pomerania upon Bogislaw XIV’s death.

Confident in himself and the Icelandic Duchy, Olaf believed the news of his betrothal would deter any ambitious challengers.

The Icelandic Duchy’s fleet was the largest, so everyone boarded Icelandic warships, leaving Pomerania’s prepared vessels unused.

Departing from Szczecin, they sailed north along the Baltic Sea for two days before reaching Stockholm’s harbor.

Stockholm was a coastal city surrounded by islands, similar to London, Reykjavik, and Amsterdam, but most akin to Copenhagen. However, its complex hydrology set it apart. The outer waters were dotted with scattered islands, seemingly accessible, but hidden reefs made navigation difficult for large ships.

Though it was Olaf’s first visit, Pomerania’s ministers and Prussian advisors had been there before, and their experienced sailors guided the fleet safely to Djurgården Island, Stockholm’s second line of defense. The island, though small, was strategically vital, fortified with watchtowers, bastions, and a bustling harbor—the largest in the northern inner sea.

Stockholm’s commercial atmosphere paled in comparison to London and Copenhagen and was far behind Amsterdam. From Olaf’s perspective, the city, while impressive, had fewer merchants and ships than Szczecin, barely surpassing Reykjavik.

Yet Olaf knew Sweden’s rise wasn’t driven by commerce but by its rich coal and iron resources and Gustavus Adolphus II’s reforms. As the first nation to professionalize its army, Sweden, under its brilliant ruler, dominated despite its smaller population. In an era without industrialization, Sweden’s military prowess made it a formidable force, much like the Qing Dynasty in the Far East, which overpowered the Ming Dynasty, Korea, and Mongolia.

In Olaf’s historical memory, Sweden remained a northern powerhouse even after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death, suppressing Denmark, Poland, and Russia for nearly a century—until Peter the Great’s rise. However, with the Industrial Revolution, Sweden’s high-latitude geography and limited arable land left it at a disadvantage against Russia’s vast resources.

Iceland and Vinland faced similar challenges, but Olaf was confident he could address them after ascending to power.

This trip wasn’t just for celebrations; Olaf aimed to study Gustavus Adolphus II’s governance and reconnect with the great ruler after over a year apart.

Upon arrival, dock guards inspected and greeted them. Due to the large number of foreign visitors, weapons like firearms, longbows, and swords were prohibited ashore.

The Icelandic fleet, with over two thousand soldiers and additional troops from Prussia, Saxony, and Pomerania, totaling over four thousand, put Sweden on high alert. However, Stockholm’s defenses—ten thousand regular troops, noble retainers, and a forty-ship navy—ensured security.

Leaving the soldiers aboard, they surrendered their weapons to Swedish guards. The guests from Iceland, Pomerania, Saxony, and Prussia were then personally welcomed by Swedish Chancellor Oxenstierna, who escorted them via carriage to a brigantine. After passing two checkpoints, they reached Staden Island, Stockholm’s central district.

Though small, Staden Island was the heart of Sweden, encircled by watchtowers, bastions, and cannons, with a permanent naval presence. It housed the “Three Crowns Palace” and Sweden’s elite ministers and nobles. Capturing this island would mean controlling all of Sweden.

After another inspection, they disembarked. As dusk fell, the carriage ride north revealed clean streets, well-dressed pedestrians, and elegant shops, leaving visitors impressed by the grandeur of a great nation.

Olaf scoffed softly. “Beyond Staden Island lies Sweden’s true face. This island is home to the wealthy and powerful—Sweden’s elite. Of course it looks extraordinary.”

The procession passed a Gothic church before stopping at a towering castle adorned with stained-glass windows—the Three Crowns Palace. Olaf and Haldor, both seasoned military leaders, immediately recognized its origins as a fortified stronghold, now expanded into an imposing royal residence.

Chapter 321: Reuniting with an Old Friend

Haldor, now a duke and ruler of his own domain, gazed up at the Three Crowns Palace with admiration. Even Olaf couldn’t help but compare Maple Palace to the grandeur of the Swedish Kingdom, feeling that his own residence was shabbier than an outhouse. Both father and son silently vowed, “When we return, we’ll have a palace built in the style of the Three Crowns Palace!”

Upon entering the palace, Oxenstierna arranged for the dukes and their families to rest and prepare for the evening’s banquet, where Gustavus Adolphus II would host them alongside the queen and princess.

Olaf and Merkel were given a suite on the third floor of the southwest wing. Since they were not yet officially married, Olaf stayed in the adjacent room while Merkel and her maid occupied the main chamber.

After freshening up, a palace servant knocked on their door. “The banquet in the throne hall is ready. Chancellor Oxenstierna requests your presence, sir, and Miss Merkel.”

Olaf asked, “Who else has arrived?”

“The regent of Holland’s envoy, the Habsburgs’ envoy, Duke Wallenstein of Magdeburg, the Duke of Buckingham representing King Charles I of England, and Monsieur Bourbon from France.”

Olaf nodded. “We’ll be right there.”

Closing the door, Olaf went to fetch Merkel. Minutes later, the couple emerged in elegant attire, following the servant through two gardens and a corridor adorned with paintings, antiques, and porcelain, arriving at a magnificent hall.

“Lord, madam, you’ve reached the throne hall. Please make yourselves comfortable. Call for us if you need anything,” the servant said before taking his place by the wall.

Olaf and Merkel spotted Haldor, Katrin, Ulf, and Annie nearby. Not far off, Duke Albert’s family and young William were engaged in conversation with Duke Wallenstein of Magdeburg.

The hall was filled with dozens of people—some familiar faces from last year’s battlefield. Olaf greeted his old comrades and introduced his fiancée.

Before long, West pulled Olaf aside. “Let me introduce you to the Duke of Buckingham from England and General Bourbon from France.”

West led the couple toward a group where Oxenstierna was speaking. Pointing to a short, plump man in a wig, he whispered, “This is the Duke of Buckingham, George Villiers. He shares his father’s name and enjoys the same favor from the English king. That’s why Charles I sent him to congratulate His Majesty.”

Olaf nodded in acknowledgment. Then West turned to the tall, lean young man beside Buckingham. “This is Francis de Bourbon, a member of the French royal family and representative of Louis XIII. He’s made a name for himself in France, suppressing rebellions and fighting on the Spanish border.”

Olaf smiled faintly. “I’ve heard of him.”

As they approached, Oxenstierna and the two envoys noticed them. After introductions, Buckingham shook Olaf’s hand and kissed Merkel’s, exchanging pleasantries.

Olaf knew little about Buckingham beyond the fact that the future British royal family would reside in his current estate—Buckingham Palace.

But he was quite familiar with Francis de Bourbon, the French envoy. Years ago, Bourbon had been a captain in New France, captured by Haldor after a failed attempt to aid the natives of Bakens City. He had even visited Hrut City, where Olaf had met him several times. Knowing Bourbon admired his father and had fallen out with Champlain before returning to France, Olaf was surprised to see him here.

Francis didn’t recognize Olaf at first, but after West’s introduction, his face lit up with joy. He embraced Olaf, exclaiming, “You’ve grown so much, Olaf! I heard about your and Lord Haldor’s exploits in Germany last year. I always knew Duke Haldor would become someone great!”

“Olaf, is Duke Haldor here too? Where is he?” Francis craned his neck, spotting the familiar towering figure of Haldor conversing with Wallenstein in the distance.

Olaf grinned. “I’ll take you to him. My father misses you greatly.”

“Alright.” Francis excused himself from Oxenstierna and Buckingham before following Olaf to Haldor.

Haldor was delighted to see Francis. The two clasped hands, sharing stories of their time apart. Olaf turned to Wallenstein, recalling from his past life that after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death, Wallenstein had outlived his usefulness to the Habsburg emperor and was poisoned. Suspecting Habsburg spies lurked nearby, Olaf asked, “Your Grace, it’s been a while. How is your health?”

Wallenstein, though in his fifties, was full of vigor. He laughed heartily. “I’m doing well! Age has caught up with me. Years of campaigning for the Habsburgs left me with old wounds that are acting up now. I don’t dare venture out much, but I’ve been taking your Icelandic royal jelly to recover…”

Olaf detected a mix of truth and exaggeration in Wallenstein’s words. He knew that with the medical knowledge of the time, even seasoned warriors like Wallenstein and Gustavus Adolphus II, who led from the front, would suffer from old injuries. Their stamina and energy would wane, making it harder to suppress flare-ups. Still, with Wallenstein’s status and wealth, his situation couldn’t be as dire as he claimed.

“You are the foremost general of our Swedish United Kingdom. I hope to learn from you in the future. Your Bohemian forces are truly impressive! You must take care of yourself. When I return, I’ll send some rare Khitan medicines to help you recover.”

Wallenstein wasn’t an ambitious man. Rising from a fallen noble to a duke with a place in history, he was content. Now, in his later years, he focused on strengthening Magdeburg’s diplomatic ties and securing his legacy for his descendants. He welcomed Olaf’s overture, a young count favored by Gustavus Adolphus II with a bright future. “I couldn’t accept such generosity. If you fancy any of my soldiers, take a group of officers with you after the celebrations. If you wish to learn my command strategies, you’re always welcome. I’ll share everything I know.”

Olaf beamed. “Then I won’t stand on ceremony. My duties may not allow me much time to learn from you directly, but I’ll discuss with Duke Haldor about sending my brother, Half, to study under you. As for your officers, I’ll gladly accept.”

Wallenstein remembered Half from Ulf and Olaf’s betrothals—a tall young man like the rest of the Haldor family. He nodded. “That can be arranged…”

Chapter 322: Olaf Goes to University

Not long after Olaf and Wallenstein had settled their mutual assistance agreement, the self-striking clock on the wall suddenly chimed. It was already seven in the evening. The palace was brightly lit, with servants, maids, and guests all dressed in elegant attire, their faces beaming with smiles, as if this were the most civilized social gathering.

The grand doors on the second floor were pushed open by guards. Gustavus Adolphus II, clad in a voluminous wool coat embroidered with gold and silver threads, appeared with the queen by his side, her silk shawl draped elegantly over her shoulders. Beside them stood a young princess in a pleated dress—none other than the future Queen Christina. At just seven years old, Christina Augusta had inherited her father’s high nose and her mother’s beautiful eyes and sensual lips, making her look as lovely as a Barbie doll, though her left shoulder was slightly hunched, giving her an odd appearance.

Olaf had spent much time with William and Duke Albert lately, listening to them discuss the affairs of Denmark, Sweden, Russia, and other nations. He knew that Gustavus Adolphus II’s only daughter, Princess Christina, had suffered a fall at the age of one due to a maid’s negligence, fracturing her scapula and leaving her with one shoulder higher than the other.

On the east wall of the second floor, a court orchestra had been playing, but they stopped as soon as the royal family appeared, the noisy hall falling into sudden silence.

All eyes turned to Gustavus Adolphus II. A young musician from the orchestra rose and lightly struck a triangle.

Ding!

“All hail His Majesty! Her Majesty the Queen! Her Highness the Princess!”

Everyone bowed in unison. Gustavus Adolphus II, his face flushed with warmth, waved to the crowd before descending the stairs with the queen and princess.

Once the royal family had reached the lower floor, the highest-ranking dukes approached one by one to pay their respects and inquire after their great sovereign’s well-being.

Gustavus Adolphus II spoke kindly to each duke. When Haldor and his family stepped forward, the king greeted Katrin, Ulf, Half, and Gerny, asking about Iceland’s affairs. His tone carried a hint of reproach for Haldor’s infrequent visits.

Haldor humbly explained that Iceland had suffered earthquakes and cold snaps, leaving him occupied with disaster relief and resettling refugees for over a year. Though he had longed to visit Sweden, he had never found the time.

Gustavus Adolphus II seemed already aware of Iceland’s troubles. He nodded in understanding, then turned to Olaf, who stood nearby, and teased, “You golden-haired brat, why aren’t you coming over here?!”

Olaf and Merkel hurried forward. After bowing, Gustavus Adolphus II asked, “Your marriage into the Pomerania Duchy is a good thing. Bogusław wants you to inherit his estate. I think that’s fine—it’ll bring you closer to me.”

Olaf saw the genuine delight in the king’s eyes. He knew the emperor truly favored him, perhaps because he had saved his life, or perhaps due to some religious belief that made him see Olaf as his lucky charm—or maybe both.

Olaf, ever the quick thinker, let his eyes redden as he spoke with feigned emotion, “Your Majesty, I’ve missed you terribly! While I was in Vinland and Iceland, I worried constantly about your health and whether your old battle wounds had healed. But last year’s cold snap was so severe, I could only—”

Gustavus Adolphus II seemed to recall the battles he and Olaf had fought side by side the previous year. His own eyes reddened slightly. “I know of your struggles. When you left, I had Oxenstierna allocate funds and supplies for you. Your father had to stay in Iceland, but you’re still young—you should go to university. Stay in Stockholm, and I’ll arrange for you to attend Uppsala University, the finest in the North. After you graduate, you’ll serve as the commander of my royal constabulary. I have great plans for you and Iceland’s Viking Legion…”

Turning to Haldor, he asked, “What do you think of my arrangement? Any objections?”

Haldor glanced at Olaf, who seemed composed, and smiled. “Thank you, Your Majesty. Your plan is perfect. I was just worrying about the children’s education. Now Olaf will attend Uppsala University, and when Half and Gerny are older, they’ll go too. The Haldor family’s children must study hard and serve Your Majesty well!”

Gustavus Adolphus II turned to the queen and whispered, “I’ve always said Haldor and his sons are my most loyal servants. Though they’re Icelanders, they admire Swedish rule. I’d like Christina to befriend Olaf. We’re getting older, and when the throne passes to little Tina, she’ll need young men like Olaf to support her.”

The queen, born into Prussian nobility, was distantly related to William. However, she had little affection for her homeland, instead embracing the cold of the North out of love for her husband.

Queen Eleanor gazed at the tall, handsome Olaf, then at her slightly disabled daughter beside her. A flicker of irritation crossed her face. “Do as you wish.”

With so many dukes and counts present—all loyal to Gustavus Adolphus II—he couldn’t show too much favoritism toward Olaf and the Haldors. After a few more words, he turned to greet the other nobles, while Olaf and the Haldor family discussed Olaf’s university plans.

Olaf was caught off guard by the king’s sudden arrangement. He had been planning to return to Vinland, mobilize resources, expand territory, and develop industry. But now, he realized his foundational knowledge was lacking, and more importantly, he lacked connections in high society. Attending Sweden’s finest university would put him among the children of great nobles. The friendships he formed there would become political capital after graduation. He could also recruit sons of merchants and minor nobles to strengthen Iceland and Vinland’s bureaucratic ranks.

After some thought, Olaf smiled. “Father, Mother, I think the king’s plan is excellent. I can’t wait to go to university.”

Haldor smiled. “University is a good opportunity. Look at us—none of us, except Heiner, have ever been to one. But if you go, what will happen to Vinland?”

Olaf replied, “Vinland is stable now. As long as Heiner stays there, the resource and trade hub will keep supplying Iceland with wealth and food. The Vinland Legion and the local governors are all my people, loyal to our family. Heiner is one of us too, and his administrative skills are top-notch. Under their care, Vinland might not expand aggressively, but it will remain secure and prosperous.”

Over the years, Haldor had come to trust Olaf unconditionally. Hearing his son’s words, he said easily, “If you’ve thought it through, then go ahead. Let me know if you need anything. Studying in Sweden will only benefit our family. Make friends with the heirs of dukes and counts—our Icelandic Duchy could use more allies. And bring plenty of money; friendship isn’t free, after all.”

Chapter 323: The Great Emperor (1)

The banquet began swiftly. As the host, Gustavus Adolphus II raised a glass first, offering a few ceremonial remarks before drinking under the adoring gaze of the assembled guests. Accompanied by lively music and dance performances, everyone soon settled into the tense yet orderly business of dining.

The royal family’s attendance was not for the meal itself but for political goodwill. After a brief appearance, they excused themselves, and only then did the guests truly relax.

The clinking of glasses grew louder, and smiles spread more freely across the faces of the nobility.

By the end of the banquet, word had spread among all the aristocrats: Olaf had become the son-in-law of Bogislaw XIV and, as the designated heir to the Pomerania Duchy, had come to congratulate Gustavus Adolphus II on behalf of the Duke.

Regardless of their true thoughts, everyone knew that once Olaf inherited the Icelandic Duchy and the Pomerania Duchy, he would become one of the most powerful men in the Swedish United Kingdom.

Nobles always treated their peers with courtesy and warmth, and faced with Olaf’s boundless potential, the dukes and counts quickly befriended him.

Olaf accepted their goodwill graciously and even verbally promised to sell the Viking merchants’ liquor and malt sugar to them at a ten percent discount.

With such favors granted, the nobles’ admiration for Olaf grew even more fervent.

Young, wealthy, with a limitless future, and strikingly handsome—such a prodigy was rare across all of Europe.

Many dukes and counts regretted not having married their daughters to Olaf sooner, leaving Bogislaw XIV to reap the benefits.

Flattered by the adoration, Olaf grew increasingly intoxicated, downing cup after cup. Though his physique was strong and his tolerance high, he eventually drank himself into oblivion.

The next morning, Olaf woke with a pounding headache, his throat parched. He immediately reached for the pitcher on the table and drank half of it in one go.

“Ah, refreshing!”

Only then did he realize he was in a guest room, with no memory of how he had returned.

The door creaked open, and Katrin entered, her face etched with concern as she gently touched his cheek. “You drank far too much last night, my dear. I made you a fish soup to help with the hangover—drink it while it’s hot.”

Gerny followed, carrying a clay pot, with Merkel trailing closely behind, looking even smaller in contrast to Gerny’s towering frame.

Olaf blew on the soup before taking a sip. “Delicious! Thank you, Lady Katrin.”

Katrin pulled Merkel down to sit beside her. “Remember how this soup is made, child. You can cook it for Olaf often in the future.”

Merkel blushed slightly. “I will. Thank you, my lady.”

“What’s the plan for today?” Olaf asked casually as he sipped his soup.

“Duke Albert’s wife has invited me, along with Lady Simpson and Lady Wallenstein, to see the opera Daphne. The lead conductor is the court musician of the Saxony Duchy—someone named Heinrich Schütz. Would you like to join us?”

“I’m not fond of operas. Where’s Father?”

“He went to the palace with Duke Albert. The king wanted to discuss matters concerning Iceland and Germany.”

Olaf nodded. “Merkel, you should go with Mother and your sister. It’s rare to have such a performance.”

“And you?”

“I’m still feeling unwell. I’ll lie down a bit longer.”

“Then I’ll stay with you.”

“No need. I’ll be fine. When Father returns, I need to speak with him. You go enjoy the opera with Mother.”

Merkel nodded. “Alright.”

After Katrin left with Gerny and Merkel, Olaf drifted back to sleep.

He was roused from his daze by Haldor’s shaking.

“Father? What is it? Are you back from the palace?”

Haldor smiled. “A Viking berserker shouldn’t be felled by a little liquor. Don’t sleep the day away.”

Olaf sat up, chuckling. “I just don’t drink much normally. I can’t compare to you.”

“What did the king ask about this morning?”

“Just general questions about population, economy, and local products. Nothing too detailed. But Gustavus Adolphus II mentioned wanting to establish the Swedish West India Company to colonize the West Indies and North America. It seems he wants our help. What do you think?”

Olaf raised an eyebrow. “We can agree, whether we like it or not. But when it comes to execution, we’ll strongly support their colonization of the southern islands. Sweden lacks food and sugar, and the southern islands produce both. If they want to establish colonies in the north, that’s fine too, but we’ll steer them toward Virginia or near New Netherlands.”

Haldor paused, then lowered his voice. “You want to use the same tactics we used against Virginia to eliminate Swedish colonies? We have to be careful—if word gets out…”

“No, Father, you’re overthinking it.”

Olaf shook his head. “Sweden’s population is small, and they’re not wealthy. The West Indies alone could sustain them for a hundred years. Any North American colonies won’t receive much attention or resources. If they’re near Virginia, they’ll learn how terrifying the natives can be and stay in line. If they’re near New Netherlands, they can rely on the Dutch for trade. Either way, we’ll ensure Sweden’s North American colonies are just barely surviving—never thriving.”

Haldor smiled. “I understand. This will be your responsibility. The king has invited us to dine with him tonight. We’ll agree enthusiastically to help with the colonies.”

Olaf coughed lightly. “The king didn’t stay long yesterday, and it was dark—hard to see clearly. You saw him again today. How does he look? Is he well?”

Haldor frowned in thought. “He’s thinner than last year, but his spirits are high. He drinks a bowl of chicken soup every day… probably because his old gunshot wounds and hidden ailments never fully healed.”

Olaf lowered his voice. “When we left Leipzig last year, the king was already in poor health. Song Qinghe told me privately that his chronic illnesses are severe, and the gunshot wound from two years ago damaged his internal organs. Though it’s not immediately life-threatening, it causes constant pain, weakness, and prevents him from wearing armor or overexerting himself. But knowing him, he wouldn’t have rested this past year—his condition is likely worse now.”

“Could it be life-threatening?” Haldor asked, narrowing his eyes.

As a high-ranking noble of the Swedish United Kingdom, Haldor was deeply concerned about Gustavus Adolphus II’s well-being. The king was Iceland’s shield and the foundation of their family’s wealth and status in European nobility.

Olaf frowned. “I don’t know. I should have brought Song Qinghe with us. The king’s gunshot wound from two winters ago was severe, and it aggravated his old injuries. With Sweden’s medical capabilities, any worsening of his condition would be a nightmare for both the kingdom and the king himself.”

Chapter 324: The Great Emperor (2)

Olaf and Haldor spent half the day anxiously discussing Gustavus Adolphus II’s health. In the end, Olaf decided that next year, he would send Song Qinghe to treat the king, provided Gustavus Adolphus II agreed.

The next day, Gustavus Adolphus II summoned Olaf again.

Olaf dressed in his finest attire and entered the Three Crowns Palace to meet the king.

Gustavus Adolphus II, along with his wife and daughter, were happily feeding rabbits in the garden. Upon seeing Olaf, the king smiled and said, “Golden-haired lad, my daughter, little Tina, is destined to inherit Sweden. You are my most trusted subject, and I know your family has inherited centuries-old combat techniques, known as the Viking methods. Tina’s health is frail and needs proper training. I don’t trust anyone else, so I’m asking you to come to the palace more often before the celebration to teach Christina horsemanship and swordsmanship.”

Olaf knew Gustavus Adolphus II was straightforward, but he was still surprised to suddenly become the future imperial tutor.

“Your Majesty… this… I…”

“You don’t need to say anything. I know your capabilities. We spent half a year together on the German battlefield. Your intelligence and vast knowledge have impressed me. I trust you the most with little Tina.”

Gustavus Adolphus II seemed eager. After speaking, he pulled the confused Christina to his side and pointed at Olaf, saying, “My little Tina, his name is Olaf Haldarson. He saved your father’s life on the battlefield and is the most trustworthy person you can rely on in the Three Crowns Palace. Now, he will be your swordsmanship and horsemanship teacher, teaching you the skills a ruler should have. You must study hard, not fear hardship, cry, or complain. Do you understand?”

Christina stared at Olaf with her big eyes and softly asked, “Father, is he really my swordsmanship and horsemanship teacher?”

“Yes, child.” Gustavus Adolphus II smiled.

Christina, without any shyness, walked up to Olaf, extended her right hand, looked up at the golden-haired Olaf shining in the sunlight, squinted, and said, “Teacher Olaf, I look forward to your guidance.”

Seeing that the matter was settled, Olaf accepted it calmly. Regaining his composure, he felt a bit pleased, bent down, and shook Christina’s small hand with his large one, saying, “Olaf is honored to serve Princess Christina.”

Gustavus Adolphus II laughed heartily and turned to the queen, saying, “Olaf and little Tina seem to have an epic hero vibe.”

The queen smiled and said, “If you like it, that’s good. It’s getting late; you should take a nap.”

Gustavus Adolphus II waved his hand and said, “With Olaf here, I’m more energetic than ever. I want to talk to him. You take the child for a nap first.”

“But your health…” The queen said worriedly.

Gustavus Adolphus II frowned and coldly hummed, “Hmm? I’ll sleep later. Don’t mention it now.”

Queen Eleanor didn’t dare to disobey her husband and had the maid take Christina away.

Olaf moved closer to Gustavus Adolphus II, not straightening his back, and looked directly at his monarch, asking, “Your Majesty, did you call me for anything else?”

“No, just that matter.”

Gustavus Adolphus II smiled and said, “Next spring, you’ll go to Uppsala to study, then stay in the palace as an official. You must assist Christina well in the future. Understand?”

Olaf frowned slightly and said, “Your Majesty, you are young and vigorous. There’s no need to rush arrangements for Princess Christina…”

Gustavus Adolphus II lowered his voice and said, “I’m already forty-two this year. John III died at fifty-five, and my father, Charles IX, lived to sixty-one. But my hidden ailments are getting worse. When the pain flares up, I can’t sleep all day. On cloudy, rainy, or snowy days, it’s unbearable. I’m colder in winter and hotter in summer than before. I don’t think I’ll live as long as my father. Whether I can outlive my uncle John III is uncertain. To prevent the Swedish United Kingdom from collapsing after my death, I must prepare in advance.”

Olaf naturally understood Gustavus Adolphus II’s intentions. He knew this wise ruler well—unconventional yet traditional, brave in battle but cautious in strategy.

Gustavus Adolphus II wanted him to teach Christina horsemanship and swordsmanship. Ostensibly, he was to be her teacher, but in reality, it was to cultivate a mentor-student relationship and political ties. Iceland was far from Sweden, with the threat of Denmark and a small population, but the Viking Legion was strong. It was a power the Swedish royal family could completely trust without worrying about it turning against them or becoming uncontrollable.

Whether it was Gustavus Adolphus II’s reign or Christina’s future rule, maintaining close relations with Iceland and keeping its rulers in the Swedish palace would only benefit the Swedish king.

Olaf couldn’t help but speculate maliciously. The titles of Duke of Iceland and Earl of Vinland held by Haldor and himself carried little weight in Sweden. Father and son had no economic or political foundation in Sweden. The more Gustavus Adolphus II favored them, the more the Swedish nobles and ministers would ostracize or even target them.

The final result would be that the Duke of Iceland’s family could only choose to be loyal subjects of Gustavus Adolphus II and his daughter, becoming the most easily controlled and loyal subordinates.

If Iceland didn’t have Vinland as a stronghold, Gustavus Adolphus II’s plan would surely succeed. But Olaf felt that as time passed and Vinland’s potential gradually emerged, he would have the strength to break free from Sweden’s control. At that time, the Swedish king’s favor wouldn’t matter.

For now, Iceland, including Olaf himself, still needed Gustavus Adolphus II’s help. So, even knowing the king’s arrangements, Olaf happily agreed.

Getting closer, Olaf could see that Gustavus Adolphus II’s complexion was indeed poor, and he had been losing weight. Concerned, he asked, “Your Majesty, I’ll send Song Qinghe to treat you soon.”

Gustavus Adolphus II was pleased with Olaf’s attitude and said, “Alright, send him next spring. His Khitan medical skills are remarkable, better than the palace doctors. Maybe he can ease my pain.”

When Song Qinghe treated Gustavus Adolphus II’s gunshot wound, he lacked Chinese medicine. During the king’s subsequent recovery, Song Qinghe only found some wild foods with blood-tonifying and qi-boosting effects for Gustavus Adolphus II to consume, never demonstrating the superior level of European doctors.

So, when Gustavus Adolphus II’s hidden ailments flared up this year, he didn’t think to have Song Qinghe treat him.

The two talked as they walked from the garden into the castle storing artworks. Gustavus Adolphus II introduced Olaf to the crafts, paintings, and the armor and weapons of former kings, which Olaf found fascinating.

After a while, Gustavus Adolphus II suddenly asked, “I heard you recruited many indentured white slaves in Germany this year. Is it for colonial development?”

Olaf reacted quickly, putting on a bitter face and saying, “Your Majesty is perceptive. I recruited indentured white slaves to develop colonies in Vinland. You don’t know how last winter’s cold snap destroyed fifteen years of Vinland’s development! The French colonies were wiped out…”

Gustavus Adolphus II didn’t expose Olaf’s exaggerated words but asked, “Your father must have told you. I plan to develop colonies in the West Indies and North America. As the governor of Vinland, your father’s agreement isn’t enough; I need your opinion. Do you think Sweden can develop there? Can you provide assistance?”

Olaf didn’t hesitate for a moment and readily agreed, “That’s a good thing. If Sweden sends a colonial company, we can unite against the savage and cruel natives of North America. However, we haven’t ventured into the West Indies, so we might not be of much help.”

Gustavus Adolphus II laughed heartily and pointed to a suit of plate armor, which, though oiled, still showed signs of rust, saying, “This is the armor of our Swedish kingdom’s founding father, my ancestor Gustavus I, when he rebelled against Denmark and fought the Danish army for independence. And his sword. Take them back and give them to your father. He is also the founding father of Iceland’s independence from Denmark. This armor and sword are most suitable for him.”

Olaf obediently agreed. Then Gustavus Adolphus II smiled and said, “There’s money to be made by everyone. North America is vast; you can’t handle it alone. From what I know, France and Britain have established several colonial companies this autumn, ready to expand their North American colonies next spring. The Swedish West India Company and you are natural allies. What do you think?”

Olaf patted his chest and said, “Your Majesty, rest assured. Next year, I will fully assist the West India Company in establishing colonies in North America and send the Vinland navy to help them occupy suitable islands in the West Indies. I won’t hold you back.”

“Golden-haired lad, you are indeed smart and bold. If your birth wasn’t so humble, you would have achieved even greater things.”

Gustavus Adolphus II satisfactorily patted Olaf’s back and sighed.

Chapter 325: The Great Emperor (3)

After spending half the day chatting with Gustavus Adolphus II in the royal palace, Olaf returned to the outer castle of the palace grounds, carrying a heavy suit of iron armor that clanked with every step.

Half was outside the castle, practicing swordsmanship with young William and several other children from ducal and countly families. The youths were all competitive, and though Half was tall and strong—trained in martial arts and horsemanship from a young age—he couldn’t match the noble children in cultural refinement. But in swordplay and riding, he was unparalleled.

With Half’s formidable skills, he and young William had defeated all the noble girls in their sparring matches. Just then, they saw Olaf approaching, struggling under the weight of the heavy armor.

The two younger brothers hurried over to help him carry it. Half asked, “What is this? What’s it for?”

But young William noticed the unique family crest on the golden plates adorning the breastplate and helmet. His pupils contracted as he said, “This is the armor of Gustavus I? Did His Majesty give it to you?”

Olaf gave a slight nod, then had the two of them carry the armor inside. The other noble children gathered around, greeting Olaf with polite curiosity.

Looking at these children, all around ten years old yet already so adept at social graces, Olaf couldn’t help but marvel at the power of European aristocratic education. After thousands of years of noble rule, the children of aristocratic families were like a different species compared to the sons of farmers and blacksmiths.

As the leader of hundreds of thousands of Vinland natives and indentured white slaves, Olaf knew all too well the depths of ignorance in an age without widespread education. It was precisely this ignorance that made the Divine King Church’s indoctrination so effective, solidifying his rule over Vinland.

The ignorant were easy to deceive and govern, but the ruling class that managed them had to be educated—even highly learned. After years in power, Olaf had undergone his own transformation, gaining profound insights into politics and governance.

Reflecting on the ancient civilization of the Far East, with its thousands of years of history, Olaf had drawn wisdom from its past. Now, ruling Vinland came as naturally to him as breathing.

Knowing that the children before him would one day govern Germany, Sweden, and Finland, Olaf engaged them politely. His vast experiences and extraordinary tales left them in awe.

As a man with a mature soul who had spent over a decade living as a child, Olaf had mastered the art of captivating young minds. Sensing their craving for excitement, he regaled them with thrilling, embellished tales of battle. The effect was immediate—by the time he left, their eyes burned with admiration.

Back in his quarters, Haldor, Katrin, and Ulf were gathered around the plate armor that Half and young William had brought in, occasionally reaching out to touch it, as if absorbing the regal might of Sweden’s founding king.

Olaf chuckled at the sight. Haldor, seeing his second son enter, asked, “Why did His Majesty bestow the late king’s armor and sword upon you?”

Olaf sat down beside him and said, “He told me to bring it back for you. He said that since you led Iceland’s rebellion to break free from Danish rule, you’ve inherited the fighting spirit of Sweden’s first king. So, he’s giving it to you.”

“Oh?”

Haldor was overjoyed. He knew that ever since the establishment of the Icelandic Duchy, European nobles had looked down on his family for lacking noble blood and ancient lineage. But now, with the personal endorsement and gift of the late king’s armor from Gustavus Adolphus II, his family’s standing had been elevated. Their rebellion in Iceland was now equated with Gustavus I’s founding of Sweden. From this day forward, his family could claim to be the heirs of the Swedish king’s legacy, gaining a halo of Swedish prestige and instantly boosting their status.

Yet, beneath his excitement, Haldor was puzzled. He was certain Gustavus Adolphus II had thought this through long ago. Why hadn’t he bestowed the armor before? Why now, right after Olaf’s audience with the king? Something must have happened.

His confusion dampened his enthusiasm for the armor. Sitting beside Olaf, he asked, “Why did His Majesty give you the late king’s relic under this pretext? What did you promise him?”

Olaf silently praised his father’s sharpness before replying, “Today, His Majesty asked me to become Princess Christina’s sword and horsemanship instructor. He wants me to spend more time in the palace. First, he wanted me to attend university, then he arranged for me to be the princess’s tutor, and soon he plans to make me the commander of the royal constabulary. Clearly, he sees that we Icelanders have no roots or connections in Sweden, so he’s grooming me as a loyal retainer, bound only to him and the princess.”

“That’s not a bad thing,” Haldor said with a smile. “Our family lacks standing in high society. Having a top figure in the Swedish court would be beneficial.”

He nodded thoughtfully. “And?”

Olaf sighed in frustration. “His Majesty also told me he’s planning to establish the West India Colonization Company and asked for my opinion. I might have shown some resistance, and he noticed. That’s why he gave me the late king’s relic. Though I eventually pledged full support, I think His Majesty might already be somewhat displeased.”

Haldor pondered for a moment before saying, “Don’t worry. His Majesty is a magnanimous emperor. He won’t hold a grudge over such a small matter.”

“As long as we Icelanders remain loyal, he will continue to value us.”

Olaf nodded. “You’re right, Father. My position and Iceland’s small population make it easy for him to trust me. Even if he made me prime minister, the real power would still be in his hands because we have no foundation in Sweden. But if a Swedish noble were prime minister, they’d always try to take power from the crown. For now, we should just keep our heads down.”

Haldor smiled. “We’re too far from Sweden, and Denmark lies between us. We’re destined to be guests in Sweden. Even if you became prime minister, you’d still retire to Iceland because you pose no threat to the throne. Plus, we’ve saved His Majesty’s life on the battlefield. As long as we don’t overstep, you’ll remain his favorite. Don’t overthink it.”

Olaf suddenly saw his father in a new light. Having lived together for over a decade, he knew Haldor was brave, kind, and charismatic, but not particularly cunning—more like a man with six out of seven orifices open. Yet now, Haldor had deduced why he and Olaf were favored by Gustavus Adolphus II and even analyzed the political implications. Olaf couldn’t help but marvel at his father’s growth since leaving Iceland.

Pushed by the tides of history first to lead the Vinland colonization and then to become the Duke of Iceland, Haldor had undergone a remarkable transformation over the past seven years.

Olaf recalled how, back on their small island, his father had been nothing more than a village chief and tax collector—ordinary in every way. But through Olaf’s influence, Haldor had become the undisputed Duke of Iceland.

Witnessing his father’s adaptability and potential, Olaf was filled with awe. It reminded him of the ancient eastern empire in the 20th century, when a single unremarkable county, no different from thousands of others, suddenly produced over a hundred generals. Such was the power of the times.

Chapter 326: Royal Tutor (1)

Olaf had assumed his appointment as a swordsmanship and horsemanship instructor would only come after Gustavus Adolphus II’s coronation as emperor. Yet, that very evening, an envoy from the privy council delivered his letter of appointment, informing him that he would be responsible for the long-term education of Princess Christina in both disciplines. Additionally, he would receive a generous monthly salary from the treasury.

Olaf read the letter twice. There was no specified term, meaning that, in theory, he would remain the future queen’s instructor indefinitely unless his position was reassigned.

Princess Christina was the sole legal heir to the Swedish United Kingdom. Like other royal heirs, her days were packed with lessons from private tutors within the castle. Her schedule included foundational subjects such as Swedish, Danish, German, French, and Latin. As she grew older, her studies expanded to politics, history, literature, mathematics, geometry, swordsmanship, horsemanship, and military strategy.

If her interests were broad, she might also study botany, painting, dance, and music. In short, Christina had at least ten tutors, with Olaf responsible for only swordsmanship and horsemanship.

Though officially her swordsmanship and horsemanship instructor, Olaf’s appointment by Gustavus Adolphus II also served a political purpose. However, there was no denying that the king genuinely valued Olaf’s abilities.

Olaf had demonstrated exceptional riding skills and unerring accuracy with throwing axes and javelins on the battlefield. While he hadn’t displayed Viking combat techniques, Gustavus Adolphus II knew he was among the most skilled of the younger generation of Icelandic warriors.

Viking combat techniques emerged after the Viking concept took shape. It was a synthesis of Viking axe-throwing, hand-to-hand combat, swordsmanship, knife fighting, and the use of axes, hammers, and spears. This martial art was passed down from the Vikings to the Icelanders and was a standard part of training within Viking raids and the Viking Legion.

Olaf was more than capable of teaching Christina, and the young blond’s broad knowledge and imaginative mind meant he could instruct her in more than just swordsmanship and horsemanship.

The next morning, Olaf ate a quick breakfast before dressing in a tailored suit and top hat, then headed to the Three Crowns Palace. There, he met the chief lady-in-waiting and the captain of the guard.

Both palace officials recognized Olaf and were aware of his appointment, so they greeted him politely and arranged a resting room and a maid to attend to him.

After the captain of the guard explained the relevant rules and left, the chief lady-in-waiting, Ekzodia, took out a sheet of parchment with Christina’s schedule written in Swedish.

“Lord Count, the princess has one swordsmanship lesson and one horsemanship lesson per week. Currently, they are scheduled for Thursday and Friday mornings from eight to ten. Do you have any questions?”

Olaf nodded. “Today is Thursday. Was this arranged based on my arrival?”

“Since His Majesty is about to hold two major celebrations, the palace is very busy, and the royal tutors are also involved in the preparations. Therefore, the schedule is not fixed. Since you are here, you can meet the princess today.”

Without waiting for Olaf’s response, Ekzodia hurriedly continued, “You should be aware of the princess’s physical condition, so please be gentler when teaching her than you would with an ordinary person. Also, please lower your expectations of her, as… the princess’s body is somewhat unusual…” Her voice grew softer as she spoke.

Olaf smiled slightly. “I will keep that in mind. Where are the swordsmanship and horsemanship lessons held?”

“There is a grassy field in the back garden where the grooms usually take the horses. Next to it is an archery range. We can use that.”

“Very well. Please take me there.”

Ekzodia personally led Olaf to the archery range and pointed to the racks of bows and weapons of various sizes on either side. “No one trains here except the palace guards and His Majesty. It should serve well as a classroom for teaching the princess swordsmanship.”

Olaf was very satisfied with the spacious archery range. “When will the princess arrive?”

“I will go and fetch her. Please sit and rest for now. If you need anything, just ask Amy.”

With that, Ekzodia turned to the fair-skinned young girl behind Olaf, who was standing timidly, and said sternly, “You must serve Lord Count diligently. Do you understand?”

Amy was much younger than Sally. She nodded respectfully, then stood quietly beside Olaf.

After Ekzodia left, Olaf had no interest in teasing Amy. He asked her to bring him some hot water. Once she left, he picked up a longbow and shot an arrow at a target two hundred paces away.

Whoosh!

Thud!

A feathered arrow, as long as an adult’s arm, shot like lightning and hit the distant target. Olaf narrowed his eyes, walked forward a few steps, and frowned. “Missed the bullseye. My skills have deteriorated!”

In Vinland, apart from eating, drinking, and handling official business, Olaf spent the rest of his time practicing archery, javelin throwing, and swordsmanship.

Although he also valued firearms, due to the backward steel and iron smelting technology, smoothbore muskets occasionally exploded. Thus, he only practiced with them for ten minutes each time and rotated the guns after three uses.

Therefore, Olaf was very confident in his close combat and archery skills, believing he was at least as skilled as the bannermen of the Eight Banners from the Far East. However, his firearms skills were only average.

In this era, firearms lacked rifling, so their accuracy and range were quite limited. Generally, the effective range of even the best smoothbore muskets did not exceed two hundred paces.

The measurement of a “pace” differed between East and West. In the East, a pace was the distance covered by two steps, while in the West, it was the distance of one step. Given the average height of people at the time, two hundred paces would not exceed one hundred meters.

The range was short, and the accuracy was poor, but it was still possible to train sharpshooters. For example, among the Vinland Legion’s firearms soldiers, over a hundred could maintain a seventy percent hit rate at two hundred paces.

Training a firearms soldier was much less time-consuming than training an archer, but becoming a sharpshooter still required long-term practice. Olaf’s limited practice time meant his marksmanship was not particularly good. He thought that once Vinland’s industry developed, he could have craftsmen research and develop new firearms with rifling and breech-loading.

After shooting a dozen more arrows, Olaf’s feel for the bow improved, and his accuracy increased. By the time he put the bow down, the distant target was filled with arrows, most of which had hit the bullseye.

Clap, clap, clap…

Applause came from behind him. Olaf turned to see Ekzodia, Princess Christina, and a teenage boy standing there.

“Lord Count, your archery skills are truly those of a master marksman,” Ekzodia praised with a smile.

Princess Christina was young but brave and poised. Historically, she was known not only for her vast knowledge but also for her proficiency in horsemanship, swordsmanship, and shooting. She was an exceptionally intelligent individual, though she had no ambition for politics or power. At the age of twenty-eight, she abdicated the throne to her cousin, Carl Gustav, who later became King Carl X.

Christina blinked and curtsied lightly. “Greetings, Teacher. Witnessing your excellent shooting skills, I believe I will make great progress under your guidance.”

“You flatter me, Princess. With the blood of His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II running through your veins, you undoubtedly have the potential to be an excellent ruler. Swordsmanship and horsemanship will pose no challenge to you.”

Olaf also bowed slightly, then straightened and asked, “Who is this young man?”

Christina replied, “This is my cousin, Carl Gustav. He is the heir of my aunt, Princess Katharina, and her husband, John, the Elector Palatine. Due to the war, they have all moved to the Three Crowns Palace. My aunt has asked him to study with me.”

Carl Gustav’s expression was somewhat serious, perhaps due to the hardships of living in another’s home, which had made him more mature than his years. He stepped forward and bowed. “Lord Count, I hope you will guide me well in the future.”

“Very well. If the princess and Carl have no other matters, I think we can begin the lesson!”

Olaf looked at the two young children standing obediently before him, his heart filled with admiration. These were the future kings of Sweden! During their reigns, Sweden would remain the strongest power in Northern Europe. Now they were his students—perhaps he could change their destinies…

Chapter 327: Royal Tutor (2)

When the princess and Karl arrived, they had already changed into their shirts, vests, riding pants, and leather boots, with small belts cinched around their waists and sun hats perched atop their heads. They looked spirited and dashing, giving Olaf the fleeting illusion that he had returned to the future.

Knowing that Olaf was about to begin his lesson with the princess and young Karl, Ekzodia instructed Amy, who had just brought in a pot of hot water, to set it down before the two of them quietly retreated to wait outside.

Olaf looked at the two slender children before him, and his initial reluctance to teach them half-heartedly began to fade.

After a moment’s thought, he lowered his head and asked, “Have either of you practiced swordsmanship or horsemanship before?”

“I’ve never practiced swordsmanship, and I’ve only ridden a horse a few times, but always with a servant leading me,” Karl admitted honestly.

Christina puffed out her chest and said, “I learned a few days of swordsmanship from Captain Oles, and I’ve ridden a horse before, but I’ve never been very good at it.”

Olaf knew that Christina was a tomboyish girl, so he wasn’t surprised. He turned and fetched two unsharpened rapiers, handing one to each of them. “Go put on your protective gear. I saw some small leather armor on the rack earlier. Put it on and come back with your helmets. I want to see your basics by having you spar.”

Karl and Christina were both sheltered hothouse flowers, never having fought before, let alone seen others fight. Olaf’s words made them nervous, but beneath the nerves, there was also a flicker of excitement.

Soon, the two returned, clad in their protective gear. Christina, however, was still too small, so even the smallest armor hung loosely on her. Undeterred, she firmly raised her rapier, assuming a dueling stance.

Karl and Christina were cousins who had lived together for years, and their bond ran deep. Karl usually took good care of his cousin, so he raised his rapier, preparing to take a defensive stance.

“Begin!”

At Olaf’s command, Christina struck first, slashing downward with her rapier.

Though Karl had no training in swordsmanship, he was a few years older than Christina and taller, with greater strength. He managed to block her downward strike.

Clang…

As Christina pressed her attack, Karl continued to dodge and parry. But since he didn’t dare to counterattack and knew nothing of swordsmanship, it wasn’t long before Christina’s rapier struck his chest armor twice.

After a short while, both children were panting, barely able to hold their rapiers. Only then did Olaf call out, “Enough.”

The two children lowered their weapons and stood still. Olaf walked over, clapping his hands. “You both did well. Christina, you do have some swordsmanship techniques and footwork, but you use them too rigidly. Karl, you’re very calm and have a physique suited for swordsmanship. If you both work hard, you could become skilled swordsmen.”

As he spoke, Olaf picked up a long sword and demonstrated one of the moves Christina had used. “In sword fighting, there are two variations: the attacker and the defender. If you attack forcefully, you can’t use all your strength. What if your opponent blocks your strike and counterattacks? You need to have enough strength left to defend. Come, attack me.”

Christina gripped her sword with both hands and lunged at Olaf’s abdomen. A flicker of appreciation flashed in Olaf’s eyes as he sidestepped, his long sword now resting against Christina’s throat. A slight flick would have been enough to kill her.

Christina took a step back and said, “What you say makes sense. I want to learn your swordsmanship.”

Olaf nodded. “You thought to use the fastest lunge to attack just now. I know you’re not a rigid person. You realized your strength and skill aren’t as good as mine, so you tried to force me back with speed. These are clever tricks, but true skill comes from mastering swordsmanship. Now, let’s begin the formal lesson. Each of you will practice the half-step downward slash.”

With that, Olaf raised both hands and slashed downward. The long sword whistled through the air as his right foot stepped forward half a pace, his upper body leaning forward. This was the swordsmanship developed by the Vikings during their medieval sea raids—far from the elegant swordplay of the nobility, it was brutal and efficient, maximizing strength, technique, and speed in every strike.

Olaf demonstrated once, then fixed his gaze on Christina and Karl.

The two had just witnessed Olaf’s masterful swordsmanship and clumsily began to mimic him.

Western swordsmanship didn’t have set routines, but it did have basic movements. Viking swordsmanship was even simpler, but simplicity didn’t mean it was easy to learn. In fact, the simplicity required precise coordination of every part of the body, leaving no room for error in practice.

Christina and Karl’s movements were stiff and full of flaws. Olaf demonstrated a few more times, but they still couldn’t get it right. Helpless, he had to physically adjust their postures before shouting commands for them to practice.

After practicing the half-step downward slash over a hundred times, Karl was drenched in sweat, and Christina was breathing heavily, swaying slightly.

Concerned for the princess’s health, Olaf called a halt. “You’ve both done well. Your movements are almost standard now, and your breathing is well-coordinated. With another ten days of practice, you’ll have a basic grasp. Now, take a seat and rest. I’ll show you a masterful technique.”

The two children, whose combined age was less than twenty, were immediately excited by the mention of a masterful technique. They removed their leather armor and sat on the long bench, eagerly watching Olaf.

Olaf chuckled, taking two short spears and two hand axes from the weapon rack. He walked to a spot about a hundred paces from the archery target and stood still.

Testing the weight of the hand axe in his hand, Olaf said, “The Viking throwing axe technique has a history of over a thousand years. Our ancestors roamed the seas, conquering Britain, Germany, and France. This technique has won many battles. Christina, you are also a descendant of the ancestors of the Scandinavian Peninsula, and Karl, you have the blood of Odin flowing in your veins. You should learn this divine technique. Let me show you what the throwing axe technique is all about!”

His words made the two children’s eyes widen in awe. Olaf smiled slightly, flicking his wrist. The hand axe in his hand turned into a black streak, striking the distant target with a thud. The children gasped, then rushed to the target to see for themselves.

Up close, they saw that the blade of Olaf’s hand axe was embedded in the bullseye.

“God! This…”

They couldn’t believe someone could throw an axe over a hundred paces and hit the bullseye. To them, such strength and skill were almost like magic.

In truth, Olaf’s throwing axe technique wasn’t top-tier in the Viking Legion, but he was strong and accurate enough to impress the two children.

However, throwing axes at targets didn’t account for speed or force—only accuracy. In real battle, to prevent the enemy from dodging and to pierce armor, one had to throw with full force. But increasing speed and power severely reduced accuracy, so the effective range of a throwing axe was only thirty or forty paces. Even with Olaf’s strength, he could only extend that by ten paces or so. Throwing an axe a hundred paces to hit the bullseye was impressive to watch but impractical in combat. If used against a person or in hunting, the target would have long since dodged.

The two children, aged seven and twelve, naturally didn’t understand the nuances of Olaf’s throwing axe technique. They simply thought their teacher was a magical figure who could perform wonders, and their excitement soared. They immediately began pestering Olaf to teach them the throwing axe technique.

Seeing the two little ones so eagerly surrounding him, Olaf’s lips curled into a slight smile. This was exactly the effect he wanted.

“Very well, if you want to learn the throwing axe technique, you’ll have to earn it. Whoever masters the half-step downward slash first will be the first to learn it!

But for now, you’ve rested enough. It’s time to continue practicing your swordsmanship!”

Olaf’s tone grew colder, ending in a sharp command.

The two children were now completely under Olaf’s control. At his words, they quickly picked up their rapiers and began practicing the downward slash with all their might.

The sound of heavy breathing, the whoosh of swords cutting through the air, and Olaf’s shouted commands formed a symphony in the archery range. Ekzodia peered through the window, her face filled with concern.

Standing beside her were Gustavus Adolphus II and Queen Eleanor. The queen, somewhat angrily, said, “How dare Olaf treat Karl and little Tina like this? This is overstepping his bounds—he’s humiliating the royal family!”

Gustavus Adolphus II knew his wife was politically naive and guileless, so he chuckled lightly. “Maria, you must not interfere with Olaf’s teaching of the two children. I knew Olaf would teach little Tina with dedication, but his methods are truly eye-opening. Seeing how serious and responsible he is with the children puts my mind at ease.”

Queen Eleanor always followed her husband’s lead. Though she had already begun to resent Olaf, she could only suppress her temper and say, “I understand. I won’t interfere anymore.”

Gustavus Adolphus II leaned forward at the window, watching the three figures in the archery range. He murmured, “Olaf is indeed reliable. On the very first day, he’s holding nothing back. Though Viking battle tactics aren’t of much use to a king, his dedication is truly commendable…”

Chapter 328: Royal Tutor (3)

Olaf diligently taught Christina and Karl swordsmanship, using the Viking throwing axe technique and storytelling to spark their enthusiasm, making them enjoy their lessons.

Two hours later, when Ekzodia announced the end of class, the children were reluctant to leave. Christina clung to Olaf, begging him to retell the story of Snow White and the Seven Dwarves.

Olaf chuckled, “Next time, if you practice your sword techniques well, I’ll tell you the story of the Frog Prince.”

“The Frog Prince?”

Christina and Karl perked up immediately, their curiosity piqued. Though eager to hear the story right away, they dared not misbehave after being thoroughly impressed by Olaf’s two-hour lesson. They eagerly promised to practice diligently.

Olaf bid them farewell with a smile and left the garden under Amy’s guidance.

Olaf had arrived in Stockholm on September 3rd, and it was now September 6th. Gustavus Adolphus II’s birthday was still two months away, but according to the Swedish parliament and privy council, the birthday celebrations would be held earlier, around early November, followed closely by the coronation ceremony.

Stockholm’s September had already turned chilly. In this era, life was quite dull, and nobles from various regions arrived early, hoping to make connections and strengthen their social circles in the capital.

Returning to his room, Olaf found Merkel, Gerny, and Annie dressed in formal attire, practicing their dance steps.

Noble interactions revolved around balls, operas, and banquets. Though Gerny and Merkel were both dukes’ daughters, Haldor’s dukedom was earned through rebellion and joining the Swedish United Kingdom in battle, lacking the aristocratic heritage of traditional noble families. Gerny had never received any courtly education before last year and had only recently learned basic dance steps from her aunt, Lorin.

Merkel, on the other hand, grew up in a well-established ducal family but lived in a dangerous environment. Due to her frail health, she had been confined to the palace since childhood and had never learned to dance.

Among the three girls, only Annie had received a proper noble education. While not a master of all arts, she was quite skilled in music and dance.

To fit in with other noble ladies and wives, Gerny and Merkel had been learning dance from Annie these past few days.

With nothing to do, Olaf decided to go out for a stroll. He called for Halik several times before the latter, who was gnawing on a mutton leg, finally approached. “What’s up, Olaf?”

Olaf looked at Halik’s increasingly burly frame and laughed, “If you keep eating like that, nothing but a draft horse or a moose will be able to carry you!”

Halik grinned, “Better to eat and drink my fill than sit around doing nothing.”

“Get ready. Let’s go out and see the sights of Stockholm!”

Halik agreed cheerfully and went to prepare.

Moments later, Olaf emerged with a money pouch and saw that Halik had changed into a linen robe, cinched at the waist with a belt, and was waiting with the carriage.

Olaf boarded the carriage, and just as Halik was about to speak, Half came running up. “Wait for me, big brother! I want to come too!”

With that, Half climbed into the carriage. Halik flicked the reins, and the carriage slowly set off.

Watching Half curiously peer out the window, Olaf smiled faintly, recalling his conversation with Wallenstein. “Half, you’re growing into a man now. What do you want to do in the future?”

Half thought for a moment and shook his head. “I don’t know. I think staying with Mom and Dad is fine.”

Olaf’s heart tightened. Could the Haldor family really produce a good-for-nothing leech?

Clearing his throat, Olaf said, “Don’t you want to be a general on the battlefield, achieving great deeds?”

“We already have you and Dad. Even if I became a general, could I be better than you two?” Half chuckled.

Olaf pondered for a moment before continuing, “What about becoming a governor in Vinland? Managing a city, holding the power of life and death over tens of thousands…”

Before Olaf could finish, Half shook his head. “Life in Vinland is terrible. The food and supplies aren’t as good as in Iceland, and it’s full of dirty, savage native slaves. I don’t like it!”

Olaf was getting annoyed. “Then how about going to university?”

“I’m the son of the Duke of Iceland. Whether I go to university or not, I don’t need to find a job. Why bother?” Half refused.

Olaf scoffed, “You’re not a child anymore. You can’t just do whatever you want. After the New Year, I’ll talk to Dad about sending you to Vinland to be a Ship District Chief in Labrador. You can go cut timber and mine—it’ll be good training!”

“That’s not fair!” Half panicked, about to lose his temper, but seeing Olaf’s dark expression, he sat back down and pleaded, “Brother, I’m your real brother. Is it right to send me to suffer in Labrador? What if I get sick again?”

Olaf coldly replied, “The Haldor family can’t have any useless members. If you don’t train now, you’ll disgrace our ancestors later!”

Seeing that his brother was serious, Half panicked. He knew that if Olaf insisted, their parents would likely agree. Desperate, he said, “There must be other places to train! Can I go to university? Or give me a ship to go trading!”

Olaf smirked inwardly but kept a straight face. After Half begged for a while, he reluctantly said, “If you don’t want to go to Labrador, then… fine. But you need to learn something. You’re too young for university. Alright, I’ll talk to Duke Wallenstein. After the celebrations, you’ll go with him to Magdeburg and study military strategy and governance. If you learn well, you can help Dad in the future. How does that sound?”

Half was just relieved he wouldn’t have to go to Vinland. Hearing that he would be studying under Wallenstein, he relaxed. He knew Wallenstein lived luxuriously and, though a renowned general, held a lower status in the Swedish United Kingdom than his father, Haldor. Following him wouldn’t be hard.

“I’m willing! I’ll go to Magdeburg to study military affairs. Don’t worry, big brother, I’ll study hard and won’t disgrace our family!”

Olaf nodded approvingly at his younger brother’s good attitude. Glancing out the window at the increasingly lively streets, he said, “Looks like it’s getting lively. Let’s go take a look. If you see anything you like, I’ll buy it for you.”

Though Half was the son of a duke, the Duke of Iceland, Haldor, controlled seventy percent of Vinland’s land resources, Iceland’s resources, and monopolized special goods, making him incredibly wealthy. His annual net profit amounted to tens of thousands of pounds of gold, though his expenses were also high.

Since Half wasn’t yet of age, Haldor and Katrin hadn’t allocated any property to him. This meant Half had no income of his own and had to ask his parents for anything he wanted.

Now that Olaf was willing to let Half pick out something, Half finally felt like a duke’s son. Looking at the colorful clothes, trinkets, and snacks lining the streets, he no longer resisted the idea of leaving the ducal estate to go to Magdeburg, become a governor, or attend university. In fact, he was even looking forward to it. Once he left the estate, his parents would give him a portion of the family’s property and estates for his own expenses, meaning he would finally have money of his own.

Chapter 329: Celebrating the Birthday

Since Olaf had taken on the role of court tutor, he would visit the Three Crowns Palace every Thursday and Friday to teach Christina and Karl. Beyond their lessons, Olaf would also tell the two children fairy tales and stories from Norse mythology, making their rigorous training in swordsmanship and horsemanship something they eagerly anticipated, especially for the chance to hear more of his wondrous tales.

Outside of teaching, Olaf, Merkel, his father, and his brother were all experiencing the lifestyle of Europe’s upper class—attending banquets hosted by ministers and nobles, occasionally returning to the grand cathedral for events, and visiting the opera house for performances and concerts. Life was quite pleasant.

As the nobles of the Swedish United Kingdom gathered in Stockholm, news from the south spread among the feasts. There were reports of the Presbyterian uprising in Scotland, the Papal States’ attempts to control northern Italy and their conflicts with Venice, Parma, and Tuscany, but what interested Olaf most was the news that the Catholic Pope had exiled the great scientist Galileo to a rural village near Florence, placing him under house arrest.

Galileo was a figure whose name resonated through both Olaf’s past and present lives. His experiments at the Leaning Tower of Pisa had revolutionized humanity’s understanding of gravity, and he was a titan in mechanics, astronomy, philosophy, and geometry. Yet, after being persecuted by the Church the previous year, he had been confined until his death, never again able to contribute his brilliance to scientific progress.

Olaf felt a deep sense of regret. Vinland desperately needed scholars of such caliber. This century’s greatest scientists—Galileo, Newton, Descartes, and Wilhelm Leibniz—were few and far between. Newton and Leibniz had not yet been born, Galileo was under house arrest in a small Italian town, and Descartes was elusive, making it impossible for Olaf to find him despite multiple trips to Europe. Bringing such a figure to Vinland seemed an impossible dream.

Through his interactions with European nobles, Olaf learned that Descartes was currently residing in a small town on the eastern shore of Lake Zuiderzee in Holland. With Vinland in dire need of talent, Olaf set his sights on Descartes, planning to visit Holland next spring. Whether through payment or kidnapping, he was determined to bring Descartes back.

By late October, the coasts outside Stockholm began to freeze, a period that would last until mid-February. However, due to the recent effects of the Little Ice Age, last year’s freeze had extended into mid-March.

Thus, the nobles who had come to Stockholm for the celebrations arrived before the end of October, preparing to stay until March.

For the nobility, this was a long vacation. Having lived in Iceland and Vinland for seventeen years, Olaf was well-adapted to such an environment. During the lengthening nights, he maintained his habit of writing.

In his notebook, besides his plans to visit Descartes in the spring, he also pondered the feasibility of rescuing—or kidnapping—Galileo.

Time dragged on during the long winter, but the nobles’ indulgent, lavish lifestyles made the season bearable.

After teaching Christina and Karl eight times—with two sessions canceled due to court affairs—time had already slipped into November.

Stockholm’s winter days grew shorter. By the end of December, daylight would last only six hours—a novelty for those from Germany but perfectly normal for Icelanders, who were used to Reykjavik’s five-hour winter days, sometimes even less.

As the weather grew colder and several heavy snowfalls blanketed the city, Stockholm’s activities gradually ground to a halt.

Guests from the German duchies began to grow weary of the endless nights. They held constant banquets in their villas, and affairs, infidelities, and debauchery became commonplace in the mansions and castles surrounding the Three Crowns Palace.

On November 14th, all the nobles received a notice: in three days, a grand celebration would be held in the Three Crowns Palace to honor Gustavus Adolphus II’s fortieth birthday—a grand banquet inviting all distinguished guests.

The nobles began preparing three days in advance. Servants busied themselves pressing and cleaning formal attire, while the nobles themselves abstained from alcohol and excess, bathing and dressing meticulously.

Nobles from cold northern Germany, Iceland, and Sweden had never adopted the French habit of avoiding baths. Though they bathed infrequently, they would cleanse themselves seven or eight times a year, and for important events, they would at least wash up. After all, in the dry northern climate, certain odors were hard to tolerate.

By the afternoon of November 17th, all the nobles, dressed in their finest, entered the throne hall of the Three Crowns Palace with their families.

The main fortress covered tens of thousands of square meters, and the throne hall itself was several thousand square meters, capable of holding nearly a thousand people.

Envoys from various duchies, counties, England, France, Denmark, the Habsburgs, Poland, Russia, Spain, and Holland entered the hall one after another. Even with hundreds of people inside, the hall still felt spacious.

Night had already fallen, but the hall was brilliantly lit. Thousands of candles cast a glow as bright as daylight.

Ten long tables were set up in the hall, adorned with silver tableware. The dishes included grilled meats of all kinds, seafish, cured and smoked meats, seabirds, poultry, and an abundance of desserts. Whiskey, aqua vitae, and wine flowed freely.

Olaf circled the tables but found no herring cans, which put him at ease. He approached one of the long tables, had a servant cut him a piece of fried pork chop, and began to eat.

After more than an hour, the court orchestra’s lively melody suddenly shifted to a majestic, powerful tune. Olaf paused, and Wallenstein beside him remarked, “The Three Crowns Anthem? His Majesty is about to appear.”

Those who had been eating, drinking, and conversing immediately stopped, quickly adjusting their attire and standing solemnly, their gazes fixed on the second-floor balcony.

The doors on the second floor swung open, and Gustavus Adolphus II emerged in full military regalia, accompanied by the queen in her elegant gown and the princess.

The music ceased abruptly.

Led by Oxenstierna and Princess Katharina, the mother of Karl, the Swedish nobles bowed deeply, crying out, “We pay our respects to the great king!”

The Duke of Iceland, the Duke of Saxony, the Duke of Magdeburg, the representative of the Duchy of Pomerania, and the heir to the Duchy of Prussia all bowed in turn, declaring, “We pay our respects to the great king!”

Finally, the envoys from twelve European nations—England, France, Denmark, Poland, Russia, and others—bowed and said, “We pay our respects to the great king of the Swedish United Kingdom!”

The ceremonial phrases had been rehearsed by the privy council in the days prior, so no one made a mistake. The scene was grand and solemn.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s expression was stern as he surveyed the room. “Honored guests,” he declared, “please rise.”

Everyone slowly stood. Gustavus Adolphus II continued in a deep voice, “I have received your well-wishes…”

After a series of formal remarks, Oxenstierna rose to report on the spontaneous celebrations held in cities across the kingdom for the king’s fortieth birthday. Delighted, Gustavus Adolphus II decreed a thirty percent tax reduction for the following year.

The birthday celebration was merely a display of Sweden’s strength. His coronation as emperor was an internal affair of the Swedish United Kingdom, unrecognized by foreign powers—though none dared oppose it.

Yet Gustavus Adolphus II wanted foreign participation, so the privy council had used the birthday celebration as an excuse to invite foreign envoys, showcasing Sweden’s power while ensuring they remained long enough to witness the “emperor’s coronation” ceremony.

Chapter 330: Does the Great Emperor Gustavus Plan to Deal with Denmark?

Gustavus Adolphus II’s birthday celebration was essentially a small-scale “tribute from all nations.”

The dukedoms, counties, and free cities within the united kingdom brought precious gifts to offer their congratulations, while envoys from various nations also came to observe and celebrate. Within the Three Crowns Palace, thousands bowed in submission, and tens of thousands revered him. Gustavus Adolphus II could confidently declare: “In Europe, no one understands better than I how to forge a ‘Celestial Empire.’”

However, European political culture had not formed a unifying ideology, and interactions between nations lacked the unequal relationship between the superior Celestial Empire and the barbaric lesser states. Europeans only cared about interests, so this birthday celebration was merely a normal exchange of courtesies. The only reason it was so grand was because Gustavus Adolphus II had intimidated various nations, recently leading the Protestant League to defeat the Catholic Church and achieving victory. Thus, north of the Mediterranean, Sweden was currently the foremost power.

Although Sweden was the strongest, it was not considered a formidable enemy in the eyes of the French. First, the distance was great, and second, Sweden’s geographical position limited its population and development potential. It also had to contend with two powerful neighbors, Poland and Russia, for access to the Baltic Sea. Once Gustavus Adolphus II died, it was almost certain that Sweden would no longer pose a threat.

Thus, France, which had always considered itself the strongest nation in Europe, only worried about the unification of the German regions. As long as the Holy Roman Empire remained neither holy, nor Roman, nor an empire, France would have no rivals. It could also isolate itself from the Ottoman Empire and gradually encroach upon Europe. Given time, France would surely achieve hegemony and unify the martial world.

Even France, which should have been the most cautious, obediently congratulated His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II on his fortieth birthday, presenting a pair of authentic blue and white porcelain as a gift. The other nations were even more compliant in their congratulations, making Gustavus Adolphus II and the Swedish court feel as if Sweden had already swept across Europe, intimidating various nations and becoming the dominant force in half of Europe.

The birthday banquet was just a pretext and did not have many programs. After Oxenstierna finished speaking, it was time for the ball.

By the time the noise had subsided, it was already late at night. However, most of the German nobles, having just adjusted to the Nordic winter schedule, did not feel tired. After the event, they left in groups of two or three, seemingly preparing for more interesting activities.

The Haldor family had already returned to rest. Olaf pulled Merkel along as they walked back to their room. Since they had stayed up late and danced intimately for over half an hour, sparks had already flown between them.

Olaf felt his “short spear” could no longer be restrained. Disregarding the objections of Merkel’s maids, he carried his petite and gentle fiancée into the bedroom.

Merkel lightly waved at the pursuing maids, who sighed and said, “Your Highness’s constitution is weak; please be gentle, my lord…” Then the maids closed the door and left.

Collapsing onto the fragrant, soft bed, Merkel wrapped her slender arms around Olaf’s neck, her face flushed and her eyes misty as she whispered, “Be gentle…”

Olaf quickly stripped them both naked. After glancing at his fiancée’s chest, which was not as ample as his own, he pressed down on her.

The battle started gently but soon turned into a storm. By the time Merkel was utterly defeated, surrendering with raised hands and legs, Olaf’s army had not yet retreated.

Olaf, neither up nor down, wanted Merkel to “persuade” him, but she couldn’t even lift a finger. He had to call in the maids waiting outside to help him end his challenge.

Olaf then took care of four young and beautiful maids before finally feeling satisfied enough to sleep.

The next morning, he found himself dressed in a silk nightgown. Merkel was still frowning in her sleep, while the other four maids had already gotten up and left.

Because Europe followed Christian teachings, it adhered to a monogamous system. However, this did not mean European men faithfully stayed with one wife. For nobles, keeping mistresses was standard practice.

Dukes and kings had countless mistresses. Generally, queens and ladies turned a blind eye, and some queens with powerful families even had affairs with other men, sometimes bearing children.

The future Louis XIV’s lineage had many doubts, and he might not have been Louis XIV’s biological son.

Merkel was gentle and had a weak constitution, so she had no intention of controlling Olaf. To satisfy her husband, she willingly let her maids fulfill the duties of a wife.

Olaf felt that although his fiancée was a bit too petite and not well-endowed, she was gentle and deeply in love with him. Having such a woman as a virtuous wife was truly wonderful.

Holding Merkel, Olaf lightly kissed her lips. Merkel opened her eyes and whispered, “I’m still a bit sore…”

“We’ll just hold each other and sleep; don’t worry.”

Only then did Merkel sigh in relief, wrapping her arms around Olaf’s chest, listening to her fiancé’s steady heartbeat, and murmuring contentedly in an indistinct tune.

…

Ever since Olaf and Merkel had broken through that thin layer of paper, they had grown even closer. Their inseparable state was noticed by Su Yu, and Katrin reminded Olaf to be careful and not to over-exert Merkel, as her body was too frail compared to his.

According to Sweden’s arrangements, Gustavus Adolphus II’s birthday celebration would have three days of feasting. However, Olaf did not attend for two days, instead spending beautiful moments with Merkel in their room.

These few days of happiness would be the time Merkel would miss the most in the future.

On the third day, after the feast ended, it was time for Olaf to teach Christina. He got up early and changed his clothes, about to leave when he suddenly slapped his forehead and laughed, “Staying cooped up in the room has made me stupid. Christian went with His Majesty to Uppsala Palace two days ago, saying he was going to visit the royal family in his hometown and also check out the university. Probably just building momentum before the coronation.”

He stayed in the room for another day. The next afternoon, Gustavus Adolphus II, who had returned to the Three Crowns Palace, sent someone to call Olaf, instructing him to welcome officials from Gothenburg and Kalmar as a royal court teacher, accompanied by the royal constabulary.

Gothenburg and Denmark were separated by the sea. Gothenburg was Sweden’s second-largest city in later years, second only to the capital, Stockholm. Kalmar was a castle at the border between Sweden and central Norway, and in later years, it became one of Sweden’s important industrial areas.

However, at present, both Gothenburg and Kalmar were under Danish control due to the Kalmar War. Historically, it wasn’t until the later stages of the Thirty Years’ War that Christian IV, unable to control his desire to suppress Sweden, attacked Sweden but was taught a lesson, leading to their recapture.

Now that the Thirty Years’ War had ended prematurely and Gustavus Adolphus II had not died in battle, Christian IV certainly wouldn’t dare to provoke Sweden, and Sweden had lost its justification for retaking Gothenburg and Kalmar.

Although Gothenburg and Kalmar were controlled by Denmark, the people and local gentry still leaned towards Sweden. Thus, they secretly sent people with gifts to congratulate Gustavus Adolphus II on his coronation as emperor.

Gustavus Adolphus II had Olaf and the royal constabulary welcome the guests from the two cities. Olaf felt that the Lion King seemed to have some ideas.

“Could it be that the Great Emperor Gustavus plans to take the initiative and reclaim the lost territory?”

Constrained by Sweden’s history as a nation that broke away from Denmark, centuries of vassal relations, and the presence of powerful neighbors like Poland and Russia in the east, Sweden had never dared to be too harsh with Denmark.

It was only after Gustavus Adolphus II took office that Sweden rose to power. However, the current relationship with Denmark was a delicate balance: you don’t bother me, I don’t bother you, but we must not have conflicts.

If the soon-to-be-crowned emperor Gustavus Adolphus II wanted to avenge past humiliations and add another achievement to his imperial resume by launching a war against the weakened Denmark to reclaim Gothenburg and Kalmar, the possibility was very high.

After bringing the envoys from the two cities back to the Three Crowns Palace, Olaf saw Gustavus Adolphus II comforting the two envoys, who were pleading for heavenly soldiers to rescue them and return to their homeland. This confirmed his suspicions.

It seemed that Sweden’s military action against Denmark was a foregone conclusion, possibly as early as next year.

Although Gustavus Adolphus II felt sympathy for the two cities’ citizens who had fallen into Danish hands and even shed a few tears, he did not agree to the envoys’ requests. However, he promised that the privy council and parliament would discuss and come up with a solution.

Olaf glanced at Oxenstierna, who stood by, indifferent, not uttering a word, and sneered inwardly, thinking: “This seems to be a play between His Majesty and the Prime Minister, probably to make the envoys from the two cities cry out in the capital, stirring up the Swedish people’s emotions of unity against a common enemy, and finally, to follow public opinion and launch a war…”

Considering his own identity, Olaf thought that the Great Emperor Gustavus might also be planning to have the small nations that came to Stockholm for the coronation ceremony contribute. Olaf pondered whether Iceland could benefit from this event and decided to go back and discuss it thoroughly with his father.

Chapter 331: Coronation

That evening, Olaf, Haldor, and Ulf sat on the sofa discussing Gustavus Adolphus II’s preparations to wage war against Denmark to reclaim Gothenburg and Kalmar.

Ulf believed that with Sweden’s current strength at its peak, it was inevitable that they would dominate Northern Europe. Taking action against Denmark was a certainty. Even without the two cities lost to the Danes, Gustavus Adolphus II would find another excuse to strike.

Haldor and Olaf agreed with Ulf’s perspective. Denmark’s current strength was no match for the Swedish army, so the three of them were delighted at the prospect of Denmark’s impending defeat.

At the same time, Haldor discussed with his two sons whether Iceland could gain substantial benefits by participating in the conflict.

Ulf thought for a moment and said, “Plunder! We can send a Viking Legion to assist in the battle. Then, we can loot the Danish cities and make a lot of money!”

Haldor smiled slightly and looked at Olaf. Olaf thought for a moment and said, “We should send more troops, at least enough to form a significant force, acting as an independent combat unit. This way, we avoid being treated as cannon fodder by the Swedes and can have some say in the matter.”

“So, besides avoiding being used as cannon fodder, are there other benefits?”

“The extent of our participation will determine our status after the war. If we participate as a major combat unit, during the post-war negotiations, Father, can’t we demand some rights for Iceland? Like carving out a piece of land from Norway…”

Olaf stopped there, and Haldor’s face lit up with excitement. He thought about it and felt that the feasibility was indeed high. As long as the Icelandic Legion actually occupied Norwegian territory, regardless of whether Denmark agreed in the negotiations, as long as there was no explicit opposition, it would be considered agreed!

At the thought of the opportunity to expand Iceland’s territory into Norway, Haldor became excited. He took his two sons’ hands and said, “Our ancestor Hrut once said that his ancestors set sail from northern Norway. If we can obtain Norwegian land, it would be like returning to our homeland in glory!”

Ulf was also very excited and hugged his father and brother, saying, “Then let me personally lead the troops to attack Denmark!”

Haldor agreed with a smile and then said, “But let’s not rush. We’ll decide after we go to the palace to see His Majesty tomorrow.”

The next morning, everyone dressed in their most luxurious attire—dukes, duchesses, counts, countesses, barons, baronesses, the prime minister, the finance minister, generals, envoys…

Nobles of various statuses arrived at St. Nicholas Cathedral in carriages. This was the largest cathedral in the Swedish capital, where the coronation of the king was held.

The carriages stopped on the stone path in front of the cathedral, and the nobles got out, straightened their clothes, and entered the cathedral. First, they admired the enormous wooden carving of St. George Slaying the Dragon, one of the largest in Europe. Although it was a wooden carving, it was lifelike and awe-inspiring.

Entering the cathedral, the grand hall had already been cleaned spotless. The elders of the Swedish Lutheran Church, dressed in robes and holding crosses, stood in the small room at the back of the hall, praying.

The guests and nobles from various countries stood around the hall, preparing to wait and observe the ceremony. Olaf, Merkel, Haldor and his wife, Ulf and Annie, Gerny and Half, and young William all stood in the front positions. No one dared to make any strange noises; they just stood quietly, silently.

After about half an hour, Oxenstierna, dressed in a robe, came out from the back door with the elders.

The black-robed deacons in the cathedral came forward, leading everyone in singing hymns.

Amid the hymns, Gustavus Adolphus II, accompanied by the queen and princess, entered through the main door and slowly ascended the platform.

Gustavus Adolphus II wore a golden royal robe but had nothing on his head. Standing in the center of the platform, the royal family also joined in singing the hymns.

After a minute, the singing stopped. Oxenstierna stepped forward first and read a flattering manuscript about Gustavus Adolphus II. Although it was somewhat sycophantic, it also highlighted Gustavus Adolphus II’s achievements.

When Oxenstierna finished, everyone spontaneously applauded enthusiastically. After the applause subsided, Oxenstierna bowed and said, “Great His Majesty, the divinely appointed leader of the Protestant world, Gustavus Adolphus II, long live!”

Everyone bowed and shouted loudly, “Great His Majesty, the divinely appointed leader of the Protestant world, Gustavus Adolphus II, long live!”

An elder representing God stepped onto the platform and briefly described Gustavus Adolphus II’s piety and sincerity, repeating the efforts Gustavus Adolphus II had made to uphold the truth and promote the right path. These efforts would make Gustavus Adolphus II an immortal existence!

After the long speech, a black-robed deacon brought a golden crown inlaid with a thousand gems and diamonds on a velvet-lined tray. This crown, worth one hundred thousand Swedish silver coins, was specially made for this coronation celebration.

The elder took the crown and walked to Gustavus Adolphus II, saying, “In the name of the Lord, Your Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II, are you willing to become the great emperor, managing the lost sheep of the world for the Lord, and leading them to the right path?”

Gustavus Adolphus II knelt on one knee and sincerely said loudly, “I am willing to dedicate myself to God, willing…”

After Gustavus Adolphus II finished, the elder placed the crown on his head.

Gustavus Adolphus II stood up, and everyone in the cathedral bowed.

However, the envoys from various countries only bowed, while the ministers, nobles of the Swedish United Kingdom, and dukes from tributary states knelt on one knee.

“Behold the great and merciful Emperor Gustavus Adolphus II!”

Gustavus Adolphus II, as he wished, was crowned as the great emperor of Sweden and even Northern Europe, an unparalleled sage. It would be difficult for anyone to follow in his footsteps.

The great emperor’s face was flushed with excitement as he shouted, “I am the king of kings, I am the true monarch, I am the center of the universe!”

Everyone except the envoys from various countries followed, shouting, “Yes, Your Majesty, you are the king of kings, you are…”

Olaf watched the somewhat self-indulgent scene before him, and his blood boiled. He felt that Gustavus Adolphus II was truly his idol. He had achieved the ultimate pursuit of a man, leading a small country with a sparse population and harsh conditions to become a first-rate power in Europe. It was truly admirable.

Olaf felt that he too should strive, not to become a great emperor, but at least to become a great king.

The coronation celebration of Gustavus Adolphus II was quickly completed. After the ceremony, Gustavus Adolphus II, on behalf of the Swedish royal family, donated a large sum of money to St. Nicholas Cathedral and signed a special amnesty decree, pardoning several thousand Catholic Union soldiers captured on the German battlefield.

Everyone present immediately sang praises of the great emperor’s mercy, and even the envoys did not dare to show any disobedience at this moment.

After the coronation ceremony, the banquet at the Three Crowns Palace continued. All the nobles gradually entered the great emperor’s palace, where they sang and danced, prayed for the great emperor, and celebrated with him.

Gustavus Adolphus II toasted with every duke, count, minister, and envoy. By the time he reached Olaf, his eyes were somewhat dazed.

Olaf gently approached His Majesty, subtly supporting him, and said, “Your Majesty, be careful later. Drinking too much is bad for your health.”

Gustavus Adolphus II laughed heartily, pulled Olaf, and said, “My golden-haired boy, I want you to be my knight, my chief of the gendarmerie. You’re really a good fellow!”

Seeing that the great emperor was already drunk, Olaf signaled his guards and then helped His Majesty leave the venue.

Queen Eleanor, who only had eyes for her husband, had noticed the situation long ago. She quickly walked over and asked, “What’s wrong? Is His Majesty drunk?”

“His Majesty is happy today and has drunk a bit too much. You should take him to rest now,” Olaf turned and said.

Queen Eleanor paid no attention to Olaf, turned, and called two soldiers to help Gustavus Adolphus II leave.

Chapter 332: The Spring of 1635

The Swedish United Kingdom had witnessed the rise of an unparalleled emperor—Gustavus Adolphus II.

France, England, Spain, and the Habsburgs welcomed back their envoys in the spring of the following year, who had been sent to attend the birthday celebrations. They also learned of the coronation ceremony, leaving all the monarchs both wary and envious.

Charles I of England and Louis XIII of France, among other kings, envied Gustavus Adolphus II for becoming a grand emperor. They too aspired to be emperors, but their national strength was insufficient. They could neither unite the European continent nor inherit the legacy of Caesar, leaving them helpless.

However, Charles I devised a way to make himself an emperor—by seizing the throne of another emperor.

In Europe, only the Holy Roman Empire, Russia, and the newly emerged Sweden had emperors. Taking their thrones was nothing but a pipe dream. Now, with England’s growing naval power, they had learned that the Ming Dynasty in the Far East was the successor to the ancient empires of Seres, Qin, and the Khitans. If they could occupy the Ming Dynasty, Charles I’s ascension to emperor would be recognized by the world.

But the Ming Dynasty was powerful. Both Portugal and Holland had attempted to provoke it, only to be taught a lesson.

Since the Far East was out of reach, Charles I turned his gaze to the Indian subcontinent, where the East India Company operated. The Mughal Empire in the north was a branch of the Mongol Empire. If England could occupy the entire Indian subcontinent and replace the Mughal Empire, the Kingdom of England could naturally ascend to the British Empire.

With this thought, Charles I was filled with enthusiasm. He decided to first send a governor to the East India Company to oversee this profit-driven private enterprise, intending to gradually encroach on South Asian lands to achieve his goal.

While Charles I dreamed of annexing the Indian subcontinent, Louis XIII and Cardinal Richelieu sat in a warm chamber, discussing the path to strengthening France.

In Richelieu’s plan, France had already achieved internal unity. The next step was to integrate their forces, vigorously develop overseas colonies, and expand and train a standing army. The military reforms of Gustavus Adolphus II of Sweden had shown their benefits after the great war. Now, European countries were rushing to emulate them, focusing on recruiting local farmers for the standing army and training them in linear warfare.

Louis XIII was indulgent in wine and women but harbored ambitions beyond his capabilities. Knowing he couldn’t achieve them alone, he tolerated the capable Cardinal Richelieu’s control over the court.

“Although the German region wasn’t unified by the Habsburgs, the central and northern areas have fallen into Swedish hands. Sweden’s rise isn’t what we hoped for,” Louis XIII sighed.

Richelieu took a piece of paper from his pocket, trembling, and handed it to the king. “This is the population, land, and income data for Sweden and our France. Though not entirely accurate, it’s close enough. Their foundation is insufficient to face four enemies—Poland, Russia, the Habsburgs, and Denmark. The current peace exists only because Gustavus Adolphus II is still alive. What if he dies? Or falls gravely ill? Do you think Sweden is a fleeting phenomenon or an eternal empire?”

Louis XIII’s mood improved. “Do you have a way to make Gustavus Adolphus II die?”

After asking, Louis XIII shook his head, thinking: Gustavus Adolphus isn’t like the fools in the Vatican; how could he give anyone a chance to poison him?

Richelieu shook his head, a smile playing on his lips. “Poison and assassination are completely ineffective against His Majesty, the Lion King. All we need to do is wait. Gustavus Adolphus II’s health isn’t good. He nearly lost his life on the battlefield of Lützen. Even though the Duke of Iceland and the Count of Vinland saved him, he was left with an incurable injury. After the coronation ceremony last year, he fell ill. Perhaps he’ll recover this spring, but what if he falls ill again? If he doesn’t recover this time, we’ll see the collapse of a great tower…”

Louis XIII laughed heartily. “Regardless of whether Gustavus Adolphus recovers, I don’t think we’ll be his enemies. We need to focus on those around us.”

Richelieu nodded. “Spain is indeed restless, wanting to abolish Catalonia’s autonomy.”

Catalonia was a land bordering Spain and France. Hundreds of years ago, it was part of the Carolingian Empire. France, claiming to inherit the legacy of Charlemagne, also coveted this land.

“What should we do? Should we support them?”

“Of course, we should support them wholeheartedly. Not only Catalonia but also Portugal. When Spain’s backyard is on fire, we can crush their land forces and ensure our backs are always safe!”

“You always bring me surprises. We’ll clear all obstacles for the next generation. I think when Louis XIV ascends the throne, it will be a prosperous era!”

Richelieu and Louis XIII knew that with France’s geopolitical situation, unifying Europe would require the efforts of another generation. They were the ones who would lay the groundwork…

As the news of Gustavus Adolphus II’s coronation spread across Europe, causing hidden turmoil, Olaf was in the Three Crowns Palace, comforting the tearful little Christina.

“Teacher, will my father wake up?” Christina looked up at Olaf with a hopeful expression.

Olaf sighed inwardly but spoke with conviction. “His Majesty will be fine. He is the commander of the Protestants appointed by God. He will surely wake up.”

It was March 1635. Since the coronation ceremony last year, Gustavus Adolphus II had fallen ill. The imperial physicians were helpless, proposing bloodletting as a treatment.

However, Olaf had guided Christina to refuse this. Although she was just a child, the panicked queen seemed moved by her daughter’s words and couldn’t bear to harm her husband further.

In the end, they could only ask the church elders to pray for Gustavus Adolphus II daily. His condition fluctuated throughout the winter, sometimes falling into a coma, but he would wake up after a few days.

Olaf knew this was due to Gustavus Adolphus II’s strong will to live. However, the more he observed the symptoms, the more he suspected tetanus. Without a specific cure, this disease was difficult to treat, so Olaf wasn’t optimistic about the emperor’s future.

Although Gustavus Adolphus II’s condition worsened, he held on until March before falling into a coma. The queen and princess wept daily. Chancellor Oxenstierna and other officials offered a reward of one hundred thousand silver coins for a doctor who could cure Gustavus Adolphus II.

This year was warmer than the last. By the end of February, the Baltic Sea began to thaw. In March, envoys from various countries left Stockholm with hidden joy.

However, the dukes and envoys from Sweden’s tributary states couldn’t bear to leave. They knew that if Gustavus Adolphus II died, it would be a loss for the entire kingdom. The newly acquired peace might be lost, and the German region would suffer first.

Thus, the nobles from the duchies and counties who attended the celebrations prayed sincerely for the Lion King, and none chose to leave.

But Olaf sent Halik and his men back to Iceland as soon as the ice melted. It was too late to fetch Song Qinghe from Vinland, but perhaps Song Qinghe’s disciple, Li Sheng, who had returned to Europe with Olaf, could stabilize Gustavus Adolphus II’s condition. After all, Li Sheng’s medical skills surpassed Huang Ping’s, reaching eighty percent of Song Qinghe’s level, according to Song Qinghe himself.

If Li Sheng arrived, using acupuncture, scraping, detoxification, and medication, he could likely alleviate Gustavus Adolphus II’s condition. After all, he had cured a Viking soldier in Iceland and Vinland who had tetanus.

But seeing Gustavus Adolphus II’s condition deteriorate rapidly, Olaf wondered if the Lion King could hold on until Li Sheng arrived…

Chapter 333: The Lion’s Life Hangs by a Thread

Amidst the united prayers of the Swedish Kingdom, no miracle occurred.

Gustavus Adolphus II remained in a prolonged coma. Four days later, the heartbroken queen finally permitted the doctors to perform bloodletting, but even after draining five ounces of blood, the king showed no signs of awakening.

As Gustavus Adolphus II teetered on the brink of death, the Swedish nobles, ministers, and the royal palace descended into chaos.

The doctors soon proposed a more radical surgical solution—trepanning the king’s skull and administering medication.

Queen Eleanor was never a woman of strong resolve, and faced with her husband’s impending death, she lost all ability to make decisions. She could only pin her hopes on the success of this surgery.

Even Chancellor Oxenstierna, usually so composed, had lost his usual poise. After careful deliberation, he too approved the surgical plan.

But Olaf and Haldor stepped forward in opposition. They argued that performing trepanning on Gustavus Adolphus the Great was nothing short of torture and humiliation. Facing the disapproving glares of the entire nation, Olaf raised a question: How many times has this surgery been performed successfully?

The doctors could not provide a responsible answer. In the end, they could only say that since the introduction of this procedure, no patient in Europe had ever protested or objected to it.

Olaf let out a bitter laugh. It’s like buying a parachute on Taobao—all the reviews are glowing because those who didn’t survive never got the chance to leave one.

Olaf’s opposition stemmed purely from respect for the Great King; he did not want him to suffer inhumane treatment in his final moments. But the desperate queen and chancellor, left with no other options, had no choice but to proceed.

Queen Eleanor clung to the hope of saving her husband’s life, no matter how slim the chance.

Chancellor Oxenstierna and the other Swedish ministers knew that if Gustavus Adolphus II died now, Princess Christina’s ascension would leave the empire vulnerable. With Russia, Poland, the Habsburgs, and Denmark lurking like tigers, the young ruler would face immense challenges. Without the king’s unifying presence, the glory of the Swedish United Kingdom might fade into history…

The thought of the dire straits Sweden would face after the king’s death weighed heavily on Oxenstierna. He even found himself wishing that Gustavus Adolphus II would not die now—if only he could hold on for another two or three years, until Sweden had fully absorbed its German territories and Christina had come of age…

Perhaps God had taken pity, or perhaps Gustavus Adolphus II’s luck truly held.

On the very day Sweden consented to the trepanning surgery, just as the doctors were sterilizing their instruments, Halik arrived with Li Sheng.

Olaf was overjoyed to see Li Sheng and immediately pulled him into the Three Crowns Palace.

As a royal court tutor, Olaf’s sudden intrusion into the palace, unarmed, did not meet with resistance from the guards.

When Olaf entered the antechamber, he saw the queen, the chancellor, the princess, the king’s sister Princess Katharina, and Karl all standing outside the king’s room, their faces etched with sorrow.

Olaf’s heart sank. He quickened his pace and called out, “Has the surgery already begun?! Stop it at once!”

Chancellor Oxenstierna and Queen Eleanor had grown increasingly displeased with Olaf. Seeing him dare to interfere again, they scowled.

Oxenstierna rebuked him, “Olaf, you overstep your bounds! His Majesty is on the verge of death, and you dare obstruct his treatment? Does the privy council not have the power to strip you of your title as count?”

Olaf paid no mind to the insult. Pointing to Li Sheng, he said, “This is my military medic. He was the one who treated His Majesty at Lützen years ago. Your trepanning surgery is far too dangerous. I think it best to let him treat the king instead!”

Both the chancellor and the queen knew of Gustavus Adolphus II’s high praise for the Ming Dynasty doctor in Olaf’s service. They hesitated.

Though still annoyed by Olaf’s rudeness, Queen Eleanor said, “Then let this foreign doctor examine His Majesty. Chancellor, stop the surgeons for now.”

Oxenstierna let out a cold snort and hurriedly led the group into the room. They saw the doctors instructing a barber on where to make the first incision on Gustavus Adolphus II’s skull—though for now, they were only shaving his head. A few more strokes, and they would be cutting into his skull.

“Stop!” Oxenstierna commanded. “Hold off for now. Let Count Olaf’s Ming doctor examine His Majesty first.”

The medical team, composed of renowned physicians from Germany, Sweden, and Poland, stepped aside. The barber, still holding strands of the king’s hair, was pulled away by Olaf.

Li Sheng had already been briefed on the urgency of the situation. He immediately sat by the king’s bedside, took his pulse, pried open his mouth and eyelids, then sighed deeply. “It’s too late… The malignant wind has penetrated deep into his marrow. I fear…”

Queen Eleanor, seeing Li Sheng’s grim expression, demanded, “Olaf, what is he saying?”

Olaf did not answer immediately. Instead, he whispered, “Is there any way to wake His Majesty? Even if it’s only for a few more days? I’ve already offended the chancellor and the queen to save him. You must make sure he wakes—only then can I turn this into a merit. If you can keep him alive a little longer, it would be beneficial for Iceland. Li Sheng, please, you must help me!”

Li Sheng had studied under Song Qinghe for twenty years and had been practicing independently for the past five. His medical skills were beyond reproach. Olaf knew that if Li Sheng said the king could not be saved, then he truly could not. But he still wanted to try.

Li Sheng had been treated with great respect by Olaf ever since arriving in Europe with his master. Olaf spoke fluent Northern Zhili Mandarin and relied on him for everything. Li Sheng had long regarded Olaf as a benefactor. Hearing his plea, he racked his brain before gritting his teeth and saying, “Very well. You have treated me as a man of honor, so today I shall do my utmost. My master once taught me the White Crane Thirteen Needles. If I use it on His Majesty, it will surely wake him. But I cannot save him. However, if we use a century-old Vinland ginseng to prolong his life and administer daily acupuncture and medicine, we might keep him alive for another ten days or so…”

Olaf’s eyes lit up. “Excellent! Then hurry and perform the acupuncture! We have the century-old Vinland ginseng—I’ll have it prepared at once!”

Olaf and Li Sheng exchanged a few more words before turning to the queen with a smile. “Your Majesty! My doctor says he can use a miraculous technique to wake His Majesty, but the king’s condition is too severe for a full recovery…”

“Ah?” Queen Eleanor first felt a surge of joy, then sadness. After a moment’s thought, she realized that trepanning was indeed a grim prospect. She turned to Oxenstierna and asked, “Chancellor, do you think we should let Count Olaf’s doctor treat His Majesty?”

Oxenstierna sneered. “Of course. If he can wake His Majesty, Count Olaf will be our savior!”

Olaf knew the chancellor was angry with him, but he didn’t care. As long as Gustavus Adolphus II woke and learned of everything that had transpired, he would surely be commended. The king would arrange his affairs, and there was an eight or nine in ten chance he would show favor to the Icelandic Duchy. This was a risk worth taking.

Chapter 334: The Lion Awakens, Old and New Clash

After Li Sheng had worked for over half an hour, Gustavus Adolphus II’s breathing gradually became smooth and steady.

During this time, Halik had gone to fetch the century-old Vinland ginseng, which Olaf had given to the queen. The palace staff had already begun to prepare it.

Seeing His Majesty’s complexion improve, Queen Eleanor, Oxenstierna, Princess Katharina, Karl, and Christina all felt a surge of hope.

Christina watched Olaf’s towering figure standing at her father’s bedside, his expression stern, his golden hair and beard gleaming like gold. She was deeply moved and silently prayed: God bless you, Olaf is the best teacher in the world. Lord, since You let him save my father once, please show Your divine power again!

Olaf stood by, watching Li Sheng insert and manipulate the needles while also massaging Gustavus Adolphus II. Soon, Li Sheng was drenched in sweat.

Olaf quickly took out a handkerchief from his pocket—one Sally had given him earlier—and handed it to Li Sheng. After wiping his face, Li Sheng looked up and said, “For now, the evil energy has been suppressed, but it can’t be cured. We can only find ways to prolong his life. Is the ginseng soup ready yet? I need to check it myself.”

Olaf knew Li Sheng didn’t trust the Westerners’ skill in preparing Chinese medicine, so he turned and said, “Your Majesty, please have someone escort this doctor to the place where the medicine is being prepared. He needs to personally brew the ginseng soup. Your Majesty’s condition has been temporarily stabilized.”

Princess Katharina was delighted and patted her chest, causing her clothes to tremble. “I’ll take him there,” she said, beckoning to Li Sheng.

Li Sheng was somewhat afraid of the Semu people, especially the terrifyingly ugly Semu women. Though he knew the speaker was a noble, he still glanced at Olaf.

Olaf nodded. “Go with her. If you can’t speak Swedish, speak Icelandic. You’ll understand some of it.”

At this time, the languages of Denmark, Norway, Sweden, and Iceland were still very similar, all derived from ancient Norse. Iceland had preserved the original form, while the others had begun to be influenced by German, French, and English to varying degrees. However, communication was still manageable.

Li Sheng followed Princess Katharina out, and the atmosphere in the room became somewhat oppressive. Olaf didn’t know what to say, so he pretended to be concerned and watched Gustavus Adolphus II on the bed.

Christina suddenly stepped forward and, when no one was looking, secretly reached out her small hand to hold Olaf’s large one. She then gave him a grateful smile.

Olaf’s heart warmed, and he subtly nodded in return.

As Olaf spent more time with Christina and Karl, his bond with the two children deepened. He found that, ignoring their future, their liveliness, kindness, politeness, and eagerness to learn made Olaf very satisfied. Now, Olaf somewhat understood how a teacher felt about good students.

He knew Christina was aware of the misunderstanding and hostility from the queen and the prime minister and was deliberately comforting him. But even though Sweden’s customs were more relaxed than the Celestial Empire’s terrifying etiquette, holding hands with a princess in public was still a crime. He could only discreetly pull his hand away and smile at Christina again.

Their small actions were not obvious, and since everyone’s attention was on Gustavus Adolphus II on the bed, no one noticed.

A moment later, Li Sheng entered with a bowl of freshly brewed ginseng soup. Olaf lifted Gustavus Adolphus II, and together with Li Sheng, they slowly fed him the soup.

After about ten minutes, Li Sheng performed another round of acupuncture, but this time the acupoints were different, and the session was much shorter.

After removing the silver needles, Li Sheng pinched Gustavus Adolphus II’s philtrum, while Olaf softly called out, “Your Majesty! Your Majesty!”

Princess Katharina and Queen Eleanor wanted to help but were afraid of interfering with the treatment, so they stood by, clutching their skirts and watching with wide eyes.

Olaf and Li Sheng, one pinching the philtrum and the other the tiger’s mouth, with Olaf calling out repeatedly, saw Gustavus Adolphus II’s eyelids twitch before slowly opening. At first, he stared blankly at Olaf, then after a few seconds, his eyes moved.

“This… is this heaven? How… are you all here? Is that Doctor Li Sheng? Oh, Olaf, you’ve saved me again.”

Gustavus Adolphus II gradually regained consciousness. His parched brain turned, and he realized he had been saved once more by Olaf and Li Sheng. Overwhelmed with gratitude, he smiled and said.

Olaf was about to speak when a fragrant breeze brushed past his arm. Christina and Queen Eleanor had already rushed to the bedside, crying and expressing their longing.

Olaf smiled and discreetly led Li Sheng out.

Gustavus Adolphus II had just awakened from a long illness, and this time should be left for the family to talk. Oxenstierna also slowly retreated.

Olaf and Oxenstierna exchanged a smile. Oxenstierna, now a benevolent elder, patted Olaf’s arm and said, “Count of Vinland, you are truly decisive. I didn’t expect you to have already sent someone to invite this Ming doctor. Thanks to you. When His Majesty summons you later, I will speak on your behalf.”

Olaf had always known that Oxenstierna was a master of politics, skilled in manipulation and hiding his true feelings. If it weren’t for his roots being overseas, he might have been played by Oxenstierna long ago.

Seeing the old man approach, Olaf knew he was aware that he had saved Gustavus Adolphus II, which was another great achievement. Regardless of the reasons, he had to reconcile with Olaf.

Olaf sneered inwardly, thinking: If you knew Gustavus Adolphus II doesn’t have much time left, you probably wouldn’t be so nice to me. The old man is probably jealous of me and afraid that I, an outsider, will disrupt the political ecosystem of Sweden under his control. He’s truly a power-hungry man. I wonder what His Majesty thinks of him? Whether to prevent him from causing trouble in the future or to retaliate, I need to find a way to weaken him…

The old and the young smiled and shook hands, praising each other, but both harbored deep disdain for the other. However, Oxenstierna’s dislike of Olaf was not personal; in fact, he even admired this promising young blond man.

But Oxenstierna represented the interests of the Swedish nobility. Their disdain for the Icelandic commoners was one thing, but more importantly, they resented the sudden favor Olaf, Haldor, Wallenstein, and other outsiders had gained from His Majesty. Especially since Gustavus Adolphus II had repeatedly expressed his intention to promote Olaf, even considering him as a future pillar of support for Christina.

This was like poking the reverse scale of the Swedish nobility. For generations, they had been the prime ministers and ministers of Sweden. Why should an Icelandic commoner be favored by the emperor and eventually rise above the native Swedish people under the blue and yellow cross flag? Absolutely not! A foreign beggar, how dare he? How could he be worthy?

Thus, Oxenstierna’s opposition to Olaf was not personal but represented the conflict between the old Swedish aristocracy and the new nobles who had risen through the Thirty Years’ War, like Olaf.

However, Oxenstierna and his faction did not want to push things to a breaking point with Olaf, Haldor, Wallenstein, Duke Albert, and the others. As long as they knew their place and stayed away from the Swedish power circle, content with their titles and lands abroad, it would be fine.

This was because Olaf and the others had estates far from Sweden and mostly held no positions within the country, so the conflict was not yet intense.

But Olaf had become a royal court teacher and was set to become the commander of the royal constabulary. This was a sign of the new nobles seizing power, which the old Swedish aristocracy, who had enjoyed their privileges for centuries, naturally opposed. This was why Oxenstierna found fault with Olaf at every turn and even targeted him.

Olaf was not talented in political struggles. In both his lives, he had rarely dealt with such matters. Now, he felt completely Icelandic and tended to think of solving problems through force or strong counterattacks.

Knowing that Oxenstierna was against him, Olaf thought he needed to deal with him through Gustavus Adolphus II. Although Olaf was not well-versed in political maneuvering, he thought that Western emperors were not much different from Eastern ones. Now that Gustavus Adolphus II’s life was in danger and Christina was still young, would he see Oxenstierna as a Zhuge Liang or a Zhang Juzheng?

But no matter what Gustavus Adolphus II thought, Olaf needed to make him understand that Oxenstierna was neither Zhuge Liang nor Zhang Juzheng, but Guo Wei! At the very least, he was Oboi. Only then could he suppress this old man who was always targeting him!

Chapter 335: Killing the Chicken to Warn the Monkeys, Hidden Intentions

Olaf and Oxenstierna stood outside Gustavus Adolphus II’s room, each harboring their own schemes, waiting for an hour.

Princess Katharina, Karl, Queen Eleanor, and Christina emerged hand in hand, their faces all somber, though Queen Eleanor and Christina’s eyes were the reddest.

Li Sheng also stepped out and said, “Chancellor, Lord Olaf, His Majesty calls for you.”

The two entered the room. Gustavus Adolphus II was already sitting up in bed, draped in a white bear pelt coat. His cheeks were sunken, and he wore a beaver hat to cover his mostly bald head. Though he looked frail, his eyes burned with sharp intensity.

Olaf and Oxenstierna bowed in greeting. Gustavus Adolphus II glanced at the maids attending him, and they brought soft stools for Olaf, Oxenstierna, and Li Sheng to sit.

Once they were seated, Gustavus Adolphus II smiled and asked about recent events at home and abroad, particularly the movements of Poland, the Habsburgs, and Denmark. Finally, he sighed and said, “News of my grave illness has likely spread to all nations. If not for Olaf, I might not have woken up and gone to meet God. Now, I’m sure many are rubbing their hands together, waiting for news of my death before baring their fangs. Oxenstierna, what do you think we should do?”

Oxenstierna bowed slightly and said, “Now that Your Majesty has awakened, we should invite the resident envoys of all nations to the palace for a banquet, letting them see with their own eyes that Your Majesty has recovered. Once the news spreads, we can launch an attack on Gothenburg and Kalmar. Capturing these two cities will surely intimidate the other nations!”

Gustavus Adolphus II then turned to Olaf and asked, “What do you think?”

Seeing Gustavus Adolphus II’s expression, Olaf glanced at Li Sheng and realized that the king already knew his days were numbered. Thus, Oxenstierna’s suggestion was likely to be rejected.

Even if Gustavus Adolphus II showed himself in his weakened state, he would not last more than a few days. The harsher the suppression now, the more severe the backlash would be later.

Thinking of Gustavus Adolphus II’s methods, Olaf cautiously said, “Why not take advantage of the unrest in other nations and immediately launch an attack on Denmark? Not only should we occupy Gothenburg and Kalmar, but we should also seize as much land as possible, preferably capturing Copenhagen. Then we can force Christian IV to sue for peace. This battle will surely make the Swedish Iron Army famous throughout the world. Then, they will fear the Swedish Iron Army, and whether I am healthy or can lead troops will no longer be the only condition they fear.”

“Good! Olaf, you’re right.”

Gustavus Adolphus II clapped his hands excitedly and said, “I am like a candle, my time is short. No matter how well the treatment goes, I will never be able to lead troops again. But the Swedish Iron Army I trained will not disappoint me. So, I want to take advantage of the other nations waiting for news of my life or death and fight a brilliant battle, letting the people of Europe know that the Swedish Empire is still an empire with or without a great emperor! Even if I die, not just anyone can challenge us!”

Gustavus Adolphus II’s resolute words shook Olaf’s spirit, and he secretly admired the great emperor’s ambition and courage.

Oxenstierna, however, lowered his head, his face darkening, his resentment toward Olaf growing stronger.

In the past, he and Gustavus Adolphus II had worked together harmoniously, but since Olaf’s arrival, the king had distanced himself from him. This time, Olaf had even guessed the king’s intentions, and Oxenstierna’s sense of crisis deepened. He knew Olaf could not be allowed to stay, and deep down, he even harbored thoughts of killing him.

Both Olaf and Gustavus Adolphus II noticed Oxenstierna’s bad mood, but Olaf was secretly pleased, delighted to see the old man frustrated.

Gustavus Adolphus II, however, sighed inwardly, feeling a slight guilt toward his old comrade. He said solemnly, “As the saying goes, the dawn is not brought by the rooster’s crow, and there’s an Eastern proverb that says killing a chicken to warn the monkeys. Old comrade, golden-haired boy, our Sweden cannot rely solely on my reputation. We must rely on the unity of the nation and the might of the Swedish Iron Army to fight a victorious conquest even without the emperor’s presence! Let’s kill a chicken to show the restless monkeys of Europe!”

“So, I have decided to order an attack on Denmark in the name of the Swedish Empire. The reason is that Denmark is mistreating the Swedish people of Gothenburg and Kalmar. Now, Oxenstierna, you will lead ten thousand native soldiers to attack Gothenburg. You must capture Gothenburg within a week and then cross the sea to attack Helsingborg, controlling The Sound!”

“Olaf, you will lead ten thousand soldiers to attack Kalmar. Don’t expect me to send you troops; you must raise your own. Even if you exceed ten thousand, it doesn’t matter, but the military pay will be provided by the Minister of Finance, who will only give you supplies for ten thousand. Remember your task: capture Kalmar within a week, then move south to blockade Copenhagen. Try to capture Copenhagen with Oxenstierna, but even if you can’t, you must quickly force Christian IV to negotiate peace. My bottom line is that all lands north of the Baltic Sea and the eastern islands must be ceded to us. You can negotiate the other terms yourselves!”

“Capturing Gothenburg and Kalmar won’t be a problem. Before the year’s end, I have already arranged the pieces, and you have been involved, Oxenstierna. With an internal and external attack, perhaps we can capture them in a day. Time is tight, so I only give you half a month. Within half a month, you must capture all the northern fortresses of Denmark, capture Copenhagen, or negotiate peace!”

“If you fail, when you return, you will no longer be Chancellor or Count…”

Hearing that he was appointed as the expedition’s marshal, Oxenstierna was initially pleased, but upon learning that another army was given to Olaf, he felt as if he had swallowed a fly. As for Gustavus Adolphus II’s harsh words, Oxenstierna didn’t take them seriously because he was confident in completing the task. He also believed that even if he failed, Gustavus Adolphus II would not let him sit on the sidelines forever. However, now that the king had not appointed him as the supreme commander, Oxenstierna felt somewhat uneasy.

After bowing to accept the order, Oxenstierna did not turn to leave. Olaf, realizing the situation, took the initiative to ask, “When General and I fight separately, it’s fine, but when our forces unite to attack Copenhagen, who should be in charge?”

Gustavus Adolphus II pointed at Oxenstierna and said, “The Chancellor will be in charge. You must make detailed battle plans and show them to me. Unless there are special circumstances, you must strive to achieve the strategic objectives.”

Oxenstierna breathed a sigh of relief, knowing that the king still considered their relationship or did not dare to truly offend the old ministers. In any case, it was not too far from his expectations. His tone lightened as he bowed and said, “I accept the order.”

Olaf also bowed in agreement. Then, Olaf left Li Sheng to take care of Gustavus Adolphus II’s health, and the two left the room.

As they exited the room, Olaf and Oxenstierna did not even glance at each other before turning to leave. Both understood that the king was deliberately establishing a balance between the new and old factions within the country.

Once the news of the war against Denmark spread among the high-ranking officials, the newly attached nobles and generals from outside Sweden would likely flock to Olaf’s side. Their identities and interests made them natural allies.

The outcome of this war was not important. The sudden attack by the two Swedish armies on Denmark, given Denmark’s current weakened state, would surely be unstoppable.

The key was who between Oxenstierna and Olaf could achieve the greatest merit and dominate the course of the war. After the war, it would likely determine the future power structure of the Swedish court.

Oxenstierna did not know that Gustavus Adolphus II only had ten days or half a month left to live. He had never seen a dying man extend his life, so he believed that Li Sheng had cured the king’s illness or at least controlled it.

Olaf, however, knew the truth. Oxenstierna’s misunderstanding led him to believe that Gustavus Adolphus II, knowing his health was failing, was starting to groom talent for the young heir. However, this time, by appointing himself as the general, he was not planning to shake up the court.

Olaf clearly understood that Gustavus Adolphus II was not planning to let Oxenstierna control the Swedish government anymore, or at least not completely.

In the past, Gustavus Adolphus II was a wise and virtuous ruler, revered by all. His personal abilities and domestic prestige had long surpassed those of the previous king. Oxenstierna was capable and met his requirements, so Gustavus Adolphus II allowed Oxenstierna to control the court.

But if Gustavus Adolphus II truly wanted to remove Oxenstierna, it would not be difficult, or at least not very hard.

However, if this wise emperor died and the not-yet-eight-year-old Christina ascended the throne, with a thoughtless queen and a few royal nobles, it would be difficult to shake Oxenstierna’s position, let alone share power.

Gustavus Adolphus II did not want to leave his daughter with a powerful minister who could not be controlled. Although he was confident that Oxenstierna would not and dare not usurp the throne, if his daughter could not grow and be tempered, the empire might end with him.

Although the art of imperial rule was not a strength of Western monarchs, the wise Gustavus Adolphus II had developed a simple understanding through practice. He believed that Olaf’s identity and background meant he would always be an outsider in Sweden. The more he was favored, the more he would be rejected domestically. The more he opposed Oxenstierna and others, the more loyal he would be.

More importantly, he was very capable. After careful consideration, Gustavus Adolphus II believed that Olaf was the best tool in the hands of the Swedish royal family—a tool to restrain Oxenstierna and maintain a balance of power even after his death. His identity, age, and status made him the most suitable to be Christina’s right-hand man.

Chapter 336: The Young Mistress’s Faction

Facing death, Gustavus Adolphus II was not afraid at first, for he had confronted it many times in the chaos of battle.

But after experiencing the helplessness of a coma and grave illness, he grew fearful of death. Yet, as a wise ruler, he quickly adjusted his mindset and made the most suitable decision—to create an internal and external political environment for his daughter where she could grow up in stability, receive sufficient training, and maintain the majesty of a great emperor.

With his last breath, facing death, Gustavus Adolphus II was no longer the king of the Swedish United Kingdom or an emperor for the ages. He was simply Christina’s father, hoping that this dying old lion could still help his daughter maintain the lands she would inherit…

…

When Olaf returned to the front hall, he saw his family, the Wallenstein family, Duke Albert’s family, and young William all waiting for him. He knew these sharp-nosed individuals were aware that the great edifice was about to collapse and wanted to glean information from him.

Looking around and confirming there were no outsiders, and that these were his future allies and comrades, Olaf did not beat around the bush. He sat down and immediately shared the news of Gustavus Adolphus II’s awakening.

However, Olaf did not mention that the king’s days were numbered. Instead, he focused on the fact that His Majesty had ordered him and Oxenstierna to split their forces and attack Gothenburg and Kalmar, ultimately marching on Copenhagen, the capital of Denmark.

Those present were all astute individuals and quickly grasped the deeper meaning behind Gustavus Adolphus II’s orders.

Oxenstierna was given ten thousand soldiers from the Swedish forces, while Olaf was tasked with raising his own army and fighting on two fronts simultaneously. This was clearly a move to have Olaf gather his own followers and establish a separate faction.

Wallenstein, inexperienced in political struggles, furrowed his brow and said, “Has Oxenstierna’s power already become a threat to the emperor? That shouldn’t be the case. Why does His Majesty want to cultivate a new faction?”

Wallenstein’s level of understanding represented that of Haldor, Ulf, and others. They frowned, unable to comprehend, but Duke Albert seemed deep in thought.

Though young, William had seen much while in Holland under the guidance of his father-in-law, the Prince of Orange, the regent of Holland. He was the first to speak up, “Olaf is Princess Christina’s fencing and horsemanship instructor. His Majesty also intends for him to take over as the commander of the royal constabulary. Does this mean His Majesty wants to support and assist the faction that will aid Princess Christina?”

Duke Albert snapped his fingers and laughed, “Exactly! Oxenstierna is an old noble of Sweden. Emperor Gustavus Adolphus doesn’t need to worry about his prestige and power, but what if Princess Christina ascends the throne in the future? His Majesty’s illness is very serious, and he is probably worried about dying unexpectedly. If that happens, the princess might not be able to control old ministers like Oxenstierna. That’s why he is promoting Olaf and having him recruit new talents during this war, especially those from outside the Swedish Kingdom, like us. This way, a faction tied to the princess can be formed, allowing her to stand on equal footing with Oxenstierna and the others after she ascends the throne!”

Duke Albert’s explanation was thorough, and everyone present suddenly understood, their faces lighting up with joy.

No one would complain about having a higher status or more power. Those present were all rulers of duchies, but within the Swedish Empire, they held little power. Now, there was an opportunity to enter the Swedish political arena, and both Wallenstein and Duke Albert’s hearts burned with excitement.

Haldor and William also looked at Olaf with eager anticipation.

Olaf had shared this information to stir their enthusiasm. Seeing that the moment was right, he took the initiative to ask, “How many soldiers are you willing to contribute to the ten thousand troops?”

“I’ll provide five thousand!” Duke Albert knew that Gustavus Adolphus II required Olaf to raise an army immediately. The Viking soldiers stationed in distant Iceland were unreliable, and the real purpose was to recruit vassal states to form a “Crown Prince’s Faction” or a “Young Mistress’s Faction.” As the current head of the Saxony Duchy and Ulf’s father-in-law, he naturally wanted to secure the largest share. He raised his hand high and declared loudly.

Olaf turned to William, who had intended to consult with Brandt but saw Olaf’s gaze shift toward Wallenstein. In a panic, he raised his right hand and shouted, “I’ll provide two thousand Prussian soldiers!”

“That’s almost enough. What about the Duke of Magdeburg?”

Wallenstein stroked his beard and smiled, “What did His Majesty say about exceeding the troop quota?”

“He said he would only provide rations and military funds for ten thousand soldiers. Any excess would have to be handled by us.”

“Then I’ll make up the remaining three thousand.”

Olaf smiled slightly and said, “Does the Pomerania Duchy not need to send troops?”

Everyone knew that the Pomerania Duchy had a Swedish governor stationed there, and its soldiers had joined the Swedish forces, so no one responded.

After a moment, Duke Albert spoke softly, “Don’t withdraw soldiers from Pomerania. Let them follow Oxenstierna. If they earn merits, they’ll occupy the promotion quotas on the other side. In the future, when you inherit the duchy, you’ll find a way to make those people lean toward our side. Even if they don’t switch, having a neutral attitude will be a help to us!”

Olaf glanced at Duke Albert, inwardly amused that he had already gotten into character, and then laughed, “Good. Now, the Saxony Duchy will provide five thousand troops, the Prussia Duchy two thousand, and Magdeburg three thousand, totaling ten thousand. Please gather your forces immediately. You will command your own armies. When the time comes for rewards, it will be easier for His Majesty to appoint you to government positions, allowing us to form a faction.”

“Alright, we’ll follow Olaf’s lead.”

“I’ll send someone back to count the troops immediately.”

…

Wallenstein, Duke Albert, and William left in a hurry. Olaf turned to Haldor and said, “Father, we can’t stay idle either. Since His Majesty wants to create a clear path for the princess, he will definitely force Denmark to cede territory, pay reparations, and submit. We should take this opportunity to carve out a piece of Denmark for ourselves!”

“Do you mean attacking Norway?” Haldor’s eyes lit up as he recalled their recent discussions. He looked at Ulf and said, “Go get the map of Norway, the sample map I brought back from the Minister of Finance the other day.”

Ulf quickly retrieved the map and spread it out on the table. The three of them pointed and discussed, finally deciding to gather troops from Iceland to attack Trondheim, the ancient capital of Norway.

Trondheim, the capital of the Norwegian Kingdom during the medieval Viking era, was founded by King Olaf I of Norway in 997 AD. Initially called Nidaros, it was later renamed Trondheim. In Norwegian, “Trond” means “throne” or “coronation,” and “heim” means “home,” so together, it means “the place of coronation.”

By the late 13th century, to expand southward, Norway moved its capital to Oslo, which means “the valley of the gods.” After the Danish union, Norway’s population also concentrated in the south, and Trondheim gradually declined.

However, this ancient capital had a natural excellent harbor and was the only passage connecting northern Norway and central and northern Sweden, making the city strategically significant.

Haldor and Olaf wanted to seize Norwegian territory. Relying on Iceland’s forces to attack the south was unrealistic, and attacking the north was too cold and barren to establish a foothold and defend in the future. After much consideration, the best strategic target was Trondheim.

If the Icelandic forces could seize Trondheim while Denmark was defending the Sound and Copenhagen, Iceland would have a continental foothold. They could develop Trondheim into a major commercial hub and use it as a base to control Norway and communicate with Sweden. This way, Olaf would have Icelandic supporters in Trondheim when he served in the court, ensuring he had people to rely on and preventing him from being targeted by Oxenstierna and others, unable to make progress.

Chapter 337: A Heart-to-Heart by the Bedside

The city of Trondheim was once the ancient capital and heart of the Viking kingdom, though now it had fallen into decline.

Olaf and Haldor were ambitious, and now they had conceived a plan to seize the opportunity while Sweden was campaigning against Denmark. They would dispatch a large force from Iceland to capture Trondheim and carve out territory in Norway.

Norway had long been weak, with sparse populations and few troops in the north. With Denmark preoccupied, Iceland could easily take Trondheim with just a small detachment.

Haldor, Olaf, and Ulf were overjoyed. They embraced tightly before sitting back down.

“How should we proceed? Who should we send?” Haldor asked, looking at his two sons.

Before Olaf could speak, Ulf interjected, “Olaf must lead the attack on Denmark. Your Majesty’s health is failing, and you cannot leave during this chaos. I should go. I’ll rally soldiers from the Viking raids in northeastern and southeastern Iceland. Uncle Hudik and Uncle Hoskuld are both valiant generals. We can assemble a Viking raid force of five thousand men. With our warships and cannons, we can certainly take Trondheim, a coastal city!”

Olaf agreed, “Yes, Ulf is the best choice. But you must act swiftly. Even returning to Iceland and organizing troops from the two eastern raids will take five days. Add the time to march on Trondheim, and it will take over ten days. That should coincide with our capture of Kalmar and Gothenburg, putting pressure on Copenhagen. You must take Trondheim quickly, or once Christian IV seeks peace, we’ll have no justification to continue the fight!”

Ulf understood the urgency. Before he could say more, Haldor made the decision, “Leave at once. Have Annie return to her father first. Take extra ships and ensure you have enough supplies when you depart from Iceland. Listen to Hudik’s advice on strategy. Go!”

Ulf nodded, stood, and left immediately.

Olaf and Haldor then discussed tactics for the attack on Kalmar. Finally, Olaf said, “With inside and outside forces working together, taking Kalmar won’t be difficult. We have the elite troops of Magdeburg, Prussia, and Saxony, and most importantly, Wallenstein is with us. This battle shouldn’t be too hard. Let Half come along to learn.”

Haldor had no objections, “Good. Half wants to study strategy under Wallenstein, doesn’t he? Let him join you this time. After the battle, he can return with Wallenstein. If the boy is willing to learn, our family will have another great general in the future!”

Time passed swiftly as they prepared for war. The next day, Olaf went to the Minister of Finance to request military supplies. The minister was a supporter of Oxenstierna and wore a sour expression throughout, but seemingly under orders from Gustavus Adolphus II, he dared not refuse. He signed the documents and handed them to Olaf, saying, “Everything is in the warehouse. Go and take it.”

Olaf turned and left without another word. Over the past few days, he had sent his men to gather intelligence. He knew Oxenstierna had already assembled his army and was training outside the city, while the supplies for his own forces had been loaded onto the large ships at the docks the night before.

Olaf understood that the Minister of Finance not causing trouble for him was already a favor. He didn’t expect equal treatment with Oxenstierna. He knew that after this war, Gustavus Adolphus II would have reason to heavily reward his faction, the Young Mistress’s Faction, with titles and lands. Once the Young Mistress’s Faction and Oxenstierna’s faction were promoted and adjusted, the Swedish political arena would no longer be dominated by Oxenstierna’s old guards. With his faction at the forefront, Christina’s reign would be smoother after her ascension.

Olaf knew Gustavus Adolphus II was using him, but it was because he had value. The world was a stage of fame and fortune, and Olaf understood the principle of advancing or retreating. He had many grand ambitions. If he could control the Swedish government, he could not only benefit Iceland and Vinland but also elevate his own status, reputation, abilities, and connections.

In Gustavus Adolphus II’s eyes, Olaf was a blade to protect Christina’s throne. In Olaf’s eyes, he was using the Swedish Empire as a shell to hatch his own egg.

As Oxenstierna’s army trained outside the city for several days, preparing to depart, the soldiers from Magdeburg, Prussia, and Saxony also arrived by ship.

Olaf had Wallenstein lead the combined forces in training, then took his Icelandic guards to transport supplies.

By midday, a palace guard rode up on horseback, bowed respectfully, and said, “His Majesty requests your immediate presence.”

“What’s happened? Has his condition worsened again?” Olaf asked, raising an eyebrow.

The guard sighed, “Lord, I am but a messenger. How could I know such confidential matters?”

Since Gustavus Adolphus II had awakened, he had been resting in the palace, summoning officials only when necessary.

Oxenstierna had visited twice in the past few days, but this was the first time Gustavus Adolphus II had summoned Olaf alone.

Li Sheng had been attending to Gustavus Adolphus II in the palace, and Olaf hadn’t seen him, so he didn’t know the situation. Seeing that the messenger was also unaware, he mounted his white deer, Haysen, and vanished in a gust of wind.

Moments later, Olaf entered Gustavus Adolphus II’s bedroom. The king was dressed in a velvet nightgown, reclining against the headboard, while Li Sheng massaged his acupoints.

After many days, Gustavus Adolphus II looked healthier, his face ruddy and his cheeks slightly fuller.

“Olaf, you should understand the meaning of my arrangements by now, shouldn’t you?” Gustavus Adolphus II asked directly.

Olaf knew the king was aware of his impending death and was anxious. He quickly replied, “I understand, Your Majesty. You want me to rally the support of noble warriors who have no ties to the Swedish domestic aristocracy to assist and support Christina. I have already done so.”

Gustavus Adolphus II nodded in satisfaction, “I know. You’ve done well. Wallenstein is a capable commander, but his loyalties are questionable, and his lands are closest to Bavaria. Such people are best kept under control. Duke Albert only gained the Saxony Duchy through Sweden’s campaign against the Habsburgs. Originally, his branch had no claim to the duchy. Prussia… William is ruthless and determined, but his nation is weak. These are the most powerful figures outside the Swedish imperial nobility, but they are also the easiest to control. With you leading the effort to win them over, Christina, though young, can still inherit my imperial throne and rule the Swedish Empire. Olaf, the future depends on you!”

Olaf suddenly felt a sense of déjà vu, as if he were in the White Emperor City. He bowed, “Your Majesty overestimates me. I will only do as you command.”

Gustavus Adolphus II chuckled, “You are an Icelander. Setting aside the disadvantage of your identity, how much can that small island support you? By serving Christina in Sweden, you can leave a legacy in history. This is an opportunity for you.”

“I understand!” Olaf bowed again.

The two spoke for a long time, with Gustavus Adolphus II doing most of the talking and Olaf listening. After a while, the king yawned twice. Li Sheng noticed Olaf’s impatience and stepped forward, “Your Majesty, you should rest.”

Gustavus Adolphus II owed his extended life to Li Sheng and thus heeded his words. He quickly waved his hand, “Olaf, you may leave. Fight well, and give me a reason to promote you!”

Olaf expressed his gratitude and left. Li Sheng escorted him to the door and whispered, “Lord Olaf, His Majesty’s health has improved considerably. He should last another twenty days or so.”

Olaf understood. He marveled at Gustavus Adolphus II’s strong will to live and whispered back, “Take good care of him. If anything happens while I’m away, notify my father.”

Li Sheng bowed deeply, “I understand, Lord Olaf. You may go without worry.”

Olaf turned resolutely and strode out of the rear fortress of the Three Crowns Palace.

Chapter 338: Capturing Kalmar

After leaving the Three Crowns Palace, Olaf headed north. The allied forces assembled by various nations were all under Wallenstein’s command for training. Since they were all elite troops and Germans, they only needed to coordinate their efforts and familiarize themselves with Wallenstein’s combat directives.

Although Olaf was not entirely inexperienced in warfare, he felt he was no match for Wallenstein. Thus, he decided to serve as a nominal commander, entrusting the actual leadership of the army to Wallenstein while observing and learning from the renowned general’s strategic vision and planning.

The next morning, Oxenstierna led the main force by ship. Not to be outdone, Olaf set out at noon with his Icelandic warships and Pomerania Duchy’s troop transports, departing from Stockholm.

Sailing from Stockholm’s harbor, the fleet followed the Baltic Sea along the western coast, soon entering the narrow Kalmar Strait between the elongated island of Öland and the Scandinavian Peninsula. By evening, they had reached the outskirts of Kalmar’s harbor.

Knowing the city was prepared, Olaf sent scouts ashore in small boats to infiltrate. Just before dawn, the boats returned, bringing back an informant.

Olaf and Wallenstein had gone without sleep all night but remained energetic. They personally interrogated the informant, verifying every detail before confirming there was no deception. They then sent the informant back with instructions: at 7:00 AM, as dawn broke, the fleet would attack the harbor while the informant’s forces would simultaneously rise within the city, sealing off the Danish governor’s castle in Kalmar, cutting off communication between the docks and the governor’s residence to prevent reinforcements from the governor’s mansion.

Once the small boat vanished into the night again, Olaf turned and asked, “Your Grace, Kalmar’s docks are defended by only 1,200 troops, with another thousand or so in the city. With the militia inside, we should be fine for now. We need to take the docks as quickly as possible!”

Wallenstein turned to examine the map on the table. Sweden possessed the most up-to-date nautical and topographical charts of Kalmar.

After pointing at a few spots, Wallenstein smiled and said, “The fleet can’t deploy easily, but we can send men to land on the northern and southern islands first to attack the gun emplacements. Then, five large ships can enter the waterway simultaneously, getting close enough to bombard the bastions. Once we take the gun emplacements, we can dig trenches from the north and south of the bastions to approach them. Our heavy ship cannons pose a significant threat to the bastions, capable of pinning down most of the defenders inside. We should be able to dig approach trenches within two hours, then use explosives to breach the bastion walls. The docks will be ours!”

Olaf was highly satisfied with Wallenstein’s tactical arrangements and laughed, “Truly a renowned general of our time. Your tactics are flawless. Let’s proceed as planned!”

Time quickly passed, and at 6:40 AM, Olaf personally issued the attack order. Wallenstein’s two generals then took advantage of the darkness to approach the small islands on either side of Kalmar’s harbor entrance and assault the gun emplacements.

“Boom…”

The sound of cannon fire and gunshots shattered the morning calm. The two small islands, with their meager defenses, fell within twenty minutes. Wallenstein then personally led five warships through the harbor entrance, attacking the last line of defense at Kalmar’s docks—a massive bastion.

Events unfolded just as Wallenstein had predicted. Two hours later, the bastion was breached, and Olaf’s fleet sailed into the harbor.

“Mission accomplished, Marshal Olaf. Kalmar’s harbor is ours!”

Wallenstein and Half, both in full military regalia, stood before the bastion awaiting Olaf’s arrival. Wallenstein then bowed with a smile.

Olaf helped Wallenstein up, inwardly admiring his humility, which was meant to bolster Olaf’s image. Grateful for his kindness, Olaf laughed and said, “You’ve worked hard, Your Grace.”

“There’s no need to wait for the rest of Kalmar. Let’s march in with our mighty army and show the people, long separated from Swedish rule, the majesty of the royal forces!”

Attacking the small harbor town of Kalmar hinged on capturing the harbor’s gun emplacements and bastions. Now that both were taken, the only remaining enemy stronghold in Kalmar was the governor’s fortress.

Facing this minor obstacle, Olaf saw no need for Wallenstein’s command. He personally led three hundred Icelandic cavalry and eight thousand legion soldiers into Kalmar, leaving the rest to guard the warships and docks.

Kalmar’s mayor, with over a thousand militia armed with firearms, defended the castle. Though not professional soldiers, they were supported by Swedish firearms and officers, and the militia consisted of brave and fierce individuals, effectively blockading the governor’s residence.

Upon Olaf’s army’s arrival, the mayor of Kalmar came out to greet them, flattering Olaf and the Swedish army’s prowess.

Olaf, in turn, praised the mayor and the militia’s loyalty and bravery, promising to recommend them for merits after the army’s triumphant return.

The mayor’s attitude grew increasingly deferential, urging Olaf to lead the “Swedish heavenly soldiers” to breach the castle and capture the “bandit chief.”

Olaf humbly accepted the suggestion, nodding, “Mayor Simmer, please stand aside and watch how the royal army breaks the fortress and slays the enemy! For the vengeance of the townsfolk!”

“Thank you, Marshal!”

Olaf turned to Halik and asked, “Are the heavy cannons here?”

Halik bowed and replied, “They were a bit troublesome to disassemble but have just arrived.”

“Good, bring them forward and blast the castle to the ground!”

Through his telescope, Olaf saw that the governor’s fortress was merely an ordinary round fort, unable to withstand heavy cannon fire. Moreover, Simmer had previously reported that there were no cannons inside the fortress. Thus, Olaf confidently waved his hand and said, “Advance a bit. Let the Danish scoundrels inside see, and let the people of Kalmar witness!”

Soon, ten heavy cannons were pushed to within three hundred paces of the castle. After the gunners made multiple adjustments and calculations to the cannon positions, the cannon battalion commander gave the order, and the fierce cannon fire shook Kalmar.

“Bang…”

Scorching cannonballs flew out, one after another, striking the fortress.

Fragments flew everywhere, and the fortress instantly became pockmarked.

After five rounds of cannon fire, the governor’s fortress collapsed in several large sections.

To prevent the cannons from overheating and exploding, the barrels had to cool for a while.

Olaf sent several loud-voiced soldiers to call for surrender. After a moment, a white flag emerged from the large hole, waving in the wind.

Fighting to the death was a demand every king made of his soldiers, but in this era, apart from the best-treated royal guards, few soldiers were willing to die for their king.

Kalmar’s Danish governor, Hennielsen, was a former captain of Christian IV’s royal guards. He had taken up his post in Kalmar less than a year ago and had only amassed a little over two thousand Swedish silver coins. He had planned to serve another three or four years before returning home as a wealthy man, but he hadn’t expected a sudden Swedish military attack.

Hennielsen had initially considered sending troops to reinforce the harbor but discovered that the city’s mayor had turned traitor, leading the militia to besiege the fortress. Hennielsen, who wanted to preserve his life to enjoy his wealth, naturally didn’t dare to take risks and kept his soldiers in the fortress to protect himself.

Now, with the fortress under continuous cannon fire and large holes blasted into it, waiting any longer would mean certain death. Hennielsen wasn’t unwilling to die for the Danish king; he just didn’t want to die pointlessly in Kalmar. Since he couldn’t hold the fortress whether he lived or died, he might as well live.

Soon, Olaf, in his capacity as the Marshal of the Southern Route of the Swedish Empire, accepted the surrender of Hennielsen, the Danish governor of Kalmar, outside the governor’s residence. He confiscated their weapons and had them imprisoned within the army. When they set out to attack Copenhagen, most of the prisoners would be handed over to the local militia for custody.

Chapter 339: Securing The Sound

As Olaf captured Kalmar, the largest coastal fortress at the northeastern corner of the Kattegat Strait, north of The Sound, Gothenburg also raised Sweden’s blue flag with the yellow cross.

Under the protection of the Swedish army, Oxenstierna entered the city without armor, still wearing his long robe and riding a horse. By then, the royal army’s looting within the city had already ended. Due to the presence of the militia, they had only focused on plundering the wealthy merchants and landowners who sided with Denmark, as well as the shops and estates of Danish merchants. Although the loot was not substantial, it barely appeased the restless soldiers.

Oxenstierna noticed that the enthusiasm and morale of the troops had slightly declined since the start of the campaign. Therefore, he first spoke of the boundless wealth in Copenhagen and the vibrant world of the largest city in the Nordic region, stirring all the officers and soldiers to hold their breath, determined to break through Copenhagen and plunder to their heart’s content, making a fortune.

This campaign saw Oxenstierna as the Marshal of the Western Expedition, but his army was a gathering of stars.

Swedish Army Marshal Horn, Supreme Commander of Land and Sea John Banér, and Duke Bernhard, though German, had always been a noble faction of Sweden. These three were the most renowned generals in Sweden after Gustavus Adolphus II, and the most respected and battle-hardened supreme commanders in the Swedish army.

This western expedition against Denmark was crucial to Sweden’s future political landscape, so all the veteran generals were mobilized, bringing along three or four rising stars they were grooming as successors. For example, there was Karl Gustav Wrangel, son of the former Marshal Herman Wrangel, and Lennart Torstensson, the artillery commander trusted by Gustavus Adolphus II.

These two young men were the most promising successors among the Swedish nobles, so they accompanied Oxenstierna as his aides in this western expedition.

After entering the city and settling the prisoners and militia, Oxenstierna gathered his aides and the two commanders to discuss the tactical arrangements for attacking The Sound and Copenhagen, using the nautical charts of the Copenhagen area.

According to Gustavus Adolphus II’s requirements, he and Olaf were to attack Copenhagen after capturing Gothenburg and Kalmar. The difference was that Gothenburg, which Oxenstierna attacked, was near The Sound and was the most elite Swedish force, so after capturing Gothenburg, Oxenstierna also had to secure The Sound.

Olaf only needed to control Amager Island south of Copenhagen and Skoladeholm at the southwestern exit of the Copenhagen Strait, thus sealing off Copenhagen from all four directions—north, south, east, and west.

Copenhagen was the capital of Denmark but located on an island. Once Copenhagen was blockaded, not a single piece of wood or sail could enter the sea, effectively cutting off Denmark’s lifeline.

Previously, Olaf’s fleet had surrounded Copenhagen, causing great distress to Christian IV and the Danes. In the final days, the entire city of Copenhagen was driven mad by the food shortage, with soldiers looting daily and civilians storming shops and the villas of the wealthy.

Although the crisis was resolved and Denmark began building more warehouses to stockpile food, recruiting two thousand citizens to join Copenhagen’s constabulary to strengthen its defenses, both Oxenstierna and Gustavus Adolphus II saw that if they could mobilize a large army to blockade and besiege Copenhagen, they could still strangle Denmark’s lifeline.

They quickly decided on the tactics to attack The Sound. Since eighty percent of the Danish navy was in Helsingborg, they had to capture the place, destroy or control the navy within the fortress to weaken the Danish navy and achieve control over The Sound.

The number and quality of Swedish warships were far inferior to Denmark’s, so if they didn’t find a way to launch a surprise attack on Helsingborg, destroy the ships docked in the harbor, and kill the navy stationed in the shore fortresses, the idea of the Swedish army of twenty thousand and more than fifty ships besieging Copenhagen and resisting the Danish navy was completely unrealistic.

Gustavus Adolphus II entrusted the core task of destroying Helsingborg and controlling The Sound to Oxenstierna because he trusted the army he had personally built. The real tough tasks should be handled by his own people. As for Olaf and others, they were purely a reason to form a team and faction, then attack Kalmar and Copenhagen. After the war, Gustavus Adolphus II could also have a legitimate reason to promote Olaf and others based on military merit, leaving a loyalist party for his daughter.

Oxenstierna didn’t know that the great emperor he was loyal to was actually about to die, so he didn’t realize that the emperor was already suppressing him. He thought it was just the emperor’s gesture to balance the political forces in the court, giving him a knock, so he was genuinely unsuspecting.

The aides and famous generals were all first-class figures in Sweden, and they quickly decided on the tactics for the surprise attack on Helsingborg.

Since the Swedish warships were inferior to the Danish navy, Oxenstierna and his men did not plan to attack by sea. Instead, they appointed Lennart Torstensson to personally lead the fleet slowly southward, while Oxenstierna himself led the main army southward by land.

A few days later, the army launched a night attack on Helsingborg. The navy in Helsingborg had not yet received news of the Swedish attack on Gothenburg, so the nighttime vigilance was severely lacking.

After the attack by the Swedish cavalry and artillery, the navy in Helsingborg was completely trapped inside the fortress, unable to come out.

Among the more than forty warships of various sizes docked in the military port, only a few were manned. Upon hearing the cannon fire from the shore, they all turned their cannons toward the sound and flames to provide support. However, within an hour, a fleet of Swedish warships entered the harbor from outside. By then, it was no longer easy for the Danish navy to turn their ships around. The Swedish warships fired their cannons indiscriminately, and the Danish warships were soon riddled with holes and capsized in the harbor, soon to sink.

By the time dawn broke, except for the Danish soldiers in Helsingborg who were still resisting stubbornly, the shouts, gunfire, and cannon fire from the docks and other places gradually subsided.

Oxenstierna’s expression was relaxed as he turned to Horn, John Banér, and Bernhard, saying, “Thanks to your efforts, our losses are minimal. We have already controlled Helsingborg and captured most of the Danish warships. As for the remaining navy in the military fortress, there’s no need to rush. Leave three thousand men to surround and slowly wear them down. We will mobilize the remaining troops to board ships and head straight for Copenhagen.”

“Chancellor, should we send someone to contact Olaf? After all, His Majesty wants us to attack Copenhagen together with him…”

Seeing that the marshals and generals were silent, Karl Gustav Wrangel stepped forward and asked.

Oxenstierna said in a deep voice, “Olaf and Haldor are not bad at fighting. Wallenstein and Albert have joined their camp, and their several principalities have formed a large army. They must have captured Kalmar by now. Now that half of the Danish navy’s ships have fallen into our hands, we are no longer afraid of Denmark at sea. We will go to Copenhagen openly and honestly, then send someone to find Olaf. If we find his fleet, let him blockade Skoladeholm, and then we can besiege Copenhagen!”

Oxenstierna calmly issued the order. Soon, the Swedish army, carrying the food and wealth they had plundered along the way south, boarded the best Danish warships. Then, the fleet of dozens of ships set off majestically from the port of Helsingborg, swiftly heading south toward Copenhagen.

…

After Olaf’s fleet left Kalmar, they did not attack the fortresses and naval strongholds around Copenhagen. Instead, they disguised themselves as merchant ships and docked on the southern shore of the Baltic Sea, sending out a few small boats daily to scout and wait at the ports north of Copenhagen. They were waiting to observe the movements of Oxenstierna’s army attacking Gothenburg and The Sound.

Chapter 340: Copenhagen Besieged Once More

Copenhagen was not far from Kalmar and Gothenburg. Even though Olaf and Oxenstierna had executed a lightning-fast pincer attack, swiftly capturing both cities and seizing control of all ships and merchants at the docks, the sound of cannon fire had still alerted the merchant vessels at sea.

Olaf knew that within two days at most, Copenhagen would learn of the fall of Kalmar and Gothenburg. Thus, he planned to abandon the mission if Oxenstierna’s ships did not arrive by the next day.

Both Olaf and Wallenstein were well aware of the Danish navy’s strength. If it came to a naval battle, the combined forces of the Swedish and Icelandic navies would not have a guaranteed victory.

Unless Oxenstierna could successfully launch a surprise attack and capture the Danish naval base, securing control over The Sound, Olaf’s main force attacking Skoladeholm and Amager Island would be walking into a trap.

By afternoon, Olaf received a message from the personnel he had sent into Copenhagen two days prior. The docks had suddenly been placed under martial law around three o’clock, and all Swedes were being expelled. Simultaneously, the Danish navy defending Copenhagen had been mobilized and was setting sail.

Olaf was thrilled. As more messages poured in, he confirmed that nearly the entire Danish navy defending Copenhagen had set out toward The Sound in the north.

His heart pounded. He was almost certain that The Sound had been captured. Even if it hadn’t, it was definitely under siege, which was why Denmark had reacted so urgently, like a beast whose tail had been stepped on.

After much deliberation with Wallenstein, they decided to take a gamble and immediately attack Copenhagen!

If Oxenstierna had indeed taken The Sound, the thirty Danish warships sent from Copenhagen would be at a disadvantage against Oxenstierna’s forces, which now controlled the Danish ships at Helsingør. They might not even stand a chance. In that case, Olaf wouldn’t need to divide his forces to blockade the area. Instead, he should take the best course of action: strike directly at the heart, concentrating his forces to attack Copenhagen’s harbor.

This was the most advantageous strategy, but it hinged on Helsingborg and The Sound already being under their control.

If the Copenhagen navy arrived and Oxenstierna still hadn’t taken Helsingborg, Sweden’s elite forces could very well be encircled. The outcome would either be a devastating defeat or a Pyrrhic victory—either way, it would be a mutually destructive end.

Neither Olaf nor Wallenstein were Swedish. They certainly weren’t about to sacrifice themselves to save Oxenstierna, their political enemy. They knew that if they bet on Oxenstierna having already taken The Sound and launched a surprise attack on Copenhagen, they would be seizing the opportunity to strike while the iron was hot. They could also claim the first victory. By the time Oxenstierna emerged victorious from his grueling battle against the Danish navy, he would have no choice but to follow in Olaf’s wake, left to eat their dust.

If Oxenstierna hadn’t yet taken Helsingborg, they would be caught between two fronts. There was a fifty percent chance they would fight the Danes to the death, both sides suffering heavy losses, and a fifty percent chance they would be surrounded and overwhelmed, forced to break through the encirclement on land and flee. If the latter scenario played out, Olaf and his men would be cornered by the returning Danish navy, putting them in grave danger.

Olaf and Wallenstein considered that Oxenstierna’s side was composed of Sweden’s top commanders, and their ships were the galleons Sweden had spent a fortune building. It was highly likely that they had already taken Helsingborg. Even if they hadn’t, they would at least have the situation under control.

With the Copenhagen navy joining the fray, it would be difficult for the Danes to gain an overwhelming advantage. Thus, Olaf and Wallenstein felt it was worth taking a big gamble. If they won, they would enjoy endless wealth and glory. If they lost, they could simply abandon their fleet and escape lightly. After all, it wouldn’t be their own Icelandic troops who would die.

Therefore, half an hour after the Danish navy defending the capital had set sail, Olaf and Wallenstein issued the order to attack. Olaf dispatched his most trusted man, Halik, with two warships and a thousand soldiers to take a detour and capture Skoladeholm.

Only by taking Skoladeholm could the Copenhagen Strait, now devoid of the Danish navy, become a backyard where Olaf’s forces could roam freely. Even if things went south and they were cornered by the Danish navy, they could abandon the main force to buy time, then board fast ships and escape through Skoladeholm into the Danish inland sea, repeating Olaf’s previous successful escape into the vast North Sea.

However, if the war reached this point, it was unlikely that Gustavus Adolphus II’s core objective would be achieved.

If Sweden lost this battle, even if Denmark was also severely weakened, it would be nearly impossible to force Denmark into a humiliating peace treaty. Without capturing Denmark and with Sweden’s elite forces suffering heavy losses, once Gustavus Adolphus II died and Queen Christina ascended the throne, she would no longer be able to maintain the title of “Great Emperor.” She would have to face attacks from Poland, Denmark, and the Habsburgs, as well as rebellions in southern Germany.

But even if Gustavus Adolphus II’s strategic goals failed, the fact that Sweden and Denmark were engaged in a major war would further devastate Denmark’s already fragile economy and livelihood, pushing it into the abyss of chaos and collapse.

This alone was enough to make Olaf willing to strike at Copenhagen. Moreover, Olaf wasn’t particularly loyal to Gustavus Adolphus II or Christina. Whether Sweden prospered or declined didn’t matter to him. If Oxenstierna’s Swedish elite forces suffered heavy losses, it would only make it easier for outsiders like himself to rise to prominence, seizing the core power of Sweden.

After all, Olaf had Vinland and Iceland as his base. His ambitions did not lie in Sweden, and he had always been in an unbeatable position.

As the open-hearted Olaf led his fleet to a stop outside Copenhagen’s harbor, he saw the imposing Danish warships with their gaping cannon mouths and the Swedish flags flying high. The ships in the harbor hastily docked, and the crew hurriedly disembarked. The soldiers on shore rushed into the fortifications and gun emplacements, standing at the ready.

Looking at the familiar surroundings and the Danes’ familiar response, and seeing the Tre Kroner Fort, now even more formidable and towering than before, Olaf felt a strange sense of familiarity, as if he had returned to a few years ago when he led the Viking Legion to besiege Copenhagen.

Wallenstein turned to Olaf with a smile and said, “Count, I’ve heard that years ago, you personally led dozens of Icelandic warships and nearly ten thousand men from the six great legions to attack Denmark. You besieged and bombarded Copenhagen for over ten days. The news spread across Europe for months. I wonder if you can repeat that victory today?”

Olaf let out a hearty laugh and replied, “With Your Grace’s assistance, repeating the siege of Copenhagen shouldn’t be difficult, should it?”

Wallenstein chuckled and said, “Then let’s give it a try. We’ll strive to keep Christian IV trapped in the city and bombard him with a few more cannon shots. It would be best if we could besiege Rosenborg Palace!”

Last time, Olaf had been just one step away from breaking through Copenhagen’s docks and achieving his goal of besieging Rosenborg Palace. Hearing Wallenstein’s words, he couldn’t help but let his imagination run wild. Finally, he sneered and said, “Christian IV is so full of himself, dreaming of surpassing His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II to become the overlord of Scandinavia, the master of Germany, even the first king of Europe… Heh heh…

But he has repeatedly fallen at the hands of our little Iceland. He failed twice in his attacks on Iceland, and his capital, Copenhagen, has been besieged and bombarded by my troops twice. I bet he’s so ashamed he could die! If we can bombard Rosenborg Palace this time, Denmark won’t just lose its claim to being an overlord or hegemon—it will lose all face as a nation… Hahaha…”

Chapter 341: The Furious Chancellor and the Furious King

Within a single day—no more than twelve hours—the cannon fire outside the Copenhagen Strait gradually ceased, the smoke dissipated, and Swedish warships began landing at Tre Kroner Fort.

Under Olaf’s relentless command, the fleet endured the fort’s cannon fire, launching continuous assaults. By afternoon, they had even attempted two forced landings, resulting in the loss of two thousand soldiers and three sunken warships.

Yet the outcome was clear: Tre Kroner Fort had once again fallen to Olaf. The Danish royal flag was cast into the mud, replaced by the Swedish banner.

The golden lion flag fluttered in the sea breeze atop the small fort, its surface gleaming under the fading sunset, eliciting wave after wave of cheers from Olaf’s troops.

Though the assault on Tre Kroner Fort had cost them dearly, morale remained high. Not only were these elite soldiers, but the capture of the fort meant Copenhagen was now exposed—like a stripped maiden, her ample form laid bare, awaiting the Swedish army’s favor.

Copenhagen was the greatest city in the North, its wealth a marvel to all along the Baltic coast. The promise of plunder upon breaching its walls fueled the soldiers’ fervor.

After securing Tre Kroner Fort, Olaf had intended to order a brief rest, but seeing the troops’ high spirits, he commanded them to press on. If they could seize the harbor’s fortifications, Copenhagen would be theirs to ravage.

As Olaf’s warships bombarded the Copenhagen harbor, another fierce naval battle in the Sound had just concluded. The Danish navy’s thirty-plus warships, after a day of brutal combat against Oxenstierna’s forty-plus vessels, had been utterly defeated due to sheer numerical inferiority.

The Swedish fleet had also suffered heavy losses, with over a thousand drowned or slain in battle. Marshal Horn had been the unluckiest—struck by a cannonball, he succumbed to his wounds.

Oxenstierna surveyed his once-proud army, now battered and weary. Most of the ships bore scars of battle, two even missing their masts, rendered immobile. His face darkened—he knew the leak of their attack plans had allowed the Danish navy to ambush them the moment they left Helsingborg.

Yet, after a day of fierce fighting, victory was theirs. Oxenstierna believed Copenhagen’s defenses must be weakened by now. He had to act swiftly to claim the city before Olaf could seize it first.

By the time the fleet was secured, night had fallen. Oxenstierna arranged for the soldiers’ rest and night watch before Frangel and Duke Bernhard approached, their faces grim.

“What is it?” Oxenstierna asked.

“Chancellor, Olaf has already taken Tre Kroner Fort and is attacking Copenhagen!” Frangel reported.

“What?! How dare he disobey my orders and launch an assault? We’ve done all the hard work for him—what kind of master blacksmith is this?!” Oxenstierna fumed.

“What should we do?” Duke Bernhard asked.

Oxenstierna’s expression remained calm, but after a long pause, he spoke slowly, “Abandon the severely damaged ships. Order them to return to Helsingborg for repairs. We leave for Copenhagen at once. We cannot let Olaf take all the glory—otherwise, this western campaign will have been meaningless for us!”

After Duke Bernhard and the others left, Oxenstierna remained alone in the room. Only then did he clench his fists in fury, slamming them onto the table before him. “Damn that golden-haired brat!”

Winter had just passed, and Christian IV had only recently returned to Rosenborg Palace from Frederiksborg Palace. Now, within the palace halls, his thunderous roars shook the very glass.

“Damn that golden-haired brat! That bastard! Daring to attack Tre Kroner Fort again and bombard the Copenhagen harbor! I’ll kill him! I’ll cut off his head and make a trophy out of it! I’ll—”

Christian IV’s face was twisted in rage, his eyes bloodshot. After venting for a moment, he turned to the ministers standing before him. “Olaf is already bombarding the harbor. Who among you can kill him for me?”

No one answered his emotional outburst. After a moment, the Danish king let out a bitter laugh. “The armies from across Denmark will take days to arrive as reinforcements. If Copenhagen falls now, whose family will be spared?”

After Christian IV finished speaking, several generals stepped forward to volunteer. He shook his head. “No. The people of Copenhagen must be disappointed in me as their king, allowing an Icelandic traitor to assault the capital twice. It is a disgrace! Since the disgrace is mine to bear, I will be the one to resolve it!”

“You will return at once to recruit soldiers and form a militia… I will personally lead the royal guards to support the harbor’s defense. We must defeat the invading Swedish scoundrels!”

Christian IV rallied his spirit, displaying the qualities of a fine commander as he issued over a dozen precise orders—strengthening defenses and boosting morale. In the end, he declared his intention to take personal command, standing with his capital in its darkest hour.

Denmark was a prosperous nation, but it lacked top-tier generals. During the Thirty Years’ War, it had relied entirely on Christian IV and his two nephews, who showed great potential as commanders. Tragically, both nephews had perished on the battlefields of Germany, and Christian IV himself had suffered repeated defeats. Now, Denmark’s spirit was low, its will to fight diminished.

Christian IV’s orders spread swiftly through the capital. The citizens of Copenhagen, terrified by tales of the horrors inflicted upon German civilians, were quickly mobilized. By midnight, over six thousand militia had been recruited. Though untrained for hard battles, with minimal training and guidance from regular soldiers, they could still serve as a second line of defense in the event the harbor fell, engaging the Swedes in street-to-street combat.

The night passed uneventfully. By morning, Olaf’s assault suddenly intensified.

Throughout the night, only sporadic cannon fire had harassed the defenses, but at dawn, a relentless barrage targeted the harbor’s fortifications. Though the Danes attempted to retaliate, without naval support, their mere dozen cannons were no match. Within an hour, the easternmost battery collapsed under Olaf’s relentless fire, its cannons destroyed, marking its fall.

The loss of the eastern battery signaled the imminent fall of the harbor. Wallenstein, leading Half, was the first to land. He then commanded his prized three thousand Bohemian cavalry in a swift advance along the coast, bypassing the harbor and charging toward the Copenhagen defenders setting up barricades and traps on the main streets.

Bang! Bang!

The musketeer formations were now in place. A cavalry charge across open ground into prepared fire was suicide. Wallenstein’s cavalry did not engage within the musketeers’ range but instead circled before seizing a nearby warehouse. Inside, they set up light cannons—several nine-pounders—quickly firing upon the defending troops.

The Copenhagen defenders were seasoned veterans of the German campaigns. They quickly located the cannon positions and returned fire, but Wallenstein had no intention of engaging in a static artillery duel. After the first volley, he ordered his men to relocate to another lumber yard, repeating the process.

After three or four such maneuvers, the Danish defenders suffered minimal casualties but were constantly outmaneuvered, scrambling to adjust their cannon aim in response to the incoming fire.

As the enemy’s cannonade persisted, the barrage showing no sign of weakening—even increasing slightly—the unseen enemy filled the Danish defenders with growing dread.

They recalled the helplessness they had felt on the German battlefields against the Catholic League’s Czech legions. The cavalry before them fought in the same underhanded, vicious style—like hounds nipping at their heels, impossible to ignore, yet always dictating the flow of battle.

Chapter 342: Breaching Copenhagen

Wallenstein personally led the Czech cavalry unit, quickly shaking the morale of the Danish defenders guarding the streets leading into the city.

Sensing the timing was right, Wallenstein waved his hand and ordered the cavalry colonel beside him, “Take a thousand men immediately and engage in hit-and-run tactics, coordinating with the artillery to try and break the Danish defenders.”

The cavalry colonel acknowledged the order from horseback and led a unit of cavalry out from the open space behind the supply depot. Soon after, the sound of gunfire echoed—some from the Czech cavalry, but mostly from the Danish defenders.

The smoothbore muskets had short range and poor accuracy, but the Czech cavalry were experts with pistols. Relying on their superb horsemanship, they lured the Danish musketeers to fire at the edge of their range, then dodged and charged in during the reloading process before retreating.

After several rounds, the Danish defenders suffered heavy losses, with over a hundred dead or wounded, while the Czech cavalry only lost four or five unlucky riders.

Wallenstein received the report from the front and was delighted. He said to Half, “First, we use the artillery to harass the Danes, making them restless and disrupting their formation. Then…” He trailed off, asking, “Do you understand?”

Half replied in a deep voice, “Understood, Your Grace.”

“Good, follow me. We’ll lead the remaining thousand soldiers to join them and launch a charge!”

With that, Wallenstein kicked his horse’s flanks and charged forward.

Haldor and the cavalry hurried after him. Soon, with the sound of whistles, all the cavalry regrouped around Wallenstein. Their three thousand riders formed two surging waves, charging toward the Danish defenders at the street entrance from both sides.

Bang! Bang!

As they entered firing range, smoke and gunfire filled the air like a thick fog.

When the mist cleared, Wallenstein and Half had already led the cavalry charge to the Danish lines. The caltrops and traps had been mostly destroyed by cannon fire, allowing the Czech cavalry to charge without hindrance.

In the exchange of fire, the Czech cavalry paid the price of over a hundred men, but the remaining riders still pierced through the Danish ranks like a sharp blade before they could fire a second volley.

Long spears, driven by the momentum of the charging horses, instantly skewered Danish soldiers. Even those clad in iron armor were sent flying, blood gushing from their mouths as they collapsed lifelessly.

Half, as Wallenstein’s personal guard and student, protected his master at the forefront. The two of them wielded their spears and flails, cutting down Danish soldiers one after another.

Though this was Half’s first time on the battlefield, after the battles at Gothenburg and Tre Kroner Fort, he had already slain over a dozen Danish soldiers with his own hands.

Compared to the previous year, Half had transformed from the inside out. He had grown rapidly, not only in martial skill but also in his throwing axe and javelin techniques. After charging into the streets, he killed eight Danish soldiers in a short burst and hurled four throwing axes, felling two more.

Wallenstein was pleased with Half’s performance. With a swing of his flail, he crushed a Danish soldier’s skull, panting as he shouted, “Well done, Half!”

The three thousand Danish defenders faced three thousand Czech cavalry, especially under Wallenstein’s leadership. After holding out for over half an hour, they were defeated.

Wallenstein’s cavalry surged into the streets, slaughtering Danish soldiers. Though some brave defenders still managed to kill mounted Czechs, overall, the Danish ranks had been shattered by the cavalry, and their annihilation was only a matter of time.

To counter the Swedish warships’ attacks and soldier landings, the defenders in the docks’ blockhouses and watchtowers could only watch as the three thousand cavalry roared past, charging into the streets behind the docks.

With the collapse of the street defenders, the docks’ defenses also suddenly weakened.

Olaf knew the Danish soldiers’ morale was low, and they seemed to have accepted defeat. He ordered the warships to continue bombarding the two crumbling gun emplacements and blockhouses while demanding all transport ships dock and disembark troops to attack Copenhagen’s city center from the rear.

The Swedish forces were excited, their fists clenched as they gazed at the distant city like a mountain of gold and silver.

After landing, the soldiers formed long columns and swiftly poured into the streets. By now, the first major street had been breached by Wallenstein’s cavalry, who were pursuing the militia in the back alleys. The follow-up infantry then charged into the streets, slaughtering Danish soldiers and civilians in groups of three or five. Some even raided shops for money, and a catastrophe had begun in the streets near the docks.

Half an hour later, the shouts and gunfire in the Danish city center rose and fell like a tidal wave, clearly indicating the fierce struggle between the Swedish soldiers and Danish defenders.

An hour later, the shouts and cannon fire gradually shifted toward the northern part of the city. Meanwhile, several streets in the city center were engulfed in flames and black smoke, which seemed to grow larger and more numerous.

An hour and a half later, it was already noon, but under the scorching sun, Copenhagen resembled a volcano erupting, with flames and smoke everywhere.

Olaf stood at the bow of his ship, watching the devastation of Copenhagen from afar. He sneered, “Christian, I wonder how you’re feeling now? Do you regret attacking Iceland? But even if you do, it’s too late…”

Two hours later, the shouts in Copenhagen’s city center gradually subsided, and the gunfire moved to the northernmost part of the city, with the frequency of shots decreasing.

The flames in the city center were not only where the Swedish forces had passed but also in other areas. Standing in the newly captured blockhouse, Olaf watched as Copenhagen transformed from a prosperous city into ruins. He sighed, guessing that the other fires were likely Danish citizens taking advantage of the chaos to loot and burn.

…

Two hours later, Olaf led five hundred Icelandic guards, riding tall reindeer, into Copenhagen’s streets.

Everywhere he passed, Olaf saw devastation—swords, armor, blood, and corpses littered the streets. Every shop had its doors kicked in, the interiors in disarray, and many bodies lay inside, some of them women, naked.

Olaf’s expression darkened, but he could do nothing about it.

In this expedition, Olaf had brought over ten thousand troops, but only five hundred were Icelandic Viking soldiers serving as his personal guards. The remaining ten thousand were Saxon and Prussian soldiers, along with a cavalry unit nominally from the Duchy of Magdeburg but actually Bohemian mercenaries.

The great European war between Protestants and Catholics had ended just over a year ago, and the German regions had been ravaged by both factions’ armies. Looting, rape, murder, and arson were standard operations for European soldiers at the time.

Olaf understood the saying: “Bandits pass like a comb, soldiers pass like a fine-toothed comb.” Even in the Ming Dynasty, representing the pinnacle of Eastern civilization at the time, aside from the Qi family army, few soldiers could refrain from looting for three days after capturing a city.

Though he was uncomfortable with it, Olaf knew his soldiers were not as disciplined as the Icelandic Vikings or the Vinland slave soldiers. They couldn’t be expected to follow his every command. If these Germans and Czechs wanted to loot, he wouldn’t stop them—doing so would make him their enemy. But since the victims were his enemies, the harsher Denmark was treated, the less of a threat it would pose to Iceland in the future.

Olaf shook his head, not dwelling on it further, and urged his reindeer forward.

Chapter 343: The Siege of Rosenborg Palace

Olaf’s ten thousand troops were all elite soldiers. The forces within Copenhagen were insufficient, and even at full strength, they could only muster a little over twenty thousand men, with fewer than six thousand being elite. Initially, they had attempted to wear down the Swedish soldiers through street battles.

However, with Wallenstein’s iron cavalry leading the charge, the militia stood no chance. After suffering heavy casualties, Christian IV ordered all soldiers to retreat to Rosenborg Palace, preparing to rely on the palace fortress for defense. He also dispatched messengers to request British military aid and awaited the arrival of reinforcements from Norway and Jutland to protect the king.

With Wallenstein’s iron cavalry leading the way and thousands of elite soldiers following to clear the path, the Swedish army swept through the streets like a swarm of locusts. Not only were the Danish militia completely wiped out, but any Danish citizens who dared to resist were also killed. Valuables and goods were looted, and anything that couldn’t be taken was burned along with the houses.

When Olaf arrived at the square in front of Rosenborg Palace with his Viking guards, he found Wallenstein, William, and Albert’s son, Albat, waiting for him on horseback. Over ten thousand soldiers had surrounded the entire southern gate of Rosenborg. The soldiers and officers were all carrying large and small bundles, the weight of which suggested that each soldier had struck it rich.

“Marshal, our soldiers are very brave. They have captured more than a dozen Danish officials and over twenty officers. From their mouths, we have learned that Christian IV is inside the palace, and there are only a little over ten thousand people in the palace, more than half of whom are militia. Should we attack the palace?”

Wallenstein and the others were very excited. They rode their horses to welcome Olaf and asked.

Capturing the monarch of another country was a great achievement, and Olaf was also very tempted. He asked, “Your Grace, how long do you think it will take us to capture the palace?”

“There are no cannons deployed inside Rosenborg Palace. Although the Danish soldiers brought a few cannons when they retreated just now, they still do not pose a significant threat.”

Wallenstein smiled and said, “Three… two hours should be enough to break the city!”

Olaf’s heart raced. Although he felt that this smooth progress was somewhat unbelievable, given Denmark’s years of heavy losses, it was understandable that they couldn’t hold out when their home was under attack. He clenched his fist and said, “Do it! Men, attack the city immediately. Christian IV must be captured alive!”

“Yes, General!”

Ten minutes later, over nine thousand Swedish soldiers began to advance their formation. At the same time, the cannons were adjusted and continuously fired at the palace gate. After three rounds of firing, the gate of Rosenborg Palace was reduced to splinters. Then, Wallenstein’s Bohemian cavalry instantly accelerated and charged towards the palace gate.

Danish soldiers suddenly appeared on the palace walls, shooting at the cavalry with their firearms and bows and arrows.

“Bang…”

As the smoke cleared, more than seventy unfortunate souls were either dead or injured, falling from their horses. However, more cavalry continued to charge forward, undeterred by the bullets and arrows.

The second and third rounds of firing from the Danish musketeers followed, and the number of Bohemian cavalry falling from their horses in the latter two rounds was significantly higher than the first.

But as a battle-hardened Czech cavalry unit, knowing that there were endless treasures inside the palace, the cavalry charged forward relentlessly. Finally, like a sharp knife piercing through the gate, they cut down and knocked away the Danish soldiers, killing their way into the palace.

“Kill!”

Seeing the Czech cavalry vanguard charge into the palace, the other soldiers couldn’t wait to accelerate their mad dash, shouting as they ran. Although most of them were shouting words like “kill” and “charge,” Olaf faintly heard something else in their voices:

“We need to hurry, don’t let those Czech dogs get ahead of us…”

“I want to be the first to grab Christian IV’s golden crown…”

“The palace is full of treasures, we can’t let the Bohemian bandits get ahead of us…”

Olaf’s expression was strange, as if he was holding back a laugh. In his eyes, this was not a great battle but a looters’ feast. He had the clearest understanding of the German elite’s character.

Previously, when Olaf and Haldor participated in the Thirty Years’ War, following Gustavus Adolphus II to attack Leipzig, there was no looting. Now, reflecting on it, it wasn’t because the soldiers were of high quality, but because towns in Leipzig or other German regions had been plundered countless times during the decade-long war. Swedish soldiers naturally had no interest in tearing down walls and digging up the ground.

But Copenhagen was different. This prosperous city and Rosenborg Palace, which surely held treasures, were tempting to any soldier. Even the Icelandic Viking Raid wouldn’t behave much better.

Olaf sat on Haysen’s back, quietly watching as Rosenborg Palace was gradually captured in the fierce battle. He watched as the cavalry that had entered the city were driven back out, and then circled around to accelerate and charge back in.

He watched as the soldiers followed the cavalry into the city, and as one Swedish warrior after another was shot dead by Danish musketeers on the way into the city. But the soldiers beside them were still full of fighting spirit, charging forward at full speed.

He watched as Swedish soldiers gradually killed their way into the city, and the shouts and gunfire inside the city gradually weakened.

Until finally, he saw the Danish royal flag on the city wall being cut down and a Swedish national flag being shakily raised.

Only then did Olaf laugh heartily and say to Wallenstein, William, Albat, and Halik beside him, “The city has fallen.”

Everyone had a smile on their faces, and then Olaf took the lead, bringing them into the palace.

“How is the battle situation?”

After entering the city, Wallenstein asked the cavalry colonel who came to meet them.

“Marshal, Your Grace, the defenders inside the palace have been either killed or captured. However, Christian IV and the royal guards are holed up in the castle in the rear palace, refusing to come out. The entrance is too narrow to attack quickly. We need to bring in the cannons!”

Wallenstein looked at Olaf and then said, “Go and bring in a few light cannons from outside the city. That should be enough.”

“Yes, sir.”

The cavalry quickly left, and Olaf smiled slightly, saying, “A cornered beast’s struggle is nothing to fear.”

“Marshal, your description is really too apt.”

Wallenstein smiled slightly and then said, “I wonder how His Majesty will reward us for such a great achievement?”

Although William was young, he was very sensitive. He frowned and said, “I don’t know what the situation is with Prime Minister Oxenstierna. If they are defeated by the Danish navy, it would be too dangerous for us to be deep in enemy territory!”

Wallenstein chuckled and said, “William, what you’re thinking, Olaf and I have already considered. As long as we have Christian IV and the Danish nobles and ministers in our hands, even if the Danish navy wins and returns, would they dare to take action against us?”

“This…”

William’s expression changed, and he nodded excitedly, saying, “Yes! As long as we have Christian IV, we are invincible!”

Albat chimed in, “Then what we need to worry about is whether Oxenstierna defeats the Danish navy and then comes to claim the credit.”

“Haha…”

They all laughed heartily, but as soon as the laughter subsided, a guard from the docks came galloping on horseback, shouting, “Marshal, Prime Minister Oxenstierna has led the fleet into the port and is now disembarking. He will bring troops to assist in the battle immediately!”

Chapter 344: Denmark’s Humiliation

What a coincidence?

The thought flashed through several minds, and they all turned to Albat. His face flushed slightly, silently regretting his ill-omened words, unsure if he had somehow offended Lord Olaf.

Olaf paused for a moment, then chuckled, “The glory-seekers have arrived, lads.”

Wallenstein frowned. “They came quickly. It seems the Danish navy has been annihilated. Should we wait for them?”

“Wait for what?”

Olaf scoffed coldly. “Order the full assault. Spare no cost to seize the inner fortress before Oxenstierna arrives. Capture Christian IV!”

Wallenstein took command and personally led the troops into battle. After two rounds of cannon fire, the gates were breached, and the defenders suffered heavy casualties.

With a grand gesture, Wallenstein signaled the Bohemian dismounted cavalry to charge into the inner fortress. In less than ten minutes, they dragged out a plump, middle-aged man. Wallenstein had seen Christian IV from afar on the German battlefields. Upon closer inspection, he smirked, “Your Majesty, King Christian IV of Denmark, long time no see.”

Christian IV had lost his usual composure. His crown had been snatched by a Czech soldier, his beard and hair were disheveled, and his royal garments were torn to shreds. Yet, his eyes burned with fury. He glared at Wallenstein and cursed, “Damned Czech! You betrayed the Habsburgs to become Sweden’s lapdog, and now you dare ambush my Denmark! My people will avenge me!”

Wallenstein merely smiled and waved his hand. “Take our king away to rest.”

The soldiers quickly escorted Christian IV away, followed by the rest of the royal family—two young princesses, a young prince, and the queen.

In Wallenstein’s eyes, none of them mattered except for the handsome young man protecting the princesses.

This was Prince Frederick, Christian IV’s heir, aged twenty-five. Earlier that spring, Christian IV had appointed Frederick as the overseer of the Bremen diocese to expand Denmark’s influence through the Lutheran Church. However, he had been captured before taking office.

Now, the only remaining member of the Danish royal family was Prince Christian, who had been serving as both bishop and tax supervisor in the Holstein Duchy since last autumn. The rest had all been captured by Olaf in one fell swoop.

By the time Oxenstierna arrived at Rosenborg Palace with his troops, the battle was already over, and Christian IV’s entire family had been “protected” by Olaf.

Oxenstierna trembled with rage. After a heated argument with Olaf, he accused Olaf of knowing the Danish navy was under attack yet refusing to send reinforcements. Olaf simply denied any knowledge, and the two parted on bad terms.

Olaf’s army entered the city first, even storming Rosenborg Palace. Every soldier struck it rich, but Oxenstierna’s forces had suffered heavy losses, all for the sake of looting the city.

Driven by resentment and friction, the two armies soon clashed, resulting in dozens of deaths on both sides.

Olaf and Oxenstierna first ordered their troops to stand down, then met to discuss the situation.

Olaf’s men were so wealthy that even their burps and farts reeked of gold and silver. Oxenstierna, as the supreme commander, ordered Olaf to withdraw his troops from Rosenborg Palace and the city, relocating them to the docks.

Olaf knew Oxenstierna’s forces had missed out on the spoils and needed to plunder some wealth. Not wanting to escalate the conflict, and since his own soldiers were already rich, he agreed.

Following Olaf’s command, the troops reluctantly withdrew from the ravaged Rosenborg Palace, forming a square formation as they left the city and set up camp at the docks’ fortifications.

After Olaf’s departure, Oxenstierna’s forces eagerly stormed the palace and the mansions of Copenhagen’s nobles, ministers, and wealthy merchants. Like ravenous wolves, they pillaged wealth, violated women, and committed arson and murder.

The battle reports from Olaf and Oxenstierna were sent out just as the citizens of Copenhagen endured a second wave of atrocities.

In the following days, Olaf and Wallenstein remained at the docks, meeting daily with one or two Danish royal prisoners and central ministers to gauge their psychological state and gather intelligence on Denmark’s current affairs.

Meanwhile, Oxenstierna’s forces continued their rampage through Copenhagen for three full days. During this time, Oxenstierna sent messengers to demand the Danish royal family, but Olaf repeatedly brushed them off.

Oxenstierna knew his forces had been weakened after the battle in The Sound. He had abandoned half his troops to hasten his arrival, leaving him unable to overpower Olaf. Thus, he ceased his demands.

After three days, a messenger from Stockholm finally arrived.

Gustavus Adolphus II was delighted by the victories of Olaf and Oxenstierna, though their reports differed significantly. Oxenstierna even included a postscript accusing Olaf of failing to aid his allies in battle, embezzling captured wealth, and dishonoring the Danish royal family, among other grave offenses.

However, upon seeing the emperor’s envoy sent to deliver orders and reward the troops, Oxenstierna’s heart sank. He realized Olaf was highly favored, and without concrete evidence of his crimes, he could not bring him down.

Per Brahe, a soldier Gustavus Adolphus II had taken notice of during the war against Poland, had been promoted several times. By the time Gustavus Adolphus II led the Protestant League south, Brahe had become a privy council advisor.

Though Oxenstierna was the chancellor of the privy council, he had never been able to control Per Brahe.

This young man was Gustavus Adolphus II’s trusted confidant, representing the emperor’s true intentions. He was a lone minister deeply embedded in the emperor’s heart.

Seeing that it was Per Brahe who had come, Oxenstierna knew the emperor had no intention of punishing Olaf.

Indeed, Oxenstierna’s suspicions were correct.

Per Brahe, in his early thirties and at the peak of his vigor, arrived at the front with the emperor’s commendations and rewards for Oxenstierna and Olaf—gold, silver, wine, and more.

After the welcoming ceremony, Brahe addressed Oxenstierna and Olaf, “Gentlemen, before I came, His Majesty instructed that King Christian IV and all the princes should be exiled to Iceland as per Olaf’s suggestion. He also ordered the Danish ministers to retrieve Prince Christian, Christian IV’s ninth child, from the Holstein Duchy to ascend the throne. Since the prince is young, he will be easier to control.”

Oxenstierna’s heart raced, his expression darkening. In the past, the emperor had always consulted him on such matters. Now, he had made decisions with Olaf without even asking for his opinion. This made Oxenstierna furious, feeling a deep sense of betrayal.

He glanced at Olaf, thinking to himself: Olaf refused to hand over Christian IV to me. It seems he had planned to put Prince Christian on the throne from the beginning. Isn’t Prince Christian still under sixteen? Installing him as king would indeed eliminate any fear of Danish retaliation…

Olaf’s plan was sound, but he should have at least consulted me. After all, I am the supreme commander of the Copenhagen campaign! The emperor trusts him so much… This upstart must be eliminated. If I let him grow any stronger, he might even take my position…

Chapter 345: Establishing a Child Emperor for Denmark

The appendix to Oxenstierna’s battle report to Gustavus Adolphus II was an impeachment letter against Olaf.

Olaf’s battle report to Gustavus Adolphus II also included a letter, but its contents suggested exiling Christian IV’s family to Iceland and selecting Danish ministers and nobles who feared Sweden and were willing to cooperate. These individuals would then support Prince Christian’s ascension to the throne.

Olaf’s proposal was that since Copenhagen had been breached and Christian IV captured, Denmark had been thoroughly offended. Gustavus Adolphus II, with his health failing and his heir still young, could not guarantee that Christian IV would not cause trouble in the future, given his unyielding ambition to dominate.

To completely subdue Denmark, they must seize the opportunity of occupying Copenhagen to capture Christian IV and his heirs, then support Christian IV’s youngest son in taking the throne. This would eliminate Denmark as a threat.

To prevent Christian IV from rallying support and potentially returning, Olaf suggested exiling him to Iceland under house arrest.

After defeating the Habsburgs, Gustavus Adolphus II’s status in Europe had soared. With his health deteriorating, he had no more reservations and directly approved Olaf’s proposal, instructing Per Brahe to convey his decision.

Olaf was greatly pleased upon hearing this. He thought to himself: If Gustavus Adolphus II were in good health, he would never be so eager to take Denmark, nor would he risk angering the European monarchs by capturing and exiling Christian IV. But since he had agreed, Olaf could leverage the situation. The benefits for Iceland in the future would be immeasurable. He needed to accelerate his actions…

As the Swedish army’s pillaging and plundering in Denmark neared its end, Per Brahe, the envoy of Gustavus Adolphus II, arrived in Copenhagen. He first halted the Swedish army’s atrocities and rewarded the meritorious soldiers.

The next day, Per Brahe, representing the Great Emperor of Sweden, Gustavus Adolphus II, issued an edict stating that Sweden had no intention of annexing Denmark. It was merely seeking revenge for the Battle of Kalmar over twenty years ago. Christian IV, disregarding the shared heritage of Denmark and Sweden, had wantonly caused slaughter and devastation in Kalmar, Gothenburg, and other former Swedish territories. The people of these regions, unable to bear the suffering, had pleaded with the Swedish royal army for salvation. Thus, this was not a war of aggression but a counterattack to reclaim lost lands.

The first half of the edict explained the justification and purpose of Sweden’s war, while the second part clarified that the Swedish army would gradually withdraw within three months and assist Denmark in recovery and reconstruction.

Christian IV was portrayed as an ambitious villain who had provoked Sweden’s invasion. Additionally, Danish ministers and merchants who were willing to cooperate, after paying a certain ransom, were released by Olaf and Oxenstierna. Under their guidance, Copenhagen and the Zealand region began spreading rumors of King Christian IV’s debauchery and warmongering. Most people accepted that it was Christian IV’s misdeeds that had led to Sweden’s counterattack and Denmark’s tragic defeat.

After more than ten days, the messengers Olaf and Oxenstierna had sent to various parts of Denmark returned with news. The reactions to the fall of Copenhagen and the capture of Christian IV varied across Denmark.

Norway and the other islands were recruiting soldiers to come to the rescue. However, last week, the Viking Raid suddenly attacked Trondheim. Since Norway had just withdrawn the garrison from Trondheim, the defensive forces were severely insufficient, and Trondheim fell within three days. Moreover, the Viking Raid, after capturing Trondheim, was not satisfied and continued to attack cities and seize territories under the banner of punishing the tyrannical and incompetent ruler Christian IV and avenging Sweden. By the time the scouts returned the day before yesterday, they had already occupied more than a province’s worth of land, nearly cutting Norway in half.

With the ancient capital and the hub managing the northern region occupied, it was like stirring a hornet’s nest. The Norwegian army, which had just left the Christiania (now Oslo) harbor, was hastily recalled, and the matter of rescuing the Danish king was forgotten. They hurried to Trondheim to attack the Viking Raid.

Norway was one of the largest regions outside the Zealand region of Denmark. With the Norwegian army’s withdrawal and the Jutland Peninsula not yet recovered enough to recruit many soldiers, only five or six thousand militiamen came to the king’s aid.

They were intercepted at The Sound. Per Brahe, representing the Great Emperor of Sweden, Gustavus Adolphus II, issued an edict that was also shown to the Danish relief army at The Sound.

Knowing they could not defeat the Swedish army, the relief army obediently returned with the edict.

A few days later, upon hearing the news, countries like England, France, Spain, and Holland all sent envoys. Some came to question Sweden’s attack on Denmark, while others sought mediation. Among them, England’s attitude was the most intense.

Per Brahe, Oxenstierna, and Olaf warmly and politely received the envoys and stated that their goal was merely to reclaim lost territories and punish Denmark.

Although the countries disapproved of Sweden’s actions, Christian IV had indeed initiated the war and captured Swedish cities twenty-two years ago. Now that Sweden had become an empire, seeking revenge was justified and understandable.

England and France did not want to see a unified Nordic region, so Sweden’s promise not to annex Denmark satisfied all the countries.

However, when the British envoy expressed hope that Sweden would release Christian IV according to convention, Olaf stated that Christian IV, after his defeat, had sincerely repented for his past wrongdoings.

Upon learning that his colonial rule over Iceland had caused significant psychological trauma to the Icelandic people, this benevolent king had requested the Danish parliament to approve his abdication. Three days ago, he had set sail for Iceland to visit the Icelandic people, intending to reside there and help them recover from the wounds of colonization.

Olaf’s words could only deceive ghosts; none of the envoys believed him. However, seeing the Danish parliament’s approval of the king’s abdication and the orderly governance of Copenhagen and the Danish privy council under Swedish military rule, all the envoys understood that deposing Christian IV was the will of Gustavus Adolphus II and also the desire of the Danish nobles and ministers.

No one delved into the deeper reasons. Perhaps Christian IV was truly unpopular, or even if he were popular, the occupying Swedish forces would have turned the people against him.

In any case, it was just another instance of the familiar European drama of deposing and establishing rulers. Upon learning that the new Danish king, Prince Christian, was on his way to the throne, the envoys accepted the situation.

For the European countries, given Sweden’s current prestige and strength, as long as they did not execute Christian IV or annex Denmark, other actions, even if slightly taboo, were acceptable.

Thus, after waiting for two days, Prince Christian, surrounded by Danish army generals, the newly appointed Marshal of the Navy, the Prime Minister, and other high-ranking officials, arrived in Copenhagen, where he was loyal.

The two Swedish commanders did not appear, but Brahe, as the Swedish envoy, along with the envoys from various countries, welcomed the new king of Denmark.

That afternoon, in the newly renovated but still somewhat dilapidated Rosenborg Palace in Copenhagen, the court preacher of the Danish Lutheran Church, Mynster, personally placed the crown on Prince Christian and, on behalf of the Lord, declared Prince Christian as the king of the Denmark-Norway Union, with the regnal name Christian I.

As Christian IV was being escorted by Halik to Iceland, Denmark had already welcomed its new king, awaiting the dawn of a new era.

Chapter 346: The Treaty of Copenhagen

All of King Christian IV of Denmark’s legitimate heirs had been sent to Iceland by Olaf, leaving only Prince Christian as the eligible successor within Denmark and across Europe. The dozens of illegitimate children were effectively non-existent in the line of succession.

Under Sweden’s orchestration, Prince Christian, who had been residing in the Duchy of Holstein, was brought to Copenhagen to inherit the throne.

Denmark thus entered the era of King Christian I, swiftly advancing to the peace negotiations that Sweden, Iceland, and other nations were most eager to witness.

On May 2nd, 1635, Olaf, Brahe, and Oxenstierna arrived at Rosenborg Palace in full military regalia, where they met King Christian I.

King Christian seemed intimidated by the trio, hastily rising to greet them. “Welcome, esteemed guests. Today, we sign this treaty to bring peace back to Scandinavia.”

Oxenstierna smiled. “Your Majesty is a benevolent ruler. Sweden and Denmark share the same blood and lineage; naturally, we all yearn for peace.”

After a brief exchange, they took their seats. Brahe then produced a treaty—the terms of which had been agreed upon by him, Olaf, and Oxenstierna days prior and had already been discussed with King Christian and the Danish ministers.

King Christian took the treaty from an attendant, skimmed through it, and, seeing no changes, sighed in relief. He looked around at his ministers and asked, “Have you all reviewed it? If there are no objections, let the Chancellor sign it.”

Since the terms had been privately negotiated and the Swedish army still occupied Copenhagen, the ministers feared refusal would lead to dire consequences. Moreover, the conditions set by Sweden were not deemed entirely unreasonable.

After the Chancellor and the other ministers reviewed the document and raised no objections, he took up the quill, signed his name with a flourish, then clenched his fist, dipped his ring in ink, and pressed it onto the paper. Finally, he handed a copy of the treaty to Brahe.

The Treaty of Copenhagen, signed between Sweden and Denmark, contained the following terms:

Article 1: Denmark unconditionally returns and acknowledges Gotland, Gothenburg, Kalmar, and related regions as Swedish territory.

Article 2: Denmark unconditionally cedes Saaremaa Island, Bornholm Island, Halland Province, Scania Province, Blekinge Province, and Bohuslän Province to Sweden.

Article 3: Denmark unconditionally cedes the Trondheim region and Trøndelag Province in Norway to Sweden, to be administered by the Icelandic Duchy.

Article 4: Denmark joins the Swedish alliance and must provide troops to Sweden in its external wars, attacking any nation hostile to Sweden.

Article 5: Denmark guarantees free passage for all Swedish imperial ships through The Sound and prohibits passage for ships of nations hostile to Sweden.

Article 6: Denmark compensates Sweden for the costs of the occupying army.

Article 7: Given King Christian’s youth and inexperience, to better learn statecraft and become a wise ruler, he shall travel to Stockholm to pay homage to Gustavus Adolphus II and establish a godfather-godson relationship.

…

The Treaty of Copenhagen consisted of ten articles, but the core was these seven. Article 3 was something Olaf had fiercely advocated for, while Article 5 benefited everyone involved.

A few days prior, the battle between Norway and Iceland over Trondheim had concluded, with the Viking Legion securing control over Trondheim and the entire eastern Trøndelag Province.

Upon learning of this strategic victory, Olaf realized that not only had they occupied Trondheim, effectively splitting Norway in half, but they had also expanded their gains, pushing their control to the very borders of Sweden. There was no way he would relinquish these territories.

Thus, he insisted on including the clause: “Denmark unconditionally cedes the Trondheim region and Trøndelag Province in Norway to the Icelandic Duchy.” This move drew severe displeasure from Oxenstierna.

However, Olaf paid little mind to the soon-to-be former Chancellor Oxenstierna. He believed that while these lands were nominally part of the Swedish Empire, their actual control lay with the Icelandic Duchy—meaning they were effectively Iceland’s.

With Norwegian territory as a foothold and springboard, Iceland’s influence would grow significantly. Moreover, with Norway divided, the sparsely populated northern region would eventually fall into Iceland’s hands.

Olaf felt that although Sweden had gained the most from this war, Iceland had secured the most substantial benefits. Even Prince Christian, who had no prior claim to the throne, had ascended to his long-desired position. The only ones who truly suffered were the deposed King Christian IV and the common citizens of Copenhagen—though the nobles signing the treaty had long forgotten their plight.

After the Treaty of Copenhagen was signed, envoys from various nations were immediately informed of its contents, sparking an uproar.

Territorial cessions and reparations were expected, and while the envoys found Sweden’s demands excessive, they attributed it to the ambitions of Gustavus Adolphus II, the Lion of the North.

However, the clause requiring King Christian to recognize Gustavus Adolphus II as his godfather was unprecedented. The envoys were stunned, viewing it as a humiliation of Denmark.

Though Gustavus Adolphus II was of appropriate age and shared the same faith as King Christian, such an arrangement could have been handled privately. Why include it in the treaty? Was this not a public humiliation, forcing Denmark to acknowledge Sweden as its superior?

Given that this treaty differed significantly from the Peace of Prague and deviated from Gustavus Adolphus II’s previous negotiations with the Habsburgs, Poland, and Russia—and considering the widespread knowledge of the king’s ongoing illness—the envoys deduced that the treaty had been drafted by a high-ranking Swedish official occupying Denmark.

Only three individuals in Sweden held such authority: Chancellor Oxenstierna, a well-known diplomat unlikely to be so crude; Brahe and Olaf, both rising stars promoted by Gustavus Adolphus II, eager to prove themselves and possibly prone to hasty, disrespectful actions.

Upon investigation, the envoys easily discovered that the primary architect of the treaty was Count Olaf.

Recalling his exploits on the German battlefields and his origins as a leader of Iceland’s independence movement, the envoys frowned, muttering under their breaths, “Rude, barbaric northern savage! A country bumpkin!”

Once they confirmed that this was Olaf’s doing—not an intentional breach of protocol by Gustavus Adolphus II—the envoys were relieved. After all, unpredictable actions were always unsettling.

But Olaf was merely the son of a chieftain from a backward, desolate land. It was understandable for such a barbarian to act barbarically.

After thanking Oxenstierna for leaking the information, the envoys criticized Olaf’s rudeness before returning to their respective countries to report.

However, the Duke of Buckingham, George Villiers, remained behind. He had been entrusted with two tasks by the English king: first, to facilitate peace between Denmark and Sweden and secure the release of Christian IV—a task now half-completed, though sufficient for a report.

The second task was more pressing. The English king, foreseeing Denmark’s defeat and the inevitable territorial and financial concessions, feared that the loans extended to Christian IV would never be repaid. Thus, he urged George Villiers to seize the opportunity while Swedish forces were still stationed in Denmark to forge an alliance with Sweden and pressure Denmark into repaying its debts with interest.

Chapter 347: I Become Denmark’s Creditor

Three years ago, Charles I had lent Christian IV one million five hundred thousand shillings, but with an annual interest rate of twenty percent. The first year’s interest had been deducted upfront when the loan was disbursed.

Thus, Christian IV had only received one million two hundred thousand shillings in hand. Over the years, he had repaid more than half, leaving a remaining balance of over five hundred thousand shillings in principal and interest.

Originally, Charles I had not been concerned about Denmark’s ability to repay. Even though Christian IV was reckless with military spending and drowning in debt, as long as the Sound remained a cash cow, Denmark could always recover, no matter how battered.

But upon hearing news of Sweden’s attack on Copenhagen, Charles I began to worry—not out of familial concern for his uncle Christian IV, but purely about whether Denmark would have the funds to repay his loan if defeated.

When Denmark’s request for military aid arrived, Charles I ignored it outright and instead dispatched George Villiers to Copenhagen, instructing him to broker peace between Denmark and Sweden. This way, he could claim favor from Christian IV and demand prompt repayment.

Before George Villiers departed, Charles I had quietly instructed him that if Denmark were defeated, it would likely have to cede territory and pay reparations, leaving little chance of repaying the loan. Therefore, he urged Villiers to seize the opportunity, offering incentives to Sweden’s representatives to pressure Denmark into using the Sound’s tax revenues to settle the remaining debt.

When faced with money and self-interest, familial bonds often weigh less than a single copper coin.

The Duke of Buckingham, George Villiers, was well aware that Denmark’s days were numbered. Reflecting on how the once-dominant power of Northern Europe had been reduced to a puppet state, he sent a servant to request an audience with Olaf.

That afternoon, the Duke of Villiers rode to a shabby military camp near the docks. It appeared to have once been a storage yard and warehouse, but now it was clearly occupied by Olaf’s personal guards as their barracks.

As Villiers surveyed Olaf’s guards, a swarthy, black-haired, black-eyed man with a rough appearance approached and spoke in broken Danish: “The master asks you to come over.”

Recalling certain rumors, Villiers smiled and asked, “Are you a yellow Viking from the Icelandic Duchy?”

The ugly man replied in a deep voice, “I’m called Stu. I don’t understand much. Please, come this way.”

George Villiers raised an eyebrow, then nodded with a smile and followed Stu into the innermost warehouse.

Olaf saw his personal guard Stu bringing in an elderly English gentleman and quickly rose to greet him, saying, “Your Grace, Duke George Villiers, welcome!”

This Duke of Buckingham, George Villiers, shared the same name as the old duke, but he was even more favored than his father, serving as Charles I’s most trusted confidant.

Later, Cromwell, representing the Puritans, rebelled under the pretext of purging the king’s corrupt advisors, targeting the younger George Villiers. After gaining power, he took control of London and had Charles I beheaded.

However, when Charles I was executed, George Villiers had already escorted Charles II to Holland. It was only after Cromwell’s death and the failure of his son to maintain control that Villiers returned to London with the restored monarchy.

Olaf, who had never wished well for the Anglo-Saxons, smiled and shook hands with Villiers, secretly pondering whether he should find an opportunity to help Cromwell eliminate him early.

Villiers inexplicably shivered, then said to Olaf, “Lord Olaf, I have come to make a request…”

Hearing Villiers’ words, Olaf sneered, “Your Grace, didn’t you already seek out Oxenstierna and Brahe? Why come to me?”

Villiers showed no embarrassment and smiled, “Indeed, I did consult them, but they were unable to facilitate this matter. They mentioned that you, Your Grace, are daring and decisive, and the most trusted general of the late King Gustavus Adolphus. Therefore, I have come to seek your assistance. If you can help broker this deal, I can offer you a ten percent share as compensation.”

Olaf laughed and said, “Let’s not rush about the money. I’ve heard that His Majesty Charles is at war with the Scottish rebels. How is the situation?”

Villiers smiled and replied, “You are well-informed. The Scottish rebels are no real threat; they have already been contained. The remaining scattered forces dare not provoke us.”

“Ah, my Icelandic Viking Legion is fierce and skilled in battle. Now that the world is at peace, such warriors have no place to fight. I wonder if His Majesty Charles would be interested in hiring a mercenary force?”

Villiers nodded understandingly, “Your Viking Legion is renowned for its battle prowess, and I am well aware of that. If your troops are available, we would certainly be willing to hire them. The price will be according to the market rate, plus an additional twenty percent. How does that sound?”

Olaf nodded in satisfaction, “Excellent! Since Your Grace is straightforward, I am also willing to be friends with you. Tomorrow, then. Tomorrow, you will accompany me to the palace, and I will certainly persuade His Majesty Christian to repay the debt.”

Villiers smiled and took out a gray pearl the size of a human eyeball from his pocket, saying, “This is a top-grade pearl from the Maldives. I heard you are betrothed to the princess of the Pomerania Duchy. It would make a perfect gift for your beautiful fiancée, a belated congratulatory present.”

Olaf laughed heartily as he accepted the pearl, then happily had someone escort Villiers out.

The next morning, Olaf and Villiers rode into Rosenborg Palace and met with Prince Christian.

Prince Christian showed great respect to Olaf and, after inviting them to sit, inquired about the purpose of their visit.

Olaf chuckled and pointed at Villiers, saying, “His Majesty Christian IV borrowed one million five hundred thousand shillings from His Majesty Charles of England. More than half has been repaid, and His Majesty Charles has entrusted Villiers to collect the remaining debt. Villiers hopes I can act as a guarantor and persuade you, Your Majesty. I think you should find a way to repay the rest of the money!”

Olaf’s demeanor was relaxed, his tone calm, and his blue eyes showed no respect as he looked at Christian I.

Christian I felt a surge of anger and was about to lose his temper, ordering Olaf and Villiers to be thrown out. But then he remembered that there were still several hundred elite Swedish soldiers in the palace, ostensibly there to assist in management but in reality keeping him under watch.

The situation did not allow him to throw a tantrum. Christian I’s expression fluctuated, and after a long pause, he smiled and said, “Lord Olaf, since you have come to mediate, I must give you some face. However, the treasury is empty. Even the military reparations to Sweden had to be borrowed from the people to be gathered. To be honest, it’s not that I don’t want to give you face, but the country truly has no money…”

Olaf turned to look at Villiers, who stood up and said, “Your Majesty, if you temporarily lack funds, could you mortgage the tax revenues from the Sound to raise some money?”

“How can that be done?” Christian I said in a panic. “Lord Olaf, Lord Villiers, Denmark has no money now. Could you grant us a one-year extension?”

Olaf smiled and said, “Your Majesty, if you truly have no money, perhaps I can find a way to arrange a loan from Iceland to repay England first, and then you can slowly repay Iceland. How does that sound?”

Christian I remained silent. Olaf softly said, “Otherwise, I could send someone to ask Christian IV. He might have some ideas after returning to the country and could gather the money to repay England…”

Before Olaf could finish, Christian I panicked, thinking to himself: If the old man returns, will I still have my position? Isn’t it just changing the debt from England to Iceland? On second thought, that’s not so bad.

Olaf smiled slightly and asked, “Have you made up your mind, Your Majesty?”

Christian I nodded and said, “I will follow Lord Olaf’s suggestion. Please help me arrange a loan to repay His Majesty Charles I first. As for the debt to Iceland, we can discuss a repayment plan later. What do you think?”

Olaf grinned, revealing a dazzling smile, and said, “As you wish! Denmark’s debt to England—I will repay it!”

Chapter 348: Arrogance

Olaf had brought a considerable sum of money with him when he followed Haldor from Iceland to Sweden last year, but it was all in Stockholm now. However, Olaf had no intention of sending someone back to retrieve it. His army had been the first to storm Copenhagen, and from top to bottom, they had plundered enough to fill their pockets. As the commander, Olaf had naturally claimed a substantial share of the gold and silver, so even fifty-eight thousand gold shillings were no issue for him—he could easily double that amount if needed.

After leaving Rosenborg Palace, Olaf took Villiers back for lunch. By the time they finished, Stu had already moved several boxes from Olaf’s room with Villiers’ attendants and a few soldiers. The boxes contained gold and silver coins, totaling exactly five hundred twenty-two thousand shillings.

Villiers rose with satisfaction and said, “I am deeply grateful for your assistance, my lord. My mission is complete, and I must return to report to His Majesty. You may send an envoy with me to discuss the hiring of the Icelandic Viking Legion with King Charles.”

Olaf also stood and shook his hand, replying, “Excellent. I will send my brother, Half, with you. I will grant him full authority, so rest assured.”

After their farewell, Villiers took his attendants and the gold coins back to the ship at the docks, preparing to set sail once supplies and fresh water were secured.

Olaf then summoned Half.

Half entered wearing a coarse robe, looking more vigorous than ever. Sitting beside Olaf, he asked, “Brother, what do you need?”

“I have a good relationship with the Duke of Buckingham, George Villiers. He wants to hire our Icelandic Viking Legion to suppress bandits in Scotland. I can’t go myself, so you’ll accompany him to London and negotiate with Charles I—first, the price… second, the troops…”

Olaf outlined the key points for Half, who smiled and said, “Understood. With your instructions, I know how to handle it. After the negotiations, should I return directly to Iceland or go back to Stockholm?”

“Return directly to Iceland to mobilize the troops. Father and I will send word home. You’ve just spent time learning from Marshal Wallenstein—this is a good opportunity to practice in Scotland. You can ask him for a few veteran colonels to serve as the backbone. Don’t worry about achieving great feats; focus on using the Scottish rebels to train our own men. Every day we delay is another day we earn money, so keep the troop numbers under three thousand. Remember that.”

Olaf repeated his instructions over and over, unable to trust Half completely. Half merely hummed and hawed in agreement.

After a long while, Olaf finally waved him off in frustration. “Go now. Stu will take you to meet George Villiers.”

Half leapt up excitedly and dashed out.

Stu hurried after him. Watching Half’s lively demeanor, Olaf felt a wave of relief and murmured, “Half is already fifteen. In a few years, he’ll be another great general for the Haldor family!”

Only then did Olaf suddenly remember that he himself was only eighteen. It was May 1635, a time of great upheaval in both the East and the West. The fact that he had successfully deposed Denmark’s monarch in this independent operation filled him with a sense of intoxication—controlling life and death, wielding such power.

Olaf knew his roots lay in Vinland and Iceland, but now that he had aligned himself with Gustavus Adolphus II and was the heir apparent to the Pomerania Duchy, he could still stir up waves in Europe while bringing more benefits to Iceland and Vinland.

Thinking that Gustavus Adolphus II might be nearing his end after twenty-some days, Olaf grew impatient. He stood and called for a guard, ordering, “Send word to Rosenborg Palace. The contract is complete, and Denmark’s new king has been established. He must go to Stockholm to pay respects to the Great Emperor as soon as possible. See what Christian I thinks—be a little overbearing. Wait for his response before returning.”

Among the dozen or so Icelandic Vikings in Olaf’s personal guard were young men he had once educated with tales from Water Margin, Romance of the Three Kingdoms, and European courtly anecdotes. As they grew older, some joined the military, others became officials in Vinland, and the rest remained as Olaf’s personal guards.

Besides the Icelandic Vikings, there were also several dozen Inuit Vikings from Vinland Island. These men had originally been under Pikku’s command in Aettangr. Later, when Pikku became governor of Greenland, Gilson took over his position.

Thus, the Inuit Vikings in Olaf’s service were completely loyal. Olaf was happy to cultivate and promote them. Gilson had become the captain of the personal guard under his father, Haldor, while Gilfa had become the governor of Bakens City. Among the Inuit in Olaf’s service, Stu was the most outstanding.

After Stu left with Half, a young man entered—Etuku, Gilson’s son. At fourteen, he was strong and spoke three or four languages. Olaf was quite fond of him.

Etuku carried Olaf’s orders to Rosenborg Palace. Having defeated the Danes multiple times and even stormed the royal palace to depose their king, Etuku saw the Danes as nothing more than seals or seabirds to be slaughtered at will.

Entering the palace, he saw Christian I sitting high on the throne. Instead of bowing, Etuku shouted, “Marshal Olaf commands: the contract is complete, and Denmark’s new king has been established. He must go to Stockholm to pay respects to the Great Emperor as soon as possible. Please have His Majesty Christian I set a time so the marshal can arrange the rest.”

Commands?

Before Etuku finished speaking, the palace guards and the prime minister’s faces darkened. Admiral Moristen clenched his fists and rebuked, “Who do you think you are, shouting in the royal palace? Olaf is merely a count in the Swedish Empire—how dare he issue commands in Denmark? To whom?”

Etuku’s weapons had been confiscated upon entry, but he rolled up his sleeves and said, “Who do you think you are? My master’s word is law. Your master hasn’t even spoken—why are you barking?”

“Your Majesty, order his arrest!” Moristen fumed, turning to the king.

Christian I was furious, but the thought of Olaf holding his father, Christian, hostage made his blood run cold. He dared not defy him.

After a moment, Christian I sighed, “My lords, Count Olaf won’t be in Denmark much longer. Why provoke trouble over a petty argument? Please control yourselves—remember, the palace guards are still Swedish!”

His words extinguished the others’ anger, leaving them in silent, bitter resentment. They turned away, refusing to look at Etuku’s ugly face.

But Christian I had no choice. He asked, “What does Lord Olaf mean?”

“My master says it’s up to you, but I think he wants it done as soon as possible.”

Etuku grinned, revealing a mouth of worn, chipped teeth.

Christian I knew he couldn’t avoid going to Stockholm to see his godfather, Gustavus Adolphus II. He also knew there were still many in Denmark who opposed his ascension. This trip to Sweden would be a good opportunity to seek Gustavus Adolphus II’s support and secure his rule.

Making up his mind, Christian I said, “Tell Lord Olaf I need a day to prepare gifts and formalities. I can leave tomorrow afternoon.”

“Your Majesty…” the other ministers began to protest.

Etuku scoffed, “The master has spoken—what are these dogs barking about?”

Ignoring their dagger-like glares, he bowed to the Danish king on the throne and said, “I’ll report back to my master at once. Thank you, Your Majesty!”

Straightening up, Etuku waited for Moristen and the others to spit in disgust before striding out.

Only after Etuku had vanished did the palace erupt in a chorus of curses.

Chapter 349: Dearest Father, Greetings!

Upon Etuku’s return, Olaf personally sought out Brahe and Oxenstierna to inform them that Prince Christian would depart for Stockholm the next day to meet the Great Emperor.

Both Brahe and Oxenstierna were delighted to issue the order for the troops to return home. After several commands were given, once the Swedish army escorted Prince Christian back to his homeland the following day, only three thousand Swedish soldiers under Oxenstierna’s command would remain stationed at the Copenhagen docks. These troops would gradually withdraw over the next two months, but for now, they would stay to assist the unstable Danish government in maintaining order and ensuring the smooth operation of the new Danish administration.

Over the past few days, Brahe had witnessed Olaf’s iron-fisted rule in Denmark firsthand. Though he was wary of the heir to the Icelandic Duchy, he couldn’t help but admire him secretly.

Oxenstierna, on the other hand, had grown increasingly amiable, seemingly intent on letting Olaf take the spotlight.

Olaf was no fool. He was certain that Oxenstierna wasn’t afraid of him. More likely, the man was deliberately letting him offend the Danes thoroughly while he, the humble gentleman, won over their hearts. This way, Olaf’s reputation in the Nordic region would only worsen.

But Olaf didn’t let it bother him. He was destined to be a loyal servant to Gustavus Adolphus II and Princess Christina, father and daughter. The more people he offended, the happier the Great Emperor would be. This was why Oxenstierna refused to help the Duke of Buckingham, while Olaf had taken on the task wholeheartedly.

Only by fearlessly offending others and securing benefits for Sweden could Olaf earn a promotion from Gustavus Adolphus II before the emperor’s death.

All of this, however, was premised on Oxenstierna being unaware that Gustavus Adolphus II’s recent displays of recovery were all an act. The Lion King Emperor didn’t have much time left.

If Oxenstierna knew the truth, he would instantly understand Gustavus Adolphus II’s intentions and feign illness to resign, thus avoiding the emperor’s suspicions.

Once the new monarch ascended the throne and struggled to control the nation, Oxenstierna would, under the new king’s earnest invitations, reluctantly step forward to take charge. Given the current power and status of Olaf and his ilk, if Oxenstierna suddenly abandoned his post but continued to pull strings in the shadows, and then completely let go after the emperor’s death, Christina and Olaf would be utterly incapable of managing Swedish court politics. Ultimately, the initiative would return to Oxenstierna’s hands.

Gustavus Adolphus II was also worried that Oxenstierna might make trouble upon learning of his impending death, which was why he kept it a secret.

Olaf had been pondering the art of imperial strategy since last winter, so he had a good grasp of Gustavus Adolphus II’s intentions and understood Oxenstierna’s tactics.

For now, there was an information gap between the two sides, and Olaf was more than happy to go with the flow. He could hardly wait to see the look of regret on Oxenstierna’s face after Gustavus Adolphus II’s death.

When one is busy with important matters, time always seems insufficient. When Olaf, Oxenstierna, Brahe, and dozens of warships escorting the Danish king Prince Christian’s flagship arrived in Stockholm, they were all greeted with enthusiastic welcome.

The Danish navy, after suffering continuous attacks and the Battle of the Sound, was nearly annihilated. The ships in Oxenstierna’s army were all the best warships from the Danish navy, brought back as spoils of war.

Before his departure, Prince Christian couldn’t find a single grand ship in the entire country to represent the royal dignity. In the end, Oxenstierna, maintaining his persona as the good guy, returned a galleon to Denmark.

Over ten thousand people gathered at the docks to welcome them, mostly relatives of Swedish soldiers, with a few Swedish government officials.

Everyone seemed to have been arranged or even rehearsed. As soon as the ships docked, cheers erupted one after another.

When Prince Christian and his ministers, escorted by Olaf, Oxenstierna, Brahe, and others, disembarked, the surrounding crowd cheered even louder. But Olaf noticed that while they shouted welcome to Prince Christian, their eyes were all on the Swedish soldiers behind him.

It was clear that without the government’s mandatory requirement, these people would have been welcoming the heroes who conquered Denmark, and their words would have surely embarrassed the Danish king.

Olaf smiled slightly and lowered his head to speak to Prince Christian, “Your Majesty, do you feel the warmth and enthusiasm of the Swedish people towards you?”

Prince Christian, somewhat flattered, waved and replied, “Unexpectedly, the people of Stockholm are so warm and courteous. Truly, a great nation’s demeanor!”

Though he said this, Prince Christian thought to himself: The Swedish people welcome me so warmly, showing that Denmark’s rule over Sweden for hundreds of years has still accumulated some prestige. I wonder when I can free myself from Sweden’s control? Or even revive the achievements of my ancestors…

Olaf had no idea about Prince Christian’s delusional thoughts. If he did, he would surely say, “What nonsense are you thinking?”

Passing through the welcoming crowd, Prince Christian saw over a dozen high-ranking Swedish officials representing Gustavus Adolphus II to welcome him. The most notable among them was the young but elegantly dressed heir to the Swedish Empire, Princess Christina.

Logically, the arrival of a monarch should be greeted by another monarch to avoid any breach of etiquette. However, Gustavus Adolphus II was gravely ill, and Denmark was merely a defeated nation. More importantly, Prince Christian had already acknowledged Gustavus Adolphus II as his godfather. Although the Great Emperor did not participate in Prince Christian’s baptism, everyone knew that the formality didn’t affect the establishment of their father-son relationship, as it was entirely based on national strength.

As the sole heir to the Swedish Empire, Princess Christina held a lofty position. Coming to welcome her adoptive brother, Prince Christian, was a perfect match in status, and even the Danish ministers accompanying him couldn’t find fault.

Prince Christian and Princess Christina exchanged a warm handshake and a few words. Then, the composed Princess Christina entrusted Swedish ministers to receive them.

Half an hour later, the Danish monarch and his ministers, along with Olaf, Oxenstierna, Brahe, and high-ranking officers from the two western expeditionary forces, arrived at the largest hall in the Three Crowns Palace—the Golden Lion Throne Hall. This massive palace, capable of holding tens of thousands of people, was usually only used for major ceremonial events.

Upon entering the palace, they saw rows of guards in golden floral armor standing on either side of the red carpet. High above on the throne sat Gustavus Adolphus II, dressed in a lace-trimmed wool suit, holding a scepter, and wearing a crown. Beside him sat the equally elegantly dressed queen.

Gustavus Adolphus II’s hair and beard had been meticulously groomed, and his complexion was rosy and healthy. Behind him stood several attendants and Li Sheng, dressed in a baron’s attire.

Olaf wasn’t sure if Gustavus Adolphus II was wearing makeup or if his improved health was due to careful recuperation. He couldn’t tell that the man was on death’s door, but he knew that regardless of the circumstances, Gustavus Adolphus II would exert himself to maintain his appearance.

Oxenstierna, Olaf, and their group knelt on one knee before the throne to pay their respects. Gustavus Adolphus II laughed heartily, and his robust voice reached everyone on the red carpet.

“Our meritorious subjects have returned. We shall discuss matters in detail later. For now, please rest on either side.”

After expressing their gratitude, everyone stood and moved to the sides. Clearly, the positions had been deliberately arranged by Gustavus Adolphus II. On the east side stood all the Swedish noble ministers, while on the west side were a few officials of humble origins who had been promoted within the last decade, along with representatives from the duchies under the Swedish Empire—Finland, Prussia, Pomerania, Magdeburg, and Iceland.

Without hesitation, Oxenstierna, Duke Bernhard, John Banér, and others stood on the east side, while Olaf, Wallenstein, and others stood on the west side.

Though Brahe wasn’t one of Olaf’s men, he wasn’t part of Oxenstierna’s faction either. As a core figure among the officials promoted from common origins, he stood on the west side. However, the two groups on the west side maintained a clear division.

Gustavus Adolphus II observed this and felt at ease. He then beckoned to Princess Christina.

The princess ascended the throne and sat beside the queen.

Now, only the Danish monarch and his ministers, about a dozen people, remained on the red carpet.

Prince Christian took a deep breath and walked gracefully to the throne. He placed his hand on his chest, bowed, and said loudly, “Dearest Father, greetings!”

“Your godson, Prince Christian, sends you his sincere regards and wishes you and Her Majesty the Queen good health!”

Gustavus Adolphus II was very pleased and laughed heartily, saying, “Rise, my child.”

…

This was destined to be a moment remembered by the world.

In later generations, the detailed account of Danish King Prince Christian, under Olaf’s coercion, coming to Stockholm to meet Great Emperor Gustavus Adolphus II had Danish, Swedish, Icelandic, and German versions. Though the content didn’t differ much, the role Olaf played varied.

The newly appointed Swedish court painters Rembrandt, Claude Lorrain, and Bourdon, among others, each painted the scene of Prince Christian meeting Gustavus Adolphus II from multiple angles. They titled their works “The Rabbit and the Lion,” “The Cuckoo at the Lion’s Feet,” and “The Lion’s Last Splendor Before His Fall,” each of which eventually became a masterpiece.

Chapter 350: Planning the Territories of the Icelandic Duchy

After Prince Christian, in his role as the adopted son, paid his respects to his godfather, Gustavus Adolphus II, the great emperor was overjoyed. He bestowed rare treasures upon Prince Christian and had him seated on the first sofa bench beside the throne.

Following Prince Christian, the Danish ministers performed the most solemn kneeling ceremony before Gustavus Adolphus II. The emperor was equally generous, bestowing upon each of them valuable eastern porcelain and silk.

Then came the much-anticipated grand feast. After about ten minutes, the lively atmosphere grew even more boisterous as the strong liquor took effect.

Olaf, his vision blurred from drink, looked around and realized that Gustavus Adolphus II and his family had already left. He quickly stepped outside, where Li Sheng was waiting for him.

Rubbing his face, Olaf asked, “How is His Majesty’s health?”

Li Sheng gently shook his head and said, “It should be any day now.”

Olaf sighed deeply and said, “A hero of the world, yet even he cannot escape the cycle of life and death.”

Li Sheng, seemingly accustomed to matters of life and death, stroked his beard and said, “Lord Olaf, I have been by His Majesty’s side day and night these past few days. He has arranged many affairs with the queen and the princess. From what I gather, after his passing, you will be appointed as a regent minister.”

“Oh?” Olaf frowned and asked, “I am a regent minister, but what about Prime Minister Oxenstierna?”

“Prime Minister Oxenstierna seems to be a regent minister as well. His Majesty’s intention is to have the queen take charge of the court and act as regent, with you and the prime minister assisting her.”

Olaf narrowed his eyes and said, “Without me, the queen’s political acumen wouldn’t last three months before Prime Minister Oxenstierna seizes power. But with me involved, that’s not necessarily the case!”

After chatting with Li Sheng for a while longer, he bowed and said, “I must return. Being away for too long will arouse His Majesty’s suspicion.”

Olaf nodded and said, “Go. If there’s anything unusual, find Guard Arinason. He is the assistant I chose after the New Year, and he is very reliable.”

Li Sheng bowed and quickly disappeared into the night. Olaf, having lost his appetite for food and drink, entered the great hall, exchanged a glance with his father, and left.

Returning home, Olaf and Haldor sat facing each other. The battle reports and peace talks had already been sent back to Sweden. Olaf had previously informed Haldor and his elder brother Ulf in Trondheim about his operations in Iceland.

Now, with Iceland expanding its territories and gaining great renown, Haldor had been receiving more respect and hospitality in Stockholm in recent days.

Olaf first shared many details, then relayed Li Sheng’s words, and finally asked, “When you and Oxenstierna went to attack Denmark, did His Majesty summon the court ministers?”

Haldor gently shook his head and said, “He sent guards out of the palace to issue royal decrees. It was the first time I saw His Majesty.”

Haldor frowned and said, “His Majesty is truly failing. Will he really arrange for the queen to act as regent, with you and Oxenstierna assisting her?”

Olaf remained silent for a moment before saying, “His Majesty sent you and Oxenstierna to attack Denmark to show the world that even without his personal command, Sweden can conquer a country. This is to prevent the Swedish Empire from collapsing after his death.

At the same time, he wants to support our political forces in Sweden, along with those of Wallenstein, Duke Albert, and young William, among others. He wants the vassal nobles led by me to rival Oxenstierna, ensuring that the royal power is not usurped by Oxenstierna. So…”

“So he will definitely appoint you as regent, making it legitimate for you to rival Oxenstierna!” Haldor clapped his hands and laughed.

Olaf nodded and said, “Indeed. With our qualifications and status, no matter how high our positions or how great our power, without military command and the ability to mobilize the duchy’s soldiers, we can only be loyal dogs to the Swedish royal family. Gustavus Adolphus II values our loyalty and ease of control, which is why he trusts me so much.”

“What do you plan to do?” Haldor asked intently, pressing Olaf. “Our foundation is in Vinland and Iceland. If you don’t want to engage in the power struggles in Sweden, let’s go back!”

Olaf gently shook his head and said, “No matter how good Vinland and Iceland are, they are isolated islands far from the mainland. If we want to achieve great things, we must have connections and support on the European continent. What better support is there than the high-ranking officials of the Swedish Empire and the Duke of Pomerania?”

Haldor chuckled and said, “I agree. If you don’t return, Iceland will be fine with me, your brother, and the generals. What about Vinland? Should we have your brother return?”

Olaf gently shook his head and said, “Since you plan to make me the heir, Vinland cannot have my brother return. Let Uncle Haig and Uncle Kadir find more useful people to send back. Then appoint Heiner as the governor of Vinland to oversee all matters. Heiner and I have long had a development plan for Vinland. As long as he steadily implements it, it won’t matter much whether I return or not.”

Haldor was also worried about his two sons competing for the succession, so he said, “Alright, we’ll do as you say. Later, I’ll have Ulf stationed in Trondheim, you in Sweden, me in Iceland, and Heiner managing Vinland. With our four regions connected as one, we’ll truly have the bearing of a great nation!”

Olaf said solemnly, “Vinland is the supply base for goods and raw materials, and this won’t change for the next twenty to thirty years. Iceland is our ancestral land, Father. Don’t be stingy with money and resources. You can offer rewards to encourage the Icelandic people to have more children. For each child born, we can reward them with land and money. For two children, promote them to production team leaders, and so on. With the support of Vinland’s food and resources, Iceland has only one task: to continuously increase the population. As for Trondheim, it is our outpost for infiltrating Norway and attracting the Norwegian population. It is also our base for establishing close ties with the European continent and ensuring smooth communication channels. There’s no need to focus on development; just strive to maintain control.”

With just a few words, Olaf outlined the roles and arrangements for Iceland’s territories. Haldor felt enlightened and laughed, “Alright, you will be a high-ranking official in the Swedish Empire in the future. Our family will have to rely on you. If you have any needs, send word to me. If you have any suggestions, tell me, and I will follow them one by one.”

Olaf was deeply moved by his father’s trust. He stood up and said, “It’s already very late. Father, you should rest first. We can talk more tomorrow.”

Haldor nodded and let Olaf leave. As Olaf left the room and walked into the corridor, he saw Merkel wearing a wine-red wool dress, looking at him with a grievous expression.

Olaf’s heart warmed, knowing that his fiancée, upon learning of his return, was eager to see him but had to wait outside the door because he was talking with his father.

Stepping forward to embrace Merkel, Olaf smiled and said, “Did you miss me?”

Merkel leaned against Olaf’s chest, listening to his heartbeat, and sighed contentedly, “If you didn’t come back soon, I would have gone crazy missing you.”

Sweet words should be said to loved ones, and Olaf was indeed a loving man. He picked up Merkel and whispered in her ear, “Then let’s go back to the room and sleep. I’ll show you how much I missed you!”

Merkel’s face turned as red as the morning glow when Olaf’s breath tickled her ear. She hummed, “Hurry up, don’t… don’t let anyone see us.”

Olaf laughed heartily and quickened his pace. The two pretty maids Merkel brought along also blushed and lowered their heads, quickly following behind.

Chapter 351: The Fallen Lion

On the second day after Olaf’s return to Stockholm, Prince Christian of Denmark was once again invited by Swedish nobles and ministers to attend two banquets.

Olaf, however, remained indoors, and Haldor also declined the banquet invitations. Meanwhile, the native Swedish noble ministers allied with Oxenstierna continued their relentless networking and communication. Oxenstierna repeatedly requested an audience with Gustavus Adolphus II, but each time, he was refused due to the king’s poor health.

Olaf observed all of this with a cold eye. He noticed that Oxenstierna seemed to have sensed something. On the third day, the privy council and parliament passed a resolution to provide compensation for the families of those who had died or been injured in the western campaign against Denmark. This did not require the king’s approval.

By the morning of the fourth day, Oxenstierna had signed off on the rewards and promotions for the soldiers of the western campaign. A large number of the promotions were for his own northern army, while Olaf’s southern expeditionary force saw very few promotions, though they received a substantial amount of monetary rewards.

Oxenstierna took the request into the palace and stayed for an entire afternoon. At dusk, he emerged with a solemn and gloomy expression, carrying the approved documents stamped with the emperor’s seal.

That evening, the nobles and ministers of Stockholm gathered together. Oxenstierna explicitly informed them that the health of His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II was a cause for grave concern.

The next morning, Olaf learned that the native Swedish nobles and ministers had gathered at Oxenstierna’s villa the previous night. He knew that the Chancellor had finally realized the grim reality that Gustavus Adolphus II was on the verge of death.

At dawn, Oxenstierna, accompanied by various ministers, arrived at the Three Crowns Palace with all the documents regarding financial and personnel changes, preparing to request an audience with Gustavus Adolphus II.

Olaf understood that Oxenstierna and his faction could no longer restrain themselves. They wanted to take advantage of Gustavus Adolphus II’s critical condition to install their own people and control large sums of money under the guise of official business, thereby securing the power and status of the native Swedish nobles and ministers after the emperor’s demise.

Gustavus Adolphus II quickly granted them an audience and approved all their requests. The emperor’s condition and energy were no longer sufficient to weigh and consider, and Oxenstierna’s reasons were sound, with the requests coming from a group of ministers. Gustavus Adolphus II had no choice but to approve them.

Oxenstierna’s faction left the palace in high spirits, continuing their feasting and drinking as if the situation was completely under control.

On the surface, all the political affairs of the Swedish Empire were under the control of Oxenstierna and the native Swedish nobles and ministers. With the addition of newly selected personnel to the central government, the emerging forces like Olaf had almost no room to survive.

Yet, Olaf remained as steady as a mountain. Even after Wallenstein and Duke Albert came to see him, Olaf calmly sipped his coffee and said, “His Majesty Gustavus Adolphus II is not dead yet. As long as he lives, the emperor’s prestige and power can surpass the privy council and parliament. His commands cannot be refused by anyone, so let us wait patiently.”

Sure enough, after Wallenstein and the others left half-convinced, that very afternoon, a decree from the emperor was issued from the Three Crowns Palace.

It was a simple white paper with only a few words, but at the bottom was Gustavus Adolphus II’s flamboyant signature.

The decree was an appointment order. Based on the military merits of conquering Denmark and the standards for promotion set by Oxenstierna, Gustavus Adolphus II promoted several dozen individuals from Olaf’s southern expeditionary force to positions in the Army and Navy departments. These promoted individuals were the backbone of the Magdeburg, Saxony, and Prussian armies. Although this order did not grant any rewards to Olaf, Wallenstein, and others, it effectively allowed their influence to extend into the Swedish military. Even though their power was not yet strong, it prevented Oxenstierna from completely sidelining them.

Olaf was not satisfied with this order, so he continued to wait, anticipating Gustavus Adolphus II to grant him an official position.

Not two days later, Arinasen, the guard, suddenly paid a visit. Olaf’s expression changed as he asked, “Did Li Sheng send you?”

“Yes, sir. His Majesty has fallen into a coma and seems to be on his last legs.”

Olaf’s expression changed again. “Thank you, Stu. Quickly, get some gold coins for Mr. Arinasen.”

Stu took Arinasen away, and Olaf hurriedly went to find his father, Wallenstein, Duke Albert, and the others.

Gustavus Adolphus II had not issued any orders that would be most favorable to Olaf’s faction before suddenly falling into a coma. If he were to die like this, Oxenstierna would truly take control of the court.

Within ten minutes, everyone was seated in the room, discussing animatedly. Wallenstein even suggested forcing their way into the palace to see the emperor, but everyone ignored him.

Olaf finally put an end to the meaningless debate and said, “Right now, Oxenstierna and his people are probably waiting too. I think we should try to request an audience with His Majesty. At the very least, we should wait outside the palace gates. If anything happens, we can be the first to know.”

Everyone came to their senses and, without preparing carriages, rode their horses to the gates of the Three Crowns Palace.

After dismounting, they saw Oxenstierna and five or six ministers also standing at the gates, waiting. Neither side exchanged greetings, each stating their reasons for requesting an audience with the emperor.

After about half an hour, Baltachov, the captain of Gustavus Adolphus II’s guards, came out. He was a Slav who had followed Gustavus Adolphus II for over twenty years and was extremely loyal and reliable.

Baltachov said, “His Majesty requests that Chancellor Oxenstierna and Count Olaf enter the palace. The other ministers, please wait in the front hall.”

Oxenstierna and Olaf followed Baltachov into the palace, passing through the gallery, garden, square, and grand hall before entering the small room where Gustavus Adolphus II rested.

Gustavus Adolphus II was half-reclining on the bed, his face sallow, his eyes dim and lifeless—clearly on the brink of death.

Queen Eleanor sat beside Gustavus Adolphus II, holding him, and Christina stood on the other side. Both mother and daughter had red eyes, their faces streaked with tears.

Princess Katharina held Karl and stood to the side.

Oxenstierna bowed and asked, “How is Your Majesty feeling?”

Olaf bowed and looked at Li Sheng, who was standing at the head of the bed. Li Sheng pursed his lips and shook his head slightly. Olaf’s heart sank, realizing that Gustavus Adolphus II, this unparalleled military genius, was about to fall today.

Gustavus Adolphus II lifted his eyelids and looked at Oxenstierna, saying, “I am about to meet God. Christina is still young, so I plan to have the queen serve as regent. You two will assist the queen. How does that sound?”

Gustavus Adolphus II’s voice was weak, but Oxenstierna dared not hesitate for a moment. He bowed and said, “I will obey Your Majesty’s decree.”

Olaf also bowed and said, “I obey the decree.”

Gustavus Adolphus II smiled and nodded, saying, “Go fetch the decree I have written and announce it to all the ministers.”

Baltachov quickly retrieved a document tied with a red string and handed it to Oxenstierna.

Gustavus Adolphus II no longer spoke, breathing heavily. Queen Eleanor said, “Chancellor, His Majesty has ordered you to gather all the ministers and read the decree.”

Oxenstierna bowed in agreement and retreated, quickly walking while unfolding the document. He discovered that Gustavus Adolphus II had appointed him as the first regent and Olaf as the second regent, which finally put his mind at ease.

Chapter 352: Entrusting the Orphan

After Oxenstierna left, Gustavus Adolphus II beckoned Olaf over.

Olaf stepped forward, his eyes reddened, and said, “Your Majesty!”

Gustavus Adolphus II took Olaf’s hand, his lips trembling as he spoke, “You are my lucky star, and your loyalty has been tested time and again. From now on, you must assist Christina well, treating her as if she were your own daughter. Can you do that?”

Olaf was taken aback by Gustavus Adolphus II’s words. Treating her as his daughter? Setting aside the nine-year age gap between them, Olaf’s position made such a thing impossible.

Before Olaf could react, Gustavus Adolphus II beckoned Christina over. Little Tina approached and said, “Father, I remember everything you told me. Teacher Olaf is a blessed man who saved your life, a messenger sent by God to help me. From now on, I will respect him as a father!”

Gustavus Adolphus II smiled and nodded. Olaf, however, felt his head spinning. He looked at Queen Eleanor and asked, “Your Majesty, what… what is this about?”

Queen Eleanor’s demeanor was surprisingly gentle, no longer showing the disdain she once had for Olaf. She held Gustavus Adolphus II’s hand and said, “His Majesty said that after his death, the Swedish Empire will face turmoil, and men like Oxenstierna will control the court. We, a widow and orphan, will have to rely on Lord Olaf. Therefore, His Majesty hopes that you will become Christina’s godfather, to assist and guide her in the future, teaching her how to be a wise ruler, just as you have done before.”

Olaf was completely stunned. He had always assumed that Gustavus Adolphus II would appoint him as a regency minister before his death to counterbalance Oxenstierna’s power, and perhaps even grant him other practical positions based on his military merits, such as the commander of the royal constabulary, or even elevate his title to marquis.

But faced with Gustavus Adolphus II’s final arrangements, Olaf realized his vision was too narrow.

No matter how he thought about it, Olaf never imagined that Gustavus Adolphus II would make him Christina’s godfather. If such a relationship were established, even without any official position or power, he could still wield significant influence.

Olaf recalled that historically, Christina had no godfather, which was partly due to Gustavus Adolphus II’s sudden death. But in terms of status, position, and age, it was somewhat forced for him to become Christina’s godfather.

Olaf’s mind was in a daze. Queen Eleanor continued, “You need not worry. His Majesty is purely grateful for your help and, before his divine summons, sensed that you are a blessing to the Vasa dynasty. Since Prince Christian of Denmark became His Majesty’s godson, he feels it is appropriate for you to become Christina’s godfather.”

After finishing, Queen Eleanor turned to her daughter and said, “Tina, quickly call him godfather.”

Christina straightened up, her face pious as she made the sign of the cross before lowering her head and saying, “Merciful godfather, I hope you will help me greatly in the future.”

Olaf hurriedly helped Christina up, then rubbed his temples and said, “Your Majesties hold me in such high regard, I am truly at a loss for words and do not know how to express my gratitude.”

Gustavus Adolphus II laughed, “Good! Good, you two will surely create a legendary tale!”

Olaf knelt down and kissed the backs of Queen Eleanor’s and Gustavus Adolphus II’s hands, feeling the spirit of a chancellor from a thousand years ago possessing him. Tears streamed down his face as he cried, “How can this subject not devote himself wholeheartedly to assisting Her Highness the Princess? It is but to serve with utmost loyalty until death!”

As Olaf was pledging his loyalty, Oxenstierna, having just delivered the imperial decree, entered again. Seeing Olaf holding the hands of Their Majesties and weeping, he was startled and said, “Your Majesty, I have conveyed the decree, and the ministers are aware.”

Gustavus Adolphus II’s eyes grew brighter. He threw off the blanket and sat up, smiling as he said, “Chancellor, you have worked hard. Olaf has saved my life many times. Just now, in a daze, I received a divine revelation that I am about to ascend to heaven. God has enlightened me that Olaf is a blessing to my Vasa family. In the future, the princess will still need his guidance and companionship, so I have made Christina recognize him as her godfather. From now on, you must unite and maintain the order of our Swedish Empire!”

Oxenstierna’s expression changed. He hastily knelt down to conceal his emotions, his heart churning with a mix of bitterness and shock. He never imagined that His Majesty would make Olaf the godfather of Her Highness the Princess.

Oxenstierna considered himself an elder of the Swedish Lutheran Church, with seniority, knowledge, and status. If Christina were to have a godfather, it should be none other than himself. But now, Olaf had become the godfather of the future emperor, leaving him in an awkward position.

Oxenstierna lowered his head, grinding his teeth. Gustavus Adolphus II saw this and smiled inwardly. He took Olaf and Oxenstierna’s hands and forced them together, saying, “I know I am not long for this world. From now on, the Swedish Empire will be in your hands!”

Olaf and Oxenstierna cried as they agreed. Then, Gustavus Adolphus II suddenly collapsed. Queen Eleanor supported him and urgently called, “Li Sheng, quickly!”

Li Sheng stepped forward to take the pulse, then knelt and said in Swedish, “Your Majesty the Queen, the Emperor has… has… ascended to heaven…”

…

Gustavus Adolphus II, King of Sweden and Emperor of the Swedish Empire, was born on December 9, 1594, and passed away due to illness on May 16, 1635, at the Three Crowns Palace in Stockholm, at the age of 41.

The sudden death of Gustavus Adolphus II plunged the entire nation of Sweden into boundless grief.

Under the leadership of the Great Emperor, the Swedish people had just begun to enjoy a few good days, but this wise ruler who had led Sweden to greatness had left them.

Upon hearing the news of the Emperor’s passing, people from all over Sweden rushed to Stockholm, eager to pay their respects in person.

Although Queen Eleanor was the regent, she was overwhelmed with grief over her husband’s death. Oxenstierna and Olaf appeared very united and courteous, discussing and deciding on the funeral arrangements for Emperor Gustavus Adolphus II, while also allowing people from various provinces to come and pay their respects.

Among the series of commands to stabilize internal affairs, some soldiers were dispatched to military strongholds such as Estonia, Finland, and Magdeburg to deliver the tragic news and issue orders to heighten alertness.

After the death of Gustavus Adolphus II, the Swedish Empire would face a severe test. Any misstep could lead to the fragmentation of the vast empire. Thus, although Olaf and Oxenstierna wished they could strangle each other, faced with this crisis, they had no choice but to temporarily cooperate.

After handling a day’s worth of political affairs, Olaf returned to his residence. Merkel came forward to massage his shoulders and back. Olaf comfortably hummed and closed his eyes, soon falling asleep.

Merkel said sympathetically, “His Majesty was truly too kind, making you Christina’s godfather. Such a great favor is a heavy burden. What if it wears you out?”

Olaf suddenly opened his eyes and said, “His Majesty was not just kind! I was deeply moved at the time, but when I saw Oxenstierna’s jealous gaze, I realized that His Majesty was also deepening the hatred between Oxenstierna and me. How many years has Oxenstierna been the Chancellor? He has seniority and great merits, but His Majesty entrusted the orphan to me, making me the godfather of Her Highness the Princess. This is a slap in Oxenstierna’s face. Oxenstierna certainly won’t resent His Majesty; he can only be angry at me for taking the position of godfather. But without me, with his prestige and power, it would have been impossible for him to become the godfather of Her Highness the Princess, because His Majesty would never trust him so much, or rather, he doesn’t have the qualifications for His Majesty to trust him so much. In short, now that I have become the godfather of the king, and we have been appointed as regency ministers together, from now on, there is no possibility of reconciliation between us. Don’t you think His Majesty is brilliant?”

Merkel didn’t understand politics and couldn’t quite follow, so she said, “I don’t understand. His Majesty said you are their blessing, and it was a divine revelation that made you the godfather of Her Highness the Princess. It’s all God’s will. Why would Chancellor Oxenstierna resent you? He’s not a petty person, is he?”

Olaf smiled slightly, reached out, and patted Merkel’s bottom, laughing, “What do you know? National affairs are not as simple as good and evil; they are all about power and strategy.”

Merkel stopped her hands and sighed, “Then, His Majesty wouldn’t harm you, would he?”

Olaf paused for a moment, then said faintly, “Yes, His Majesty wouldn’t harm me…”

Chapter 353: Queen Christina

On May 16, 1635, Gustavus Adolphus II passed away. According to the late emperor’s will, the throne of the Swedish Empire and the title of Grand Emperor would be inherited by his sole heir, Princess Christina.

On May 18, with the assistance of Prime Minister Oxenstierna and Count Olaf, the two regents appointed by the late emperor during his lifetime, Christina was crowned as the Grand Emperor and King of the Swedish Empire in St. Nicholas Cathedral.

From this point onward, the Swedish Empire bid farewell to the glorious era under Gustavus Adolphus II and entered the reign of Grand Emperor Christina. However, due to the late emperor’s will, Christina was only the nominal king at present. The powers of the Grand Emperor were exercised by the Queen Dowager, Queen Eleanor, with Oxenstierna and Olaf assisting as the chief officials.

Queen Dowager Eleanor attended Christina’s coronation ceremony, but after the ceremony ended, she returned to the palace, clearly still unable to emerge from the grief of losing her husband.

Due to Queen Eleanor’s lack of knowledge and political experience, coupled with Olaf’s inability to proficiently manage Swedish affairs, Oxenstierna began to control the entire country as the first regent during the handling of Gustavus Adolphus II’s funeral, and he had the full authorization of Queen Eleanor.

Queen Eleanor had never received education in political struggles or national governance, and her nature was not resilient. At this moment, she only knew that she was the regent, the mother of Christina, and the Queen Dowager, holding the second position in the Swedish Empire but with the first authority. Therefore, she did not feel at all that Oxenstierna posed a threat to the royal power.

Olaf could only worry secretly about this situation. He then summoned Wallenstein, young William, Duke Albert, and others, ordering each of them to withdraw five hundred elite soldiers. Olaf then entered the Three Crowns Palace to seek an audience with Queen Eleanor, who was holding Christina and reminiscing about her husband.

“Your Majesty the Queen, Your Majesty the Emperor, the late king appointed me as a regent and tasked me with instructing Your Majesty. Such great kindness I can only repay with my life.

In the Battle of Copenhagen, the Swedish national army suffered heavy losses, and the royal constabulary was among them. To defend the palace and ensure that Your Majesties have usable troops to deter foreign powers, I humbly request that Your Majesty approve my withdrawal of elite personnel from various duchies to join the royal constabulary and expand the royal constabulary!”

Olaf’s words were somewhat restrained in places. If it were Gustavus Adolphus II, he would have understood immediately, but Queen Eleanor was confused and waved her hand, saying, “You are the regent and also Christina’s godfather. You don’t need to ask me about these matters. Go ahead and do it yourself. However, in the future, the commander of the royal constabulary must be you. This was the late emperor’s wish.”

Olaf bowed and said, “I obey the decree. Thank you, Your Majesty and the late emperor.”

As Olaf left the palace, he saw young William waiting for him. His heart warmed, and he smiled, saying, “It’s done.”

“Did the Queen Dowager approve?” young William asked with a smile.

Olaf nodded and said, “Not only did she approve the expansion of the constabulary, but she also made me the commander of the royal constabulary.”

“That’s great. We helped His Majesty expand the royal constabulary. In the future, Stockholm will have a five-thousand-strong constabulary. With our people mixed in and you as the commander, we can turn the constabulary into a sword in your hand. With us holding the hilt, we won’t be afraid of Oxenstierna not giving us some face. In the future, Oxenstierna won’t dare to go too far!”

Olaf gently shook his head and said, “William, you’re wrong. It’s not my sword; it’s His Majesty Christina’s sword.”

“Right, it’s His Majesty’s sword.” Young William, still young and impetuous, added in his heart, “But it’s also your sword.”

A few days later, over two thousand elite soldiers personally selected by Olaf joined the royal constabulary, increasing the original three thousand royal constabulary to over five thousand.

The composition of these five thousand people was five hundred from Magdeburg, five hundred from Prussia, five hundred from Saxony, five hundred from Iceland, and the rest were mostly native Swedes.

Since Queen Eleanor did not interfere with either Oxenstierna or Olaf, and Oxenstierna oversaw the government affairs that Olaf could not manage, while Olaf, as the godfather of His Majesty and the commander of the constabulary, reformed the constabulary without Oxenstierna’s authority to interfere, the two maintained a delicate balance.

Olaf knew that Oxenstierna certainly did not want him to expand the constabulary, but he was busy consolidating the political situation and eliminating dissenters, so he naturally did not want to offend Olaf. Olaf also understood that with his status and that of Wallenstein, Duke Albert, and others, it was difficult to enter the Swedish political and even military circles. Starting with the royal constabulary was the best approach.

After Christina’s ascension, envoys from various countries sent congratulatory gifts, and there were indeed some movements on the front lines.

Prince Christian and his ministers had only arrived in Stockholm a few days ago when they encountered the death of Gustavus Adolphus II. As a godson, Prince Christian also had to participate in the funeral.

After Christina’s coronation and Gustavus Adolphus II’s burial, Prince Christian could not wait to bid farewell to Oxenstierna and prepare to return to his country.

Oxenstierna was busy handling government affairs and raising taxes and provisions, preparing for possible warfare in southern Germany and eastern Estonia. Naturally, he did not have the mind to say much to Christian IV and agreed.

Prince Christian then entered the palace to bid farewell to Queen Eleanor and Grand Emperor Christina. Queen Eleanor ordered gifts to be presented to Prince Christian, and then Christina bid farewell to her adoptive brother.

The departure of Prince Christian and his ministers seemed to be a signal. Sensing the instability in the rear garden, Wallenstein also followed suit and returned to his country.

Magdeburg was the first stop for Bavaria’s northward attack, so Wallenstein had to return to his country to take charge and prepare for war, preventing the Habsburgs from tearing up the Prague Treaty and attacking northward upon learning of the death of Grand Emperor Gustavus Adolphus II.

Duke Albert and young William also left soon after. The foreign noble lords who had been closely surrounding Christina in Stockholm each left with their missions to return to their countries, leaving only Haldor and Olaf, the new emperor’s godfather, the Count of Vinland, and the heir to the Icelandic Duchy and the Pomerania Duchy. The core of the foreign noble lords remained stationed in Stockholm.

Since the death of Gustavus Adolphus II, Olaf and Haldor had been discussing state affairs late into the night every evening, to the point that Olaf’s old mother, Katrin, and his fiancée, Merkel, were somewhat resentful.

However, facing the critical moment when the power dynamics of the Swedish Empire and Europe were about to change, Olaf and Haldor dared not be negligent, pondering what role Iceland could play in this.

Olaf also discussed the development plans and subsequent arrangements for Vinland with his old father and wrote more than a dozen letters to Heiner.

When Haldor returned to Iceland, he could hand over the letters to Heiner when sending ships to bring people back.

Haldor knew that the Swedish Empire was facing a precarious situation that might lead to war, so it was not good to stay in Stockholm any longer. He prepared to return to his country to train troops and wait for the possibility of Sweden and the Habsburgs going to war again, then he would bring troops to assist.

Olaf highly approved of his father’s considerations and then told him to make a detour to Holland on his way back, trying to either bind Descartes or hire him at a high price to send to Vinland. Also, the craftsmen recruited by Song Qinghe’s disciple, Huang Ping, from the Ming Dynasty should be returning soon.

Olaf asked Haldor to inquire with the Dutch East India Company to see if the craftsmen and talents sent from the Far East had arrived. If they had, they should be sent back to Vinland together.

Chapter 354: The Thirty Years’ War 2.0 Begins

Haldor, carrying Olaf’s instructions, left Stockholm at the end of May, taking with him all of Iceland’s warships and sailors.

Previously, Olaf had expanded the royal constabulary by drafting five hundred Icelandic warriors, so Haldor wasn’t worried that taking everyone away would leave Olaf without trusted men or even put him in danger.

With his father, mother, brothers, and sisters all gone, Olaf had no one left by his side except Merkel.

Facing exclusion and coldness from Oxenstierna’s faction, Olaf knew that struggling for power was meaningless. Though he was a regent, he no longer attended to government affairs.

Oxenstierna and his men were more than happy not to see Olaf, so after deciding on a matter, they would send someone to inform Olaf with a document, giving him at least a semblance of respect.

Since Christina’s ascension, her daily studies had doubled. Oxenstierna claimed it was to prepare His Majesty to learn how to be a ruler before coming of age, but Olaf always suspected Oxenstierna had ulterior motives.

As Christina’s godfather, as well as her fencing and riding instructor, and as the commander of the royal constabulary, Olaf couldn’t avoid the Three Crowns Palace, even if he could skip the privy council.

Olaf still gave Christina and Karl riding and fencing lessons twice a week, managed and trained the constabulary, and found excuses to remove soldiers from noble and ministerial families, replacing them with Icelandic officers.

Olaf went about his duties calmly, purging dissenters from the constabulary and gradually tightening his grip. Aside from his twice-weekly lessons with Christina, where they would chat, his days passed leisurely.

But in July, Sweden suddenly received news: the Habsburgs and Poland had simultaneously attacked Estonia and the Saxony Duchy. Poland demanded the return of southern Estonia—what would later become Latvia and Lithuania.

Over the next few days, messages poured in.

On July 8th, the Habsburgs declared the Prague Peace Treaty null and void, aiming to reclaim dominance over the German regions in the name of Catholicism. The Bavarian army confronted Magdeburg at the border, and the Bohemian army began advancing westward to attack Leipzig Castle on the 9th.

The Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth dispatched six thousand winged hussars into Lithuania, surrounding Vilnius, seemingly intent on reclaiming the ancient capital that Sweden had occupied for over a decade.

This war had clearly been brewing in secret for a long time. With the Habsburgs and Poland declaring war, the Spanish-Portuguese United Kingdom also announced its entry into the Catholic League, sending mercenaries to the German battlefield.

If Sweden hadn’t already defeated Denmark, it might have faced betrayal from that front as well.

At this critical moment, the Catholic Kingdom of France, ever the thorn in the side, once again joined the Protestant League, dispatching troops to engage Spain in the southeast.

The Kingdom of England chose to remain a spectator, but the Swedish envoy in London reported that Charles I had hired the Viking Raid to suppress Scottish rebels, stationing part of the legion in the central region—perhaps preparing to send them to the continent at any moment.

As reports flooded into the royal palace and privy council in Stockholm, the Queen Dowager, though regent, was the last to hear the news. Panicked and at a loss, she hastily summoned Oxenstierna and Olaf to the palace to discuss countermeasures.

Oxenstierna and Olaf entered the palace together, sharing little on the way except the latest updates, both concerned about Sweden facing strong enemies from the east and south.

Olaf knew that if Russia hadn’t just been weakened by Poland, it might have attacked Sweden’s coastal outlets. And if Denmark hadn’t been defeated early, with troops still stationed in Copenhagen, it might have caused trouble as well.

The current situation had been anticipated.

Under Gustavus Adolphus II, Sweden had risen too prominently, so after his death, a backlash was inevitable. Poland and Russia were powerful eastern foes, the Habsburgs a formidable southern enemy, and Denmark—had it not been for Olaf’s sudden rise, splitting Iceland and defeating Denmark multiple times—would have been a western threat.

Facing enemies on three fronts, the Swedish Empire’s position was untenable. Historically, Poland’s territorial claims in the Baltic region had been satisfied, and Sweden eventually returned the lands south of Estonia to Poland.

But Sweden was now far stronger than in history. Oxenstierna likely had other plans. Pondering this, Olaf entered the palace.

Though called a palace, it was actually Queen Dowager Eleanor’s prayer room—a small space barely large enough for a dozen people.

When Oxenstierna and Olaf arrived at the door, Eleanor was praying with Christina. After a moment, she allowed them inside.

After bowing upon entering, Oxenstierna and Olaf sat down to speak. Li Sheng stood in the room as the royal court physician, having just taken the queen’s pulse.

Eleanor first praised the two for their efforts in managing the situation, then said, “His Majesty has just passed, and now Poland, the Habsburgs, Bohemia, and Spain all declare war on us. What do they intend? When I heard the news, my hands went numb. Thankfully, Li Sheng treated me.”

She continued, “Gentlemen, we are now in Sweden’s most perilous moment. You are both His Majesty’s appointed regents, the pillars of Sweden. Do you have any good strategies? How can we repel the enemy and secure victory?”

Olaf remained silent. Oxenstierna suddenly stood, his voice grave. “Your Majesty, rest assured. Fortunately, we defeated Denmark early, so the Baltic Sea is secure. I have already asked the French envoy to return home. If we can secure support from His Majesty Louis in the form of mercenaries, our Swedish forces, combined with the allied armies, can hold off the Habsburg and Spanish forces. As for Poland, I believe it would be prudent to fight while negotiating.”

“What do you mean by ‘fight while negotiating’?” Eleanor frowned.

Oxenstierna glanced at Olaf. “Poland’s Cossacks, cavalry, and noble legions are formidable, but defeating them isn’t impossible. However, with multiple fronts requiring reinforcement, we can’t afford to openly clash with Poland over the eastern Baltic lands. Those territories could drain us and disrupt the overall war effort. So, I suggest having the Governor of Finland send troops to support Estonia, striking hard to dampen Poland’s momentum. Then, we can negotiate with them.”

“How?” Christina suddenly asked. “Chancellor, do you intend to trade the eastern Baltic lands for peace with Poland?”

Oxenstierna sighed. “Yes, Your Majesty. Only then can we focus our strength on defeating the Habsburgs and securing Germany. Germany is far more important than the eastern Baltic.”

Oxenstierna’s words made everything clear. This was all Sweden could do.

Christina tugged at her mother’s sleeve. Eleanor suddenly regained her composure and said, “Very well, Chancellor Oxenstierna. With war upon us, I appoint you as Marshal, commanding all military affairs. If necessary, you may personally go to Germany. All funds and personnel are at your disposal.”

This was exactly what Oxenstierna wanted. He bowed. “I accept the command.”

The pre-war discussion was dominated by Oxenstierna. Olaf only spoke at the end: “I have already sent a letter to the Duke of Iceland at the first opportunity. Even without the Chancellor’s orders, Duke Haldor will raise troops to come to our aid!”

Eleanor nodded happily. “I know you are the most loyal, Olaf. You must manage the royal constabulary well. In times of war, we must guard our own doorstep!”

Olaf bowed in acknowledgment. Then, Eleanor waved them away.

Chapter 355: Going with the Flow

Leaving the royal palace, Olaf was about to mount his horse and head home when Oxenstierna hurriedly called out to him.

“Count of Vinland!”

Olaf turned and asked, “What orders does the Chancellor have?”

Oxenstierna sighed, “In these troubled times, we must work together in unity. I am heading to the privy council to convene a meeting. Would the Count care to join me?”

Olaf did not feign modesty and nodded, “Very well. Serving the nation should not be hindered by personal grudges. Let’s go.”

The two men, one in a carriage and the other on horseback, made their way through the tense and heavy atmosphere of Stockholm’s streets. After traversing three blocks, they arrived at the privy council.

This was the first time Olaf had entered the inner sanctum of the Swedish Empire’s cabinet since assuming his role as a regent.

At present, Sweden’s ministers, privy council members, generals, and marshals were all in attendance. Upon seeing Oxenstierna and Olaf, they all rose to pay their respects.

As the first and second regents, the two men naturally held the highest positions among the assembled officials.

After exchanging greetings, Oxenstierna and Olaf took their seats at the center of the round table. Oxenstierna first conveyed the command from Queen Dowager Eleonora, granting him full authority over military and political affairs, thus legitimizing his direct issuance of orders.

Those present were either Oxenstierna’s confidants or allies. Even if some were of questionable character, their relations with Oxenstierna were undoubtedly a hundred times better than with Olaf.

Thus, everyone was pleased to see Oxenstierna’s power further consolidated, and they all expressed their willingness to cooperate fully with the Chancellor.

Oxenstierna, a seasoned statesman who had held the reins of power for decades, first boosted morale and declared Sweden’s resolve to triumph over all enemies. His oratory skills were exceptional, and with just a few words, he had many believing in victory.

Once the crowd’s fighting spirit was high, Oxenstierna continued, “Although Sweden, united as one, can certainly overcome any formidable foe, how we respond is equally crucial. Now that our Lion King has left us, we must be even more vigilant. Over the past few days, I have analyzed the situation and consulted with several generals and staff officers.

The conclusion is that the southern front in the German region is of utmost importance. There lie Magdeburg, Saxony, Prussia, Pomerania, and other tributary states and territories—the very foundation of Sweden’s standing at the heart of Europe and the world. Facing the mighty Habsburg armies of Spain and Austria, we must commit our full strength to counter them!”

“As for Poland and Lithuania, I have already dispatched the Governor of Finland with troops. Sending another renowned general of our time with a portion of our elite forces should be sufficient to stabilize the situation.

On the eastern Baltic front, we need only defend and not attack. It won’t be difficult to prolong the conflict. We can also negotiate with Poland. Once they realize that even with a two-front war, Sweden is not to be trifled with, returning some land should secure peace.”

After finishing his speech, Oxenstierna began assigning generals, armies, and personnel for the campaign into Germany. Finally, Marshal John Banér was to lead ten thousand soldiers to reinforce Leipzig Castle.

Lennart Torstensson, promoted to Field Marshal after the western campaign against Denmark, was to lead eight thousand German mercenaries to reinforce Magdeburg under the guidance of Duke Bernhard.

Oxenstierna himself would proceed to Szczecin to oversee operations, commanding the Swedish navy to manage military supplies and funds, and leading the final ten thousand elite Swedish troops.

For the entire German campaign, Oxenstierna had committed all available forces, leaving him with neither suitable generals nor troops for the eastern Baltic front.

After making these arrangements, Oxenstierna suddenly slapped his forehead and sighed, “Oh dear, I was so focused on Germany that I completely forgot about the eastern Baltic. Gentlemen, who can take charge of the eastern front? Does anyone have a recommendation?”

Finance Minister Andreasson spoke up, “This is a time for unity, and no one should hold back. However, we civil officials lack the skill for leading troops in battle, and the remaining officers are not up to the task. Therefore, I believe the only one with proven military merit and sufficient rank to command is Count Olaf.”

Before Andreasson had even finished, several other ministers rose to voice their agreement. With the crowd’s recommendations, Oxenstierna turned to Olaf and asked, “What do you think, Count?”

Olaf grinned, knowing full well that Oxenstierna had invited him only to send him to the eastern front, without troops or generals. Nominally, he would have command over the unruly Finnish governor’s forces, but in reality, it was far from certain. The old fox had no good intentions!

After Oxenstierna’s question, Olaf remained silent for a long time. Other officials stood up to persuade him, all using flattering language—how Olaf was favored by the late emperor, how he was the godfather of Queen Christina, how no one else in the country could shoulder this responsibility, and how he must save the nation.

Olaf understood perfectly. Oxenstierna was heading to Szczecin, and there was an eight or nine out of ten chance he feared Olaf would cause trouble or make moves against him if left in Stockholm. But he also didn’t want Olaf on the German front, where he might gain military glory. So he had schemed to force Olaf to the eastern Baltic front.

If Olaf died, Oxenstierna would be overjoyed. If he survived, he wouldn’t be able to achieve any great feats. In the end, under Olaf’s command, Sweden would have to negotiate peace with Poland, ceding territory. Future generations would remember Olaf as Sweden’s scapegoat.

Olaf quickly saw through Oxenstierna’s underhanded tactics. Though his methods were devious, they were executed in broad daylight. Now that the situation was laid out before him, Olaf had no choice but to accept unless he wanted to end his political career in Sweden in disgrace.

Raising his hand to quiet the crowd, Olaf finally spoke when everyone had fallen silent, “Thank you all for your kind words. You say I am a renowned general of our time?”

“That’s only natural. Count Olaf’s rescue of Her Majesty from a thousand miles away and the capture of Ferdinand III are both legendary feats. How else would you have been granted the title of Count of Vinland if not for such illustrious achievements?”

“Yes, yes. This year, Count Olaf’s victories at Kalmar and Copenhagen were brilliant campaigns.”

“Exactly. The battles of this year alone are enough to secure his place in history. If he isn’t a renowned general, who is?”

The crowd continued to flatter Olaf, who smiled and accepted all their praise before saying, “Since you all claim to know nothing of warfare and the remaining officers are incompetent, I suppose I have no choice but to go.”

“However, Chancellor, I am, after all, a regent and a renowned general. I cannot go alone and empty-handed.”

After Olaf finished speaking, he looked at Oxenstierna, whose expression remained unchanged. “The situation is urgent, and we are short on troops and supplies. That is precisely why we are asking you, a first-rate general of our time, to go.”

Olaf shook his head, “Never mind the troops, but military supplies cannot be lacking. The soldiers on the Estonian front will need them.”

Oxenstierna nodded, “Rest assured, Count. The Estonian garrison, combined with the forces the Finnish governor has taken, totals eight thousand men. I will provide you with enough supplies and armaments for ten thousand men and a month’s worth of provisions.”

Olaf did not press further for more and coldly laughed, “Thank you, Chancellor Oxenstierna. Since you’ve put it that way, I accept the task of personally defending Estonia. Prepare the supplies and armaments quickly!”

Oxenstierna smiled warmly and praised, “Count Olaf truly is the cornerstone of Sweden. His brave and fearless spirit is an example for all soldiers to follow!”

“Count Olaf is a role model for us all!”

“I will have my children learn from Count Olaf.”

“Our great Sweden is blessed to have Count Olaf!”

After Olaf agreed, starting with Oxenstierna, the privy council members took turns showering Olaf with praise.

Olaf dismissed their words as nonsense, knowing full well that this mission would either result in him ceding territory for peace or, at worst, his death or injury. Either way, his future would pose no threat to Oxenstierna’s grip on power.

However, Olaf was not afraid. He believed that a country like Poland-Lithuania was no match for him, so he decided to go with the flow and accept the assignment.

Chapter 356: A Heavy Blow Against Poland-Lithuania

The Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth, established over seventy years ago, had long been the most populous and vast nation in Europe.

This country went by several names—Kingdom of Poland-Lithuania, Polish Republic, Polish-Lithuanian Union—and its political system was a chaotic mix of noble assemblies, elected monarchs, and feudal warlords. Even its religious landscape was a tangled mess: Poles adhered to Catholicism, Cossacks in Ukraine followed Eastern Orthodoxy, Jews practiced Judaism, while Lithuanians in the west and south were Catholic, and those in the east were Orthodox.

While other nations often descended into chaos over religious and ethnic conflicts, the Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth remained stable. With its fertile lands, vast territories, and large population, it stood as the dominant power in Eastern Europe in the 1640s, surpassing even Russia.

Yet Olaf held little regard for this so-called powerhouse. His skepticism wasn’t due to foreknowledge of Poland’s eventual partition or its infamous reputation as a doormat. Rather, he knew that in just over a decade, the Great Deluge would strike—an event that would reduce Poland’s population by a third.

The catalyst would be the Cossack leader Khmelnytsky, who, driven by land disputes, would lead a Cossack uprising. Ukraine would declare independence as the Cossack Hetmanate and become a Russian vassal. Soon after, Sweden and Russia would join the fray, crushing Poland completely.

Olaf understood that land disputes had been a long-standing issue, not just in the years leading up to the uprising. The soil for peasant revolts had always been fertile in Poland—it merely lacked a spark, or perhaps the Cossacks had been unlucky not to produce a figure like Zhang Xianzhong or Li Zicheng to lead their cause.

Still, Olaf believed he could investigate the situation and perhaps stir up trouble for Poland.

With confidence in his knowledge of Poland’s weaknesses and no fear of defeat, Olaf was eager to engage with the Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth. He sought to earn military merits, cultivate loyal followers, and recruit war refugees from the eastern front for Iceland and Vinland.

Filled with determination for his mission in Estonia, Olaf first selected two thousand royal constables, then arranged for the remaining forces to guard the palace. Finally, he entered the palace to bid farewell to Queen Dowager Eleonora and Empress Christina.

Understanding the gravity of the situation, the queen dowager nodded in agreement. Christina, however, questioned him in detail. Upon learning that Oxenstierna had refused to provide Olaf with troops, her expression darkened. “Godfather,” she said, “take all the royal constables with you.”

Olaf shook his head. “That won’t do. First, it’s against protocol. Second, the palace cannot be left undefended. Two thousand men will suffice.”

Christina pondered for a moment. “Then what else can I do to assist you on the eastern Baltic coast?”

Olaf considered before replying, “You’re still underage, and power rests with the queen dowager. Focus on your studies and wait patiently.”

“How I hate being a woman and a king… I can’t accompany you, Godfather, onto the battlefield…”

Christina muttered, then reluctantly saw Olaf off.

The next day, Olaf sent Merkel aboard a Pomerania Duchy merchant ship, accompanied by over a dozen guards. After a farewell kiss, he watched the ship depart before turning toward the privy council.

After a night of reflection, Olaf had a clear plan for his arrival on the eastern Baltic coast. This time, he sought personnel from Oxenstierna.

When Olaf requested individuals fluent in Polish and Russian, Oxenstierna promptly arranged for several Russians and Poles from the stationed Swedish forces.

Pleased, Olaf took his new translators and left. Two days later, he received a letter from his father, Haldor, informing him that Olaf’s message to Heiner had been sent to Vinland and that Descartes had already returned to Iceland.

However, the East India Company also delivered grim news: the Dutch merchant ship carrying Huang Ping and the Ming artisans and physicians had been lost in a typhoon in the Indian Ocean. None had survived.

Beyond the bad news, Haldor also told Olaf that Half had finalized the agreement with Charles I to hire the Viking Legion and had already assembled a three-thousand-strong Viking force for deployment.

After reading the letter, Olaf rubbed his face and sighed. His request from last week for a Viking Legion to be prepared for the European battlefield had apparently not yet reached his father, but it likely had by now.

Pondering, Olaf wrote another letter to his father, detailing his plans to engage Poland on the eastern Baltic coast and requesting backup. He also urged Icelandic merchants to sell more dried meat, fish, liquor, and malt sugar to Sweden while purchasing white slaves to send to Vinland.

With war looming, selling grain would be impossible against Dutch competition, but Vinland and Iceland’s specialty goods would always find buyers. The displaced Germans from the war would also make excellent white slaves.

The latter half of the letter covered the latest European developments. Though Ulf in Trondheim was also gathering intelligence, Olaf’s information from Oxenstierna was far more timely and accurate.

After finishing the letter to his father, Olaf decided to write to his brother Ulf as well, warning him to monitor Norway and Denmark to prevent them from inciting rebellion in Trondheim.

Once the letters were handed to the Icelandic merchant ship’s captain, Olaf exhaled deeply and sought out the Polish and Slavic Swedish soldiers serving as translators. He intended to learn their languages while also instilling in them the basics of espionage, hoping they would prove useful once they reached Estonia.

Though Oxenstierna and most others had little faith in the eastern Baltic front—even preparing to sacrifice land for peace—Olaf disagreed.

Having already reshaped Iceland, Sweden, and even Europe, Olaf was confident he could resolve the Polish-Lithuanian threat. He might even retain most of the territory or suffer minimal losses. And even if Sweden lost land, he and Iceland would not be the ones to pay the price.

Olaf had no respect for Poland-Lithuania. Unlike England, Russia, or the Habsburgs, Poland-Lithuania was the kind of nation that, once provoked, required not concessions but a heavy blow.

Even without Swedish support, even with Poland’s formidable Cossacks and cavalry, and even with the Finnish governor in the eastern Baltic being difficult to control, Olaf believed he could prevail. Most importantly, if he lost, it wouldn’t be his Viking soldiers paying the price—but if he won, the rewards would be tenfold.

With this confidence, Olaf set sail days later aboard a fleet loaded with supplies and arms, departing Stockholm and arriving at Estonia on the southeastern Baltic coast.

Upon disembarking, Olaf found no one to greet him. With a cold snort, he summoned a harbor soldier and asked, “Where is Governor Jesnelin?”

Jesnelin was Finnish but had been loyal to Sweden for generations. His father had remained steadfastly on Karl IX’s side during the Finnish duke’s rebellion, earning the family favor.

Now in his sixties, Jesnelin had served as Finland’s governor for over twenty years and also oversaw Estonia on the eastern Baltic—a true powerholder.

Olaf had expected Jesnelin to dismiss him and refuse to relinquish command, but the outright cold shoulder still angered him. His tone was icy.

The soldier, sensing the tension, bowed respectfully before answering, “Honorable Count, the governor has taken the main force to the front lines against the Poles. He has no time to come, but before leaving, he instructed us to welcome you.”

No governor, no high-ranking officers—just a few indifferent soldiers. Clearly, Jesnelin was sending a message.

Olaf smirked inwardly but remained composed. He inquired about the battle situation and the Swedish forces’ deployment.

The Poles had already advanced into southern Estonia, pillaging and probing Swedish-held cities. Meanwhile, the Prussian Duchy’s exclave of Memel Castle was under Polish attack after Prussia broke from Poland to become a Swedish tributary state.

Nodding at the eastern Baltic’s situation, Olaf gestured to the ship behind him. “Fetch the highest-ranking officer here. This ship carries arms and supplies, but without Governor Jesnelin, I don’t know how much you need, so I can’t distribute them. I’ll wait half a day. If he doesn’t appear by three in the afternoon, I’ll take these supplies to Memel Castle. The Prussians on the front lines might need them more.”

Chapter 357: Olaf’s First Strike on Lithuania

After Olaf finished speaking, the soldier hurriedly turned and left.

Olaf silently chuckled, then turned and returned to the ship, where he had a map brought out and began analyzing the situation.

Memel Castle stood at the northwestern corner of the Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth, serving as Poland’s sole outlet to the sea. However, this harbor had always been under the control of the Duchy of Prussia.

Since the Duchy of Prussia had long been a tributary state of Poland, this arrangement had never posed a problem. But after Gustavus Adolphus II led Sweden to prominence, he seized the Duchy of Prussia’s sovereignty. Memel Castle was then taken over by tax officials appointed by Gustavus Adolphus II, who began levying taxes on Polish merchants, much to Poland’s dismay.

This small harbor in the southeastern corner of the Baltic Sea had become a thorn in Poland’s side, and an even greater irritation to King Władysław IV Vasa of the Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth.

Before Gustavus Adolphus II’s cousin died, Władysław IV had been embroiled in wars with the Ottoman Empire to the south and Russia to the east, forcing him to endure the situation.

But now, with Gustavus Adolphus II dead, Russia subdued, and Poland having signed a truce with the Ottoman Empire the previous year—including a treaty to curb mutual raids by Ottomans and Cossacks—Władysław IV was eager to launch a war. He sought to reclaim the northern territories and Memel Castle in the northwest, and to bring Prussia back under his control as a tributary state.

Thus, the Polish-Lithuanian forces were primarily focused on attacking Memel Castle, with only Cossack infantry and winged hussars harassing the northern regions of Latvia.

Given this situation, it was impossible for Sweden’s supreme commander, Jesnelin, to appear on the front lines to engage in a major battle with the Polish army. Unless he had gone to Prussia, but without Sweden’s orders and no personal ties to Prussia, Jesnelin would not risk exposing Estonia’s vulnerabilities to aid Memel Castle.

On the ship, Olaf studied the map, deducing that the battle for Memel Castle was likely still in a stalemate. Before his departure, the Duchy of Prussia had sent a war report to the privy council, stating that they had recruited five thousand troops to reinforce Memel Castle and were requesting Sweden to send reinforcements.

Olaf knew without a doubt that Oxenstierna would never send troops. He would be delighted if the Duchy of Prussia suffered more losses, as it would weaken Olaf’s faction.

Olaf summoned a guard and said, “Take a few men to Memel Castle harbor and see what the situation is like there. I need to be prepared.”

After the guard left to carry out his orders, Olaf returned to his room to rest.

Two hours later, his personal guard brought him fried pork chops, berries, and vegetable soup.

As Olaf finished eating and was wiping his mouth, Etuku entered and said, “Master, the Governor of Finland, Jesnelin, is outside the ship requesting an audience.”

Olaf calmly finished cleaning his mouth and beard before saying, “Show him in.”

Moments later, Etuku returned with a tall, elderly man.

The man had snow-white skin, but his features bore some resemblance to Asians. His hair and beard were streaked with white, and he wore a linen robe with a long sword at his waist. Approaching Olaf, he laughed heartily, clasped his chest, and bowed, saying, “You must be Lord Olaf! So young indeed! I am Jesnelin Yavi, Governor of Finland. It is an honor to meet the Regent Count!”

Olaf stood and shook Jesnelin’s hand, noticing they were of similar height. He smiled and said, “Governor Jesnelin, your height is rare even in Sweden and Finland.”

“I’ve been told since childhood that I am a descendant of giants. Meeting you, Lord, I see that the descendants of giants are not alone,” Jesnelin joked, his words dispelling any lingering discomfort from his earlier rudeness.

“I hear you’ve brought quite a few weapons? Cannons? How many?” Jesnelin asked eagerly as he sat down.

Olaf could see that the Governor of Finland was a straightforward and genuine man. This was why people called him unruly—once he set his mind on something, others found it hard to change his opinion. Moreover, he often acted on his personal preferences, especially in interpersonal relationships, which sometimes led to offending others.

However, Olaf had grown up around such people—Kadir, Hoskuld, and Haig were all of this type—so he didn’t mind. In fact, he quickly found common ground with Jesnelin.

Hearing Jesnelin’s direct question, Olaf replied with a playful smile, “So even the governor is short on cannons?”

“For over a decade, the homeland hasn’t sent a single cannon to Finland or Estonia. I know His Majesty wants to develop the navy and wage war in Germany, so I’ve never asked. But the cannons here are too old, and many are unusable.

You haven’t brought a large army, so it’s clear that Lord Oxenstierna wants us to hold off the Poles, even abandoning southern Latvia. I understand the difficulties of the Swedish Empire, so I’m prepared to defend to the death. But without cannons, defense is impossible!”

Jesnelin sighed and continued, “Apart from the soldiers guarding the cities, I have fewer than five thousand men under my command. I can’t launch an offensive, nor can I engage the Poles in open battle. Marshal Schwarzenberg of Memel Castle has requested reinforcements twice, but my forces are too few. Defense is already a struggle—how can I spare troops to aid him? Alas!”

Olaf smiled reassuringly, “Old general, there’s no need to worry. Now that I’m here, I will take full command of the eastern front. I’ve brought supplies for ten thousand men and a month’s worth of provisions, not counting ammunition. There are three thousand new smoothbore muskets, forty-three light cannons, twelve heavy cannons, and twenty-eight mortars of varying sizes—enough to arm a large artillery battalion. If you don’t need them urgently, I can take them to Memel Castle, where the situation is critical, and oversee the battle…”

“This…”

Jesnelin hesitated upon hearing Olaf’s words. He was reluctant to surrender his command so readily, fearing Olaf’s reckless leadership and the unnecessary sacrifice of his soldiers.

But the supplies and cannons Olaf mentioned made Jesnelin waver. Seeing that Olaf was about to rise and dismiss him, Jesnelin had no choice but to say, “Regent Count, please don’t rush. From now on, the soldiers in the east will follow your orders. But you must consider the bigger picture and not sacrifice the lives of our men for mere military glory.”

Jesnelin’s words were sincere, even carrying a hint of reproach, but Olaf didn’t take offense. He laughed and said, “I too understand warfare. Rest assured, if I intend to do anything, I will consult with you, Governor. I won’t act alone.”

Hearing Olaf’s assurance, Jesnelin finally relaxed. He stood and smiled, “I apologize for my behavior today. Regent Count, you shouldn’t stay on the ship any longer. Please come to the Governor’s Mansion to rest.”

Olaf nodded in agreement, “Very well.”

Jesnelin led Olaf and his entourage from the harbor to the Governor’s Mansion. Olaf, accompanied by his personal guards, took up residence there, while the two thousand royal constabulary troops settled in the surrounding civilian houses. In wartime, the Estonian people, though resentful, dared not voice their complaints. They quietly vacated their homes, taking their belongings to stay with relatives and neighbors.

Chapter 358: Olaf’s First Strike Against Lithuania

After dinner, Olaf ordered Jesnelin to gather all the high-ranking officers for a meeting.

Jesnelin knew that since Olaf now held military and political authority over the eastern region, convening a meeting was inevitable. Moreover, he was curious to see how the godfather of the empress would respond to the Polish army’s advance. Thus, Jesnelin quickly summoned the generals and staff officers stationed in Estonia, as well as the colonels from his own forces.

Olaf’s room suddenly filled with over twenty people, creating a lively atmosphere. However, since Jesnelin remained standing, everyone else stood at attention, awaiting Olaf’s address.

Olaf was pleased with Jesnelin’s attitude, recognizing his genuine cooperation. He said, “General Jesnelin, please take a seat.”

Once Jesnelin was seated, Olaf spoke with each of the officers, gaining a general understanding of the military situation. Then, he asked, “The Polish forces attacking Memel Castle number around fifteen thousand. The invaders in Latvia consist of several thousand Cossack infantry and cavalry, along with six thousand winged hussars—noblemen’s sons—who have surrounded Memel Castle. However, they are not attacking; instead, they are pillaging nearby, seemingly aiming to blockade and besiege Memel Castle. This is the current situation in our Estonian region. Am I clear?”

After speaking, Olaf surveyed the room. Jesnelin nodded and said, “You are correct, Sir Olaf. Memel Castle is our southernmost military stronghold, with two thousand soldiers inside. Before your arrival, I was still deliberating whether to send reinforcements.”

Olaf tapped the map on the table and said, “How would you reinforce? Including the two thousand royal constabulary I brought and the local garrison troops, we have a total of ten thousand soldiers, with only about five thousand deployable. With less than three thousand cavalry, how can we confront the winged hussars?”

Jesnelin said, “We have enough cannons and musketeers to fight, but our numbers are too few. If we had nearly ten thousand troops, I would have already launched an attack!”

Seeing that everyone else remained silent, Olaf sneered and said, “The Poles have assessed your situation clearly. That’s why they only surround but do not attack. They have superior numbers and easy access to supplies and reinforcements from their rear, unlike us. They don’t want to expend too much effort on a siege; instead, they aim to lure us into open battle. If you had ten thousand troops and attacked a few days ago, you would likely be surrounded and ambushed by the winged hussars’ reinforcement units by now!”

After hearing this, Jesnelin pondered and broke out in a cold sweat. He was genuinely convinced and became even more respectful, changing his address as he said, “Then, what does Marshal Olaf suggest we do?”

Olaf said, “I have brought enough firearms and cannons. Currently, what we lack is manpower. If we had enough troops, we could first eliminate the Cossacks in Latvia and then find a way to deal with the winged hussar legion blockading Memel Castle.”

Everyone agreed with Olaf’s words in their hearts, but they also felt he was stating the obvious.

Olaf, unaware of their thoughts, looked intently at Jesnelin and said, “Therefore, I plan to abandon all of Latvia, leaving only a thousand men to defend Estonia. This way, we can gather seven thousand troops. By conscripting some able-bodied men and seizing some horses, we can assemble six to seven thousand infantry and four thousand cavalry. Marching south swiftly, we should be able to surprise the winged hussar legion!”

“Hiss!”

Everyone gasped, shocked by Olaf’s bold tactical plan.

In the era of the Thirty Years’ War, where the bastion era had not yet passed, relying on castles as strongholds for attrition warfare was standard practice. However, Olaf intended to abandon vast territories, cities, and populations south of Estonia, withdrawing the garrison forces to concentrate them. He did not plan to eliminate the Cossack troops scattered and pillaging in Latvia but instead aimed to strike directly at the Polish winged hussars besieging Memel Castle. This was an extremely dangerous decision.

Setting aside the withdrawal of the main force to march south, abandoning Latvia to the Cossacks would result in significant loss of life and property for the people. Additionally, once the main force entered the Memel Castle region, Latvia would fall under Cossack control. Unless the Polish winged hussars could be defeated, there would be no way back.

Everyone was too frightened to speak. Many officers and staff believed Olaf was a clueless fool. They all looked at Jesnelin, hoping the governor would advise against it.

Jesnelin frowned and stood up, saying, “Marshal! You are gambling with the lives of hundreds of thousands of military personnel and civilians. I hope you will reconsider. If the attack on the winged hussars does not go well, we could face total annihilation. Then, not only would Estonia be lost, but even Finland…”

“Hahaha!”

Olaf’s laughter interrupted Jesnelin. He glanced at the old general, who was bristling with anger, and said, “As long as Memel Castle has not been breached, the six thousand winged hussars besieging it will remain just that. We can swiftly defeat or rout the winged hussars. Then, we can turn back and eliminate the Cossacks. At that point, the three regions of Estonia will be revitalized, and the flank of the Polish army attacking Memel Castle will no longer be secure. The entire battle situation will change!”

After Olaf spoke, everyone’s expressions changed again. Jesnelin lost his confidence but still said, “But this is all based on the premise of swiftly defeating the winged hussars. What if we cannot achieve a quick victory?”

Sweden and Poland were old rivals. To say that an army of ten thousand, with sufficient musketeers and artillerymen, could not defeat six thousand winged hussars was something Jesnelin could not bring himself to say. However, whether a swift victory could be achieved was uncertain.

Olaf shook his head slightly and said, “Old general, have you forgotten the two thousand defenders inside Memel Castle? When we engage the winged hussar legion in open battle, as long as the troops inside Memel Castle come out to support us, we can attack from both sides. Even if the Poles had one or two thousand more winged hussars, they would still be hard-pressed to avoid defeat. The only difference would be the extent of their loss.”

Jesnelin smacked his lips and smiled, saying, “You are right, Marshal. At that time, we can send cavalry to coordinate with the defenders inside Memel Castle. Open battlefield combat is where the Polish winged hussars are most confident. They will definitely engage us in battle. When the defenders of Memel Castle attack from behind, the winged hussars will surely panic. Under our cannon fire, we cannot lose!”

Jesnelin slapped the table and said, “I am willing to gamble with you, Marshal!”

With Jesnelin’s analysis, all the officers and staff now understood that although Olaf’s tactics carried some risk, they were by no means suicidal. There was a real chance of defeating Polly’s army, making it the best option available.

The choice was between passively defending, waiting for the Polish army to nibble away at their territory, and ultimately accepting defeat, fleeing in disgrace after ceding land—or taking a risk to concentrate their forces, using their overwhelming advantage to decisively engage the elite Polish winged hussars.

All soldiers valued honor and craved military glory. By now, everyone had accepted Olaf’s tactics and bowed their heads, saying, “I am willing to gamble with you, Marshal!”

Olaf stood up and looked at everyone, asking, “Advancing on Memel Castle is a joint action. One misstep, and there will be no turning back. Are you not afraid of death?”

“Not afraid!”

“With such an army, the Swedish Empire will surely prosper forever.”

Olaf sighed and then clenched his fist, saying, “Fight to the death, for the empire, for the great emperor!”

“Fight to the death, for the empire, for the great emperor!”

Chapter 359: Olaf’s First Strike on Lithuania

Once all the officers were brimming with fighting spirit, Olaf began arranging the specifics.

He wasn’t particularly skilled in details, so this time, he invited everyone to discuss and plan together.

The deployment of personnel, the mobilization of militia, the replenishment of horses, and the marching routes were all handled by Jesnelin and the other generals. Olaf reviewed their proposals one by one, approved them, and then assigned the commanders to carry out their tasks.

On the night Olaf arrived at the Governor’s residence in Estonia, the lights in the residence burned all night, with hundreds of officers and messengers coming and going.

By the time Olaf and Jesnelin had arranged everything, it was already 8 a.m. the next morning.

Jesnelin, being older, looked weary. Seeing that most matters had been arranged and only needed to be implemented, Olaf stood up and said, “Jesnelin, do you have anything else to add?”

Jesnelin shook his head and replied, “We’ve arranged everything we could think of. All that’s left is to wait for the army to assemble.”

Olaf looked around and asked, “Does anyone else have anything to say? If not, let’s dismiss. Go back and rest well. By tomorrow afternoon at the earliest, we’ll be able to gather the army and march south!”

After everyone responded, they dispersed. Olaf personally escorted Jesnelin out of the room before returning to sleep.

A few hours later, Etuku shook Olaf awake and said, “Master, would you like to eat something before going back to sleep?”

Olaf frowned and snapped, “Why are you disturbing my sleep?”

“Mistress specifically instructed me before she left to take good care of you, to make sure you don’t go hungry or get hurt…”

Etuku counted on his fingers as he spoke. Olaf remembered that Merkel had made arrangements before returning to Szczecin, then glared at the simple-minded Etuku and scolded, “You fool! What are you doing?”

Etuku scratched his head and said, “The local chefs made sausages and roasted meat, which we ate. The chef we brought made fried fish and smoked lamb’s head, served with sweet beet soup.”

Olaf nodded, got up, washed, and sat at the table. Etuku had already arranged the dishes. Olaf first drank some soup, then started eating the meat.

After a moment, he finished and had someone bring water to rinse his mouth. Then he asked, “Did anyone come looking for me just now?”

“No, master, rest assured. If there was anything important, I would definitely wake you up.”

Olaf nodded and was about to go back to sleep when he heard a soldier outside say, “German battle report!”

Olaf quickly said, “Bring it in.”

A Saxon soldier entered, first saluted, then handed over a letter sealed with wax, saying, “Regent Count, this is the latest battle report from the front.”

Olaf took it and opened it. It was a report from Magdeburg. Two days ago, the Bavarian army had marched north and engaged in a field battle with Wallenstein’s army. Both sides suffered losses, but Magdeburg had lost three towns.

Olaf frowned and asked, “Has the Chancellor already gone to Szczecin to oversee the battle? Didn’t he and Duke Albert send troops to reinforce?”

The soldier’s plate armor bore the emblem of Saxony-Lauenburg, indicating he was part of Duke Albert’s personal army. Olaf put away the report and inquired. The soldier replied without hesitation, “The Bohemian forces are still besieging Leipzig Castle. My lord, the Duke, is unable to reinforce. The Chancellor did issue an order, saying he would send troops to support us and Magdeburg.”

Olaf waved his hand, dismissing the soldier to rest, then pondered for a moment.

The latest news from the German battlefield confirmed Oxenstierna’s speculation entirely. The German battlefield was indeed the most important to the Habsburgs and the focal point of contention between the Catholic League and the Protestant League.

With the unfavorable situation in the German region, it was likely that the Swedish army would join the fray.

Currently, Spain and France were engaged in a lively battle on their border, and their mercenaries were also fighting in the southwest of Germany. England was watching from across the channel, and there was an eight or nine out of ten chance they would join the Protestant League, though both England and France seemed to be vying with Sweden for the leadership of the Protestant League.

Spain was in its union period, and its national strength was still among the best in Europe, capable of contending with France for several rounds.

The Ottoman Empire, although powerful, was, as in the original historical timeline, led by a weak-minded Sultan Mustafa, so internal palace struggles and infighting plagued the entire Thirty Years’ War, preventing them from participating.

Russia was still weak, and Poland had only intervened slightly. Thus, the current situation was different from the middle and late stages of the Thirty Years’ War that Olaf remembered. However, it could be predicted that Denmark now lacked both the strength and the courage to engage in backstabbing, and the German region, which had just stabilized for two years, was about to plunge into chaos again.

With Oxenstierna and Wallenstein in the German region, Olaf didn’t think Sweden would lose, but he was somewhat concerned that Oxenstierna might use delaying reinforcements and other means to weaken Wallenstein and Duke Albert.

However, all these speculations were currently meaningless. Olaf felt that his own strength was still too small.

Knowing that the German battlefield was mired in a bitter stalemate, Olaf decided he must seek a breakthrough on the Eastern Front to find a strategic advantage for Sweden.

The next afternoon, the garrison troops of Estonia and Latvia withdrew from the castles, conscripting able-bodied men and seizing horses, naturally also taking some other valuables.

Olaf and Jesnelin led the combined 6,000-strong garrison from northern Estonia and Latvia, along with militia supplies, marching south and gradually merging with the Latvian garrison along the way.

Over two days of marching and stopping, the Swedish army continued to grow. By the time they reached the southernmost region, it had become a large army of over 9,000 men.

The Polish Cossacks were currently rampaging and looting throughout the southern region. Whenever Olaf’s forces encountered them, they would send out cavalry to pursue and eliminate them. If they couldn’t be found or escaped, they wouldn’t pursue.

To seize the initiative, Olaf ordered the army to march at full speed. Under the guidance of the scouts, the army absorbed more than 2,000 Estonian garrison troops. At this point, all the Swedish garrison troops in the eastern Baltic region, covering 100,000 square kilometers, had gathered under Olaf’s command. For the Polish Cossacks, capturing cities and fortresses to get rich had become the most important thing.

The Swedish army’s elite forces, combined with the militia, now exceeded 12,000 men, with more than half being cavalry.

The entire army’s strategic objective was to quickly defeat the Polish winged hussar army besieging Memel Castle. If they couldn’t win or the battle dragged on, the outcome would not be optimistic.

To gain speed, the Swedish army only carried three days’ worth of rations. The army’s full-speed march also surpassed the Cossacks, so by the time Olaf’s army entered the border area between Poland and the Estonian Governorate, the Kurland and Semigallia Duchy, the thousands of Cossacks in southern Estonia were still unaware, engrossed in their looting spree.

The Duchy of Kurland and Semigallia was a small country under the Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth. With its access to the Daugava River and the small port of Riga, which thrived on trade, the country was small and sparsely populated. In the wars between Sweden and Poland, it had always participated but not too much, contributing effort but not going all out.

This time, when Olaf’s army appeared in the Duchy of Kurland and Semigallia, it was the same. Duke Frederick Kettler personally led his army to guard the outskirts of Mitau, sending soldiers to deliver food and wine. They didn’t dare send books to avoid leaving evidence, but the leading envoy verbally expressed their willingness to remain neutral.

Olaf was very pleased with this, accepted the supplies, and said, “Rest assured, I am only borrowing the road to go and support Memel Castle in Prussia. You can pretend you never saw us.”

After saying this, Olaf led his army to continue their rapid march, quickly passing through the Duchy of Kurland and Semigallia, arriving at a wetland bordering Memel Castle.

Chapter 360: Olaf’s First Strike Against Lithuania

Watching the forward scouts gallop back, Olaf ordered the main army to halt its march.

Moments later, Jesnelin, having received the news, rode over from the vanguard and reported, “Marshal, the main Polish forces are stationed outside Memel Castle in Greenwood Town. However, lacking cannons, they have not launched any assaults on the city. Instead, they loiter before Memel Castle daily, plundering the villages and towns in the region.”

Olaf pondered for a moment before asking, “So, Greenwood Town is their stronghold?”

“Yes, Greenwood Town is built on high ground, and they have constructed watchtowers.”

Olaf turned to Jesnelin and said, “It seems Poland does not truly intend to open a two-front war with us Swedes. A few thousand winged hussars, even without cannons, would not dare attack Memel Castle. And what are the Cossacks worth?”

He continued, “What do you think? Should we strike directly at Greenwood Town?”

Jesnelin sneered, “The Poles are indeed bold. Having just finished major battles with Russia and the Ottomans, they can hardly afford prolonged warfare. They must also maintain defenses on their eastern and southern borders. Moreover, it’s harvest season, and Poland is an agrarian nation—how can they easily mobilize troops? I suspect that sending a few thousand men to attack Memel Castle is already stretching their resources thin.”

He added, “Though they call themselves winged hussars, I doubt there are many true winged hussars in Greenwood Town. Most are likely just Crimean Tatars. However, with their watchtowers and the keen senses of their cavalry, it will be difficult for us to quickly capture Greenwood Town. If we take too long, Polish reinforcements will arrive.”

Olaf nodded in agreement. “You’re right. Then we shall proceed with the tactics we previously decided upon. The Finnish cavalry will eliminate the Polish cavalry loitering outside Memel Castle, luring the forces from Greenwood Town out, and then we will engage them in the field with our musketeer formations.”

Jesnelin acknowledged with a grunt and immediately issued combat orders to the messengers.

Soon, Major General Pasanen, accompanied by several colonels and over three thousand Finnish cavalry, departed from the main army and headed toward Memel Castle.

Using the Finnish cavalry to support Memel Castle and lure out the Polish cavalry was a plan Olaf and his men had devised long ago. Even the number of troops—three thousand—was carefully chosen. Fewer would not be enough to draw out a large number of Polish winged hussars, while more might raise suspicions, making the Poles wary of a larger Swedish reinforcement force. Half the number of the Polish cavalry was deemed the most appropriate.

The Polish winged hussars were the most renowned and battle-hardened unit in the Polish army. However, after Gustavus Adolphus II had defeated Poland years ago and seized vast territories in Latvia, the Swedes had learned that even the winged hussars were no match for Gustavus Adolphus II’s adjusted musketeer formations, with their volley fire and cavalry support.

A thousand winged hussars could defeat two thousand Swedish cavalry, but against an equal number of Swedish musketeers in formation, they would only be charging to their deaths.

Olaf and Jesnelin’s plan was to use cavalry to lure the Polish cavalry into a field battle, then lead them into an ambush zone where musketeer formations would intercept and annihilate them.

This tactic was perfectly tailored to the situation. The only variable was whether the Polish cavalry would pursue the Finnish cavalry and, if so, how many would give chase.

Olaf and Jesnelin waited over half an hour before leading the main army forward again. Along the way, they began to see the bodies of civilians and Polish cavalry scattered by the roadside—clearly, Polish scouts had been discovered and pursued by the Finnish cavalry.

As the vanguard, the Finnish cavalry’s primary task was to eliminate scouts, preventing the main army from being detected by the Poles.

After another half-hour of marching, two Finnish cavalrymen emerged from a nearby forest and were quickly brought before Olaf and Jesnelin. They reported, “We encountered twenty-nine scouts on the road. All have been killed or wounded and fled. General Pasanen has already led the cavalry unit out.”

Olaf said, “Governor, let us set up an ambush nearby.”

“Very well, Marshal.”

Jesnelin asked the two Finnish cavalrymen in a deep voice, “What did you find when you scouted the nearby terrain?”

After a moment’s thought, the two cavalrymen described the terrain within a few miles.

Jesnelin pondered for a while before saying, “In that case, the most suitable place for battle and an ambush is the southern Erik Village. There is a high ground there. We will position our musketeers behind it.”

Olaf urged his horse forward, saying, “You two lead the way. Let’s go take a look.”

Soon, Olaf’s main army arrived outside Erik Village. Looking into the village, they saw devastation—doors and windows broken, bodies lying at the intersections. Clearly, the village had been pillaged by Polish cavalry.

Beyond the village, the terrain sloped downward to the south, leading to a valley with a lake and a small stream.

Olaf pointed to the valley and said, “If we are to engage the Polish cavalry in battle, we must seize this high ground to extend the range of our cannons and muskets. However, we cannot afford a prolonged standoff with the Poles. If they refuse to launch a strong assault, we will be in trouble.”

“Yes, this high ground is indeed advantageous,” Jesnelin said gravely. “But if we can see the advantage of occupying the high ground, the Poles can too. Therefore, we will abandon the high ground and set up our ambush in the valley. The pursuing Polish cavalry will lower their guard and enter our ambush zone.”

Olaf stroked his beard and said, “That makes sense. Governor, please arrange the cannon and musketeer units immediately. If all goes well, the decisive battle should take place this afternoon.”

Jesnelin agreed and left. Soon, the caravan in the middle of the main army arrived at the forests on both sides of the valley. The cannons were unloaded and aimed at the high ground for calibration.

The musketeers stood in three ranks before the cannon units, following Gustavus Adolphus II’s three-rank firing method, checking their smoothbore muskets.

It was now approaching noon. The moisture in the valley had been dispelled by the sun. The soldiers hid in the shade, waiting. Olaf and Jesnelin rode to the front of the high ground to observe and inspect, while sending out cavalry to scout and eliminate any possible Polish cavalry.

Time passed slowly. The midday heat made Olaf sweat profusely, but he dared not remove his iron armor. He and Jesnelin took shelter under a pine tree, gnawing on dried fish.

Fearful that cooking fires would reveal their position to the Polish cavalry, Olaf’s army could only chew on dried meat and drink water mixed with alcohol.

As Olaf struggled with a tough piece of fish skin, he heard the sound of galloping hooves approaching. Five Finnish cavalrymen quickly arrived.

Olaf put down the dried fish and, along with Jesnelin, hurried over. The cavalrymen, without dismounting to salute, reported, “Marshal! General Pasanen has lured six thousand Polish cavalry here!”

Olaf clenched his right fist into his left palm and said, “Excellent! Pasanen deserves credit for this. Are all of them cavalry? How many winged hussars?”

The leader of the Finnish cavalrymen replied, “All are cavalry. Only about a thousand have wings on their backs—the rest are likely Crimean Tatars!”

Olaf nodded and said, “That makes sense. If Poland could send six thousand winged hussars to attack Memel Castle right after a major war with Russia and the Ottomans, their national strength would undoubtedly be the greatest in Europe.”

“Governor Jesnelin, let us prepare!”

Jesnelin responded solemnly, “Yes, Marshal. You must return immediately and inform Pasanen that we have set an ambush in the valley. Ask them to lure the Polish cavalry into the valley.”

“Understood, Governor.”

With the sound of galloping hooves fading into the distance, the Finnish cavalrymen quickly disappeared from sight.

Olaf and Jesnelin also retreated into the forests on both sides, issuing numerous commands. The musketeers and gunners emerged from the dense woods, their gazes fixed on the distant hill, waiting silently.

Chapter 361: Olaf’s First Battle Against Lithuania

The thunderous sound of hooves suddenly echoed across the open wilderness, like a roaring tide, sending the villagers hiding in the mountain huts and the citizens within Memel Castle trembling in fear, praying desperately to God for protection.

On the grassy dirt roads of the wild fields, thousands of Finnish cavalrymen advanced rapidly, occasionally stopping to fire their flintlock firearms backward.

A burst of smoke rose, and several corpses were left behind in the Finnish cavalry’s ranks, but they also took down a few pursuers before continuing onward.

Amid the intermittent fighting, the Polish cavalry unit behind them gradually fell into disarray. At the forefront were the winged hussars, but during the pursuit, they had unknowingly suffered over a hundred casualties.

The winged hussars were an elite cavalry force composed of Polish nobles and military offspring, the most formidable unit in the Polish army. With only around ten thousand in the entire country, this time only a little over a thousand had been deployed. Losing over a hundred before even engaging in battle was a painful blow to the Poles.

The winged hussars were a unique Polish unit. Each wore plate armor, with feathered wings on their backs, and their horses were also clad in heavy armor. Each carried two flintlock firearms, a saber, a mace, and a lance.

Not to mention that every winged hussar was an elite soldier, but their equipment alone was invaluable. The cost of one set of gear could equip over twenty musketeers.

Although the Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth had a large population and was at the peak of its power, it still only had around six thousand regular winged hussars and another five to six thousand semi-regular ones. Thus, deploying over a thousand winged hussars this time was already a significant mobilization.

Having failed to capture the Finnish cavalry harassing them and instead suffering losses during the pursuit, the leader of the Polish winged hussars was furious, but he quickly regained his composure.

Knowing that the Finnish cavalry could move so swiftly only by abandoning their heavy armor, he ordered the Tatar cavalry at the rear to charge forward while the winged hussars fell back to support.

With this adjustment, the Polish cavalry’s pursuit speed increased dramatically. Within minutes, they were rapidly closing in on the Finnish cavalry, seemingly about to catch up.

Noticing the accelerating Polish cavalry behind them, Pasanen’s Finnish cavalry soon abandoned their counterattacks and increased their escape speed, even discarding weapons and armor to gain speed.

The Polish cavalry, seeing this, grew even more excited, whipping their horses relentlessly, eager to catch up and slaughter the enemy.

After ten minutes, several Finnish cavalrymen approached from the front. As Pasanen listened to their reports while riding, the unit changed direction and headed toward the southern slopes of Erik Village.

Another ten minutes passed, and they were on the verge of being caught. Gunfire erupted behind them, taking down dozens of soldiers.

Pasanen turned his head, his expression anxious, about to order his guards to stay behind and cover their retreat. Suddenly, as they turned past a grove of trees, he spotted a high slope ahead.

“Increase speed! Quickly!”

The Finnish cavalry accelerated continuously. After losing over two hundred men to the Polish pursuers’ arrows and firearms, the unit finally charged up the slope.

Although the Polish cavalry behind them pursued with increasing fervor, upon seeing the high slope ahead, the winged hussars suddenly slowed down. After a brief observation and confirming there were no ambushes on the slope, they resumed their charge.

Time flew like a white horse galloping through a mountain gap.

In the blink of an eye, the Finnish cavalry had crossed the hilltop and rushed into the valley below.

Led by the Crimean Tatar cavalry, the Polish cavalry shouted as they chased after them, preparing to use the downhill momentum to slaughter the Finnish cavalry.

Suddenly, several cavalrymen spotted rows of musketeers standing in the forests on the gentle slopes on both sides. Wearing Swedish uniforms, they were aiming their firearms at them.

“Ambush! Ambush!”

The cavalrymen who spotted the enemy shouted, trying to pull the reins to stop, but in the midst of a downhill charge, no one could halt their momentum. The two shouting knights were violently pulled from their horses, causing the following cavalry to trip and fall.

After hundreds of cavalry and horses were trampled, the remaining thousands finally slowed down. But clearly, Olaf had no intention of giving them time to react.

With a wave of Olaf’s hand, the flag in the front commander’s hand dropped, and the three rows of musketeers began a volley of fire.

“Bang…”

Smoke billowed, and bullets rained down. Before the Polish cavalry could recover from their panic, they fell from their horses like dumplings, some even collapsing with their mounts.

After three volleys, before the smoke had even cleared, only half of the Polish cavalry on the slope remained.

This was because the ambush had been discovered early, preventing nearly half of the cavalry from entering the firing range. Otherwise, this volley alone would have been enough to completely rout the Polish cavalry.

The remaining Polish cavalry took advantage of the musketeers retreating to reload and quickly reorganized, preparing to counterattack and charge during the gap in the musketeers’ reloading.

In the eyes of the Polish cavalry, musketeers who had fired their shots were like lambs waiting to be slaughtered. So even though they had been caught off guard by the ambush and suffered heavy losses, the winged hussars were still high in morale, brandishing their flintlock firearms on their charging horses and firing at the Swedish musketeers ahead.

“Bang!”

A cannon roared, followed by dozens, then hundreds of cannon shots. Cannonballs of various sizes flew out from the forest, smashing into the two charging cavalry units.

For a moment, dirt, grass, and blood mixed with limbs splattered everywhere.

A precise barrage instantly killed over a thousand Polish cavalry, leaving the survivors too terrified to continue their charge. They turned their horses and fled.

However, near Erik Village, Jesnelin personally led three thousand well-rested Finnish cavalry waiting in ambush. After the remaining thousand or so Polish survivors fled, Olaf did not order a pursuit but instead commanded his men to finish off the wounded Polish soldiers.

About ten minutes later, distant gunfire and battle cries were heard. Half an hour later, Jesnelin, wearing a blood-splattered half-plate armor, led his troops over and said to Olaf, “Marshal, the fleeing thousand winged hussars have been mostly slain, with only a hundred or so captured.”

Olaf laughed heartily and said, “The crisis at Memel Castle has been resolved. Let’s rest for half an hour and then head north to eliminate the Cossacks in Latvia. Send the wounded to Memel Castle and have the Prussians take care of them to avoid slowing down our march and being caught by Polish pursuers.”

Jesnelin bowed in admiration and said, “I’ll arrange it immediately. Your bold tactics and brilliant strategies have truly impressed me, Marshal.”

Olaf smiled slightly and said, “With our small numbers and limited territory, and insufficient support, even if we defend, we won’t be able to hold out. Since we can’t defend, we might as well not defend at all. Abandoning Latvia to the Cossacks, who have the weakest combat power, and then striking the superior Polish forces with a surprise attack on the winged hussars—defeating the Polish cavalry will make the Cossacks like bugs in our pocket, easily crushed.”

After speaking, Olaf silently thought to himself: Anyway, if we fail, it’s not the Icelanders who will die. If we succeed, it’s a great achievement. What do I have to lose? But I still have to thank Comrade Mao. I’m just borrowing a little from his tactic of ‘you fight your way, I fight mine’…

Chapter 362: Scorched Earth

Olaf’s army had marched hundreds of miles, and through bold maneuvers and a surprise attack, they lured the Polish cavalry into an ambush zone. In the end, they crushed a Polish cavalry unit of six thousand men, composed of over a thousand winged hussars and four thousand Crimean cavalry.

The Polish cavalry was nearly annihilated, lifting the siege on Memel Castle in Prussia and defeating the main force of the Polish offensive. This strategic victory would surely bolster Sweden’s prestige and severely damage the morale of Poland-Lithuania once news spread.

After a brief cleanup of the battlefield and a meal, Olaf’s army rested for about two hours before regrouping and continuing north. Their next target was the Cossacks in Latvia, who were enjoying their spoils.

Hundreds of wounded soldiers were sent to Memel Castle, while the rest of the army pressed northward, returning to Latvia at an even faster pace than before.

Upon entering Latvia, the army split into ten units of a thousand men each, advancing north in a sweeping formation.

The Cossacks were much like the Manchus—skilled horsemen but also adept at infantry combat. Poland recruited them primarily as foot soldiers.

As Olaf’s forces fanned out, they quickly encountered small bands of Cossacks laden with loot and larger groups pillaging towns and villages, assaulting women and extorting wealth.

The Cossacks, who had been as fierce as wolves before the villagers, were no match for the Swedish regulars. Most fled at the first sign of resistance, begging for mercy, while the few who fought back were swiftly cut down.

By the time Olaf’s main force returned to Estonia, all of Latvia had been reclaimed. Though the civilian casualties were severe, with tens of thousands dead or displaced, the wealth the Cossacks had plundered over days now fell into Olaf’s hands.

Back at the Governor’s residence, Olaf waited a day for all his troops to return to Estonia.

Jesnelin arrived with a full report. As he entered, Olaf was sitting on the lawn in the courtyard, grilling skewers of lamb over a charcoal stove. Without cumin, he seasoned them with black pepper and mint juice, giving them a unique flavor.

“Perfect timing. Have a taste,” Olaf offered, handing Jesnelin a few skewers.

Jesnelin shook his head. “I’m too old; my teeth can’t handle it.”

Olaf didn’t press him and took the skewers back. “What’s the news?”

“The units we sent to clear out the Cossacks have all returned. Casualties were light—over eighty dead, a hundred or so wounded. We killed more than two thousand Cossacks, captured eight hundred, and seized thirty thousand pounds of grain, eighteen thousand gold coins, and fifty thousand silver coins.”

Olaf nodded. “Have the soldiers’ shares been deducted? We should be generous.”

Jesnelin smiled. “Those youngsters have sticky fingers. If I hadn’t gone myself, we might not have gotten even this much.”

Looting was customary in war, but so was turning over a portion of the spoils. Olaf saw no reason to break tradition, especially when it served no purpose.

“What’s the situation in Latvia now?” Olaf asked.

Jesnelin’s voice was grim. “The Cossacks looted for three days. It’s bad—most villages and towns have little food left.”

Olaf nodded. “Then let’s gather all the Latvian civilians, give them rations, and send them away. What do you think?”

Jesnelin was confused. “You mean…?”

Olaf smiled faintly. “What if the entire southern part of Estonia became a wasteland?”

Jesnelin gasped. “You want to abandon Latvia?”

Olaf neither confirmed nor denied. “Our forces are too small. Unless we push the Latvian people to the brink, they won’t stand with us. And next time Poland attacks, they’ll likely send a proper army. Holding Latvia will be difficult. Better to leave them a barren wasteland—it’ll slow them down. Then we can find opportunities to engage them in Latvia. We might not win big, but a few small victories are guaranteed. What do you think?”

Jesnelin nodded. “You’ve thought this through, Marshal. But Latvia has a population of over a hundred thousand. How will we relocate them?”

Olaf pondered. “Numbers aren’t a problem. Half can go to the Pomerania Duchy under Oxenstierna and Duke Bogusław. The German front needs laborers and support personnel—sending a few thousand will help. The rest can be shipped to Iceland. My father will settle them there. We need to turn Latvia into a physical wasteland. When the Poles enter, they won’t find supplies, clean water, food, or even a place to rest.”

Jesnelin agreed but asked, “To achieve what you’ve described, just relocating the people won’t be enough, will it? What else needs to be done? I’ll arrange it.”

Olaf hesitated. “When we gather the people, have them burn their houses. Many Cossacks and civilians have died—we don’t have time to bury them. Toss some corpses into springs and wells. Do the same for rivers and streams like the Danube and the Daugava—dump bodies upstream to contaminate all water sources in Latvia.

By the time we withdraw with the civilians to Estonia, Latvia must be a plague-ridden hell—no clean rivers, no towns fit for occupation, no land, no food, no people. Let’s see how the Poles plan to occupy it then.”

Jesnelin shuddered inwardly. He almost mentioned that this would harm the Duchy of Kurland and Semigallia downstream on the Daugava, but seeing Olaf’s faint smile, he realized Olaf intended to make Latvia a death trap, drawing the Poles to Kurland and Semigallia instead.

Without another word, Jesnelin agreed and ordered someone to fetch paper and ink to record the details. “Poland will take ten days, half a month, or even a month to gather their forces. Rest easy—I’ll personally oversee this scorched-earth operation.”

Olaf noticed Jesnelin’s growing respect for him and said coolly, “Thank you for your hard work.”

“Not at all. If we distribute the captured grain to the people, we won’t have much left. Should we send someone to Szczecin to ask Oxenstierna for more military supplies?”

“No need. Oxenstierna doesn’t expect us to hold Latvia, so he won’t allocate extra supplies for us.

If we want to avoid blame and earn merit, we must rely on ourselves. In a few days, Dutch and Icelandic merchants will come to sell grain, fish, and other supplies. We can use the captured funds to buy more.”

Jesnelin considered this. The Dutch were indeed quick to sniff out opportunities—they always arrived first to sell supplies during wars.

As for the Icelanders, there was no need to worry. Olaf was the heir to the Icelandic Duchy. If he said Icelanders would come to sell dried fish, then it would happen.

After discussing a few more details, Jesnelin left the residence and stood under the shade of a tree outside.

Though the overcast sky brought a cool breeze, the old governor broke into a cold sweat. He couldn’t help but sigh, “I never expected him to be so ruthless—even planning to drag down the Duchy of Kurland and Semigallia.

Kurland and Semigallia haven’t stabbed us in the back. Why provoke Poland to raid them?

No wonder the Grand Duke made him Christina’s godfather to counter Oxenstierna. His methods are truly brilliant!

But he’s so merciless. If Oxenstierna ever falls, I fear Christina won’t be able to control him…”

Chapter 363: Olaf’s Second Strike on Lithuania

Under Olaf’s arrangements and Jesnelin’s execution, the Latvians, who had been robbed once by the Cossacks and knew fear, obediently brought their families and meager belongings, leaving their homeland and heading to Tallinn Castle, the political, military, and economic stronghold of Estonia.

Tallinn Castle was located on the northwest coast of Estonia and was the center of Sweden’s vast lands on the eastern shore of the Baltic Sea. Since Olaf had annihilated the Polish cavalry and the Cossacks, he had been strolling through the city every day with his personal guards, showing concern for every soldier while chatting with Polish merchants, especially the Cossack prisoners, inquiring about the situation in Poland, focusing on understanding the living conditions of the Cossacks in eastern Poland.

After a large number of Latvians migrated, Dutch grain ships also arrived, quickly suppressing the soaring grain prices in Estonia, which had doubled.

Since there were not enough ships in the Estonia region, Olaf had to spend money to hire Dutch merchant ships. In the end, five Dutch cargo ships and more than twenty Swedish, Finnish, and Estonian ships transported over twenty thousand Latvians who had gathered at Tallinn Castle to Szczecin.

Since Olaf had already reported the situation of transporting the Latvians to Oxenstierna in the battle report last week, this time he directly sent five hundred men to board the ships to maintain order.

After a large number of Latvian refugees left Tallinn Castle, more than twenty Icelandic merchant ships of various sizes also arrived at Tallinn Harbor.

Fish jerky, meat jerky, sheep, wool, liquor, malt sugar, cowhide, and other goods further stabilized the prices in Estonia. At the same time, due to Olaf’s army’s procurement, the Icelandic merchants also made a fortune.

Olaf was never polite to his own people. He treated several ship captains to a meal of fried pork chops with caviar, then kept them in Tallinn for another week. Knowing that the Latvians had once again filled Tallinn and pushed the prices up by more than double, he had the quartermaster issue basic rations to the refugees, allowing the second batch of nearly twenty thousand Latvian refugees to board the Icelandic merchant ships and leave.

After two rounds of military ration distribution, the military rations of Olaf’s army, even including the captured and looted food, had been exhausted. However, because he had spent money to purchase a lot of fish jerky, liquor, grain, and other supplies, they could still eat for more than a month. According to Oxenstierna’s arrangements, supplies would arrive in half a month, so the food in Tallinn Castle was enough to eat.

In two weeks, Tallinn Castle had taken in more than forty thousand Latvian refugees, from which about three thousand men who had lost their families and wanted revenge were selected and recruited into the army.

As the situation in various places was summarized, Olaf also knew that there were not many Latvians left, and it was estimated that in a few days, another ten to twenty thousand people would come.

Jesnelin’s estimate of over a hundred thousand was probably optimistic. Of course, it was also possible that many Latvian people were unwilling to cross the sea to leave, so they fled to the eastern part of Russia.

Some even hid in the forests and became bandits. However, no matter where they went, the original towns and farms of Latvia had been reduced to ashes, and springs, wells, and rivers had become graveyards. The water sources were polluted, and viruses should have already appeared in Latvia.

Olaf was worried about bringing the virus over, so he hurriedly ordered the cavalry to speed up the migration of the Latvian refugees and required that all Estonian cities bordering Latvia be closed and locked down in five days. The three city-states of Dardel, Viljandi, and Pärnu, which automatically intercepted the entire territory to the west, were the first line of defense. Anyone coming from the south, whether civilians or Polish soldiers, would be shot dead without exception.

While Olaf was busy fortifying the walls and recruiting refugees, Jesnelin, as the second commander, also arrived at Viljandi to take charge. He commanded and managed the three frontier fortresses, and within a hundred miles of the three fortresses, there were no signs of human habitation or usable water sources.

Therefore, as long as the Swedish army in Estonia firmly held the three fortresses, it would be a fantasy for the Poles to attempt to attack Estonia. And if they wanted to capture the three fortresses, they would be greatly affected by the lack of supplies and the plague.

Olaf’s tactical arrangement was not actually profound; it was purely a foolish move that harmed a thousand of his own to injure eight hundred of the enemy. However, since Latvia was not Sweden’s homeland, and the departure of the Latvians had played a role in supplementing the labor force for Sweden and Iceland, except for the Latvians, everyone else benefited.

But destroying Latvia had indeed played an important role: it made it no longer easy for the Poles to march north and attack.

Olaf’s thinking was simple. Since it was difficult to defend Latvia, it was better to destroy the place, which could slow down the Polish attack and, in the worst case, leave a ruined land for Poland.

Twenty days after Olaf led the army to eliminate the Cossacks, Poland finally prepared an army of more than twenty-five thousand to march north and attack Latvia and Estonia. However, within two days of marching north, they began to suffer from diseases and plagues due to river pollution. After sending scouts to investigate, they were shocked to discover that the entire Latvia had become a dead land.

Diseases, plagues, and the lack of clean water sources made it impossible for the Polish army to march. However, they quickly changed direction and entered the Duchy of Kurland and Semigallia.

After entering the duchy, they requisitioned all the ships of the duchy and had the Riga shipyard work day and night to build ships, intending to take the water route to bypass Latvia and directly attack Estonia.

The Polish winged hussars and the peasant infantry were of good quality, but the Cossack infantry and Crimean cavalry were restless. Within a few days of living in the duchy, there were malicious incidents of looting and burning, causing the Duchy of Kurland and Semigallia to be extremely resentful of the Polish army, and the contradictions between the two sides became increasingly prominent.

In this situation, Olaf did not sit idly by. On the one hand, he ordered the reinforcement of the large and small towns along the coast, and on the other hand, he sent the Polish and Russian translators he had trained to Memel Castle, preparing to send them to the future Ukraine region to spread rumors, provoke conflicts between the Cossacks and the Polish nobles and large landowners, and see if they could provoke an early Cossack uprising.

The Prussia Duchy did not want to lose Memel Castle, so these days Olaf and the Prussian general Otto von Lauer, who came from the rural Junkers, had been exchanging letters frequently, agreeing on many cooperative matters.

The Swedish navy was now the sole hegemon of the Baltic Sea. After Olaf received Lauer’s report that the Polish side was preparing ships in the Duchy of Kurland and Semigallia to attack by sea, he sent a letter to Szczecin, requesting Oxenstierna to send thirty warships.

This time, Oxenstierna gave him a lot of face, seemingly to repay Olaf for sending the Latvian refugees. The thirty warships were all large warships from Sweden and Danish navy warships captured from Helsingborg.

These warships were equipped with the most advanced cannon heavy guns and carried enough cannonballs and gunpowder.

After the fleet arrived in Tallinn, Olaf personally led two thousand royal constabulary and one thousand Latvian militia to board the warships and sailed south to the western capital of the Duchy of Kurland and Semigallia, Riga Harbor.

Upon arrival, without any greeting, the ships turned sideways, lined up the cannons, and continuously poured cannon fire at the unprepared medium and small warships in the harbor.

Several hours of cannon fire actually sank five warships of the Duchy of Kurland and Semigallia, and the rest were so frightened that they were pulled back to the shallow water area.

Olaf personally led the navy in a barrage of cannon fire, crippling the newly formed Polish navy. The Polish army had not yet engaged with the Swedish army but had already suffered losses and low morale.

Facing this strange and disgusting situation for the first time in decades of leading troops, the highest commander of the Polish army, Marshal Stanislaw Koniecpolski, was furious, cursing: “Shameless Icelandic bastards! Damned Viking barbarians!”

Chapter 364: Olaf’s Second Strike on Lithuania 2

Stanisław Koniecpolski was Poland’s highest military commander and its most formidable general. Before Sweden joined the Thirty Years’ War, the Polish army had suffered repeated defeats at the hands of the Swedish forces led by Gustavus Adolphus II. It was only through Koniecpolski’s brilliant tactics, fighting against overwhelming odds, that he managed to hold Gustavus Adolphus II to a draw, securing a peace treaty.

The Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth’s geographical position was precarious. To the north lay Sweden, to the east Russia, and to the south the Ottoman Empire—none of them friendly neighbors. The German principalities to the west had also seen little peace in recent decades. Since the establishment of the Polish-Lithuanian Union, the nation had been embroiled in constant warfare on all fronts. Fortunately, Poland was Europe’s breadbasket, its fertile black soil and large population sustaining centuries of conflict, even briefly occupying Moscow.

However, recent years of harsh winters and frequent disasters had led to reduced harvests, with some regions experiencing total crop failure. The issue of land consolidation was growing increasingly severe.

As the supreme commander, Koniecpolski had been engaged in battles against the Ottoman Empire and Russia on the southern and eastern fronts. It was only after the northern front suffered a devastating defeat, with nearly ten thousand troops annihilated by the Swedes, that the Polish court, shaken, redeployed him to the north.

To ensure the war’s success, King Władysław IV Vasa of Warsaw personally allocated funds from the royal treasury to recruit mercenaries from Bohemia and Crimea, as well as militia and Cossacks from the royal lands and Kiev region. He also decreed that Lithuania must contribute by raising its own forces. Ultimately, without disrupting the harvest or weakening the four regular army divisions on the eastern and southern fronts, they managed to assemble an army of over twenty thousand, placing it under Koniecpolski’s command.

The Polish king was elected by the noble assembly, so the true power in the Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth lay in the hands of the “Sarmatian” noble democracy. The assembly was the nobles’ tool for controlling the state, and the king could neither alter nor refuse its decrees.

Thus, despite years of warfare and domestic disasters, the Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth was not as strong as it appeared.

Every noble was a large landowner, and after negotiating peace with Russia and the Ottomans, they wished to recuperate, tending to their estates and sending soldiers home to farm. Under the nobles’ demands, the regular army and peasant militia had long since disbanded, preparing for the late July to late August harvest and hay-cutting seasons.

Though Władysław IV Vasa wanted to exploit the chaos, launching a major campaign to reclaim and expand territory, after the first probing attack resulted in the near-total destruction of ten thousand troops, the noble assembly was furious, demanding a halt to the offensive.

But Władysław IV Vasa refused to back down, ultimately using royal funds to raise a new army.

As the king’s most trusted commander, Koniecpolski naturally sought to defeat Olaf and Jesnelin, reclaiming Latvia. However, upon entering Latvia, he discovered the Swedes’ ruthless tactics—turning the land into a wasteland, a strategy Koniecpolski had never encountered, especially not from the Swedes.

Due to a leak, the half-completed naval preparations were ambushed by Olaf, leaving them crippled. Koniecpolski was eager for a decisive battle with Olaf, but he found himself powerless—unable to maintain morale while advancing into Latvia’s uninhabited zones to attack Estonia, and unable to engage in naval warfare.

After his initial fury subsided, Koniecpolski heeded the advice of his deputy, Jakub Sobieski, and changed his target. Abandoning the plan to attack Sweden, he decided to first take Memel Castle.

Jakub Sobieski was also a renowned Polish general and the father of the future King John III Sobieski. His father-in-law was Koniecpolski’s mentor and former superior, the previous Grand Commander of Poland. Thus, Koniecpolski held Sobieski in high regard.

After adjusting their strategy, Koniecpolski ordered Sobieski to lead an eight-thousand-strong vanguard to scout the area around Memel Castle and establish a camp. Meanwhile, Koniecpolski himself met with Frederick Kettler, Duke of Kurland and Semigallia, demanding that the duke raise an army to join the assault on Memel Castle.

Kettler was deeply reluctant but dared not refuse outright. He could only find excuses before reluctantly assembling a force of three thousand men.

The commander was furious, lashing out with his riding crop and berating the duke. He then allowed his troops to plunder several cities in the duchy before leading the main army, the three thousand ducal soldiers, and five thousand conscripted laborers out of Riga harbor, marching south until they reached the outskirts of Memel Castle.

By then, Sobieski had already set up camp in a village northeast of Memel Castle, just ten miles from Greenwood Town.

Koniecpolski first ordered the laborers and soldiers to fell trees and construct siege engines. He also sent messengers to Warsaw, requesting more cannons and gunpowder. Clearly, he intended to rely on firepower to take Memel Castle.

The garrison commander of Memel Castle had long since detected the Polish army’s approach and dispatched soldiers to leave via the rear harbor, intending to report to the homeland and Marshal Olaf, stationed in Estonia.

However, Olaf was currently in Riga harbor, drinking and conversing with Duke Kettler. Since Koniecpolski and the Polish soldiers had caused significant damage to the duchy, after their departure, Kettler hastily sent envoys to the Swedish fleet outside the harbor with gifts, pleading for peace.

Olaf also wished to win over this neighbor, so he personally disembarked to attend Kettler’s banquet.

Amidst the feasting and laughter, a Finnish soldier entered with a messenger. After Etuku clarified the situation, he approached Olaf and whispered, “Koniecpolski’s army has reached the outskirts of Memel Castle. General Otto von Lauer has sent someone to report to you, requesting our support.”

Olaf nodded calmly, then instructed Etuku to take the man away to rest.

After they left, Olaf turned to Duke Kettler with a smile and asked, “Your Grace, are you having a difficult time?”

Sandwiched between great powers, one misstep could mean annihilation. Kettler naturally found his position unbearable. He sighed, “Regent Marshal, you jest. I truly do not wish to be at odds with Sweden. It’s just that Koniecpolski, that old brute, is too overbearing—”

Olaf nodded. “Would you like to break free from Poland? Expand your territory? Become as powerful as Prussia or Saxony?”

Without giving Kettler time to respond, Olaf continued, “Don’t rush. I am also the heir to the Icelandic Duchy and the Pomerania Duchy. I will analyze this from your perspective, not use you as a pawn. Rest assured!”

“I have a way to throw Poland into chaos. When that happens, they won’t have the strength to concern themselves with external matters. Once our Swedish Empire concludes its campaigns in Germany, we can deploy a large force southward from Estonia. A weakened Poland, facing Sweden, Russia, the Ottomans, and Austria—you can imagine its fate. So, would you like a share of the spoils?”

Olaf’s words stirred Kettler’s heart. After deep thought, he cautiously asked, “What do you need me to do?”

Olaf laughed heartily. “Poland has many Jews, doesn’t it? They’re wealthy, fond of usury, but their status is low, correct? I’d like you to take the initiative. In the name of the Polish-Lithuanian Commonwealth, act against the Jews in your duchy. Seize their property, execute a few prominent ones—charge them with illegal usury. My people will handle the rest. Just wait and see.”

“This…?” Kettler hesitated. “Killing a few Jews is easy, and seizing their property will please those indebted to them. But how will targeting Jews harm Poland? There are only five or six hundred thousand Jews in all of Poland. They’re just merchants, disliked by the Sarmatian nobles. How could they destabilize the nation?”

Olaf smiled without answering. After much deliberation, Kettler nodded. “Since you’ve instructed me, I’ll arrange it immediately.”

Olaf nodded. “Good. Once the Jews in your duchy have fled, allow my troops to occupy Riga harbor—just a performance. Then, I’ll rescue the wealthy Jewish prisoners from your jails. After they and my army leave, all you need to do is wait patiently. Does that work for you?”

Olaf’s tone was warm, but Kettler dared not refuse. Gritting his teeth, he said, “As you wish. Just ensure your troops don’t plunder my people.”

“Rest assured, we are friends. We would never do anything harmful to a friend.”

Olaf raised a glass with a smile, and Kettler hastily lifted his own, clinking it against Olaf’s. As the wine swirled and the glasses chimed, Olaf and Kettler exchanged glances, their expressions starkly different, before draining their cups.

Chapter 365: Olaf’s Second Strike on Lithuania 3

Olaf and Duke Kettler, despite their significant age difference, had grown as close as brothers after a single banquet.

The duke had prepared the finest room for Olaf, along with slender-waisted, fair-skinned maidservants. Since Olaf’s army was stationed at the docks and he had brought a hundred or so guards into the castle, he wasn’t concerned about Kettler’s loyalty to Poland. Thus, he cheerfully embraced the fragrant maidservants and went to bed.

The next morning, Olaf bid farewell to Duke Kettler and led his army out of Riga, heading for Memel Castle Harbor.

The harbor of Memel Castle was several dozen miles from the city itself. As Olaf disembarked, he was still waiting for his three thousand troops to come ashore and organize their ranks when he spotted General Otto von Lauer, the supreme commander of East Prussia, galloping toward him with his guards.

Olaf had met this East Prussian commander three times before—once during his brother’s betrothal, and again when General Lauer had served as an escort for gifts during Gustavus Adolphus II’s coronation in Stockholm.

The last time they met, Olaf had been introduced to him by young William, and they had shared a drink together.

General Lauer dismounted and quickly approached, bowing as he said, “Respected Regent Marshal, it is an honor to have you here. I extend the gratitude of Duke William for your kindness!”

Olaf inclined his head in acknowledgment from atop his mount before dismounting to shake Lauer’s hand. “The front lines are in dire straits. Why have you come to greet me in person? You must be exhausted!”

“It is all for the empire. The Poles are still constructing camps, digging trenches, and building siege engines and trebuchets. It seems they won’t attack for another three to five days.”

Lauer smiled faintly. “I hear you’ve destroyed the Polish navy, Marshal. Truly impressive.”

Olaf chuckled. “It seems the Polish army is preparing for a prolonged battle. Koniecpolski is indeed Poland’s finest general. Knowing he can’t take Estonia, he’s set his sights on Memel Castle first. He’s patient, leaving no room for error. The siege will be a tough fight.”

With a sigh, Olaf continued, and Lauer’s expression darkened. “Though Memel Castle is difficult to defend, with your army’s support, we should be able to hold out for a month or two. If the German front gains an advantage, Lord Oxenstierna can mobilize reinforcements.”

Olaf dared not speculate on the German front’s outcome or Oxenstierna’s decisions. He only planned to rely on his own strategies, but outwardly, he agreed with Lauer to boost his confidence.

After a brief exchange, Lauer bowed again. “Please follow me to Memel Castle, Marshal. While the Poles haven’t attacked yet, I’d like you to arrange the city’s defenses.”

Olaf casually agreed, then turned to two colonels from the military police, Simmer and Odin. “Send someone back to Tallinn by ship to bring the remaining garrison. The Poles are truly determined to take Memel Castle.”

The two young Icelanders bowed in acknowledgment. Simmer gave Odin a meaningful glance before turning to leave.

Etuku, standing beside Odin, whispered, “What are you two up to?”

Odin grinned. “We made a bet—to see who can kill the most enemies on the battlefield. Simmer, you’re reminding me not to break my word.”

Etuku laughed heartily, rubbing his head. “That’s an interesting wager. What’s the prize?”

“Whoever loses gives the winner a box of tobacco.”

Etuku burst into laughter. “Count me in.”

As his confidants chatted behind him, Olaf mounted his usual reindeer, Haysen, and called out, “Still talking? Let’s move.”

The three thousand troops followed Olaf as General Lauer led them out of the harbor along a small dirt road heading east. They passed through a marshy area dotted with lakes, circling around before returning to the road.

After more than an hour of travel, they finally caught sight of the sprawling town ahead. In each of its four corners stood two bastions, flying the red-and-white eagle shields of the Brandenburg Duchy, signifying that Memel Castle was not only part of the Prussia Duchy but also Brandenburg territory. General Lauer himself hailed from Brandenburg.

East Prussia was vast, but its core cities were only Memel Castle and the largest port on the eastern Baltic coast behind it.

Poland’s ambition to annex East Prussia, Latvia, and Estonia was no easy feat. Though Olaf’s scorched-earth tactics in Latvia had halted the Polish advance northward, it also meant the Poles no longer had to worry about Finnish cavalry or Swedish musketeers striking from Latvia.

Thus, the Poles could now focus their efforts on Memel Castle. If they could take both the castle and its harbor, the rest of East Prussia would quickly fall into their hands.

Clearly, Lauer was aware of this, as was Duke William, who was stationed in West Prussia.

The day after Olaf’s three thousand reinforcements arrived in Memel Castle, Duke William dispatched a thousand Dutch mercenaries to bolster the city’s defenses. They brought with them twenty heavy mortars.

With these additions, the garrison in Memel Castle now exceeded ten thousand—a far cry from the forty thousand Polish troops outside. However, Lauer assured Olaf that he had recruited over eight thousand militiamen in the southern Alsding region, along with two thousand city guards, who could serve as reinforcements.

In this era of advanced firearms, traditional siege tactics no longer applied. Attacks now relied heavily on cannons, rendering old military strategies obsolete.

The forty thousand Polish troops, equipped with dozens of cannons, cavalry, musketeers, and infantry, were led by Poland’s finest general, Stanislaw Koniecpolski. No matter how one looked at it, holding Memel Castle seemed impossible.

The only question was how long they could hold out and whether they could endure until Swedish reinforcements arrived. But these were all unknowns before the battle began.

As the remaining Tallinn garrison arrived by ship at Memel Castle’s harbor, the well-prepared Polish army launched their first assault.

Koniecpolski was experienced in capturing bastions. He had already ordered his soldiers to dig trenches outside Memel Castle’s range, construct tall fortifications, and build a high platform in the northeastern corner—the highest point outside the city—for placing trebuchets.

With the sound of horns, the Polish army advanced to the open ground beyond Memel Castle’s range. Cavalry circled the entire city, musketeers stood at the ready, and infantry, shielded by wooden barriers, began digging trenches toward the castle with their shovels.

As the soldiers dug, the trebuchets on the northeastern platform hurled stones into the city and at the walls. The tall fortifications before the east and north gates were pushed forward with several cannons, which began firing at Memel Castle.

Since the Polish army wasn’t particularly large, Koniecpolski only surrounded two gates, using the cavalry—unable to participate in the siege—for patrols and vigilance to prevent surprise attacks or escapes from the city.

Chapter 366: Olaf’s Second Strike on Lithuania 4

Stanislaw Koniecpolski was known for his fiery temper, but when it came to commanding troops in battle, he was the complete opposite—steady and methodical.

The Polish army now held a clear advantage and could have launched a direct assault on Memel Castle. Yet, Koniecpolski chose the most cautious approach, constructing gun emplacements and towers before using cannons and siege engines crafted by military artisans to bombard the fortress relentlessly.

After enduring a round of heavy shelling, Olaf ordered the castle’s cannons and mortars to be rolled out in retaliation. The mortars had a shorter range than the cannons, so they could only barely reach the Polish fortifications. In just three exchanges of fire, they had already destroyed most of the cannons in the enemy’s emplacements.

As for the long-range cannons, under Raoul’s command, the artillery brigade concentrated their firepower to shatter the siege engines’ platforms before counterattacking the Polish camp, killing over a hundred Polish soldiers.

The intensity of Memel Castle’s cannon fire caught the Polish army off guard. The sudden barrage left them struggling to respond as their siege engines, gun emplacements, and forward positions were systematically dismantled, resulting in heavy casualties. Stanislaw Koniecpolski himself ordered the front lines to retreat fifty feet.

Although the castle’s cannons had gained the upper hand in the exchange, the militia and infantry digging trenches were unaffected by the artillery fire. It was nearly impossible for the cannonballs to land directly in the trenches, and even if they did, the chances of hitting someone inside were slim. Despite several subsequent rounds of firing at the trenches, the Polish soldiers’ excavation continued unabated, slowing only slightly when the cannons fell silent. But as soon as the gunfire ceased, the trenches were once again filled with flying dirt and rocks, signaling the resumption of rapid digging.

Olaf lacked experience in bastion warfare, and his knowledge was mostly limited to naval battles. He summoned Raoul to discuss countermeasures.

Raoul shook his head, frowning. “This is bad. Koniecpolski’s tactics for attacking bastions are textbook-perfect. Unless we send in a suicide squad to eliminate the soldiers in the trenches, but the exchange rate will be painful. Once they dig to the base of the walls and use explosives to breach them, the castle will fall.”

Olaf furrowed his brow. “If there’s no better way, we’ll have to resort to brute force. Organize a suicide squad and offer generous rewards.”

Raoul nodded solemnly before hurrying off.

Half an hour later, the castle gates opened, and over two hundred warriors armed with pistols and sabers charged out. Before they could even reach the trenches, the Polish soldiers digging the tunnels raised their firearms and gunned down seventy or eighty of them.

The remaining warriors leaped into the trenches, and the sounds of fierce combat echoed through the air. Even from within the bastion, Olaf could faintly hear the clash, and through the gun ports, he could see the distant trenches filled with shadowy figures locked in battle.

After a few minutes, around a hundred men emerged from the trenches, all wounded but unmistakably Swedish soldiers.

Olaf ordered his men to cover their retreat, but a volley of gunfire rang out, and the brave Swedish warriors were riddled with bullets, their bodies collapsing to the ground as the earth beneath them turned crimson with blood.

Olaf gritted his teeth. “The Polish musketeers are within cannon range! Return fire!”

By the time Memel Castle’s cannons roared in response, the Polish musketeers had already finished firing and retreated. Only one unlucky soldier, who had twisted his ankle and lagged behind, was struck by a cannonball and reduced to a bloody pulp. The rest escaped unscathed.

Olaf let out a cold snort, about to speak when he noticed movement in the trenches again. Moments later, dirt and rocks were once more being hurled out, signaling the start of the second wave of digging.

Raoul rushed in, his voice urgent. “There are only a little over a hundred Polish soldiers in the trenches at a time, but we lose over two hundred brave warriors to kill them. Marshal, this isn’t sustainable!”

Olaf’s tone was sharp with displeasure. “I see that. By the time they dig to the walls, it’ll be too late!”

He fell into deep thought, racking his brain for ways to counter the trenches. But before long, Raoul exclaimed in alarm, pointing toward the Polish encampment. “They’re building more gun emplacements!”

Olaf looked up and saw the Poles constructing new platforms not far behind the ruins of the old ones. Peering through his telescope at the Polish rear, he gasped in shock. “That old dog, Stanislaw Koniecpolski!”

Olaf had spotted over thirty heavy cannons in the Polish rear—twenty-pounders, possibly even thirty-pounders. Combined with the smaller cannons and siege engines on the platforms earlier, he realized Koniecpolski had been using those as bait to probe the maximum range of Memel Castle’s cannons before deploying the real heavy artillery.

Without needing to see further, Olaf knew the new Polish gun emplacements would be taller, larger, and more fortified than the previous ones, granting them a range that would surpass the bastion’s defenses. Once the makeshift platforms were complete, Memel Castle would face the dual threat of relentless bombardment and the ever-approaching trenches.

Olaf massaged his temples. “That old fox Koniecpolski is really something else…”

Raoul stamped his foot. “Marshal, should I organize another suicide squad?”

Olaf shook his head slightly. “Not yet. How long do you think it will take them to dig the trenches to the bastion?”

Raoul pondered for a moment. “About four days, maybe five.”

Olaf smirked coldly. “Good. Since we have a few days, there’s no need to rush. Let them dig their trenches and build their towers. Didn’t Koniecpolski leave us two options? Gather soldiers who aren’t night-blind—around three to four thousand. Tonight, have them raid the camp… No…”

Olaf reconsidered. “Koniecpolski will definitely be on guard against a raid. Here’s what we’ll do: select over three thousand cavalry, divided into groups of five hundred. Starting at ten o’clock tonight, send out a thousand men every two hours. Have the two groups cover each other and harass the Polish camp. Even firing blank shots is fine—just keep them from sleeping.”

Raoul had never heard of such a tactic—if a raid wasn’t feasible, then harassment would have to suffice. But…

After a moment’s thought, he said, “Marshal, what if the Poles send cavalry to chase our men? Our groups are too small.”

“Light armor only—no need for heavy plate or long spears. Just a pistol and a mace per man. With five hundred in a group and two groups working together, there’s no danger unless the Poles can keep three thousand cavalry awake and waiting. Otherwise, they won’t be able to catch us.”

“Understood. I’ll select the men at once.”

After watching the tedious digging and construction for a while longer, Olaf turned and returned to the government hall inside the castle to sleep.

Half a day later, Etuku shook Olaf awake. “Master, it’s evening. Time to eat.”

Olaf rubbed the sleep from his eyes. “Has Raoul been here?”

“He came once, said the men were ready. I told him to come back later. Should I call him now?”

“What time is it?”

“Seven twenty-two.”

“No rush. Let’s eat first.”

Etuku quickly had a servant bring in a steaming platter of roasted lamb and a barrel of wine. After Olaf finished his meal, Etuku was about to speak when he heard a noise outside. He went to investigate and found Raoul, pulling him inside. “The master is awake. Speak quickly if you have something to say.”

Raoul, unable to break free from Etuku’s grip, was dragged into the room. Seeing Olaf putting on his leather armor, he said, “Marshal, the three thousand knights are ready.”

“Feed them well. Starting at ten o’clock tonight, send a few good archers with longbows to see if they can set the Polish camp ablaze with fire arrows.”

Olaf finished speaking casually, then put on his iron helmet. “I’m going to the bastion to take a look. You focus on this task.”

Raoul gave a slight bow before leaving the room.

Chapter 367: Olaf’s Second Strike on Lithuania 5

Olaf entered the bastion and observed for a long time before realizing that the Poles had advanced their trenches by several feet. However, at this rate, it would still take several days to reach the city walls, so he felt relieved.

Memel Castle had four gates, not exactly aligned to the cardinal directions but roughly positioned in each quadrant. At 10 PM, the western gate opened, and a thousand cavalrymen slipped out quietly.

Under the cover of darkness, the horses did not dare to gallop too fast. However, led by soldiers familiar with the terrain around Memel Castle, they encountered no obstacles, and the horses grew bolder. Gradually, the two cavalry units increased their speed.

As a renowned general, Stanislaw Koniecpolski was naturally prepared for Olaf’s night raids. He had stationed sentries around the camp, keeping watch and ensuring the tents were spaced far apart to prevent fires.

But Olaf had no intention of actually raiding the camp. Instead, the two cavalry units charged toward the Polish camp in a pincer formation, killing the sentries before they could raise the alarm.

The thunderous sound of a thousand horses galloping at night was deafening, immediately alerting the Polish army.

Koniecpolski, already on guard, quickly mobilized his troops to the camp gates to block the Swedish cavalry.

The Finnish cavalry did not manage to reach the Polish camp before being repelled by gunfire. They circled the camp, firing sporadically, with a few skilled riders approaching closer to launch fire arrows, though only two tents were set ablaze.

After half an hour of chaos, the Finnish cavalry retreated with loud shouts once the Polish cavalry emerged.

Koniecpolski, fearing another ambush, did not allow his cavalry to pursue. The noisy Polish camp gradually returned to calm, though he did increase the number of sentries and scouts outside.

About an hour later, warning shots rang out again. Koniecpolski, who had just lain down, hurriedly got up. By the time he organized the musketeers and cavalry to leave the camp, the Swedish cavalry had already destroyed two more tents and vanished.

Koniecpolski was furious, cursing loudly, but Jakub Sobieski managed to calm him down. Koniecpolski composed himself and ordered, “Sobieski, you personally lead three thousand musketeers and hide in the woods along the path the Swedish cavalry must take. When they come, open fire and kill them!”

Sobieski nodded and said, “But they have two units, and the other seems to be taking a different route. If we let them harass us a few times, the entire army won’t be able to rest. How will we attack the city tomorrow? I think this is a cunning ploy by the Swedish commander, Olaf.”

“Exactly,” Koniecpolski said, clenching his fists. “Olaf is a strange and treacherous man. He turned Latvia into a wasteland, so it’s no surprise he’s harassing us. Tonight, we’ll have to station more musketeers outside the camp. You handle this. The woods and grass can serve as ambush points. Rotate shifts every two hours. We have enough men. As long as we can intercept and drive them away, most of our soldiers can still get a good night’s sleep.”

Sobieski took note of the Marshal’s orders and left.

An hour later, dense gunfire erupted in the distance outside the camp. A few minutes later, the sound of galloping horses and gunfire filled the air, followed by the chaotic retreat of the horses.

Koniecpolski sat at the edge of his bed with a slight smile, waiting for twenty minutes before Sobieski hurried in and saluted. “Commander, this time our ambush killed over fifty Swedish cavalrymen, most of them dead. But eighteen are severely wounded. Should we save them?”

Koniecpolski said gravely, “We must save them. I need to extract information about the troops and cannons in Memel Castle from them. We know Olaf has brought reinforcements into the castle, but we don’t know the specifics. Without that, our tactics will be inaccurate.”

“Understood, sir.”

After agreeing, Sobieski smiled and said, “Your ambush plan worked well, sir. The enemy probably only sends a few hundred to a thousand men each time, but we can take down dozens of them and disrupt their harassment of our camp. Olaf’s schemes aren’t working.”

Koniecpolski shook his head slightly and said, “Olaf turned Latvia into an uninhabitable wasteland, showing his cunning. Even if we can use musketeers to stop his harassment, our combat effectiveness and morale will still decline. Tomorrow, continue building fortifications and digging trenches during the day. At night, station men outside the camp and in front of the fortifications, and set traps.”

While Koniecpolski and Sobieski were talking, a room in Memel Castle was brightly lit. Raoul and Olaf sat opposite each other, the atmosphere somewhat tense.

Olaf sighed and said, “The third round of harassment cost us fifty-three men. Koniecpolski’s reaction is too fast.”

Raoul frowned and asked, “Should we continue tomorrow?”

Olaf looked somewhat displeased and said, “We can’t stop now. We’ll continue tomorrow, but with fewer men. One or two hundred men, each with two horses, no guns, just light armor. Bring a small cannon, approach the camp under cover of darkness, fire a few shots. If we can injure someone, great. If not, the cannon fire will at least disrupt their sleep.”

Raoul nodded excitedly and said, “That’s good. With fewer men, the target is smaller, and in the dark, they won’t be easily detected. Our men are familiar with the terrain and can get close to the Polish camp. If God wills it, maybe a cannonball will hit Koniecpolski’s tent, and we can achieve a great victory!”

“Don’t fantasize. Koniecpolski is definitely staying in the innermost part of the Polish camp. At night, not only is the range an issue, but aiming is also impossible. We just want to disrupt their sleep and slow down their construction of fortifications and trenches.”

Olaf shook his head slightly.

A few hours later, dawn broke. After breakfast, the Polish army reappeared outside the range of Memel Castle’s cannons. The cavalry dispersed, and the infantry began digging trenches and building fortifications. However, from the firing ports of the bastions, it was clear that the Polish morale was low, and most of the soldiers were in poor spirits, digging much slower than the previous day.

Olaf and Raoul knew their strategy of exhausting the enemy was working. Since they could only wait passively, the soldiers had nothing to do during the day, so they might as well find some fun at night. Seeing the state of the Polish army, Olaf and Raoul were determined to continue harassing them at night.

In the following days, the battlefield at Memel Castle entered a tedious cycle.

During the day, one side watched while the other dug trenches and built towers. At night, the Swedes sent out small units of light cavalry, familiar with the terrain, carrying cannons to approach the Polish camp, fire a few shots, and retreat. They would return a few hours later.

Because the units were small and quiet, and they came during the darkest part of the night, the Polish ambushes were largely ineffective.

Three days later, the Polish side seemed to be struggling. During the day, only the cavalry patrolled, and the infantry did not come out. But at night, a large number of Polish soldiers appeared, digging trenches.

The musketeers were practically useless at night, so Olaf felt at ease and sent out suicide squads to kill the digging soldiers before retreating to the castle.

In the following days, the area outside Memel Castle became a stalemate. The trenches reached within two hundred paces of the castle but could not advance further.

However, the situation changed when the Poles built gun emplacements. While the Polish infantry dug trenches, the cannons on the emplacements began firing at the walls and gates, making it difficult for the Swedish suicide squads to charge out. Even if they did, they suffered heavy losses due to the concentrated cannon fire.

Thus, ten days after the Polish army surrounded Memel Castle, the speed of the Polish soldiers digging trenches increased once again.

Chapter 368: Helping the Jews Establish a Nation

Since regaining control of the battlefield, Koniecpolski had been in high spirits.

The Grand Commander felt victory was within his grasp, so he wanted to end the battle quickly to prevent any unforeseen complications. Thus, he sent several letters of surrender to Memel Castle, each one more severe than the last. By the third letter, he had even harshly insulted Marshal Olaf.

But Marshal Olaf would never see the Grand Commander’s letters, for he had already left Memel Castle and personally arrived at the harbor of Riga, speaking warmly with several Jewish merchants who had just been “rescued.”

“You are all good people. Though your faith differs, Judaism has never taught evil. And you conduct your business honestly—how can Poland claim your wealth was wrung from the pockets of its people? Nonsense! This is nothing but oppression and persecution by the Polish-Lithuanian nobility, a blatant robbery!”

Olaf spoke with such fervor, as if the Jews were his own kin.

The Jewish merchants present were among the wealthiest in Poland. Since Memel Castle and Riga Harbor were Poland’s finest ports, the Jews had established shops and warehouses in both. They often stationed themselves at the docks, and with Memel Castle under blockade for over a month, Riga Harbor had become a prized location.

Since late last month, many wealthy Jewish merchants from Poland had flocked to Riga Harbor, trading in grain, horses, leather, herbs, and liquor—goods whose prices had soared due to the war, yielding substantial profits.

Thus, after Olaf’s previous departure, Duke Kettler had rounded up all the Jewish merchants in Riga Harbor, capturing thirty-four wealthy merchants and one hundred sixty-nine of their representatives and children, seizing several hundred thousand gold coins in the process.

So when Olaf arrived yesterday with his warships, guns blazing (though most shots missed), Duke Kettler had been grinning from ear to ear.

After firing a few harmless cannonballs and bullets, Duke Kettler withdrew his forces from Riga Harbor.

Olaf’s troops entered the harbor without harming the civilians, merely announcing the Swedish Empire’s intention to requisition the port. Then, they rescued the emaciated Jews from the dungeons—though the most prominent among them had already been tortured to death, leaving only three great merchants alive.

The Jews, though nomadic across Europe and skilled in trade, were still far better off than the Roma, yet they remained discriminated against. Olaf’s fierce condemnation of the Poles and his aid and respect for the Jews left them deeply grateful. They rose to comfort the Regent Count, urging him not to be angry.

Seeing their genuine emotions, Olaf decided to press his advantage. He sat down and said, “Mr. Brown, Mr. Ehrlich, Mr. Fleming—you are elders among the Jews. Tell me, haven’t the Poles gone too far this time? First, they provoke war, then they abuse and torment you. It’s an outrage!”

The three named Jewish magnates stood in agreement, and soon, the entire room was denouncing the Poles.

After a moment, Olaf waved his hand and said, “Judging by the current situation, Poland has no intention of letting you live. All your hard-earned wealth will likely be seized by the Polish nobility. What are your plans for the future?”

The crowd was at a loss, but the three magnates were shrewd. They knew Olaf wouldn’t help them without reason. Brown, stroking his small beard, asked, “We truly don’t know what to do. Please, Regent Count, guide us.”

Olaf cleared his throat and said, “You are not native Europeans, and your faith differs from others. Dangers like this may arise again. I think you should find a way to establish a Jewish nation—or at least a nation where Jews are respected.”

“A Jewish nation of our own?”

The moment Olaf spoke, all the Jews were stunned. They had been displaced for over fifteen hundred years, and while the idea of restoring their nation was tempting, they knew their people were weak. Whether returning to Canaan or settling in Europe, the chances of establishing a nation were slim.

But now, Olaf, as a regent of the Swedish Empire and godfather to the emperor, was telling them—the Jews should have their own nation.

The Jews were deeply moved, their hearts pounding with excitement.

However, the eldest among them, Mr. Fleming, remained calm. The Jews had suffered too much, and he couldn’t bring himself to trust an Icelander, even one who had just saved him.

After a moment, Fleming asked, “Your suggestion is compelling, but we lack the ability. Could you clarify your intentions? If it’s within our power, we will do our utmost.”

Olaf silently praised Fleming’s shrewdness and didn’t hide his thoughts. He looked directly at the old man and said, “I didn’t rescue you out of pure sympathy, though I do feel for the Jews. But rest assured, I’m not a bad man. I can support you in establishing your own nation—or finding a spokesperson, supporting a nation where Jews can freely practice their faith and live freely.

I can make this happen, but on the condition that you swear allegiance to the Icelandic Duchy. I need you to help the Duchy with trade, purchase white slaves, and even assist us in turning Vinland—a desolate land in the West Indies—into a civilized city. This will require your wealth, talent, and wisdom. Do you understand?”

Olaf’s words were half-truths. He genuinely wanted the Jews to work for him, whether in commerce or technology, as they were ideal builders. But he didn’t truly intend to help them establish a nation, believing he lacked the strength of the United States and seeing little benefit in it.

However, Olaf would indeed give the Jews a chance to establish a nation—whether they succeeded would depend on their own efforts.

Olaf spoke sincerely, and after much discussion, the Jews decided to trust him—not out of naivety, but because they had no choice but to believe him now.

Moreover, they understood their own worth wasn’t high and couldn’t fathom the schemes of a Swedish noble. Thus, after reaching a consensus, Brown spoke on their behalf: “We thank you for your kindness. We are willing to follow your lead. How should we proceed with this nation-building plan? Where will it be? What must we do?”

Olaf was extremely pleased with the Jews. After dealing with the foolish natives and the eccentric Icelanders, he felt the Jews were the most suitable to teach and cooperate with.

“I plan to help you establish a nation in southeastern Poland, where the Cossacks live. You can negotiate with the Cossack leaders. You may not become rulers, but as high-ranking nobles, you should be able to share in the nation’s prosperity.”

The Jews were incredulous. The bald Ehrlich exclaimed, “Sir, you want us to establish a nation in Kiev? That’s Poland’s breadbasket—they’ll never agree!”

Olaf smiled. “Whether it’s a breadbasket or a dump, no one will agree to your independence. But Poland is currently at war with Sweden, and the Cossacks share neither their faith nor their oppression by the Polish nobility. I’ve heard that many Cossack lands in Kiev have been seized by Polish nobles. You know how much resentment the Cossacks hold.

And as I understand, the Jews have a decent relationship with the Cossacks. Most of what they need, they buy from you. So, you can fund a Cossack uprising, and I’ll provide weapons to support you. Together, we’ll aid the Cossack rebellion. Russia will also get involved. Poland alone can’t stand against both Sweden and Russia, so peace talks won’t take long.

As long as you aren’t quickly suppressed, Sweden can pressure Poland to recognize your independence during negotiations. With Sweden backing you and your efforts in nation-building, how can the Cossacks deny you a share in the nation’s prosperity? So, what do you think?”

UNTITLED

Chapter 1: Golden-Haired Olaf
Chapter 2: Bad News
Chapter 3: Feudal Society Devours People
Chapter 4: A Countermeasure
Chapter 5: Reputation Matters
Chapter 6: Brawl
Chapter 7: Scheming
Chapter 8: The Visit
Chapter 9: Starting School
Chapter 10: The Tale of the Hrutstakki Family

Chapter 11: Haldor’s Fame Spreads Across Iceland

Chapter 12: Purchasing Arms

Chapter 13: The Exploitation of the Works of Nature

Chapter 14: The Hammer of Thor
Chapter 15: Uncle
Chapter 16: Court Assembly
Chapter 17: The Governor of Iceland
Chapter 18: War Contribution
Chapter 19: Crisis Averted?
Chapter 20: Assassination
Chapter 21: Turning the Tables
Chapter 22: Poison
Chapter 23: Waiting for the Rabbit
Chapter 24: A Kind Father and a Filial Son
Chapter 25: Ambition
Chapter 26: Setting Sail
Chapter 27: Greenland
Chapter 28: The Inuit
Chapter 29: Pikku
Chapter 30: Arrival
Chapter 31: Grapes
Chapter 32: The Black Bear Kills
Chapter 33: Semi-Military Management
Chapter 34: Haldor Manor
Chapter 35: Haig
Chapter 36: Haig’s Fortress
Chapter 1: Overseas Visitors
Chapter 2: The Feast
Chapter 3: Relocation and the Harsh Winter
Chapter 4: Icelandic Musketeers

Chapter 5: Contemplating the Eight Banners System

Chapter 6: The Deer Hunters
Chapter 7: Spring
Chapter 8: Boiling Salt
Chapter 9: Beaver Pelts
Chapter 10: Opportunity
Chapter 11: The Decision
Chapter 12: Olaf’s First Pot of Gold
Chapter 13: Royal Jelly
Chapter 14: The First Trade Voyage
Chapter 15: Ireland
Chapter 16: Nobility
Chapter 17: Making Connections
Chapter 18: Striking It Rich
Chapter 19: The White Slave Trade
Chapter 20: Amsterdam
Chapter 21: The Bank
Chapter 22: Grain
Chapter 23: Windmills

Chapter 24: Good Things Don’t Worry About Selling

Chapter 25: Visiting the Big Shot
Chapter 26: Journey to Scotland
Chapter 27: Scottish White Slaves
Chapter 28: The Return Journey
Chapter 29: Celebration Banquet
Chapter 30: The Oarsman
Chapter 31: Viking Raid
Chapter 32: Planting Potatoes
Chapter 33: The Expedition
Chapter 34: Crumbling Like Dry Wood
Chapter 35: Conquest
Chapter 36: Slaves
Chapter 37: Distribution of Slaves

Chapter 38: Wielding Firearms Makes You a God to the Indians

Chapter 39: The Great Waterfall City
Chapter 40: The Descent of the Heavenly God
Chapter 41: Divide and Conquer
Chapter 42: Faith

Chapter 43: Managing the Savages Requires Good Methods

Chapter 44: Triumphant Return by Land and Sea

Chapter 45: Hrut City

Chapter 46: The Formation of a Thousand-Strong Legion

Chapter 47: The Frenchman’s Movements
Chapter 48: The French Motive
Chapter 49: The Cannons Roar
Chapter 50: Victory
Chapter 51: Haldor Unites Vinland

Chapter 52: The Establishment of the Viking Raid System (Part 1)

Chapter 53: The Establishment of the Viking Raid System (Part 2)

Chapter 54: Bountiful Potato Harvest, Impressive Yields

Chapter 55: Champlain’s Reaction

Chapter 56: The Reaction of the English Colonists

Chapter 57: The Heavenly God and the Loyal Hound

Chapter 58: The Messenger

Chapter 59: A Tripartite Balance is True Stability

Chapter 60: Do You Want to Go Home?
Chapter 61: Christmas
Chapter 62: Spring Blossoms
Chapter 63: The First Viking Raid Expedition
Chapter 64: Journey to Europe
Chapter 65: Caution in Business
Chapter 66: Turmoil Brewing in Ireland
Chapter 67: The Development of Light Industry
Chapter 68: Champlain’s Overture
Chapter 69: Aid for Quebec City
Chapter 70: The Unfathomable Human Heart
Chapter 71: The Alliance
Chapter 72: Exploration
Chapter 73: The Brave Iroquois

Chapter 74: How to Guard Against the Terrifying Vikings?

Chapter 75: Smallpox
Chapter 76: Smallpox and Cowpox
Chapter 77: The Whaling Station
Chapter 78: Experimental Firing of Bone China
Chapter 79: The Tradition of the Ancestors
Chapter 80: Joint Operation
Chapter 81: Changes in England
Chapter 82: Seize This Ship!
Chapter 83: Let Me Avenge You!
Chapter 84: A Woman for Every Man
Chapter 85: Vinland’s Potential Remains Vast
Chapter 86: Complete Treatise on Agriculture
Chapter 87: A Whole New World
Chapter 88: The Agricultural Express Train
Chapter 89: Helping You Rise to Lordship
Chapter 90: Discovery of the Mines
Chapter 91: Pirates Arrive from Afar
Chapter 92: The White Wolf Warriors
Chapter 93: Hanged
Chapter 95: The Great Harvest

Chapter 96: The Wonders of Sweet Potatoes and Potatoes

Chapter 97: Eastern Malt Sugar
Chapter 98: Industry Builds a Nation
Chapter 99: The Meeting and the Rift
Chapter 100: Striking Out on His Own
Chapter 101: Changes in Greenland
Chapter 102: The Governor’s Happy Life

Chapter 103: The Success of the Greenland Colony

Chapter 104: Unlocking Greenland’s Potential

Chapter 105: Captain

Chapter 106: Respecting the Powerful Presence in the East

Chapter 107: Or Change the World?

Chapter 108: The Winter Snow of 1629 (Combined)

Chapter 109: Bakens City
Chapter 110: The Spring Wind of 1630
Chapter 111: Commencement
Chapter 112: The Water of Life
Chapter 113: Fishing and Hunting

Chapter 114: The Religious Nation Circle and the Celestial Empire’s Tributary Circle

Chapter 115: Preparations Before the Vikings Set Out

Chapter 116: Planning the Vinland Livestock Farm

Chapter 117: Resources and Livestock Farm Location

Chapter 118: Vikings Lead the World in Per Capita GDP

Chapter 119: Saherimnir Breeding Farm
Chapter 120: Signing the Contract
Chapter 121: Cousin Vanhild
Chapter 122: The Farming Company Takes Shape
Chapter 123: Insufficient Production Capacity
Chapter 124: The End of Spring Plowing
Chapter 125: The Banquet
Chapter 126: Vinland’s Educational Direction
Chapter 128: A Bounty of Export Goods
Chapter 129: London
Chapter 130: Whitehall Palace
Chapter 131: The Essex Leather Company
Chapter 132: Sir Bulchir
Chapter 133: Mr. Cromwell, Good Day

Chapter 134: Befriending the Future Lord Protector

Chapter 135: Discussing the Past and Present, Speaking of Heroes

Chapter 136: Blast Furnaces and English Indentured White Slaves

Chapter 137: Returning to Vinland to Develop Industry

Chapter 138: The Fox’s Scheme
Chapter 139: Dog Bites Dog
Chapter 140: The Massachusetts Colony
Chapter 141: Savage Attack

Chapter 142: Massachusetts Becomes a Thing of the Past

Chapter 143: Dominance in North America
Chapter 144: Haig’s Return
Chapter 145: Hrut City Militia
Chapter 146: Military Reform

Chapter 147: Moose Cavalry and the Siege of Quebec

Chapter 148: Marching to Annihilate the Natives

Chapter 149: The Military Factory Moves Forward

Chapter 150: Defeating the Iroquois
Chapter 151: The Vikings’ Unstoppable Victory
Chapter 153: Territory Greatly Expanded
Chapter 154: Haig’s Son Named Arthur
Chapter 156: Making Coal Briquettes
Chapter 157: Tragic News
Chapter 158: Return to Iceland

Chapter 159: Three Meetings to Finalize the Plan

Chapter 160: Training the Troops
Chapter 161: Preparations Complete
Chapter 162: Olaf’s Daily Life as Regent
Chapter 163: Return to Iceland
Chapter 164: Attack on Reykjavik (1)
Chapter 165: Attack on Reykjavik (2)
Chapter 166: Assault on Reykjavik (3)

Chapter 167: The Assault on Reykjavik (Conclusion)

Chapter 168: The Situation Stabilizes

Chapter 169: The Campaign Against the Traitor Haldor

Chapter 170: Dealing with the Rebellion
Chapter 171: Uprooting the Nest
Chapter 172: The Public Trial
Chapter 173: The Free Republic of Iceland

Chapter 174: The Great Reform of the Viking Raid

Chapter 175: Good News Reaches Hrut City
Chapter 176: Meeting at Big Port
Chapter 177: Vinland Shipyard
Chapter 178: Preparations in Full Swing
Chapter 179: The Storm Approaches
Chapter 180: The Great Battle Begins
Chapter 181: Prelude to the Symphony
Chapter 182: The Climax Strikes
Chapter 183: Blood Battle
Chapter 184: The Invincible Vikings
Chapter 185: The Face of War
Chapter 186: The Aftermath of War
Chapter 187: News of Victory Reaches Vinland

Chapter 188: Personnel and Supplies Arrive in Iceland

Chapter 189: North American Turmoil (1)
Chapter 190: North American Turmoil (2)
Chapter 191: The Storm Over North America (3)
Chapter 192: The Storm Over North America (4)
Chapter 193: The Storm in North America (5)
Chapter 194: Pikku’s Happy Life
Chapter 195: Spring of 1632
Chapter 196: The Unyielding King Christian IV
Chapter 197: Thriving Industries

Chapter 198: The North American Native Slave Legion

Chapter 199: The Greenland Regiment
Chapter 200: The Six Legions of Vinland
Chapter 201: Vinland’s “Baturu”
Chapter 202: The Divine King Church
Chapter 203: Olaf’s Expedition (1)
Chapter 204: Olaf’s Expedition (2)
Chapter 205: Olaf’s Expedition (3)
Chapter 206: The Siege of Reykjavik (1)
Chapter 207: The Siege of Reykjavik (2)
Chapter 208: The Siege of Reykjavik (3)
Chapter 209: The Siege of Reykjavik (4)
Chapter 210: The Siege of Copenhagen (1)
Chapter 211: The Siege of Copenhagen (2)
Chapter 212: The Siege of Copenhagen (3)
Chapter 213: The Siege of Copenhagen (4)
Chapter 214: The Siege of Copenhagen (5)
Chapter 215: The Siege of Copenhagen (6)
Chapter 216: The Siege of Copenhagen (7)
Chapter 217: The Siege of Copenhagen (8)
Chapter 218: The Siege of Copenhagen (9)
Chapter 219: The Siege of Copenhagen (10)

Chapter 220: The Battle of Tre Kroner Fort (1)

Chapter 221: The Battle of Tre Kroner Fort (2)

Chapter 222: Bombardment of Copenhagen (1)
Chapter 223: Bombardment of Copenhagen (2)
Chapter 224: Fortunate Iceland
Chapter 225: The Szczecin Alliance (1)
Chapter 226: The Szczecin Alliance (2)
Chapter 227: The Szczecin Alliance (3)
Chapter 228: The Szczecin Alliance (4)
Chapter 229: The Tragedy of Copenhagen

Chapter 230: Magnus’s Army Returns to Reinforce

Chapter 231: Strait Pursuit Battle (1)
Chapter 232: Strait Pursuit (2)
Chapter 233: The Aftermath of War

Chapter 234: The Second Young Master Returns to Iceland (1)

Chapter 235: The Second Young Master Returns to Iceland (2)

Chapter 236: Iceland’s Great Savior

Chapter 237: The Heir of Iceland

Chapter 238: Saving Emperor Gustavus Adolphus II

Chapter 239: The Cultural Identity of the Viking Raid

Chapter 240: The Icelandic Sage, Haldor
Chapter 241: Ming Dynasty Doctors
Chapter 242: Song Qinghe and Zheng Yiguan
Chapter 243: First Stop: Bremen
Chapter 244: Gustavus Adolphus II
Chapter 245: People in Turbulent Times
Chapter 246: Prelude to Lützen
Chapter 247: The Battle of Lützen
Chapter 248: The Rescue (1)
Chapter 249: The Rescue (2)
Chapter 250: Saving the King (3)
Chapter 251: Diagnosis

Chapter 252: Heaven-Appointed Leader of the New Faith

Chapter 253: With Olaf, I Am Like a Tiger with Wings

Chapter 254: Winter’s Chill
Chapter 255: The Assault on Leipzig
Chapter 256: Wallenstein’s Transformation
Chapter 257: The Clash of Two European Titans
Chapter 258: The Brutal Siege of Leipzig
Chapter 259: Peace Talks
Chapter 260: A Single Blade to the Feast
Chapter 261: The Three Inches of Integrity
Chapter 262: The Alliance of Leipzig

Chapter 263: A New Chapter in the Pan-European War

Chapter 264: The Union of Two Heroes
Chapter 265: Sweden’s Moment of Glory
Chapter 266: The Habsburgs’ Dilemma

Chapter 267: The Situation Takes a Sudden Turn

Chapter 268: A Trap Sprung
Chapter 269: The Warrior Gilfa
Chapter 270: Capturing a Young Emperor
Chapter 271: A Timely Retreat
Chapter 272: The Excited Lion King
Chapter 273: Terror Across Europe

Chapter 274: Why Should Iceland Be Inferior to Britain?

Chapter 275: Natural Disasters Cannot Defeat the Viking People

Chapter 276: Returning Home

Chapter 277: A Matter of Marriage

Chapter 278: Disaster Victims to Be Relocated to Vinland

Chapter 279: The Viking Spirit

Chapter 280: Vinland is the Cornerstone of Iceland

Chapter 281: The Migration Begins
Chapter 282: Ireland’s Desire for Rebellion
Chapter 283: Master of Strategy, Olaf
Chapter 284: Song Qinghe’s Longing for Home

Chapter 285: Can the Celestial Empire’s System Be Adapted to Vinland?

Chapter 286: Recruiting German Indentured Laborers

Chapter 287: Smooth Progress
Chapter 288: Olaf, the Great Sovereign
Chapter 289: Assessing the Situation

Chapter 290: Searching for a Cotton Planting Base

Chapter 291: Vinland’s First Five-Year Plan (1)

Chapter 292: Vinland’s First Five-Year Plan (2)

Chapter 293: Vinland’s First Five-Year Plan (3)

Chapter 294: Vinland’s First Five-Year Plan (4)

Chapter 295: Vinland’s First Five-Year Plan (5)

Chapter 296: Relocating the Capital

Chapter 297: The Beginnings of Vinland’s Industry

Chapter 298: American Ginseng
Chapter 299: Forging Weapons
Chapter 300: News from Europe
Chapter 301: Hongrode’s Visit
Chapter 302: Vinland Minting

Chapter 303: Advancing into the Heart of North America

Chapter 304: The Expedition
Chapter 305: Crumbling Like Dry Wood
Chapter 306: Harvest and Marriage Prospects
Chapter 307: Bullying with Power

Chapter 308: Granaries Full, Fish Warehouses Overflowing

Chapter 309: Deciding Life and Death Over Hot Pot

Chapter 310: Southern Inspection
Chapter 311: Southern Inspection (2)
Chapter 312: Southern Inspection (3)
Chapter 313: Southern Inspection (4)
Chapter 314: West Plymouth
Chapter 315: The National Anthem of Iceland
Chapter 316: Olaf’s Ambition
Chapter 317: The Betrothal
Chapter 318: The Founder of Prussia

Chapter 319: The Old Father-in-Law Is Not Confused

Chapter 320: Stockholm
Chapter 321: Reuniting with an Old Friend
Chapter 322: Olaf Goes to University
Chapter 323: The Great Emperor (1)
Chapter 324: The Great Emperor (2)
Chapter 325: The Great Emperor (3)
Chapter 326: Royal Tutor (1)
Chapter 327: Royal Tutor (2)
Chapter 328: Royal Tutor (3)
Chapter 329: Celebrating the Birthday

Chapter 330: Does the Great Emperor Gustavus Plan to Deal with Denmark?

Chapter 331: Coronation

Chapter 332: The Spring of 1635

Chapter 333: The Lion’s Life Hangs by a Thread

Chapter 334: The Lion Awakens, Old and New Clash

Chapter 335: Killing the Chicken to Warn the Monkeys, Hidden Intentions

Chapter 336: The Young Mistress’s Faction
Chapter 337: A Heart-to-Heart by the Bedside
Chapter 338: Capturing Kalmar
Chapter 339: Securing The Sound
Chapter 340: Copenhagen Besieged Once More

Chapter 341: The Furious Chancellor and the Furious King

Chapter 342: Breaching Copenhagen
Chapter 343: The Siege of Rosenborg Palace
Chapter 344: Denmark’s Humiliation

Chapter 345: Establishing a Child Emperor for Denmark

Chapter 346: The Treaty of Copenhagen
Chapter 347: I Become Denmark’s Creditor
Chapter 348: Arrogance
Chapter 349: Dearest Father, Greetings!

Chapter 350: Planning the Territories of the Icelandic Duchy

Chapter 351: The Fallen Lion
Chapter 352: Entrusting the Orphan
Chapter 353: Queen Christina
Chapter 354: The Thirty Years’ War 2.0 Begins
Chapter 355: Going with the Flow

Chapter 356: A Heavy Blow Against Poland-Lithuania

Chapter 357: Olaf’s First Strike on Lithuania

Chapter 358: Olaf’s First Strike Against Lithuania

Chapter 359: Olaf’s First Strike on Lithuania

Chapter 360: Olaf’s First Strike Against Lithuania

Chapter 361: Olaf’s First Battle Against Lithuania

Chapter 362: Scorched Earth

Chapter 363: Olaf’s Second Strike on Lithuania

Chapter 364: Olaf’s Second Strike on Lithuania 2

Chapter 365: Olaf’s Second Strike on Lithuania 3

Chapter 366: Olaf’s Second Strike on Lithuania 4

Chapter 367: Olaf’s Second Strike on Lithuania 5

Chapter 368: Helping the Jews Establish a Nation